Dragonborn Rising

by ordinarywriter29

Summary:

Before he became the Dragonborn, Ragnar was many things. Thief. Mercenary. Warrior. Even as assassin. He enjoyed many things in life. Good food and alcohol. Travelling the breadth of Skyrim. The companionship of good friends. The finest weapons and armour coin could buy him. And fighting. He loved a good fight. But the one thing he enjoyed above all was the company of women. He was greedy in many ways, always desiring more than one, though more than once, he fell in love and dreamed of even more.

This is his story.

Chapter 1: The Virgin Warrior

My name is Ragnar. Some called me ‘the Broad’, as I’m tall, being a Nord and all, and due to genetics, I was, well, broad. Others called me ‘the Fearless’, as during my times in the Fighter’s Guild of Cheydinal, I’d proven to have little sense of self-preservation though none doubted my bravery. Some, trying to make a joke, called me ‘the Blonde’, because I had long, dirty blonde hair that most Nords had, plus I think they were joking about my intelligence. I’m the first to admit I’m not the smartest of men, but I’m not a complete dullard either.

Before I begin to discuss my time in Skyrim, I guess you need to know about how I was and why I ended up walking into Skyrim and a series of life-changing events. I’m not sure where or when I was born, as I learned at an early age that I was an orphan, but I was probably born in the Imperial City. I was given the name Ragnar by the headmistress of the orphanage I lived in at a young age, and told early on that I was a Nord, who called a country named Skyrim their home. I never did learn who my mother or father were. Not that I tried too hard to find them. I’d been abandoned on the steps of the orphanage barely a few days old. I’d clearly been unwanted.

I spent ten years at the orphanage before running away, not that I think they would have been too bothered about that. There was only one woman who worked there that all the children liked. The headmistress was a stern, almost cruel woman, while the other two women who worked there cared little about our welfare. Looking back, I’m not sure why they even worked with children, but by the age of ten, I realised I wasn’t wanted there either, and had long since found friends with the street urchins.

Leaving the orphanage behind was a good choice, personally speaking. There were a group of kids who worked together, about a dozen of them, all looking out for each other, everything stolen was shared, and they never seemed to go hungry. The older ones taught me the finer art of being a pickpocket, how to tail a mark, how to be invisible in a crowd, and most importantly, how to get away as quickly and silently as possible.

We made a great team, and I thought I’d made some lifelong friends. But living and working the streets was dangerous, and over the years, we lost more than one to the city guard. And some people had no problem injuring if not killing us. I lasted six years before I fell afoul of a mark. By this stage, we were working for the Thieves Guild, most of us kids on the street being recruited at the age of fourteen. Still young enough not to draw too much attention, old enough to look after ourselves. And even at fourteen, I was larger, faster and stronger than the rest.

But while I had all those qualities, I was still a dumb kid. The job was one of the hardest I’d been given. Break into the house of a local lord in Cheydinhal and ransack his safe. I was probably overconfident, but while I managed to break into the house without a problem, the lord and his bodyguards were waiting for me in the darkness. To say I was beaten would be an understatement. By the time they were done with me, I had numerous broken bones, bleeding from numerous wounds, and how I survived was only a miracle… and a lot of magic and healing potions.

I had been rescued by a member of the local Fighter’s Guild and they sent for a healer and priestess to look after me as I recovered. They kept me under for around three days to lessen the pain. Waking up on the fourth day, the healer and priestess were still by my side, as was a member of the Thieves Guild, standing at the foot of the bed with his arms folded.

“Easy, child,” the priestess said softly, her voice soothing, “You’ve been seriously wounded.”

“Where am I?” I asked. My mind still fuzzy, I added, “What happened?”

“That’s what we’d like to know,” the guild man stated. It wasn’t unfriendly but the tone was stern.

I looked at the healer then the priestess. “How old are you?” the priestess asked.

“Sixteen winters, I think. I’m not sure.”

“And you’re a thief,” the healer stated. Not unkindly, but I probably looked like one. Rather filthy and my clothing was one worn by thieves.

“Not anymore. Not after…” I’ll admit that I almost cried. The pain was horrendous, and I knew I’d screwed up royally. The lord would know my face. And if I didn’t return to the Imperial City, the guild would come looking for me. My options were few, and none of them were good. Recognising I was still hurting, the healer gave me a little potion that put me back to sleep.

I was kept under for another week before I was finally woken up for good. The healers had done a bang up job, my broken bones having been set, the wounds healed up with only a few scars remaining, and there was only a lingering amount of pain that didn’t bother me too much. I immediately thanked the healer and priestess for their help, both suggesting I should see them as soon as I was up and about. That left me with the guild man, who introduced himself as Corvus, the local master of the guild. He sat down on the chair once occupied by the healer.

“Do you remember talking to us a week ago?”

“Barely.”

“Okay, I want to know a few things about you. Then I’m going to make you an offer. But you must be honest to hear the offer. Agreed?” I nodded immediately. “What’s your name?”

“Ragnar. I don’t have a surname. Some called me ‘The Broad’, others ‘The Blonde’.”

“Where are you from?”

“I live in the Imperial City. I’m homeless.”

“And you’re a thief?” I nodded. “Who injured you?”

I shrugged. “I never know the marks’ name. I just had the address or name of the residence.”

“I could ask, but that’s not important. He or they are the people who left you for dead?”

“Do you blame them?”

He paused before answering. “I don’t blame them for wanting to stop you. But even I can admit they went a little overboard. I’m being honest when I say they left you for dead, Ragnar. You’re lucky to be alive. You should definitely go thank the healer and the priestess.” I nodded, stating I would as soon as I could stand up. “Do you like being a thief?”

“I don’t like being homeless. I’d like to have a warm bed and full belly each day.”

“And how old are you?”

“Sixteen, I think. I’m being honest when I say I’m not sure.”

He nodded again. “How long have you been working for the Thieves Guild?”

“They recruited me at fourteen, but I’ve been homeless since I was ten.”

I think that surprised him, raising his eyebrows. “Where were you before then?”

“An orphanage. I left when I realised there was little point me staying until I was sixteen.”

“So you’ve had a hard life?”

Shrugging, I said, “I don’t blame anyone but myself. Each decision I’ve made was on my shoulders alone.”

“A rather responsible outlook for someone so young.” I shrugged again. I think that was a compliment. “So, want to hear my offer?” I nodded. “For someone so young, you’re quite… large, Ragnar. honestly, you already have the build of a warrior. All you need are the skills to be one. I’m willing to give you a way out of your current life. We accept men and women of all backgrounds, and as long as they follow the rules going forward, they will be accepted as one of us.”

He looked at me, and all I could eventually say was, “You’re serious?”

“I am. Do you really want to head back to the Imperial City, homeless, having failed your job, and still recovering from your wounds? Don’t you want a chance to escape that life? Stay with us, Ragnar, and you have the chance of doing something good with your life. You will learn to be a warrior, honour-bound. You’ll make coin, as you will be paid for every contract. Work hard enough, and prove your worth, and you might even end up running one of the guild chapters. But to get all that, you must agree to our rules and work your arse off to get there.”

I agreed, and after giving me a couple of days to get used to moving around, I got to work. He had me working for at least eight hours a day. If I wasn’t training with a weapon, I was doing exercises to get fit and slowly build muscle. If I wasn’t doing either of those things, I was cleaning and sharpening weapons, polishing armour, or generally helping around the building. But, mostly, it was about the training.

It took six months before he was confident enough to send me out on my first contract, and I learned quickly that I wasn’t to just turn up and start swinging a sword. Sometimes I would have to deal with a domestic issue. Occasionally it would be a pest problem. Every so often I would be sent to deal with some bandits, and that was when I knew all my training had been worth it, and I was rarely ever troubled by them. And then there were the missing person jobs, where I had to travel the length and breadth of Cyrodiil, feeding on scraps of information. I surprised myself by managing to find the person most of the time. Not always alive, though.

Once I started taking jobs and making some coin, I would do work for the other guild chapters around Cyrodiil, and slowly but surely ascended the ranks of the Fighter’s Guild. Every day I improved my skill with the blade, and even took up archery as a hobby, Corvus having suggested it was always good to learn a variety of skills. As I approached my eighteenth birthday, Corvus suggesting I should use the date I was found by the orphanage as that day, he sat me down and asked a rather personal question.

"Have you ever been with a woman, Ragnar?”

“No, I haven’t.”

“Why not?”

Shrugging, I replied, “To be honest, I’ve been so focused on learning my craft and doing jobs I just haven’t thought about it.”

“You do like women though?”

I couldn’t help laugh, wondering if he was insinuating something. “Yes, Corvus, I do like women. There are a lot of pretty ones around Cheydinhal. As I said, I just haven’t worried about it.”

“Do you want to get laid?” I must have looked surprised at the question as he started to laugh. “It’s not a hard question, Ragnar. What date is your birthday again?”

“Twelfth of Midyear.”

“Okay. That night, we’ll take you out for a few drinks, then we’ll head to a particular tavern that will cater to certain tastes.”

“You mean a place of working girls?”

“Does that bother you? Or would you rather wait?”

“I’m not worried about it being special or anything. But now that I think about it, I wouldn’t mind getting laid. Will probably be a lot more fun than my hand.”

Corvus agreed that I’d have no contracts a couple of days before so I’d be in town for my birthday. I’d made friends within the local chapters across Cyrodiil, and was pleasantly surprised when a few of them arrived on my birthday. Once the sun started to set, we headed out into Cheydinhal, and as my face was now well known for good reasons, each tavern we entered, I received a free tankard of ale and a slap on the back.

Corvus had suggested that I enjoy myself but not get too drink. When I asked why, he whispered, “If you drink too much, your dick won’t work.”

I almost spat out my drink, probably looking at him wide-eyed as I asked, “Really?”

“Your first time is going to be nerve-wracking and awkward enough as it is without worrying about whether you can get hard or not.”

“I don’t think that will be a problem.”

“No, you’ll probably cum in two seconds. But you’re young, so you’ll recover quickly at least.”

“Thanks for the vote of confidence, Corvus.”

He just laughed, slapping my back again. “We’ve all been through it, Ragnar. It’s a rite of passage to becoming a man.”

After visiting a sixth tavern, where I didn’t partake in an alcoholic drink, Corvus suggested it was the right time to make our way to the ‘Scarlett Lady’, a well-known tavern in Cheydinhal that sold some of the best liquors in the Empire but also had a selection of beautiful women willing to keep you company for an evening, if the coin was right.

Most of our group left Corvus and I to it, wishing us goodbye as they would head on to another tavern, no doubt returning the guildhall later that evening very much worse for wear. We walked into the ‘Scarlett Lady’, pulling back the curtains that hid what was inside from view. It had all the appearances of a normal tavern, only the light was kept lower and it wasn’t as busy as most of the taverns we’d visited that evening. There was a bar at one end of the room, while there was a small stage where a woman was dancing in not very much.

We took a seat, a waitress approaching to take our order. “We’ll each have a brandy,” Corvus stated.

Once she disappeared, I asked, “Brandy?”

“Help calm any last minute nerves. Trust me.”

The brandy arrived rather quickly, and I took a moment to look at the waitress. She was wearing a tight fitting top and short skirt, showing off a pair of long, pale legs. She noticed me look and winked. I surprised myself by only smiling, not blushing. I knew what I was there to do, and the women were on display.

As we enjoyed our brandy, we were eventually approached by a mature woman. I knew she likely wasn’t one of the working girls, so was either the owner or at least looked after the girls. “Good evening, gentleman.”

“Evening.”

“I am Muriel. Are you here to drink or are you after some company?”

Corvus clamped a hand om my shoulder. “It’s Ragnar’s birthday and we’re here to celebrate.”

She looked at me and smiled. “Oh, and how old is the birthday boy?”

“Eighteen today,” I stated.

The smile broadened before she had a quiet chuckle. “I can imagine what you’re here for then. First time?” I nodded. I didn’t think it was embarrassing. “Okay, we can handle that. And you, sir?”

“I would like some company too,” he said. I looked at him with surprise. He wasn’t married, nor in a relationship, but I didn’t think… “If you’re going to be busy all night, I wouldn’t mind getting my dick wet too.”

“At least you’re honest.”

She appeared to wait until we’d finished our drinks, as one we placed the empty glasses on the small table in front of us, she approached and asked us to join her in an adjoining room. Inside were at least ten women, all of them lazing around in negligees or sheer nightdresses. There was skin on display though there was still an element of modesty. But they were all beautiful and I felt a rising in my groin.

"The choice is yours, gentleman. You have a choice of human or elven, depending on your taste.”

Corvus picked first, surprising me by picking a dark elf, otherwise known as Dunmer. I didn’t know a whole lot about them but she had a certain quality, I guess. Whatever the case, he asked her name and she quickly led him out and likely up the stairs to one of the bedrooms.

“And you, young man?” Muriel wondered.

I had my eyes only for the redhead. She smiled under my gaze, and that was when I felt heat rise in my cheeks. Muriel recognised who I was looking at and gestured for the others to leave for a moment. Once alone, she beckoned the redhead forward. “What was your name, young man?”

“Ragnar.”

“Ragnar, this is Ariel.”

I bowed slightly. “Pleasure.”

“Nice to meet you,” she said softly. Her voice was pure silk. It was probably a tone she’d perfected in her job, but it did the job regardless. “Would you like my company for the evening?” I nodded. “Have you been told the rules?”

I glanced at Muriel. “Your friend is a regular, Ragnar. He doesn’t need reminding. The rules are few, but if you break them, you will be broken in return. Understand?” I swallowed hard before nodding. “Do not abuse our girls. If you’re into the rough stuff, you’re in the wrong place. Once you’re upstairs, Ariel will tell you what she’s prepared to do and what she isn’t. Do not even think about forcing her to do something she doesn’t. If I hear about it, remember the warning. Now, as for payment, Corvus will take care of it. He’s already had a word in my ear about you.”

“Thank you,” I said.

“As long as you behave yourself, you will have a good time here tonight, Ragnar. Now, Ariel, why don’t you take our young man upstairs and show him a good time.”

She took me by the hand, amazed at how soft her skin was, and I was led through the other room up a set of stairs, past a number of doors before she stopped and opened one, entering a rather exquisite looking bedroom. A four poster bed, a number of chests and wardrobes, a pair of chairs and small table near the curtained windows. “You look impressed,” she said, closing and locking the door.

“I had no idea.”

I just stood in the middle of the room, probably looking rather stupid. Ariel approached me and probably noticed my hesitation. “Let me guess; first time?” I nodded. She immediately smiled, a sweet one that highlighted her green eyes. “Why did you pick me?”

“I like redheads and your bust is spectacular.”

That made her laugh. “Thank you for the honesty.” I shrugged again. “You’re certainly tall, Ragnar. How tall?”

“Around six foot. I’ve always been larger than most.”

“You certainly are,” she said quietly, running her soft hands up my arms and over my shoulders, helping take off my coat, throwing that onto the bed behind me. “Sure you’re only eighteen?”

“Fairly sure. I…” I didn’t know how much I should share. One, just in case it ruined the mood. And, two, how much would she really want to know about me really?

She smiled. “Never mind. We don’t have to share too many personal details.”

“Your name really Ariel?”

The smile broadened. “Figured that already eh?” I nodded. “Since you’re so cute, I’ll let you know. My name is Inga, but men don’t want to fuck Inga. No, Inga is a homebody, raising three children, constantly standing at the pit cooking dinner. No, men want to fuck Ariel.”

“You have three children?”

That made her laugh at me. I didn’t mind. It actually helped me relax while she unbuttoned my shirt. “No, I don’t have children, Ragnar. Just making a point.” She eventually helped take off my shirt, throwing that onto the bed too, and ran her hands up my chest. “Wow, you look after yourself. Those arms already…”

“I’ve been working for the guild since I was sixteen. Rarely take a day off. Probably why I’m a virgin, to be honest.”

“Compared to most men who come in, I’m not going to complain to the others tomorrow morning.”

That made me smile as she started to undo the buckle of my belt, before she unbuttoned my trousers. As I was only wearing shoes, slipping out of those wasn’t a problem as she helped dropped my trousers, stepping out of those and kicking those away. Standing in just my underwear, the tent in my underwear would have been easily recognisable. She stepped back to look me up and down. I tried to stand somewhat confidently. “Definitely won’t be complaining,” she muttered to herself.

I’ll admit, I was a virgin in many ways. I hadn’t lied about being so busy I rarely took a day off. So that meant I hadn’t even kissed someone before. When I say it out loud, it sounds rather pathetic, but I simply hadn’t worried about it. Sure, I had a libido, but I generally took care of myself when I needed it, then carried on with my day.

“Have you kissed a girl before?” That’s when I felt the first wave of embarrassment, shaking my head. She put a hand on my chest and pushed me back until I was sat on the bed. Even sitting down, she was barely taller than I was. I didn’t really know what to do with my hands, so she helped me, taking off her night dress, leaving her in just a bra and panties, placing my hands on her side. Soft, delicate skin at my fingertips. I know I had a big, dumb grin on my face as I ran my hands up her body, over her stomach, around on her arse, over her covered breasts. I watched her face at the same time. She seemed rather interested in my reaction.

Then she leaned down and laid a soft kiss on my lips. It was awkward at first. No first kiss is ever that great, but that was the first hurdle done. And I had no problem with her telling me what to do. I had an idea of what I was to do, but instructions are always good. Once I learned the idea of using my tongue, that was when I made her squeal in surprise as I pulled her close to me, feeling my cock harden completely as she tasted like wine and had a scent of flowers, no doubt a perfume.

Feeling a little confident, I tried to take her bra off as I kissed her, but I fumbled for a while before I felt her smile, our lips still joined, as she helped me take it off. Then she stood back so I could take them in. They were more than a handful, her nipples already hard, about the size of a coin. I think I licked my lips as she said, “Well, I know one part of my body that’s going to get attention later. But first…”

She offered her hand, helping me stand again, as she gestured for me to remove my underwear. Figuring that’s what I was there for, I had no problem dropping those to the ground too. “Holy shit!” she exclaimed.

“What?” I asked, suddenly worried at her tone.

“Ragnar, it’s… it’s…”

I looked down at my erection before looking at her. “What is it?”

She looked at me, an enormous grin. “It’s spectacular!” she stated, instantly wrapping her arms around me to kiss me again. I felt a hand snake between us, and I shuddered when her small hand wrapped around my shaft, taking a sharp breath through my teeth. “Excited?” I nodded. “Would you like me to suck your cock?” I nodded again. “I know you won’t last long, being your first time. And that’s okay, Ragnar. Don’t be ashamed if you cum really fast, okay?” I nodded a third time. “And you’ll probably surprise yourself when you do cum, so that’s okay too.”

I couldn’t help smile as she kissed me again before she lowered herself down, kissing down my chest and over my abs before she ran her tongue along my shaft. I nearly came there and then. I wanted to look down and watch this beautiful woman blow me, but if I did, I wouldn’t last thirty seconds. So I closed my eyes and just focused on what I could feel.

Feeling her lips wrap around my shaft, the heat of her breath on the head of my cock, I knew I wasn’t going to last long at all. I’d surprised myself by not coming yet. She removed her mouth for a second. “Run your hand through my hair,” she said quietly. I had to open my eyes for that, and couldn’t help smile as Ariel was on her knees, her eyes looking up into mine, watching my cock slowly disappear into her mouth. I ran a hand through her hair as instructed, and she made an approving sound.

I didn’t last long at all. She probably took about half my length, focusing on that, using her hand for the rest of my shaft. I groaned a few times and she knew my climax was imminent. I could see the question in her eyes and I nodded. She removed her mouth and stroked me, groaning rather loudly as I came on her breasts. I think I came quite a lot as she started to giggle. “By the Eight, Ragnar, when did you last cum?”

Incapable of doing anything except concentrate on standing, she allowed me to step back and collapse on the bed as she grabbed a towel to clean up. Once she’d done that, she hopped onto the bed to lie down beside me. “As you gain experience, you’ll meet women that will swallow your cum, or take a load on their face, or let you cum in various parts of their body. I generally don’t do it while at work.”

“You’re with someone?”

She shook her head. “No. But when I meet the right man, I’d do it for him.” That’s when she poked me. “Don’t get feelings, Ragnar. I’m a working girl, and while I will freely admit you’re clearly a very nice young man, you’re still a customer at the end of the day.”

“Why do you say…”

“Because you will have strong feelings for the first person you’re intimate with. It’s only natural.” Then she leaned down to kiss me. “But I’m still glad you chose me.” She gave me about ten minutes to recover, before she asked, “Would you like to lick my pussy? Before you worry, I’m completely clean, and haven’t been with anyone else today.”

I agreed immediately, and I took delight in removing her panties as she laid back, surprised to see her pussy was completely bald. “I thought…”

Another sweet smile as my inexperience showed again. “I keep it smooth as many men like it, and it’s just easier. But most women will have hair between their legs and above their sex. Just so you know, I am a natural redhead.”

Spreading her legs wide, she then gave me the rundown on female anatomy. I listened to her intently, as she was clearly more experienced and would know what she liked. I had no problem with listening to instruction. I did it all the time at work, and I could so while I learned how to please a woman too. After all, we’re only virgins once, and can only lose it once too.

Explaining what would help her feel good, she asked me to kiss her first, and I got more practice doing that. She told me to go easy with the tongue, and helped me learn what was good, though practice would always make perfect. She then mentioned her neck, and she seemed to like that, but I was eager to play with her breasts. That made her laugh as I took one in each hand, surprised at how soft they felt. When I licked and sucked at a nipple, she made an appreciative sound, and she suggested I give her pussy a rub. Doing that, I could feel she was wet, mentioning to me that’s what would happen when she felt good and what I was doing was working.

Though I think we both enjoyed my attention on her breasts, she asked me to kiss down her body to her pussy. She was slim but had some real curves, and her stomach was soft, enjoying just kissing her there, earning another giggle. Moving down to her pussy, that was where I was completely lost for a moment, but she gave me more instruction, telling me where to lick and what to listen out for.

Having never tasted pussy before, I have to say… It tasted bloody marvellous! Looking up after a minute or so, I said, “I’ll definitely do this again.”

“And women will love you for it, Ragnar,” she breathed, “Keep going.”

I had no idea what I was really doing, but I guess enthusiasm made up for inexperience, as I’m sure she was making sounds, and a few moans, that suggested what I was doing could be working. If I could make her orgasm? Shit, I’d strut out of the tavern like I was the bloody emperor!

"Put a couple of fingers inside me, Ragnar.” Doing that earned another moan. “Ysmir, that’s just your fingers,” she whispered, “Okay, make a ‘come hither’ motion with them. You’ll hit the right spot. While you’re doing that, focus on my clit,” she added, pointing to where her clit was.

Doing as instructed, she was soon enjoying what I was doing rather a lot, if I do say so myself. She would tell me if I was being too hard on her clit, asking me to go a little softer, but asked me to pump my fingers a little faster. She was soon writhing, and I held onto her with my left arm around her right leg. Her head was now rolled back, and she was moaning quite a lot. I wasn’t sure if women fake orgasms or not, but if she was faking, she was one hell of an actress.

“Harder on my clit, Ragnar. Keep doing what you’re doing!”

Ariel knew what she wanted, so I had my tongue on her clit, my fingers now pumping into her pussy, and I loved watching her body. Her scent alone was making me rock hard again, so I knew we’d be fucking soon enough. I found that thought very exciting, and I knew I probably wouldn’t last long.

When her body started to buck slightly, I had to ask, perhaps rather stupidly, if she was going to orgasm. “By Ysmir, Ragnar…” I think that was a yes, “Don’t stop. Please don’t stop. You’re going to…” Whatever she was going to say trailed off into a long moan.

Her orgasm, when it arrived, I found even more exciting than the thought of fucking her. She squeezed her thighs into me, so much so that I could barely keep pleasing her, and she eventually whispered for me to stop. Lifting my head and removing my fingers, I sucked on those and felt my cock throb as I can readily admit I loved the taste of pussy.

Sitting on my knees looking down at Ariel, she looked at me with a rather sweet smile, her body shuddering every so often. She beckoned for me to lie next to her, surprising me when she turned onto her side. “God’s help the women of Cyrodiil.”

“Why?”

“Because you just made me cum on your first time. Add to that, very few men go down on a woman. Oh, some woman is going to make you a keeper, Ragnar.” She leaned up to lay a soft kiss on my lips. “It’s my turn to thank you for that. You were very good, and you learned very quickly.”

I definitely blushed as I said thanks. That made her giggle at my reaction. She moved one of my arms so she could properly snuggle into my side, enough to make me state, “Well, this is rather intimate.”

“You’re staying the night, Ragnar. So despite who I am and who you are, you will be holding me tonight. Get used to it, and you should always do it with a woman you’ve been intimate with. Most women love being held by their man as they sleep.”

“I must sound so clueless.”

“You’re still a virgin… for the next ten minutes or so. Trust me, you’ve come to the right person to learn at least a few things.” She then met my eyes. “And I can say right now, you ever want to visit again…”

“What about those feelings you spoke of?”

She laughed. “As I said, you’re a nice, young man. And that cock you’re about to put inside me, I’ll definitely want again. I won’t fuck for free, but if you become a regular, I’ll have a chat with Muriel.”

It was actually nice just lying there with her naked. I definitely kept checking out her body. She had little feet. Her legs were gorgeous. Her arse was fantastic, soft yet firm at the same time. A strange sensation. She was soft all over. Her breasts were perfect. And her face was beautiful. It made me wonder why she was working in that sort of establishment. I wasn’t dumb enough to ask that sort of question.

Eventually her hand moved to my still rock hard cock, and she eventually positioned herself on her back again, gesturing for me to get on top of her. Spreading her legs, she suggested what we were about to do would eventually be natural, but she helped guide my cock into the right spot. Asking me to at least take it slow, that first feeling of sliding my cock into a hot, wet, tight pussy… It was a feeling I knew I would enjoy every time for the rest of my life. My face was obviously priceless as Ariel giggled, wrapping her arms around my neck and dragging me down to kiss her.

I took it slow inserting my entire length, and the look on her face suggested she loved it. Once I was all the way inside, I took a few moments to calm myself, as I didn’t want to cum again too quickly. That would have left me rather embarrassed. She gave me a couple of tips, and I was soon slowly thrusting into her, just getting used to it. Part of me wondered why the hell I’d taken so long to start fucking. The other part of me knew I’d want to do this every day if possible.

Somehow, I don’t really know how, I managed to last quite a while. Ariel eventually moved under me, and she gasped, stating I was even deeper as she wrapped a leg around me. “Fuck me,” she demanded albeit gently.

“I’ll probably…”

“If you do, you do. Fuck me. Trust me, Ragnar.”

So I started to what I thought was fucking her, which was thrusting harder and faster. It was what she wanted, as she lay back with a smile, occasionally kissing me, breathing deeply, moaning occasionally, repeating the demand to fuck her. I was starting to feel rather warm already, and I knew I wasn’t going to last too long. “Cum inside me. It’s okay.”

“But what about…”

“Potions. I’ll take one in the morning. Trust me, Ragnar, you’re cumming in me all night.”

That made me smile, which made her smile. And then I came. I groaned loudly. I’m sure they heard me downstairs. It was far better than my previous orgasm. It was the best orgasm of my life. I had to resist collapsing on top of her, holding myself by a forearm as her arms remained around my neck, leaning up to kiss my cheek. “There you are, Ragnar. Now you’re a man. How was it?”

“When can we do it again?”

She burst into laughter at my eager tone. “Give yourself a few minutes, young man. And I’ll need to clean up first.” I learned sex was a little bit messy as she needed a towel, not that it bothered me. It was my first time, and to be honest, I’m glad it was with Ariel. She was beautiful, had a good sense of humour, and seemed to be genuine in the fact she sort of liked me. I just had to remember that she was a working girl, and that we might like each other, but at the end of the night, I was but a customer. Still, I’d remember the night fondly…

We had a lot of sex the rest of the night as Ariel showed me number positions. Lying me down on my back, I loved watching her bounce up and down on my cock, particularly her breasts swaying as she did. Utterly mesmerising, and what made it better is that it helped her have another orgasm. Having a woman on her hands and knees was a position I enjoyed, and it felt like a slightly dominant position, as I could give her arse a gentle slap. Afterwards, she said some woman would like harder slap, or their hair gently pulled, and various other things. As she was smaller than myself, we event tried it standing up against a wall. That’s when she properly complimented me on my strength, as I found it rather easy to hold her up as I thrust into her. I definitely had an admirer as she certainly liked running her hands up and down my arms, back and chest.

It must have been early in the morning when we finally stopped, and Ariel hadn’t lied, happily snuggling against my body, politely insisting that I hold her. I quite happily did that, and for the first time of my life, fell asleep with a naked woman in my arms.

Waking the next morning, I woke up with an erection, poking her in the back. She woke up and started to laugh, and figured that we may as well have one last fuck. It was a lot softer and more sensual than all the fucking of the previous night, with plenty of kissing. Our faces barely inches apart, she said quietly, “And this is how you make love to someone you love, Ragnar. Okay?” I nodded. “I’m already jealous of whoever it is.”

“I have to find someone first.”

“Well, as I said, my door is always open if you’ve got the coin.”

“I’d like that.”

I think she tried to stop the smile being so broad. “So would I.”

I eventually finished inside her, and offered to bring her off, but she said that one was for me, as thank you for actually caring about hers the previous night. Getting dressed, I didn’t do so with a heavy heart. I took her warning seriously, so made sure I remembered that it was a business transaction. But that didn’t mean I couldn’t like her just for being a lovely young woman. She walked with my downstairs, where Corvus was already waiting for me with Muriel.

“Did you enjoy yourself, Ragnar?” Muriel asked.

“Did he enjoy himself! Look at his face!” Corvus exclaimed.

“Ariel was delightful company,” I stated.

“And he was the perfect gentleman,” Ariel added.

“Will we expect your return?” Muriel wondered.

“Definitely.” I think my reply was quite eager, as the three had a chuckle.

Corvus and I left, thanking Muriel, while I gave Ariel a soft kiss on her cheek, thanking her for a wonderful evening. She smiled and thanked me in return, and I definitely walked back to the guildhall with a spring in my step, to the amusement of Corvus, who practically laughed at me the entire way.

---

 

My first time lit the blue touch paper in regards to my sexual exploits around Cyrodiil. In addition to my continued work with the guild, I felt a surge in self-confidence. Having spent an entire evening being complimented, I figured I could use a little of that confidence and learn the art of picking up women. Sure, it blew up in my face quite often as I learned what to do, but slowly and surely, the confidence I carried myself with started to gain attention.

Having a well-known face around Cheydinhal, many of the local women already knew me, and knowing I was single, I soon found myself joining the occasional woman back at her place after an evening out. Remembering everything I’d learned with Ariel certainly helped, and the compliments I received about my physique, the size of my cock, and my continually improving talents as a lover, only helped my confidence surge even more.

I was careful not to mix business with pleasure too often in Cheydinhal. But as I was sent around Cyrodiil for work, I started to ensure I spent a few days in a town to meet more women. The first city I made a permanent lover was in Bruma, a woman by the name of Arnora. I met her in a tavern one evening, and once she seemed interested in me, getting an invite back to her place was rather easy. She was a little older than myself, I would have said around thirty, but she was fantastic fuck, leaving the next morning with an invite to join her any time I was in Bruma.

Chorrol proved to be a city of delights for someone such as myself. While I was ever more confident, I could still embarrass myself trying to impress or flirt with women, but most seemed to find it amusing and sweet, rather than amusing in a way that they laughed at me. I found myself in Chorrol often enough that I soon had at least three lovers there. A Cyrodilian by the name of Arriana, a beautiful, busty blonde who was a mix of sugar and spice in the bedroom. A Nord by the name of Vilena, a buxom brunette who was the first woman to introduce me to anal sex. And my first elf, an Altmer by the name of Earana, who put my back up to begin with, but after helping her with a personal issue, was suddenly sweet as pie and very eager to spread her legs for me.

I visited Chorrol a lot.

The Imperial City had always been off-limits for me, and Corvus had always ensured I didn’t get contracts there. But a job eventually crossed his desk that he wanted one of his best lieutenants to complete it, and that meant me, as I had now risen the ranks to effectively be his direct subordinate. I managed to make it into the city without a problem and complete the job. I’m not sure if anyone ever recognised me, but I think I’d probably changed enough over the past three years that it would have helped. The fact I now had a well-trimmed beard and washed at least one every couple of days, plus I was dressed in some fine armour, I would probably have been unrecognisable to those I’d use to run with in the Thieves Guild.

That made me feel a little more confident, and once the job was complete, I ended up in a tavern and picked up this lovely little Breton woman by the name of Aileen, no older than myself. I’ll be honest, she was probably the best fuck I’d had since Ariel, and we really liked each other. Though she knew I wasn’t a local, she insisted that her door would always be open whenever I was in the Imperial City. I suddenly had a reason to return.

Speaking of Ariel, I still visited her whenever I was in Cheydinhal, and she kept her word. I became a regular, and a word with Muriel meant I paid only half the price compared to the others. And if I was going to visit her of an evening, I would be her only customer that day. We grew rather close. No, we certainly were not falling in love, but we didn’t just fuck when I visited. We’d lie back and talk about things, and we learned pretty much everything we could about each other. Both of us were orphans. She was only a couple of years older than me. She was hoping to save money so she could open her own shop, as she liked to sow when she wasn’t working. I could only wish her well.

I spent at last three years working for Corvus in Cheydinhal. Every so often a job opportunity would come up to possibly run my own guild, but I had to be honest and admit it didn’t interest me. Guildmasters rarely completed contracts nor spent time on the road. Corvus didn’t mind, liking the fact I would remain loyal to him, and over the years, we became the closest of friends and I was his most reliable warrior.

Or, at least I was until everything blew up in my face and I had to depart rather quickly.

I was returning from Chorrol, having spent a couple of nights there completing another job while visiting Vilena. I was feeling rather tender in my groin region, though probably not as sore as her, as I had spent half the night in her arse. For some reason, she loved it, and I’d certainly loved to do it.

Approaching the gates of Cheydinhal, there was a crowd at the gates, and my hand moved to the hilt of my sword as the group moved in my directions. I counted at least twelve men, at least half of them wearing the uniform of the Imperial army, and all of them were armed.

“That’s him! That’s the one,” one of them yelled, and that was followed by more shouting.

I stopped a few metres from them, hand on the hilt of my sword though leaving it sheathed. They formed a line in front of me. “Are you Ragnar?” one of them asked.

“Who’s asking?”

“My name is Lucius Veranus. I am the husband of Arriana.”

Shit. I should have known…

“She’s married?” Of course she was. They all were. All of them. All of them except Ariel, my first. Even the sweet young Breton girl in the Imperial City was married, to a soldier of all people. I was a damned stupid fool, thinking with only his dick. “Look, I clearly didn’t know…”

“While we could accept one or two, Ragnar, you have fucked all of our wives. Do you know how that makes us look? Like jokes. Pathetic little men, incapable of pleasing their wives. And all of them found pleasure in you. One man.”

My hand tightened around the hilt of my sword. “So what do you intend to do?”

“We agreed that we won’t kill you, Ragnar, not unless you give us reason to fight and kill you. But you can’t stay. Not in Cyrodiil. Not after what you’ve done to us.”

“So where the hell should I go?”

“You’re a Nord. Skyrim is north. Go there. Anywhere but here.”

“You’re seriously kicking me out of my home?”

“It’s either that or fight us all right now. Because, trust me on this, some of these men want your blood for what you’ve done. They admit that you probably didn’t know, but that doesn’t make you completely innocent. As I said, one or two, sure, it happens. But how many women do you need to fuck, Ragnar? By the Eight…”

I couldn’t fight them all. I had talent, and could have taken maybe three of them. But twelve and more was just a death sentence. “You obviously have coin, so you can make it to the border without a problem.” They threw a bag in my direction. “Those are the few things of yours. We’ve already spoken to your guildmaster. He spoke highly of you, and tried to speak your case, but we were not going to have it. So, you either go peacefully or you fight us all. But rest assured, we will know if you’re still in Cyrodiil, Ragnar. We have friend everywhere, and if anyone of us even hear a whisper that you’re still here, we will all arrive on your doorstep to deal with you. We can’t forgive and we won’t forget.”

As I said, I’m not a particularly smart man, but I’m not stupid. And I knew I couldn’t win here. “Very well. I guess I have no choice,” I stated, bending down to grab the backpack, “Never thought I’d be run out of my own home.”

“Take the north road to Bruma and head for the mountain pass. You will be watched until you cross the border. As I said, if you don’t do as we demand, there will be consequences.”

I knew the soldiers could call on all their friends, and I’d probably end up fighting an entire cohort of soldiers, so that wouldn’t be particularly sensible. “Skyrim it is then!”

It took me two days to reach the border, and I knew I was being watched. I know when I’ve got eyes on me. No doubt the husbands had called in favours of fellow soldiers and others who would be willing to assist. No doubt any reputation I once had in Cheydinhal and other cities across Cyrodiil was now in tatters. I could only hope the women I’d bedded were okay.

The weather turned as I followed the mountain road, and as the sun set on the third day, I had to take one last look back at Cyrodiil now below me. Bruma was in the near distance, while I was high enough to see the Imperial City in the distance. I never thought I would have left Cyrodiil in this manner, basically on the run from a group of jealous, angry husbands. I probably should have been more circumspect in my actions about bedding women.

Oh well, never mind. Despite the situation, I’ll admit to a little excitement at starting life anew in my homeland. I could only hope my life didn’t fall apart quite as badly.

Chapter 2: Begin Anew

Having escaped Cyrodiil, it took a couple of days to cross the mountains, thankful I had enough warm clothing to keep the worst of the cold at bay. Being a Nord, I was capable of withstanding cold naturally, but when the wind whipped up snow into my face, leaving me half blinded as I walked along, even my teeth would chatter as it cut straight through my coat.

The weather cleared as crested the mountain, and I had to stop and stare at the sight that unfolded before me. Skyrim. Home of the Nords. Did I weep at seeing my homeland? No. I’d never felt any major yearning to journey here. Cyrodiil had been my home since my birth. I’d grown up and was happy there. That didn’t mean I was too upset to make a new home for myself in Skyrim. I just had to figure out where and how. 

It took a few hours to descend the mountain, walking into a forested area, following the main road until I came to a junction. Looking left and right, the signpost suggested a town was only a couple of miles off to the right, by the name of Falkreath. A town or city meant an inn, food and drink, and a warm bed. So Falkreath it was. 

I’ll admit to being relieved that I still had my armour and weapons. I only wore light armour, mostly leather with steel plate in the important parts. My weapons were the best available, though. The Fighter’s Guild didn’t scrimp on armour and weapons, as without the best available, we’d have quickly run out of fighters. 

Left feeling rather glad I was young and fit, having spent three days crossing the border, light was dimming as I approached the outskirts of Falkreath, and I realised things were very different in Skyrim to Cyrodiil. Walking up to the main gates, the pair of guards standing there looking rather board gave me a curious glance but said nothing as I passed by. There wasn’t much to Falkreath on first appearance. At the end of the main road was what I guessed the be the lord’s hall. There were a few shops lined either side of the road, including a blacksmith. But, most importantly, there was an inn, a sign suggesting it was named ‘Dead Man’s Drink’. 

Walking inside, it was surprisingly empty except for a woman behind the bar and another sweeping the floor. She turned to me and smiled. “Shor's bones! A handsome man in Falkreath!” 

“Um, thanks.” 

Walking towards the bar, the woman was wiping it down with a cloth, noticing my approach and smiling. “I’m Valga. Welcome to Dead Man’s Drink. What can I get you?” 

“An ale, please.” 

As she poured me a tankard, I took a seat on one of the stools, dumping my bag on the floor. “I hear a faint accent in your voice, yet you’re clearly a Nord. Where are you from?” 

“Just crossed in from Cyrodiil.” 

“Oh, whatever for?” 

“Needed a change.” 

Placing a tankard in front of me, I handed over a couple coin and thanked her. “You’ve perhaps come at the wrong time, with the civil war and all.” 

“Civil war?” I couldn’t hide the surprise. I didn’t know a thing about it. 

Valga just scoffed. “Of course it wouldn’t be news in Cyrodiil. Ever heard of Ulfric Stormcloak?” I shook my head. “The White-Gold Concordat and the banning of Talos worship?” 

“No to the first question. Vaguely the second question.” 

“Well, the only thing I can suggest is that you watch yourself when on the open road. The Empire and Stormcloak both patrol, and sometimes don’t mind taking prisoners.” 

I took a room for the evening, dumping my bag on the single bed, and as the inn started to fill up for the evening, I found myself chatting with some of the locals. Most were either fellow Nords, but there were a few from Cyrodiil and even a Redguard, a woman by the name of Zaria who ran the local apothecary. As we chatted, I could feel an underlying tension between certain people, believing it was probably to do with the civil war. Some of the Nords were proud to tell me they backed the Stormcloak Rebellion, as it was called. I kept any opinion to myself, not that I had one, merely stating I’d just arrived and was wondering what to do. A local shopkeeper offered me a job, asking if I could head to the city of Riften for him to deliver a parcel. Smart enough to suggest payment was at the other end, I agreed, as it gave me something to do and a chance to earn coin. 

I slept alone that night, not that I minded, and it allowed me to make an early start the next morning. After breakfast, I asked for some directions, Valga stating signposts would point the way, and that it should take me about a day to walk there. I bought a couple of things for lunch and set off. 

The weather around Falkreath was rather gloomy, and it wasn’t until I crested a large hill, another town off to my left, that I found myself walking in sunshine, though it still wasn’t particularly warm. I passed a few merchants or fellow travellers, and most were polite enough to swap a cheerful ‘Hello!’ 

Following the signposts to Falkreath, I learned the names of other towns apparently within Skyrim, including Whiterun, Helgen, Ivarstead and Windhelm, which I had heard mentioned the night before as the home city of Ulfric Stormcloak. Sticking to the south road, I ended up on the southern side of what was signed as Lake Honrich. The southern gate into Riften was boarded up, which was a surprise, so I had to cross around to the other side, using the city walls as a guide. The area was rather beautiful, trees reaching for the sky, leaves the colour of red and orange. Scents fill my nostrils. It was remarkably peaceful. 

Sun was setting by the time I made the gates. I was tired, my feet hurt, and all I wanted to do was sit down for a drink. But two guards thought they’d try and shake me down first, crossing the spears they were holding to block my entrance. 

“See here, anyone wishing to enter has to pay the tax,” Tweedledum stated. 

“Yes. Anyone wishing to sample the delights of Riften must pay for the privilege,” Tweedledee added. 

“I’m surprised you know words longer than two syllables.” 

“What?” 

I sighed. “Look, I’ve just walked here all the way from Falkreath. My feet are sore. I’m tired and could do with a wash. All I want is a hot meal, a cold drink, and a warm bed. And I don’t appreciate being dicked around. So I’ll put it like this. Either get out of my way or I’ll put you both on the ground.” 

“Think you’re some sort of tough guy?” Tweedledum asked. 

“I don’t think I am. But I fought with the Fighter’s Guild of Cheydinhal for three years, so I know I could put a sword through you within five seconds, and your idiot friend there in the next three. Want to test if I’m bullshitting?” 

My hand was now at the hilt of my sword, ready to draw, and there must have been a look in my eye, as the pair of idiots shared a nervous glance and moved their spears out of the way. “You may enter,” one of them said meekly. 

“I see you shaking down anyone else…” I warned as they moved out of the way. 

My first impressions were not great. The smell was horrendous, noticing a dank river of water below that likely hadn’t been filtered years. Only the gods would know what rested in it. A lot of dead things, going by the smell. Otherwise Riften was rather drab, plenty of wooden buildings, and it was clearly not rich at all. I noticed a marketplace in the distance, though it was now deserted considering the time, and the streets were otherwise rather empty. 

There was an inn across a wooden bridge, so figuring I could make my delivery the next day, I headed for the inn, wandering inside to find it already quite busy. An Argonian was behind the bar, a female, though I’ll be honest, I found telling the difference between non-humans and elves to be quite difficult. After taking one of the available rooms and dumping my bag upstairs, I returned and took one of the spare tables. The other Argonian, the male and I assumed partner of the female, took my order of a meal and drink. Sitting back with my back against the wall, I gazed over the crowd, listening into some of the conversations. 

As it was rather busy, I was approached by a rather tall woman, who asked if she could sit with me. I gestured to the spare seat and she sat down. She introduced herself as Mjoll, and her accent was difficult to place. With long blonde hair and hazel eyes, I’ll admit the armour she wore hid whatever figure she did have. She asked what I was doing in Riften, and I admitted I’d only just arrived in Skyrim, and was delivering a package for someone. Other than that, I didn’t have any plans. 

“Careful while you’re in Riften. The Thieves Guild makes their home here.” 

I’ll admit my ears pricked up at the mention of them, though I tried to keep my face blank. “Are you sure?” I asked. 

“Aye, I am. See that woman over there?” she gestured with her head to a middle aged woman, hair as black as night and a face like thunder, surrounded by people I assumed were her children, “That’s Maven Black-Briar. She has this city in her pocket and the Thieves Guild at her back.” 

“Have you had run-ins with them?” 

“One or two. Never more than words. But I know who some of them are. They might deny it, but there’s no doubt in my mind who works for them.” 

“Thanks for the warning.” 

I did mean my thanks, but my mind was already wondering… I’d left the Thieves Guild in Cyrodiil primarily due to my own screw up. Almost being killed would make anyone reconsider their life. However, I was now older and wiser, and I’ll admit, I still thought like a thief at times, wandering through a crowd, thinking ‘I could swipe that coin purse without them noticing’ or look at a business and know they have valuables kept out in the open that I could easily take after a quick picking of a lock. But would I approach the Thieves Guild in Riften? Would I want to go down that road again? 

Let’s be honest. I wasn’t the most honourable of people around. Sure, I had worked with the Fighter’s Guild, but even while working with them, I did a few things I probably shouldn’t have been proud of. Particularly when it came to taking payment in pussy rather than coin. Then there was the fact I was fucking a variety of women, unbeknownst to me all of them being married. That was the reason I was in Skyrim anyway. 

Heading to bed later that night, I was toying with the idea… 

Dropping the package at Elgrim’s Elixirs the next morning, I found myself talking to a cute girl behind the counter who introduced herself as Ingun Black-Briar. I’m not sure if she was a dead ringer for her mother, but her voice was soft and captivating, and I couldn’t help flirting with her for a few minutes before the old woman she worked for cleared her throat, a not so subtle suggestion for me to piss off. She did ask if I was staying in Riften. I said I might have a reason to hang around a little longer. 

Keeping to myself, I wandered the streets of Riften, walking past a temple, which appeared to be for the worship of Mara. I couldn’t help snort, because if I worshipped anyone, it was Dibella. She was usually a god worshipped primarily by women, but I followed her doctrine regarding the more erotic delights one can experience. More than one woman I bedded in Cyrodiil worshipped Dibella, albeit in secret. 

The local lord’s residence was far more impressive than that I’d seen in Falkreath, walking past that and through the marketplace, where there were quite a number of stalls, shopkeepers yelling out plenty of information regarding their wares. I eventually leaned back against the wall of the inn and watched life drift by, wondering what I should do next. I must have been there for a good twenty minutes before I was joined by someone. 

“Never done an honest day's work in your life for all that coin you're carrying, eh, lad?” 

“Well, I don’t know about that. What makes you ask that question though?” 

“Well, let’s just say that you've got the coin, but you didn't earn a septim of it honestly. I can tell.” 

“That’s where you’re wrong, friend. The coin I have now I earned honestly with a Guild.” I gave him a sideways glance. “Let me guess, you’re with the Guild rumoured to operate in this city.” 

He glanced my way and smirk. “While I cannot admit to knowing what you’re talking about, you seem to know your stuff already.” 

“What you’re wearing is eerily familiar of my youth.” 

He nodded, seeming to understand. “Homeless?” 

“And an orphan too.” 

“What brings you to Riften then?” 

“Did a job as a favour for someone in Falkreath. I’ve just recently crossed into Skyrim from Cyrodiil. Looking for work now.” 

“I’ve got something for you if you’re interested?” I nodded. “I’ll put it simply. I've got a bit of an errand to perform, but I need an extra pair of hands. And in my line of work, extra hands are well-paid.” 

I always liked earning coin, so I took the job offer immediately. He told me what needed doing, and I almost laughed at the simplicity of the job. I told him that, and he chuckled, telling me not to be cocky, to just get the job done and we’d talk afterwards. It really was child’s play. Pick a lock, steal a ring, plant it on someone else. The lock was so simple; I could have done it blindfolded. Actually putting a ring in someone’s pocket was different to what I normally did, but the mark didn’t have a clue, and the whole plan went off without a hitch. 

My new friend introduced himself as Brynjolf, and he kept his word, handing me a small coin purse for a job well done, particularly as our mark was quickly approached by a trio of city guard, his pockets turned out, and he was eventually marched off to the cells. Standing with our backs against the wall again, he admitted with a sigh, “I’m just glad that went off without a hitch. About bloody time something went right for us.” 

“Something wrong?” 

He nodded. “I guess I can be honest if you used to run with the Guild. We’ve been having a run of bad luck, but I suppose that's just how it goes. But never mind that, you did the job and you did it well. Best of all, there's more where that came from. That is, if you think you can handle it.” 

“I’ve done this all before. What you just had me do was simple.” 

“If I may ask, why’d you leave?” 

“I was sixteen and a job went bad. Really bad. I was lucky to get away with my life, and it was then that I chose to take a different path.” 

“And now?” 

“Well, I can admit I’m not the most honourable of people. But I do believe in honour amongst thieves.” 

“Just what I wanted to hear, so I’ll give you some information, and you can do with it what you want. Below Riften is a section of tunnels called the Ratway. The Guild I represent makes its home in a place called the Ragged Flagon. Get there in one piece and we’ll see what happens.” 

He disappeared as I wandered the marketplace. I found myself talking to a rather annoyed woman called Grelka. With raven hair and brown eyes, she would have been quite attractive if she wasn’t so grumpy. I had a good look at her armour, and was surprised at the quality, but I didn’t have the coin to buy anything. That just pissed her off even more, and even my attempts at flirting went nowhere. I said I’d be back if I had the coin, but I don’t think she believed me. 

What I learned with the Thieves Guild back in Cyrodiil is that the homeless, the destitute and the downtrodden are usually associates. After giving a coin to one of the local homeless, I asked about the Ratway. She sized me up good and proper before telling me what to go. “Careful, stranger. All sorts of riff-raff call the Ratway home.” 

Figuring there was no point in delaying, I found the entrance to the Ratway, and making sure I had weapon in hand, I walked in. 

The first thing to overwhelm me was the smell. By the Eight, it was enough to make even me gag, and I’d traipsed through my fair share of shit over the years, walking through sewers as I worked for the Guild as a kid, or even for the Fighter’s Guild later on. I took a few deep breaths, trying to get used to it, before I moved on. 

The Ratway was home to the crazy, the foolish, the damn fucking insane. I didn’t want to kill them, as I’d seen and met plenty during my time in Cyrodiil. Generally, I tried to just knock them out, or at least leave them on the ground with a stern warning to not try it again. Most were smart enough to nod their acceptance. The last guy I met, though. He was fucking enormous, armed with a big cleaver, and he just wouldn’t see sense. Clearly insane, I had to cut him down, and I had to do it quick, as his cleaver came too close for comfort more than once. 

Walking into the Ragged Flagon, I was surprised at the lack of smell, particularly due to the pool of water around which the tavern was situated. I guess it wasn’t as stagnant as the water that ran through the middle of Riften itself. I noticed Brynjolf in the middle of a group of people, and stood back though eavesdropped on their conversation. He made it sound like I was some sort of saviour of their group. I’m not sure about that, but he seemed rather happy to see me, walking forward to shake my hand. 

“Well, colour me impressed, lad. I wasn't sure I'd ever see you again!” 

“Why? I made it pretty clear I was interested.” I thumbed behind me, adding, “And that lot out there wasn’t much trouble.” 

He barked a short laugh. “Reliable and headstrong? You're turning out to be quite the prize!” 

“I’m not sure about that, but I’m not inexperienced, that’s for sure.” 

He grabbed my arm and led me forward. “Let me introduce you around. Behind the bar is Vekel. Runs it, and once you’re confirmed, he’ll look after you. The blonde is Vex, our expert lockpicker. The bald egg is Delvin. He’ll hook you up with jobs. Our Redguard friend is Tonila. She’s our fence and will always do you a good price. And finally, that big lump of meat over there is Dirge. One rule about Dirge. Don’t fuck with Dirge.” 

I looked at Dirge, and as he was bigger than me, I took his advice to heart. “Now, it’s getting dark, and while it’s usually our best time to work, to be honest, pickings are thin here. However, if you haven’t a bed for the night, you can crash with us and you can do an initiation test for us tomorrow. Every potential recruit does it.” 

“Sure, no problem.” 

“Want a drink?” 

I certainly wanted a drink, and though the ale served to me left a lot to be desired, I sat at a table with Delvin, Vex and Brynjolf and listened as they discussed matters. Whether they trusted me or not, I’m not sure, but they had no problem discussing business. I kept my eyes on Vex, as she was very cute, with long blonde hair, blue eyes, and wearing armour that showed off her best assets. She noticed me looking and just folded her arms, trying to warn me off, though her eyes suggested she was returning the appraisal. 

Brynjolf suggested a little later that we should get a little shut eye, and before I could follow, Vex grabbed my forearm. “Be careful if you want to mix business with pleasure,” she said quietly. 

“Don’t know what you’re talking about.” 

She scoffed but said nothing else as I followed Brynjolf down a separate corridor, through a secret entrance, and into an enormous cistern. It was there that I was introduced to more members of the Guild, including a gorgeous brunette by the name of Sapphire, whose cold demeanour, quite frankly, made me even more interested in her. I was like that sometimes. 

Brynjolf went through a few of the rules, though suggested that I’d learn a lot more once I passed my initiation, but for now, I was welcome to a bed at least. Most of the others headed to bed rather quickly, so I decided to do the same thing, feeling a little disappointed that it was another night alone. I hadn’t gone more than three days without sex for a long time now, so this was my longest dry spell since I’d turned eighteen and that first night with Ariel. I tried not to dream of her as I drifted off. 

The next morning after breakfast, Brynjolf explained the test. I was to obtain protection money from businesses in Riften that were now refusing to honour their debts. I’d changed out of my armour the night before, so asked if I could at least be giving a coat with a hood to hide my face. “A thief takes pride in anonymity after all,” I said. 

“Right you are, Ragnar,” he replied, and he managed to find me what I wanted. Putting it on, he said my face was in darkness, and I should be safe. 

The first target was a man by the name of Bersi. He knew where I was from and was immediately uncooperative. Brynjolf had warned me that we did not kill people, but if sometimes we needed to rough people up to get them to behave. It only took a slap for him to hand over the money, promising he’d pay on time going forward. 

Next target, the Argonian lady who ran the inn. Word must have already spread, as it only took a subtle threat to deal with her. Did I feel a little bit of guilt? Perhaps, but I surprised even myself by being back in the mindset of working for the Guild. The only thing I needed to learn was if they operated by the same standards at the Guild in Cyrodiil. I’d have to ask some questions of my own. 

The last target was Haelga, and she already had the coin waiting for me, so word must have definitely spread. Her look of disdain amused me, and I was ready to depart until seeing the statue of Dibella nearby. “You worship her?” I wondered. 

“I do. What business of it is yours?” 

“None. It’s just unusual someone would openly have a statue of her on display. Even I know those who worship her are looked down upon for various reasons. I’ve heard of women run out of towns for openly worshipping her.” 

“Why do you even care?” Considering my lifestyle and who I worshipped, the amulet I wore shouldn’t be a surprise. But it certainly was to her, and I had to laugh as her demeanour completely changed. She held the amulet as I removed my hood. To be honest, I didn’t mind if she saw my face considering what I had in mind. “So, you worship her but you’re a thief?” 

“I’m not a thief. I’m just getting paid for some work.” A damned lie, but it didn’t matter. She was your typical Nord. Blonde, blue-eyed, busty. Bit of an attitude, which I liked. I preferred feisty to placid. No ring on her left hand, suggesting she was unmarried. Same as all the women from Cyrodiil… 

“It’s unusual a man would worship Dibella.” 

“She’s the Goddess of Love. Or certain other things that brings enjoyment to life.” 

“And if you weren’t in here extorting me, I might just be interested.” 

So I handed the money back. “I’ve got it covered. Don’t worry about it. Just make sure you pay your debts to the faction I’m representing, and you won’t have someone on your doorstep again. And next time, it might not be someone as generous as myself. Understand?” 

“I do. And you’re serious?” 

“Were you?” 

She handed the amulet back. “Tell you what. Are you ever in the Bee and Barb?” 

“Well, I’m rather new in town, but you might see me in there from time to time.” 

“If you’re serious about your Dibella worship…” 

“Want me to recite one of her prayers?” She shook her head. “Your name is Haelga?” She nodded. “I’m Ragnar.” 

“Well, despite the circumstances, it’s a pleasure, Ragnar.” 

“The pleasure is mine. So, the Bee and Barb? I’ll make sure I drop by sometime. Might buy you a drink.” 

I’ll admit, I walked out shaking my head, wondering what the hell just happened. I had more than enough coin to cover the paltry sum each mark owed, so returning to Brynjolf with coin in hand raised no questions. He was pleased I’d done it without too much violence and, more importantly, had sent a message. Well, maybe not entirely, but I had a feeling my subtle warning to Haelga would be enough too. 

“Lad, I’ll admit it, two tasks and you’ve completed both bloody well. Far as I’m concerned, you’ve more than proved yourself.” 

“And I’ll admit it that I prefer my coin purse bulging rather than empty.” 

That made him laugh, earning a clap on the back. “That’s the spirit! But, I’ll be honest, things have been rough around here for a long time. But that’s for me to worry about. If you keep doing these jobs, we’ll all be rolling in coin in no time.” 

Brynjolf wasted no time, leading me into the cistern again where I was introduced to the leader of the Guild, a man by the name of Mercer. Ever have a shiver up your spine from just a look at someone? I had that with Mercer. There was something about him that immediately had me worried, though maybe I was misreading the situation. Brynjolf spoke in glowing terms of myself. I don’t think Mercer was entirely convinced, but he agreed nonetheless. 

“One thing before we begin, Ragnar. I want to make it perfectly clear. If you play by the rules, you walk away rich. You break the rules and you lose your share. No debates, no discussions. You do what we say, when we say. Do I make myself clear?” 

“Crystal, boss. You won’t have any problem with me. I’ve worked with the Guild before.” 

“Really? Well, if you’re as good as Brynjolf thinks you are, and as good as you think you are, then I think we’ll put that to the test.” 

Brynjolf wasn’t happy. “Mercer, you’re not thinking of the Goldenglow job are you? Even Vex couldn’t get in.” 

Mercer turned on Brynjolf. “You claim this recruit possesses an aptitude for our line of work. If so, let him prove it. Goldenglow Estate is critically important to one of our largest clients. However, the owner has suddenly decided to take matters into his own hands, and shut us out. He needs to be taught a lesson.” 

“I’ll do it. Give me a few days to scope it out and make some preparations. But it’ll be done.” 

My confidence appeared to surprise Mercer, before he gave an approving nod, turned and walked away. Brynjolf led me back to the Flagon to fill me in on the details, announcing at the same time that I was now a member of the Thieves Guild. The first thing I did was grab armour from Tonila. It was similar to that I’d worn while working for the Guild in Cyrodiil. 

I didn’t remain in the Flagon all day though. Once it was dark, I headed to the Bee and Barb, taking the same seat as before. This time, I was looking for female company that would hopefully end my dry spell. Ingun walked in first, and once she met my eyes, I gestured to the empty chair across from me. I was pleased she moved immediately in my direction. 

“A pleasant surprise, Ragnar.” 

“Nice to see you again, Ingun. Elgrim keeping you busy?” 

I listened in as I gestured for two drinks, a couple of tankards quickly placed in front of us. If either of the Argonians recognised me as the one who’d been in for payment, they didn’t give it away. 

“What brought you to Riften?” Ingun asked as we started our second drink. 

“I really shouldn’t say. It’s a little embarrassing, and you’ll probably up and leave when I tell you.” 

“Oh.” She leaned forward, whispering, “Is it scandalous?” 

Learning forward myself, I whispered back, “Very.” 

“How scandalous?” 

“Well, let’s just say some jealous husbands ran me out of Cyrodiil.” She gasped, no doubt in shock. “I assure you, I didn’t know they were married.” 

“They? How many were you bedding?” 

“A few. My job took me around Cyrodiil, and let’s just say I had some lovers around.” 

I was surprised when she actually laughed. I honestly thought she would have been horrified, that helped calm me. “Well, I can see why,” she said softly. 

“Oh… Why?” 

She started to blush, so I figured she wanted to say something perhaps a little unladylike. “Would you like to come back to mine for a drink, Ragnar?” 

I couldn’t help smile. “That’s a rather forward invitation, Ingun.” 

“I don’t like beating around the bush. Are you interested?” 

“Very.” 

I stood up, offering my arm, and we departed rather quickly. She guided me towards the front door of their manor, whispering for me to be quiet, though she was fairly sure no-one should be home. Inside was rather dark, and I noticed her grab a bottle of something. Expecting to be escorted upstairs, we ended up heading down into what I thought would have been the basement. Her room was rather plain, though had a double bed at least. “I’m sure you have questions. Trust me, I’m down here as a form of punishment,” she said, taking a seat on the bed. I shut the door and joined her. 

Popping the cork of the bottle, she took a swig before handing it to me. It was wine, so I took a good mouthful. “Punishment?” I asked. 

“Because I won’t do what they want me to do. I like working for Elgrim and I want to learn how to become a master alchemist.” 

“And your mother doesn’t like that?” 

She scoffed. “Certainly not. She wants me to work alongside my brother in the ‘family business’. No thank you.” She took another swig of wine. “But enough about that. What about you, Ragnar?” 

“What would you like to know?” She wanted to know the important details, so I shared what I thought was, such as the fact I was an orphan, living in the Imperial City, worked as a thief, worked for the Fighter’s Guild, my journey to Skyrim and then how I ended up in Riften. I didn’t mention the Thieves Guild bit, just suggesting I’d look for work. “How long do you intend on staying?” 

I shrugged. “No idea. I’ll see what happens.” 

Reaching across to put the bottle on the small chest next to her bed, she turned towards me and wasted no time kissing me. I realised quite quickly she was rather eager, left thinking she was… desperate. That wasn’t always a bad thing, assuming it might have been a while. She certainly wasted little time trying to get my clothes off, so I returned the favour, sliding off her coat and blouse, leaving her bra and skirt. She had very nice skin, though her hands were a little rough, no doubt from dealing with all sort of chemicals, but I didn’t mind so much. 

Taking her bra off was easy, freeing a pair of rather perky breasts, nipples already rock hard in her excitement. My coat and shirt was already off, and her hands were exploring my body at the same time. Wanting to take charge, I lay her down on the bed, and fumbled with the buttons for her skirt, finally breaking our kiss to remove her boots and skirt, before I finally removed her panties, revealing a nice patch of dark hair, and it was clear she was very excited. 

Kicking off my boots first, I wasted little time lowering my face to her pussy, running a tongue up her slit, earning a gasp from just that, and she tasted divine. Pushing her legs slightly wider, I simply lapped at her cunt, using all my experience earned over the past couple of years to tease her, running one hand up her stomach so I could fondle her breasts at the same time. Parting her lips with my tongue, I teased and probed her entrance, swallowing whatever juices that flowed, and I just had to compliment her on the taste. 

Switching my right hand fondling her breasts for my left, I slid a couple of fingers from my right hand inside her, and that excited her even more. “So long,” she whispered. 

This wasn’t the time for questions, but it wasn’t something I could ask about later. Right now, I wanted her to cum. I was left thinking she needed it. With a couple of fingers inside her, just teasing her, occasionally touching that special spot everyone woman has, I switched my tongue to tease her clit at the same time. She was soon writhing on the bed, and I knew by instinct that she wasn’t going to last long. 

“Ragnar,” she breathed. 

I loved it when women breathed my name in such a manner. It meant I was definitely doing something right. It surprised me when she purposely spread her legs a little further, begging for my fingers to fuck her harder and faster. I was tempted to finish undressing and just slide my cock inside her, but that would be for later. So I did as she asked and now used all the tricks I knew regarding her clit. 

She near enough jolted off the bed before her back arched, and I knew she was now well on her way. My fingers were now fucking her hard, though my arm didn’t get sore. I’d done this often enough now that it would take hours for either my arm or jaw to get sore. More than once I’d eaten our one of my lovers all night, leaving them a sweating, quivering mess by the time I was done. 

“Oh, Ragnar!” she cried. If she was meaning for this triste to be in secret, I think it ended with that. Not that I cared, as all the body language suggested she was on the verge of a climax, and quite a good one. I felt her start to squeeze my fingers, and with one loud, long moan, she did have quite the orgasm, grabbing one of her pillows to cover her screams. I kept pumping and licking all the way through it, and wondered if she’d want to be keep going, but I eventually heard a whisper for me to stop. I did so and quite happily licked my fingers clean, sitting on my knees as I gazed down upon her naked body. That actually her start to blush, watching her chest rise and fall as she sucked in some deep breaths. 

“I would ask where you learned…” I just smiled and lowered myself down so I could give her a gentle kiss, feeling one of her hands run through my hair. “Well, whoever you did learn with, I should thank her.” 

“Been a while?” 

“Mother judges any man who even talks to me. It’s why…” She blushed again. “It’s why I was in such a hurry to get you here.” 

“Well, you’ll hear no complaints from me regarding that.” 

She took ten minutes to recover, sipping a little wine again, and then she sucked my cock. Like all the women I’m intimate with, she expressed surprise as it was uncovered, taking a few moments just to appreciate it. I’ve never actually measured it, but most of the women I’d been with in Cyrodiil suggested it was the largest they’d seen and had inside them, while Ingun with me right now was worried about it hurting her. I assured her I was always gentle the first time. 

“Oh, you’re fucking me regardless,” she stated before she attempted to swallow as much of my cock as possible. 

Having just eaten her out, I was already rather turned on, so my own orgasm wouldn’t be long in arriving. But ever since that first time with Ariel, my body had learned how to cope with certain things, and while I would always cum from a blowjob, it took a little longer for me to cum so I could at least enjoy it for a while. 

Ingun certainly seemed to like sucking my cock, proving very enthusiastic as her head bobbed up and down. She didn’t attempt to swallow the whole length, but what she did with her tongue was enough to drive me wild. Asking where I should finish, she just smiled at me and I assumed that meant it in her mouth. I’d been fooled once and ended up cumming on myself when she removed her mouth, so I asked for clarification. “I swallow,” Ingun stated, and that put my mind at ease. 

She took a blast in the mouth a couple of minutes later. No doubt anyone in the house would have heard me groan at the same time, giving me a chuckle once I’d finished in her mouth. “What?” she asked. 

“I just had a vision of your door bursting open while you were sucking my cock, about to take my load in your mouth.” 

Ingun moved up to straddle my groin, my rather flaccid cock not rising just yet. I had youth on my side, but I still needed a few minutes of recovery. She leaned down to kiss me, and was surprised when I did so. I said it was only a lingering taste, and if she was willing to swallow, I can handle the after taste. She said that was rather sweet. 

We made out for a while, and with her beautiful naked body on me, and the heat of her sex at my groin, it didn’t take long for me to get hard again. Once I was, Ingun simply sat up, lifted herself up a little, and slowly slid down my cock. It took her a little while to take my entire length, and I just watched her face explode with delight as more of my cock disappeared inside her. “By the Eight, Ragnar, it feels wonderful!” 

“And you’re wonderfully tight, Ingun.” 

Another blush, though it was joined by a rather sweet smile. Once she was bottomed out, she gyrated a few times, gasping quite loudly and she shuddered. “Well, that certainly hits the spot!” 

Resting my hands lightly on her hips, she quite happily started to bounce and grind a little, and I quickly moved one hand to her breasts. She leaned down rather quickly herself so I could finally get my mouth on one of her nipples, running one of her hands through my hair again. “You’re so big, Ragnar,” she whispered, “I’ve never had a cock like it before.” 

I wasn’t dumb enough to ask ‘How many cocks have you had?’ though I’m sure I wasn’t the only one to think that whenever a woman said it. Then again, I’d had my fair share of pussy, so thinking anything negative would be one hell of a double standard. I went with the mindset of we’re fucking now and enjoying it, and hopefully it happens again. 

Ingun was soon riding me hard and fast, her kisses hot and passionate, and with hands to either side of my body, she was now riding me in search of another orgasm. Lifting and bending my knees, I ran my hands up and down her back and started to thrust up into her, watching her face bloom with a gorgeous smile. “That’s it. Fuck me.” 

Her face hovered just above mine as I started to properly do as she’d asked, and the noises she started to make suggested she was about to cum again. I couldn’t help smile myself, and she knew why. “I thought it would hurt, but it’s wonderful...” 

“Glad you like it.” 

She certainly did, as when she started to squeeze my cock again, her orgasm imminent, I fucked her hard and fast, earning a rather delightful scream and quite the giggle, watching her face as she leaned down to kiss me hard as she started to cum. Her body writhed against mine, holding onto her as she shuddered from her feet to her shoulders. She surprised me by asking me to keep going, as she wanted me to cum too, and nowhere else but inside her. 

That wish was granted a couple of minutes later. Once I was done, she quite happily collapsed onto my chest, where we swapped a rather soft kiss before I wrapped my arms around her. “Well, I can see why you had so many lovers now,” she whispered. 

“You’re my first in Skyrim,” I admitted. 

She giggled. “Well, consider me honoured.” 

Once we’d recovered and cleaned up, we fucked again a little later, Ingun this time on her back, wanting nothing more than to be ‘fucked hard by your big dick, Ragnar.’ She got what she wanted, and considering she had worried about me hurting her to start off with, she absolutely loved it as I drove into her over and again, surprising me further by spreading her legs completely wide, holding then under her knees. We both made quite a lot of noise by then, and I’m sure whoever was upstairs would definitely have heard us. I figured I’d hear about it the next morning. 

Sharing a second orgasm, admittedly I came first and had to help Ingun to another climax with my fingers, we cleaned up and snuggled under the covers. As always, I happily held the woman I’d just been intimate with in my arms, and she asked if I’d like to do it again. I assured her I would, and I think that response made her happy. 

I woke up alone in the morning to see a note on the bedside table. It was from Ingun, letting me know she’d had a great time, but she had to go to work early. After dressing, any hope of sneaking out was ended when I had to pass through the dining room, and at the table sat Maven Black-Briar. 

“Shit,” I muttered, before I walked forward. “Good morning,” I stated cheerfully. 

“Enjoy yourself last night, young man?” 

“Your daughter was wonderful company, Miss Black-Briar.” 

“So you know who I am yet you still thought bedding my daughter was a good idea?” 

“She was just as willing as I was.” 

“I’ll warn you only the once, whoever you are. Come near my daughter again, or if I find you in this house again, not even tracking dogs will find your body. Understand?” 

“While I might understand your warning, what about what Ingun wants?” 

“I decide what Ingun wants, considering her head is in the clouds most of the time. Now, I suggest you piss off before I change my mind and deal with you now.” 

I’m not stupid and headed out without another word. Heading back to the Flagon, I ran into Brynjolf, who wondered where I’d been. When I freely confessed to who I’d bedded, the colour drained from his face. Delvin burst into laughter at the table nearby. “You fucked Ingun Black-Briar?” Brynjolf whispered. 

“I don’t see the big deal.” 

Brynjolf shook his head. “Maven is…” He trailed off and sighed. “You’ll find out soon enough. But I can assume she warned you off?” I nodded. “Heed that warning, Ragnar. Trust me on this.” 

“She’s a grown woman. She can decide…” 

“She’s a Black-Briar, Ragnar. And what Maven says goes. You won’t want to make this an issue. As I said, trust me.” He cleared his throat. “Right, now what about Goldenglow?” 

“You said Vex tried the job?” He nodded. “Well, I’ll see what she says, but do you think it’s a two-man job?” 

He shrugged. “It’s possible. If you want assistance, I don’t see a problem. It’s always good to have someone watching your back.” 

“What’s her skill?” 

“Lockpicking.” 

“I’m good with a pick, but I’m no master. If she’s that good, then that alone will be helpful.” 

“It’s up to you at the end of the day, Ragnar. But try not to take too long. There isn’t a time limit on the job, but the sooner it’s done, the happier the client.” 

I nodded my agreement. “Very well. I’ll get to work right away. Time to earn my place here.”

Chapter 3: In the Company of Thieves

Vex and I spent three days casing the Goldenglow estate, looking for any signs of weakness, learning patrol patterns, when there was a change in the guard, how many guards there were, were there any visitors, who they might be, anything and everything that would gain us an advantage and get us inside the building itself. 

In addition to the work, we actually spent time talking. She certainly kept her cards close, and prising anything out of her was like pulling teeth, but once she realised that I was honest about anything I told her, probably strange considering our line of work, she slowly but surely started to open up. “Don’t start getting any funny ideas, Ragnar. I’m in this job for the gold, not to make friends.” She then paused and looked me up and down. “However, I’m also a flesh and blood woman, and compared to most of the idiots who work for us, you appear to have some talent, and you’re rather handsome.” 

“Thanks.” 

“Don’t let it go to your head.” 

“But?” 

The shield cracked for a moment as she smiled. “Well, like any woman, I like to be fucked. Tell you what. We do this job clean, I might just be interested enough to give you what you clearly want.” 

“I don’t expect sex in… Actually, that’s a lie.” 

Now she properly laughed. “You’re serious?” 

Shrugging, I said, “I may have taken the opportunity for a good fuck session as payment for jobs while working for the Fighter’s Guild. Pissed off my old Guild Master when I returned with no coin but empty balls.” 

Returning to the Guild, Brynjolf showed interest in what we learned, Vex and I agreeing that we would hit Goldenglow the next evening. A good thief uses anything they can to their advantage, and darkness is a thief’s natural ally. 

The night before hitting Goldenglow, I headed up to the Bee and Barb for a good meal and a stiff drink. I’ll be honest in admitting it was due to a case of the nerves. The last big job I’d done in Cyrodiil ended with me critically injured and on death’s door. Vex and I knew what we would be walking into this time, but there was still lingering doubt in the back of my mind. 

Sitting at my already usual chair, I was joined by Haelga after I’d polished off my meal. She sat down without invitation, which didn’t bother me at all, gesturing for a couple of drinks for us. Once the tankards were placed down and my plate cleared away, I leaned forward a little. “I didn’t know if you’d ever approach me or not,” I admitted. 

“You left me rather intrigued, Ragnar. I’ve seen you wandering around town. Have you found yourself some work?” 

“I have. Keeps me occupied and out of trouble.” 

“Good to know.” She paused, before asking quietly, “And you weren’t leading me on about the Dibella worship?” 

I was surprised she moved onto that topic so quickly, so smiled as I said, “I’ll put it in words you’ll understand, Haelga. I love to fuck. And I love nothing better than bringing a woman to continuous orgasm.” 

She smiled in return. “It’s unusual to meet a man so blunt in his desires. So many beat around the bush or find themselves unable to speak about the subject, embarrassed about their natural desire for intimacy.” 

“And what do you desire, Haelga?” 

“A thick, hard cock filling all my holes.” 

“Play your cards right, and you might just get your wish.” 

“Not tonight?” she asked, pouting a little bit. 

“I have important work tomorrow, and while you would be a delightful distraction, I must be focused.” 

She surprised me by leaning across and kissing me. A soft kiss, but one that promised a lot more, running a hand down my cheek for good measure. “Well, I’ll just have to make do with my fingers tonight then,” she whispered. 

“You’re quite blunt yourself.” 

“My sexuality is nothing to be ashamed of.” 

“Absolutely. I like a woman who knows what she wants.” 

“Sure I can’t convince you?” 

“Part of me wants to. But good things come to those who wait, Haelga. But if you’re seriously interested in me, I can admit that interest is returned.” 

“Deadly serious.” 

We shared a couple of tankards, and we actually got to know each other a little bit. I was saddened to learn she was a widower, only married to her husband for a year before he passed. She’d been a widower for five years, and freely admitted to having bedded a number of men, though added many were only the once as she was still looking for the one to satisfy her cravings. Other than that, she happily ran the Bunkhouse, finding enjoyment in providing the working man with a safe place to eat, relax and sleep. I told her about most of my history, and figured as she’d been so honest, I was just as honest, including why I’d been run out of Cyrodiil. She found that rather amusing, but didn’t find the fact I had a harem of lovers unsurprising at all. 

Staying late enough for us to be kicked out when the bar closed for the night, I escorted her the short walk back to her front door. I think she was hoping I would change my mind, and while I wanted to go inside and fuck her brains out, I actually wanted to wait. So we shared quite the kiss on her doorstep, my hands wandering her body, particularly getting a nice feel of her arse. “I spend all day on my feet, Ragnar,” she whispered, “Toned arse and legs.” 

“Guess they’ll feel fantastic around my waist.” 

“Particularly if you’re in my arse.” She paused before asking, “Does that shock you?” 

“I’ve done it before, so no, it doesn’t.” 

“I love it, Ragnar. Almost as much as I love a big cock in my cunt.” She paused before asking, “Can I have a quick feel?” 

I nodded and she slid a hand down my trousers. Considering the topic of conversation most of the night and the kiss we just shared, I was nursing a semi, so she got a good indication of what I had between my legs. When her eyes met mine, I couldn’t help chuckle. “I think that should satisfy you, Haelga.” 

She kissed me hard, her hand still down my trousers. I eventually had her pressed against the door, and it was only through sheer willpower that I finally pulled away. “When, Ragnar?” she almost pleaded. 

“If I’m not busy, the night after tomorrow.” 

“Okay.” She kissed me again, a soft one that again promised more, before she opened the door, wished me goodnight, and disappeared. 

I’ll admit it. I liked her already. A woman who freely admitted that she loved to fuck without feeling ashamed? She was right up my alley. And I think she might have a few kinks worth exploring. 

Returning to the Flagon, the place was empty so I walked through to the cistern, to see only a couple of the other still awake. Vex was asleep, so no doubt she was relaxed about the next evening. I just headed to my own bed, kicked off my boots, undressed, jerked off (which I desperately needed to do!) and went to sleep. 

Vex and I stuck to the Flagon the next day, though we made sure that no alcohol was consumed. Brynjolf not so subtly suggested that my previous evening companion had been noted, but he didn’t make a big deal of it, simply warning me to be careful, considering she had been a mark. I assured him I wouldn’t mix business with pleasure. 

Waiting until night was starting to fall, Vex used the secret exit through the cistern and stuck to the shadows as we made our way to the front gate. It was only a twenty minute walk to the estate, though the sewer grate we needed required a quick swim across the lake. We made it there without being noticed and slid inside to find nothing but darkness. Vex knew a little magic, surprising considering she was a Nord, and summoned a flame spell to provide a little light, though we found a torch quickly enough so we could use that to make our way forward. 

Exiting the sewer, we were near the back entrance, and Vex got to work. She broke more than one pick, suggesting it was a tough bastard, but she eventually managed to get it open. Thankfully we knew the layout so took the lead, though we were both now armed. The rule was that the main target shouldn’t be harmed, but the mercenaries were fair game. 

Sneaking would always be the better option, but the hallways provided next to no cover, and we eventually had to get physical. Vex was diminutive, particularly compared to someone of my size, but she was bloody fast with her dual daggers. The noise drew the attention of other mercenaries, and we were soon working back to back. The narrow hallways worked to our advantage, and we managed to take down five of the mercenaries without taking too many wounds ourselves. 

“Shit, we’d better find Aringoth and get out of here,” she muttered. 

“Don’t forget we need to do the hives too.” 

“We’ll do that last.” 

Making our way upstairs, I took the lead and met the mercenaries waiting for us head on. The first one met my sword with barely a block returned. The second one was a little more talented, while Vex watched my back as a third tried to take me from behind. This was no time for a draw out battle, and I had no problem fighting dirty, putting a boot into his knee. That caused him to crumple and I put my sword through his throat. The fourth mercenary barely had any fight left in him, but I wasn’t about to let him run and get help, though I did feel maybe just a teeny tiny bit sorry for him as I ran a sword through his gut. 

Finding Aringoth cowering in his bedroom, it didn’t take much for him to come clean once he realised it was both Vex and I. He didn’t know me, but he knew Vex well enough. Crouching down near him, I said, “You know who sent us. You know who we work for. So I will ask only the once. Give us what we want, and we’ll leave you alive.” 

“You don’t work like that,” he muttered. 

I glanced back at Vex. “I don’t think Maven Black-Briar will care whether you live or die after this little stunt,” she stated. 

“Your choice, Aringoth. Give us the key and what we want, and we’ll at least give you the chance of escaping with your life.” 

He obviously didn’t want to die, and figured taking his chance afterwards was better than trying to fight both of us. His hand was shaking as he handed over the key, though he was incapable of giving any more information about who had set everything up. All I was left thinking is that he was more terrified of them than us. 

With a last suggestion for Aringoth to leave Riften, and do it quickly, lest Maven send others to deal with him instead, Vex and I headed downstairs. There were more mercenaries in the basement, and despite our pleas about what happened upstairs, they were idiots and decided to fight us. I wasn’t used to working without a shield, but found I could easily take on two at a time, the speed of my blade catching them unawares. Neither had a lot of talent, leaving me wondering what sort of mercenaries Aringoth had hired. Vex helped take out the third as I near enough took out my two at once. 

The safe wasn’t exactly a treasure trove, but we swiped the gold and picked up a piece of paper. I handed it to Vex, who I figured would know a little bit more, as I made sure I emptied the room, finding more gold a nearby chest. 

“What a fucking idiot!” she exclaimed. 

“What?” 

“Oh, Aringoth, what have you done?” she questioned herself before looking at me. “We’d better get back to Brynjolf. He’ll want to see this.” 

Thankfully we didn’t have to go back through the manor, finding a secret exit that took us back into the sewer and out the way we had arrived. Following the shore, we found a small bridge back to the mainland, helping hoist Vex up onto it before I managed to clamber up, and under the cover of darkness, clouds covering the moon, we quickly took care of the hives as requested before carefully making our way back to Riften. 

“Ragnar, wait,” Vex called once we were away from the major. I turned to look at her, just able to see her face in the darkness. “Thanks.” 

“For what?” 

“I’ll be honest. You kept me alive just then. If I’d done this job alone as originally intended, I’d be dead. Those mercs didn’t fuck around.” 

“No worries. Just doing my job.” 

“You’re good with a blade. You fought with the Fighter’s Guild, right?” 

“Aye.” 

“Look, as I said, I don’t mix business with pleasure, but I’ll admit, watching you fight was mesmerising, and it’s had me thinking since. About pleasure instead of business. But I’ll put it bluntly. I’m not fucking you in the Flagon or cistern. I think we can both admit it’s disgusting down there, and there’s also no privacy.” 

“The inn?” 

“I’d rather not go in there. Look, you’ve got my interest, but I’ll leave it at that for now.” 

“Okay. It’s always nice to know where I stand at least.” 

It didn’t take long to return to the Guild, using the secret entrance I’d been shown located in the graveyard, which was much quicker than heading through the Ratway each time, though I’d been warned by Brynjolf to only use it when it was dark. 

Everyone was asleep upon entering the cistern, so Vex and I agreed to have a quick nap and hand the information over the next morning. It had been a rather long day, so once I’d kicked off my boots, I collapsed back onto my bed and practically fell straight to sleep. 

---

“Aringoth sold Goldenglow? What's that idiot thinking? He has no idea the extent of Maven's fury when she's been cut out of a deal, but I'm certain he'll find out. If only the parchment had the buyer's name instead of this odd symbol. Any idea what that may be?” 

Vex and I swapped a glance and shrugged. “Never seen it before,” I replied. Vex added her own thoughts, none particularly helpful but rather amusing. 

“I'll check my sources and ask Mercer. Good job, the pair of you. You made a good team.” 

“Thanks,” we stated in unison. 

“No major jobs for the moment, either of you, but keep your ears open. There’s always the next big score.” 

Remembering the promise I’d made to Haelga, I hung around Riften the next couple of days. I didn’t go on a crime spree around Riften. There were a few rules I remembered while working for the Guild in Cyrodiil. One main rule was that you didn’t steal from the unfortunate and the poor. I wouldn’t say we were idealists, we were still thieves, but we would make sure those less fortunate than even us were taken care of. Those homeless you see wandering the streets generally have our protection. Fuck with one of them and you’d have the Guild on your tail. 

Taking my usual chair in the Bee and Barb the night I’d stated, it was no surprise Haelga wandered in a few minutes later, immediately taking the spare chair at my table. After ordering us a pair of drinks, we made polite conversation, but we both knew what we were there for. Just seeing her had me nursing a slowly growing erection. By the time we entered her bedroom, I’d probably already be rock hard. 

“Want to get out of here?” she asked once we finished the first tankard. 

I don’t think either of us had moved so fast in our lives. I’m sure plenty noticed, but I certainly didn’t care. Once inside her bunkhouse, she led me by the hand upstairs. The second floor was where those who resided in the bunkhouse slept, as I was led up another set of steps. “I call it the penthouse,” she explained. 

It was quite a nice room. A large window looked over Riften. The room was tastefully decorated, though there were hints of her Dibella worship in everything. The statue took pride of place on the mantelpiece. Closing the door, she slowly walked towards me, eventually resting her hands on my chest, looking up at me. She was a good four to five inches shorter than I was. 

“Have you been thinking about me?” she wondered. 

“I have.” 

“Good thoughts?” 

“Of course. If our kiss was a sign of things to come…” 

The first kiss that evening was a surprise, soft and tender though our hands were all over the other, pulling her tight to my body and growling into her mouth, causing her to break it and giggle. “My, you are strong, Ragnar,” she said softly, running her hands up my back and down my arms, “How old are you, if I may ask?” 

“Twenty-one.” That made her chuckle. “What?” 

“It’s been a long time since I made love to or fucked someone so young.” 

“Why, how… Ah, I know enough not to ask.” 

“I’m twenty-eight, Ragnar. You know I was married, and that was five years ago, so I’m obviously older. And most of the men I’ve been with since were actually older than me.” She surprised me by resting her head on my chest, cuddling into me. “I’m actually a little surprised.” 

“Why?” 

“Men your age generally don’t look at women like me.” 

“Well, those men are obviously idiots.” 

To prove how much I actually wanted to be there, I took the lead and spent a long time undressing her. Each piece of skin was touched by either fingers or my lips, ensuring I spent plenty of time kissing her regardless. She only wore a simple dress, and once I had her down to her bra and panties, she didn’t turn shy, instead wondering what I thought, the first hint of nerves. I just held her close again and kissed her, no doubt feeling my erection pressed against her. “What does that tell you?” 

I’ve never seen a woman drop to her knees as quickly as she did, her hands fumbling with my belt and trousers in her desperation to release my cock. Why she did that, I shrugged off my coat and shirt, throwing those away. Once she had my cock free, I managed to kick off my boots and everything else as she stroked my cock, and once I was naked, she wasted no time trying to swallow my length. Running a hand through her hair, she only looked up at me with those pretty eyes of hers, and I couldn’t help watch as she slowly but surely managed to swallow my length. 

Hand on heart, she was the best cocksucker I’d had up until that moment in my life. I’m not exactly sure what she was doing, but it felt awesome, and I knew I wasn’t going to last too long. I needed a distraction and I also wanted to return the favour. 

“I want to taste you too, Haelga.” 

My cock popped out of her mouth and she stood up, allowing me to remove her bra, revealing her breasts. They were around a handful, and I had large hands, so I knew I’d enjoy them. Helping remove her panties, I wasn’t surprised to see her pussy was bald, putting my nose to her groin and inhaling her scent. That just made her giggle. “Like it?” she wondered. I just licked my lips, earning another laugh, with a playful slap on the shoulder. 

Grabbing her hand, I laid back on the bed as she fell down on top of me, and we made out for a little while again. She eventually turned around and swallowed my cock without hesitation, so I ran my tongue along her slit, tasting her for the first time, before I started to tease her in return. That distracted her from her cocksucking just enough, so I knew I’d last just a little longer. 

But, as I said, she was brilliant, and despite my best efforts to please her at the same time, desperate to continuously taste her, I eventually had to stop as I found myself gently thrusting into her mouth. Though I couldn’t concentrate on eating her out, I could slip a couple of fingers inside her, and she certainly enjoyed that, fucking my fingers in return as she continued to suck my dick. 

She stopped only for a moment to say, “You’re going to finish in my mouth, Ragnar.” 

Like I was going to disagree to that. I gave her rather firm arse a good slap, which made her squeal as she blew me. I eventually had to remove my fingers, ensuring I enjoyed her taste, as I simply focused on what her mouth and tongue was doing to my cock. “Haelga,” I breathed. 

Grabbing her body, I soon started to thrust a little harder into her mouth. I felt her lips tighter around my cock, as if she knew what was going to happen. I groaned again as I felt my orgasm approach, doing my best not to just start fucking her face. She seemed to enjoy sucking my cock, and as it was only her first time doing it, I’d like her to do it again. 

“Haelga,” I said a little louder, and I’m sure my eruption into her mouth didn’t actually catch her by surprise. She took the load well, and didn’t spill a drop. By the Eight, I swear I must have felt six pumps into her mouth, but she was greedy for my cum, and happily swallowed the lot, feeling her start to immediately clean me up with her tongue. My cock was rather sensitive, but she couldn’t get enough. 

Resting back on the bed, she swung herself around, feeling the heat of her sex on my groin as she rested her head just above mine. “Well, I can say I’ll happily do that again, Ragnar.” 

“Like it?” 

“You must have a good diet. Most men don’t taste that good. I’ve spat out more often than I’ve swallowed.” I couldn’t help chuckle as she was nothing but honest. Running a hand down her cheek, she closed her eyes and smiled, running it up and through her hair, dragging her down for a soft kiss. “Well, I think it’s clear I really like you already, Ragnar. And you haven’t properly eaten my pussy yet.” 

“I think that situation needs to be rectified immediately. Want to sit on my face?” 

The smile that broadened across her face was incredibly sweet, and I think the suggestion made her day. Sliding down the bed so my entire body was flat, she walked on her knees until hovering above my face, teasing me by lowering her pussy to me before raising herself up. “Beg for it,” she said. 

“Please!” 

“How much do you want my pussy?” 

“Like you wouldn’t believe, Haelga.” 

“Do you want to fuck my pussy?” 

“Afterwards.” 

“And my arse?” 

“Definitely.” 

“Will you tie me up and dominate me?” 

That caused a moment of pause. “You’re serious?” 

“I just want to know what you’re capable of. So, would you be willing to do that?” 

“Honestly, Haelga, I’ll do anything you want… Bar a couple of things which I’d hope we both find disgusting.” 

That made her laugh as she lowered her pussy to my mouth. I think she was rather turned on, as although she was soaking wet, and I thoroughly enjoyed her taste, as I was left thinking she was going to climax rather quickly. I could watch her body as I ate her out, and I think she put on a slight show for me, running her hands up her soft stomach to her breasts, giving them a nice squeeze and pinching her nipples, looking down at me with eyes that spoke volumes about what I was doing to her. 

“You’re good,” she breathed. 

I would have said thanks, but I was concentrating on teasing her entrance as she started to grind on my face, covering my mouth and chin in her juices. She was definitely loving my attention to detail, but quickly asked for me to focus on her clit. Teasing her there, she grabbed my hands to hold her in place, suggesting she would fall off when she climaxed. Doing that kept her in place, and I forced her down on my mouth even more. 

“Someone’s eager.” 

I muffled something about wanting to make her cum on my face, but that only made her laugh, as she could barely understand me. By now she was just watching me, and my eyes were only for her, feeling her body continued to grind on my face. When her eyes closed and she shuddered, I knew she was getting close. I was now totally focused on her clit. 

“Harder… faster… Make it big…” 

Some women I’d been with couldn’t take that sort of treatment, being too sensitive. Maybe she was sensitive but could handle it, wanting the feelings that it gave her. Good news for me if I gave her good orgasms. Leaning down slightly, she grabbed a handful of my hair as I held onto her tight, listening to her breathing and moans, knowing she was getting closer. “So close,” she breathed, “Oh, Ragnar…” 

When she came, it was spectacular. She was very noisy. Her language was filthy, which I absolutely loved. Tell me what you’re really thinking. She flowed and I swallowed what she gave me, continuing to grind against my face as she near collapsed forward, only held in place by my strong hands, as she called them. 

Lifting herself off my face, she manoeuvred back down my body so we were face to face. She had a giggle, as no doubt my mouth, nose and chin were now soaking. I could feel my beard was rather wet, though that didn’t stop her kissing me. “Hmmm, I taste good, don’t I?” 

“I’ll want to taste you again and again.” 

Leaning down to my ear, she whispered, “I love my taste as well. I love putting a couple of fingers in my mouth after they’ve been in my cunt.” 

I couldn’t help chuckle at her honesty as I wrapped my arms around her, running a hand up and down her back. We took a few minutes to relax, though I was already rock hard again. She no doubt felt it, but no doubt wanted to wait at least a little while too. “Ragnar, a question.” 

“Hmmm.” 

“Will you be wanting other girls? I merely ask because you’ve been honest about your life before.” 

“And I’ll continue to be honest with you. I like variety.” 

“Okay. What about in the future?” 

I could only shrug before replying, “I’m not sure. I don’t think that far ahead. I think of the here and now, and maybe what I’ll be doing in a week.” I paused before asking, “Why do you ask?” 

She lifted her head to meet my eyes. “I’ll be honest already. I’ve found what I’ve been looking for in those other men.” I definitely blushed as she kissed me softly on the lips. “But I am not asking you to commit or anything like that. I think we should agree right now that as long as we’re honest, this will work going forward. We clearly like each other, and I know I’m going to love fucking you, and vice versa I hope, so as I said, honesty is important.” 

“I can agree to that,” I stated, before kissing her, “And I like you a lot already too.” 

She kissed me hard for that and rolled me over so I was on top of her, and I slid inside her with little ceremony. I took my time inserting my full length, but once I filled her, she placed her little feet on the small of my back and begged for me to fuck her. 

That’s what she got, and the headboard was soon banging against the wall, and she was screaming or moaning rather loudly. I’m fairly sure we would have woken the others downstairs, though as I was busy giving it to her, I didn’t really care about that. I just wanted to fuck her, cum inside her, and hope she’d cum too. 

Wrapping her arms around my neck, she begged for me to keep fucking her. “Your cock is marvellous, Ragnar.” 

“And your pussy is nothing but warm, wet and tight, Haelga.” That made her blush for a moment. I think it was just the fact I so readily complimented her. “What?” I wondered. 

“Most men are usually so quiet.” 

“I will always let you know what I think or feel. And your pussy, Haelga, is fantastic. I can’t wait to cum inside you.” 

“Oh gods!” she exclaimed, kissing me hard before dragging my head down beside hers. In that position, I could give her a proper pounding while listening to her breathing and moaning, feeling her shuffle her body slightly, moaning again. “So deep. So good,” she muttered. 

I growled something as I was now doing nothing but pumping into her. She suggested I was hitting the right spots, which pleased me, wrapping my arms up and under her body to her tight, she did the same around my back. We were both now bathed in sweat, her legs now as tight around me as possible. 

“Fuck me, Ragnar. Fuck me as hard as you can.” 

What did she think I was trying to do?! But I tried to fuck her even harder. I was now worried we’d break the bed, or smash the headboard through the wall. I lifted my head to look at her, and we kissed, one so passionate, it made me feel a little funny as I fucked her. 

“I’m close,” I whispered. 

“It’s okay. I want to feel you cum inside me, Ragnar. Please…” 

The desperation in her voice was actually rather sweet, so I just focused on her face as I felt my orgasm approach. I would have liked to hold it back for a while longer to ensure she climaxed too, but I honestly think she just wanted me to finish inside her. I warned her one last time, but all she did was shuffle a little more, tighten her legs around me, and told me to make her mine. 

I’m not sure what it was, but the orgasm I had while inside her was one of the best of my life to that point, probably to the equal of the very first one I had with Ariel all those years ago. I buried myself deep in her pussy as I blasted, my head on the pillow beside hers as I groaned and swore rather loudly, feeling hers legs tight around my waist, her arms around my back, holding her just as tight before I finally relaxed. 

“Holy shit!” I managed to state once I’d regained my senses. 

Lifting my head, Haelga had the broadest grin possible, running a hand down my cheek, enjoying the feel of my trimmed beard. “Definitely a keeper. You’re a stallion, Ragnar.” 

I was surprised I was still rather hard, and she made no motion to unwrap her legs as I lifted my body slightly. Looking down, we were bathed in sweat, nothing unusual in that, the moonlight causing it to glisten on her body. “You really find me attractive?” She sounded so unsure in that moment, it actually hurt my heart a little. Meeting her eyes again, she searched mine in return. “So many judge me, Ragnar, yet they know nothing about me. They call me names behind my back. I know they do.” 

Grabbing a towel, I slid out of her, lying down next to her on my side. She turned to face me as I wrapped an arm around her again, our legs in between each the other. “I’ve done things I’m not proud of Ragnar. I can admit that. Things I should probably be ashamed of. But I felt… forced into them. Not by men, if that’s what you’re thinking. More a case of ‘fuck you’ to certain people.” 

Lifting her chin with a finger, I smiled at her. “I’m not one to judge anyone, Haelga. I mean, I was run out Cyrodiil by a pack of jealous husbands for bedding their wives. As for anyone who judges you for your lifestyle, I have two words for you. Fuck them.” 

The look of worry on her face was immediately replaced by a smile. “Will you visit me often?” she asked eagerly. 

“Yes. I can’t promise all the time, because I might end up working around Skyrim…” 

“I know what you’re doing.” My face fell, and that just made her laugh. “I should sit here, judge and hate you for it. Make me one promise?” I nodded. “Don’t thieve from people in Riften. Most of us don’t have a lot. Do what you must, but as long as you don’t do it here, I’ll live and let live.” 

I grabbed both her hands, kissing them as I gave her my word. Being a Nord, giving ones’ word was a bond that shouldn’t be broken. I’d strive to keep my word to her. 

Being rather young, and still quite hard, all she needed to do was give me a gentle stroke and I was soon at full mast again, this time being rolled onto my back as she climbed on board. Suggesting she was going to climax rather quickly, I happily watch her bounce on my cock, delighted to hear all her compliments, and rather eager to return them. Her body was fantastic. Her breasts were delightful. Her stomach soft but flat. Her legs were long and toned, as was her pert little arse. Did I find her attractive? I could understand the question, everyone felt unsure about themselves at times, but she made me rock hard, and I knew I’d want to fuck her constantly. 

Her first climax wasn’t long in arriving, watching her shake and shudder and she continued to ride on through. Taking a deep breath and smiling, she simply bounced harder and faster, adamant she wanted another one. Quite frankly, she could ride my cock all night and have as many as she wanted. She was my Nord goddess. 

After a second orgasm, she finally had to lie down on my chest, and I think our passions for one another were finally sated for the evening. I felt no urge to cum again, and once I slid my cock out of her, it slowly deflated as she slid off me onto the bed, turning to face me. She enjoyed running a hand through my beard, her eyes searching mine in the moonlight through the window. I wrapped an arm around her and pulled her close, her head resting under my chin, and it didn’t take long for either of us to fall asleep. 

Waking the next morning, we enjoyed a little make out session, before she asked me to go, but only because she had to work. I didn’t mind, so quickly dressed as she threw on a dressing gown that barely covered her arse, but showed off those fantastic legs she had. Walking me as far as her bedroom door, we kissed a last time, holding her close to my body, and I think we were both thinking of having a last fuck, before she broke the kiss, placed to hands on my chest and said, “Go!” It was stated with a smile, so she was definitely thinking the same thing as me. 

Heading out into Riften, the sun was hidden by clouds, and it was a cool day. I found myself whistling away as I walked towards the secret entrance, checking I wasn’t noticed, before I climbed down to the cistern. Most people were already up and about, and I joined them for breakfast. 

“Where were you last night?” Cynric asked. 

“With a friend.” 

There were plenty of sniggers around the table. I ignored them as I chewed on a piece of bread. “Who, if I may ask?” Rune wondered. 

“Haelga.” 

“Fuck off!” Thrynn exclaimed, “She’s…” 

“Delightful company,” I stated, interrupting whatever he was going to say. I looked around the table, meeting the eyes of everyone, male and female alike. I guess I was already a little intimidating, as they all nodded silently. “Anyway, what I do with my free time is my business. And it will remain so as long as it doesn’t affect the Guild.” 

I finished breakfast and listened into the conversation, and the topic was simply one of how badly the Guild was doing. The job Vex and I had pulled certainly had tongue’s wagging, but while it had been a success, and gained the Guild (and ourselves) some gold, it was a drop in the ocean compared to the so-called glory days. I was left thinking the Guild had completely collapsed across Skyrim. 

Brynjolf came looking for me, and he appeared rather shocked at what he was about to tell me. Standing away from everyone else for privacy, he said, “I don’t believe this, but we’ve had contact from an old friend in Windhelm.” 

“Why do you look so surprised?” 

“Because we’ve had no allies outside of Riften for years. That’s how badly all this has gone. Look, Vex is currently occupied with another job, so I would like you to do this. You’ve made a name for yourself with the Goldenglow job, and Mercer wants you to make contact with this friend in Windhelm. Talk to Delvin, he has all the details you’ll need.” 

Delvin told me that I was to get in touch with a man named Torsten Cruel-Sea, who had once been a close ally of the Guild in Windhelm until their influence slowly ebbed away. He was surprised to receive a letter so quickly, though he put that down to Maven Black-Briar no doubt spreading word about the successful hit on Goldenglow. As for transport, the Guild kept no horses, so he suggested I travel by carriage. “Far safer than walking,” he admitted, “Even a carriage will take all day. And I’d suggest you wrap up warm. Windhelm is far to the north.” 

“When should I go?” 

“Immediately if you can. If we can start to spread influence in Ulfric’s capital…” 

“Let me grab a coat, a few supplies, and I’ll head out now.” 

“Good luck, Ragnar. And come back with good news for once.” 

Grabbing the coat I’d worn while crossing the mountains into Skyrim, I took a few lockpicks, as they would always come in handy, my sword and shield, just in case I found myself in a fight, and headed out. Thankfully there was a carriage waiting at the main gates, and after giving him a few coins, I climbed on board and we headed out. 

I can honestly say the Rift was a beautiful part of Skyrim. It felt incredibly peaceful, and almost cut off from the rest of Skyrim. We passed a number of small villages, the carriage driver keeping a running commentary of sights as we passed by. The further north we headed, the more the landscape changed, particularly as we passed through Eastmarch, and the natural hot springs that looked absolutely stunning. After a few hours, the weather cooled and though I was a Nord, even I needed to eventually throw on my coat. By the time we reached the outskirts of Windhelm, grass and trees had been replaced by a barren snowbound landscape, pure white snow as far as we could see. 

The carriage driver stopped at the end of the bridge leading over to Windhelm itself. It was now rather dark, the temperature having dropped even further, enough that I immediately headed straight for the first inn I could find. Not before I needed to step in to help a woman though… 

One thing I really hate is bullies, particularly two brutish, drunk bullies, who were intimidating a dark elf woman. They both towered over her, jabbing a finger in her direction. 

“You come here where you're not wanted, you eat our food, you pollute our city with your stink and you refuse to help the Stormcloaks.” 

“But we haven't taken a side because it's not our fight,” the woman retorted, obviously frustrated. I wondered how often she’d had this argument with locals. I knew nothing about Windhelm though. 

“Hey, maybe the reason these grey-skins don't help in the war is because they're Imperial spies!” the other man exclaimed. 

“Imperial spies? You can't be serious!” 

“Maybe we'll pay you a visit tonight, little spy. We got ways of finding out what you really are,” the first man threatened. 

I normally don’t get involved in such matters, but that’s where I stepped in, pushing the second man first, then the man who made the threat. “That’s enough, the pair of you.” 

I was pleased to stand taller than both of them, but they looked ready to start swinging, noticing their balled fists at their sides. “You some sort of dark elf lover?” the first asked. 

“I prefer them to ignorant fucks such as yourself.” 

Probably the wrong thing to say as the second man took a swing. But he was drunk, and I saw it coming, immediately stepping out of the way and putting a fist into his stomach. He fell to the ground, moaning about me hitting him, as the first man squared up to me. He was also drunk, but appeared to at least be clear minded enough not to telegraph a punch. “This is our city. Ours! Don't think I can take you?” 

I beckoned him forward, dodging his first two swings, before he threw a third that put him off balance. A couple of punches to the body had him down on one knee. “Apologise. Now!” I demanded. 

“Fuck you.” 

I put a knee into his face and put him on his back, His face now covered in blood, no doubt a broken nose, I picked him up by the collar. “I won’t ask again. Apologise to the lady right now.” 

He met my eyes, and though still drunk, I could see fear. I bet no-on had ever stood up to him before. He then looked to my right, his left. “I’m sorry,” he mumbled. 

“She didn’t hear you. Louder!” I said, balling my fist. 

“I’m sorry!” he cried. 

“Better. Now, piss off, the pair of you.” 

I stood back and gave the one still on his hands and knees a kick up the arse. He picked up his friend and the two staggered away, smart enough not to say anything as they disappeared. Turning back to the elven woman, she looked rather surprised by it all. “Never though a Nord would step in to defend someone like me.” She looked me up and down. “First time in Windhelm, I take it?” 

“Aye. Is everyone like that?” 

“Thankfully, no. But Rolff and Argrenor do like to get drunk and hurl abuse.” She smiled and held out a hand. “Suvaris Atheron. Pleasure.” 

“Ragnar. I’m actually here from Riften.” 

“And what brings you to Windhelm?” 

“Work, but it’s rather late, so I was just going to find a place to sleep.” 

“Try Candlehearth Hall. Come, I’ll escort you.” 

As we walked together, she told me a little of the problems the Dunmer were having. They had been invited into Windhelm after her people had fled their homeland, but they had been treated badly since arriving. They lived in what was basically a slum area, and apparently Ulfric did not lift a finger to at least try and alleviate some of their problems. It was rather depressing. I thought my people would be better than that. I thought all Nords at least had some sort of honour. Might sound funny saying that, considering I was a thief, but as I’d told Brynjolf, honour among thieves. 

Suvaris thanked me for stepping in to help her, suggesting that maybe they’d have a peaceful night for once. Leaving me to enter the inn alone, I quickly grabbed a spare room, had an ale and a meal, and asked a few questions about what was happening in Windhelm. Most spoke of the civil war taking place and the stalemate currently between the Stormcloaks and Empire. Asking after Torsten Cruel-Sea, I was given directions to his house, and I decided I’d go there first thing in the morning. 

I didn’t go to bed alone. While enjoying my second drink, I found myself talking to and eventually flirting with a rather attractive woman named Susanna. If I thought Haelga was rather upfront about what she liked, Susanna was something else entirely, quickly suggesting she found me rather handsome among other things. We must have talked no longer than half an hour before she invited herself up to my room, stating she just wanted a good hard fuck before going home. 

I was left wondering if she was a working girl once I’d emptied myself inside her and she immediately got up and dressed. Instead, all she did was kiss me, thank me for a good time, then headed out the door. I couldn’t help laugh to myself as I slowly drifted off to sleep.

Chapter 4: Friends and Rivals

It was bitterly cold the next morning. In addition to the wind, the snowfall was almost blinding, but at least that covered the icy ground underfoot. Despite the early hour and drop in temperature, Windhelm was already busy, walking past a market with merchants already busy selling their wares and produce, the blacksmith at his forge, the clang of his hammer on new steel. The city was alive. 

Knocking on the door of the Cruel-Sea residence, it was opened by a young man I knew not to be Torsten. So I asked after his father. Asked who was calling, I merely stated, “A friend.” 

Torsten appeared seconds later, motioning me away from the front door as he followed me. “I didn’t realise you would come so soon.” 

“The Guild is trying to get back on its feet. First impressions matter.” He nodded his understanding. “So, how can the Guild assist?” 

He asked me to wait, grabbing a coat from inside, and we walked back towards the inn I’d stayed in. Grabbing an early drink and heading upstairs, we sat at a table in the corner before he started to explain. “How long have you been with our friends?” 

“Not long.” 

“There was a time when the Guild stretched across Skyrim, always influential. But something has gone wrong, and slowly but surely, the Guild has ebbed away to its current position. But word about Goldenglow was spread far and wide, no doubt by Maven Black-Briar as a statement, and I thought I should send word.” 

“Delvin suggested you needed our help.” 

“Aye, I do,” he said sadly, “My daughter, Fjotli… She was…” 

“I understand,” I said softly. 

“I got the bastard who did it, but that’s not the whole story. Not at all. Not only did they kill her, they stole a silver locket from her body that meant everything to her, and means everything to her family. I want that back. Before I killed the bastard responsible, he gave me a name. Niranye. She runs a stall in the marketplace.” 

All this for a locket? There must be more. “Is that it?” 

“No, the locket is only a minor part. Because the Guild has lost so much influence, new groups have sprung up, trying to gain a foothold. There is a new group working around Windhelm, trying to spread across Skyrim. They call themselves the Summerset Shadows.” 

“Summerset? They’re elves?” 

Torsten shrugged. “It’s possible they originate from there, or they all themselves to invoke fear in Nords. But they do not operate with the honour of your Guild. They must be eliminated. Do that, and you will have a trusted friend in Windhelm again.” 

“Where are the Shadows based?” 

“That I don’t know. Maybe Niranye will be able to tell you.” 

“Anything else?” 

“No, that’s about it. But if you can get me that locket back, I would be forever grateful.” 

“I’ll do what I can.” 

He finished his tankard, nodded his head and departed. We wouldn’t speak until the contract was now complete. I took my time finishing my own tankard, considering it was rather early, and being sat in the corner and mostly ignored, I listened into conversations taking place around me, hoping to learn a few things. Apparently there was a series of murders taking place around Windhelm that nobody could solve. Pirate attacks had increased, apparently due to both the Stormcloaks and Empire being distracted by the civil war. And an alchemist who lived in the city was apparently at death’s door. 

All interesting to hear, but nothing I could currently assist with, and I headed out to the marketplace. Asking one of the guards who Niranye was, I was pointed in the direction of an Altmer, a real surprise to see a high elf in Windhelm, considering I’d learn of Ulfric’s disdain for the elven people, particularly after the Great War. 

Sometimes I could be subtle. Sometime I found being direct put people off more. Approaching her stall, I looked at her wares as she asked, “Help you with something?” 

I returned my easiest smile as I replied, “Yes, I’m here about Fjotli.” 

She might be a thief, but her act was embarrassing. All it took was for me to take the dagger from where I kept it hidden, laying it down, keeping a hand on its hilt. “Look, I don’t have time for bullshit, Niranye. So, I’m going to ask a couple of questions and you will answer them.” 

“What about the guards?”

“I can be rather believable when I want to be. And considering you’re an elf in a Nord city, who do you think they’ll believe?” I didn’t like playing that card 

She noticeably blanched at the threat, knowing what I said was true. I’d learned enough in my short time in Skyrim to know elves were rather disliked in the Empire due to the actions of the Thalmor, so I’d use that to my advantage if I could. She raised both hands defensively. “Okay, okay, let’s not do anything hasty.” 

“Look, I don’t like making threats, but I have been asked for help. A girl murdered, a father heartbroken, an heirloom stolen. Tell me what I need to know, and you probably won’t see me again.” 

I removed the dagger, hiding it again, but the fear remained on her face. She turned to another merchant and asked them to cover for her, asking me to them follow her home. Once inside, she offered me a seat at the table and started to explain. The Summerset Shadows name I already knew, but she gave me the name of their leader, Linwe. But that wasn’t all. 

“He's the worst of the lot. He steals valuables from the dead.” 

“So he murders his marks?” 

“No! Linwe prefers stealing from the deceased. Digs up the corpses, breaks into the Hall of the Dead. He even stole that locket right off that poor murdered girl's body... or what was left of it.” 

“Fjotli?” She nodded. “So how in oblivion did you get mixed up in all of this?” 

She sighed, shaking her head. “I used to fence for the Thieves Guild in Skyrim a long time ago. When Linwe moved into the area, he contacted me and said if I didn't fence for them, he'd kill me.” 

“Tell me where they are, and I’ll ensure he won’t be a problem.” 

“And you won’t kill me?” 

“No. You know that’s not how we operate. But we could use a fence in Windhelm in the future.” 

She nodded. “Linwe is holed up at a place called Uttering Hills Cave. He's got his entire Guild there, so be careful.” 

“What do you know about Fjotli?” 

She shrugged. “I don't know. Rumour has it that she was murdered, butchered by a madman. Torsten might think Linwe or myself are responsible for Fjotli's death, but I can assure you nothing could be further from the truth.” 

I nodded, stating I believed her, and she sighed with relief, perhaps thinking I’d do something if she admitted being involved. The last question I asked was in regards to direction, stating I head out the main gates, to right, then head into the mountains. I’d know I was close when I ran into guards. 

Figuring there was little point in delaying, I grabbed my weapons from the room I’d kept at the inn, and headed out. It was still bitterly cold, but the snow had stopped falling, the clouds parting and the sun was now out. It was quite bright, sunlight reflecting off the snowy landscape, and I soon found myself walking along an incline. Taking a couple of wrong turns, I finally found the right path towards the cave I wanted, though any idea of sneaking up ended as I stood out quite brightly against the white background. 

The first guard simply charged at me, a rather stupid tactic, I might add. I slammed my shield into him once he was within range, and cut up diagonally with my sword. He was dead before hitting the ground, needing to raise my shield as an arrow was fired at me. Now it was time for me to move quickly, but I moved with thought, eyes on the archer ahead. He fired two more arrows, managing to block both of them, before he dropped his bow and unsheathed a pair of daggers. He was fast, I’ll admit that, but I’d spent three years with the Fighter’s Guild, and have proven to be the best. Even Corvus had admitted that fact. 

Though I’d killed the two guards, I don’t believe I’d broken our code, as we were allowed to defend ourselves. And considering this was a rival Guild trying to cut in our action, we could justify violence. Slipping quietly inside the entrance, I let my eyes take a moment to adjust to the gloom before moving on. Two more guards were on patrol, and despite trying to be quiet, my footsteps attracted attention, and I had to take them both down. I didn’t kill either of them, but made sure they wouldn’t be a problem for me again. 

The cave had the remnants of what must have been an underground fort, as I wandered down a winding set of steps. Another was on patrol, who I managed to sneak up on, covering his mouth to render him unconscious. Their leader was not going to get the same treatment, trying the first door on the left, finding it empty except for supplies, but door number two revealed two people, both of them asleep. I crawled up to the first one, covered his mouth enough that he soon woke up, though didn’t struggle for too long before he passed out. I was tempted to kill him but figured the message was being received by those I was leaving alive. 

Finally, there was Linwe, still fast asleep. Taking the dagger from its hidden sheathe, I sat on the bed and put the tip under his chin. He woke up immediately, reaching for his weapon that I’d already moved. “Linwe?” I asked. He nodded. “You have something that doesn’t belong to you. Where is it?” 

“Fuck off.” 

I shook my head. “Wrong answer. Do you have the locket?” 

“Fuck you.” 

I sighed and rammed the dagger upwards. He choked for barely a couple of seconds before he died. Searching his body, I found no sign of the locket, but there was a chest at the end of his bed where I found gold, a few jewels, and a silver locket that I figured was what I wanted. 

Waking up the one in the other bed, I held the dagger to his throat. “Linwe is now dead. The two guards outside are dead. Your friends within the cave are alive, though two won’t do anything like this again. So you will have one and only warning. Leave Skyrim and return home. Do not come back. Got it?” He nodded. “Good.” 

I’d worked rather quickly, so that by the time I walked out of the cave, there was still plenty of light, and I made it back to Windhelm without a problem. Returning to the Cruel-Sea residence, only the wife appeared to be home, and she gave me directions to a farm on the other side of Windhelm. It was only a twenty-minute walk to the farm, amazed that anything could grow in such a barren, inhospitable region. Torsten was busy using a hoe on the frozen ground and appeared surprised. “You’re kidding?” he asked. 

I took the locket from my pocket and handed it over. “The man who stole it lies dead. It’s not usually how we work, but it was justice for that and other things.” 

“You have my thanks…” 

Holding out my hand, which he grasped, I said, “Ragnar. And it was a pleasure.” 

“Thank you, Ragnar. Rest assured, your order has an ally in Windhelm going forward. Hopefully your renewed presence will help us all get very rich.” 

“Just make sure you look after the little people too. They should not be forgotten.” 

He raised eyebrows before he whispered, “Teachings of the Grey Fox.” Nodding to himself, he added, “Those are words that we should all remember.” We shook hands again as I bid him farewell, returning to Windhelm, where I would relax until returning to Riften the next morning. I did drop by to visit Niranye, informing her of what happened. She was happy to hear that the Shadows would no longer bother her, and assured me that she would cooperate with the Thieves Guild once again. 

I wandered around Windhelm for a couple of hours, noticing certain aspects of the city, and the clear divide between the Nords to one area, and everyone else to the other. Finding myself wandering the slum, as that was the only word to describe, I wandered into a tavern and found a dozen pair of eyes immediately on me. “What do you want?” the barman asked, not particularly friendly. 

“Wait, Ambarys. He is a friend.” I glanced in the darkness to see Suvaris at a table by herself. 

Ambarys scoffed but said, “Very well, if you say so. But if he causes trouble…” 

“Just wanted a drink,” I said. 

Suvaris kicked out a chair at her table, a suggestion I should join her, and Ambarys did bring me a tankard of ale, though I’m sure he still wanted to tell me to piss off. 

Suvaris quietly apologised for the harsh welcome and she proved to be rather delightful company. She worked at a nearby farm for another Nord, who she said appeared to at least tolerate her people. “One of the few,” she added bitterly, before she looked at me and smiled, “You’re the first I’ve ever seen who stood up for us, particularly against one of their own.” 

“It was the right thing to do.” 

No doubt some of you are probably thinking I ended up fucking her. No, I didn’t. She was very pleasant company, and had a wicked sense of humour, leaving me in chuckles quite often. But we parted at the end of the evening with nothing more than a kiss on the cheek and good wishes for the future. Not every woman I helped dropped their panties for me. Only some… 

Returning to the inn, I headed straight for bed as I wanted to rise at dawn, asking the innkeeper to wake me immediately. Thankfully she did so, and there was a carriage waiting for me outside that took me all the way back to Riften within the day. 

Walking into the Flagon, Dirge ignored me as always, his eyes, if not watching the entrance, only for Vex. I’d learned that rather quickly, and Vex admitted to using that to her advantage, getting him to do pretty much whatever she wanted. Brynjolf was also aware, and had warned her more than once not to take advantage, which she tried hard not to ignore. 

Sitting down with Delvin, I told him what happened, and that we now had allies in Windhelm. “Well, happy bloody days. It’s about time something went right for us around here! You should go let Bryn know. He’ll be just as delighted.” 

So that’s what I did, and I was surprised when he actually embraced me. “Lad, do you know how long it’s been since we had a win like this? A new contact, a new fence… I knew I was right about you.” 

“Um, thanks.” 

He laughed at my reaction. “So what are your plans for tonight?” The question was asked with such insinuation; I know my jaw dropped. “Someone mentioned it, lad. And it’s not a problem.” 

“Yes, I’ll be off to see her shortly.” 

“Enjoy yourself tonight, lad. And hopefully I’ll have another job for you soon.” 

It was dark by the time I’d arrived back in Riften, so wasn’t sure if I was too late by the time I walked into the Bee and Barb. But Haelga was sat at my now usual table, and the broad grin suggested she had been hoping for me to arrive. I sat down with her but before I could order a drink, she asked if I wanted to leave straight away. 

We were in her room barely a couple of minutes later, our mouths locked together as my hands blindly undid the back of her dress. Once out of that, I easily undid her bra and dropped her panties as she kicked her boots off too. Her hands moved to my belt, and once that was undone and my trousers were down, she pulled me by my cock towards the table, where she turned around and bent over. 

“Seriously?” I wondered, unable to hold back my chuckle. 

“I’ve missed you, Ragnar. Just fuck me first.” 

Sliding inside her tight, warm pussy, I couldn’t help groan and she showed her appreciation too. Resting my cock inside her, I stopped and took off the rest of my clothes first, placing my hands on her hips and slowly thrust into her. She looked back and smiled, I think just enjoying the feeling of my cock inside her once again, and I didn’t up the tempo of my thrusts too much, taking my time and enjoying her just as much as she enjoyed me. 

Moving one of my hands to grab a handful of one of her breasts, I gave her nipple a tweak as I upped the tempo a little bit more, skin started to slap together, and she lowered herself, folding her arms and resting her head in a way so she could look back at me. “Enjoying it?” I asked. 

“I love your cock already, Ragnar. Are you going to fill me up?” 

“Give it a few minutes.” 

“I can’t wait.” 

I was going to cum no matter what I did, and while I wanted to give her a pounding, I did want to draw it out for a little while. While she did repeat ‘fuck me’ a few times, the smile that remained on her face suggested she liked exactly what I was doing. Moving my hand from her breast to her shoulder, I started to fuck her a little bit faster, and she knew that my climax was close. 

“Don’t worry about me for now. Just you, Ragnar,” she said, and I felt her squeeze my cock for emphasis. Moving my other to her shoulder, I was now properly fucking her, and she was loving it, crying out how big my cock felt inside her and how much she wanted to feel me cum inside her. Gods, I liked her a lot. 

When I finally did cum, it was the sort that makes one weak at the knees, driving into her again and again until I was spent, leaving my cock buried inside her as I leaned forward, resting my arms on the table as I kissed her cheek. “Miss me?” I whispered. 

“Like you wouldn’t believe,” she replied, turning her head to kiss me properly. Not happy with the angle, she pushed me back so she could sit on the table, making sure my slightly shrinking cock was inside her before we resumed our kiss, feeling her legs wrap around me at the same time. She finally stopped kissing and hugged me, resting her head against my chest. “Ragnar, I’m getting feelings already. I don’t want feelings. I just want to enjoy this.” 

“Well, try not to think about it too hard.” I lifted her chin to meet my eyes. “But there’s nothing wrong with feelings either.” 

She smiled. “Maybe I’m just falling in love with your cock?” That made me laugh, so she added, “I’ll go with that. Because, by the Eight, Ragnar, it is magnificent. A real gift, that I will happily admit that I’m glad it’s still inside me now.” 

Lifting her up, causing her to squeal with surprise, she complimented me on my strength as I carried her over to the bed, lying her down still inside her. I could feel my cock still softening, and I eventually rolled off her, looking down her body as she lay on her back. She was slightly pale, no doubt from working indoors most days. Her nipples were very pink and quite dark against her pale skin. Her pussy was still smooth, and I ran my hand down her body towards her sex. She smiled as she spread her legs again, throwing over mine, as I slowly started to fondle her. “My turn now, is it?” 

“I’d eat you out but I have just dropped a load inside you.” That made her burst into laughter as I added, “So I hope you don’t mind fingers.” 

“As long as they’re your fingers, Ragnar.” 

Being rather turned on as she was, I watched her face as I quickly had her approaching a climax. She watched mine in return, and she did that little thing with her mouth, her lips parting slightly as she moaned, and she was soon eager for me to kiss her once again. It was the sort of kiss that helped my cock near enough spring back to life but now the focus was only about her. 

“Rub my clit,” she breathed, “Just focus on that.” 

She wanted more of my lips, but I moved mine down to give one her nipples a suck and a nibble, hearing her squeal with laughter when I did that. I gave both nipples plenty of attention before moving up to her neck, and I figured a nice nibble at her soft skin would be fun too. “Oh, want to mark me, Ragnar?” 

I looked up with a raised eyebrow. “Would you like me to?” 

Her back arched for a moment, and I knew she was very excited, my hand now very wet as I continued to fondle her. “Mark me.” 

She had a nice little love bite a couple of minutes later, and she had quite the nice orgasm a couple of minutes after that, the sort of orgasm where she didn’t want me to touch her yet she was eager to hold me as she came down from her climax. She eventually asked me to hold her and I thoroughly enjoying running my hands up and down the soft skin on her back, eventually running one hand down to her arse, lifting her leg over mine. 

We lay like that for quite a while, feeling her hands run up and down my back and arms too. I eventually found myself on my back, Haelga straddling me and she enjoyed just running her hands all over my body. It was rather nice, and she seemed to enjoy it too. “Ragnar, how would you like to make love to me different?” 

“How?” 

“Well, you know I mentioned I love anal just as much, so would you be interested in that?” 

“Yes. Yes, I would.” 

She reached across to the small chest of drawers beside her bed. I had a glance as she opened it, as she grabbed a bottle of oil. I also saw various other things in there too. “Those might be for another night, Ragnar.” 

“I assume that’s the dildo you made for yourself?” 

“It is. But I think your cock in my arse will feel much better.” 

I shuffled back, using the pillows to hold my upper body up, as she started to suck my cock first. I didn’t think I’d cum too quickly, but I suggested she not do it for too long, just in case. I think she was rather eager too, though, so she soon had the top of the bottle off and coated my cock in oil. She then gave me the bottle and turned around, thrusting her pussy and arse in my face. My tongue immediately went to her tight little hole at the rear, and the gasp she made delighted me. “Oh, you like that, Ragnar?” 

“I’ll eat your arse whenever you want, Haelga,” I replied, giving one of her cheeks a good slap at the same time. 

I gave her arse plenty of attention with my tongue before finally pouring some oil and slid a finger in her arse. She didn’t want just one, immediately asking for a second one. That had her squirming though I didn’t pump into her too hard or fast, at least not too quickly. She was soon pushing backwards though, and asked for a third finger. “Stretch me out for your cock, Ragnar,” she breathed. I barely had three fingers in her for a few minutes before she reached back to remove them, swinging around again so she could straddle me. 

Wasting absolutely no time, she sat up and pressed my cock to her rear entrance, a smile on her face and eyes only for mine. I returned the smile but couldn’t help look down as she rubbed her cock against her little rear a few times before I felt the head of my cock slowly pop inside. That caused her to gasp, watching a little more of my cock disappear. It took her a while to accept my entire length, but once she had her arse nestled against me, the smile on her face was heart-warming and utterly genuine. 

“I thank Dibella for this gift,” she whispered, “Ragnar, this being our first time, leave me in control please.”

 “Okay.” 

I bent my legs a little and shuffled so I was sat up enough so kissing her was far easier and more comfortable as she slowly started to ride my cock. By the Eight, her arse was tight. My cock felt enormous inside her, left wondering what she thought. She was desperate for my lips again, though she found kissing constantly quite difficult, needing to stop to gasp and moan more often than not. 

I knew I wasn’t going to last forever, so I slid a hand down her front to again fondle her. She smiled and reached across to her drawer again, taking out the dildo. She sat up just enough and lean back so I could slide it into her pussy, and I helped fuck her with that as she bounced on my cock. 

“Ragnar,” she breathed. 

“Good?” 

“I love your cock, Ragnar. I love it. It’s the best. Gods, it’s so big and stretching me completely.” 

I didn’t quite understand that but if she was enjoying it, that could only be a good thing. And I can freely admit that I loved being in her arse almost as much as I loved being in her pussy. Having two of her holes filled, she was now making a lot of noise, and I was holding back the urge to start pumping into her. But I’d given my word. Plus, watching her ride my cock and using the dildo on her was quite a lot of fun. I’d never been in a threesome before, so watching a woman with two of her holes filled was a new experience. 

Haelga eventually started to ride me a little faster, which surprised me, as I was amazed it didn’t hurt her. Her face nor eyes showed no pain. Not one grimace. Only a constant smile, her eyes alive with desire, and I think a few other feelings she had for me. Leaning forward, she slowed down so she could kiss me, wrapping my arms around her as she changed to a grinding motion. Breaking the kiss, she rested her forehead against mine, breathing deeply. “Do you want to cum?” she asked quietly. 

“I will soon.” 

“As long as you can. I want to enjoy this feeling.” 

I kissed her again before she rested her head on my shoulder, bouncing again. I blindly used my hand to position the dildo so she could feel that going in and out of her too, and the sounds she made in my ear were a thing of beauty. Holding her in my arms, I could feel the sweat on her back. I figured the pillows behind me would also be wet. But she kept right on bouncing on my cock, still moaning in my ear. “Ragnar,” she breathed again, “Ragnar, I’m going to cum!” 

I kissed near her ear. “Cum for me then, Haelga.” 

“Oh, Dibella,” she cried, bouncing a little bit faster. She lasted another minute or so before she shuddered, her body writhing as she screamed out, bouncing even faster as I removed my arms, resting her hands on my shoulders as she rode me as hard and fast as possible. Head rolling back, she cried out again, and that’s when she had one of those whole body climaxes, tingling from her fingertips to her toes. I don’t know how she did it, but she right on bouncing until she just couldn’t continue, finally collapsing again my chest. I leaned back to relax, taking her with me. 

“Hold me,” she whispered. So that’s what I did, though she was still a little sensitive. We stayed like that for quite a while, listening to her breath deeply against me. Eventually lifting her head, she laid a soft kiss on my lips. “You haven’t finished?” I shook my head. “Do you want too?” I nodded. 

She got off my lap and lay down next to me, grabbing a couple of pillows to lift her arse high, and holding the dildo still in her pussy in place. She then spread her legs as wide and as far back as possible. “Use a little more oil, then fuck me.” 

Lubing up my cock, surprised that everything was still so clean, I slowly slid my cock back inside her arse. “I won’t last long,” I admitted. 

“Ragnar, you just gave me the best orgasm ever. So good I wanted to cry. Trust me, all I want you to do now is fuck my arse and cum in it.” 

I fucked her. I’ll admit that. But I didn’t do it as hard as she might have wanted, not that she made one complaint, just enjoying the feeling of my cock inside her. She managed to continue fucking herself with the dildo at the same time, which was a rather delightful distraction, and I think she was already looking forward to have another climax. 

Leaning down to kiss her, she wrapped her legs around me, not too tight, leaving those loose enough so I could fuck her. Dragging my head down next to her, she whispered. “Hard as you can, Ragnar. I can take it.” 

She got what she wanted, though it barely lasted a couple of minutes before I erupted inside her again. Groaning loudly, it was my turn to search for her mouth, kissing her hard as I thrust hard with each eruption inside her. Once I stilled, she tightened her legs around me to keep me in place, lifting my head so she could stroke my cheek again. “You’d like to do that again?” 

“Definitely,” I said quietly. 

“Good,” she said, kissing me softly again, “But I’ll want you in my pussy a lot more, just so you know.” 

That gave me a good chuckle as I sat up and slid out of her, grabbing a towel so we could clean up. My cock was now completely flaccid, and probably wouldn’t work again that night. Lying down beside her again, we pulled the blankets back and cuddled into each other, running a hand through her blonde hair as she looked at me, a near constant smile on her face. “Definite feelings,” she whispered. 

“Me too. Hard not to feel them.” 

“Can I ask a question?” I nodded. “I know you were away. Were you… you know…?” 

“Yes, I was. I promised never to lie to you, Haelga. I did enjoy some company in Windhelm.” 

She smiled and kissed me before saying, “Thank you.” 

“For what?” 

“For not lying to me. You could easily deny it.” 

“I like you far too much already to be doing that.” 

We kissed for a little longer, but there was no reaction from my groin region, and Haelga eventually fell asleep in my arms. I have to be honest, I liked many of the women I was intimate with in Cyrodiil, but I never loved any of them. I enjoyed their company, and I definitely enjoyed the sex, but the one I had the most feelings for were for Ariel, despite her warnings not to fall for her. It probably didn’t help that I visited her at least once a week. If I was in Cheydinhal with no work that took me across Cyrodiil, I’d visit her at least once every two or three days. I had similar feelings for Haelga, and knew that even if I did find enjoyment with others, I’d probably always return to her. Strange… 

The next morning after awaking up, and not having the chance the night before, I made sure I ate her out to an orgasm first, loving the feeling of her thighs clamping against my head as she climaxed. Then we made love. That’s the only way I can explain it. Our faces barely an inch or so apart. The constant exchange of kissing and sweet words. The feel of her little feet on my pack as I gently thrust into her. The feel of her hands running up my arms and resting on my back. The compliments of how good my cock felt inside her. Her joy when I finally came inside her again. 

She walked me downstairs a little later. The workers of the bunkhouse fell silent as we stopped at the door and we kissed a final time. There were one or two comments that we both ignored. “Will I see you again soon?” she asked quietly. 

“Absolutely. If I’m in the Bee and Barb, that means I’m here for the night. Otherwise, I’ll find you in there.” 

“Don’t make me wait too long.” With a last kiss, I wished her farewell and returned to the Thieves Guild. 

---

It was at least a week later when Brynjolf approached me as I sat with Delvin and Vex. Work was slow, though I had been sent back to Windhelm on an assignment, breaking and entering into the house to nab some important documents. I didn’t read them though I did help myself to the gold and a couple of gems in the safe at the same time. Considering the wealth on display around the house, I didn’t feel particularly guilty about it. That’s a lie, I rarely felt guilt. Proof I was a good thief, I guess.

Staying at the inn again, Susanna was there and once she laid eyes on me, I was assured another night of fun. This time she remained in my bed all night, and we were fucking again the next morning when the innkeeper opened the door, ready to tell me to get out. Instead, she called Susanna a whore, as apparently I definitely wasn’t the first man she’d entertained in the same room, while she simply told me to get dressed and get out. I ensured Susanna and I both came before we did that. 

“Was she lying?” I asked as I dressed. 

“Does it matter?” she retorted. 

“Not really. I’m just curious.” 

She shrugged. “I love to fuck. And with the gift you have, Ragnar, I wasn’t going to go looking for anyone else last night. Most men, and even a few women, get one shot at my pussy and nearly all of them are disappointing, so never get another chance.” I chuckled, shaking my head. “I’ll put it like this. Whenever you’re in Windhelm, you want a fuck, you just come find me.” 

“Good to know.” 

I must have been smiling to myself, as Delvin dug me in the ribs. “Thinking about Haelga again?” 

“No, someone else this time.” 

Brynjolf cracked up, banging the table with his palm. “By the Eight, man, who now?” 

I shrugged. “Just a girl I met in Windhelm. She’s a lot of fun.” 

Glancing at Vex, I was surprised to see she appeared more disappointed than anything. Considering I was left with the opinion that she was interested but not particularly willing to do much about it, I hadn’t given it much thought. Don’t get me wrong, a diminutive woman like her, I’d definitely have a good time with. 

“Anyway, something’s come up, Ragnar. Maven Black-Briar has asked for help from the Thieves Guild, and she’s asked for the person responsible for Goldenglow.” 

He knew about Ingun, so I had to ask, “Why not Vex?” 

“Because Vex has other things to do. And she’s asked specifically for you.” 

“Does she know I’m the one who… you know?” 

“I’m not sure.” 

“You know what?” Delvin wondered. 

“Our young friend here fucked Ingun Black-Briar… in her home…” Brynjolf stated. 

Delvin burst into laughter. “And you still have your cock and balls attached? The last man who was found in her bed was left black and blue the next day by a couple of her heavies.” 

“Maybe I made a better impression that a simple warning sufficed,” I suggested. 

“Well, no matter what, you’d best go meet her,” Brynjolf stated, “She’s at the Bee and Barb, expecting you at lunchtime.” 

I lay back on my bed in the cistern, reading a book and relaxing, figuring the job Maven was about to give me would probably lead me away from Riften, though one never knows. Brynjolf came in a couple of hours later, suggesting it was time I should head up. Not feeling completely assured of my safety, I did a couple of circuits around the Bee and Barb, looking for any sign of the ‘heavies’ Delvin had mentioned. But things looked clear, so I headed in and straight to the bar. Asking where Maven was, I was pointed in the direction of the stairs. 

She was sitting in a side room, and when she saw me, I’ll admit the look on her face nearly caused me to burst into laughter. “You!” 

“I thought you would have put two and two together, Miss Black-Briar.” 

“So you defile my daughter…” 

I crossed my arms and tried to look intimidating. “Look, Maven, your daughter was the one who invited me back to your place. She was a very willing participant, and I mean very willing. Would you like me to describe what she was willing to do with me?” Her eyes narrowed but she stayed silent. “Brynjolf said you have a job for me to do. So, what we can do is put what happened behind us, and perhaps even accept your daughter is an adult and more than capable of making her own decisions. But, more importantly, I’m the best at what I do. Whatever job you have, you want me to do it.” 

She smirked, and even appeared impressed by my bravado. “Is that confidence I hear, or arrogance? Strange how often they're confused.” 

I returned the smirk. “I’ll admit, probably a little bit of both. I’m arrogant to know how good I am, and I’m confident because I know how good I am. Trust me, I’m going to be the one to put the Guild back on its feet.” I grabbed the available chair and sat down. “Now, if you’re worried about me being a problem, we’re after the same things here. I assume we both want to be rich, correct?” 

“I’m already rich. I want influence. Power. The jarl of this city is already in my pocket. I want everyone else to join her.” 

“Well, good for you. But if we’re working towards a common goal, how about we drop the antagonism between us?” 

She stared at me for a good minute in silence. Then she nodded. “Very well. Ragnar, right?” I returned the nod. “If we are going to be working together, I guess we should at least respect one another. But trust is earned, and in this business, it takes a lot to earn one’s trust. Understand?” 

“I do. What’s the job?” 

“I have a competitor called Honningbrew Meadery that I want to put out of business. I also want to know how they got the place up and running so quickly.” 

“Bit different to thievery, but so be it. Where do I begin?” 

“Head to the Bannered Mare in Whiterun and ask for Mallus Maccius. He'll fill you in on all the details.” 

“I’m new to Skyrim. Where’s Whiterun?” 

That made her laugh at me. I didn’t mind, as I immediately relaxed and she appeared to do so too. “Use the carriage outside the city gates. He should get you to Whiterun safe and sound.” 

“Anything else I need to know?” 

Her face darkened as she leaned forward. “You butcher this job and you'll be sorry. I’m throwing the Guild a bone with this job, Ragnar. You’d better not let me down,” she warned. 

“That meadery will be out of business by the end of the week.” 

“I’ll believe it when I hear it. You can go now.” Before I disappeared through the door, she called out my name. “I’ll give you something to ensure you don’t fuck this up, Ragnar. Complete the job, do it well, and I won’t complain if you wish to see my daughter again. She could certainly do a lot worse.” 

I couldn’t help smile. “Well, now I have a very good reason to make sure I do it right, Maven.” 

Heading back to the Guild, I told Brynjolf what I was to do and asked for any information about Whiterun and the meadery. About Whiterun, he could tell me plenty, suggesting it was actually a rather nice city to live in, but there was absolutely no Guild presence in the city, so if I ran into trouble, I’d be on my own. As for the meadery, he couldn’t tell me a lot, though knew the man running it, Sabjorn, was new to the business, but the popularity of Honningbrew did raise a few eyebrows. 

Suggesting I would leave early the next day, Brynjolf laughed as he knew where I was heading straight away. The Bee and Barb was full like usual, and I headed to my usual table, waiting for Haelga. She appeared an hour or so later, and after eating dinner together and enjoying a couple of drinks, we headed back to hers for the evening, where we would make love all night. She fell asleep in my arms, letting her know I would be gone a couple of days. She simply said she’d miss me while I was gone. 

I left for Whiterun the next morning.

Chapter 5: Enemies of the Guild

The journey took most of the day, though the sun was still up as I walked the path to the main gates. I received a couple of suspicious glances from the city guards posted either side of the gates, though I had covered my Guild armour, so they let me pass with only a couple of questions in regards to my intentions. 

It was certainly a pretty little city. Plenty of colour and character and a vibrancy of life that had been missing in Windhelm. It probably helped it wasn’t all grey stone and bitterly cold. There was a blacksmith immediately to my right, a woman working the forge. She looked my way and smiled. Guards strolled along without a care in the world. There was plenty of noise as the city felt alive. Walking up the main road, houses and businesses lined either side, ending up in a market square, with merchant stalls, just like Riften, but also more buildings that housed other business interests. 

My eyes were for the Bannered Mare. Walking inside, it was warm and welcoming, and I could smell the cooking of meat on a spit, my stomach rumbling immediately. Taking a seat at an available table, a rather cute Redguard woman approached, offering to take my order. I asked for a plate of meat and a tankard, both arriving rather quickly. “I’m hoping to meet someone. I think he’s a guest here,” I said. 

“Name?” 

“Goes by Mallus.” 

She gestured with her head. “He’s in room two.” 

“Thank you.” 

Listening into the music, I ate the meat and finished the tankard, attempting to listen into conversations as usual but the music meant I couldn’t hear much. There were a few pretty women who came and went, and I gave one or two more than appraising glance, though I kept my mind mostly focused on the job at hand, finally rising to my feet and knocking on the door. Hearing a call to enter, I walked in to find a Cyrodilian sitting at a table, nursing a tankard. 

It took him two seconds to figure out what I was there for, gesturing to the empty chair at his table, where he then wasted no time explaining what I needed to do. Poison the vats, take care of the pest problem, and ensure Sabjorn was immediately put of business. That didn’t bother me at all, but something in his tone suggested this was more than business as Maven described it. This was personal and he was honest when I said just that. 

“I made the mistake of borrowing coin from Sabjorn. He's allowing me to pay it back, but he's working my fingers to the bone! He treats me like a slave. I have to do every nasty, dirty job in the meadery.” 

“And what does Maven want?” 

“Maven and I worked out a little deal. If Sabjorn ends up in jail, she's going to take over his meadery. And guess who gets to run the Black-Briar Meadery in Whiterun? You're looking at him.” 

“Just like that? Does she have something on you too?” 

“No, but she will have my loyalty going forward.” 

Heading back out, I took a room for myself and joined in with the revelry. With plenty of attractive women around, I eventually found myself up on my feet in the crowd, my arms wrapped around a rather attractive Nord redhead, who introduced herself as Ysolda. While there was plenty of flirting, and maybe just a little bit of kissing as I held her close as we danced, there was no invite to return to her house, and I didn’t offer an invite back to my room either. However, before leaving for the evening, I’d made enough of an impression for her to hope she’d see me again. 

After enjoying a filling breakfast the next morning, I found myself walking along the main road towards the meadery, passing a patrol of Whiterun guards, who were rather friendly as they greeted me. I waited outside Honningbrew Meadery for at least an hour, standing by the nearby creek, skimming rocks across the water as I watched the door. Barely anyone came or went, though as it was still rather early, I figured drinkers might only arrive after lunchtime. 

Waiting until I figured it was noon, judging it by the position of the sun in the sky, I wandered into the meadery to find it deserted except for one man behind the bar, who I assumed was Sabjorn. He was a miserable bastard, though not entirely his fault I guess, but he did or said nothing to invoke sympathy. Guessing I was there to have a drink, he offered me the job of taking care of the pest problem. I asked how much he was paying, then demand he double that, and pay me half to start with, knowing I probably wouldn’t see the second portion of payment. With little options available, he begrudgingly agreed to my demand. 

“My only demand is that these vermin are permanently eliminated before my reputation is completely destroyed. I bought some poison. I was going to have my lazy, good-for-nothing assistant Mallus handle it, but he seems to have vanished. If you plant this in the vermin's nest, it should stop them from ever coming back.” 

Heading into the meadery itself, there were barrels full of bottles, most of them empty, ready to be filled. Heading down to the basement, there were plenty of traps already set, and that’s where I ran into the first skeevers. Ugly little bastards, but they die quick and easy, though you definitely don’t want to be bitten or scratched by one, as they carried all sorts of diseases. 

The basement led to tunnels far underneath the meadery, full of all sorts of vermin. The skeevers were relatively easy to deal with but the frostbite spiders gave me a moment of pause, immediately missing my bow. The good thing is, everyone on Tamriel is capable of magic, though Nords don’t like it. It’s something ingrained in our minds and souls, that magic is used by the weak… Which is why many look down on elves, who are master practitioners of the arcane arts. As for myself, I used magic rarely but, if it was the better option, I’d use it. I knew a few basic spells, mostly for healing but also fire. 

So I burned those spiders, flames erupting from both my palms. Once they were dead, I had an all over body shiver. I hate spiders. 

The tunnels were also full of traps to catch out the unwary, left wondering who had left them. Certainly not Mallus or Sabjorn. Neither had been this far down. So I moved forward carefully, sword back in hand as I found myself entering a large chamber. Being a thief, I am capable of sneaking despite my size, and as I neared the centre of the chamber, I noticed a man working at an alchemist lab. And as I crouched there in darkness, I heard the mutterings of an absolute lunatic. And it was clear he was responsible for the infestation. 

So I killed him. I don’t generally like sneaking up on people and doing the job, but I had an inkling he was gifted with magic as I listened to his insane ramblings, so taking his head from behind was probably best for both of us. Poisoning the skeever nest was easy, and I found a tunnel that led me back into the meadery, and even better, right near the vats. Climbing up a set of steps, I found a vat that was full of mead so dumped more rat poison in that too, hoping whoever would end up drinking it didn’t fall too ill. 

Satisfied with myself at a job well done, I wandered outside and back into the meadery, where Mallus had made an appearance, sitting at a table nearby. I glanced across the other side of the room to see a man in uniform at another table. “Is it done?” Sabjorn asked. 

“Aye. It’s done.” 

“Well it's about time!” he exclaimed through gritted teeth, “I had to stall the captain until you were finished.” 

Well, fuck you too, is what I thought. But I simply stepped back to watch whatever was about to unfold. The captain rose to his feet and approached the bar. “Well, Sabjorn. Now that you've taken care of your little pest problem, how about I get a taste of some of your mead?” 

Sabjorn was obviously polite to those above his station. “Help yourself, milord. It's my finest brew yet. I call it Honningbrew Reserve. I think you'll find it quite pleasing to your palate.” 

“Oh come now, this is mead, not some wine to be sipped and savoured.” 

Well, I don’t know about that. Some mead should be sipped and enjoyed by a fireplace, preferably with some lovely female company at the same time. Mallus was now standing beside me, glancing to see a smirk on his face, knowing what was about to happen. 

I’ll give the captain credit, he either had a strong stomach, or it took longer for the poison to work, because he polished off the whole tankard before he started to feel the effects. First was the dropping of the tankard as he started to feel queasy. “By the Eight?!/Shor's Bones! What... What's in this?” 

Sabjorn immediately glared at me, though his voice carried only worry. “I... I don't know. What's wrong?” 

The question was answered by the captain vomiting all over the floor. I looked away immediately, while Mallus watched on with amusement. Looking back at the captain, he wiped his mouth and jabbed a finger at Sabjorn. “You assured me this place was clean! I'll see... see to it that you remain in irons for the rest of your days.” 

“No, please! I don't understand...” Then he looked at me and appeared to understand. “It was him! It was them. They’re responsible for this!” 

The captain unsheathed his sword and staggered around the bar. “Silence, idiot! I should have known better, to trust this place after it's been riddled with filth.” 

“I beg you, please. This is not what it seems! I’m not responsible for this.” 

The captain grabbed Sajborn by the collar and dragged him out from behind the bar, and pushed him towards the door. He then looked in our direction. “You there,” he said, pointing at Mallus, You're in charge here until I can sort this all out.” 

“As you wish, captain.” 

He grabbed Sabjorn by the collar again. “And you! You're coming with me to Dragonsreach. We'll see how quickly your memory clears in the city's prisons. Now move.” 

Sabjorn tried arguing, but I think the captain was ready to put the sword through him if he continued arguing. Realising his defeat, shoulders slumped, Sabjorn allowed himself to be pushed out the door, the captain slamming it as he left. Mallus turned to me and offered a hand. “Job well done, I think. And with me in charge here, Maven will have Black-Briar meadery being dispensed as soon as I can get a batch bottled up. And as for the Guild, I’ll be the perfect fence in the area.” 

“Though Sabjorn is out of the way, I need to find out who was backing all this. There’s no way he could have funded this operation alone.” 

Mallus gestured with his head. “His office and private quarters are upstairs. Take a look around, and anything within is yours if you want it.” 

Sabjorn’s office was a treasure trove. Not only did I find a letter from Maven to Sabjorn, where the threat was implied though was intrigued to read she offered to buy him out, suggesting she was rather rich. But it was the second latter that peaked my curiosity and I knew I’d have to take it back to Brynjolf. The same symbol as the letter we took from Goldenglow. And the undertone of the message suggested whoever it was had a real axe to grind with Maven Black-Briar, and by association, the Thieves Guild. “Shit, this is getting serious,” I muttered. There was gold, jewellery and gems to take too, as well as this beautiful decanter that I just had to steal. Delvin had spoken of exquisite items that would have greater value than normal. I figured I’d show him that and see what he gave me for it. 

Mallus thanked me again as I left, handing me a small bag of gold that I didn’t really need, though he insisted I’d earned it. Wishing him good luck taking ownership, I happily headed back to Whiterun, my pockets now bulging. Not wanting to head straight to the Bannered Mare, I noticed a sign for the Drunken Huntsman, and figuring that was a tavern, I headed in. Unlike the Bannered Mare, it was rather quiet, so I grabbed a tankard and took a seat next to the only other person inside, a Dunmer. She was rather surprised to see me take a seat, but after politely introducing myself, she returned the introduction, calling herself Jenassa. 

We had a good chat. I didn’t tell her what I did for a living, suggesting I had worked as a mercenary and was now between jobs, though I wasn’t poor. She admitted to working as mercenary for hire. Unfortunately for her, pickings were slim as most approached the Companions for help. 

“The who?” 

She had a good chuckle. “You’ve never heard of them?” I shook my head. “They’re the only sort of Fighter’s Guild you’ll find in Skyrim. They base themselves up in Jorrvaskr.” She looked me up and down. “You should perhaps approach them. You look solid enough to handle yourself.” 

“Why don’t you?” 

She drained her tankard. “I work alone,” she eventually muttered. 

We had a couple more tankards, and both became a little flirtier with each other. Her features softened the longer we talked, certainly smiling a lot more, and I started to appreciate her physical features. She was very fit, her legs long and toned, particularly as her skirt was very short and my eyes definitely spent time looking at them… which she noticed too. 

Leaning closer to each other as we talked quietly, she finally asked, “Where are you staying tonight?” 

“I was just going to book a room at the Bannered Mare again.” 

“Or you could stay at my place…” 

I couldn’t help the slight chuckle. “Rather forward of you, Jenassa.” 

“Are you saying no?” 

“Definitely not.” 

“How long are you in Whiterun for?” 

“Only tonight. I return home tomorrow.” 

“Well, even better then. Stay with me tonight, fuck my brains out, then you can go home with a smile on your face.” I met her eyes to see she was absolutely serious. “So, would you like to join me?” 

We’d been in the tavern longer than I thought, as it was dark by the time we walked outside. She took me by the hand and escorted me to her house. It was rather small, though she explained she didn’t need much space. There was a fireplace, a double bed, small table and chairs and a few chests where her possessions would be kept. 

Once she locked the door, she practically leapt on me. She was only a couple of inches shorter, and we wasted no time undressing each other as our mouths met. I was eager to get her naked and see her body, hoping it matched my expectations. It did. Her breasts were small but she was fucking fit. A toned stomach and her legs without the skirt and her boots hiding them were perfect. Reaching around, I felt her arse too and gave that a good squeeze. “You like?” 

“Oh, I definitely like,” I replied. 

My clothes disappeared rather quickly too, and once she had my cock free, I received the usual response. “Oh my, now that is a gift, Ragnar.” 

And Jenassa wasn’t lying about fucking her brains out, leading me to the bed where she lay down and spread her legs. I at least had a good taste of her Dunmer pussy, letting her know I liked her taste, but she practically ordered me to slam my cock into her. That gave me a good chuckle… then I gave her what she wanted. I put my hands under her knees, pushing her legs back and wide, as I positioned my cock at her entrance. I slipped just the head of my cock inside her pussy and stopped. “You sure?” 

“I haven’t been fucked in a while, Ragnar. Trust me, that’s all I want. This is about fucking, not love.” 

“Oh, I like you already. If I’m in Whiterun again…” 

I’m not sure if fit women have tighter pussies or not. I don’t know the human body that well. But by the Eight did Jenassa have a sweet and tight little pussy. I may have complimented her quite a bit about it. She, in return, showed plenty of affection for the size of my cock, particularly once I had it slamming into her. She just wanted it hard and fast, letting me know she could cum from that. A surprise, but if that’s what she wanted… 

I lasted as long as possible, but I guess tight Dunmer pussy was always going to win in the end. I let her know I was going to cum, and that’s when she surprised me by asking to suck me to completion. Well, I wasn’t going to turn that offer down, and as I sat back on my knees, she quite happily took my cock in her mouth, not bothered at by the fact it had just been deep in her pussy, and she took a load in the mouth a couple of minutes later. 

Feeling drained, I could only mutter, “Bloody hell. That was fantastic.” 

“And the night is yet young, Ragnar. I’m not done with you yet.” 

“Definitely coming back to Whiterun!” 

She gave me ten minutes to recover, sucking me again to make sure I was rock solid. She then spent a couple of minutes just stroking my cock, not to do anything except gaze upon it in admiration. “You ever measured it?” 

“No. I just know it’s above average.” 

“Nice and thick too, Ragnar. I bet women love you for it.” 

“Well, I’ve had my share of compliments over the years.” 

Straddling my groin, she happily slid herself down my cock and immediately rode me hard and fast. I worried she was going to hurt herself, but the only sounds she made were those of pleasure and absolute bliss. She was soon crying out rather loudly, glad we were alone in her house, though I’m sure people probably heard her outside. Reaching up, I played with her breasts as one of her hands moved to her clit. “You’ll make me cum,” she assured me, “But this will make it bigger and better.” 

She changed position slightly, planting her feet on the feet and bouncing on me that way. It must have taken a lot of leg power, but she rode me all the way through one orgasm, not stopping all the way through it, before taking a deep breath and continuing to bounce up and down. Glad that I’d already cum, she pulled me up then she ended up her back, arse in the air with me in a position to drive straight down into her. It didn’t look comfortable at all, but she insisted I fuck her hard. 

We both came hard about five minutes later, and could only lie back, sucking in deep breaths. Both of us started to have a giggle. “Well, this has been a rather pleasant introduction,” I stated. 

“Would you believe me if I said I don’t normally do this?” 

“I would, but it wouldn’t bother me if you did anyway.” 

“There was just something about you that I liked immediately. Seeing that cock of yours just confirmed I made the right decision.” Turning onto her side, she ran a hand up and down my chest, where I did have a faint covering of blonde chest hair. “A short break then we’ll go again?” 

“You’re insatiable.” 

“I want as much as you can give me before you go home tomorrow. Who knows when you’ll be back.” 

“Guess I can’t complain about that.” 

“Are you with someone?” 

“If you mean if I’m in a relationship, no, I’m not. But I have got one or two women I’m also intimate with.” 

“Well, I consider them to be very lucky women indeed.” 

She wasn’t lying. Jenassa made sure I was completely drained by the time we went to sleep much later that evening, or perhaps it was even early morning. But once her appetite was sated, she quite happily snuggled into me as we went to sleep, ensuring my arms were wrapped around her, muttering that she liked to be held by the man who’d just fucked her brains out and made her cum hard. That gave me a good laugh before we fell asleep. 

I had breakfast cooked for me the next morning, and we ate in the nude after I’d watched her cook… perhaps distracting her for a time by bending her over the table and giving her a final load. That made her quite happy, humming contentedly as she finished cooking breakfast. We then dressed and wandered out together, and she escorted me out to where a carriage was waiting to take me home. We shared quite the passionate embrace before I left, with promises that I’d catch up with her again if I was ever in town. 

I’m sure the carriage driver didn’t have to wonder too hard what had me smiling most of the way back to Riften. 

---

Knocking on Maven’s door, I’ll admit to a sense of nerves. I didn’t find her all that intimidating, but I was smart enough to realise she probably had friends in high places, and if she wanted, could make my life a living hell. I was surprised it was her to actually answer the door. “Not here,” she said quietly, “Bee and Barb. Ten minutes. Same room.” 

I headed to the inn and waited for her to arrive. Once she arrived and sat down, I took the two letters from my pocket. “This is the one you sent to him,” I said, placing that on the table beside us, “But this is the one that should provoke interest,” I added, handing the second to her. 

She read the letter I handed to her, watching her mood immediately darken, though only for a moment. “It’s not a lot to go on, Ragnar. Did Sabjorn tell you anything?” 

“No. He was an uncooperative git.” 

That made her smirk. “As proven by the first letter. What about this symbol?” 

“That’s the interesting bit. That symbol was also on the note was took from Goldenglow.” 

“Well, whoever this mysterious marking represents, they'll regret starting a war with me. You should bring this information to the Thieves Guild immediately.” 

“That’s what I was going to do after concluding this meeting.” 

She sat back and I think attempted a smile. “Well, I’m not easily impressed, Ragnar, but consider me impressed. Maybe you have a reason to be confident.” 

“I’m arrogant enough to know I’m good, but smart enough to know there are people who are better, and a lot of my skills were hard earned.” 

She nodded her agreement. “It’s always wise to know one’s limitations. Right, I know you will like payment, so do you want gold? Weapons? Armour?” 

“I want your word that, if I wish to see Ingun again, you won’t interfere.” 

“Very well. As you said, she’s old enough to make her own decisions. I’d rather not see her involved with someone from the Guild, but I guess I can’t really complain considering what we actually do.” She leaned forward and prodded my chest. “But I will not have you fuck my daughter in my house. If you wish to defile her again…” 

“I wish you wouldn’t use that word.” 

“Very well. If you wish to fuck her again, then you will find somewhere else to do it. If I find you leaving her room or in my house again, it will not end nicely for you. Understand?” 

“I do. I’ll fuck her here instead,” I said, ensuring I grinned at the same time. 

“Careful, Ragnar.” 

I held up my hands. “It was a joke, Maven.” 

Gathering up the letters, I stood up to leave. “Ragnar?” I looked down at her. “Thank you. Not many people hear those words from me. But you’ve done me a big favour by eliminating Sabjorn. I won’t forget that either.” 

It was dark outside by the time I left the inn, a chill wind causing me to pull my coat a little tighter. A few guards patrolled, but otherwise everyone else was either at home or at the inn, with perhaps a couple of people at the temple for evening prayers. The smell that had so disgusted me when I first arrived had apparently disappeared, though I figured I was just used to it by now. Heading to the secret entrance, I found Brynjolf in the Flagon. Upon seeing me, he gestured to an empty table. 

“So, how did it go?” 

“Very well. Sabjorn is out of business and now enjoying the pleasure of Whiterun prison. Mallus is now running Black-Briar Meadery. We have a new ally in Whiterun with Mallus. Maven Black-Briar is happy with how the mission went.” I pulled the letter from my pocket. “But this is where it gets interesting.” 

I watched Brynjolf read the letter. “This is beyond coincidence, Ragnar. First Aringoth and now Sabjorn. Someone's trying to take us down by driving a wedge between Maven and the Guild.” 

“Well, they’ve failed twice now, and that has to mean they’ll be getting desperate.” 

He nodded. “True, true. Let me give this to Mercer and we’ll see what he says.” He laid a hand on my shoulder. “Good bloody job, lad. Good bloody job. You alone are going to put this Guild back on its feet. I knew that feeling I had when I saw you was right.” 

“I’m not doing it alone, Bryn.” 

“Aye, but you’re doing a hell of a lot of the leg work. By the way, how did Maven pay you?” 

I couldn’t help smirk. “I got assurance she would leave Ingun alone if she wanted to be with me again.” 

Brynjolf cracked up laughing. “Most men would have wanted gold, and you just wanted the chance at some pussy.” 

“Ingun won’t say no. Trust me.” 

That made Brynjolf laugh even harder before he stood up and disappeared into the cistern. I joined Delvin and took out the decanter. I think I made his year as he was very pleased by the find. He disappeared for a couple of minutes and returned with a bag of gold. “How much?” I wondered. 

“Five hundred septims, Ragnar. You ever find anything else like this, the price will only go up. Trust me on this, I will find someone who will want this and we’ll make a tidy profit. Nicely done, lad.” 

“Thanks.” 

As it was now rather late, I spent the rest of the night at the Flagon before heading into the cistern, where I swapped stories with my fellow thieves. Most were pulling their own jobs, but they admitted pickings were slim at the moment, and without any real influence in most cities, they knew if they got caught, they would definitely be on their own. Thieving always required care and attention to detail, but you also wanted a get out clause. I remember working for the Thieves Guild in Cyrodiil that, in most cities, thieves would be jailed but would soon find themselves released, only kept in a cell for longer if they stole from the wrong person. 

The next day, I headed out at around lunchtime and headed to Elgrim’s Elixirs. The smile on Ingun’s face when she saw me walk in the door melted my heart, and she surprised me by running around the counter to hug me. “Damn mother to oblivion sometimes!” she whispered. 

I just hugged her back. “It’s okay. She’s relented now.” 

“How? Why?” 

“I did a favour for her. The favour returned was that you were allowed to do what you want. I know that sounds really bad, as if you were some sort of payment, but…” 

She kissed me hard for a moment. “No, I understand what you mean. You could have taken gold, jewels or anything else…” 

“Want to join me for lunch?” 

The smile simply broadened before she shouted out that she was going to lunch, taking her hand as I led her to the inn. Lunch must have lasted at least two hours, including a meal and a couple of tankards, and we spent time actually getting to know one another, considering we did leap into bed rather quickly. The only thing I didn’t mention was who I was working for now, simply stating I had a job that would occasionally have me wandering Skyrim. If she had an inkling of what I did, she either didn’t care or would make a big deal of it later. 

Dropping her back at her shop after lunch, where we enjoyed a very nice kiss upon parting, with whispers in my ear of more if I wanted, I returned to the cistern to find Brynjolf had been waiting for me to return. He appeared rather nervous, left wondering what I had done. He calmed my fears first before explaining. “Mercer thinks he knows a way to identify this new thorn in our side. He wants to meet with you right away. And if I were you, I'd hurry. I've never seen him this angry before.” 

Mercer had his own desk away from all of us. Behind the desk were a couple of shelving units, on which I saw the decanter I’d found. On the desk was a map of Skyrim and what looked like plans for possible heists, or at least that’s what it looked like. Mercer looked up when noticing me standing there. “Ah, Ragnar, good of you to meet me so soon.” His pleasant tone surprised me, so he added, “I’m a hard arse because I have to be. But you’ve exceeded expectations. Goldenglow sorted. Honningbrew out of business. And, most importantly, Maven Black-Briar reassured that her alliance with the Guild is right for both parties. Now, about Goldenglow, I've consulted my contacts regarding the information but no one can identify that symbol.” 

“I’ve not seen it before either but the letter I nabbed at Honningbrew had the same symbol.” 

He nodded. “It would seem our adversary is attempting to take us apart indirectly by angering Maven Black-Briar. Very clever,” he stated, almost approvingly. 

“You sound impressed, Mercer. But at least we kept Maven onside.” 

“They're well-funded and they've been able to avoid identification for years. I'm surprised it reached this point. Just don't mistake my admiration for complacency; our nemesis is going to pay dearly.” 

“Okay, so what’s our next step?” 

He met my eyes and nodded again. “Good. Just what I wanted to hear. Someone willing to take direct action. And, looking at what you grabbed, even after all their posturing and planning, they've made a mistake. The parchment you recovered mentions a "Gajul-Lei". According to my sources, that's an old alias used by one of our contacts. His real name is Gulum-Ei. Slimy bastard. What I can’t understand is how Gulum-Ei's mixed up in all this; that Argonian couldn't find his tail with both hands. Don't get me wrong. He could scam a beggar out of his last septim, but he's no mastermind.” 

“So I guess I should pay him a visit. Where is he located?” 

“Gulum-Ei is or should I say was our inside man at the East Empire Company in Solitude. I'm betting he acted as a go-between for the sale of Goldenglow Estate and that he can finger our buyer. Get out there, shake him down and see what you come up with.” 

“That’s quite the journey, isn’t it?” 

Mercer cleared away the paper so I could look at the map. “You’ll need to take two carriages as the journey will take at least two days. One to Whiterun, where you can rest the night, then one to Solitude. Just remember that we don’t kill our targets, though you’ll find him to be a stubborn bastard. Breaking a few fingers might be required.” 

“I’ll do what’s necessary without shedding blood.” 

“Good. Follow the rules and you’ll do just fine.” 

Sitting down with Brynjolf in the Flagon, he gave me more information about Gulum-Ei, the East Empire Company and also about Solitude as a city, aware I’d never been that far north. Otherwise, he told me to prepare for at least a few days away, as he knew trying to extract information from Gulum-Ei would be like pulling teeth. He emphasised the fact that I must do it clean and without bloodshed, assuring him in return that I’d make him talk before I kill him, and that I’d leave him alive at the end. 

Remaining in the Flagon until it went dark, I headed out and up to the inn as usual, taking my usual seat. There was no sign of Ingun, assuming she’d gone home, but Haelga wandered in an hour later, making a beeline straight for my table. She sat opposite me, watching me eat my dinner. As soon as I was done, she grabbed my hand and led me out. 

The first round of lovemaking was incredibly intimate, though Haelga insisted it was only because she’d missed me. But once I’d finished inside her as always, she kept her legs and arms wrapped around me, and wanted nothing more than more of my kisses. That was enough to keep me rather hard, and once she felt me back to full thickness, I was rolled onto my back so she could ride me to climax. She came particularly hard, and it was the first time she got really emotional as she lay down on my chest. “Something wrong?” I asked softly. 

“No. Just really needed that release.” 

“You sure?” 

She looked up and smiled. “I’m sure. Just missed you, that’s all.” 

“I missed you too.” 

“But you slept with someone while you were away?” I nodded. “Who was she?” 

“You really want to know with my cock still inside you?” 

She had a little giggle. “Ragnar, I’ve already told you, I don’t mind. So, who was she?” 

“A Dunmer in Whiterun.” 

That surprised her, and I had a chuckle at the face she pulled. “Really? I didn’t think you’d go for elves.” 

Shrugging, I said, “Humans or elves, I don’t mind. I don’t find orcs attractive, and fucking a khajit would just be weird. But the Dunmer I was with in Whiterun was fit as fuck.” That gave her another good chuckle. “She was a mercenary, so she kept fit.” 

She laid her head back down as I stroked her back. “And you won’t be mad if I wanted to fuck someone else?” 

“I said it would be a hell of a double standard if I was mad or jealous.” 

“Okay,” she said quietly. She didn’t add anything for a while before she said, “I don’t want anyone else, just so you know.” 

“Even if I disappear for a few days?” 

She looked up again. “That’s what my toy drawer is for. I’ll just have to imagine your hard cock inside me while I fuck myself stupid with it.” 

Leaning down, I whispered into her ear, “Well, it’s inside you now, Haelga.” 

She ended up on her hands and knees, wanting it hard and fast before we went to sleep. She also asked me to give her a good spanking at the same time, and by the time I was finished, her cheeks were bright red and I was sure must have hurt, but she’d cum incredibly hard, so I can only assume she actually loved it. When I finally came, I practically passed out and collapsed on top of her, barely keeping my entire weight from squashing her, though she loved the feeling of my body pressed against hers, at least until it did get a little uncomfortable. 

Spooning against me a little later, she wiggled her butt into my crotch and made sure my arms were tight around her. “Ragnar,” she whispered. 

“Yeah?” 

“I definitely have feelings. I shouldn’t, but I do.” 

“So what do we do?” 

“Continue as we are, because I already accept you as the man you are, and I don’t want to deprive you of what you want, which is a selection of women who will definitely desire you too.” 

“Teachings of Dibella?” I wondered. 

“Of course. The only thing I want is for you to share my bed as often as you can.” 

“I promise.” I didn’t say that second word lightly. 

We laid in silence for quite a while, her hand stroking one my arms, as I stroked her stomach, loving the feeling of her soft skin at my fingertips. 

“I love you,” she said quietly, “And don’t feel like you have to return…” 

“I love you too.” Because I did. Perhaps not in the same way she loved me. I’m sure the way I loved her in return was different. But while I liked Ingun or Jenassa, I thought about Haelga constantly, and my promise was based on the fact I would want to share her bed above the rest. 

It was unsurprising she started to shudder as she wept, so I turned her around to hold her, lifting her chin so I could dry her happy tears, and the kiss we shared spoke volumes of her affections for me. Then she gave me a gentle shove. “Falling in love with a fucking thief. That’s all I need in my life!” she exclaimed, before she hugged me tightly. 

Waking together the next morning, the smile on her face continued to speak volumes of how happy she now was. I’m glad I brought her that happiness. It was a nice feeling, and the only time I’d felt similar feelings was when I was with Ariel. And I was always sure she knew I liked her more than I should, but she never made a big deal about it. She’d been right, though. I fell hard for the first woman I was intimate with. 

We headed downstairs together, where her niece was serving breakfast. We had a table all to ourselves as we ate together, and no-one dared make a comment. I’d been there often enough now for everyone to realise Haelga and I were intimate, if not in a quasi-relationship. “Will you be around tonight?” she asked. 

“No. I’m off to Solitude today for work.” 

“Quite the journey. Will you be gone long?” 

“It’s a two-day journey there. Then the job, that I’m not sure how long will last for. Then a two-day journey back. So I might be gone a week at least.” 

I could see that disappointed her, though it disappeared quickly, covering it with a smile. We finished breakfast together and before I left we shared a long, passionate embrace, enough that her niece cleared her throat, though was smart enough not to say anything. “When you’re back, if it’s the evening, just come straight here,” she said softly, “I’ll be waiting for you.” 

“Naked?” 

“Definitely.” 

I kissed her a final time before I left, returning to the cistern where I packed up the supplies I would need for such a journey. Brynjolf gave me a little more advice about what to expect, particularly in regards to being careful and remaining anonymous, because if I got caught, I was on my home. I assured him I’d find the Argonian, get what we needed, then head straight back. 

I asked the carriage driver about direct journeys to Solitude from Riften, and he said that wasn’t possible. I could go to Windhelm, Whiterun or Falkreath, but carriage drivers did not like driving at night, so he suggested Whiterun for the day then he would complete the job the next day. 

We made Whiterun by sundown, and I headed straight to the Bannered Mare, not because I was avoiding Jenassa, but because the Drunken Huntsman didn’t have rooms, otherwise I would have headed there. After booking a room and grabbing a feed, I was joined by Ysolda again, and once the music started, she had me up and dancing with her. It was rather lively to begin with, but once the musician slowed it down, Ysolda had her body pressed into mine, her hands running up and down my back, complimenting me on my physique. Once again, there was a little bit of kissing as there was definitely an attraction, and while I was tempted to invite her to my room, I was distracted by the mission, so while polite enough to escort Ysolda to her home, where we shared a rather passionate embrace, there was no invitation to join her inside, so I headed back to the Bannered Mare for sleep. 

The scenery of Skyrim changed as we headed west then north the next day. Whiterun Hold was flat, surrounded by mountains or large hills, passing through a town called Rorikstead before noon, continuing to head north as the sun moved overhead, eventually crossing an impressive bridge outside a village called, funnily enough, Dragon Bridge, before we started to climb towards Solitude. 

Thanking the carriage driver for carrying me from one end of Skyrim to the other, I walked up to the gates and into an execution.

Chapter 6: Best Laid Plans

“Who’s the poor bastard losing his head?” I quietly asked the man next to me. 

“Roggvir,” the man replied out of the side of mouth. 

“What did he do?” 

“You’ll find out in a minute. The captain is walking up the steps now.” 

Plenty of abuse was being hurled at the man dressed in little more than rags, hands bound in front of him. His hair was long and dirty, his beard straggly. But he had an air of defiance in the face of the accusing words. Most were calling him a traitor. I could have a good guess at what he’d done considering the civil war I’d heard about. 

“Roggvir. You helped Ulfric Stormcloak escape this city after he murdered High King Torygg. By opening that gate for Ulfric you betrayed the people of Solitude!” the captain exclaimed. 

The torrent of abuse only increased, and it took the line of guards keeping the crowd away from possibly tearing Roggvir limb from limb. Roggvir was allowed to step forward to answer the accusation. 

“There was no murder! Ulfric challenged Torygg. He beat the High King in fair combat. Such is our way! Such as the ancient custom of Skyrim, and all Nords!” 

The crowd continued to be unruly, and it took guards pushing people back with spears, one or two brandishing swords, and I wondered if this wasn’t going to turn ugly. But the crowd behaved, stepping back and continued to just hurl insults at Roggvir, while I think the guards took a few barbed words too. The crowd was now so loud, you could barely hear the captain give the order for execution, Roggvir walked forward unaided to the block, where he dropped to his knees and lowered his head. The executioner walked forward, carrying an enormous two-handed axe. Lining up the axe, he took the head of Roggvir in one swing. 

Their bloodlust satisfied, the crowd dispersed rather quickly. The executioner took the head, and I assumed that it would be placed on a pike above the gates as a warning to others. I fell in with the crowd, hoping to be ignored, though the coat I wore would have covered my armour. I’d heard more than one comment suggest I was a thief. They were right, but I certainly didn’t like being accused of being one! 

Mercer had mentioned that I would find Gulum-Ei in a tavern called the Winking Skeever, Locating the tavern wasn’t particularly difficult as it was on the main road leading towards the palace. Wandering inside, it was rather full, with two musicians playing an instrument each, with a third providing further ambience with a simply beautiful singing voice. I had to stop, watch and listen for a few minutes, and once she finished, I had to join in with the applause that echoed around the entire tavern. 

Thought I wanted a tankard of ale after such a long journey from Riften, I didn’t want to converse with the Argonian with anything but a clear mind, Mercer and Brynjolf both warning that he was a slippery fucker, and I had the feeling they were not entirely confident I’d get the information out of him we needed. However, though I wouldn’t kill him, I could always torture the bastard to get what I wanted. Not that I’d done that before, but when needs must… 

I found the Argonian in a secluded corner of the tavern, busy drinking an aisle, back to the corner, eyes on everyone entering and leaving. No doubt he had clocked me enter, and probably sniffed out who I was within five seconds. Standing in front of his table, I simply looked down at him and said, “Gulum-Ei.” 

He looked up at me with what I thought was a smirk. “Let me guess. By your scent, I'd say you were from the Guild. But that can't be true, because I told Mercer I wouldn't deal with them anymore.” 

I took the spare chair without being invited to sit down and just looked at him in silence for a moment. I guess I was naively hoping I’d make him sweat, but he merely returned my look. “I’m here about Goldenglow,” I finally said. 

“I don't deal in land or property. Now, if you're looking for goods, you've come to the right person.” 

“Is that so, Gajul-Lei?” 

Reading Argonian faces at the best of times is difficult, but I saw the nervous swallow, so I knew I had him, at least for a moment. “My apologies. I'm sorry to say I know very little about that… Bee farm, was it?” 

I sighed, ready to take out my dagger to issue a threat or two, but I’d rather get the information without doing that. “Look, we know you acted as a broker for that deal. Your name is all over the paperwork.” 

He shrugged. “Maybe I did, maybe I didn't. I can't be expected to remember every deal I handle.” 

I sighed again, and withdrew the dagger, placing it on the table. “Listen very carefully, you dumb fuck. You’re going to tell me everything I need to know…” 

“Hasn't Mercer Frey taught you people anything? You kill me and your only contact with the East Empire Company vanishes. That's not smart for business.” 

I let the smirk form, and I could see the body language change. “Who said anything about killing you? What I will do is drag your sorry arse out of this tavern, find a nice secluded alley, where I will first beat your black and blue, and if you still don’t cooperate, I’ll start removing fingers and toes until you give me what I want.” 

“You’re not…” 

I slammed dagger point first into the table, no doubt earning the curious glances of others in the tavern. “You’d better believe I’m not joking,” I growled, “Do not test my patience. Someone is fucking with the Guild and I want to know who it is.” 

He held up both his hands, now scared shitless. Good, that meant he’d tell me the truth. “Okay, okay, okay. I’ll tell you what I know. I was approached by a woman who wanted me to act as the broker for something big. She flashed a bag of gold in my face and said all I had to do was pay Aringoth for the estate. I brought him the coin and walked away with her copy of the deed.” 

“Interesting. Did she give you any reason why she’s doing all this? She’s certainly well-funded and in the know.” 

“I tend not to ask too many questions when I'm on the job. I'm sure you understand. However, I did notice she was quite angry and it was being directed at Mercer Frey.” 

I nodded, definitely understanding what he meant, but still asked, “Did you at least get a name?” 

“In this business we rarely deal in names; our identity comes from how much coin we carry.” 

“Or your aliases,” I muttered. He snorted in amusement, knowing it was an alias he’d used that led me to his table. 

“Look, that's all I know. I never promised you I'd have all the answers. Now, since our transaction is done, I'll be on my way.” 

“Watch yourself, Gulum-Ei. You’re not smart enough to get away with it.” 

He gave me a look but I let him leave, letting him think I’d sit there and simply slink back to Riften. But I knew the slimy bastard knew a hell of a lot more than he was telling, so what I needed to do was find out where he was hiding information. Giving him a minute to leave, I knew he worked at the East Empire Company, so just had to figure out where their warehouse was. 

Heading back to the gates, I was fortunate enough to see him in the distance, walking down the road and disappearing to the left. Jogging after him, he had already disappeared around another corner, but a signpost said the docks and the warehouse were down the hill. Perfect. 

There was a lone guard on patrol around the docks, looking rather bored by everything. Gulum-Ei had disappeared by the time I was walking along the docks, and I quickly found myself at a large door, the sign stating the East Empire Company was inside. Glancing back to ensure no-one was watching, I managed to pick the lock rather quickly before stepping inside. 

Stopping for a moment to allow my eyes to adjust to the gloom, I noticed guards on patrol. I didn’t particularly want to wander through, cutting down everyone. These were likely legitimate workers, so I kept to the shadows and looked for a way forward. Climbing up a tall stack of shelves, I kept low and in the dark as I moved forward, noticing Gulum-Ei walk forward unimpeded, though he did stop occasionally to share a word with a guard. That was good for me, as I could watch where he was going easily, noticing he finally slipped into a hidden area. 

Getting there myself was difficult, and I did eventually have to deal with one or two guards. Ensuring my hands were empty, I made do with knocking them out though made sure they wouldn’t be found for at least a little while. Otherwise, it was a case of watching the guards patrol and moving when their backs were turned. It took a while, but I eventually made it to the same door through which Gulum-Ei disappeared. 

I have no idea where I was, but it was clearly not part of the warehouse. There was something dodgy about all of it, and after taking care sneaking forward, I noticed bandits or mercenaries instead of warehouse workers. Fair game, as far as I was concerned. I’d left my shield back in Riften, armed with only a sword and dagger. Two men were standing on the edge near a river of water. Sneaking up behind them, I kicked one in the back, pushing him into the water, allowing the other one to turn so I could drive my sword into his gut. The one in the water couldn’t swim, and I left him behind to drown. 

The noise attracted attention, as another bandit was running towards me. On the narrow ledge with the water to my left, I parried a couple of his swings before getting in close, putting a foot into his knee. That caused him to drop down and I put a knee into his side, watching him fall into the water. I dealt with another three bandits, none of them particularly skilful, pushing two more into the water, the third required a sword through the chest to shut him up. 

Gulum-Ei was definitely involved in a smuggling operation, considering the number of large crates and barrels bearing the East Empire Company name and symbol. But my eyes were for the three bandits who he was talking to. He turned as I approached and I think turned a shade or two of green lighter, as the three bandits thought fighting me was a good idea. Fighting three at once is never a good idea, but it was lucky for me that I don’t mind fighting dirty. 

However, I also like to think I have some honour, so once I was one on one with the last bandit, I offered him the chance to leave with his life. “Drop your weapons now and you can go,” I said. 

“I’m a dead man if I do.” 

“You’re a dead man if you stay. All the others are now dead or dying. You’ll see their bodies in the water when you go. Is this really worth dying for? You’ll find another group to work for. This isn’t worth it.” 

His sword dropped first, quickly followed by his shield, and he even added his hidden dagger, before holding his arms wide and walking away. “You have my thanks, stranger.” 

I waited until I figured he was at least halfway back to the entrance before turning my attention to Gulum-Ei. He was now scared shitless. “Sit!” I ordered, the Argonian complying immediately. Standing behind him, I put the tip of my sword on his shoulder, making sure he felt the blade against his neck. 

“Now, there's no need to do anything rash...” He audibly swallowed. “This isn't as bad as it seems. I was going to tell Mercer about everything, honestly! Please, he'll have me killed!” 

“I thought you said the Guild doesn’t operate like that…” 

“The Guild doesn’t, but Mercer…” He trailed off. I was intrigued as to what he would want to add, but I left it for now. 

“Just tell me what I want to know and I will leave you alone, and none of this need be mentioned, though perhaps kicking a few more septims to the Guild will be a good idea.” 

“I see you wish to be reasonable. Perhaps I misjudged you. The name of the person you want is Karliah.” 

“And who is Karliah?” 

“Mercer never told you about her? Karliah is the thief responsible for murdering the previous Guild Master, Gallus. Now she's after Mercer.” 

“So why are you helping her?” 

He started to shake his head. “Help? No, no! Look, I didn't even know it was her until after she contacted me. Please, you have to believe me!” 

I pressed the blade into his neck, enough to give him a fright, perhaps start to plead for his life. But I believed him, fairly sure he was about to wet himself. So I removed the blade and sheathed it, but clamped a hand on his shoulder. “I believe you, Gulum-Ei. However, what I do need to know is where Karliah is now?” 

“I don't know. When I asked her where she was going, she just muttered ‘where the end began’. Here, take the Goldenglow Estate deed as proof. And when you speak to Mercer, tell him I'm worth more to him alive.” 

“In thanks for your cooperation, I’ll keep quiet about all this. But I expect a little something in return.” 

“Now you're speaking my language. Tell you what, if you need any stolen goods fenced, you bring them to me and I'll pay you good money for them. Consider me your new friend in the north.” 

“And maybe some select goods from the East Empire Company warehouse? I have some lady friends who would like the latest styles. Perhaps a nice dress or lingerie?” 

“Sure, sure. I can hook you up on the best stuff available.” 

“Good. Now, since I followed you in here, I’m going to need your help getting out.” 

Gulum-Ei helped me get out of the warehouse past the guards, stating I was a new hire just learning what was required. I had to admit, the Argonian was a brilliant liar, and none of them thought he was lying at all. Once we were back outside, he asked nervously, “Now, you won't forget to tell Mercer I cooperated, will you?” 

It was now rather late, so I headed back to Solitude and the Winking Skeever. I managed to get a bed for the evening, and enjoyed a hot meal and a few tankards of mead. Though I would have liked some female company, my attempts at flirting with the rather pretty blonde Breton singer blew up in my face, though only because she insisted she didn’t sleep with anyone from the crowd. I think she was just letting me down nicely, but was polite enough to join me for a drink and a chat. 

The journey back to Riften took two days, leaving at dawn the first day, making it to Whiterun in the afternoon, where I had another night in the Bannered Mare. I only made it back to Riften after dark the next evening. In fact, much later than usual so that by the time I entered the Bee and Barb, they were already asking for last orders. 

Wanting some particular female company, Haelga had given me a key before leaving so I was free to come and go from the Bunkhouse. Quietly climbing the stairs, I think Haelga was already asleep as I shut the door silently, only a candle providing any illumination. Stripping off completely, I slid under the covers and Haelga turned over to my body. Only when she felt my presence did she wake up. 

She was eager for my mouth, and the kiss was immediately hot and passionate, wasting little time climbing on top to straddle me. Her hands were all over my face and through my hair, though she eventually stopped to simply look at me. “Hello,” she whispered. 

“Hello to you too. Miss me?” 

“Like you wouldn’t believe. Did you miss me?” 

“Of course.” Running my hands up and down her back, she leaned down to kiss me again, my cock prodding her entrance, and I managed to blindly slide inside her. She gasped into my mouth, refusing to stop kissing me, as she met my slow thrust by sliding down me. Once our groins touched, she had to break the kiss to smile at me. 

“I love this feeling.” 

She started to ride me ever so slowly, her mouth still desperate for mine, her tongue exploring my mouth and teeth. Gods, she was a good kisser. My hands ran down her back and sides before finally resting on her arse, giving it a good squeeze. Her arse was fantastic, holding it tight as she started to ride me just a little faster. 

“I love you,” she whispered, her eyes only for mine as she bounced away. I moved a hand to run it through her blonde hair before cupping her cheek, watching her eyes close at my touch. She wasn’t lying. The look on her face, in her eyes, her entire body language, told me what she was feeling. 

I wanted to make love to her all night, but it had been a few days since we’d been together, so I felt my orgasm approaching quicker than normal. I warned her about that, but I think she just wanted my cock inside her for a little while, and we’d make up for lost time tomorrow. That didn’t stop her riding me faster, hoping she would climax too, but it was too much for me, dragging her down to hold her body tight to mine as I pumped her hard and fast for a couple of minutes before I came. I think she liked my groans, giggling away in my ear as I suddenly felt very drained. 

“I think someone needed that,” she said quietly. 

“I needed you.” 

“Didn’t get any while you were away?” My face fell, a little hurt as I thought she accepted that. She immediately noticed and made sure she hugged me tightly. “I’m sorry. That was mean of me.” 

I hugged her back, kissing her cheek too. “No. I understand what you mean. And, no, I didn’t have company while I was away. But I was always going to come see you first when I returned. And I would have been happy just to lie next to you until the morning.” 

She slid off me as I continued to kiss her, knowing she hadn’t climaxed either. The mood changed as my hands wandered her body, and she spread her legs so I could help bring her off. She was almost insistent that I continued to kiss her until she finally had to rest her head on my shoulder, listening to her soft moans and breathing as I brought her to climax. I felt her shudder as she came, her arms tightening around my body. “Gods, Ragnar,” she cried quietly. 

I kept fondling her, wondering if she would want another one, but she finally grabbed my wrist and asked me to stop as she’d had enough. “We’ll continue in the morning. It’s late.” 

She kept her promise, as I was woken as the sun rose by her lips around my cock. All I did was shuffle up the bed so I could watch her make love to my cock with her mouth, and she certainly took her time trying to bring me off. I did ask if she wanted anything else, but she insisted that all she wanted was my cock in her mouth, and then my cum down her throat. If that’s not love, I don’t know what is. 

So I watched her for however long it took. Her eyes remained on mine nearly the entire time, and I did enjoy watching my entire cock disappear into her mouth. I think she was rather pleased to do it at the same time, always looking up and smiling at me when she did. 

The problem with Haelga is that she was an excellent cocksucker, so while I loved what she did, I couldn’t handle it for too long. Warning her I was close to orgasm, she kept doing what she was doing, and she was rather excited when she finally felt the first stream of cum erupt in her mouth. She took the entire load and swallowed the lot, ensuring she cleaned me up with her tongue before she simply crawled the bed to lie beside me, giving me a peck on the cheek. “Morning,” she said quietly. 

“Aye, morning.” 

“Thank you for coming to me last night. Did you come straight here?” 

“Of course. I said I would. The only reason I arrived so late is that we were delayed by a couple of bears on the road. It took a while to scare them off. The driver tried to make up time but the road isn’t the best, and he had to be careful once the sun disappeared.” 

“I was hoping you’d walk in on me as I was masturbating. You could have replaced my fingers or toy with your cock. Just walk in, undress and slide inside me. Just the thought of you doing that got me very excited.” 

“Maybe next time.” 

Wrapping an arm around her, we lay back together, her hand running up and down my chest, my hand stroking her side. She asked what I was doing, admitting that she did wonder what I was up to from time to time, knowing and beginning to accept what I did, particularly once I admitted that, so far, I’d actually done little thieving, finding myself involved in all manner of other intrigues. But I also admitted that I was still a thief at heart, but that I had heard of the Companions of Whiterun, and was considering approaching them. 

“But that would mean taking me away from you,” I added, “And I’ve grown to like Riften too.” 

“You know how I mentioned company last night?” I nodded. “I’ve heard rumour that you’ve been in the company of someone else in Riften.” 

“Ingun. Yes, I have.” 

“Okay.” 

I couldn’t help the chuckle as I lifted her chin to meet my eyes. “That’s it? Okay?” 

“Again, I was just wondering if you’d be honest, and what you’d say?” 

“I slept with her before our first time, and while we’ve had lunch since, we haven’t been intimate again.” 

“Do you want to be intimate with her again?” 

“Yes.” 

She smiled. “Okay. Again, you’re honest with me.” She snuggled into me, adding, “And she’s a pretty girl. I understand the attraction. The best thing is that it would piss off Maven Black-Briar. Bitch.” 

“Don’t like her?” 

“Gods no, she’s a fucking bitch. Far too much power and influence in this city for my liking. Is she aware of your interest in her daughter?” 

“She is, considering the morning after I fucked her, I had to walk through their dining room where Maven was waiting for me.” 

Haelga found that quite amusing, cracking up with laughter for a good couple of minutes, imagining her reaction to my presence. She quieted down eventually as she confessed, “I’m sure my niece says things about me, and perhaps even about us, to those who live here.” 

“Do you care what she thinks?” 

“I do simply because I have to live with her. And rumours have a habit of spreading. I know people talk about me already, as I’ve told you before.” 

“Do you care what they think?” 

“I know I shouldn’t but I do.” She kissed my cheek, adding softly, “Though the only real opinion that matters is yours.” 

“And I think you are an absolute delight, Haelga.” 

I think we would have happily laid there all day, cuddling, chatting, with the occasional round of lovemaking, but I had to report to Mercer, and she had a house to run, further emphasised when her niece knocked on the door, asking when Haelga would be downstairs to help. She didn’t want to move at all, but she eventually rolled over me and stood up, giving me a good view of her back and perfect arse. 

She had to pull me up as I was rather comfortable myself, and we dressed together, mixing plenty of kissing and cuddling. Heading downstairs, the dining room was full to bursting, and I quietly apologised to Haelga for distracting her. The last thing I wanted to do was affect her business. She wouldn’t hear of it, of course, ensuring she left a long, lingering kiss on my lips before I left her. 

Heading down into the Flagon via the Ratway, Brynjolf was sitting with Vex and Delvin, all three looking relieved at my appearance. Taking a seat with them, I declined the offer of an ale before Brynjolf asked, “How did it go, lad?” 

“Gulum-Ei talked, but I’d better talk to Mercer before anyone.” 

“Bad?” 

“Could be. It will depend on Mercer.” 

Wandering into the cistern a few minutes later, it was rather busy as I walked over the raised area towards Mercer’s desk, where he appeared to be reviewing a map, or perhaps some heist plans. He looked up seeing me approach and his face darkened. I don’t think because of me personally but at what I was possibly about to tell him. 

“So, what did our Argonian friend cough up?” 

“He said Goldenglow was purchased by a ‘Karliah’.” 

I’ve never seen a man’s face drain of colour as fast as Mercer’s did. I thought he was about to collapse, wondering if he had a chair behind him to break his fall. “No, it… It can't be. I haven't heard that name in decades. This is grave news indeed. She's someone I hoped to never cross paths with again.” 

“Gulum-Ei told me what he knew, which to be honest, wasn’t much. What can you tell me about her?” 

“Karliah destroyed everything this Guild stood for. She murdered my predecessor in cold blood and betrayed the Guild. After we discovered what she'd done, we spent months trying to track her down, but she just vanished.” 

“Well, she must still have a bone to pick with the Guild because she’s returned with a vengeance. But why the apparent hatred for all this?” 

“Karliah and I were like partners. I went with her on every heist. We watched each other's backs. I know her techniques, her skills. If she kills me, there'll be no one left that could possibly catch her. If only we knew where she was...” 

“That’s where Gulum-Ei did come in useful. He mentioned the words ‘where the end began’.” 

He snorted, as if what I just said had an edge of humour. “There's only one place that could be. The place where she murdered Gallus. A ruin called Snow Veil Sanctum. We have to go out there before she disappears again.” 

That caused me to raise my eyebrows in surprise. “We? Why am I being dragged into this?” 

“You’re neck deep in this already, Ragnar. And while I’m confident I can kill her alone if I have her cornered, I wouldn’t mind some back up at least. Your sword might just come in handy. I hope you can fight.” 

“Can you tell me anymore about what all this is about. Karliah murdered Gallus. Fair enough. But I’ve thought about it on the way back and I’m still trying to figure out why. What happened exactly?” 

He thought about it for a moment before gesturing for me to follow. We walked into the Flagon where he grabbed a pair of tankards then ordered everyone out, including Vekel, while told Dirge to bar the other door in until we were done. Taking a seat at a table, I took a sip as Mercer took a moment, I guess to get his thoughts in a line. He still looked utterly shocked by what I’d told him, as if a ghost from the past had reappeared. From what he’d told me, I guess this Karliah was. 

“Twenty-five years ago, Gallus and I were to meet at Snow Veil Sanctum. He wouldn’t say why, but I figured it was some sort of heist. The old ruins around Skyrim are full of treasure, though I thought maybe we would be hitting somewhere in Winterhold or Windhelm, as both cities are close by. When I arrived, Gallus stepped from the shadows of the ruin. Before he uttered a sound, an arrow pierced his throat. Before I could even draw my blade, her second arrow found its mark in my chest.” 

“Bloody hell, so she’s that good?” 

“Karliah was a master marksman and her greatest weapon was the element of surprise. I was lucky as she missed my heart by mere inches. I staggered away from the ruins and my vision began to blur. It's then that I realised the bitch had poisoned her arrows.” 

“Okay, before we head there, I want to know everything you can tell me about Karliah, because no doubt she’s going to take me by surprise anyway, so I’d like to know how fucked my situation is.” 

He barked a bitter laugh before replying. “She was a stubborn Dunmer.” 

“She’s a dark elf?” 

He nodded. “They make good thieves. And Karliah always had to do everything her way. But she was also the best, bringing in more coin a month than some thieves heist in a year. Gallus trusted her too much and let her get too close.” I didn’t miss the insinuation, and my face must have been easily readable, as he nodded before continuing. “Were they fucking? I have no doubt they were. But I think she was softening him for the kill. Gallus would call her his "little nightingale". He was absolutely smitten by her.” 

“So she was attractive?” 

“She could have had all the men of the Guild under her spell if she’d really wanted. Before she proved to be a murderous, traitorous bitch, I would have considered a roll with her. The one thing I can’t figure out is what was the true reason she killed him. That’s one question I want to ask her before I put her in the ground.” 

I drained my tankard. “Right, when do you want to go?” 

“I doubt Karliah will move before I arrive. No doubt she wants a showdown, and I want to be organised before we leave. We’ll leave the morning after tomorrow. Get yourself a horse. You should have the coin for a decent one now, and it’s better than a carriage. We’ll make our way there separately, just in case she has eyes on the city.” 

When Delvin returned, I asked where the best place was to buy a map. He laughed and disappeared for a few minutes, returning with a pile of rolled paper. There were maps of Skyrim, maps of each Hold, maps of each city, maps of where all the ruined forts. You get the idea. I took a map of Skyrim, and a map of each Hold. It was a lot to carry but I would only take the map of the Holds I would actually need. 

“What about buying my own place?” 

He stroked his chin for a moment. “That will depend on the jarl, though if you have the coin ready to buy immediately, they might be willing to sell without you having to prove yourself worthy. How much coin do you have, if you don’t mind telling?” 

“Two and a half.” 

He raised his eyebrows. “Made a bit of coin already eh?” I chuckled as he added, “But I know that won’t be enough for a house. Most start at five and only go up from there. Sorry, Ragnar, you’re stuck with us for a while longer.” 

“What about a horse?” 

“You have more than enough. No problem there.” 

He was right, as I headed up to the stables outside the city gates and had a good chat with the stable owner. He showed me all the horses he had available to sell, asking what I would require. I suggested I’d probably be doing a lot of travel across Skyrim, including into the northern regions, where it was colder. I eventually handed over five hundred septims for a horse the colour of night. I christened him Sooty, much to the amusement of the stable hand. 

Happy that I had transportation, I knew I’d need some good armour if I was going up against someone as talented as Karliah probably was. So I headed to the markets and to Grelka. She was surprised to see me, figuring I was likely one of the many who would peruse her wares and never return. I said I wanted the strongest chest armour she could provide, in addition to new boots and bracers, and they must be able to withstand the cold. Realising she was going to make one hell of a sale, she closed her stall and led me to her warehouse, which was simply a converted house down by the river, where she stored much of her stock. 

“What do you prefer, weight wise?” 

“Light is best. I don’t like being weighed down.” 

Taking a seat at a table, she walked in a couple of minutes later carrying a pile of armour. “Ever heard of scale armour?” Shaking my head, she started to explain, “This is some of the best light armour you can buy, unless you’re really willing to pay through the nose. What I’m about to give you isn’t cheap either. But it’s exactly what you’ll want. A fusion of corundum and steel, with leather bindings, but light enough that you won’t feel over encumbered. Want to try it on?” 

I said I would, and Grelka made no move to leave as I started to undress. Standing there in just my underwear, she asked, “You have a few scars. Mercenary?” 

“I used to work for the Fighter’s Guild in Cyrodiil. I found myself in one or two scrapes.” 

“What do you do now?” 

“Nothing regular. Riften is slim pickings regarding the sort of work I’m used to.” 

It took a few minutes to get the armour on, as it was a little tight, but I certainly felt more protected than normal. Grelka helped tighten some of the straps for me, making sure it wasn’t too snug, though I noticed her hands linger on my arms for a few second longer than necessary. Not that I complained. “What do you think?” 

“I certainly feel a lot safer than what I was wearing.” It was the same armour I’d brought from Cyrodiil, a simple leather armour that was usually good enough for the work I did. But a pack of bandits was different to a dark elf assassin. “How much?” 

“Since you’re buying a set, I’ll give you a discount. The armour is usually three-fifty, the boots and bracers seventy a piece. You don’t want a helmet?” 

“No. I don’t like my head weighed down at all.” 

“Okay, so the armour, boots and bracers… Make it four-fifty.” 

“Do you haggle?” She gave me a look that made me chuckle. “Fair enough. Four-fifty is fair.” 

“Do you want to keep your old armour? If you don’t, I’ll buy it off you.” She had a good look over it. It was in good condition but was old, but I’d figure she could still sell it. “Tell you what, I’ll take a hundred off the price.” 

“Deal.” 

I counted out and handed over a bag of coin, and she was suddenly rather friendly, if not a little flirty. I took it in my stride, finding it rather amusing, as we walked back to her stall. She thanked me for the purchase, and even mentioned that I might find her in the Bee and Barb from time to time. I thanked her for the purchase and headed back to the cistern so I could leave my armour there and change into some normal clothes. 

Once the sun disappeared, I headed up to town and my usual spot in the inn. I should have known something would go wrong, though, knowing my luck, as I entered to see Haelga and Ingun sitting at my usual table. Both looked my way and smiled as I sat down, wondering what I was about to receive. “You look like you’re about to be sick, Ragnar. Are you okay?” Ingun asked sweetly, laying a hand on my forearm. 

“No, I’m fine. Just wondering what’s going on.” 

Haelga gestured to Talen-Jei to bring us some drinks before she added her own thoughts. “I was just having a nice chat with Ingun here, Ragnar. Comparing notes, shall I say…” 

I couldn’t help roll my head back and groan, hearing both of them laugh. “It’s fine, Ragnar,” Ingun stated, “What is going on between us isn’t serious. We’ve only fucked the once anyway.” 

Once the tankards arrived, and I drained most of it at once, I asked, “Okay, so…?” 

Both of them shrugged. “Well, what I can say is that it’s easy for us to be together, Ragnar,” Haelga stated, “But Ingun knows that your presence at her mother’s manor wouldn’t be welcome.” 

“That’s an understatement,” I stated with a chuckle. 

“That doesn’t leave many options for you. I mean, you can always rent a room here, though that might start getting expensive. You can attempt public fucking, but that could see you thrown in jail. Or, and I’m not suggesting this for right now, but we could always have a threesome.” 

I’m glad I didn’t have a mouth full of ale, as I’d have spat it out. “You’re serious?” I asked, looking between them. 

“I’ve had them before, Ragnar, and I know you have too, so the offer shouldn’t come as a surprise. And young Ingun here is open-minded enough that, while she wants your cock, she’s willing to give my pussy a try too. And I’d like to give that young pussy of hers a try in return.” 

“But not tonight?” 

She smiled. “Not tonight, Ragnar.” 

“Well, I am off on a job tomorrow morning. So what’s the plan?” 

“Ingun will go home soon. You’re coming home with me.” 

Ingun shared one more tankard with us before she left, ensuring to sit on my lap and give me such a long kiss, her tongue doing things that certainly sent signals to other parts of my body. With a final stroke of my cheek, she got off my lap, wished us goodnight, and disappeared out the door. “Yeah, she’s a cutie. I can see why you want to fuck her,” Haelga stated bluntly. I could only look at her and chuckle, “I said I don’t mind as long as you’re honest.” 

We enjoyed one more drink alone before we left for the Bunkhouse. Up in her penthouse, I threw her on the bed and ripped off her panties. She laughed as I simply hiked up her skirt and buried my face. “Oh, you want my cunt that badly, do you? You going to make me cum with that tongue of yours?” Gods, she had a filthy mouth. Another thing to love about her. 

“I’m eating you out then fucking your arse.” 

She smiled. “Oh, I love a man who knows what he wants. Go on then, eat my cunt. Make me cum. Then my arse is yours to do whatever you want with.” 

Dropping to the floor on my knees, I dragged her to the edge and lifted her pussy to my face. She laughed away as I just went to town on her. With her legs draped over my shoulders, I soon had her writhing at my ministrations, practically pushing her pussy into my mouth. She managed to sit up slightly to grab my hair. “Fuck…” she cried. 

I think my taking complete control rather excited her, as it didn’t take long for her to make the sort of noises that suggested an orgasm was getting close. Her legs still over my shoulders, I just tightened my hold on her and lifted myself up slightly. She laughed and moaned at the same time as the position she was in probably looked awkward, though she made no complaint. “Ragnar?” I stopped a moment and met my eyes. “You eat my pussy like no other.” I smiled as I continued to eat her out, now watching her eyes and face as she moaned even more. 

She was soon rubbing her pussy in my face as much as I was eating her out, and switching my attention to her clit finished her off, hearing her cry out loudly that she was cumming, her body arching and bucking as I held onto her before she had to ask me to slow down and eventually stop. Lowering her body down, her legs hanging off the edge of the bed, she started to laugh to herself as I started to undress myself, opening the drawer to find the bottle I would need. 

“Not wasting time tonight?” 

“I want that arse. And I’m figuring you want me in your arse.” 

“And this is why I pray to Dibella. Oh, we still have a lot to do together, Ragnar. A lot to do.” 

She stood up and threw off her dress, holding up her panties that were now completely ruined, before she kicked off her boots and stood before me naked. I embraced her for a moment and gave her a soft kiss, holding her tight to my body. “Softening me up, are you?” 

“I love you,” I said softly, “I know it must sound weird, considering everything else I do...” 

“What do you think love is, Ragnar?” 

“I get funny feelings whenever I’m around you. Good feelings. Positive feelings. I want to smile all the time. And definitely be intimate with you. Make you happy. Have you return that smile.” 

“Well, in addition to all that, do you think about me often?” 

“I do.” 

“And you enjoy being with me?” 

“Definitely. And not just the sex. I just love being with you, holding you in my arms...” 

“And you want to continue being with me?” 

“Definitely again.” 

“And you see some sort of future?” 

“Aye, I do. Not sure how it will work, but it’ll work out.” 

“Then I think all of that means love. You just make me feel good, Ragnar. You make me feel loved. Only one other man has done that for me.” She kissed me on the tip of my nose and let me go, getting on the bed on all fours, positioning herself near the edge of the bed, grabbing a couple of pillows to rest her head. 

I poured a little oil on her arse and started to get her ready, using my tongue at first, as I would happily eat her arse first, before I slid a couple of fingers in. But she was quickly asking me to just fuck her. “I want it,” she pleaded, “Just give me your cock.” 

Knowing it was going to hurt her, I also wanted to fuck her, so lubed up my cock properly before positioning my head at that tight little hole. She cried out when I slid the head of my cock inside her, hearing her suck in a deep breath, and I stopped immediately. Once she gave me the go ahead with a nod, I slid a little bit more in each time, thrusting ever so slowly as I allowed her to adapt, getting a little faster each time. Once she took my entire length, I would slowly thrust all the way in and out again, just enjoying the tightness of her arse, and she was definitely enjoying it, looking back with a broad grin on her face. 

“Ragnar?” she breathed, “Fuck me hard.” 

“You sure?” She nodded, holding back her hands so I could grab her. I know I smiled, and hers broadened even more. 

“You’re in charge now. Make me yours completely.” 

My hand was large enough to hold both her wrists, and I quickly started to pound her, giving her arse a hard slap at the same time. The noises she was soon making suggested that she was loving it. And I mean absolutely loving it. Continual cries of ‘yes’ and praise of my prowess as a lover and the size of my cock. And the obligatory ‘fuck me’ or ‘fuck me harder’. 

Thrusting into her even harder and faster, I pulled her back so her back rested against my chest, feeling her feet against my legs. She turned her head to kiss me before she leaned her head back. “Gods, I’ll never get tired of your cock being inside me.” 

“And it’ll never get tired of being inside you, Haelga,” I grunted in return, feeling my climax starting to approach. 

“You want to cum?” I nodded. “Your choice. Where?” 

“Oh, this is going in only one place and that’s where my cock currently is.” 

“Just what I wanted to hear,” she whispered before kissing me again. I kept an arm wrapped around her body as I started to fondle her pussy, her body almost jolting out of my grip. She moved my hand back around her body and started to fondle herself. “I can do that. You just focus on fucking me.” 

I wasn’t going to last too much longer, and I pushed her back down to the bed flat. I fell on top of her, holding myself up just by my forearms, so she could still fondle herself, as I proceeded to just pound her as hard as I could. To my surprise, she absolutely loved it, crying out for me to keep going, and it was all just a little bit too much for me in the end, burying myself deep one last time as I felt myself unload, groaning loudly into her ear, laced with plenty of colourful language about how good she felt. 

Once I felt empty, I stayed where I was for a short time, Haelga turning her head so I could lay a soft kiss on her lips. “Okay?” I asked quietly. 

“Now I really love you, Ragnar,” she whispered, “Just what I wanted. My man to take charge.” 

“How do you mean?” 

“I’ll explain once you’re no longer buried in my butt.” 

We took a couple of minutes to clean up, surprised that she made no complaint at all about any pain. In fact, she hummed a tune to herself as she sorted herself out, a constant smile, blissfully happy at what just occurred. Joining me back on the bed, she cuddled into me, immediately running a hand up and down my body as we kissed again. 

“I like to be submissive, Ragnar,” she admitted, “Only in the bedroom, and not all the time, but I like not being in control. But there’s only one other man I’ve been like that with. But I trust you completely, and know I can give myself to you in such a way that I know you’ll never hurt me intentionally. Nor accidentally, if I’m honest.” 

“I’ve heard of things like that, but I’m used to just… you know, sex.” 

“You’re young, Ragnar. And this is certainly something only those who practice the Dibellan arts would be aware of. Would experimenting with me in certain ways interest you?” 

“Yes, it would, particularly if it makes you happy.” 

“Ragnar, just looking at you naked makes me wet. The idea of you taking complete control of me? I could probably orgasm just thinking about it.” That gave me a good chuckle. “But we’ll have to talk about it, and there will be some learning on your side.” 

“I think I’ll have the perfect teacher though.” I paused before asking, “This is just for the bedroom, right?” 

“Absolutely. And, as I said, not all the time. I love it when you are soft and gentle with me as we make love. I love it when you’re a little bit rougher when you just fuck me senseless. But there’s another level above that which we can explore.” 

I’ll admit, it sounded interesting, and it was with Haelga, then I knew I was going to enjoy it immensely. I didn’t quite know what to expect, but she appeared to know what she was talking about, so she’d be the perfect guide. We eventually fell asleep together. Waking up at dawn as always, we made love again, her legs and arms wrapped around me as it was far softer and sensual than the night before, our climaxes barely a thought before we finally had to part. 

At the front door, we embraced and kissed for long enough that her niece cleared her throat. I chuckled as Haelga blushed, telling me to be careful whatever I was up to, before I kissed her softly a final time and headed out. 

Heading down to the cistern, I changed into my new armour and grabbed everything I needed, Brynjolf wishing me good luck and to be careful before I left. Mounting my new horse, I pointed it in the direction of travel and gave it a good kick in the ribs. It didn’t move fast but I knew it would get me to Windhelm within the day. 

Little did I know how my life was going to change within the next couple of days. Everything was a lie.

Chapter 7: The Betrayal

The journey took me two days in all. Though having my own horse meant I could technically travel a little faster, in reality I barely moved any faster than the cart. Digging my heels into the ribs of my horse barely had it trotting along, and I could forget about a canter. I was left thinking horses native to Skyrim were hardy beasts, built for the cold, but not made for speed. 

Though it was still light by the time I made it to Windhelm, it was fading fast, and I didn’t particularly want to ride during the evening. The temperature dropped the further north I travelled, and while it was a bleak, desolate but rather beautiful landscape, I didn’t want to be caught outside during an evening. I’d probably be dead by morning.

I made it to Winterhold by the lunch the next day and left my horse at the inn, paying the innkeeper a few septims to give it some food and look after it if I wasn’t back by the evening. Heading back south, I had a map and a rough idea of where Snow Veil Sanctum was, and thanks to the fact the land was rather flat and white, any sort of burial mound did stand out. 

Despite my Nordic blood, I still kept my coat wrapped tight, the wind whipping snow into my face, and the breeze would have stopped even the hardiest of travellers after a couple of hours. Thankfully I found the ruin, Mercer standing at the top of the steps that would lead us inside. Walking down to the entrance, there was a door covered in a mural that I certainly couldn’t decipher. I figured it was locked, and it was Mercer who stepped forward. 

“They say that these ancient Nordic burial mounds are sometimes impenetrable. This one doesn't look too difficult. Quite simple, really. I don't know what all the fuss is about these locks. All it takes is a bit of know-how and a lot of skill. That should do it. After you.” 

I gave him a look, as I didn’t particularly want to take the lead, but figuring I shouldn’t particularly argue, as he still looked rather pissed off, I unsheathed my sword and led the way. He warned me Karliah would have been smart enough to reset all the traps, so I stepped carefully, my eyes constantly moving side to side, up and down, while I stepped so softly, I’m sure Mercer wanted to order me to hurry up. 

Having never explored one of these ruins before, we soon ran into… creatures, monsters, I’m not sure, but Mercer called them draugr. Asking what they were, he said they were undead, ancient Nordic warriors, who always seemed to guard these sort of ruins. All I could say is that they were ugly motherfuckers, tough to kill, and I was certainly glad that I had Mercer there for help. 

There were an endless number of traps too, and I’m sure it was only my prayers to the Eight that kept my head on my shoulders and all my limbs attached to my body. But I certainly bloodied my sword alongside Mercer, and we even seemed to make a decent team. His prowess with his dual blades left me wondering what he did before being a thief. 

Entering on chamber, after killing all the draugr inside, he mentioned that the wall on the far side was a ‘word wall’. “What’s a word wall?” I wondered. 

“I’m not sure as the words on them are written in a language no-one understands.” 

Walking towards it, I’m sure I started to hear… chanting. “You hear that?” 

“Hear what?” 

“Chanting.” 

“You losing your mind already, Ragnar?” 

Getting closer still to the world wall, it started to glow. Not the entire wall, just a small section of the writing. “What in oblivion is going on?” I muttered to myself. The closer I stopped, the brighter the glow, the louder the chanting. And then a word popped into my head. 

“Zun…” 

“What was that?” 

Pointing, I said, “On the wall here, the glowing bit, it says ‘Zun’.” 

“What glowing bit?” 

Looking back at him, I asked, “You don’t see it?” 

“I don’t see a damned thing except a fool looking at a wall he can’t possibly read.” 

I’m sure the word meant something, though why it glowed, why I heard chanting, and why I could apparently read one of the words, I guess I’ll never know. It was bloody weird, but I put it to the back of my mind as I joined Mercer at the exit of the chamber. 

We fought our way through more draugr, avoiding more traps, and I grew in confidence the further we travelled. It had been quite a while since I’d fought so often, so quickly, and was amazed I’d come out relatively unscathed, particularly as I wasn’t carrying a shield. Mercer killed a lot of draugr too, and I think was psyching himself up for the inevitable showdown with Karliah. I was just interested to see exactly who she was. 

Walking down a wide hallway, lights illuminated as we strode cautiously, Mercer now at my side. Murals lined each wall to the left and right, thought I wasn’t sure exactly what they were meant to depict. Ahead was an enormous door, covered in more murals, and there also appeared to be a special lock and puzzle to do. 

Not that Mercer was worried. “Ah, it's one of the infamous Nordic puzzle doors. How quaint. Without the matching claw, they're normally impossible to open. And since I'm sure Karliah already did away with it, we're on our own. Fortunately, these doors have a weakness if you know how to exploit it. Quite simple, really.” 

I’m not sure what he did, but it took about a minute for him to work at it before there was a couple of clicks and the door started to open. “Karliah's close, I'm certain of it. Now let's get moving.” 

Following him into the next room, I probably took half a dozen steps forward before I heard the sound of an arrow fired. I felt a slight thud into my chest, looking down to see an arrow sticking out of me. “Well, that’s not good,” I muttered. 

I’d never been shot with an arrow before, so didn’t really know what I should be feeling. I was amazed at the lack of pain. What I didn’t expect was for all feeling to leave my body, and I pretty much dropped straight to the ground straight away. I could still move my head at least, managing to lift it to see and hear what happened next. 

Karliah appeared to blossom out of thin air, bow raised, arrow nocked, waiting to fire. Mercer didn’t remain still, never offering a target, but he didn’t close in on her either. He was cautious. “Do you honestly think your arrow will reach me before my blade finds your heart?” 

“Give me a reason to try.” Her voice was soft… almost kind. I’d go so far as to say beautiful. Strange… 

“You're a clever girl, Karliah. Buying Goldenglow Estate and funding Honningbrew Meadery was inspired.” 

“’To ensure an enemy's defeat, you must first undermine his allies.’ It was the first lesson Gallus taught us.” 

That didn’t sound like someone who would have murdered him. Did it? “You always were a quick study.” 

“Not quick enough, otherwise Gallus would still be alive.” She sounded utterly heartbroken saying those words. What the hell was… 

“Gallus had his wealth and he had you. All he had to do was look the other way.” 

Bastard. That fucking son of a bitch, cocksucking, motherfucking bastard. Oh, I had about a million thoughts all at once, of what I was going to do to that bastard… Once I was capable of moving at least. 

“Did you forget the oath we took as Nightingales? Did you expect him to simply ignore your methods?” 

Nightingales? What in oblivion are Nightingales? What was I now neck deep involved in? And how was it in any way tied to the Guild? Not that it mattered. What did matter was that I’d been lied to, and I’d fallen for it hook, line and sinker. I’d been a damned fool, not listening to that little voice that was telling me something was not quite right with Mercer. The rest of the Guild was fine. I had a good laugh with them. But something about Mercer had always rubbed me the wrong way, I’d just never been able to put a finger on it. 

Karliah disappeared, I assume taking some sort of invisibility potion. I’d heard of such things before. I’m not sure where she went, but she promised that, next time, she would kill him. I was left thinking I probably wouldn’t be around to see it. Oh well… 

Mercer stepped forward to stand over me, looking rather pleased with himself. “How interesting. It appears Gallus's history has repeated itself. Karliah has provided me the means to be rid of you, and this ancient tomb becomes your final resting place. But do you know what intrigues me the most? The fact that this was all possible because of you. Farewell. I'll be certain to give Brynjolf your regards.” 

Luckily I still had the power of speech, but all I could do was say, “Fuck you, Mercer.” That made me feel better. 

I didn’t feel the blade slide into my body, thankful that whatever I’d been poisoned with had left me with next to no feeling. Content I was going to die, Mercer sheathed his blade and disappeared from view. To be honest, I thought I was a goner too, particularly once I slipped into unconsciousness. 

---

When my eyes opened, they did so because of the searing pain in my chest, enough to make me groan rather loudly. But that meant I was alive, not that I was particularly overjoyed at that moment. It felt rather cold, and the ruin had been rather warm, looking down to see my armour had been removed and my wound sort of healed, my body wrapped in white cloth. 

A figure stood up from the nearby fire and crouched down next to me. “Easy, easy. Don't get up so quickly.” 

That voice. A man would never forget a voice like that. “Karliah?” Then I felt myself get a little angry, lifting myself up slightly. “Hang on a second, you bloody well shot me!” 

She gently pushed me by the shoulder back onto the bedroll, which explained at least a little of the warmth. “No,” she said kindly, “I saved your life. My arrow was tipped with a unique paralytic poison. It slowed your heart and kept you from bleeding out. Had I intended to kill you, we wouldn't be having this conversation.” 

“Well then why didn’t you shoot that fucker Mercer then?” 

“I promise you, the thought crossed my mind, but I never had a clear shot. I made a split-second decision to get you out of the way and it prevented your death.” 

“Well, thanks, I guess. Still don’t like being shot though.” 

“I had an antidote and have managed to heal you as best I can. I assume it still hurts?” I nodded. “You’ll have pain for a little while. I’m sorry, there’s not a lot I can do about it.” 

I just collapsed back on the bedroll as she stepped back towards the fire, dragging a small log she’d found and placed it near my bedroll. “Still think you should have shot him,” I muttered. 

“The poison on that arrow took me a year to perfect; I only had enough for a single shot. All I had hoped was to capture Mercer alive.” 

“Hang on, what? Take him alive? Take his fucking head, more like it!” 

She chuckled at my opinion though shook her head. “No… What’s your name?” 

“Ragnar. And I know yours, so that’s the introductions done.” 

“I’m sure you’ve heard all sorts of stories from Mercer. What do you think now?” 

“I’ll be honest, I’m not entirely sure. But I now believe Mercer killed Gallus, at least. I’m still not sure what your role in all this is?” 

“It’s a long story, Ragnar, and I promise I’ll tell you all about it one day. But as to why I want him alive, he must be brought before the Guild to answer for what he's done. He needs to pay for Gallus' murder.” 

“Well, I don’t think anyone would disagree with that motive, but how are you going to prove it?” 

“My purpose in using Snow Veil Sanctum to ambush Mercer wasn't simply for irony's sake. Before both of you arrived, I recovered a journal from Gallus' remains. I suspect the information we need is written inside.” 

“Wait, his body is still inside?” 

She looked away as she whispered, “What’s left of him.” 

“Sorry.” 

She glanced at me and shook her head. “It’s been a long time since that day. I’m sure Mercer no doubt mentioned our relationship. Yes, we were in love. But while that love remains, there is now a fury at what happened, and a sense that I will bring justice to Gallus and myself. Mercer must pay.” 

“Okay, the journal, what does it say?” 

“I wish I knew. It’s written in a language I’ve never seen before.” 

I held out my hand, thinking I might know. Opening the journal and looking at the first page, I immediately felt like an idiot. If she couldn’t read it, what chance did I have? I could read, but I wasn’t the most literate of men around, and the language used by Gallus was incomprehensible. “Do you think anyone out there would recognise it, and more importantly, be able to translate it?” 

Karliah remained silent for a couple of minutes before she clicked her fingers. “Enthir! He might be able to help us.” 

“And Enthir is?” 

“Gallus' friend at the College of Winterhold. He’s the only outsider Gallus trusted with the knowledge of his Nightingale identity.” 

“I keep hearing about these Nightingales. Who or what are they?” 

“There were three of us: Myself, Gallus and Mercer. We were an anonymous splinter of the Thieves Guild in Riften. Perhaps I'll tell you more about it later, like everything else I promised to tell you. Right now, you need to head for Winterhold with the journal and get the translation.” 

“You’re sending the walking wounded to do this? I need to get back to Riften and alert everyone.” 

“I have important things to do, Ragnar. Most importantly, lay Gallus’ remains to rest. But you are right, you do need to return to Riften, though only after speaking with Enthir. I simply don’t feel comfortable revealing my whereabouts to anyone else for the time being.” 

“Can I have a few more hours shut eye?” 

“Sure. I’ll give you a shake when it’s light.” 

I fell asleep pretty quickly, and I think she gave me a good few hours, as by the time she shook me awake, I think it had been light for a while. She had a few supplies so gave me something to nibble on. Asking how she would get around, considering her horse was dead, she admitted she usually walked everywhere, so once she had laid Gallus to rest, she would start to head south. My armour was nearby, so I tried dressing myself, but found spreading my arms difficult, enough that Karliah offered to help. Despite the situation, I noticed her eyes have a glance at my chest. 

“You’re younger than I’d imagine most who work with the Guild. Why did Mercer bring you along?” 

“I may have been the one to stop your Goldenglow and Honningbrew operations.” 

She gave me a look; I think of slight admiration. “So that was you, eh? Colour me impressed.” 

“I’ll have to explain to Maven everything too. I’m not sure of the relationship between her and Mercer.” Karliah shrugged, so figured she wouldn’t know either. “The more allies to bring him down, the better, I reckon.” 

Once I was in my armour, weapons attached to my belt, we doused the fire and split up, Karliah heading back into the ruins, while I wrapped my coat tight and headed north to Winterhold. I attempted to get into the College, but the elf at the edge of the bridge was having none of it, though when I said I was looking for Enthir, I was pointed back to Winterhold and the inn there. 

After introductions, he was very excited when I handed over the journal, though it was too good to be true to think he would have all the answers. No, but while he couldn’t translate it, he knew what it was. Falmer language. “Who the bloody hell are the Falmer?” I wondered. 

He gave me a very brief explanation about who they were before pointing me in the right direction. I was to head to the very westerly region of Skyrim, to a city called Markarth. There, I would find a scholar by the name of Calcelmo, the court wizard of the city, and he would have the answers, though he could be rather obstinate. 

Thanking him for the information, I mounted my horse and headed south, as I was heading to Riften first. I stopped at Windhelm for the night, heading to bed early and sleeping for as long as possible, waking early and leaving just as dawn was breaking. The ride was harder than usual, as the pain in my chest lingered all the way. By the time I stabled my horse, I was exhausted again. Walking into the Bunkhouse, I headed straight upstairs, where Haelga was at her desk. She took one look at me and cried out. I probably looked like shit. I certainly felt like it. I don’t even remember falling into bed… 

---

I woke up with a start, resting on my elbows, looking left and right. It was daylight, looking down to see my chest was still strapped, though the bandages looked fresh and the lingering pain had disappeared. I didn’t feel sick. I felt pretty good actually. Looking left, Haelga was at her desk, busy writing in her ledger. “Hello,” I said quietly. 

I gave her a little fright, as I noticed her jump slightly before she turned around, a wide grin on her face as she immediately made her way to the bed, sitting down next to me. “How are you feeling?” 

“I feel fine. What happened?” 

“You had an infection. Whoever healed your wound did a good job, but the blade used probably had some sort of poison.” 

“I think I must have had a double dose then. I took an arrow from one person and a blade from another.” 

“Gods,” she whispered, immediately hugging me tight, “What happened?” 

“We were betrayed. And now I have a job to do. I have to help clear someone’s name and take revenge on the bastard who tried to kill me.” I paused before asking, “Do I have a couple of neat scars at least?” 

She chuckled in my arms. “Yes, Ragnar, you do. You’re not going to rush off, are you?” 

“No, I’ll rest here today, at least. But time is of the essence. The man who tried to kill me has a hell of a head start and I have no idea where he is or what his plans are.” 

She pulled back to the blankets to join me under the covers, though she shuffled around a bit and eventually her dress was thrown onto the floor before she cuddled into me. I wrapped an arm around her at the same time. “Thanks for taking care of me.” 

“Ingun helped too. She smeared something or other on your wounds. They appear to have worked rather fast.” 

“How long have I been out?” 

“A day or so. Are you hungry?” 

“I probably will be a little later.” 

“We’ll eat here tonight. I’ll have Svana cook us something and bring it up here.” 

Haelga barely left my side all day, and it was little surprise to me that we ended up naked. I was still feeling rather tired, but that didn’t stop me from sliding a couple of fingers into her pussy as we made out, though I teased her by not bringing her to orgasm right away. I suggested she wait until after dinner and we went to bed. She pouted for a little while before whispering in my ear that she was probably going to pass out when she finally did. 

Svana was quiet and shy when she brought dinner up to us, noticing the glance she gave me, as I sat at the small table in just trousers, my chest still strapped up. I could see the eyes linger on my arms and shoulders, and she blushed when I met her eyes, suggesting that I noticed her looking at me. She quickly made her way downstairs, much to my amusement. 

Haelga chatted away about anything and everything, and I knew it was because she was worried about me. She’d accepted what I did, which was incredibly gracious, though I knew she’d prefer me not to do what I did. I still contemplated the Companions, but Haelga seemed to enjoy running the Bunkhouse. Something to think about… 

We stayed up, sipping at some wine, and she finally asked what I was involved in. I figured I owed her the truth, so I explained everything that had happened since the Goldenglow job. I glossed over a few details, but otherwise, I was truthful in what I found myself involved in. She thought it was all a bit nuts, and was left wondering where the thievery was actually occurring. I wondered the same thing at times… 

As usual, we ended up in bed together without any clothes on. I was on my back, cock buried inside Haelga as she rode me ever so slowly. She would normally have her hands on my chest, but while it was healed, it was still a little tender, so she was leaned further forward, hands beside my head. My hands were on that firm little arse of hers, though I left most of the work to her. 

“I was so scared when you walked in,” she admitted quietly, “I thought you were…” 

I cupped her cheek with a hand, her eyes closing. “I’m not going anywhere, Haelga.” 

She kept riding me, though she blinked rapidly, not doubt not wanting to cry as we made love. So she leaned down to kiss me briefly. “Always come back to me, Ragnar,” she pleaded, “Please…” 

Pulling her down to hold her against me, she stopped moving though my cock was still buried inside her. “I love you, Haelga,” I whispered, “Trust me, it will all work out in the end.” 

“I love you too, and I can’t bear the thought of anything happening to you. I accept what you do. I didn’t think it was going to be this dangerous.” 

“Once I have the man I want, things should return to normal. And I’ll think of a new career.” 

“Promise?” 

“It’s either that or make enough coin so I can retire.” 

“I can accept that.” 

Lifting herself up, she began riding me slowly again. It was quite the tease, feeling herself lift herself up so my cock barely remained inside her before lowering herself down again. But it felt marvellous, and she was definitely enjoying it too. The compliments regarding my cock never stopped. There was only so much I could take before I grabbed her by the arse and started to thrust upwards into her, watching her breasts sway as she leaned forward to kiss me again, begging quietly for me to fuck her, pleading for me to cum inside her as always. 

I had learned since we had started our intimate relationship that she always came on top, and she was soon moaning in a manner I recognised. She started to bounce harder and faster as I fucked her, and I knew she was getting close when her breathing change, her cries growing louder, her body starting to writhe and shudder. So I just whispered that I found her beautiful and I’d love nothing more than for her to cum with my cock buried inside her. That made her smile… 

Then she had an orgasm. Feeling her pussy tighten around my cock as she climaxed, I pumped her for another couple of minutes before I enjoyed my own, and we immediately relaxed, Haelga resting on my chest, running my hand lightly up and down her back, tickling her slightly though all she did was giggle and ask me not to stop. 

That was us done for the night. I just held her until we went to sleep, holding her close and kissing her constantly. Once she turned over and nestled her body against mine, I held her as tightly as possible, and she sighed with contentment. “Will you leave in the morning?” 

“Yes. I’m off to Markarth to get some information.” 

“Markarth? That’s all the way on the other side of Skyrim!” 

“Two-day journey there probably. Then I’ll need to head back to Winterhold to link up with a possible new friend. Once I do that, we’ll head back here together to decide our next move.” 

“So you’ll be gone a while again?” 

I just gave her a gentle squeeze. “I’ll miss you.” 

“Will you seek the company of someone else?” 

“I’m not sure. I might be too busy.” 

“I’ll understand if you do though. You know I don’t mind.” 

“I’ll be honest about it. You know I will.” 

Because I was leaving for a few days again, we made love in the morning, Haelga not allowing me out of the bed until I left another load inside her. I certainly didn’t mind, and I definitely had a renewed spring in my step when we headed downstairs for breakfast. I noticed Grelka in there, and she gave me an appraising look, while Svana still couldn’t meet my eyes, blushing away. I was used to the attention, but it was still amusing to see. Haelga noticed and her look surprised me, suggesting ‘If you want to, go for it.’ Something to discuss on my return… 

After a last kiss and cuddle with Haelga at the front door, dressed in armour with my weapons, I didn’t bother heading down to see the Guild. I’d let them know what was going on when I returned from Winterhold with Karliah. Before leaving, though, I went looking for camping supplies. I had no real idea how long it would take to get to Markarth, the map only showing me the routes possible. The marketplace had nothing for me, and it was suggested I head into the Pawned Prawn. Thankfully the shop owner didn’t recognise me, and I walked out later with a tent, bedroll, and other supplies I’d need if I had to stop on the road. 

My guess was right, as it was a two-day journey to Markarth, avoiding Whiterun entirely by taking the southern route. I did camp in the wild along the way, and it was quite a nice night under the stars, the first time I’d done that since entering Skyrim. Stabling my horse at the stables outside the walls, I could only marvel at my first real look at the city. Nothing but solid stone. I knew next to nothing about the city, and my introduction via the city guards at the main gates certainly left me wondering what the hell I would be walking into. 

While I felt a lingering tension in the air, the city appeared to be at peace, and I made my way straight towards the keep, intent on getting the information I needed and heading straight back to Winterhold. After asking where Calcelmo was, I was pointed towards the edge of an archaeological site, and there I met a rather elderly gentleman, who was not particularly friendly, and definitely did not like being interrupted. 

“Look, I'm very busy, so this better be important.” 

“Professor, I’ve heard you’re a leading authority on all things Falmer. I’m here as I need your help.” 

“You were well informed. I am at this very moment on the cusp of completing my magnum opus on the subject. I'm calling it 'Calcelmo's Guide to the Falmer Tongue.' It will revolutionize the way we understand those ancient beings.” 

“Perfect. I have an issue that will require understanding their language. Don’t suppose you could let me have a look at it?” 

That riled him big time, waving his hands in the air as if I was a lunatic for even suggesting such an idea. “Preposterous! That research represents years of personal toil in some of the most dangerous Dwemer ruins in Skyrim! You must be mad to think I'd allow anyone to see it before it's completed.” 

Time to bullshit him. “Professor Calcelmo, I have been a great admirer of your work for my years. Your writings regarding the Dwarven race were sensational. I’ve learned so much.” 

I noticed him relax and even a slight smile formed. “What kind of a mentor would I be if I denied a potential student a glimpse at his master's ingenuity! Here, this key will provide access to my museum. Feel free to browse for as long as you wish. However, I must insist that my laboratory remains strictly off limits.” 

So, his laboratory was through his museum and I was going to need to sneak into that. Fair enough, that was doable. The museum was full of dwarven artefacts that I pretty much ignored, and the guards barely took any notice of my presence. Sneaking out of the museum wasn’t particularly difficult, ending up in a hallway which led in various directions, including what I think might have been Calcelmo’s bedroom. 

The laboratory was full of guards too, and I didn’t particularly want to cut and kill my way through them. Instead, I rolled one of the dwarven barrels towards the edge of an overhang and climbed way up, and that’s where I hit the jackpot. I couldn’t read the stone tablet, but I recognised it as similar writing to the journal. Sneaking further into the laboratory, I found a tome that already had plenty of translations, more than enough for Enthir to at least make a little sense of the journal, but just in case, I took a rubbing of the stone tablet. Then I got the hell out of there before someone found me. 

All this work had barely taken me a couple of hours, but it was still rather late by the time I headed back towards the city gates. I could have ridden for a couple of hours and camped, but there was an inn near the gates that no doubt sold hot food, cold drinks and hopefully a warm bed, so I wandered inside. 

Taking a seat at the bar, I was astounded at the argument taking place between the gentleman behind the bar and a woman who was busy cleaning. I was left thinking they were husband and wife, and only clearing my throat grabbed his attention, ordering a meal, tankard of mead and a room for the night. The inn filled up as night fell outside, and I eventually found myself talking to a beautiful and petite but rather sad Breton woman by the name of Muiri. Lending an ear, she unloaded all her worries on me, and I must have proved rather attentive, as we soon ended up sitting close by the fire. 

“There’s something about you I can’t put my finger on,” she admitted. 

“How do you mean?” 

“Are you here about….” She paused, then shook her head. “No, never mind. You would have said something already.” 

“What?” 

“No, I can’t say, Ragnar. Forget I mentioned anything.” 

Though intrigued as to what she meant, I didn’t pursue it, as it was obviously personal. Though I felt an attraction, what she’d unloaded on me about her previous partner, and then what happened in Windhelm, suggested that I shouldn’t just take advantage of her, though I was polite enough to walk her home. She wasted no time kissing me on her doorstep, and I think it was only me wishing her goodnight, after a good few minutes, that stopped her from inviting me inside. 

But I found myself with a definite reason to visit Markarth again. She was stunning. 

Riding from south-west to north-east Skyrim took nearly three days. I was fed up walking back into the Frozen Hearth Inn in Winterhold, heading straight downstairs to where Enthir was hopefully still waiting. He was, as was Karliah, who had removed her hood, revealing a youthful, beautiful face. I know I stared at her for a good few seconds before Enthir cleared his face, causing me to blush before handing over everything I had. 

“I’m going to need a little time to decipher this. Give me twenty-four hours.” 

With that, he disappeared, I assume back to the college. That left Karliah and I alone, so we headed upstairs to grab a bite to eat and a drink. The inn was deserted otherwise, left thinking there wasn’t much to Winterhold except the college, though Karliah and I still sat alone in a corner, talking quietly. She enquired as to what I’d been up to, and was very apologetic when I told her about the infection. I said it wasn’t her fault, that it was probably Mercer’s fault, but I thanked her for caring. 

“There’s still a long way to go, Ragnar. Though Enthir can possible translate his journal, that doesn’t mean they will believe us. And who knows where Mercer is now.” 

“I have a feeling he hadn’t returned to Riften. No-one was on the lookout for me, though if he told them I was dead… Thanks again, by the way.” 

“Couldn’t let a good looking young man such as yourself be left to die.” I know I looked at her in surprise. “What? I have long since mourned Gallus. But it was upsetting finding him there as he was.” 

“I didn’t think… Um…” 

“Don’t think too hard, Ragnar. I merely paid you a compliment.” 

“You’re gorgeous,” I blurted out. Gods, I felt like I was eighteen again, and I’d barely touched a woman. Still, I was pleased that it made her blush. 

“Thank you,” she said quietly, “I can’t remember the last time anyone said something nice to me.” 

“I was left wondering what you looked like the first time I heard your voice. I thought to myself ‘That isn’t the voice of a murderer’.” I guess I have a thing for certain accents. 

“And so you now think I have a lovely voice and I’m gorgeous?” 

“Aye.” 

“I’m not sure if you’re trying to be smooth and get in my panties, or just trying to be nice…” 

“Why not both?” I asked, hiding my smile by draining my tankard. 

That made her blush, looking away from me. “Not now. There is too much still to do.” 

Still, she hadn’t said no, so maybe there was something there. As there was no-one in the inn, Karliah and I paid for a room each, though we were both rather drunk by the time we headed to bed. I think Karliah needed to let her hair down and relax, just for a couple of hours, while I drunkenly proclaimed I would protect her from anyone who dare think of doing her harm. She just called me an idiot, and we eventually shared the same bed. Still dressed and all, both of us waking in the morning with a hangover and slightly embarrassed. 

Enthir turned up just after breakfast, admitting that breaking the translation code was relatively simple, and he had a near full translation of the journal. He explained what he had discovered. I didn’t understand much of it, and Karliah broke it down for me. Mercer had desecrated a shrine of the Nightingales, and for that alone, he must be killed. 

With no horse of her own, Karliah had join me on mine, making sure all of supplies were secure before we journeyed as quickly as we could back to Riften. We had to camp on the way back once we were well past Windhelm. With only one bedroll and few furs, we had to snuggle to stay warm, not that either of us complained. I’m not arrogant suggesting there was already an attraction, but she was right. We couldn’t afford distraction with what possibly lay on the horizon. 

Making it back to Riften in the late afternoon the next day, I stabled my horse and we headed into the city itself. I’m not sure why, but I felt tense, almost as if we were being watched. Karliah felt it too and mentioned it as we tried to stroll casually towards the Ratway. I figured taking the secret entrance would probably get us killed. 

Thankfully the Ratway was empty of life, so we made it the Flagon without incident. I could feel her tense up as we passed by the bar, Vekel looking our way, towel in hand as he cleaned it down, but if he recognised Karliah, he gave no indication. I knew where everyone else was waiting for us though, and before we entered the cistern, Karliah grabbed my forearm and asked that I follow her lead. 

Brynjolf, Vex and Delvin were armed and ready for us. Behind them in a line were the rest, some armed with bows, arrows nocked, waiting to fire. Others were armed with blades, ready to get in on the action if ordered. Karliah showed no fear as she stepped towards them. I stayed by her side, glancing to see that, despite her cool exterior, her hands were shaking. I probably surprised her by taking her right hand in my left until we were stood in front of Brynjolf, where I did let her hand go. 

Brynjolf looked at me first. “You better have a damn good reason to be here with that murderer.” 

“Do you trust me, Bryn?” 

He was silent a few seconds before he nodded. “Aye, I do, lad.” 

“Then listen to what Karliah has to say.” 

“Please, lower your weapons so we can speak. I have proof that you've all been misled!” 

Brynjolf looked at me again and I nodded. “No tricks, Karliah, or I'll cut you down where you stand. Now what's this so-called proof you speak of?” 

She took the original and translated journals from her pocket, holding them out towards him. “I have Gallus' journal here, and a translated copy so you can understand what he wrote. I think you'll find its contents disturbing.” 

Brynjolf looked left at Vex, then right at Delvin, before he sheathed his weapon and took the journals. He walked towards Mercer’s desk, everyone following him, as he placed both copies down. He first flipped through the original journal, realising quickly it was written in the Falmer language, before he started reading the translated journal. It was quite easy to see the blood drain from his face with each page he read. “It can’t be,” he muttered. 

Karliah sighed, possibly with relief, maybe because she knew it was all true regardless. “It's true, Brynjolf. Every word. Mercer's been stealing from the Guild for years, right under your noses.” 

There was an argument between Brynjolf and Delvin about whether such a crime would be possible. Vex wasn’t entirely convinced either, but by now, everyone had sheathed their weapons, waiting for the outcome. It took for the opening of the vault for everyone’s lives to come crashing to the ground. I think Delvin wanted to collapse to the ground and weep. Vex was ready to commit bloody murder. Brynjolf just looked so disappointed, I wanted to give the man a hug. 

He immediately took command, sending people up to the surface to watch the gates and the city, Delvin and Vex to watch the Flagon. 

Brynjolf was now a believer, as was I. I had been since Mercer admitted it all in Snow Veil Sanctum, but I felt relief that everyone else now believed Karliah. The three of us sat around the desk as Karliah explained absolutely everything that happened. Her voice caught more than once, particularly when talking about Gallus, taking her hand to give at least a modicum of comfort. By the end, all Brynjolf could say was, “I’m sorry.” 

Karliah returned a crooked grin. “It’s not your fault, Brynjolf. Mercer had everyone fooled.” 

“We could never make it up to you.” 

“And you don’t have to. You believe me. Now all you need to do is help me bring Mercer to justice.” 

“Aye, lass, that’s what we’re definitely going to do. First, we need to know what Mercer was up to.” He looked at me. “That’s where you come in again, lad. Mercer has his own house called Riftweald Manor. It’s next door to the Black-Briar Manor. Get inside and see what you can find.” 

“Any chance I can just bust down the front door?” 

“No. Mercer was paranoid and barred nearly all entrances. You’ll need to talk your way past Vald, then make your way up to the second floor entryway.” I stood up and that’s when he added, “And if that big bastard gets in your way, and if anyone else gets in your way, kill them.” 

“Are you sure?” 

He nodded. “Aye, lad. It’s time to go on the offensive. Riften and all of Skyrim will learn the Thieves Guild is back.”

Chapter 8: Road to Revenge

Vex surprised me by admitting she had been intimate with Vald, though she added that what occurred wasn’t actually intimate. “He fucked me, came, then left me to finish myself off each time.” 

“And you did this more than once?” 

She shrugged. “He has a big cock.” She paused and smirked, “Same as someone else I’ve heard about.” 

I know my eyebrows raised at that admission. “Seriously?” 

“Women like to share details, Ragnar. And those details have even made it down here.” She cleared her throat. “Anyway, Vald owes a debt to Maven. I think the only reason he’s still breathing is that he was willing to work for Mercer.” 

“So I should probably just talk to Maven then?” 

“Vald is an idiot, so yes, see what the issue was from Maven and maybe you can get Vald out of the way. Though I think you’re big enough to take him, Vald does some talent in those arms.” 

Sighing to myself, as it was just more legwork, I headed up to the surface and knocked on the door of the manor again. It was opened by one of the men this time, not sure of his name, and asked to see Maven. He let me in and I was escorted upstairs to what looked like her bedroom, though Maven was sat at a desk. She appeared rather amused to see me, though I’m sure that was because she didn’t know what was going on. “This is becoming a common occurrence, Ragnar.” I wasn’t sure if that was a threat or not. She actually smiled when I didn’t say anything. “Come now, Ragnar, take a seat. I won’t bite. I think it’s safe to say that you’re definitely in my good books.” 

I took a seat nearby and explained what I wanted. That’s when she actually laughed. “You actually want to help that idiot? Why?” 

“Guild business. I’ll explain everything once the issue is sorted. I’m not sure you’ll want to know yet.” I think my tone carried enough that even she wouldn’t ask questions. Well, except for… 

“This won’t bite me in the arse, will it?” 

“No, Maven. Your arse will be just fine.” Gods, did I just… flirt with Maven Black-Briar? What made it even weirder is that she giggled and I think was maybe a tiny bit… interested. Okay, I needed out right now, so cleared my throat and asked, “What did he do exactly?” 

Once she’d explained everything, I figured either myself or someone else would be going for a swim. Thanking her for the information, I headed out towards the docks straight away. There were plenty of rowboats, but I knew I couldn’t swim to the bottom to find the quill. So I went looking for an Argonian and eventually found one in the fishery building. The first couple wouldn’t even listen to me, but the third was willing to hear me out, and with the promise of a coin pouch, she agreed to help. 

With a rough idea of where Vald had shipwrecked, the Argonian undressed to her underwear and dove in. She was gone for a few minutes but eventually appeared carrying a strongbox. I took that first before helping her up onto the boat. Cracking the lock wasn’t the difficult, and the quill was amazingly dry, and there was even an inkpot too. I gave the Argonian anything else within it, a few coin and jewels, which made her rather happy, and I rowed us back to shore. 

I think I was making a habit of impressing Maven Black-Briar, as when I handed the quill over, I think I left her a little speechless. “Ragnar, what I said about Ingun…” 

“Yes?” 

“I’d like you to have dinner with us one night, just you, my daughter and I. You’ve more than proven yourself.” 

“Um, you do realise…” 

“That you’re fucking Haelga?” She laughed. “Everyone knows, Ragnar. But it’s also known that she’s always had open relationships, even when she was married. And as Ingun apparently doesn’t mind that you’re fucking someone else, and possibly interested in her too, then you’re welcome to join us.” 

“I can do that once this situation with the guild is resolved.” 

“Very well. Just let me know when you would like to join us.” 

Vald didn’t even know what I was organising, so turning up with the letter releasing him from his debt made him very agreeable, handing over the key to Mercer’s house and letting me know others were inside. He suggested they were not the greatest of mercenaries, but I remained careful as I snuck up the ladder and carefully unlocked, opened and slipped inside. 

I moved quickly once I heard their footsteps, trying to kill as silently as possible. One fought better than I anticipated, and he got in a couple of good swings that, although I didn’t worry, made me cautious. But Vald was right in the end, and I managed to take down all four mercenaries without too much hassle. 

The house was empty, and after searching for an hour, I was ready to give up when a cabinet I’d looked at a couple of times had me thinking. Pressing my ear to the door, I was certain I heard a faint breeze, and a kick into the back of the cabinet revealed a hidden passageway. Always careful, I managed to avoid the traps Mercer had set, and I eventually found myself in a hidden office. It was full of information I could take back to Brynjolf and Karliah, including plenty of maps that appeared to reveal numerous locations for possible heists, correspondence between Mercer and unknown clients, that were more than likely private affairs rather than Guild issues. I made sure I took all the gold and jewels on offer, but the one prize that took my eye was the sword in a locked display case. 

An elbow into the glass smashed the lid and I grabbed the sword, recognising straight away that the blade was enchanted. Making my way back to the front door, it took a couple of swings of my other sword to smash the wooden bar to get the door open. Once back out into the city, I headed straight back to the Ratway and the Flagon. 

Karliah, Brynjolf, Vex and Delvin were all sitting at a table, obviously waiting for me to return. They didn’t ask what took so long. All they wanted to know was if I was successful. I’m sure I looked rather smug when I laid down everything. “Oh, and I also took this rather nice sword for myself,” I added. 

“That’s Chillrend,” Delvin whispered with admiration, “The bastard had it?” 

“In a display case, locked tight. So I smashed and grabbed.” 

That caused a few chuckles as I grabbed chair, two of them shuffling out of the way, as the four looked over everything I grabbed. It remained quiet for at least a few minutes before Brynjolf exclaimed, “Shor’s balls!” 

Everyone shut up and looked at him. “What is it?” Karliah wondered. 

“The son of a bitch is going after the Eyes of the Falmer. That was Gallus's pet project!” 

“I remember,” Karliah said quietly, and bitterly. 

“Guys, if he gets his hands on them, you can be certain he'll be gone for good and set up for life.” 

“Then we stop the bastard,” I practically growled. 

“Aye, that we do, lad. He's taken everything the Guild has left, and to go after one of the last greatest heists is just an insult.” 

“Does anyone have a plan though?” Delvin wondered, “He’s either anticipated our every step, or been two steps ahead so far.” 

Brynjolf rolled up all the paperwork, placing it in the middle of the table, before he spoke. “Mercer Frey tried to kill Ragnar and Karliah. He betrayed the Guild and all of us. He murdered Gallus and made us question our future. He needs to die.” 

All eyes turned to Karliah. While agreeing, she retorted, “We have to be very careful, Brynjolf. Mercer is a Nightingale, an Agent of Nocturnal.” The rest of us all shared glances. I wasn’t concerned. I’d probably fought worse opponents. Brynjolf was naturally worried about taking on someone he’d once called a leader and a friend. Vex wanted blood. I think Delvin just wanted it all over. “Listen, the four of you. We need to prepare ourselves and meet Mercer on equal footing. Just outside of Riften, beyond the Southeast Gate, is a small path cut up the mountainside. At the end of that path is a clearing and an old standing stone. I'd ask Ragnar and Delvin to meet me there tomorrow morning. Vex and Delvin, if you’re interested, I can induct you at a later time.” 

“Shouldn’t we…” 

“No, Brynjolf. You should prepare yourself mentally for what we are about to do. Once we leave to face Mercer, we either return victorious… or we don’t return at all.” The other three understood what she meant and left me alone with Karliah, I guess to be alone with their thoughts and prepare themselves. She sat up from her chair and sat next to me. I took her hand and looked at her. She removed her hood. “Sorry, force of habit.” 

“Maybe when this is all over, you can forget about wearing it at all…” 

“Still trying to charm me?” 

I shrugged. “I’m generally honest about things like that.” 

“What are your plans this evening?” 

It was time to be honest. “I will probably spend the night with Haelga.” 

I was surprised when she smiled. “Ah, the Dibellan worshipper. I’ve heard the rumours, or should I say stories.” Before I could ask, she quickly added, “Brynjolf has a big mouth. And I think Vex is a little jealous. But you are still interested in me?” 

“Haelga and I have an agreement. Don’t get me wrong, I love her, but we have also agreed to an open relationship. She says she won’t be with other men, but if she does want to be with another, particularly as I might not always be around, I’m willing to accept it, just as she accepts that I may want to sleep with other women.” 

“Oh… And I assume you’ve done that already?” 

I shrugged. “A couple of times. Generally, only when I’m away from Riften for a while. But if I were to meet someone I really liked in Riften, she won’t mind.” 

“I’ve heard you have your eye on Ingun Black-Briar. Playing with fire there…” 

“Oh, I’ve done Maven a couple of favours so she’s fine with it now. In fact, I have an invitation to join her and Ingun for dinner.” 

“Careful, Ragnar. She’s a widow and might be tempted by some young, fresh meat.” 

“Such a thought has already crossed my mind, to be honest. Not in the sense I want to fuck her, but I have a feeling an offer might be made.” 

“So where does that leave you and I?” 

“I’m not sure. Let me ask you bluntly; are you interested in me?” 

“Yes.” 

I couldn’t help smile. “Good, because that interest is returned.” She blushed again. “So here is my suggestion. We find Mercer. Kill him. Head back here. See what happens. Neither of us makes any promises. If it works, great. If it doesn’t, we keep it professional.” 

She kissed my cheek and whispered, “Deal.” 

Karliah suggested she would relax for the rest of the day, and after I had a quick word with Brynjolf, I headed back up to the city and into the Bee and Barb. Haelga was busy cleaning up, the room otherwise empty, but stopped everything as soon as she saw me, wrapping her arms around me and the kiss we shared had me rising to the occasion very quickly indeed. Holding her tight to my body, she definitely felt it as she started to giggle. “Not right now,” she whispered, “Though I definitely want you right now…” 

“How about a quickie?” 

She smiled and looked around. She grabbed my hand and led me to one of the tables. She sat down and rest back on her forearms, allowing me to reach under her dress to take off her panties. I took those off and inhaled her scent, which made my cock throb with anticipation. Dragging her forward, I undid my belt and unbuttoned my trousers, freeing my cock. I groaned loudly as I slid inside her, leaning down so we could share a deep kiss. 

I didn’t lie about a quickie, as I was soon fucking her hard and fast. She made no complaint, wrapping her legs around me but leaving them loose enough so I could really give it to her. We were soon making quite a lot of noise, fiddling with the buttons on her dress so I could free her breasts, tearing at her bra to free them so I could suck on her nipples. “Oh gods,” she cried. 

If I wasn’t kissing her, I was giving her breasts plenty of attention. I was lasting far longer than I thought, and eventually just had my palms placed on the table, my face not far from hers, groaning and growling as I fucked her. 

“Oh my!” I heard someone say. I turned to see Svana holding a mop, having already dropped the bucket of water. I thought she would have turned away or said something, but she simply stood there watching me fuck her aunt. 

“Don’t stop, Ragnar,” Haelga cried. Shrugging, I returned my attention to Haelga, kissing her again as I resumed fucking her. I forgot all about Svana as I continued to bury myself. Haelga eventually grabbed me and shuffled herself backwards, knocking everything off the table until she was lying flat, lifting her legs high and wide and begged for me to finish inside her. “Fuck me!” 

“You’re getting a bucketful of cum inside you in about two minutes, Haelga.” 

“I can’t wait!” 

Wrapping her arms around my neck, we kissed as I continued to pound her, and it wasn’t long until I felt the urge to cum. She must have been able to read my eyes, as all she did was break the kiss and say, “Fill me up, Ragnar.” 

I groaned loudly as I buried my cock a last time and empty myself. It was one hell of a good orgasm, and considering it had been a few days since we’d last fucked, I felt rather tired once I was finished. She just held me close to her, kissing my cheek and whispering in my ear that she loved me. “Is she still there?” I whispered. 

Haelga moved her head. “No, she’s gone now. Maybe she’s gone to masturbate about what she saw?” 

That gave me a chuckle. “Despite the fact it was her aunt?” 

“Oh no, she’d be imagining she was the one getting fucked.” She pushed me up slightly. “I’ve seen the looks she’s been giving you, Ragnar. That girls definitely thinks you’re handsome.” 

“So…?” 

“If you want to fuck her, then fuck her. And before you ask, I’m being serious. Just don’t get weird and suggest a threesome with me involved. That’s a bit too far.” 

“Wouldn’t dream of it.” 

We eventually lifted ourselves off the table. I packed myself away as I handed back her panties. She just put them in her pocket, insisting she would go without panties the rest of the day. “Maybe I’ll feel a little of your cum slide down my legs?” she whispered. All she did was quickly take off her bra before doing up the top of her dress. “Now, I really should get back to work, Ragnar. What are you doing the rest of the day?” 

“Nothing, to be honest. I will be heading off again soon, though. That issue I’m dealing with should hopefully we resolved completely within the week.” 

“Good. Why don’t you just head to the inn and I’ll join you in a couple of hours?” 

That sounded like a fine plan, so I went and sat in my usual chair, slowly drinking a couple of tankards. Ingun was the first to arrive, and she sat down opposite me. I mentioned what her mother had suggested, and she thought, though a little weird, she liked the idea of me being invited into her home, thinking it was also an invitation that I could spend the night with her too. That’s what I hoped as well, though didn’t mention the possibility her mother was actually interested in me too. I was still trying to wrap my head around that one, and wondering what would happen when I turned her down. 

Ingun had departed by the time Haelga appeared, with Svana in tow, which was a real surprise. I offered to buy them dinner and a round of drinks. Svana could barely meet my eyes, spending nearly the entire meal blushing, Haelga I think wanted to joke about it but remaining silent. Eventually I had to ask, “Like what you saw?” Svana looked at me wide-eyed, her cheeks very red, before she nodded silently. “Get a good look?” 

Svana leaned forward. “It’s so big,” she whispered. 

“Gods yes!” Haelga exclaimed quietly. 

I figured blunt would work. “You’re interested?” 

“I am, but you’re clearly with my aunt.” 

“Oh, I don’t mind sharing him with my niece. He’ll probably make you pass out with pleasure. You don’t get him tonight though.” 

“And you’re interested in me?” Svana asked me. 

“I’ll be honest. I didn’t look at you in that way originally because you were her niece, and figured you’d be off-limits. But I’ve seen enough of your looks that suggested you were interested in me, and Haelga had it figured out rather quickly too. And the more I thought about it, the more I liked the idea. If you don’t me asking in front of your aunt, have you been with a man?” 

She blushed even more if possible and shook her head. “Ah, that’s different then. Do you really want me being your first? I say that because your aunt isn’t the only one I’m intimate with. While I will try and make your time special, Svana, it will not lead to anything permanent. And trust me on this one, you will think fondly of the first person you are with.” 

“Who was yours?” Haelga wondered. I’m surprised I hadn’t mentioned that, or maybe she wanted Svana to hear it so she would understand. 

“She was a working girl in Cheydinhal by the name of Ariel. She told me not to get feelings, but that was impossible. She was beautiful, funny, ambitious to leave the life, and she was my first. What didn’t help is that I continued to see her afterwards. She probably knew I was falling for her, but never made a big deal about it. Being run out of Cyrodiil was probably for the best, as I would have only ended up broken hearted by wanting something I couldn’t have.” 

“So what about me?” Svana asked. 

“It’s your choice in the end, but can I suggest something? Wait for a man who will definitely treat you right.” 

“You’re talking yourself down here, Ragnar,” Haelga stated, grabbing my hand and giving it a squeeze. 

“I’m just trying to do the right thing here. Svana, you’re a cute young thing, and while I would like to be your first, I’m merely giving my honest opinion.” 

She smiled and leaned across to kiss my cheek. “Thank you, Ragnar. And you’re right. I think I’ll just keep you in my imagination for now. Though perhaps it would be best if you two didn’t fuck so openly.” 

Now I felt myself blush. “Ah, that might have been my idea. It had been a few days since I’d seen Haelga…” 

We enjoyed a couple more drinks before heading back to the Bunkhouse. Svana hugged me before heading to her room, whispering in my ear that she would think about me that night. I knew what she meant and simply gave her arse a gentle squeeze. That earned a gasp in my ear as no doubt she had many thoughts at once. Kissing my cheek, she disappeared quickly. “That girl will have a couple of fingers inside herself in two minutes,” Haelga said as we headed to her room. 

Though I hadn’t gone into great detail about what I would be doing except that I could be away awhile, I knew Haelga was worried, as all she wanted was to hug me in the middle of the room. I held her tightly in return, her head resting on my chest, feeling her hands tight on my back. “You’re worried?” I asked quietly. 

“Admittedly, yes, I am. I’ve realised you must be good at your job, and a hell of a fighter, but…” 

“I’ll come back, Haelga. I promise.” 

She slowly undressed me first, her lips barely leaving my skin, sending shivers up and down my body, her lips soft against my hard skin. Coat, shirt, boots, trousers were all in a pile on the floor, and a rather large tent formed in my underwear by the time she put a thumb in either side and lowered them. While desperate to have my cock in her mouth, I returned the favour first, taking delight in undressing her, though she had no bra or panties on still. 

We pleasured each other with our mouths at the same time, and while her mouth on my cock was a distraction, I could eat her out without a problem nowadays as it was something we’d done often enough now. I always complimented her about how good she tasted, as she knew I’d happily bury my face in her pussy all day and night, simply pleasing her with my tongue. She suggested that, one day, she’d take me up on that offer in the future. 

I made her cum first, which always delighted me, though once her orgasm had passed, she could totally focus on me, and it didn’t take long for her to take another load in her mouth. I still loved the fact she swallowed without hesitation. I’d cum on her face a couple of times, which she also loved me to do, but she was generally far too eager to taste me than waste it by spraying over her face. 

Swinging around, she did her usual thing of laying herself down on my chest so I could run my fingers up and down her back. “I love you, Ragnar,” she whispered. 

“You just love the fact I gave you an orgasm.” 

She chuckled, giving me a squeeze, before she said, “But you know I do. And, despite what actually seem to do with your life, you’re a decent man. From what I can gather, you’re doing what you’re about to do for the right reasons.” 

“A woman’s life was destroyed. He tried to kill me. Our vengeance is justified.” I held her tightly before I whispered, “And I love you too, Haelga.” 

It didn’t take long for me to harden, and after I’d shuffled back into a seated position, Haelga slowly slid down my cock until our groins touched, then sat for a few minutes as we made out. I offered her the choice of fucking or falling asleep with my cock inside her, though she said that would simply be impossible. She couldn’t resist starting to bounce up and down on my cock, teasing me by doing it ever so slowly to start with, feeling her squeeze her pussy around my cock, something that felt awesome, leaving her smirking at the look on my face. I’m not sure how long we made love for, but having already shared one orgasm, a second one wasn’t particularly important. She just wanted me inside her, and I just wanted to be inside her. 

Haelga eventually ended up on her back as I slowly fucked her, our mouths barely parting, her hands all over my body, her legs wrapped around me as always, holding me as tightly as possible. There wasn’t much of the dirty talk that night. Only a lot of moaning, heavy breathing, and expressions of our love for each other. I’ll be honest, there was a thought forming in the back of my mind about asking for her hand in marriage when I returned, but I’m not sure if she’d accept an open marriage. 

“Cum in me,” she whispered. She’d already had an orgasm by now, but I had kept right on fucking her. I wanted it to last, as I figured I’d go straight to sleep afterwards. “Cum in me, Ragnar,” she repeated. 

“How much do you want it?” 

“I’d sell my soul for it.” 

“How much do you love me?” 

“More than anyone in my life ever.” Wow, I didn’t expect that response. It was enough to bring my thrusting to a momentary halt. “I don’t care what you do, Ragnar. All I know is that I love every moment we’re together, and it’s not just the sex.” She paused, before adding, “Okay, half of it is probably the sex. But there’s nothing wrong with that anyway.” 

Despite being inside her, I still asked, “Are you sure you don’t mind?” 

She knew what I meant and simply stroked my cheek. “It is the teachings of Dibella, Ragnar. She accepts that we love many. And so do I. I can’t deny the women of Skyrim the chance at being with you. Or having this magnificent cock inside them. Just as long as I get it more often than them.” 

“Well, considering some of the things we get up to, or might get up to in the future, that’s fairly assured, Haelga.” 

“Good. Now, as I said, cum inside me, Ragnar. You know I don’t like wasting it by cumming anywhere else in my pussy, mouth or arse.” 

I pretty much passed out when I came, holding myself up with a forearm as I recovered. Despite now dripping with sweat, Haelga had no problem holding me, her legs still wrapped tightly around me. “Still so hard,” she said quietly. 

I chuckled, “It’ll go down soon. Trust me. After an orgasm like that…” 

Once it did, Haelga immediately turned onto her side to face me. I kissed her forehead and held her close, head nestled under my chin. I was trying hard not to just fall asleep, as I wasn’t lying. I felt utterly drained, so when she asked, “Would you like to fuck my arse next?” I couldn’t help chuckle and suggested I was a little tired. She didn’t mind, and after she settled down, her arm around my side, she fell asleep rather quickly. I continued to just stroke her back as we lay in darkness, my thoughts turning to what would happen the next day and however many days afterward. 

We both enjoyed making love in the morning, and after waking up with her mouth wrapped around my cock, she quickly moved up so she could ride me to climax, and we timed it rather well so I could basically climax at the same time. It was the first time we’d properly managed it, and she started to get a little emotional. I don’t think it was that exactly, but she knew I was heading off again, and knew it was going to be dangerous. 

Dressing a little later, we headed downstairs for breakfast, Svana joining us this time, sitting next to me rather closely. Haelga noticed and shared a rather amused glance with me, though I said or did nothing other than fill myself with food. 

After an enormously long hug at the front door, Haelga couldn’t help herself, covering my face in kisses before her mouth found mine, and I eventually had to break it, cupping her cheek with my hand, watching her eyes close and a smile form at my touch. “I love you, Haelga. And you have my word. I will be back.” 

“I love you,” she whispered, hearing her voice catch. I knew she was worried. I hugged her a final time before I stepped out the door. 

Remembering Karliah’s instructions, finding the required standing stone didn’t take too long, Brynjolf and Karliah already waiting for me. I might have been late, suggesting I was spending a last few moments with Haelga before leaving. Both understood what I meant, as they were just as aware of the dangers as I was. 

Escorting us to Nightingale Hall, one would never have noticed the entrance, cut into the side of the cliff. I was all for becoming one with Nocturnal, particularly any advantage allying myself with her might give, but you could hear the hesitation in Brynjolf’s voice. I guess it was understandable, probably still in shock from learning about Mercer. Karliah did her best to convince him that becoming a Nightingale was the right course of action. 

The hall had fallen into disrepair over the past decades, though Karliah wasn’t too worried about that. She was worried about communing with Nocturnal herself, believing she would be rather displeased with everything. Entering the first main chamber, I noticed small piles of what looked like clothing on separate stones, each with what I assumed was Nocturnal engraved on it. Karliah asked us to don the Nightingale armour, stating that it was enchanted, and though had likely sat there for many years, it would be like it had just been made. 

The armour seemed to naturally fit to my body. Tapping the chest piece with my knuckles, I could feel its strength. The gloves were tight and it barely felt like I was wearing them at all. The boots were light and I figured they’d be noiseless. And the hood and face mask would allow almost complete anonymity, what every thief loves. It wasn’t skin tight, but it was certainly superior to the armour I’d been wearing, though I asked Karliah that I store that at the hall in case I wanted it again, as it was a rather recent purchase. She laughed but said it was fine. 

Karliah led us to what she called the oath chamber. We each stood on a separate platform as she began her summons. 

“I call upon you, Lady Nocturnal, Queen of Murk and Empress of Shadow. Hear my voice!” 

Nothing happened for a few seconds before there was a glow on the platform in front of us. I had no idea what it was, but I figured it wasn’t there to kill us… yet. 

“Ah, Karliah. I was wondering when I'd hear from you again. Lose something, did we?” 

I watched as Karliah actually took a knee and bowed her head, an act of submission. “My lady, I come before you to throw myself at your mercy and to accept responsibility for my failure.” 

“You're already mine, Karliah. Your terms were struck long ago. What could you possibly offer me now?” 

“I have two others that wish to transact the Oath; to serve you both in life and in death.” 

I guess I should have been slightly worried, as being a Nord and all, I still had dreams of Sovngarde upon death. But maybe Nocturnal’s realm, wherever that was, wouldn’t be so bad? Whatever the case, Karliah and Nocturnal talked between themselves, and after they struck an agreement, Brynjolf and I were accepted as Nightingale agents. I didn’t immediately feel any different. 

Once Nocturnal disappeared, happy with the fact she had two more souls, Karliah revealed the final act of Mercer’s treachery. “Mercer was unable to unlock the Guild's vault without two keys because of what he stole from the Twilight Sepulcher...the Skeleton Key. By doing this, he's compromised our ties to Nocturnal, and in essence, caused our luck to run dry.” 

I shared a glanced with Brynjolf, though unable to see his face, couldn’t read his thoughts. “So what? the key unlocks every door or something?” 

“Something like that, Ragnar. But the key isn't only restricted to physical barriers. All of us possess untapped abilities; the potential to wield greater power, securely sealed within our minds. Once you realize the key can access these traits, the potential becomes limitless.” 

“No wonder he wanted it, but I guess I can see the dangers in having such an item.” 

“Good, then you understand why this is about more than Mercer's lust for power. If the Key isn't returned to its lock in the Twilight Sepulcher, things will never be the same for the Guild. As time passed on, our luck would diminish to the point of non-existence. And whether you know it or not, our uncanny luck defines our trade.” 

“I’ve certainly walked out of buildings wondering how the hell I managed to pick the lock…” 

Wandering back through the hall, Karliah pointed in the direction of what had once been a bedroom. There wasn’t a lot of furniture, but Brynjolf had brought along the maps and other information needed to find Mercer. He explained he’d pored over them with Vex, Delvin and Karliah the previous night, and they figured where Mercer was. 

The Eyes of the Falmer were far in the north, based in a Dwarven ruin by the name of Irkngthand. 

We agreed to leave immediately, knowing Mercer had a hell of a head start. If he’d headed straight there after Snow Veil Sanctum, I wasn’t confident of our chances regarding finding him nor the Eyes. But Brynjolf believed he would have headed back to Riften to tie up loose ends, and he was aware he kept contacts across Skyrim, ready to help at a moment’s notice. 

I already had my horse, Karliah had stolen one on the way back to Riften, while Brynjolf gave in and bought one at the stables outside Riften. With enough supplies to survive past Windhelm, we wasted no more time, digging our heels in the flanks of our horses and we… trotted off, all of us probably forgetting that horses in Skyrim barely cantered. 

At least the reasonable pace allowed us to chat, Karliah explaining more about our agreement with Nocturnal, and also more about how Mercer taking the Skeleton Key had fucked the Thieves Guild. Brynjolf admitted to just being disappointed, in addition to being utterly pissed off. He’d known Mercer for years, and while he’d always been a hard arse, he never believed Mercer would have turned his back on the Guild in such a manner. 

We camped just past Windhelm, none of us wanting to enter. Finding a clearing, we got a campfire going and set up two tents, Karliah suggesting she would share my tent. Brynjolf met my eyes and just laughed, shaking his head. “Shor’s balls, Ragnar…” 

It was far too cold to do anything, and I don’t think Karliah was suggesting we would, but she did snuggle in close later that night under the furs, both of us still dressed in our armour, only our masks taken off, so in the faint moonlight, I could see her purple eyes, finally understanding the colour after meeting Nocturnal. She eventually grabbed my arm and wrapped it around her, so I pulled her closer still, and finally bit the bullet and kissed her. 

She was a great kisser, and I think the only thing that stopped it going further was the fact it was pretty bloody cold, and no doubt she was still hesitant about making that step. When we did finally break apart, she leaned forward to rest her head on my chest. “I haven’t kissed anyone in twenty-five years,” she whispered. 

“I would ask how old you are…” 

“How old are you?” 

“Twenty-one.” 

She looked up and I could see the surprise. “Really?” Then she started to laugh, while looking rather embarrassed. “I’m just about triple your age, Ragnar!” 

“So what? You don’t look that old. And I figured elves aged slower since they live longer.” 

“We do, but still… Twenty-one…” 

Leaning forward, I whispered into her ear, “I’m young and rather virile, Karliah.” 

“I haven’t been fucked in longer,” she whispered back, “The last man was…” She trailed off. 

“Gallus?” She nodded. “You still mourn him?” 

“No. I mourned him long ago, Ragnar. But there are a lot of dormant feelings coming to the surface, knowing I am so close to gaining revenge on the man who killed him and destroyed my life.” 

I tightened my arm around her. “We’ll get Mercer. You have my word.” 

“And I believe you. Completely.” 

We drifted off like that, waking with the sun the next morning. After breaking our fast by the campfire, we quickly packed up, remounted our horses and finished the journey to Irkngthand in a couple of hours. The exterior to the ruins appeared to have been taken over by bandits. If we had time to prepare, we might have been able to sneak past them. But as time was now of the essence, we killed a few of them which sent the rest of them running. We were certainly not going to waste time chasing them down. 

The next few hours of our lives were death-defying. Irkngthand might be the ruins of a dead race, but it was still alive with their contraptions. Having never descended a Dwarven ruin before, Karliah and Brynjolf took the lead as they knew what to expect. What we did realise upon entering the first chamber was that Mercer had arrived, the dead bandits inside, their butchered bodies waiting for us to find, a sign of what he probably hoped would happen to us. 

After ten minutes or so of walking, we saw Mercer for the first time since Snow Veil Sanctum. All we could do was watch as he murdered a couple of… “Karliah, what in oblivion are those?” 

“Falmer. Have you never seen one before?” 

“No.” 

“It’s a long story. I can tell you all about them later. For now, we have to follow him.” 

Mercer did everything he could to slow us down, making sure every single Dwarven trap was reset so we had to work our way forward inch by bloody inch. More than once we found ourselves under attack from weird looking Dwarven contraptions that would have sliced apart the unwary. But it wasn’t just the contraptions. The Falmer had infested the ruin, and while they might be blind, their other senses were heightened beyond belief. Despite our best efforts to sneak by them, more often than not they’d somehow sense our presence, and Karliah was quick to suggest we don’t get hit, as the bastards poisoned their arrowheads and blades. 

We finally ended up passing through a cave, where the Falmer had made some sort of large camp. Somehow we managed to sneak around the very edge, our footsteps, as quiet as they were, covered by the sound of running water. I’m sure I wasn’t the only one who sighed with relief as we made it past and Karliah suggested we must be closed to the Eyes and to Mercer. 

Standing at the door, we shared some final words, not knowing if all three of us would walk out alive. 

“We do this for Gallus and the Guild,” Brynjolf stated. 

“For Gallus,” Karliah added. 

“And for everyone who has suffered due to his actions,” I finished. 

We managed to slip inside without being noticed, or so I thought, watching as Mercer was doing his best to dig out the second Eye, the first already on the ground below him. I was ready to tell Karliah to put an arrow in him to make our jobs a lot easier when there was a rumbling beneath my feet and I saw him look directly at us. 

“Karliah, when will you learn that you can’t the drop on me?” 

And that’s when the ground disappeared from beneath my feet and I found myself tumbling away. 

To be honest, I thought that was it. Game over.

Chapter 9: Revenge and Rebuild

My body ached. I’m sure I’d smacked my head on something as my vision was still blurry. But I felt a presence next to me. “When Brynjolf brought you before me, I could feel a sudden shift in the wind. And at that moment, I knew it would end with one of us at the end of a blade.” 

“Tell you what, Mercer. Just give me the Skeleton Key and I’ll forget about everything else you’ve done. But you’ll have to leave Skyrim. Can’t have you hanging around here.” 

That made him laugh at me. I was hoping to distract him, but Karliah nor Brynjolf were not attacking. I wondered why. Then my vision finally cleared and I could see the blade he was holding, ready to strike. His eyes were only for mine though. I thought I’d seen hatred, but his? He thoroughly despised me. “What's Karliah been filling your head with? Tales of thieves with honour? Oaths rife with falsehoods and broken promises? Nocturnal doesn't care about you, the Key or anything having to do with the Guild.” 

“Okay, I’ll answer each question. Karliah told me the truth about you, the fact you’re a conniving cunt. I do believe in honour amongst thieves. And the oath I’ve taken in regards to Nocturnal will ensure the success of the Guild once we return the Skeleton Key. It is all your fault, Mercer. You caused the influence of the Guild to slowly but surely ebb away.” 

“t's clear you'll never see the Skeleton Key as I do. Don’t you see, it’s an instrument of limitless wealth. Instead you've chosen to fall over your own foolish code.” 

“Don’t you read the stories, Mercer? The bad guy never wins! I’ll take pleasure putting a sword into your gut.” 

Before he could react, I rolled out of the way, unsheathing my sword at the same time, so that by the time I was on my feet, I had sword and shield in hand. “Getting slow in your old age, Mercer. A young warrior wouldn’t have wasted time talking. He would have put a sword in me immediately. That’s your problem. You’re full of hot air.” 

“Then the die is cast, and once again my blade will taste Nightingale blood! Karliah, I'll deal with you after I deal with your irksome companions. In the meantime, perhaps you and Brynjolf should get better acquainted.” 

I glanced to see the pair of them start to fight each other, so figured Mercer had used some sort of spell. I knew next to nothing about magic, so simply ignored them. My eyes were for Mercer. Remembering he wielded dual blades, and he was fast, I remained circumspect to begin with, confident in my own talents, and in the fact my new armour would protect me. 

He was fast, I’ll give him that, and I was on the back foot for quite a while, but I had plenty of experience myself despite my youth, and I had been the most trusted lieutenant of Guild Master Corvus of Cheydinhal. I knew how to fight, but sometimes a better defence was worth more than a good offense. So I let Mercer attack me, believing he was gaining the upper hand. Don’t get me wrong. Constantly defending was tiring, but I was waiting for the first mistake, just a moment where he left an opening that would allow me to strike. 

Most fighting is not only about how you swung a blade. It was about how you positioned your body, and perhaps the most important facet of swordplay was actually footwork. So I watched his blades while judging where he would place each foot. And what I always remember was that, in a fight to the death, things like honour are quite quickly forgotten. If you had to, use anything to your advantage, and don’t worry about fighting dirty. 

What didn’t help us was the fact there was that the very ground started to shake, and one of the pipes high above us burst, pouring water down, and I knew that the chamber was slowly but surely going to flood. I moved backwards onto dry ground, and with the higher ground, I started to use that to my advantage. I managed to put a boot into Mercer’s face, leaving blood pouring from his nose, and a minute later, finally managed to disarm him with a perfectly timed parry and swipe that sent his sword clattering into water. 

Now with only one sword, I could finally get on the front foot, and with sword, shield, elbows and kicks, I wore down his defences. I wasn’t going for a killing blow immediately, I wanted to disarm him, then give him the coup de grâce. Once I realised he was starting to tire, I pressed home my advantage, and when his second sword was sent flying, he was probably expecting an immediate killing blow. He wasn’t going to get that just yet as I grabbed him by the hair and dragged him up the stairs to the top the statue. Pushing him onto the head, I kicked out his legs, forcing him to his knees. Looking past him, I could see Brynjolf and Karliah no longer fighting. 

“Do it, Ragnar!” Karliah called. 

“What about you?” 

“As long as he dies.” 

I placed the blade to his neck. “Feel that, Mercer? That is death on your shoulder. You fucked with the wrong man.” 

“You’re just another stooge for Nocturnal.” 

“No, I’m about to make all of us very rich, Mercer. I’m going to help rebuild the Guild and restore our reputation and influence. You will lie in this chamber, quickly and quietly forgotten by all.” 

There was no time to waste as I could see the water continuing to flood the chamber, and I took his head with one clean strike, his head simply falling to the ground. I searched his body, finding the Skeleton Key in one of his pockets, putting that in one of my own. Karliah and Brynjolf joined me, both carrying an Eye of the Falmer. Wondering how the hell we were going to get out, we were saved as the roof caved in, exposing a hidden cave. I liked to think it was Nocturnal looking after us, aware we’d retrieved the Key. 

We walked towards the entrance of the cave without exchanging a word, realising we were going to have to walk back to find our horses. We’d been in the ruin for quite a while as it was now rather dark too. As it was warmer in the cave, we headed back inside and Karliah managed to get a small campfire going. We would go hungry as we had no supplies otherwise. 

Sitting down, she finally said, “I can't believe it's over. After twenty-five years in exile and just like that, it's done. All that remains is to ensure the safe return of the Skeleton Key.” She paused before adding, “I’m actually glad you killed him. I would have tortured him first, given him just a taste of what I’d been through for a quarter of a century.” 

“How do you feel?” Brynjolf wondered. 

“Relieved that it’s over. Justified at the measures taken. Sad because I think about what might have been otherwise...” 

There wasn’t a whole lot else to say and the three of us eventually just leaned back against the cave wall and slowly drifted off, Karliah ensuring she was close enough to have her head rested against me. I had no doubt she still had love in her heart for Gallus, so what would actually realistically happen between us was what she eventually decided. 

We were further away from the entrance to Irkngthand than we realised, so the three of us were rather cold and miserable, in addition to very hungry, by the time we made it back to our horses. Karliah suggested we head back to Riften first before we discuss the next and hopefully last stage of what was required to complete the agreement with Nocturnal. I thought that was a sound idea, and we agreed that we would keep riding until we made Riften stables. It took longer than a day, but riding at night wasn’t such a problem, one of us dozing as the other two kept a look out. 

At least it was daylight by the time we made it back to Riften, but the three of us were exhausted. Brynjolf and Karliah headed to the Flagon, and we agreed to meet the next morning. I headed into the Bunkhouse. Haelga was cleaning one of the dining tables, and once I’d removed my hood and mask, she burst into tears and ran towards me. I held her tightly as she wept. “I’m okay. It’s over,” I whispered. 

“I was confident in whatever you were doing, but so worried at the same time.” She leaned back and looked down. “New armour?” 

“It’s a long story and slightly unbelievable. But the new armour is excellent.” I couldn’t help the sigh that followed. “Mostly I’m just exhausted, hungry and really want a wash.” 

She gave me a soft kiss on the lips. “Head upstairs and I’ll bring up a little food and some hot water for you.” 

Once up in her bedroom, I immediately stripped off my new armour, laying down on the soft bed and near enough falling straight to sleep, only woken when shaken awake by Haelga. “Tired?” 

“Exhausted. Had a quick nap on horseback but otherwise been awake for longer than a day.” 

Getting up, I removed my underwear before she asked me to sit down. She then stripped herself nude before grabbing the bucket of hot water, and after adding a little oil, she used a cloth to start washing me. She enjoyed running it over my arms and shoulders, spending plenty of time scrubbing my chest and back, and went so far as to clean my legs and feet. All this touching made me quite hard, and after she towelled me down, she kneeled between my legs and eagerly took my cock in her mouth. 

I could only let my head roll back and groin as she quickly took my entire length, her head bobbing up and down. Like always, it felt wonderful, proving her skills with her mouth and tongue time and again. But while I would have loved nothing more than finishing in her mouth, I wanted something else. Suggesting what I did want, she happily removed her mouth and positioned herself over my cock, lowering herself down without stopping until my entire length was inside her pussy. 

“I’m not going to last long,” I warned, “And I’ll want a nap afterwards.” 

“That’s fine,” she said softly, wasting no time bouncing up and down. I moved my lips to her neck, immediately giving that a hard enough bite to leave another mark before she arched her back so I could lick and suck at her breasts. 

Haelga was soon making a lot of noise as always, while I was just trying not to cum too quickly. But all the washing, the blowjob, and now her tight, wet pussy was just too much for me, and I held her tight as I thrust up and came, groaning loudly enough that I’m sure Svana heard downstairs, though I’m sure she probably knew what we were doing anyway. Haelga settled down on my lap as we continued to make out, our kisses now soft but still full of passion and desire. Eventually it was my turn to rest my head on her chest. 

She eventually stood up and, after a quick clean up, helped me into bed. Leaning down to kiss me again, she whispered that she still had work to do, but as soon as she was finished, she’d be up to join me. I said I’d probably sleep until the next morning. “What if I woke you up offering you my arse?” 

“Well, maybe… But I am really tired!” 

That made her giggle, she kissed me a last time, and I was probably asleep by the time she was out the door. 

She came in quite a bit later, waking me up with her offer. I’d had enough sleep to at least rise to the occasion, and thankfully she was happy enough to just ride me, shoving her toy in her pussy at the same time, and she had quite the orgasm once I blasted in her arse. We both slept like logs a little later.

---

 

My hand was sore from all the handshakes I’d received since entering the Flagon. Everyone was delighted to hear that Mercer Frey was dead, and more importantly, that the Guild was on the verge of being restored to what it once was. Karliah and Brynjolf were waiting in the cistern, where we would discuss the final part of the rebuild. 

“Sleep well, Ragnar?” Brynjolf asked. 

“I don’t know about you, but I was bloody exhausted.” 

“Aye, we slept like logs too.” Then he cleared his throat. “Look, before we get down to the returning of the Skeleton Key, we’ve actually got something we need to discuss.” 

I glanced at Karliah before asking carefully, “What?” 

“The leadership of the Guild.” 

“Well, clearly it should either be yourself or Karliah. Frankly, it should be Karliah, as recompense for everything she’s been through.” 

“I've been at this game a long time, my friend. A long time. I've stolen trinkets from nobles and framed priests for murder. I'm good at what I do, maybe even one of the best. But it's all I know. I've never been one to lead. Never desired it, never cared for it. Don't want it.” 

I looked at Karliah and she added her thoughts. “There’s only one man who we agree should lead the Guild, Ragnar. Delvin and Vex agree too. Thanks to your efforts, Mercer's treachery has been exposed, and once we’ve returned the Key, all we need to do is ensure our influence spreads across Skyrim once again. As a result, we both feel that you have the potential of replacing Mercer as leader of the Thieves Guild.” 

I ran a hand through my long hair. “Seriously?” 

Brynjolf laid a hand on my shoulder. “Look, lad. Everyone in the Guild admires what you've done. Maybe they won't come out and simply tell you, but I promise you it's true. And now they know Mercer never genuinely cared about the Guild. He lacked the loyalty you obviously possess. I can't think of anyone better.” 

I looked at Karliah. “What he says is one hundred percent correct, Ragnar. And in Brynjolf and I, you will have people who can guide you as we rebuild the Guild.” 

“I’ll think about it. Let’s return the Key and start spreading our influence again. All being well, I’ll accept.” 

“Good,” Karliah stated, “So that means we can discuss what we need to do next. And, unfortunately, it’s not going to be simple. When the Skeleton Key was stolen from the Twilight Sepulcher, our access to the inner sanctum was removed. The only way to bring it back will be through the Pilgrim's Path.” 

“And that is?” I wondered. 

“To be honest, I’m not sure. It wasn't created for the Nightingales. It was created to test those who wished to serve Nocturnal in other ways. As a consequence, I have no knowledge of what you'll be facing.” 

“Will you come with me at least?” 

“I can’t, Ragnar. I've been a Nightingale for a very long time. I sold my allegiance to Nocturnal in exchange for many profitable years of thieving. Falling in love with Gallus was wrong. It was a distraction that allowed the Sepulcher to be desecrated and it likely cost him his life. Until the Key is returned, I will never set foot inside that place again.” 

“Okay, will you at least make the journey with me? Brynjolf, you’re welcome to join us too.” 

“I’ll stay here, lad,” he replied, before turning to Karliah, “But you should go with him, Karliah. Keep him company.” His tone was slightly suggestive, something both Karliah and I heard. With her face uncovered, the blush was noticeable. She looked rather shy and very cute when looking away. 

But she immediately agreed, and we didn’t really need to make any plans except gather some supplies and head to the stables. Karliah knew the way. 

We made it to Falkreath as the sun was setting, Karliah suggesting we head into the woods to make camp. I liked the idea, and we rode for another twenty or so minutes, tying our horses to a tree, and as Karliah set up the tent, I went to find wood for a fire. I managed to get that lit rather quickly, and with the supplies we’d brought, we managed to sate our hunger, at least for something regarding our stomachs. 

Sitting side by side on a log, the moon now out and stars twinkling above us, Karliah cuddled into me as it was rather cool around Falkreath. “Were you intimate with your woman last night?” she finally asked. 

“I was. Why do you ask?” 

“Just wondering.” She paused, before adding, “I wasn’t lying about falling in love being a mistake. I was a distraction to Gallus. I’m not saying I got him killed, but he was so enamoured by me that he failed to see what Mercer was doing right under his nose.” 

“Did you see it? What Mercer was doing?” 

“I never trusted him completely, but he and Gallus had been friends for years, so I think Gallus gave him wiggle room and enough rope to finally hang himself. I don’t think he ever imagined Mercer would have ever turned on him in such a manner.” 

“Don’t blame yourself, for Mercer or Gallus. Mercer had everyone fooled, most importantly Gallus. And there’s nothing wrong with falling in love.” I paused before adding, “Though I guess certain acts don’t require love, just an attraction…” 

She burst into laughter. “Smooth, Ragnar. Very smooth.” She cuddled into me. “When we return to Riften, I think we should discuss it. No, scratch that. There’s nothing to discuss. You should just carry me to a bed, strip me off and do what we both want.” 

“I’m going to need my own place…” 

“Why not Riftweald Manor? Mercer is dead and it’s better in your hands than someone else’s.” 

“Hmmm. Not a bad idea. I’ll have a chat with Maven, as I believe she still owns the land itself. Considering I have a decent relationship with her, I’m sure she won’t mind handing it over to me.” I paused before asking, “I assume that is a subtle hint that we won’t be getting naked tonight?” 

“Part of me really wants to, Ragnar. It’s been twenty-five years since I felt the touch of a man. But another few days won’t make a real difference. I want a warm room and a soft bed for the first time we make love.” 

“Make love?” 

“You will have to be gentle with me, Ragnar. Firstly, because it’s been so long. And, secondly, because I know you’re gifted.” I groaned, causing her to giggle. “I’m sure I’ll still be surprised.” 

We snuggled under the furs at little later, and it didn’t take long under our kisses turned hot, heavy and suggestive of what we both really wanted. When she ended up straddling my lap, she definitely felt the erection, unable to stop herself grinding against it despite being clothed. My hands were on her arse, enjoying how firm it was. I had a very good idea of how she was going to look naked. I immediately had a thought of Jenassa and figured Karliah was going to be even fitter. 

She eventually had to stop, stating if we kept going, she would give into temptation. So she slid off me and cuddled into me instead. She apologised for apparently teasing me, though I didn’t mind. She was a great kisser, and sometimes a make out session could be just as much fun as anything else. 

The Twilight Sepulcher was hidden away a section of forest probably rarely if ever visited, though was no doubt likely protected by magics and whatnot. Karliah was with me as far as the entrance before she insisted that she would go no further until I’d returned the Key. She hugged me and wished me good luck before I wandered inside. 

It was rather dark and the entrance was nothing grand. In fact, it looked rather abandoned, as if unvisited in decades. Figuring there was little time to waste, I headed straight to the set of stairs ahead, though my progress was halted when a spirit, or perhaps it was a ghost, approached me in return. 

After a short conversation, I realised it was Gallus. I told him what happened and that I was returning the Skeleton Key. But when I told him Karliah was still alive, the joy in his voice told me everything I needed to know. Even as a spirit, his heart was still full of love for her. He couldn’t tell me much about the Pilgrim’s Path, but he admitted that he was slowly dying, the longer the link between us and the Ebonmere remained broken. It was a subtle suggestion for me to hurry. 

There were five tests in all. The first room was guarded with Nightingale spirits, and I had to sneak by them. Despite my size and bulk, I could be surprisingly fleet of foot, and using the shadows to my advantage, sneaking by them wasn’t particularly difficult. In the second room, I discovered quite quickly that the light burned, and I had to be careful where I stepped, otherwise I’d find myself shot by poison darts. Sticking to shadows, I took my time getting past all the traps, as though in a hurry, I didn’t particularly want to be burned or shot. 

The third room was a simple test. Pull a couple of chains, extinguish the flames, darkness restored. The fourth test was where I had to take a choice of path. Both were difficult, and I eventually took the right path, where I had to time my run to avoid swinging axes and spears that would have skewered me. It took a light step, speed and a dive over a pressure plate to get through safely. 

Whoever designed these tests should be found and made to do it themselves. 

There was nowhere else to go at the end except to drop down into what looked like a dry well. I could see a pile of bones at the bottom, so figured the poor bastard had dropped down and slowly starved to death, but with no other option, I dropped down. After a few minutes, I thought I’d made one hell of a bad decision, but as quickly as I thought that, the well disappeared, nothing more than an illusion, as I found myself dropped into what appeared to be a shrine. Taking the Skeleton Key from my pocket, it had a glow, and stepping forward, I inserted it into the lock. 

I stepped back, briefly blinded by bright light, and it was then that Nightingale herself appeared in front of me. She gave a long speech, suggesting I was now her ‘Champion’, which sounded good, but she also suggested that the luck that had deserted the Guild would return, and that our hands would once again be guided by the forces at her disposal. It ended with a subtle suggestion, if not warning, for the Key not to be stolen again. And as quickly as she had appeared, she disappeared. 

Karliah must have realised that I’d returned the Key, as she appeared at my side, and it was there that she could enjoy a final goodbye with Gallus. They spoke of the love they had once shared, and hoped to be reunited in the Evergloam once Karliah passed from the world too. After sharing a fond goodbye, Gallus disappeared, though Karliah assured me that he would be waiting for her once her debt was repaid. 

With the link restored, there was a portal that led us back to the entrance and exiting out into the bright light, I heard the sigh Karliah gave. Then she turned towards and hugged me, and it was little surprise her entire body shuddered as she wept, I think releasing all the pent up emotions she’d been hiding since I first met her at Snow Veil Sanctum. 

“Thank you,” she said once she’d expelled all her tears. 

“For what?” 

“For everything, Ragnar. For helping and believing me. For helping me bring Mercer to justice. Everything you’ve done allowed me to say goodbye.” 

“I guess you never got to say it,” I said quietly. 

“No, and now that I have, I can properly move on with my life.” 

Lifting her chin with my finger, I asked, “Before we make that leap, you are aware…” 

“I am, Ragnar. I’m not expecting you to change. Besides, we’ll be busy working, won’t we? But it would nice to return to Riften and know you might be there waiting for me.” 

“Like me, eh?” 

“I do.” 

“Good. As I’ve already let you know what I think.” 

We mounted our horses and began our journey back to Riften. We camped halfway between Falkreath and Riften, stopping as the sun began to set, and Karliah proved rather sneaky as she unveiled a bottle of wine that she’d hidden away. We made a series of toasts and a couple of drinks helped us finally relax completely, and Karliah asked me plenty of questions about my previous life. I’m generally an open book, probably not always the best thing considering my line of work, but I’m usually honest about most things. 

“You escaped the life. Why did you return?” 

“Because I never lost my skills. Even when working with the Fighter’s Guild, I could be walking through a crowd and I could pick a dozen marks, knowing exactly what I’d have to do to nick a coin purse, jewellery or anything else I wanted. I never lost the desire. The only reason I stopped was that I was nearly killed, so thought I should change the road I was on.” 

“There is certainly a thrill to what we do.” 

“Aye. I enjoyed working as a fighter. I’d happily do it again. But I was raised a thief, I’m bloody good at it, and what I know now is that we’re all going to make a lot of coin. But I will be instituting some changes before we get to work.” 

“What sort of changes?” 

“I’ll let you know when the time comes. But we’re not just going to be about gold and wealth.” 

Karliah gave me a look, and I think she understood what I might mean. I knew what I meant, as the idea had been in my head since Brynjolf suggested I should be the new Guild Master. I’m sure some might not like the idea, but while I was a thief and warrior at heart, I also tried to do the right thing, as a balance for the things I knew I was doing wrong. 

Returning to Riften by early afternoon the next day, Karliah went straight to the Flagon while I made a beeline for Maven’s house. She was home and we sat at her dining table as I began to explain everything that happened. She knew about Goldenglow and Honningbew, but knew nothing about anything Mercer had been up to and his complete betrayal of the Guild. That took her completely and utterly by surprise. “I had absolutely no idea he was capable of something like that,” she admitted. 

“And that’s why he is now dead and the Guild will be restored.” 

She smirked. “So… I take it you are the new Guild Master? I can assume you are from the way you’re talking, and the fact it is you here now.” 

“It’s not official yet, but yes, I will be.” 

“Then we will have a rather close relationship going forward, Ragnar.” 

“How close, Maven?” 

I felt a foot run up my leg and it eventually nestled in my crotch. All she did was look at me in the eyes. “Depends on you really, Ragnar.” 

I had to be blunt. “You’re serious? What about Ingun?” 

“What she won’t know won’t hurt her. I’m a flesh and blood woman. And I think you’ll be rather intrigued by some of my desires.” 

“Are you married?” 

“I’m widowed. The men you see in this house are my sons.” 

“Let me think about it.” To be fair, she was simply an older version of Ingun. Seeing them walk side by side in town, they looking remarkably similar. “What I did want to ask about is Riftweald Manor. Now that Mercer is dead, the house will be empty. Can I have it please?” 

She laughed. “I don’t get to make that choice, Ragnar. It’s up to you as Mercer owned the house and land. I gave I all to him, so if you find the deeds somewhere, take them to the jarl and the steward will ensure the place is now in your name. You might have to pay some taxes, but I’m sure you can afford it.” 

Maven thanked me for informing her of everything that happened, and I headed to Riftweald Manor. The front door was still unlocked, and I headed upstairs, looking for the deeds to the house. It took a little investigating, but I found the deeds and immediately headed to the Keep. I was pointed in the direction of her steward, and after answering a series of questions, explaining that Mercer had left Riften for pastures new, the steward didn’t seem to really actually care. I handed over a bag of coin and I received new titles for the house. Riftweald Manor was now mine. 

After catching up with Brynjolf and everyone else, letting them know I’d spoken to Maven and sorted everything out, I spent a week getting Riftweald Manor in order. I practically emptied the place out of the furniture Mercer had left behind and bought everything new, making it a real home to live in, as I was not going to spend any more time living down in the cistern. I wanted a more comfortable life when not sleeping on the road. I did brick up the hidden entrance, as I didn’t think that was necessary, and made sure all the windows were unlocked so I could let in plenty of fresh air. 

I let Haelga know I had my own place, but I sat down and explained the friendship I’d struck up with Karliah. She smiled, mentioning that I’d explained it all before leaving for Irkngthand, so she wasn’t offended when I said we had been waiting for me to find a place for us to be intimate for the first time. It probably sounded pathetic when I thanked her for understanding. All she did was kiss my cheek, told me to enjoy myself and that she hoped to be my next guest. I promised she would be a welcome guest more often than not… And that I had Shrine of Dibella waiting for her in a separate room, which had certain features she might enjoy. She knew exactly what I meant, earning the most beautiful of smiles before receiving whispers in my ear of such an erotic nature, I near enough dragged her upstairs. 

Karliah was to be my first guest, wandering outside the gates of Riften, back towards Nightingale Hall. She had mentioned that she would now live there instead of the Guild, finding comfort in solitude, though she hoped one or two might eventually join here there. She’d been as busy as I, the bedroom she would call home already full of colour and a feel that suggested she would be rather happy there. What made her happier was the invitation to my house, with an offer of dinner too. 

Knocking on the door of my house later that day, I opened it and felt my jaw drop wide. Gone was the Nightingale armour she’d worn since the day we’d met. Instead, she wore a beautiful purple dress, tight to her body, flowing down to just above her ankles. Her raven hair was in a pattern she immediately explained was something all Dunmer women would wear when being courted. 

“Courted?” I asked once we’d sat down, eating the meal I’d prepared. I’m not the best cook, but I haven’t killed myself yet. 

“Well, I haven’t just jumped into bed with you, Ragnar. We’ve got to know each other first. But I am also going to be honest with myself. While I will likely develop feelings as we go along, I will not make the same mistake as I did with Gallus.” She held up a hand to halt what I was going to say before reaching across to grab my hand. “We will be intimate, Ragnar, and I hope it will be often, because as I’ve already told you, I do like you. Quite a bit, to be honest. But we will remain only very good friends. That will suit both of us, yes?” 

“Actually, it would. I’m glad you said it though.” 

Finishing dinner, on which I received a rather nice compliment, not that it was much to cook – meat, potato, vegetables – we retired to my sitting room, where a fire was burning and I’d bought a nice lounge where we could relax in front of it, enjoying another bottle of wine. It took all of five minutes for us to be making out. I have no doubt we desired each other completely, but I could sense we were taking our time. I didn’t want to rush it with Karliah, and while I think part of wanted me to simply pick her up, dump her on my bed and just ravish her, she was enjoying the fact I just wanted to kiss her, in between sips of wine and occasional conversation. 

I waited for her to suggest we head to the bedroom. Once she did, I took her by the hand and led her upstairs. I received more compliments for the decoration, ensuring that there was a fusion of Dibella, though most of that was in another room for when Haelga visited, and also a hint of Nocturnal, primarily with the colours I used. 

“You have nice taste, Ragnar,” Karliah stated as we stood at the foot of the bed. 

“Well, I now worship an aedra and have submitted to a daedra.” 

“Aedra?” 

“Dibella! I thought that would have been obvious.” 

“So your other woman…?” 

“Takes her Dibellan worship very seriously!” 

She turned towards me as she laughed for a moment, wrapping her arms around my neck as I rested mine on her lower back. “So what about me, Ragnar?” she asked softly. 

I sensed a trap, so asked, “How do you mean?” 

“Well, be honest. Do you love this other woman?” 

I nodded. “In a way, I do. I know that must sound…” 

She shut me up by placing a hand over my mouth. “I understand. You enjoy the relationship you’ve built with her?” I nodded silently. “But you also enjoy the time you spend together, not just physically?” 

“Yes." 

“Well, as I said on the way back from the Sepulcher, is that we will be friends, close friends, who may also occasionally… Well, more than occasionally have sex. Is that what you would like?” 

“Definitely.” 

"So would I.” 

The kiss we shared next was a sigh of things to come, and I wasted no time taking off her dress, leaving her in just an exquisite pair of bra and panties, once she’d kicked off her shoes, standing around four inches shorter than me. Taking great delight in undressing me, her hands definitely wandered over my body, running a couple of fingers over the scars remaining after what happened at Snow Veil Sanctum. 

“I’m sorry,” she whispered before kissed both of them. 

“Nothing to be sorry for. The fault was Mercer’s.” 

Once I was naked, she stood back to appreciate my physique. I could see it excited her, and once her eyes fell to my now rather erect cock, there was the usual quiet exclamation of, “Oh my!” 

Pulling her towards me, I kissed her again as my hands moved to undo her bra. I’d undone enough of those over the years that I could do it once handed, taking a moment to look at her breasts. They were small, but absolute perfect for her, a hand immediately moving to them and her very hard nipple. Running a hand down her flat, toned stomach, I ran my hand under her panties towards her pussy, unsurprised to feel she was very, very wet already. She helped me by lowering her panties and flinging those somewhere with a foot. 

“Play with me,” she whispered, breaking our kiss for a moment. 

“Lie down?” 

She smirked. “No, make me cum standing.” 

“You’re confident that’s going to happen.” 

“Ragnar, first of all, it’s you. I mean, look at you. No wonder I’ve heard rumours of all these women wanting to be with you. Second of all, it’s been twenty-five years. Just knowing you’re going to touch me will be enough.” 

She wasn’t lying, as after briefing teasing her entrance, I slid a couple of fingers inside her. It was a little awkward, but Karliah lifted a leg and wrapped around me, able to balance on just one as I fucked her with my fingers. “Told you,” she whispered before resuming our kiss. 

It took all of five minutes before she had to break the kiss and held onto me tight, her breathing suggesting she was already very excited. I eventually had to pick her up and carry her to the bed, where after laying her down, I crouched and used my mouth on her instead. She cried out loudly when she felt my tongue on her for the first time, a hand immediately grabbing my hair to hold me in placed, noticing her legs spread wide so I had full access to her. 

Her orgasm arrived very quickly, far quicker than I expected. She was loud as she cried out my name, and begged for me to continue. I’m fairly sure she was crying as she did, though assured me it was simply the sheer relief of having finally had someone else make her cum after all these years. So I quite happily kept eating her out until she had a second one, that one arriving a little later. Once she’d come down from a second high, she let go of my hair and asked me to stop for the moment. So I kissed up her body, enjoying the feeling of her skin against my lips. She shuffled back so I could hover above her. 

“Gods, Ragnar, where did you...” 

“Lots of practice.” 

“I think I should return the favour.” 

I couldn’t help smile as I leaned down to her ear. “I only want my cock one place tonight, Karliah.” 

Reaching down between us, I felt her rather delicate hand grasp my length. “Ragnar, I can’t get my hand around it,” she whispered. 

“Maybe you just small hands?” 

That made her giggle. “Well, small hands get into tight places.” 

She positioned me at her entrance before removing her hand, wrapping her arms around my neck. Ever so slowly, I pushed forward to enter her. Gods, was she ever so tight. My face must have been a picture as she said, “So I feel good, yes?” 

“Wait until I’m all the way inside you, then I’ll ask the same question.” 

Her arms tightened around me the more I inserted, almost feeling her stretch to accommodate me. She breathed my name more than once, desperate to kiss me. By the time our groins touched, her face was one of utter bliss. I’m sure I look rather pleased myself. She asked me not to move for a few moments, stating she simply wanted to enjoy the thrill of having a man inside her once again. To be honest, I could have stayed like that most of the night. I’m not sure if all Dunmer were the same, but the two I’d been with had the tightest pussies around. 

I slowly started to move, and she asked me immediately not to do it too hard. To be honest, I didn’t need to. The feel of sliding inside that tight, wet pussy of hers was going to be more than enough to get me off, letting her know I probably wasn’t going to last long at all. She didn’t mind whatsoever, hoping this would simply be the first of many times we would make love that night. 

Feeling those lithe legs of hers wrap around me almost set me off. It changed the angle of how I entered her, and she cried out. I thought I hurt her, but she said it simply felt even better, before she kissed me deeply again, the sort of kiss that would only ever make me harder. 

Breaking the kiss, she pulled my head gently next to hers. “You feel wonderful, Ragnar. Why have I waited so long?” 

“I didn’t mind, Karliah. You know that.” 

“Good things come to those who wait, right?” It felt like only five minutes, perhaps it was longer, but I eventually had to warn her I was about to cum. She heard the hidden question in the statement, and gave me no indication that I was finishing anywhere except inside her. “I’ve prepared,” she admitted, “I have more than enough potions.” 

As I neared climax, I upped the tempo more and she still thoroughly enjoyed it, as it was nothing like the hard fucking I did with Haelga. I don’t think Karliah could handle that… yet, if she was ever interested. But it was still a heavenly climax as I buried myself a final time, and she held onto me for a while, her hands stroking my back as I recovered. 

After a quick clean up, we lay together, our heads now on the soft pillows, Karliah cuddling into my side, an arm of mine wrapped around hers. “This is going to sound like a stupid question, but can you get pregnant? I mean, you said you’re older than me, quite a bit older…” 

She shrugged. “I’m not sure, to be honest, but I’d rather not take that chance.” 

“Sensible, but I was just curious.” 

She had offered to blow me earlier, and she was still tempted, as she quickly kissed me again, before moving down my body. Once down near my groin, my cock was already starting to harden, and it was near enough at full mast one she had her mouth around it. I’ll be honest, she obviously hadn’t given a blowjob in a while, but she was desperate to please me, knowing the one thing many loved was that she should maintain eye contact. I couldn’t help smile as I watched her head bob up and down. 

I’m not sure if she was waiting for me to cum in her mouth or not, but I eventually gestured for her stop and instead straddle me. She didn’t sit straight down on my cock, instead laying it flat against me and running her pussy along it. That gave me the perfect opportunity to look at her body. There were a few scars, as expected, but she was near enough flawless. 

“You think I’m beautiful?” she asked, sounding a little unsure. 

“Gods yes. Never had a Dunmer like you before.” 

“How many have you had?” 

“Three before you.” I pulled her down for a moment to whisper in her ear, “But your pussy is by far the best.” 

That made her laugh before she sat back up, continuing to rub herself along my length. I’m sure it was teasing herself as much as it did me, but I could have watched that body of hers all night doing it. But I think it eventually got too much for her, as she finally sat up, grabbed my cock, and placed it at her entrance. I usually loved to watch my cock disappear inside a woman, but for once I watched her face. Gods, her face lit up as she slowly took my length, crying out rather loudly at times as she adjusted to my size again. 

She shuddered once she’d settled on my crotch, smiling away as she admitted, “I think I nearly came just then.” 

“That good?” 

“It’s certainly hitting the right spots. Now, just let me control it this time, Ragnar. You just lie back and provide the cock.” 

Despite the confident tone, she didn’t last long, her first orgasm arriving very quickly. She rode her way through it, barely, starting to ride a little harder and faster as she became ever more accustomed to what was inside her. Wondering if she was going to have another one soon, she could barely put three words together, leaning forward with both hands on my chest as she properly started to ride me. That sent sensations up and down my cock, and my body, and I knew I was going to cum again quite soon myself. 

Climaxing a second time, that’s when she had to cry enough, at least for the moment, collapsing on my chest, feeling hers rise and fall as she murmured how good she felt. I really needed to cum, so she lifted herself up, and suggested I just cum on her, so I left a load on her arse and lower back, suggesting we’d just clean it off later. 

We both had a little nap, Karliah not moving off me at all. Waking up a little later, I grabbed a little water and cloth to clean her back, and we made love again, our appetites for each other still not quite sated for the moment. Apart from Karliah being on her back and me between her legs, there was only endless amounts of kissing and caressing, with plenty of romantic words shared between us too. I wasn’t quite falling for her, but I knew we would be very close going forward. I was left thinking she just wanted a man who she could trust and know that would treat her right. 

Cuddling under the covers later, Karliah spooned against me, we lay in silence and conversed quietly about nothing particularly important, until she said, “Thank you for tonight, Ragnar.”

“You don’t have to thank me.” 

“I know, but the entire evening, since I walked in the door, your focus has been on making me… happy. I’ve had a near constant grin since you opened the door. I can’t remember the last time I felt remotely happy.” She paused before adding, “Promise me one thing, Ragnar.” 

“Of course.” 

“Never say you love me, or you’re in love with me. Even if you do. And I promise to do the same.” 

I could understand why she said that, so I agreed. I won’t say wholeheartedly, because if we did fall in love, we’d be denying ourselves possible happiness. I had no idea what was going to happen with Haelga. Or Ingun. Or any other woman I met. But I understand why she said it, and to be honest, it was probably the best course of action. Work alongside each other. Enjoy the other’s company. Enjoy some really hot sex. But don’t let feelings cloud our judgement. 

I did have to say, “You say that like you expect to fall in love with me, Karliah.” 

She turned around to face me. “Because I know I will. But I can’t repeat history, Ragnar. My heart won’t be able to take it.” 

I was about to say ‘I won’t end up like Gallus’, but who was I to make that sort of promise? I could die tomorrow if a mission went wrong. So I promised her that, if I did fall for her completely, I’d keep it to myself. 

It would probably end up being a hard promise to keep.

Chapter 10: Rise of the Guild

Though I was leader in name, Brynjolf pulled me aside and said he’d rather not announce it until he had word from across Skyrim that the Guild was present. I agreed, suggesting that only when the Guild was back at full strength would I have proven worthy of the position. I did suggest that he or Karliah would still be the better choice. Brynjolf just retorted, suggesting in return that I was being overly modest. 

Not one to just sit back and take the plaudits, I was immediately in Brynjolf’s and Delvin’s ears about jobs. While I could easily just turn up in a city and go on the rob, I preferred specific, high value targets, the sort that either had a specific buyer or at least something that could be fenced that would be a nice little earner. 

The first job I was given had me complaining to Brynjolf about the fact it was too damned easy. Break into Dragonsreach in Whiterun, forge a ledger and steal a letter. Hardly bloody difficult. Delvin cracked up laughing as I demanded something a little more taxing on my skills, thinking I was nuts. “Most thieves want easy scores,” he said. 

“Others might, but I like that hint of danger.” 

Delvin gave me another job a week later, this time in Solitude. Knowing I’d be gone for quite a while, I thought I’d invite someone along for company. I asked Haelga first, figuring we might even be able to make it a little romantic. But she had two reasons why she couldn’t come. One, Svana just couldn’t run the Bunkhouse alone, which I understood. And, two, she was a vehement Stormcloak supporter and wouldn’t feel comfortable being in the still loyal to the Empire capital of Skyrim. I knew she was a supporter, it was a topic we never really discussed, but didn’t think she was that supportive. I didn’t mind, and accepted. 

So I asked Karliah if she’d like to go. She wasn’t up to much herself so accepted. We wouldn’t need too many supplies for the two-day journey, though agreed we’d avoid Whiterun and simply camp on the way to Solitude. Other than that, I suggested we simply book a room at the inn when we arrived and go from there. We packed our Nightingale armour away, agreeing to only wear that when actually on the job, otherwise we’d wear regular armour covered by a warm coat. 

Normally I would have spent the night before leaving on such a journey with Haelga, but I had received a dinner invitation from Maven, to join her and her daughter. I accepted, believing a refusal would have offended her. When I told Haelga, she didn’t know whether to laugh or not, figuring I was a lamb to the wolves. I smirked, retorting that she must underestimate me. She thought I’d taken offense, assuring her I hadn’t, admitting it would be an interesting experience. 

Maven and Ingun had apparently cooked dinner and certainly put on a smorgasbord of food on the table, allied with a choice of a few wines and even some brandy if so chose. Ingun had made sure she sat next to me, as close as possible, and her hand was soon caressing my thigh. Maven noticed, of course, though didn’t mention it, simply engaging me in conversation about what I was up to. By now, Ingun had a very good idea of what I did, and while I never openly admitted it, she didn’t seem to care. Pretty much the only thing she warned me not to do was get caught. 

After dinner, we retired to the sitting room by the fire, where I found myself in between mother and daughter. I was thinking this could go horribly wrong, or go in a direction completely unexpected, and a little weird. Thankfully, while Maven had made her intentions clear earlier, she was simply enjoying some light flirting with me, which still felt a little strange, as I knew she was usually an absolute ball breaker. Hearing her giggle at one or two of my jokes had me exchanging glances with Ingun, who looked utterly dumbfounded in her change in demeanour. 

Maven eventually headed to bed before Ingun and I, and let me know what she would be doing upstairs once she was alone. She wasn’t as quiet as she thought as I know Ingun heard every word, before she disappeared upstairs. 

"So mother likes you too?” Ingun asked once we were alone. 

“It appears she does.” 

“Understandable, but I have to say, that was weird to see. Mother does not giggle, nor flirt so outrageously. And she definitely does not admit to masturbating to another man while her daughter sits next to him!” 

“Well, it was either pleasure herself or make an awkward suggestion.” Ingun pulled a face which had me crack up with laughter. “I thought it would get the reaction. I’m thankful she didn’t suggest it.” 

“Would you, though?” 

“Would I what?” 

“Would you fuck my mother? Would you actually have the balls, and I mean that figuratively and literally, to fuck Maven Black-Briar?” 

“To be honest, I’m not entirely sure. I mean, she’s an older version of you. And it’s weird seeing her act in such a way. But, to be honest, probably not. Though I don’t like leading her on either.” Meeting her eyes, I asked, “What would you think?” 

“It would be weird if I could sit there with mother comparing our lover. But I also understand why. She must get lonely. She’s been a widower for a long time now.” 

Thankfully we agreed to move the topic of conversation on to something different, and after finishing the glass of wine, we headed downstairs to her bedroom. It had been a long time since we’d been intimate, and Ingun was very, very eager to please, and desperate for me to slide my cock inside her. I would normally have enjoyed going down on her, but once we were naked, she got down on all fours on the floor, thankfully covered by a nice thick rug, and begged for me to just fuck her. 

Seeing her in such a position, her arse up in the air, her pussy wet and ready, I willingly obliged her. If someone had walked in, we’d have looked like a pair of animals rutting, as she had her head on the ground, arse raised as high as possible as I crouched over her, ramming my cock into her. She was loving it, moaning my name or other things not particularly intelligible, and constantly asking for it to be harder and faster. 

I had a feeling she was trying to prove something to me too, but she needn’t have worried. I remembered our first time rather fondly, and had simply been waiting for another opportunity to be intimate with her. But I wasn’t going to complain about the completely submissive attitude she’d taken so far, but it wasn’t something I expected nor wanted. Well, except for Haelga, but we were still exploring that aspect of our sex life… 

Ingun eventually took a load inside her, which satisfied her completely, both of us collapsing to the ground once I pulled out. She shuffled across and threw a hand across my chest. “Gods, I needed that,” she murmured. 

“What?” 

“To just be fucked hard. I’ve been wet most of the night, Ragnar, so you didn’t have to bother doing anything else.” I couldn’t help laugh, unsure of what to say to such a confession. “I still want you to cum in my mouth sometime this evening though.” My laughter continued at such honesty, simply because it was so unexpected. 

To prove her point, she gave me around fifteen minutes before she moved down my body. Considering her attitude that evening, I made sure I stood up so she had to kneel. The look in her eyes as she sucked my cock was… I’m not sure. It wasn’t love, that’s for sure. But there was something that suggested she was very happy with what was happening. I don’t honestly think she was into all that dominant and submissive thing that Haelga liked, I think she was just happy with me taking the lead. And as she took my length, I remained gentle with her, stroking her hair and letting her know how beautiful she was, how smart she was, and all the other positive things I knew and liked about it. 

Then I came in her mouth, which made her incredibly happy, and once she’d taken her time to clean me up, we got under the blankets of her bed and snuggled for a little while. “When am I going to be invited to your new place?” she wondered. 

“I’ve been meaning to, but life is still a little hectic with everything going on. Plus, you know, I have others…” 

“Who’s the Dunmer I’ve seen go in occasionally?” 

“Karliah. I work with her.” 

“She’s very pretty, Ragnar.” I looked at her, surprised she’d say something nice about another woman I was intimate with. “What? She is! And she has excellent taste in clothes.” 

“She’s also a lot older than me. I’ve never been with a woman with such an age gap between us, though it is different as elves live so long compared to us.” 

“How much older?” 

“Triple my age, and a little more!” That made her laugh. “I know! I can honestly say if she was human, the thought would never have crossed my mind, but as a Dunmer, she barely looks a day over, what, thirty, thirty-five…” 

“I’m still waiting for that invitation from Haelga, by the way.” I gave her a curious look, not remembering to what she was referring. That caused her to giggle. “You seriously don’t remember? Haelga made it quite clear she’d like to taste me too.” 

“Oh, that’s right.” 

“I can’t believe that you, as a man, forgot about the possibility of a threesome!” 

I shrugged. “I’ve had one or two. While they’re fun at times, sometimes it’s not what it’s crack up to be either. Don’t get me wrong, having you and Haelga at once will be very good indeed. I’ll mention it to Haelga when I get back from Solitude.” 

Conversation ceased as we started to make out again, and once I was hard, Ingun straddled me, slid herself down my cock and, to my surprise, gently started to ride me. She must have noticed my look, as she mentioned I’d fucked her hard as she’d wanted, now it was time to make love to her. I shuffled back so I was in more of a seated position, lavishing her breasts with plenty of attention, interspersed with more making out. I let Ingun control the tempo completely, and she really took her time. Resting her forehead against mine, she stared into my eyes, a slight smile on her face, listening to her breathing, the occasional moan, a whisper of my name, a compliment about what my cock was doing to her. 

I loved running my hands over her body. I loved running my hands over any woman’s body I was intimate with, as they were usually so soft compared to mine. Ingun was completely different to Haelga and Karliah. She wasn’t athletic at all. She wasn’t slim, though her curves were faint, as she still looked after herself. Her breasts were wonderful, continuing to give them plenty of attention, while I loved grabbing a handful of her arse, particularly when she was riding me. 

She couldn’t ride me forever, not in such a manner, without feeling the need to finally have an orgasm. I’m not sure how long we’d been at it before she finally picked up the tempo, immediately riding me faster and a hell of a lot faster, thrusting down on my cock with such force, I wondered how she didn’t hurt herself. But it worked, as she arched her back as she climaxed, screaming out my name so loudly, I’m sure Maven would have heard us upstairs. I had to hold onto her tightly as she near enough passed out, pulling her back towards me as she collapsed against my chest. 

“Okay, that was really fucking good,” she whispered. 

“Glad you enjoyed my cock so much.” 

“Not just your cock, Ragnar,” she said softly, lifting her head to lay a gentle kiss on my lips before resting her head back down against my chest. 

We sat like that for a while, my cock still hard an inside her. She eventually realised and asked if I needed to cum again. I said I would like to, so she happily blew me to completion a second time. I just called her greedy as she swallowed another load. She happily admitted that what I gave her tasted quite nice. I wasn’t one to judge that, but as I happily ate women out, I guess it was roughly the same. 

Spooning together a little later, Ingun holding both my hands, ensuring her body was moulded into mine, she admitted to liking me quite a lot. I returned the same words, though she added further that she knew it would never be more, but until she met a man she could see a future with, she was happy for our arrangement to continue. That was good news to me, and I said once she found another, I would sadly, but not reluctantly, as that would be unfair, let her go. 

Breakfast wasn’t as awkward as I thought it would be the next morning. Ingun had a constant smile on her face, the smile of a woman who’d been satisfied the night before. Maven looked like she had a hangover, and she admitted to perhaps drinking a bit too much wine, though she still thanked me for the company the night before. 

Heading back to Riftweald, I’d packed before heading out, so all I needed to do was change into the armour I’d bought from Grelka, cover that with my coat, then head out to the stables to meet Karliah. She knew what I’d been up to the night before, asking one or two pointed questions, primarily about Maven to my amusement. I could happily state I only had dinner with Maven, though didn’t go into details about what I’d been up to with Ingun. I knew Karliah still found the whole Maven thing amusing. 

The ride towards Whiterun took place without incident, keeping the pace gentle but ensuring we covered enough distance by nightfall so that we’d make Solitude by nightfall the next day. Camping on the plains of Whiterun, it was a clear night, the two moons providing light. Karliah and I sat on a log and spent a lot of time looking up at the stars after we’d had dinner, sharing a bottle of wine. Heading to bed later, all we did was take off our armour and cuddle under the blankets. Neither of us rode horses often, so we were both feeling a little sore after a day in the saddle. 

The next day wasn’t without incident, as we found our progress halted around lunchtime by half a dozen bandits, threatening to kill us if we didn’t hand over our supplies and horses. The fact we showed absolutely no fear put them off enough that they didn’t notice Karliah get her bow ready. I dismounted, sword and shield in hand, and by the time I was past the head of my horse, Karliah had her bow up and an arrow fired. Two bandits came towards me. Neither were particularly good swordsman, and with my experience, and confidence, the first dropped rather easily, the second at least got in a couple of decent swings before I cut him down. Three of the bandits had taken arrows, two dead, the other wounded, leaving one final bandit alive. He simply dropped his weapons, turned and ran. I raised a hand to Karliah not to bother. “We defend ourselves but we’re not cold-blooded killers,” I said. 

She agreed, and after I remounted my horse, we restarted our journey, which was uninterrupted all the way to Solitude. It was dusk by the time we arrived, so after stabling our horses, we headed through the gates, barely earning a curious glance from the two guards, and straight for the Winking Skeever. Unsure of how long we’d be in town for, the innkeeper agreed to payment each morning once we’d decided what to do. Karliah hadn’t been in Solitude for years, so after we’d changed into some regular clothing, we strolled the streets hand in hand, and it felt more like a date than being on the job, so much so that she eventually wrapped an arm around and cuddled into me as we strolled. 

Heading back to the tavern for a meal and a drink, we ended up talking with a few of the locals, catching up on the local gossip. Some of it was about the civil war, though I admitted to seeing little signs of it, told that it was apparently a stalemate with no sign of it changing. The main topic of conversation was still about what happened between the High King and Ulfric. Despite being in Solitude, a few did admit that what Ulfric did wasn’t particularly honourable, but he had challenged the young king in the correct manner. We sat with people until last call, heading up to bed once we’d finished our drinks, where we made love before falling asleep. 

The next morning, we were heading to the house of the local contact when we found ourselves stopped by an Argonian. “You two are passing through Solitude? Maybe you're looking to make some easy gold, yes?” 

I shared a glance with Karliah. “I can speak for both of us that we like gold,” I replied, “Why do you ask?” 

“It's easy to find things to sell. Things nobody will miss. Things from underground, or just left lying around in someone's house. I bet the two of us, we're very alike. So why not take the next step? We can help each other. My sister Deeja and I are treasure hunters. We like to collect things.” 

“So you’re thieves?” Karliah pretty much accused. 

“Of course not! Thieves take what is precious. Thieves steal. We just take what will not be missed. What no one needs anymore. Maybe we take some weapons and stop a few deaths. Who would call that thievery?” 

I’ve always said you can’t bullshit a bullshitter. “Look, do you know who we are?” I wondered. 

“No. Should I?” 

I stepped closer, unsurprised that he was immediately intimidated. “We’re with the Guild,” I whispered, “And you shouldn’t be performing jobs like this without their knowledge.” 

“I heard the Guild was back but had no idea you were in operating in Solitude again.” 

“We’re technically not at the moment, but we’re here at the moment working on regaining a foothold.” 

“Okay, I’ll tell you our idea. With the war, many more ships come through Solitude docks. Loaded with weapons and pay, but few people, as most are either on the front line. But these ships pass through dangerous waters. We have an interest in one of those boats, the Icerunner. The Solitude Lighthouse will be guiding it in... But if its fire were to go out, the Icerunner would run aground.” 

“When is it expected to arrive?” Karliah asked. 

“Well, let’s say if the fire were to go out sometime tonight, the Icerunner won’t make it into dock tomorrow.” 

“That sounds like we have at least a little time. Tell you what, we’ll do what we need to do right now, but we might take a look into this tonight,” I said. 

“Well, it is up to you in the end. If the fire were to go out in the lighthouse, the ship will run aground. If not, the ship will dock safely.” And with those words, the Argonian turned and walked away.

Karliah and I resumed walking to the house we’d been told to visit, talking over what we’d been told. We agreed that something about it smelled fishy, but agreed that we’d get involved and find out what was going on. I suggested there would be two outcomes; we’d either have a new ally in Solitude, or… we’d take out a rival faction. 

After speaking with our contact, the task given was rather simple, but he assured us that, if completed successfully, the Guild would once again have a foothold in Solitude. Obtaining the Balmora Blue that we needed could have been more expensive than originally intended, the seller realising she was dealing with two well-trained Guild members ensuring she saw sense and sold it at a more reasonable rate. 

Heading to where a ship called the Dainty Sload was docked, Karliah suggested she would be the best choice to infiltrate and plant the drug. I didn’t have to worry about her. Quite frankly, she was a better thief than I was, and could certainly make it all the way into the ship and out without being seen, and if required, could kill silently. 

I hid well enough that I could watch her slip onto the ship without being noticed, and simply kept watch, waiting for her to reappear. I have no idea if she had to fight her way to the captain’s cabin or not, but I didn’t have to wait as long as I thought for her to reappear, giving a short, sharp whistle so she knew where I was. Once in the treeline with me, she said, “Easy peasy.” 

“You make this far too simple at times, Karliah.” 

“I make it look simple. I had to kill half of them inside. I’ve hidden their bodies so they won’t be found until the guards arrive to arrest the captain.” 

“Good. So I think it’s best we make ourselves scarce and start planning for tonight.” 

We immediately headed back to the Winking Skeever and relaxed until near sundown. Once the sky turned the usual mix of orange and purple to signify dusk descending, we headed towards the lighthouse. For some reason, it appeared to be unoccupied, so slipping inside and then up towards the fire wasn’t a problem. From the top of the lighthouse, you could see for what felt like miles. Putting out the fire wasn’t an issue. There wasn’t a bucket of water we could use, so Karliah used magic. Watching ice appeared from palm to extinguish the flame was near mesmerising. Our part of the plan complete, we headed back to the inn. 

In our room after dinner and drink, we could hear the music from downstairs, Karliah mentioning she hadn’t danced in quite a while. So I offered my hand and held her close, moving to the music. I managed to not step on her feet as I held her, Karliah resting her head on my chest. I guess the relaxed mood helped, and certainly the music, as we were soon kissing as we danced. Kissing led to hands exploring. Hands exploring led to Karliah being slowed stripped to nudity. Nudity led to Karliah being placed on her back on the bed, where I could cover every inch of her body with my lips and tongue. I’m fairly sure the music would have covered her cries as I made her cum more than once, and if they did hear us, neither of us cared. 

Lying back later after we’d made love, surprising myself by how long I managed to last before I finally had to release, I did ask what might have been an awkward question, but I was curious. “Was it like this with Gallus?” 

She wasn’t perturbed by the question, no doubt understanding my curiosity to a point. “To be honest, no. That’s not to say Gallus and I were not lovers, but it was nowhere near as physical as you and I are. Gallus and I knew each other for years before we became intimate. It was friendship that became more. With you… Well, with you, Ragnar, the attraction was rather quick, and I knew we’d be intimate sooner rather than later.” 

“I’m not being arrogant when I suggest that happens more often than not.” 

Running a hand up and down my chest before resting on my flaccid cock, she said, “And I’m sure you can understand why. Young. Virile. Quite handsome. And you have the loveliest blue eyes too. Honest eyes, Ragnar. And the thing is, you are a warrior dressed up as a thief.” 

“Despite the natural talent I have towards thievery?” 

“I’m sure you enjoy what you do, and I certainly enjoy working with you. But if you wanted to fight in the civil war, both sides would love someone like you in their ranks.” 

“To be honest, I have no interest in the civil war. Yes, I’m a Nord, but I grew up in the heart of the Empire. Both sides make good arguments. If anyone is the enemy, it’s the Thalmor. Though I don’t know much about them either except we fought them a few years back.” 

She laughed. “Now is not the time for a history lesson either,” she said. Having stroked me as we chatted, my cock was hard again so she swung her leg over me, lowered herself down, and conversation ceased for a time, except for murmurs of desire and affection for the other, the occasional breath of my name, whispered in such a manner that made me even harder, with plenty of kissing dripping with unspoken passion… at least until we both came and quite happily drifted off to sleep a few minutes later. 

The next morning, the Argonian we’d spoken to was waiting for us, letting us know the Icerunner had run aground, and that if we wanted a pick of goods, we should head to where it was. After giving us directions, he headed off, and I suggested we head out in our Nightingale armour. “Just to be sure,” I said. Karliah understood my caution, though we left the hoods and masks off for the moment. We received some glances as we strolled towards the gates, explaining it was armour found on the eastern shores of Morrowind. Complete bullshit, but considering Karliah was a Dunmer, they believed us. 

It wasn’t a long ride to the wreck, ensuring we tied up our horses out of sight. I had no reason to trust anyone we were about to meet, but I was still seeing the benefits of a link up with whoever these people might be. They must have been informed of us coming, as they were rather friendly, one of them introducing themselves as a member of the Blackblood Marauders. Never heard of them before but figured they were pirates. Despite being friendly, I shared a glance with Karliah, words not required, when they said we would need to see Deeja, the sister of the Argonian we’d organised this with, who was further down the ship. 

The pirates had apparently not bothered taking any prisoners, bodies and blood coating the decks. We walked by a number of pirates busy carrying loot out of the ship, taking care to see what they were taking, wondering just how much booty was on the ship. The further we descended, the more I was left thinking it was a trap. Karliah murmured as much, though I suggested that, if it was, we fight our way out. Karliah seemed to enjoy the thought. 

Deeja was waiting for us on the lowest deck of the Icerunner. Like all the others, she was friendly to begin with, even shaking our hand. “My brother told me you were coming. I'm supposed to give you what you've earned.” 

Naturally, my eyes turned to the large chest behind her. Instead, I heard footsteps behind us, and knew at least two men were now armed and ready. The Argonian smiled. “Unfortunately for you, I'm afraid the loot has already been moved. You've been useful to the Blackbloods, though. You've earned a quick death.” 

What they didn’t now is that I could unsheathe and strike rather fast. Quickly judging the distance between myself and the Argonian, it took only a step forward after I’d unsheathed to leave a diagonal cut across the chest of the Argonian. As she collapsed back, I twirled to see Karliah fighting off two of the Blackbloods. Stepping into assist, we made short work of them. They were tough, but like always, simply didn’t have the talent that Karliah and I possessed. Once they were both dead, I checked Deeja for evidence, finding a note that suggested her brother, the other Argonian who was named Jaree-Ra, had moved it all somewhere else. 

“Know where Broken Oar Grotto is?” I asked of Karliah. 

“Yes. It’s just a little further along the coast. We won’t even have to take our horses.” 

“Good. Because they all die here, then we go get what’s ours.” 

There was no fucking around now. Armed with sword and shield, Karliah taking out our bow, more blood ran along the decks of the Icerunner, this time being that of the Blackbloods. They knew we were coming, no doubt hearing the screams of their companions as they died, and most stupidly tried to fight us. It was only when we stormed out onto the deck that one or two finally turned and ran, and this time I told Karliah to fire, so they didn’t alert their companions. 

We didn’t have a map but Karliah knew exactly where we were going, aware of various caves used by pirates and shady merchants as places to hide goods they stolen. Before infiltration, Karliah asked what the plan was. I said the Blackbloods were fair game, but if possible, take Jaree-Ra alive first, interrogate him, then kill him. She wasn’t surprised by that, and didn’t argue, as she was as pissed off about what happened as myself. 

Though I would have liked to charge in and start swinging, Karliah suggested we do it as quietly as possible, at least to start with. As I always carried a bow nowadays, she handed me a few arrows and we got to work. It was rather wierd to begin with, alternating who would take the shot. I hadn’t fired an arrow, except for the occasional practice, for quite a while, though each made its mark. As usual, Karliah was ridiculously accurate, and we made it most of the way with barely a sound uttered. 

Taking position on a ledge, there were a couple of sunken boats below us, and a large building that no doubt housed plenty of loot. We could see a few more men on patrol, but no sign of the Argonian yet. Using the fact we hadn’t been located, we fired a few arrows from the ledge. Karliah hit the mark every time, though I missed twice, but we’d whittled down their numbers enough that I could finally unsheathe my sword, getting up close and personal seconds later. 

I really should have taken a couple of wounds but the Nightingale armour was either thicker than I thought, or Nocturnal really was now protecting us. It must be that, because it was only purely luck that allowed to actually divert an arrow that was aimed straight at my face, Karliah immediately firing an arrow straight back at the archer, hers going straight through his throat. 

Once most of the pirates were dead, we were searching for the Argonian, finding him hiding underneath a bed. Dragging him out by his tail, we interrogated him for information, and I’ll be honest, we were not pleasant. Blood was spilled to ensure he told nothing but the truth. But we didn’t stoop to torture, and once we had the information we wanted, we were kind enough to make his death quick. 

The pair of us took a good look around and the loot being held would make the Guild a tonne of coin. Not wanting to leave it unattended, I asked Karliah to return immediately to Riften and have a pair of horse and carts return to take the best of the goods back to the Guild, while I would link up with Erikur in Solitude to fence the rest of it via Gulum-Ei. 

I didn’t stay in the grotto the entire time, as I paid Gulum-Ei to take a shift, and he hired people he knew and trusted to also help out, with the promise of a few more coins too. Karliah returned five days later with Brynjolf and Vex in tow, the pair astounded at what we’d managed to find. Vex was so impressed there were whispered words in my ear about wanting an invite to my new house. Karliah heard, as Vex wasn’t shy in asking, Brynjolf finding it all rather hilarious. 

We spent a few hours loading up the best of the goods, the sort of things that we could move quickly and make plenty of coin. But we also took certain things that would make the Guild simply a nicer place to be. I didn’t live down there any longer, and while I had suggested others could live around the city, many preferred the privacy of the cistern, preferring to spend their coin on other things… Those things usually being drink and women. 

It was a long two-day journey back to Riften with two horse-drawn carts and a pair of horses. But it gave the four of us a chance to talk about things not just about the Guild. I spent some time getting to know Vex, or as much as she was still willing to share. She admitted Vex was not her real name, much like Sapphire. “Some of us are smart enough to keep our identities secret, Ragnar,” she stated with a smirk. 

“Where are you from?” 

“Cyrodiil. I came to Skyrim a long time ago now.” 

“How old are you? And, before you say anything, I have no problem asking a woman that question.” 

“Well, I know old you are, so if this puts your mind at ease, old enough to know who Karliah is, not old enough to have worked with her, and probably old enough to know better than to even think about making our relationship anything but professional.” 

“But?” 

“I’ll be honest, I like the flirting between us, and I find myself away with my thoughts sometimes. The biggest thing? The way you dealt with the Mercer situation. Completely focused on just doing the right thing. I don’t usually care about that, but what Mercer did to us… I know I give Delvin a lot of stick, but he’s my best friend, if one has a best friend in this business, and I didn’t appreciate seeing my friend hurting.” 

“What made you become a thief?” 

“A natural talent that was noticed by Bryn. Mercer put me to the test and, voila, I was accepted.” 

“And what do you hope the future?” 

She shrugged. “I just want to make enough coin so I can buy a little place away from everyone and everything so I can retire in peace.” I couldn’t help glance at her. “No-one wants to do this forever, Ragnar. We want to make enough coin so we can stop eventually. And even with Nocturnal on our side again, your luck won’t hold. It will run out one day, and that’s when you find yourself spending the rest of your days in a small cell, if you’re lucky.” 

It was sensible advice. 

Returning to Riften, we waited until it was dark before we had everyone moving goods down to the Guild, Maven having already paid off the guards in our pay to look the other way. If anyone had doubted my future appointment as Guild Master, I think what we came back with, and also the story about how we gained it, ended any arguments. There was one last city where we needed to gain a foothold in the east of Skyrim and the Guild would have regained all that it had lost since the fall of Gallus. 

It was late by the time I returned to the city, and wanting to see Haelga, I avoided returning home and made my way to her room in the Bunkhouse. What I saw brought me to a halt, a sign she was really missing me. Not only was she naked, she had four fingers in her pussy and the toy up her arse. I quietly closed the door and leaned against it, just watching her in the mix of candle and moonlight. She soon noticed my presence, and simply put her fingers in her mouth before beckoning me to join her. I was naked by the time I was beside her bed, and she left the toy in her arse as I slid my cock inside her. 

Haelga was well and truly double penetrated by one real and one fake cock that night. It was all a little too exciting for myself, and I’m not embarrassed to confess I came much quicker than usual, staying her enough to keep fucking her for a little while longer at least. Haelga simply kissed me and asked me to use the toy on her. I had a lot of fun with that, and she asked me not to be gentle. I wasn’t, amazed at how hard she could take it, and when she finally had an orgasm, she pretty much passed out, leaving me to chuckle as she sleepily told me how much she loved me. 

Holding her in my arms a little later, I asked, “You knew I was back, didn’t you?” 

“I saw you with your friends. I knew you’d come to see me once you were done. I like it when I’m proven right.” 

“If you ever want to put on a show for me…” 

“Love what you walked in on, did you?” 

“You’re beautiful and or sexy all the time, Haelga, but seeing you like that… It’s why I came so quickly.” I paused before adding, “You’ll have to come around to mine tomorrow. I’ll have to show you the special room I’ve designed for us.” 

“Oh, is this to do what we’ve talked about?” 

“Aye, and hopefully it will suit what you would love to do with me. Some of it I had to have made specially, which led to some awkward questions.” 

“But you did it for me?” 

“For us, Haelga.” 

“I’ll come around tomorrow night.” 

“I’ll cook you some dinner first. Don’t expect to go home.” 

I spent the next day relaxing around my home, giving it a good clean before Haelga arrived. That afternoon, I sat out on the balcony with a bottle of wine and a good book, listening to all the noises of Riften. The marketplace was as busy as always, but for some reason, Riften appeared to be alive with people. But there wasn’t the fear I expected, as I heard whispers from people about the presence of the Guild. I’d already slipped word to Brynjolf about future expectations. 

Funnily enough, despite what I did for a living, very few knew the truth, so I heard many calls of hello as I sat on the balcony. I had a short conversation with Ingun as she walked home for lunch, and I’m sure there was a subtle suggestion she was hoping for an invitation up sooner rather than later. Even Grelka wandered by on the way to the Bunkhouse and asked for a tour one day. It simply gave me a good chuckle, amazed at the attraction I seemed to have. Then again, I’d had the same thing in Cyrodiil… 

Haelga knocked on my front door just after sundown. Opening the door, she quickly had to use a finger to shut my mouth. The dress she was hugged her figure perfectly, the amount of cleavage on display very unladylike, the bottom of her dress just below her knees, and I knew straight away she would definitely not be wearing panties. I knew her well enough. 

We ate dinner first and enjoyed a little wine, though our eating and drinking was interrupted by plenty of making out at the same time. Half our meal was eaten before we simply gave into temptation and headed upstairs, though it wasn’t to just strip naked and fuck. I knew Haelga wanted to see the room. So I blindfolded her first before I showed her into the ‘Dibellan Room’. 

Taking off the blindfold, she took one look around before she turned and hugged me tightly. “Just what I dreamed about,” she whispered. 

I showed her everything in the room available, including what was hidden away in the drawers. I still didn’t fully understand nor comprehend everything she wanted, but the room was filled with all the desires she had mentioned. And, apart from being interested myself, the only reason I’d done it was to make her happy. She was already talking about what I could do to her in that room, suggesting that after a night in there, should be sore all over but she’d have had innumerable orgasms. But that would be for later. 

That night, we stuck to the bedroom, where we made love until dawn.

Chapter 11: Doing Time

Markarth… Now there is a city I hope I never have to visit again in all my days. What should have started as a simple job to ensure Guild influence ended in… well, quite frankly, unmitigated disaster that I’m still trying to wrap my head around. The fact I’m still alive speaks volumes to pure luck, and is another example that Nocturnal must now watch my back.

It was meant to be a simple job, much like the others. Meet a contact, do a job, ensure the spread of Guild influence, not only in the city but throughout the entire Hold. It all started to go horribly wrong the moment Karliah and I walked in the city gates…

---

Stabling our horses, it had been some time since I’d visited the city. In fact, I’d only visited the place once, when I had to find Calcelmo, infiltrated his laboratory and retrieved the information that eventually found Karliah innocent of what she’d been accused of.

Remembering how on edge the city had felt last time I’d visited, I mentioned it to Karliah a couple of times during our ride, and reminded her a final time before walking through the gates. Coming to a stop just past the entrance, the marketplace was busy, as they always are, but it was the glint of a weapon that caught my eye. Before I could even shout a warning, Karliah had her bow out and arrow knocked. There was a loud voice of someone shouting something about Forsworn, the scream of a woman, and then a loud groan as the arrow Karliah fired found the exact spot it had been fired.

City guard were on the spot in seconds. Thankfully the woman still lived, though had taken a wound across her stomach, Karliah immediately stepping forward to help heal her. Meanwhile, the guard herded everyone who had been present into a corner and warned us to forget what we’d just heard.

“We know what we heard. The Forsworn are here!” someone retorted, with plenty of agreement.

Swords were unsheathed. The city guard were apparently not fucking around. The guard in charge pointed his sword at various people. “I will not repeat myself. The Markarth City Guard are in control. There are no Forsworn in this city. Do I make myself clear?”

There were murmurs of agreement, I think most people simply saying yes so the guard would piss off and leave the rest of us to talk about what happened. Karliah was still looking after the woman as the crowd finally dispersed, and that’s when I had someone hand me a letter, claiming it was mine. Before I could even say anything to him, he’d already walked off. Opening the letter, it simply said ‘Meet at the Shrine of Talos.’

“What’s that?” Karliah wondered.

“Someone just handed me this letter.” I told her what it said, and though both of us were intrigued, we agreed to help the woman first. Karliah had managed to heal her and we escorted her to the Silver Blood Inn, where she had a room. Once we had her lying down on her bed, she told us who she was and, to our complete surprise, admitted why she was in Markarth. If the knowledge that she was an Imperial spy had been known, little wonder someone had tried to attack her, though she was adamant no-one could possibly have known.

I showed her the note I’d been given, and while I couldn’t explain who had given it to me, as it had happened so fast, I couldn’t describe the person, but she suggested it could be related to the attack on her. I think that was a suggestion for me to head out. So I headed out alone, Karliah letting me know that she would buy us a room for a few days.

Walking into the Shrine of Talos, I was surprised it was still open, considering the worshipping of him was banned. I walked in without a weapon in hand, but my sword and dagger were both sheathed, shield on my back. I could have one or two weapon in hand within two seconds if this was a ruse.

The man I met introduced himself as Eltrys. He wanted the help of an outsider as he couldn’t trust a soul within the city walls itself. Asking just what the hell was going on, he replied, “You want answers? Well, so do I. So does everyone in this city. A man goes crazy in the market. Everyone knows he's a Forsworn agent. Guards do nothing. Nothing but clean up the mess.”

“Why not go to the guards? The jarl?”

“Because they’re either in on it or refuse to deal with it, keeping their heads in the sand.” He sighed and sagged against the stone pillar behind him, running a hand through his long hair. “Look, all of this, what you just witnessed in the market, it’s been going on for years. And all I've been able to find is murder and blood. I need your help. Please. Can you find out why that woman was attacked, who's behind Weylin and the Forsworn? I promise I'll pay you for any information you bring me.”

This was well above what I normally did. I was a bloody thief, not an investigator. But a part of me, a small part, but it was surprisingly vocal, was interested in what was going on. Who in their right mind would attack a woman in broad daylight, knowing they would probably die because of it? You’d have to be an absolutely bloody fanatic.

I said I’d help, on the proviso he told me everything he knew. So I asked about the murders, unsurprised to hear they’d begun around the time of the civil war and just afterwards. The Forsworn themselves were natives of the Reach, opposed to Nord rule. As for Weylin, the man who’d tried to murder Margaret, Eltrys knew little about him, and knew nothing about Margaret except her name. Asking the best way to keep in contact, he said I would be watched by a couple of people who did believe him, and whenever I entered the shrine, he would already be waiting.

Returning to the Silver Blood Inn, Margaret was alone in her room, so I sat down with her and discussed what I’d spoken about. She knew Eltrys, and warned me about the reputation he had in Markarth. However, once I’d explained what he told me, she believed him and me, and went into further detail of why she was in Markarth.

“Apart from just keeping an eye on things, I was sent here to obtain the deed for Cidhna Mine.”

“Whatever for?”

“It’s the largest silver mine in Skyrim, and its proceeds are used to fund the Stormcloak army. Aside from that, I’m also investigating Thonar Silver-Blood.”

“Okay, why him?”

“We believe he is the man behind the Forsworn. But I think your first avenue should be looking into the man who tried to kill me. What was his name?”

“Weylin. Apparently he lived in the Warrens.”

“I can only suggest you find what you can there and come back to me.”

Karliah was sitting at the bar, so I pulled her aside next to the fireplace and explained what was going on. She thought I was getting in over my head, and that Markarth’s problems were not my own, but I had to admit that I was intrigued by it all, and though part of me was screaming to simply do the job we’d come for and leave, the other part wanted to see it through. She wasn’t particularly pleased, but relented in the face of my yearning to do it. “I might make us a few coin too,” I suggested.

It had already been a long day, so by the time I visited the Warrens, it was already growing dark. The Warrens reminded me of the Ratway in many respects, so I remained quiet as I moved down the dark hallway. I eventually found a couple of people huddled over a campfire and asked a few vague questions about Weylin. Of course, they knew him rather well, and after saying I was looking into the matter, one of them gave me a spare key and said I could take a look around if it helped.

To say Weylin had absolutely nothing would be close enough to correct. There was some hay and a tatty blanket which I assume he slept on. It was under the blanket that I found a letter. The words were few, but it was clear Weylin had been ordered to kill. But there was no name, just an initial from whoever sent the letter.

Walking back outside, there was a large brute of a man clearly waiting for me. I was always amazed that people would want to fight me, considering I looked rather sinister in my black armour, but some people were obviously idiots. I strode forward until we were a couple of metres apart.

“I assume you want something.”

“You've been digging around where you don't belong. It's time you learned a lesson.”

His first swing was so telegraphed; it was actually rather pathetic. Blocking that and putting my own fist straight into his gut, following that up with a knee to his groin. I have no problem fighting dirty, and I hate prolonged fights. Get your opponent on the ground as soon as possible were the words given to me by Corvus.

Grabbing him by the collar, I raised my fist and put it straight into his nose. He cried out as blood flowed, and I glanced around to ensure no-one thought they should step in. “Now, who sent you?”

He looked around, obviously hoping someone would help him. I raised my fist again and he pleaded with me not to hit him again. “Nepos the Nose! I was sent by Nepos the Nose! The old man hands out the orders. He told me to make sure you didn't get in the way. That's all I know, I swear!”

I let him go and told him to fuck off. He rose to his feet and scarpered without looking back. I now had a name, but it was dark, I was tired and already fed up, so I figured I could at least spend a night in the Silver-Blood Inn before finishing up. I did head to the Shrine of Talos, where Eltrys wasn’t lying, he was already waiting for me. Informing him of what I’d found out, all he suggested was that I be careful when approaching Nepos.

Returning to the Silver-Blood Inn, my attention was immediately taken by a woman I still fondly remembered, even though I’d only met her once, and even though we’d never done anything more than talk. Taking a seat beside her at the bar, she was surprised to see me but appeared to remember me at least, hugging me from the side as she said hello.

“How are you, Muiri?”

“I’m well, Ragnar,” she replied in that beautiful soft voice of hers, “What brings you back to Markarth?”

“Just some work.”

“It’s nice to see you again. I didn’t think you’d be back.”

“Did I make a good first impression?”

“Oh, definitely. I enjoyed our night together. It was nice to just enjoy a conversation with a man without anything expected from me in a return.”

“Still having it rough?” I remembered one of the many topics we’d discussed.

“It’s not as bad as it was, but to put it simply, if I’m interested, I’ll let them know. But I have other things on my mind at the moment.”

“Any news from Windhelm?”

She sighed, gulping half a cup of her wine before replying. “Nilsine replied to my letter. Instead of being upset by it, I was just left… angered, but also hollow.” She paused before adding quietly, “I just feel alone now.”

“Surely you have friends around here?”

Sighing, she did reply, “I do, but no-one as close as Nilsine and Friga. They were like family.” She turned towards me. “Would you like to come to my place for dinner?" 

I’ll admit the question caught me off-guard. I figured it was just for dinner, but I thought I should say, “I am here with someone, Muiri.”

“Oh… A girlfriend?”

“Not quite. It’s… complicated. Let me go have a word with her, and I’ll let her know what I’m doing.”

To my surprise, Karliah thought it was hilarious when I found her lying back on a bed, reading a book. “By Ysmir, you don’t waste any time, do you, Ragnar?”

“Firstly, I’ve met her before. Secondly, it’s just dinner.”

“Uh-huh. I’ll see you in the morning, Ragnar.”

“You don’t mind?”

“No. We’re on the job, and we’re not together. So you go have some fun.”

“It’s just dinner!” I exclaimed, before I groaned, hearing her laugh away as I headed back to the bar. Muiri knocked back the rest of her drink and took hold of my arm as she led the way back to her place. It wasn’t a large place, Muiri stating she certainly couldn’t afford one of the bigger houses, but there was a joint sitting room and kitchen, with an adjoining bedroom. A fireplace provided plenty of light and warmth, Muiri having paid for some comfortable furniture, as we sat together on a lounge after she’d cooked a simple but tasty dinner. Opening a bottle of wine afterwards, she kicked off her shoes and curled her feet underneath her as I turned towards her. The faint facial markings she had under her eyes accentuated her cheeks, and she had dark eyeshadow, which highlighted her eyes. She was a lot smaller than me, certainly slimmer too.

The one thing I definitely thought is that she was beautiful.

“Ragnar, can I ask you a rather forward question?”

“Sure.”

“Will you stay with me tonight?”

“Of course. But…”

“I know it will most likely be a one-time thing, though if you’re ever in Markarth again…”

And, with that, she practically leapt on me. She wasn’t desperate. No, she was just very eager. So I picked her up and carried her into the bedroom. No point wasting time starting on the lounge. I had to resist tearing at her clothes, though I didn’t take my time stripping her off. She was rather petite as she stood in just her underwear, and once she had me down to mine, she took a few moments to run her hand over my muscular but scarred body. I returned the favour as I leaned down to kiss her again, deftly undoing her bra with a hand, freeing her small but perky breasts.

Lying her back on the bed, I felt enormous in size compared to her, kissing down her neck towards her breasts. I could feel her legs already widen as my tented cock was already pressing against her. As I suckled at her breasts, hearing her sweet moans, I snaked a hand down her body towards her underwear, sliding it under and towards her sex, feeling a little hair before I felt her wetness. I wasted no time sliding a finger inside her, feeling her back arch under me as she moaned a little louder.

Kissing down her body, I removed her underwear as she spread her legs wide, and I immediately lowered my mouth to lick her. She shuddered as my tongue slid up and down, teasing her entrance. She was very excited already, leaving me wondering how long she would last. “Right there,” she breathed, so I took her advice and tickled her with tongue, though once I heard her breathing change, I moved up to start tickling her clit as I slid a couple of fingers inside her again. The effect was almost immediate, amazed at how tight she felt with just my fingers, already leaving me wondering how she would take my cock.

I didn’t pump her too hard with my fingers, focusing most of my attention on her clit. She was soon whimpering and writhing at everything I was doing, loving all the little sounds she was making. She liked to whisper ‘Yes’ quite a lot, so at least that was telling me she was enjoying what I was doing it. When I felt a hand moved through my hair, I figured that was her telling me not to move it again.

“Ragnar,” she breathed, before taking a couple of deep breaths, “Ragnar!” she cried a lot louder.

I felt her thighs try and press against me, though I managed to keep them spread with my shoulders. Writhing even more, she screamed that she was going to cum. That just made me double down on my efforts, and I was soon rewarded with a last cry as her back arched, feeling her squeeze my fingers so tightly, it was almost impossible to move them.

Then she stilled and I lifted my head, withdrawing my fingers and cleaning them with my mouth. Standing up next to the bed, I looked down at her, and she returned the sweetest of smiles. “Gods, I can’t remember the last time…”

She moved so I could lie down next to her and she immediately cuddled into me, making me chuckle to myself. “Don’t get too attached,” I whispered.

“Ragnar, you’re the first man to give me… Who in oblivion taught you all that?”

“It’s a long story. My life is a long story.”

“I’d like to hear it one day,” she murmured, adding, “I need a few minutes here. My heart is racing.” To emphasise that, she grabbed my hand and put two fingers to her neck. She wasn’t lying. It was galloping along.

“Been a while?” I wondered.

“The last man I was intimate with was… him. And he never did that.”

To prove how much I loved doing it, I did it again. Fifteen minutes later, she was little more than an out of breath, sweaty and quite satisfied young woman, eager to smother me in kisses. Despite being rather worn out, she near begged for me to be inside her, so I slid off my underwear and sat on my knees before her so she could see my cock for the first time.

“Gods,” she whispered.

“I know. So I’ll be gentle.”

“Please!” she said with a smile.

I couldn’t help groan as I felt her warm, tight wetness around my cock. I had to take my time, as I watched her face, and while it wasn’t painful, I could see she was having to adjust, but any time she met my eyes, she simply smiled and urged me to carry on, albeit slowly. Slowly sliding back and forth, she eventually managed to take most of my length, and I warned her that I probably wasn’t going to last that long.

“Do I feel that good?”

“Definitely,” I muttered.

That made her smile again, wrapping her arms around my neck so I could kiss her. I didn’t feel her legs wrap around me, looking down to see she’d spread those wide, feet resting on the bed, just trying to feel comfortable. So I just focused on the feeling of her tight little pussy and her amazing little body. I had to resist the urge to start properly fucking her, though her kisses were quite the distraction, but after barely five minutes, I could feel the end was nigh.

“I’m close,” I whispered, “Where?”

“I have potions, Ragnar.”

“Good. Anywhere else would be a waste anyway.”

I came really hard. I’m talking the sort of climax after which I feel completely drained and want to have a sleep right away. I managed to stay hard for a little while, as Muiri wrapped both arms and legs around me to hold me in place for a while, just enjoying the feeling of my cock inside her. I enjoyed the feeling too, so wasn’t going to complain. Resting on my forearms, we continued to kiss despite the feeling of wanting to sleep.

My cock eventually softened so I had to pull out, and after flopping onto the bed, Muiri turned onto her size, placing an arm across my chest, running her fingers through my faint chest hair. I held her petite body next to mine. “When will you be in Markarth again?”

I couldn’t help chuckle. “I’m not sure. It will depend on work.”

“What do you do?”

“Do you want the honest answer or a lie?”

“Considering my life sometimes, I don’t really care what you do.”

“Okay…” I paused, thinking if I really should, then figured it probably wasn’t going to matter now. I had a feeling she would like me regardless. “I work for the Thieves Guild. In fact, I’m pretty much running it nowadays.”

I felt her shrug. “Could be a hell of a lot worse. Are you good?”

“Haven’t been caught yet and taken the top job after only a few months in Cyrodiil.”

I glanced at her and she looked at me. No judgement whatsoever. Only a contented smile. “Well, if you wanted to get me something nice for when you’re next in Markarth…”

“What would you like?”

“A nice dress. Maybe one that I could wear for you next time you’re here…”

Chuckling, I said, “Well, if I can’t get my hands on one personally, I have people who can.”

The conversation had helped us both recover, as after a few minutes of making out, I was hard again and my hand slid down to her pussy, where she was already wet and willing to go. She kept me on my back, flinging a leg over my body and running her pussy up and down my cock. She was a natural brunette, with rather pretty hazel eyes. Watching her sit up and place her cock my entrance, it was mesmerising watching it disappear inside her little body. I keep mentioning little, because I was around six foot, maybe an inch above, and she was no more than five-two at most, and I was probably overestimating.

But my whole cock disappeared inside her this time, feeling her groin touch mine. She had a good shuffle to adjust before leaning forward to kiss me. I bent my knees and grabbed her arse as I slowly started to thrust up into her, simply watching her eyes. “Gods, you feel enormous,” she breathed.

“And you feel extremely tight, Muiri. Do you do exercises or something?”

That made her giggle. “No, all natural, Ragnar. Do you like my tight pussy?” 

“I have a great reason to return to Markarth constantly now.”

“I wouldn’t complain if you did,” she whispered before we resumed kissing.

I was soon giving it to her a little harder, and she had to break the kiss, resting her forehead against mine, her eyes alive with all the feelings and sensations of the moment. “Fuck me,” she cried quietly, “Fuck me.”

So I did. Not too hard. Not like I did with some of the others. But she got fucked like she wanted. And she loved it, eventually sitting up, still allowing me to keep control though she grabbed one of my hands for balance as she started to bounce, meeting my thrusts, her other hand trying to fondle herself. “I’ll cum anyway, but this will help make it even better,” she said.

I lasted a little longer than our first time, mostly because I’d cum so hard, but watching her ride me was a pleasure for both my eyes and my cock. I think men are visual creatures at times, which is why I loved it when women rode me, because I could see everything. I was trying to hold on so she could have another orgasm. There is no greater feeling than watching a woman cum as she’s sitting on your cock. Well, to me anyway.

Thankfully she did, and as she was climaxing, I pumped her a few times. She was aware of what I was doing, and although she fell forward onto my chest, she told me to keep going until I came again. My second was just as good as my first, and once it was finished, I wrapped my arms around her and had a little nap.

Little did I know that would be the last time I would have sex for… I’m not sure how long…

---

The shit well and truly hit the fan the next day. My visit to confront Thonar Silver-Blood went worse than I expected. He lived, but his wife was killed by Forsworn agents, and it was only after we killed them did he admit the whole, horrible truth. A traitor to the city. A traitor to the Empire. Frankly, I should have killed him then and there, but something stopped me. Probably the thought that I wasn’t a cold-blooded murdered.

Next on the list was Nepos the Nose. I grabbed Karliah from the Silver Blood Inn for back up before walking up to his front door. The woman who answered didn’t want to let me, but Nepos called out, inviting me in. I wasted no time on ceremony, flat out accusing him of being a Forsworn agent. To my amazement, he didn’t deny it. In fact, he seemed… pleased.

“Ah, yes. You've proven to be a real bloodhound. Well, you've sniffed me out. I've been playing this game for almost 20 years. Sending the young to their deaths. All in the name of the Forsworn. And I'm tired. So tired.”

“Why? Why all the senseless deaths?”

He looked at me as if I were an idiot. “Because my king told me to do it. Madanach. When the uprising ended at the hands of the Nords, they threw him in the mines. I don't know how, but he still lives. I get his messages, and I hand out his orders without question.”

He went on and on about Ulfric, the uprising and Madanach, but in the end, all I could ask was, “Why are you telling me all this? You will join Madanach in the mines.”

The old bastard laughed at me. “My dear boy, what makes you think you're getting out of here alive? You were seen coming in. The girl at the door is a Forsworn agent masquerading as a maid. You aren't the first one to have gotten this far. You won't be the last.”

Bullshit, I thought. And I’d come armed for a reason. Before his maid could strike, Karliah already had blade in hand. I didn’t want to, but the first to die was Nepos. He barely had weapon in hand as my blade found his neck, watching blood spurt out in an arc as he spun to the ground. Two more Forsworn agents ran into the room, two against three. They were good, probably some of the better opponents Karliah and I had faced. We both took wounds but we somehow walked out of the house alive.

I knew I had to speak to Eltrys straight away. Karliah stayed out of sight as I entered the shrine. Ever have that feeling in the pit of the stomach that something is wrong. The first thing that grabbed my attention was the body of Eltrys. His lifeless eyes stared into nothing, his body covered in blood, numerous wounds across his chest and stomach. Crouching down over his body to close his eyes, I knew I wasn’t alone, but by then, it was already too late.

“You were warned, both of you, but you just had to go and cause trouble. Now we have to pin all these recent murders on you. Silence witnesses. Work. Work. Work.”

“You didn’t have to kill him,” I muttered, “Why? What’s the bloody point?”

“We had a nice little deal going between Thonar and Madanach until you and Eltrys started snooping around. Well, you wanted to find the man responsible for those killings? You'll have plenty of time with the ‘King in Rags’ when you're in Cidhna Mine.”

My hand went to the hilt of my sword without thinking. I heard their blades unsheathed in response. “There are six of us in here, and more outside. I would think very carefully about what you do in the next few seconds.”

I removed my hand and spread my arms wide, feeling a guard each take an arm. Hauled to my feet, one of the guards looked me up and down before putting a fist into my gut. He had put all the power he could into it, so despite my best efforts, I still wanted to collapse. I was then dragged out, noticing even more guards outside. I made I shook my head as no doubt Karliah was watching, and I didn’t want us going on a killing spree of guards. We could kiss goodbye to any hope of ever establishing influence if we did that. Our current predicament was bad enough.

She was definitely watching and observing though as I was dragged to the entrance of the mine. Turning back, I simply yelled, “Do the job and go!” I doubt she’d do just that, but there was little she could actually do. I figured she might try and rescue me in the end, which wouldn’t be so bad, so I added, “That’s an order. Job and go.”

I knew she’d ignore it. I hoped she did.

Dragged in front of an orc guard, one of the other guards detailed all the crimes I was guilty of. All lies. If they’d caught me for thieving, I wouldn’t have happily complied, but at least there would have been truth. But no, instead I find myself accused of murdering Eltrys, finding out that he had a wife and small child. Nepos and his maids? Well, we did kill them, but primarily in self-defence. They added in a few other people they’d no doubt taken care of during the entire conspiracy. They even pinned the death of Thonar’s wife on me. Bastards.

I was told I’d never see the sun again, smacked in the back of the head, and I’m not sure what happened after that, at least for a little while.

Waking up some time later, they’d stripped me of armour and weapons. The orc guard stood there, flinging me some thin clothing to dress myself in. Once I’d put those on, I was escorted at sword point into the mine. There were no guards inside, only prisoners, and they all seemed to know me, as I was immediately called ‘The Lifer’. I learned quickly I wasn’t the only one totally fucked over by the city guard.

“So what do we do?” I asked Uraccen, who was surprisingly friendly and full of information.

“We dig. We eat. We piss and shit. We sleep. And we do that seven days a week. If we don’t dig enough silver in a week, we don’t eat. More than enough bodies have been carried out of here due to hunger, exhaustion and murder. Try not to let yours be another.”

“Subtle suggestion to earn my way?”

“There is only one other way out of here, and that’s by talking to Madanach. But talking to Madanach means going through Borkul the Beast?”

“And I take it that the big cunt of an orc by that gate over there?”

“That’s him. And,” he looked me up and down, “While you’re a big lad, he’s bigger, stronger and meaner. And considering none of us have had sex in a long time down here, you could end up getting something somewhere you don’t want it.”

“Delightful.”

“Just giving you fair warning. Borkul will beat you senseless, then if he likes you that way, he’ll fuck you for good measure. And like the fight, it won’t be gentle.”

“I take it that’s happened before?”

“We generally head off down the tunnels when someone tries. You hear them when they’re beaten. Then you hear them afterwards.” He sighed, shaking his head, a slight shudder too. I guess it happened more often than I realised. “Take the rest of the day to meet everyone. Tomorrow, you dig.”

That’s what I did. The men were in there for a variety of crimes. Most were quiet but friendly enough. It was back-breaking work, sweating with minutes, so much that I removed my shirt. I had a few questions about the scars, figuring I’d been a bandit or mercenary. I admitted that I was a thief, though that’s not what I’d been jailed for. Most of them already knew, and while sympathetic, they had their own problems.

Seeing as we never saw daylight, the mine worked to its own clock. We basically mined until we were exhausted, ate and drank, slept, then got up and did it all over again. It was always as a group, so we knew everyone was pulling the same weight. It was amazing at how everyone cooperated. While I worked, I thought of everything I’d done since arriving in Cyrodiil. Part of me thought I was just being punished for everything else I’d done. I tried not to think about all the girls I’d been with, though I did wonder what Karliah was up to. I figured there would be a lot of guards outside the gates to the mine, which is why she probably thought a rescue wasn’t on the cards. At least a dozen entered the mine at the end of my first week to deliver food and take what we’d mined.

It was probably a fortnight at least before I finally decided I’d had enough. Uraccen tried to talk me out of it, but I needed out. I had shit to do. “I warned you, lad. You do know what will happen if you lose.”

“I know. But he hasn’t fought me before.”

He probably thought I was being an arrogant bastard, but he didn’t try and stop me again. I walked up to Borkul. “I want to see Madanach.”

“To see Madanach, you have to pay the toll. You can either earn his favour, or you can go through me.”

“Option two, please.”

He looked me up and down, and I knew exactly why. “I prefer them when they’re young. I’m going to make you squeal, boy.”

I knew the fist was coming, swerving out of the way, immediately raising a foot to his groin. It was a quick, fast kick, but it did enough. It hurt, and it made him angry. An angry fighter made misjudgements and mistakes. That’s how I wanted him. He remained circumspect to start with, but he only ever swung his fists. I replied with fists, elbows, kicks, knees, anything and everything I had learned. There was no honour in such fights like this. The only important thing was winning.

He continued to taunt me, about how he was going to make me bleed, about how he was going to fuck me for a long time afterwards, suggesting I might even enjoy it. I let him talk and concentrated on winning. When I managed to take out one of his knees, forcing him down on the other, I put a knee into his face. Frankly, it should have knocked him out, but although it stunned him, he didn’t go down. But it was now he who was bleeding, and he knew this was serious, suddenly growing quieter, less taunts, more focus.

He was hurting, though, now hobbling on one leg. I got in close, a series of punches, deflecting his, feeling him weaken. Another knee and elbow to his head before I escaped his clutches had him wobbling. A sweep of his legs finally had him on his back. You never hit a man in the face with a fist, not unless you want to break your hand, particularly if said male is an orc. So I got in the right position and used my knee, busting his nose and mouth. Hand around his throat, I asked softly, “May I see Madanach now please?”

“Where the fuck did you learn to fight?”

“That’s not important right now. What is important is that I don’t want to have to kill you. Despite what I’m in here for, I’m not actually a murderer. But I will if I have to.”

“Yeah, fuck, sure. Go on. Go see him. Just get the fuck off me.”

Madanach was as I expected. An absolute fucking lunatic. Batshit insane. Knew exactly who I was, of course. He suggested that escape was possible, but he hadn’t, simply due to the deal he had with Thonar. But he suggested that the situation had changed, and that perhaps it was time he left to re-join the fight. I said I just wanted out, and I didn’t care who with. But if Madanach was willing to help me, then I’d forget all the shit from before if he got me out.

Before we left, Madanach had a few loose ends to tie up. One of my fellow prisoners found himself with a few holes from a shiv, the deed not done by myself but by someone else. Madanach wrote some letters, I assume to send word to his army outside, and told us we’d have to wait a few days, so for now, we carried on as normal. Once everything was prepared, around five days later, he gathered us together, where he made a nice little speech to get everyone psyched up for battle, then we headed into a secret tunnel under Markarth.

Just before exiting out into the city itself, there was a female Forsworn waiting for us. She handed over my armour and weapons, and I was given a little time to get dressed and arm myself before we headed out.

It was a fucking calamity. By the time we were on the streets, the Forsworn was in a full scale battle with the city guard. And I got the fuck out of there, particularly once I heard the shout of my name, looking around to see Karliah waving at me from a nearby doorway. I ran towards her and we watched the two sides battle it out. Madanach did make his escape, doing so by killing Thonar Silver-Blood and numerous city guard along the way. At least a dozen Forsworn made it to the city gates.

As for Karliah and I, we melted into the shadows, keeping to the back streets of the city. She told me she did the job we were there for, and that Margaret had been to the jarl about what happened. We headed back to the Silver-Blood Inn, where it was agreed I would lay low until Margaret went to see the jarl again the next day. I barely slept that night, the adrenaline still flowing, and Karliah was delighted to see me, of course. Not in the way you might expect. I was filthy, probably stank to high heaven, and desperately wanted a wash. Once I’d cleaned up and eaten, I appreciated a bed to lie on, Karliah keeping me company. I wasn’t in the mood, and she was happy just to lie with me.

The next morning, we walked up to the Keep, where I met the jarl. Karliah and Margaret showed them all the evidence we had gathered, but the jarl was already aware of what had happened, and quickly cleared my name of any wrongdoing. That was a relief, and I thanked him for it.

Before leaving, I did stop to see Muiri. She was aware of my incarceration and was delighted to see me a free man. I let her know I was leaving immediately, but gave her the name of my house in Riften, and asked her to keep in contact. I also promised that I would return to Markarth as soon as I was able. That’s how much I liked her, as despite the shit I’d just been through, I’d return to see her again in a heartbeat.

I can’t say I was sad to walk through the city gates, heading towards the stables. The sense of relief as we took the road east was almost overwhelming, not in the sense of wanting to weep, just the sense that I was still alive and no longer behind bars. Better yet, Karliah assured me that our influence was now assured in the Reach, so for intents and purposes, the Guild was back to where it was many years ago.

That would be a cause for celebration on our return to Riften.

Chapter 12: The Master

It took two nights for us to finally crest the hill that would lead us to Riften. It was afternoon by the time we’d stabled our horses, and the first thing I wanted to do was see Haelga, as I knew she’d be worried sick about me. Karliah said she’d head down to the cistern, spread the news, and we’d all gather the next day for whatever happened next. She assured me, though, that by the end of the next day, I would officially be the Guild Master for the Thieves Guild of Skyrim. 

And then I’d start laying down some of my own laws. Brynjolf and Karliah were aware of some ideas I had.

As soon as I walked in the door, Haelga ran and jumped into my arms, wrapping both arms and legs around me, little surprise she was tearful at the same time. I just held onto her as tightly, reassuring her I was absolutely fine and that I’d been caught up in something not to do with what I did for a living. Simply not letting me go, I proved my strength by managing to carry her upstairs, finally resting her arse on the table. “Haelga, I’m fine,” I whispered again.

She lifted her head, a crooked smile on her face, her cheeks rather wet. “I was so worried when you didn’t return after a few days. And with no word from anyone, I just assumed the worst.”

Using a thumb to gently wipe each cheek, I said, “Let me give you the short version. Ever heard of the Forsworn?” She shook her head. “They’re a bunch of natives to the west of Skyrim. Lot of shit going on over there. I got caught up in some sort of conspiracy. Lot of death. In the end, I had a few murders pinned on me and I was thrown in jail.” That made her gasp. “I know, and I thought I was done for. But the leader of the Forsworn was in there with me, and I helped him and myself escape. A couple of friends had helped gather evidence of my innocence, and after a meeting with the jarl, I was declared innocent of all crimes. I returned straight here because I wanted out of that bloody city.”

Now she smiled. “And you came straight to me?”

I cupped her cheek with my hand, watching her eyes close for a moment. “Where else would I go?”

It shouldn’t come as a great surprise that our kisses turned into something else. As I’d interrupted her day, we couldn’t exactly have a long lovemaking session in bed, but that didn’t stop her undoing the belt and trousers to take out my cock, taking down her panties at the same time, and the groan I made as I slid inside her was probably heard all the way around Riften. But it wasn’t a hard, fast fuck. I wanted to appreciate every moment I was inside her, as she still hadn’t moved her legs from around me. I knew I wasn’t going to last long, Karliah and I hadn’t done anything on the way back to Riften, so it had been at least a couple of weeks. I let Haelga know, and she didn’t care. She’d just missed me and stated that we’d have a much longer session that night.

My legs nearly gave out when I came, causing Haelga to giggle at my reaction. “Was it that good?” she wondered coyly. I just kissed her and growled in her ear that she was getting fucked hard that night. “Is that a promise?” she whispered into my ear.

“How about the Dibellan room?”

“Oh… Oh, yes, Ragnar! I’ve been thinking about that.”

“Tonight then. I’ll cook you a nice meal, we’ll drink some wine, and all you need to do is come prepared.”

She knew what I meant by that. “Am I going home sore tomorrow morning, Ragnar?”

“Would you like to?”

“I don’t want to be able to sit down all day.” Gods, I loved this woman. And the thought immediately made my cock start to harden. “Like that thought, Ragnar?” she breathed.

I teased her by pulling out, which made her moan with frustration. I smiled, wagging a finger in her direction. “Good things come to those who wait, Haelga.”

Grabbing my cock, she pulled me back towards her. “Please,” she pleaded quietly, placing it at her entrance. So I gently slid back inside her, feeling her legs immediately wrap around me again, her mouth eager for mine. There was no way I’d have another climax any time soon, so I knew it was for her. Running one of my hands along her legs, I slid it to where I could use my thumb on her clit. The first touch made her jolt up off the table, causing her to giggle, before she grabbed my hand, sucked on my thumb, then placed it back where it was.

She climaxed a few minutes later, holding onto me tightly as she moaned my name, complimenting me on many things at the same time. Then she had another little weep. “I was thinking it would never happen again,” she whispered.

“I’m sorry.” I genuinely felt it.

“It’s okay. You kept your promise. You came back. It just took a little longer than expected.”

We cleaned up a few minutes later, heading back downstairs, where Svana probably knew what we’d been up to but didn’t make a big deal, simply saying hello to me. Haelga and I hugged again before I left, with her promising she would be at mine as soon as possible.

Heading straight to Riftweald after a quick stop at the market for supplies, I closed the door behind me, took a deep breath, then headed straight to bed. Not to sleep, simply to enjoy a soft mattress at my back for the first time in what felt like weeks. I did eventually have a nap, but only for an hour or two, waking up to see the sunset as I sat on the balcony with a glass of wine, taking in the sounds of Riften slowly winding down for the night.

Heading back inside once I could see stars in the sky, the first thing I needed to do was get dinner ready. I had meat ready to cook, some potatoes that I would mash and add herbs, and some fresh vegetables to add a little more flavour. I had a selection of wines that I now kept, and picked out one that I knew Haelga liked. I figured we’d probably eat half the meal at most before heading upstairs to fuck.

Haelga arrived a little later, knocking at my door. Upon opening it, she was a vision in red. It was a dress I’d had delivered to her a while ago, something Gulum-Ei had sent from Solitude. It was a strapless number that showed off her impressive cleavage, tight to her body at her hips and flowed down, the bottom just above her ankles. On her feet were a pair of red shoes, and she also carried a small red bag. Probably nothing in it, just to compliment her look. She’d done her hair and there were faint traces of make up on her face.

“Are you going to invite me in, Ragnar?” she asked, hiding her giggle.

Standing to the side, I gestured for her to come in. “Sorry. You just look…”

“Yes?”

I grabbed her hand and pulled her close. “Beautiful, Haelga,” I said softly. The smile she returned was heart-meltingly sweet as I laid a soft kiss on her cheek.

Escorting her to the table, I sat her down and poured a glass of wine. She knew it was her favourite upon taking her first sip as I headed into the kitchen to finish dinner. Returning a few minutes later with a plate each, we ate mostly in comfortable silence. We both knew what was going to happen that night, so there was no point discussing it. And the only other topic would have been Markarth, which would have dampened the mood.

Haelga was hungry, as we did finish our meal, along with a couple of cups of wine. After clearing away the plates, I grabbed her hand and asked, “Sitting room or Dibellan room?”

“What do you think, Ragnar?”

We headed upstairs immediately.

The Dibellan room was full of all the instruments Haelga had told me about. There was a chest full of toys I could use on her, most which had to be specifically made and shipped to the house. There were manacles on the wall, where I could tie her there. There was a bench where I could manacle her wrists and her legs as she was bent forward. There was a swing I could put her in. There were chains from the room I could attach her too.

Walking into the room, she asked me to untie the back of her dress, unsurprised to see that, once it fell to the ground, she was naked. Turning towards me, she dropped to her knees without any hesitation. I caressed her cheek. “I love you,” I said quietly.

“I love you,” she said, “Now, are you going to take control, Ragnar?”

I smirked as I replied, “What do you think?”

Walking across to the chest of drawers, I opened one and had a look. Taking a long piece of black cloth, I wrapped that around her head, covering her eyes. The smile on her face suggested she liked that idea. “Just my other sensations now,” she said.

As she sat there on her knees, waiting for whatever came next, I quickly undressed myself. When she felt my cock prod her lips, she wasted no time opening her mouth, and she eagerly tried to take my length as quickly as possible. She did use one of her hands but I told her not too. “Bind them,” she suggested.

Walking back to the drawers, I took out a leather strip and bound her hands together behind her back. Back in position, now she could only use her mouth on me. I wasn’t going to start out hard straight away, though I could have face-fucked her and she’d have enjoyed it. No, we would start sedate and ramp up as the night went along. But she was going to take a mouthful to start with, as the quicker I came, the longer I would last next time.

But I didn’t warn her, and she squealed when she felt the first hot blast, but she greedily swallowed it down, wanting more. As I said, I really loved this woman. Withdrawing from her mouth, she looked up at me blindly, no doubt sensing where I was. “Did you like that, Ragnar?”

“Haelga, you know how good you are.”

“Whatever I can do to please you, Ragnar.”

Helping her to her feet, I led her towards the bench. Lying her down on her front, I unbound her hands from behind her back but attached them to the manacles, doing the same with her ankles. I could see the excitement in her body language as I returned to the chest of drawers. Grabbing what I wanted, I walked back to her and ran it along her back. “Is that what I think it is?” she whispered.

“It is. Now, I’m thinking I start soft and get harder. And I’m thinking… ten. How does that sound?”

“Will you fuck me right after?” she breathed, the excitement in her tone exciting me at the same time.

“Of course,” I said, reaching forward to caress her cheek before I got in position. Her arse and pussy were completely exposed, her pussy glistening with the excitement she was already feeling. I couldn’t help myself, bending down for a quick taste of her before I ran the riding crop down from her neck to her arse, before I gave her a soft stroke across her cheeks. 

“Count them,” I demanded.

“One!” she said.

“Louder!” I said as I used it slightly harder.

“Two!” she cried.

“Louder again!” The next one did leave a slight red mark.

“Three!” she near screamed.

“Better,” I said, striking her again. I could see the shudder go up her body. No doubt it hurt, but she had explained it all. She absolutely loved it at the same time.

With each strike, a little harder than before, she counted it off. By eight, her arse was red, amazed at the fact she didn’t cry out at all. In fact, after six, she was demanding I strike her harder still. I held back slightly, figuring if I hit her with all the power I had in my right arm, I’d make her bleed. And I didn’t want that… though, to be honest, I’m not sure about her. After ten, I put the crop in her mouth before I slid inside her. She lasted a couple of minutes before she had one hell of a powerful orgasm, the sort which left you little more than an exhausted heap.

Wasting little time, I grabbed the bottle of oil we both now kept and poured some on her body. I was no expert, but Haelga had given me pointers on an effective massage, and as she was now completely relaxed, I ran my hands up and down her body, enjoying the feeling of her soft skin. I eventually started to oil up her arse, teasing her little hole. She reacted, trying to lift herself so I’d do something.

“You want it there?” I wondered.

“You know I do, Ragnar. I’ve been thinking about it all day.”

I used my tongue first, and Haelga found the manacles slightly frustrating. Once I slipped my first finger into her, she moaned loudly, quickly asking me to add another one. A third one was added soon after that too, though I was only getting her ready. She was quickly begging for something else, so after lubing myself up, I placed the head of my cock at her rear entrance.

Part of me knew I could ram it in and she’d make no complaint. In fact, it would hurt, but she’d enjoy it. So while I wasn’t as gentle as normal, I wasn’t a complete bastard, but once I had my length inside her, I bent forward, placing a hand on each shoulder. “Ready?” I asked quietly.

“Gods yes, Ragnar. I have one request. Ruin me.”

My first few thrusts were slow but hard, hearing her grunt and noticing her wince, even with the blindfold. But she cried ‘Yes’ quietly after each one, with no suggestion whatsoever for me to stop. So I went a little faster, still just as hard, and that seemed to make her even happier. “Dibella loves me, Ragnar. She’s given me you.”

“Remember to let me know if it gets too much.”

“You’ll cum before I say stop, Ragnar.”

That sounded like a challenge, so I changed my position ever so slightly. Haelga felt it and I could see the smile on her face. “Am I getting properly fucked now?”

My reply was what I did next. But Haelga still loved every second, screaming out her delight as I rammed my cock deep into her arse over and over again. And considering my size, I could only be impressed at how she managed it. She was right though, she managed to take it for longer than I could fuck her, as despite the pounding she took, I felt my climax arrive quicker than she even began to suggest she wanted me to stop. Letting her know I was nearing the end, she simply smiled and told me to finish where it was expected.

I collapsed on top of her once I was empty. She could still move her head, and managed to kiss my cheek. “Thank you,” she whispered.

I took a couple of minutes to recover before I undid the manacles to her wrists and ankles, grabbing a towel so we could clean up the mess. Taking off her blindfold, the look in her eyes when she looked into mine was one of absolute love and devotion. “What would you like to do next?”

“Now is the time for us to go to bed and make love, Ragnar. We’ll keep it short this first time. We’ll build it up as time goes by.”

The next hour was a complete contrast to what just occurred. I was incredibly soft and gentle with her, and I made sure that, this time, I brought her to climax time and again. After we made the softest, most tender love possible, she fell asleep in my arms, moulding herself into my body. Her last words before she fell asleep were that she couldn’t remember being happier.

To be honest, neither could I.

---

Heading into the Flagon, the first person to see me was Vex. She wished me good morning, and appeared to be in a good mood. Wondering why, she called me an idiot, suggesting I was the reason, though didn’t clarify what she meant by that. She laughed at the expression on my face, letting me know everyone else was in the cistern. 

Brynjolf and Karliah were obviously waiting for me to arrive, because as soon as they saw me, the ceremony began. There was no spectacular handing over a sceptre or anything. The three of us simply stood in the middle, surrounded by the Guild, as Karliah announced that I would be the new Guild Master of Skyrim, and that if anyone had a problem with that, they should speak now and lay down a challenge to my rule.

No-one did. In fact, most were quite vocal about the fact it was a bloody good idea. I thought it slightly strange that I was probably the youngest there, certainly a lot younger than Karliah or Brynjolf, yet both seemed quite happy that it would be me that would take the reins. Karliah insisted she would just do the occasional bit of thievery, but that she would spend most of her time at Nightingale Hall. As for Brynjolf, I made him my second, and he would run things when I wasn’t there. I didn’t plan on being away too often, only if I was to be gone for longer than usual.

Since it was all agreed, I asked them all to be quiet, sharing a glance and nod with Karliah and Brynjolf. Vex and Delvin were also aware of what I was about to say. They were not as happy, but understood where I was coming from.

“Right, I’m sure all of you are used to the way Mercer used to do things. But if we’re going to use that arsehole as a yardstick, I won’t be much of a leader. No, for those of you who don’t know, I once worked with the Thieves Guild of Cyrodiil, and they still worked by the teachings of the Grey Fox. Have you all at least heard of him?”

Most nodded. One or two hadn’t but that wasn’t important, and the others could fill them in with the details. “Okay, so while we’re all Thieves here, we all want to make coin, get rich, and hopefully retire to wherever you dream. But there will be some new rules for how we operate. And I’ll put it like this. If you don’t like them, the door is there and you may leave.”

I looked across the group, gauging their reaction so far. They all stayed silent.

“Rule one. All those people you see living on the streets. The homeless. The beggars. The desperate. They should be our allies. They should be the people we look to for help. And in return for that help, we look after them. I know for a fact that hasn’t happened, even with those who live in Riften. Trust me on this, having these people as allies will only be of benefit to the Guild. So, whenever you’re next in Windhelm or Solitude, get in contact with these people, let them know the Guild is looking out for them.

Rule two. We no longer steal from those less fortunate than ourselves. We shouldn’t be robbing people of their last septim. Yes, we’re thieves, but there is still a sense of honour to what we do. And, let’s face facts, we don’t just steal. There have been jobs all of us have done that had little to do with thievery. So I have a motto that we will adhere to. Rob from the rich, give to the poor. No, we’re not going to start handing out our coin to every single poor person across Skyrim. But it will be a minor reallocation of some of the wealth in this country.

Rule three. Quite simple, really, and there a few sub-rules. Don’t get caught. Don’t steal from the Guild. Definitely don’t steal from each other. Don’t fall out with each other. And definitely don’t try and undermine my rule. If you have a problem, speak to either Devlin, Vex or Brynjolf. If it’s vitally important, come talk to me. I won’t micromanage, I don’t want to know all your plans. But just don’t fuck it up and put the entire Guild in hot water.

You agree to all that?”

Again, a sea of nodding heads. I didn’t think they’d be entirely happy, but they now knew where I stood regarding what I expected. None of us were particularly good people. We were thieves, after all. But as I’d told Brynjolf the very time we met, I did believe in honour among thieves.

“Okay, that’s all I have to say. Thank you for readily accepting my rule. And I can only hope that it’s much better than the previous bastard.”

“Here, here!” they all called, and after a round of handshakes, they split up, only Vex, Delvin, Karliah and Brynjolf staying with me.

“Any major plans?” Brynjolf asked. 

“Yes, a couple. Delvin, I want you to see if you can get in touch with anyone from the Guild in Cyrodiil.”

“I’ll do what I can, boss, but we haven’t heard from anyone outside of Skyrim for decades.”

“I figured, but if we can forge a link between our two Guilds, then the flow of coin and goods will only help us. There are some businesses out there ripe for the taking, and plenty of people in Cyrodiil with coin they probably won’t miss. Karliah, will you be interested in Nightingale recruits?”

“Vex is interested, Delvin…”

“No. I’m far too old for all that traipsing about,” he admitted.

“Are you thinking something?” Karliah wondered.

“Not really, but since everyone is now more than aware of us, I’m just wondering if anyone was showing an interest.”

“I’ll spend some time chatting with the group over the next few weeks.”

“Bryn, you’re going to be the face of the Guild in two ways. One, you’ll be the link between myself and everyone else, though as I said, I won’t be missing too often. But, two, and I think most importantly, I want you visiting our contacts, almost to reassure them from time to time that the Guild is here to stay.”

“Sure thing, boss.”

“Last issue, and this is for all four of you. Keep your ears open for anything, and I mean anything. I’m not sure about the rest of you, but I don’t want to spend every day sitting in this bloody cistern, or on the balcony of my house. I like being out there, causing a little havoc and making plenty of coin. I want to keep my skills sharp at the same time. If the job makes coin for us and the Guild, and who knows, maybe a new ally, perhaps some influence, or we deal with a potential problem, even better. There are no stupid ideas, just those which won’t be of real benefit.”

It was rather easy to slip into a routine, and I quickly found being Guild Master… well, quite frankly, rather dull. Gone were the trips across the breadth of Skyrim, and I didn’t find any jobs that caught my fancy. At least none that actually involved thieving anyway. It did mean I could spend more time in Riften, though. Haelga was a regular visitor, and we spent more time in the Dibellan room, where things slowly but surely got a little more… extreme, I guess would be the right word. I was left amazed at what she wanted me to do at times. 

Though Karliah dropped by from time to time, I would visit her at Nightingale Hall more often. She spent a long time making it a real home, turning one of the rooms into a large bedroom for herself. She lived there by herself, so whenever we fucked, she could make as much noise as she wanted. And she certainly did, hearing her screams echo down the empty halls. Our sex life was in complete contrast to that I experienced with Haelga. Don’t get me wrong, Karliah loved to fuck, but it was far gentler and tender, not to say Haelga didn’t enjoy that too.

Then there was Ingun, who I spent less time with than the other two, but that just meant each time we were together was even better. She would occasionally tease me, suggesting her mother was still asking after me. I still found the whole idea rather weird, so did avoid their home. Ingun enjoyed coming to my place anyway, particularly sitting on the balcony, where we’d enjoy a bottle of wine and watch the sun go down. She was incredibly sweet, and we liked each other a lot. But in the back of my mind was the concern that, if it did wrong and I broke her heart, Maven would have my balls.

It must have been at least a month before I finally had a job worthy of my time. But, I’ll admit, it wasn’t what I expected. Wandering into the Flagon one morning, Vex and Karliah were waiting for me, looking rather impatient. Vex stated she had something that would interest me, and I know I smirked, thinking dirty thoughts. She just called me an idiot before we wandered into the cistern, where we sat at my desk. Handing me a note, I quickly read the details.

“Meridia’s beacon?” I asked, looking between the pair of them.

“Do you know anything about Meridia?” Karliah asked. Shaking my head, she continued. “There’s a reason why I’ve come to you with this. The beacon itself isn’t the prize. It’s what might lie in wait inside her temple.”

“I’m assuming treasure…”

“You are correct to a point. Right, first, a little about Meridia. She’s a Daedric Prince, though she’s considered lesser evil than some of the others. What most know about her is her intense hatred for the undead, and her ‘love’ for all living things.”

“A good Deadra? I find that hard to believe,” I stated, holding back the scoff.

“She’s not good. She’s still all the things you would expect from someone from the realm of Oblivion, but I believe the prize you may receive if we get the beacon would be worth it.”

“Okay, what’s the prize?”

Karliah took a notebook from her pocket and laid it on the desk. Opening to a particular page, there was a drawing of a sword. A mighty fine sword. “It’s called Dawnbreaker. And it should be carried by a warrior who may, just occasionally, deal with the undead.”

“I assume you mean me. But why?”

“I called you a warrior posing as a thief. If you were to wield this blade, as either Guild Master and whatever else you happen to do, then I predict you will be victorious each time.”

I looked between the pair of them. “Fuck it, sounds good. Where’s the beacon?”

“It was taken by a bunch of idiot bandits,” Vex replied, “They’re in a camp north of Whiterun, attached to a mine.”

We agreed to leave immediately, each of us heading home to gather supplies before meeting outside the city gates, at the stables. Each of us had a horse, as I’d suggested to everyone that they should purchase one, simply for ease of getting around. The journey to Whiterun took place without incident, barely stopping along the way, except to allow the horses a breather and a drink of water, making it to Whiterun stables just as the sky grew dark.

Choosing to stay in the city instead of camping, we headed up to the Bannered Mare, where we managed to snag a room each. Vex was surprised, figuring I’d want to bunk with Karliah, but I suggested all we needed was a good night’s sleep and an early rise. I don’t think she completely bought it, but I earned looks from both of them when Ysolda walked in, saw me, and immediately ran over to where we were sat by the fire and sat on my lap, laying a big, wet kiss on my cheek.

“Who’s your friend, Ragnar?” Karliah asked, in such a sweet tone, even Vex laughed.

“This is Ysolda. Ysolda, this is Karliah and Vex.”

“Friends of yours, Ragnar?” Ysolda wondered.

“Friends and colleagues. We work together.”

“What brought you back to Whiterun?”

“We’re heading up Solitude way. Broke up the journey from Riften, and figured we’d stop in here for the night.”

She moved her mouth to my ear as she whispered, “And were you hoping to see me?”

I couldn’t help smirk. “Maybe…”

Karliah and Vex laughed again as I signalled to Saadia for a round of drinks. Ysolda eventually sat down next to me, wrapping an arm around my waist. I glanced at Karliah, who simply shrugged, while Vex looked rather amused by it all, probably thinking a fight was about to start. Between who, though, I’m not sure.

Thankfully, my two Guild companions were friendly with Ysolda, though once the music started, Ysolda dragged me up to dance with her, ensuring my hands were in particular parts of her body. I had a feeling she was putting on a bit of show, particularly once she kissed me, and her tongue wasted no time requesting entrance into my mouth. Now, while I good kiss was enough to generally make me want more, I didn’t particularly want to be distracted, nor did I want an awkward ride the next day. So I happily made out with Ysolda, but when she whispered in my ear, inviting me to hers, I had to decline, though quickly assured her that I definitely would next time.

“Is that a promise?” she asked, her eyes pleading with me to say yes.

“Of course. Next time I’m in Whiterun, and preferably alone,” I said quietly back.

The four of us stayed up until the innkeeper said that was it for the evening, and I escorted Ysolda home, where she asked again if I wanted to join her. There was no doubt in my mind that, if I joined her inside, I’d be naked with my cock buried inside her within a couple of minutes. But… I declined again, so made sure the kiss we shared was a great one, leaving her wanting more.

“When will I see you again?” she wondered, standing on the threshold.

“I’m not sure. But I now have a good reason to visit Whiterun more often.” After another soft kiss, I wished her goodnight, and headed back to the Bannered Mare.

To my surprise, Karliah was waiting for me in my room, though not for the reason people probably think. She was simply curious as to who Ysolda was, and I was honest about it. We’d flirted a few times when I’d been in Whiterun previously, and as for what she did, I knew she was a merchant, and even hoped to buy the Bannered Mare one day, once she had the coin.

“And I assume you had an invite back to hers?” Unable to stop the chuckle, I simply nodded my head. “Why did you say no? Because of me?”

“To be honest, that was part of the reason. But we do have an early start too, and didn’t want to spend a couple of hours fucking before going to sleep. However, I will admit that if I were to visit Whiterun again, I’ll do it alone.”

“Well, at least you’re honest,” she said, kissing my cheek and heading to the door, where she surprised me by closing it… with her still in my room. Turning back towards me, I’m sure my face would have been priceless. “Ragnar, I know for a fact you wanted to fuck but stupidly said no. And no doubt you’re probably nursing something hard in your trousers.” She wasn’t lying about that. “So I’m thinking you could do with some help regarding that, then we’ll sleep.”

“You’re serious?” I had to ask, “You’ve just spent most of the night watching Ysolda throw herself at me.”

“Yet here you are, with me. So… Are you really saying no to me too?”

“Definitely not.”

I had a gorgeous and very naked Dunmer underneath me a few minutes later, cock buried inside her tight, warm pussy. There was little foreplay, as Karliah admitted that watching me dance with Ysolda had excited her, wanting it to be her. I promised we’d do that as soon as possible. With her legs wrapped around me, her mouth was desperate for mine as I slowly thrust into her. We both tried to make as little noise as possible, as we knew Vex was in the room next to us, though the headboard may have occasionally banged the wall, leaving both of us in fits of quiet giggles.

Karliah knew what I loved though, and she eventually ended up on top of me, riding my cock slowly, watching her grind and slowly bounce as I hit all the right spots inside her. My hands caressed her body, running my fingers over her stomach or I’d gently grab one of her breasts. I eventually shuffled so I could sit up and use my mouth of those or kiss her at the same time. She couldn’t ride me forever, and once she enjoyed a rather nice climax, we flipped over again, pushing her legs back, so I could pump her hard for a few minutes until I enjoyed my own.

“So, glad you said no?” she asked as we cuddled after a quick clean up.

“Definitely. We still have to see how flexible you are, though.”

“Ankles behind my head, Ragnar. Just imagine how I’d look.”

“Don’t give me thoughts like that! I’m trying to sleep here.”

At breakfast the next morning, Vex gave us looks and eventually asked flat out if we fucked. Neither of us denied it, as what was the point. Everyone in the Guild was now more than aware that we were intimate, though I had a sneaking suspicion Vex was a little jealous. However, while we had flirted constantly, and Vex had stated more than once she was interested, she hadn’t given any suggestion was actually serious. And with everything on my plate, I liked the flirting but, frankly, would leave it to her.

The sun was still rising as we departed Whiterun in the direction of the bandit camp. Vex knew exactly where it was, but on the flat, featureless plain, lookouts were always bound to see our approach. Thankfully Karliah was a crack shot with a bow, so after finding a solitary tree to keep our horses safe, we carefully as possible approached the camp. Karliah lined up and sent an arrow into the chest of one lookout, though that sent at least three more charging in our direction. I thought they were idiots, giving up the safety of their walls to take us on head first. Three on three, we were always bound to win, Karliah quickly unsheathing her blade, Vex weaving two short blades, I was armed with my usual sword and shield. We made short work of the three bandits before moving on.

With no sign of the beacon in camp, we headed for the mineshaft. We didn’t hear anyone working, and was surprised to see it was rather empty. It wasn’t a large mineshaft, eventually rounding a corner to find a lone bandit sat at a table. “Who the fuck are you?” he asked.

“That’s not important. What is important is that we’re here for the beacon. I will ask you only the once. Where is it?”

“Fuck off.”

“Wrong answer.” Karliah put an arrow through his throat.

We found the beacon in a chest behind him. If the idiot had said that, I might have let him live. Oh well… But that wasn’t the strange part. I know all three of us shared concerned glances when we heard the voice, almost as if it flowed from the beacon I was now holding.

“A new hand touches the Beacon. Listen! Hear me and obey! A foul darkness has seeped into my temple. A darkness that you will destroy.”

“I take it that was Meridia?” I asked Karliah. Her look was my reply.

The three of us quickly headed back for our horses, amazed at how quickly we’d found it, and quickly found ourselves on the road heading to Rorikstead. The land west of Whiterun was mostly flat, able to see for what felt likes miles around. Mist rose from the ground at this early hour, giving it an eerie though beautiful feel. We rode by herds of deer and more than a few rabbits and foxes. It was amazing how nature took over barely a few minutes away from a large city such as Whiterun.

Making Rorikstead for mid-morning, we continued on, pushing our horses hard, as Karliah knew where we were headed, not requiring us to actually stop in Solitude itself. Crossing the Karth River over Dragon Bridge, passing through the small village on the northern side, it was afternoon by the time we turned off the main road towards the temple.

I could see a statue at the top of the temple, Karliah mentioning it was Meridia. But that was only the first thing that took my attention. Dismounting our horses, I could hear… chanting… Chanting vaguely similar to that time I was in Snow Veil Sanctum. “You hear that?”

“Hear what?” Vex asked.

“Chanting. You can’t hear it?” They both looked at me as if I was insane. Following the sound, we ended up at another word wall, and within the writing I couldn’t understand, a small section of it was glowing. As I walked towards it, my vision darkened so that only the word was glowing, and after a few seconds, it was as if my mind suddenly clear.

“Su…”

“What was that?” Karliah asked.

Pointing at the no longer glowing word, I said, “Right there. It says ‘Su’. It’s not our language though.”

“What language is it?”

“I have no idea. I can’t read the rest of it, but I can understand the word that was highlighted. Strange…”

Vex and Karliah shared a glance, shrugged, and we headed back to the temple. Placing the beacon on the pedestal, a bright light immediately shot into the sky, and I’m sure I wasn’t the only one blinded by a bright light that seemed to flow from the statue itself. It was then that a vision appeared in front of us. She looked female. In fact, she was rather beautiful. Pale skin. Blonde hair. And still that otherworldly voice that promised so much.

“It is time for my splendor to return to Skyrim. But the token of my truth lies buried in the ruins of my once great temple, now tainted by a profane darkness skittering within. The Necromancer Malkoran defiles my shrine with vile corruptions, trapping lost souls left in the wake of this war to do his bidding. Worse still, he uses the power stored within my own token to fuel his foul deeds. I have brought you here, mortal, to be my champion. You will enter my temple, retrieve my artefact, and destroy the defiler. Guide my light through the temple to open the inner sanctum and it is there that you will receive your boon.”

The light disappeared as we headed downstairs, back towards the entrance. The doors opened for us, I assume done so by Meridia, and I wasn’t the only one to almost gag at the stench that filtered up our nostrils. A thick, black fog hovered not far from the floor, and the first thing we noticed, apart from the fact the temple had fallen into ruin, were the bodies of desecrated soldiers.

“By the Eight, what sort of vile magic is happening in here?” Karliah muttered.

Descending further into the temple, we had to move beacons at occasional points, helping Meridia’s light flow. Doing that only attracted the attention of shadowy creatures Karliah called Shades. No idea what in oblivion they were, but they were vicious bastards, so the three of us worked in tandem to take each and every one down.

I’m not sure how many bodies we passed, but I did stop to take a quick look at one, and wished I hadn’t. Horrifying only begins to describe what had been done to the body. With each beacon we raised, it attracted more and more attention of the Shades, who started to attack in packs. Vex and I continued to work together, Karliah taking out her bow to help with those not within our range yet. That tactic worked in the larger chambers, not so much when fighting our way down narrow corridors.

The temple was enormous, assuming most of it was dug into the mountainside, left wondering why Meridia needed such a large building to begin with. It certainly felt we were going around in circles at times, backtracking on ourselves more than once. But we continued to guide her light through the temple, passing by even more bodies, killing endless number of Shades. Arriving at a large pair of doors, Karliah suggested Malkoran would lie in wait for us.

I suggested Karliah use her bow on him, and if there were any Shades, Vex and I would deal with those. A good idea, and for the most part, it worked. Karliah had three arrows buried in Malkoran as Vex and I handled the Shades. Malkoran managed to get off a spell, causing Karliah to leap out of the way, and as the necromancer dropped to the ground, another Shade formed, and this one had even more powerful magic.

Ordering us to pull back, we funnelled the Shades into a narrow corridor, and from there Vex, Karliah and I could work as one. The Shades fell to our blades, and once we had Malkoran’s Shade alone, we could hit it from all sides, and while the magic it wielded was dangerous, all of us taking a hit, the Shade eventually disappeared in a black mist.

“It is done. The defiler is defeated. Take Dawnbreaker from its pedestal.”

I hadn’t even seen the sword, walking towards it, noticing the same light emanating from it, similar to the light we’d helped flow through the temple. Taking the sword from its pedestal, I held it so I could look at the blade. I had never seen such intricate artwork on a blade. The design of the hilt was beautiful, and the light appeared to come from a jewel within the blade itself.

The three of us were then enveloped in a bright light, and we found ourselves standing in front of the statue again, it too shining brightly in the now night sky. “Malkoran is vanquished. Skyrim's dead shall remain at rest. This is as it should be. This is because of you. A new day is dawning. And you shall be its herald. Take the mighty Dawnbreaker and with it purge corruption from the dark corners of the world. Wield it in my name, that my influence may grow.”

“It shall be done, my lady.” What else was I going to say? No? What she was requesting was actually something good.

“May the light of certitude guide your efforts.”

Her light disappeared, and that left the three of us alone. I couldn’t help look upon the weapon again, and I knew this would be a weapon I would continue to wield for many years ahead.

Mounting our horses, we began the long ride back to Riften.

Chapter 13: Daedric Worship

Having Dawnbreaker in my possession urged something from within. I was already bound to Nocturnal, knowing my soul would be one with the Ebonmere upon my death. Did that disappoint me? Did I dream of Sovngrade above all? To be honest, not really. Let’s face facts. I’d joined the Fighter’s Guild because I almost died, and saw an escape. But I had enjoyed being a thief, and I was definitely enjoying it now. I’d been on adventures of which I’d never imagined, met and bedded some gorgeous women, and I was now rather rich. 

But I became ever more aware of shrines across Skyrim to the Daedra. And if that was the case, would we find ourselves in possession of more artefacts such as Dawnbreaker? Why should the Guild, or even myself, own them? Wield them? Have them in our possession as treasures? 

I sat down with Karliah one evening at my dining table, having invited her around for dinner, primarily to speak with her about these artefacts. She was surprised that I was so interested, and that I was so willing to go after Daedric artefacts, considering many were considered either cursed, or having to sell your soul to the Deadric prince themselves.

“Well, haven’t we already done that with Nocturnal?” I retorted gently, “So I guess we’ll just leave it to them to sort it out.”

“Ragnar, are you sure you want to head down this road? It’s a dark path you are considering, fraught with danger, your very soul at stake. These are powerful beings you are willing to deal with.”

“The prizes at the end might just be worth the risk. Dawnbreaker is a thing of unreal beauty, Karliah. And there must be more examples out there just like it. I will admit that I want to see what we could possibly gain, not just for ourselves, but the Guild.”

Karliah asked me for a map, so after clearing our plates, I poured us a cup of wine each as we sat close together, deciding what targets we could hit. She mentioned a Shrine of Azura, which I vaguely remembered seeing near Winterhold, though the weather had been awful while I was in the area each time. Karliah added further that Azura is considered a ‘good’ god by her people, and had been a worshipper herself before turning to Nocturnal.

She mentioned a Shrine to Peryite, a Daedra I’d never heard of, but according to her memory, there was a shrine near the village of Karthwasten. There was a Shrine to Mehrunes Dagon near the mining village of Stonehills, but even Karliah warned me about even thinking of doing anything for him. “You will be fine with most other Daedric Princes, Ragnar. Sure, they’ll exact some sort of price for a boon, but Mehrunes Dagon is not someone to be trifled with.”

“Why are you so worried about him?”

She laughed, at me more than anything. I didn’t mind, as I loved her laugh. “Do you not know anything about the Oblivion Crisis, Ragnar? The dragon statue in what was once the Temple of the One? You grew up in the Imperial City!”

Shrugging, I replied, “I know of the statue but never gave it much thought. As for the Oblivion Crisis, I know the Septim dynasty ended then but not much else.”

She said nothing for a moment, instead leaning over to kiss my cheek. “Never mind, it’s not that important. But what is important is that we be very careful obtaining any of these artefacts. Yes, the Guild will benefit from having them in our possession, but as I said, just remember the price it may cost you and us.”

“Anyone would think you cared, Karliah.”

She gave me a gentle shove. “I care about the Guild, Ragnar. But I care about your welfare even more. You’re the best thing to happen to the Guild in years. None of us can afford to lose you so quickly.”

I kissed her. I kissed her hard, Karliah immediately opening her mouth, accepting my tongue. Rolling up the map with one hand, I quickly stood her up and sat her down the table, pulling at the buttons of her dress, feeling her shuffle so she could lift it up from under her arse and eventually take it off. Now dressed in only panties, as the dress she was wearing meant she didn’t need a bra, I ran my hands over her soft skin as we continued to make out, Karliah pulling me into her body as she shuffled to the end of the table. She would have felt something hard press into her.

Moving my lips from her mouth, I kissed down her neck, feeling her gasp as I gave her a couple of gentle bites, nothing to leave a mark, but the sound she made was certainly appreciative, moving down past her collarbone before she leaned back to I could focus some attention on her breasts. Her nipples already hard, I had some fun with those, giving those a gentle bite too, hearing her suck a breath through her teeth as she ran her hands through my hair, holding my head in place for a moment.

Carrying on down her body, I kissed down her stomach until I reached the top of her panties, taking a moment to remove those with my teeth before she laid back on her forearms, her legs spread, her sex glistening in the candlelight, her chest rising and falling in her excitement.

I devoured her with my mouth, hearing her cry out as my tongue teased her, feeling her press down into my mouth, wanting even more. Wrapping my arms around a thigh each, I kept her in place as I ate her out like a man on death row, enjoying his last meal. Gods, she tasted marvellous. I loved going down on any woman I was intimate with, but there was something about that warm Dunmer pussy that I couldn’t get enough of.

I’m not sure what it was, perhaps it was the fact I was so in control, but apart from some deep breathing, a few moans, and mentions of my name, Karliah was already on the verge of having quite the climax. Stopping for a moment, I stood back, put my hands on the backs of her legs and pushed those wide and back, opening her up completely, before lowering my mouth again, looking up to see Karliah watching me.

“Soon as I cum, you’re fucking me,” she breathed.

Switching my attention to her clit, I slid a couple of fingers inside her, and she was now putty in my paws. Her back arched and she cried out, knowing she was now getting close, her hand now gripping my hair tightly. “Don’t fucking stop!” she cried.

Like that was going to happen. I wanted her to cum, and I wanted her to cum hard. Her body was now writhing, bucking slightly as I attacked her clit and fucked her hard with my fingers, ensuring I was hitting the right spot. It was simply too much, and I once I felt her start to squeeze my fingers, I knew she was on the verge.

“Ragnar!” she cried out as she climaxed. I didn’t stop what I was doing, not until I felt her hand release my hair and for her to collapse back on the table, asking me to stop for a moment.

Lifting myself up, I looked down at Karliah, lying across my dining table, her chest rising up and down, her legs spread, sex glistening from what we’d just done. Unbuckling my belt and unbuttoning my trousers, I pulled her forward and slid my cock inside her. I wasn’t going to last long at all. She cried out as I did, lifting herself up on her forearms again, begging for me to fuck her.

I didn’t last too long, not that it mattered. She managed to sit herself up, holding onto my shoulders, so she could kiss me, sliding her arse forward so I could properly start to fuck her. Once we started to resume making out, feeling her legs wrap around me, there was no chance I was going to last long at all. So I enjoyed it while I could.

“Karliah,” I breathed.

She just kissed me again as I buried myself inside her a few more times until I finally climaxed. I groaned loudly as I did, feeling my legs go weak as she fell backwards, collapsing on top of her, just stopping myself in time by lowering a forearm. I felt her soft kisses on my forehead and cheeks as I managed to regain some thought processes.

“What brought that on?” she asked a few minutes later, “Something I said?”

“Yeah, I guess so. Plus, the idea of fucking you was on my mind at the time.”

That made her laugh as I stood up, helping her sit up. Still hard inside her, though softening, we shared a soft kiss as she threw her arms around my neck. “I was only being honest,” she said quietly, “Everything you’ve done for me, Ragnar. Everything… It’s no wonder I’m here like this with you.”

Wrapping my arms around her, I held her tight, stroking her hair, her head resting on my chest. “I was only doing the right thing. I haven’t always done that in my life.”

“Plus you wanted to get in my panties, Ragnar.”

“That may have crossed my mind from time to time.” She scoffed at that. “Are you complaining?”

“Not at all. Just stating a fact.”

I carried her upstairs where, after I undressed, we continued our intimacy the rest of the night. Karliah loved nothing more than straddling and riding me for as long as she could last, and there’s perhaps nothing sexier than a fit Dunmer thief impaled on your cock, bouncing and riding away to one climax after another. If it wasn’t that, she liked me being in control when on her hands and knees. Considering her arse was practically perfect to look at, I definitely enjoyed that position too.

Once our appetites were sated, at least a couple of hours later, she slept in my arms, murmuring how much she enjoyed our relationship. I just let her know that I cared for her as well, remembering her last words prior to starting our fuck session. I saw her smile in the candlelight before I blew it out so we could both sleep.

Wandering into the Flagon together the next morning, Delvin, Vex and Brynjolf looked at us and laughed. No doubt Karliah looked rather content with life, and I probably looked smug as fuck. Can you blame me? They’ve all seen Karliah now, and would certainly understand my attraction. Sitting down at the same table, we declined the offer of a drink.

“So what’s on your mind, boss?” Brynjolf asked. That’s what they all called me now. Boss. I didn’t mind, as I was the Guild Master and it was a simple sign of respect.

“I was discussing with Karliah last night an idea that I feel I should run by you guys too, get your opinion.” They all nodded, so I continued, “Obviously you know I now have Dawnbreaker, an artefact given by Meridia. I’m thinking the Guild should try and locate more artefacts.”

“Daedric artefacts?” Delvin asked for clarification.

“Correct. Let’s face facts. The Guild is already allied to a Daedric Prince. Those of us who are Nightingales, and that’s all five of us here, have all sold our souls already. I’m not sure if the Daedra communicate, but I think Nocturnal will probably fight to keep us, so I’m thinking we could pursue other artefacts. Then we can decide whether we keep them, or sell them for a lot of coin to interested parties. What do you think?”

I looked around the table. Karliah was already on board, though wanted us to be careful. Brynjolf looked worried, but the idea that we’d make coin would swing him. Delvin was prepared to back me regarding anything considering I was the one responsible for ending the ‘curse’. Vex would agree as long as it didn’t put us in danger. Or that’s what I figured the four of them would think.

“I’m all for it, boss, but it’s dealing with Daedra,” Brynjolf stated.

“Have you considered the consequences if it goes wrong?” Delvin wondered.

“I have. If the price is too high, like my life, then it’s obviously not worth it. But the risk trying to obtain whatever it is just might just be.”

“What are you thinking of first?” Vex asked.

Karliah had brought the map, so after clearing away the tankards, I pointed. “The Shrine of Azura lies just west of Winterhold. Apparently on a clear day you can see it from miles around. I’m wondering what visiting her will gain us…”

“When are you going?” Brynjolf asked. I must have had a look on my face, as he laughed. “Come now, boss, I know you’re itching to get back on that horse of yours to ride somewhere, another adventure waiting to unfold.”

“You make it sound so romantic, Bryn,” I retorted a little sarcastically.

“So I assume you’re taking Karliah?” Vex wondered. I must have had another look on my face, as she laughed too. “She’s Dunmer, so it would make sense you would take a Dunmer to the god they revere above all.”

“How do you know that?” Karliah asked.

“I know things, Karliah. You should know that by now.” She looked back at me, asking, “So…?”

“I’ll take Karliah, and we’ll leave tomorrow.”

Figuring we’d be gone a few days, I spent the night at the Bunkhouse with Haelga. If she was at my place, we’d more often than not start in the Dibellan room before moving to the bedroom. I’d learned she loved being tied up and completely at my mercy, to do with her whatever I wanted. Half the time I’d do something silly, like tickle her relentlessly. Sometimes she liked me to use the crop or a cane on her arse. She loved being spanked, cooing about the strength in my arms if I only used my hand. If she wasn’t tied up, I’d have her over my knees, and after a good spanking, she’d be soaking and it would barely take a few minutes to finger her to orgasm.

Other times she’d beg for me to just ruin her, fucking her mouth, pussy and arse, cumming in all three, just using her as a living, breathing sex toy. It was amazing that, after doing that, we’d lie in bed together, where I’d simply hold her in my arms, assuring her that I loved her, and she would happily fall asleep.

If we were at her Bunkhouse, though, things were a little more ‘normal’, for want of a better word. Sure, the fucking could still be hard, fast and rough, headboard smacking against the wall and Haelga crying out at the top of her lungs, but more of than not, it was more tender and sensual, without the need for any real exuberance. That was when Haelga would happily ride and grind me most of the night, either leaning back so I could take in her body, she would lean forward, so we could kiss continuously, or I’d be sat back so we could look into each other’s eyes with ease and share sweet and tender words of love for the other.

The night before leaving for the shrine, we made love but spent most of the night simply cuddling and talking. We were always rather warm after a good sex session, so the blankets were not covering us, and I could continue to take in her body in the moonlight. She knew I looked and would occasionally move her body so I could take in some more. She was a Nord goddess, she really was. I had noticed she now left a little mound of blonde fur above her sex, having mentioned it helped keep her scent. Just that alone helped make me rock hard at times.

“Are you going with Karliah?” she wondered.

“I am. Why?”

“I just figured you were, considering you work together often. My question is, when are you going to have us both at the same time?” 

I could help chuckle. “I know you’d be interested, but I’m not sure about Karliah. She’s not like you at all.”

“She doesn’t like being tied up and spanked?”

“We just have what I would call ‘normal sex’.”

“Does she take it in the arse?”

“Not yet. She’s interested, but she’s hesitant due to my size. We’ll cross that bridge if she decides that she’d like to try it.”

“Does she at least swallow?”

“Most women I’ve been with swallow, Haelga. I’ve been a very lucky man. Some just love it more than others.”

“You’re giving me a final load in the morning before you leave, aren’t you?”

I kissed her forehead. “Like I would deny you something like that, gorgeous.”

She cuddled into me, feeling her breasts press into me. “You know I love it. Maybe I’ll swallow. Maybe I’ll let you finish on my face. Maybe…”

We eventually fell asleep, and she kept her promise. As soon as we were both awake, me with my usual morning erection, she manoeuvred herself so she could blow me, though she knew what I’d want, burying my face in her pussy at the same time. Gods, she was already wet and willing, but while I certainly spent a lot of time licking every inch of her sex, I concentrated on what she was doing to me. As I’ve mentioned, Haelga was probably the best cocksucker I’d ever been with, and it didn’t take her long to receive what she wanted, taking the umpteenth load in her mouth. Once I’d blasted, I concentrated on bringing her to orgasm, unsurprised hers didn’t following too much longer after mine.

After dressing, we headed downstairs for breakfast, where most of those who lived in the Bunkhouse were used to my presence. I’m sure they heard us more often than not. Svana was still as flirty as always, and I think she was still interested in me, though my advice still stood. Sure, I’d take her virginity if she was adamant about it, but I’d rather not be her first, even though I still remembered Ariel rather fondly, and she’d been a working girl and my first lover, after all.

Karliah was waiting for me at the stables, asking if I’d had a good time the night before. I was always polite enough to simply say that I had, as she was genuinely only joking, Haelga and Karliah more than aware of the other. I still didn’t see Ingun as much as the other two, though I knew we’d both like that to change, but juggling two was hard enough. Three would make it even more difficult.

We were leaving early, planning on making it to Windhelm by nightfall, finishing the journey the next day. Normally we’d camp if heading west, but with snow continuously lying on the ground the further north one travelled, staying in Windhelm was the only sensible option, unless you wanted to freeze to death.

Still, the slow pace of our horses allowed us plenty of time to chat. The longer time went on, the more Karliah was willing to talk about what happened during her exile. I was amazed to hear she’d been all over Tamriel, though she had spent a lot of time back in her homeland of Morrowind, simply as it was easier for her to be another face in the crowd. Skyrim had always been her real home, though, and she’d even stayed in Windhelm itself. She admitted to exaggerating about never staying anywhere more than one night, aware that the search for her had ended as soon as Mercer had taken control of the Guild. But she also admitted that she still slept with one eye open, just in case.

Being a Dunmer, I suggested that we should just stay in the Grey Quarter. Karliah understood my reasoning, so we ended up staying at a tavern, where my presence was tolerated, though I heard murmurs of resentment, even though it was obvious I was there with Karliah. So she suggested we show them how together we were, heading upstairs before the place was closed and made plenty of noise, enough that the innkeeper mentioned it the next morning, to our amusement.

Heading west and then north, following the road, it was a clear day so the statue of Azura was visible for miles. As it was a clear day, it was bitterly cold. I was okay but Karliah was huddled under furs as we rode along, muttering about my damned Nordic blood. The road took us close to Winterhold before we turned off and headed up the mountain path. Heading into the wilderness, even in a frozen landscape this far north, could lead us into some trouble. And that was the case when we ran into a frost troll.

Dismounting quickly, Karliah kept back and used her bow as I got in close, trying to turn the troll so Karliah could pepper its back with arrows. It worked but not before I took a good swipe from the troll, enough to leave an ugly gash in my armour, and I certainly felt pain in my chest. That just pissed me off at the same time, leaving plenty of wounds on the troll in return, and with all the arrows in its back, it’s white skin quickly ran red with blood. Finally weakening and dropping to its knees, I dropped my shield, placing two hands on the hilt of my sword as I swung at its neck.

Karliah was concerned about my wound, and used a little magic to heal me. I rarely saw her use magic, and I think the fact I didn’t react at all when she used it impressed her, as I knew most Nords hated magic. I felt okay even before being healed, but there was now no lingering pain at all, and we mounted our horses, continuing on our way. Apart from having to deal with a pack of wolves, Karliah shooting two of them, the rest running away in fright.

The wind was fierce the higher we climbed, and even I started to feel the bite. The world was a white canvas of snow. Not a thing seemed to grow. It was eerily beautiful, and when we stopped to look over the landscape, there were plenty of landmarks, none of which I knew, though Karliah was aware of one or two, pointing out the College, which was home to the mages of Skyrim, and one or two forts she knew of.

We dismounted again and climbed the steps towards base the statue itself. From up close, it was absolutely enormous, left staggered that anyone had managed to build a monument in such harsh conditions. I thought it would have been deserted, but there was a lone worshipper on their knees, rising to their feet as we approached.

“Azura has seen your coming, traveller. It was not curiosity, but fate, that has led you here.”

“Who are you?”

“I am Aranea Ienith, traveller. I am the last of my people to continue the worship of our god.”

I looked at Karliah. She shrugged, stating, “She’s not exactly wrong. But, then again, who in their right mind would remain here in this bitter cold?”

“What did you mean by ‘seen my coming’?” I wondered.

“Azura has given me the gift of foresight. I had a vision of you walking up the steps to this altar long before you were born. You have been chosen to be her champion. I know it is unexpected, but do not worry. It will all unfold as she has predicted.”

I couldn’t help chuckle. “Champion for another daedra!”

“Azura is no ordinary daedra, traveller. She is the Queen of Dawn and Dusk. The Queen of the Night Sky.” She paused before asking, “Who else are you champion for?”

“Nocturnal. We’re thieves.” Karliah sighed beside me, probably thinking I was an idiot for admitting that. But I didn’t see any real harm.

“Hmmm. Azura and Nocturnal are natural enemies. But my vision of your arrival would not be a lie. There must be a reason why you are here, and why you have been chosen.”

Glancing at Karliah again, she said, “Well, we are after daedric artefacts, so I can only assume we’ll end up with one if you’re her supposed champion.”

Looking back at Aranea, I nodded, stating, “Okay, if I’m her champion, what am I to do?”

“You must go to a fortress, endangered by water, yet untouched by it. Inside, you will find an elven mage who can turn the brightest star as black as night. It is cryptic, I know, but Azura's signs are never wrong. I believe the fortress may refer to Winterhold. Ask if they know this elven enchanter.”

Figuring Winterhold would at least be a good place to start, Aranea wished us good luck on our quest before we mounted our horses and headed back down the mountain. There was very little to Winterhold, having learned that most of the city had collapsed just under a century ago. There was the jarl’s residence, the usual tavern and inn, a shop which, upon inspection, didn’t have all that much. And while there were plenty of houses, most of them were abandoned. The only major feature of the city was the College, but despite not being concerned about magic, I had no real interest in learning it.

Wandering into the Frozen Hearth in, it was rather deserted, only the innkeeper and a few hardy souls busy getting slowly and quietly drunk. Asking the innkeeper about any elves making their home in Winterhold, we were pointed to an adjoining room, where we found an elven mage by the name of Nelacar.

He was immediately suspicious and I made sure my hands were away from my weapons as he glanced between Karliah and myself. Narrowing his eyes, he asked, “Who sent you? Was it the College? The Jarl? We agreed there would be no more questions.”

I had a feeling he wasn’t well liked either in Winterhold or the College. Figuring honesty was sometimes the best policy, as I was a habitual liar at times, I said, “A priestess of Azura sent me.”

I think having Karliah was rather convincing, as I noticed blood drain from his face, even as it was hidden by the hood of his cloak. “Azura? Gods, it's all finally coming back to haunt me,” he muttered.

Gesturing to the chairs at his small table, I said, “Why don’t you tell us everything you know. It might be best for all of us.”

He looked at us in silence for a few seconds before he sighed, already defeated, and he explained further once we were all sat down. “What do you know about soul gems?”

“They’re used for enchanting.” That was the extent of my knowledge. It was another thing to do with magic.

“They are. Except the gem is always consumed. They're frail. Except for one.”

“And I assume this is something to do with Azura?”

He nodded. “Azura's Star. A Daedric artifact that allows any number of souls to pass through it. Some of us wanted to find out how. I was working under Malyn Varen, then. If only we knew what he was really planning.”

He went into further detail about himself, Malyn, and the experiments they were performing. Their exile from the College, where Malyn headed after their exile, their joint work on the Star, and Malyn’s eventual descent into insanity. He then described how he went insane, apparently at the machinations of Azura herself. Considering what he’d told me, I didn’t particularly feel any sympathy. “We're nothing to the Daedra. Pawns to move around, praise, and punish as they see fit,” Nelacar retorted.

“Look, just tell us where Malyn is and we’ll get the Star.”

“And what will you do with it?”

“Keep it as an artefact.”

“Why? Don’t you realise you can use it? If you were to trap the souls of your foes, you could enchant your weapons and armour with considerable effects. Make your weapons capable of wielding fire. Enchant your armour to protect yourself from even the worst of magic.”

“And how would I do all that?” 

“When you get the Star, bring it to me and I can finish the work Malyn started.”

I didn’t agree, simply saying I would see once we found the Star. But at least he knew where Malyn was, a crumbling fort by the name of Ilinalta’s Deep, which rested on the north shore of Lake Ilinalta, which was just north of Falkreath. In other words, one hell of a long ride away.

Thanking Nelacar for the information, we headed back to the innkeeper and booked a room for the night. Figuring we were a couple, he gave us the room downstairs, for more privacy. We didn’t head downstairs straight away, heading outside to check the weather. The sky was still relatively clear, so could assess the time as late afternoon. Figuring there was nothing else to really do, we headed back inside and bought ourselves a tankard of ale.

One turned into a few, and after sharing a meal, the conversation turned rather suggestive as we sat side by side, and after suggesting it would be best to head downstairs, she was giggling away as she took my hand. Once we had a little privacy, she was all over me, as much as I was over her, our clothes disappearing rather quickly. Lying back on the bed naked, she simply spread her legs, grabbed my cock and guided me inside her. “Fuck me hard,” was all she said.

So I did. All the dirty talk in my ear has turned me on quite a lot, as after barely five minutes, I was ready to cum. She surprised me further by saying, “Pull out and cum on me.”

“Seriously?”

“Gods yes.”

Pounding that sweet Dunmer pussy for all I was worth, I barely pulled out in time to stroke myself to climax, my white ropes of cum standing out quite starkly against her dark skin. She giggled with delight once I was done, watching as she used a finger to scoop up one line and put it in her mouth. “Should have just asked me to finish there,” I said.

“I wanted to feel it on me rather than in me, Ragnar.”

“Okay, next time your face then.”

I watched her clean herself with her fingers, and she put on quite the show, as once she was done with that, she started to fondle herself. Not wanting to be left out, I got on the bed, hovering above her, using my fingers on her too as we made out. Sliding my fingers inside her, she gently rubbed her clit at the same time. “Why am I so fucking turned on, Ragnar?” she breathed.

“No idea, but I’m definitely not complaining.”

That made her laugh. “Of course you’re bloody not.” She paused before leaning up to whisper in my ear, “I’m even thinking about letting you fuck my arse.” She leaned back to meet my eyes. “You’d love that, wouldn’t you?”

“Karliah, your arse is fantastic. And you know I’d love to fuck you there.”

The smile was surprisingly sweet. “Well, maybe not tonight, but next time you’re at the Hall, you can show me how good it can be.”

She quieted down as I started to fuck her harder with my fingers, ensuring I was hitting the right spot. With her fingers now rubbing her clit furiously, her orgasm wasn’t long in arriving either. With the focus completely on her, I could watch her face, her eyes filled with lust and desire, her mouth parting slightly as she panted, getting every close to climax. “Ragnar,” she breathed, and I knew she was getting close.

When I felt her start to squeeze my fingers, that’s when I knew, and I slow my thrusting down as she continued to rub herself to completion. She was now quiet as she crested that wave, her back arching up into my body, feeling her legs wrap around me tightly as I managed to keep my hand moving. “Ragnar,” she breathed again. Gods, I loved it when a woman said your name like that. It sent a shiver up your spine.

She eventually had to cry enough, moving her hand and putting her fingers in my mouth, before I did the same with mine, enjoying her taste. Then we kissed as we stayed in the same position. “So, we were both rather horny,” she stated a little later.

“It was your fault with all that dirty talk in my ear upstairs.”

“What? All I said is that I wanted to be impaled on your big, thick cock, Ragnar. Haven’t you heard that before?”

“Well, yes, but it was the way your said it, then the way your breathed on my neck and in my ear while saying it…” I looked down and I was hard again. “See, just thinking about it does the job!”

She flipped around and got on her hands and knees. “Well, no point wasting a perfectly good erection, Ragnar. I think I need to be fucked again. Oh, and do the same again, but cum on my back. Maybe you can feed it to me this time?”

“By the Eight, woman!”

“What?” I couldn’t help smile as I slid my cock inside her again, hearing her gasp before her own smile formed. “Ragnar,” she said quietly.

Pulling her back against my body, I kissed her again before I held her and I fucker her gently to start with. She enjoyed it, and kissing down her neck certainly made her moan rather loudly. Though we started out soft and gentle, she was soon lying down on her front, arse in the air, and I was fucking her hard. And she got what she wanted in the end…

Lying together under the covers a long time later, as we carried on for quite a while, enjoying at least another climax or two each, I held her in my arms, feeling her hands stroke them in return. “Ragnar, you know how I said when this all started, to never say those words.”

“I remember.”

“I still won’t say them. But I…” She sighed, feeling her snuggle into me even more, her body moulded against mine. “I love the time we spend together. Not just the sex, although that is incredible in itself, but travelling around Skyrim with you. It reminds me of better times when I was young.”

“I’m just glad we’re doing this together. I love your company, Karliah.”

“Can I ask a question?”

“Sure.”

“What of Haelga? Will you eventually settle down with her?”

“We’ve talked about it already. She doesn’t want to marry again. I guess that suits me too. We love each other in our own way, but we will never be monogamous. I’ve always said since we started that she can be with others if she wants. I certainly won’t be jealous. She knows about you; she knows about Ingun. She knows I’ve had others around Skyrim.”

“What about children?”

“I don’t think my profession really leads to things such a wife and children, in all honesty. I love what I do, Karliah. And I like having a selection of women to be with. I don’t want to be tied down.”

“You’re just greedy.”

“I am. But lives are short for most of us. So I’m going to have some fun while I’m alive.”

“Will I be involved in that fun?”

“For as long as you’re willing to put up with it, Karliah. That’s all I can promise.”

She turned around to face me, a hand stroking my cheek before she kissed me softly on the lips. “For as long as possible,” she whispered, before she nestled her head against my chest. I wrapped her arms around her as she promptly fell asleep.

It took us two full days to ride from Winterhold to the area where the fort was situated. We made camp on the night of the second day of travel along the shoreline some distance from the fort. There was no sign that anything lived within its walls, though we agreed that if Malyn wasn’t alive, there were bound to be other mages he’d probably recruited over the years. Karliah suggested we both go armed with bows and do our work from a distance.

Camping under the stars that evening, we were sensible, knowing we wanted an early rise the next morning. We’d discussed whether it was worth returning to the shrine if we grabbed the Star. Karliah eventually said we should make the journey, just in case there was a profit in it, though I insisted that we keep the Star itself. She figured that would probably be the case regardless.

I’m sure I wasn’t the only one feeling a slight sense of foreboding as we entered the crumbling fort at dawn the next day. The skeleton we found shackled to a post certainly didn’t help our sense of unease. In a knapsack nearby we found a waterlogged journal. Most of it was unreadable but a small portion suggested he’d been a fisherman, and that stories abounded about the fort. Apparently it was haunted. I figured it was mages.

Dressed in our Nightingale armour, no doubt we blended into the shadows and darkness of the halls and corridors. It didn’t take long until we came across our first mages, and we put arrows in them before they could try out. Standing over the body of one, Karliah mentioned they were necromancers.

“Jog my mind, Karliah. Do I want to know what a necromancer is?”

“Not particularly. Let’s just say they don’t let the dead rest in peace.”

“Figured. Bastards. So we kill them all?”

“We’d be doing people a favour. I know we’re not exactly honourable, but there’s what we do, then there’s what these people do.”

So that’s what we did, a pair of Nightingales stalking the corridors, putting arrows in anything that resembled a necromancer. Other monsters patrolled, including skeletons and the undead. Seeing their rotting corpses stagger along was utterly unnerving. The fort itself was flooded, and our progress was stopped at times as passages we could have followed were submerged. We were never in any real danger from the water, but the further we travelled, the more necromancers were found. Of Malyn, I wouldn’t have recognised him anyway, but I figured none we killed were him, particularly as we didn’t find Azura’s Star.

Even Karliah was nervous when we kept heading down instead of up, figuring we must be heading further nad further underwater. How the entire fort wasn’t filled with water, I’ll never know. Maybe the fort was just built to last. Maybe it was magic. Maybe it was pure luck. But as we descended, there were even more necromancers. None gave anything away about what they were doing, simply going straight on the attack when they noticed our presence. Half the time Karliah and I managed to put them down without them ever knowing we were there, but sometimes luck still wasn’t exactly on our side.

Nocturnal was probably still a little pissed off about the whole Skeleton Key issue.

There was evidence as we wandered that the mages had made a home for themselves, figuring they were probably like Malyn, once of the College but now exiles. Or perhaps the avenues of magic they wanted to practice was frowned upon. If they were all necromancers, then little bloody wonder. The prison cells were found were thankfully empty, though Karliah murmured that the mages probably attempted to catch people for experimentation. Another good reason to kill them all.

We never did find Malyn Varen. Or, at least, we never found him alive. We entered a large room, having explored everywhere possible, finding a skeleton sat on what looked like a throne. If it wasn’t a throne, it was at least a rather comfortable chair. Funnily enough, sitting in the lap of the skeleton was the Star itself. Or, at least, I think it was. The fact it was black suggested something was amiss.

Beside the chair was a book, Karliah grabbing that to have a read. It contained the thoughts of Malyn, and it told us everything we needed to know. “We need to head straight back to Aranea, Ragnar. She will help us solve this.”

Getting out of the fort was easy, considering there was a ladder leading out onto the roof of the fort, giving us quite a beautiful view of the lake and opposite shoreline. We stood in silence for a couple of minutes, feeling the slight breeze, the call of nature around us. I had the thought that building a house somewhere along the shore would be quite a nice idea in the future, once I’d made enough coin to live comfortably the rest of my life. Maybe with enough rooms for some of the women in my life though…

Our horses were nearby, and we quickly packed up our camp and headed off, straight back the same way we came. It was another two-night journey, camping out under the stars the first night, staying in Windhelm in the Grey Quarter again on the second. Aranea was pleased to see us, but also surprised to see us so soon. After a quick explanation of what we’d discovered, I handed over the star. She lay it on the altar, stating she would commune with Azura herself. “Azura. Mother of Roses. Goddess of Dusk and Dawn. Your chosen champion has returned your Star to you.” Nothing happened, or at least I didn’t hear anything, then she turned to me. “She wishes to speak to you herself. Please, place your hands on the altar, and you will hear her voice.”

Doing as she asked, I quickly heard this soft, smooth, feminine voice. Quite similar to Nocturnal. She thanked me for retrieving her Star, though informed me that the reason the Star was black was due to Malyn actually occupying the Star itself. Wondering how such a thing was possible, Azura then gave me more news; to ensure the purity of the Star, I must venture into the Star’s realm to kill him.

Figuring I had little choice but to agree, Azura wasted little time sending me in. I have no idea it was just my soul or my entire body, but I knew taking on a mage such as Malyn would be difficult. So I wasn’t going to fuck around. Unsheathing my sword, attaching my shield to my forearm, I went searching for him. I eventually found him, he thought I was a captured soul until I told him to fuck off, then I ran after him. He flung some magic in my direction, including a fireball that came far too close for comfort, but he couldn’t run forever.

“I am immortal!” he cried. That was proven to be a lie when I ran him through with my sword, leaving his dying body on the ground.

I woke up, still standing at the altar, looking down to the see Azura’s Star now glowed a pure white. Aranea stood at my side again. “While you were in the Star, Azura gave me a vision. Her last, she said. I have never been without Azura's foresight since escaping Morrowind. I don't know what to do.” She seemed to think for a moment. “If you need me, I'd be honoured to accompany you, Guardian of the Star. It would give me a purpose.”

“I have told you what I do. Are you sure you can handle that?”

“My past is not clean, Guardian. As for what you and your friend do, it is not my position to judge. All I know is that you helped me and showed your devotion to Azura. To me, that is the only important thing.”

“What do you think, Karliah?”

“What skills would you bring, Aranea?” she asked.

“I was a sorceress of no small skill before I came into Azura's faith. Afterwards, her magic sustained me. I could easily provide my spells to your cause. Protect you from harm. Defeat your enemies.”

“Well, that’s me sold, Ragnar, but you’re the boss.”

“What would you do otherwise?” I wondered.

Aranea shrugged. “Azura said my part in all this was over. That my fate had moved beyond the Twilight, and I was on my own. I will tend Azura's shrine when you do not need me. I still have my duties, but for the first time I feel... alone.”

I can be a bastard at times, but I also have a heart. And she sounded so… heartbroken, I would have felt like an arsehole if I’d left her there. “Come with us, Aranea. Do you know of Riften?”

“I’ve heard of it. Is that where you call home?”

“It is. I’m sure we can find you something to do there and also a place to rest your head.”

“Then I would be delighted to join you, Guardian.”

Mounting our horses, Karliah figured she would join me on my horse, allowing Aranea to ride hers, and once we’d descended the mountain, we turned our horses south and began the long journey home.

Notes:

Haven't really said much, but hope those following this are enjoying it. Leave a comment if you have any questions or if there's something you particularly like (or dislike.)

Chapter 14: Crossing a Line

Aranea was living at my place. No, we were not intimate. She was simply a friend, offered to be my steward, and would offer to accompany me on the road if and when I chose to head off on another adventure. I guess I didn’t really need a steward, but more importantly, it gave her a roof over her head, and I suggested she get to know any of her fellow mages in town.

I also had to warn her about my lifestyle. I didn’t exactly show her the Dibellan room, but I let her know that when Haelga visited, she would hear lots of noise from within. I also admitted that I would enjoy physical relations with the women I was intimate with around the house. She surprised me by simply laughing, stating she was young once, and if she did walk in on me with a woman, she would simply head to her own room.

My first visitor after Aranea moved in was actually Ingun. We saw each other often, nearly every day, but we very rarely spent a night together. After returning from the Shrine of Azura, I spent the first night with Haelga at the Bunkhouse, where we made love but spent most of the night just talking, then the next night I stayed with Karliah at the Hall.

Heading down to Elgrim’s shop, Ingun was behind the counter as always, busy working away, though as soon as she noticed it was me who walked in, she ran around the counter and leapt into my arms. Thankfully I was strong enough to hold her, even with her legs wrapped around me. “I’ve missed you!” she whispered before I was kissed in such a way, it was bound to get a bodily reaction.

“That’s why I’m here. How would you like to come to my place for dinner tonight?”

Her face lit up in absolute delight. “Of course. When would you like me there?”

“I’ll be home all day, so whenever you finish. I’m thinking dinner first, then perhaps dessert and a little wine or brandy on the porch.”

“Then sex?” she asked hopefully.

I couldn’t help chuckle. “Yes, then sex.”

She kissed me again before lowering herself to the ground, letting me know she would be at my front door at dusk. I headed to the market, as although I had plenty of food at the house, I thought some fresh fish would be a nice change. The Riften fishery just outside the city walls always had the latest catch, and for the price of a couple of septims, I had a couple of nice salmon steaks for Ingun and I. I was no chef, but I sprinkled a few herbs onto the fish in preparation, while I would do the same with the potatoes and vegetables. I had quite the wine collection growing, some I’d purchased legally, others gained through more nefarious means. I still didn’t rob from anyone within Riften, but that didn’t mean I wouldn’t stoop to robbing transports between others cities and Riften, particularly if I heard there was something worth stealing.

Ingun appeared as the sun was slowly starting to set, the sky a beautiful mix of orange and purple. Inviting her inside, we sat at the dining table as I poured her some wine, and I served dinner rather quickly. She was rather complimentary of the meal I cooked. I wasn’t any sort of grand chef, but I was slowly learning what worked and what didn’t.

“And what’s for dessert?” she asked in such a tone, I think she was suggesting something other than the small cakes I’d bought. I mentioned I did have those, and a tasty brandy that should go with them. She surprised me stating she would like to have some of those and we could sit on the porch.

The sun had set by the time we took a seat on the porch. Torches had been lit across the city, providing light, though we sat mostly in darkness. Ingun lasted all of five minutes before she was sitting on my lap, leaning back against me, head resting against my shoulder. “It’s a lovely evening,” she said softly.

“It certainly is. Though I have to admit my first impression of Riften wasn’t great.”

“There’s a reason why it is like you see. Around seventy years ago, there was a jarl in charge of the city and surrounding area who proved little more than a tyrant. The people eventually cried enough and fought back, but after lighting his castle on fire, it spread and eventually consumed the entire city. What you see is the portion of Riften that’s been rebuilt. It used to be a grand old city on the shores of Lake Honrich. Now it’s… what you see. So, little wonder you didn’t think a lot. But Riften’s experienced a lot of hard times over the centuries.”

“Has your family always been in Riften?”

“Well, I was born here, as was mother. Before that, I’m not sure. I’ve never really asked, to be honest. What about you?”

“All I know is that I’m a Nord. Being an orphan…”

“Sorry.”

“No, no. Trust me, it’s not a wound of any sort. It’s just I don’t know my heritage at all.”

“So what do you think of Riften now?”

Putting my lips to her ear, I whispered, “Let’s just say I have a few reasons to stay,” before I kissed her cheek.

She stood up, and I thought was going to grab my hand to lead me inside. Instead, she sat down on her knees on my lap, and we had a little make out session while sitting on the porch. One or two of the guards may have noticed if walking at the right angle, but I’d discovered the porch did provide an element of privacy. I hadn’t had sex on the porch, though. Or, at least, I hadn’t yet.

Ingun and I didn’t have sex on the porch. After quite a long make-out session, during which I may have partially disrobed Ingun, we headed inside for some fun. Before doing that, though, she asked about my special room that I’d designed for Haelga. Slightly surprised that she was interested, I figured there was no harm in showing her.

I’ll admit I found her reaction to some of the things I had in their quite amusing, particularly the manacles and chains attached to the ceiling and roof, and then she had a nosy in the drawers, pulling out a rather long phallic like object. “She likes this?”

“In her arse,” I stated bluntly.

Ingun’s jaw dropped. “Seriously?” she asked quietly.

“I’m sure you’ve heard the rumours about Haelga. While most of them are probably true, there is a good reason why we are together too.”

“You really like her, don’t you?”

“I do. She’s totally misunderstood. And, surprisingly, since we started our relationship, I know she has not been with anyone else. She says she hasn’t, and I believe her.”

“Do you want me to do anything like this? I mean, like with the chains or…”

“No. Not at all. I made all this purely for Haelga and I. She’s into it, and I don’t mind experimenting with her.”

I think she sighed with relief, putting the rather large phallic object back in the drawer. In the comfort of my bedroom, I slowly undressed her until she was nude, then lay her back on the bed and ate her out to a couple of orgasms. Laying down next to her after the second, she lay back with a sweet smile on her face as she recovered, ensuring she cuddled into me, then laughing away when she realised I was still clothed except for having removed my shoes.

We stayed like that for quite a while, continuing to chat away. Ingun loved to talk about all her experiments, and I’d happily listen. There’s nothing better than listening to someone speak so enthusiastically about their passions. I did the same with Haelga, though her passions were more about what we did together, while Karliah would regale me with stories of jobs she’d pulled prior to her exile.

Ingun eventually had enough and pulled me to my feet and slowly undressed me. Her hands were like mine, a little rough. She worried about them from time to time, so I made sure I spent plenty of time kissing her palms, letting her know that I didn’t worry about them. Once she had me naked, she returned the favour by dropping to her knees. Looking up at me with those gorgeous eyes of hers, I didn’t last particularly long, though I was rather turned on from having spent so long eating her out.

She didn’t blow me to completion. I let her knew I was close before she lay back on the bed so we could fuck, albeit very briefly, before I came. She held onto me tightly as I did, kissing me all over my face. “I love it when you do that,” she whispered. Thankfully, because of her job, she always had plenty of potions to prevent the possible outcome of always doing that.

We made love again a little later, this time Ingun quite happily riding me for quite a while. She knew I loved watching her slowly grind herself with my length inside her, while I could run my hands all over her body, particularly those two perfect globes on her chest, which I’d be constantly sitting up to suck and lick, feeling her hands wrap around my head to hold my head in place as I did so. Once we both came, I’d lie down with her on top of me, heading resting on my chest as I stroked her back. Apart from her hands, the rest of her was silky smooth. I really did enjoy every time we were together. I think we would have both liked it more often, but she understood my lifestyle, so we just ensured we enjoyed every single moment we were together.

I walked her to the shop the next morning, where she made sure to leave a very long, lingering kiss on my lips before she softly bid me farewell for the moment. I often looked at Ingun, then compared her to the rest of the family, and wondered how someone as kind-hearted and good natured as her ever rose from the rest. Don’t get me wrong, I worked for Maven in a way, but the difference between Ingun and the rest was stark.

The next couple of days were spent with Vex, Delvin, Brynjolf and Karliah, looking into more Daedric artefacts and what we could possibly find next. We thought obtaining any known texts on Daedra would help us locate further locations of statues, or at least an idea of what we might be looking for. The five of us did manage to put together a list of Daedra we know about, but as to if they had statues or shrines, we didn’t know.

“Put out feelers about any Daedric influence,” I suggested, “If any strange occurrences are happening around Skyrim, perhaps it might involve one of them?”

“Not a bad idea. Daedra can be behind some of the strange shit that goes on around here,” Brynjolf admitted, “I’ll send out word, and if there’s anything weird that catches the eye or ear, we should certainly be notified.”

“Are you still sure we should be doing this?” Delvin asked. I wasn’t the only one to hear the concern in his tone.

I understand his caution. “What concerns you?”

“Look, you’ve done a bloody good job, boss. But we’ve already got the blessing of one Daedra. That I can handle. But if we go supporting more Daedra, or obtaining more of their artefacts, we’re going to start gaining the attention of others who won’t like it.”

“You mean the Vigilants,” Vex stated.

“Precisely. And they don’t fuck around. They will come in here so fast, it’ll make your head spin.”

“Vigilants?” I had to ask, “Never heard of them.”

“They hunt Daedra worshippers, boss,” Delvin explained, “And if the get even the faintest whiff of that, they ask no questions. And they have free reign to do so.”

“Okay, so we do our investigations and we do it quietly. And if we get a hint the Vigilants are closing in, we shut it down until they lose interest.”

The four shared a glance and agreed that wasn’t a bad idea. I guessed Delvin would remain concerned no matter what, but at least he’d got it off his chest immediately, instead of continuously worrying about it.

Heading home when it was dark, I’d barely shrugged off my coat when there was a knock at the door. Not expecting Karliah or Ingun, I thought it would be Haelga. I had told her as soon as I moved into Riftweald that she was welcome anytime she wanted as she definitely didn’t need an invitation. Opening the door, I was surprised to see a courier. “Ragnar of Riften?”

“Aye.”

“I have a letter for you.”

That surprised me. One, because apart from members of the Thieves Guild, very few knew I even existed, let alone knew where I lived. Taking the letter from the courier, I did have a glance around outside as he walked away, wondering if anyone was watching my place. I wasn’t nervous or suspicious, but I was wondering who and why I had a letter.

Dear Ragnar,

I hope this letter finds you well.

I know my writing you probably has you wondering who has written to you and why. I must confess that I find myself thinking of you often, and that as I’ve thought of you and the time we spent together, I find myself wondering if you are just the man I need to solve my problem.

I have told you everything that happened to me, but I was wondering if you might be willing to help me further. I don’t wish to write too much in this letter, but if you are willing to help me, please return to Markarth as soon as possible so I can explain.

Love,

Muiri

“I wonder what she wants?” I muttered to myself. While I don’t believe it was urgent, considering I wasn’t doing a whole lot else, I figured I might as well just go straight away.

After letting everyone at the Flagon know that I’d be heading out for a few days, not exactly wanting to share too many details, even with Karliah, I did let Haelga know that I was heading west again. Naturally, she was ever so concerned about me heading into Markarth after last time. I hugged her and quietly told her that I’d be fine, as anyone involved in my incarceration was either dead or in jail themselves.

It was at least midday by the time I departed, so knew I’d still be on the road come nightfall. I wasn’t too worried, as I had my sword and shield, a dagger, plus my bow and quiver of steel arrows. I didn’t wear my Nightingale armour, going with my scaled armour that I’d bought from Grelka. I couldn’t always wear my Nightingale armour, as it would simply draw too much attention, so I would generally wear that if the job was at night.

I made it to Falkreath after dark, only having to deal with a few wolves, shooting two of them from horseback, scaring the rest off by summoning a small ball of flame and flinging it in their general direction. I very rarely used magic, but there were rare occasions that I would. Booking a room at the inn, I did enjoy a couple of tankards and conversation with the locals before bed.

The journey between Falkreath and Markarth took place in peace though the weather took a turn, and I arrived at Markarth stables drenched to the bone. Heading straight to Muiri’s house, she opened the door, took one look at me and gasped, before grasping my forearm and dragging me inside. “You’re soaked, Ragnar, and you’ll catch a chill!”

She helped me take off my soaking clothes until I was just in my underwear, sitting me down by the fire before she grabbed a blanket and wrapped me in it, grabbing a towel so she could dry my hair at the same time. I didn’t realise how cold I was until I sat by the fire. I was near frozen. She sat down next to me and got under the blanket too, wrapping her arms around me. She felt very warm.

“I didn’t think you’d come so quickly,” she said, though I could hear how pleased she was to see me.

“It sounded urgent, and I had nothing else on, so I left as soon as I received your letter.”

“Do you want to know now or can it wait until morning?”

“Morning is fine. I just want to get warm and eventually go to sleep.”

We slept together that night, in the same bed, but we did nothing but cuddle, Muiri moulding herself into my body as I held her. We didn’t talk a whole lot. I think she wanted to discuss whatever was on her mind, and I wanted to ask plenty of questions. I did ask what had happened in Markarth since I’d left, and apparently the jarl now owned the mine, and was making sure any profit made flowed back into the city. As for the Silver-Bloods, most of them were now dead, and their influence in the city had waned significantly.

The next morning after breakfast, Muiri sat with me by the fire and told me what she wanted. “I want you to kill someone for me, Ragnar. No, not just one. I want two people dead.”

“Muiri, I’m…”

She squeezed my hand. “Let me finish. Please.” I nodded. “Have you ever heard of the Black Sacrament?”

Of course I had. No-one would admit it, but everyone had heard of the Dark Brotherhood, and the Black Sacrament was performed to contact them. I didn’t know if the Brotherhood existed in Skyrim. I’d heard rumours of others trying to contact them, and Mercer had mentioned an agreement with the Brotherhood regarding dealing with Guild matters. So I guess they were somewhere around. I admitted to Muiri that I knew what it was.

“I performed the Black Sacrament, Ragnar, because I want Alain Dufont dead. If it wasn’t for him, I wouldn’t be here alone in Markarth. My friends wouldn’t have run me out of Windhelm when he broke my heart and took everything from them. But while he deserves to die, so does Nilsine. We were like sisters, as was I with Friga. Yet when she died, and I went looking for comfort, I was cast aside by all of them. She should suffer like I have.” I didn’t say anything as this was a request I had slightly expected, but actually hearing it was something else altogether. She looked at me with pleading in her eyes. “Say something, please?” she asked quietly.

“Alain, I can kill without worry. He’s a bandit, or whatever… Even better, I’ll try and get my hand on anything he’s stolen. But Nilsine… Muiri, that’s straight up murder. That’s…” I took a deep breath. “I know I’m a thief. I do it with barely any hesitation, and rarely if ever feel any guilt about it. I can still claim that being a thief is generally a victimless crime, in the sense no-one is hurt.”

She grabbed both my hands and kissed me, our mouths opening, tongues dancing, and I knew then and there that I’d agree. Because I really liked her. And though I’d never felt the heartache she’d suffered, I guess there was a small part of me that understood, even sympathised with her. When she broke the kiss, she barely leaned back, stroking my cheek with her right hand. “Will you, for me, Ragnar?” she asked softly.

“For you, Muiri, I will.”

She kissed me deeply again, and I knew from that moment, she was mine, as much as I was hers. I eventually had to gently prise her off me so I could get details. Nilsine was in Windhelm, that was the easy part. I needed to know where Alain was. “Raldbthar. It’s a Dwemer ruin west of Windhelm. He will have men with him. I always wondered who some of them were. He always told me they were old friends. I was such a fool…”

I suggested I should leave immediately, and would only return once the deed was done. Muiri walked with me all the way to the stables, where I wrapped my arms around her again, our parting kiss leaving both of us longing for each other, I’m sure. I’ll be honest, if it wasn’t for the three women I had to Riften, I’d had moved to Markarth immediately. She was beautiful, intelligent, and obviously had a dangerous, dark streak to her. She knew I liked her, and I knew I was being slightly used, but I didn’t mind at all.

Having everything I would need, I headed straight in the direction of Windhelm. It wasn’t raining but was still bitterly cold, thankfully all my clothes having dried out as they’d been hung for the fire all night. I always took camping supplies so was prepared for when I had to camp during the night. It took two nights of travel to make it all the way to Windhelm, thankfully making it in the early morning. The first thing to do was ask about Raldbthar, and with the map I had, locals in one of the taverns were able to point me in the right direction, asking why I was interested. I said I had a problem that needed dealing with. Most figured I was some sort of mercenary or bounty hunter. That suited me just fine.

The next job was to locate Nilsine Shatter-Shield. Muiri gave me all the information I needed. Where their house was and a general description of the woman herself. Dressing in regular clothing, I tried to make myself invisible in the crowds and finding Nilsine wasn’t particularly difficult, as Muiri gave me a rundown of her usual day. Then it was just a matter of tracking her movements and getting her alone.

It took a couple of days, but I generally worked out her general daily pattern, and more importantly, when I could get her alone. There were a couple of alleys she had to walk down to get to her place, which I’d observed her take as a shortcut home. Walking home after her day at work on my third day in Windhelm, I was leaning casually against a wall when I noticed her approach. She walked along without a care in the world, and I knew this was going to be simple. She even looked at me and smiled as she walked past.

“Nilsine,” I said.

She turned and looked at me. “Do I know you?”

“No. But you know someone I know. Muiri sends her regards.”

I moved fast for a big man, managing grab and turn her, clamp a hand over her mouth as I drove the dagger into her gut. It took a couple of times before she started to weaken, watching her eyes drain of life. Once she was dead weight in my arms, I dragged her into a secluded corner, propping her up and closing her lifeless eyes.

Looking down at her body, I was concerned. It wasn’t the fact I’d just committed cold-blooded murder. It was the fact I felt nothing at all. No guilt. No joy. No… anything. Muiri had asked me to do something for her, and I’d done it. It was only the fact I felt nothing about it that made me feel uneasy. Maybe the guilt and other feelings would come?

My hands were a little bloody, so I put those in my pocket and made straight for the city gates. Thankfully my clothing was otherwise clean so I didn’t draw any attention. No doubt someone would find her body soon enough, and I wanted to be as far away as possible. Mounting my horse, I rode for a good half an hour before I pulled up next to the river on my right and washed my hands, watching the red drip off and float away. Still nothing… The only thing I thought is that I wanted to do it for Muiri. Kill Alain. Kill Nilsine. Make her happy.

This far north was nothing but cold, windy and snowbound, the wind cutting through my coat, and eve my Nord blood had difficulty keeping me warm. Raldbathr rested in a small mountain range, so I camped by the shores of the nearby river, still some distance away, but I could cover the rest easily the next morning. There was a mill on the opposing side of the river where I could have stayed, but after events in Windhelm, I wanted to avoid any sort of population. Even the mill could be guarded, and they could be in communication with those in Windhelm, and while I’d got away unseen, someone was bound to have noticed my presence…

Knowing I was always going to stand out in such a snowy landscape, I did my best to remain in cover as I approached the Dwemer ruin. I could see a patrol near the entrance, three people in total. I wasn’t a crack shot with a bow like Karliah, but I was still decent, so attempted to make my job a little easier. Loosing half a dozen arrows, three found their mark, one in the chest of one, two in the chest and stomach of the second. I missed the third completely, so he came charging towards me. They never learn, as I took out my sword and shield, deflecting his strike and returning a swing of my own. The cut went straight across his chest, drawing blood. It would have hurt, but to his credit, he stayed on his feet. He swung again, this time dodging, continually moving, never offering a still target. He started to weaken as the wound would now be painful, and once I felt the power in his swing diminish, I finished the job with another strike, this time burying the point of my sword in his chest.

Climbing the stairs towards the entrance, I put the first one I hit out of his misery, hearing his laboured breathing as he was dying slowly. I made no apologies as I did so. He was little more than a bandit. I like to think there’s a hierarchy of those on the opposing side of the law, and I considered people such as myself ‘unlawful good’ or at least ‘unlawful neutral’. Bandits were just arseholes, and we’d never had any problem dealing with them like we would vermin.

I didn’t have to go too far into the ruin to find the rest of the bandits, including Alain, who I recognised from the description Muiri gave me. But there were a few of them, and running in screaming would have just led to my death. I needed to find a way to get Alain alone. Judging where they were located, I found a side passage, and after a few minutes, ended up on an elevated section near where they were.

“Jackpot!” I whispered to myself.

Keeping out of sight, there was a pair of Dwemer ballistae ahead. Judging where they were aimed, the one on the right looked like it was aimed near Alain. Not the one I wanted. He was mine to deal with personally. The ballista on the left was perfect, and all it took was the pulling of a lever to send down a hail of bolts. It created carnage below me, hearing the screams of the dying as I ran down the stairs, sword and shield in hand. Alain was crouched over the bodies of his dead or dying men, and it took him a few moments to recognise I was there.

“Who the fuck are you?”

“Muiri says goodbye, Alain.”

“Muiri? Muiri? So, what, you're the cow's champion? Oh, now that is rich. Well then, champion, let's get this over with.”

“For calling her that, I’m going to make your death nice and slow.”

He wielded an enormous warhammer, and I could see it was also enchanted by the way it glowed in his hands. That didn’t concern me. I’d fought plenty of warriors who wielded two-handed weaponry, and I found them far easier to kill, as large weapons were heavy, cumbersome, and often forced a warrior off balance. And Alain was some dumb bandit, not a trained warrior, and probably not with a weapon like he was holding. 

I was proven right rather quickly, as his swings were wild, and I was able to easily dodge them. So that’s what I did, leading him around the room as he swung again and again, and I could see him slowly tiring with each one. After a while, I started to parry and leave cuts on his arms or legs. While that angered him, it made his swings even wilder, and soon I had to say enough, and disarming him was quite simple. Exhausted as he was, it wasn’t a surprise he slumped to his knees, immediately driving my sword into his chest before withdrawing and beheading him.

Grabbing the warhammer, I could feel the cold from the iron head. I had a look around for any more valuables, and considering they’d pulled a job on the Shatter-Shields, I found plenty of gold and jewels to take for myself. I had no intention of returning the warhammer to Windhelm. I was going to take it to Markarth and let Muiri decide.

Arriving in Markarth around lunchtime three days later, I knew Muiri would be at work so I headed to the Silver-Blood Inn, where I could enjoy a hot meal and a couple of tankards, listening into the conversation. Considering it was still called the Silver-Blood Inn, I did ask about the proprietors of the establishment.

“I’m the owner now,” Kleppr stated, “Me and my wife, Frabbi. Jarl Ingmund took it off their hands and allowed us to buy it at a knockdown price.”

“So what happened to them?” I wondered.

“Thonar is dead, as is his wife. Thongvor is working in Cidhna Mine.”

“The jarl threw him in jail?”

“Conspiracy against the throne and supporting the Stormcloaks was always bound to see the man in chains. He’s lucky his neck didn’t find a noose or the headman’s axe. Whatever the case, the Silver-Blood family is finished in Markarth.”

“About damned time too!” someone shouted, with plenty of roars of approval from others.

I stayed in the tavern until workers started to arrive, suggesting the working day was done. Heading outside, I took a moment to take a deep breath, noticing the sun was going down. Walking up towards Muiri’s place, I knocked on her front door, and noticed her surprise when it opened.

“It’s done,” I stated simply.

She leapt on me, there’s no other way to describe it, her arms wrapping around my neck, her legs around my waist, as I walked forward, kicking the door shut behind me, as I carried her inside. “Thank you. Thank you. Thank you!” she said for a moment before resuming our kiss.

I carried her as far as the couch, where I sat down with her still on my lap. She eventually broke the kiss, leaning back for a moment. “I can never repay you for what you’ve done for me, Ragnar.”

“I did it for you, Muiri,” I said softly, “And I’d do it again in a heartbeat.”

The smile she returned… Well, I’m sure you can probably imagine how sweet it was. She lowered her mouth to mine again, our kiss a lot softer, but by Ysmir, did it convey a lot more feeling. Wrapping my arms around her, I pulled her close before rolling her onto the couch on her back, ensuring her head rested on a cushion. We made out for quite a while, my coat and shirt eventually disappearing, allowing Muiri to run her hands up and down my arms and back, cooing about how strong I felt.

“Sure you can handle still seeing me after what I did?” I wondered.

She stroked my cheek again. “You did it for me, Ragnar. It makes me wonder what else you would do…”

“Come with me to Riften. What holds you here?”

“Nothing,” she admitted, “There’s no reason for me to stay at all.”

“There are houses for sale in Riften. I can help put you up somewhere. And you can open your own ship. There’s an apothecary in town. The gentleman who runs it may even guide you, much like your current boss.”

“You are with other women though?”

I nodded. “I am. There is one woman I am particularly fond of. Her name is Haelga. But I feel for you the same way I feel for her.”

“You feel that way, and we’ve only met a handful of times?”

I grabbed her hand, interlacing our fingers. “Sometimes the heart just knows,” I said quietly.

“I knew the first time we talked,” she confessed, no more than a whisper, “And the others?”

“One is named Karliah. I work with her and we enjoy each other’s company. The other is Ingun. We are intimate infrequently.” I paused, before asking, “So you’ll come with me back to Riften?”

“Give me tomorrow to get my affairs in order, then I’ll put this place up for sale and leave with you immediately.” I couldn’t help smile before kissing her. “Take me to bed, Ragnar. I want you to make love to me.”

Picking her up was easy considering she was smaller. After taking a long time to undress her, as I kissed every inch of her body upon appearing, she did the same thing to me when taking off my trousers, though my shirt was already off. She did get down on her knees for a moment, but I picked her up and laid her down on the bed, continuing to cover her body with my mouth and hands, feeling her writhe underneath me, breathing my name as I made my way towards her sex.

Hearing a woman scream my name as she orgasmed was always a great feeling, but when Muiri did it, there was a tone of love and affection I heard only very rarely. Who would have thought doing such a thing for a woman would have provoked such intense feelings? I’d crossed a real line, one I never thought I would. Sure, I’d killed before, but there were circumstances to it. What I did to Nilsine was flat-out cold-blooded. But Muiri had asked, and I’d willingly complied.

She begged for me to make love to her once she’d recovered, and I couldn’t help groan as I slid my cock inside her. Our lips barely parted except for when we needed to take a deep breath, and the look in her eyes, as she stared into mine, told me the depth of feelings she was now experiencing. I think she even wanted to say a few certain words, even this quickly, as there was no doubt she was feeling rather intense emotions.

I remained gentle the entire time. I didn’t want to just fuck and pound away at her. I wanted to enjoy every single moment I was inside her. Her warmth and tightness. The feeling of her fingers on my arms, my back and my face. Her gentle kisses as I slowly thrust into her. Listening to her little moans and gasps as she enjoyed the size of my cock inside her.

Eventually she ended on top, her tight little Breton body riding my cock to another climax. I was surprising myself by how long I was lasting, but I was doing everything I could to hold back, because when I finished, that was going to be me done for the night. After she recovered again, she bent down as I ran my hands down her back to rest on her arse. I leaned up to kiss her before gently warning that I was going to go a little harder so I could finish. She just smiled and told me she was waiting for me to cum.

Hands down, it was on the best climaxes I’d had in my life up to then. I’m fairly sure I passed out momentarily, my eyelids fluttering open to see Muiri looking down at me, that same sweet smile on her face, running a hand down the side of mine before she kissed me softly again. “I’ve never felt like this for anyone before,” she whispered.

“Not even him?”

She shook her head. “Nothing like that. I was in a different place. What you’ve done for me, Ragnar. Even before that. The very first time we spoke in the tavern, I felt an attraction. Then when you visited again, I just had to have you. Now you’ve done this for me, and the depth of feeling I now have…”

“I was attracted within five minutes,” I confessed, “I wanted to be with you that first night.”

She smiled, almost shyly. “Me too. But I wondered what you would have thought of me.”

“I would have found any reason possible to visit here all the time.”

She grabbed my hand, holding it to her chest. “Say I’ll always be yours. I know there are others, but say you’ll never leave me. I don’t care who the others are. I just want you whenever I can have you. Maybe even one day all to myself in the future.”

“Muiri, I can definitely give you my word as a Nord.” I reached up to caress her face, the look that appeared one of absolute contentment. “Besides, we share quite the… secret now.”

“You killed for me, Ragnar,” she whispered, “And I love you for it.” Opening her eyes, she looked down into mine. “Does me admitting that frighten you?”

“No. I’d do it again tomorrow if you wanted me too.” Lifting her off my now shrinking cock, I laid her down beside me, turning so we could face each other. Her eyes were beautiful and brown, looking at me with such wonderment… “The only thing that concerns me when I did it… I felt nothing. Shouldn’t I feel guilty about it?”

“Maybe because, deep down, you know it was deserved. Because what they did to me was completely undeserved.”

I wasn’t sure about that, but in the end, it didn’t matter. What’s done is done, and I’d done it for her, pretty much without any hesitation whatsoever. She eventually turned over and nestled her body against mine, again cooing about how my arms felt around her body. “You make me feel safe and loved, Ragnar. I’ve never felt that before with anyone,” she said quietly.

To be honest, I loved holding her too, and I eventually fell asleep with my arms still tight around her. Waking the next morning, neither of us had moved, though she did have a giggle as I was poking her. But that was just a good excuse to make love in the morning, building up an appetite as she disappeared to make breakfast, returning a few minutes later, carrying a tray of food. She hadn’t dressed, so I was allowed a real appreciation of her naked body. “You’re beautiful,” I said softly. She really was. I didn’t lie about such matters. Other things, however…

After enjoying breakfast in bed, Muiri said she would have things to sort out. Quitting her job wasn’t a problem, and she would speak to the steward about selling her house. After that, she would simply pack a bag and we would ride my horse back to Riften. Sounded easy enough, so while she did all that, I wandered around Markarth, able to actually enjoy the sights and sounds of the ancient Dwemer city. Some were not convinced it was built by them, but in my opinion, it was bloody obvious they had.

Heading back to her place at lunchtime, she appeared a little later, stating preparations were underway, and she would be able to leave first thing the next morning. In celebration, we headed to the inn later that evening for a meal and drinks. She didn’t know that many people in the city, having generally kept to herself, though it wasn’t surprising that people mentioned we looked like a happy couple. She didn’t stop smiling, while I certainly felt rather relaxed in her company.

After dinner, we headed back to hers where we made love again. I had a feeling I’d never ‘fuck’ Muiri, not unless she wanted me to. We would always ‘make love’, the sex gentle, with plenty of caressing, cuddling, kissing, murmurs of affection, which would no doubt turn into expressions of love soon enough. I’m not sure if one can love more than one person at once. I loved Haelga and everything we shared. I held a great deal of affection for Karliah and Ingun, and while my feelings were intense for the former, it wasn’t love. But there was no doubt in my mind I was utterly and hopelessly falling for Muiri. It was actually a really nice feeling.

We left Markarth just after dawn the next day. Muiri expressed no sadness about leaving. Instead, she was excited about joining me on a journey across Skyrim and then settling down in Riften. Her enthusiasm was infectious, and the two-day ride was a lot of fun. We camped just outside Riften, where we made love under the stars, Muiri looking up to the heavens as she climaxed, exclaiming for all who could hear that she loved me. Though we had a tent, we spent some time lying on our backs, looking up into the night sky, trying to point out any constellations we knew. It was quite the romantic evening by the campfire.

Walking into Riften the next day, I invited Muiri to stay with me until she had a place of her own. I did explain that, although I would have liked her to move in, due to my lifestyle, that would have made things very awkward. Thankfully, she completely understood, insisting she wasn’t expecting me to change for her, or at least, not yet. I gathered immediately what she was insinuating, and though I’d discussed a similar thing with Haelga, the thought of it with Muiri… didn’t scare me at all. Strange…

Escorting her to the Bee and Barb that evening, I introduced her to some of the locals, including both Ingun and Haelga, who were both intrigued by my new guest. I explained she was a friend from Markarth who was moving to Riften, so would be staying with me for a few days until we could buy a place of her own.

“Ah, is this your ‘friend’, Ragnar?” Haelga wondered.

"Yes, it is.”

“And she followed you here from Markarth?”

“Yes, she did.”

Haelga looked at Muiri. “I don’t blame you one bit. Though I assume you’re aware of everything?”

“I am. I’m very understanding. But after everything he’s done for me, and the opportunity to start anew here, how could I not come with him?”

Haelga looked at me again. “Oh, Ragnar, she has it bad for you!” For once, I actually felt myself blush. “So if she’s staying with you, I guess you’ll be staying at mine if you visit?”

“I’ll visit or you can visit mine once Muiri is in her own place. I don’t particularly want to leave her alone in mine.”

“Oh, I don’t mind…” Muiri said.

“But I would,” Haelga stated, to my surprise, “So, until you are in your own place, he’s all yours. Enjoy it while you can, because once I get him back, I’m wearing him out!”

Back in Riftweald later that evening, I introduced her to Aranea, explaining that the Dunmer was my steward, whispering into Muiri’s ear that I was definitely not intimate with her. That made her laugh, assuring me she didn’t think I leapt on everything with a heartbeat.

It took a week for us to find a property she liked, but with all the coin I’d made for the Guild, affording it wasn’t a problem. On the day she moved in, we had all the furniture she would need delivered in the morning, before spending the afternoon getting her house in order. The home was called Honeyside, and as further assistance to her, I offered her the services of Aranea to help the upkeep of her place. Aranea didn’t mind, suggesting it would keep her busy. We sealed her moving in day by enjoying a night together in her new place.

The very next day I was home alone when there was a knock at the door. I was getting used to people knowing who I was and therefore receiving visitors, but the fact it was a courier again did have me questioning who outside the city knew where I lived. I generally didn’t give away that detail.

Taking the letter, I opened it once I had some privacy. There was little too it. A simple handprint. And two words underneath it.

‘We know.’

Chapter 15: The Visitor

“It’s the Dark Brotherhood, boss,” Delvin said, sitting across from me at my dining table. 

“Is this letter a threat or… something else?” 

He met my eyes. “They know you committed murder, that’s for sure. Who in oblivion did you kill?”

“I did it for Muiri. She admitted to performing the Black Sacrament, but she never received any word from the Dark Brotherhood. So, she asked me to do it instead.”

“And you did it?” he asked, unable to hide his surprise.

“It’s a long story, but yes, I did it for her.”

He paused before asking, “Really like her, huh?”

“I think I love her.”

That made him laugh. “Now in love with two women? Most of us are happy with one! You’re asking for trouble, boss.”

“I’ll worry about that if or when it blows up in my face. Right now, I’m worried about the Dark Brotherhood. They obviously know where I live. So what are they going to do? Send assassins after me?”

Delvin shrugged. “I can’t tell you, boss. I’m not exactly sure where they base themselves. Though I’m aware of their leader, and I’ve had communication with them before, we are separate entities. But as you’ve proven willing to commit murder, they might even try and recruit you.”

“I’m not a….” I paused, then sighed, “Guess I can’t really say that after doing it.”

“Tell me this, boss. How did or do you feel after doing it?”

“Honestly?” He nodded. “Not a damned thing. And that’s the only thing that concerns me.” I leaned forward and lowered my voice. “Alain was a justified kill, Delvin. But Nilsine… That was straight up murder, no matter what happened between Muiri and her family. I can admit that much. But I felt nothing about that. The only thing I felt was that Muiri would be pleased I’d done it, and that made me feel… Good would be the wrong word, but… Know what I mean?”

“Killing for love. Many men have done it before, boss. You’re not the first, and won’t be the last. The fact you feel nothing doesn’t mean it’s for you. In your mind, perhaps you simply feel both deaths were justified. I don’t know the whole story, but to be honest, people don’t perform the Black Sacrament without having a very good reason for someone to die. The only thing I don’t understand is how or why the Dark Brotherhood didn’t respond to it?”

“That’s why she asked me in the end, because no-one from the Brotherhood showed up.”

Delvin leaned back, stroking his smooth chin. “I’ll put it like this, boss. The Brotherhood know what you did, that much is for certain. But as to what they want with you, I’m not sure. I don’t think they’ll kill you in return. The only thing I can suggest is that, when out on the open road, watch your back.”

“I’ll do that then. Just tell the locals to watch for anything suspicious, or if anyone looks out of place. If that’s the case, I’ll confront them myself. I don’t want to see us descend into violence, or worse, battle against the Brotherhood. This is on me; I can handle it.”

“I’ll pass the word down, boss.”

Muiri invited me around for dinner that night, and although I didn’t want to worry her, I did let her know what was going on. Naturally, she was crestfallen to hear that I was possibly in danger because of her request, though I insisted I’d have done it regardless. Asking what I would do, I said I would just have to wait and see what happened, but as I didn’t particularly want to be assaulted on the open road, I suggested I’d be staying in Riften for the time being. She was delighted to hear that, as was Haelga the next evening, when she came to mine for dinner before an evening in the Dibella room.

Lying in bed that evening, I admitted what I’d done for Muiri, in that she’d given me two targets, and that I’d eliminated them both. I thought she would have been utterly horrified by it, but having explained what happened to Muiri and her effective exile to Markarth, she was more understanding than I could have ever given her credit for.

Brynjolf naturally worried about it, as the last thing he wanted was my assassination. Credited with restoring the Guild, he thought if I disappeared, the whole thing would slowly but surely collapse. I figured he or Karliah would be perfect replacements, but he insisted that people were put on both gates to watch for suspicious characters. I relented, and said that was fine, and probably not a bad idea.

After a couple of weeks since the letter, I hadn’t forgotten about it, but I’d certainly relaxed, as had everyone else. I still left the house armed, though that was natural. After just a week stuck in Riften, I cried enough and went for a ride as for as Shor’s Stone, and apart from some wild animals, which were smart enough to leave me alone, I had no trouble. The next day, I took Karliah out for a ride south and west, where we did a little hunting, camping out for the night by the lake. She was the only one unconcerned about the letter, confident in my abilities to look after myself. “If you can defeat Mercer Frey in single battle, you can handle an assassin from the Brotherhood,” she stated.

“Know much about them?”

“I know that, as a force, they’ve been effectively exterminated. Most of their sanctuaries have been destroyed over the years. I have heard of two that still might exist. One in Cheydinhal…”

“Fuck off!” I exclaimed, “You’re serious?”

“You would never have known, Ragnar. The Brotherhood don’t go advertising their presence. But I’m not sure even that still remains. I’ve heard rumour of a crypt in Bravil, but I believe that was destroyed or at least abandoned centuries ago.”

“Well, the fact I have a letter with that handprint on it suggests something.”

“I’ve heard rumours of a Brotherhood sanctuary in Skyrim, but where it is, I can’t tell you. I wouldn’t suggest you try locating them. The Brotherhood protect their secrecy above everything. You could perform the Black Sacrament to draw them out, but considering the whispers about others performing it and having no response, it would suggest the Brotherhood, if they still exist, wield no real power. It’s another reason why you have no real reason to worry, Ragnar.”

I wish she had been right…

---

Ever been dreaming and your body senses a presence that causes you to wake up? I’m not sure if it was that, but my eyes opened immediately as I certainly felt someone else was in my room. It was only when I couldn’t move a muscle that I knew something was very wrong. I always kept a dagger on my nightstand, just in case someone was stupid enough to break into my house. Looks like I’d been caught out…

“It’s a unique poison, Ragnar. The effects will wear off soon enough,” a feminine voice said from nearby. I couldn’t move my head, but my eyes could move, and I noticed a woman sitting on a chair next to my bed. She was rather slim, her face covered, though I could see a pair of blue eyes, which even in my paralysed state, thought were gorgeous, and what I figured was blonde hair under her hood. Her voice, though. That was captivating. She had my complete attention, though I didn’t really have a choice in the matter for now.

“Well, Ragnar. Here we are. I’m sure you have plenty of questions. Did you get our letter?”

“Aye, I did. I guess I got lazy.”

“I waited until I knew you would relax before doing this. I figured sending that letter would put you on your guard, but considering our reputation at the moment, I assumed you would think we no longer existed. But, you see, there is a problem, Ragnar. Muiri performed the Black Sacrament. Word gets around, and she was looking for the Dark Brotherhood. For people such as myself, and my associates. Alain Dufont was, by all rights, our contract. Consider me intrigued, though. What of Nilsine Shatter-Shield?”

“Muiri asked me to do it as a favour. I willingly obliged.”

“I’ve watched her. You are intimate with her?” She laughed lightly to herself. “I’ve heard of stranger things, for a murderer to fall for the one asking for help.” She stopped laughing. “That was our contract, Ragnar. It was a kill you stole. And, therefore, a kill you must repay.”

I would have laughed if I didn’t think she could kill me. What she didn’t know is that I could feel my feet, and after the slightest wiggle of my toes, I knew I could move. So I would now allow her to get comfortable. I don’t like threats.

“You want me to kill someone else?”

“Yes. There is a boy in Windhelm attempting to contact the Dark Brotherhood. Word has been slow in reaching us, but I’ve overheard whispers around town in the past few days. I guess word travels fast across the rest of Skyrim. What you are to do is this. Travel to Windhelm. Meet this boy. I believe his name is Aretino. Take the contract and perform the kill.”

I didn’t reply, making do with a glare, as I knew the threat would come.

Instead, her eyes suggested she smiled behind the mask covering her face and nose. “Am I to take your silence as acceptance? Then you know where we stand. Make your kill, and we're square. And before you get any ideas about running to the authorities, you will be watched. We know where you live. We know where you work. And we know who you are currently fucking. Don’t make a decision you will come to regret.”

My glare turned to ice. There was the threat I’d been waiting for. I curled my hands into fists under the covers. She would have no idea the poison had worn off. I guess she underestimated my tolerance for whatever she used.

“Fine,” I stated.

“Very good. Now, you just lie there and go back to sleep. I’m sure you’ll wake up in the morning, thinking all of this is a dream.” She surprised me by getting up and walking towards me, totally overconfident in the poison she’d given me. Feeling her gloved hand stroke my cheek, she simply gazed into my eyes. “I can assure you, Ragnar, this is definitely not a dream. Be a good boy and do what I said.”

As I’ve said, I move fast for a big man, and I took delight in hearing her cry out when my arms shot out from under the cover to grab her. She weighed barely anything, or so it felt, as I dragged her onto the bed, hand to her throat, my other hand raised in a fist. I wasn’t going to hit her, but I could issue my own threats. Squeezing her throat, she choked out a plea.

“Wait!” she managed to wheeze.

“Who are you?” I shouted.

“You know who I am.”

“No, your name. I want to know who I’m going to kill in about five minutes.”

“Astrid. My name is Astrid.” Not releasing her throat, I tore at her mask and hood, and actually leaned back for a moment when her face and hair was revealed. Her face matched her voice. She was gorgeous. And she knew I thought that, the smile on her face telling me everything. “Not expecting this, were you?”

I squeezed a little harder. “I don’t like threats, Astrid. I obviously don’t know the ‘rules’. I merely did it as a favour for a woman I happen to like quite a lot.”

“Yet you appear to have quite an aptitude for murder, Ragnar. I’ve asked around. You’ve eliminated quite a few threats to you or people you know.” Her eyes moved down from my face down my body. Her eyes then widened. “So, you’re a killer, a murderer for want of a better word, but are you also a rapist?”

“No, but trust me on this, I’m considering crossing a second line right now.” I leaned down so my nose touched hers. “It’s taking all my self-control not to tear your clothes off and slide something hard in you…”

I thought the threat would invoke fear. Instead, she… smiled. She fucking smiled! I didn’t know whether to get angrier or start laughing. So I slid my hand down her body and under her skin tight trousers. The kinky bitch was already wet! I removed my hand and stuck two fingers in her mouth. “Getting off on this, are you?” I asked, left staggered when she sucked on my fingers instead of biting them.

"What can I say, I like the danger and a man who takes control. You remind me of my husband. All muscles and power.” I’d relaxed my hand around her throat so squeezed again. “Just like that,” she added, “This has been quite the introduction, Ragnar. But how receptive do you think I’ll be if you carry out your threat?”

“What about your threat?”

“Perform the kill, Ragnar, and you’ll find I’m a very grateful person.”

“What about your husband?”

She smiled. “That’s for another time. So what are you going to do now? You going to let me go… Or you want your way with me?” I released the tension in my hand slightly. “Want to slide off my pants and slip that big cock of yours inside me? Want me to fight you off as you do, or do you just want me to lie back and take it?”

“You’re serious?”

“We’ve both made some threats tonight and I’d say it’s rather tense in here. A good fuck will help relieve some of the stress.” I couldn’t help laugh. The whole situation was utterly ludicrous. Here was this woman, who broke into my house, poisoned me, ordered me to kill someone else and threatened retribution if I didn’t, I now have the upper hand and she was now willing to fuck me. I mean, I know I had a track record with some women, but this was nuts.

I released her throat and immediately grabbed the dagger from the night stand, sitting on my knees as she lay back, resting on her forearms. “I’m a bastard, and perhaps even a killer, but that’s a line I won’t cross, Astrid. I’m a lot of things, but that is a line too far.”

“Shame. That’s quite the gift you have, Ragnar. Maybe some other time?”

“You’re serious?” I asked again.

“My husband has a condition which means intimacy is a problem. It’s been a while since I’ve had something that large in me.” She paused before sighing, “And I can’t believe I just admitted that to a total stranger.” Then she met my eyes. “But I’ve watched you for at least the past week, Ragnar. What can I say, I like what I see. And those women you’re with certainly seem to like you a lot in return.”

“Look,” I said, gazing down her body, taking in her rather lithe figure, “I think it’s best if we just leave it here. I’m willing to let you leave unharmed.”

“And you’ll head to Windhelm?”

Sighing, I said, “Yes. I will attempt to contact whoever this Aretino person is and see what they want.”

She sat up on her knees in front of me, and I watched her as she replaced her hood and mask, just in case she got any funny ideas. But she didn’t, sliding off the bed and standing on the floor. She must have been no more than five-six at most. I stood up in front of her, enjoying the fact she had to look up at me. “My, my, you are the specimen, Ragnar. Sure you don’t want to take me?”

Feeling the tension disappear, I couldn’t help chuckle. “Part of me wants to tear your clothes off and do certain things to your body. But I think it’s best you just go now.”

“Now that’s just teasing. And it’s a waste of an erection.”

“It will go away once I try and go back to sleep.”

Walking her downstairs and to the front door, I did check her out as she walked in front of me. I have to say, her arse was fantastic, though maybe it was the skin-tight clothing that helped accentuate all of her curves. Opening the door, it was still the middle of the night, if not early morning. A faint mist had descended, so I figured she’d slip out of Riften unseen. “I have no idea what the Aretino boy wants, Ragnar. But when word gets to us of a murder, we’ll know it was you. When that happens, I’ll be back to discuss your future.”

“My future?”

“With our organisation, if you’re interested. As I said, you have an aptitude. But tell me this. When you killed Nilsine, how did you feel? How did it feel?”

“I felt nothing,” I admitted, “And I still feel nothing. Muiri asked me to do it so that’s what I did.”

“You did it for love?” I made a gesture with my hand to suggest it was possible. “What about for coin?”

“You mean become an assassin?”

“Exactly.”

I thought about it and eventually shrugged. “I’m already a thief and my soul is already damned. I’ve already killed plenty of times as a thief. What’s the difference, I suppose?”

She stepped towards me, running a hand down my bare chest before her gloved hand wrapped itself around my cock. “Do this for me, Ragnar, and I promise you the rewards will be… Well, let your imagination run wild,” she said softly.

“You really want to be fucked by me?” I asked, admittedly a little confused by her demeanour.

“Gods yes,” she exclaimed quietly. I couldn’t help chuckle at her tone, a slight hint of desperation. “As I said, I love my husband, but it’s been a long time because of what he is.” She shook her head before I could ask. “I’ll tell you all about it once you’ve done the job.” Removing her hand, she trailed it back up my chest towards my chin, tipping my head down. “Maybe when I return, you can fuck me then?”

“And your husband?”

“I will tell him, and he will understand.”

“He must be one hell of an understanding man.”

“Just like all the women you are with appear to be understanding.”

“Touché.”

“I’ll make sure I keep an ear out for news, Ragnar. If not, one of my people will tell me, and I’ll return.” And, with those words, she turned and disappeared into the mist. I closed the door and leaned back against it, running a hand down my face before bursting into laughter. “My life sometimes!” I exclaimed to no-one. Returning to bed, I was surprised at how quickly I managed to drift off.

Returning to the Flagon the next morning, I spoke only with Delvin and Karliah about the visit, and once I mentioned her name, Delvin was very interested in what I said. He appeared to know her, and the way he spoke about her, it suggested they were friends, and perhaps had even been intimate at one stage. I didn’t pry, but he was able to give me a bit more information about who I was dealing with.

“She runs the Brotherhood in Skyrim, Ragnar. You were visited by the boss. Considering all the other chapters around Tamriel have been eliminated, and the body of the Night Mother has been lost…”

“The Night who?”

He waved a dismissive hand. “It’s not important. But she leads the last agents of the Brotherhood. If the sanctuary in Skyrim was to fall, that would be it for the Dark Brotherhood.”

“And you’ve agreed to do this?” Karliah wondered.

“I think I have no choice, otherwise my life could be forfeit. The threat wasn’t exactly subtle. According to her, I stole the kill, therefore I owe them one. And, to be honest, I’ve done it once.” Shrugging, I added, “I guess I can do it again.”

“Just be careful, boss,” Delvin warned, “You’re dealing with a group that most people don’t know about, or if they do, then they certainly don’t talk about them. To perform the Black Sacrament… You don’t do such a thing lightly.”

“When will you leave?” Karliah asked.

“First thing tomorrow morning. The quicker I do it, the quicker I can move on. Though Astrid is of the opinion I could join them.”

“And will you?”

I met Karliah’s eyes. “To be honest, I’m not sure. I’ve done it once. I’m going to do it again. What do you think?”

“It’s your life, Ragnar. You answer to no-one but yourself.”

Haelga came around that night, and she noticed within a few minutes I was distracted as we sat down for dinner. She asked what was wrong, but I knew I couldn’t openly admit what I was doing to her, nor to Ingun. I didn’t like lying… Well, that’s a lie there. I didn’t like lying to the women in my life. But I couldn’t be honest about what I was going to do.

“Nothing. Just work things. You know how it is.”

I don’t think she believed me, but she never asked too many details about what I did regarding work. I’d kept my word about ensuring we left Riften alone, but the rest of Skyrim was fair game. I never gave her stolen goods, except for one or two dresses, and some lingerie. She knew I could afford jewellery purchased through legal means, but she would always have doubts, so for the moment, I gave her other things.

Realising I was distracted, we avoided the Dibellan room that night, instead just heading for my bedroom. Once I had her naked, all other thoughts disappeared, and my sole focus was bringing her as much pleasure as possible, spending an inordinate amount of time with my head between her legs. She never complained, knowing how much I loved doing it with her, though eventually I needed to stop, usually for two reasons. One, my jaw does start to hurt. And, two, I really want to fuck her.

I did fuck her, and with my mind now fully focused on her, she got what she wanted. Fast and hard as possible, the headboard smacking against the wall. I did amuse myself afterwards, wondering what Aranea thought, particularly as Haelga was not quiet, and her language was utterly filthy. Eventually on her hands and knees with a handful of her hair, I pounded her relentlessly until I couldn’t take anymore, cumming hard and collapsing on top of her. Lying on her back, I could feel both of us covered in sweat, breathing deeply as we recovered.

“Well, that’s cleared the mind,” I said.

“Just needed some Haelga time,” she said with a light laugh. Sitting up, she managed to turn around onto her back and dragged me back down so I could kiss her, and I was still rather hard, so slid my cock back inside her, watching her face as I did. “Ah, the wonders of a young man.”

Feeling her legs wrap around me, the second time was far gentler, Haelga wrapping her arms around me and simply gazing into my eyes, that slight smile I was used to seeing when we made love in such a manner. Neither of us had another orgasm, eventually just stopping when we’d had enough, turning onto our sides so she could cuddle into me.

We woke early the next morning, as I wanted to leave as soon as possible. She knew I was leaving Riften, and I assured her that I would be absolutely fine. Naturally, she worried about me regardless, but I’d been through worse things in my life, but she still walked me to the stables so she could see me off. Because I hadn’t told her exactly what I was doing, she hugged me tighter and longer than usual, repeating that I should be careful. I assured her again that I would be absolutely fine, and would hopefully be home sooner than I planned. With a final kiss, I mounted my horse and, after waving farewell, turned my horse onto the road north.

Apart from passing a couple of Stormcloak patrols, which did their best to keep the roads safe, my journey to Windhelm was generally uninterrupted, making it by the time the sun was apparently going down, as the weather as far north as Windhelm was always bound to be changeable. It wasn’t snowing by the time I arrived, but the clouds were low, dark, and rather threatening, and I assumed ready to dump a lot of snow either overnight or the next day. After stabling my horse, I headed straight into the city and the Candlehearth Inn, booking a room for the night and sitting with the regular as I ate dinner and enjoyed a couple of tankards.

Finding the Aretino residence wasn’t particularly difficult, as I just asked where it was. The man I asked whispered that he’d heard rumours about what the boy had done. I had to prevent myself blurting out that’s precisely why I was looking for it. The door was locked, so after a quick look around, picking it wasn’t particularly difficult, and I entered find a place that looked mostly abandoned. Walking up the stairs, there were signs of at least some life, as candles were lit and still burning.

I had expected an adult. I did not expect a kid not older than… maybe ten years old. He hadn’t heard my approach, as he was in a small alcove, and thought I’d never seen it performed, it was definitely the Black Sacrament.

“Sweet mother, sweet mother, send your child unto me, for the sins of the unworthy must be baptised in blood and fear.”

I cleared my throat, and I swear the kid near shit himself as he slowly turned to look at me. Dressed in my Nightingale armour for anonymity, I would have looked rather sinister. Getting to his feet, his fear quickly turned to pleasure.

“You've come at last! I knew you would!” I remained silent, wondering what he would say. “It worked! I knew you'd come, I just knew it! I did the Black Sacrament, over and over! With the body, and the... things. And then you came! An assassin from the Dark Brotherhood!” Remaining silent, he continued on after a few seconds. “You don't have to say anything. There's no need. You're here, so I know you'll accept my contract.”

“Yes, I will. Who is the target?”

“My mother, she... she died. I... I'm all alone now. So they sent me to that terrible orphanage in Riften. Honorhall. The headmistress is an evil, cruel woman. They call her Grelod the Kind.”

I knew that name! Memories long repressed burst forth in my mind. “I’m sorry, but did you say Grelod?”

“Yes, do you know her?”

“I do. I know her rather well.” A name from the past. An orphanage long ago. In the Imperial City. Where I grew up. And now she was in Riften? The Eight must favour me. Or maybe it was Nocturnal rewarding me for returning the Skeleton Key? Whatever the case, this contract just got rather personal. “Tell me more, young man,” I requested kindly.

“Everyone calls her Grelod the Kind, though that’s because she forces us to. But he's not kind. She's terrible. To all of us. So I ran away, and came home. And performed the Black Sacrament. Now you're here! And you can kill Grelod the Kind!”

“Any other targets?”

“No! And please don't kill Constance Michel! She really is kind, and once Grelod is dead, she can take over. The kids really like her.”

“Anything else? What about payment?”

“I have a family heirloom you can have. Supposed to be sort of valuable. I hope that's all right.”

“It will do.” And, if not, I’ll just go robbing around Windhelm when I returned with the good news. “I will return when it is done. Just so you know, boy, you have drawn attention to yourself. I would suggest you stay out of sight until then.”

“Yes, of course. Just, return as quick as you can. To be honest, I'm kind of lonely here. As much as I hated getting sent to Honorhall, I really miss my friends there...”

Walking out of his house, I didn’t like the idea of completing the contract in the very city I lived, but it was a chance I’d have to take. As it had barely taken a few minutes to gain the information required, I headed out to the stables and rode straight back to Riften. Arriving after sundown, I slipped into the city without being noticed, and would attempt to stay unseen during my time. I already had a plan in mind. Visit Honorhall the next day to learn what I could, which to be honest, all I needed to do was see her. She wouldn’t recognise me, so I’d go with the story of looking at adoption. Then I’d return at night to finish the job.

I didn’t try disguising myself or anything the next day, leaving the house after I guessed everyone would at least be at work and not walking along the streets. Walking into Honorhall, the first thing I noticed was the lack of… The place just felt cold. Nothing adorned the walls to suggest children lived in the building. Another reminder of long ago…

Finding myself approached by a rather friendly young woman, deducing she was Constance, from what the Aretino child had told me, I was ready to ask a question when a voice took my attention. Walking further inside, I stood at the doorway to an enormous bedroom, a row of beds to either side, with children standing by them.

“Those who shirk their duties will get an extra beating. Do I make myself clear?”

The bitch hadn’t changed in all these years. I remember those beatings, and I remembered scrubbing those pots until my fingers were bleeding, but it still wasn’t good enough. “Yes, Grelod,” the children replied in unison. I can admit I’m a fairly hard-hearted man, but the tone in their little voices was heart-breaking. Constance stood next to me and I exchanged a glance with her. She looked miserable too.

“And one more thing! I will hear no more talk of adoptions! None of you riff-raff is getting adopted. Ever! Nobody needs you, nobody wants you. That, my darlings, is why you're here. Why you will always be here, until the day you come of age and get thrown into that wide, horrible world. Now, what do you all say?”

By the Eight, the desire to stride in there with sword unsheathed, and to take her head… I had to take a couple of deep breaths to calm down. “Is she always like this?” I asked through gritted teeth.

“This is a good day,” Constance replied quietly, and rather sarcastically, before asking hopefully, “Are you looking to adopt?”

“Considering it. I was hoping to speak to Grelod, as I was told she was the headmistress here. But after this little performance, perhaps not.” I felt a hand on my forearm and she led me into another room, closing the door so we had privacy, gesturing to a small table and two chairs. “Do you like working here, Miss…?”

“Constance. My name is Constance.” She would survive this. I figured I was a fairly good judge of character. She was… nice. If I’d had someone like her at the orphanage all those years ago, I might not have left. “Are you married… I don’t recall your name?”

“Erik. From Morthal. And no, I’m not. Though I have a woman I intend on eventually marrying. This is just an introductory meeting. She will make the journey with me next time.”

“Would you like to meet the children?”

“Yes, I would.”

Despite their circumstances, the eight of them appeared rather happy, although I have a feeling it was for appearances sake. Can’t have a bunch of miserable children on display when no doubt Grelod wanted all of them gone. I was introduced to them and told each of their names. I could hear the hope in their voices that I would choose them to take with me. While I might not adopt them, killing Grelod would certainly be doing them a favour, particularly if Constance was left in charge. As for Grelod, I didn’t see her again, assuming she was in her own quarters. That suited me just fine.

Thanking Constance for taking the time to speak to me, I headed home and prepared body and mind for what I was to do that evening. I would wear my Nightingale armour, and would leave my house at the darkest time of night, sticking to the shows. Breaking the lock into Honorhall wouldn’t be too difficult. The children and Constance would be safe. As for Grelod…

I had a meal and a nap earlier than normal, waking when the sky was dark. After dressing and preparing everything I would need for the job, I sat on my porch in the darkness, pleased to see it was a cloudy night, which would help me even more. The few torches lit around town barely provided any light, and from the silence around the city, I guessed it was rather late in the evening, if not early the next morning.

Figuring I had to make a move, I took the long way around to Honorhall. Making sure there was no-one watching, picking the lock was quite simple. Once inside, I let my eyes adjust naturally to the gloom, sneaking forward and checking Constance. She was dead to the world, so I closed her door and hoped she wouldn’t hear anything. The children were all fast asleep too, but they would wake easier, so I would have to keep this quiet.

Grelod was fast asleep and didn’t hear me enter. Stuffing a thick sock in her mouth, making sure she couldn’t spit it out, I took a few moments, using a couple of leather strips to bind her wrists to the headboard so she couldn’t move. Making sure the door was closed, I lit a candle so I could see her face, and the look of unbridled hatred in her eyes pleased me, as I remembered those cruel eyes very well. Grabbing the chair from her desk, I sat next to her bed, looking at her dispassionately for a couple of minutes.

“You haven’t changed one bit, Grelod. You’re still a bitch.” She tried to say something though it was muffled, and I leaned forward to hold the sock in place until she calmed. “I doubt you remember me, but I definitely remember you. The orphanage in the Imperial City. I spent near ten years there until I ran away.” The eyes changed from hatred to confusion, as no doubt she was trying to figure out who I was. “I could give you my name, but what’s the point? You should know why I’m here.”

Unsheathing the dagger, I laid it on the bed next to her body. “This blade is going to slice your throat in a few minutes, and I will happily sit here and watch you bleed out and die. Then I will return home and sleep like the dead. But before that happens, let me tell you a story.

It is the story of a young boy who grew up in an orphanage. Abandoned by his parents, all he wanted was a little love and affection as he grew up. Instead, he is beaten, almost tortured at times, locked away in small rooms, punished harshly for the smallest of infractions. He remembers the bruises and the blood. The fact no-one cared. And all the kids suffered. I remember them all too.

So that young boy ran away at around ten years old and spent the next six or so on the streets. He found a calling. He became a pickpocket. A thief. Eventually started working for the Thieves Guild. That’s what your treatment of him did. Turned him into a criminal. And, let me tell you something, he was a damned good thief. Or, at least he was until a particular job…

I found a second calling as a warrior. Despite being abandoned, my parents, whoever they were, gave me some good traits. Tall. Broad. And there’s no doubt I have a natural strength many men pray for. After training, I’ve proven to be a natural warrior. And after finding the pleasure of the flesh, I’ve had success with the ladies too. Of course, I got greedy, it blew up in my face, and I ended up here in Skyrim.

Then I find work with the Thieves Guild here. Sort out all their problems, rise to become the Guild Master after the betrayal of the previous one. I’ve made plenty of coin. Made some good friends. Even own my house now. And I’ll admit it again, I’m a damned good thief. Better than what I was.

Then a young woman I met asked me for a favour. We share affection for each other. We might even love each other. And she asked me to kill for her. She asked me to kill a former lover. That wasn’t a problem. But she also asked me to kill a former friend, someone who betrayed her. I agreed with barely any hesitation. And I did the job. I did it well. I know they’re still on the hunt for her murderer.

But the young woman had performed the Black Sacrament, and word got back to the Dark Brotherhood. They found out I took the contract, and demanded I pay them back. And what do you know, a young boy who once lived here performed the Black Sacrament, and I bet you’re lying there wondering who he could possibly have demanded I kill?”

I picked up the dagger and bopped her on the nose with it. “You, Grelod. A young boy, no older than ten years old, the very same age I ran away all those years ago, performed the Black Sacrament because he wants you dead. How fucked up is that? How awful must his life have been here to have performed such a ritual? And, surprise, surprise, you are still one awful goddamn bitch. Just hearing your voice again after all these years made me want to cross the floor and punch in your teeth.

I was in here earlier. You probably didn’t notice me. You’re still as horrible as you were all those years ago. I’ll be doing these kids a fucking favour by releasing them from the likes of yourself. Now I could sit here, and wonder what you could possibly have to say, but to be honest, I don’t want to hear a word. You’ll try and justify yourself, or you’ll just say something cuntish, to try and piss me off. I doubt you’ll plead for your life. I reckon you’ve been expecting something like this for years.” 

I stood up, looming over her, so she could meet my eyes. No fear. Only hate. That’s all she was. A human vessel of hate. “Oblivion take your very soul, Grelod.”

I slit her throat and watched the life slowly dim from her eyes.  Once she was dead, I took the binds off her wrists and the sock out of her mouth. Ensuring there was no sign that I’d ever been in the room, I placed the chair where it had been, extinguished the candle, and got the hell out of there as quickly as possible. Once back home, I undressed and was amazed again at the lack of any real feeling. In fact, I had a slight feeling of elation that I’d killed her. It wasn’t particularly revenge. I hadn’t wanted to kill her all those years ago, but at least the children would no longer suffer with her in charge.

Leaving at dawn for Windhelm the next day, the Aretino lad was delighted to hear the news, and after giving the heirloom, I suggested he should take a carriage and return to Honorhall, so at least he had someone to look after him. He agreed, though I turned down the question of me taking him. I didn’t particularly want to return to Riften with him. That would lead to questions.

Back in Riften the next evening, I wandered into the Bee and Brab and the only story on everyone’s lips was the murder of Grelod the Kind. There were mixed feelings, depending on who you spoke to. Some figured the kids were better off. Others were shocked that the headmistress of an orphanage could be murdered. There were enough rumours around to suggest no real surprise that Grelod had actually been killed though, most people figuring an orphan would definitely have had an axe to grind. In that regard, they were absolutely right.

My closest friends in the Thieves Guild could put two and two together. Delvin actually found it rather amusing, and wasn’t surprised that someone had asked for her to be killed. Brynjolf only worried about any comeback on me. I assured him that no-one saw me enter or leave, and the crime scene was clean except for the body. Vex hadn’t believed me capable of such an act, and I think was actually impressed. Karliah was… I don’t think disappointed would be the right word. She understood I had to do it, lest something happen to me, so I had a private conversation and told her everything, basically repeating the story I’d told Grelod. Karliah then understood completely, letting me know she was okay with it.

It took a week for Astrid to make her appearance. I knew she would be coming, and I wasn’t concerned at all. I didn’t think she’d come to kill me. That didn’t stop her from poisoning me again, though this time when I woke up, the covers had been pulled down and, though still dressed, she was straddling me. Her hood and mask were missing this time so I could see her face.

“Well, you sure work fast, Ragnar.”

“It was easy in the end.”

“How did it feel?”

“I knew Grelod, from long ago. It felt righteous.”

“Would you be willing to kill again?”

Shrugging, I said, “The only thing is that it would depend on the target. I would have rules, much like I have rules regarding who we do and do not rob in the Guild.”

“I’ll tell you more in the morning.”

I felt the smile form, so figured I wasn’t paralysed all over, or I wasn’t at all. “Oh, and where will you be staying?”

She started to unbutton her top, freeing a pair of small, perky breasts, noticing a few noticeable scars on her stomach. She turned so I could see her back, noticing a few more there. “Hazards of the job,” she said. Removing her boots, she then removed her trousers, leaving her naked on top of me, noticing a thick patch of blonde hair above her sex. I knew I wasn’t paralysed as I felt my cock thicken quickly, and she felt it against her.

The surprise was when she leaned down to kiss me, and I know I surprised her in return when I placed my hands on her back. “Underestimated again,” she muttered, before resuming our kiss. I could feel her get wet as she slid her pussy along my shaft, earning a cry of surprise when I rolled her over onto her back. “Are you going to keep your promise, Ragnar?”

“What promise is that?”

“Well, I distinctly remember you saying you wanted to fuck me last time I was here. And I remember admitting that I wanted to be fucked. So, are we going to fuck?”

I slid my cock inside her without further hesitation, all the way in until she had my entire length. It earned the usual smile of pleasure, and I wasted no time pumping away into her. She spread her legs and placed her feet around me, urging me on to fuck her hard. Gods, she was hot, wet and tight. She must have arrived eager for it. Leaning down to kiss her again, I felt her hands run through my hair before breaking the kiss. “Do you know how long it’s been? Years.”

“Tell me after I’ve cum. Not now.”

I rolled onto my back, taking her with me, allowing her the pleasure of riding my cock. It did the job, as with a little assistance of my thumb on her clit, she came hard quite quickly. It must have been a good one, as the look on her face was absolute bliss. Grabbing onto her hips, I fucked her hard for another couple of minutes before I blasted inside her. The groan of relief I made probably woke half of Riften.

Resting on my chest, I was still rock hard inside her. Not a real surprise. There’s no doubting that, despite our introduction, I was attracted to her. And after seeing her naked, that only increased. We lay together for a few minutes like that before she got off me and got on all fours. “Like this, Ragnar. Just fuck me hard again.”

Getting into a certain position behind her, I gave her what she wanted, feeling her cry out as I slammed my cock into her. I’m not sure what she got out of it, but the noise suggested she was enjoying her, forcing her arse further up as I leaned down, my mouth near her ear. “You like what I’m doing?” I wondered.

“Fuck yes. My pussy has been empty for so long.”

“Someone like you shouldn’t be left empty at all, Astrid.”

“Is that a compliment in the middle of fucking me, Ragnar?”

“Definitely.”

“Well, if we’re doing that, your cock is magnificent.”

“And it definitely likes you in return.”

It took me a long time to cum again, and by that stage, I had Astrid on her back again, her legs pushed wide and back, completely exposing her. I was tempted at once stage to shove it in her arse, but I figured she might be up for that later anyway. But she urged me on, a real reminder of Haelga in that she just wanted to be completely fucked. I could only last so long, and after my second climax, at which I near collapsed on her, my cock did cry enough.

Lying on my back afterwards, I found it surprising that she turned onto her side and cuddled into me, running a hand up and down my chest, until she had to straddle me again. “I won’t get hard again for a while.”

“I just wanted to lie like this,” she said quietly, resting on her forearms so she could see my face, “As I said, it’s been a long time.”

“Why? How could someone not be fucking you constantly?”

She blushed. I didn’t think it was much of a compliment, but she seemed to like it. “My husband… I love him dearly, but he has a… let’s call it a disease. Unfortunately, since the day he was infected, we have been unable to be intimate.”

“What sort of disease?”

“He’s a werewolf. I don’t know much about it, but the strain he has means he cannot control his changes. And, unfortunately, he cannot make love to his wife without changing. It was only after the third time he nearly killed me that we agreed that part of our life simply couldn’t continue.”

“How long since you were last intimate?”

“Six years, five months and thirteen days.” I couldn’t help chuckle at the fact she knew exactly. “I know he is frustrated too, but unless he is cured, that facet of his life is over. Unfortunately for me, he does not want a cure. He believes being a werewolf helps him. So while we love each other, and choose to remain married, I am… not satisfied.”

“But he knows you are here?”

“Yes. I said if he was not willing to find a cure, then I needed a release, as frankly, masturbation and toys are not fulfilling. I need to feel a real cock inside me. I need to feel a man inside me, on top of me, behind me, or me on top of him. I need to feel him cum inside me. I need him to make me cum too. My fingers don’t do that, nor do other phallic objects I might use.”

“What did he say?”

“He understands, though he is not happy. But that is on him. I have waited all this time and he has never changed his mind. Then again, you are the first man I have been intimate with in all that time.”

“I’m honoured.”

“Seeing your body and what’s between your legs made my mind up for me. Plus… Well, when you are on top of me last time, with the threat of what you could do… I’ll admit it, you turned me the fuck on, Ragnar. That’s why I was so wet. I wanted you to do it to me.”

“Really?”

“Oh, I’d have fought, but it would have been half-hearted at best. I’d have eventually quite happily ridden you to one climax after another.” I couldn’t help chuckle at her confession. “Well, the wait for worth it.”

“And you will be here in the morning?”

“Yes.”

“Okay.”

She eventually lay next to me, spooning herself against me. Her body was athletic but also soft at the same time, and she was very complimentary about my arms as I held her. A quiet voice was saying ‘This is another man’s wife’. Another louder voice was saying ‘You’ve just had one of the best fucks of your life’. “Would you like to do this again, Ragnar?”

“Definitely.”

“We’ll talk more in the morning then. Maybe after we make love?”

“Ah, so you’d like it different.”

“Would you?”

“Why not now?”

So that’s what we did. Orgasms were a mere afterthought as we kissed, cuddled and made love until we were simply too tired to go on. Then she spooned against me again, wiggling her butt into my crotch until she was comfortable, holding my hands in hers, her head nestled under my chin. “Well, I could get used to this,” she whispered, “Though I’d better not. I don’t think my husband would like that.”

Waking the next morning, we dressed and enjoyed breakfast together. Surprisingly, I didn’t feel awkward at all, and she sat near me with a smile on her face all morning, so I guess she was absolutely fine as well. We chatted about nothing in particular, suggesting I would stay in Riften for the time being and just continue to do what I do.

Escorting her outside, she wore a coat to cover her Brotherhood armour. A carriage was waiting there, and after asking the driver for transport, he would take her as far as Falkreath. I didn’t know exactly where the Sanctuary was, and I asked her not to tell me yet, as I wasn’t sure I would join them.

“You will think about it?” she asked, near pleaded.

“I will, but it’s a step in a direction I’m not entirely comfortable with yet. There is one thing that might convince me.”

“And that is?”

“You.”

“How do…” She stopped and smiled, knowing what I meant. “Ah, I guess I’ve made quite the impression then.”

“You have. Unfortunately, I only see heartbreak in the end for both of us if we go down this road. Part of me wants to. Part of me wants to take you back to my house and do what we did last night again. The other part knows you have a husband waiting for you. And the voice in my head tells me that I’m a bastard. I’m already enough of a bastard, but adding a married woman to the list of women I’m bedding is too much of a reminder of why I’m here in the first place.”

She nodded in understanding before I leaned down to kiss her. It was a hell of a kiss, wrapping my arms around her and pulled her close, her hand running around the back of my head, her tongue doing rather naughty things that made me growl into her mouth in return. Breaking the kiss, she had a look in her eyes that suggested she wanted to stay. “You should go,” I said quietly.

“I will return if I don’t see you soon, Ragnar.”

“Part of me hopes you do.” I took a couple of steps back. “For now, though, this is for the best.”

She climbed up onto the carriage, speaking quietly to the driver. He nodded and quickly prepared to leave. With a crack of the whip, the horses started to walk forward and I walked alongside the carriage until it turned onto the road. She didn’t call anything out as it moved away, nor did I. I raised a hand in farewell, and she responded in kind. I stayed there until the carriage disappeared down the hill and out of sight. Only then did I turn and walk back into Riften.

Notes:

Fifteen chapters in. Hope you're still enjoying it.

Chapter 16: Muiri

Every day that passed since Astrid departed, I would find myself thinking long and hard about whether I would make that leap. Sure, I’d killed plenty of people before, when working for the Fighter’s Guild, and when working for the Thieves Guild, but I could justify in my mind that those deaths were necessary. Most of the time, I was defending myself. 

But I had murdered two people. I didn’t count Alain. He was a bandit and deserved what he got, just like Mercer Frey. Nilsine, though. Despite what she did to Muiri, she was still an innocent. And despite Grelod being who she was, she was technically an innocent. They were defenceless when I killed them. 

It was two cases of clear cut murder.

“Something on your mind, boss?” Brynjolf asked me about a week after Astrid’s visit, sharing a tankard with he and Delvin.

“Aye. An offer Astrid made last week.”

“You saw her again?” Delvin asked, and I near enough laughed at his surprised tone.

“Yes, she stayed the night.”

The look on both their faces was absolutely priceless. Brynjolf just started to laugh. I eventually reached across the table to shut Delvin’s jaw. “She’s a married woman, boss. Isn’t that the reason why you left Cyrodiil?”

“She told me she was married. She told me about her husband. And she told me she hadn’t been intimate with him in years.”

“Why not?” Brynjolf wondered.

“Not my place to say. But there’s a good and valid reason why she stayed with me. And as for what’s on my mind, she made me an offer to work for her.”

“As an assassin?”

“Aye.”

“That’s quite the leap from being a thief, lad,” Brynjolf stated, “I know we’ve taken lives. You killed Mercer Frey. But there’s a difference between the killing we have done to rebuild the Guild, and the killing one would do on behalf of the Brotherhood. Are you sure you can deal with that?”

“I’ll be honest. Killing Alain wasn’t a problem, not after what he did to Muiri. And Grelod was rather personal, it just happened that the young lad giving me the contract didn’t like her either. No, it was the third kill, Nilsine, that suggested… I’m not sure, but maybe I’m suited to it?”

“No guilt?” Delvin wondered.

“Haven’t felt any yet. As far as I’m concerned, two of the three deaths were deserved. But Muiri wanted Nilsine dead…”

The two shared a knowing glance. “Like her, eh?”

“Yes, Bryn. I have a lot of affection for her. And that is returned, which is why she’s now in Riften. But as for Astrid and her offer, part of me thinks I should give it a go. The Guild is running smoothly. Do you need my presence here every day? Quite frankly, it will run smoothly as long as you or Karliah are here. I’ll pop in every now and then, and if anything goes drastically wrong, then contact me.”

“You’ll stay in Riften?”

“Of course. I have no reason to move.”

“Astrid would rather you stayed at the Sanctuary,” Devlin stated.

“That’s not happening. I’ve made a home for myself here, plus my friends are here too. Those I sleep with, and those I don’t. I’m not dropping it all for her offer just yet.”

“Whatever you decide, tread carefully, boss. Joining the Brotherhood is not a decision taken lightly,” Delvin warned. I would heed that warning before making a decision.

Instead of making a decision too soon, in addition to continuing our research into Daedric artefacts, Muiri asked if I would escort her around the lake, as she wanted to gather fresh supplies for her apothecary. She had proven to be a rather adept alchemist already. I was happy to do so, and asked how long we would be gone. She suggested more than a couple of nights, so I bought some food supplies, and as I already had camping equipment, we looked over a map and decided on a route. We would take the south gate and follow the shore of Lake Honrich, where we would eventually cross to the north side over the Treva River, and return to Riften via the northern shore. We could probably do all that in one night, but Muiri wanted a few days away, for two reasons. One, because she legitimately wanted supplies, and would spend plenty of times looking for some rare ingredients. And, two, she wanted time alone with me. I would have happily joined her for the first reason alone, but the second was an even better reason.

We left a rather crisp but sunny Middas morning. I carried all the camping supplies along with my weapons, Muiri carried a small backpack with a change of clothes and space for her ingredients. I managed to leave a hand free, and we walked along hand in hand for a while, following the road south. Walking at no more than a stroll, she would stop every so often as something caught her eye. She would occasionally pick something and place it in her backpack. Others she would leave alone.

“Anything in particular you are looking for?”

“Not really. There are certain things that simply won’t grow around here. It’s just a matter of keeping an eye out.”

“What sort of potions are you planning on brewing?”

“I usually brew potions to help people. I generally try and avoid poisons. Particularly now, after everything that’s happened.”

I grabbed her hand and squeezed. “You did nothing wrong. Are you feeling guilty?”

“Not at all. But it still weighs heavy on the conscience.”

I stopped us and immediately moved a hand to her face, caressing her cheek, earning one of those sweet smiles. “Anything I can do to help?”

“Stay with me. That’s all I want. You’re the man who helped me when no-one else could or would. I’ll always love you for that.” I couldn’t help smile, as although she’d mentioned love before, that was the first time she’d properly said it. “Do you feel the same way about me, Ragnar?”

“By the Eight, yes!” I leaned down to kiss her, though with all the supplies I was carrying, it was a little awkward.

We carried on walking, Muiri with a smile on her face nearly the entire time, happily humming to herself when she went off to pick her flowers or other things. If there was a rock or boulder, I could at least take a seat and drop our supplies for a moment. She knew I was watching her at times. She was a petite little thing, or at least she was compared to myself. Each time she was happy with gathering what she wanted, she’d wander over to where I was waiting, give me a kiss, then take my hand to move us on.

I knew we would be longer than I expected when we camped that night, and I knew from the map that we hadn’t covered all that much ground. I certainly wasn’t going to complain, and I knew Muiri definitely wasn’t. She never complained about the arrangement, but I knew more than any of the women I was with, she was desperate to have me all to herself. Part of the reason why I easily agreed to go with her now.

Sitting side by side on a log after we’d eaten dinner, I had an arm around her waist as she leaned into me, one of her hands on my chest. “Thank you for helping me.”

“Not required, Muiri.”

“I know, but I’ll thank you each day we’re away. I know you have…”

I gave her a squeeze, stopping the sentence. “I had nothing else planned, and I would have cancelled any plans I did have otherwise.”

“I’m going to ensure I go even slower tomorrow,” she said with a giggle.

“And I won’t complain one little bit.” 

Naked under the furs later, we made love. As I’ve said previously, I knew I would never ‘fuck’ Muiri, unless that’s what she asked for. Resting on my forearms, my thrusts inside her were slow, just hard enough to provoke a smile and hit the right spots inside her. Her legs were wrapped around me, lifting herself up so the angle I was inside her definitely felt good for her. Our mouths barely parted, her fingers digging into my back as I slowly thrust into her.

“I love you,” she whispered, “Gods, I love you, Ragnar.”

I couldn’t help smile at her in the light of the fire, watching her smile in return. “And I love you, Muiri.”

She kissed me hard, the sort of kiss that conveyed far more feelings than words ever could. This was a woman who was now nothing more than devoted to me. If I’d asked her to marry me then and there, there was no doubt to her saying yes. Part of me was even ready to ask. Instead, I focused on ensuring she climaxed with me. Somehow, it worked, as she cried out as I came inside her. It was only once she’d come down from the high that she blinked rapidly, our kisses barely slowing nor lacking in passion despite our joint climax. When I made to move to lie beside her, she asked me to stay in place. “I love it when you’re inside me,” she admitted quietly. She wiggled underneath me, gasping as my still rather hard cock must have hit a good spot.

Wrapping an arm around the back of her neck, I relaxed above her, just gazing at her in the low light. She knew why I was looking, and there’s no doubt she blushed slightly. I had a conundrum, as I now felt torn between her and Haelga. I liked Ingun, and adored Karliah, but it was Haelga and Muiri who I loved above all. And I wondered if I was eventually going to have to make a decision. And I figured it would be the woman I was currently with who might ask me to make that choice.

Lying next to her later, her petite body spooned against my larger one, even her hands being much smaller than my own, she sighed with contentment, constantly snuggling backwards, complimenting me on my body warmth. “I’ll admit something, Muiri. You’re the first Breton I’ve ever been with.”

“Really?” I made a sound of agreement. “And what do you think of us?”

“Well, if they’re all like you…”

She laughed lightly. “Well, we are generally smaller than you Nords. Then again, you’re a specimen all on your own, Ragnar.” She turned around to face me, running a hand down my cheek, over my shoulder and down my arm. “I’m a very lucky woman to have someone like you lying against me.”

“How do you think I feel, having a sweet little thing like you with me? Then again, I think you’re practically perfect.”

“You don’t have to keep sweet talking me, Ragnar, though I will always take your compliments.”

“I’m always honest. Well, with the women I’m intimate with anyway.” I pulled her closer so our faces were barely an inch or so apart on the pillow. “Even your facial markings are pretty. They make your eyes stunning.” All she did was snuggle into me, wrapping her arm around my side. “I’m not a good man, Muiri. I can admit that. I’ve done a lot of things I should regret, or that I should at least feel bad about, or definitely feel guilty. Yet, I feel none of those things. I do what needs to be done.”

“And me in all that?”

“I can give thanks to the Eight for your arrival in my life.”

She kissed me for that one, her mouth opening immediately, turning into the sort of kiss that would always make me rise for the occasion. She rolled me on top of her again, and finding her entrance was easy, watching her face as I slid inside her again. She wasted no time wrapping her arms and legs around me, holding her tight to her body. “I think the same thing,” she breathed into my ear.

I changed our position quickly, rolling her so she was on top. She didn’t lean back, resting her hands on my shoulders as I position my legs so it was easy for her to ride me, still leaning down to kiss me. Thrusting up into her, the angle definitely made her feel good, watching the smile her face slowly widen, her eyes closed and a simple look of pleasure across her face. “Gods,” she said quietly.

“Good?”

“I don’t want to stop.”

“Then don’t. We have all night. And tomorrow. And the day after. I’m in no rush to return to Riften.”

She rode me for a long time, and when her orgasm came, it was a big one, a cry of her love for me, following by some tears. I just held her body tight to mine as she recovered, and it was no surprise to me when she started again once she felt okay to do so.

And that was how the next few days and nights went. We would wander along without any care in the world, Muiri stopping every so often to pick some plants or what looked like fungi, then we would make camp for the evening by the water, eat a little dinner, then we would make love. We didn’t experiment all that much, but I wasn’t worried about that. It was the act that itself that meant everything between us. There’s no doubt we were both falling for each other hard. I could tell by the way she’d look at me when I woke up in the morning and the near constant smile on her face.

Being by the lake, we would also stop occasionally for a swim. With no-one around, we could happily strip off our clothes and head into the water. It was warmer than I figured it would be, though cold enough for Muiri to say it was rather cold, enough that she’d generally swim to hug me, feeling her very hard nipples brush against my chest. We didn’t do anything more than swim and cuddle while swimming, but after the first time, we eventually did it at least once each day. It was an excuse to see each other naked in the daylight.

It was four days by the time we crossed the river to head back along the northern shore. I sensed Muiri was now really taking her time, stopping constantly for any little thing she could see. I joked about her delaying our return to Riften for as long as possible, but assured her at the same time that I didn’t care at all. “There are some hot springs to the north of here, in Eastmarch. We should head there one day soon. I’m sure there are plenty of different plants and whatnot up that way which you won’t find around here, plus we could relax in one of the pools each day.”

“Is it safe?”

“I’ve walked or ridden by them a few times on my way to and from Windhelm. I see plenty of people camping. We’d just have to find a little spring for ourselves.”

“Are you getting ideas, Ragnar?”

“Maybe.”

“I love it when you get ideas like what I know you’re thinking.”

“So you want to do it?”

“Tell me when and I’ll be with you.”

We were away from Riften for longer than a week in the end, our return journey taking even longer, as we deviated inland as Muiri was sure she would find even better flora further from the lake. It wasn’t a bad idea, and it was a good excuse for me to unleash a few arrows, eventually taking down a big elk. Taking some meat, and also hide and its horns, it certainly fed us well that evening.

Our last night together was barely a couple of miles away from Riften. We could have easily made it on that day, but Muiri led me inland again, so that by the time we returned to the shore, the sun was setting, so I happily agreed to one last night in camp. I managed to catch a mudcrab for dinner that night, and Muiri helped me turn it into a rather tasty stew. I surprised her further by unveiling a bottle of wine I’d kept for such an occasion. Sitting on a log by the fire, we ate dinner and shared the bottle of wine, chatting away about our hopes and dreams. To be honest, neither of us hoped or dreamt of too much. Simply to a happy, and if possible, a longer life than average.

“What about children?” I asked.

“Not before I’m married.”

“But you want one or some?”

“Yes. Eventually. But only after I’m married.” I heard the hint. It wasn’t subtle. The only way she could have been more obvious is if she’d held a sign over her head saying ‘Marry me, stupid’. “What about you, Ragnar?”

“I’ll be honest, I’m not sure. Doing what I do isn’t the greatest example. Then there is my love life in general, as you know.”

I felt her glance my way. “Will you want to settle down eventually?”

I returned her glance. “Yes. Eventually.”

“But not now?”

“I’m enjoying my life at the moment, Muiri. I like what I do. And I have a few women I adore, even love.” I turned slightly and grabbed her hand. “I’m hearing you loud and clear, Muiri. Trust me on that. But please don’t force the issue.”

“Sorry,” she said quietly.

Wrapping an arm around her, I said, “No, don’t be. I understand why. I know you have trouble with it.”

“I do understand. But when you’re not there with me… I feel lonely. And I don’t want anyone else. Just you, Ragnar.”

“You’re making this very difficult. And I mean in the sense that I could stop everything with all the others except one.”

“You mean Haelga?” I nodded. “Can I ask a question about how you are with her?”

“Sure, but how do you mean?”

“I mean physically.” I couldn’t help smile, knowing what she was going to ask. That made her smile too. “Know what I’m going to ask?”

“I do. And, yes, what I share with you is very different, and I like that, because what I share with Haelga is unique to her, and what I share with you is unique to you.”

“So with you Haelga you’re…”

“Want to hear the truth?” She nodded. “More often than not, it is… hard. Rough. She has interests that involve her being completely submissive. Do you understand?”

“She likes being tied up and other things?”

“That and a lot more. Yes, at times, it can be incredibly loving and tender, but she is showing me many different ways that we can express our affection for each other.”

“Would you ever want to do that with me?”

“Most of the things I do with Haelga I wouldn’t want to do with you, Muiri. Not at all. But there is that carnal part of me that wants to rip off your clothes and fuck you senseless. Make you swallow my cock before I shove it in your arse, pull your hair back, slap your arse, make you beg, and then just ruin you. But most of me loves what we share now. You’re my beautiful, petite Breton woman, and I loved nothing more than watching you slowly ride me all night, or gazing into your eyes as you lie underneath me.”

She was quiet for a time, my arm still around her as she leaned into me. Her free hand gently grazed my thigh as my hand ran up and down her side. “I understand, Ragnar. And I mean that. So I can live with it. She offers you something different, and I know you love her.” 

“I do.”

“But you love me too?”

“Gods yes.”

“Then show me.”

I grabbed the furs and blankets and lay them down by the fire. I took forever taking off her clothes, running my fingers up and down every uncovered inch. She returned the favour until we were both naked, our bodies pressing together as we embraced and kissed. Then she surprised me by lowering herself down to her knees. She’d never taken me in her mouth. I’d never asked, and it never bothered me.

Her hands were small, barely able to wrap around my shaft, and I wondered how much she would be able to swallow. In the end, not the whole length, but she certainly tried her best. In the light of fire, her eyes were alive with their desire to please me, but I wasn’t going to finish in her mouth or on her face. I didn’t want to. There was only one place I would ever want to finish with her.

But I let her know it was very good. Excellent. Perfect, in fact. She was certainly enthusiastic, running her tongue constantly up and down my shaft, using her hand to stroke me at the same time. Once I reached a certain point, I asked her to stop. She understood why, and after helping her up, I immediately lay her down on the furs and returned the favour.

Her first orgasm didn’t take long at all. I’d learned everything about her body during the time around the lake. Knew where to kiss. Where to bite. Where to kiss. Where to touch. What turned her on. What didn’t work. And as for her pussy, I liked to think I was an expert in that region. And she tasted… I’m not sure if every woman has a unique taste or scent. I think they do. And, by the Eight, Muiri was the best I’d had. Even better than Haelga.

Despite how we’d met, what she’d ask me to do, and what she’d done before me, there was a purity, an innocence to her. It might sound strange, but even she would agree with me. I had a feeling she’d had few lovers, and certainly I was her first since Alain. But add all her feelings for me, and it was little wonder she found everything I did for her so wonderful.

I ate her out to three orgasms. After her third, I was left hoping no-one was around to hear her, probably wondering what was going on otherwise. I would have kept going, but after the third, she finally cried enough, though I still took my time kissing up her body, enjoying the softness of her skin, taking time to enjoy her breasts, before kissing up her neck and finally her mouth.

“Anyone would think you enjoy doing that to me,” she said softly.

“How could I not? Those little sounds and moans you make are worth it.” I noticed her blush slightly, looking away, so I used a finger to return her eyes to mine. “I could say even more, if you’d like.” Still blushing, she nodded regardless. “Your scent alone makes me hard, Muiri. Then there is your taste.” That made her laugh lightly, obviously never having heard anyone say it to her before. “I’m serious here. There’s a reason why I’m so happy to do it for what feels like hours. Your entire body is beautiful. I just want to touch and kiss you all over, feel your soft skin against my rough hands. Front and back. Every inch of you.”

She reached down to grab my cock, guiding it inside her. She was now used to taking me, though I was always careful not to cause her any pain. Once I was sheathed inside her, she asked me not to move, that she just wanted to enjoy the feeling of fullness. I couldn’t stay still forever, but I lasted as long as I could before I needed to do something.

“Ragnar, I want you to do something for me.”

“Yes?”

“I want you to fuck me.”

“Are you sure?”

She nodded. It was emphatic. “Maybe not what you do otherwise, but I’m not a delicate wallflower. That’s not to stay I haven’t loved every single second, but maybe you can show me what you can do otherwise? And, if we like it, we can mix up our love making going forward.”

I pulled out and flipped her over. She knew what I wanted, getting onto her hands and knees, looking back with a smile on her face. Her back was as perfect as her front, taking a moment to kiss from the small of her back all the way up to her neck, whispering into her ear that I loved her. She whispered those words back immediately. Her arse was soft but, like the rest of her, petite. I teased her by placing my cock between her cheeks. It looked enormous compared to her body, leaving me wondering how she took me at times. “Not there, Ragnar. I’m not sure I could handle it.”

“Only a very small but carnal part desires that, Muiri. Though your arse is fantastic, just like the rest of you.”

“Keep sweet talking me, and I might just say yes!”

Gently grabbing her hips, I pushed her forward so I could line myself up, and then held her in place as I slid inside her. She loved it immediately, but while I would have liked to have dominated her in that position, instead I lifted her up so her body was against me, wrapping an arm around her as she turned her head so I could kiss her. I fucked her harder than normal, enjoying the cries she made as I did, and she eventually asked me to let her go so she could fall forward, resting her head on her arms, looking back still with that smile on her face.

“Harder. Just a little harder.”

She wouldn’t ask if she didn’t want, so I did as she asked. Her face was a picture as I pumped into her hard enough that our skin was soon slapping together, leaning forward myself to place an arm on the ground, driving into her as I breathed in her ear. “That’s good, Ragnar,” she breathed.

“Not going to last much longer. It’s too damned good, Muiri.”

She giggled. “It’s okay, Ragnar. I’ve had three already. This is just for you.”

I kissed her cheek and kept the same momentum. No need to completely ruin her, and I didn’t want to. But she said she would stay in that position until I came, and my orgasm wasn’t long in arriving. I grunted a few times, Muiri enjoying the sound of my own pleasure as I released a roar as I drove into her a few final times before I finally released. I had to relax, leaning down above her on my forearms as she lay flat on the ground, taking me with her. My body just above hers, she leaned back to kiss my cheek. “I enjoyed that a lot, Ragnar.”

“Uh-huh.”

“And I think you definitely enjoyed it.”

“Aye.”

I had to lie down, quite happily pulling out and collapsing onto the ground beside her. She quickly wrapped an arm around me and turned me onto my side so she could spoon with me, ensuring she was holding both my hands. “I’ve had a wonderful week, Ragnar. I can’t remember being happier.”

“I’ve enjoyed it too. It’s been a lot of fun. Wonderful scenery. But the company has been delightful and certainly the best thing about it.”

Lying together by the fire, it took a while for us to feel the chill of the night, and we eventually had to head into our tent and snuggle under the furs. We didn’t talk much more but certainly spent a lot more time kissing and cuddling. We were both spent, though, so there was no further lovemaking that night.

I think we both had slightly heavy hearts the next morning, knowing we’d be back in Riften in a couple of hours. She proved how tolerant she was of me, though, by saying she expected me to visit Haelga that night. Part of me wanted to. The other part wanted to be with her. As we walked, she could see that I was in two minds, so made it for me, insisting that she’d had me for longer than a week, so that I should visit Haelga, understanding that I loved her too, and wanted to be with her as well.

“I’ll let Ingun know soon that we’ll just have to be friends.”

“And Karliah?”

“I don’t know. We work together quite often, so it’s… awkward.”

Muiri grabbed my hand and smiled at me. “It’s your decision, Ragnar. As you requested, I won’t force it. If you want to be with either of them occasionally, it’s fine.”

After passing through the gates, I escorted her all the way home, and we stood on the threshold of her bedroom, looking at the very soft and welcoming bed. It shouldn’t come as any great surprise that I didn’t return to Riftweald until the next morning.

Haelga was delighted to see me when I dropped by the next day. Asking where I’d been, she wasn’t surprised when I told her where I’d been, sitting me down at one of the tables, offering me a drink at the same time. Once I had a tankard in hand, she said, “That woman is head over heels in love with you, Ragnar.”

“I know she is.”

“You know I’m open-minded and don’t mind. What about her?”

I shrugged. “She says she’s fine with it. She knows how I feel about you, at least.”

“But…”

“She wants to get married, and I think sooner rather than later.”

“And if that happens, it ends between us,” she stated.

I nodded. “I’m sure some people would enjoy open relationships when married. But I think if I put a ring on her finger, and she puts one on mine, then that’s me committed to her, and only her.”

“There’s a smile on your face, Ragnar. You like the idea.”

“The idea of marriage doesn’t scare me as much as I thought it would. I know we talked about it too.”

“Aye, we did. But I’ve been there, done that, and… Well, you know.” She reached across the table. “I love what we share, Ragnar. I love you. But if you make the choice, I’ll understand. Please don’t lose her just to keep me around. I’m old enough to understand. As for the others, they’ll understand too. Try and make the right choice, at least.”

“I’ll give it some thought.”

“Good. But, despite that, what are you plans tonight?”

“That’s what I’m here to talk about. Would you like dinner at mine?”

“I’ll come prepared, Ragnar.” 

She certainly did, as after dinner, she practically dragged me to the Dibellan room. Her evening seemed to be one long continuous orgasm. She took my cock in every hole more than once. At one time or another, she was blindfolded, gagged, wrists bound, ankles bound, toys in her pussy, toys in arse, whips and cane across her arse. Think of something and it may just have happened…

Yet the smile on her face the next morning was totally worth it. Granted, she found sitting down quite difficult, as her last orgasm arrived through some of the hardest anal I’d ever given her, and I was still staggered when she begged for more. Lying in bed once we were finally done, and her appetite for everything was finally sated, she confessed that, selfishly, she hoped I wouldn’t propose to Muiri. I didn’t hold it against her at all, as I would miss her like no other if we stopped.

But I certainly had a decision to make.

---

 

After what was effectively a holiday away with Muiri for longer than a week, it was time for me to get back to work. The Guild had been busy during my time away, and Karliah had news to report. Books had come in from all over Skyrim and further afield, and she had learned of the location of another Daedric statue.

“I’ve barely heard of this one, but have you ever heard of Peryite?” she asked.

“No, never heard of him.”

“I’ve had to do a little research since discovering the name. He is known as the Taskmaster, or as the Blighted Lord.”

“Sounds delightful. So I assume you know where we are heading?”

“Well, you see, the thing is… It’s not a statue, like Azura, nor a temple, like Meridia. It’s more a… Well, it’s a tree, Ragnar.”

“A tree?”

Karliah shrugged helplessly. “That’s what the books state. Some sort of tree, and through it, we might be able to commune with Peryite.”

“When do you want to go?”

Karliah smiled. “I’ve already started putting things together. Tomorrow morning?”

“Perfect.”

“One last thing. We’ll have to take certain supplies, as one of the books suggested that we’d need to make some sort of incense to commune.”

I couldn’t help the slight groan. “Great. Why do I think it’s going to be something really weird again?!”

She laughed lightly to herself before stating she would meet me at the stables the next morning. I spent that night with Muiri at her place. She was surprised to see me, figuring I would be with Haelga again, not that she was complaining. I told her what I was doing, and that I’d probably be gone for a few days, but that the prize would be worth the time away. She just told me to be careful as always.

It was a cool morning as Karliah and I mounted our horses, ready for at least a two-day journey across Skyrim, and I knew we’d end up having to search for this shrine, as Karliah didn’t have an exact location. It had been a while since Karliah and I had been alone, so the first few hours of our ride was simply an opportunity to catch up. She’d been busy herself, and admitted she was putting together plans to perhaps recruit one or two more Nightingales. She knew I would eventually be distracted by other things, while Brynjolf agreed to become one but wasn’t exactly devoted. She wanted recruits who would live at the hall and perhaps even tend the Twilight Sepulcher with her.

We took the south road, and camped near Falkreath for the night. I managed to snag us a couple of rabbits for dinner quite quickly, and sitting by the campfire at night, we still had plenty to talk about. The conversation generally stayed on topic, the retrieval of Daedric artefacts, though it eventually strayed into other matters, my private life, of course.

“You were gone longer than we expected, Ragnar.”

“Aye. It was unexpected.”

“But?” she asked, giving me a look.

“But what?”

She laughed to herself. “Come now, Ragnar. I think I know you well enough now.”

“What do you mean?”

“You’re thinking or contemplating something. Part of me does wonder what it is though.”

Draining the bottle of ale in my hand, I placed the bottle down and turned towards her. “I don’t wish to rake over old wounds, but you had a connection with Gallus, right?”

I think she knew where I was going straight away. She smiled though, I would assume at obvious memories. “I did, Ragnar. It was wonderful while it lasted.”

“I feel that same connection with Muiri.”

That caused her to raise eyebrows. “And Haelga?”

“I love her too, but the week I’ve just spent with Muiri… I’m head over heels for her, Karliah. Shit, when we weren’t talking as we were riding along, I was wondering what she was doing, thinking about what we could do when I returned, hoping she was thinking of me in return.”

Karliah didn’t say a thing for a moment. Then she hugged me. “I’m happy for you, Ragnar.”

I closed the hug, but still asked, “And you’re okay with it?”

She laughed lightly again as she let me go, though continued to hold my hands. “Ragnar, I knew this was never going to be permanent. I’ve enjoyed the time we spent together, and I have a lot of affection for you, as I’m sure you have for me.”

“I do. Definitely do.”

“But it’s not love. Yes, the sex has been great, but I find myself just enjoying spending time with you like this. Above all, you are my friend. And it won’t hurt me if we’re no longer physical. I’ll miss it. By the Eight, I’ll miss it, but I will still want your companionship on jobs like this.”

“Thank you.” I didn’t know what else to say.

“Will you want to be physical during this trip though?”

It was my turn to laugh. “I guess we can make it one last fling?”

She agreed that we would be intimate until our return to Riften, where our relationship would continue to be close, but it would only be professional. So we made the most of it that first night, and before mounting our horses the next morning after a night of lovemaking, we shared quite the passionate kiss before she hugged me tightly, resting her head on my chest. “Definitely going to miss that,” she said quietly.

The further west we headed, the more the landscape changed, becoming more mountainous, the plains of Whiterun left far behind. And with plenty of places for ambush, we both rode along with bows in hand. Forsworn operated in the region, and although Madanach had given his word that my allies and I would not be harmed going forward, I wasn’t sure if all his soldiers would be aware, and certainly wouldn’t know what I looked like.

But we rode along in peace, eventually coming to a stop at a particular mountain, albeit smaller than those in the distance, Karliah suggesting the shrine would be at the top of it. We searched and eventually found a path for our horses, and although narrow in places, managed to ascend without too much difficulty.

There we found a lone Khajit, who noticed our arrival and then… ignored us. Dismounting and tying our horses, we wandered towards the Khajit, who was busy at what looked like a Dwarven cauldron. What he was cooking, I have no idea, and didn’t particularly want to ask.

“Um, hello,” I stated.

He turned to look at us and introduced himself as Kesh. “Ah, wanderers, yes? No? Pilgrims, perhaps? You have come to commune with Peryite, Taskmaster and blighted lord, yes?”

“That’s what we’re here for. What can you tell us about him?” I assumed he would know more about him than either Karliah or I, who knew little. There were not many books about Peryite.

“He is the pus in the wound. Oh, proper ones curl their noses, but it's pus that drinks foul humours and restores the blood. I worship Peryite, yes, because sometimes the world can only be cleansed by disease.”

Karliah and I shared a glance. “Okay, what in oblivion have you got me into here, Ragnar?”

“Me? You’re the one who suggested this!”

“You’re the one that wants Daedric bloody artefacts!”

Damn it, I hate it when she’s right. “Kesh, we would like to commune with Peryite. What would it take to do that?”

“Not everyone has the stomach required to entreat my Lord. But Kesh likes you, friend. There is a way Peryite may speak to us who will take Him in. If you wish to commune with Him, we'll need the incense.”

Karliah walked to her horse, returning a couple of minutes later with what was required. Kesh looked surprised but thanked us, and he immediately moved towards another cauldron next to a mangled tree. Karliah grabbed my attention, suggesting the tree was how we would commune with Peryite. How that would happen, I had no idea.

I also had no idea what Kesh was actually doing, but in addition to our ingredients, he added a lot more, and after a few minutes, the cauldron was full of a green and absolutely foul smelling liquid. Karliah looked like she was going to be ill, and while I might have a strong stomach, even I was struggling. Kesh didn’t appear perturbed, and once he was done stirring, he beckoned me forward. “It is ready, pilgrim. Inhale deeply and Peryite may speak with you if he finds you worthy.”

Doing as required, I was fairly sure I’d lose my breakfast in seconds. Instead, there was a bright light and… The tree seemed to speak to me. If not the tree, then there was a trio of skeevers, ghostly looking skeevers, that seemed to speak. It was weird. I’m not sure it was a hallucination or if I wasn’t going nuts. I’d seen enough strange things as it was.

“"Breathe deep, mortal. I would have you hear me well, so let these vapours fill your lungs.”

Definitely Peryite. “You’ve chosen to speak with me. Why?”

I’m fairly sure he’d know why I was there. I was after some sort of artefact. The Daedra seemed to know what we mortals were thinking most of the time. “I have watched you for some time, you know. The decisions you've made intrigue me, and I wonder if you are a proper agent for a task of mine. I sent a blessing to Mundus, a wasting plague that infected a scattering of Breton villages. One of my monks, the elf Orchendor, was sent to gather these Afflicted. He shepherded them into Bthardamz for me, but has since lost his way. I will not stand for betrayal. I want you to go to Bthardamz and kill Orchendor, in my name.”

Our commune didn’t last long. I guess Peryite would speak more upon my return. My vision cleared and everything around me returned to normality. Asking Kesh if he knew Bthardamz was, he said it was just down the mountain and we’d see Dwarven ruins during our walk down. “What does he want us to do?” Karliah asked once we started walking.

“Find an elf and kill him.”

“You didn’t ask too many questions. What did he say otherwise?”

“Apparently he’s been watching me. I’m not sure how but he said my decisions intrigued him.”

I’m fairly sure one Dwarven ruin is like another, but the outskirts of Bthardamz appeared in rather good conditions, left thinking the Dwemer had built things to last, much like their machines that waited for us inside. Any thoughts of an easy journey through the ruin ended in a matter of minutes as a couple of the Afflicted Peryite mentioned attacked us. One appeared to spew this green bile, eerily reminiscent of the liquid Kesh had cooked up on the mountain, and the fact it sizzled on the ground suggested it was probably poisonous and acidic. After killing the pair, Karliah asked, “So what do we do once inside?”

“Kill those who attack us. Leave those who don’t.”

Karliah agreed, and we found an entrance into the ruin itself. Like always, it was rather dark inside, though the place felt alive, as the Dwemer mechanisms were still working, Karliah and I sneaking past areas we knew their machines might wake and attack us. We passed rooms where Afflicted were sleeping on stone beds, agreeing that we would let them live, at least. I’d committed murder, and didn’t particularly want to commit many more.

We found evidence that some of them were a little nuts in addition to being full of whatever poison they’d chosen to imbibe. Gathered around some sort of statue or idol to Peryite, Karliah and I listened in to their prayers. The mention of Orchendor gained our absolute attention. With no way to sneak around them, we did something to gain their attention, and once they immediately tried to attack us, putting them down wasn’t a problem.

Bthardamz was an absolute labyrinth of long corridors and cavernous rooms. Some Afflicted remained asleep, and therefore undisturbed by us. I think many were probably dreadfully ill, remembering the words of both Kesh and Peryite about blight and disease, just wondering what sort of plague had taken place in Breton lands. Thinking of Bretons made me think of Muiri…

Armed with bows, as neither Karliah nor myself wanted to get too close to the Afflicted, we slowly but surely made our way forward, keeping to the shadows, killing those that chose to attack, leaving alone those who didn’t bother us. The further into the ruin we descended, the more Dwemer machines woke up, and they did not hesitate in attacking, and that’s when I needed to unsheathe my sword and defend the pair of us. The little spider looking machines were more a nuisance, but the machines that appeared to roll along the ground, making all manner of strange sounds, packed a punch with their solid metal arms.

Eventually we saw no more Afflicted, only the Dwemer machines. Sneaking by them was nearly impossible, so Karliah unsheathed her own blade as we went on the attack. No point in sneaking, but I think we both near shit our pants upon opening one of the large pair of double doors to be faced by an enormous Dwemer contraption.

“Centurion! Fuck!” Karliah cried, grabbing my arm and dragging me back.

“How the hell do we kill it?”

“Get in close, hack at its legs. Just watch yourself. It blows steam that’ll cook you where your stand, and its arms will take your head clean off. Keep low, move fast.”

Looking back, I still have no idea how we both survived. With little room for manoeuvre, it actually suited us more than the enormous Centurion, as we could time our swings, rolling out of the way of its giant arms, while raising my shield blocked the worst of the steam. It took a long time, Karliah and I exhausted by the end, but somehow we managed to get the giant contraption onto its knees. Once we had it there, the pair of us went on the attack. Even a machine can only take so much punishment before it will stop working, and as I distracted it, the Centurion still managing to blow off steam, Karliah attacked it from behind, banging its head for all she was worth. The Centurion finally collapsed onto its front, and the pair of us hit it a number of times before we were satisfied it wouldn’t rise again.

“Fuck that thing!” I cried. Karliah just staggered towards me, throwing her arms around me, sagging into my body. “And you’re exhausted.”

“That was tough, Ragnar,” she groaned.

“And we still haven’t found Orchendor.”

She relaxed against me for a couple of minutes. To be honest, I needed a few minutes to let the adrenaline die down too. Taking a last deep breath, she let me go and took out her bow, suggesting we just put a few arrows in the elf and be done with it. That sounded like a fine idea, and stepping over the Centurion, we moved on.

We found Orchendor in an enormous room, completely isolated. He was a powerful mage, and was able to fling magic rather quickly, Karliah and I ensuring we split up as we worked. Karliah was far better with a bow, so I made sure I distracted the elf, allowing her to line up and get the shot. She didn’t need more than one arrow, the steel tip going straight through the throat of the elf as he was charging up some sort of spell. He collapsed to his knees, hearing him choke, as I stepped towards him. I think he tried to say something before he fell forward.

“Well, I think it’s safe to say the Centurion was tougher,” I joked.

“Humans are fragile. And can’t withstand a well-aimed arrow.”

We wandered around, seeing if there was anything we could swipe. There was coin and jewels as always, sharing those between us, making sure we’d also take back a little for the Guild too. We also found a key, and after a quick search, found it worked on door, which opened to an elevator that took us all the way back to the surface. I’ll admit we both delighted in taking a few deep breaths of fresh air, realising how dank and pungent the air had been throughout the ruin.

It was probably the middle of the night, but we agreed to head straight back to the shrine, Karliah using a little magic to generate a bright light that lit the way. Both of us still rather exhausted, our walk up the hill took far longer than it normally would. Kesh was asleep, and Karliah and I quickly set up a tent, rolled out our sleep bags, and went straight to sleep.

The next morning, I communed with Peryite after again inhaling the incense, and he was rather pleased. “Well done, mortal. All things are in their order, and Orchendor roams the Pits. His betrayal will be punished, and your obedience is rewarded.”

There was a bright light, that I’m sure might have blinded all of us, and next to the tree was a shield. “That’s Spellbreaker,” Karliah stated.

Picking it up, the shield was far lighter than my current one. “What do you know about it?”

“In language you’ll understand, Ragnar, it’s enchanted to fuck.” I laughed as she continued. “It will protect you from any magic attack. It pretty much acts as a magical ward.”

“Awesome,” I whispered, “It looks Dwarven.”

“While the Dwemer didn’t revere the Eight, or Nine, as far as I’m aware, it’s possible it could be built from the same materials.”

Objective complete, we thanked Kesh for his assistance before packing up camp, hitching our supplies to our horses, and we headed back down the mountain before turning onto the road heading east. It was another two-day journey, and the final night in camp, Karliah and I made love for what we figured was the final time. Neither of us got particularly emotional about it, simply having fun together, knowing we would remain firm friends from the next day onwards, just without sharing the bed occasionally.

But I’d made my mind up by the time we approached the hill leading up towards Riften. I knew what I was going to do. I surprised even myself by making the decision I would take. Perhaps it was a sign that I was maturing. Or maybe I was just more in love with her than even I thought.

After stabling our horses, Karliah said she would head back to Nightingale Hall and continue her research. Her last words to me were said with much affection.

“Good luck, Ragnar. I hope she says yes.”

Chapter 17: Love and Marriage

“How does marriage work in Skyrim?” I asked the priest, who introduced himself as Maramal. I’d seen him once or twice in the Bee and Barb, calling all of us sinners for drinking alcohol, listening to music, and generally enjoying ourselves. 

“You wish to get married?” he asked, sounding a little surprised. I guess he’d noticed me around town.

“Aye.”

“Oh, well, to be honest, it’s quite simple. All you need is an Amulet of Mara. Wear that near the person you intend to marry. She or he should notice it, and will enquire as to your intentions. You may then propose to that person, return to myself or my associates, and we can organise a date for the ceremony.”

“It’s that simple.”

He laughed at my tone, as I was quite clearly surprised at the simplicity. “This is not the Imperial City. Most people simply wish for a simple exchange of vows and rings before returning to their lives. It is a reflection of life itself in Skyrim. No need for gaudy displays of affection.”

Not having an Amulet of Mara, I asked if I can purchase one, and for the price of a few coin, I took the Amulet of Dibella from around my neck, placed that in my pocket, and wandered back out into Riften. The first person I needed to visit wasn’t Muiri. I would need to talk to Haelga first.

She was delighted to see me as always, but I think my face must have said it all, as after she kissed and hugged me, she led me to one of the tables nearby. Taking a seat side by side, she asked, “It’s over, isn’t it?”

My heart nearly broke at her tone. I loved her. She loved me. But my love for Muiri was… stronger. Better. Haelga didn’t want marriage. Nor children. And she would remain in Riften forever. With Muiri, I felt there were opportunities for other things. She’d made her feelings and intentions known since nearly day one. And the more time passed, the more the thought of settling down with someone, but particularly her, seemed to be the best decision I could make.

“I’m sorry,” I said quietly.

She wrapped an arm around me, leaning her head against me. “Don’t be. Don’t be at all. I think we both knew this might happen if you were to meet someone else.”

“But I feel like I said…”

“Ragnar, there are two men I’ve loved. I still love my husband, despite him no longer being here. And you, and I know you will still love me in your own way, even when we’re no longer together.”

“I will remember our time together fondly.”

“As will I. As I said, you were what I was looking for. I can only hope the next man I meet measures up to even half of who you are.”

“That’s quite the compliment.” I turned to kiss her cheek. “But I will always have a place in my heart for you, Haelga.”

“And I you, Ragnar,” she whispered. Her voice finally broke, and I turned to hold her. She didn’t break down and cry. She was far stronger than that. But I knew this would be the last time I would hold her in such a way. And kiss her, as she looked up at me, her eyes glistening from tears that wanted to fall, and when our lips met, I knew the tears finally did.

It was one of our greatest kisses, putting all the feelings we had for each other into the gesture. But it was also the worst, as we both knew it would likely be the last. We would not be intimate again, not with the decision I had made. When we broke apart, she laid her head on my chest as I held her. “Once you go, I won’t want to see you for a couple of days, Ragnar. Just to get my head right.”

“Okay.” 

“I don’t hate you for this. As I said, I’ll still love you. And I’m even happy for you. Despite what you do, and some of the things you’ve done, you’re still a decent man at heart. And Muiri is a delightful young woman.” She paused, before adding, “And I won’t come to the wedding. I can’t see you get married to someone else, despite the fact we never would.”

We sat together in silence, just holding each other, before I suggested it was best that I leave. She held tightly onto my hand as we walked to the door. Standing on the threshold, we hugged a final time, and I could feel her hands tight on my back, not wanting to let me go. I held her tightly in return, and we kissed a final time. “I love you,” she whispered once our lips part.

“And I love you, Haelga. And I’ll always be around if you want some company. Just no longer in the way I know we both enjoyed.”

That gave her a good chuckle, and it was probably the best way we could part. “I will see you around, Ragnar. Maybe for a drink in the Bee and Barb?”

“I’ll be at my usual table if you’d like to join me one time.”

“You and your new wife?”

“Well, yes.”

“I’d be delighted, Ragnar. But, again, maybe not in the next few days, or immediately after your wedding.”

We shared a brief, final hug, before she kissed my cheek, gently pushed me back, bid me farewell, before closing the door. Not exactly in my face, but it was a symbol of what just happened. The relationship between Haelga and I had just changed, perhaps forever. I would always hold affection for her. To be honest, I would always love her. But it was now time to move on.

I wouldn’t just go straight from Haelga to Muiri. In my mind, that certainly wasn’t the right thing to do. Instead, I headed back to Riftweald. Aranea was sitting at the dining table, and offered to make me dinner. I eagerly agreed, and as we sat together, feasting on some roasted goat and potatoes, I showed her what I bought. “Who’s the lucky woman? Or, I think the accurate question is, which one is the lucky woman?”

“Muiri.”

Aranea smiled. “A good choice. She’s a lovely woman. What of Haelga?”

“We’ll remain friends. It will be awkward to begin with, but I think we’ll be as close in the future, just without the sex.”

“And Karliah?”

“We’ll remain friends and co-workers, also without the sex.”

“So you will be a one-woman man?”

“Aye. First time in my life.”

“You must really love this woman.”

I couldn’t help smile as I said, “I do. I really, definitely do.” 

Lying in bed alone that night, I found sleep difficult as I thought about what I was preparing to do. It wasn’t the fact I was scared. It wasn’t the idea that I thought she’d say no. And I didn’t think I was too young. Many were far younger than myself when they found themselves wed. I had never intended to marry, always thinking I’d enjoy a variety of women. But I’d felt something for Muiri within minutes of meeting her. Our first time being intimate was some of the best sex of my life.

It's probably why I’d willingly killed for her.

Waking the next morning having finally drifted off to sleep, I enjoyed a hearty breakfast with Aranea before dressing in some of my finest clothes. Heading out into the market, I bought a bouquet of flowers before heading to Muiri’s place. Taking a deep breath, I knocked on the door. Upon opening it, she smiled immediately upon seeing me standing there with flowers. “For me?” she asked.

“Aye,” I replied, handing them over. She dipped her nose, inhaling the scent, closing her eyes, the smile on her face broadening.

“Oh, they’re wonderful, Ragnar. And some of my favourites too. How did…”

“How did I know? I do listen to you, Muiri.”

“You should come in.”

As the fire was always roaring, I took off my coat and sat on the lounge in front of it, watching Muiri grab a vase, fill it with water, and place the flowers in it. The vase then took pride of place on her mantelpiece before she sat next to me, immediately leaning into hug me. “Thank you. They’re beautiful,” she said softly.

“I’m just glad you like them!”

“It’s a lovely gesture, Ragnar. Not often a man will… pick?”

“No, I can admit that I bought them at the market.”

“Well, you still managed to choose the most colourful, those with the nicest scent, and most importantly, those I love the most.”

“As I said, I do listen.”

I leaned down to kiss her, her lips soft, her mouth willing, as I wrapped my arms around her, pulling her tight towards me. I felt the smile on her lips as we kissed before she pulled back, gently stroking my cheek. “I love you, Ragnar,” she whispered, “A little bit more every day.”

“Well, I’m glad you said that because…”

I reached under my shirt and pulled out the amulet. I watched her face. She didn’t know whether to smile, cry, cover her mouth due to the shock. Her eyes, though. They said everything I needed to know. I knew the answer before I even started. “I love you, Muiri. And you’re the only one I truly want to be with. I learned that during our week together. So, it’s a rather simple question. Will you marry me?”

“Yes!” she exclaimed, throwing her arms around me, kissing me again.

“It’s just you and me, Muiri. You have my word.”

Leaning back, I watched her look at my face before meeting my eyes, “So even Haelga…?”

“I talked to her yesterday. We were not intimate and I told her we would remain close friends if she wanted, but that I wanted to be with you, and only you.” She opened her mouth, and I think she was ready to ask a question. I could guess what that question was. “I’m sure, Muiri. I’ve never been so sure of something in all my life.”

“Take me to the bedroom, Ragnar,” she ordered, gently.

Picking her up was easy, considering how small she was compared to me, though that didn’t stop her cooing about her big strong man as I carried her to the bedroom. Sitting her down on the bed, we undressed each other rather quickly, doing it rather awkwardly at times, as we simply didn’t want to break our kiss. Once we were naked, she shuffled backwards on the bed so I could join her. I think she was expecting me to just slide my cock inside her, but the smile on my face suggested what I was going to do first.

I covered her body with my lips, leaving kisses everywhere, giving her small breasts plenty of attention. By the time I made it to her sex, she was soaking wet, and I thoroughly enjoyed her taste as I dipped my tongue. Lifting her legs back, she completely exposed herself, grabbing a pillow so she could watch me, my eyes ensuring I looked up into hers. “Ragnar,” she hissed quietly.

I couldn’t help think to myself as I ate her out that I’d happily do this every single day for the rest of my life, if she was willing. I didn’t think she wouldn’t be. She loved sex just as much as myself. And she was loving what I was doing at the moment, watching her face, her chest rising and falling quicker, almost panting at times, knowing her climax was approaching and inevitable.

“Clit, Ragnar. Do that and…”

Her head rolled back as I touched it the first time, her body almost unconsciously pressing down into my mouth. As I gently played with her clit, I slid a couple of fingers into her tight Breton pussy. She cried out again, hooking her arms under her knees, her eyes now wild with desire, and I knew she was desperate to cum. I knew it was going to be big, and considering what I’d done a few minutes before, probably emotional too.

“Ragnar,” she breathed again, “I’m so close…”

She was, as her climax arrived no more than a minute or so later. She cried out again as she came, her head rolling back, nearly her entire body shuddering, from her little feet all the way to the top of her head. She cried out again as I kept going before I felt a hand on my head, the universal gesture for me to stop. Kissing gently back up her body, it still shaking from what I’d just done, she opened her eyes as I hovered over her. It came as no surprise to see her cheeks were already wet, throwing her arms around me to hold me close.

“I thought I’d be waiting forever for you to propose,” she said, her voice heavy with emotion.

“I couldn’t wait forever. And I was being selfish to think you’d put up with it forever.”

“When did you change your mind?” 

Lifting my head to meet her eyes, I said, “During the week we spent together. I never gave anyone else a thought while we were way. That’s when I knew you were the one.”

She kissed me, though needed to break it when I slid my cock inside her, watching and hearing her gasp before the smile formed. I didn’t last long at all. Five minutes, tops. She certainly didn’t complain. I certainly wasn’t going to either. When I climaxed inside her, I’ll admit even I felt the sense of occasion, though I put it down to the look of love, devotion and adoration in her eyes.

We spent the entire morning in bed, mixing lovemaking with conversation. It amazed me that we could always find something to talk about. With Muiri, I was honest about everything in my life. She knew what I did and didn’t judge as I’d explained the rules by which the Guild would now work. We were still all thieves at the end of the day but we worked with at last a modicum of honour, and I still believed it was a relatively victimless crime.

Heading out at lunchtime, we went to the Bee and Barb, where I wore the Amulet of Mara above my shirt, holding the hand of Muiri as we wandered in and sat at my usual desk. Many of the regulars noticed the amulet, assumed we were now betrothed, and were quick to congratulate us. Even Maven approached us, offering us good wishes, though leaned down and whispered in my ear that she was sad to know I was now off the market.

“When would you like to get married?” I asked after we’d finished eating.

There was nothing but a smile at first, no doubt thinking of our future together. “As soon as possible, Ragnar.”

“Would you like to buy a dress for the occasion?”

“No. I just want to get married to you.”

I thought about what day it was. “Today is Tirdas. How about Loredas? You sound eager to be married as soon as possible. So am I, so the quicker, the better.”

“Something to look forward to for the rest of the week.”

“And you’ll obviously move into mine after the ceremony? I was thinking you move in, and Aranea can take your place?”

“What about the… room you built for Haelga?”

“I’ll lock the door and forget about it. Unless…”

She laughed lightly. “I think most of it is far too much for me, Ragnar. I prefer you when you’re being gentle with me.” She leaned forward and whispered, “Though I did like it when you grabbed me tightly by the hips when I was on my hands and knees and… you know…” She trailed off with a blush.

“We can do that any time you want to. Quite frankly, Muiri, we can do anything you want… within reason…”

Gently kissing my lips, she whispered, “There’s a good chance I will end up thinking the same thing, Ragnar.”

Heading to the Temple of Mara, Maramal explained the ceremony and what to expect. He asked if we would have many guests. I said I would have a witness. Muiri had no family, so I suggested Aranea could be there for her. Muiri didn’t mind who was her witness, as long as we were wed at the end. Letting Maramal know the day, he asked when we’d like to be married. We both agreed that midday would be best.

Returning to Riftweald, Muiri stopped me before entering. “Ragnar, what would you say if I suggested that we don’t see each other until the wedding?

“Why?”

“Because although I don’t need a fancy frock to marry you, I would still like to surprise you. And I’m sure you can find a little something to dress in too. And, as they say, absence makes the heart grow fonder. So I expect us to eagerly consummate our marriage quite quickly, yes?”

“Definitely.”

“So you can handle not seeing me for a few days?”

“No.” She was about to say something as her face fell, so I smiled and added, “But I can deal with it.”

She hugged me tightly before I leaned down to kiss her. It was a long kiss, long enough to draw the attention of a couple of passing guards. One cleared his throat and suggested we should just head inside. That caused both of us to laugh before Muiri took a step back. “Next time you see me, I’ll be walking down the aisle towards you.”

“I can’t wait. I love you.”

“I love you, Ragnar. See you on Loredas.”

Knowing I wouldn’t see her for a few days, I had to keep myself busy. First thing I had to do was get myself some new clothes. The finest I could lay my hands on. And, of course, I’d get those at the Guild. Heading down the Flagon, I let everyone know what had happened. I received plenty of pats on the back or handshakes in congratulations. Vex was surprised, believing I’d continue to sleep around with various women, mentioning I’d never approached her for a good fuck. I couldn’t help chuckle at her tone, though she said it was probably for the best to just keep our relationship professional. I asked Brynjolf to be my witness, and I think I near enough made him cry. Considering I had few friends outside the Guild, and the relationship the pair of us had formed, no wonder I’d want him there. I then added that everyone would be invited to the post-wedding celebration at the Bee and Barb, suggesting everyone should attend though incognito. As in, dressed in normal clothing.

With three days to fill, I packed up some camping supplies and headed out of Riften, figuring I’d spend the three days I had free out in the wild, perhaps doing a bit of hunting, a bit of swimming, and trying not to think about Muiri most of the time. I also didn’t want any temptation in Riften to go back on my vow, nor did I want to be too near Karliah at the hall.

I’ll admit, I ended up finding it a little lonely as, despite my best intentions, I thought about her all the bloody time. Typical. At least when I was armed with bow and arrow, tracking an elk or deer, I could concentrate on the task at hand and clear my mind. But when sitting by the campfire during the evening, nursing a cup of wine, I found my thoughts would eventually drift and end up thinking about her, wondering what she was doing and if she was missing me as badly.

At least I bagged a couple of elk, so I’d have some furs and meat to take back with me. Almost ran into a bear during one of my hunts, a couple of arrows into the ground near it actually scaring it off. I had my sword and shield with me, just in case it decided to attack me, though it was always dangerous taking on a bear one v one.

I returned to Riften on the evening of Fredas, rather excited at the prospect of getting married the next day. I took the pelts to Asbjorn, who was the owner of the ‘Scorched Hammer’. He asked if I wanted anything made from the pelts or if I just wanted to sell them. As I had plenty of armour, I just took the offer of coin. The meat I took back to Riftweald, where I ask Aranea to cook us up some venison, while I would put the antlers to good use. 

“Are you looking forward to tomorrow, Ragnar?” she asked once we sat down to eat.

“Aye. Probably won’t sleep tonight. I haven’t seen her for three days.”

“Is it because you haven’t seen her or another reason?”

She gave me a look and I couldn’t help chuckle. “No, I haven’t missed her just for that reason, Aranea. As I told her, that week and a bit we spent together told me everything I needed to know. Just being with her, having her close to me… I knew when we returned to Riften what I wanted to do. It was just that selfish part of me that wanted to have my sweet roll and eat it too.”

“Maybe it’s a sign of your maturity?”

I couldn’t help chuckle. “That’s doubtful. But I’m prepared to give up everyone else for her in a heartbeat.”

Lying back in bed later that night, I couldn’t help think back about my life. Being an orphan. Then an urchin on the streets. A pickpocket. A thief. Then a new calling as a warrior. Losing my virginity and finding a carnal desire to be with as many women as possible. Life blowing up in my face and my effective exile to Skyrim. Then everything that had happened to me since then. Yet growing up, I’d never given marriage a serious thought. It’s funny how life works out.

I woke earlier than normal the next morning, sitting out on the porch as the sun rose, eating a hearty breakfast. Aranea joined me, rather amused at my excitement. We’d spoken and she was happy enough moving out, though insisted she’d still spend plenty of time at my place. Heading inside, I picked out the finery I’d chosen. I didn’t want to wear all black, too much of a reminder of my Nightingale Armour. So I went with a dark blue coat and trousers, with a white shirt and dark shoes. I trimmed my beard and made sure I had a good wash before dressing. Once I felt ready, I asked Aranea how I looked.

“Nervous?” she wondered.

“Surprisingly no. I feel ready for this.”

“That’s good. Though last minute nerves are nothing to be ashamed about.”

“Have you been married?”

“No. I have always served Azura in one form or another. That’s not to say I haven’t enjoyed a few lovers over the decades.”

Raising my eyebrows, I asked, “Decades?”

“I understand your friend, Karliah, is in her sixties? She looks good for her age. I’m much older, Ragnar. I guess one of the joys of my kind is the length of life you can expect.”

“And I’ve got a couple of decades if I’m unlucky…” 

“Make the most of it while you can, Ragnar. A long life isn’t always what it’s crack up to be.”

Close to midday, we headed out into Riften and towards the Temple of Mara. It appeared quite a few of the townsfolk were aware of what was happening. It probably wasn’t good that so many knew my face, but whether they knew what I did for a living, I didn’t know. Perhaps there were rumours, but I never heard any. I assumed most had me down as some sort of mercenary, particularly as I left and returned quite often.

Walking into the temple, there was actually quite an audience. Everyone from the Thieves Guild was in attendance, all dressed in ordinary clothing, most sitting either alone or in pairs. None would be well known to anyone in Riften. At least that’s what I thought. I noticed Maven and Ingun sitting together. Grelka was also in attendance, as was Madesi, who also ran a stall at the market.

Maramal was in position for the ceremony and it was a case of waiting for Muiri to arrive. I didn’t watch the door, just in case that would cause the nerves to build. I talked quietly with Brynjolf beside me, and only turned when the conversation turned to whispers, and I knew she had stepped inside. I turned to see her, and I nearly wept immediately. She was… radiant. I didn’t know what to expect, but I certainly hadn’t expected her to be dressed in white, and certainly nothing like the pure white dress she was wearing. On her head she wore a veil, just about covering her face. In her hands she carried a small bouquet of flowers. I could only watch, completely entranced, as she slowly walked towards me.

I felt an elbow into my side. “You are one lucky S.O.B, lad,” Brynjolf whispered.

Once by my side, I helped lift her veil, revealing her face. She’d put on some faint make up, but frankly, she didn’t need any. The smile on her face lit up the room. She didn’t look close to crying. She looked utterly, blissfully happy. Grabbing both her hands, I’m sure I smiled like a complete idiot too. “You look… beautiful.”

“You scrub up nicely yourself.”

Maramal cleared his throat to gain our attention. It was a good idea, as I was thoroughly distracted otherwise. Muiri just laughed to herself as we turned to face the priest.

“It was Mara that first gave birth to all of creation and pledged to watch over us as her children. It is from her love of us that we first learned to love one another. It is from this love that we learn that a life lived alone is no life at all. We gather here today, under Mara's loving gaze, to bear witness to the union of two souls in eternal companionship. May they journey forth together in this life and the next, in prosperity and poverty, and in joy and hardship.”

Muiri and I shared a glance, both of us smiling. Maramal continued. “Muiri, do you agree to be bound together with Ragnar, in love, now and forever?”

“I do. Now and forever.”

“And Ragnar, do you agree to be bound together with Muiri, in love, now and forever?”

“I do. Now and forever.”

“Under the authority of Mara, the Divine of Love, I declare this couple to be wed. I present to the two of you with these matching rings, blessed by Mara's divine grace. May they protect each of you in your new life together.”

After each of us placed the ring on the others finger, we kissed for the first time as husband and wife, keeping it relatively chaste, considering we were in a temple, and had quite the crowd, who broke into applause as the conclusion of our kiss. Retaining my hold of her hand, we walked out into Riften, where more people were waiting for us. Heading straight for the Bee and Barb, we had organised with Keerava for platters of food to be provided for invited guests, as well as at least three barrels of ale, and what seemed like endless bottles of wine. There was also a trio of bards to provide music, and as the alcohol flowed and food was consumed, everyone relaxed and enjoyed themselves. In the end, I think the only people who didn’t attend were people from Mistveil Keep, which is the local jarls residence.

To both our surprise, Haelga did wander in a couple of hours after festivities began. Muiri and I approached her, the first thing Haelga doing was hugging my wife. I stood back, not hearing the words they shared, but after breaking the hug, both were smiling, so I can only assume the words exchanged were polite. Haelga then hugged me, whispering her congratulations for us both in my ear. I held her for a little while, thanking her for attending.

“I guess I just had to see you,” she said once she took a step back, “And I told Muiri she looks simply beautiful in her wedding gown.”

“Certainly took my breath away as she walked towards me,” I said.

“So do you plan on taking your wife away to celebrate?”

“Aye. We’re going to head to Eastmarch.”

“Ah, the hot springs.”

“I’m certainly looking forward to it,” Muiri added, “I’ve found a real love and appreciation for the outdoors lately.”

We didn’t stay at the Bee and Barb all night. After a couple of hours, Muiri was soon whispering things in my ear. Very rude and suggestive things that was always bound to get the desired reaction. Standing on a table and asking for silence, everyone looked at me as I thanked them all for attending. There were one or two comments about Muiri and I leaving early, but frankly, neither of us was embarrassed, as what was stated was categorically true.

It was dark by the time we left the tavern, so the first thing I did upon entering Riftweald was light the fire and plenty of candles. “Do you want a drink?” I asked from the kitchen.

“I just want you, Ragnar,” Muiri called back.

Walking into our bedroom, she wasn’t lying, as her dress was already lying over one of the chairs, Muiri stood by the bed in only panties. I know I definitely smiled as she giggled at my reaction. Between the door and embracing her, I managed to undress myself completely. She was rather warm as our skin touched, and I don’t think I’d been harder in my life. “I’m going to last two minutes,” I warned with a chuckle.

“We have the rest of our lives, Ragnar.” Then she surprised me by dropping to her knees. “But maybe this will help you last longer after later?”

“Muiri, you don’t…”

“I want to,” she interrupted, looking up at me with the most loving and devoted smile I’d ever seen. “I am your wife. You are my husband. And as I said, I will do anything to make you happy. Plus, I enjoy doing this because I love the look on your face when I do.”

I wasn’t lying. From my cock disappearing into her mouth to my climax, I lasted about two to three minutes at most. I guess it was the fact I hadn’t been with her for a few days, plus the sense of occasion. Even better, Muiri let me finish me finish in her mouth. No, ‘let me’ isn’t the right phrase. She wanted me to. It was a rather nice climax, feeling it necessary to sit back on the bed once I was done. Muiri swallowed what I gave her before she sat next to me, immediately cuddling into my side. “Well, it’s safe to say I’ll definitely do that again,” she said softly.

“I’ll last longer next time.”

“No complaints from me, Ragnar. I love the fact I excite you so much.”

Of course, I was quite happy to return the favour, though I didn’t just start with her sex. No, I focused attention all over the rest of her body before lowering my mouth to her pussy, spending plenty of time fondling and using my mouth on her breasts, before finally eating her out. By the time I started, she was soaking wet, and her climax was like mine. Rather quick in arriving. Unlike myself, though, she didn’t need a certain amount of recovery time, and I quite happily kept going, eating her out to a second and then third. I would have happily kept going all night, but it eventually got too much for her. The look in her eyes as she looked to where I rested my head on her mound…

Kissing back up her body, her hands ran up my arms, resting on my back as I kissed her. I gave her a couple of minutes before pressing my cock at her entrance. She kissed me harder as I slid it inside her, needing to break the kiss so she could gasp and release a loud moan as I buried myself completely. Then I stopped, just enjoying the feeling of being inside my wife for the first time. I think we both smiled at each other like a pair of fools, completely, hopelessly in love with each other.

“Promise me it will always be like this,” she whispered.

“Oh, definitely.”

Wrapping her legs around me, she lifted herself up slightly, gasping again at the new angle I was inside her. “Okay, I’m definitely not going three days without this again.”

“Miss me and this feeling of fullness eh?”

She slightly blushed. “I may have played with myself that very first night thinking about you.”

“And the other two nights?”

She looked away, now rather embarrassed. “I had to take some time during the day for myself.”

Despite my cock being buried inside her, I couldn’t help chuckle at her confession. “So if we’re in the same city, we won’t be doing that again?” She shook her head emphatically. “Lesson learned?”

She lifted her head to kiss me. “I think you should make love to your wife, Ragnar.”

We made love all night, taking our time to simply enjoy each other. She was constantly wet and willing. I knew I’d never tire of the feeling of burying my cock in that tight Breton pussy. The look in her eyes as we continued to kiss as I slowly thrust into her was one of complete happiness. Her hands loved running up and down my arms and my back, raining compliments down on me for my physique. Switching positions so she could ride me, I returned the favour, enjoying the feeling of her soft skin under my palms, holding her small body at her hips with my hands as she slowly rode me. There was still little more exciting than watching my cock disappear inside her, then reappear, disappear again, and so on as she rode herself to another climax. She kept going, though, wanting me to finish inside her.

She got her wish a few minutes later, then she laid down on my chest, running a couple of fingers along her spine. She started to giggle, suggesting it tickled her, though she didn’t ask me to stop. “Ragnar, can I ask a question?”

“You can ask me anything.”

“When do you want to start a family?”

Chuckling, I replied, “Someone is eager.”

She lifted her head to meet my eyes. “I’d just like to know when I can stop taking my potions.”

“Why don’t we talk about it when we’re back from Eastmarch?”

Smiling, she said that was fine, though added she was looking forward to being a mother. Being as corny as always, I said we should just get in as much practice as possible before we decided on taking that next step. She eagerly agreed, sliding off me and lying back, dragging me on top of her, demanding again that I make love to her.

As I said, we made love all night. It had been a long day, and by the time I held her in my arms a couple of hours later, we were both exhausted. Happy, but exhausted. I think we both found sleep difficult despite our tiredness, her hands continuing to caress my arms as I held her tightly towards my body. The last thing we told each other before finally drifting off is that we loved each other. I would make sure they would always be the last words we shared upon parting or sleeping.

The next day, we packed up some supplies and headed out to the stables. Muiri didn’t have a horse, and she was quite happy to sit in front of me. Once I had everything tied to the rear, I helped Muiri up before I mounted up behind her, and we began our slow journey north. With one hand holding the reins, my other was wrapped around my wife. Most of the time it was simply around her stomach, though she would occasionally grab my hand and it slide it under her top so I could fondle her breasts, and feeling rather naughty, I may have fondled her lower down as well. And if not fondling her, she would lean back against me so we could kiss.

The Rift was probably the most beautiful region of Skyrim, Muiri stating our ride along was rather romantic, but she was looking forward to a few days at the hot springs. The ride took most of the day, as there was no rush to get there, though I ensured there was still plenty of light so we could find a secluded spot with a large spring, and though we had food supplies, I did want to hunt so I could bag us some fresh meat.

Once we’d set up camp, the first thing we did was strip and head for the hot spring. The water was hotter than either of us expected, and when turning around to look at me, Muiri lowered her eyes and smiled.

“Muiri, the day I don’t have this reaction to you, take me out the back and put an arrow or two through me.”

“Need me to take care of that?”

“Not right now. Just take it as a compliment and, rest assured, I will always find you this exciting.”

“Just knowing you’re that hard will excite me.” She did reach forward to wrap her small hand almost around my shaft. “So big…” she whispered, “You’ll definitely have this inside me later?”

“Oh, most definitely, wife of mine.”

We didn’t do anything other than sit back and relax. Considering it was a naturally heated pool of water, the temperature remained constant, even when the sky started to darken and the temperature otherwise dropped. I did build a campfire for us when we would finally tire of the hot spring, Muiri only half-joking that she didn’t want to do anything else except sit in the hot spring or make love with me. I thought that sounded like a bloody good idea.

After we cooked dinner over the campfire, I dragged a few rugs out into the open, where we made love under the stars, Muiri ensuring I was lying down as she rode me so we could both look at the night sky. I made sure the tent was otherwise near the fire, though the hot springs alone provided plenty of warmth, and after a couple of rounds of love making, we were left feeling rather hot and sweaty, her skin glistening in the light of the fire. She constantly wanted my touch, not always in a suggestive way, but my hands were on her body nearly all the time, and if not talking, we were either kissing or her head rested against my body. If that was how our relationship would always be, then I would be content for the rest of my life.

I think we ended up spending a week in Eastmarch. To be honest, after the first day, we simply stopped counting, feeling in absolutely no rush to return to Riften. If not relaxing in the hot spring, we would make love. If not making love, we’d explore. Sometimes we’d dress to do that, other time we’d walk around nude. We did find other revellers, and more than once found others enjoying the pleasures of the flesh too, just as once or twice they walked by as Muiri and I were doing the same. There would be comments, perhaps a little laughter, and we’d just announce that we were newlyweds and taking time to enjoy each other.

Muiri had me chuckling when suggesting we hike to the nearest peak overlooking the entire region. It took a couple of hours, but once we made it to the top, she undressed, helped undress me, then got down on all fours as we took in the view, where she asked me to make love to her as we gazed across what felt like half of Skyrim. She wasn’t quiet either, crying out my name, and we both laughed hearing it echo across what sounded like all of Eastmarch. Doing it do openly and in daylight was rather exciting, so much so, that we returned a couple of other days, once so she could ride my face so she could take in the view alone, then returning the favour by getting down on her knees as I looked out across Eastmarch.

Neither of us wanted to leave. If it wasn’t for the fact we needed coin and supplies to survive, I think we’d have happily camped there forever. But when we finally ran out of supplies, and surviving on the meat I’d managed to hunt or trap ran low, we agreed that heading back to Riften would be the best idea. Our last night in camp was just like the first, making love by starlight. There was no urgency to do anything more than that. As soon as we returned to Riften, she would move into Riftweald with me and we would begin our lives together.

We slept under the stars too, me on my back, Muiri with her head nestled in that little gap between shoulder and head, her hand stroking my chest. We were both exhausted from a couple of very good climaxes. As I had joked, plenty of practice for when we wanted to try for children.

“I love you,” she whispered, “Do you have any idea how much?”

“I can take a guess.”

“I know we don’t talk about it, but you killed for me, Ragnar. I know it was a job, but…”

“It wasn’t. I did it for you, Muiri. I’d do it again too.”

She lifted her head as I turned mine to meet her eyes. “You’re serious?”

“I know you don’t have other enemies, but I’d do anything for you, Muiri.” She kissed me hard and I knew she was crying as I pulled her close. “Anything, Muiri,” I added softly, “All you need do is ask. Anything you want or need, I’ll move the heavens themselves to do it.”

“The only thing I want now is children, Ragnar,” she whispered back, running a hand down my cheek, “But what I can tell you in return is that my body is always yours. I will never say no.”

“All I want is your love, Muiri,” I replied, cupping a cheek with my hand, “I’ve never felt anything like this before. I was lonely for a long time, and tried filling the void the wrong way. Then I found you, and I haven’t felt those feelings of loneliness since. All I want is your love. I will love you just as much in return. And the last thing I want is for us to grow old together.”

She kissed me again before settling down, cuddling me as tightly as possible. Despite being married, if either of us had even slightly doubted how the other felt, those doubts were well and truly quashed. I hadn’t lied. I would do anything for her.

All we could do is hope and work to have the future we both so desperately wanted together.

Chapter 18: Domestic Bliss

Moving Muiri into Riftweald took barely a couple of hours as she didn’t need to move any furniture, only her clothes and personal mementoes. I’d bought her a wardrobe and a chest of drawers to hang her clothes in and the drawers for her more personal garments, and made sure she had plenty of space for any other personal effects. Aranea moved out and into her Muiri’s old place, which Muiri would still use as her personal shop, and a storage place for all her ingredients and potions. Aranea would split her time between my place and there. 

I was quite used to looking after myself, and even Aranea was left annoyed as I’d quite happily cook for myself. But Muiri slipped straight into the role of what I would called ‘domestic goddess’. Coming home after whatever I was doing, whether a day at the Guild or out hunting for game and hides, I would wander in to find Muiri already at the pit, cooking up a storm. She would always smile and greet me with a hug and kiss that would already want me wanting more. She knew exactly what she was doing too. Sometimes we’d have to move the pot so we could head upstairs and not worry about the food burning.

Most nights, we’d sit together on the porch and share a bottle of wine, Muiri nearly always sitting on my lap, leaning back against me. We would generally be sitting in darkness, though we’d still hear cries of ‘hello’ and ‘good evening’ from those who were passing by. There would be occasional visits to the Bee and Barb, but we found enjoyment in the presence of the other and were quite content to stay at home most of the time.

One evening, Muiri mentioned that she would like to go hunting with me. While surprised, I offered to show her how to use a bow and arrow. There was much laughter when she insisted she could use magic, left wondering how talented she was. Showing me the next day, I think I fell in love with her a little bit more, if it were possible. I had no idea she knew such spells!

“Why didn’t you tell me!?” I asked after almost burning down the entire forest. Not literally, but the fire spell she used was utterly destructive.

She shrugged, almost embarrassed. “I’ve never really had to show off. I’m an alchemist, not a mage.”

“You could be both. You could be… Still, I think you should learn the bow. There’s something noble about hunting an animal and taking it down with a simple wooden bow and arrow.”

Smirking, she leaned into me and asked, “You consider magic cheating?”

I made a gesture with fingers. “Maybe just a little.”

She relented quickly. “Okay, I’ll learn the bow, just for you.”

Teaching her the bow was a lot of fun, as it meant a whole lot of body contact. And, of course, that distracted us both, and half the time we ended up doing other things other than practicing her bow. Mostly just a lot of making out and cuddling, which would leave us laughing at the fact we were both so incredibly useless at times. But it was just a small sign of how happy we were together. I couldn’t remember an argument, barely a disagreement. We just seemed to always be on the same wavelength.

In addition to never going to bed even slightly angry, never leaving a room without saying I love you, and near constant affection for each other, there was no decrease at all in our intimacy. In fact, I think it increased and kept at the same level once we had rings on our fingers. Returning from Eastmarch, we would make love more often than not upon waking up, I would sometimes return home for lunch, where we’d fit in a hot, steamy ‘quickie’, and at night, well, we’d generally wear each other out and go to sleep with smiles on our faces.

Despite all the above, despite our near constant lovemaking and affection, the one topic we didn’t talk much about after the wedding was children. I think part of the reason was that we wanted to enjoy each other for as long as possible before introducing babies and little people to our lives, as we knew our lives would change once that happened. Not for the worst, but the idea of making love anywhere around our house would go out the window.

I’m sure it was at least three months after the wedding and our trip away to Eastmarch before we even thought about the idea again. For the first time in a long time, I detected some nerves when she sat down next to me, on the lounge in front of the fire. I could sense something was on her mind, so placed the book I was reading down on the table next to me before turning towards her. She took my hands in hers, eyes gazing into mine, and I could see something was on her mind.

“Ragnar, I want to start a family.”

“Okay.”

To me, it was that simple. My response made her laugh for a moment before she turned serious. “Are you sure?”

“Absolutely,” I replied, making sure I sounded as adamant as possible.

“You realise…” I cut off whatever she was going to say by kissing her. I felt her smile as I kissed her, so I think she understood why I chose to cut her off. We kissed for a while before finally breaking apart. Taking a deep breath, she stroked my cheek and said, “Well, that answers whatever question I was going to ask.”

“The thought of having children with you, Muiri, makes me ridiculously happy.”

Not wanting to waste any time, she grabbed me by the hand and led me upstairs. She suggested we needed more practice but her body needed to be ready too. Apparently she would need to ween herself of the potions before her body would be capable. I didn’t really understand, but she managed to dumb it down enough that it was a case of, once she was capable, I’d find myself rather exhausted, in a good way.

While my domestic life was indeed bliss, that didn’t stop me from continuing my work with the Guild. I tried not to find myself away from Riften for too long. In fact, I think Brynjolf went out of his way to ensure I was never away for longer than a night or two at most. I did find myself in Whiterun for a meeting with our contact there, and running into Ysolda was amusing and awkward all at once. Though I remembered each night we’d spent together fondly, and that was without us never having been intimate, I did have to politely remove her from my lap and explain I was now married. Though surprised, she was happy to hear the news.

Guild jobs were handled by others most of the time. Brynjolf kept the day to day operations going for me. Karliah looked after Nightingale business, particular further afield, outside of Skyrim, increasing our presence across Tamriel. We’d made connections with other Guilds throughout the continent, though some saw as competition rather than allies. While there were no threats stated, one or two Guilds told us to back off as the countries they were operating was there’s and they would allow no interference. So as the Guild ran smoothly, I could concentrate on tracking down more Daedric artefacts, though all Karliah and I did was make a list of where we heard rumours of shrines and would go from there.

We eventually had a list of possibilities. There was a shrine to Boethiah east of Windhelm. There was a shrine to Mehrunes Dagon far to the east of Morthal, high up in the mountains. Everyone warned me about even contemplating anything to do with Dagon, considering he was responsible for the Oblivion Crisis. But anything else was simply rumour, such as a shrine to Clavicus Vile in the mountains west of Riften, east of Falkreath, and a shrine to Vaermina not far from Dawnstar. But those were simply rumours, and would require investigation.

Visiting Karliah at her Hall, we were poring over a few books and scrolls, when she admitted her concerns. “Some of these we shouldn’t really be messing with, Ragnar.”

“Okay, you’ve warned me about anything to do with Mehrunes Dagon, and I’m willing to take your advice. But out of the list of Daedric princes, who else should we avoid?”

“Molag Bol.”

“Recognise the name. But I know little about him.”

“Some Daedra are not considered wholly evil, as you know. Molag Bol is evil personified. He isn’t known as the ‘King of Rape’, the ‘Harvester of Souls’, the ‘Lord of Brutality’, or the ‘Prince of Rage’ for no reason. He is responsible for vampirisim. My people detest him. He’s not someone you want to do anything for, Ragnar.”

“So I should avoid anything to do with him?”

“I would consider it a personal favour if you could, Ragnar.”

“Okay, Dagon and Molag are out. Anyone else?”

Karliah shrugged. “To be honest, it would probably depend on what they ask of you. I know we’ve done some dark shit at times, but there’s doing dark shit and that there’s dark shit.”

Chuckling, I said, “I know what you mean.”

“I take it you won’t want to go too far from Riften?”

She didn’t hide the friendly insinuation in her tone. She was well aware that I was happy. “I’m willing to put most of it on the back burner, Karliah. I’m quite happy staying near Riften.”

“And when will you be ready to head back out onto the road?”

“Honestly, maybe never.”

Karliah laughed herself. “So marriage is working for you?”

"Definitely.”

Grabbing my hand, she simply said, “I’m happy for you, Ragnar.”

I rarely spent more than one night away from Riften, and whenever I was away, Muiri would be all over me upon returning. I’d feel just the same, of course, as I hated sleeping alone, missing her presence beside me, whether I was sleeping in a tent or in an inn. She was slowly but surely weening herself off her potions with each week that passed, stating she couldn’t just stop taking them as the side-effects might leave her rather unwell.

After spending two nights away in Windhelm after Torsten Cruel-Sea asked for a meeting, concerned about possible growing Argonian influence regarding certain aspects of their trade, I returned home to plenty of love and affection from Muiri as always. After enjoying another home-cooked meal, and I always complimented her for her cooking, as it was simply fantastic, she told me I would be in for a surprise that night.

“Oh, what sort?”

She blushed, so I knew it was something naughty. Rising to her feet, she grabbed my hand and led me upstairs. Gesturing to the night stand, I noticed a potion bottle sitting there. It wasn’t the potion bottle she would drink the next morning. It was another sort of bottle I remembered rather well. Turning towards her, I could only ask, “Are you sure?”

“Definitely. My body is nearly ready, Ragnar, so I wanted to give you this before we started trying for a baby.”

I pulled her towards me, lifting her chin with a finger. “I might hurt you.”

Smiling, she said, “No, you won’t. You will make sure it’s nothing but a pleasure for me, Ragnar. I know you well enough by now. Trust me, I want this. I want you to do it. Maybe just this once, but if I like it, maybe we can do it again in the future. But I’ve been thinking about it. I remembered feeling you tease me there when we were up on that hill in Eastmarch. There was a small part of me that wanted you to just stick it in and take it, but I knew you’d never do that to me.”

“Are you ready?”

“I’ve prepared before you got home.” She grabbed my hand and slid it under her skirt. I couldn’t help smile as my fingers came back wet. She wasn’t wearing panties. She often didn’t around the house, quite happy for me to walk up behind her, lift her skirt, and simply tease her half the time. “I’ve been thinking about it all day. No, that’s a lie. I’ve been thinking about it for quite a while now, but I thought this would make a nice surprise on your return home.”

“Best. Wife. Ever.”

Helping each other undress, she wasn’t surprised to see my erection spring free when removing my underwear. As I’d told her, the day I didn’t have one around her was the day I should just be put down. She happily dropped to her knees, though I said I didn’t want to finish, so we ended up on the bed so I could return the favour. We didn’t try and bring each other to climax. She’d more than proven that she simply loved to blow me, as much as I was willing to go down on her. Sometimes we’d tease each other, bringing each other to the brink before stopping. Doing that throughout the day drove us wild by the time we went to bed in the evening. It was a lot of fun most of the time, simply increasing our desire for each other.

Spinning around so she could kiss me for a moment, I slid her off my body as she got on all fours, looking sideways at me with a smile. “How tiny do I look when you’re behind me, Ragnar?”

“I sometimes wonder where my cock goes when inside you.”

She laughed loudly at my reply. “Well, it always feels good.”

Grabbing the potion bottle, I sat on my knees behind her, just gazing down her body. Her arse was perfect, running hand over both her cheeks, giving each a gentle squeeze. Running my hands down her back, enjoying the softness of her skin, I pulled her up against me so I could kiss her, running my lips down to her neck, giving her a gentle bite, my hands fondling her breasts at the same time. She could feel my erection press into her back. “You’re teasing me,” she breathed.

“I know. I want you as turned on as possible before I do this.”

“You’re worried?” I nodded and that earned nothing but the heart-warming smile I was used to. “I’m not worried at all, husband. I love you, and I trust you.” Resting again on her hands and knees, she wiggled her butt. “Now, enough teasing, Ragnar.”

Uncorking the bottle, I poured a little oil down her back towards her arse. She giggled, stating it was a little cold, though complimented me on my warm hands once I started to gently rub the oil into her body. I was no expert at giving a massage, but I judged how well I was doing by her body language, though I was soon spending plenty of time down in her lower part of her body, and when I lowered my mouth to her arse, she gasped when she felt my tongue for the first time.

“Oh my,” she whispered, “I wasn’t expecting…”

“Do you like it?”

“Oh yes, keep going.”

Using my mouth on her arse, I gently fondled her pussy at the same time, though she did say she didn’t want too much focus on that. But she certainly loved what I did with my tongue, as much as I loved teasing her. But there was only so much teasing both of us could take, and when I prodded a finger at her rear, she looked back with a smile, waiting until she nodded.

She clenched as I inserted a finger, so I used my other hand to run up and down her back. She loved it when I did that, and she relaxed, allowing me to gently slide my finger in and out of her. I let her just get used to that feeling, again judging her body language and her reactions before sliding in a second. That caused her to gasp and she moaned rather loudly a little later. “Do you like that?” I asked for my own reassurance.

“Yes,” she hissed quietly.

“My cock will feel… um…”

“Better?”

“Maybe.”

She definitely enjoyed two fingers, lowering her head down to lift her arse a little more. I remained gentle, sliding them in and out, noticing she had positioned herself so she could watch me. I pulled my fingers out for a moment and held up three. She laughed again but nodded her head. I kept watching her face as I slid the three in. Her eyes closed as a look of bliss otherwise crossed her face. “Ragnar,” she breathed.

“Another couple of minutes then I think you’ll be ready.”

“I’m ready for you now, but you know what you’re doing.”

I’m glad she had that much confidence in me! But I’ll also admit, I was now ready to make love to her in a different way. Removing my fingers, I quickly lubed myself up and pressed the head of my cock to her arse. With a hand on her hips to hold her in place, I gently pressed forward. She reacted by moving away, immediately apologised, and moved back towards me. I pressed forward again, and the head of my cock disappeared inside her. She made a loud gasp, so I stopped straight away, letting her get used to it.

“Holy… You feel enormous…”

“I did tell you!”

“No, it’s fine.”

I waited a minute before sliding a little more in. With both hands now on her hips, I continued to judge her reactions as she adapted to my size in a completely new orifice. The look on her face suggested she was enjoying it, though it was also hurting a little. I stopped and asked, “Are you okay?”

Opening her eyes, the smile was nothing but loving. “Oh, definitely. I’m sure I’ll get used to it eventually.”

I didn’t insert my entire length, and slowly, very slowly, started to thrust into her. She got back on her hands and knees, so I moved one hand from her hip to her shoulder. She kissed my hand and looked back again, asking for my entire length. “I know you’re holding back, Ragnar.”

“I’m just being careful, Muiri.”

She sat up and back against my chest, wrapping an arm around me and dragging me down to kiss her. Putting her lips to my ear, she whispered, “I trust you, Ragnar. And I want you to do this. I want you to fuck me. Fuck your wife in her arse. Can you do that for me, please?”

“Okay. But if it gets too much…”

“Then I’ll ask you to stop, and I know you’ll do so immediately.”

She returned to all fours, wiggling her arse as a suggestion for me to do as she asked. Now placing both hands on her shoulders, as he really was that small compared to me, I buried my cock entirely. She groaned loudly when I did that. I didn’t fuck her too hard, but I did as she asked. My wife got her arse fucked… gently. Well, gently-ish.

I didn’t last long. Her arse was far too tight, and the fact Muiri had so willingly given it to me was just too much for me. But I enjoyed it while it lasted, Muiri having to lie her head down so I followed her, changing the angle which caused her to cry out, though she quickly told me to keep going. Lowering my head down towards her ear, I quietly said, “Do you like your husband’s cock in your arse?”

Her eyes met mine as she retorted, “Is he going to cum soon?”

I couldn’t help chuckle. “Very soon.”

“Good. You can cum, then we can relax, then I’m going on top next time.”

Just the thought of Muiri riding me, my cock buried in her arse, was enough to send me to the brink. Muiri’s legs gave out, her body now flat against the bed. She told me to keep going, my cock seeming to go ever deeper inside her. I was now fucking her harder, but she told me to keep going and cum for her. My lips still near her ear, I told her I loved her.

Then I came.

I know I passed out from the sheer bliss of it. Or, at least, I’m pretty sure I did. When I came to, I quickly rolled off her and grabbed a towel that Muiri had left on the bedside table. Muiri remained how she was lying, looking at me as I turned onto my side, running my hand up and down her back. “I love you too,” she whispered.

“Are you okay?”

“Ragnar, I loved it. Yes, it hurt a little, but it was always going to. But I wanted to do it, for me and for you.”

“Thank you.”

She smiled, leaning over to kiss me. “No thanks are necessary. We can simply add this to things we can do together from time to time. Though perhaps not too often. Can’t have you in my arse becoming a habit.”

I needed a little recovery time. No, that’s a lie. I needed longer than usual, though Muiri knew what to do to get me hard again, sliding up onto my body so we could make out, my hands immediately running up and down her back, the oil I’d used now mixed with her sweat. Rubbing herself against my cock, it didn’t take all that long to get the desired reaction, feeling her smile as my cock started to harden.

Grabbing the bottle, she lubed my cock up again before adding a little more to herself. I felt her position my cock at her rear entrance again as she leaned down to kiss me. Feeling myself again enter her, she gasped into my mouth as I groaned into hers, causing both of us to laugh. She wasted little time taking my entire length, and once she was happy, I pulled her down against me, continuing to kiss her, gently thrusting up into her.

“I thought I would be in control,” she said, gently admonishing me.

“Well… Okay then,” I replied, letting her go. She sat up, watching her face as she felt my entire length again, resting her hands on my chest as she slowly started to ride me.

Haelga had been my Nord goddess. Muiri was my Breton goddess. No, she was just my goddess, the most beautiful woman I’d ever been intimate with. I sometimes had to pinch myself at how lucky I was. By rights, a woman like her should never have been interested in someone like myself. Certainly shouldn’t be my wife. And definitely not have allowed her husband to slide his above average sized cock into her rather tiny arse.

She didn’t ride me too hard or fast. She did enough just to enjoy the sensations. Unsure if she would climax from it, she did grab my hand, sucking my thumb for a moment, before resting it near her pussy. “Play with me,” she requested quietly, “Maybe my clit. Just not too much.”

Doing that caused the desired reaction, as she started to ride me a lot faster than I expected. Add to that, she was also make quite a lot of noise, her cries of elation, my name and her love for me quite erotic, and a turn on for me in return. She hadn’t been riding me all that long, with my thumb now teasing her, I think it was getting a little much.

“I’m going to cum,” she warned.

“Can you keep going?”

She nodded. “Uh-huh. You’re cumming in me again before we’re done.”

Ever told you how much I love my wife?

When she came, she came hard. The sort of orgasm that caused her entire body to shake and writhe on top of me before she simply collapsed. The sort of orgasm that made her smile, even giggle in her happiness. The sort of orgasm that also caused a few tears. She didn’t do that often, but there was the occasional time when we had such a connection, shit, she even got to me at times.

She simply had to stop, lying down on top of me again, feeling her take a number of deep breaths as I gently held her. I didn’t move my hands otherwise as she was simply too sensitive for anything else, though I was still buried in her arse. “My god, that was a good one,” she whispered.

“Well, can’t have sex without my wife having at least one good orgasm.”

"I usually have more than you, Ragnar.”

“That’s because I’m a very loving husband.”

“Want another one?”

“To be honest, no. I’ve enjoyed myself, but I’d rather clean up, lie here with you, then make love tomorrow morning.”

She agreed, kissed me again, before we spent a little time cleaning up then cuddled under the blankets. She admitted to feeling slightly tender after the nights’ exertions, though insisted that she would want to do it again in the future. I said I would always be willing to do it as long as she wanted to, though joked that it wasn’t the correct way to make babies. That made her crack up in laughter. She then turned around to face me and made a promise. “We will make love every night, even after I’ve had children, Ragnar.”

“That’s quite the promise.”

“You really think I’ll want to stop what we share?”

“No, but having a child or children will change things.”

“Perhaps, but that is my intention, Ragnar.”

“I appreciate the thought but I won’t hold you to it. I’ll be happy as long as you’re here with me.”

“And you are just too sweet for your own good sometimes.”

“That’s why you married me.”

“One of the many reasons.”

We slept well, and upon waking the next morning, we made love again, this time my cock finding itself in its much more usual home. With her legs wrapped around me, arms around the back of my neck, she said that she would only need one more bottle that morning, then we could begin trying for a child.

It was something for both of us to look forward to.

---

I’m not sure if it’s possible for a man and woman, or a husband and wife, to have too much sex. But by the Eight, after the day Muiri stopped taking her morning potion, she was all over me. We had a lot of sex as it was. Every evening, as she’d promised. At least one every second morning. And sometimes just when we were in the mood during the day. Considering we lived alone, and Aranea visited infrequently, quite content running the shop for Muiri when she wasn’t there, Muiri and I could make love wherever and whenever we wanted. And, at times, she wanted it all the time, almost desperate to fall pregnant.

I had no reason to complain, but a man can only take so much at times, and just occasionally, it felt like I was starting to shoot blanks, and I would start to get a little sore, left wondering how she wasn’t sore either. “Oh, I am, Ragnar,” she said when I made that point, “But it’s going to be worth it.”

Three months after she stopped taking potions, Muiri started to feel sick. Me not knowing anything about pregnancy nor its symptoms, I naturally worried about her. She assured me that she was fine, but hearing her being sick each morning wasn’t a nice experience. I thought it was to do with her stopping her potions, and her bodies reaction to it. Little did I know.

Four months after she stopped taking potions, she said she would go to the temple and see one of the healers. Now I well and truly fretted, asking what was wrong with her. She smiled at my concern, kissed my cheek, and assured me everything was fine, she just wanted to get a check-up.

“Want me to join you?”

“No, Ragnar. You stay here. I’ll be back soon.” She read my face and the obvious concern. So she kissed me again, the sort that had me holding her against my body and possibly rising to the occasion. “I’m fine, Ragnar. Trust me,” she said softly, “Just want a check-up. My health is important.”

“Okay… You’ll tell me if there is anything wrong when you get back?”

“I will.”

I couldn’t sit still while she was gone, wearing a groove into the ground as I circled the house again and again. She was gone for a while, maybe an hour or so, but I was relieved when she returned, a smile still on her face, so I figured she’d been given a full bill of health. After placing her things on the table, she immediately came to me, grabbed my hand, and led me to the lounge by the fire. Sitting me down, she turned towards me, taking both my hands in hers.

“Ragnar, I have something to tell you.” She said it so seriously, I immediately thought the worse. It obviously showed on my face, so she leaned up to kiss me, I guess to assure me everything was fine. “Ragnar, I’m with child.”

“What?” That wasn’t what I wanted to say. A natural reaction to such surprising news. “I mean, you’re sure?”

“What do you know about pregnancy, Ragnar?”

“Pretty much nothing.”

My honesty gave her a little chuckle. “Remember how I was sick every morning a few weeks ago?” I nodded, so she continued. “That’s a symptom. I thought I was pregnant then, but I wanted to be sure. So I waited a few weeks before there were further signs. The healer has confirmed it, Ragnar. Right now, there is life growing inside me.” She grabbed my hand and slid it under her top, onto her stomach. “You won’t feel it yet, but somewhere around there, a little boy or girl will form, and in around six months’ time, we’ll have a son or daughter.”

I wept. I can easily admit that I held my wife in my arms and wept at the news. So did she. Seeing me weep set her off big time, both of us starting to laugh at our reactions before we shared one of the most loving kisses I could remember. I guess news such as she just shared would always heighten the feelings.

After drying my cheeks, I was immediately full of questions. The most important one I thought of was, “What do I need to do to help?”

“At the moment, just continue to do what you do. But I will start getting bigger, and things will get more difficult for me. But considering how kind and considerate you already are, I don’t think I’ll have to ask you to do a thing. You’ll do them because, when it comes to me, you are always thinking, more than you realise.”

“Can we keep having sex?”

Another chuckle before she replied in a tone that I liked, “Oh, most definitely. Would it bother you fucking a pregnant woman?”

“Nope. Not if it’s you.”

“Good. Because my stomach will obviously get bigger as the baby grows. But my boobs will get bigger too.” I smiled without knowing as she gave me a playful shove. “I thought you loved my boobs now?” She feigned hurt in her tone.

“I do. But I wouldn’t mind seeing how big they get.”

She smiled before removing one of her hands, leading me towards the stairs, suggesting we should celebrate the news in the usual way. It’s not like she could get pregnant again anyway. Lying upstairs a little later, both of us rather exhausted after our exertions, I asked if it would be okay to share the news. Muiri said it should be okay to tell others now, as according to the healer, the pregnancy had ‘taken’. I didn’t quite understand what that meant. Muiri just told me that sometimes pregnancies can fail to ‘take’.

The first thing we needed was space for a child. So for the first time since Muiri moved in, I opened the doors to the Dibellan room. Everything inside was untouched, but I didn’t want to throw anything away. I’d spent good money on it and I knew someone who might want at least some of the things. Letting Muiri know my plan, I headed to the Bunkhouse for the first time in what felt like months. Walking in the door, Haelga was the counter. I hadn’t seen her in quite a while, and the first thing she did was walk around and hug me tightly.

“Gods, I’ve missed you, Ragnar.”

“Me too, Haelga, me too. Are you well?”

“I could complain about one certain thing, but that would just put a downer on your visit. Can we just hug for a little while? Would that be wrong?”

“Not at all.”

Resting her head on my chest, I stroked her hair as I felt her hands gently stroke my back. I’d missed her in my life despite my devotion to Muiri, but I hadn’t seen her that often, simply due to temptation. I wasn’t a weak man, but Haelga would always be a temptation to me, and I knew I’d break if I saw her too often. I still loved her, but it wasn’t the fact I still had those feelings for her. It was the fact that a little part of me still wanted to do all the nasty, naughty things we’d once done together.

“You wouldn’t visit without a reason, Ragnar, and I know it’s not because you want to fuck me.” She lifted her head to look at me. “Though part of me still wishes you would.”

I chuckled at her honesty. The longing in her voice did sadden me though. “Have you not…”

“No.” I winced at her blunt tone. “Okay, a slight lie. I tried with one man, but he wasn’t you, Ragnar. I’m half tempted to give up on men and become a lesbian.”

“Seriously?”

“No, because I’d still desire someone’s cock.” She let me go and stepped back. “I should stop there, otherwise I’ll get too worked up or upset. So, what are you here for?”

“Well, actually… um…”

Now it was her turn to laugh. “You can tell me, Ragnar. I’m not going to…”

“Muiri is pregnant.”

She hugged me again, but I knew she was crying within a few seconds. I didn’t feel guilty, but I should have known the news would be hard for her to take. When we had been close, we had discussed marriage and children, and Haelga had always said she didn’t want to marry again, nor did she desire to have children. That didn’t mean she would take the news I wanted to share any easier. “Sorry. I’m happy for you, the both of you, but…”

“Don’t apologise, Haelga. I understand. But now I’m going to feel like a right arse for what I’m about to ask.”

“About what?”

“Well, we’re going to turn the Dibella room into a nursery, and I need to move some of the things in there. Everything, to be honest.”

She started to laugh. “Sure, I’ll take them off your hands. I might even find a use for some of the things. Do you still have all the toys?”

“I do. Untouched since our last time.”

“Well, I can put those to good use at least. As for everything else, I’ll take them off your hands at least.”

“Thanks, Haelga.” She eventually released me and took a step back, using a sleeve to dry her cheeks. “Would you like to come around for dinner one night? I know it might…”

“I’d love to, Ragnar. Let me know when. And give Muiri my congratulations for me too.”

“I will. When can I start bringing things across?”

“Any time is fine. If you want to bring the toys today, I won’t complain. I’ll fuck myself thinking about you.” I just smiled, as I knew she would. Then I wondered, and my face reflected my thoughts, as she added, “Every time, Ragnar. Every single damned time.”

“I feel I should apologise or something.”

“You should for ruining the chances of finding a man who comes anywhere close to the standards you set. But one of my dildo’s is a perfect reminder of you, so while I can complain, at least I can still enjoy rather nice orgasms with something similar.”

One thing Haelga would always be with me was honest. And I’ll admit it was a turn on to know she still thought of me like that. I moved everything from the Dibella room to her place over the next couple of days. She asked for some of the restraints to be attached to her bed, another to the wall. I happily did as she asked, before I brought across all the toys. She did offer to put on a show for me with one of the larger dildos. Part of me wanted to say yes, but it wasn’t a good idea. Watching wouldn’t be cheating, or so I thought, but I couldn’t just watch her. I’d want to join in. So I invited her to dinner for that night, and she readily accepted.

It wasn’t as awkward as I thought it would be. I had been with Haelga before meeting Muiri, so she was aware of our history. Muiri was also more than aware of the sort of relationship I’d shared with Haelga. So it should come as little surprise that Muiri showed some interest in that, and this was without having consumed any wine, considering she had stopped drinking alcohol since finding out she was pregnant.

So Muiri asked, and Haelga had no problem with being absolutely honest about what we’d got up to. I sat back, rather amused by it, and if I judged my wife correctly, she slowly but surely got turned on by it all.

“What about anal?” Muiri asked of her.

“Have you done it with him?”

“Just the once.”

“And what did you think? How was it?”

“He… He felt so big. His cock is big as it is, but in my arse, it was like something else entirely. But he was so gentle too, even when I asked him to fuck me.”

I noticed Haelga smile. “I didn’t ask for gentle when he fucked me there.”

“No?”

“Oh no, Muiri. I wanted it hard. I wanted it rough. Pound me until I scream. Pull my hair. Slap my arse. Call me his whore. Chain me to the wall and just ruin me. I wanted him to hurt me.”

Muiri looked at me. I just shrugged my shoulders. “She loved it, Muiri.”

“I did. I remember all those times fondly. Fucking my mouth so I’d choke on his cock. Blasting his cum on my face or down my throat. And don’t get me wrong, I loved him in my pussy but, by the Eight, could this man fuck my arse well. I loved walking home, feeling so tender, I couldn’t sit down all day. Or we’d fuck in the morning so he’d cum in me, and I’d feel it leaking out all day.”

Muiri looked at me. “Ragnar, I have to admit, I’m almost tempted to watch you do it. Just to see…”

I shook my head. “Before I put that ring on your finger or a baby inside you, I would have agreed.”

“Are you sure?”

“I am.”

“Don’t worry, Muiri. I have a couple of toys that are adequate replacements for the real thing. I do miss his strikes with the cane though.”

We ended up sitting by the fire, Muiri and Haelga sitting together. My wife was by now very turned on, though she was managed to control herself. Haelga’s cheeks were flushed, I think from the wine and also the conversation, and Muiri kept dropping hints about me fucking Haelga. I kept saying no. I wasn’t going down that road again.

Haelga eventually had to go home, freely admitting she was horny and needed to take care of herself. She hugged me tightly before leaving, whispering in my ear that she would be thinking about me. I didn’t really know what to say to that, so simply kissed her cheek and wished her goodnight. Once Muiri and I were alone, she practically dragged me upstairs, where I was stripped naked by an incredibly turned on pregnant woman, pushed onto the bed, where my wife proceeded to mount me and ride herself to an orgasm so quickly, I was left rather astounded by it.

Life was indeed bliss. I had a loving wife, who I absolutely adored. She was carrying my child, who I was so ever eager to meet. We feel a little more in love with each passing day. To say we were happy would be an understatement, but it’s the easiest word to describe us.

Little did I realise my dream was about to come crashing down.

Chapter 19: Dreams & Nightmares

Muiri was seven months pregnant when… 

If I hadn’t shared those drinks with Sam, maybe it wouldn’t have all gone wrong. It’s my fault. Everything that happened is my fault. But I guess I have to start at the beginning. That fateful night in the Bee and Barb… 

Muiri was now quite large carrying our child, and while she still endeavoured to do everything she’d always done, it was now far more tiring, and she took more naps than usual. I certainly helped out where I could to ease the strain. She would generally head to bed earlier than usual the longer the pregnancy went on, but she kept her word about our love making. Some positions were clearly out of the question the further on her pregnancy, but we found her riding me worked well for both of us. She would then want me to hold her until she fell asleep, though was happy for me to leave and perhaps head out if I wanted to. 

That fateful night, I wandered into the Bee and Barb with the intention of just having a tankard, perhaps catching up on some local gossip, while I received plenty of questions about how Muiri was and how long until she would give birth. Sitting at my usual table, I was content to sit back against the wall and just sip my tankard when I was approached by a stranger. In his hand was a strange looking staff. Offering his hand, he introduced himself as Sam, and I returned the favour. 

Then he offered a challenge, a drinking contest for the staff he held. “I’m not a mage,” I said. 

“Oh, this staff is special, Ragnar. Trust me, you’ll want this staff.” 

“What does it do?” 

“Hmmm. How can I put this simply? If you use the staff, you’ll always have a friend at your beck and call.” 

“What are we drinking?” 

“Just ale. You up for it?” 

“Sure. I can handle my ale.” 

No, I could not handle my ale last night. I remember enjoying three before everything turned black. I’m fairly sure my drink was spiked by something because I can usually drink double that amount and still return home, get hard and enjoy some time with my wife. 

I woke up later, I have no idea how much later, my head pounding so badly, I wanted the sweet release of death. Instead, after groaning to myself, I found myself under verbal attack. “Wake up! That's right, it's time to wake up, you drunken blasphemer!” 

Managing to drag my body into a sitting position, I was surprised to see I was now dressed in my scaled armour. My sword and shield were on the ground next to me. Looking around, nothing looked particularly familiar, though I had a bad feeling I was in Markarth. And that left me wondering just what in oblivion I’d done. 

“Blasphemer?” I had to ask. 

“I see. So you don't remember fondling the statuary, then?” 

Looking around, I recognised quite a few things, particular the aforementioned statue. I was in a Temple of Dibella. The only one I knew of was in Markarth, so that was clarification of where I was. So the next question to myself was ‘How the hell did I end up here?’ 

“I don’t remember that,” I muttered. 

“I'm guessing you also don't remember coming in here and blathering incoherently about marriage or a goat. Which means you don't remember losing your temper and throwing trash all over the temple.” 

Marriage? Was I talking about Muiri or… The same question of what had I done floating through my mind. “I'm sorry, I don't even remember how I got here.” 

It must have been something in my tone, as she surprisingly relented. There was no smile, but her tone softened. “Well, you were deep in your cups when you got here. You were ranting but most of it was slurred. You said something about Rorikstead.” 

Managing to stand up, taking a few moments to stop swaying and prevent myself being sick, I helped the priestess clean up the mess I’d made, offered her a few coins, admitting that I did worship Dibella myself. She was surprised at that, as males generally worshipped one of the other Divines, though I wasn’t going to go into great graphic detail about why I did. 

During my clean-up, I’d found a note signed by Sam, stating that to fix the staff I was promised, I needed a list of things, all of which I’d collected inside the temple. I had a small pack I could throw those things, and again thanking the priestess for her understanding, I headed out into Markarth. No-one recognised me as I walked towards the city gates and I was left wondering how I’d get to Rorikstead. 

I thanked the Eight when walking towards the stables and noticed my horse was there, leaving me even further confused, as all my camping supplies were tied to its rear as usual. I asked the stable-hand, “Do you remember seeing me last night?” 

He laughed. “Oh yes, you and your friend were very drunk.” 

“Friend? Do you mean Sam?” 

He shrugged. “Never got his name. But he wandered off as you walked into the city.” 

Shit, that’s what I didn’t want to hear. I didn’t care about the staff, I just wanted to know what else I’d done, and only he could answer my questions. I had a queasy feeling I’d done some rather stupid things, and wanted answers. The other part of me figured I should just head back to Riften and forget about it. Though I also worried about Sam. If he was as drunk as I apparently had been, then who knows what condition he was in. 

Mounting my horse, I still felt rather woozy, though I found some dried meat in my supplies, so chewed on that as I rode along. The ride to Rorikstead took most of the day, though it was still light when tying up my horse outside the inn. Walking inside, I’d barely approached the bar when I felt a hand on my shoulder. 

“You bastard!” the voice stated angrily, the hand turning me around. “You've got a lot of nerve showing yourself in this town again. What do you have to say for yourself?” 

It came as no real surprise I’d pissed someone off, though I didn’t recognise the man at all. “Look, I don’t even remember being here. What in oblivion are you talking about?” 

The fact I was clueless just seemed to rile him even more. “Is that so? Does the name Gleda ring a bell? The star beauty of my farm? Kidnapped by a drunk lout and sold to a giant? So you'd better remember her right fast, before I call the guards and have you hauled away.” 

“Well, I don’t really want that…” 

“You're damned right you don’t. I'll never breed another prize-winning goat like Gleda! And don't you think of coming back to Rorikstead until you get her back from that Giant.” 

“Well, I’m not doing that. But, you see, I need to find my friend and his staff to get your prized goat back. No staff, no goat.” 

He remained silent for at least a couple of minutes, no doubt thinking about what to do with me. Finally, he sighed before replying. “I suppose that makes sense. You didn't mention a Sam and nothing you said about the staff made sense. You left a note but it was mostly gibberish, the only bit I could make out was ‘after repaying Ysolda in Whiterun.’” 

Crap, what else had I done? 

Thanking the man for his understanding, I headed outside and mounted my horse. It was getting dark, and it was a few hours to Whiterun, but I was closing in on an answer to everything I’d done, all apparently in one night. A fine mist was descending by the time I made it to Whiterun stables, glad I’d packed a coat to wrap around myself. It had been a while since I’d been out on the road, and I was already feeling saddle sore once I’d dismounted. The city was deserted at this time of night, but Saadia was still awake when walking into the Bannered Mare, and I paid the few coin required for a room. 

I felt much better the next morning, particularly after gorging myself on the breakfast offered. Wandering outside, I took a deep breath of fresh air. My mind was working once again, and the aches and pains of the previous day had most disappeared. Better yet, Ysolda was busy at work in the market, so I headed straight for her, though I was taken aback when her face fell upon seeing me.

“So, you're finally back. Look, I've been patient, but you still owe me.” 

“Ysolda, can I be honest? I have no idea what I owe you for.” 

“It's not even about the money, really. I wouldn't have given you the wedding ring on credit if you weren't so obviously in love. But if there isn't going to be a wedding, the least you can do is give the ring back. That was one of my best pieces.” 

“Wedding? Ysolda, I’m already married.” 

“From what you were saying, Muiri didn’t even exist. Don’t you remember who it was for?” 

“Well, Muiri already has a ring.” I groaned, wondering who in oblivion I could have been talking about. “Okay, let’s just forget about who it was for. This wedding ring, do you know what I did with it?” 

“You went right out to give it to your new fiancé! Don't you even remember where you left her? And after you told me that sweet story of how you met in Witchmist Grove! I can see why she left you.”

“Witchmist Grove? Where in Skyrim is that?” 

“Eastmarch, I believe.” 

“Eastmarch!? By Ysmir, how long was I on this bender for?” I grabbed one of her hands. “Please, Ysolda. Obviously my memory of last night, or however long all this has gone on, is rather fuzzy. I’m having trouble remembering a lot of what happened. Can you do me a favour and tell me everything you know? Please?” 

She relented easily, a smile forming. “It’s a good thing I like you, Ragnar. If I didn’t…” 

“I’ll get the ring back for you, I just want to know everything that happened.” 

“Okay, apart from your fiancé in Witchmist Grove, you said the ceremony was going to be at Morvunskar.” 

After consulting a couple of maps up at the inn, I figured I could get to Witchmist Grove within a day, and then head north to Morvunskar. Thanking Ysolda for the information, and assuring her I’d return with the ring, I headed out straight away. The map hadn’t given a precise location of the grove, but it was within the area of the hot springs. Arriving around mid-afternoon, I approached a couple of bathers and asked about the grove. They at least knew of it, and managed to point me in the right direction. 

Finding the cabin wasn’t too difficult. It was what was greeting me outside the cabin that caused my stomach to lurch, and I near enough threw up all the food I’d consumed that day. My blushing bride was what I knew to be a Hagraven. I’d never seen one before but I’d been told about them before. My hand was immediately at the hilt of my sword as I cautiously approached. What made me feel even worse is that she recognised me. 

“Darling! I've been waiting for you to return, to consummate our love!” 

“That’s not happening, whatever your name is. Give me the ring back and we can just forget all about this.” 

“What? You want it for that hussy Esmerelda, with the dark feathers, don't you? I won't let her have you!” 

No idea who Esmerelda was. Didn’t care. But I knew Hagravens had magic and could be utterly vicious when provoked, so before she could even think about attacking me, I struck first. It was a lucky strike, as it spun her around and she hit the ground face first, and she didn’t rise after I put my sword through her back. I wasted little time searching her body to find the ring. Once I had that in hand, I mounted my horse and headed to Windhelm. I knew Morvunskar was close by, but with night falling and the weather closing in, I needed to relax before heading to the fort. If they were like every other fort in Skyrim, they would either be full of Imperial or Stormcloak soldiers, who I’d have to persuade to let me in, or full of bandits, who I’d just kill. 

Heavy snowfall had blanketed the landscape overnight and the wind was bitter, cutting through my coat, I was mounted my horse the next morning. I had asked about Morvunskar at the inn the previous night, and had been warned that the place was infested with mages, who performed all sort of nasty experiments on those unlucky enough to fall into their hands. I managed to find someone to tie up my horse at the bottom of the hill leading up to the fort. There were guards on the walls, lining those up with my bow. I managed to take down two, drawing their attention, the rest deciding the best course of action was to head in my direction. Lining them up and taking each of them down was too easy. I was left thinking mages were idiots. 

Inside the fort, I put away my bow, figuring that working a sword and shield would be better inside the confined spaces. There were still plenty of mages, and it was only when having to take on more than one at a time that it was a problem. Those who were experts in fire were a real concern, laughing off those who used frost attacks. Those who used sparks or lightning were bastards, and I made sure to decapitate them when I got close enough. 

With no real idea what I was looking for, I ended up wandering the empty halls, looking for any sign of Sam, but I didn’t find a thing. At least, I didn’t until breaking into a room, where I was greeted by… I’m not sure what it was. Some sort of magical sphere. It glowed brightly when I approached it, and figuring I had no real choice, it was either this or just heading back home, I stepped into the sphere. 

As always, there was a bright light, and I found myself somewhere else. Where? No idea. But there was a serenity, a calmness about the place, that made me feel completely relaxed in seconds. I could hear music playing, the bubbling brook nearby, and I heard conversation in the distance. The path was lit by lanterns, following it along, feeling a smile creep across my face as I strolled along. 

Walking out into an open area, there was a large table, at which plenty were sat eating and drinking. And standing at the head of the table, as if waiting for my arrival, was Sam. 

“You're here! I was beginning to think you might not make it.” 

I strode forward to shake his hand. Any anger I might have felt about having to traipse across Skyrim had disappeared. “Bloody hell, what a few days that was. But where are we?” 

“I thought you might not remember your first trip here. You had a big night. I think you've definitely earned the staff.” 

“Ah, the staff. To be honest, I wasn’t that worried about it. I just wanted to find you, make sure you were okay…” I held up my small pack, “Though I did grab everything needed, just in case.” 

“Oh, the Hagraven feather and so on. You can throw all those out. You see...” He was enveloped by a black mist, it disappearing in seconds. “I really just needed something to encourage you to go out into the world and spread merriment. And you did just that! I haven't been so entertained in at least a hundred years!” 

“Who are you?” 

“I am Sanguine, Daedric Prince of Debauchery! I know, I know, how could I lie to you? Well, how could I trust you until we've shared a few drinks? But it wasn't long before I realised you'd make a more interesting bearer of my not-quite-holy staff than this waste of flesh.” 

“Ah, I guess you’re aware of my hunt for artefacts?” 

“Most of us are, Ragnar. So I figured I’d have some fun with you at the same time. But, no, you’ve more than earned my staff.” 

“Well, thanks… I think…” 

“My pleasure. But I think it's time for you to go. No fun keeping you locked up in here with the staff.” 

Before I could reply, there was the usual bright light, and I found myself back outside Morvunskar, holding the staff. I looked at it, intrigued as to what it was and what it would do, though I wasn’t going to mess around with it. Looking around, it appeared not a minute had passed since I’d taken down the first mage, so I mounted my horse, pointed it in the direction of home, and off we went. 

It was night by the time I dismounted at the stables outside Riften. It had been a long few days, crossing from the far west of Skyrim before turning north to Windhelm. It had been quite a few months since I’d properly hit the open road, and despite being left to wonder what else I might had done, I did find myself enjoying it most of the time. 

I headed straight home. I’m not sure how many days it had been since I’d headed out for what I had intended to be a solitary drink. I expected my wife to be a little unhappy with me, as I would assume I’d disappeared without a word. Walking into the house, I was greeted by a few people. Aranea. Ingun. Maven. Brynjolf. Vex. Delvin. Brynjolf rose to his feet, and he looked… 

“What’s wrong?” I asked, a bad feeling immediately nestling in my stomach. 

“Where have you been, lad?” 

“It’s a long story. What’s wrong? Where’s Muiri?” 

Brynjolf opened his mouth but couldn’t say anything. Aranea rose to her feet and walked towards me. “I found her this morning, Ragnar.” 

“What do you mean ‘found her’? Where is she? Where is my wife?” 

I brushed by them and headed upstairs, calling her name. Walking into the bedroom, there was no sign of her. I walked into the nursery, no sign of her there either. I looked around the entire house, my calls becoming ever more frantic. It felt like some sort of sick joke was being played on me. ‘Found her’? Of course they’d find her in our home. Where else would she be? 

Walking downstairs, I strode towards Brynjolf and grabbed him by his collar. “Where is she?” I shouted into his face. 

“She’s not here,” he said quietly, face full of sorrow, “She’s gone, lad. She’s gone…” 

And my life fell apart in an instant. 

---

Ragnar of Riften had his heart ripped out. Where it once rested, there was only a black void. I knew I’d never love again. My wife and child had been stolen from me. And I knew she’d been murdered. I had spoken with the lady who tended the Hall of the Dead, a woman by the name of Alessandra. She had performed all the usual checks. She confirmed Muiri’s sex, age and other distinguishing features, including the fact she was heavily pregnant. She also confirmed the manner of death. 

Murder. She’d been poisoned. There was the tiny hole in her neck, where someone had likely used a needle to dispense the poison. She confirmed death would have been in seconds. 

There was only one group responsible for murder in Skyrim. The Dark Brotherhood. I knew I would be going to war with them after the funeral. I was going to find Astrid, kill her, then wipe the rest of them out. The Dark Brotherhood would cease to exist in all of Tamriel by the time I was done with them. 

But first, I had to lay my wife and child to rest. The Temple of Mara, the site of the happiest day of my life, where I had married her, was now the site of my saddest. I had shed enough tears between hearing the news and the funeral. Now I was just left feeling angry and bitter. And, I’ll admit, a little confused. I had no idea who would want to kill her. Was it her? Or was someone trying to get at me? I had asked around, and no-one could give me a straight answer. 

Like weddings, funerals were simple affairs in Skyrim. Maramal spoke a few words and I wasn’t capable of adding anything. Thankfully Aranea spoke for me, and her words were beautiful, and it was then that I was finally able to cry. I hugged her tightly afterwards, thanking her profusely. Carrying out the coffin afterwards, a grave had been dug for her in the lone graveyard the city had. Maven had bought an exquisite gravestone for me, and it was next to the grave that we placed the coffin down, before four of us used ropes to lower it into the ground. I insisted I would fill the grave myself. It took a while, but it was therapeutic at the same time. 

The grave full, Ingun approached and dropped some seeds, as flowers would now grow on the grave, a symbol of Muiri’s love for alchemy. Asking for everyone to meet me at the Bee and Barb in a few minutes, I was left alone as I stood in front of the grave. “I’m sorry, Muiri. It’s all my fault. Maybe if I’d been home…” 

“It’s not your fault.” The voice made me jump, turning to see Nura, the priestess of Talos I often saw praying at a nearby shrine. “It’s not your fault, Ragnar. And if you’d been home, you would perhaps be dead too.” 

“Being dead would be better than feeling like this,” I muttered. 

“Those feelings will disappear and your heart will mend eventually.” 

“I just want whoever did this. I will find them. And I will kill them.” 

“You want revenge?” 

“I would say justice, but no, I don’t just want revenge. I want blood. I will find whoever did this. Track them down to the ends of Tamriel if necessary. And when I have them cornered, I’m going to take their heart and show it to them before they die.” 

“That is a dark path you approach, Ragnar.” 

“I feel a heart beat in my chest, but it has otherwise been ripped out. I now feel only two emotions. Anger, or rage to be more accurate, and hate. I’m not sure who I hate just yet, but I can make assumptions as to who is responsible for why my wife is now lying in the ground instead of standing next to me. I will walk that dark path if necessary.” 

“Talos guide you regardless, Ragnar.” 

“Thank you, priestess.” 

The Bee and Barb was far more subdued than normal. Little wonder, considering the circumstances. I received plenty of sympathy from everyone I knew. Haelga was in floods of tears when she offered hers. I had seen her at the service, but she had stayed back. “If there’s anything I can do,” she started. It wasn’t an offer that required a response, so I just thanked her.

I got drunk. I can admit that freely, as that’s all I wanted to do. Sure, that’s how the whole business started, at least in my mind. I’d got drunk, ended up traveling from one side of Skyrim to the other, and back again, and while I was away, my wife was murdered. But getting drunk seemed like the best thing to do, so that’s what I did. I got so drunk I barely remember being carried home, though I’m sure I was probably weeping, or maybe angry at everyone, or perhaps critical of myself, as I’d feel forever responsible for what happened. 

Waking with a massive hangover the next morning, Aranea cooked me some breakfast before I headed down to the Guild and the Flagon. Taking a seat across from Delvin, I asked one simple question. “Where is the Dark Brotherhood located?” 

He was ready to argue but decided being honest was the best course. “West of Falkreath. There is an entrance just off the main road. Did Astrid tell you the secret phrase?” 

“Yes, I made sure to remember that. But her description was vague otherwise.” 

“What do you plan on doing?” 

“Asking a few questions. My wife was murdered. The Dark Brotherhood will be held responsible unless Astrid assures me that they were not responsible, and more importantly, I believe what she says.” 

“Careful, Ragnar. You’ll be dealing with a bunch of assassins, and they do have talent.” 

“And I’m a bereaved, heartbroken husband to a murdered wife, nothing more than a vessel of hate and rage. Who do you think should be more scared?” 

He nodded, replying, “Just make sure you go armed.” 

I didn’t leave immediately. I took a couple of days to get my affairs in order. Part of me wanted to sell our house, her house, and just leave Riften behind. I could leave the Guild, that wouldn’t be a problem. They didn’t really need me. Brynjolf or Karliah could run it. I had no real idea of what I’d do. Selling the house would earn me plenty of coin though. Maybe become a mercenary? 

I departed Riften a week after the funeral, with more warnings ringing in my ears from those who were aware of what I was going to do. I appreciated their concern but ignored them all. If the Dark Brotherhood wasn’t responsible, then they would have nothing to fear. Haelga was the last to see me, and I knew she was thinking things. Personal things. I didn’t blame her. Both of us were now widows, but she was smart enough to not even start broaching that subject. But I appreciated her company as I didn’t want to be lonely. Going to bed was difficult enough without the presence of my wife. Pottering around an empty house was enough to drive me mad. 

Leaving final instructions with Brynjolf and Karliah, I suggested I would eventually return, but not to expect me to show much interest in Guild business for the foreseeable future. So, as far as I was concerned, they were both in change until then. Neither of them were particularly happy about it, but I left them with next to no choice in the matter. I was going, and that was that. 

My mind was still in turmoil as I rode along, almost hoping something, someone, would try and attack me so I could release some of the rage that was still building inside. I needed to explode, release some of it, so a few bandits or a bear would be the perfect valve. But nothing did, the road to Falkreath clear of anything dangerous. 

Avoiding Falkreath itself, I managed to find the door with ease, and camped down the road a little further. It had been another long day in the saddle, and after building a small fire, I opened a bottle of wine and got plastered again, crawling into my bedroll sometime later. Considering I had a near constant hangover lately, I woke feeling fine the next morning, and after a quick breakfast, readied myself for whatever was to come. 

I left my horse at the campsite, cautiously walking the road back towards Falkreath, turning off where I knew the entrance to the Sanctuary was. I watched it for at least an hour, though no-one came or went, so figured I might as well just try and enter. 

Standing in front of the door, the sinister looking skull looking back at me. I knew there was magic involved when I touched the door and heard a whispered voice ask, “What is the music of life?” 

I knew the answer. “Silence, my brother.” 

“Welcome home,” the door replied before it swung open for me. 

Unsheathing my sword, I walked slowly down the stairs, turning to see a larger room. There were a couple of shelves, a table, but otherwise the place looked in a rather sorry state. Waiting at the other side of the room was Astrid. Her eyes met mine and my hand moved to my sword as I walked towards her. Coming to a stop a couple of metres back, I didn’t let her speak. Raising my sword, pointing the tip at her neck, I said, “You will answer my questions. You will answer them truthfully. If not, then you had better believe…” 

“We didn’t do it, Ragnar. Trust me, I wouldn’t have taken the contract if it had been offered.” 

“Then not you, who? Who else would commit such a flagrant murder in Skyrim?” 

To my surprise, she stepped towards me, moving the sword out of her way with her gloved hand, before she hugged me. “Calm down, Ragnar. We’re not your enemy,” she said softly, “And I’m definitely not your enemy. Put your sword down and we’ll talk.” 

“But…” 

“Trust me. Please.” 

I sighed. Did she have any reason to lie to me? Perhaps. But I also believed her. Maybe I was being foolish, but for some reason, I believed her. So I sheathed my sword before she finally released me. “Good. Now, we should talk about what happened.” She let me go and walked to the other side of the nearby table. “I did hear about what happened, Ragnar. For what it’s worth, I’m sorry.” 

“Thanks. I appreciate it.” 

“Now, as for who did it, do you truly believe we didn’t do it?” 

“I believe you personally didn’t do it. But would anyone in this organisation do it on their own initiative? Perhaps hearing a rumour?” 

“No. If they would have heard something, I’d have heard it. And, to be honest, I would have let you know, Ragnar. I know it’s been some months since that night, but I still remember it fondly. I’ve been waiting for you to show up. But I learned you were married, so I understood why you never arrived.” 

“Any idea who might have done it?” 

“I think the right question you need to be asking is who would have wanted your wife dead? Would it be someone after Muiri herself? Or is it someone trying to tear you down?” 

I grabbed a chair and sat down, racking my mind over everything we’d done. “Well, I can be honest. I don’t have many enemies, and most I do have are dead. Add to that, most people don’t even know what I do with my life. As for Muiri, the only person who might have had an axe to grind is…” I looked up at Astrid. “But how could he have known about…” 

“You killed Nilsine, Ragnar. What you wouldn’t know is that his wife committed suicide a couple of weeks later. Torbjorn Shatter-Shield would have had every reason to find the woman he’d hold responsible for everything that had happened to his family.” 

“So you think it was him?” 

She opened the drawer of a nearby chest and handed across a book. “I’ve done some investigating, Ragnar. I believe he probably hired Argonians to do it. I’ve asked Veezara, an Argonian who works for us. Although he states he is the last Shadowscale, Argonians do make talented assassins, so it’s possible there are some working freelance. The other reason I suggest it is an Argonian is that there is a community who lived outside the city walls. It’s possible there are some living inconspicuously amongst their ranks, and Torbjorn was able to approach them there.” 

I was about to ask ‘Are you sure?’ but reading through the information she’d managed to gather, I could only ask, “How did you get all this?” 

“I knew you’d show up here asking questions, if not ready for a fight. Call it self-preservation.” She paused, before asking, “So what do you intend to do now?” 

Rising to my feet, I said I would be heading straight for Windhelm. Before leaving, I thanked her for the information. “What will you do after?” 

“No idea,” I admitted. 

“You will always have a job with us. Consider what you’re about to do. Is doing work for us any different?” 

I didn’t need to really think about it. “No. No, it’s not. The only difference is this is personal. I’ve already killed for love. Is killing for money better or worse?” 

“Neither. It just is.” 

“I might wander through the door again someday soon, Astrid.” 

“Be safe, Ragnar.” 

After packing up camp and tying everything up on my horse, I headed west and north, eventually turning onto the road towards Whiterun, knowing I couldn’t make Windhelm in a day from Falkreath. I still carried the ring for Ysolda, and she was pleased that I returned it, though it appeared news had spread about the murder of my wife. She offered her condolences as we shared a drink in the Bannered Mare. 

Walking into Windhelm late the next day, I headed straight for the house of the Shatter-Shields. I wasn’t going to waste any time. Looking around to ensure no-one saw me enter, I knocked on the door. It was opened by Torbjorn. “Yes?” he asked, “Who are you?” 

“We need to speak, Torbjorn. About my wife.” 

He sighed, nodded, and opened the door wider. I gestured for him to walk in front of me, not wishing to turn my back, ensuring the door was closed and secured before I followed him. He took a seat, gesturing to one opposite as we sat in front of the fire. He poured us each a glass of wine, though mine would remain untouched. He took a sip as he stared into the fire. “I suppose you’d like to know why.” 

“I can take a good guess.” 

“She’s responsible for everything… What was your name?” 

“My name isn’t important.” 

He nodded again. “Very well. As I said, she’s responsible for everything. Not for the death of Friga. I can’t pin that on her shoulders. But she was responsible for our heirloom beings stolen. If she’d not been such a floozy…” 

“Careful, Torbjorn. Be very careful about what you say about her.” 

He glared at me. “Frighten me all you want, young man. I know my end is near. Just shut up, let me speak, then you can do what you must.” 

“Very well. Continue.” 

“She was responsible for the loss of Aegisbane. That weapon had been in our family for generations. If she hadn’t met that man and brought him into our lives, maybe none of this would have happened. I know she ran away to Markarth to escape. I kept tabs on her, just in case. 

Then Nilsine was murdered, and I knew she was responsible.” 

I leaned closer to him. “I did that. For Muiri. Want to know how your daughter died?” 

“No. I will sit here knowing I will join them all soon enough. But Muiri asked you to kill her?” 

“She asked me to kill Alain. If you hadn’t thrown her out of Windhelm, forced her into exile, maybe your daughter would still be alive.” 

He nodded before continuing, perhaps wanting to argue, but probably not seeing the point. “After we buried Nilsine, my wife was beside herself with grief. I did what I could but…. I found her returning home from work about a month later. She’d taken poison. She left a note for me, absolving me of any fault. She blamed your wife, of course. That’s when I took action.” 

“How did you find her?” 

“As I said, I knew she was in Markarth. If she’d remained there, as miserable as I knew she was, I’d have let her be. But no, she had to find happiness, a man who loved her, and a child on the way. There was no way I would allow her to have that. So I did what I needed to do. It was a clean job.” He met my eyes. “But I did it knowing you would one day arrive on my doorstep. I hide nothing. I’m glad to have done it.” 

“I will give you a choice of how you die, Torbjorn. You can pick up a weapon and fight me, or I will make your ending quick. You will not suffer, much like my wife, who I was assured had died within seconds as she slept.” 

“I can’t fight you, boy. Just let me finish this cup and you can then do what you want.” 

I let him finish his cup. I gave him that much. Then he stood up, straightened his clothing, then met my eyes as I stood in front of him, sword already in hand. I was polite enough to put it through his chest, aiming for his heart, killing him almost instantly. He collapsed to his knees, and I took his head for good measure. Once satisfied, I wiped off my sword before sheathing it, and I walked out of the house. I assumed someone would find him soon. If not, the smell would attract someone eventually. 

It was rather dark by the time I left Windhelm, intending to ride to Kynesgrove, where I would spend the night in the local inn. The next morning, I returned to Riften and my empty house at Riftweald, with absolutely no idea of what I was going to do next.

Chapter 20: Recovery

Summary:

Three months later...

I had barely left the house since returning from Windhelm having killed the man responsible. I knew I would never have found the Argonian who did the deed. No doubt they’d have returned to Black Marsh. Finding the man who had given the order was enough. Though I barely left the house, I still received the occasional visitor. Brynjolf would drop by once a week, letting me know the latest news and gossip from the Flagon. Karliah would visit every so often, just to see how I was doing. Aranea still worked for me, and though she hadn’t moved back in, spent more time at mine than anywhere else. 

And then there was Haelga, who in no way tried to seduce me, but I know she was wondering if I would change my mind about our relationship, once I’d stopped mourning my wife. I would visit her grave once a week, placing a new bouquet of the flowers she had loved, letting her know that I was thinking about her, that I missed her terribly, but that I hoped she was at peace wherever she was. The first time I had visited her grave, I let her know I’d found the man responsible for her death. The flowers had bloomed spectacularly within a couple of weeks. Maybe it was just in my mind, but I took it as a sign that the news had made her happy. 

But after three months, I was going a little stir crazy and needed to do something with my life. And the more I thought about it, the more I was ready to take Astrid’s offer. But more than that, I was missing the intimate touch of a woman. The last time I had been intimate with my wife had been the night everything had gone wrong. Besides my wife, there was only one woman I would consider being intimate with. The fact I knew she would be receptive made things slightly easier. I couldn’t mourn forever, and I knew Muiri would want me to move on. And considering she knew of my previous relationship, I’m sure she’d approve. 

Walking into the Bunkhouse, Svana was at the counter. She smiled at me and yelled upstairs that I was there. Haelga came bounding down the stairs and leapt into my arms, rather happy to see me. I couldn’t help chuckle at her excitement. Leaning back to look at me, the smile on her face was infectious. “You look… better, Ragnar.” 

“I had to get out of the house. It’s getting rather lonely moping about. So, I thought I’d come visit you.” 

Leaning forward, looking up at me, she asked, “And you thought of me first?” 

“I did.” My hands were on her back, and I slowly moved one down so it rested just above her arse. “I have to move on, Haelga.” 

“I understand, Ragnar. I had to do the same thing when I lost my husband. Such a shame we now share widowhood in common.” 

“Aye. Perhaps a topic best not discussed too often.” 

She smiled. “But now you’re out of the house. What did you want?” 

“What I wanted was for you to join me in the Bee and Barb for dinner tonight. Would you like to join me?” 

“Just dinner?” she whispered. 

“Honestly, no. I can’t remember the last time… But I also know how that must make you feel…” 

She leaned up to kiss me. A soft, gentle kiss. The first time I’d kissed a woman since that last night with Muiri. The first time I’d kissed another woman since the day I proposed to Muiri. Yet, because of the history I had with Haelga, it felt right immediately. “I’ll join you there once the sun has gone down. Would you like to return here with me?” 

“Aye. Returning to Riftweald…. Honestly, I just want to sell it…” 

“No, don’t do that. Make new memories in addition to those already there.” 

“Maybe I should get a new bed though. It wouldn’t be right…” 

“I can’t tell you what to do, Ragnar. Do what you think or what feels right. No matter what you do, Muiri would understand. And I’m sure you know she’d want you to move on.” 

I kissed her, the same she gave me. I didn’t exactly want to put on a show for Svana, plus there were still a few hurdles in my mind I needed to get over. But it was nice to hold a woman in my arms again, Haelga resting her head against me as I gently stroked her hair. “I’ve missed this feeling,” she said softly, “And before you say anything, don’t apologise. I know how happy you were. And I’m sorry…” 

“Thank you. It means a lot, especially from yourself.” 

For the first time in three months, I had reason to smile. Haelga said again that I looked much better before I left her to work, and I found myself wandering around Riften. I still felt the weight of the world on my shoulders but I felt better about things. I hadn’t trimmed my beard or hair in months, nor had a proper wash, so I headed to where Aranea still lived, and asked for her help. When I told her why, she immediately escorted me back to Riftweald, where my beard and hair were trimmed and neatened up, water heated so I could enjoy a proper wash, and she made sure I dressed to impress. 

“Now, just remember one thing, Ragnar. You go as fast or as slow as you want. I know why you’ve gone back to Haelga. You want intimacy again.” 

“Know me that well?” 

“You’re a man, Ragnar. And, trust me on this, I know what it’s like to go without intimacy for a long time.” Taking a step back, she looked me up and down. “And I’m sure Haelga will be impressed with the effort you’ve made. You won’t be returning here?” 

“No, I’ll stay at the Bunkhouse if the night goes well.” 

Taking a seat at my usual table, I received plenty of hearty hellos as I sat down and enjoyed a tankard of ale, chatting with anyone who wanted to join me. Most simply enquired as to my state of mind, as they wouldn’t have seen me in months. And if they had, I’d probably shared few words with them. Haelga walked in as I was nursing a third tankard. She kissed my cheek before taking a seat opposite. If anyone was surprised by her sitting with me, they didn’t show it, and no-one made any comment. I bought her a tankard too, and ordered dinner. 

It was just like old times, and I found myself laughing quite a lot that night, Haelga regaling me with stories of life in the Bunkhouse. After we finished eating dinner, Haelga cut straight to the chase, asking if I’d like to accompany her home. I said yes without hesitation. She offered her hand and practically dragged me away. “Enjoy yourself, Ragnar!” I heard someone call out, to the laughter of plenty of others. I certainly wasn’t going to take offence. 

It had been a long time since I’d been in Haelga’s penthouse. Well over a year and more. Nothing had changed, though. Once the door was closed, she was all over me, her mouth desperate for mine, her hands trying to disrobe me as quickly as possible. I was returning the favour, and may have accidentally ripped her dress. She told me not to worry, so I ripped it some more before it dropped to the ground. Underwear followed just as quickly before I led her backwards to the bed. 

“No foreplay,” she said, “Just sex.” 

“Sure?” 

She nodded as she shuffled backwards, beckoning me to join her with a finger. I did kiss up her body, taking a breast in my mouth for a moment, giving each nipple a quick bite, before kissing her, my right hand down by her sex. I couldn’t help smile as she was soaking wet. She needed to gasp when I touched her. “I haven’t had sex in over a year, Ragnar.” 

That brought me to a halt. “You’re serious? But… You’re you!” 

“I was still in love, Ragnar. I still am now.” She put a finger to my lips. “And you don’t have to say a thing. Just letting you know.” 

Sliding my cock inside her, I watched her face break into an enormous grin, hearing her gasp as I wasted no time burying my entire length. She felt just as good as the first time I’d been inside her. Wrapping her legs around me immediately, I was quickly thrusting away into her. Wrapping her arms around my neck, she dragged me down to kiss her. I growled into her mouth as I fucked her even harder. She needed to break the kiss to moan. “Yes, Ragnar,” she hissed quietly, “Fuck me!” 

“I won’t last long.” 

“I don’t care. Fuck me and cum in me. This is just the start.” 

I stopped a moment. “The restart?” 

“Just fucking, no feelings this time. Well, at least in the sense I still love you, but that’s just how I feel. But I’ll always be here if you want some fun, Ragnar. You think I’d say not to this magnificent thing currently inside me?” 

I resumed fucking her, feeling her legs tighten around me, urging me on to go faster. I could feel the need to release rather urgently, lifting her body with mine, burying myself even deeper if possible, causing her to cry out as I drove my cock into her harder and faster still. 

Then I erupted inside her, groaning so loudly, they probably heard me all the way in Solitude. Then I needed to relax, using a forearm to prevent squashing Haelga underneath me, her legs and arms still wrapped around me, laying soft kisses on my cheeks before kissing me again. 

“Well, I think we both needed that,” she said a little later. 

“Give me a few minutes to recover, then you’re riding me until you cum.” 

“Ever the gentleman, Ragnar.” 

It took barely ten minutes for me to be hard again, and considering I’d just cum, I would last much longer. Rolling me onto my back, Haelga wanted to suck my cock first, and I quite happily watched her do it, as she was as talented as ever, ever eager to swallow my length. She wouldn’t get a mouthful of cum, but happily sucked away until she was ready to mount me. 

Watching her slide down my cock was rather exciting, my Nord goddess feeling back home with my cock inside her. And she happily bounced and grinded away as I grabbed a breast in each hand, giving them gentle squeezes, maybe giving her nipples a tweak. Moving a hand down to her sex, I licked my thumb and gently rubbed her clit. That pretty much set her off and she enjoyed her first climax of the night. But she kept on going, though grabbed my wrist to move my thumb away, insisting her next one would arrive from my cock alone. 

Manoeuvring backwards, I was in a seated position so we could make out as she continued to ride me. Running my hands down her back, she was already sweating, not that I cared, particularly as her body language suggested she was approaching a second climax. “Thrust up,” she pleaded. I somehow managed to do it from the position I was in. That made her cry out, leaning forward to hold me, breasts pressed into my chest as she cried out into my ear. 

“Holy shit, Ragnar!” she said softly once she stopped moving. 

“Enjoy yourself?” 

She leaned back. “Enjoy myself? I haven’t had that good an orgasm in months.” After kissing me again, she added, “Want my arse tonight too?” 

I smiled but shook my head. “I just want what we’re sharing right now. But if you want, we can get into some of the crazy stuff again, if you’re interested.” 

“Definitely.” 

Hopping off my lap, we settled down together side by side, Haelga spooning against me. A thousand memories came flooding back for me, and I’m sure they did for her too. “I’ve missed you,” she whispered after minutes of comfortable silence. 

“I’ve missed you too.” 

“And you’re welcome anytime you want, Ragnar. Just like before.” 

“I’m not falling in love again, Haelga.” 

She turned around to face me, kissing me softly on the lips. “But you still love me?” 

“Yes, but…”

Another finger on the lips. “No. You love me. That’s all I need to know. We were never going to have what you shared with her. That’s why I was… content to let you go. I never wished that…” She sighed. “Anything I say won’t sound right. I can’t even say I’m glad you’re here without it sounding awful.” 

“How about this? There is only one other person each of us would rather be with. But we can’t be with that person, so we find love and companionship with each other.” 

She smiled. “That works. And the really good sex helps.” 

“Just good?” 

“Great. Superb. Life-changing.” 

I was soon poking her in the rear, and it only took a slight shuffle for my cock to slide inside her again. She rather liked me holding her in my arms, cuddling and fucking her from behind. Lifting one of her legs over my own, I moved one of my hands so I could fondle her at the same time. “You want me to have another one?” she asked with a chuckle. 

“I’m going to cum so you are too.” 

She suggested we make it a little more comfortable, and a little easier for me to fuck her, so she got on her hands and knees, and I definitely groaned as I slid inside her. Grabbing a handful of her hair, I noticed her smile as I started to pound her, and she quickly dropped onto her forearms, resting on one as her free hand started to fondle herself. “I’ve missed the feeling of those hands on my hips, Ragnar. 

I stopped, still buried inside her, and asking, “Would you like the return of the special room?” 

“What about…?” 

“I can’t keep it forever. That’s not healthy. So, as you said, I’ll make some new memories.” 

“If you want to, Ragnar, I won’t say no.” 

I started pounding her again in agreement. All she did was rest on her forearm, looking back in my direction with that gorgeous smile of hers. I hadn’t lied to her. I would not fall in love again, but I’d definitely enjoy rekindling my relationship with her. To be honest, I’m just glad everything still worked. I’d been in such a depression; I’d barely taken care of my own physical needs. 

And I’d always enjoyed the intimacy I’d shared with Haelga. I’ll admit that I hadn’t particularly missed it while committed and then married to Muiri, but she had been interested in hearing about the things we’d been up to. My lovemaking with my wife had always been markedly different, as although she was intrigued, we kept it what I would call ‘normal’. I’m sure some would probably call that ‘boring’. 

Warning Haelga I was close again, I could see her shoulder and top of her arm move quickly, so knew she was rubbing herself to orgasm, though I’m confident what I was doing was doing most of the job. She was still bent in such a way so I could watch her face, and I knew she was getting close too. 

“On you?” I asked. 

She smiled but shook her head. “No. Another time. I want to feel it inside me.” 

Well, I wasn’t going to deny her what she wanted, my hands gripping her even tighter as I started to drive into her even harder. She lowered her body down to the bed, barely lifting her arse up, begging for me to just ruin her. That led to me not lasting more than a couple of minutes before groaning rather loudly, buried myself deep one final time, before I exploded. She kept fondling herself and followed me not long later, and once we were both done, I lowered my body to gently lie on top of hers. 

She didn’t want that for too long, eventually wanting to flip over onto her back, though as my cock was still relatively hard, had me slide back inside her before wrapping her arms and legs around me again as we continued to make out. It was just like old times, except we were around eighteen or so months older. 

“I’d like to fall asleep like this, with you still inside me… Though I’d want you to keep fucking me too!” 

I eventually softened enough that we just had to clean up and lie down together again, Haelga spooning into me so I would hold her as tightly as possible. “Ragnar, if we resume our relationship, will you want to be with others again?” 

“I haven’t thought that far ahead.” 

“Like before, I wouldn’t be upset if you were.” 

“How about this? You will be my only girl in Riften.” 

“So no Ingun or Karliah?” 

“Ingun is a good friend. I’ve always liked her, but that aspect has long since passed. As for Karliah, I don’t think she’d be interested. She’s now just a very good, close friend. I think if she or I offered, we’d probably fall into bed immediately, but to be honest, there’s a reason why I’m here right now.” 

“You thought I’d be easy?” 

That made me chuckle. “No, not like that. I just figured…” 

She leaned back to kiss me. “I’m teasing, Ragnar. I would never say no to restarting what we shared. I knew you just needed time.” 

“You don’t feel… I don’t know, like…” 

She kissed me again. “Never. I knew you ended it with heavy heart to begin with. And, more importantly, Ragnar, I knew you were in love. It would have been incorrect of me to somehow make you break your word to Muiri.” 

We fell asleep and woke up in the same position, the first time I woke up with a woman in my arms for months. Despite waking with a raging erection, I admitted I just wanted to enjoy the feeling of continuing to hold her, as I was remembering all the little details of her body. Her spectacular arse and legs. Soft skin. Soft, perfect breasts that I may give a gentle squeeze. Long blonde hair that still had that scent of flowers I remembered. Blue eyes that looked into mine, and I could see the same feelings in them, as if we’d never spent time apart. 

As I said, she had been, was again, and perhaps always would be my Nord goddess. 

Eventually having to get up, we dressed and headed downstairs for breakfast. Svana was friendly as always, stating she was glad to see me back in the Bunkhouse after so long. She sat down next to me once she had served Haelga and I, and I wrapped an arm around her in thanks. “Will you be visiting often?” she wondered. 

Looking across at Haelga, who couldn’t help smile and blush, I said, “I think I’ll be a regular visitor. That’s if Haelga isn’t at my place. The only proviso will be if I’m in Riften or not.” 

“Will you have reason to be away?” 

“I need to resume my life. I’ve spent three months moping around my house. It’s time to do something. I’m just not sure what.” 

“Any ideas?” 

“Just the one. I had an offer a while back. I’ve been thinking about it for some time.” 

“What sort of offer?” Haelga wondered. I just shook my head. “I don’t want to know?” 

“Well, I haven’t exactly been doing much regarding my other… ‘job’ since I was married. Doubt I’ll start doing that again. I’m still the boss, still take my cut, but others are now running it, and they are still abiding by my rules, as far as I know. But I received a job offer regarding something else I’ve proven rather adept at. I might see where that goes.” 

“Will that take you away from Riften often?” 

I could hear the longing in Haelga’s tone. She wanted me around all the time. “Hopefully not. But I could be away from time to time. It will depend on if I actually take the offer, though I’ll insist I won’t be moving. I’ll probably head off in the next few days and see if the offer is still available.” 

Between that day and leaving for Falkreath, which I did at the end of the week, I made some changes to Riftweald. I bought a chest and started storing the personal effects and mementoes Muiri had bought, and the little things that reminded me of her. I couldn’t get rid of everything. I would want to open the chest occasionally and look at things. But the nursery was an open wound, and I finally emptied that out, giving away most of the things for free, most things to the local orphanage. I bought a new bed, as I couldn’t share the same bed I’d shared with my wife with another person. To me, that just didn’t seem right. Plus, the bed held far too many memories. I should have thrown it out long ago, but in my mind, I could still feel her presence when I went to sleep each night. Her clothing… A few things went in the chest, but I sold or gave away nearly everything else. 

I moved the chest under the new bed, where it would stay, not forgotten, but I wouldn’t open it too often. I moved everything around in the bedroom, and also downstairs, giving the place a sense of ‘newness’. Aranea walked in one day to see me changing everything around, immediately stepping in to help, realising what I was doing and why. When we were finally done, she hugged me as I released the final bit of grief I still held deep down inside me, her words nothing but soothing, again understanding what was happening. 

“Feel better?” she asked later.

"I needed to do that. Now I can look around and not see a reminder every single second.” 

“You’ve seemed a little more content lately, Ragnar. Your reconnecting with Haelga is going well?” 

“I will invite her over one night soon. And… well… The room I had before…” 

“It’s probably a good thing I will remain where I am living,” she stated with a smirk. 

“Perhaps it would be for the best. I plan on making new memories with Haelga around the house.” 

I noticed the eyebrows raise. “You will only be with her?” 

“When I’m in Riften, yes.” 

From that first night back together, I spent five nights at the Bunkhouse, reconnecting with Haelga, not just physically, but also emotionally. She had freely admitted to still being in love with me. I admitted I still carried endless affection for her, but I had been honest about not wanting to fall in love. She understood why, though did make a subtle joke that I did love her, though not in love with her. She was probably right, but I didn’t want to get her hopes up too soon. 

On the morning after the fifth night, I let her know I would be heading away from Riften. I couldn’t say how long, but I needed to get active again. As before, she admitted to being worried about me while I was away, but trusted me to look after myself, though gently warned me not to get either injured, arrested or killed. I couldn’t make that promise, though told her I had a reason again to return home so would rather I didn’t end up like that. I think telling her that near enough made her cry. Instead, the lovemaking we shared that morning nearly earned a round of applause from everyone else in the Bunkhouse when we headed down for breakfast an hour later. 

Riding my horse, back out on the open road, I felt a sense of peace I hadn’t felt in a long time. Sure, I was armed and armoured, ready to fight, but after so long not having even thought about leaving the city walls, with each mile further from Riften, the better I started to feel. My ride towards Falkreath wasn’t uninterrupted, as I found myself stopped a trio of bandits about halfway along. Taking on three bandits at once wasn’t something I’d normally contemplate, but it was opportunity to test my sword arm again, as I was sure to be rusty, and most bandits are usually poor swordsman. 

The three attacked me at once, so I had to fight dirty, using my shield to block and bash, my feet aiming either for knees or crotches, as I had no problem hitting a bandit it in his lower regions. He didn’t deserve that sort of respect. I put one of them on the ground rather quickly, leaving me to face two of them. So I thought taunting them would help. 

“Sure you want to keep fighting a Nightingale?” 

“Heard of them. You don’t look like one.” 

“My armour is at home. Okay, how about the boss of the Thieves Guild?” 

“I heard he was dead.” 

“If you mean Mercer Frey, then you would be correct.” 

“No, the other one. He was supposedly murdered with his wife.” 

That just pissed me off, so I shut up and put them both down as well. One still lived as I put a sword to his throat. “Who told you that?” 

“Told me what?” 

“That I was dead with my wife?” 

“Just a rumour. It was just a rumour. The sort of thing shared over a campfire.” 

I put my sword through his throat, enjoying the sound of him choking to death. I could have made some sort of quip, but he was a bandit, and wasn’t worthy of any more time than necessary. The rest of my ride to Falkreath took place without further incident. I left my horse outside the Sanctuary, away from prying eyes of anyone walking the road, and found the door would open on approach. 

Wandering downstairs, Astrid was in what I could already assume was her usual place, leaning against the table. I stopped and looked over her fine figure. She had a fabulous arse, the legs leading up to it also rather nice and long. She must have noticed my presence as she eventually glanced in my direction, and definitely knew I’d been checking her out, as she immediately smiled. “Well, this a pleasant surprise, Ragnar.” 

Walking forward, I was surprised when she stepped forward to embrace me. I completed the embrace, and a few memories of a certain night started to flood my mind. I particularly remembered what she looked like under that skin tight armour. 

Stepping back after a couple of minutes, she asked, “What brings you back to our Sanctuary? I heard about Torbjorn…” 

“I’m sure everyone has. Any link back to me?” 

“None whatsoever. Another unsolved murder in Windhelm. Ulfric’s capital doesn’t appear to be the safest place in Skyrim. But that’s not why you are here, is it?” 

“I need something to do. I’ve been thinking about your offer for quite a while. I’ll do it, with two provisos.” 

“I’ll hear them, Ragnar, if you’re being honest.” 

“One. I wish to remain living in Riften. I’m not sure how it works, but you can send orders by courier, can you not?” 

She nodded. “Yes, we have people we can trust to send letters. Okay, that’s your first point, and I can immediately say that’s fine. What’s the second?” 

“I want you. And not just a one-time thing. I’ve done my grieving, but I’m not falling in love again. I have a woman in Riften I’m intimate with. When I’m not in Riften, I might be here. And if I’m here, I want you, in a bed, naked on top of me with my cock inside you. I hope that’s blunt enough so there’s no reason for misinterpretation.” 

The smile that formed suggested she liked that idea very much. “Well, I’m sure we can figure something out, Ragnar. But what about my husband?” 

“Is he still a werewolf?” She nodded. “And when was the last time you were fucked?” 

“That night we shared, Ragnar.” 

“By Ysmir, is he dumb or something? I mean, look at you! I’d get a cure tomorrow then ensure we were intimate all the time.” 

“Careful, Ragnar. I love my husband, but compliments like that will have me performing the Black Sacrament for a certain reason…” 

“Can it work?” 

“Yes, I will tell him straight. If he refuses to do the right thing for his wife, then I will do what I need to do.” She cleared her throat. “Would you like to meet the others?” 

“Sure.” 

Arnbjorn, her husband, was what I expected. A Nord warrior, quite intimidating, though maybe to others, and his grip of my hand as he shook mine suggested he knew exactly who I was. He was rather gruff and short with me. Didn’t particularly blame him. Babette was a ten-year-old girl, though learned later she was actually a three-hundred-year old vampire. I understood quite quickly how she carried out her jobs. Gabriella was a Dunmer, with a beautiful, melodic sounding voice, the sort that would have me smitten, and after a conversation with her, learned she was incredibly dangerous. Was I attracted to her straight away? Damn right, I was. She knew too. Festus Krex was a grumpy, old human mage, who despaired at the plight of the Dark Brotherhood, and there were subtle suggestions he wasn’t happy with Astrid’s leadership. Nazir was a Redguard who handled contracts on behalf of Astrid, with a dark and dry sense of humour. The sort of guy I’d enjoy a tankard of ale with. Finally, Veezara was an Argonian Shadowscale, the last of his kind, and someone who appeared to like and respect Astrid quite a lot. 

Returning to her table, Astrid felt it necessary to explain what was expected of me as a member of the Dark Brotherhood. I simply assured her I was in this as I was clearly good at it, much like I was pretty damned good thief, and I clearly lacked that part of the heart or brain that made them feel guilty when they took another life. I’d killed for love. I’d killed for revenge. I’d even killed for power, if you look at how the death of Mercer Frey worked out for myself. Now I could kill for coin. All I said is that I did have one or two rules. I wouldn’t kill children, which made Astrid laugh, as she insisted they would never accept that sort of contract, and I wouldn’t do anything else other than kill. She understood the insinuation, and said the Brotherhood only assassinated. 

Before my joining was official, she wanted to know that I’d kill on demand, or as ordered. She confessed that she knew I’d probably kill just to please her, and I replied that she was right. The rush of adrenaline I’d feel would want something from her in return. But it still needed to be done, to prove to everyone else that I would do as ordered. I agreed and accepted the first contract. 

“Head to Dawnstar, Ragnar. You have no reason to contact the person responsible for requesting the assassination, but do you want to know why?” 

I shrugged. “If the person needs to die, they need to die. Knowing why isn’t going to change that.” 

She smiled. “That’s right. It’s not for us to judge. We merely carry out the request. So, you are looking for a woman by the name of Beitild. She runs the Iron-Breaker Mine on the outskirts of the city. She separated from her husband around a year ago, and has been left angry and embittered by it. I’d suggestion slight caution, simply because she will fight you, depending on how you approach her.” 

“I’m guessing it’s rather late out now, so I’ll leave tomorrow.” 

“Will you stay here?” 

“I’d rather stay down the road at the inn, to be honest.” 

“I’ll join you.” 

“Already?” 

“Ragnar, you’ve made it perfectly clear what you want from me, and I’ll make it clear in return. I feel the same way. So, if you head off now, get a room with a double bed at the inn, and I’ll be there shortly.” 

I couldn’t help grin as I let her know I was looking forward to seeing her soon. 

After booking a room, I ordered a meal and a tankard, taking a seat in a dark corner, listening to the lone musician strum a harp. Astrid took longer than I expected, and when she walked in, she glanced my way, my temper rose, and I followed her into the room I booked. Closing the door behind me, she didn’t turn to face me until I gently rested a hand on her shoulder. “Let me see,” I asked quietly. 

She turned around slowly, and my temper rose further as I noticed the already forming black eye and blood dripping from a nostril. “He did this?” 

“I gave him an ultimatum. Either the blood or me. He made his choice.” 

“Astrid, this isn’t…” 

“I know it isn’t!” she stated loudly, before sagging into me, and I held her tight to my body. “I know it isn’t, Ragnar,” she said softly, “There’s an attraction, and maybe it’ll turn into something else. But it’s been so long, and he made his choice. He chose the blood over his wife.” 

“Where is he?” 

“Gone. He hit me a couple of times, packed his few things, and left. To be honest, I thought he would turn, then try and kill me. But he made do with calling me a few names before he stormed out. But it was time to force the issue. I know he loved me, but he also had a duty regarding certain things, which he refused. So I said I would go looking elsewhere if he was to make that choice.” She leaned back, and I used my hand to clean away the blood. “Can you just hold me tonight, Ragnar? I want to be intimate, but I just want to feel your arms wrapped around me tonight.” 

“Can I undress you first?” 

“Do it slowly.” 

I took my time, and she slowly started to smile as her skin was exposed. Once she was nude, she did the same to me, and once I was naked, we slid under the covers. I held her in my arms, gently stroking her skin with my fingers, and she eventually grabbed my wrist and moved it between her legs, as she quietly pleaded for me to get her off. I didn’t mind at all, and after her climax, she turned to face me, burying her face into my chest as she wept. “Fucking bastard,” she sobbed. 

“Do you want me to find him and take care of it?” 

“No. He’ll be long gone. He’s an expert tracker. To be honest, Ragnar, I can only suggest you watch your back.” 

“I’ll be fine. And I have plenty of friends. I’ll put the word out when I get back to Riften.” 

“Please don’t blame yourself. It was always going to happen. I haven’t been happy in a long time. I loved my husband, but in the end, it was the idea of him rather than anything else.” 

She eventually fell asleep against me, and I laid there thinking I’d just broken up a marriage. Astrid would deny that, as I think what she said was also true. It had been a long time coming. I mean, going a whole year without feeling the intimacy of your husband? No wonder she was so eager to be with me again, as I’d made it rather obvious, and quite blunt, that I would like to be intimate with her. But I just hoped she wouldn’t expect too much more from me. 

We didn’t make love the next morning, as I rose early, leaving her to sleep in bed. I crouched down next to her before leaving, running a hand through her hair as she looked at me before kissing her. She told me to be safe, and return to the Sanctuary once the job was done, and that we would hopefully enjoy some more time together upon my return. That was something to definitely look forward to, so I suggested I’d be rather eager to return as quickly as possible. That made her laugh, and after a final kiss, I left her to sleep. 

I couldn’t remember if I’d ever been to Dawnstar or not, but it took a bloody long time to get there from Falkreath, at least two nights camping on the way. And it was far to the north, so far that only snow covered the ground. It was a rather barren, white landscape, and due to the exposed nature of Dawnstar on the shores of the Sea of Ghosts, the wind ripped through the city and anyone who happened to be walking or riding through the exposed regions of the Hold. 

Finding the target wasn’t particularly difficult, as I asked where Iron-Breaker Mine was, and was pointed in the right direction, the mine lying on the outskirts of the city. Finding Beitild wasn’t too difficult, being the angry, bitter, raven-haired miner, who looked just about to have given up on life. I spent a couple of days tracking her movements, as I didn’t want to be caught in the act. She spent all of her time between three places. Her house, the mine, or the inn. 

The most obvious place was her house, as she lived alone, though spent little time there, only returning to sleep each evening. On the day I chose to do it, I spent most of the day wandering the northern coast, taking in the view. There was a harsh beauty to the northern sea, and it was so cold, ice formed in certain places. Few animals and little vegetation abounded, adding to the bleakness. It remained dry, but bitterly cold. 

I completed the job at night. I won’t go into detail, but as it wasn’t personal, I made it quick and as painless as possible. But upon returning to the inn to sleep, I still felt nothing. No guilt. No sorrow. No… anything. Just like when I’d killed for Muiri. Just like when I’d killed Grelod. So I guess I was the perfect choice for the job. Losing Muiri and having my heart ripped out probably helped at the same time. 

Leaving Dawnstar under the cover of darkness, I camped at a ruin I was aware of a couple of kilometres outside of town. It was a rather cold night under the furs, but I had made sure that few had noticed my presence around town, but figured that Beitild going missing would be noticed quickly, so I made sure to rise with the sun in the morning and head south straight away. 

Walking into the Sanctuary almost a week after I’d left, Astrid was pleased to see me and happy the mission was completed without a problem. Considering I’d now proven myself twice, as she remembered the fact I had willingly killed Grelod, even though that was ‘owed’, she made my position within the Brotherhood official. “How do you want to celebrate?” she wondered, the smile on her face letting me know how she thought we should do it. 

I’m not sure how much later we finally slept. I could count up her climaxes, but that would just feed my ego. I enjoyed at least three during the night as we explored each other’s bodies with our mouths and hands. She was an absolute sexual dynamo, releasing years of pent up sexual frustration. On that very first night, she gave me everything she could, and you should probably know what I mean by that, as she joked the next morning that she would have some trouble sitting down for breakfast. But as we laid together under furs the next morning, it felt just like it was with Haelga. Plenty of affection after a night of passion, and I was slowly but surely starting to feel myself restored to how I was before Muiri. 

“I’ll be returning to Riften today,” I told her over breakfast. 

“I understand. And I won’t use a courier to contact you. I think I could find reason to visit Riften every so often.” 

“I’d like that. But, please remember, you might meet Haelga if you do show up unannounced”

“I won’t be offended, Ragnar. I’m intrigued.”

“You share similarities. Blonde. Nordic. Beautiful.”

“And we like the sex?”

I laughed, replying, “No, you both love it.”

“I’m sure I’ll visit you quite soon, Ragnar, if it’s anything like last night.”

“It can be like that all the time and even better.”

“Definitely plenty of reason to visit Riften more often then.”

I was polite enough to walk Astrid back to the Sanctuary before returning home. Standing close to me, she reached up to stroke my cheek, a smile on her face, the sort of smile I’d seen before from certain women in my life, though I think the reason for hers was a little different. After another long kiss, holding her tightly to mine, our desire building for each other as we did, I eventually pulled away and wished her farewell. She replied again that she would be in Riften sooner rather than later.

I told no-one what I was doing on my return to Riften, but in addition to still being master of the Thieves Guild, technically at least, I was now, for all intents and purposes, an assassin.

Chapter 21: Silence Broker

Astrid didn’t lie. She found reason to visit Riften rather quickly, no more than a couple of weeks after my own visit to the Sanctuary. Of course, she knew where I lived, and Haelga was at my place when Astrid knocked on my front door. I found the two women meeting rather amusing. Haelga was blunt in her questioning as to who she was. I said she was my lover in Falkreath, and that she was my boss otherwise. Haelga didn’t ask too many questions about what I did, and although I hated lying to her, I couldn’t freely admit what I did either. 

Inviting Astrid in, the two women sat with me at the dining room, and I found it amusing how alike the two women were, at least in appearance. The conversation remained pleasant, Astrid more than aware of who Haelga was, as I’d explained who she was, while Haelga was never jealous of anyone else I was with, though did joke about the fact I’d found a woman rather similar to her in various ways. Admittedly, I would find it difficult to be with anyone even slightly similar to Muiri… 

“So will you be wishing to stay the night?” Haelga asked of Astrid. 

“That’s why I’m here. We need to talk first, but I didn’t plan on returning to Falkreath until tomorrow.” 

“Good thing I haven’t worn him out too much.” Haelga then looked at me. “Would she be interested in our room though?” 

Shrugging, I said, “I’m not sure. We’ll have to see.” 

“Room?” Astrid asked. 

“Oh, I’m sure Ragnar will find it rather fun showing you what’s in there. And, trust me on this, you might find yourself having quite a lot of fun in there too.” 

Astrid looked at me, now wondering what Haelga was talking about. “We can look later, if you want.” 

Haelga did eventually leave, putting on a little show by kissing me hard and practically feeling me up before she left, whispering not so quietly about how sore her arse was after the night before. She probably wasn’t lying, as things were very hot, heavy and rough the night before, the pair of us slowly building back up to where we were before things had originally ended. Once I was alone with Astrid, she looked at me questioningly. “What was she talking about?” 

“I can show you later, if you’d like. But what brings you here?” 

“I have news, Ragnar. I’ve taken a chance leaving the Sanctuary to bring it to you, but I’m hoping you will return with me tomorrow. Because you’re so new, and don’t know a lot about us, I find myself thinking you might be the only person I can trust.” 

“Huh? What are you talking about?” 

“It’s a long story, to do with the history of the Brotherhood.” 

“Okay, I’ll get you a drink and we’ll sit near the fire. Wine okay?” 

“It was a long ride. A cup of wine would be wonderful.” 

Once sitting together on the lounge, Astrid sitting as close as possible to me, she started to explain the Brotherhood. About Sithis. The Night Mother. The history of what had happened since the Oblivion Crisis. The destruction and loss of sanctuaries around Tamriel. She admitted that the Sanctuary in Falkreath was truly the last, and that she led what was truly the last remnants of a once ruthless but proud organisation. 

“That’s not all,” she continued, “We’ve had an arrival in the past week. A person and package from Cyrodiil.” 

“Who?” 

“The Night Mother herself. Or what’s left of her. Her sarcophagus, to be exact. And her Keeper.” 

“You don’t sound pleased about this.” 

“Between you and me, I’m not. We stopped using the five tenets long ago. But I can already sense loyalties are divided. Though the others will continue to obey my orders, I know the arrival of the Night Mother has already caused ripples of discontent, some believing we should return to our roots. None of this matters, though, as we don’t have a Listener. They are the only one to communicate with the Night Mother herself.” 

“And you’re concerned…” 

“Her Keeper, Cicero, is a fucking lunatic, Ragnar. Off the deep end. I guess it’s no surprise when you lug a corpse around, and who knows what he does with it in privacy. But it’s already obvious he does not like me at all. He’s no leader, but he will use the fact the Night Mother is now present to undermine my authority.” 

“What do you want of me?” 

“Your presence at the Sanctuary for a few days.” 

“Okay.” 

She looked at me in surprise. “I was expecting…” 

“Astrid, I like you already, and it’s not like I’m doing much else. If you want or need my help, you have it.” 

“Thank you, Ragnar. I’m not sure what I’ve done to already earn such loyalty.” I gave her a look, which made her laugh. “Well, there is that aspect, but…” 

“I can see you care, Astrid. That’s a good reason too.” 

After a couple of cups of wine, we ended up upstairs, Astrid intrigued as to the room Haelga had mentioned. She had a good giggle at a few things, though suggested that, while intrigued by one or two of the apparatuses, she’d rather keep most of our lovemaking or fucking to the bedroom, and the bed. 

We enjoyed the night together and I showed my full appreciation for her body. Her body was a thing of beauty, quite athletic and she proved to be quite flexible at times. She also had stamina, so much like that night in the inn in Falkreath, our lovemaking lasted a couple of hours, finally having to stop, a pair of heavy breathing, sweaty but rather satisfied lovers. Lying on my back, she cuddled into my side, continuing to make out as her hand stroked my chest, feeling her fingers occasionally trail along a scar or two. She had a few herself, and she explained how she had gained one or two of them. She then told the story of how she’d come to work for the Brotherhood. I wasn’t surprised by it, considering what she now did, but it was an explanation at least. 

I let Haelga know I would be leaving a few days the next morning. She knew it was primarily for work, but our relationship was now as close as before, so she whispered plenty of naughty things in my ear about what she would do to herself while I was gone, before giving me the sort of kiss that would have me wanting to carry her upstairs. She was very much a tease like that, so I simply said I would return as soon as possible, because she would be spending all night in the Dibella room upon my return. She found that prospect very exciting. 

Arriving outside the Sanctuary later that day, Astrid and I tied up our horses well away from the main road and walked inside. She stopped me near her table and gave me a little more information. All she wanted was for me to integrate with the rest of them. Talk to them. Get to know them. And subtly try and understand if they were happy about the Night Mother arriving or not. The last thing she mentioned is that I would be sleeping in her room. 

“Won’t that cause… issues?” I had to wonder. 

“They know Arnbjorn left me. They saw what he did to my face. No, it won’t cause an issue, and anyone who does have one can talk to you.” The smile on her face suggested she wouldn’t mind me defending her however I saw fit. But I was still worried. 

“Astrid, I’m not…” 

She stepped forward, closing my lips with her right hand. “I’m not looking for a replacement, Ragnar. And I know you’re not. Definitely not. But it’s obvious we like each other. Is that true?” I nodded my head. “I’m aware of your personal history. I’m not expecting anything except for you to share my bed while you are here. And while sharing my bed, I’m hoping we will enjoy each other intimately. Would you like that?” I nodded again. “That’s all I want too.” 

She removed her hand. “Okay,” I said quietly before she hugged me. “I am sorry about everything,” I added. 

“It’s not your fault. It was a long time coming, but I guess the mutual attraction and the fact I was willing to sleep with you rather quickly… Well, that’s all on me, Ragnar. You are not to blame. And my hus… Well, he is also responsible for choosing something else over his wife.”

“He was an idiot, Astrid. I’m no saint, but if it was between you and…” 

She didn’t let me finish, her mouth eager for mine, and any idea of me joining the rest of her group ended as I found myself dragged into her bedroom, door closed by her foot, and I was quickly undressed and pushed back onto her bed, where she leapt on me and… Well, let’s just say she slept very well later that night. Holding her in my arms as she drifted off to sleep, murmuring that she was happier than she’d been in a long time, I knew I had the same feelings for her that I had for Haelga. I had two blonde Nordic beauties as lovers. I would never love them like my wife, but maybe I would love them like… I’m not sure. I knew I’d never marry again. Muiri would always be my one and only. But I would treat Haelga and Astrid near enough the same. 

The next few days were spent mostly in the Sanctuary, getting to know the rest of the Brotherhood. It was rather easy to figure out where loyalties lay. Babette near enough considered Astrid her mother. Nazir would only ever follow Astrid, though respected the position of the Night Mother. Gabriella expressed her support for the arrival of the Night Mother, though figured out rather quickly why I was getting to know and speak with everyone, and assured me she still respected Astrid and her position. Festus Krex shared the same opinion as Gabriella, his opinion of Astrid significantly harsher than the Dunmer. Veezara was indifferent, respecting Astrid though intrigued as to what the arrival of the Night Mother would mean for the Brotherhood in Skyrim. 

Then there was Cicero. He was a fucking nutcase. Lunatic. I think probably a little insane. Trying to converse with him was incredibly frustrating. Most of the time, I just gave up. He didn’t exactly talk in riddles, but it was obvious rather quickly that he detested Astrid and his worship of the Night Mother verged on… Well, I wouldn’t have accused him of defiling the corpse to his face but… jokes may have been made… 

It was a few days later, lying in bed with Astrid late one night after another couple of hours of rather intense lovemaking, that we discussed what I thought. “They’re split,” I admitted, “Two back you completely, and care little about the Night Mother. Two think the arrival of the Night Mother has restored the Brotherhood and means you should relinquish leadership. The fifth doesn’t care either way.” 

“And Cicero?” she asked. 

“He’s fucking insane. And he definitely doesn’t like you. No doubt he’ll do whatever he can to undermine your authority and ensure everyone eventually follows the wishes of the Night Mother.” 

“And you?” she asked quietly. I turned her around before rolling on top of her, sliding my cock inside her again, watching the smile form on her face. I didn’t reply for a little while, enjoying the slow thrusts into her as her mouth searched for mine. “You’re trying to distract me,” she finally said, though she said that with a smile. 

“I’m yours, Astrid,” I whispered. 

That made the smile on her face only broaden, and it was only when we finished later that we continued our conversation. “I don’t trust him,” she confessed. 

“Nor do I, but what can we do?” 

“Leave it with me. I’ll think of something.” 

“Considering what I’ve already done for you, all you need do is ask.” 

I heard a soft sigh. “I’m sorry, Ragnar…” 

“For what?” 

“Losing her. Because if you were even half the man you were with her than you are with me, then little wonder…” 

Running my hands up and down the soft skin of her stomach, I simply said, “Because you’ve already proven more than deserving of everything I’m willing to give.” 

“Ragnar, can I admit something?” 

“Sure.” 

“I’m feeling a little sore and tender. It’s been a long time since my pussy has seen so much action. And longer since I had it so hard and fast at times. She’s crying enough for the moment.” 

“Want me to stop?” 

“No, but tomorrow night, you can have my arse, though only after you’ve had my mouth. Maybe you can finish on my face?” She smiled as the thought excited me. “And I think something inside me liked those ideas.” 

I rolled onto my back, taking her with me, so she rested on my chest, kissing her gently. “Well, like the rest of you, your arse is perfect,” I said softly. 

I watched her eyes close, and a couple of tears fall down her cheeks, so I held her close to me. “Why did he…” 

I shushed her. “Don’t think about him.” 

“This is all I wanted, Ragnar. My husband to be with me like this, to show how much he loved me.” She lifted her head, leaning up to kiss me. “I love you, Ragnar.” 

“Astrid…” 

“No, you don’t have to say anything. It might seem quick, but I liked you immediately. I’ll admit, when I had you lying there helplessly, I had some rather unsavoury thoughts about what I wanted to do to you. Then when we were intimate the next time I saw you, I realised what I’d been missing in my life. That night in the inn was the most love I’d felt from a man in years. And this past week, everything we’ve done, everything we’ve shared, I’ve listened to what you said. I know you love Haelga, and you may love me in your own way. Neither of us will replace who you lost, and I don’t expect either of us will ever do so. But I trust you with my life, Ragnar.” 

I kissed her as she started to ride me hard and fast, her climax arriving rather quickly, holding her again once she was finished, as she released some more pent up emotion. Little wonder, as she’d been untouched by the man she had loved most for years. I liked her immensely. Possibly even loved her. I still found it difficult to figure out my feelings after everything. I enjoyed my time with Haelga, and although it felt like it did before Muiri, a little part of me was missing. And probably always would be. 

“I can’t say those words, Astrid. But I can give you my promise.” She looked up to meet my eyes. “I will never hurt you. I will never break your trust. And, most importantly, I will protect you from anyone who tries to take you down.” 

My presence in the Sanctuary had been quickly accepted. The young vampire, Babette, found it rather amusing how quickly Astrid had moved me into her room, but considering she was three-hundred-years old, she was old enough to understand why. Everyone else was pleased just to see a new face after so many years of stagnation, though were probably smart enough to realise I was an ally of Astrid, first and foremost. Nazir joked about the fact Astrid seemed very pleased that I was present, noting that she was rather vocal during the evening. I chose to look smug instead of embarrassed, which just made him laugh. 

Everyone was given a contract while I was there, surprised at how much news did filter back to the Sanctuary about Black Sacraments being performed. Being the last of the Brotherhood, the others did find themselves sent across Tamriel to provide contracts, even into Thalmor occupied lands. At one stage, only Astrid, Cicero and I were left in the Sanctuary, so I spent most of my time around Cicero, ever more convinced he was insane, but also left plotting something, though whether alone or with people he’d managed to influence, I wasn’t sure. 

I’d been at the Sanctuary for around three weeks when I sat down with Astrid and gave her my thoughts. “There is no doubt Cicero is trying to split those loyal to you and those who wish to see the Night Mother resume her role as Matriarch of the Brotherhood.” 

“I can take a guess as to those he’s working on.” 

“He’s quite obviously insane. I mean, he’s off the fucking deep end, Astrid. Quite frankly, even I find his presence here concerning. As for the Night Mother, I guess the choice is yours. We either accept her presence here and wait for a Listener, or we somehow get rid of her and Cicero, and carry on how you want.” 

“I can’t get rid of her. Even those who claim loyalty to me still respect the Night Mother. As for Cicero, all I can ask if that you continue to observe and listen. I’ve talked to him once or twice myself, but I know he trusts me as much as I trust him in return.” 

“I’ll do what I can.” I paused, and that caught her attention. “One other thing…” 

“You want to go home for a while?” 

“Yes. I’ve been here a three weeks. I did tell Haelga I’d only be gone a few days, and quite naturally, she worries about me.” 

“Go, Ragnar. It’s fine. But don’t be gone too long… for me?” 

“Just a couple of nights. I’ve become quite used to sleeping next to you already.” 

She laughed. “Yeah, sleeping, Ragnar…” 

Returning to Riften the next day, the first place I visited was the Bunkhouse. As expected, Haelga was delighted to see me, dragged me upstairs, and I didn’t leave until a few hours later, with a promise that she would come to mine for dinner that night. Having spent so little time with the Guild in the past few months, I headed down to the Flagon, and it was nice that everyone was delighted to see me. Even Vex gave me a tight hug at my appearance. The cistern was as busy as ever, and Brynjolf showed me the vault, where nearly everything Mercer had stolen had been replaced. We had allies across Skyrim and Tamriel, and he assured me they were working to my ideals. Yes, we were thieves at heart, but we helped those even less fortunate than ourselves. Most still hated the Guild and everything we stood for, but slowly but surely, some considered us thieves but with good hearts. 

I had a chat with Delvin while I was there, letting him know what I was doing. Apparently Arnbjorn leaving Astrid had made news in the Guild, and he was more than aware of my burgeoning relationship with Astrid. He thought it was rather amusing and said I should just enjoy myself. “Astrid is a fine woman, boss. I can admit I’ve fancied her from afar for a long time. Wouldn’t give me the time of day.” 

“She was with Arnbjorn?” 

“No, it wasn’t that. Thieves and assassins don’t mix too well. And while I understand what they do, there’s a part of me that finds it a little horrifying. In my mind, what we do is rather victimless. We don’t commit murder. That’s the business of the Brotherhood, and I wonder how much blood is even on her hands.” He leaned in close, as he added quietly, “Just be careful, boss. Even though you’re not here much, it’s your legacy that keeps this place going. We work by your ideals, and this is what’s kept us going so far.” 

“Thanks, Delvin. I think that’s the nicest thing you’ve said to me.” 

“None of us will tell us what to do, boss. But I can give you one piece of advice. Watch your back. At the end of the day, you are with a bunch of cutthroats.” 

Haelga arrived for dinner that night, and after I’d taken her coat, to reveal she was nude underneath, eating dinner was quickly forgotten, as she took the lead, heading straight towards the Dibella room. We had dinner much later than planned, only when Haelga was left sweating heavily and very sore. She sat on my lap as we ate dinner, my cock still buried in her arse, which caused me to chuckle half the time, while she near enough had an orgasm halfway through dinner, since she wouldn’t stop moving. 

We returned to the Dibella room after dinner for a couple of hours more fun, and it was rather amusing when I carried her back to the bed as I’d worn her out completely. But the smile on her face was worth it as she snuggled into my chest, and it was while she was half asleep that I told her how I felt about her again. She looked up and smiled, told me she felt the same way, as she always had, and fell asleep against me. 

She was still smiling the next morning. I thought I had to clarify what I said, but it was her turn to shush me, as she knew how I felt about her. It would never be like it was with Muiri. She knew how much I’d loved her, and she knew how it felt to have your heart ripped out when you lost them. So the love we had for each other would never be the same, but we would still have each other. And I would have other women too. She might have the occasional man if I wasn’t around, as she knew I still didn’t mind that fact. 

“And Astrid?” she wondered over breakfast. 

“Having spent a few weeks with her, I can admit there are feelings.” 

“Understandable, as I could see that she really liked you in return.” 

“Well, I have two beautiful blonde Nordic women to satisfy now.” 

“Only two women?” she laughed. 

“Give me time, Haelga. I haven’t done a lot of travelling lately. I might have to return to Whiterun soon. I remember a good friend I made there who might be interested in rekindling a potential romance.” 

“A woman in every city? 

“Would that worry you?” 

“Only if I didn’t get to see you very often, Ragnar. Otherwise, I’ll take what I can get.” 

“As I’ve always said, if you find someone else, Haelga…” 

“I don’t want marriage or children, Ragnar. My opinion on that hasn’t changed. I’ve loved, I’ve lost. I love again, but we both know it’s different for both of us this time. Can anything replace that first love?” 

I had to admit she was absolutely right. So we agreed to simply enjoy each moment we were together and damn what anyone else thought. 

The third and last night I spent in Riften before returning the Sanctuary was with Karliah at the Hall. We hadn’t seen each other that much, particularly while I was married, so we used the time as an excuse to catch up all the news. She’d made a real home for herself in the Hall, though I was a little saddened to hear she did find herself a little lonely at times, as although she’d recruited a couple of Nightingales, she simply didn’t allow herself to get close to anyone else. 

Except me, as she freely admitted to missing me terribly. So I guess it was of little surprise that I ended up spending the night. That hadn’t been my intention at all, but after a couple of drinks, we ended up making out on her bed. And once she was naked and my face was in a certain position on her body, sex was always going to follow. We had a lot of fun that night, and although we made no promises to do it again, we agreed that, if the mood took us, we wouldn’t deny each other the pleasure. I returned to Riften before leaving for the Sanctuary. Walking into the Bunkhouse, Haelga took one look at me and laughed. “Karliah?” 

“How do you know?” 

“You have a look on your face after enjoying that sweet little Dunmer.” 

“It won’t be a constant…” 

She walked towards and hugged me. “I told you I don’t care, Ragnar. But are you leaving soon?” 

“I’ve got to head back to Falkreath. I promised Astrid I’d only be gone a couple of days. There are things that need doing.” 

“How long this time?” I could only shrug. “Well, I’ll look forward to when you do. And I’ll miss you. And Ragnar?”

“Yes?”

 “I love you.” I wanted to say those words back to her. I did love Haelga. But, sorry for repeating myself, it wasn’t the same as Muiri. And I still thought Haelga deserved more than I could ever give her. I didn’t hesitate, wasn’t given the chance to even begin to stutter a response, as she immediately hugged and kissed me. “I know you feel the same way, and it’s okay. Because I know you didn’t just lose her. You lost everything.” 

I hugged her tightly to my body. “I won’t hurt you again, Haelga. That I can promise. This thing between us won’t end again.” 

“And that’s the only thing I want to hear from you. Whatever the case, I’m yours, Ragnar.” 

I leaned back and caressed her cheek, staring into her eyes. The love and devotion returned were things I simply didn’t deserve. So I put everything I felt into the last kiss I gave her before I left. If she doubted even for a moment how I truly felt, I hope that kiss told her everything she needed to know. 

Part of me didn’t particularly want to leave her there and then, but she escorted me to the door and, after kissing my cheek, told me I should go, but that should would be waiting for my hopefully inevitable return. I didn’t give many promises, as they were always hard to keep, but I promised Haelga I would return. 

Returning to Falkreath after dark, as my arrival was delayed as my goodbye to Haelga took a while, but Astrid was still pleased to see me. She usually kept it professional in front of everyone else, but once in the bedroom with the door closed, she was all over me with her kisses. I was left thinking she missed me, and she did say as much once she finally took a step back. 

“I’m glad to see you, Ragnar. I’ve learned a thing or two while you’ve been gone.” 

We took a seat at the small table in the bedroom, ensuring the door was closed, before our conversation continued. “Okay, what have you learned?” 

“Cicero is up to something, I’m sure of it. But I can’t figure out what. I need your help.” 

“What do you need?” 

The smile on her face was beautiful, lighting up her eyes in such a way, I felt my heart beat a little faster. If she doubted what I’d do for her, she was about to learn I’d do nearly anything. And it didn’t matter if it was just for her or was for the Brotherhood. “I need you to hide in his room and find out who he’s conspiring with. I have no doubt he intends to drive me away, even kill me. I don’t trust him at all, and I’m sure he’s trying to influence the others.” 

“Okay. When?” 

“It’s rather late, and he’s in there sleeping now. We’ll do it soon, at some time tomorrow.” 

“So what would you like to do until then?” 

My face was buried in her arse about five minutes later, and she was definitely sore the next morning. I was feeling rather tender myself, as she wanted it harder than I expected, but when she was underneath me, her calves against my shoulders, as I buried myself harder and faster with each passing minute, the look in her eyes was exactly the same as I would see in Haelga’s. I would stop and lean down further to kiss her, proving how flexible she really was. Adding to that I’d go even deep inside her, and it was little wonder she even managed an orgasm from doing that. I absolutely loved Haelga, despite feeling incapable of saying it because I was pathetic. There was no doubt I was falling in love with Astrid too. She knew, and like Haelga, didn’t expect me to say anything. Saying those three little words while I was buried in her arse did bring me to a stop, as part of me wanted to laugh at the fact we were doing that and she expressed those feelings, but it still made me feel good about our continually burgeoning relationship. 

The next morning, after we made love again, proving Astrid was just as insatiable as I could be, as I’d be ready to go at the drop of a hat, I wandered around chatting with others until I saw Cicero leave where he had the Night Mother positioned. Walking into the room, I noticed there were few places to hide and listen into any of his conversations. Whether he was actually conspiring with anyone, I couldn’t be sure, but I wanted to put Astrid’s mind at ease. 

Then I looked at the sarcophagus. “Fuck it,” I muttered to myself. 

Opening it up, I was expecting to be hit with the horrendous smile of a rotting corpse. While I wouldn’t say it smelled fresh, it wasn’t as horrific as I thought it would be. Then I heard Cicero approach, so I quickly pulled the lid shut and I was stuck in the darkness with the Night Mother. It was fucking creepy. 

What was slightly creepier was the fact that Cicero rambled on talking to the Night Mother. If I needed any further proof he was insane, there it was, but I could almost understand why. He was desperate to hear her voice. I didn’t understand what a Listener was, but I assumed that, somehow, she spoke to someone. I’d heard of enough crazy shit to know such a thing was possible. 

Then I heard a voice, and I’ll admit I almost pissed and shit my pants. “Poor Cicero. Dear Cicero. Such a humble servant. But he will never hear my voice. For he is not the Listener.” 

I glanced at the corpse, and shook my head, figuring I was probably going as nuts as Cicero outside. I didn’t just hear a voice. Did I? Cicero continued to ramble on about hearing the Night Mother speak. Then I heard the same voice. 

“Oh, but I will speak. I will speak to you. For you are the one. Yes, you. You, who shares my iron tomb, who warms my ancient bones. I give you this task. You are to journey to Volunruud. Speak with Amaund Motierre.” 

I was fairly sure I wasn’t going crazy now. But the Listener? I was a fucking nobody! Well, maybe not a nobody. I was Guild Master for a pack of thieves. Why would I be chosen to be the Listener of the Brotherhood? I’d just joined the group. Why wasn’t someone like Astrid more worthy? Or Festus Krex, who’d made it quite clear where his allegiance lay since the arrival of the Night Mother. 

Then the lid burst open, blinking rapidly as my eyes adjusted to the light. And there was Cicero, a look of murder on his face and in his eyes. “What? What treachery! Defiler! Debaser and defiler! You have violated the sanctity of the Night Mother's tomb! Explain yourself! Speak, worm!” 

I stepped forward, pushing his backwards at the same time. “Back off, clown, lest you find my sword buried in your gut. The Night Mother just spoke to me.” 

“She... She spoke to you? More treachery! More trickery and deceit! You lie! The Night Mother speaks only to the Listener! And there is... no... Listener!” 

“Darkness rises when silence falls. That’s what the Night Mother told me to tell you.” 

The blank look on his face suggested I shouldn’t know that phrase, or at least those words in that particular order. “She... She said that? She said those words... to you? 'Darkness rises when silence dies'? But those are the words. The Binding Words. Written in the Keeping Tomes. The signal so I would know. Mother's only way of talking to sweet Cicero...” 

“That’s what she said to me.” 

He started to dance like a fool. “Then... it is true! She is back! Our Lady is back! She has chosen a Listener! She has chosen you!” He laughed like a maniac as he added, “All hail the Listener!” I thought he was about to step forward to embrace me, so I raised my hands to ensure he didn’t think about it. 

He kept rambling on, no doubt drawing attention. And it wasn’t a surprise when Astrid burst through the door no more than a minute later. My eyes immediately went to her, and I noticed the concern when she looked at me, before they turned to fury when they looked at Cicero. “By Sithis, this ends now! Back away, fool! Whatever you've been planning is over!” She looked at me, her eyes softening as I stepped towards her, her to me, “Are you all right? I heard the commotion. Who was Cicero talking to? Where's the accomplice?” She glanced away again. “Reveal yourself, traitor!” she demanded harshly. 

Cicero was still giddy, dancing away. “I spoke only to the Night Mother! I spoke to the Night Mother, but she didn't speak to me. Oh no. She spoke only to him! To the Listener!” 

Astrid looked at me, the same concern in her eyes. But I noticed something else… “What? The Listener? What are you going on about? What is this lunacy?” 

Before I could answer, Cicero cut in. “It's true, it's true! The Night Mother has spoken! The silence has been broken! The Listener has been chosen!” 

I needed to nip this in the bud now, so I grabbed her hand and escorted her back to her bedroom. Closing the door, I sat her down on the bed, sitting down next to her. “Astrid, she spoke to me, but this changes nothing.” 

“But if you are…” 

“I don’t care. I am yours, Astrid.” 

“This will change things, Ragnar. There hasn’t been a Listener for decades. If you truly are…” She looked at me, judging my eyes. “She spoke to you? As in gave you specific instructions?” 

“She did. And Cicero, despite the fact he’s a fucking lunatic, confirmed the words I said. It’s why he’s… happy.” Astrid slumped, rubbing the temple of her forehead with her fingers. I grabbed her other hand, giving it a squeeze. “Astrid, trust me as much as I trust you.” 

She looked at me, more hurt than anything. “It’s not that…” 

“I follow your word above all when it comes to the Brotherhood, Astrid. Do you want to know what the Night Mother told me?” She nodded and gestured for me to continue. “I am to go to Volunruud and seek out a man named Amaund Motierre. If you want me to go, I will. But if you don’t want me to go, then I won’t.” 

“Stay with me tonight, and I’ll decide in the morning.” 

I knew what she wanted from me that night, so we spent the rest of the day apart. I suggested I speak to Cicero, to at least understand what it all meant. She was happy for me to do so, as she knew where my loyalty truly lied. I’d never have to assure her again. 

Cicero was still absolutely fucking nuts, but he was certainly a lot friendlier with me now that I was the Listener. I don’t add ‘apparently’ to describing myself, as I know the Night Mother spoke to me, as strange as it may sound. But while I didn’t tell him straight where my loyalties truly lay, I think he understood I wasn’t just going to throw Astrid to the wolves and perhaps take control of the Brotherhood. Astrid was my… Well, Babette had called Astrid her matron. I wouldn’t describe her as that, but though Astrid was my lover, my confidant, she was also my leader when it came to the Brotherhood. I was happy to follow her word. 

I suggested we all eat dinner together that night, Astrid agreeing that it was probably a good idea. She received questions about what would happen now that a Listener had been found, but she allowed me to answer that question, replying that, as far as I was concerned, nothing changed. The Night Mother might speak with me, but Astrid still gave orders. The only one who grumbled about that was Festus. Astrid and I shared a glance, but I knew we wouldn’t do anything about it unless he decided to make his move first. I knew that if he betrayed Astrid, I would kill him. 

Astrid and I only joined together in her bedroom once everyone else had retired for the evening. Once the bedroom door closed, she wasted no time taking off her skin tight armour so she was standing naked in front of me, her excitement already obvious. Two perfect breasts. A flat, toned stomach. Blonde patch of hair above her sex. A pair of the most perfect legs on a woman possible. The look in my eyes probably told her all my thoughts and more as she stepped towards me. My armour disappeared perhaps just as quickly as hers, and once my very erect cock was free, she dropped to her knees. 

“Now, Ragnar, this is what is going to happen. You will follow my every word?” 

“Of course, Astrid.” 

“So, I will suck your cock until you cum, preferably in my mouth. Then you will lick my pussy until I cum in return. Then you’ll fuck me until I cum again.” She licked up and down my shaft before finishing, “Then you will take me in the arse, where you may finish a second time.” 

“You’re bossy.”

“Are you complaining?” she asked before licking up my shaft again, teasing the head of my cock with her tongue. 

“No. I kinda like it actually. I love a woman who knows what she wants.” 

She licked up and down again. “Ragnar, I love you.” 

I leaned down to stroke her cheek and through her hair, closing her eyes as her head moving towards my palm. “I love you too, Astrid.” 

Her eyes opened wide and the smile made my heart flutter. There was no doubt she was in love with me. It was a nice feeling, a similar feeling something inside that I hadn’t felt since Muiri. I felt it with Haelga too, but I guess I just didn’t want to face facts. Maybe I could truly love again? Maybe I could love two women wholeheartedly? 

But first there was what Astrid was doing, as she happily swallowed my cock, her nose eventually bumping into me. But she didn’t need to swallow my whole length to get me off, though she was willing to do it time and again. She was different to Haelga, but no less enthusiastic, and as she blew me, I could her hand gently fondling herself at the same time. I would let her know how good it felt, how much I wanted to fuck her afterwards, but most importantly, how much I wanted to cum in her mouth, suggesting I’d cum elsewhere later on. 

When I came, she barely spilled a drop, ensuring her lips were clamped tightly as I felt a few spurts fire into her mouth. It was the kind of knee weakening orgasm every man loved, and once I was done, I had to take a seat on the nearby bed. Astrid sat before me, still on her knees, resting her head against one of my legs. The same look of love and devotion I saw in Haelga’s… 

Picking her up, she squealed as I threw her on the bed, dragging her forward by her legs, before burying my face between them. She moaned loudly when my tongue touched her, soon pressing herself down and rubbing herself against me as much as I was eating her out. At the same time, she was rather vocal, another reminder of Haelga, though perhaps not as rude. She just let me know what she liked and how much she liked it. 

Placing my hands on the back of her legs, I pushed them wide and apart, leaving her completely spread, dropping down to tease that puckered little hole of hers. She squirmed when I did that. “Later,” she breathed. 

“Just wanted to tease you,” I said, before returning to where she wanted me most. 

“I’d rather your cock there.” 

Bringing her to orgasm was quite simple, not to sound too arrogant. Though I teased her, not actually bringing her to climax at least three times before she finally groaned, “Make me fucking cum, Ragnar!” Her eyes were looking down at mine from where my mouth and tongue were still bringing her pleasure, the desire in them causing my cock to spring to life almost immediately. 

So I relented and helped make her cum. She was rather complimentary as she climaxed, and she couldn’t take more than one, helping me up so I could kiss her, both her hands running through my hair as her tongue did plenty of things in my mouth that made my cock harder, if possible. 

Shuffling so we could at least be slightly comfortable, I slid my cock inside her, earning a grateful smile, as she wrapped arms and legs around me. This wasn’t going to be fucking, not yet. For now, it was gentle and tender, an expression of the love we now shared, with plenty of kissing as her hands ran up and down my back, murmured compliments of my physique. Astrid was tight, hot and very wet, and I’d learned over the time we’d been together she loved sex just as much as myself. Just as much as Haelga. I had good luck when it came to women and their desires matching mine. Or maybe it was just me? 

Rolling onto my back, taking her with me, I quite happily lay back and watched her bounce up and down on my cock. “By Sithis, your cock is wonderful,” she stated. 

“What I’m looking at right now is pretty damned fine.” It was, as her breasts jiggled as she bounced, and the joy on her face simply made me smile whenever she looked at me. 

And in that position, I knew she was going to cum again. Nearly all women I had been with did climax in that position. Astrid eventually changed the way she was riding me, sitting forward so her hands were placed on my chest, her eyes staring into mine with an intensity I could only remember on a few times… from someone else… 

“I love you,” she whispered. 

“I know, Astrid. I feel the same way.” 

She kept riding, the smile as forming, though she asked, “You do?” 

I nodded, reaching forward to bring her face towards mine, laying a soft kiss on her lips. “I do.” 

Leaning back, she rode me as hard and fast as possible, and I knew she was now desperate for another climax. Bending my legs and grabbing her tightly by the hips, I started to match her bounces. She looked at me with surprise as she screamed about, then begged for me to fuck her as she continued to bounce as hard as possible. 

I’m sure she woke the entire Sanctuary when she climaxed again, continuing to ride me until she simply couldn’t take anymore, and I gently pulled her down so she laid against me, feeling her take a series of breaths, running my hands up and down her back, feeling her shudder at my touch as she was still sensitive. “By Sithis, Ragnar, will it always be this good?” 

“I bloody hope so!” 

We both had a good chuckle as she snuggled into me. “Give me a few minutes, then you can fuck my arse.” 

“I love the fact you’re so blunt sometimes.” 

“And the fact your cock just throbbed inside me would suggest you love the idea of fucking my arse.” 

“Yes. Yes, I do love the idea.” 

“As I said, Ragnar, I am yours as much as you are mine. My body is yours.” 

“I might have to mark your body to make it truly mine.” 

“How? A bite on my neck or cum on my face? Or something else entirely?” 

“I like the cum on the face idea.” 

“Tomorrow morning then.” 

She eventually slid off me, lying flat on the bed as she wiggled her butt, suggesting what she wanted next. There was already a bottle waiting on the bedside table, so I gave her a massage first, ensuring my cock laid in the valley of her arse cheeks before I finally positioned myself so I could eat her out first. She loved that, and loved it even more when I started to use my fingers to get her ready. 

Once I was lubed up, I slowly slid inside her, resting most of my body against hers, as she said she wanted to feel my breath in her ears or on her neck as I fucked her. I did surprise her, not being as gentle as I could when inserting my cock, crying out slightly though turning her head to show me her smile. “Well, looks like I’m in for a good time, Ragnar.” 

I didn’t reply, just sliding more cock inside her until my entire length was buried. “That’s my whole length,” I growled into my ear. 

“So big,” she whispered. 

“Sure you want it how I think you want it?” 

“Please,” she pleaded. 

I pulled back and thrust into her hard. She moaned loudly, if not grunted a little. “Sure?” I asked again. I was only teasing. I knew what she wanted. She turned her head to show her smile again. 

“Fuck me, Ragnar.” 

Wiggling her butt, she lay down flat but lifted her arse slightly for a moment, moaning again, as I put my lips to her ear. “This is going to hurt,” I whispered. 

“I don’t mind,” she whispered back. 

I started slow, letting her get used to my cock driving into her. She moaned each time, though turned her head so I could watch her eyes. She grimaced occasionally, but the smile remained on her face. Slowly turned up the pace, I was soon driving into her hard and fast, amazed that she could take it. Nothing like what I did with Haelga, but it was still surprising Astrid liked it how she did, though I’ll be honest, I think she did it for me too. 

There was no way I was going to last too long having already made love, and I whispered that I could feel another climax approaching. She just asked me to bury myself once I needed to and cum inside her. “Oh, there was nowhere else I was going to finish,” I said. 

“God, I love you,” she whispered. 

“You’re only say that because I’m buried in your arse.” 

“And I hope you’re there more often going forward. I’ve found a real love for it since our first time.” 

“I’ll never say no.” 

“Neither will I. So, fuck me hard and cum in me.” 

She got both over the next couple of minutes, enough so that I’m sure she was going to be sore in the morning, and once I enjoyed my second climax, I had to rest against her, barely keeping myself from squashing her. She managed to lift her head to kiss my cheek. “Thank you,” she whispered. 

“For what?” 

“For saying those words. I wasn’t sure if you’d ever be capable of telling me how you really feel.” 

I didn’t reply until I’d pulled out and helped clean her up. Facing each other, my arms wrapped around her, I kissed her before our conversation continued. “I had to tell you otherwise I’d drive myself stupid.” 

“Go to Volunruud, Ragnar. Leave tomorrow. I trust you to do the right thing by the Brotherhood.” 

“I’ll do the right thing by you too.” 

Snuggling into my chest, she murmured, “I have a feeling that I don’t deserve this, and don’t deserve you, Ragnar. Not after everything.” 

“You made a choice, Astrid. That’s all you did.” I lifted her chin with a finger and met her eyes. “I’m glad you chose me. I make no apologies for that.” 

With a smile, she said, “I’m glad I made that choice too. Too bad there’s no way to end a marriage unless one of the married partners dies. So, while I am estranged from my husband, as I have no idea where he now is, technically this is still considered infidelity.” 

“But do you care?” 

“After what we just shared?” She laughed loudly before adding, “By Sithis, not at all. I don’t care what anyone thinks now.” She buried her head into my chest again before stating, “You’re the one I trust above all. It’s funny saying that, considering how long I’ve know the rest of them.” 

“What have I done to earn that trust?” 

“You’ve never lied, about who you are and what you want. It’s rare in this business to have such honesty.” 

“Hopefully I’ll return with a decent contract.” 

Breakfast was amusing the next morning, as Astrid found sitting down a little difficult at first. No-one asked why though I received one or two amused glances, as it wasn’t difficult to figure out why, and the smile on her face would have told the story. She was a happy, content, well fucked woman. 

She joined me outside as I prepared my horse to leave. I wasn’t dressed in Brotherhood armour, not yet. I would only wear that when meeting the contact. Astrid wasn’t exactly sure where Volunruud was, but the maps we checked suggested it was far to the north, so I’d be gone for a few days at least. Her last instruction was for me to be safe, and I assured her I’d done plenty of similar things before, though I now had a good reason to ensure I didn’t do anything too stupid. 

Making it to Whiterun that evening, I asked around the Bannered Mare, and was told Volunruud was a Nordic ruin, almost directly to the north of the city, just over the border in a region of Skyrim called The Pale. Choosing to stay in the inn for the evening, I found myself joined by Ysolda, and it was just like old times, as we chatted, drank and danced together. She knew I was a widow but I think I left enough of a suggestion that I had moved on. Escorting her home that evening, she was apparently keen not to lose an opportunity like before, directly asking me to join her inside for the night. I wasted no time taking her into her bedroom, and I knew I would have a lover in Whiterun going forward. 

I made it to Volunruud not later than lunchtime the next day. Like other ruins I’d explored before, it was full of draugr, though they were already dead. It took a couple of walking down dead ends to find him, but I eventually found him in an empty chamber, guarded by a man in Imperial uniform. He would only have seen my eyes now that I was dressed in Brotherhood uniform. The army man looked nervous, though a glance into his eyes and a nod, my arms spread wide, suggested I was not a threat. 

Walking forward until I stood only a half dozen paces away, I said, “The Night Mother heard your pleas, Motierre.” 

He was more nervous than I would expect. Incredibly jumpy, to be honest, stumbling over his words as he replied. “So it would seem. Well, I won't waste your time. I would like to arrange a contract. Several, actually. I daresay, the work I'm offering has more significance than anything your organisation has experienced in, well, centuries.” 

“You have my interest. Continue.” 

“As I said, I want you to kill several people. You'll find the targets, as well as their manners of elimination, quite varied. I'm sure someone of your disposition will probably even find it enjoyable. But you should know that these killings are but a means to an end. For they pave the way to the most important target. The real reason I'm speaking with a cutthroat in the bowels of this detestable crypt.” 

“And who is that target?” 

He couldn’t help the smirk as he said the two words I almost expected. 

“The Emperor!”

Chapter 22: Murder Inc.

I went over everything Motierre told me as I rode back to the Sanctuary. The book of notes he also provided, if handed to the authorities, would have brought him and any of his associates down if I’d chosen to do so. The amulet he’d given as payment I didn’t recognise, but it looked exquisite, wondering just who the man I’d met exactly was. But the prospect of killing the Emperor himself? I was no Stormcloak supporter, but I wasn’t exactly a supporter of the current Imperial line either. I hadn’t been alive when the Septims had been alive, but it was when their line was extinguished that everything had begun to crumble. So killing the Emperor didn’t exactly bother me, if I was the one chosen to perform that operation. 

Astrid was happy to see me upon my return, though more eager to hear what I had to report. We sat down at her table and I showed her everything I’d been given. To say she was excited would be an understatement, though the amulet intrigued her. She knew of only one person who might know what it was. “I’m sure you know Delvin, considering you’re the Guild Master.” 

“Yes, he’s suggested before that he knows who you are.” 

“He’s carried affection for me a long time now. I’ll admit I might have used that to my advantage once or twice over the years.” 

I couldn’t help chuckle. “And he knows too.” 

“Can you take the amulet to Riften for me and let me know what he thinks? If it’s what I think it could be, then we have quite the little mischief maker on our hands.” 

I left for Riften immediately. It necessitated an overnight stop under the stars, but Astrid was keen to know just what we had on our hands, so I didn’t mind and a night in camp gave me plenty of time to think about things, including my relationships with Astrid and Haelga. After stabling my horse, I headed straight for the Flagon, though part of me did want to see Haelga first, though I’d go see her afterwards. As always, everyone was happy to see me appear, receiving plenty of questions as to what I was up to. Most were aware that I was working for the Brotherhood, though I also had one or two insinuations about my relationship with Astrid. I didn’t bother denying it, much to the amusement of Delvin. 

Sitting down with him, we enjoyed a tankard together first as he asked after Astrid. He also had information about Arnbjorn. “He’s still in Skyrim, that much I know.” 

“Exact location?” 

Delvin nodded, not needing to ask why I wanted to know. “I’m not sure, boss. You want to know?” I nodded in return. “I’ll find out what I can. We have enough friends around Skyrim to help us out nowadays.” A smirk formed as he asked, “So you really like her?” 

“I do, Delvin. And I will do whatever is necessary to protect her from threats inside or outside the Brotherhood.” 

He leaned forward, resting a hand on my shoulder. “Good to see you back on your feet, boss. It’s been a long time.” 

“Thank, Delvin. Now, the amulet.” 

He pulled back the cloth and whistled. “Where oh where did you get this?” He looked at me, shook his head. “Don't answer. I don't want to know.” 

“So, what is it exactly?” 

“This is an amulet of the Emperor's Elder Council. One of these is specially crafted for each member. Worth a small fortune. Ain't somethin' you'd give up lightly. Look, it ain't my business to tell the Dark Brotherhood its business, but if you killed a member of the Elder Council, you'd better belie…” 

“We haven’t killed anyone yet. What Astrid wants to know is what it’s worth and will you buy it?” 

“Buy it? This? An Elder Council amulet? Oh yes. Oh yes, indeed,” he stated excitedly, “Wait just one moment…” he added as he got to his feet and disappeared. Returning a couple of minutes later, he handed over a sealed letter, which I wouldn’t open when I returned to Astrid. “It's a letter of credit. Usable, by Astrid only, for any service or item I can provide. As per our standard arrangement. You bring that back to your lovely mistress. With my regards.” 

“Mistress?" 

“I can call her your lover to be more accurate.” 

“You wouldn’t be wrong.” 

I stayed in the Flagon for a few hours, enjoying a couple of tankards with everyone. I even flirted with Vex for a little bit. She knew what I was doing, and returned the flirting, leading to plenty of laughter from both of us, and jokes from everyone else. I think there was still a desire somewhere buried inside both of us to perhaps make that leap, but she knew of my relationships otherwise, and I had a feeling she didn’t just want to be another notch. I respected that, so I would endeavour to remain professional with her. 

The Bunkhouse did eventually call, heading upstairs at sunset. Haelga was busy at work when I entered, wrapping my arms around her and burying my face in her neck. She jumped slightly before realising it was me, dropping the broom and turning to embrace me. “Dinner at the Bee and Barb?” I asked. 

“Then we’ll go home to yours?” 

“Of course.” 

“I’ll be there in an hour.” 

“I’ll wait here. I’ll watch you work.” 

Ever just sat and watched a woman clean up? I’m not sure what it was, perhaps Haelga was making it seem… hell, I’d say even more erotic, but I found watching her work rather exciting. And she seemed to notice, as she eventually sat on my lap so we could make out for a little while. “Knew it would work,” she admitted a little later. I could only laugh as she stood up, reached under her dress and handed me her panties. No surprise they were wet, and I took a deep sniff of her scent. That just made me hard and she had to kick me out, otherwise she wouldn’t finish her work. 

After dinner at the Bee and Barb, where we enjoyed a roast dinner and a bottle of wine, we spent time chatting and flirting before we finally gave into temptation and headed back to my place. I was thinking she would just be interested in some lovemaking in the bedroom, but no. She wanted the Dibella room, though only to start with. Once satisfied in there, she admitted to wanting something a little more tender and loving afterwards. 

I didn’t hurry back to the Sanctuary, choosing to spend a day with Haelga. Leaving Svana to look after the Bunkhouse, I took her south of Lake Honrich, where we enjoyed a picnic on the shores of the lake before some rather public lovemaking in sunlight. There was something very exciting about having Haelga completely naked either under or on top of me during daylight hours, in such an exposed region, as we were barely a few metres away from the main road. If anyone passed by, we certainly didn’t know. 

We only left Riften for the day, returning to my place again for the evening. I cooked dinner for Haelga, earning plenty of compliments for my cooking as we enjoyed some fresh mammoth steak, potatoes and vegetables. As we sat together on the balcony watching the sun go down, she cuddled into me as the wind picked up slightly, providing a chill to the air. 

“Can I be honest, Ragnar?” 

“Of course.” 

“I really missed this while you were gone.” 

“I know it was difficult for you. But I gave her my word. I couldn’t break it.” 

“I know how much you loved her, and how much she meant to you. But were you ever tempted?” 

“Once or twice, whenever I saw you walking around town, and I could see you were sad, as I knew what would put a smile on your face. And I’ll be honest myself, I don’t think Muiri would have minded if I had. But then I remember what caused me to leave Cyrodiil…” 

“I’m sorry she’s no longer here, Ragnar. And I mean that with all my heart.” 

“I know, Haelga. And thank you. I’m glad you were so ready to accept me back in your life.” 

“I still loved you, Ragnar. I would have taken you back in an instant.” 

“I love you too.” 

She was quiet for a little while. “I love hearing you tell me that again. And I know you never really stopped loving me, deep down in your heart,” she said quietly, “Can you say that again as we make love in a minute?” 

I did just that. There was no Dibella room that night. There was only myself, Haelga, and the bed. Kissing, caressing, lovemaking, a lot of sweating, panting, moaning, compliments, whispered confessions of love, a few climaxes, and Haelga in my arms, spooning against me as she drifted off to sleep. I whispered again before she did that I loved her. My feelings for her were the same I felt for Astrid. I’m not sure about others, but I could easily love two or more women at once. Maybe I was just a greedy bastard. Maybe I didn’t quite know what love was, though I’m fairly sure I did, considering I’d married and given up nearly everything for her… 

She knew I would have to return to Falkreath the next morning, though that didn’t make our parting any easier. It was a little harder each time to leave her, as I thoroughly enjoyed her company, and not just the sex. Sure, I loved the fact that we made love or fucked every night we were together, but I would have happily just slept beside her… Though I’d have given into temptation eventually. She walked with me to the stables outside the city walls, only asking as always for me to be careful. And I promised her, as I had started to do, that I would return to her once whatever job I was doing was complete. 

It was dark by the time I made it to the Sanctuary, joining everyone as they were sat down for dinner. I took a seat near Astrid, a glance between us the only thing required to let her know I had the news she wanted. As for everyone else, they figured I’d either been on a job or had returned home for a day. They didn’t ask too many questions. If I wanted to share a story, I would if I chose to. 

Joining Astrid in her bedroom later, she made sure we had complete privacy before I told her everything. “So, what did Delvin say?” 

I handed her the letter first. She whistled and showed it to me too, assuming that he had bought the amulet. “Fifteen thousand septims? Fuck me!” I exclaimed. 

“Later,” she said with a laugh, “What about the amulet?” 

“Let’s say it’s specially made for members of the Elder Council.” 

“The Elder Council! Oh, now that explains quite a bit. Motierre, you naughty, naughty boy. Hiring the Dark Brotherhood to help you rise beyond your station. Delicious.” 

“So if we kill the Emperor, he, what, has a chance at the crown?” 

“Unlikely, but no doubt he believes he’ll have influence over whoever does take the throne next.” She opened up the letter from Motierre, reading that alongside the small booklet I’d also been given. “Well, well, well, he certainly has plenty of plans for us.” 

“What sort of plans?” 

She looked at me with a grin. The sort of grin that suggested she was finding all of this rather amusing. “I hope you have something nice to wear, Ragnar, because you're going to a wedding.” 

“Good thing I don’t mind them. When, where and who is the target?” 

She leaned across to kiss my cheek. “Oh, my newest recruit knows the right questions. No point asking why, though I guess it’s easy to figure out, right?” 

I kissed her back, and we forgot about everything for a couple of minutes, particularly once one of my hands wandered under the band of the trousers. She moaned into my mouth before breaking the kiss. “Anyone would think you have a one track mind, Ragnar.” 

“Maybe I find the idea of killing for you exciting. Can you explain what you want with my fingers inside you?” 

She took a deep breath and smiled. “I’ll try my best. So, you have to kill the bride at her wedding, or at least at the reception afterwards. The target is…” She had to stop as she needed to moan, her body starting to gyrate at what I was doing. “The target is…” She trailed off again, “Oh, Ragnar,” she breathed. 

“Tell me what I need to do, Astrid,” I breathed into her ear. 

She didn’t tell me at first, her mouth desperate for mine. She finally broke away to continue. “Vittoria Vici. She oversees the East Empire Company's business holdings in Solitude. The wedding is being held in that city, at the Temple of the Divines.” She had to stop and take a deep breath. “Ragnar, you need to…” 

“Continue, Astrid. Only when you’re done will you get what we both want.” 

“Tease,” she moaned, though she smiled, “Her death will cause an uproar, which is exactly what we want.” She trailed off again as she finally needed to lie down. I wasn’t doing anything other than gently sliding a couple of fingers into her, but there’s no doubt she found the whole idea exciting too. “Ragnar, once I’m done explaining, we’ll do everything, right?” 

“Just tell me,” I said quietly. 

“Vici is likely to address her guests frequently, as is the wedding custom. Kill her when she does that, and I promise you a significant bonus.” 

“Oh, what sort of bonus? The only thing I want is you, Astrid.”

 “Oh god,” she cried quietly, her body now gently bucking against my fingers. I still kept the pace gentle, though I was now hard as a rock. “Ragnar, please…” she pleaded. 

“Not until you tell me everything.” 

“A public kill is required. How you do that is up to you. Your choice, so long as it's loud and messy. Because of the current political climate, people are going to assume the murder is related to the bad blood between the Legion and Stormcloaks. In any event, when Vici dies, it's going to be complete pandemonium.” 

I removed her boots and trousers, exposing her glistening pussy to the candle light. She was soaking wet by now, and I returned my fingers to her sex, teasing her relentlessly. “What else?” I breathed in to her ear. 

“I need your mouth there,” she cried, kissing me desperately. 

“Not until you’ve told me. Why Vici? What makes her important?” 

“Vittoria Vici is the first cousin to our dear Emperor, Titus Mede II. Vici has obvious Imperial connections. Her husband has ties to the Stormcloaks. Their union is a step toward reconciliation. So if there's a murder at the wedding... Not only will it stall the peace process -- it will send shockwaves throughout the entire Empire. The Emperor's hand will be forced. He'll have to travel to Skyrim to deal with the aftermath. And that’s when he'll find the Dark Brotherhood waiting.” 

She cried out after that, and I knew she was close to climax. 

“When do I go?” 

“The day after tomorrow. You’ll have enough time to make plans. Now, please, Ragnar, I need…” 

I kissed her hard before I whispered, “I kill for you, Astrid.” 

I didn’t even have to lower my mouth to make her climax as she shuddered, turning towards me to hold on as she climaxed. The kiss we shared near enough made me shoot a load in my underwear, and I know why it was a kiss of such intensity. Resting her head against my chest, she finally murmured, “You did that on purpose.” 

“Who would have thought discussing murder would be such a turn on?” 

We ended up completely naked quite quickly, and we made love, mixing that with discussion about what I would do. I wanted her to come with me so we could work together, and while I think the idea thrilled her, she said more organisation was required for the other targets. Knowing I would be gone for a while, we made love for as long as possible until I was simply incapable of getting hard again. 

Astrid announced what I would be doing the next day, and I had offers of help from Veezara and Gabriella, both offering to join me in Solitude to assist. I was grateful for the offer, and we agreed to travel alone but meet in Solitude to make plans. Astrid and I had not been public with our affection, though everyone was more than aware of our relationship, so I was pleased when she stopped caring about what they all thought by kissing me hard just before I mounted my horse. “Come back to me, Ragnar,” she said, resting her head against me as I hugged her. 

“There is only one other woman I promise, Astrid. I will promise you too.” 

“Haelga?” 

“Yes.” 

“She’s a lucky woman. Just like me.” 

It was a two-day ride to Solitude, stopping for the night in Rorikstead instead of Whiterun, as staying there would have meant doubling back on myself. It was still light by the time I was on the road heading up the long hill towards the capital of Skyrim. There were signs that something important was happening, as there were more troops on patrol, and after stabling my horse, there were more checks on those entering the city than usual. 

Despite that, there was an air of excitement once inside the city walls. The market had tripled in size since my last visit, the crowds were enormous, most no doubt ready to watch the wedding or at least be present at the reception. Veezara and Gabriella met me at the designated point where we agreed on the plan I’d thought of on the ride. Babette had given me advice on a loose statue hanging above where the wedding party would convene. She suggested a good shove with my shoulder would lead to a very public death. Veezara and Gabriella agreed to the idea. Veezara would cover my exit, Gabriella would be the back-up with a poisoned arrow if the statue missed its mark. 

We slept in different places over the next two nights, though I doubt anyone gave us a second glance. We weren’t stupid enough to wear Brotherhood armour openly. I wore casual clothing, hoping to simply melt into the crowds. My colleagues would stand out a little more, simply due to be non-Nords in the Nordic capital, but there were enough Dunmer and Argonians around to not draw too much attention. 

The morning of the wedding, the air of excitement in the city was enormous. Elisif herself would be attending. I was sure I’d seen her before, but as I tracked her walking towards the temple for the wedding ceremony, I found myself having rather nice thoughts about her. She was utterly gorgeous. 

While the wedding ceremony took place, I got into position. I was surprised at the complete lack of security once inside the city, with very few guards patrolling around the temple. Good news for me, at least. Gabriella had stated she would signal once Vici and her husband would appear on the balcony below, and it would be then, while giving her speech, that I would ensure a bloody end to the wedding. 

Did I feel any guilt about what I was about to do? No. I was doing it for Astrid, as much as Alain and Nilsine were killed for my wife. I’d proven to myself time and again by now that I cared little for the lives of others, unless they were friends or lovers. I’m sure they had fancy terms to describe people like that. 

Waiting was rather boring, though I kept watch on Gabriella across the other side. When she signalled, I could hear excitement rise again before applause erupted, and I knew the bride and groom had made their appearance below me. I got into position, my shoulder resting against the statue, and I could feel how easy it was going to give way. 

I knew Vici was in the right position when he started her speech. “Good people of Solitude. My husband Aesgir and I thank you for coming to our reception. We thank you for sharing the love we have for each other. You have all helped make this a truly extraordinary wedding. All of my dreams…” 

Her sentence was cut off as I’d pushed the statue with everything I had, feeling stone rub against stone before it fell. There were screams and shouts from below as the statue no doubt crashed into the head of Vici below, killing her instantly. With the confusion and consternation below, I kept low and made for the exit point, knowing Veezara and Gabriella would be doing the same thing. 

We headed for a separate exit from the city, that would take us out just down the road from the docks. Gabriella had organised for our horses to be waiting for us, and we wasted no time mounting up and riding off. We probably looked completely suspicious, but we didn’t care. All we wanted was distance between us and the city. 

We split up not far from Solitude, agreeing to take different routes back south. I headed south and west towards Windhelm before deciding to turn south, while Veezara would head far to the west before heading to Falkreath. Gabriella would take the most direct route. It was the safest thing we could do, and I had little doubt the news of the assassination would spread like wildfire across Skyrim. Astrid would probably know before I returned, or at least Gabriella would let her know. 

Returning to Falkreath took longer than the journey to Solitude as I took my time. I didn’t think I was being tracked, and I was sure I hadn’t been noticed, but I wanted to be sure. I certainly didn’t want to lead the army near the Sanctuary. It was three days before I walked in, Astrid leaping into my arms upon seeing me, suggesting she was rather pleased by how everything happened. 

“The news is everywhere! Vittoria Vici, the Emperor's cousin, butchered at her own wedding! Well done! Let's see his eminence try to ignore this.” 

“So I did a good job?” 

“Good job?” she laughed, returning to her position at the table, “With Vici's murder, you've started us down a path the Dark Brotherhood hasn't travelled in centuries. The assassination of an Emperor.” 

“And I believe you mentioned something about a bonus?” 

“I remember. What would you like?” I gave her a look she would know rather well. “You’re rather simple at times, Ragnar. Not that I’m complaining. And it’s something I want too. You don’t want anything else?” 

“Just you, Astrid.” 

Walking around the table, she leaned against me as we kissed. “How would you like to tie me to the bed first? Just my wrists, as we would both like my legs free to do certain things, then my body is yours for whatever you want to do with.” 

“You have leather strips?” 

“Of course.” 

“And a bottle of oil?” 

“And what would you like to do with that, Ragnar?” 

“Cover you in it first. Perhaps give you a bit of a fondle.” I paused, before leaning forward to whisper into her ear, “Then absolutely pound your arse.” 

“And my pussy?” she breathed in my ear in return. 

“Oh, that will get plenty of attention first.” 

“Now?” 

“If you want.” 

Wrapping her arms around the back of my neck, she said, “Can you tell me all about it while you fuck me?” 

“Turns you on, doesn’t it?” 

“It does when you’re involved. You’re a gifted killer, Ragnar. I want to work by your side soon. We can kill together, then we can fuck afterwards.” 

“Most people would be horrified by that.” 

“And you?” 

“The adrenaline of the kill would lead to me ripping off your clothes and taking you hard and fast.” 

We waited a while as I reported to everyone else the success, Gabriella having been kind enough to let me spread the news. Just like Astrid, they knew what it meant for the Brotherhood, and I think their opinion of me was certainly elevated because of it. I’d been of the opinion that they thought I was little more than Astrid’s lapdog. I didn’t really care if they thought that or not, but I’d certainly proven to be an effective killer. I did thank Babette for her suggestion, and it was always a little awkward to remember she was a centuries old vampire instead of a little girl.

I wasn’t particularly close to any of the other members of the Brotherhood, and that meant I didn’t share too many personal details. Only Astrid knew everything about me. I would share things with others, such as I was an orphan and was from Cyrodiil, but regarding my current circumstances, it was none of their business, though they all knew I kept a home somewhere away from Falkreath.

Still, despite not being close, I wanted to know them in return. I did ask Babette about being a vampire and never growing old. She recognised the reason for my question but, considering her profession, didn’t mind being a ‘forever child’. Considering my viewpoint on vampires had always been negative, she was the first friendly vampire I’d met. I doubt I’d meet many more. I had little to do with Festus, as he’d made his opinion about the Night Mother and leadership of Astrid quite clear, left wondering when, not if, I would have to deal with him. Most of the others were ambivalent at best, their allegiance to Astrid first and foremost. Even Gabriella had changed her mind slightly 

Nazir liked a drink, and I ended up spending a couple of hours with him, downing a couple of tankards, regaling each other with stories. It wasn’t a secret that I worked for the Thieves Guild, and he was impressed at how quickly I had risen to leadership of the organisation. I suggested I was no longer involved in the day to day operations, but I still took a monthly cut of coin as they all recognised my position, considering I was the one who’d eliminated Mercer Frey and helped restore the Guild to its former glory. He had a very long list of kills, all over Tamriel. Given his humorous, even friendly demeanour, it was hard to remember that there was a cold hearted killer underneath the pleasant, joking exterior.

It was only when everyone else had gone to bed that I returned to Astrid. We’d purposely avoided each other all day, even sitting at opposite ends of the table during dinner. Closing the door behind me, she rose from her position of the bed to meet me, the kiss we shared first rather soft and tender. Though I think we wanted to fall into bed rather quickly, we spent plenty of time undressing each other, barely able to stop kissing and caressing each other as we did so. Once we were both naked, she fell to her knees. “I’ll get you off so you last longer, Ragnar, then you can tie me up.” 

“Still want that?” 

She stood up and moved my hand to her sex. “I’ve been thinking about what you could do to me while tied up all day. Just remember that I’m not Haelga. She has some rather unique tastes. I just want to be tied up.” 

Sitting down on her knees again, she made love to my cock with her mouth, her tongue doing some rather nice things that sent shivers up and down my spine. Her eyes were wide, full of love, desire and devotion, or at least that’s what I thought. She loved going down on me, as she knew I loved returning the favour even more. I’d been thinking about it all day too, finding my mind wander even when chatting with the others, so I knew I wouldn’t last long. 

“Swallow or face?” I wondered. 

Taking my cock from her mouth, she asked, “What do you think, Ragnar?” 

She proved what she wanted by swallowing my length, grabbing one of my hands to hold her head in place for a few moments. Grabbing her hair, albeit gently, I started to slowly thrust into my mouth, just a few times, before letting her resume control. Once her head was bobbing up and down rather quickly, there was no chance I was going to last too much longer. I warned her, though that was only to be polite, so when I did finish in her mouth, it didn’t catch her by complete surprise. 

It was another wonderful climax. Well, to be fair, I think it’s difficult to have a bad orgasm, but the excitement of the day, and what we were about to do, certainly made it feel a lot better. Once I was empty, Astrid sat back on her knees, looked up at me and opened her mouth. She then closed it, winked and noticeably swallowed. Dragging me down to my knees, she hugged me as she whispered, “I’ll do that for you all the time, Ragnar.” 

I surprised her by kissing her. If she was willing to swallow it, I could handle lingering aftertaste as I just wanted to kiss her. Standing up and taking her with me, I laid her down on the bed. She ran her hands down her body as she spread her legs, giving herself a fondle, as I grabbed the leather strips. Tying her wrists to each bedpost wasn’t particularly difficult, making sure they were tight but wouldn’t cut off blood flow. “Well, I’m now vulnerable, Ragnar. What are you going to do?” 

Hovering over her, I gave her a soft kiss first. “I love you,” I said softly. 

The smile returned was incredibly sweet, lighting up her eyes. “I wish I’d met you years ago. Maybe…” 

“Years ago, I’d have been too young. But there is the future, at least.” 

I kissed her again before moving down, leaving a mark on her neck, whispering into her ear that she was now mine. “Always,” she breathed as I moved down, focusing on this magnificent breasts of hers. Just lavishing attention on those increased her excitement, feeling her body rise up, pressing into mine, moving a hand down her body to fondle her sex. Not wanting to delay too long, I slid a finger inside her, hearing her gasp when I did before she breathed my name. 

Kissing down her body, I removed my finger as I kissed towards her sex but avoided it, kissing down each of her thighs before moving back up, just gazing at her glistening pussy. I breathed on it, and even that caused a shudder up her body. “You’re a tease.” 

“I could leave you here right now like this.” She groaned, no doubt horrified at the thought. So I made her happy by licking up her slit, and that earned a grateful moan. 

Lifting my head to meet her eyes, I smiled at her before I simply buried my face. The next ten minutes or so was filled with plenty of filthy language and no doubt everyone would have heard her, and she was rather descriptive at what I was doing and how good it felt. And, despite being tied up, she was still a little bossy. I didn’t mind, as she was telling me what she liked, and that assured she was going to cum. 

Which she did, for the first time, not long later. And I kept on going, changing position slightly, bending her body so I was on my knees, and I could look down into her eyes as I continued to eat her out. “Oh, I like this position, Ragnar. I can see your eyes. Help me cum again.” 

That wasn’t particularly difficult, as I had her knees almost beside her head. I was now rock hard, and she could feel it press into her back. “Want to fuck me like this?” 

“One more with my mouth.” 

That arrived rather quickly, her body now in quite a ball, wondering if she was getting sore. I barely let her recover, continuing to eat her out, before she asked me to fuck her. Keeping her in the same position, I wasted no time sliding my cock inside her and just immediately pounding her. Holding the headboard, she just kept her legs spread wide, able to look each other in the eyes as I fucked her. 

“I’m going to cum again really quickly,” she breathed. 

“I’ll stop once you do and get you ready.” 

She wrapped her legs around me, just enough so she could lock her ankles. But the position got a little difficult for me first, so after a readjustment, I had her calves by my shoulder, continuing to slam my cock into her. I loved to watch her face when doing it. The smile was one of complete happiness. She’d gone so long without having a man make love or fuck her that she appreciated it every time it happened. She loves it soft and tender. But she also loved it when I just pounded her relentlessly. 

Once she came again, I felt the urge as well. I didn’t let her know, so when I blasted inside her, she pulled the restraints, as I knew she wanted to hold me afterwards. She always did. Instead, I rested on a forearm, my cock still hard and buried inside her, her legs now rested alongside my body, leaning down to kiss her. “I wasn’t expecting that,” she said quietly. 

“Neither was I.” 

“Ragnar, can I ask a question since that just happened?” 

“Sure.” 

“Would you ever want… I mean, I know…” She sighed. “There’s no way to ask this question…” 

“You want a child?” 

“I’ve been thinking about it. We take lives constantly. To know I had life growing inside me…” 

“Why don’t we discuss then when you’re not tied up?” I was rather content with how the night had gone, so I immediately untied her. She looked ready to question, as she knew we’d discussed doing something else, then I guess understood why. She immediately cuddled into me as we lay side by side. “You’re serious?” I asked. 

Feeling her fingers trail up and down my back, she said quietly, “Since I met you, I’ve wondered if I want to keep doing this. Maybe I can go with you to Riften once we complete the big mission.” 

“And do what?” 

“Raise a family with you, Ragnar.” I remained silent, as the last time I’d planned that, my wife was murdered, and I never got to meet my child. “Do you not like the idea?” 

“I love it.” 

“But?” 

“I can’t marry again. We can have children, but I can’t do it…” I grabbed one of her hands and laid it against my chest. “I love you, Astrid, I truly do. But somewhere in here, I will always…” 

“I know, Ragnar. And, remember, I’m still technically married myself. Only when Arnbjorn is dead can I even consider it. But we can still have children. The question is, do you want them too?” 

“I’d love it. You’re ready to be a mother?” 

She kissed me softly before replying, “Only if you’re ready to be a father.” 

“I will be once we’ve finished this job. Are you sure you’re ready to walk away?” 

“The Night Mother has returned, Ragnar. I know my authority will eventually wane. So, as long as they agree to let me leave and live in peace, then I will just go with you.” 

I lifted her chin with a finger. “One thing, Astrid. I will remain with Haelga, at the very least, particularly if we do stay in Riften. I can’t hurt her again by ending our relationship.” 

“That’s okay, Ragnar. You’re with her now. You can be with her forever like me.” 

We sealed the agreement with lovemaking, Astrid pushing me onto my back as she lay on top of me first, simply looking at me as her fingers stroked my hair, my hands running up and down the soft skin on her back. I sometimes had to pinch myself at the thought this beautiful, athletic, yet incredibly dangerous woman was so obviously in love with me. I had wondered if I’d ever love again after Muiri. Part of me hadn’t wanted to, in case it happened again. But I couldn’t deny the feelings I felt for her, as much as those same feelings I had for Haelga I’d simply locked away while I was devoted to Muiri. 

We waited at least a week before discussing the next step on the road to killing the Emperor. Gabriella joined us as we planned, as she had performed some reconnaissance on her return to the Sanctuary, and had been out and about since. It was quite simple, really. Travel to Dragon Bridge, where the Penitus Oculatus were stationed, no doubt preparing for the arrival of the Emperor, news having already spread that he would be travelling to Skyrim for the funeral of his niece, and it was rumoured he was now going to personally take control of the war against the Stormcloaks, many believing Ulfric was responsible for her death. That suited the Brotherhood just fine. 

Once at Dragon Bridge, I was to locate the whereabouts of Gaius Maro, the son of Commander Maro, leader of the Penitus Oculatus, stealing his schedule so I could track him down. The easiest way to take care of him would be to wait in a certain city and kill him there. I could do the job on the open road, but they suggested he would have bodyguards and it would be likely that he’d travel by horseback. Once he was dead, I was to plant evidence on him, implicating him in a plot to kill the Emperor. The embarrassment it will cause Commander Maro would result in his resignation and leave the Emperor exposed. 

“Once I do this, I won’t be heading straight back. I’ll lay low in Riften for a while and head back here afterwards, unless you want to come to me,” I told Astrid in bed later that night. 

“Just don’t get caught, Ragnar. We don’t have the influence to spring you free.” She paused, obviously thinking, before adding, “Although your friends at the Guild…” 

“I’d rather not involve them in our business.” 

“I understand. So what I said originally means even more. Don’t get caught.” 

“I’ll do my best. I think getting him on the open road would be best. Kill him, leave his body out in the open, and make sure I leave more than just the letter implicating him. Ensure his and his father’s reputation both lie in tatters.” 

“Where will you do it?” 

“As far away from here as possible, so on the road leading out of Markarth. Do it in the right location and they’ll think it was a Forsworn attack.” 

In the end, I didn’t bother heading to Dragon Bridge to get his schedule. I’d learned enough over the years that I could figure out who he was while I was in Markarth. I spent five nights there waiting for his arrival, tracking him around the city as she spoke with the commander of the local garrison. Whether the Emperor would ever visit the city or not, I didn’t know, but they spent a few hours viewing defences and the surrounding region, and I knew both would be concerned about the Forsworn. 

The best news for me was that he travelled alone, out of uniform and near enough incognito. Perfect news, and I headed out early one morning in preparation for him to come riding by, knowing he would be heading east to Falkreath. I rode at least a couple of hours out of Markarth to lie in wait. I wasn’t going to put an arrow into his chest. I was going to gut him, make it personal, then leave everything required to ensure his name was ruined. 

Perching myself at the top of a hill, I watched his horse slowly trot along, eventually heading up the incline, where the horse slowed to a walk. When he was no more than twenty metres away, I moved out of cover and he brought the horse to halt. “Get out of the way!” he ordered. 

With shield already in hand, I simply unsheathed my sword. He now had a choice. He could have chosen to try and ride into me, but I would just aim for the saddle straps, ensuring he’d hit the ground hard. Or he could dismount, arm himself, and face me. He probably took me for little more than a bandit. I hope he did, as that would make him confident enough to dismount, believing I’d be an easy kill. 

I couldn’t help smile as he dismounted. I even allowed him the opportunity to arm himself. “You know who I am?” he wondered. 

“I do.” 

“And yet you choose to do this? Why?” 

“There are reasons. And for those very reasons, you must die.” 

“Then you are a fool. I am a trained soldier of the Penitus Oculatus.” 

“I know exactly who you are, Gaius Maro.” 

The eyes narrowed, and I believe in that moment, he knew why I was there, and knew why he had to die. “For the Emperor!” he cried, and without hesitation, charged forward. 

He might have been a trained soldier. He may have been close to the Emperor. He may have been the son of the commander himself. But he made two mistakes. One, he underestimated me. And, two, I had the higher ground. Whenever I found myself in a duel, I lived by the rule of ending it as quickly as possible. Only when I fought with the Fighter’s Guild did I worry about things like honour. I’d done enough since arriving in Skyrim that honour mattered little anymore. All that mattered was my survival. If I could fight clean, fair enough. But I had no problem fighting dirty, using every trick in the book to ensure my opponent died. 

Maro fought well, I’ll give him that. He was a trained soldier and had talent. But, as I said, he underestimated me. I had years fighting for the Fighter’s Guild. And I’d spent more than enough time fighting for my life. I’d looked death in the eyes and laughed in his face more than once. Maro didn’t stand a chance. 

Once I’d disarmed him, I put my sword straight through his chest, making sure his death was quick. I could give him that, at least. Putting my sword in the rump of his horse, that took off, leaving his body alone on the road. From my hidden horse I took the incriminating letter and a couple of other items that would leave those who found him in little doubt that he’d been killed due to his Stormcloak sympathies. His father would have to resign immediately. 

Job complete, I mounted my horse and headed straight for Riften. I had no idea what the fallout of what I’d just done would be.

Chapter 23: Traitors

I laid low in Riften for a week, barely venturing out of my house except to see Haelga. I wasn’t worried about being tracked down. It was simply a cause of caution and vigilance. My presence in Markarth would have been noticed, no matter how careful I was, and as I’d left the same day as Maro, and that man was now dead, those investigating his death would make assumptions. 

No doubt Astrid would have heard the news, but after no sign of her coming to see me, I finally left Riften for the Sanctuary. After leaving my horse hidden as usual, I approached the black door to find Gabriella waiting for me. Although she didn’t look concerned, the fact it was her waiting instead of Astrid worried me. 

“There’s been an incident,” she said, barring my way inside. 

I felt my stomach drop, my immediate thought being ‘Not again!’ “Astrid is fine,” Gabriella added quickly, “Or, at least, she’s alive. But… Follow me.” 

We walked into the bedroom to find Astrid fast asleep. Her top was off, her stomach covered in bandages. Her eyes opened upon sensing my presence, and I sat on the edge of the bed, grabbing her hand. “So I leave for a week and this is what happens.” 

She laughed for a moment before her face creased in pain. “Is it bad?” I asked Gabriella. 

“It was a nasty wound, but she’ll live.” 

Looking at Astrid, I stated, “I would know who did it.” Not a question, as it was easy to figure out who. “Where is he?” 

Gabriella disappeared, returning a few minutes later, holding a few diaries. “This will tell you everything, Ragnar. His thoughts prior to what happened. And, most importantly, it will tell you where he has gone. And we’re all available to assist you if necessary. Many of us were happy to see the return of the Night Mother, perhaps a sign that our fortunes would improve. But none of us wanted this. No matter what happens, no matter if the Night Mother has returned, Astrid is and always will be our leader… At least until the time she decides to leave…” 

Astrid had remained silent until then. “Thank you,” she said quietly. 

“Can you give me a few moments, Gabriella?” She dipped her head, and after closing the door, I looked back at Astrid. “He will die. But what set him off?” 

She couldn’t help smile. “I’ll admit I probably provoked him a little. But the little bastard was faster than I imagined. He has talent with a dagger.” 

“I’ll study these and leave first thing tomorrow.” 

“No, stay with me for a day. There’s no rush.” 

“Are you sure?” 

“Please, Ragnar.” 

I relented easily. I guess there was no rush, though my blood was up. Cicero would die. Despite the brave face, she was still in a lot of pain, so although she was healing, I brought her meals in bed, and otherwise stayed with her, mostly just to keep her company and her spirits up. She managed to turn onto her side so she could at least cuddle with me, and although she wanted to be intimate, even she admitted that she had to ignore her desires, at least for a little while. 

It was nice spending an entire day in bed next to her. She wanted to know everything about taking down Maro, as although news had filtered back that he was dead, she wanted to know the details. I had no need to exaggerate. Astrid had never seen me work, but she didn’t need to see it to know I was good. She was surprised Maro travelled alone, figuring I would have had to go through bodyguards to get to him. 

“He died well,” I said, “He faced me down like a warrior. And he died like one.” 

“Didn’t think you cared about things like that.” 

“I don’t usually. Things like honour mean little to me nowadays. But I can still look a man in the eyes and give him a good death.” 

“When you leave tomorrow, Ragnar, I want you to promise me something.” She squeezed me, looking up into my eyes. “Come back to me. I’m not saying Gabriella’s words are empty, but you are the only one I truly trust here now.” 

“I think we’ve talked about enough things that I’d fight Mehrunes Dagon himself to ensure I returned, Astrid.” 

“So you love me that much?” 

“Well, helps that you’re a beautiful and rather flexible Nordic goddess. Add the dangerous aspect of your personality and, well, I think it’s easy to see why.” 

“I’ll be honest. I just love your big cock.” I could only burst into laughter as she went into great vivid detail about it and what it did to her. “Do you know what it is most, though? Despite what you do. Despite what you’ve done. You still have this… honesty, though perhaps that’s just due to me.” 

“I lie all the time, except to you and Haelga. Well, I’ll clarify Haelga knows about the Thieves Guild, but doesn’t know about this. She probably has an idea that I’m up to no good, so simply doesn’t want to know. Don’t ask, don’t tell. All she wants is a promise each time I leave that I will return. I haven’t broken that promise yet.” 

I left early the next morning, Astrid managing to walk with me outside as I packed supplies onto the rear of my horse. I intended to make it north as quickly as possible. Astrid warned me that the Empire would have increased their patrols due to what happened, so suggested I avoid the main roads if I could. That would delay me, but there would be no doubt the army would be merciless. If they even minutely suspected someone, they’d find themselves in chains and escorted to the nearest cell. 

The delays meant an extra night on the road, but I figured if Cicero was where I assumed, he would by lying in wait for someone to come find him. I wondered if he figured it would be me though. No doubt he would assume I would be an ally due to me being the Listener. What he wouldn’t particularly know is that I didn’t care about being that. My allegiance would always be to Astrid. It probably didn’t help that I was intimately involved with her, but I’d rather take orders from her than a rotting corpse. 

The door into the Northern Sanctuary was surprisingly out in the open. Not hidden at all. I hadn’t asked around Dawnstar about it. I simply followed the coast until I found it. Dismounting my horse and leaving it, I approached the door. Just like Falkreath, the door asked a question before allowing me entrance. 

“What is life’s greatest illusion?” 

“Innocence, my brother.” 

The place had been abandoned for centuries, at least according to Cicero’s journals. Though abandoned, it was not empty, as I found myself encountering… Well, ghosts, to be honest. Ghosts who were not happy to see me. I thought they’d recognise me as Listener and part of the Brotherhood, but they chose to attack me instead. As I was busy fighting them off, I could hear Cicero from further inside, taunting me. All that did was incense me, clearing my mind, knowing I’d kill him for what he’d done. 

There was even a bloody big troll living in one of the caves that I had to fight my way past. I took a hit from it, leaving a nasty wound across my left arm, but I took its head in return, stabbing it a few more times, just to make sure the thing was dead before moving on. Cicero continued to taunt, though his voice was becoming louder and clearer. I knew I was closing in. 

“Keep talking, Cicero. You merely dig your own grave.” 

The taunts continued, and rounding a last corner, I entered a large room, where I found Cicero lying on the ground. It was obvious he was feigning injury, I wasn’t stupid, ensuring I stayed back far enough, as I figured he was hiding a weapon under his body. 

“You caught me! I surrender!” he cried, laughing away as he always did. 

“You tried to kill Astrid, Cicero. Your last mistake.” 

“Being intimate with the pretender displeased the Night Mother, Listener. How can you not understand that?” 

“You’re a fucking lunatic, Cicero. And all you’ve done since arriving is prove to be a gigantic pain in the arse. There is only one solution to the problem.” 

He made to move, no doubt withdraw a weapon and get up, but a good kick into his stomach caused him to curl up, another kick to the face rolled him over onto his back, the dagger he’d been holding clattering away. I wasn’t going to stab him. I just put my foot on his throat and pressed down, watching his face as he suffocated. He tried to say something as my foot pressed down harder, but I didn’t want to hear his pleas. He was getting what he deserved, his hands grabbing my lower leg, trying to prise it away. But he weakened with each passing second, eventually passing out. Getting down on my knees, I lifted his body and snapped his neck to ensure he was truly dead, before dragging it all the way out the Sanctuary, turning right and walking out onto the nearby headland. With no ceremony, I dumped his body into the water, hoping the tide would take it out. If it ended up on a nearby shore, I didn’t care. No-one would know who he was. 

Mounting my horse, all I did was point it southwards, leaving Dawnstar and the sanctuary behind, though kept it in mind, just in case the worst was to ever happen. 

My return journey took just as long as the one north, so that by the time I returned, Astrid was back on her feet, and I found myself dragged into the bedroom for some lovemaking after letting her know Cicero was dead. If I didn’t know her better, I would have thought the fact I’d killed the man who tried to kill her turned her on. Her language as she rode me, generally filthy anyway, took on a certain twist as she imagined what I did to him. When I went into detail of how I did, she had one hell of an orgasm. 

We sometimes had what many would have thought a weird relationship. 

Later that night, once the Sanctuary was silent, cuddled into my side as she always was, she whispered her concerns. “I think more than Cicero is conspiring against me.” 

“Who?” 

“Festus has made his opinions known. And although Gabriella swears allegiance, I know she is torn. Plus, there is still the Arnbjorn factor. Considering how we parted, I’m sure he’ll want his revenge, particularly against you, though I’m sure his heart only knows hate for me too now.” 

“What do you want me to do?” 

She kissed my cheek. “Nothing, Ragnar. You’re listening. That’s all I wanted. But… If I asked you to…” 

“Yes.” 

She laughed lightly. “You haven’t even heard my question?” 

“Don’t have to. I know what you’re going to ask. Will I kill a colleague? If they are a danger to you, I will.” 

I must say the right thing constantly, as her hand sild my body towards my cock, stroking that enough to get me hard, before she straddled me, rubbing her pussy against my shaft. “Anyone would think you loved me, Ragnar. What wouldn’t you do for me? Who wouldn’t you kill for me?” 

“It’s not a long list, Astrid. Children, my other lovers, and the few people I count as friends. Anyone else? I might ask a question if I feel it necessary.” 

She sat up and slowly sat down on my cock, enjoying the feel of that tight pussy I had grown to love and adore so much over the recent weeks and months. Once my length was inside, she didn’t move, just leaning down so her face hovered just above mine. “I want you to kill the Emperor for me, Ragnar. Do you know how turned on the thought makes me? The man I loved killing the most powerful man in Tamriel.” 

I thrust up into her, watching the smile immediately form as she started to ride me, ever so slowly. “Who else?” 

“I don’t trust Festus. What about him?” 

“He’s dangerous. No doubt wonders about your leadership now. I’d do it tomorrow if you wanted.” 

“No. Not yet. But we might need to consider it.” 

I grabbed her and flipped her over so she was underneath me, driving my cock into her hard a few times. “Who else?” 

“By Sithis, I can’t think straight while you’re doing this to me, Ragnar.” 

I leaned down towards her ear. “Who else, Astrid?” I breathed. 

“All of them!” she cried quietly, kissing me hard, more passion in that one in all those I could remember, before leaning back, gazing into my eyes, “Just me and you, Ragnar. You’re the only one I trust. You’re the only one I need.” 

“Or we just leave. We kill the Emperor, then we don’t return. They don’t know where I live, so we just leave it all behind, and we can start what you want.” 

“I’ve already stopped taking them, Ragnar. I want your child.” 

It was a surprise, but a nice surprise. “Well, I guess I should hurry up and finish.” I lifted her legs up and wide, Astrid grabbing them so I could really fuck her. “Killing the Emperor, Astrid. When was the last time that was done?” 

She moaned loudly. “Centuries,” she muttered, “Yet you could do it for me.” 

It was my turn to lean down and kiss her hard before leaning back an inch. “I will do it for you, Astrid.” 

Feeling her legs around my back, she urged me to fuck and finish inside her. She was going to get her wish anyway, but she asked me to really drive into her. So that’s what I did, amazed she could take it so hard, particularly after her recent injury, but it certainly helped me finish rather quickly. Once I had, she hugged me to her body, whispering rather nice things in my ear. “We’ll talk about the next step in the morning, Ragnar.” 

“Which next step?” 

She laughed, as it could have meant one of a few things. “The Emperor killing business. If I find out I’m with child, you’ll know when I want to talk about that.” 

“The day I leave to kill him, go to Riften. Leave here immediately. I do the job, then I return there and we get on with our lives together.” 

“Not yet, Ragnar. Not yet. There is still work to be done, and I want to leave the right way.” 

“Are you sure?” She nodded adamantly. “Okay, I trust you as much as you trust me, so if you’re sure, then we’ll do it your way.” 

We went to sleep a little later. Or, at least, Astrid fell asleep, once against snuggled into my side, her hand resting where we thought our hearts were in our chest. My fingers continued to trail up and down her side, probably tickling her, even as she slept, though all she did was snuggle into me even further. In moments like that, it was easy to forget what both of us did for a living. It was easy to forget that we found talk of what we did thrilling, and found a common bond in it while being intimate at the same time. It was easy to forget she was still married… 

I also wondered how she would adapt to regular life again, as in no longer killing for a living. No doubt she’d find it slightly boring. Could she adapt to domestic life? I think she had ideas of happily raising our children and staying at home. I’m sure she thought she wanted it, but it was one thing to have an idea of what it was like, have hopes and dreams and expectations, but the reality could and probably would be far different to what she might want. Though maybe she would find happiness in the simplicity that our lives might become. 

The next morning after breakfast, she gathered myself and the only other two people she might trust in the organisation, Babette and Nazir. Both had stated to me that they would never turn their backs on Astrid, and I’ll admit, I did trust them probably more than Astrid did, though I knew her mind was in turmoil, so while she stated in private I was the only one she could trust, I noticed she would often approach Babette and Nazir about her thoughts too. 

Stood around her table, she had a couple of books, looking at me with a smirk. I knew she was going to spring a surprise. “What I have here, Ragnar, is a signed copy of Uncommon Taste, owned by someone named Anton Virane. I called in a favour from your friends at the Thieves Guild.” 

“Why didn’t you just ask me?” 

“Because I don’t always want to rely on you.” 

I chuckled. “Fair point. What’s the point in the book?” 

“Mister Virane will know who the author of Uncommon Taste is. No-one knows the identity of someone known as ‘the Gourmet’, but what is known is that he is probably the most famous chef in Tamriel, and is known to be the personal chef of the Emperor, particularly on visits to Skyrim.” 

“So he’s a Nord?” 

“No, no-one knows his race or name. It’s one of the best kept secrets in Tamriel. So, the job is this. Find out who the Gourmet is from Virane. Once you obtain that information, kill Virane, as he’s bound to alert the authorities if someone was to come asking. After that, we track down the Gourmet and kill him. As no-one else knows who he is, you assume his identity and get in close enough to kill the Emperor.” 

I looked around the table before finishing with Astrid. “Seems a bit convoluted, doesn’t it?” 

She smiled, not taking offense. “It might be, but this way, you will get away scot-free. Poison the meal, and make your escape during dinner. By the time the Emperor is dead, you should be free and away. We just need to put together the plan of where it will be. So when you kill him, grab whatever he has that will tell us the best place to make the attack.” 

“Where is Virane?” 

“Markarth. He is the personal chef to the jarl.” 

“Shit. My track record in Markarth isn’t great. You already know I’ve done some time in Cidhna Mine.” 

“That’s why I’m not sending you for this leg, Ragnar. Nazir has offered to kill Virane, gain the information you require, then you can track down the Gourmet and complete the rest of the mission.” 

It was unusual not to be taking the lead role in a mission, but I could understand the reasoning. My history in Markarth wasn’t great, and Astrid knew nearly everything about me. As Nazir would be gone for a few days, I suggested once Astird and I were alone that I would head back to Riften. Astrid liked that idea, and she offered to join me. “May as well get used to living there eventually,” she added. 

“You’re completely serious, aren’t you?” 

“You’re not?” 

“Of course. But…” 

Back in her bedroom, she just hugged me tightly. “I’ve had enough, Ragnar. More than enough. They can have their Night Mother and their old ways. I kept this place going for years, and if that’s how they want to repay me, then fine.” 

“I’m not saying no, Astrid. Not at all. I’ve be thrilled for you to come with me. I just want you to be absolutely sure, because once you leave, I think there’s no coming back.” 

“I’ve found the best reason to leave.”

 We left the same day as Nazir, Astrid deciding she would simply ride along with me on my horse, not needing to take many supplies, as she mentioned that she hoped she wouldn’t need many clothes during our few days in Riften. I thought I’d take a chance, suggesting we could invite someone else to join us. She laughed, and said she wouldn’t mind having Haelga join in for some fun. I dug the horse in its sides, urging it to move faster and faster, much to the amusement of Astrid. To heighten the fun, I held the reins with one hand while my other was put down the front of her pants, where I teased her nearly the entire way to Riften. By the time we dismounted at the stables, she was soaking wet, as were my fingers, and she practically dragged me to my house to finally finish her off. We didn’t make the bedroom, as she lay back on the dinner table after taking off her trousers, spread her legs, and held my head in place as I brought her to an almost immediately orgasm with my mouth. 

That was the start of our night, and by the time we finally slept that evening, sleep came easily as we were both utterly exhausted, and Astrid might have been a little sore too, admitting to being rather turned on so she wanted my cock in her tightest little hole, lying down on her knees, almost curling herself into a ball but raising her arse up, begging me to fuck her hard. I obliged, of course, and she surprised me further by wanting me to cum on her face at the end. I hadn’t done that before, and she laughed away as I coated her face. “I never did this for him,” she confessed, laying back afterwards, having barely cleaned her face. 

“What? Anal or finishing on your face?” 

“Both, to be honest.” 

“So why now?” 

“Because I wanted to, and I knew you’d love it too.” The smile she noticed told her my thoughts. “As I said, Ragnar, my body is yours.” 

“Well, I definitely love your arse, and you must have read my mind about wanting to cum on your face. But would you like to see what I do with Haelga when I invite her around?” 

“Yes. Definitely, as I will admit to being intrigued. I’m sure I don’t want what you do with her, but I wouldn’t mind watching.” 

“I’ll invite her around. She might be interested in staying for longer if you’re interested in a threesome.” I paused before asking, “Have you been with a woman before?” 

“I have. One or two women though that was a long time ago now.” 

“I’ll talk to her tomorrow. We’ll have dinner then see where the night takes us.” 

“Hopefully it will involve your cock in all three of my holes, Ragnar.” I couldn’t help laugh, though she just added, “At least I’m honest.” 

“You are.” I pulled her in close and whispered in her ear, “I’m going to fuck your arse even harder when Haelga is here.” 

“Promise?” 

“Absolutely.” 

I was polite enough to hand her a cloth to clean her face before we went to sleep. I was left thinking, had I not, she’d have happily gone to sleep without cleaning up. The thought amused me, as she revealed sides to her personality all the time that I believed were there, though she kept many of them hidden. 

After breakfast the next morning, I headed to the Bunkhouse. As always, Haelga was delighted to see me, and after a long kiss and cuddle, I asked if she’d like to join me for dinner that evening. She readily accepted as always, though when I added I already had company, the smirk that appeared more than suggested she knew what was on my mind. “You have ideas,” she stated. 

“I do. Are you interested?” 

“I’m surprised it’s taken you so long. I assume it’s Astrid?” I nodded. “So you will have two blonde, Nordic beauties to satisfy tonight?” 

“Aye. I look forward to it.” 

“The Dibella room?” 

“Astrid would like to watch what I do to you.” 

“Want a quick fuck now before tonight?” 

I wouldn’t deny Haelga anything, so we fucked on one of the tables. There was at least a little foreplay before I had her laid down, panties off, skirt hiked up, legs wide and my cock buried inside her, wasting absolutely no time driving my cock into her. Svana was now used to our shenanigans, so when she walked in on us, she actually watched me fuck Haelga, making one or two comments about my prowess and size of my cock, which made me stop while buried inside Haelga. “You sound like you’re still innocent.” 

“Because I am.” 

I looked down at Haelga. “How is that possible?” 

“I think she’s just picky, Ragnar.” 

Returning my glance to Svana, I said, “I remember long ago you mentioned an interest. I’m a different man now. Do I still interest you?” 

She laughed. “Are you kidding me? I’d like to be where Haelga is right now! I still masturbate thinking about you, Ragnar.” 

Haelga burst into laughter, feeling her squeeze my cock as she did so. “Okay, this might not be the best time to discuss it, since my cock is currently buried inside your aunt, but if you want me to fuck you, I will. But we’ll talk about it later. I’d better finish your aunt off.” 

“Have fun,” she said. 

Looking back down at Haelga, she simply squeezed her legs around me. “You’d better make me cum now, Ragnar.” 

“Do you mind if I fuck her?” 

“Of course not. She won’t have a better lover for a first time. Just… you know, go easy on her to start with.” 

“Maybe she’ll be one of those girls who wants it up the arse to save her purity for marriage?” 

That made her laugh again. “No, I don’t think so. Just treat her right and she’ll walk around with a smile on her face for a month. Just like me, to be honest. She always knows when you’ve visited.” 

I lifted her up into a sitting position. “I probably do the same thing, you know.” 

She ran a hand down my cheek and laid a gentle kiss on my lips. “Cum in me, Ragnar,” she breathed, “Then I’ll get back to work.” 

I did just that a couple of minutes later, groaning loudly enough that Svana yelled out for me to be quiet. Haelga hugged me until I softened enough that my cock fell out, and we kissed for a little longer, before she said that she really had to get back to work, lowering her skirt but giving me her panties to take. She escorted me to the door, we kissed again, her last words being that she’d be at mine after sunset. 

Astrid knew I’d fucked her while I’d been away, but knowing we’d be having quite the night, said she would be happy to just pass the day away quietly before Haelga arrived later that day. So we ended up sitting on the balcony for lunch, each of us grabbing a couple of books from one of my bookshelves, and we sat back together with a book and bottle of wine. We would swap the occasional glance and laugh, as it was something we’d never done before, but I knew that anything to do with the Brotherhood was barely in the back of our minds. “Emperor, then I’m done,” she said, before returning her attention to the book in hand. 

We spent most of the afternoon sitting on the balcony. As I’d been gone more often than not the past few months, I had plenty of locals stop and converse with me, wondering what I’d been up to. As I told Astrid, I lied a lot, so I just said I was away for work. Ingun noticed me and I invited her up, introducing her to Astrid. The latter had no problem wondering if I’d been intimate with Ingun too. I admitted we had a brief relationship before I married, though Ingun prevented it getting too awkward by letting me know she was seeing someone. 

“Who?” I wondered. 

The grin told me it was someone she shouldn’t be with. “Saerlund.” 

“The jarl’s son? But even I know he’s not popular due to his vocal support of the Empire.” 

“Precisely why I like him. He’s a good man and has the courage of his convictions. Of course, we generally have to meet in secret but…” She leaned in closer. “Can I tell you another secret?” 

“Of course.” 

“We’re considering eloping. We’ll leave Riften behind.” 

“Where will you go?” 

“Somewhere where supporting the Empire isn’t a problem.” 

“Could always try Solitude, though I wouldn’t use your family name.” 

“Once we marry, we’ll change our names.” 

“Do you need help getting away?” 

“No. We have a plan ready. You know, the whole middle of the night, cover of darkness escape. I think our disappearance would barely be noticed, nor will anyone really care.” 

“Send word once you’re safe, just so I know at least.” 

She assured me that she would do just that, then she kissed my cheek, said her goodbyes, and headed off. “Sweet girl. Can see why you bedded her,” Astrid said once we were alone again. 

“She’s very sweet, but she does have a wild side. But I’m glad she’s met someone who makes her happy. I wasn’t ever going to be the one.” 

“Why is that?” 

“Before Muiri, I was committed to Haelga, in the sense that I loved her, and if it was between her and Ingun, Karliah or anyone, I’d have chosen her. But once I met Muiri, that was it, I was committed to one woman, well, at least after a couple of months and I knew Muiri was the one. If you’d had the chance to meet, her, you would have understood why I chose her.” 

Astrid was quiet for a while before asking, “You still miss her, don’t you?” 

“Every day. That sort of love is something we probably only experience once in our lives. It’s a rather depressing thing Haelga and I share. We’re both widows, though we don’t actually talk about it.” 

Once the sun started to set, we headed inside so I could start dinner. Haelga arrived not long later, wearing a stunning dress that showed off her curves and bust, with enough cleavage to distract me as I cooked. The two women sat the table with a bottle of wine as I cooked, hearing them chat and laugh as they no doubt got to know each other and probably share details about me. Both would know why they were there, and as I stood at the doorway, leaning against it, I couldn’t help notice how similar the two were, at least in appearance. Personality wise, there were stark differences. They both turned to look at me and smiled. 

“I am a very lucky man,” I stated. 

“Still want dinner or do you want to take both of us upstairs now?” Haelga wondered. 

“I need food as I’m going to need the energy.” 

“Long night planned?” Astrid asked. 

“You’re both going to bed sore tonight, front and back.” 

The two shared a glance. “That’s just the sort of night I love, Astrid,” Haelga stated. 

“I’ve heard about this room you both enjoy. I understand you’re putting on a show.” 

“Oh, I’m hoping you’ll be involved in some way.” 

“Of course.” 

Dinner was simple as always, but I’d learned enough from Aranea about adding flavour. She now lived in Muiri’s old place and ran her own little store. She was no longer my steward, as I simply wasn’t around enough to warrant having one, so while she would occasionally visit, we were simply friends. 

After dinner, we finished the bottle of wine, Astrid and Haelga continuing to chat away before there was an unspoken conversation between the pair, both turning to me. Moving their chairs closer, I was soon kissing one or the other as their hands were all over me, finding my clothing taken off rather quickly, sitting down naked in a couple of minutes. Parting my legs, they got down on their knees, Haelga grabbing my growing cock as the two women met my eyes then looked at each and kissed. 

“This is going to be a good night,” I muttered. 

I wasn’t going to last long with two women pleasuring my cock at once. Haelga’s head was soon bobbing up and down, swallowing my entire length. There was little teasing, as she was going to get me off quickly, knowing I would last longer afterwards. She would hand my cock over to Astrid, who followed her example, the two ensuring they got equal time with my cock in their mouth. 

Letting them know when I was going to finish, Astrid handed it to Haelga, who blew me until I let her know I was going to erupt, Haelga taking a mouthful as always. She then smiled at me and turned to Astrid, the pair kissing as I knew what they were doing, both looking at me as they made out. “Okay, I’m done. Don’t need anything else.” 

The pair swallowed them laughed, as I no doubt had an enormous grin on my face. “This is just the start, Ragnar.” 

“I need to eat out one or two both of you. Right now.” 

Astrid was stripped quickly and laid back on the dinner table, Haelga and I both eating her out together. As we used our mouths on her pussy, I whispered into Haelga’s ear what I was going to do. She quietly urged me to do it, so I started to rub Astrid’s arsehole. She lifted her head and smiled, nodding that it was okay. Sliding a finger into her arse, the noise she made suggested she wasn’t going to last much longer. 

“And that’s just his finger,” Haelga said, “Imagine his cock later tonight.” 

“Enjoyed it before,” Astrid whispered. 

“So have I. Plenty of times. It’s rather addictive.” Haelga leaned into my ear. “Will you tie me up?” 

“And more, if you want. Putting on a show, remember.” 

Haelga put her hand between her legs before sticking her fingers into my mouth. “I can’t wait.” 

Astrid was making plenty of noise and I allowed Haelga to bring her to orgasm. Watching one woman I love bring the other woman I loved to orgasm was… probably one of the sexiest and erotic things I’d seen in my life. Astrid immediately sat up, stating she wanted to taste herself on Haelga’s lips, and I felt my cock spring back to life as I watched my two blonde beauties make out. I helped undress Healga first, her dress unbuttoned and falling away easily, unsurprised to see she only wore panties, so those came off easily. I then undressed Astrid, and once both were naked, we headed upstairs. 

Astrid had seen the Dibella room before, but I let Haelga explain some of the things we used in there. Haelga and I had always wanted a threesome, and though we’d expected another man to be involved, we had prepared for another woman, as we had designed and made something in preparation. Taking it from the drawer, Astrid did have a good giggle as we placed it down. “You strap that around you so it’s just like a cock. Then you can double penetrate me.” 

“And you like that?” Astrid asked. 

“Ragnar has done it before, usually his cock in my arse and toy in my pussy. Now I can be fucked properly.” 

“Wouldn’t this be more comfortable on the bed?” 

“Yes, that’s why that will be for later. For now, Ragnar is going to tie me up and do a few things. You can watch, even participate if you’d like. The grand finale will be… Well, what do you think?” 

“I can imagine it will be something involving your arse. He’s told me before about your desires.” 

Astrid had seen the room. Had heard about what Haelga and I would get up to inside it. But hearing was one thing. Seeing was believing. Her reaction to how events unfolded as Haelga received what she desired was rather amusing at times, amazed at what Haelga truly wanted from me during the hour or two we spent together in there. Most of the time, Astrid was an observer as Haelga found herself tied up, completely at my mercy, though even Astrid mentioned that, despite some of the things I was doing, it was done with love and affection, though Astrid herself didn’t appear interested in being a participant. Or, at least, not a participant in regards to particular activities in that room. 

Once Haelga was left rather satisfied with what we’d done, most of the time involved with my cock being buried in her arse, Astrid murmuring amazement at how her arse wasn’t too sore to handle more, we gathered on the bed, where Haelga received some aftercare first before we turned the night into a proper threesome. 

“I want both my holes filled, then Astrid can get all the attention,” Haelga suggested. 

“And I guess I’m just providing the dick here?” 

She looked at me and smiled. “You can have both of us riding you as the grand finale, Ragnar.” 

I couldn’t disagree with that. With the toy strapped to Astrid, she lay down first with Haelga straddling her before I watched the two women make out and Astrid rather enjoy fucking Haelga. Eventually the pair stopped and looked at me, happily watching. “Are you not going to join in?” 

“I’m watching two beautiful blondes currently fuck. I’m not sure if I want to ruin the moment.” 

“I want you to ruin me again, Ragnar. Get that cock inside me.” 

After the pounding she’d just taken, even I was wondering how she could take much more, so I remained gentle as Astrid and I started to fuck her in unison. I got into a position where I could lean down and meet Astrid’s eyes on occasion. She looked to be having quite a lot of fun too, and definitely liked kissing Haelga. Having already blown a couple of loads into Haelga earlier on, there was no chance I was going to finish again anytime soon, so it was all about Haelga and what she was experiencing. With a real and fake shaft pumping into her, the orgasm was inevitable, and once she had around her fourth of the evening so far, even she had to cry enough. 

She was so worn out that she suggested Astrid and I just enjoy each other for a time, happy to lie next to us as Astrid made sure I was on my back before she had me take her arse as well. My surprise obviously showed, as she smiled, leaning down to kiss me, before whispering that, having watched Haelga enjoy it so much, she wanted to share the same sort of experience. 

I didn’t last too long, not that Astrid complained, but having spent quite a bit of time with Haelga in the Dibella room, I was rather exhausted, so we agreed to go to sleep and perhaps resume in the morning. I think Haelga definitely liked that idea, and I’ll admit my ego couldn’t have been much bigger as I wrapped an arm around each woman as they cuddled into me. 

“I’m wondering if life gets much better,” I wondered aloud. I didn’t receive an answer, so I guess they either agreed, or were too tired to argue. 

Surprisingly, we didn’t continue our antics the next morning, Haelga whispering into my ear that she was feeling rather tender after the activities of the previous evening, while Astrid wanted me alone later that day. We would remain in Riften for at least a couple more days, and the three of us agreed that, while we were in Riften, Haelga would visit us each night, both women aware I loved them equally, and it was amazing that the two of them seemed to like each other too. 

On our last night, Astrid wanted to be involved in some of the activities Haelga and I got up to. Once I had her tied up, receiving compliments at how well I had her bound, she surprised me by submitting completely. Haelga and I both had a lot of fun with her that night, and Astrid slept soundly after we exhausted her. As Astrid slept, Haelga and I disappeared for some fun of our own, ensuring the door was closed though I’m sure Haelga probably woke Astrid at times with the noise she made. 

Haelga was worried upon my leaving as always, though Astrid assured her that I would return unharmed. The former was aware that Astrid wished to carry my child. Haelga hadn’t changed her mind yet about wanting a child, though I knew, in those private moments we had together, she was thinking about, simply because she thought I wanted them with her. I just reassured her that I expected nothing from her, at least in regards to bearing children. 

On the ride back to the Sanctuary, Astrid and I managed to behave, hoping that Nazir would have already returned, or would return quickly. While we were not worried about our contract being discovered, as it was unlikely there would be any leaks, the quicker we completed it, the better. A couple of reasons. One, being the longer we planned and operated, the more chance of being discovered or caught. And two, with each passing day, Astrid’s mind wandered away from matters of the Brotherhood to the future. 

Nazir returned the day after our own. He had good news. Virane had told him everything we wanted to know before his unfortunate death. The Gourmet was an orc by the name of Balagog gro-Nolob. He was currently in Skyrim. He was staying at the Nightgate Inn, far to the north, west of Windhelm. I would travel there, eliminate the orc, assume his identity, then kill the Emperor. 

Or, at least, that was the plan…

Chapter 24: To Kill an Emperor

Astrid asked me to kill the orc then return to receive final instructions. I’d have rather completed the job all at once, return, then take her with me, but I guess there were final plans to be made before I was sent to kill the Emperor. On the morning I left, she simply told me to be careful, complete the job, and ensure I returned safely, as the role of assassination would be for myself. As she had made up her mind regarding her future, and she knew I didn’t really care about being Listener, she liked the idea of myself taking the glory of making the kill. 

As always, it was a day’s ride to Windhelm, and for the evening, I took a room in the inn as always, but went looking for an old friend. Not finding her in the tavern in the Grey Quarter, I was directed to her home. She was surprised but delighted to see me, inviting me in for a drink, where we caught up on what was happening in our lives. Again, there was no attraction between us, but each time I was in Windhelm, we would meet up as, after standing up for her, we had developed a friendship. I was one of very few Nords she trusted. 

It was a dark and bitterly cold morning as I walked back to the stables. The snowfall had been significant the previous evening, even my walk from the Suvaris residence to my inn having been rather treacherous, the numerous tankards consumed having an effect on me at the same time. The roads had barely been cleared as I mounted my horse and headed west, though men were out with shovels, helping make them at least slightly passable. 

Making it to Nightgate Inn just after lunchtime, I tied up my horse, headed inside, and booked a room for the evening. With no sign of the orc, I wandered outside and found him standing on a pier beside the lake. Though I could have made the kill there and then, I figured my arrival and possible departure, with the orc going missing, might raise too many questions. I never wanted to get to know my marks so, after saying hello, I wandered off, only returning to the inn once light started to fade. 

I ordered dinner and partook in a couple of tankards, but headed to bed early for two reasons. One, to actually get a little sleep. And, two, as I would wake in the late evening or very early morning to complete the job. Waking a few hours later, the inn was near dark and silent, the barkeep having also headed to bed, only the fire still smouldering, providing barely any light or warmth. 

Not finding the orc in either of the other rooms, I assumed he would be downstairs. Why he would choose to stay down there, I would never know, but it meant I could kill him quietly and hide the body, though I’m sure the innkeeper would probably go looking for him soon enough. He didn’t wake as I approached, covering his mouth as no doubt his eyes would widen as I slid the dagger into his throat. But he died almost immediately and without a sound. The bastard was heavy, so dragging him into a hiding spot wasn’t particularly easy, but I managed to lift him into a large barrel, covering it with a lid, confident he now wouldn’t be found for at least a couple of days. 

Heading back to bed, I was woken by the innkeeper the next morning, and after enjoying a hearty breakfast, thanked him for the service and headed out to my horse. He muttered something about the orc not appearing for breakfast, but whether he went to look for him or not, I didn’t find out. Once mounted on my horse, I rode straight for the Sanctuary, arriving well after dark. 

Astrid was already in bed by the time I made my way inside, sitting on the edge of the bed as she woke up. After a brief kiss, I told her the good news. “The Gourmet is dead. They hopefully won’t find his body for a few days. And I have his Writ of Passage. The path to the Emperor now lies wide open.” 

The smile was immediate. “Good. I can think of a way of celebrating the news. We’ll discuss the next step in the morning.” 

We went to sleep an hour later, that smile of hers having only broadened as she cuddled into my side. 

Gathering all of us around her table the next day, she announced that I would be given the honour of assassinating the Emperor. There were no objections, all our colleagues recognising that I had been at the forefront of everything leading to this moment, in addition to my position as Listener. None other than Astrid knew that I didn’t care about the position, but if it gave us an advantage or two, I wasn’t going to complain. 

“The plan is quite simple. Since assassinating Vittoria Vici, the Emperor has arrived in Skyrim and is presently in Solitude, where he is spending time with General Tullius regarding the ongoing civil war and plan of battle against the Stormcloaks. He dines at Castle Dour every night. The Writ of Passage Ragnar secured will allow him entrance to the kitchen posing as the Gourmet.” She looked at me. “While I’m sure you would like to bury a blade in his chest, it will be a simple case of poisoning, Ragnar.” 

“I’m not fussed how it’s done, as long as he dies.” She raised her eyebrows as I shrugged. “I don’t care one way or the other about the Empire. Grew up there, but there’s no sense of loyalty, to them or the other side. It’s business.” 

A smile and a nod. “Exactly.” 

“So how am I poisoning him?” 

Festus cleared his throat. “Jarrin root, Ragnar. All it takes is one taste, and the effects are quite immediate. The Emperor will be serving Sithis before he even knows he's dead.” 

Astrid gestured with her head and everyone departed, leaving the two of us alone. She rounded the table, taking both of my hands in hers. “It took all the favours, bribes, and blackmails I could muster, but I've secured your exit out of the keep. Just follow my instructions, and the Dark Brotherhood will be back on top. Then… Then we can leave this behind.” 

“You’re still sure about your choice?” 

“Do you want to keep doing this, Ragnar?” I shrugged, as I didn’t really care one way or the other. “If we… or you… kill the Emperor, where do we go from there? What could we possibly do that would exceed that sort of kill? Don’t get me wrong, I still find a thrill in the kill, and spilling blood still…” She trailed off and smiled. “Well, I think we both know we’re a little weird about certain things.” 

“You mean discussing murder gets you hot and you like to fuck after it’s been discussed.” 

“Stated bluntly but correctly as always, Ragnar. But tell me true, do you want to keep doing this?” 

“No.” 

“The return of the Night Mother will herald a change no matter what I want or what I do. You provide a different future. It will be strange adapting to civilian life, but our luck won’t hold forever either. Every other Sanctuary has fallen. There will be a time when this one falls too.” 

“Do you think anyone else knows what you’re thinking?” 

“If they do, they haven’t said anything. I think they’ll be unhappier about you leaving rather than myself. But they don’t know where you live when you’re not here. I think we’ll be safe, but I guess we’ll always have to watch our backs, just in case.” 

“Sooner we get this over and done with, the better. I’d like to move on with our lives.” 

She grabbed my hand, putting it under her skin tight shirt, on her stomach, as she stepped closer. “I wonder if we’ve already conceived,” she said quietly, “I won’t know for at least a few weeks if we have.” 

I felt the smile form as I asked, “One would think you’re excited at the thought.” 

“Making life instead of taking it. I never even dreamed, Ragnar… Arnbjorn never had an interest.” She paused before adding, “You don’t have to leave until tomorrow. Want to head to the bedroom to make sure we have?” 

At dinner later that evening, there was plenty of talk, even excitement, at what was about to happen. Everyone believed that we could not fail. There was little chance many knew out of the Sanctuary of what was to come. It was believed no-one still considered the Dark Brotherhood a threat, and certainly no-one would have believed us capable of assassinating the Emperor. We would prove them all wrong. 

The next morning, while I was feeling confident as I prepared my horse for departure, I could sense the nerves from Astrid. Our embrace lasted far longer than normal. She did not ask for a promise of my return. She simply asked for me to complete the job and return the Brotherhood to glory. Once that was done, our departure would certainly be more… acceptable. The only real problem she foresaw was the fact I was the Listener. But that was for later… 

With time on my side, I did not rush to Solitude. The Gourmet was expected, and it would only be after my arrival that the Emperor would be summoned to Solitude. From what Astrid had learned, my arrival would result in a banquet being organised, at which the Emperor would request the Gourmet cook one of his favourite meals. Astrid assumed I would be told upon arrival. 

I didn’t arrive in Solitude until three days later, taking my time as I took a longer route than normal, arriving in mid-afternoon. There was an air of excitement around the city as I walked through the gates, hearing plenty of conversation regarding the imminent arrival of the Emperor. I headed straight for Castle Dour, overhearing conversation between either city guard or what appeared to be agents I remembered seeing in Dragon Bridge. What I heard was of interest, and I was able to listen into a particular conversation that gave me plenty of information. 

“This city is crawling with Imperial Legion, and you know what? I'm still nervous. Lazy and useless, the lot of them. They can't even keep the Stormcloaks in line. No way I trust them with the Emperor's life.” 

“You worry too much. The Emperor's never been safer. You think assassination attempts are planned overnight? We discovered the plot. End of threat.” 

That was good news. They bought the letter and other items incriminating Gaius Maro. To be honest, while I believed it was believable, I would have thought they’d have cast a net for other conspirator’s. Perhaps this was a sign they were over-confident, though there was still a large presence of guards, soldiers and agents. Dressed in regular clothing, I barely earned a second glance.

“I suppose. But what about the old man? Son killed, family name ruined and he acts as if nothing even happened. Think he's even fit for duty?” 

“I'm going to pretend I didn't hear that. Commander Maro is the best the Penitus Oculatus has ever produced. You should be half the man he is.” 

“You misunderstand. It's just I feel for him, is all. To carry a weight like that. It's got to take its toll. That happened to me, I'd be a wreck.” 

It was easy to decipher the concern, the fact that Maro was no doubt distracted by what had befallen his son. To hear he was still in charge was a surprise to me. I hadn’t met the man, but it was Commander Maro himself at the door. After ordering me to halt, I carefully handed over the Writ of Passage I’d secured from the orc. Maro read the words before looking up at me in surprise. 

“By Azura. The Gourmet! I... I'm sorry! I didn't realise! We... We had no idea when to expect you, you understand.” 

“I get that a lot. Don’t worry about it.” 

“Okay. The Emperor isn’t in residence right now, though we have anticipated your arrival for some time. The banquet he wishes to hold is tomorrow. Can you wait at one of the local inns until that time?” 

“Of course. I am at the service of the Emperor, after all.” 

“If you return during mid-morning tomorrow, head straight for the kitchen. Your arrival has been expected, so inside you’ll find everything you will require.” 

I stayed at the Winking Skeever that evening. I’ll admit to almost sleeping with one eye open, as although I remained confident, I would have preferred to have completed the job immediately. Waking the next morning, I ate breakfast and headed out into the city, where the only topic of conversation was the arrival of the Emperor. Apparently he had arrived the previous evening, entering through a side entrance rather than the main gates. Although Solitude was the capital of Skyrim, and a safe Imperial city, the fact the High King had been murdered in the Blue Palace lingered in the memories of everyone. 

Heading up to Castle Dour, Maro was waiting for me again. He appeared to recognise me, though asked for the Writ again. After re-reading the words, he met my eyes and nodded. “Again, pleased to meet you, Gourmet. Proceed to the kitchens straight away. Gianna, the castle chef, has been eagerly awaiting your arrival.” 

“Thank you.” 

Politeness always helped. 

The castle was full of servants scurrying about, so my progress to the kitchen was possibly observed though ignored. Dressed in regular clothing, and walking confidently, I would have looked like someone who belonged. The kitchen was warm to rather hot, and who I assumed was the head chef was already at the pot. She looked at me as I approached. “Who are you?” 

“The Gourmet.” 

“You’re the Gourmet? Oh! Finally! When I heard the Gourmet was being brought in to cook for the Emperor, I could hardly believe it. It's just...” She trailed off, looking me up and down. 

“What?” I asked, feeling the first fleeting sense of nerves. Did she know who the Gourmet really was? 

“You're a Nord! I never would have guessed it! But where in the world did you learn to cook like that? Here in Skyrim? Or maybe somewhere less...” 

“Who did you think the Gourmet was?” 

“Well, to be honest, I always pictured the Gourmet as being a Wood Elf, a Bosmer. Their knowledge of woodland herbs… If not a Bosmer, then I assumed perhaps a Breton…” 

“I’m one hundred percent Nord, Gianna. So, let me get an apron and a hat, and we’ll get started.” 

“Yes. Of course.” 

After dressing in the appropriate attire, Gianna announced what we were doing. “The Emperor has requested your signature dish -- the Potage le Magnifique. I've taken the liberty of getting it started. But the cookbook only says so much, and everyone makes the Potage differently. I would be honoured if we could make it, you know, the Gourmet's special way. The base broth is already boiled. We can get started right now. So which ingredient should I add next?” 

“A sweetroll.” 

I think she near enough started to laugh. “Oh, how decadent! I never would have guessed.” She added the sweetroll, and I was left wondering how it would taste. It didn’t particularly matter in the end. “Okay, what next?” 

“A nirnroot. If not cooked properly, it can be dangerous to your health. Cooked correctly, and the flavour is sharp but long lasting.” 

Gianna smiled at my explanation. “I use Nirnroot as a special seasoning all the time as well. What a wonderful idea.” 

“Next is some diced horker meat.” 

I think Gianna near enough started to salivate at what we were cooking. “So delicious. I swear, is there a soul alive who doesn't enjoy the taste of...” She trailed off, looking a little embarrassed. “Sorry, I didn't mean to get carried away. There we go, one cup of diced horker meat. I have to say, the stew seems done.” 

I dismissed her apology with a wave of the hand but a smile. “No worries. But there is one last herb to add. Trust me, it gives the Potage a real kick, particularly the way the Emperor likes it.” 

“Are you sure?” I gave her a look. A friendly raised eyebrow, again with a smile. “Of course, of course. Let me add this.” 

“Just sprinkle a little bit. As you said, we don’t want to dilute the distinct flavours.” 

The dining room wasn’t that far away, Gianna carrying the cooking pot as we could hear the conversation between the Emperor and guests as we approached. Funnily enough, they were speaking of the murders that had brought him to Skyrim, and the assassination plot apparently foiled that was led by Gaius Maro. There were one or two bad jokes that led to laughter, Gianna halting us on the threshold until we were summoned by a guard. 

“Aha! Here we are. Honoured guests, I present to you – the Gourmet!” There was applause at my appearance. I merely bowed at the Emperor, as Gianna placed the pot near the Emperor. “Ah, the Potage le Magnifique. So delicious. My friends, as Emperor, I of course reserve the right of first taste.” 

The Emperor helped himself to a generous portion of the potage. If Festus was right, he’d only take a bite or two before the herb worked its magic. His first bite must have blown him away as he was immediately complimentary. He took a second and third bite, continuing to extoll how marvellous it was. Then he dropped his spoon as he looked my way. “It... I... I think something's... wrong... I... Ugh...” 

I turned to look at Gianna. “Run. Now.” 

There were two agents in the room. I might have been unarmed, but I move fast for a big man. I closed in on the nearest one and put a fist into his throat. He dropped immediately to a knee, and I put my own knee into his face. Quickly grabbing his sword, I put my foot into the arse of one of the nobles to clear them out of the way as the second agent attacked me. They were meant to be the best, but the agent was still in shock, and no doubt underestimated who I was, probably still thinking I was just a chef. I disarmed him, and thought about letting him live. There were already witnesses, but the less people who knew my face, the better. I put the sword through his chest, then the other agent lying on the ground, before making my escape. 

The bridge was clear, just as Astrid had promised. Or, at least, it was clear until I was halfway across. That was when Maro showed his face, alongside five more agents, all of them armed. Standing slightly above them, he actually applauded me. 

“That man was, by far, the most insufferable decoy the Emperor has ever employed. I'm glad he's dead. Ah, but I'm even happier that you killed him. You, an assassin for the Dark Brotherhood, has just made an attempt on the Emperor's life. Would have succeeded, had it been the real man.” 

Shit. It was a set-up. I had an inkling this had been far too easy. Why had there been no taster for the Emperor? Didn’t even think of that. Surely he’d have had one, even for someone as trusted as the Gourmet, particularly after the plot to kill him. 

“Surprised?” I merely met his eyes, giving nothing away. No doubt what he was about to tell me wouldn’t be a surprise at all. “So was I when a member of your so-called ‘Family’ approached me with news of your location and who you all were. Let’s just say you probably pissed off the wrong man. Not only did you attempt to kill the Emperor and lay a trail of devastation as you tried, but to steal the man’s wife? The only reason I’ve let him go is he’s going to take some pleasure in helping us eradicate all of you.” 

“Arnbjorn,” I muttered. 

“Oh yes, he had quite a lot of information about you. And Astrid. And the rest of you. Right now, my men are moving in on the location of your Sanctuary, led by the jilted husband. I’m going to allow him a modicum of revenge by killing his wife. Then I might even consider letting him go. I’ll see how I feel. But as for you, you’re responsible for everything. The death of my son. The death of the Emperor’s cousin. The attempted assassination of the Emperor. You sure have been busy. But I will bargain with you right now. Tell me who organised all this, tell me who put you up to this, and I’ll make your death quick.” 

I flipped him my middle finger and beckoned the other five on. Maro laughed before he issued the order to have me killed, preferably chopped into little pieces afterwards, as he disappeared, no doubt heading straight for Falkreath. 

I’d like to say I made short work of the five agents, but unlike the two in the dining room, they were not surprised and were ready for me. The first one died quickly enough, but four on one is nver good odds. Only one or two things worked in my favour. One was the narrowness of the bridge, so they couldn’t surround me. The other was the fact all wanted the kill, so they got in each other’s way. That was perfect me for me, so I stayed where it was the narrowest, and used anything to my advantage. I managed to put my foot into the chest of one and actually kick him over the ledge, hearing his screams all the way until he hit the ground. The other three I slowly but surely put down, but not without taking wounds of my own. 

I made it to the horse I’d left near the exit point, bleeding from numerous wounds, healing those I could, but my magical talents were not enough to stop them all. Despite the pain I was in, a wound across my chest particularly bad, I dug my ankles into the sides of my horse and we took off. I rested forward in the saddle and let the horse have its head, hating the fact the animal moved so damned slow. But I wasn’t going to stop unless the horse collapsed. I needed to make it to the Sanctuary and fast. 

I’m not sure how long it took for us to return. At least two nights, though I spent half the time passed out on the horse, ensuring my hands were tied to the reins so I didn’t fall off as I slept. Once we were approaching Falkreath from the west, I knew we’d approach the Sanctuary first, dismounting my horse and tying it up first before hobbling my way towards the black door. 

I could hear voices, two of them, chatting away about what was going on inside. I had no idea if they’d just arrived or were clearing up. I took both by surprise, leaping from above them, taking one out immediately, managing to fight off the other despite my injuries that meant I had to basically fight one handed, my left arm hanging useless to my side. Looking around outside, I found the body of Festus, his body used as if it had been an archer’s practice target. I felt no sadness at realising he was dead. As long as Astrid… 

Slipping inside the black door, I found the body of Veezara at the corner leading towards the first chamber near Astrid’s bedroom. A cursory check showed his neck had been severed, his head barely attached to the rest of his body. There were probably even more wounds, but there was little point. I checked the bedroom but there was no sign of Astrid, moving deeper into the Sanctuary, flames everywhere, the smoke causing me to lower my head, coughing away. I ran into the first agents not much further in, taking care of them as quickly as possible, before moving into the main chamber. Gabriella was still alive, fighting off three of them. I helped her beat them off before she collapsed into me, barely alive. Wrapping an arm around her waist, I helped her move ahead, finding Babette cowering under the table, the spider they kept as a ‘pet’ already dead. 

She joined us, the three of us finding Nazir surrounded by flames and agents. Gabriella could barely stand but summoned magic to help fight them off, Nazir surprised but thankful all at once as the pair of hacked at the remaining agents. As soon as they were dead, he whirled around to face me, weapon still raised. A look up and down saw him lower his weapon. 

“You look like shit, Listener. I was starting to wonder if you survived all this.” 

“It was all a trap, Nazir. The whole damned thing. We were set up.” 

“Considering most of us are now dead, I assumed as much. And before you ask, no, I don't think it was you. Well, maybe I did, but you saving my sorry hide just now sort of erased any doubts. So thanks.” 

“No worries. Now, I think getting out of here would be the best idea, considering this place is burning and about to collapse on our heads. But where’s Astrid?” 

He shook his head. “I’m not sure. But Arnbjorn…” 

“He was here? You saw him?” 

“He took great delight in leading the cohort of agents inside. Took us completely by surprise. Our numbers were few. We barely fought them off, as you could see.” 

As we attempted to flee, the flames spreading heat and smoke further still, I heard the voice of the Night Mother tickle my mind, calling me towards her. Standing before her shrunken corpse, she bid me to embrace her, so that I may live. I turned back to Nazir, who understood immediately as I stepped into the coffin. He closed the doors and I felt the coffin being pushed, before there was a sound of glass being smashed and a splash. 

The Night Mother then told me to sleep. So I did. 

---

My eyelids fluttered as faint light hit my face. I sat up immediately, sword in hand. I thought it was all a bad dream, but the smells of burned flesh told me that it had happened. Turning to my right, Nazir had both hands up, asking me to take it easy. Babette was by his side. “Gabriella?” 

“She’s still alive. Barely, I’m not sure how, but she lives.” 

“Anyone else make it? Astrid?” 

“No sign of her.”

Then the Night Mother spoke again. “You must speak with Astrid. Here, in the Dark Brotherhood Sanctuary.” 

A look must have passed my face. “The Night Mother?” Nazir wondered. I nodded as he offered his hand to help me out of the coffin. I first approached Gabriella, who looked up at me with a slight grin. 

“Babette, do you have anything that could help her?” 

“Not right now, Listener. Once we find Astrid, we need to get out of here.” 

Nearly the entire Sanctuary had collapsed in on itself, so I knew we’d leave and never return. I headed back to Astrid’s bedroom. The flames had destroyed everything, but there was no body. Turning in a circle, I noticed an alcove, which led to a secret room. It was there I found Astrid. 

I took a knee beside her, giving her a gentle shake. “Astrid?” 

She opened her eyes, meeting mine as she turned to face me. She was deathly pale. Glancing down, her armour was in tatters, and blood was pooled below her on the ground. She was not long… 

“We can heal you.” 

She smiled, a sweet smile that told me I was being a fool. She stroked my cheek, leaving her hand where it was, feeling slightly cold against it, as she spoke. “I’m just glad you’re alive.” 

“So are you. So what we’re going to do is lift you up, put you on my horse, and…” 

“I’m sorry, Ragnar. I never thought he…” 

I shushed her. “It’s not your fault. I should have tracked him down and taken care of him.” Then I looked around and noticed the candles, the flower… I met her eyes again. “You performed the Black Sacrament?” 

“We were betrayed, Ragnar. And I was a fool. So I performed it, prayed to the Night Mother, so I can order you to kill someone for me. But once you agree, I must die.” 

“No.” 

She placed her other hand on my cheek. “Ragnar, I am going to die.” 

I blinked rapidly. “No, not again.” 

She brought my face down to hers to kiss me. “I love you, Ragnar. I cannot say I happily go to the Void, but if it saves your life and the lives of our friends, and as long as you kill the person I want killed, then I will die happy.” 

“What about our future together?” 

She smiled, but it was a sad one. “We were fooling ourselves, Ragnar. We’re assassins. There is no such thing as happily ever after with people like us. What I can say is that I have loved every single time we’ve been together. Meeting you was the best thing to happen in my life. I wish it didn’t have to end here, but it must, for you to survive.” 

I swallowed, and finally nodded, accepting her words. “Who?” 

“Arnbjorn.” 

“Do you know where he is?” 

“No. But I know you will find him, Ragnar. If not today or tomorrow, maybe one day in the future. But whatever the case, I know you’ll kill him for me.” 

“I won’t just kill him…” 

She took a dagger sheathed to her side. “You must end me with this, Ragnar. It is a symbol of position as Leader of a Sanctuary. I gladly hand it to you. Lead the survivors to Dawnstar. Rebuild the Brotherhood there. And, most importantly, complete the task given to us by Motierre. The Emperor must die.” 

I nodded before leaning down to kiss her again. I felt her arms wrap around me, and I know she put all the feelings into that last kiss. Once we broke apart, our faces inches apart, I stuck the dagger in. “I love you,” she whispered as I held her body to mine. I held onto her long after she had departed, unable to stop the tears streaking down my face. This is what I get for falling in love a second time. For planning a future a second time. The gods clearly did not want a happily ever after for someone such as myself. 

Sitting up on my knees, I wiped my cheeks before exiting into the first chamber, where Nazir, Babette and Gabriella waited. They didn’t need to ask any questions about what happened. “I must speak with the Night Mother. As long as one of us still lives, the contract remains open.” 

Nazir and I dragged the coffin into at least a standing position. It wasn’t a surprise she had information for me. “We must fulfil our contract. Emperor Titus Mede II must be eliminated,” she ordered, “Speak with Amaund Motierre at the Bannered Mare in Whiterun.” 

“He’s still in Skyrim?” I thought he’d have long disappeared. 

“Yes. He will know the true Emperor's location. But first, inform Nazir of your plans. For you are the Listener, and must bind this Family together.” 

So that’s what I did. Nazir and I sat down, discussing our next move. We agreed that our base of operations would move to Dawnstar. He would liaise with Delvin while I was away and help kit the new Sanctuary out with what we needed. He wasn’t that surprised the contract on the Emperor remained open, and that the Night Mother had instructions. I also informed the three of what Astrid had asked for. “Any ideas where Arnbjorn would have gone?” 

The three shook their heads. “He’d have gone to ground, if they haven’t already turned on him,” Gabriella said. 

“You think they’d kill him?” 

She nodded. “He’s an admitted Brotherhood member, or at least, ex-member. Though I guess he might have bought his freedom sacrificing the rest of us.” 

“I’ll worry about him afterwards. I’m heading home, then to Whiterun. I will only return once the Emperor is dead.” 

The first thing I did was head back into the hidden room and pick up Astrid’s body. I wasn’t just going to leave her there. I could have buried her in Falkreath, but that hadn’t been her home. I grabbed a shovel from outside, as the agents had brought along a few tools, and I dug a grave near the small lake only a few metres from the black door. Once it was deep enough, I found something to wrap her body with, and Nazir helped me lower the body into the hole. 

I wasn’t sure what to say. I didn’t surprise them by stating that I loved her, that I would miss her, and that I would get revenge. I didn’t mention what we had planned. It was no longer important. Babette admitted she would miss her, as did Nazir. Gabriella admitted her guilt that she’d ever doubted Astrid. We asked Sithis to take care of her in the Void, as she had at least always remained true to him, and with those last words, we filled in the hole, making sure I left a marker so I would know where she was buried. I would endeavour to return to visit her, just as I did with Muiri. 

There was a spare cart with a horse nearby, left by the agents, so Nazir and I dragged the Night Mother’s coffin outside and loaded it up. They would head straight to Dawnstar, though would stop on the way to heal Gabriella, who was still looking poorly herself. Wishing me good luck, they headed off as I returned to my horse, mounted up, and rode straight for Riften. 

Once there, I went straight to Haelga’s. She took one look at me and understood, embracing me. “You looked just the same when…” 

“I have no luck. You should stay away from me, Haelga.” 

“Like hell I would do that, Ragnar. What happened?” 

“We were betrayed. So I leave tomorrow to take care of everything. I’m not sure… when…” 

“You want to say if, don’t you?” 

I leaned back and met her eyes. “There is a chance… But I don’t particularly want to die either.” 

“Will you stay with me tonight?” 

“I will, but not for that. Not after…” 

“I was more worried about you, Ragnar.” 

She joined me for dinner in the Bee and Barb, where I got rather drunk, not particularly remembering leaving the tavern, nor if we actually did anything together that night. Waking the next morning, the hangover was horrendous, and it was only then that I noticed my nudity. Haelga woke up and assured me that all we did was sleep, and that she always slept nude. So did I, so I believed her. Plus, the usual scent of sex was missing. 

After a quick breakfast, she followed me home, where I changed into my armour and packed all the supplies I would need. She mentioned it looked like I was going to war. She wasn’t completely wrong. Taking everything out to my horse, I ensured everything was tied up before I hugged her a final time. 

“I love you,” she whispered, “But I won’t make you promise.” 

“I love you, Haelga. And I have someone that I want to return to.” 

“Do what you need to do, then come home, Ragnar.”

I kissed her, holding her tight to my body, all the passion and love we had for the other in that last kiss. She had no idea what I was about to do, and it was best she didn’t. She knew it would be dangerous, could possibly cost me my life. That’s all she needed to know. After mounting my horse, she grabbed my hand a final time, telling me she loved me once again. I said the same words back, and with a final wave, I pointed the horse north and rode away. 

I didn’t look back. 

Arriving in Whiterun after dark, I headed to the Bannered Mare, thinking Motierre wouldn’t have stayed anywhere else, not if he wanted to remain incognito. I found his bodyguard sitting at a table. He recognised me immediately and jerked his head towards one of the rooms for rent. Knocking on the door, I entered without invitation, and I think Motierre near enough shit himself upon seeing me. He stayed silent as I took the spare chair at the table. 

“We have unfinished business, Motierre.” 

He leaned forward, and I could feel the nerves radiate off him. “Please! You mustn't think I had anything to do with what happened. I wanted the Emperor dead! The true Emperor! I still do! It was Maro and whoever sold you out.” 

“Motierre, if I thought you were involved, you would already be dead.” He signed with relief before I asked, “The Emperor is still alive. So where is he?” 

“You mean, after all that's transpired, the Dark Brotherhood will still honour the contract?” 

“The Black Sacrament was performed, Motierre. Sithis is due a soul.” 

He couldn’t hold back the smile. “Why, this is astounding news! Wonderful news!” He immediately turned serious, lowering his voice so that I could barely hear it, drowned out by the noise of the music in the main room. “The Emperor is still in Skyrim, but not for long. He's on board his ship, the Katariah, moored offshore in the Solitude Inlet. But you must hurry! If you can get on board that ship. Kill Titus Mede II, as contracted and I will reveal the location of the dead drop that holds your payment.” 

“What about Maro? Where is he placing himself?” 

I noticed the raised eyebrow. “You want revenge?” I nodded. “Solitude docks, preparing for the Emperor’s departure. He will be in Skyrim for no longer than a couple more days.” 

“Then I will sleep lightly and depart early the next day, hopefully returning soon with news of his death. If I don’t, I would suggest you make yourself scarce, Motierre, as although I will not talk, they will eventually discover your presence here. Take this warning how you wish.” 

I left the Bannered Mare and booked a room at the Drunken Huntsman, where I spent time glancing over the maps. Knowing I wanted to get to Maro first, I figured I would have to ride at least towards the docks. If not for Maro, I’d stop south of the inlet and just swim to the ship, but there was no way I was letting Maro get away with having helped Arnbjorn. 

Knowing time was on my side, I waited until the second night to make my move against Maro. Waiting until the sun was starting to set, just so there was enough light to see, I made my way down the docks, ensuring there were no other guards around. I found Maro patrolling, well away from prying eyes, almost without a care in the world. No doubt he figured the Brotherhood was dead. 

“Hello, Commander.” 

He turned upon hearing my voice. He would have taken in the scaled armour first. His eyes immediately flicked to my hands, one holding a sword, the other holding a dagger. But it was definitely the voice he recognised most. “You!” he cried, “You’re supposed to be dead.” 

“Tell me where Arnbjorn is and I’ll let you live.” A blatant lie, one he recognised. 

“I’m not telling you a fucking thing, traitor.” 

“I won’t ask again, Maro. I’ve killed your son. I’ve killed Vici. I’ve killed a lot of people. The Emperor is still on my list. I won’t hesitate killing you. And, trust me on this one, your death is only for me.” 

He unsheathed his sword, a two-handed jobbie, and went on the attack. But as enraged as he was, it was almost too easy for me, swerving and ducking as he swung wildly. I cut him with the dagger time and again, causing him to weaken with each. I wanted to disarm him first, as he would not be sent to Sovngarde upon his death, and a well-timed parry finally managed to take the sword from his grasp. He tried to fight me still, so a hard punch into his nose finally dropped him onto his arse and I was upon him, dagger at his throat. 

“Arnbjorn. Where is he?” 

“Fuck you.” 

“Very well.” I took quite a bit of pleasure slitting his throat. I didn’t make it quick, standing up and watching him slowly fade away, ensuring he didn’t move too far by keeping a foot on his chest. Only when I was sure that he was dead did I drag his corpse to the edge of the pier and roll it into the water. It wouldn’t be found until the next day, and I would be long gone by then. 

After sheathing my weapons, I dove into the water and headed straight for the ship. The water was cold, close enough to freezing, but the darkness would cover my tracks, and I made it to the entry spot without being noticed. Climbing up the anchor chain, I managed to get up to the top deck. I had no idea regarding the layout of the ship, but I knew the Emperor would be in a cabin at the other end of the ship, at least one or two decks below. 

While I would rather complete the job silently, I knew that would be impossible. The top deck had one or two spotters at most, the rest being sailors, who I didn’t particularly want to kill. I managed to get below deck without being seen, clouds coming to my rescue a couple of times. It was only below decks that I started to run into the Emperor’s bodyguards, and once I killed the first one, unable to keep him quiet, I knew I would have to butcher my way to the Emperor’s room. 

The fact it was far too easy didn’t cross my mind, my focus only on making it to the Emperor’s room to finish the job. I’d already killed a lot of agents, so didn’t believe their numbers would be limitless. I’d killed at least half a dozen of agents, and one or two sailors who decided to try and take me on, before I made it to the cabin I wanted. 

It had been far too easy. 

Getting into the cabin wasn’t too hard, finding the key on one of the bodies I’d left behind. And the Emperor was inside, waiting for me. But he wasn’t alone. Flanked to either side were three agents, all armed with bows, all with arrows nocked, watching me as I walked towards the desk he sat behind. Flanking either side of the room were more agents, these armed with sword and shield. They could have attacked me without hesitation and cut me down, but I was surprised the Emperor called for them not to attack. 

“Drop your weapons, son, and take a seat.” I couldn’t move. I shouldn’t have been surprised by the trap. I really thought I’d have been able to take him down and escape. More fool me, I suppose. “And, once more, I prove Commander Maro the fool. I told him you can't stop the Dark Brotherhood. Never could. Come now, don't be shy. You haven't come this far just to stand there gawking.” 

Dropping my weapons, there was little I could do except do as he asked. Even if I tried to kill him, I’d be dead before I’d taken three steps. It was over, and my lift was practically forfeit now. Once I’d taken a seat, I said, “Maro is dead. He is responsible for what happened to the Sanctuary. To Astrid.” 

“She was the leader, correct?” 

“Yes.” 

“And your lover?” 

“If you mean ‘Did I love her?’ then yes, I did. As much as she loved me.” 

“Maro did mention a jealous husband being involved in all of this.” 

“He chose to walk away instead of taking care of the situation. Don’t suppose you can tell me where he is?” 

“Still in Skyrim, though you are aware any idea of hunting him down ended the moment you entered this room.” 

“I’m aware. So, what happens now?” 

“What do you think will happen?” 

“To be honest, I expected to be killed immediately if I was caught. So, now I’m not sure.” 

“I know you killed my niece, Vittoria. You can admit it or not.” I nodded that I did. “You’ve admitted to killing Maro.” 

“That one was purely personal. No contract necessary.” 

“You’ve killed a lot of people to get to me, Listener.” He smiled as no doubt my face showed surprise. “Maro didn’t get to where he was without being very well informed. The only thing we don’t know is your real name.” 

“And you won’t be getting it either. Do with me what you will otherwise.” 

“To be honest, we should put you to death first thing tomorrow. But Tullius doesn’t want that just yet. He has plans for you. No, he won’t use you to wipe out our enemies. We’re more honourable than that, but you will be seeing the inside of a jail cell for a while before we figure out what to do next. There is only one question I have for you.” I nodded again. “Who asked for you to kill me?” 

“You know I can’t answer that question. And considering I am practically dead man walking, I guess there’s no reason why I should help.” 

“Pity, I was hoping to find out, though I will find out eventually. I have an inkling it’s someone on the council. Finding out who has been away causing trouble shouldn’t be too difficult. As for you, Listener, my men here will escort you to prison. There will be no trial. Your guilt is confirmed already.” 

“So what then?” 

“As I said, Tullius has plans.” 

I was swarmed by the half dozen agents, hauled to my feet, my wrists and ankles manacled and chained. Once satisfied I couldn’t escape, a black hood was put over my head, and I guess to make sure I remained agreeable, the last thing I remember is a smack on the back of my head.

Chapter 25: Ragnar the Reborn

I have no idea where the prison was where they kept me. I remained alone in my cell. It was rather dark, unsure when it was daylight or not. I was given three meals a day, though to call them meals wasn’t exactly correct, being either bread and water, or some sort of gruel and water. Otherwise, I could only pass the time by pacing the small cell, sitting down and leaning against the wall, or attempting to sleep. 

I was expecting to be tortured eventually. The Emperor would want to know who was behind the contract. But apart from the lone guard who brought my meals, I had no contact with anyone else for what felt like day and weeks. It felt like that, but it might have been only a matter of days. I had no idea when it was day or night, so didn’t know when day passed into night, or vice versa. 

Despite the solitude of my cell, I could hear plenty of noise from within the prison. I assumed others were being beaten or tortured, as I heard the occasional scream and plenty of whimpering. Yet I remained left alone. It actually started to drive me a little bit nuts, the constant isolation, except for the tri-daily visit of the guard to deliver a meal and take the bucket I used for other matters. 

I’m not sure how long I remained alone in the cell but the door finally opened, a trio of heavily armed guards walking in. “Up!” one of them ordered. 

Despite the boredom and isolation, I’d kept my body sharp. I wasn’t in real fighting condition, but if I wanted to, I could have at least given it a go. But looking at their armour and the fact the three carried weapons, I wasn’t going to sacrifice my life for no reason. Rising to my feet, two of them grabbed me, manacled and chained together my wrists and ankles, before I was escorted out of my cell for the first time since my arrival. 

Led towards another room, I was sat on a chair in front of a large desk. Sat to the other side was who I assumed was the warden or commander of the prison. There were sheets of paper in front of him. I assumed that listed the charges or perhaps the orders he had been given regarding my incarceration. 

“No-one knows your real name, so we’ll just call you Listener,” he stated, “Quite the list of charges here. Murder and treason are the stand outs. You are aware there will be no trial?” 

“I know.” 

“I have been given the authority to ask you once, and only the once, for your co-operation. Give us the name of the person or people who asked for you to kill the Emperor, and you may find your time here more comfortable at least, though the chances of your actual release are minimal at best. Don’t help us… Well, I’m sure you can imagine what will happen.” 

“Do what you must. You should realise I will not give up the contact.” 

“You won’t be asked again, Listener. Is that your final response?” 

“It is.” 

“Very well. You will be returned to your cell. Tomorrow morning, you will be taken and transported to the place of your execution. Don’t worry, one thing you won’t be doing is dying alone.” 

“You found the others?” 

“No, we don’t know where the rest of your so-called Brotherhood is, if there are even any survivors. No, you will be dying alongside someone else who wishes to see the end of the Empire too.” I raised my eyebrows as my question was answered. “Yes, we have captured Ulfric Stormcloak. Tomorrow will be a good day for the Empire. The death of the man who attempted to assassinate the Emperor, and the death of the man who wishes to see the Empire itself on his knees. I know you won’t confirm, but we can guess that it wasn’t Ulfric who ordered the death of the Emperor.” 

“That I can confirm. Never met the man myself.” 

“Well, you will die beside him. You will be given a final meal tonight. Tomorrow morning, you’ll be loaded into a cart and transported to Helgen. It has been chosen as the place where the Stormcloak rebellion ends and the threat to the Emperor himself is put to rest.” 

If they were expecting me to plead for my life, perhaps break down and cry, or even fight them off, they didn’t know me well. I accepted my fate. Hauled to my feet, I was led back to my cell, wrists and ankles unchained, and left alone in the cell. That evening, plates of food were delivered, and it was a fine last meal. I was given some meat, potato and vegetables, with bread and ale. It was the best food I’d eaten in days or weeks, so made sure I savoured every bite. 

I was woken by the clanking of keys the next morning. Ordered to my feet, I was surprised not to find my ankles bound, though my wrists were, though only by rope. Led down a corridor, with further cells to my left and right, I was led up a couple of flights of steps and out into the fresh air, ensuring I took a deep breath. I had no idea where we were, but it looked like a fort, glancing around to see quite a few Imperial soldiers. The smell and damp in the air suggested we were in the south. 

Pushed onto a cart, I found myself joined by three others. Two were dirty and bloodied, and considering the Imperial soldiers around us, I figured them for Stormcloaks, as both had the build of soldiers. The third man I couldn’t pick, so figured he was a common criminal. The man opposite nodded in my direction but didn’t say anything. 

The first hour or so took place in silence and we were led past the remains of the Sanctuary near Falkreath. The man across noticed my glance linger longer than probably expected, so it was no surprise when he asked, “You know what was there?” 

“Aye, I did. I do. Someone is buried there.” 

“A lover?” 

“One of them. She’s buried there, and it was the last Sanctuary.” 

“Sanctuary? Sanctuary for what?” 

I met his eyes. “Sure you want to know the truth?” 

“I assume we’re all here as we will soon be in Sovngarde. I don’t think there’s a point in holding onto secrets anymore.” 

“What’s your name?” 

“Ralof.” 

“Call me the Listener. I was the last one of the Dark Brotherhood.” 

“Listener? Dark Brotherhood? Last… You were an assassin?” 

“I was. Now I’m the last of my kind. The others are dead, and as for the Night Mother, I can only assume the body was burned.” I wasn’t saying it for the benefit of Ralof. I knew the soldiers around us would be listening in. No doubt that’s why I hadn’t been told to shut up just yet. “As for my crimes, I killed Vittoria Vici, the Emperor’s cousin, which led to his arrival in Skyrim. I killed the son of Commander Maro, implicating him in a plot to kill the Emperor. I killed Commander Maro as he was responsible for the death of Astrid, leader of the Brotherhood in Skyrim, and my lover. And I was finally caught just as I was about to kill the Emperor himself. Bastard knew I was coming.”

“No wonder you’re in this cart with us.” 

“I can only assume you’re Stormcloaks.” 

“Aye. Beside you sits Ulfric Stormcloak himself.” 

I glanced to my right, wondering why his mouth was currently covered by a cloth. As for the man himself, he was what I expected. He’d be tall, broad, slightly greying blonde hair, and when his eyes met mine, I could see why men and women followed him. They expressed everything and nothing at once. “Well, if the Empire caught him, then we’re definitely going to our deaths.” Glancing at the man next to Ralof, I asked, “What are you here for?” 

“I’m a horse thief.” 

I couldn’t help chuckle. “Seems the Empire will put you to death for anything nowadays.” 

“You seriously tried to assassinate the Emperor?” Ralof asked in disbelief. 

“Twice. The first time I poisoned his meal, but the man who died was a decoy. I managed to escape the first time, not without a couple of injuries. I had no such chance second time around. Why he didn’t just have me killed straight away, I’m not sure.” 

“How long have you been held?” Shrugging, I admitted I had no idea. “Well, I guess it doesn’t matter.” Glancing to his right, he added, “I think they’re taking us to Helgen.” 

“Why Helgen?” 

“Who knows? It means nothing to the Stormcloaks.” 

The cart descended into silence, listening to the thief silently pray to himself as we approached the city gates. They were opened as we approached, and I noticed Imperial soldiers and Thalmor. Ralof didn’t hide his disgust. “Look at him, General Tullius the Military Governor. And it looks like the Thalmor are with him. Damn elves. I bet they had something to do with this.” 

“You mean with your capture?” 

“Aye.” He looked around, adding nothing else about what happened to them, and eventually took a deep breath. “I used to be sweet on a girl from here. Wonder if Vilod is still making that mead with juniper berries mixed in.” He paused and chuckled, albeit bitterly, “Funny, when I was a boy, Imperial walls and towers used to make me feel so safe.” 

“I grew up in Cyrodiil.” 

“How long have you been here for?” 

“A couple of years at least. Had a few jobs before finding talent as an assassin. Was married, now widowed. To be honest, dying isn’t that bad a thing.” 

“Dreams of Sovngarde?” 

I shook my head. “Not a chance they’d accept me. No, I’ll end up somewhere else.” 

“Have you ever fought as a warrior? Maybe a mercenary?” 

I could hear a hopeful tone, perhaps thinking I had at least done something decent with my life before. “Aye, I fought with the Fighter’s Guild before ending up here.” 

“There is honour in that, stranger. Perhaps the gods will find that acceptable.” 

“No matter what, I am not afraid of death.” 

I wasn’t. Part of me hoped that death would be in an instant, and I would join Muiri wherever she was. But the larger part knew that my soul would be claimed by one of the Daedra. I figured it would probably be Nocturnal if anyone as I’d pretty much sold my soul to her to become a Nightingale. I didn’t particularly want to be part of the Ebonmere, or the Shadows as Karliah had called it, but I could think of worse fates. 

There were two carts, we were the lead one, the other trailing close behind. We pulled up in front of what might have been a temple, but there were rows of soldiers, but my eyes immediately went to the headsman, who stood still, one hand holding an enormous axe. So we were definitely being beheaded. That was a quick death, at least. 

Ordered from the cart, we gathered in a bunch, no doubt all of us wary as we were all unarmed, surrounded by soldiers. I had no doubt they’d be quite happy to start swinging. Whether they knew who exactly most of us were, I’m not sure, but Ulfric certainly stood out, as we were the same height, taller than those around us. 

The Imperial officer in charge, a woman, announced, “Step toward the block when we call your name. One at a time!” 

Ralof muttered something about the Empire and their lists as Ulfric stepped forward as he was called first. “It has been an honour, Jarl Ulfric,” he added as Ulfric stepped away. 

“Ralof of Riverwood.” He turned my way, dipped his head, returning the gesture to him, as he stepped away. The thief was called forward next, and the idiot tried to run. He made it perhaps twenty, thirty metres before he was shot by a trio of arrows. 

“Idiot,” I muttered, but he was going to die, one way or the other. 

Then I was called forward. As he didn’t know my name, he simply called me ‘Listener’. “Will you tell me your name? Your real name?” 

“No. It’s not important anymore.” 

“Where you are from?” 

“That’s not particularly important either. I’m not sure what you’ll do with the others, so just burn my body when you’re done.” 

“Where would you like the ashes sent?” 

“Honestly, I don’t care. Dump them where it’s easiest. Nearest lake, if you’d like.” 

“We can do that. You should join the others.” 

I could tell most of the prisoners were soldiers, as they were lined up behind Ulfric, standing at ease but proud, despite being dressed in rags and their hands bound in front of them. On the elevated area in front of us, where a row of soldiers waited, alongside the headsman, the man Ralof had pointed out as General Tullius stepped before us, his eyes only for Ulfric. 

“Ulfric Stormcloak. Some here in Helgen call you a hero, but a hero doesn't use a power like the Voice to murder his king and usurp his throne.” I think Ulfric had particular words for the general, but due to the gag, it was muffled. “You started this war, plunged Skyrim into chaos and now the Empire is going to put you down, and restore the peace.” 

I guess that was proof that the Empire didn’t believe in trials, though if Ulfric was considered a traitor, from the little I knew, they were generally executed without one. Ulfric tried saying something else again, though my attention was taken by a loud noise that echoed from a nearby mountain. I know I wasn’t the only one to hear it, as plenty of heads turned in the direction of it. One or two questions were raised, but Tullius ordered the last rites be performed. 

A Priestess of Arkay stepped forward, but one of the Stormcloaks told her to shut up and get on with it. I’d seen plenty of people die before, many at my own hand, but as he was placed on his knees, waiting for the axe, I couldn’t help but feel respect for this soldier as he faced death. 

“As fearless in death as he was in life,” Ralof stated solemnly. I could only imagine they were comrades in arms and friends. 

Then I was called forward. A slight surprise, as I figured they would have wanted to get Ulfric done quickly, end it there and then, but I guess they knew who I was too, so their hatred for me probably matched their hatred for Ulfric. I strolled forward, enjoying the last minute or so of life I had left, taking a deep breath of fresh air, looking around at the trees in the distance, closing my eyes and feeling the slight wind on my bare shoulders, wondering if every condemned man did the same thing in their last moments. 

Standing before the chopping block, I was gently put down on my knees before I rested my neck in place, looking up at the headsman. “Just make sure it’s a clean strike, headsman. At least give me that.” 

I closed my eyes, not particularly wanting to watch the axe come down to take my head. Then I heard that same noise I’d heard echo down from the mountain, though it was far, far closer this time. Opening my eyes, I saw what could only be described a dragon land on the tower nearby. It then did… something, I’m not sure what exactly, but the headsman dropped his axe and collapsed to the ground. Whatever the dragon did sent me rolling away from the chopping block at the same time. 

And then all hell let loose… 

---

Ralof and I ducked behind a rock ledge, hoping the dragon above didn’t see us. I have no idea how many people had just died in Helgen. Far too many, and I was someone who dealt with death near every day. But there was something… wrong about what had just happened. What had made a dragon attack us then and there? Why now? Those were not the only questions as the dragon flew into the distance. 

Following the dirt path ahead, Ralof mentioned that the village of Riverwood was only a short walk away. As we wandered along, he pointed out some landmarks in the area. I honestly can’t remember if I’d ever ridden through Riverwood. I’m sure I had, as he mentioned it was part of Whiterun Hold, and I’d visited there often enough, but even Ralof admitted you could pass through Riverwood and barely notice it. 

We came to a stop a set of standing stones. I’d seen one or two on my travels around Skyrim. There were three stones in total, which was unusual, as there was generally only one. “Warrior, mage or thief, depending on what you believe in.” 

“Any idea what they do?” I wondered. 

“Some say those who pray at a stone will be given gifts from the gods themselves.” He paused and met my eyes. “You say you were an assassin. Look at it this way. What’s just happened at Helgen, the fact you were a condemned man and have escaped with your life, nearly everyone who was involved now lies dead. You can restart your life from this moment. Whatever you’ve done before may be forgiven depending on what you do next. What did you do before, apart from the Brotherhood?” 

“I was a thief, and a bloody good one at that.” 

He looked me up and down. “You have the build of a warrior. Why not try the noble and honourable path with this new lease of life? Consider this a chance for the rebirth of your character?” 

“You judge me better than I deserve, Ralof.” 

“I believe in second chances… I don’t even know your name…” 

I offered my hand. “My name is Ragnar. And I live in Riften.” 

He grasped my forearm and met my eyes again. “Well met, kinsman. So, which stone will you pray at?” 

“I assume you prayed at the warrior stone?” He nodded. “Ragnar the Reborn has a good ring to it.” 

I knelt in front of the warrior stone, Ralof instructing me what to do. I’m not sure what happened, but the stone soon lit up and a beam of light ascended into the clouds. “The gods hear your prayers, Ragnar. You have their favour, it seems.” 

Getting to my feet, I didn’t feel any different. I was dressed in leather armour, the sort I hadn’t worn in years, not since my earliest days in the Fighter’s Guild. I had an iron sword and shield, and a wooden bow. Any gear I had while trying to assassinate the Emperor had long since disappeared. I would have to return to Riften to get re-armed and armoured. 

Resuming our walk, Ralof invited me to meet his sister, Gerdur. She was pleased to see her brother and was immediately interested in who I was. He just introduced me as Ragnar, someone he had escaped Helgen with. She was very helpful, offering her own place as somewhere we could rest our heads, as I was also introduced to her husband and a boy I believe was her son. We were both starving, and she happily stopped her work, escorting us to her house and started to put together a meal for us. Ralof insisted he could cook though she pretty much ordered him to sit down. I felt rather exhausted after our escape through Helgen, and suggested a good wash in the nearby river would be nice after a feed. 

There was certainly something peaceful about Riverwood, though what I definitely appreciated was the feeling of freedom. I have no idea how long I lived in that cell. Certainly a month and more. I always knew there was a chance I’d eventually see the inside of a cell, and now that I had, I certainly had no desire to return. I won’t say I would immediately turn over a new leaf, but my life as an assassin was certainly at an end. As for a thief, I’d visit the Flagon and let them know what had happened. What I did after that, I wasn’t sure. 

Gerdur had a couple of spare beds in the basement where Ralof and I could relax and sleep, providing us with plenty of ale and mead, figuring we could do with a few drinks. I asked Ralof about how he’d been captured and the war in general, as I was honest with him and admitted I knew little about it. 

“Do you not want a free Skyrim, free from the control of the Empire and Thalmor influence, free to worship who we want?” 

“You’re talking about Talos?” 

“Aye.” 

“He’s not the god I revere most.”

I could see the surprise on his face. “But… You’re a Nord!” 

“I know I am. But, for certain reasons, I worship another god.” 

I think he wanted to ask who, but then figured it was a private matter, so moved on. “The war is currently a stalemate. The Empire and Stormcloaks each control four Holds. Whiterun is still undecided. Ulfric is trying to tempt him with promises for after the war, but so far, Balgruuf won’t commit, claiming complete neutrality.” He met my eyes. “Would you ever choose a side?” 

“I’m from Cyrodiil, Ralof, but I’m also a Nord. I will take the weak excuse by saying it’s not my fight as I have split allegiance. I am a Nord, so Skyrim is my homeland, but until a couple of years ago, Cyrodiil and the heart of the Empire was my home.” 

The Stormcloaks I’d conversed with, and to be honest I hadn’t spoken to many, were not particularly open-minded. But Ralof nodded, and stated he understood my reasoning. “We could do with someone such as yourself, if the way you fought through Helgen is any indication of your talents.” 

Gerdur fed us again the next morning, asking plenty more questions of Ralof, and asking me one or two personal questions. She knew I wasn’t a Stormcloak, so wondered what I did for a living. “I was a mercenary. I killed the wrong man, which is why I was in Helgen too.” 

“Married?” 

“No. Widowed.” 

“And where are you from?” 

“Originally from Cyrodiil. Arrived in Skyrim a couple of years back, and now Riften is my home.” 

“Will you be wanting to head back there?” 

“Eventually.” 

“So you’re in no rush to go back?” 

“Honestly, I don’t know what I’m going to do next. Life has fallen apart somewhat recently.” 

“If you’re not going home straight away, can I ask a favour?” I nodded. “Ralof will need to return to Windhelm immediately as we must know that Ulfric Stormcloak survived the attack. That means we need your help. Riverwood needs your help. The Jarl needs to know there's a dragon on the loose. Riverwood is defenceless at the moment, particularly against any sort of dragon. We need to get word to Jarl Balgruuf in Whiterun to send whatever soldiers he can. If you'll do that for me, I'll be in your debt.” 

I glanced at Ralof across the table before returning my eyes to her. Shrugging, I said, “Sure, why not? I’m in no real rush to return, so I guess I can head to Whiterun first.” 

Ralof and I left Riverwood mid-morning. I was still dressed in the leather armour I’d taken in Helgen, Ralof had found Stormcloak gear, though he covered that with a cloak, as although Whiterun was neutral, he still didn’t want to be noticed. It was only an hours or so walk to the crossroad, noticing the former Honningbrew Meadery to my left, with Whiterun perched on its hill in the distance. I shook hands with Ralof, wishing each other luck before splitting up, Ralof continuing to head north. If I’d really wanted to, I could have turned right, crossed the bridge, and eventually ended up in Riften, but I’d given my word to Gerdur, so turned left and headed along the western road towards Whiterun. 

Having visited Whiterun several times, I knew most people at least by name, though was smart enough not to get to know any guards too well, particularly once we had the city in our grip. ‘Our’ meaning the Thieves Guild, though I knew we had a few guards in pocked in the event one of us ended up in jail. I still had no idea how long I’d been locked up for. It may have only been a few days but I had a feeling it was a few weeks. 

Approaching Dragonsreach, the guard to either side of the giant doors stepped in my way, looking me up and down. I may have washed, but I probably looked like a bandit. “What brings you to Dragonsreach, stranger?” 

“I’ve just come from Riverwood. I have a message for the jarl.” 

The two guards shared a look and stepped aside, one opening the door for me. Walking inside, my walk slowed until I was barely moving, craning my neck to take in the expanse of the hall. I had entered the jarl’s residence in Riften only the once, and that was nothing compared to Dragonsreach. It was spectacular. Up a small set of steps and past an enormous fire pit, the jarl was in conversation with a couple of other people. My progress was stopped by an armed Dunmer, who looked ready to put a sword through me without hesitation. 

“What's the meaning of this interruption? Jarl Balgruuf is not receiving any visitors.” 

“I was at Helgen yesterday. A dragon…” I paused, then added, “I really should speak to the jarl about this.” 

“As Housecarl, my job is to deal with all dangers that threaten the jarl or his people. So, you have my attention. Now, explain yourself.” 

“Fine. A dragon destroyed Helgen yesterday. I barely escaped with my life. I managed to escape to Riverwood, and Gerdur asked me to come here so help can be sent to Riverwood.” 

“What was that about Helgen?” the jarl wondered, now looking directly at me, gesturing me forward. 

I politely dipped my head before stepped towards him. “A dragon destroyed Helgen. Gerdur is afraid Riverwood is next.” 

“Gerdur? Owns the lumber mill, if I'm not mistaken... Pillar of the community. Not prone to flights of fancy.” Then he leaned forward, his own eyes taking in myself, no doubt judging me on appearance first. “And you're sure Helgen was destroyed by a dragon? This wasn't some Stormcloak raid gone wrong?” 

“Saw the dragon with my own eyes, sir. Helgen was destroyed around me as I made my escape.” I figured I’d avoid why I was there and the fact Ulfric Stormcloak was there. I just wanted to report this then get on with my life. 

The jarl turned from me to one of the other gentlemen nearby. “What do you say now, Proventus? Shall we continue to trust in the strength of our walls? Against a dragon?” 

“My lord, we should send troops to Riverwood at once,” his Housecarl stated, “It's in the most immediate danger. If that dragon is lurking in the mountains...” 

“The Jarl of Falkreath will view that as a provocation! He'll assume we're preparing to join Ulfric's side and attack him! We should not…” 

The jarl slammed his palms into the arms of his throne. “Enough! I'll not stand idly by while a dragon burns my hold and slaughters my people! Irileth, send a detachment to Riverwood at once!” 

I didn’t know her, but I swear she smirked in the direction of Proventus. “Yes, my jarl.” 

No doubt embarrassed in front of the stranger, Proventus simply requested his leave, the jarl agreeing he had other matters to attend to. Left alone with the jarl, except another tough looking Nord nearby, who I assumed was perhaps a bodyguard, he leaned back and relaxed. “Thank you, stranger. You've done Whiterun a service, and I won't forget it.” 

“It was the right thing to do, lord.” 

“You’re not local to my city, are you?” 

“No, lord. It’s a long story, but I have a house in Riften. That’s where I call home.” 

“Do you have family there? Any urgent business that will require you to return there immediately?” 

“No, lord.” 

“Then if I may ask a favour, I have need for talented, or perhaps lucky people such as yourself. My court wizard will undertake research into the return of dragons, and as you’ve actually seen one and survived an encounter, your experience could prove invaluable.” 

“Are you asking me to stay in Whiterun, lord?” 

“Yes.” 

I shrugged. “Not a problem. But I have no coin nor place to rest my head.” Looking down and gesturing, I added, “I lost everything in Helgen. I have no idea who this armour belonged to, but they’re probably dead. The sword and shield I have are nothing compared to what I carried before.” 

“Coin isn’t a problem. You deserve a reward for what you’ve done for us. Regarding everything else, you should approach the Companions for work. How’s your sword arm?” 

“I’m not dead yet, lord. Earned a few scars though.” 

“Speak to Kodlak Whitemane. He’s a good man, and if he thinks you’ll prove worthy, he’ll agree to your recruitment. But first…” 

His bodyguard disappeared for a couple of minutes, returning with a coin purse. I had a glance and couldn’t help but look at the jarl in surprise. “Well deserved, I think.” 

“Thank you, lord.” 

“Head to Jorrvaskr, home of the Companions. When I have need of you again, I’ll send a couple of guards to find you.” 

Heading back out into the city, my first thought was about getting some new armour. The armour I’d been wearing when trying to assassinate the Emperor had been my Brotherhood armour, so that was long gone. My scaled armour that I’d bought from Grelka long ago was still in Riften. I could take a carriage there and back, but I had no idea when the jarl would send someone for me. And, to be honest, if he was going to give me coin purses full of gold, I had reason to hang around. 

Walking into the hall, the roof appearing to be that of an upturned boat, I guess I shouldn’t have been too surprised to see a pair of Companions going at it. As in fighting, not fucking. And neither was holding back, hearing the impact of fist against skin, even from a few metres back. The crowd wasn’t trying to intervene and stop it. In fact, they were urging them on, giving advice at the same time. 

I watched from a distance for a couple of minutes, surprised at how long they both lasted, before I asked the elderly women cleaning up where Kodlak Whiteman was. I was directed towards the living quarters below. The long hallway below was lined with trophies, the heads of beasts, plaques with shields and weapons, shelves with books and other knick-knacks. Strolling towards the doors at the end, I waited at the threshold, noticing two warriors in discussion. One was older, with long greying hair, who I had to assume was Kodlak. The other was far younger, and I tuned out, not wanting to interrupt not eavesdrop on their conversation. 

Only when the eyes of the older man turn towards me did I stride forward. “A stranger comes to our hall. What can I do for you, young man?” 

“I’d like to join the Companions, sir.” 

The ‘sir’ made him smirk. “Sir?” I shrugged as he rose to his feet. I didn’t want to guess his age, but despite what I assumed, he was still tall and broad, and his eyes spoke of decades of experience. He looked me up and down before circling around me. I stood almost at attention, only meeting his eyes once he stood in front of me again. “Hmmm, yes. Perhaps a certain strength of spirit. What’s your name?” 

“Ragnar. Originally from Cyrodiil, I’ve called Riften my home for the last few years.” 

“And now you’re here?” 

“Have you heard what happened in Helgen?” 

“Whispers. You were involved? Something about a dragon?” 

“Barely escaped with my life. The jarl has asked me to stay close by if the situation develops, and he suggested I come here for work.” 

“Have you done work like this before?” 

“I worked with the Fighter’s Guild in Cyrodiil.” 

He nodded approvingly. “They are a good order of warriors. I would assume you learned many of your skills with them?” 

“Aye. My commander was a good man and a better warrior.” 

“Then I think we should put that to the test.”

"Master, you're not truly considering accepting him?" 

I met the eyes of the warrior still sitting nearby. He met my eyes and I returned what I hoped was a friendly smile. Kodlak turned towards him. “I am nobody's master, Vilkas. And last I checked, we had some empty beds in Jorrvaskr for those with a fire burning in hearts.” 

“Apologies,” Vilkas stated, and I could hear the respect in that one word, “But perhaps this isn't the time. I've never even heard of this outsider.” 

Kodlak looked back at me. “Sometimes the famous come to us. Sometimes men and women come to us to seek their fame. It makes no difference. What matters is their heart.” 

I almost wanted to tell him that I wasn’t the man he hoped I was. Or, at least, I wasn’t yet. But perhaps working with this guild of fighters would help restore some honour. I’d never looked at myself as ‘evil’, though perhaps some of the acts I’d done would certainly be considered that. I knew I certainly wasn’t what someone would consider ‘good’. 

But Kodlak still wanted to test me, so asked Vilkas to take me outside to spar. When Vilkas stood up, he near enough stood as tall as me, but was certainly broad. He said nothing as we headed out the back of the hall, where there were tables and chairs, covered in tankards and plates. A couple of dummies and targets for practice, but otherwise, it was a clear space for us to spar. 

He was similar to me, armed with a sword and shield, though his were certainly of a higher standard than the shit I was armed with. “The old man said to have a look at you, so let's do this. Just have a few swings at me so I can see your form. Don't worry, I can take it.” 

Figuring I wanted to make at least a half-decent impression, I drew on my years of experience, and managed to get him on the back foot. I wasn’t aiming to draw blood, so figured I’d just have him take half a dozen steps back before raising an eyebrow. He laughed and nodded. “There you go! Not bad. Next time won't be so easy! You might just make it. But for now, you are just a whelp to us.” 

And that was proven quickly as I wasn’t sent out to solve problems nor fight, but was given plenty of menial tasks to do. I wasn’t made to clean up or anything, they already had the elderly woman for that, but I was sent around Whiterun with things to get fixed and other jobs better suited to… Well, someone that wasn’t me. But I did it with a smile, as although I was little more than a whelp in their eyes, I found a purpose. Put up with their shit to begin with, then I’d prove myself completely. 

While doing that, I made sure I was friendly to the others, getting to know at least names and faces, as much as they knew me. And being who I was, my eye certainly appraised the females of the order. One who certainly took my eye was Aela, who called herself ‘the Huntress’. She was gorgeous, with a pair of the finest legs I’d ever seen on a Nord woman, but the rest of her body was a gift from the Divines. But she was involved with a fellow warrior named Skjor, and I wasn’t going to get involved in a contest for her affections. Another who took my eye was a young woman named Ria, whose enthusiasm for the order was certainly infectious. 

Alas, I did not sleep with anyone from the Companions. Or, at least, not while I was still a whelp. I went looking for pleasure elsewhere, as although I’d now experience the loss of two lovers, I still had needs, at least of the physical kind. So after around a week, I headed to the Drunken Hunstman in the evening, hoping to find Jenassa. She wasn’t there, but man behind the bar told me she might be home. 

Knocking on her door, she was surprised to see me at first and the tone of her voice suggested as much. “Ragnar! I haven’t seen you in… Well, I’ve seen you around town but… What brings you to my door?” 

“Honestly, there’s so much to tell you, I’m not sure where to begin.” 

“Well, why don’t you come in and tell me.” 

I took a seat at the table as she brought a pair of tankards and some ale, and I regaled her with stories, skimming past the obvious things I didn’t want to share. When it came to my incarceration, I said it was simply trying to kill the wrong man. She didn’t ask too many questions, but figured I’d broken the law, admitting she skirted if not broke it herself often enough. 

After a couple of drinks, our conversation turned rather flirtatious, and it was no surprise we tumbled into bed soon after. I’ll be honest, I probably would have fucked any woman who wanted me, but I’ll admit I was glad to have chosen Jenassa. Once I had her naked again, memories of the night we’d spent together long ago returned, that athletic body, fantastic legs and wonderful butt all on display. 

She got on all fours on her bed and I buried my face in her pussy. I’m not sure what others thought, but there was a difference in taste between Nord, Breton and Dunmer. Not sure exactly what caused it, but if I went down on Haelga and then Karliah, then was a difference. Jenassa loved what I did with my tongue, bringing her to orgasm quicker than I would have thought, then I moved up, spreading her cheeks and tickling her arse. 

“Oh, someone has ideas…” 

“Just teasing, unless it interests you.” 

“With that thing of yours, Ragnar? Oh yes. Oh yes indeed. But do that later. I want what you’d called it ‘normally’ first.” 

She remained on all fours as I lined my cock up, looking back with a delightful smirk on her face. She remained looking back as I slid inside her, though her eyes fluttered in a way that suggested she enjoyed it, particularly once my entire length was inside her. “I won’t last long,” I confessed. 

“Been a while?” 

“Not sure how long I was in that cell for. Plus, well, let’s just say I’m already enjoying myself.” 

Remembering that she liked to be fucked hard, I grabbed onto her hips and wasted little time pounding her. She loved it, or the noises she made told me as much. But I wasn’t lying. I barely lasted five minutes, thankful I’d already made her cum with my mouth. The groan I made as I erupted inside her probably echoed around Whiterun, feeling it necessary to lean forward, careful not to rest too heavily on Jenassa at the same time. 

“I’ll last longer for round two.” 

“No complaints, Ragnar,” she whispered, feeling her squeeze my cock, “And you’re still pretty hard anyway.” 

“Youth and perpetual horniness does that.” 

I pulled out and collapsed onto the bed beside her, where she leaned over to give me a rather soft kiss. My face must have shown surprised as a smile appeared, which lit up her face, and in the candlelight she looked, well, beautiful. “Is it a surprise that I like you, Ragnar?” 

“I’d be wondering what I was doing here if you didn’t.” 

“I remember our night together fondly, and hoped it would happen again another time.” 

“No-one take your fancy around Whiterun?” 

“Oh, I enjoy the occasional fling with one or two locals, but nothing serious.” 

We continued to make out until I was ready to go again, Jenassa rolling me onto my back, resting herself on my crotch as she reached across to her bedside table, retrieving a bottle of oil from the top drawer, giving me a look I knew well. She then spent some time lubing me up while talking incredibly dirty at the same time, the general theme being she wanted me to fuck her arse. 

Despite being rather eager, she was still careful as my head popped inside that tighter hole. I watched her face as she concentrated hard on not just taking my entire length at once, resting a hand on my chest as mine rested on her hips. It took her a few minutes before she was comfortable enough to start riding me, but once she was, it was… fantastic. 

I had to ask, “Have you done this before?” 

“Just the once,” she breathed, “His dick was nothing like yours though.” She then moaned quite loudly, moving of my hands, suggesting I use my fingers to fondle her too. “Do that and it’s going to be enormous. Get ready to catch me.” 

Chuckling, I asked, “That good?” 

“I would have done this our first time together but, well, I thought you would think things…” 

“Trust me, I thought about it too. Your arse is fantastic, inside and out.” 

She stopped as she had to laugh at my comment before resuming her slow, rhythmic grinding, soon enough leaning forward, hands to either side of my head, as I bent my knees so I could start to meet her movements. She kissed me hard once I started doing that, begging me to fuck her a little harder. So that’s what I did, and though her brow did crease occasionally, wondering if it was hurting her, she didn’t ask me to stop. But I didn’t pound her as hard as I would Haelga. 

Sitting back up again, my hand went back towards her sex to fondle her, and after placing both hands on my chest, she leaned forward enough to look into my eyes, before she took full control, bouncing away even faster. I could see her wince every so often, but apart from positioning myself for best effect, I barely moved. 

“Love my cock up your arse?” I wondered, as apart from some deep breathing and a lot of moaning and groaning, the dirty talk had been at a minimum. 

“By Azura, it’s the best I’ve had.” 

“Want it again?” 

“Not so long between fucks next time would be good.” 

“Deal.” 

She was soon bouncing away quite fast and hard, and with what my fingers were doing to her clit, she wasn’t lying about her orgasm. She shuddered so much she almost fell off my lap before falling forward, collapsing on my chest, barely able to do anything except breathing deeply. Wrapping my arms around her, she wiggled, stating she was sensitive, though didn’t actually want me to move my hands. It took a few minutes for her to recover before she lifted herself up, my cock falling out of her. 

“I might be a little sore in the morning,” she said softly. 

“Enjoy yourself though?” 

She looked up with a smile. “I want to do that again. Maybe you can take control next time. Really give me a good fucking.” 

I moved my hands to her arse. “The idea of fucking this tight little arse is very arousing.” 

“When are you next in Whiterun?” 

“I’m living here at the moment.” 

The smile only broadened. “So you can visit often?” 

“Well, as I mentioned, I’m working with the Companions, so if I’m not in Jorrvaskr, I’m sure I can find enough reasons to leave of an evening.” 

Sliding onto the bed next to me, she cuddled into my side as I wrapped an arm around her, feeling one of those fine legs of hers rested between mine. She was asleep within minutes, which gave me a chuckle. I just appreciated the feeling of a naked woman in my arms again. I’d been in Whiterun for longer than a week without intimacy, and add to that all the time I’d been in a cell, little wonder I’d barely lasted five minutes first time around. 

I did get up to give myself a wash, as I figured she’d be eager for some more the next morning, before re-joining her, Jenassa instinctively turning onto her side to spoon into me. Good thing I washed, as she was eager the next morning, spinning around so we could pleasure each other with our mouths first, and she was happy enough to swallow a load before I made her cum more than once with my mouth. She then laid back, spread her legs, and practically demanded that I fuck her. 

She complained about being sore, front and back, once I was done. Leaving after we’d had breakfast, the kiss we shared suggested she didn’t particularly want me to go, but we both had jobs to do, as she had told me about having to leave Whiterun for a couple of days, though we agreed to pop into the Drunken Huntsman whenever we were in town. 

Wandering into Jorrvaskr, my disappearance had been noted, one or two wondering where I had been. I let them know I’d been with Jenassa, Athis exclaiming surprise that I’d been intimate with a Dunmer. “I didn’t think Nords were interested in my kind, particularly sexually.” 

“She wasn’t my first Dunmer.” 

“You’ve had previous?”

“Of course. You’re Dunmer. Surely you know your women well?” 

He laughed. “Sounds like you really like us, or at least the female form?” 

“Well, those I’ve been intimate with, I definitely liked.” 

Though early, I sat down with Athis and some of the others to enjoy a round of drinks, and was quite happy to continue doing that until Aela approached me. She definitely noticed my eyes run up from her boots to her face, the smirk on her face a sign that she probably didn’t mind. Maybe she was used to it. 

I was told to head downstairs as Skjor had news for me. Greeting the bald-headed warrior, he told me that it was time for me real initiation. The Companions had recently received news about an ancient weapon call Wuuthrad, an enormous axe once wielded by Ysgramor, which had long since been lost and broken up. A piece had been discovered in a ruin nearby and my task would be to retrieve the piece. Farkas would be sent along with me as a Shield-Brother, as he would report if I performed honourably or not. 

We would be heading to a ruin called Dustman’s Cairn the next morning.

Chapter 26: Restoring Honour

“Found yourselves in many of these ruins before, Ragnar?” Farkas asked as we turned onto the road that would take us to the ruin. 

“Once or twice.” 

He gave me a sideways glance. “Uh-huh.” 

“Don’t want to sound overly arrogant. But I’ve dealt with draugr and other monsters before. Nothing we face will come as a surprise.” 

“You haven’t mentioned much about your past except you fought with the Fighter’s Guild. What did you do between your arrival in Skyrim and joining us?” 

I remained silent, thinking of the best way to be honest without saying what I actually did. “The best way I can put it is that joining the Companions will help restore my honour as a warrior.” 

“You were a criminal?” Looking at him in surprise, he simply returned my glance with a smirk. “You’re not the first, Ragnar, and you won’t be the last. Half of the reason Kodlak doesn’t ask many questions is that he sees the Companions precisely like you do. Restore your own sense of worth, give you purpose, and prove you have honour in battle, protect your colleagues and friends, and you will find glories in the Great Hall in the end.” 

“I don’t regret what I did. I was bloody good at what I did. But I always knew I would end up with my head on a chopping block if I was caught. I can only thank the dragon for saving me from my fate. If I’d lost my head then and there, I wouldn’t have ended up in Sovngarde.” 

“Where would you have ended up?” 

Shrugging, I admitted I wasn’t exactly sure. I didn’t want to go into too much detail, and we fell silent until we were walking the rise towards the old ruin, a set of stair leading down to the door itself. Suggesting we didn’t particularly need to go over what was required once inside, the only thing needed agreeing was, that as this was my trial, I would take the lead. I preferred being in front anyway. People sometimes got in the way. 

The first chamber was empty of enemy. A couple of dead draugr, but tools that suggested others might be further in. “Looks like someone'd been digging here. And recently. Tread lightly. Be careful around the burial stones. I don't want to haul you back to Jorrvaskr on my back.” 

“Give me a little credit, Farkas.” 

“I give the same advice to any whelp, Ragnar. No offence meant.” 

We descended deeper into the ruin, the usual signs that this was an ancient Nordic ruin, rather well built, as most were, though slowly crumbling as the centuries passed. Torches had been lit, lighting our way, the air still and rather humid, with the usual smell of decay. It didn’t bother either myself or Farkas as we ended up walking down stairs into a larger chamber. Still no sign of draugr or anyone else, but our progress was halted by a gate. 

I found a lever in another room and pulled it without a second thought. I should have known better, as a gate locked me in where I was. Farkas laughed at my predicament, assuring me it was fine. 

It wasn’t, as at least a half dozen mercenaries appeared from the now open gate. I had no idea who they were. Farkas didn’t seem all that concerned, not even bothering to unsheathe his enormous great-sword. The mercenaries issued a bunch of threats towards Farkas, one or two then looking past him at me, and threatening to kill me next. I flipped the bird as the mercenaries walked towards Farkas. 

What happened next… Well, at the time, I was gobsmacked, as it revealed quite the secret about the Companions. You see, Farkas turned into a werewolf, and his armour was obviously designed for it, as it simply dropped to the ground. And the blood flowed, body parts flung around the chamber, as the werewolf tore the mercenaries to shreds. It was horrifying, but I didn’t turn away. I had no idea who the mercenaries were, but a large part of me thought they got what they deserved. 

The werewolf, or Farkas, though I wasn’t sure how much of him remained, then looked at me, before disappearing. The gate opened a couple of minutes later and Farkas reappeared, as naked as the day he was born. He said little as he assembled himself in armour, studiously ignoring my look of surprise. Or that’s what I was sure I looked like. 

“Sooo… Are you going to explain that or not?” 

“Some consider it a blessing, to be like wild beasts.” 

“Are all Companions werewolves?” Because if they were, it would be one hell of a secret, as I don’t think anyone in Whiterun had a clue otherwise. 

“Oh, no. Only the Circle have the beast-blood. Prove your honour to be a Companion. ‘Eyes on the prey, not the horizon.’ We should keep moving. Still the draugr to worry about.” 

Gesturing at the dismembered bodies, I asked, “And who were these clowns?” 

“We know them as the Silver Hand. Bad people who don't like werewolves. So they don't like us either.” 

Farkas explained things simply. As he liked to repeat, he got Ysgramor’s strength while his twin, Vilkas, got his brains. Plenty of those joked about Farkas and his simplicity, though most were not brave enough to do it to his face. There was no doubting his bravery as a warrior, though. 

Knowing that Silver Hand were present, we now had to fight them and any draugr that decided to wake up. What I found interesting with each group of Silver Hand we killed was what they carried. Most carried weapons made of silver, and also carried potion bottles, a quick sniff suggesting it would cure disease. Farkas shrugged when I suggested that, mentioning that the Silver Hand likely believed that was what infected the Companions. I didn’t know enough to suggest anything otherwise. 

In addition to Silver Hand and draugr, the ruin was infested with skeevers and spiders. Skeevers I could handle; they were just giant rats. But I hated spiders. Most people hated them. Eight legged freaks. Farkas decided running into their nest was the smartest move. I stayed back and summoned magic for once, using flames to burn the fuckers. Farkas noticeably shuddered at the same time, glancing in my direction and using the same language to describe them. 

Passing through what I called ‘hallways of the dead’, as there were numerous draugr that we no doubt both hoped didn’t wake up as we walked by, more Silver Hand laid in wait, while the occasional draugr did wake up. Even when swarming us, Farkas and I worked well together, using my shield to keep us both protected, and his great-sword help cut the enemy down. It helped the Silver Hand were only dressed in leathers, making them quite easy targets, while draugr attacked without any thought of self-preservation. Almost stupidly aggressive and easy to lead into traps. 

I’d been in enough of these ruins to know we’d eventually end up in a final large chamber, and that’s precisely what happened again. I gestured for Farkas to stop and looked to either side. “See all the sarcophagi? Bet you we’ll do something to wake them all up.” 

“Best we’re cautious then.” 

There was also a word wall ahead, and I’d seen enough by now that I didn’t make a big deal of the chanting or the highlighted word I couldn’t read. I approached it to learn the word. “Just so you know, Farkas, this word right here says Yol.” 

“You can read that?” 

“No. Just this one word here. It’s a long story.” 

“Any idea what the word means?” 

“None whatsoever.” On the table near the word wall lay pieces of Wuuthrad. Farkas made to grab them but I grabbed his wrist. “I think they’ll wake up when you grab them.” 

“How do you know?” 

“Let’s just call it a sixth sense when dealing with things like this.” 

Making sure we were both armed and ready for a fight, I swiped the pieces of Wuuthrad, quickly putting those in my pack, just as the lids of some sarcophagi dropped to the ground. The usual growls were followed by weapons being unsheathed. More than half a dozen draugr ran towards us, weapons raised high, ready to strike. Farkas took one side of the table, I stood on the other, and we allowed the draugr to come towards us, hoping to filter them so they’d have to fight us one at a time. Each time we killed one, we heard another lid drop to the ground. 

“Hell of a trial!” I yelled out, driving my sword into the chest of the nearest draugr. 

“Their numbers are thinning out. We’ll be fine.” 

He was right, and I was surprised at how easily I was able to slip back into ‘warrior mode’. A couple of the draugr were tougher than the rest, those usually dressed in ancient armour, the toughest being those wearing helmets. But while the undead didn’t bleed, we could still lop off an arm or a leg, and if timed right, a decapitation. 

Farkas let me have the honour of killing the last one, and after a quick check of the urns dotted around the large chamber, we wasted no further time locating the exit, finding a secret passage that eventually led us back to the very first chamber we had entered. It was still light as we walked outside, Farkas figuring it was early afternoon, so we’d only spent a couple of hours in the ruin at most.

Heading straight back to Whiterun, the guards offered a friendly greeting as nearly all Companions were recognised by the guards. In the past week, one or two had noticed I was now with the guild and suggested I was also on an honourable path. Walking into Jorrvaskr, Kodlak and the rest had been waiting for our return, and asked Farkas and I to join them outside. 

I had a general idea of what was going to happen as Kodlak stood in the middle, flanked the twins, Vilkas and Farkas, to his left, Aela and Skjor to his right, the rest of the Companions standing in a group behind me. 

“Brothers and sisters of the Circle, and our fellow Companions, today we welcome a new soul into our mortal fold. This man has endured, has challenged, and has shown his valour. Who will speak for him?” 

“I stand witness to the courage of the soul before us,” Farkas replied.

“Would you raise your shield in his defence?” 

“I would stand at his back, that the world might never overtake us.” 

“And would you raise your sword in his honour?” 

“It stands ready to meet the blood of his foes.” 

“And would you raise a mug in his name?” 

“I would lead the song of triumph as our mead hall revelled in his stories.” 

Kodlak nodded along before looking at me, a small grin, before he continued. “Then the judgment of this Circle is complete. His heart beats with fury and courage that have united the Companions since the days of the distant green summers. Let it beat with ours, that the mountains may echo and our enemies may tremble at the call.” 

“It shall be so,” the entire group stated as one. 

And that was it. I was a Companion. Kodlak stepped forward, offering his hand. “Well, boy, you're one of us now. I trust you won't disappoint.” 

“I’ll do my best, Harbinger. I’m sure Farkas will exaggerate what happened.” I paused, waiting until we were alone, before I added, “But I think I learned something about the Circle I perhaps shouldn’t have.” 

He nodded, understanding immediately. “I see you've been allowed to know some secrets before your appointed time. No matter. Yes, it's true. Not every Companion, though. Only members of the Circle all share the blood of the beast. Some take to it more than others.” He paused before adding, “Don’t worry about it for now though, Ragnar. We can discuss it later. First thing, go speak to Eorlund about getting a new weapon. I’m sure you’d rather something a little better than whatever is at your hip right now. Then I think your new colleagues would like a night of revelry and celebration.” 

“Sounds good, Harbinger.” 

Eorlund had been informed of me coming, as he already had a line of weapons ready for me to check. I had managed to replace the iron sword I’d taken from Helgen with a regular steel sword, but the Skyforge steel sword Eorlund gave me just looked so much better, and that was before I’d used it in a fight. He told me what he could about the Skyforge, and promised me that I would definitely prefer his steel compared to any other. 

Satisfied with the weapon, I headed back into Jorrvaskr, where I was given a seat in the middle of everyone, platters of food already in place, and the alcohol was soon flowing freely, everyone sharing stories of recent contracts. As I guessed, Farkas exaggerated everything about Dustman’s Cairn, though I didn’t do too much to stop him. 

Only realising it was dark when I needed to head outside for a piss, I staggered back inside and suggested to whoever was sat next to me that I might need a little company that evening. I was now seated next to Aela, who suddenly became very interested in what I had to say. Most had heard about my past, knew I was a widow, but also knew I’d had my fair share of partners. 

“What sort of company?” she asked. 

I took a sip of another tankard of ale before replying, “What sort do you think?” 

“Well, I’ve heard rumours about what you’ve been up to around the city.” 

I met her eyes and smiled. “I’ve heard rumours about yourself in return, Aela.” A gentle retort, but she would have heard the same rumours. 

She simply smirked. “Do you believe everything you hear?” 

“No, but I am wondering if you would give credence to the them.” 

The smirk remained as she said, “I don’t care about rumours. People can say what they want, though I would prefer they just ask me straight instead of whispering in the dark.” 

“I have no problem with bluntness. Are you with Skjor?” 

She took a sip of her cup before looking at me with a smile. “That’s none of your damn business, Ragnar.” I couldn’t help laugh as she added, “But at least you had the balls to ask.” 

She didn’t say no. She didn’t say yes. So I was just left confused. And I didn’t end up leaving that night, eventually taking one of the empty beds, collapsing however many hours later, having drunk far too much. But it had been a fun evening, certainly one of the best I could remember, at least in recent times. 

We all woke with hangovers the next day. The best thing for it, apart from a hearty breakfast, was to sweat it out, so we all headed outside for sparring in the morning sun. We were all sweating within minutes as we paired up. Vilkas and Farkas both wanted to give me a good spar, going as far to admit that they could learn a thing or two from myself. Even Kodlak, who was probably the only one without a hangover, headed out to join us, and despite his advanced age, you could still see the skill in his technique and footwork. 

It was clear I’d now been well and truly accepted, and as I was now one of them, I started to find myself given better contracts, that would pay me more coin but also be a test of my abilities. But while I was enjoying my time with the Companions, I hadn’t been back to Riften in all that time. Around a fortnight after I’d been made a Companion, I sat down with Kodlak and explained what I wanted to do. “Jarl Balgruuf wants me to stay around in case a dragon makes an appearance, but there are people I would like to see in Riften. And my house in there too.” 

“Then go, Ragnar. If the jarl sends his guards, we’ll explain the situation. How long will you be gone for?” 

“Only a couple of days. I wouldn’t mind picking up my old armour, and there are perhaps one or two other things I need. And if I do end up staying her for the foreseeable future, there are people I would like to see farewell to.” 

The old man didn’t need to ask about ‘people’, and I left early the next morning. I’d made enough coin to purchase a new horse, as I had no idea where my old one was now located. Perhaps still in the stables around Solitude, but I figured probably adopted by someone else. I still had no idea how long I’d been in the cell for. 

Though I hadn’t missed Riften itself, I did feel a sense of returning home once I’d stabled my horse and walked through the city gates. The usual sounds of the market and the smell of the stagnant river of water below were the first things I noticed. Immediately turning right, I headed straight to the Bunkhouse. It wasn’t too late, the front door was open, so I wasted little time walking in. 

Haelga was busy placing plates on the dinner table, ready for the return of the workers who lived there. She turned upon heading me enter and the trio of plates still in her hand smashed on the ground as she ran towards me, near enough knocking me over as I stumbled back into the wall. No surprise she was already crying as I held onto her tightly in return. “I thought you were dead!” she cried. 

“I came very bloody close,” I confessed. 

“I would ask what happened, but I don’t care. I’m just glad you’re here.” Then she leaned back and gave me an almighty slap. Normally that would have earned my ire, but I understood the reason, particularly as she kissed me hard straight away, the sort of kiss that would normally have led to us heading upstairs. But I think we both just enjoyed kissing and hugging each other. The only thing that stopped us kissing was the entrance of Svana. 

“You’re alive?” she asked quietly, and to my surprise, she joined in to make it a group hug. 

“When did you get back?” Haelga asked. 

“I came here straight after stabling my horse.” 

They both let me go and I could see Haelga was in two minds. Part of her would have wanted to head straight upstairs. I wouldn’t have complained. Instead, she suggested the three of us head to the Bee and Barb for a drink and catch up. That was a fine idea, and my return didn’t go unnoticed. Ingun walked in about half an hour later and I was pulled to my feet to give her a very long hug. Sapphire wandered in not long later, looked in my direction, then disappeared back out the door. “We’re about to have some visitors,” I warned Haelga and Svana. 

I was right, as Brynjolf, Karliah, Delvin and Vex all walked in. The men received a handshake, the women a hug. “Thought you were dead, lad. You’ve been gone months.” 

“Heard about Astrid,” Delvin added sadly, “It all went pear shaped in the end, eh?” 

“You could say that. Heard any news otherwise?” 

He shook his head. “I’ve sent a contact to check the ruins. No sign of anyone. No idea where any survivors would have headed.” I did, but I wasn’t about to share. I was hoping they simply thought I was dead and that would be it. 

We joined a couple of tables together, gathering some chairs around, ordered some more tankards. Haelga sat as close to me as possible, and wouldn’t let go of my hand. I didn’t mind. I received plenty of questions of what happened and where I’d been. I skirted the real truth about my arrest, but admitted to spending time in a cell, staring death in the eyes as I was nearly executed before Helgen was then destroyed, then told them what I’d been up to since. 

“You’re living in Whiterun now?” Haelga asked, and I could hear the disappointment in her tone. 

“For the time being. I’m now a Companion. An honourable path.” I met Brynjolf’s eyes. “We’ll need to talk tomorrow.” 

“Aye, lad. No problem.” I looked at Karliah, and she nodded too. 

“Are you going to stay there permanently?” she did wonder. 

Shrugging, I could only admit, “I’m not sure. I enjoy what I’m doing at the moment. Made some friends. Earning coin. And I’m rediscovering the thrill of battle.” Leaning forward, arms folded on the table, I added, “I’ve nearly been executed. I don’t particularly want to stare in the headsman’s eyes again as he’s about to lower the axe. Once is enough.” 

I could sense Haelga wanted to ask what I’d done. I squeezed her hand and assured her that I wouldn’t be that close again. “What I was involved in, those days are behind me. Working with the Companions is helping restore a lost sense of pride and honour. Don’t get me wrong, I enjoyed what I was doing while living here, at least before I met Astrid. And I’m still glad I met her. But…” 

“You’ve had enough and want a new start,” Brynjolf finished for me. 

“I don’t want to look over my shoulder for the rest of my life. And, like I said, I’m enjoying what I’m doing.” 

As we had people at the table not part of the Guild, Brynjolf and Karliah couldn’t go into too much detail, but apparently the Guild had been running perfectly fine without my presence, which would make what I wanted to talk about the next day even easier. Haelga admitted life was rather dull, so she had little news to share. I was surprised Ingun was still in Riften, remembering she had wanted to elope, but apparently Saerlund’s mother, the jarl herself, caught wind of it, and he was now locked in a cell twenty-four hours a day. She still hoped to escape, but Maven had been informed, so Ingun was now being watched by a couple of Maven’s heavies. 

Though everyone was drinking, I made sure I was consuming alcohol very slowly, noticing Haelga had one, maybe two drinks at most. There was plenty of laughter as we all shared stories of what we’d been up to. As we talked, Haelga’s hand moved to my leg, and slowly but surely stroked my thigh before it moved closer and closer to my crotch. I eventually turned to look at her, and the desire in her eyes suggested we should leave. And leave immediately. 

“I’m not sure about you guys, but it’s been a long day, and Haelga would like to go home. Brynjolf, I’ll be around tomorrow to catch up. Karliah, if you can join us too, that would be great.” 

“Have fun, Ragnar,” Brynjolf stated as Haelga practically dragged me from my seat and out the door. 

Inside the Bunkhouse, Haelga made sure we were upstairs, with the door locked, before she leapt on me. Before leaping on me, she led me backwards towards the bed, pushing me down, reaching down to unbuckle my belt and lower my trousers. She lowered her head, not to get me hard, as I already was, but I think simply to suck me as it had been quite a while for her. But she definitely only had one thing on her mind, as she hiked up her dressed, lowered her panties to the floor, then climbed onto the bed and slid my cock inside her. 

I’m sure they heard my groan around the entire Rift. Once she bottomed out, she leaned forward and gave me a gentle kiss. “I’ve missed you,” she whispered. 

“I’ve definitely missed you.” 

“Do you know how long it’s been?” I shook my head. “Four months, Ragnar.” 

I reached up and brought her head down gently to kiss her again. “I’m sorry.” 

“No, it’s okay. You did warn me… I may have cried myself to sleep once or twice though.” She paused before adding, “Sorry for slapping you earlier.” 

“It’s fine. I’m guessing there were a lot of conflicting emotions at that moment.” 

“Surprise. Anger. And unending horniness. I wanted to hit you while fucking you.” 

“Can we just do the fucking now?” 

She finally started to move, barely lifting her head from mine, as I moved my hands to her arse. I warned her I wouldn’t last long, though suggested I’d stay hard. She didn’t mind, simply enjoying the feeling of my cock inside her once again, and within a couple of minutes, I was fucking her hard. I could feel my orgasm building quickly. All Haelga said was to cum, and she would keep going. I dragged her down, holding her tight against my body, as I slammed my cock into her, and the eruption of cum deep inside her was such a relief, I had to relax my entire body, my arms flopping onto the bed as Haelga lifted herself up a little, giggling at my reaction. 

She sat up and took off her dress, revealing that beautiful body of hers, then removed her bra. It was now rather amusing that she was completely naked while I was fully dressed. She made no mention of it, though, as she simply continued to ride my still hard cock. Once I regained my senses, I licked my thumb and moved it to her clit, giving her a gentle fondle. 

That certainly helped, as she was soon grinding on my cock, and I knew she wasn’t going to last long either. “I’ve thought about this every day,” she breathed, “Hoping you would walk through that door again.” 

“I would have come sooner, but…” 

“It’s fine. You’re here now.” 

She fell forward, resting a hand to either side of me, doing nearly all the work as I watched her face. She was desperate to cum. Hot, wet and tight as always, I was amazed at how hard I felt. I’d had relations with Jenassa while I was in Whiterun, but the connection I had with Haelga was something else entirely. There was only one other person… I cleared that thought immediately. I didn’t want to think about her. At least, not at that moment. 

“So close, Ragnar,” she breathed. 

“Hold it off as long as possible.” 

That made her giggle. “I’ll pass out if I do.” 

“Then pass out. It will give me time to undress.” I looked her up and down. “Not that I’m complaining.” 

She kept her rhythm steady as I just loved the feeling of her move up and down my cock. Continuing to watch her face, I felt her body quiver occasionally, realising her orgasm was building. She would stop every now and then, take a deep breath, before resuming. My hands ran up and down her back, feeling a slight sheen of sweat in one hand, moving my other to her hair, bringing her head down so I could kiss her again. 

“Getting close again. I need to cum, Ragnar.” 

I didn’t ask her to hold off again as she sat up, changing her rhythm and the angle of how she rode me. I couldn’t help appreciate her body, running my hands up and down her side, grabbing a handful of one of her breasts. She was making all the noises I remembered well, and I knew she was getting close. And when it finally arrived, it was… It was emotional, I think, as she cried out my name, along with a nice string of obscenities, before she relaxed and gently laid down on my chest, where I held her in my arms as she had a little weep. 

“I should hate you for doing that to me,” she sobbed quietly. 

“I know. I’m glad you don’t.” 

“It’s because I still love you, dummy.” 

“Well, I still feel the same way too.” 

We laid like that in silence until she needed to move off me, sliding under the covers as I quickly undressed and joined her. Lying on our sides facing each other, we cuddled together and continued to make out. “What took you so long to come back?” she wondered. 

“I wanted to come back a while ago but the Jarl of Whiterun asked me to remain in the city. I still don’t know exactly why, but once I found myself working with the Companions, I was in two minds. You would be the only reason why I would now come back to Riften.” 

“So you’re not coming back?” 

“I’m not sure. I don’t know.” 

She sighed. “We’re never going to have any luck, are we?” 

“Can you handle long distance? Just the occasional visit?” 

“I can, but I’d prefer you close by.” She met my eyes and sighed. “But you have your own life, as much as I have mine. And I can understand why you don’t want to remain here, except for me. You’re making a new life for yourself.” 

“I would ask that you come with me but…” 

“Part of me would love to, Ragnar,” she said quietly, cuddling into me tightly, resting her head against my chest, “But my life is here. And I can’t leave Svana alone with this place. So… We can try long distance. Or we just do what we’ve always done. Sleep together when you’re here, otherwise we enjoy ourselves otherwise.” 

“Have you been with someone else?” 

“Yes. Does that bother you?” 

“Of course not. Particularly if you thought I was dead.” I lifted her chin with a finger. “And if it gets serious…” 

She smiled. “Let’s not get too far ahead. But he does know all about you.” 

“Do I know him?” 

“He’s a guardsman, so it’s likely you don’t. But…” She trailed off and looked away. 

“You can see a future?” She nodded. “Then perhaps we should make this one of the final times. I want you to be happy most of all, Haelga. And I can’t do it for you now…” 

“I still love you though.” 

“And my feelings haven’t changed. But our lives have.” She sighed and cuddled into me again. “Do you love him?” 

“I like him. He’s a good man. And I know his feelings for me are deeper already.” 

“Then I think I should step away and at least give you the opportunity to find happiness with someone else.” 

“But what if you eventually come back?” 

“Honestly, I think the chances of that are slim. I like living in Whiterun now. To be honest, I was going to ask you to come with me, but if you can’t, then perhaps it’s best we remain friends but move on with our lives.” 

“When are you returning?” 

“I can stay for a couple of days. I’ll probably pack up parts of my house and send things to Whiterun.” 

“We’ll stay at your place tomorrow night. There’s a certain room I haven’t been able to use for quite a while. And, before you ask, yes I’m sure. Definitely sure. I want to be sore the next morning.” The excitement in her tone gave me a good chuckle, and I promised that is what we would be doing. 

She headed down a little later to grab some wine, and after having a cup each, made love again, this time Haelga quite happy lying back, legs wrapped around me, and it was surprisingly gentle and tender the entire time, spending most of the time making out, her hands running up and down my body, feeling the new scars I had, and plenty of sweet talk to start with, that soon devolved into the usual dirty talk we both liked. Only when approaching our orgasms did the tempo increase enough that I would call it fucking, but we climaxed rather close together, and with appetites stated, we fell asleep, Haelga in my arms as always. 

After a good, hard and fast fuck the next morning, we headed downstairs for breakfast. There were one or two comments about my return, and the fact we’d made a bit of noise the night before, though we both laughed it off, as we’d heard it all before. Svana had mentioned the night before at the Bee and Brab that she’d found a man to be with, and I’ll admit to a tinge of regret, as I had been looking forward to taking her first, but it was probably for the best, in all honesty. 

Haelga saw me off, having no problem with me departing with the longest kiss on record, the sort of kiss and embrace that, if we’d been alone, I’d have turned her around, leaned her against the counter and… well, I’m sure you can imagine. 

Heading through town, I headed to the Flagon the old way, through the Ratway. Dirge was surprised to see me appear that way, saying hello to Vekel before heading into the cistern. Everyone I’d asked for – Brynjolf, Karliah, Vex and Delvin – was already waiting for me, and we all took a seat around the desk. 

“So, where have you been, Ragnar? And, since you’re now in the right company, I’m guessing you can be completely honest.” 

“You all knew I was working for the Dark Brotherhood?” All four nodded their heads. “Okay, so a lot of shit went down from about the moment I walked in the door. The Night Mother returned, which caused Astrid no end of paranoia. What didn’t help is that her husband was a werewolf, and couldn’t perform his husbandly duties, so she went looking for someone else.” Delvin started to laugh. Vex smiled. Brynjolf shook his head. “That’s not all. I’m the Listener too.” 

All four shard glances before Karliah asked, “You mean…” 

“Yes, the Night Mother spoke to me. And because she did, I was instructed to put together something not done since the Oblivion Crisis.” 

“You’re joking!” Brynjolf exclaimed. 

“Part of me wish I was, Bryn. We were instructed to assassinate the Emperor. And I was within perhaps thirty seconds of doing it too. I managed to get onto his ship, kill his crew, or those who got in my way. Made it all the way to his chambers. But I was caught, spent weeks in a cell, interrogated once or twice though surprisingly not tortured, and then I was at Helgen.” I let that sit with them for a couple of minutes. None of them asked a question, so I continued. “I’m sure you’ve heard by now that Helgen was destroyed by a dragon. I was there that day as I was to be executed alongside Ulfric Stormcloak. The dragon helped keep me alive, though it spent a couple of hours trying to kill me at the same time. After escaping, I was asked to go to Whiterun to get help for Riverwood, a little village nearby. The Jarl of Whiterun asked me to stay in the city just in case he needed more help, and at the same time, I opted to join the Companions. And I’ll admit I’ve enjoyed it so far.” 

“So what’s this meeting for exactly?” Delvin wondered. 

“I think it’s obvious the Guild is functioning perfectly without me here. So I am going to rescind my position as Guild Master. And I see no reason why Brynjolf and Karliah cannot run it together. Quite frankly, you both deserve it far more than myself.” 

“And what about you?” Brynjolf asked, “Can we rely on your…” 

“Of course, Bryn. While I won’t visit down this way very often, you will find me at the Bee and Barb, or in Riftweald if I do find myself in Riften.” 

“Are you sure?” Karliah asked, the first words she’d said. 

“Aye, I am. I need to get away from Riften. There are far too many bad memories here. And I need to restore my personal honour after working for the Brotherhood. I thought I could handle some of the shit I was up to. But having spent time with the Companions, I realise that I am a Nord at heart, and if I want to spend eternity anywhere when I die, it is in Sovngarde.” 

“But you are still a Nightingale,” she stated. 

“I know I am. Always will be too. But if push comes to shove, I know where I want to go. Guess the gods will have to fight over who gets my soul.” 

“You’re sure about this, lad?” Brynjolf asked, I guess for the final time. 

“I’m going to spend a day or two packing up what I need and send it on to Whiterun. To be honest, if you want it, Bryn, it’s all yours.” 

“You’re serious?” 

“We can seal it with a simply handshake.” He offered his hand, which I accepted, and that was that. Riftweald belonged to him. “I’ll make sure I empty the Dibellan room before you move in.” 

“What about Haelga?” Vex asked, and I couldn’t help smirk in her direction, because I knew at heart that she didn’t give a shit about her. I still wondered if she thought about the suggestion she’d made long ago, about the two of us being intimate. 

“We will enjoy a couple of nights together then basically call it quits. Long distance simply won’t work, and I can’t keep disappearing on her, so we agreed last night that, although at heart we really don’t want to, it’ll prevent the inevitable heartbreak in the future.” 

“You’re not planning on coming back at all?” Karliah asked. 

“Not unless work sends me this way.” 

“Well, I think I speak for everyone that it’ll be a damn shame to lose you, lad. But I think we can also understand, particularly with the… losses you have suffered over the years. There’s no doubt you were the lynchpin of the rebuilding of the Guild. You helped take down Mercer Frey, returned the Skeleton Key, and put the Guild on its firmest footing in decades. We can only hope to continue the fine work you started.” 

“You give me far too much credit, Bryn. I wasn’t the only one involved. Karliah should take much of the credit for opening all our eyes.” 

I could have stayed and chatted with them all day, but I wanted to return to Riftweald and get started, so after a round of handshakes, and a whisper from Karliah to visit her before I left, I left them behind, figuring it was unlikely I’d ever visit the Flagon again. I simply didn’t want to return to the life, no matter how much I had enjoyed it, and despite the fact I’d made a lot of coin. It just wasn’t for me anymore. 

Despite my prolonged absence, Aranea had obviously been in to clean every week or so, as the place didn’t look lived in, but had been cleaned. Grabbing a chest, I started to place mementoes and other things I wanted sent to Whiterun, but as Brynjolf would be moving in, I figured all the furniture could at least remain. 

After heading to the market for a little food, I started to put together some dinner for that evening. Haelga arrived as the sun was going down, wearing a coat which, once she’d shrugged it off, revealed she wasn’t wearing anything else. Dinner was forgotten as she dragged me to the Dibellan room. 

I could go into great, graphic detail about what we did the rest of the night, but to be honest, you probably wouldn’t believe half of it anyway. I think she wanted to do absolutely anything and everything with me that night, as before we started, she said it would be our last time. She couldn’t keep visiting while I was in Riften. I was rather reluctant as I agreed but understood her reasoning. 

She was tied up, whipped, fucked in the arse more than once, swallowed more than one load, spanked, and left in all sorts of strange positions, proving how flexible she was more than once, before I finally released from the restraints and carried her to bed, where we relaxed for a while, sipping some wine, then made love for the final time. It was little surprise she cried upon her final orgasm. One, because it was a bloody good one. And, two, it was the last one we would share together. 

Breakfast the next morning wasn’t awkward, with plenty of light kissing and cuddling, before I escorted her to the Bunkhouse. Standing on the threshold, she held both my hands in hers and told me she loved me. I already knew that, but she then added, “And that’s why I can’t see you again, Ragnar. Once I walk inside, that will have to be it. At least for a while.” 

“I’ll be leaving tomorrow so I guess that will make things easier.” 

I hugged her tightly when she said it wouldn’t, but it would get easier later. I didn’t want to let her go. She definitely didn’t to let me go, so we let each other go at the same time. She kissed my cheek a final time, gave me a sad smile, and walked inside, looking back a final time before closing the door. 

Feeling rather depressed by it all, I headed to the Bee and Barb, enjoying a morning tankard, earning a question from Talen-Jei about my state of mind. I cracked a bad joke and he at least left me alone. I stayed in my usual seat for lunch before heading towards Nightingale Hall. Karliah was waiting for me, and I did wonder what she wanted with me. 

Finding myself escorted to the bedroom she’d made for herself, I did have to ask if she was sure. She was adamant that she was, adding further that she knew I’d been with Haelga the night before, and that things had now ended between us, so she wanted a final fling with me before I left Riften behind for good. 

It was a fun afternoon, only leaving once it was dark, no doubt with a giant smile on my face. Karliah was near asleep as I dressed, and though she was sad that I was leaving, she was also understanding. She simply hoped I would change my mind and return one day, as I ‘still made a bloody good thief.’ 

Brynjolf turned up the next morning so I could hand over the keys. I’d already arranged for a carriage to take the chest of stuff I wanted to keep, so I dressed in the armour I wanted, with my new sword and the best bow I had. Standing at the gates, I took one last look around Riften. I remember thinking how awful the place was when I’d first arrived, but over the years, it had grown on me, and I knew I was going to miss the place at heart, mostly because of the people. I’d made some friends that I thought would be for life, though perhaps, if things changed, I would return. 

Mounting my horse, I pointed it north and put my heels into its flanks, the horse ambling off as normal. I didn’t turn back to look at Riften. All I wondered is if or when I would ever return.

Chapter 27: Blood

“I need you to retrieve something called the Dragonstone.” 

I could have raised a million and one questions but I opted for the simple, “Just point me in the direction and I’ll grab it.” 

He smirked, no doubt wanting to return a sarcastic comment himself, but he swallowed it down. It was one of those times I was glad to be taller and broader than most people. “You are eager to begin your adventure. Excellent. The sooner begun, the sooner done, eh?” 

“Agreed. So what’s this Dragonstone anyway?” 

He seemed surprised by the question, but I just wanted to know what I’d be lugging back. Anything with ‘stone’ in the name would suggest it might be heavy. “I, ah, learned of a certain stone tablet said to be housed in Bleak Falls Barrow. A ‘Dragonstone’ that is said to contain a map of dragon burial sites. Go to Bleak Falls Barrow, find this tablet, no doubt in the main chamber, and bring it to me. Simplicity itself.” 

“Good thing I know where Bleak Falls Barrow is. A friend showed it to me as we escaped Helgen. But how can you be so sure this Dragonstone is there?” 

It was amusing to see the question made him uncomfortable. “Well. Must preserve some professional secrets, mustn't we? I have my sources.” He paused before ensuring he met my eyes. “Reliable sources.” 

The jarl hadn’t exactly been happy I’d left for Riften, as just my luck he’d requested my presence while I’d been gone. Thankfully Kodlak spoke in my defence, and the jarl was happy to hear that I was thinking of making Whiterun my home. I think that helped calm any tempers. I turned to him as he’d listened into what Farengar had to say. “There has been no word of any further dragon attacks, but there are more than enough rumours of sightings to take the threat seriously. I wouldn’t ask you to do this for me if I didn’t believe they would eventually be a threat to my city and its people.” 

“It’s fine, lord, though I will take a friend or two if I’m going to be delving another ancient Nord ruin.” 

“Done your fair share of adventuring?” 

“Aye, and have some scars to prove it too. Right, head to the ruin, find a Dragonstone, head back here. Seems simple enough. Never is though.” 

“You’ll be paid well for this, Ragnar.” 

“Well, that’s nice. I just hope to come back alive. Can only push one’s luck so far.” 

There was little else Farengar could share with me, and I didn’t feel like sitting through a lecture regarding dragons, so with wishes of good luck, I wandered back down towards Jorrvaskr. I let Kodlak know what the jarl had requested, and asked if it was okay to ask for some help. He laughed, stating that the Companions were now my shield-brothers and sisters, and that if I was to request their help, it was likely they would come to my aid. 

The first person I asked was Aela. I think she was surprised, but I admitted to being interested in how she worked, as I’d fought alongside Vilkas and Farkas during contracts I’d completed, so simply wondered if she’d like to join me. After asking where I was headed, she was intrigued by what I was being sent to find, so agreed with little hesitation. We went looking for others to join us, but she admitted that unless we found Vilkas or Farkas, she thought the two of us would be fine. 

“What about Skjor?” 

“We generally don’t work together.” 

“Don’t like mixing business with pleasure?” 

Wrong thing to say, though to start with, she simply smirked before walking closer to me, perhaps to intimidate. Considering I had four to five inches on her, it wasn’t working. “I will be honest with you, Ragnar, as you are aware of some secrets about the Circle. When Skjor and I disappear, it is to hunt.” 

“As werewolves?” She nodded. “So you’re not lovers?” 

“Skjor is a good man, but I do not think of him in that way.” She then smiled. “I didn’t think you’d listen to rumours, Ragnar.” 

“I don’t, but I have noticed you disappear together more than once. I’m not going to judge either way, I was simply wondering.” 

“Wonder no more.” 

“So, just us two then?” 

“Don’t worry, Ragnar. I don’t bite.” 

I gave her a look and smiled, agreeing to leave at first light the next morning. Riverwood was barely an hour’s ride, where we agreed to leave our horses, walking the rest of the way to the ruin. Dark clouds loomed ominously in the distance as we mounted our horses the next morning. I knew the ruin was in a nearby mountain, so we both ensured to take warm clothing in case the weather did close in. It remained clear but cool on the way to Riverwood. 

Tying our horses outside the inn, we asked the innkeeper if it was okay to leave them there, as we would not be customers, at least for the time being. He asked what we would be doing, and let him know we’d be heading to the ruin. “More adventurers!” he exclaimed. 

“What do you mean?” I asked. 

“A couple of days back, there was a Dunmer in here with a few friends, talking about heading to Bleak Falls Barrow. Took them for little more than bandits, though the Dunmer seemed to be clued up, at least. I’d watch your back when approaching.” He paused before adding, “I have a feeling they might have been responsible for the break in at the Riverwood Trader.” 

“Anything of note taken?” 

“Aye, just a golden claw. Only saw it once or twice myself, but Lucan has been devastated since it’s disappearance.” 

“And you think these adventurers took it?” 

The innkeeper shrugged. “As I said, most of them looked like bandits. And the claw went missing the night before they left for the barrow. Put two and two together…” 

It was something worth remembering as Aela and I followed the road out of town, across a stone bridge, turning left and following the path up the hillside. It didn’t take long for the temperature to drop as the path was rather steep. Not enough to lose our footing, but the vegetation soon thinned, and ahead we could see the beginning of snow remaining on the ground. 

We’d climbed for at least half an hour when we approached a tower. Unfortunately, it wasn’t empty as a trio of bandits noticed our approach. With snow now underfoot, the most important thing to do was making sure our footing was secure, so we let the bandits come towards us. Well, two of them did, as Aela put an arrow through one of them to even things out. Whether they were with the bandits the innkeeper told us about or not, I couldn’t be sure. Not that it mattered, as the armour they wore was an insult to the very word, and they died easily. 

Continuing to climb, the snow under our feet grew ever deeper, the wind whipped it into our face, in addition to being bitterly cold. We eventually had to stop to put our coats on as, despite our Nord blood, that could only keep us so warm before even out teeth started to chatter. Rounding the side of the mountain, through the snowfall we could see the barrow in the distance. 

Any sense of relief as we climbed the steps ended when we came upon more bandits. These were at least dressed for the cold, but their armour was still poor in comparison to ours, as was their weaponry. Aela worked from a distance with her bow, leaving me to deal with those confident enough to believe they could take me on. Fighting two of them at a time wasn’t too difficult, as long as they didn’t time their attacks. Most bandits were not particularly talented, relying on fear and intimidation, something that wouldn’t work against me. And it was always amusing to see an arrow fly into the face or neck of someone I was fighting. It made my life easier. 

It didn’t warm up as we opened the enormous steel door into the ruin, as it was quickly obvious that it had long been abandoned. Sections of the roof had collapsed, leaving the enormous entranceway exposed to the elements, while ahead, we could see a fire providing light and warmth, Aela and I crouching down and sneaking closer. Once close enough, she lined up one of the bandits as I surged toward the other. 

“If this is the standard of bandit we’re to face the entire time…” 

“Looking for a fight, Aela?” 

“Surely you want to meet an opponent worthy of your sword rather than the pathetic bunch we’ve run into so far?” 

“You’re right, but who knows what lies in wait for us. You’ve been through ruins like this before, right?” 

“I have. I guess we’ll find draugr soon enough.” 

The rest of the bandits and draugr must have been further in, as we found ourselves walking down crumbling hallways, with no sign this ruin had anything living in it for possibly millennia. There was a staleness to the air that I was used to. Aela did complain about a slight smell, adding that it was due to her heightened senses. I guess I could see how it would come in handy at times. 

The puzzle we had to pass through was rather easy to figure out, and apart from a few skeevers, the way appeared clear ahead. That was until we followed the path down and noticed thickening webs around us. Aela murmured something about spiders. As the webs continued to thicken, I heard a voice ahead, someone pleading for help. 

On the threshold of a larger chamber, Aela grabbed my arm and pointed up at the gap. I nodded, as I’d almost been squashed in a similar sort of room. Carefully stepping forward, we both kept our eyes on the hole in the ceiling as the enormous spider soon made its appearance. Aela wasted little time firing arrow after arrow, while I sheathed my sword and summoned flames. If there was one thing spiders hated, it was fire. 

And considering the size of the creature, I wanted to keep it as far back as possible. Fire and arrows worked like a charm, taking delight in the fact the spider was quickly sheathed in flames. While that only pissed it off so that it did finally come forward, all Aela and I did was pull back where the spider couldn’t get us. 

I’m not sure how many arrows she let loose but the spider eventually collapsed into a ball on the ground, and it was only as we sucked in a few deep breaths that the smell near enough overcame us both. Coming across burned bodies could be bad enough, but burned spiders? I’m not sure how either of us managed to keep our breakfast down. 

Approaching the Dunmer being held in place by the webbing, I noticed his eyes flick between Aela and I. “Cut me down!” he pleaded. 

“You have the claw?” I asked. 

“Yes, the claw. I know how it works. The claw, the markings, the door in the Hall of Stories. I know how they all fit together! Help me down, and I'll show you. You won't believe the power the Nords have hidden there.” 

“So you’re a thief?” Aela asked pointedly, noticing her bow was now slung around her back and a short sword was in hand. 

“No, you don’t understand…” 

I glanced at Aela. “Lucan has offered quite the reward for the claw. Said nothing about the thief though.” 

Aela swung her sword, the Dunmer looking away and flinching as she struck. We laughed at the cry of surprise as he hit the ground with a thud. He muttered something under his breath before he got to his feet. Instead of just handing over the claw, the idiot turned and ran. It caught us by surprise in return, though I suggested to Aela we’ll find him eventually. “Probably dead too,” I added. 

I didn’t always like being right, but I felt no pity when we came across his body a few minutes later. He’d woken up at least six draugr, who took an immediate interest in our presence. Thankfully they were not armoured, their weaponry ancient and, as they were not particularly smart, Aela and I managed to kill them rather easily. That’s not to say we were cocky or over-confident. We were simply better than mindless drones. 

Checking over the body of the Dunmer, we found a small pack. There wasn’t much, a few coins, a journal and the claw itself. It wasn’t particularly large but was heavy, as it did feel like it was made out of solid gold. There were symbols on the ‘palm’ of the claw, wondering what they might relate too. 

The barrow had more traps in stall for us, including a hallway of swinging axes, and more than once I was sure I’d got it wrong and was about to be sliced in two. Aela let me go first, waiting for me to pull the chain at the end. She walked safely towards me with a smirk. “Knew it was there, right?” 

“Of course, Ragnar.” 

More draugr were already awake waiting for us, and despite trying to be careful, even more woke up as we walked through the halls of the dead. Due to the barrow falling into complete disrepair, we ended up following a path cut into the ground itself, left wondering who had done it. I guess the draugr may have been capable, or adventurers before us had once made it this far, though that seemed doubtful. 

After what felt like a long walk, we finally entered what I knew was the Hall of Stories. I’d seen similar artwork at Snow Veil Sanctum long ago. Mercer Frey had managed to pick the lock that time, though I figured out the symbols on the door had to correspond with those on the claw. Like their puzzles, not particularly difficult, though I still breathed a sigh of relief when the door juddered a moment before lowering into the ground. 

I think we were still in the ruin, though I wouldn’t call what we entered a chamber, it was more like a cave. Bats flew towards us out of nowhere into the ruin behind us, a shallow rive of water flowed beside us, while ahead in the distance I could see a word wall. There was also a sarcophagus, which I knew would hold another draugr, no doubt one that would require a lot of effort to kill. 

Approaching the word wall, there was the usual chanting only I could hear, the word I would learn though couldn’t read lit up too. Aela didn’t hear, couldn’t see, so I didn’t bother explaining what was happening. And I learned the word nonetheless. 

“Fus,” I whispered, quiet enough so Aela didn’t hear. 

Then the lid of the sarcophagus flew open, and by the time I’d turned with sword in hand, the draugr was already on its feet, and I knew it was bad. It wore a helmet and body armour. That wasn’t the concern. No, it was the fact the bastard stood taller than myself, and it was armed with an enormous two-handed great-sword. 

And it was angry. 

“Get back and unleash,” I ordered. 

“And what will you do?” 

“Get friendly with this draugr.” 

“Careful, Ragnar. This type is called a Deathlord. They actually have talent.” 

I was fairly sure I’d fought one before, but whatever the case, the Deathlord only had eyes for me. I blocked its first swing to get a feel for its strength and immediately regretted it, the clang reverberating up my arm, and I swear it near broke my arm as well. Stepping back to give myself space, the Deathlord wasted no time coming forward. 

It took all my skill just to parry and block its swings. Each one was hard and fast, barely able to make any sort of response. At the same time, Aela was firing arrow after arrow, but the armour of the Deathlord was thicker than normal, and barely any of her arrows was able to puncture it. 

“Aim for its legs!” I yelled. 

Then the draugr stopped and leaned back, left wondering what it was doing. The bastard screamed at me, which didn’t bother me. No, it was the fact I was sent flying backwards, rolling arse over end, crashing into the word wall. It was only quick thinking that cause me to roll out of the next swing of its sword. 

“Keep it still so I can get its legs!” Aela shouted. 

“Yeah, because it’s that easy,” I muttered, but got in close to the draugr, close enough I could smell its breath. It was the second thing that day which nearly made me throw up, but I managed to keep it still long enough for Aela to get a trio of arrows in one leg, causing it to take a knee. It didn’t give up, still swinging its sword, but the gap between helmet and armour was too tempting to take, and I took delight in driving my sword down into it. 

Withdrawing my sword, the draugr growled before it hit the ground, and I stabbed it again, just to make sure it was dead. I was tempted to hack off its head, but that would have been a waste of time. Finding the Dragonstone in the now empty sarcophagus, I was thankful it wasn’t too heavy, though it still did weigh down my pack. 

“Are you okay?” Aela asked, and I couldn’t help the slight grin at the concern in her tone. 

“Had no idea you cared so much.” 

“I had no idea draugr had such power. What was that?” Shrugging, I admitted I didn’t know. “How’s the head?” she asked, again showing at least a little concern. 

“I’ve probably had worse. But I think it’s best we get out of here. Lucan will like his claw back too.” 

The exit was only a few metres away, and like usual, it was nowhere near where we’d entered the ruin. Thankfully it was still light, and the river was close by, so once we walked towards it, we just followed it back to Riverwood. We didn’t really have a lot to say on the way. I was starting to feel rather sore from my hard collision with the word wall, while Aela only spoke when she had something to say. I’d learned she didn’t really do idle chit-chat. The perfect companion. 

Lucan was delighted to have his claw back and handed over two bags of coin. I could have counted it there and then, but the sheer weight of it suggested he had been very generous to us both. I even earned a kiss on the cheek from his sister as thanks for helping her brother. Nothing untoward, though I returned a smile as she was rather cute. 

Collecting our horses from outside the inn, we headed straight back to Whiterun, Aela barely saying a word until we had stabled our horses. “Ragnar, I must admit something,” she said after at least an hour of silence. I looked at her, waiting for her to continue. “You’re talented. I mean… Very talented.” 

“Um, thanks. So are you.” I looked her up and down, as our coats had been taken off before mounting our horses, so her legs were on display again. 

“My eyes are up here, Ragnar.” 

“They are.” 

She laughed and grabbed my arm, leading us towards the gates. I’d been in Whiterun long enough now that at least my face was recognised, though being with Aela would help get past most roadblocks. Not only was she very attractive, but she could talk her way out of most problems. She joined me up the steps towards Dragonsreach, wandering inside to find it busy as always, with a line of petitioners waiting to see the jarl. But once he saw me, they were all dismissed as I headed straight for the wizard. 

The first and only thing that took my attention was the feminine figure in the hood, making sure her face was away from light, so I could barely see her features. They ignored my presence, continuing their conversation about the dragon menace until Farengar finally looked up and appeared surprised to see me standing there. Without invitation, I stepped forward, opened my pack, and laid the Dragonstone on the table. 

“Ah! The Dragonstone of Bleak Falls Barrow! Seems you are a cut above the usual brutes the Jarl sends my way.” 

“Suppose that’s a compliment. Need anything else?” 

“Me? No. But maybe the jarl will have further work for you later.” He gestured to his right. “My associate here will be pleased to see your handiwork. She discovered its location, by means she has so far declined to share with me.” Glancing to his right, he added, “So, your information was correct after all. And we have our friend to thank for recovering it for us.” 

Now the hooded figure looked at me. I still couldn’t quite see her face, but locks of blonde hair did appear. “You went into Bleak Falls Barrow and got that? Nice work.” 

“Not the first ancient ruin I’ve adventured through, doubt it will be the last.” 

“You’re probably right,” she replied, before glancing at Farengar, “Just send me a copy when you've deciphered it.” 

“Of course. I’ll have it to you as quickly as I can.” 

I wandered back towards the throne with Aela, explaining what we’d just done for Farengar. He was profuse in his thanks as before, and we found ourselves handed another large bag of coin each for the assistance. Once again he asked that I remain in Whiterun to assist with the dragon investigation. “I’ve moved, lord. I now call Whiterun home for now.” 

That news seemed to please him immensely, adding that I was now a Companion, so that if he needed my services again, he need only send someone to find me at Jorrvaskr. If I wasn’t there, I would be the Bannered Mare or out doing a job. He suggested that, as soon as Farengar had news, he would send for me again, adding that he might also ask for Aela, as we must have worked well as a team. 

Aela and I headed back to Jorrvaskr, the sun finally starting to set. Kodlak was interested in what we’d been up to, and figured doing jobs for the jarl couldn’t be a bad thing for the Guild, adding that any coin we made would be only for us, as the reputation we would help build mattered more. That didn’t mean we didn’t celebrate a contract completed, with Vilkas and Farkas returning that evening to join in the revelry. Best part of the evening? The light flirting between Aela and I. There was no doubt I found her attractive, and I was left thinking she might be tempted with a roll under the sheets, but I wasn’t going to push my luck. After everything I’d been through, while I yearned for the feeling of soft skin against mine, I’d broken enough hearts, or had mine broken, to be cautious about doing it all again. 

After the excitement of the ruin and finding the Dragonstone, the next couple of weeks was a return to normality, with the occasional contract but I spent more time training or lazing around Jorrvaskr than actually working. Not that I complained too much, as I’d made plenty of coin due to that mission. When not working, I got to know the people around the city. Carlotta, who ran the fruit and vegetable stall. Rather attractive, though made it quite clear she was a content single mother. Amren, who was a former mercenary and now rather bored family man. Arcadia, who ran a shop that sold potions. Adrianne and Ulfberth, who ran the shop and smith near the gates. As I got to know them, they got to know me, though I kept much of my past vague. I didn’t particularly want the truth revealed. 

Returning from a contract late one evening, Skjor was waiting for me at the top of the stairs leading into Jorrvaskr. “Ragnar, I have something special planned for you.” 

“Oh, what would that be?” 

He heard the caution in my tone and he chuckled before continuing. “Nothing to be concerned about. Meet me in the Underforge tonight. We will speak more then.” 

“Where’s the Underforge?” 

“Beneath the Skyforge, where Eorlund works. The door is hidden, but I will show you the way.” 

“Okay.” 

I didn’t give it another thought as I headed inside, letting Vilkas know the contract was complete and I’d made some coin too. Not knowing what Skjor had planned for me that evening, I didn’t join the rest in drinking around the fire, though I still ate dinner with them. The Companions loved to eat as much as they loved to drink, and there was always meat cooking on the spit, as in addition to everything else, we all loved to go hunting game. Sometimes it was nice going solo, but I would usually join others, simply to avoid feeling lonely. 

Aela disappeared during dinner, giving me a look that suggested she would also be at this meeting. When I left, Vilkas and Farkas remained seated, so I sort of figured out what might happen. Joining Skjor outside, he led me towards the rock face. I couldn’t see a door so figured it was well hidden, perhaps by magic. 

“So what is this place?” I had to wonder aloud. 

“Jorrvaskr is the oldest building in Whiterun. The Skyforge was here long before it was. And the Underforge taps an ancient magic that is older than men or elves. We bring you here to make you stronger, new blood. There is no test inside, only a gift. Are you prepared?” 

“Sure.” 

The rock face started to move, and a doorway slowly appeared. Walking into the dark cavern, a spell was cast and I almost cried out when I saw the werewolf waiting inside for us. But considering Skjor was beside me, I figured it was Aela. Skjor confirmed that before I could mention it. 

“I'm glad you came. It's been a long time since we've had a heart like yours in our numbers. That pitiful ceremony behind the hall does not befit warriors like us. You are due more honour than some calls and feasting. I would hope you recognize Aela, even in this form. She's agreed to be your forebear.” I glanced at the werewolf, and the eyes were the same, so she was still somewhere inside. “We do this in secret because Kodlak is too busy trying to throw away this great gift we've been granted. He thinks we've been cursed. But we've been blessed. How could something that gives this type of prowess be a curse? So we take matters into our own hands.” 

“He doesn’t know about this?” 

“No. I respect the old man, I really do, but I don’t agree with him when it comes to this matter.” 

“Fair enough.” 

“To reach the heights of the Companions, you must join with us in the shared blood of the wolf. Are you prepared to join your spirit with the beast world, friend?” 

“Sure.” 

I didn’t know a lot about being a werewolf, but knew it involved Daedra, it would involve something… weird. Becoming a werewolf meant a blood ritual. Most would have been horrified at the thought, but I’d done enough strange things during my time in Skyrim that, once Skjor offered me the chalice of Aela’s blood, I knocked it back without hesitation. 

Then things went a little black. 

---

“Ragnar!” I opened my eyes to see a black sky above me, many millions of stars twinkling, the moons near as bright as the sun. Or maybe it was just my new eyesight. “Ragnar, you awake?” 

I suddenly felt rather cold, running hand down my body to realise I was naked and lying in deep snow. Despite feeling cold, my body felt like it was on fire, figuring it was the beast-blood now flowing through my veins, and my body slowly adapting to it. Lifting my head, I could see Aela standing nearby, holding a torch. “What the hell happened?” 

“You were born into the pack, brother. I almost envy you, that first time is always the most...intense. You gave us even more trouble than Farkas did in his first turning.” The way she spoke, she made it sound almost erotic. I got to my feet and that’s when I heard her gasp. “Oh my!” 

I looked down to realise I was completely hard. I mean, the sort of erection I would have before sliding my cock inside a woman. I glanced back at Aela, who was utterly transfixed. “I had no idea,” she said quietly. 

“Not like I walk around Jorrvaskr with my cock out, Aela.” 

She walked forward towards me, her eyes not leaving my cock. Her interest in it merely meant it stayed rock hard. A fine woman like Aela would also do the trick. If only she was naked… She switched the torch to her left hand and finally met my eyes. “May I, Ragnar?” 

“May you what?” 

“May I touch it?” 

“Touch what?” 

“Your cock. I want to touch it.” 

I shrugged. “Go on then.” 

Her hand was cold, but she immediately wrapped her hand around my shaft. “So big,” she whispered. She couldn’t help herself as she gave me a few strokes. “By the Eight,” she added quietly. 

I cleared my throat. “Um, this feels nice and all, but… What are we doing here?” 

“What?” she asked, then seemed to realise, though she didn’t remove her hand. “Oh, um, we’re outside a fort called Gallows Rock. There’s a pack of werewolf hunters inside called the Silver Hand. We’re going to take care of them. Skjor has scouted ahead.” 

“Did you bring my armour or am I fighting naked, scaring them off with my cock?” Her hand was still moving, and she almost looked in two minds as to what to do next. “Aela?” 

“I’m sorry, Ragnar, I’m just imagining what this would do to me…” She stepped a little closer so her body almost touched mine. She stood short, at least four to five inches, requiring her to look up. “When were you last with a woman, Ragnar?” 

“I’ll be honest; I’ve been on a bit of a dry run lately.” 

“If you want to fuck, Ragnar, just knock on my door. Trust me, I’m more than willing. I was willing before, but after seeing this magnificent thing between your legs, I want it inside me now.” She then released me and stepped back. “But we have work to do first. Your armour and weapons are on the log over there. Get dressed and we’ll make a move.” 

I needed a couple of minutes for it to go down before I could actually dress. Once in my armour, both of us had a bow in hand, ready to eliminate any sentries. Despite the snow covered landscape and the wind, I knew the blood was keeping me warm. My sight was much better in the darkness. My sense of smell was much better. My hearing was exceptional, hearing the crunch of footsteps in snow as one of the Silver Hand patrolled. 

After taking the trio of guards out with some well-aimed arrows, we headed straight to the door leading inside. I did immediately wonder where Skjor was, having assumed he would be waiting for us inside, but he must have headed further in. Now in the confines of rooms and corridors, I unsheathed my sword and happily took the lead. 

It was bloodied rather quickly, as three Silver Hand were waiting for us to walk in. I’ll give them some credit, all three knew what they were doing with a sword, but Aela and I linked up well, making a good team, and they died all the same. Searching around for any clues, I found a dead werewolf hung up in what appeared to be a torture chamber. 

“There's a dead one, isn't there?” 

“Aye.” 

I felt her presence beside me, sniffing the air. “Nobody we know, by the smell. Some can't separate the animal from themselves and eventually go feral. This poor sod could have been anyone.” She sighed before adding, “We should keep moving.” 

Despite not knowing the werewolf, she was now pissed off, and took great pleasure in killing the next Silver Hand we came across. Most seemed to know who we were. Some even knew our names, which I found slightly concerning. We also found more werewolves caged up, some still alive. I asked if we should release them, but after doing that with the first one and finding ourselves under attack, Aela suggested they were probably all feral, so the humane thing to do would be to put them out of their misery. I think we both did that with a heavy heart, but it was the right thing to do. 

Silver Hand continued to fall at our hands. The further in we walked, the angrier she became, but also ever more concerned due to there being no sign of Skjor. I’ll admit I was worried myself, and tried to move forward as quickly as possible. 

Deep in what felt like the bowels of the fortress, we agreed we must be nearing the commander of the fortress. “We're getting close now, be careful. Their leader is a tricky one. They call him ‘The Skinner’. I don't think I need to tell you why.” 

“Maybe you do?” 

She managed a smirk but it faded quickly. I was careful opening the door, immediately counting half a dozen people. None of them saw us at first. I crouched down on one knee, sensing Aela take out her bow. She would manage at least two arrows before they closed on us. I looked up and back, nodded once, and she wasted no time letting loose. 

The first arrow found the back of one the Silver Hand, hearing them cry out before collapsing to the ground. The other five immediately turned towards us, the second arrow finding the throat of another. Before she could fire again, I was up and running towards who I figured the ‘Skinner’ was, a giant of a man, perhaps taller than myself, armed with an enormous maul. I couldn’t help smirk myself, as although he could possibly kill me in one blow, a giant maul was a slow, cumbersome weapon. I would rely on speed. 

I couldn’t get straight to him at first, as one of the other Silver Hand figured he would try and fight me. It was a simply parry, block and thrust into the body, withdraw and move on. By the time I faced the brute down, his maul was already arriving towards my body, managing to stop and reverse my progress in time. I cut his arm, enjoying his cry of pain, as he tried to jab the maul into my gut, again turning and stepping away in time. 

Hearing Aela in battle with whoever else was alive, I kept my eyes on the large bastard in front of me. Each time he swung his maul, I cut him, either on an arm, his body, or his legs. It would continue to piss him off, and I knew he would eventually make a mistake, one that would leave him completely open. “Stop messing with him, Ragnar.” 

“You want to fight this big lump?” 

There was a moment of silence. “No, you’re alright. Continue as you are.” 

“You’re going to die, Companion,” the big lump warned, “You besmirch the memory and name of Ysgramor.” 

Time to stop messing around. With only a two-handed maul, there was no way he could block the flurry of strikes that I unleashed, and I took great joy in driving my sword into his gut. But the big bastard was made of stern stuff, and despite a wound that would have immediately lamed a normal sized man, he managed to get up from his knee and charged at me. I cut him a further time, this leading to him stumbling and dropping his weapon. 

He turned towards me, wondering if he was going to continue to fight. I didn’t give him a chance as I cut him across the throat. He dropped to the ground on his knees, and I took further pleasure in taking his head. As his headless body crashed to the ground, I heard Aela call my name. 

Turning to see her on the ground, I knew the body in front of her was Skjor. She looked up at me with such fury in her eyes, I nearly took a step back. “Bastards. He's one of the strongest we had, but numbers can overwhelm. He should not have come without a Shield-Brother!” 

I rested a hand on her shoulder. “I’m sorry.” And I meant it as she was right, he’d been a damned fine warrior. 

She shrugged off my hand and told me to have a look around for any information. I found a desk nearby and plenty of notes. Aela had a quick check before she asked me to help carry Skjor’s body out. It was still dark outside, but at least Skjor and Aela had ridden to the fort. I found an abandoned cart nearby, found some leather strips, and attached the cart to one of the horses, and we slowly rode back to Whiterun. 

It was dawn by the time we arrived at the gates of the city, the guards recognising immediately what happened, opening them wide so we could escort Skjor most of the way to Jorrvaskr. I headed straight up to the hall to inform them. Vilkas read my face as he suggested I head straight to Kodlak and let him know. Just like Vilkas, he knew something had happened, simply following me back outside to where Aela was waiting. 

Aela held nothing back, explaining everything from the ritual in the Underforge to finding Skjor’s body. Kodlak wasn’t particularly surprised that I had undergone the ritual but added nothing else, simply asking me to carry Skjor’s body to the Skyforge, where his body would be given rites before the funeral that evening. Realising Aela and I were otherwise exhausted, he suggested we head inside for a rest. 

Ready to just grab one of the beds in the common area, I found my hand grabbed by Aela and escorted to her room. Leading me inside, she closed the doors and locked them as I turned to face her. “I’m not sure…” 

“We’re not fucking, Ragnar, so calm yourself. I just wanted some company. I’ve just lost a good friend.” 

“Company I can do.” 

She walked towards me until we barely stood apart. “But would it be on the table at another time?” she asked quietly. 

“Fucking?” She nodded somewhat eagerly. I couldn’t help smile. “Definitely. But… But there are perhaps one or two things you need to know about me. I can tell you about it all later.” 

Dressed in armour, getting into bed did require undressing, though only down to underwear. I did let my eyes wander over her body though. We did have a wash before getting into bed, as there was still a little blood, but once we were clean, we soon snuggled under the furs, surprised she immediately spooned into me. Feeling her warmth pressed into my body, it was little wonder my body reacted. And she felt it. 

“Later,” she whispered. 

“Natural reaction. And I’m far too tired as well.” 

“We’ll talk later. Maybe after the… you know… Skjor and everything.” 

“Sure.” 

“Will you join me in here again?” 

“If you would like me to.” 

“I want you in here with me, Ragnar. Preferably all the time.” 

“And if it leads to whispers?” 

“Do you care what anyone else thinks?” 

“No.” 

“Neither do I. And, right now, I just want your company.” 

We both drifted off rather quickly as there was no doubt we were both exhausted after the previous night. We were woken by a knock at the door, Farkas sticking his head in, letting us know it was mid-afternoon and that plans were underway for the evening. Thanking him, Aela simply wiggled her arse into my crotch as she nestled her body back into mine. It was surprisingly tender considering. 

“Surprised?” she asked a little later. 

“A little. I was expecting to just be thrown down on the bed and for you to jump on me.” 

“When it comes to battle, I am who I am. But I’m still a woman at heart. I do like the finer things in life at times.” She paused before flipping around to face me. “That’s not to say I don’t want to be fucked.” I couldn’t help grin as she added, “Just so you know for the future, Ragnar.” 

“But not now?” 

“Now is probably not the best time. That’s not to say I’m not thinking about it.” 

“Let me know when and where.” 

We eventually got up and, after cleaning our armour, dressed and joined the rest upstairs. The mood was solemn, as to be expected, Farkas taking the pair of us to the side, letting us know the ceremony would begin at dusk. There would be no drinking or eating until afterwards, so I left Aela with the rest as I went looking for Kodlak. I found him sitting outside by himself, reading a book. Joining him at the table, he looked up and shook his head. 

“It’s not your fault, Ragnar.” 

It was hard not to feel at least some guilt. “Maybe if we’d got to him quicker…” 

“Skjor was a brave warrior, of that there is no doubt. But if he truly did go into that fort alone, I do not wish to speak ill of the dead, but that was a mistake. It is why a Companion never works alone.” 

“He didn’t deserve to die, though.” 

“No, he didn’t.” He paused before adding, “And now you carry the blood. Do you feel any different?” 

“A little bit. Certain senses are sharper.” 

“And what of Sovngarde?” 

I shrugged. “I’m not sure I’d be heading there if I died anyway. Working with the Companions is helping restore lost honour.” 

“Your past?” I nodded. “You have regrets?” 

“One big one.” 

“You have suffered loss?” 

“A wife and unborn child.” 

I noticed the eyebrows raised in obvious surprise. “You were married?” 

“Harbinger, the sense of happiness I felt during my all too brief time with my wife is indescribable. Once I lost her, I truly lost my way. I did things many would find horrific. I did things that almost led to my death at the hands of the executioner. It is why I’m here with this guild now. I was never one to really worry about my honour. But after escaping Helgen, I saw an opportunity to change the direction of my life.” 

Kodlak slowly nodded his head in understanding. “Yours is not the first story. Unfortunately, yours is similar to many who have served this guild over time. We do not judge what has come before. We judge only what you do with us now. No matter what, you have proven to have a good heart, Ragnar. Keep doing what you’re doing and you will earn honour and respect from us, and also the gods.” 

“Thank you, Harbinger.” 

Once the sun started to set, torches were lit around Jorrvaskr as we began to gather by the Skyforge. A pyre of logs had been built on top of which Skjor’s body now lay. He was dressed in his armour, a giant sword resting on his chest. A few civilians came to watch proceedings. There were no priests from the local temple. This was a purely Companion affair, Kodlak offering words of comfort and wisdom, and also of regret that a Companion had been lost, before the pyre was lit and Skjor was sent to the Hunting Grounds. All of us knew he did not wish for Sovngarde. 

There were a few tears. While I did feel guilt, I did not cry. It was sad, but I did not know him that well. Aela took my hand and leaned her head against my shoulder, feeling no shame in the tears that streaked down her own cheeks. I knew the two had been close friends and that she would miss him. We waited until the pyre collapsed and Skjor was no more, only then did we return to Jorrvaskr, where all of us, even Kodlak, proceeded to get incredibly drunk. 

I’m not sure when I headed to bed, but I woke up next to Aela the next morning, both of us clothed. Since we were clothed, we figured nothing untoward happened, and it was a day where we did absolutely nothing. Jorrvaskr was quiet as everyone dealt with a hangover tinged with a sense of grief. 

It was only the next day after breakfast that Aela asked me to join her in her quarters once again. She had all the paper and journals we’d grabbed about the Silver Hand, and we came to a quick agreement. 

The Silver Hand had killed one of our own. They had attempted to kill another. It was time to go on the offensive. 

We would be going to war against the Silver Hand.

Chapter 28: Dragonborn

Aela originally wanted me to deal with everyone alone, or at worse, ask another Companion to help me. I suggested working alone was exactly what led to Skjor’s death, which caused her to grimace, get a little upset, but also agree. I added that perhaps involving everyone else might not be the best idea. I was fairly sure Vilkas and Farkas wouldn’t agree with what we were planning on doing, and did either of us want to be responsible for the deaths of the other Companions. 

Aela relented, rather quickly to be honest, agreeing we would see it through together until the bitter end. Looking over the journal and paperwork we had, alongside maps of each region of Skyrim, we figured out where one of the Silver Hand operations was located. “They must definitely be located here,” Aela stated, pointing at the location with a dagger, “I’d bet… well, not my life, but perhaps a bag of coin.” 

Leaning over the map, I looked at the name before glancing at her. “Fort Fellhammer?” 

“Probably one of the many abandoned by the Legion over the centuries, and probably has no strategic value for the Stormcloaks.” 

It was a little too close to Dawnstar for my liking, remembering that is where I’d sent the survivors of the Dark Brotherhood, but I figured enough time had passed and I doubted they’d actually see me. We agree to leave the next morning. 

If anyone had an inkling of what Aela and I were up to, they said nothing at breakfast the next morning. We were already armoured, ready to leave, and I’d been out to see the horses at dawn, our supplies already loaded. Before leaving immediately after eating, Farkas did ask what we were up to. Aela immediately stated we would be going hunting and perhaps one or two other things, in such a suggestive way, Farkas looked away embarrassed while I nearly burst out laughing. 

“Promises, promises,” I said once we were walking towards the gates. 

“I didn’t promise anything, but you already know what I think, Ragnar.” She stopped, turning to look at me. “But part of me doesn’t just want to jump into bed… Well, you’re already sleeping in my bed, so I don’t want to just start fucking.” 

“To be honest, neither do I.” 

“And I understand why.” We’d done a lot of talking the morning we woke up, hungover and grief-stricken. I had to tell her the truth and she was the only Companion that knew everything. And I mean everything. I had thought long and hard, and believed if there was going to be any sort of relationship, and most importantly trust between us, then I had to be honest. 

I was amazed that she hadn’t judged, almost repeating the words Kodlak had said to me in the hours before the funeral for Skjor. She would judge me on my actions going forward, but she still figured I was a good man at heart. I still don’t really know how they figured that, considering everything I’d done, but I was slowly working on restoring my pride and honour. 

Mounting our horses, we first headed east towards the meadery before turning north, having already agree to keep our pace light, as we would camp before attacking the fort the next day. Having been to Winterhold before, though what felt like long ago, I knew the way as well as Aela, so we could at least spend time chatting away, only having to deal with wildlife dumb enough to try and attack us. Usually just wolves, but we did run into one bear walking towards us. Our horses wanted to turn and bolt, so we quickly sent a couple of arrows towards the bear. The giant beast was smart enough to run away. 

I generally didn’t like camping on snowy ground, but after leaving our horses tied to a tree and finding Fort Fellhammer, we pulled back and made camp in a dense clump of trees, hoping our fire wouldn’t be seen. We huddled close together under a large fur blanket as a bitter wind blew, and despite the fact we were still dressed, the body warmth and close proximity of Aela did provide some excitement as we continued to quietly chat about anything that came to mind. 

We went to bed early, continuing to huddle together under a layer of furs. Aela remained dressed in her leathers, but I couldn’t sleep in my scaled armour, though she made no complaints about having to hug me close. I’m not sure how I managed to sleep as I had innumerable thoughts in regards to what I wanted to do with her, most involving removing her leathers. 

Waking up just as the sun started to rise, we ate a cold breakfast of hard bread and cheese before dousing the fire and moving out. If we were lucky, the fort would be as lightly guarded as Gallows Rock. In the low morning light, we could see at least a trio of guards patrolling the crumbling walls. Armed with a bow and quiver of arrows, taking the three out silently wasn’t difficult, finding two more in the courtyard, the gates of the fort having long since disappeared. 

“Bit too easy, isn’t it?” I wondered, approaching the main building. 

“At least they’re dead.” 

I grunted as I opened the door, both of us now armed with a blade. It was dark inside, only a few torches providing any sort of light. Moving as silently as possible, we found a pair of Silver Hand still asleep, neither of having a problem slitting their throats before moving on. Any hopes of doing it silently ended when a door opened as we almost ran into another one, putting a sword into their chest before we just started swinging. 

That drew the attention of others, and we were soon fighting our way down a wide corridor. Having been woken up by our arrival, most were not completely armoured, some only carrying a sword without a shield. No matter what, they all died. Reaching the upper level, the commander of the fort was waiting for us. He knew who we were too. 

Taunting us, Aela and I wasted no time putting him to the sword. We could have drawn out his death, perhaps performed a little torture, but I think we wanted to eliminate the Silver Hand with at least some modicum of honour. Once his body hit the ground, we immediately went searching for information. The one interesting piece we found was the fact there was a mine below us. Other than that, we grabbed a couple of journals, agreeing to read those later, before we headed downstairs. 

I was expecting prisoners in the mine, figuring the Silver Hand had kidnapped people. But my assumption was incorrect, as we found Silver Hand busy swinging axes at the ore veins. They turned and attacked as soon as we came into view, but with chests exposed, and only pickaxes at hand, we made short work of the few miners actually awake. 

Heading back across the courtyard and through the gatehouse, Aela grabbed me by the hand, turning me towards her. “Thank you,” she said, far more softly than usual. 

“What for?” 

“For helping. You did so without hesitation.” 

I shrugged, not sure what to say, except that it was fine. I liked being with her. Then she stepped forward and kissed me. It took barely a couple of seconds for me to drop my weapons and wrap my arms around her, and how we didn’t end up on the ground doing many other things, I think both of us were probably surprised. There was no doubt we were incredibly attracted to one another, and I think that kiss, as hot and heavy as it was, signified what we both wanted. Each other. Badly. 

Finally breaking apart, as I had her pinned against the wall, our hands exploring each other, we stared at each other before bursting into laughter. Clearing my throat, I said, “Well, I think that clears that up.” 

Staying close, leaving her hands on my chest, she looked up and admitted, “It’s been too long since I was with a man, Ragnar.” 

“Seriously? But you’re… Well, I think it’s obvious what I think about you.” 

“I’ll be honest, most of the men in Whiterun are losers, married or… Well, you’ve seen them for yourself. And I generally had a rule about being intimate with a fellow Companion.” 

“But you changed that rule for me?” 

“I’ve wanted to fuck you for quite some time, Ragnar. I assume you’ve felt the same way?” I nodded. “I don’t want our first time to be in Jorrvaskr,” she added, before smirking, “I’m not quiet.” 

“Good to know.” 

“And considering I know what you’re packing, I’ll definitely make some noise.” 

I pulled her forward and kissed her again before sliding my lips towards her ear. “I endeavour to make you scream,” I whispered. 

“I’m going to hold you to that one, Ragnar,” she whispered back. 

I kissed her again, this one much softer, tender, and I felt her smile as she wrapped her arms around my neck. Having been so long since I’d even kissed a woman, my body was having the usual reaction, and I finally had to pull away. Aela would have felt it as she was pressed against me. “We should head back,” I suggested. 

She held my hand all the way back to where we’d left our horses before we kissed one last time, mounted our horses, and slowly made our way back to Whiterun. It was very late by the time we dismounted at the stables outside the city walls, late enough that the fire was barely burning by the time we entered Jorrvaskr. Aela led me straight to her quarters, where she eagerly started to take off her leathers, a look suggesting I do the same. 

Once down to my underwear, I gave her another look. “Listen, if we get naked, I will want to fuck you,” I admitted, “Just being in our underwear will be difficult enough.” 

“What if I’m just naked?” 

“Then that would be very unfair. And I’d want to do other things to you.”

“Would you mind doing other things to me without sliding that cock of yours inside me?” 

“I definitely wouldn’t mind at all.” 

She took off her bra first, freeing a pair of breasts that were larger than I expected. Smaller than Haelga but they were still spectacular. But I definitely smiled when she slid her panties off. Looking up from her little feet, up those incredibly athletic legs, towards her sex with a patch of dark hair. Her stomach was flat, and I could see the scars of the hard life she had lived. I had plenty of my own. 

Stepping towards me, her mouth only wanted mine as my hands immediately enjoyed the feeling of her naked skin, grabbing a handful of her arse, feeling her smile as we continued to make out, before I slowly led her towards the bed. Sitting her down, she manoeuvred backwards so her heads rested on a pillow as I hovered above her. “Can I admit something, Aela?” 

“Of course.” 

“I absolutely love doing what I’m about to do.” 

The smile returned… My heart fluttered. The same sort of flutter I’d felt a couple of times before. “Well, I look forward to whatever you’re about to do.” 

I lavished her body with attention before getting to the part I really wanted to taste. She loved the attention I gave her breasts, enjoying how hard her nipples got. She laughed as my beard tickled her as I kissed down her stomach and teased her, avoiding her sex as I kissed her thighs instead. I kept teasing her until she was begging for me to focus on her pussy. 

I eventually had to relent, give into temptation, and taste her for the first time. We both made noises that suggested we enjoyed that very much. I knew after that first time that I’d want to do it again and again, perhaps for the rest of my life. Aela’s back arched and breathed my name, the sort of thing that excited me quite a lot. 

Once in my groove, she had no chance, looking up to see she’d grabbed a pilled, holding it over her face to stifle her screams and moans. That just made me double down on what I was doing, near enough dragging her body off the bed as, in addition to my tongue, I slid a couple of fingers inside her. 

That made her move the pillow to cry out, feeling one of her hands move through my hair. “By Talos, where did you learn all this?” she cried, “Don’t answer. Don’t stop. Just make me cum.” 

So that’s just what I did. I usually wasn’t exactly sure what I did to bring about an orgasm, generally just following the general instruction or judging body language and noises made. Being my first time with Aela, I figured I could at least judge body language enough, particularly when her body began to writhe as I held onto her with my one free hand, but when she repeated ‘Right there, don’t stop’, that let me know exactly what to do. 

She had quite the orgasm, and once she’d recovered, she asked me to stop, managing to tell me that she couldn’t take any more before she near enough passed out. Gently kissing up her body, I eventually just hovered over her again, waiting for her to focus and look at me again. When she did, another of those smiles formed that caused my heart to flutter as she leaned up to kiss me. “Well, you’re definitely a keeper,” she said quietly before reaching down to grab my obvious erection, “Would you like the favour returned shortly?” 

“I’m definitely not going to turn down a blowjob.” 

“Give me a few minutes. You’ve worn me out.” 

Lying down next to her, she turned and wrapped an arm across my chest, and it was funny how natural it already felt. I think we already liked each other, though I tried not to wonder nor think too hard about any sort of future. Considering this was the first time we’d been intimate, I figured I should just enjoy it while it lasted, and if it developed into something more, we’d cross that bridge when it came to it. 

Aela kept her word, and a few minutes later, she was happily licking up and down my shaft, and I took delight in watching her use her mouth on me. She certainly knew what she was doing, her eyes constantly looking up into mine. They were beautiful eyes. In one way, they reminded me of my wife. I tried not to think of her then and there, but it was hard not to. There were one or two similarities. Perhaps that’s why I’d taken a real shine to Aela. 

Since it had been a while, I was never going to last long, quickly warning her I was about to cum. She stopped and said, “I’ll let you finish in my mouth this time. If I like your taste, that’s what we’ll do going forward.” 

“And if you don’t?” 

She smiled as she replied, “My face or my tits are always an option. Though when you finally fuck me, there’s only one place you’re finishing.” 

“Inside you?” 

“Of course, Ragnar.” 

I finished inside her mouth not long later. She happily swallowed the entire lot and mentioned I tasted good. I made her laugh when I joked that we agreed that we both tasted good, so next time, we should do it together. She readily agreed, though we figured it was rather late, so we were quite happy to go to sleep. Aela happily spooned into me again that night, making sure I held her tightly in my arms. The fierce warrior she usually could be was a complete contrast to moments like that, snuggling against me, feeling safe in my arms. 

“Ragnar?” she whispered. 

“Yeah.” 

“It’s been a long time since… Well, since I was with a man. But also since…” She sighed. I think she had a lot to say but couldn’t exactly articulate it. 

“Let’s just enjoy it for the moment. If things develop, we can talk about it.” 

She shuffled back into me as I kissed her cheek. “I can deal with that.” 

Yep, I really liked her too. 

Waking up together the next morning, I think we both wanted to fuck, make love, or at least something like that, but we somehow managed to not give into temptation. I’m not sure why, to be honest. It was obvious we wanted to be intimate, though I didn’t mind waiting either. If she wanted to be absolutely sure, then so be it, but considering what we’d done the night before, being intimate was simply the next step. 

Wandering upstairs, we realised it was later than usual as no-one else was around, but Tilma happily brought us a plate each so we could enjoy breakfast together. In the morning light by the fire, it was unusual for Aela to wander around without her face-paint. Even the night before, it was still present, but she had cleaned her face before leaving the bedroom. 

She was absolutely stunning. Her face was slightly pale, the slight freckling across her cheeks and nose a slight surprise, but she noticed me looking at her and blushed. “What?” she asked. 

“I’m not sure what to say without sounding too corny.” 

“Well, I’ll just interpret what your eyes and face are saying and be rather happy with that.” 

Having spent a couple of days away from Jorrvaskr, we agreed that constantly coming and going would draw attention, so we wouldn’t leave Whiterun for at least a couple of days, though we would spend time in her room planning our next move. Looking over the map, we picked out more possible places of Silver Hand operations, but still couldn’t figure out where their main base was. If we had that information, we’d already agreed that we would take it to Kodlak and let him decide. But, for the moment, we would continue to lay the groundwork. 

Farkas was out on a contract, as were most of the others. Vilkas was around and made more than one suggestive comment about the burgeoning relationship between Aela and I, while I think he also had an inkling, if didn’t outright know what we were up to regarding the Silver Hand. When asking him to be honest with me, he admitted he did know, but that it wasn’t his place to involve himself, simply warning me to be careful. 

“I understand Aela. Skjor was a good friend, and the pair took to the blood. But why you, Ragnar? Is it simply because you like her?” 

“Skjor did not deserve that death. You saw his body, how he was mutilated. If they’d just killed him, we probably would have attacked them once and been content. But it was the disrespect shown to him, alive and dead, that has riled us both.” 

“The old man isn’t blind, deaf nor dumb, Ragnar. I would be very careful about what you do next.” 

Any idea of Aela and I leaving to take out the next Silver Hand operation ended the next day. 

---

It was the second day after our return from Fort Fellhammer, perhaps around mid-afternoon, when my life changed forever. I was sitting down, Aela quite happily sitting sideways on my lap, the pair of us simply enjoying a little peace and quiet alone, when the doors to Jorrvaskr burst open, in striding a pair of guards, both coming straight towards us. I immediately thought they’d figured out who I really was, and had come to arrest me. 

“You Ragnar?” one of them asked. 

“Aye,” I replied carefully, noticing Aela glancing at me with slight concern. 

“The jarl requests your presence immediately.” 

I glanced again at Aela before asking, “For what reason?” 

“A dragon has been sighted.” 

Well, good a reason as any, so considering I was already armoured, I grabbed Aela by the hand and the pair of us followed the guards up to Dragonsreach. The jarl wasn’t at his throne, nor were we led into the court wizard’s quarters. Instead, the guards walked up stairs towards the private residence of the jarl, finding the man himself in conversation with another guard, and the Dunmer I remember from before. I believe she was his housecarl. Farengar was also there, listening intently to the report. 

From what I could hear, the guard was suggesting a dragon was sighted to the west of Whiterun, and it had already attacked a watch-tower. The jarl ordered the guard to return to barracks to rest before immediately turning to the Dunmer. “Irileth, you'd better gather some guardsmen and get down there.” 

“I've already ordered my men to muster near the main gate. I will meet with them immediately and move out.” 

“Good. Don’t fail me. I don’t want to watch my city burn.” He paused before adding, “One last thing, Irileth. This isn't a death or glory mission. I need to know what we're dealing with.” 

“Don't worry, my lord. I'm the very soul of caution.” 

Irileth met my eyes and nodded before she disappeared down the stairs, the jarl then moving towards me. He noticed Aela with me at the same time. “There's no time to stand on ceremony, my friend. I need your help again.” My friend? I didn’t think we were that close, but if I was on the good side of the jarl, that could only be positive. “I want you to go with Irileth and help her fight this dragon. You survived Helgen, so you have more experience with dragons than anyone else here.” 

“I spent most of the time running for my life, lord, but I’ll do what I can.” 

He glanced at Aela. “You’re a Companion?” 

“Yes, lord.” 

Looking between us, he added, “Then if the Companions wish to stand for Whiterun at the same time, I can only promise you honour and reward for the assistance.” 

“Whiterun is our home too, lord. A dragon is a danger to us all,” Aela stated. 

With wishes of good luck ringing in our ears, we headed straight to Jorrvaskr to collect our weapons and gather any other Companions we could find. Vilkas was out back, practicing sword work against a dummy, and as soon as I told him what we were involved in, he immediately offered his services. The three of us headed for the main gate, where Irileth had been waiting for us, so I guess she knew before my arrival that I would be tasked with helping them. 

There was no standing on ceremony as we headed out of the gates as a gaggle, most eyes on the horizon or the sky above us. There was no sign of a dragon near or far as we passed the stables and turned right onto the main road leading towards Rorikstead. Jogging past Fort Greymoor, always left wondering if it was empty or not, the western watch-tower soon came into view. I wasn’t the only one concerned as we could see smoke rising, and as we crested the smallest of rises, we could see the flames as well. More than one guard muttered something loud enough that echoed all our thoughts. 

The guards spread out as I headed straight for the tower. If a dragon was around, I wanted height, as I figured using a bow would be better. Aela followed me, Farkas yelling that he would stay with the guards on the ground. Running up the ramp leading into the tower itself, a bloodied guard appeared in the doorway. “No! Get back! It's still here somewhere! Hroki and Tor just got grabbed when they tried to make a run for it!” 

I brushed by him as I heard Irileth asked, “Guardsman! What happened here? Where's this dragon? Quickly now!” 

I didn’t hear the response as I tore up the stairs, hearing the footsteps of Aela right behind me. Reaching the top, my eyes scanned the horizon, wondering where the dragon was. I looked north first, but there was no sign of it over the vast plains of Whiterun Hold so turned south towards the mountains. And that’s when Aela and I both saw it. 

“It’s coming in fast!” she yelled as we both nocked an arrow, lining up the flying beast. 

As soon as it was close enough, Aela and I both fired. It barely seemed to bother the dragon, making a beeline straight for us, both leaping out of the way as the dragon breathed flames where we had been standing. “We’ve got to get this thing on the ground now!” 

Aela and I circled the tower, firing arrows whenever it got close enough. More than one landed, though I wasn’t sure if it was making any difference or not. The dragon decided to land below us, and I could see the guards move in quickly, swords and axes swinging wildly. The dragon scratched and bit in return, and one poor bastard ended up being dragged into the sky in the jaws of the dragon. Eventually releasing the guard, I think we all heard his screams before he thudded into the ground. 

The dragon made another pass towards our position, and if I didn’t know any better, it was coming straight for me instead of Aela. I fired one last arrow before I dove out of the way, feeling the flames on my back as I collided into Aela, both of us rolling away. Glancing where the dragon was, it looked like the last arrow hit true, as I noticed the dragon start to struggle staying in the air. 

Aela and I shared a glance, nodded, and we wasted no time heading back down to the ground. By the time we were downstairs and out the door, the battle was in full flow. More than one guard screamed out in pain, collapsing to the ground, as I threw my bow and quiver to the ground, unsheathed my sword, and joined in. 

Close up, I could see what we were up against. Just the teeth of the dragon looked sharp enough to tear all of us to shreds. Its claws were long and razor sharp, ready to tear skin from bone. And its scales appeared to be incredibly thick. What I knew is that we couldn’t fight the dragon forever. It needed to be a short, sharp battle. 

“Aela, I have an idea,” I yelled towards her. 

“What is it?” 

“A little crazy. Irileth, keep this thing distracted!” 

“Will do!” 

Hoping the dragon would remain distracted by the guards attacking its head, I circled around the beast, amazed at how large it was. Unsheathing my dagger, I leap onto its back, driving the dagger in deep. It barely noticed and was able to start crawling my up its back, driving my dagger in each time. Halfway towards its head, the dragon finally realised I was there and started to shake itself vigorously. With my dagger dug in, I held on for grim life and somehow managed to stay on it, though I was worried about it taking off. 

Irileth came to my rescue, hearing a roar from the guard as she apparently cut the dragon across its neck. Not enough to bring it down, nor kill it, but apparently the blood started to flow. The dragon was again distracted, so I could continue to make my way towards its head. It shook its body again once I was near to its neck, so I sat down, sheathed my dagger and drove my sword into its back. That caused it to roar out in pain, immediately sliding forward so I was now sitting on its neck. 

The dragon turned its head, almost so it could look at me. I met its eyes. I thought I was going to see evil personified. Instead, I saw the eyes of… A beast, but an honourable beast. Despite that, I lifted my sword and, with two hands, drove it down into its neck, all the way down to the hilt. The dragon couldn’t withstand that sort of punishment, and I felt its legs start to wobble underneath me before it collapsed to the ground. 

Sliding off its neck, I walked around to its head, watching its eyes again watch mine. Lifting my sword, I aimed at the eye that had originally been looking at me, and without hesitation, drove my sword deep into the brain of the dragon. The dragon cried out something as it lifted its head, snatching the sword from my hand, before it slumped to the ground. 

The guards were beginning to cheer and applaud when something strange happened. The dragon seemed to erupt into flames, its scales disappearing, leaving only its skeleton. But it was the other event which started everyone. Some sort of… energy perhaps, or… I’m not sure, but something flowed from the dragon into me. Aela immediately mentioned that I ‘glowed’. 

“I can't believe it!” one of the guards nearby muttered, “You're... Dragonborn...” 

Turning towards the survivors, I swear they were all about to take a knee in front of me. Sharing a glance with Aela, she simply shrugged, while Irileth looked at me with renewed interest. Looking at the guard who spoke, I asked, “Dragonborn?” 

Rising to his feet, he approached. “Aye. In the very oldest tales, back from when there were still dragons in Skyrim, the Dragonborn would slay dragons and steal their power. That's what you did, isn't it? Absorbed that dragon's power?” 

“I have no idea. I don’t feel any different.” 

“There's only one way to find out. Try to Shout, that would prove it.” 

“Shout?” I wondered as the guards started to chatter excitedly amongst themselves. I heard the name of Tiber Septim mentioned, further tales of who the Dragonborn might have been, before they all turned and asked Irileth what she thought. 

“Hmph. Some of you would be better off keeping quiet than flapping your gums on matters you don't know anything about. Here's a dead dragon, and that's something I definitely understand. Now we know we can kill them. But I don't need some mythical Dragonborn.” She did turn my way and nod as she added, “Someone who can put down a dragon is more than enough for me.” 

I thought of the word walls I’d seen in the ruins I’d adventured through, and it all suddenly clicked into place. Gesturing with my arms, I asked them all to stand back. 

“FUS…” 

I’m not sure what it was, but the Shout that erupted from deep within made what felt like a thunderclap, and a couple of the guards in the way were blown from their feet. I glanced again at Aela, who looked at me in wide-eyed surprise.

The same guard stated excitedly, “That was Shouting, what you just did! Must be. You really are Dragonborn, then...” Again, I think he was ready to take a knee, along with most of the other guards. 

Irileth approached me, offering her hand, her demeanour very different to our first meeting. “That was the hairiest fight I've ever been in, and I've been in more than a few. I don't know about this Dragonborn business, but I'm sure glad you're with us. You better get back to Whiterun right away. Jarl Balgruuf will want to know what happened here.” 

“What about you?” 

“We’ll keep this area secure as no doubt people will want to come and take a trophy. There might be a good trade in dragon bones soon enough.” 

Aela joined me as we headed back to Whiterun, Vilkas suggesting he would remain with the guards for the time being. I thought she’d have plenty to say, but whenever I glanced at her, all she did was return my look and smile, though eventually couldn’t resist grabbing my hand. Past the still silent Fort Greymoor, one or two curious civilians walked past us, hearing excitement and nerves as they wondered about the outcome of the battle. Only when we were about to turn onto the path leading to the gates did something grab our attention. It sounded like a roar, or rolling thunder, from the mountains high to our right. 

“What was that?” I asked. 

“No idea. But it appeared to come from the Throat.” 

“The Throat?” 

“Throat of the World. Did you understand what it was?” 

“Just sounded like loud noise to me.” 

We received a few questions from civilians we passed, who figured that since we were returning, we’d been victorious. Passing Jorrvaskr, we headed straight up to Dragonsreach, wasting no time approaching Jarl Balgruuf, who was now seated at his throne. His assistant or steward approached me. “Good. You're finally here. The Jarl's been waiting for you.”

I was ready to give him a slap for the tone of his statement, but the jarl grabbed my eye and immediately beckoned me forward. “So what happened at the watchtower? Was the dragon there?” 

“It was. The watchtower is destroyed but the dragon is now dead.” 

“I knew I could count on Irileth. But there must be more to it than that.” 

I glanced at Aela, who shrugged, her eyes suggesting I should just tell him everything. “Well, you see, the guards… They seem to think I’m something called the ‘Dragonborn’.” 

His eyes narrowed, I thought suspiciously, as he asked, “What do you know about the Dragonborn?” 

“Well, this is the strangest thing. When the dragon died, it burst into flames and… I seemed to have absorbed something. Some sort of energy flowed right into me.” 

“So it's true. The Greybeards really were summoning you.” 

“Who are the Greybeards?” 

The jarl got to his feet. “Come, we should sit down and discuss this.” We made our way over to one of the long tables, the jarl taking a seat on one side, Aela and I on the other. The jarl offered us a drink before he continued, and I’ll admit I drained the tankard quickly, much to the amusement of the jarl, who asked more be brought in and just placed in front of us. “The Greybeards are masters of the Way of the Voice. They live in seclusion high on the slopes of the Throat of the World.” 

“So it definitely was them that made that noise returning here,” Aela stated. 

“Okay, so they were attempting to summon me. But what would the Greybeards want with someone like me?” 

“The Dragonborn is said to be uniquely gifted in the Voice. The ability to focus your vital essence into a Thu'um, or Shout. If you really are Dragonborn, they can teach you how to use your gift.” 

The jarl’s bodyguard stepped forward. “Didn't you hear the thundering sound as you returned to Whiterun?” I nodded. “That was definitely the voice of the Greybeards, summoning you to High Hrothgar!” he stated excitedly. “This hasn't happened in... In centuries, at least. Not since Tiber Septim himself was summoned when he was still Talos of Atmora!” 

“Talos? You mean the ex-divine?” 

“Hrongar, calm yourself. What does any of this Nord nonsense have to do with our friend here?” Proventus wondered. “Capable as he may be, I don't see any signs of him being this, what, ‘Dragonborn’.” 

I near enough got out of my seat ready to slap him for the disrespect. I think Hrongar was ready to do the same, stepping forward menacingly. “Nord nonsense? Why you puffed-up ignorant...” Hrongar stopped and took a deep breath, obviously to calm himself. “These are our sacred traditions that go back to the founding of the First Empire.” 

The jarl explained more about the Greybeards and what it would mean if I truly was Dragonborn. It was all happening incredibly fast. So much for just living out a life with the Companions. If I truly was this Dragonborn, I knew my life was going to change, though for better or worse, I couldn’t be sure. “Ragnar, I must ask one more favour. Before you depart for High Hrothgar, please return here tomorrow. I wish to show my thanks for all that you’ve done for my city.” 

“Not alone, lord.” 

“No, and the Companions will also be compensated for their assistance.” 

“Ragnar did land the killing blow, lord,” Aela added. 

“Well, if he’s not Dragonborn, perhaps we can call him Ragnar the Dragonslayer.” It was stated with such a smirk and tone, I couldn’t help chuckle. 

“Thank you, lord. What time tomorrow?” 

“Lunchtime. And come in your best armour.” 

I looked down and suggested I just needed to give my current armour a good wash and polish. Leaving Dragonsreach, we were by the Gildergreen when Aela stopped me, immediately turning towards and kissing me hard. It was such a kiss, certain parts of my body reacted, and if we’d been in privacy, I have no doubt it would have led to nudity and fucking. Finally pulling back, she looked up into my eyes and there was something different about them. “Dragonborn,” she whispered. 

“Still me, Aela.” 

She shook her head. “No. If you really are, then it changes things,” she said quietly. 

“Between us?” 

“Oh no, I’ll just dig my claws even deeper into you, keep you all to myself.” She paused before adding, “Well, maybe I’ll allow you one or two extra girls, as I have no doubt you’re going to wear me out eventually. And you’ve been honest about your life so far.” 

“Maybe…” 

She put a finger on my lips. “We can discuss it later.” 

Wandering into Jorrvaskr, the first thing we did was head straight downstairs to see Kodlak. We told him everything, from the second the guards came to collect us, to our meeting with the jarl. To say the old man beamed with pride would be an understatement, insisting that all Companions, or at least those present, would join me the next day. I asked what the jarl could possibly want with me. Kodlak likely did know, but simply told me to dress correctly for what would probably be an important day in my life. 

Aela barely left my side all day, and by the time we headed to bed that night, I knew her idea of our first time not being in Jorrvaskr was out the window. After closing and locking the door, she practically leapt on me. As my armour was already polished for the next day, I was only dressed in shirt and slacks, so those came off very quickly. She was also wearing a dress, a real surprise as I rarely saw her in anything but her leathers, and once both naked, we tumbled into bed. 

Making sure I was on my back, Aela leaned down to kiss me as I felt one of her hands stroke my length. “I can’t wait for this to be inside me,” she breathed. 

“Not wasting any time tonight?” 

She couldn’t help smile. “I wanted it last night, but I figured pleasing each other at the same time with our mouths would sate our appetites. While it did, I could only think about what it would feel like for you to slide your cock in me.” 

Sitting up, she positioned herself over my erection and we both groaned when I felt the head of my cock slip inside her. The smile on my face made my heart beat even faster as I watched her slowly slide down my cock until our groins touched. “By Talos, that’s… I don’t know what word to use,” she stated. 

Resting my hands on her hips, I bent my legs a little and then let her take control. She started slowly, leaning down so she could kiss me, running her hands through my hair at the same time, before she had to finally give in, sit back, and ride herself hard. Watching that tight little athletic body enjoy my cock that much, and her breasts sway as she did so, was certainly captivating. And for around the third, perhaps fourth time in my life, I found myself falling hard for a woman. And I had a feeling she felt the same way. 

“Ragnar, I’m going to cum!” 

I couldn’t stop the chuckle. “Already?” 

“I’ve been turned on all day! I wanted you as soon as we’d finished the meeting with the old man earlier.” 

“Think you can keep going?” 

She looked down, meeting my eyes. “Definitely. I’ll just get a good sweat up at the same time.” 

After her first orgasm, she slowed down to recover, leaning down again to kiss me, before she whispered about us managing to finish together next time. I suggested that was a damned fine idea, as we could cum together then sleep. It didn’t quite work out that way, as she had another orgasm quite quickly, though she was quite happy to roll onto her back and let me have her way with her for a couple of minutes before I finally climaxed too. Then we slept rather well. 

The next morning after breakfast, Aela helped me dress in my armour, taking her time to do up all the straps, running her hands up and down my arms, making sure she spent a lot of time kissing me too. The affection shared between us was a real reminder of someone else. I knew we’d have to talk about it and soon. I felt I almost had to warn her off. 

Kodlak and the other Companions were waiting for us outside Jorrvaskr. Aela grabbed my hand we led the way up the stairs towards Dragonsreach, the path flanked by town guard on either side. I came to a stop at the enormous double doors. The two guards in place bowed slightly my way before one turned and knocked on the door three times. Both doors were then opened and the guards gestured for me to walk in. It appeared almost all of Whiterun was in attendance as they crowded to either side. I recognised many of the faces, hearing whispers of 'Dragonborn' as we slowly filed past. 

At the top of the stairs, the tables had been cleared away. Instead, there were short pews where even more citizens of Whiterun sat quietly, all turning to watch my progress. Stood in front of his throne was Jarl Balgruuf, dressed in his finest clothes, compared to his usual appearance. To his left was Irileth, dressed as a warrior, while to his right was Proventus. 

Aela let my hand go as I came to a stop before the Jarl and finally knew what to do, taking a knee. "My lord," I stated, meeting his eyes. 

"Ragnar of Riften, although I should now call you Ragnar of Whiterun, or perhaps Ragnar the Dragonslayer, you have done a great service for the city and entire hold of Whiterun since your arrival, and have also done me a great service in carrying out any request I have asked of you since you first walked through the gates of my city. I have met few warriors who carry out their tasks with as much honour and courage such as yourself. Your name will now carry the respect of all the citizens of Whiterun for the service you have provided and for the service I have no doubt you will continue to provide. You have proven to be a true warrior, a defender of the city and a champion of its citizens." 

I lowered my head as he drew his sword, feeling the tip of it placed on my shoulder. "Dragonborn, it is my great personal honour to provide you with two titles. The first, by my right, is to name you the Thane of Whiterun. But I also add a second title, by my right, that of Defender of Whiterun. These are the greatest honours I can bestow upon you as Jarl." 

I looked up and found myself speechless. "Hrongar, bring forth the weapon," the Jarl ordered. I looked to my left to see Hrongar walk forward, holding a giant war axe in his hands. "Dragonborn, I present to you the Axe of Whiterun. I award this to you as a symbol of the badge of office you now hold." He then turned to his steward. "Proventus." The steward turned and grabbed a piece of paper from a nearby table. "I also award you a property in Whiterun, a fine house by the name of Breezehome. You will find it has already been furnished with everything you will require. As you now own property in this city, and befitting your new title, I have assigned you a personal Housecarl." He gestured to his left, where a woman was now standing next to Hrongar. "Her name is Lydia. She will serve you well." 

I won't say I was going to break down in tears at what was happening but the feeling of being overwhelmed was now weighing down on my shoulders. It was far too much, far too quickly. I'm just an ordinary warrior with a history that would have shocked nearly everyone present. "Thank you, lord," I managed to say. 

"Three cheers for the Dragonborn," the Jarl called as I got to my feet and turned to face the crowd. I looked towards my friends of the Companions, who joined in with the cheers. If I didn't know any better, Kodlak looked like a proud father, which heartened my soul even further. Vilkas and Farkas met my eyes and nodded their respect. All of them beamed with pride that one of them had been feted as such a hero of the city. 

As for Aela, there’s no doubt how she felt about me now. 

"What will you do now?" the Jarl asked quietly as the crowd continued to cheer. 

"I head to High Hrothgar, lord. I must learn if I truly am Dragonborn."

Chapter 29: Mountain High

Though I intended to leave for High Hrothgar before doing anything else, I wasn’t going to just drop everything and go. After the giant feast the jarl put on for me in celebration of my elevation to Thane, I found myself escorted to my new home by Aela and Lydia, as we’d all consumed a lot of food and drink, and by the time it was all over, the sun had well and truly set. 

Lydia was another beautiful woman in a long line I’d had the pleasure of meeting. She was tall, at least for a woman, though not as unusual considering she was definitely a Nord. Raven-hared, brown eyes, a figure hidden by the armour she wore, it was her voice that was most captivating. Soft, friendly, and she made clear her position. I was quick to wave away all talk of her doing my bidding, though I was left thinking I’d still wake up to find breakfast cooked, eager to know what task I was to give her next. 

Walking into Breezehome, I was pleasantly surprised. The firepit had already been lit, providing warmth, and they hadn’t lied about the place already being furnished. Considering I hadn’t brought much with me from Riften anyway, I wouldn’t have many things to take out of Jorrvaskr. 

“I assume you’ll be living here then?” Aela asked. 

“Of course.” I looked at her. “Want to move in with me?” 

I smiled at the dropped jaw. “You’re serious?” I nodded. She returned the smile. “I want to say yes right now…” 

“So why don’t you?” 

“Because you’ve only just been given this place!” 

I looked at Lydia. “Would you mind Aela moving in?” 

“No, my Thane.” 

“My name is Ragnar, Lydia.” 

A smirk as she simply replied, “Of course, my Thane. And Aela would be welcome to stay permanently or whenever you choose.” I couldn’t help laugh, the tone utterly suggestive, obviously having figured out the relationship between Aela and I quite quickly. “I’ll just sleep with something over my ears.” 

“Or you could join in,” Aela suggested. That caused me to look at her wide-eyed, before I glanced at Lydia, who blushed but appeared slightly interested, giving me a sideways glance though remained silent. 

Clearing my throat, I wandered upstairs to the large bedroom, noticing Lydia’s room was off to the other side of the stairs. It wasn’t large so I asked, “Will that be large enough for you?” 

“It’s my own room so I’ll be pleased with that.” 

“Where do you live at the moment?” 

“I have a bed and chest at Dragonsreach. I’ve been training for this position for years. I can purchase one or two things, make the room prettier.” 

Walking back downstairs, we gathered around the fire, where I said we would sleep tonight and put together a plan to go to High Hrothgar, probably the day after tomorrow. In addition, I asked both women to join me for the journey. Lydia would have come regardless, but I figured Aela would want to join me too. She did, and after getting to know Lydia a little better, we retired to our separate bedrooms. 

Though it had been a very long day, Aela was still up for some fun, and once she started to strip while kissing me, it didn’t take long for me to get in the mood too. Though I spent a little time pleasing her with my mouth, she was soon begging me for one thing, and one thing only. Sliding my cock inside her, she had me stop, just enjoying the feeling of my length. 

“I’ll move in after High Hrothgar,” she said softly. 

Looking down to where we were joined, I looked back up and said, “I guess this made the best argument?” 

“I hope we won’t annoy Lydia… Though I was serious about the offer too.” 

“You were?” 

“I don’t think it will take much to convince her to sleep with you, Ragnar. The only issue I see is that she’d want you to herself too.” 

“Why don’t we finish what we started and talk about it later?” 

We had some fun and experimented that night. What we both learned is that she loved it on her hands and knees, and she was also open-minded regarding perhaps taking it in her arse at a later time, as she loved it when I rubbed my thumb across her arsehole. Not quite enough to push it in, but she certainly seemed interested. 

After our orgasms, admittedly mine arriving first before I helped her climax a second time, we laid together, Aela spooned against me as always. “Ragnar, can I admit something?” 

“I feel the same way, Aela.” 

She turned around to face me. “You do?” she asked, unable to stop the smile forming. 

“I thought it would be obvious. But I have to warn you…” 

“You’ve told me about your past.” 

“It’s not just that,” I said quietly, caressing her cheek, “The first woman I lost was my wife. She was murdered, and I didn’t just lose her. I lost a possible son or daughter. The second woman I lost wanted our child and I think we might have married in the end. I don’t think she ever knew how much I did love her. Haelga… I just feel nothing but guilt about her. I still love her even now, but with everything in my life, we had to face facts and admit we would never be together permanently. Honestly, I’ve had nothing but bad luck when it comes to love, and I don’t want to lose you too.” 

“Who says you’re going to lose me?” I gave her a look, so she cuddled into me, feeling her arm wrap around me, her cool hand on my back. “Trust me, I’m not going anywhere, and neither are you.” 

“I’m going to hold you to that.” 

I was right about one thing. Lydia was already up and stood at the firepit, busy putting together breakfast for the three of us. She asked us to sit at the table as she served, handing each of us a bowl of piping hot… something. Whatever it was, it tasted damned good, and I said she would be cooking meals going forward, though I would always be on hand to assist, as I wasn’t completely useless. 

As we hadn’t moved anything into the house yet, I wore the same clothes as the day before, the three of us heading to Jorrvaskr, where we would put together a plan. Looking over the maps available and figured our best bet would be heading to Ivarstead. There was no direct route, and the journey there would be long enough that we’d likely have to stay the night before heading up the mountain. 

I had a chat with Kodlak about High Hrothgar. Though he’d never been there, he had a few ideas about who they were, but suggested I head up to Dragonsreach, as apparently Jarl Balgruuf had undertaken the journey before. Leaving Aela and Lydia to organising our departure, I wandered up to Dragonsreach, noticing how friendly the guards were now, all of them saluting and calling me ‘Dragonborn’ as I passed by. 

I found the jarl standing over a map of his own, up at the stairs where we’d talked prior to heading to the watchtower. He grasped my hand and I was amazed at how friendly he was with me. He’d never been rude, but I knew he’d been suspicious during our first meeting, considering my involvement with Helgen. He still didn’t know everything about me. I doubt I’d ever tell him, but at least I had the ear of a lord now. Asking him about the Greybeards, he immediately invited me into his private quarters, where we sat together in a comfortable chair each, a steward was summoned to deliver some ale, and he regaled me with his story. 

“First thing’s first, Ragnar. There's no refusing the summons of the Greybeards. It's a tremendous honour. When do you depart?” 

“Tomorrow morning, lord. Lydia and Aela are putting the finishing touches to our plans. We believe it’ll be a two-day journey in all. First day to Ivarstead, then a day to climb the mountain.” 

He nodded. “I envy you. To climb the Seven Thousand Steps again.” He sighed, disappearing into memories for a moment. “I made the pilgrimage once, did you know that?” A rhetorical question, so I let him continue. “High Hrothgar is a very peaceful place. Very... disconnected from the troubles of this world.” 

“Sounds ideal.” 

He laughed lightly. “I wonder if the Greybeards even notice what's going on down here. They haven't seemed to care before. No matter. The best thing to do would be to go to High Hrothgar. Learn what the Greybeards can teach you. With any lucky, you’re the man who can end this Dragon Crisis.” 

“And what about Whiterun?” 

“Are you considering making my city your home?” he wondered, very interested by my next words. 

“It already is, lord. I now have a house and a housecarl. And I have no desire to move anywhere else. I made my goodbyes to my former home.” 

“And it helps you also have a woman to come back to.” 

“Aela?” He nodded. “I think so too. I’ve asked her to join me at Breezehome. She will move in upon our return.” 

“I’m sure this is just the beginning of your adventures, Ragnar.” 

He wasn’t exactly right, as my life had been a whirlwind since first entering Skyrim what felt like decades ago, but maybe he was suggesting a lot more was to come. Though part of me would have liked settling down, much like I had with Muiri, I did like wandering across the breadth of Skyrim, particularly now that I was working with the Companions. 

After finishing my tankard, I thanked the jarl for his advice, returning to Jorrvaskr, where Aela and Lydia filled me in with the rest of the plan. They hoped we wouldn’t need too much in the way of supplies, as Ivarstead was a village, so should have a tavern or inn where we could eat, drink and rest. As for climbing the mountain, the hope was that we’d only need cold weather gear and that we would hopefully make the climb in a day, but it would be best asking the locals. 

Knowing we had quite the journey in front of us, we headed to bed early that night, Lydia joking about not making too much noise and keeping her up. It gave me quite the chuckle, and also a sense of relief that we could already joke about such things together. And, surprisingly, Aela and I just went to sleep that night with nothing more than a little kissing before she cuddled into me as always. It was amazing how quickly it all felt… normal. 

Lydia was awake first the next morning, lightly knocking on our bedroom door to wake us. It was barely light by the time we left Breezehome for the stables, the temperature still cold enough that we all needed our thick coats over our armour to keep warm. Cold enough that, after boarding our horses, you could see each breath we and our horses took. 

Skyrim on a cool, sunny morning was beautiful, particularly when the sun broke through the morning mist, highlighting the colours of Whiterun Hold. We were heading as far east as a small village named Darkwater Crossing, where we would hopefully find a turning towards Ivarstead. That’s what the map showed us, at least. It was a rather dull ride apart from the fact I had the company of two beautiful women, who kept me entertained with plenty of conversation. The only concern was when we followed signs to Ivarstead that left the main road, particularly as the path started to severely incline, enough that we had to dismount and walk our horses. 

Apart from having to deal with a troll, which I dealt with by using my new gift, the three of us then falling upon the body with swinging swords, our trip to Ivarstead took all day, riding into the village just as the sun was starting to set. There was a sawmill, a few dwellings, and a tavern, but the one thing that took our eyes was the bridge across raging rapids, and it was obvious that would take us up the Seven Thousand Steps. 

“Ever stayed here?” I asked of Aela. She had passed through here once or twice at most. Lydia was like me, never having come near the village. 

“The Vilemyr Inn? No, I would generally head to Darkwater Crossing and camp there if I couldn’t make it home.” 

“Hope they have enough room for us,” Lydia stated. 

Wandering inside, it was busier than I thought it would be. In addition to locals, you could see likely pilgrims who might end up following us along the path to High Hrothgar. After ordering food and drink, we sat down and spoke with a couple of people who had returned from the monastery, giving us a few hints and tips as to what we might expect during our climb. There might be the occasional wild animal, but the main concerns were inclement weather and possibly slipping and falling to your death. But anyone we spoke to was confident we’d make it to the monastery within a day, as long as we left early. 

Aela and I managed to behave ourselves… mostly. My fingers may have wandered, finding themselves in a hot, tight, wet hole, and Aela may have needed to kiss me constantly to keep her moans quiet. After her climax, she held onto me tightly for quite a while before she leaned back and look at me in such a way, I figured she was on the verge of saying something quite meaningful. Whatever it was remained unsaid, and after replying I didn’t need anything from her in return, we happily fell asleep. 

The innkeeper woke us up early, and after a hearty breakfast, we donned our coats, heaved on or packs, and began the long walk up the mountain. One or two pilgrims joined us to begin with, but there were shrines dotted along the path, and those with us quickly left us as they stated they would pray at each shrine along the way, and they would probably camp halfway up the mountain, completing the journey the next day. 

It was an hour or two of casual walking before the path truly starting to steepen, the steps starting to fall into disrepair, and the scenery changing, with snow starting to lie on the ground. Though we were all working up a sweat as we climbed, there was no chance of removing our thick coats, as the wind was fierce, though thankfully not blowing into our face, coming more from the side and slightly from the rear, though that changed when we turned a corner, our pace dropping considering as snow and ice was blown into our face. 

Thankfully the weather stayed clear until we decided to stop for lunch. Our coats were still keeping us warm but, after stopping, we quickly felt the cold so Lydia proved her talents by starting a fire, after I’d managed to scrape together a few bits of wood. There was a rock to sit on, so after clearing it of snow, we sat down together, myself in the middle, and ate a bit of bread and cheese for lunch. 

“Will they let us in?” Lydia wondered. 

“I have no idea,” I admitted, “I guess we just walk in and I introduce myself, then see what happens from there.” 

“What do you think they’ll be like?” 

“Well, I’m guessing they don’t get many visitors. From what that man was saying last night, he leaves them goods but has never met them. I don’t think we have anything to fear. Though I assume they’re isolated for a reason.” 

We didn’t relax too long, otherwise the chill would have seeped all the way to our bones, so somewhat reluctantly, we doused the fire and continued our hike. The wind was still fierce but the sun remained out, providing next to no warmth, the snow thick on the ground under our feet. The higher we climbed, we could no longer see the steps below us, instead our feet sinking into at least an inch or two of snow with each step. 

Despite warning about the local wildlife, apart from a couple of wolves, which Lydia scared off with some flames, we didn’t run into anything that caused us a concern. We did pass one or two more pilgrims, and also a hunter, who suggested more game would lie further up the mountain. How they could possibly survive this high, I had no idea. 

It was a few hours before we finally reached some sort of plateau, and at times the path even went down, still passing the occasional pilgrim along the way. It was cresting another rise that we ran into our first major problem of the day. A pair of trolls waiting for the unwary. Thankfully Aela and I saw them at the same time. Lydia hadn’t even noticed them due to their white skin moulding into the landscape. 

The trolls saw us and charged towards us together. Lydia and I unsheathed our swords, realising we’d never fought alongside each other, as Aela moved back with her bow, looking for elevation. “I’ll take left,” I said, “But I’ll used my gift to knock them off balance at least.” 

“On your go, my Thane.” 

I used my new gift when the pair of trolls were barely a couple of metres away. It wasn’t powerful enough to send them flying but it did cause them to stumble backwards, Aela firing an arrow into each of them before Lydia and I surged forward. Trolls were ugly but aggressive creatures. Their bite was bad enough, but their razor sharp claws could bring down even the largest of beasts with one well-aimed swipe. 

Keeping my eyes on the troll in front of me, I kept out of its range, striking when it left itself exposed. Trolls were difficult to take down at the best of times, but with snow under our feet, getting our boots to grip was always in the back of our minds. The one help was that Aela could still shoot the occasional arrow, so slowly but surely, the trolls wilted, as although they could heal over time, they would soon lose too much blood. 

A strike from hip to shoulder put the troll I was fighting on its knees, wasting no time taking its head before turning to see Lydia had the upper hand over her troll. I stayed back, ready to assist if needed, but she proved her talents, and I think possibly showing off too, as she eventually hacked it to the ground before driving her sword through its chest. 

She looked up and smiled. “Well, that’s a good afternoon workout.” 

“You’ve got talent, Lydia.” 

The smile only broadened. “Thank you, my Thane.” 

After sheathing our swords, and checking that none of us carried an injury we hadn’t noticed, we carried on. There was still a little climbing, but it appeared the worst was over, and the information had been right. It had been a long day, the sun was setting in the distance, the three of us taking a moment to appreciate the view, Skyrim spreading out to the horizon. 

“Get some sort of artist up here,” I mentioned, “And paint this. Ever seen anything so beautiful?” 

“I can already say I’m glad you’re my Thane.” 

“Why is that?” 

“Because I have a feeling you’re not the usual knuckle-dragging idiot that inhabits Dragonsreach.” 

I glanced at Aela. “I think that was a compliment.” 

She laughed, agreeing it probably was, before we turned and completed our walk to the monastery. There was an enormous statue of Talos nearby, amused when Lydia walked towards it and kissed the base. She glanced at me and appeared surprised I wasn’t doing the same. “Do you not believe?” she wondered. 

“I don’t give religion a lot of thought. I did revere one above all…” 

“Who?” 

“Dibella.” She giggled at the thought. “There are perhaps one or two things about my past you don’t quite know yet, Lydia. There is a good reason.” 

“And will you tell me later?” 

“When we’re back in Whiterun. Not sure you can handle the entire truth though.” 

“Ooooh. Colour me intrigued.” 

Aela did walk up the statue, kissed her hand and placed it on the base of the statue. Being a werewolf, she at least still revered the Nine. I only continued to believe in the Eight as it was what I’d done my entire life. I was aware of the many reasons for the civil war, but to be honest, the worship of Talos didn’t affect my life one way or the other, so I didn’t worry about it. 

High Hrothgar was enormous, and I was left amazed that such a building had been erected up the mountain, leaving me figuring ‘Why?’ above all else. It was eerily silent, lookedather cold, and I’ll admit, quite intimidating. But the doors opened after we’d walked up the stairs, walking inside to find it surprisingly warm, needing to remove our coasts straight away. 

Coming to a halt in the first room, we looked around and even I jumped a little when a hooded and robed man appeared through the dark. Aela and Lydia both gestured at others appearing from other doorways, another two at the pair of stairways ahead. All appeared to have long grey beards, go figure, but appeared docile, if not intrigued as to our appearance. Three off them remained stood apart as the fourth walked towards me. 

“So, a Dragonborn appears, at this moment in the turning of the age.” 

I’d had one question on my mind ever since those who started calling me by that name. “You and everyone else is now calling me Dragonborn. What does it mean?” 

He nodded in understanding, but replied, “First, let us see if you truly are Dragonborn. Let us taste of your Voice.” 

“Towards you?” 

“Yes. The Greybeards can handle the power of your Voice.” 

I still took a couple of steps backward, as did Aela and Lydia, as I used my new gift, aiming it straight at the rather friendly old man. 

“FUS!” 

I honestly thought he was going to go flying arse over head, but apart from a slight stagger, he managed to withstand it. Walking towards each other, he nodded again. “Dragonborn. It is you. Welcome to High Hrothgar. I am Master Arngeir. I speak for the Greybeards. Now tell me, Dragonborn, why have you come here?” 

“I honestly don’t know where to start. I mean, the first question is, why me?” 

“That is for the gods to answer. What is your name?” 

“Ragnar.” Gesturing to my side, I added, “These are my companions, Aela and Lydia.” 

He glanced at them and nodded. “Friends of the Dragonborn are also welcome in High Hrothgar, at least for the time being.” 

He looked back towards me as if expecting another question. I wracked my mind, thinking of a question that wouldn’t sound too stupid. “Who are you? The Greybeards, I mean.” Gesturing around, I added, “And what is this place? I’ve never seen anything like it.” 

“We are the Greybeards, followers of the Way of the Voice. You stand in High Hrothgar, on the slopes of Kynareth's sacred mountain. Here we commune with the voice of the sky, and strive to achieve balance between our inner and outer selves.” 

“Way of the Voice? What is that?” 

“The Voice was a gift of the goddess Kynareth, at the dawn of time. She gave mortals the ability to speak as dragons do. Although this gift has often been misused, the only true use of the Voice is for the worship and glory of the gods. True Mastery of the Voice can only be achieved when your inner spirit is in harmony with your outward actions. In the contemplation of the sky, Kynareth's domain, and the practice of the Voice, we strive to achieve this balance.” I probably blinked in confusion as he added, “You will understand what I mean in time, Dragonborn.” 

“Am I the only one here? The only Dragonborn, I mean?” 

“You are not the first. There have been many of the Dragon Blood since Akatosh first bestowed that gift upon mortalkind. Whether you are the only Dragonborn of this age, that is not ours to know. You are the only one that has been revealed thus far. That is all I can say.” 

“Okay, well… I guess I’m answering your summons, Master. I’m here to learn what it is, what it means to be Dragonborn.” 

“We are honoured to welcome a Dragonborn to High Hrothgar. We will do our best to teach you how to use your gift in fulfilment of your destiny. But that is for later. You have no doubt journeyed far to come here. Please, join us for dinner and then we will find lodgings for you and your friends.” 

“We don’t mean to intrude,” Lydia said, and I could hear the nerves in her tone. 

“Think nothing of it. You are welcome here.” 

We were shown to a spare room, where there were empty bunks that we could sleep, Arngeir suggesting we would be there for at least a couple of days. Joining them for dinner, the other three didn’t say a word, Arngeir explaining further that just a whisper from them could kill my two companions. He wasn’t exactly chatty either, but did show some interest in our lives. After that, the four disappeared to do their own thing, stating we would gather for a series of tests the next morning. 

Thankfully the three of us were exhausted, so going to bed not long after dinner wasn’t a bad idea. There were no double beds available, but Aela wasn’t sleeping anywhere except with me. I wasn’t going to complain when she stripped down to her underwear, sliding under the covers to join me. Feeling her warm body against mine once spooned against me, there was the usual reaction. 

“Excited, are we?” she whispered. 

“I am now.” 

“You want to?” 

“What about Lydia?” 

“I can hear you, you know.” 

“Sorry!” Aela and I said in unison. 

“Look, I know it’s been a couple of days for you. Just… Keep it down or something.” 

“You can masturbate if you want,” Aela suggested. 

Lydia didn’t reply to that. At least, not at first. “Well, if it sounds really good, I might have to.” 

I’d never been one for putting on a show. Haelga had mentioned once or twice about fucking where we might or would be caught, but we never really had the opportunity. As it was dark, Lydia wouldn’t be able to see anything, but she would hear everything. 

Aela slid her panties down before spreading her legs, looping one of mine as my fingers found what we both wanted. She turned her head to kiss me as I fondled her, helping me remove her bra so my other hand could fondle her breasts. One of her hands helped take off my underwear so she could stroke me at the same time. It was all slightly awkward, but she certainly complimented me. 

“I can’t wait to have your big cock inside me,” she said, not as quietly as she should have. 

“How big?” Lydia asked after a few moments of silence. 

“Biggest I’ve had.” 

The only sounds that followed were of her light moans before she finally removed my hand and positioned herself in such a way that I could easily slide my cock inside her. We remained in that position for a little while, but it wasn’t particularly comfortable for either of us, and it was no surprise when she moved onto her hands and knees. 

Ever have the feeling you’re being watched? I knew Lydia was definitely watching us in the darkness. I learned forward once I slid inside Aela again and whispered a suggestion. “Lydia, would you like to watch us while pleasuring yourself?” 

Silence for a few seconds before there was a “Yes.” 

“Light a candle and come closer.” 

Aela and I were illuminated in the faint glow of a candle a few seconds later, Lydia lighting a couple more to really provide some light. Aela glanced back and smiled as Lydia appeared to our side. She was also naked, taking a few seconds to look her up and down. She was stunning. Absolutely gorgeous. A pair of breasts that I immediately want to grab, if not lick and bite, a fantastic body, flat and toned stomach towards a bare pussy, which was a surprise. 

“I think you just got a little harder, Ragnar.” 

“Can I see it?” Lydia asked. 

I pulled my cock out of Aela and rested it on the crack of her arse. I looked at Lydia as her eyes widened. “By Talos,” she whispered. 

“And it feels wonderful when he’s inside you,” Aela added, “Speaking of which, Ragnar…” 

I slid my cock back inside her, earning a grateful moan, as Lydia got down on her knees next to the bed and started to fondle herself. I tried to concentrate on fucking Aela, but I was distracted from time to time watching Lydia, as she put on a show for me in return. I looked down and gestured with my eyes, watching as she lifted her hand, placing her fingers in my mouth. “You taste wonderful,” I said. That just made her blush. “Would you like this one day?” 

“By the Nine, yes,” she said quietly. 

“I won’t mind,” Aela managed to say, despite the fact I was driving my cock into her. 

We flipped around so I was on my back, Aela riding me hard and fast. Lydia stayed where she was, continuing to masturbate, occasionally giving me her fingers to taste her. I was half tempted to invite her to sit on my face, but while Aela talked about it, I wasn’t sure both of them were ready for it. Aela eventually climaxed first, and as it had been a couple of days since we’d last been intimate, it was quite a good one. She then surprised me by sliding off me and positioning herself to finish me with her mouth. 

“Want to help?” she asked, looking at Lydia. 

Lydia looked at me. I could only smile and nod as she eagerly joined Aela on the bed. Aela could take my entire length by now, and Lydia quickly proved how much she wanted to please me too, as it took a few tries, but she was soon taking my entire length as well. Having two women suck my cock was all too much, warning them I was going to blow. Lydia was blowing me at the time, and looked up with a smile in her eyes, and I knew what she was going to do. 

No doubt the first blast of cum into her mouth was a surprise, but she barely spilled a drop. Aela then grabbed Lydia by the hair, turning towards her, and made sure, with a mouthful of my cum, kissed her. I think my cock practically sprang back to life, as Lydia was clearly surprised, noticing the sideways glance from Aela. 

“Well, if Breezehome is going to be anything like this,” I stated. 

Lydia and Aela looked at each other again before looking at me. “Definitely,” Aela stated. Lydia blushed, but nodded her head eagerly at the thought. Aela grabbed my half-hard cock. “And you’ll definitely want this inside you, Lydia.” 

“Part of me wants it now,” she said quietly. 

“Get him hard and have a go. Would you mind, Ragnar?” 

“Definitely not. I won’t cum again for a while, but if you haven’t, Lydia…” 

“He cares about your orgasm first,” Aela said, the smile lighting up her face. She knew I’d eat her out all night if she wanted, giving her endless orgasms for very little in return. 

The pair gave me five minutes to properly recover before Aela blew me by herself, Lydia doing what I’d thought about originally and moving to sit on my face. She definitely enjoyed what I was doing with my tongue, and that turned me on, Aela quickly stating to Lydia that I was rock hard and ready to go. Moving off my face, she leaned down to kiss me first, and I made her squeal as I grabbed and rolled her over, my cock pressing at her entrance. She spread her legs as I teased her, rubbing the head of my cock at her slit a few times before finally slowly sliding it in. I watched her face as I slid my entire length inside her, feeling her body shudder. She looked at me and blushed. “I nearly climaxed,” she whispered. 

“If you do, we can either stop or keep going.” 

“Just fuck me.” I raised an eyebrow as I felt her feet move to rest on the small of my back. “Fuck me, my Thane. My body is yours.” 

Lydia got fucked. Well and truly fucked, mostly because I was wondering if she could handle it. She could, and I knew from that moment, I had two women in my life again. What would make it easier than any other time is that we would all live in the same house. It would only get awkward if they fell out about the others relationship with me. I had a feeling that probably wouldn’t happen, as once Lydia had a very nice orgasm, enough that she collapsed onto my chest, breathing deeply. 

“Definitely yours, for as long as Aela lets me, or you want me.” 

“I wouldn’t mind dipping my tongue into that little arse of yours,” Aela stated before she lay next to me. 

“And I probably wouldn’t mind,” Lydia admitted, “I’d even take his cock there if it feels good.” 

Aela laughed. “Well, Ragnar, sounds like you have a night of anal on your hands, and probably soon, because if she wants it there, I’m not missing out.” 

Almost to prove it wouldn’t be a problem, once she was recovered, Lydia kissed me before getting off me and heading back to her own bed. If we’d been at Breezehome, I’d have invited her to stay, but the bed was small enough with Aela and I. As she spooned into me again, I did joke, “I wonder if the Greybeards heard all that?” 

“They would now know the Dragonborn can satisfy two women at once.” 

“Definitely,” Lydia added, “And leave them wanting more, but also sleep too.” 

Lydia fell asleep quite quickly, but I was still hard and prodding Aela, so we managed to quietly fuck again, this time not moving from our position, and she was very happy to take another load inside her a few minutes later. After a quick clean up in the dark, we snuggled under the furs and finally drifted off to sleep. 

The next morning was not awkward at all. I thought it would be after the shenanigans of the previous evening, but Lydia simply wished us both good morning before getting dressed, giving me a few seconds to take in her body in the morning light filtering through the windows. I could see Aela also giving her an appraising glance too. She disappeared, leaving Aela and I alone in bed. “I enjoyed last night,” she confessed. 

“So did I. It was a lot of fun.” 

“We’ll have a proper threesome once we’re back home too. We’ll wear you out instead.” 

“You’ll be surprised how long I can last.” 

“I’ll happily put that to the test.” 

I just gave her a squeeze and kissed her neck. “I bet you would,” I breathed into her ear, feeling her shudder before she kissed me, “But while I’d like to stay here all morning, and definitely do certain things with you, we are here for a reason.” 

After breakfast, the Greybeards put me to the test. Aela and Lydia happily sat and observed as I quickly proved I was definitely Dragonborn, learning everything they could show me quicker than they imagined or thought possible. As it was all rather simple, or so I thought, they had me outside after lunchtime, where I learned another Shout. 

In addition to that, the Greybeards taught me everything they could about being Dragonborn, the history of known Dragonborn since the very first, and also of how I would learn new and perhaps more powerful Shouts. I would learn those which would have me breathe fire and ice, and those were Shouts they were aware of. Apparently there were ruins across Skyrim with word walls where I could learn another part of a Shout. 

Then there were the one on one conversations I had with Arngeir, where I believe he was simply just getting to know me as a man. He asked for complete honesty, so I gave it to him. He was surprised by the twists my life had taken. Surprisingly, nothing I said shocked him nor did he judge me, simply stating that it was my life, though he was pleased I was now taken a better, more noble path. 

After three days of learning and conversations, Arngeir stated I would have one final test. “Retrieve the Horn of Jurgen Windcaller, our founder, from his tomb in the ancient fane of Ustengrav. Remain true to the Way of the Voice, and you will return.” 

“Jurgen Windcaller?” 

“Hmmm. It doesn’t surprise me you have not heard of him. Another name to have disappeared into the mists of history. He was a great war leader of the ancient Nords, a master of the Voice, or Tongue. After the disaster at Red Mountain, where the Nord army was annihilated, he spent many years pondering the meaning of that terrible defeat. He finally came to realize that the gods had punished the Nords for their arrogant and blasphemous misuse of the Voice. He was the first to understand that the Voice should be used solely for the glory and worship of the gods, not the glory the men. Jurgen Windcaller's mastery of the Voice eventually overcame all opposition, and the Way of the Voice was born.” 

“This Way of the Voice philosophy does appear to be a worthy avenue, but what about when I’m fighting dragons or other enemies?” 

“The Dragonborn is an exception to all the rules. The Dragon Blood itself is a gift from the gods. If we accept one gift, how can we deny the other? As Dragonborn, you have received the ability to Shout directly from Akatosh. We therefore seek to guide you on the proper use of your gift, which transcends the restrictions which bind other mortals.” 

“All I can do is promise to do my best.” 

“And that’s all we can ask of you, Dragonborn. But in regards to your destiny, we can only show you the way, not your destination.” 

We spent a last night at High Hrothgar before departing for Whiterun early the next morning. Walking down the mountain was certainly easier than walking up it, and we agreed that it was possible for us to ride up the mountain path next time. It was something to consider, dependent on the weather. The weather heading down wasn’t the best as the snowfall was heavy to begin with though it cleared the lower we journeyed. Making Ivarstead before sunset, we were still tired after such a long walk, so stayed in the inn again before completing the journey back to Whiterun the next day. 

None of us had a clue where Ustengrav was, so the first thing to do was head to Jorrvaskr and check the maps. It would be a trek to get there, the ruin beyond the outskirts of Morthal, but at least it wasn’t the other end of Skyrim. Although we would have liked to take our time, part of me wanted to get the horn back to the Greybeards as quickly as possible, as I was sure I still had a lot to learn. Lydia and Aela sensed my eagerness, so agreed to leave the day after our return to Whiterun. 

Over dinner that night in Breezehome, Aela having already moved her stuff in, I made Lydia choke on her food when I asked, “So why did you so easily agree to sleep with me?” 

She managed to swallow what she was eating, blushing at the same time, before admitting, “I’ll admit I immediately had… well, thoughts… You strode towards me and I felt a little weak-kneed. I mean, I was going to be the housecarl to the Dragonborn! And you’ve already made me feel welcome and at home. I’ve heard horror stories of how others treat their housecarl’s.” 

“And the sleeping with me bit?” 

“Oh, that was always going to happen regardless. Soon as I saw you, I thought, ‘Well, if he doesn’t offer, I’ll find a way of getting into bed with him’. As I said, immediate…” 

“Don’t worry, Lydia, I was nearly the same,” Aela added, before looking at me, “We fucking tonight?” 

“Just us two? Or the three of us?” 

“I don’t mind, though as I said, we’ll do it properly once we’re here without needing to travel the next day.” 

Lydia eventually suggested Aela and I just enjoy one another, though she made sure to give me quite the parting kiss before heading to her own room. Getting ready for bed, Aela wore her face-paint every day without fail, but I was now used to seeing her without it during an evening before bed. Every time she sat or lay barefaced next to me, I know I stared, and it occasionally made her self-conscious. “You should go without it except when we’re working or out hunting,” I suggested. 

“I’m just so used to wearing it nowadays.” 

“You don’t have to hide from me. You know what I think.” 

She couldn’t help smile before she said something that surprised me. “No wonder she married you.” 

It was one hell of a compliment. As I’ve said, she knew everything about me. “What makes you say that?” 

“Because if you were anything like this with her, then no wonder.” 

I just shrugged. “The one thing I always am is honest. I haven’t always been a good man, but I’ve tried to be honest.” 

I would say we made love for the first time that night, and I say that because it was the first time that Aela said those three words. Hearing them made me smile, and there was no hesitation in returning them, which made her smile too. After Muiri, then Astrid, then leaving Haelga, I really didn’t think I’d be capable of those feelings again, but something with Aela just clicked. And I already had a tonne of affection for Lydia, and I’d only known her a few days, though considering I’d already fucked her, that should be no real surprise. 

Cuddling a little later, Aela turned towards me for once, we made each other a promise. We would live each day as it comes. No talk of the future or planning for it. At least, not yet. I was Dragonborn, and no doubt my immediate future would be linked with the return of the dragons. Knowing there were plenty of potential negative outcomes, we agreed to wait until the Dragon Crisis was over until we began to contemplate a future. It would perhaps help prevent utter heartbreak if it all ended as badly as it possibly could. 

But all that was for later. First there was Ustengrav and retrieving the horn. Of course, nothing is ever as simple as it seems.

Chapter 30: Blast from the Past

We rode into Morthal before sunset. On first glance, it was probably the most depressing town I’d ever laid eyes upon, not surprised that in all the time I’d been in Skyrim that I’d probably passed the town but never actually been in it. As we rode past the jarl’s longhouse and dismounted outside the tavern, we looked around and agreed to stay the night then leave early the next day. I’m not sure what it was, but I know all of us found something a little unsettling about the place. 

The tavern was one of the quietest I’d entered. In fact, it was empty except one lone orc. After reserving a couple of rooms, and ordering food and drink, I asked the innkeeper about Morthal. She was just as depressed as the place itself. Next to no trade and strange occurrences in and outside the town. She did ask what we were doing in Morthal, explaining that we would be searching a nearby ruin. She thought that was crazy but wished us luck. 

Any hopes that Ustengrav would a simple abandoned ruin ended on its outskirts when we found ourselves under attack from bandits. Though we killed them relatively quickly, there was agreement that we’d find more inside, and if they were busy ransacking it, no doubt draugr would now be infesting the halls and caverns inside. 

Leaving our horses tied to a nearby tree, we entered the ruin to find bandits in battle with mages. Seeing mages was a concern, wondering what reason they would have to be there. We watched from the shadows as the two groups fought. Once both sides were spent, and most of them were dead, Aela and I killed the rest with a series of arrows. 

Onwards, it was either draugr or walking skeletons, as any mages that made it further in were now dead. Most of the draugr we dealt with were easy enough to take down, but I was now more than aware that more powerful variants would lie waiting for us further within. And, if the bandits and mages had made it this far in, they were probably awake and already patrolling. 

What helped us move forward whenever we found ourselves surrounded was the fact I could use my new gift. The words the Greybeards had taught me made my Thu’um incredibly powerful. They called it ‘Unrelenting Force’, and it sent the strongest of draugr rolling away while it tore apart the weaker versions. I tried other words I had learned, one which caused fire to erupt from deep within myself. That was a surprise the first time I tried it. 

Into the depths of the ruin, the three of us did come to a stop at one stage, amazed at the rugged beauty in front of us. It was no longer a ruin but a cave, a waterfall with a word wall nearby, and what appeared to be some sort of garden. “If this wasn’t an ancient ruin, and we didn’t have to worry about draugr, this would be a nice place to visit,” Lydia stated as we walked towards the word wall so I could learn another word. 

There are always puzzles to get past, and one of them was rather tricky, requiring using one of the other Shouts I had learned from the Greybeards, which caused me to run incredibly fast. We did eventually run into powerful draugr, who we now understood were also capable of Shouting, though I was capable of withstanding any they used. Aela and Lydia were not so capable, but usually leapt out of the way before they were hit. 

Draugr, bandits, walking skeletons, even mages don’t particularly bother me. Spiders always had, always will. There was just something about them which sent a shiver up my spine. While Ustengrav wasn’t infested with them, there were still enough to cause a shudder, Lydia and I using magic, Aela her bow, to kill the lot of them. When they were all dead, Lydia gave me a look. “What?” I asked. 

“You have no problem using magic?” 

Shrugging, I said, “I don’t use it often but there are certain times. I’m no mage, but I know some basic spells.” Holding up my sword, I added, “Though I definitely prefer using this.” 

Walking down another long corridor, I was expecting another word wall, or perhaps a room full of draugr. Instead, we walked into a large room, with a stone path ahead flanked by pools of water, out of which appeared monuments. Ahead was what I assumed was the resting place of Jurgen Windcaller. We were still cautious as we approached it, and that caution turned to confusion when we saw not a drinking horn but a note waiting for us. 

Sharing a glance with my two companions, I grabbed the note and read it. 

Dragonborn,  

I need to speak to you. Urgently.  

Rent the attic room at the Sleeping Giant Inn in Riverwood, and I'll meet you.  

A friend 

Immediately frustrated, I suggested we talk about it outside, finding the exit rather easily, and as usual, there was a secret exit that dumped us near the entrance. It was still light outside, figuring we’d only been in the ruin for a few hours, and we took advantage of the nearby campsite to rest for a moment after lighting the fire. 

“Any idea who this could be?” I asked. 

Lydia shrugged and stayed silent. Aela thought for a moment. “Well, the owners of the Sleeping Giant Inn are Orgnar and Delphine. And I don’t see either of them fighting their way through a ruin like this. So I can only assume our ‘friend’ is… someone who knows you?” 

“Well, a few know I’m Dragonborn. If it’s anyone from before Helgen, then I would question their motives.” Folding up the note, putting in my pocket, I suggested we head back to Morthal and return to Whiterun tomorrow. Both agreed, and we found ourselves in the mostly empty tavern again. We did take time to walk around the city, speaking to a couple of the locals. Most complained about a mage that had moved close to town recently. Considering what most Nords were like regarding magic, I gave their complaints an ear but figured they were over-reacting, fearful of magic like a lot of people. 

The three of us managed to behave that night, helped by the fact Lydia was in her own room, while Aela and I were both tired after a long day. Add to that, we knew it would be a long day returning to Whiterun, and I was eager to get to Riverwood to discover who this ‘friend’ was. 

Returning to Whiterun the next day was slightly quicker than our original journey to Morthal, and as we still had daylight, we rode past home straight for Riverwood. Wandering into the Sleeping Giant Inn, I approached the female sweeping the floor. She gave me a curious look, and appeared surprised when I asked about the attic room. “Attic room, eh? Well, we don't have an attic room, but you can have the one on the left. Make yourself at home.” 

I expected my two companion to wait outside, but they followed me into the room, Aela making a rude joke about getting naked and have a little fun. Those two laughed, sitting on the bed, as I took the chair, waiting for whoever asked for us to walk in. I’ll admit we all shared glances as the woman I spoke to walked in, closing the door as I rose to my feet. She stood in front of me in silence, looking me up and down. “So you're the Dragonborn I've been hearing so much about. We need to talk.” 

“How do you know who I am?” 

“I'm the one who left the note in Ustengrav.” 

Now it was my turn to look her up and down. “Seriously?” I asked. 

“Surprised? I guess I'm getting pretty good at my harmless innkeeper act. Look, all I can ask is for you to follow me into another room and I can explain what’s going on. Your friends will have to wait out in the main room though. Not until after I’ve explained everything.” 

The four of us walked out, me following the yet unnamed woman, Aela and Lydia stating they’d grab a drink and wait for me. Entering the opposite bedroom, she asked me to close the door. Once I’d done so, she pushed a button to open a false rear of the wardrobe, exposing a hidden stairway. Following her down, we entered a large room, full of training gear, bookshelves and a variety of other things that suggested this woman was definitely no ordinary innkeeper. 

She rounded a table and looked me up and down again. “Now we can talk. The Greybeards seem to think you're the Dragonborn. I hope they're right.” 

“Who are you?” 

“I’m Delphine. And you’re Ragnar. You would have seen me with Farengar when you returned the dragonstone.” 

“Ah, I remember you. Seemed to know your stuff.” 

“Well, at least you pay attention to things. First thing, though.” She walked over to a chest, returning with a drinking horn, sliding it across the table. “That’s for you.” 

“Thank. But why did you take it?” 

“I knew the Greybeards would send you there if they thought you were Dragonborn. They're nothing if not predictable. When you showed up here, I knew you were the one the Greybeards sent, and not some Thalmor plant.” 

“Thalmor? You think the Thalmor are involved in all this?” 

“I have a lot of thoughts about what’s going on. The Thalmor are perhaps the tip of the iceberg.” 

“But I guess that’s why we’re meeting down here?” 

“Because of who I am, I have to be careful of who I trust.” 

“So what am I doing here?” 

“I'm actually trying to help you. I just need you to hear me out.” 

“I wouldn’t be here if I wasn’t willing to listen.” 

She took a moment to judge my words and sighed, I think with relief. I guess I was saying all the right things, at least enough to trust me a little bit. “Like I said in my note, I've heard that you might be Dragonborn. I'm part of a group that's been looking for you. Well, someone like you, for a very long time. If you really are Dragonborn, that is. Before I tell you any more, I need to make sure I can trust you.” 

“Trust is a two-way street. Look, I don’t know who you are, but you managed to get the horn from Ustengrav, so you’re clearly not just an innocent innkeeper. And I am Dragonborn. You can believe that or not, I don’t really give a shit. But what I do know is that you’re telling me precisely fuck all at the moment. Tell what you know, what you think, and we might actually get somewhere.” 

She was probably taken aback as my frustration certainly showed by the end. She looked through all the paperwork on the table and eventually pulled out a map. “Dragons aren't just coming back; they're coming back to life. They weren't gone somewhere all these years. They were dead, killed off centuries ago by my predecessors. Now something's happening to bring them back to life. And I need you to help me stop it.” 

“Look, I know I’ve seen a couple of dragons, even managed to kill one, but what makes you so sure they’re coming back to life?” 

“I've visited their ancestral burial mounds and found them empty. And I've figured out where the next one will come back to life."

“Where?” 

“Kynesgrove. Heard of it?” 

“Aye, little village on the outskirts of Windhelm.” 

“There's an ancient dragon burial mound there. If we can get there before it happens, maybe we'll learn how to stop it.” 

“Right, it’s late, and I’m not travelling anywhere except back to Whiterun for some shut eye. So, I can either meet you here tomorrow, and we travel together, or I can meet you at Kynesgrove.” 

“You have a horse?” 

“Aye.” 

“Then I’ll meet you at the crossroads tomorrow morning, next to the meadery. We can ride together from there.” 

“Works for me.” 

After re-joining Aela and Lydia upstairs, we headed straight back to Whiterun, arriving in the stables in darkness. Feeling rather ravenous, we headed to the Bannered Mare for a slap-up meal, ordering plenty of meat and potatoes, vegetables too, and a few rounds of ale. I almost felt sorry for Saadia bringing plates to our table, though she appreciated the tip I left her at the end of the night. 

I’d barely owned Breezehome for longer than a week, but it already felt like home upon stepping inside. The first thing to do was light the fire to provide a little warmth as Lydia headed straight upstairs to bed, stating she’d had enough for one night. Aela and I stayed downstairs, enjoying a last drink, before she grabbed my hand and led us upstairs. 

Our armour was taken off rather quickly, my already hard cock springing free and she happily dropped to her knees to pleasure me, running my hands through her hair as she did so. Though I would have liked to have left a load in her mouth, she blew me for a while before I lifted her up and we hopped onto the bed so I could return the favour. 

I would have been quite happy eating her out for hours, and I think she felt the same, but after giving her one climax, she pulled me up and I slid my cock inside her quickly, and there was no taking time, building to a crescendo. She held on for dear life as I fucked her, and fucked her hard. The headboard was soon slamming into the wall, Aela crying out as I pounded her. I wasn’t quiet either, grunting away or being quite rude and descriptive. She either giggled at what I said, or return the rude suggestions. 

I came hard and had to relax immediately, resting on a forearm as her legs remained tightly wrapped around me. “We should wait a couple of days every so often. The sex is always incredible,” she stated. 

“I didn’t hurt you? I was… Well, I wasn’t gentle.” 

“Of course not. I’m just a well fucked woman now, Ragnar.” She gave my cock a squeeze. I always enjoyed a woman who could do that. “And it’s still quite hard. How old are you again?” 

“Um, twenty-something.” 

The fact I didn’t know my exact age made her laugh. To be honest, I’d lost track of the days, months and years, particularly after Muiri. She obviously noticed me away with my thoughts, so brought me back with a sweet, soft kiss. “You were thinking about her?” I’ll admit, I was still hard and inside her, so obviously embarrassed. “You do that occasionally. It’s something I’ve noticed.” 

“Sorry.” 

“Never be sorry about that. You don’t speak about her often, but when you do, it’s obvious how much you did love her.” 

“I love you now.” 

The smile returned lit up her face. “And I love you, Ragnar.” 

Leaning down to kiss her, it didn’t take long for my cock to harden completely, and after a quick adjustment, Aela quite happily rode me, though a lot slower than usual. I eventually shuffled so I could sit up a little, holding on her body as she grinded against me. Her orgasm, when it came, caused her to shudder in my arms, kissing me hard to stifle the moans she wanted to release otherwise. 

After a quick clean up, we cuddled under the furs, Aela just staring at me in the faint candlelight. I just pulled her even closer, enjoying the softness of her skin against my fingertips, running them from the back of her neck, down her back, to her arse. “No-one has ever looked at me like you do, Ragnar,” she said softly. 

“Well, there are obviously a lot of dumb and blind men in Whiterun.” 

“Most of them are losers, and I wouldn’t give them the time of day anyway. I knew there was something about you the first time you walked into Jorrvaskr.” 

“The only reason I took so long to show an interest is that I thought you were with Skjor, and if not with him, then at least someone.” 

“Well, at least we’re here together now. As we agreed, no promises about anything…” 

“Even if…” 

She smiled again. “Oh, I think about a lot of things, Ragnar. But I don’t want to tempt fate. Or I don’t want to until once this issue with dragons is settled.” 

“Agreed.” 

“Then we’ll discuss… many things…” 

Lydia did make a joke the next morning at the breakfast table about the noise, though we hadn’t kept her up, as she heard us, then promptly went back to sleep. “Guess I’m already used to it.” Aela nor I were embarrassed. We clearly loved each other, and our sex life was only going to get better with luck. And I knew Lydia wanted more of me too. 

Once armed and armoured, we headed for the stables, mounted our horses, and headed for the crossroads. Delphine was waiting for us, looking rather impatient, and after a brief greeting, we took the road heading east. I took a moment to look over Delphine, and I couldn’t place her armour, nor the emblem prominent on the chest-piece. She noticed me looking and told me all would explained once we found out anything at Kynesgrove. 

Riding past Valtheim Towers, she was surprised it was empty, Aela taking pride that it was the Companions that had recently cleared out the bandits, and made some gold doing so. In fact, Aela and I had cleaned it out a while ago, and I was slightly surprised more fools hadn’t moved in so far. Delphine was further impressed. 

“We'll cross the White River and follow it to Windhelm. Then we can swing south to Kynesgrove.” 

“Sounds like the idea,” I said, “We could go east around the steam pits, but it’s a long way.” 

“You know this area well?” 

“I honeymooned with my wife in the area.” 

Delphine looked at me in surprise. “You’re married?” 

“I was. Before you ask, she’s dead.” 

“I’m sorry.” 

“Thanks, but it happened what feels like a long time ago, yet at times, it feels like only yesterday.” 

“I know what you mean.” I looked at her, waiting to explain, but perhaps it was a secret. I knew she was carrying a few, and I was willing to wait. She’d done nothing for me to really mistrust her yet. I figured we had to get to know each other. 

As always, it took a day for us to make it to Windhelm, with barely enough light for us to ride to Kynesgrove. Though all of us would have liked to head for the burial mound, it was simply too dark by the time we arrived at the inn, so could only agree to stay the night and leave first thing in the morning. 

There were only two rooms available, and it got a little awkward. Aela and Lydia didn’t particularly want to share a room with Delphine, so in the end, I suggested they take one room, and I’d just take the room with Delphine. They were rather amused by that, while Delphine was a little shocked, and definitely embarrassed when I suggested it, though she didn’t say no. 

We behaved before heading to bed, knowing we had to rise early, so only had a couple of tankards before heading to our respective rooms. Closing the door behind me, I had no problem starting to take off my armour. Looking at me, Delphine eventually shrugged to herself and started to do the same. There was no doubt she was older than me. I’m not sure how much older, but if there was an age gap, she certainly looked after herself, though there were the typical scars a warrior carried, so she was definitely a fighter. 

She then turned to look at me and I noticed the slight smile as I stood there in just my underwear. “Well… You certainly have the physique of a Dragonborn.” 

“How old are you?” I wondered. 

She smirked. “Old enough to know better, Ragnar.” 

“What? You think I’m going to try and seduce you or something?” 

She made a subtle pose. “Well, what do you think then?” Raising my eyebrows, she laughed to herself. “I’m just wondering if I can still fire up a young man’s loins.” I figured I’d have a little fun with her, so I dropped my underwear. I always loved to see the reaction when I did, and Delphine was no different, her jaw dropping wide as she unconsciously stepped forward. “My, my, you certainly do have a gift or two,” she said quietly. 

I bent over to pick up my underwear but she cried out no quite quickly, so I stood up again as she eventually stood just in front of me. She was short enough that I did have to look down. “Yes, Delphine?” 

I hadn’t expected this, but I was just having a little fun. And if she wanted to fuck the Dragonborn, I probably wouldn’t say no. Sure, I didn’t exactly trust her, but I’d fucked women who I didn’t like at all, so I fucked them hard and fast, only satisfying my own urges. I didn’t know Delphine well, but she was definitely interested now, at least in my body. And when she gently grasped my cock, it didn’t take long for it to start to thicken. 

“Oh my… Oh my…” 

“How old are you?” I whispered, “Am I with someone double my age?” 

“Older, Ragnar,” she said quietly, “I fought in the Great War.” 

“That explains the scars then.” 

She looked up, still stroking me. “Do you know how long it’s been since I was fucked?” I shook my head. “Long enough that I want to do something incredibly stupid, even with your friends next door.” 

“If you want to do something stupid but fun, I’m not going to say no.” 

“Really? But you barely know me?” 

“And that matters because? My body is saying yes. Is yours?” 

She removed her hand for a moment to take off her bra. She was slim, and her breasts were smaller than I expected. She definitely kept fit. She then lowered her underwear as well, definitely surprised by the smooth pussy. I lowered a hand of my own, trailing fingers down her stomach as she shuffled slightly, allowing me access. She was already soaking wet. “Is that just from me right now?” She gasped as I touched her before nodding. I leaned down to her ear. “So what would you like to do then?” 

She shuddered again. “Something stupid,” she whispered, “You’re the Dragonborn. I’ve longed for this day.” 

“What? To be fucked by the Dragonborn?” It wasn’t a surprise when she nodded. “You want my cock inside you?” 

“By Talos, yes, Ragnar.” 

I took control, leaning down to kiss her. She was eager, very eager, and it didn’t take long to have her lying back on the bed, cock pressed at her entrance. But I wasn’t just going to do that, instead moving down her body. That really surprised her, causing her to cry out when my mouth grabbed a nipple, teasing her there for a moment, before I kissed down her stomach. I inhaled her scent before running my tongue along her slit. She near enough bounced off the bed. 

“So long,” she breathed. 

Getting her to climax didn’t take too much effort. Sounds arrogant, but the honest truth. She was incredibly turned on, and I have no doubt Aela and Lydia knew what we were doing, as although she used a pillow to stifle her cries, one or two escaped that would have told them that she was getting eaten out or fucked. After a couple of climaxes, she was begging for my cock, lying back so I could join her, spreading her legs wide and practically ordering me to fuck her. 

I willingly obliged, fucking her hard and fast, and she was well up for it, urging me on to fuck her senseless. My orgasm, when it came, was pretty damned good, and she wrapped her legs tight around me, begging for me to cum inside her. Once I settled down, we looked at each other, I think a little surprised at how the night had gone. 

“Well, I didn’t expect this,” I admitted. 

“Neither did I… But I wasn’t lying about the Dragonborn bit. I have fantasised about this moment for years.” 

“Glad I could oblige. You’re a good fuck.” That made her blush. “Has it really been that long?” 

“You don’t think about certain needs when you see threats at every turn.” 

I pulled out, and after a quick clean up, we lay together under the covers. Considering we’d just fucked, Delphine didn’t lie pressed against me until I dragged her so her body moulded into mine. “We just fucked, Delphine, so you can spoon with me without a problem.” I leaned close to her ear, adding, “And I’ll wake up rock hard too.” 

“Careful, Ragnar. I’ll get addicted. We really shouldn’t have done this as it is.” 

“You regret it already?” 

“By the Nine, no. I feel like a new woman, ready to take on all the dragons. It’s just… you know…” 

“Well, I can now cross off older woman on my list.” That made her laugh. 

“Did you… like it?” she wondered. 

I placed a hand between her breasts before running it down her body, doing that a few times before sliding it towards her pussy, Delphine automatically opening her legs, lifting her right one over mine, as I started to fondle her again. “Ragnar,” she breathed. She turned her head, eager for me to kiss her, and it wasn’t long before I was hard again, manoeuvring so I was on my back so she could ride me. 

She absolutely loved that. I am sure of it, leaning forward, a hand to either side of me, bending my legs so we could match my thrusts to her bounces. I just watched her face, the waves of pleasure, particularly as she approached another orgasm. She rode through one before I fucked her a little harder, giving her another one before I enjoyed a second. She collapsed onto my chest after that, now running my fingers up and down her back, my cock still buried inside her. 

“Definitely addictive,” she whispered. 

Once she slid off me, we pretty much fell asleep straight away. 

The next morning wasn’t as awkward as I thought it would be. I thought Delphine would have been embarrassed, perhaps regretful, but when she woke up, with my erection pressed against her, she wondered if I wanted a morning fuck before breakfast. I wasn’t going to say not to that, and we walked out of the bedroom half an hour later, armed and armoured, probably with stupid grins on our faces. 

Aela and Lydia just laughed at us. I thought they’d be pissed off, but sitting next to Aela, she simply leaned into my ear and said, “Knew it would happen.” 

“Why?” 

“Because it’s you, Ragnar. You just have this magnetism that makes women want to jump into bed with you.” 

“So you’re not angry or anything?” 

“No, of course not. You’ve told me about your life. I know you will be with others at times. Do you still love me?” 

“Of course.” 

“And you want to be with me?” 

“Definitely.” 

“Then what you did last night was just a bit of fun. No harm done.” 

After eating, we paid up and headed out, leaving our horses outside the inn, Delphine explaining that the burial mound was just up the hill. She led the way, and it was only a ten-minute walk before turning off the path. The burial mound was ahead, though we stayed back in cover, and we were barely there five minutes before a dragon swooped over us. 

It was the same dragon I remembered seeing in Helgen. A big, black bastard, as if sent from the depths of Oblivion itself. The dragon hovered above the barrier mound and appeared to use a Shout, as the mound erupted, piles of dirt sent everywhere, including us in cover behind a large boulder. 

“Sahloknir! Ziil gro dovah ulse!” 

“You understand that?” Delphine asked quietly. I just shook my head, continuing to listen in. 

“Sahloknir! Ziil gro dovah ulse! Slen Tiid Vo!” 

I guess I shouldn’t have been surprised when the skeleton of a dragon appeared. The flying dragon then performed another Shout, giving flesh and scales to the other dragon. “Alduin, thuri! Boaan tiid vokriiha suleysksejun kruziik?” 

“Geh, Sahloknir, kaali mir.” 

“This isn’t good,” Aela muttered under her breath. 

Then the black dragon, who I believe was called Alduin, seemed to look straight at me. Showing no fear, and shrugging off the hands to keep me in place, I stepped forward. “Ful, losei Dovahkiin? Zu'u koraav nid nol dov do hi.” I just pointed at my ear and shrugged. Alduin snorted in derision. “You do not even know our tongue, do you? Such arrogance, to dare take for yourself the name of Dovah.” The dragon turned away from me, looking back at the other one, who I figured was called Sahloknir, if I’d understood it correctly. “Sahloknir, krii daar joorre.” 

That sounded like an order, and I wouldn’t be surprised if it was ‘kill him or them’. 

Alduin disappeared, and the other dragon took off. I ran into the open field, joined by the three others. “Who’s good with a bow apart from Aela?” 

“I can hit a target from one hundred yards.” 

“Then you’re helping Aela get this dragon on the ground. Once it is, Lydia and I will go on the attack.” 

The dragon circled us a couple of times, breathing frost in our direction. While it was certainly cold, the four of us were Nords, and we were built for the cold. I suggested we not take a full blast, as that could possibly leave us worse for wear, otherwise, just focus on getting it on the ground. 

Aela and Delphine fired plenty of arrows, and one it flew close enough, I used Unrelenting Force. That definitely grabbed its attention, noticing it look in my direction, and it would have learned that, yes, this human did possess a Thu’um as well. I was hoping to would now want to join me in battle as a matter of pride. 

It did, though at first, it floated high enough above the ground that neither Lydia or I could get at it, though it was a wide target for Aela and Delphine, and I noticed a number of arrows find gaps in its scales, enough to start drawing some blood. I used my Thu’um again, this time the lone word of fire. That definitely grabbed its attention, the dragon quickly taking off out of range. But I had to get it on the ground. 

I Shouted a third time, again all three words of Unrelenting Force, and I near enough knocked it out of the sky this time. The dragon yelled something in its own language and headed straight for me, landing on the ground close enough that Lydia and I barely had to move. But it was now my turn to go on the attack. Its jaw was powerful, its teeth long and sharp, ready to grab and tear us to shreds if we made a mistake. 

Lydia had already proven her talent, and we’d already discussed tactics. Aela and Delphine were circling around, continuing to fire arrows into the dragon. They could barely miss, so Lydia stayed in its eyeline, shield raised, only striking when necessary, as I circled around and drove my sword into the exposed neck of the dragon. Burying my sword all the way to the hilt, the dragon rear up and roared, and I held on for grim death, hoping it didn’t take off. 

It didn’t, and the fact it moved helped length the cut, blood now pouring from the wound. Lowering its head, I withdrew the sword, hoping Lydia was still distracting it, as I rolled to the other side and buried my sword again. 

That was it. Rather anti-climactic, in a way, but after sawing for a few seconds, I took the sword out and stepped back, looking down to see its body covered in arrows, blood now pouring from all its wounds. Walking backwards alongside Lydia, the dragon tried to step forward, but it barely took a step before it collapsed to the ground, releasing a final growl before I was sure it was dead. 

“I'll be damned, you did it! That was well done. Come on. I've been wanting a closer look at one of these buggers.” As we stepped closer, the same thing that happened by Whiterun watchtower occurred again. Delphine stepped back as she exclaimed, “Wait. Something's happening.” 

I absorbed the soul of the dragon as Delphine muttered, “Gods above!” 

I didn’t feel any different, just like the first time, but I looked down and noticed I glowed for a little while. Lydia hadn’t seen it either, and she looked just as mesmerised as Delphine. Aela had seen it, but she had a look in her eye that she wanted to fuck me there and then. Sometimes there was nothing better than getting down and dirty after a good fight. 

“You really are Dragonborn. I owe you some answers, don't I?” 

“No need to sound so contrite considering what happened last night, Delphine. We’ll talk when we get back to Whiterun.” 

The ride back to Whiterun took most of the day, and for myself, took place in silence. To be honest, I was thinking about the black dragon, Alduin. He seemed to be the centre of everything, but I didn’t know how or why. I guess Delphine might be able to tell me once we returned to Whiterun. As I led the way, Delphine would sometimes ride quietly alongside me, or just behind, apparently deep in thought herself. Aela and Lydia took the rear, talking excitedly between each other. Lydia wasn’t quiet in her… appreciation of myself. I definitely had another admirer. 

Wanting some privacy, we headed straight for Breezehome. After three of us changed, Delphine stating she would head back to Riverwood after our conversation, we gathered downstairs around the fire. “Okay, Ragnar, you’ve had plenty of time to think about things. Rest assured, anything you want to know, I’ll answer truthfully.” 

I couldn’t help smile as I asked, “So, really wanted to sleep with the Dragonborn eh?” 

She met my eyes and smiled herself. “Partly. The only part was you. I probably would have fucked you regardless, but the fact you were Dragonborn? That’s what really made me wet.” 

“Damn, no wonder you made quite a bit of noise,” Aela stated. 

She looked at Aela. “I hadn’t been fucked in a long time. To be honest, Ragnar was definitely worth the wait. I’m glad we had to fight first as I’m not sure I could have immediately mounted up this morning. I was a little bit tender.” 

“Okay, let’s get serious. I know your name is Delphine. You’re a warrior of some sort. Who are you exactly though? Who do you fight with or for? And, most importantly, what do you want with me?” 

“I'm one of the last members of the Blades. A very long time ago, the Blades were dragonslayers, and we served the Dragonborn, the greatest dragonslayer. For the last two hundred years, since the last Dragonborn emperor, the Blades have been searching for a purpose. Now that dragons are coming back, our purpose is clear again. We need to stop them.” 

She might have been surprised but I’d read about the Blades. During my time with the Guild, I’d ensured we built a vast library of knowledge, and one or two of the books was about the Blades. “I’ve read about them.” 

“You have?” she asked, unable to hide the surprise. I nodded. “So you know who we used to serve?” I nodded again. “For the last two hundred years, we've been searching for the next Dragonborn to guide and guard, as we are sworn to do. But we never found one. Until now.” 

“How many of you are left?” 

She sagged, and we all noticed the sadness. “I’m not sure. I don’t know if there are any other survivors. It’s been so many years now…” 

“Okay, so that makes four of us for the moment. We can work with that. But I don’t have a clue what we do next. Dragons are back. That big black one, Alduin, might be trouble. Any ideas?” 

“The first thing we need to do is figure out what's behind the dragons. The Thalmor are our best lead. If they aren't involved, they'll know who is.” 

I was suspicious about that. Not about Delphine, but it was clear she didn’t like them at all. If she’d fought in the Great War, and used to be a Blade, it was completely understandable. And, as I didn’t have any ideas, it was at least a sensible avenue of investigation. “Okay, I’m willing to agree, but what makes you think the Thalmor could be behind all this?” 

“Nothing solid. Yet. But my gut tells me it can't be anybody else. The Empire had captured Ulfric. The war was basically over. Then a dragon attacks, Ulfric escapes, and the war is back on. And now the dragons are attacking everywhere, indiscriminately. Skyrim is weakened, the Empire is weakened. Who else gains from that but the Thalmor?” 

“She makes a good point,” Lydia added, “It’s all just a little too convenient.” 

“Okay, if the Thalmor are involved, how do we find out?” I wondered, “I’ve seen their patrols. Take one of them out?” 

Delphine smiled but shook her head. “No, I doubt they’d carry anything we’d need. But, if we could get into the Thalmor Embassy! It's the centre of their operations in Skyrim. Problem is, that place is locked up tighter than a miser's purse. They could teach me a few things about paranoia…” 

I glanced at my two companions before looking at Delphine. “Do you know anything about me? I mean really?” 

“No, just what you’ve told me.” 

“Okay, I used to be a thief, and one thing I’m good at is getting into places. But the Thalmor Embassy? I’ll admit, that’s one nut I don’t particularly want to crack. Even with my gift, I don’t particularly want to be caught.” 

“No, we’ll do this smart. I’ve got an idea or two already brewing, but it’ll take a little time to pull things together. Will you remain in Whiterun?” 

“Well, if it takes a couple of weeks, I’ll probably do a job or two, but I won’t disappear.” 

“Then I should head back to Riverwood and get thing started.” 

I offered to escort her back to the stables, which she appreciated. Before mounting her horse, she turned, pulled me forward, and laid one hell of a kiss on my lips. “I can’t believe I fucked you so quickly!” she admitted. 

“To be honest, neither can I.” 

“But I don’t regret it one bit. And if you’re ever in Riverwood…” 

“Well, after what we got up to last night and this morning, I don’t think I can refuse. Just one thing…” 

“Yes?” 

“How old are you really?” She leaned up and whispered into my ear. “No way? Seriously?” 

“Surprised?” 

“Consider me impressed. You have a fantastic body for...” 

“Someone of my age?” A little embarrassed, I nodded my head. She took no offence. “I look after myself, Ragnar. And I’m glad I can make a young man of your age so excited. But I really should go. Any more of this talk, and I’ll want to take you with me, and we both have work to do.” 

We kissed again before I helped her mount up, and with a final parting farewell, she turned her horse and headed off home. Returning to Breezehome, Lydia had already disappeared, so Aela and I headed straight upstairs. After closing the door, it was Aela’s turn to be all over me. “I heard you two last night,” she whispered in my ear, “I was very jealous.” 

“I honestly hadn’t planned it to happen.” 

“I know you didn’t, but it was also no surprise. I saw her eyeing you up as we rode along. How old is she?” I whispered it into her ear, and she laughed. “Seriously? Damn, I hope I look that good at her age.” 

“Never fucked a woman that old before.” 

“Do you want it to happen again?” 

“I wouldn’t say no if she offered. Her arse is fantastic.” 

Aela just smiled. “Good, because I promise you, I won’t get jealous. As I said, you’ve always been honest about everything. What would you like to do tonight though?” 

“I have an idea or two. Most involving you.” 

“Oh, and what would you like to do to me?” 

I showed her over the next couple of hours. I might have liked fucking Delphine and Lydia. But I wanted Aela above them all. If she’d asked me to commit, just like Muiri, I’d have done it in a heartbeat. We wouldn’t talk about it, but I already thought about marriage and children, and I know she did too. But part of me didn’t want to really even consider it. The gods didn’t want me to have that, or so I thought. They’d taken Muiri from me. They’d taken Astrid from me. I didn’t want them to take Aela. If they did, I’d pretty much give up on life, or at least love. 

After making love and holding her in my arms, I told her how much she meant to me, and shared my thoughts about committing. It made her smile, nearly cry I think, but she assured me it was fine. She could see Lydia was definitely enamoured by me, and she was looking forward to her joining us eventually. As for Delphine, she figured it might have been a one-time fling, but if it happened again, she wouldn’t complain, and wouldn’t mind joining us there either. 

The next morning after breakfast, not knowing how long Delphine would be getting us into the embassy, I admitted I couldn’t just sit around waiting, otherwise I’d get bored. Aela suggested we resume our work for the Companions, but as I now had Lydia for help, she would continue working from Jorrvaskr while I headed out. She was confident that, since I was Dragonborn, and had Lydia, we should be safe enough. 

It wasn’t a bad idea, so the next day, we resumed our war against the Silver Hand.

Chapter 31: Blowback

After the excitement of learning about being Dragonborn, climbing the mountain to High Hrothgar, then battling against another dragon outside Kynesgrove, returning to work as a Companion was a slight comedown. Not that it didn’t provide plenty of excitement, but in the back of my mind all the time was the dragon issue.

But I kept my mind occupied by continuing our personal war against the Silver Hand. Aela still had all the information we’d gathered, and after explaining to Lydia what we were doing, she was happy to help out. There was one particular reason why. She got me all to herself. I found no reason to complain, as she’d already proven very delightful company.

Our first mission was a Silver Hand camp to the north, more than a day’s ride, meaning we had to camp out. We behaved ourselves that first night, spending our time around the campfire talking. She asked plenty of questions about my life, and once assured that she wouldn’t judge me, at least too harshly, I gave her the unfiltered truth.

“Are you still the master?” she asked.

“No. I have nothing to do with the Thieves Guild any longer. But I put them on a better path. Yes, they are still thieves, but there is now an honour to what they do.”

“And the other thing?”

“I don’t regret it for a moment because I got to spend all that time with Astrid. And it led me all the way to this night here with you.”

That made her smile, at least. “You loved her?”

“I did. It was different to my wife. Very different, for a number of reasons. But we connected. However, the work I’ve done with the Companions, and now as the Dragonborn, means I can restore a sense of pride and honour. I’ve never thought of myself as a bad person, and certainly not evil, though I know I’ve done many dishonourable and perhaps evil things.”

“What about what we’re doing now?”

Aela wasn’t intimate with him, but there’s a burning sense of revenge for the death of Skjor. “What happened wasn’t right.”

“Is it possible you’re going too far?”

“Possibly. We’ll cross that bridge if it comes.”

Taking out the camp wasn’t too difficult as we agreed to infiltrate at night. We killed a couple silently but once a couple of them woke up, we just let the blood flow. Using my Thu’um wasn’t practical, but it didn’t particularly matter, as the Silver Hand were no match for the pair of us, surprised at how easily we adapted to fighting alongside each other.

There was little information to take back to Aela, but we’d taken out another operation, so I was happy enough with the result. Riding back to Whiterun, I realised the one secret I was keeping from Lydia was the fact we were werewolves. I’m sure there were whispers around the city but no-one would truly believe, and certainly never accuse, the Companions of being werewolves.

It was only upon returning to Breezehome that I noticed the drinking horn still sitting on top of a side cupboard. Picking it up, I said to myself, “I really should return this to the Greybeards.”

“What was that?”

“Huh?”

“You’re talking to yourself, my Thane.”

“I just said I need to return this horn. I’m sure the Greybeards are wondering where I am.”

“When would you like to leave?”

I couldn’t help chuckle at her enthusiasm. “Let me have a word with Aela, as she’ll want…”

“I was thinking just you and I…” I gave her a look, and her eyes said everything. “Do I need to spell it out for you why?”

“No. I’ll go have a word with Aela anyway.”

I found Aela in Jorrvaskr, downstairs in her old room. She was disappointed that I didn’t find any more information, but rather amused when I added news about heading back to High Hrothgar. I wasn’t particularly subtle when I said I’d just take Lydia this time. “She wants to fuck you without me there.”

“More than likely.”

“Well, I guess I can’t complain. You leave me satisfied and sore most of the time, and I know she has to listen to it.”

“So you don’t mind?”

“Of course not. Though I’ll probably just stay here and work. I can’t sleep at home if you’re not there.”

I couldn’t help smile when she called it home. “Think of it like that already?”

“Don’t get me started, Ragnar, otherwise I’ll break my promise and started talking about things we agreed not to talk about.” She paused with a smirk before asking, “When will you go?”

“Tomorrow morning. I’m sure they’re wondering where I am.”

“Okay. I’ll join you at home shortly. Just one or two things I need to do here first.” I turned to leave when she called my name. Turning back, she walked towards and hugged me. “I love you,” she said quietly.

“I love you too. But what’s brought this one? Not that I’m complaining, but…”

She leaned back, another of those heart-melting smiles that I already adored. “Because although I promised not to talk about it, I do think... I think a lot.”

“So do I. But I don’t want to jinx things. Hopefully third time is a charm though.”

“Fingers crossed.”

“I’ll grab Lydia and head to the Bannered Mare for a drink. Meet us there when you’re done here.”

“I won’t be too much longer.”

Lydia and I sat at what I would now consider our usual table, one of the corners nearest the door where I could watch people enter or leave. Lydia found it amusing but it was simply force of habit, never liking to have my back to a room full of people. Saadia didn’t even have to ask what we wanted, coming over within a few minutes of our arrival with tankards of ale and a plate of meat for us to nibble. Ysolda noticed me and came over to say hello. I’d spoken to her once or twice since moving to Whiterun, and I was pleased to hear she was now married to a fellow merchant.

When she left, Lydia asked, “Did you sleep with her too?”

I gave her a look and a smile. “I don’t sleep with every woman I meet.”

“Just most of them then.”

“I can’t help it if women want to sleep with me.”

Lydia had nothing to say to that, as she was in my bed within a couple of days at most, and she wanted me all to herself after leaving for High Hrothgar in the morning. So we sat back, ate and drank, conversed a little bit, waiting for Aela to arrive. Mikael was providing the music as always, and others got up for a dance. Lydia looked at me more than once, pleading with her eyes, and it didn’t take a lot for me to relent and join her.

Aela walked in as we were dancing and near doubled over in laughter, probably because I looked uncomfortable. I usually need a few more drinks before I really get into it, but Lydia was enjoying herself at least. We danced through a couple of tunes before I could finally escape back to my chair. Aela made one or two jokes at my expense, which I didn’t mind, ordering another round of drinks from Saadia.

Despite having to leave the next morning, the three of us stayed at the tavern until it was rather late. I was sensible regarding my consumption of ale, but Lydia and Aela were both rolling drunk by the time we left. Dumping Aela in a chair by the fire, I managed to help Lydia upstairs. Thankfully she just got under the furs and went straight to sleep, though I grabbed a bucket, just in case she was ill. Aela was fast asleep by the time I headed back downstairs, so carried her upstairs, managed to undress her, before putting her to bed too.

Neither woman was feeling too good the next morning. Aela could barely drag herself out of bed, while Lydia was downstairs by the time I headed down, already armoured, ready to go. She didn’t look well at all, and I was ready to delay for a day, but she insisted that after breakfast she would be ready to go.

She was still groaning as we carried our supplies down to the stables, Aela somehow having dragged herself out of bed to wish us goodbye. I gave her a hug and told her to go home and back to bed. She didn’t argue, and after giving me a brief kiss, turned and headed straight back home. I helped Lydia up onto her horse before mounting my own, and we began the long journey to Ivarstead.

She barely said a word the entire journey. In fact, she was pretty much dozing once we crossed the bridge past the crossroads. Thankfully we didn’t run into any bandits or wild animals, and to avoid the steep incline we travelled previously, I kept us on the main road, following the signs for Ivarstead. It was a much longer route but it gave Lydia much more time to recover before our journey up the mountain.

We stayed at the same inn as before, no surprise as there was no other accommodation available, taking only one room as Lydia wanted to share the same bed, though admitted she wasn’t capable of anything else. I found that rather amusing, as she’d made no secret of why she wanted to do this journey alone, so I suggested we could spend a couple of nights at High Hrothgar together before heading back to Whiterun.

Lydia behaved that night, only enjoying a lone tankard before we headed to bed early. Despite not wanting to be intimate, she still wanted to see flesh, so there was some making out as we undressed each other. Taking in her naked body by candlelight, she was a little shy at first, more so when I sat on the bed first and pulled her onto it with me. Spooning into me, there was the natural bodily reaction, which made her gasp.

“I so want to but I’m really tired,” she whispered.

“It’s fine. You go to sleep and it’ll go away soon.”

She was out rather quickly, quite happy snuggling against me. It was rather weird how quickly she fell into bed with me, and now lying together naked under the furs, I was amazed how natural it also felt. I’d never tell her, but I’d never choose her over Aela, but if she was happy with the occasional night together, then I would be happy if it worked. And I certainly wouldn’t stop her finding a man of her own. I’m not that much of a selfish bastard.

Feeling like her usual self the next day, and prepared for the Seven Thousand Steps, we departed early, wrapped in our thick coats, and kept a steady pace nearly the entire time, only stopping briefly to nibble on some bread and cheese. We met the occasional pilgrim along the way, but came across no wildlife, figuring we’d killed anything that lurked the last time we’d journeyed up the path.

The weather did close in the higher we climbed, and it was getting dark by the time we reached the monastery. Despite its cold looking exterior, inside was toasty and warm, just like last time, and the four Greybeards quickly appeared from wherever they had been meditating. When Arngeir appeared, I took the horn from my backpack and offered to him. He nodded approvingly.

“You've retrieved the Horn of Jurgen Windcaller. Well done. You have now passed all the trials. Come with me. It is time for us to recognize you formally as Dragonborn.”

Gathering together in the main chamber, I was told that Lydia should vacate the area. “Why?” she asked, only curious, as no doubt she wanted to see whatever ceremony was to come. Arngeir took no offence to the question.

“The Dragonborn has completed his training. We now wish to Speak to him. Few can withstand the unbridled Voice of the Greybeards. You cannot, but he is ready.”

Lydia made herself scarce as I stood in the middle of the four Greybeards. And Arngeir wasn’t exaggerating. I felt the full force of their Thu’um.

“Lingrah krosis saraan Strundu'ul, voth nid balaan klov praan nau.

Naal Thu'umu, mu ofan nii nu, Dovahkiin, naal suleyk do Kaan, naal suleyk do Shor, ahrk naal suleyk do Atmorasewuth.

Meyz nu Ysmir, Dovahsebrom.

Dahmaan daar rok.”

Arngeir walked towards me, a warm smile on his face, grasping my right hand with both of his. Dipping his head, he said, “Dovahkiin.” Looking up and meeting my eyes, he added, “You have tasted the Voice of the Greybeards, and passed through unscathed. High Hrothgar is open to you.”

“I’m honoured, Master. But what did you just say to me?”

The smile broadened, and he couldn’t help himself with a small chuckle. “Ah. I sometimes forget you are not versed in the dragon tongue as we are. This is a rough translation:

"Long has the Stormcrown languished, with no worthy brow to sit upon. By our breath we bestow it now to you in the name of Kyne, in the name of Shor, and in the name of Atmora of Old. You are Ysmir now, the Dragon of the North, hearken to it."

“And do these titles work in conjunction with the Way?”

“In a way, though whether you choose to follow the Way is your choice, Dragonborn. Akatosh has bestowed these gifts upon you. It is up to you how to use them.”

We joined the Greybeards for dinner, Lydia amused that it took place in near silence, as only Arngeir could talk to us, and I think he was used to the silence too. We left them alone to meditate after we were shown our own quarters. Putting on our coats, we headed outside to the rear of the monastery, looking up to see a cloudless sky and the two moons providing plenty of light. Not quite like the sun, but close enough.

Walking to the edge of the mountain, the night sky was utterly spectacular and it wasn’t surprising Lydia cuddled into my side. “Well, this is probably the most romantic evening of my life so far.”

“And here I thought I sucked at romance.”

“You probably do, but after this, it’s a sure thing tonight, Ragnar.”

I’m sure my laughter echoed around Skyrim.

She wasn’t lying though. Once it was far too cold for us to remain outside, we headed to our bedroom for the evening. Lydia was eager, very eager, to get me naked and into bed. I returned that eagerness by taking off her armour rather quickly and almost throwing her onto the bed, from where she beckoned me with a finger to join her.

The kissing immediately was hot and passionate, and I knew I’d always enjoy kissing her. Our hands didn’t waste time, one of hers wrapping around my cock to give it a stroke, one of mine immediately fondling her. I couldn’t help smile as she was already wet. She broke the kiss to say, “I’ve been thinking about this for quite a while.”

“Well, what have you been thinking about? My mouth or my cock?”

“I’ve heard many good things about what you can do with that mouth of yours, Ragnar. Why don’t you show me?”

I did, first spreading her legs wide as she hooked her hands under her knees. I sat back for a moment and looked at her. The look she returned on her face… I could have just slid my cock inside her and she wouldn’t have complained. But I gave her my mouth first, and Lydia held nothing back that night. Her language was surprisingly filthy, but it was a major turn on, and when she came the first time, she demanded that I keep going. I wasn’t going to say no, and gave her a second one, which was so good, she needed me to stop.

She wanted to return the favour, so after she recovered, I lay down and we pleased each other, Lydia mentioning that she wanted to taste me as much as I’d tasted her. There wasn’t going to be any problem with that, as she blew me for no longer than ten minutes before I erupted. I was really into it that night, and we both knew this was just the start.

We lay together after I’d given her a third one, and she was quite content making out with me despite the fact my mouth and lower face was covered in her wetness. My hands continued to wander as we made out, and she laughed as my fingers found her entrance again, gently fondling her for a little while before my cock started to harden.

“Anyone would think you’re addicted, Ragnar,” she breathed after I’d slid my fingers inside her.

“Making up for a little lost time.”

I heard the smile in her tone. “You’re with Aela, but I can assure you I’m never going to say no.”

She wanted more than my fingers though, eventually pushing me back as she straddled me, running her pussy up my cock before lifting herself up, grabbing my cock, and slowly lowering herself down. She felt fantastic, very tight, and I joked that I probably wasn’t going to last long. “I’ll take that as a compliment,” she said, before leaning forward to kiss me gently, as I ran my hands up to rest on her arse, “Now, am I taking control, or are you going to fuck me?”

“You can have all the fun for now, but you are getting well and truly fucked later, Lydia.”

“Oooh, will I be on my back for that? Or my hands and knees?”

I couldn’t help laugh as she sounded eager either way. “Hands and knees so I can ruin you a little bit.”

She leaned down, kissed me gently on the lips, before moving her mouth to my ear. “I can’t wait,” she whispered, before leaning back, and riding away. As she bounced and grinded along my cock, I enjoyed running my hands up and down her body, showing particular interest in her breasts, which she noticed and mentioned. So I shuffled back into a more seated position so I could give them more attention. She loved that, feeling both her hands run through the hair on the back of my head, and feeling her pick up the pace.

“Ragnar,” she breathed in a way I knew well. She was getting close.

Looking up, I held her close and kissed her. “Are you going to cum on my cock?”

“Uh-huh…”

“I bet you love it already.”

“By the Nine, yes.”

She kissed me hard, moaning into my mouth as I felt her pussy squeeze me tight, having to break the kiss, resting her head on my shoulder, holding me tight as she climaxed again. I just held onto her as she kept riding me until she couldn’t anymore, resting with my length still inside her. After a couple of minutes, she started to laugh. “I never thought I’d ever have this sort of relationship with my Thane.”

“Certainly helps that my housecarl is fit as fuck.” She leaned back and smiled. “What? I had these thoughts within a couple of minutes of meeting you.” The blush was noticeable in the candlelight. “I take it you had the same thoughts.”

“Definitely. I did wonder what you thought that other night we had here with Aela.”

“I knew this would happen eventually, and quite quickly.”

She had to get off me, so we lay down together, and this time I left her alone, as she was feeling a little sensitive, though was very complimentary of me. I might have left her alone, but we still made out, and her hand did find its way to my cock. “How are you still so hard?”

“Youth and,” I looked her up and down, “There’s a very good reason too.”

“Give me a few minutes, then you can give me a good fucking.”

She wasn’t lying, as after a few minutes, she moved onto her hands and knees, before lowering her head to the pillows, as I positioned myself behind her. I lifted her so her arse was high in the air and gave her arse a light slap for good measure. That made her giggle, though she asked not for them to be too hard if I did do it.

I was gentle as I slid my cock inside her, burying myself all the way, before I grabbed her hips and warned her to get ready. “Fuck me hard, my Thane.”

Oh, I knew I was going to have a lot of fun with Lydia while we lived together. And I kept my word, she got fucked hard. I didn’t last too long, simply because I enjoyed it far too much, and Lydia enjoyed it quite a lot too, particularly as she urged me on to give it to her harder and faster before I could finally hold back my orgasm no longer, buried my cock, and had one hell of a good orgasm. The sort that made me want to pass out for a few minutes.

After recovering and cleaning up, we cuddled under the furs. “If we do that again, I think you should take my arse too,” she whispered.

That woke me up! “You’re serious?”

“Absolutely. I am your sword and shield, and I am most definitely your lover in addition to that.” She paused before adding, leaning up to whisper in my ear, “Plus I haven’t done it before, and would love for you to be my first there.”

“I’ll be gentle the first time. I promise.”

She smiled at me. “I know. It’s because I like you already, Ragnar.”

“Well, that feeling is definitely mutual.”

She was very happy cuddling into me as I wrapped my arms around her. As we lay there, I made a promise. “Only yourself and Aela going forward, though maybe a certain older women from time to time. I think we can make it work.”

“Does Aela know?”

“Not yet. I’ll tell her when I get home. I don’t need anyone else. Two Nordic beauties to share a bed with each night is more than enough.”

I didn’t think the next morning would be awkward, amazed at how natural it felt, waking up together like a pair of old lovers, a little bit of kissing and cuddling before rising, dressing, and joining the Greybears for breakfast. If they’d heard us the previous evening, Arngeir didn’t say a word and gave no indication, simply asking what we would be doing now. Having not told him everything, I explained meeting Delphine and the involvement of the Blades. I was surprised that the gentle man was angered by that revelation, but he didn’t accuse me of anything, at least not yet. He did have one question though.

“Do you trust her?”

“She’s done nothing so far not to earn my trust. She was honest about what she thought I was.”

“The Blades and the Greybeards have very different ideas of what the Dragonborn should be.”

“I’m still no sure myself, Master. This is all very new.”

Arngeir nodded. “I understand, Dragonborn. We merely wish to show you a path. The Blades will likely show you another. But, for now, I will let the matter rest. Will you be returning home today?”

“I have other matters to attend to, and as it’s a two-day journey, I think it would be best.”

“High Hrothgar is always open to you, Dragonborn.”

As before, the journey back down the mountain was far easier and a little quicker than the journey up. Apart from some ligh snowfall, the weather was generally clear, so although it was cold, the sun remained out and it was still light by the time we walked across the bridge into Ivarstead. We spent the night in the inn, enjoying each other physically only the once, both of us worn out from the long walk, departing for Whiterun early the next morning.

I had no idea of the storm I would be walking into as we stabled our horses. Suggesting I should probably stop in Jorrvaskr, I left Lydia in Breezehome and walked up to the guild hall. The first person I met was Aela, and she looked… Well, I think I knew her well, and she looked ashamed. I immediately went to her. “What’s wrong?”

“Kodlak knows what we’ve been up to, Ragnar. You’d better go speak to him.”

“But we haven’t…”

She stepped closer to me, putting a finger to my lips. “I know we haven’t done anything wrong, Ragnar,” she said quietly, “But if the old man isn’t happy, then… I feel like I’ve let him down. Know what I mean?”

I did, as my respect for Kodlak was boundless. “I’ll go talk to him.”

“Just be honest, that’s all I can ask, Ragnar.”

I assured her I would be as I headed downstairs. Kodlak was seated in his usual chair, asking me to sit down across from him. He remained silent for a little while, perhaps gathering his thoughts, or just trying to think of the right thing to say. I guess me being Dragonborn made it awkward for him. He knew it was a boon for the Companions that the Dragonborn was one of them, but he was still the Harbinger. And, most importantly, I respected him.

He finally met my eyes. “Thank you for coming, Dragonborn. I know you’ve been busy.”

“I will always seek your guidance, Harbinger.”

“And while I cannot order you to do anything, I can give you advice. And while the Companions do not have a leader, as Harbinger I can…” He paused a moment. “Tell me, Ragnar. Aside from the dragon business, what do you think you’ve been doing of late, on behalf of the Companions?”

I leaned back in the chair, ran a hand through my hair. “Aela and I have been…”

“Revenge?”

“I did not know Skjor well, but I respected his skill as a warrior in the brief time I did get to know him. Most importantly, I do it for Aela.”

“You are intimate?” I nodded, figuring it wouldn’t be a surprise. “Should have known. I heard the excitement in her tone at your appearance.” He paused again before he sighed. “Ragnar, I know your hearts are still full of grief at the loss of Skjor. Mine was broken to hear of his loss, and it is still not mended. But his death was avenged long ago. You have taken more lives than honour demanded. The cycle of retaliation may continue for some time.”

“The Silver Hand are dangerous, Harbinger. They know what we are. And I think they mean to end the Companions.”

“They can try but it’s part of the reason why I’ve asked you to come speak to me. Have you heard the story of how we came to be werewolves?”

Shrugging, I replied with, “It depends on who you ask. Skjor considered it a blessing, Vilkas a curse.”

“At least you listen to both sides, Ragnar. And I understand you’ve been through the ritual?”

“I wished to be a member of the Circle.”

He nodded. “An understandable aspiration. You’ve more than proven yourself, and that was before we knew you were Dragonborn. Back to the point of my question, the Companions are nearly five thousand years old. This matter of beast-blood is only troubled us for a few hundred. One of my predecessors was a good but short-sighted man. He made a bargain with the witches of Glenmoril Coven. If the Companions would hunt in the name of their lord Hircine, we would be granted great power.”

“Was it meant to be this permanent?”

“No, we had been deceived. And the disease affects not just our bodies. It seeps into our spirit. Upon death, werewolves are claimed by Hircine for his Hunting Grounds. For some, this is paradise. They want nothing more than to chase prey with their mastery for eternity. And that is their choice. But I am a true Nord. I wish for Sovngarde as my spirit home.”

“What would you like me to do, Harbinger?”

“The witches' magic ensnared us, and their magic can release us. They won't give it willingly, but we can extract their foul powers by force. I want you to seek them out. Go to their coven in the wilderness. Strike them down as a true warrior of the wild. And bring me their heads. The seat of their abilities. From there, we may begin to undo centuries of impurity.”

Rising to my feet, I said, “It will be done immediately, Harbinger.”

“One last thing, Ragnar. You will not have a Shield-Brother or Sister with you this time. This is something you must do alone.”

“Atonement?”

He nodded. “In a way. Plus, I’m confident you can do this by yourself. Send Aela down here again when you head back upstairs. I’d like to speak to her too.”

Heading to the top level, I passed the message, letting her know I would head home and wait for her. She asked what we talked about, letting her know I’d tell her later. Walking into Breezehome, I headed straight upstairs to change out of my armour, Lydia walking out of her own room as I headed back downstairs. Taking a seat by the fire, she started to make dinner.

“I’ll be heading out again tomorrow.”

She turned to look at me. “Oh, what is it now?”

“Companion business.”

“Will you be wanting my help?”

“No, Kodlak told me that I must do this myself.” She looked ready to ask at least one question, so I quickly added, “I can tell you all about it when I’m back and it’s done.”

“Of course.”

Aela came home no more than an hour later. I didn’t need to explain what I would be doing as Kodlak already told her. Lydia could tell it was something important and thankfully didn’t ask too many questions. She left Aela and I alone that evening, heading to bed early. In bed a little later, Aela wasn’t what I would call upset, but she knew Kodlak was disappointed in both of us. “He’s right. We did go too far. But the Silver Hand are a danger to us all.”

“And he will see that in the end. But I also see where he is coming from, particularly regarding the beast-blood.”

“Are you regretting it?”

“No. Or, at least, not yet. But you know what I’ve done before. I think the chances of me entering Sovngarde are slim.”

We didn’t make love nor fuck that night, both of us lost in our thoughts, and I think she just needed the comfort of my arms that night. I woke early and dressed in the dark the next morning, kissing her as she slept. She still woke up, quietly exclaimed her love for me, before falling back asleep. Walking downstairs, it wasn’t a surprise to see Lydia already dressed, waiting for me, breakfast already cooking prior to our departure.

“Thank you,” I said, giving her a kiss on the cheek.

“You are not only my Thane. You are my friend, Ragnar.” I smiled at the use of my name. “And, most importantly, you should not do this alone. I will always be ready to fight by your side.”

I gathered the map I needed along with my weapons and a sack I would need for the heads. Lydia noticed and I explained briefly what I needed to do. She accepted it without further question, and we headed out into the morning light. The ride west took place in near silence, Lydia likely understanding I probably didn’t want to talk too much about what we were doing.

Turning south, I knew we had to look for a gap in the hills to our right, eventually finding a hidden path that passed by a hunter’s shack, sharing a wave with them as we passed by. Stopping nearby, I asked if they would be willing to watch our horses as we explored further west, and the offer a few coin certainly made them more agreeable.

Aela and I had hunted once or twice in the area, so I had a rough idea of the where the cave was located. Falkreath and the area surrounding it wasn’t quite as beautiful as the Rift, but there was a rugged beauty to the area that one couldn’t ignore. We found the cave after a brief investigation, and we walked in the dark entrance with sword and shield to hand. I wouldn’t just kill one or two. They would all die.

There were five witches in all. We found the first one in the main chamber, and I made sure we’d come prepared, taking out our bows and leaving a pair of arrows in what we figured out was a hargraven, once we were in the light of a nearby brazier. Taking out my sword, I then hacked its head with one good swing, placing it in the sack.

We found the other four in a separate room each. More than once I had to use my Thu’um, as the hargravens had magic, and unlike regular mages, who I didn’t fear, the hargravens were utter cunts, but could not be taken lightly. The one thing I warned Lydia was not to let them get too close, so she kept her in bow in hand as I got in close. In addition to the hargravens, two of them had ‘pets’. One was a spider, which I sheathed in flames from my Thu’um, the other had a trio of skeevers.

Each hargraven had its head taken when it was dead. By the time I put the fifth one in the sack, the bottom was soaked red from blood. Before leaving each chamber, I made sure we burned each body at the same time. Walking outside, I realised I had barely said a word to Lydia, as we didn’t really need to communicate when fighting, already learning how the other worked. We must have only been inside for an hour or so as the sun was still high in the sky.

“So what’s the truth, Ragnar?”

“Since the whole point of this exercise is to hopefully cure all of us, I guess I can be honest. Have you heard the rumours about the Companions?”

“I have.”

“It’s true.”

She came to a stop, unable to stop the jaw hanging in surprise. “You’re werewolves?”

“Only some of us. Kodlak and the Circle. It’s why he sent me to do this. He wants to be cured before he dies. And I think the twins will want a cure eventually.”

“Are you one?” I nodded. “Why?” she asked, curious rather than accusing.

“I had to undergo the ritual to become a member of the Circle. And there are certain advantages.”

“Have you turned into one?”

“Only the once, just after the ritual, and that was involuntary. I haven’t changed since then as I like some of the benefits, but don’t particularly want to change. I prefer being me.”

“And Aela?”

I paused before replying. “She has taken to the blood and I know she enjoys going on the hunt. I will not judge her for it. She does not wish for Sovngrade, and I doubt I’ll be going there anyway. But Kodlak does dream of Sovngarde, which is why I’m here now.”

“Will you want a cure in the end?”

“Kodlak wants a cure now. If the twins cure themselves, then I will do the same, to ensure the purity of the Circle, though I’m not sure what Aela wants in the end. It is her decision and no-one can force her to take the cure, though perhaps I can make a convincing argument.”

We had returned to the hunters shack by now, where they offered us some lunch before we departed. The journey back was much like the journey from, slow on horseback but we were unbothered by bandits or wild animals. It was only when approaching the stables that I felt something was… off. Leaving our horses at the stables, we walked up the path to the gates, and it was only there that a guard stopped me.

“Dragonborn, you should head straight to Jorrvaskr.”

I glanced at Lydia, as I just knew something was wrong. “What?” I asked, looking back at the guard.

“There’s been an attack. We tried to stop them, but whoever they were, they came in full force.”

“Thanks for the information,” I said, walking through the gates.

It was utter chaos. Bodies of who I could only assume were Silver Hand littered the road from the gates leading towards the marketplace. Guards had also been injured, as more than one was being tended to by one of the healers from the temple. I noticed Adrianne off the side, leaning against a beam, going straight to her.

“Are you okay?”

She chuckled to herself. “Here’s me trying to be brave. I should have known better.” She was covering a wound on her side. I had a quick look and glanced back at Lydia.

“Think you can heal her?”

“I know a spell that might help. You go on, I’ll help out around here.”

“Find the bastards and kill them, Ragnar. We could have lost a lot of friends today.”

I jogged up the road through the marketplace, noticing one or two bodies, with more guards and civilians receiving healing. Climbing more steps, I noticed a large crowd gathered around the Gildergreen before the steps leading to Jorrvaskr. A few of the Companions were holding station outside, asking me to head straight inside. Aela was waiting by the door, and ran towards me upon seeing me, hugging me tightly.

And she was crying. I’d never seen her cry before. “What’s wrong?”

“You should go inside, Ragnar,” she managed to say before letting me go.

Walking inside, there were more bodies. Mostly Silver Hand, but the Companions hadn’t come out unscathed either. I noticed Athis and Nadja on the ground, tending to their wounds, but it was the other body which gained my attention, noticing a visibly upset Farkas on the ground next to it. Vilkas noticed me approach, rose tall and approached me, a look in his eye that near enough had me reaching for my sword.

“Where have you been?” he growled.

“Kodlak sent me…” I trailed off. What did it matter now? I brushed past Vilkas and took a knee next to Farkas. The old man’s eyes were still open, but life had long since disappeared. The blood had stopped flowing, but it was pooled on the ground underneath us. His body… I forced myself not to look away. “What happened?” I finally asked.

Vilkas took a knee next to me. “The Silver Hand. They finally found enough courage to attack Jorrvaskr. We fought them off, but…”

“Did any get away?”

“Yes, and they made off with all our fragments of Wuuthrad. But you and I are going to reclaim them.”

“Do you know where their headquarters are?”

“Aye, Aela believes she has the location.”

“Then we leave at dawn.”

“We will bring the battle to their chief camp. There will be none left living to tell their stories. Only songs of Jorrvaskr will be sung. We will avenge Kodlak and they know will terror before the end.”

Vilkas told no lies. He was absolutely right in what we would do. But the revelation behind the Silver Hand was the biggest gut punch I would suffer since returning from Markarth to find my wife was gone. It was almost as if my life had come full circle.

Whatever the case, we would leave Whiterun with vengeance in our heart and blood boiling our veins. There would be no mercy and no prisoners. There would be only death.

We would allow the darkness to overcome us.

Chapter 32: Restoration

Vilkas and I left the next morning. The previous night had… It wasn’t quite the worst night of my life, but it was close. Aela was beside herself with grief, and after she’d barely eaten dinner, I took her upstairs to the bedroom, where we cuddled together all night, barely able to share a word.

She was in no state to join Vilkas and I, Lydia already up and waiting as I headed downstairs, offering me breakfast, before letting me know she would look in on Aela, and convince her to at least stay at home that day. I thanked her for the help before heading out.

Vilkas was waiting for me at the stables, already mounted on his horse and rather impatient for me to mount mine. As soon as my arse hit the saddle, he urged his horse on. I caught up in a couple of minutes and simply fell in alongside him. I figured he knew where we were going. I was just going along to kill a lot of people.

Heading east first then north, the further we rode, the more I thought about where we were heading. Vilkas looked at me occasionally and finally offered some explanation. “You might have seen it after attacking Fort Fellhammer. The fort where we are heading is north of that.”

“And what’s your idea? Apart from retrieving the fragments?”

He cast me with a curious eye. “What do you want, Dragonborn?”

“Tear them all apart with my Thu’um.”

“None of them will live after today. This isn’t just vengeance. This will be a warning to any and all who dare think or believe they can usurp us.” He paused before adding, “I wish you and Aela had approached the rest of us. I understand why you felt secrecy was necessary, but…”

“Trust me, Vilkas, this guilt will take a long time to go away.”

“No, my words were harsh, Ragnar. The old man had you doing something that will not only help him, but would eventually help us all. I know my brother has concerns, and we spoke to the old man about it. And we both knew he wanted a cure.” He looked my way again. “You have nothing to feel guilty about. The old man trusted you.”

I did feel a sense of relief at his words, though the guilt would still remain for some time. He had been right in a way. I hadn’t been there to help defend Jorrvaskr. Not only was I a Companion. I was Dragonborn. And I knew just my Thu’um could have turned the tide of battle.           

Turning off the main road, we headed through the snowbound landscape towards the once abandoned fort known as Driftshade Refuge, passing by Fort Fellhammer on the way, noticing a couple of the bodies still lying in the snow, unclaimed and unburied since Aela and I had attacked it. The sun still shone though it was dipping by the time we dismounted and approached the target. I used my bow to take out the sentries, needing no more than one arrow for each of them.

At the entrance, we unsheathed swords. Vilkas looked at me. “For Kodlak, Ragnar.”

“For Kodlak, Vilkas. None shall live beyond this day.”

What happened over the next couple of hours was nothing short of blood-letting. Many of the Silver Hand did stand and fight, though they had no chance of victory, particularly when I unleashed my Thu’um. One or two tried to surrender, but we cut them down where they stood or kneeled. No mercy. No prisoners. They would all die.

The abandoned, crumbling fort was far larger than I imagined, most of it built underground. No room was empty, filled with Silver Hand ready to fight us. More than once Vilkas and I found ourselves outnumbered, but even when we’d taken wounds, we simply fought with renewed ferocity. If we died, so be it, but we would make sure to take most of the bastards with us before the end.

The Silver Hand were, in many ways, prepared for us. They had plenty of warriors, ready to fight and die for their cause. They had wild beasts and a number of traps waiting for the unwary. But in addition to that, they had also captured more werewolves. Vilkas knew none of them, and after releasing one, which attacked us immediately, we had to put the rest down. It was probably the most humane thing to do, rather than leaving them caged up to slowly starve to death.

After leaving a trail of dead bodies behind us, there was always the sense that you were approaching the end. We’d found evidence that one or two of those already dead had been commanders. It appeared the Silver Hand had pulled back to this fort entirely, so we were well and truly wiping them out. Walking up another stairway, Vilkas grabbed my shoulder.

“I think this is it, Ragnar. Through here is the end.”

I sensed the same thing. “What do you think?”

“Kill them all, get the fragments, go home. Those are the only things that matter.”

I opened the door and strolled in, counting one, two, three… six warriors, all of them armoured, ready and waiting for us. I felt Vilkas follow close behind, no doubt holding his great-sword high, ready to strike. Then I met the eyes of the warrior in middle. Tall. Broad. And anyone else would have found him intimidating. I knew him immediately, as much as he knew me.

“Arnbjorn,” I growled.

“You know him?” Vilkas wondered.

“Aye. And what I don’t understand is that he was a werewolf.”

“No longer,” Arnbjorn retorted, “I was found by the Vigilants of Stendarr, who sensed a strength inside me that wasn’t the beast-blood. They helped cure me, and I have since spent many months cleansing Skyrim of your filth. But if you’re wondering about all this?” He grinned, I guess trying to be menacing. “This was all about you, Ragnar. You took everything from me.”

“You chose the blood over your own wife, you fucking idiot. Then you got cured?!”

“I had no choice! I was a dead man otherwise!” he roared, “If she hadn’t met you, she would still be with me. And she wouldn’t be buried under a few feet of dirt.”

That took me aback. “You know?”

He nodded, still glaring. “I have my sources. Everything is your fault, Ragnar. Ever since you killed for that wife of yours. If you’d just stayed out of it, I would still have a wife…”

“Who you couldn’t satisfy,” I stated, unable to stop the smirk, “She needed me for that. You weren’t enough of a man to fulfil all her needs. And trust me on this, Arnbjorn, I definitely made her happy during our time together.” That did the job, as he wasted little time releasing a war cry and striding forward. I used my Thu’um, of course. I doubt he knew I was Dragonborn, but I sent five of the six of them flying. “Vilkas, the rest are yours. Arnbjorn is mine.”

A couple of the warriors were already wounded from being blown into the walls, so Vilkas wouldn’t have too much of a problem. I let Arnbjorn get to his feet, his eyes only for me, as much as mine were only for him. I would like to say it was a long battle, each of us gaining an upper hand at one moment, barely surviving the next, and it ended with an honourable death.

But it was nothing like that. He threw down his sword, and I knew what he wanted. “You carrying any other blade?” I wondered.

“I’m going to kill you with my bare hands, cunt.”

I dropped my sword and shield, and undid my chest armour, dropping that to the ground, watching as he did the same. We were both covered in scars. Then we closed the gap between us. It all happened very quickly. Punches. Elbows. Knees. Kicks. There were no rules. The only thing that mattered was winning. I put my head into his nose, causing it to break and bleed, and that gave me the upper hand. A heel into his knee put him down, and a knee into his jaw put him on his back. He’d got a few hits in on me, but he never thought straight the entire fight, far too angry to make the right decisions.

Leaping on him, I left a couple of punches in his face before wrapping my hands around his neck. As he struggled for breath, I just leaned down close to his face. “Just remember she chose the better man,” I whispered. It angered him, of course, and he almost kicked me off, but I put a knee into his groin, and that took most of the fight out of him.

I watched life drain from his eyes before his head lolled to the side. I kept my hands tight until I was absolutely sure. “He’s dead, Ragnar,” Vilkas said quietly.

“Just making sure he’s dead,” I said, slamming his head into the ground for good measure.

“He’s dead,” he repeated, feeling a hand on my shoulder, “Let him go. At least leave with a little honour intact.” I released him, sitting back on my knees. It was only when I opened my eyes, looking at his body, did I remember that I’d kept my word to Astrid. It was her final request. Kill Arnbjorn. “Take it that was personal?”

Rising to my feet, I met his eyes. “I just remembered that I’ve kept a promise to someone I loved.”

“She’s dead?”

“Aye. It was her final request. Kill him,” I said, gesturing to the body.

After I’d picked up my armour and weapons, Vilkas gathered up the fragments, we had a search for anything else, finding a few coin and jewels, and I found a diary that definitely belonged to Arnbjorn. I put that in my small pack, wanting to read his thoughts at a later date.

It was dark upon leaving the crumbling fort, but we agreed that we’d head straight back to Whiterun. Two warriors on horseback would draw attention, but no-one would be dumb enough to attack us. It was still dark by the time we rode into Whiterun, both of us still wide awake, no doubt running on the adrenaline of battle. Coming to a stop outside my home, Vilkas offered his hand.

“Thank you, Dragonborn.”

“It was for Kodlak, Vilkas.”

“Aye. I’ll give the fragments to Eorlund in the morning. No doubt we’ll have the funeral for Kodlak tonight or tomorrow at the latest.”

“I’ll come up to Jorrvaskr later, or Aela can at least fill me in when I wake up.”

Heading upstairs once inside, I managed to undress quietly, wiping myself down with a towel as I figured I’d have a little blood on me. Sliding under the covers, Aela turned towards me, and I guess I did surprise her, as she did wake up, turning to give her a kiss when I noticed her eyes open.

“Is it done?”

“We got the fragments back.”

“And the Silver Hand?”

“Eliminated, but it’s a long story. I’ll tell you when I wake up later.”

“Want to make love?”

I couldn’t help chuckle. “Though that sounds like a nice way to end the day, I’m beat.”

“In the morning then.”

I kissed her forehead as she snuggled into me and pretty much fell asleep straight away. I still felt a little adrenaline, so needed to feel myself calm down, my mind going at a million miles an hour. I couldn’t help smile to myself at the thought that I’d managed to keep my promise to Astrid. I cared little that I’d fulfilled the contract, as I didn’t give the Brotherhood a second thought. But from time to time I did think about Astrid, as much as I still thought about my wife, as much as I tried not to.

Finally managing to drift off, I’m sure I didn’t actually get that much sleep, feeling I’d barely had a couple of hours before I was gently shaken awake by Aela. Opening my eyes, she smiled down at me as she said it was getting near the middle of the day. I grabbed her hand before she could leave and dragged her under the covers with me. As I was only wearing underwear, it was only a matter of getting her clothes off before I could slide my cock inside her.

We didn’t really share many words over the next few minutes. Only words such as ‘harder’, ‘faster’, ‘yes’, and ‘I love you’. It was only when we had both enjoyed a climax that we lay together naked, Aela pressed against me as always, enjoying the warmth of my body, as I enjoyed the feeling of her soft skin against mine.

“Their leader was someone I knew,” I confessed, “His name was Arnbjorn. He was the estranged husband of Astrid.” I paused before adding, “Everything is my fault. Taking Astrid from him led him down this road. Everything led to Kodlak…”

“Yet from what you told me about your relationship with her, he chose the blood. I thought he was a werewolf?”

“He didn’t share the whole story, but he said he’d been cured. Whether he actually was or not, I guess I’ll never know. But he made sure to blame me for everything, basically saying I ruined his life.”

“Due to his choices.”

“Astrid chose me in the end. That’s the only thing I know.”

She kissed my cheek. “I can understand why,” she whispered in my ear, before turning my head to face her, “And never, never, believe you are responsible for what happened to Kodlak. We all loved that man. None of us failed him. The responsibility lies with the Silver Hand. They started the conflict. You and Vilkas just ended it.”

Though her words did make feel a little better, I still felt guilt. Probably always would, though at least I had avenged his death and kept my word to Astrid. That did make me think briefly of the survivors, wondering if they had made it to Dawnstar. I figured they would surely be aware of my capture, but wouldn’t have a clue if they were aware of my survival. I figured I might get a knock on my door one day. But I wasn’t going to worry about it.

After dressing, we headed downstairs, where food had been left in a pot to keep warm, and I sated my hunger, Aela informing me that, after the funeral that evening, there would be plenty of food and drink as we both mourned the loss but celebrated the life of Kodlak Whitemane.

We did nothing the rest of the day, both of us eventually heading back upstairs to lie together on the bed, both of us quite happy to sit back with a book, though sitting close together, occasionally stopping to have a cuddle. She was still very upset, as though she would never admit it to anyone else, Kodlak had been a father figure to her, and she regretted deeply that some of their last words had been tinged with anger. Like many, she wished their last words had been one of the respect they had for the other, but life was not like that.

Once the sun started to set, we heated some water over the fire so we could wash before dressing in our finest armour, spending a few minutes polishing steel and leather, doing the same with our weapons, as they would also be sheathed and carried to the funeral. Dressed as the finest warrior, the last thing Aela did was paint her face as always, though she had to re-apply it more than once as the tears began again. Each time she needed a hug from the Dragonborn, chuckling to herself that she would be worse during the service itself.

The sun having disappeared over the horizon; we knew it was time to head to Jorrvaskr. Heading outside, the first thing we both noticed was the near silence. The marketplace was already empty, all the stores empty of traders and buyers. Walking up the stairs to the Gildergreen, that too was empty. I shared a glance with Aela, who could only shrug her shoulders.

Heading inside Jorrvaskr, the rest of the Companions were already gathered around the firepit. Food was already cooking on the spit, though no-one dared touch any food nor drink yet. Aela and I shook hands with our friends, and I could feel the sadness emanate from near everyone. I’d never seen Jorrvaskr as sombre, though it was understandable.

The twins took the lead as we headed out of Jorrvaskr and up the steps to the Skyforge. I was surprised to see Jarl Balgruuf and his entourage waiting for us, stepping forward to take each of us by the hand, his other hand on our shoulder, as he offered his condolences. “The Harbinger was a great man. His presence in my city will be missed.”

“You knew him well?” I asked.

“I considered Kodlak a close friend. And I, like everyone, am deeply saddened by his loss. It is a wound to the heart that will take time to heal.”

“Wise words as always, lord.”

Gathering in a couple of lines around the Skyforge, the Jarl asked us to look over the city before the service began. Once we had, he whispered something to Irileth. She stepped forward and yelled, “Extinguish flames!”

Whiterun was surprisingly well lit of an evening, but we watched in silence as every other fire across the city disappeared, until the only light was provided by the Skyforge and the few torches carried by the Companions and the invited guests. I know we were all left in shock as small little fires then started to appear, and the people of Whiterun appeared from everywhere. I couldn’t pick out too many faces, but the torches suggested close to a hundred if not more gathered by the Underforge, all ready to pay their respects. I felt my hand grabbed briefly by Aela. I figured she would be weeping again, gently pulling her closer and wrapping an arm around her.

Turning back to the Skyforge, the Companions lined up to pay their last respect to the Harbinger. Those not of the Circle passed by first before the four remaining Circle members passed by. I wasn’t sure in what order we should pass, and I was surprised when the twins went first, followed by Aela, allowing me the last word. Aela openly wept again as she said her goodbyes, giving her another hug before she left me alone with Kodlak.

Resting a hand on his forearm, I wasn’t exactly sure what I should say. “I failed you,” I finally whispered, “I should have been at your side when they attacked. But I have the heads. I’m not sure how we’ll do it, but I’ll make damn sure your soul is sent to Sovngarde. If that in any way makes up for the fact I failed otherwise, then perhaps you may find it in yourself to forgive me if we ever meet again. My only other regret is that we had so few opportunities to really speak. You had decades of wisdom that I could have used considering who I am now. I have many regrets in my life, but that is one I will carry for the rest of mine.”

Standing in line again, the Circle members at the fore, we all shared a glance. “Who should start?” I asked.

Aela nodded. “I’ll do it,” she said, taking a deep breath before adding, “Before the ancient flame…”

“We grieve,” all the Companions stated in unison.

“At this loss,” Eorlund stated.

“We weep,” the Companions, the Jarl and his entourage, and all of Whiterun echoed below us.

“For the fallen,” Vilkas added.

Eyes fell on me as I walked forward and used my Thu’um to light the pyre. “We shout!” everyone present cried after I’d done the same.

“And for ourselves,” Farkas stated.

“We take our leave,” everyone finished.

The Companions gathered together, where Aela said the Circle would meet in the Underforge before we would all gather in Jorrvaskr for the wake. The civilians slowly started to filter away, though Jarl Balgruuf would remain as an invited guest. Heading to the Underforge, I didn’t quite know what to expect, but I never thought it would descend into the bitter argument between Aela and the twins over the matter of the beast-blood. I knew the pair had their reservations, but I had a feeling their minds were made up.

Vilkas sighed as the argument went around in circles. “Look, Aela, the old man had one wish before he died. And he didn't get it. It's as simple as that.”

“Being moon-born is not so much of a curse as you might think, Vilkas.”

“That's fine for you, and maybe for Ragnar, but he wanted to be clean,” Vilkas explained, “He wanted to meet Ysgramor and know the glories of Sovngarde. But all that was taken from him.”

“And you and Ragnar avenged him,” Aela retorted.

“Kodlak did not care for vengeance,” Farkas added, and I couldn’t help nod in agreement. Aela’s and I quest for vengeance over the death of Skjor had started us down this sorry road in the first place.

“No, Farkas, he didn't,” Vilkas said, “And that's not what this is about. We should be honouring Kodlak, no matter our own thoughts on the blood.”

Aela finally relented. I didn’t blame her as her love for Kodlak would over-ride anything else. “You're right. It's what he wanted, and he deserved to have it.”

“Kodlak used to speak of a way to cleanse his soul, even in death. You know the legends of the Tomb of Ysgramor?” Vilkas wondered.

“’There the souls of the Harbingers will heed the call of northern steel.’ We can't even enter the tomb without Wuuthrad, and it's in pieces, like it has been for a thousand years.”

“Then we speak to Eorlund about putting it back together,” I finally said. The three looked at me in surprise, almost as if they’d forgotten I was there, “I’m not sure how you feel about all this, though you don’t have to explain. Your faces and eyes say everything. But if anyone can put Wuuthrad back together, it’s Eorlund Gray-Mane. I suggest we talk to him tomorrow.”

The three agreed and we finally headed back into Jorrvaskr. Many would have thought it would have been quiet and solemn, but we were warriors not only mourning but celebrating the life of a fallen brother and leader. So there was plenty of food and ale shared, laughter echoed around the hall as many embellished stories were told. Many wanted to hear of my fight against the dragon outside Kynesgrove, as only Aela had been present. I kept to the facts as always, though Aela would butt in occasionally to exaggerate an aspect or two of the fight.

After many hours of eating, drinking, laughing, and yes, the occasional tear, only the Circle remained awake, sat together by the fire pit, still chewing on the cooling meat. The topic of conversation had naturally turned to the blood that flowed through our veins, and what we would do next.

“You got the heads, Ragnar. Did the old man explain how it would work?” Farkas asked.

“No. He simply said that taking their heads would release the curse.”

“Hmmm. Maybe it’s something to do with the tomb?” Aela wondered.

“It’s possible. I’m sure the old man had his ideas. I’d go search through his things but…” Vilkas stated, but trailed off. Then he looked over the three of us. “Who here wants a cure?”

“I accepted the blood because I wanted to be part of the Circle and I could see the benefits. But I am a Nord, and I dream of Sovngarde. I will seek a cure eventually,” Farkas stated.

“I don’t know,” Aela admitted, “You know I have taken to it deeply that others, and I still go hunting now. But my last words with the old man… I am thinking I should simply to honour him.”

The three looked at me. “To be honest, I’ll have that many arguing over my soul I’m not sure there’s a point getting a cure anyway!”

“But seriously?” Vilkas asked.

“Same as Aela. It would honour Kodlak by all of us following his final wish to be clean. The Companions, and definitely the Circle, should not have links to a Daedric prince. But first we figure out a way to send Kodlak to Sovngarde, then we worry about ourselves.”

Back at Breezehome, Aela wanted to end the evening on a positive note, as by the time I’d walked into the bedroom and turned towards her, she’d closed and locked the doors and taken off her top. I raised an eyebrow as her dress followed rather quickly, and after I was disrobed, I was pushed back onto the bed and mounted with what I would consider urgency.

I had a chuckle once the act was done, as all she was worried about was her own orgasm, and it was a good one, as she’d ridden me hard, fast and I’d taken pleasure in just watching her face and body as she stopped herself climaxing too quickly more than once. I think she was all cried out, as once she was done with me, she simply lay down on my chest with a smile on her face, particularly once I started to gently stroke her back. “End this day on a good note,” she whispered.

Heading up to the Skyforge the next morning, the four Circle members approached Eorlund about reforming Wuuthrad. He agreed immediately but revealed a secret at the same time. “There is another piece that Kodlak always kept close to himself. Would one of you be willing to go to his chambers and bring it back for me? I'm not sure I'm the best one to go through his things.”

For some reason, all eyes turned to me. “Kodlak spoke highly of you from the day you walked through the doors,” Vilkas stated, “And, to be honest, none of us would feel…”

“I understand,” I stated.

Walking the long hallways towards Kodlak’s room felt like one of the longest of my life. Opening the doors, I immediately saw little reminders of the man everywhere. The chair where he was sat more often than not. The last book he had been reading. Trophies he had told long stories about. The bedroom was the same, and I felt like an intruder.

It took a bit of searching but I eventually found the piece of Wuuthrad, but after pocketing that, my eyes fell upon what looked like some sort of diary or journal. If he’d been alive, I would never have even considered reading it, but since he had now passed, I did wonder if he’d given any private thoughts to the cure. Feeling my heart beat a little faster, I picked up the journal and started to flip through the pages.

In my dream, I see the line of Harbingers start with Ysgramor. Each of them ascends to Sovngarde, until we come to Terrfyg, who first turned us to the ways of the beast. He tries to enter Sovngarde, but before he can even approach Tsun, he is set upon by a great wolf, who pulls him into the Hunting Grounds, where Hircine laughs with welcoming arms.  

Terrfyg seems regretful, but also eager to join Hircine after a lifetime of service as a beast.  

Then I see every next Harbinger turn away from Sovngarde and enter the Hunting Grounds of their own accord. Until it comes to me, and I see great Tsun on the misty horizon, beckoning me. It appears I have a choice. And then, at my side, a stranger I had not seen before. As I look into his eyes, we turn to see the same wolf who dragged away Terrfyg, and he and I draw weapons together.  

I realize this is only a dream, but a strong enough dream to inspire a man like me to take to writing, so it must be of some import.

The journal speaks mostly of his trouble with the blood that flowed through his veins, and his thoughts on the Companions of the Circle. He admits to wanting a cure, and it’s no surprise that Farkas and Vilkas feel the same as he. As for Aela, he was aware she had taken to the blood, as had Skjor.

While Vilkas was confiding, through the shadows of Jorrvaskr, I saw a newcomer approach, who wished to join our numbers. It was the stranger from my dream, the one who would stand with me against the beast. Vilkas began speaking obliquely, not wishing to air our problems in front of our guest, and I had to be doubly cautious to not reveal anything of our secrets to the newcomer while also not revealing the details of my dream to Vilkas. I don't know how the politicians deal with these sorts of machinations daily.  

In any case, I've sent Vilkas to test the newcomer. We'll see if Ragnar is truly the great warrior I dreamt of.

I didn’t particularly believe in premonitions, and didn’t pay much attention to my dreams, but perhaps it was the gods themselves informing Kodlak of my arrival? I did wonder why he had been so ready to accept me into the Companions, and while we had not conversed as often as I’d wished, I had felt an immediate… closeness, for want of a better word, that I found surprising, but also comforting in a way.

I'm amazed that Aela thinks she can keep a secret among this drunken rabble. Especially with the loss of Skjor (my heart aches), emotions are fraying, and the walls of discretion are the first to fall.  

Apparently she and Ragnar are waging their own separate war against the Silver Hand, in retaliation for Skjor's death. Their hearts are noble, but the course of vengeance is running hot, and I fear the counterstroke that may come if they do not rein in their fury.  

Ragnar shows valour, though, even in this more underhanded time. We have not had cause to speak much, and that is something I deeply regret. I have high hopes for Ragnar destiny, as I realized that Ragnar appearance in my dream may indeed mark Ragnar as the Harbinger to succeed me.

I have received few dreams over the course of my life, but when they come, I have learned to trust them. I have also learned to trust the instincts of my heart, which tells me that Ragnar can carry the Companions legacy as truly as any residing in Jorrvaskr, especially with the loss of Skjor. Aela is too solitary, Vilkas too fiery, and Farkas too kind-hearted. Only Ragnar stands as a true warrior who can keep a still mind amidst these burning hearts.  

I will not speak to Ragnar of any of this, though. It is too much to burden another with. My hope is that Ragnar and I can keep counsel over the coming years, that I can impart the wisdom of the Harbingers. All things in time. Firstly, I will seek Ragnar assistance in the matter of the witches of Glenmoril. It would appear that our path to the cure is not without some poetic justice for the tricksters who first cursed us.

I find no shame in admitting that I placed the journal next to me and wept, wishing he had been open with me about his thoughts. I’m not sure if it would have changed anything, but maybe, just maybe, everything that happened could have somehow been prevented.

I must have been a while as Aela eventually appeared in the doorway. Taking a seat beside me, she wrapped her arms around me and pulled me tight to her. “About time you let it go,” she said.

“It’s not just that. I found this,” I replied, gesturing to the journal.

“He kept a diary?”

“Aye. It makes for some interesting reading. Though I’m not sure…”

“I don’t want to read it. Nor will the twins. Or, at least, we won’t until his soul is laid to rest properly. Keep it to yourself for now. But the piece of Wuuthrad?”

“I’ll take it to Eorlund in a minute.”

Eorlund told me to give him three days and he should have the weapon forged, ready for us to take to the tomb. Having to wait around three days wasn’t going to be fun, so Aela and I agreed that we’d spend the three days away from Whiterun, thinking that heading to the forests around Falkreath to hunt and fuck would be a pleasant way of spending time together.

Lydia understood why Aela and I wanted to go alone, and though I knew she was a little disappointed, she made no argument, simply wishing us a good time. Collecting our horses from the stables, we took our time riding east then south, not even hunting before it was time to make camp. We found a clearing within the forest, Aela putting up the tent as I gathered wood to make a fire. There was enough light that we could have a quick hunt for dinner, and eventually managed to snag a rabbit to eat.

Both of us had brought along enough ale for us to be merry, and if anyone had stumbled our campsite that night, they’d have heard plenty of laughter. At least to begin with. A little later, they’d have heard a lot of different noises. Knowing absolutely no-one was around, Aela wanted everything that night, eventually making love by the side of the fire, both of us looking up at the stars as she rode me to at least a trio of climaxes.

Under the furs once it grew too cold, Aela asked the question that had definitely been on her mind all day. “Were you serious about getting a cure soon?”

“I’m serious about a cure but I’m not sure when. Add to that, I’m still not sure how it works.”

“I think one of the twins knows. No doubt they’ll be researching how to do it right now.”

“So while they’re studying, we’re fucking?”

That made her giggle. “Which would you prefer?”

A hand slid down her body towards her sex, her legs opening immediately so I could fondle her. “Well, I could ask you the same question?”

She answered that by rolling me on top of her, my cock sliding inside her easily, burying myself but not moving. I watched her face, the smile broadened, as I slowly started to make love to her. “Ragnar?” she asked quietly.

“Yes?”

“Can I break the promise?”

“Not yet. But I know what you’re thinking. Of course I do.”

“So we’re both thinking but can’t talk about it?” I nodded. “Okay, I can live with that for now.”

We spent the next two days wandering the forests of Falkreath, taking down a couple of deer and elk, agreeing to take them back to Whiterun to sell the hides and meat. Of an evening, we’d enjoy a good meal, a bottle of two of drink, and then make love again. It was certainly the best thing for us, as we were both still wracked by grief and guilt over the death of the old man. I knew the only thing that would help us would be ensuring Kodlak’s spirit was finally sent to Sovngarde.

The time away spent together was enjoyable, but in the back of our minds for the three days was the fact we still had a job to do upon our return. Walking into Jorrvaskr upon our return, the twins were downstairs in their own quarters, the four of us gathering with Vilkas in his room. He and his brother had taken a contract that took them out of Whiterun but not too far away, and they’d released a lot of frustration killing a few wild animals. They made a joke or two as it was easy to figure out what Aela and I had been up to.

Vilkas and Farkas had also been looking into a cure, and it was at the tomb, and we would need to take the heads of the witches I’d killed at Glenmoril Coven. First there was Wuuthrad, the four of us walking up the Skyforge. Eorlund noticed us coming and beckoned us closer, gesturing towards a weapon covered by a cloth.

Once gathered around him, he removed the cloth to reveal the enormous two-sided axe. It was an impressive weapon. “Do you know the history of this weapon?” he asked.

I’m sure Vilkas probably did. I shook my head, as did Aela. “Carried by Ysgramor and his Five Hundred Companions, he killed an unknown number of elves, leading to the establishment of the First Empire. There are numerous stories about what happened to Wuuthrad over the centuries, but what is known is that it was shattered and its pieces were spread across Tamriel, and the Companions have spent much of their time searching for them. This is the first time since the days of the Second Era that all the pieces have been together, thanks to our Shield-Brother here.

‘The flames of a hero can re-forge the shattered.’ The flames of Kodlak shall fuel the rebirth of Wuuthrad. And now it will take you to meet him once more. As the one who bore the fragments, and also as you are the Dragonborn, I think you, Ragnar, should be the one to carry Wuuthrad into battle. The rest of you, prepare to journey to the Tomb of Ysgramor. For Kodlak.”

As he handed me the weapon, I met his eye and nodded. “For Kodlak, Eorlund.”

The four of us headed back to Jorrvaskr to plan. We agreed to leave at daybreak the next day, heading to Windhelm to rest for the night, completing the journey the day after tomorrow. No matter what, we would not return to Jorrvaskr until Kodlak’s spirit was sent to Sovngarde. I don’t think it was a case of ‘Cure him or die trying’, but I knew we would fight the gods themselves if they tried to stop us.

Lydia did ask if we wanted her assistance. I could see she was feeling left out of things, so I promised her that, once we were back from the tomb, the three of us would do something that would involve her too, even if it was just a simple hunt in the forests down south. That put a smile on her face, particularly once I explained what we were doing. She rose with Aela and I the next morning to wish us luck as we mounted our horses, and I made sure I gave her a long hug and a kiss of appreciation before I mounted mine.

Four heavily armed warriors on horseback would be ignored by everyone except the dumbest of bandits, or wild beasts who didn’t want to live past today. With what was to come on our minds, we rode in pairs but conversation was minimal, even between Aela and myself, and we could talk about anything. We made it to Windhelm by nightfall, taking a pair of rooms at Candlehearth Hall, agreeing that we would leave first thing the next morning.

Being as far north as we were, the morning was bitterly cold, with fresh snowfall and the road icy underfoot. All of us wrapped up in thick fur coats, as many layers as possible, particularly once we started to head around the hills towards Winterhold. To the east of us was a bleak landscape of snow and little else. Snow Veil Sanctum was nearby, not that I wanted to visit the place again, though my mind did wander for a brief moment, wondering how all my old friends in Riften were doing.

There were no stables in Winterhold, instead having to leave our horses tied up outside the inn, heading inside to leave a few coins, asking they be looked after while we were away. The College of Winterhold was to the north of the city, but we passed under the bridge, heading north-west, Vilkas now walking with map in hand. Ending up on the bitterly cold shoreline, he pointed to what looked like an ancient cairn across the water. “That’s Ysgramor’s Tomb,” he said.

“Just what we needed. Crossing ice with a good chance of falling in,” Farkas muttered.

I know I wrapped my furs tighter before I took that first tentative step onto the ice. It seemed to take hours to cross to the other shore, but we all made it without falling in, only arriving with slightly wet feet. The tomb looked like it had been abandoned for centuries, though the door leading inside was unlocked. We were met by a statue of Ysgramor, all four of us taking a moment in front of it.

“This is the resting place of Ysgramor. And his most trusted generals. You should be careful, Ragnar,” Vilkas stated. I gave him a look as there was something his tone that told me… He noticed my glance, shook his head. “Kodlak was right. I let vengeance rule my heart. I regret nothing of what we did at Driftshade. But I can't go any further with my mind fogged or my heart grieved.”

“I did the same things, and feel the safe grief.”

He lay a hand on my shoulder. “You helped your Shield-Sister in her battle against the Silver Hand as vengeance for the murder of our brother, Skjor. And you assisted your Shield-Brother in our battle at Driftshade. It was we that sought vengeance, not yourself, Ragnar. I’m not saying you just went along with us, but it was we that made the decision.”

Telling me what to do, I took the enormous axe from my back and placed it in the hands of the statue. It was a perfect fit, and a hidden doorway opened out of sight. Each of us shared the handshake of a warrior with Vilkas before we departed, and he wished us good luck. His final words of advice were about what we would face. For once, we wouldn’t face draugr. Instead, he believed we would face the spirits of Companions past, who would wish to test if we were worthy of heading to the tomb of Ysgramor himself.

I’d fought ghosts once or twice, and it was always a strange sensation, particularly when sticking your sword through them, as it felt like nothing, but they would quickly blink out of existence. The tomb was all others, with long halls of the dead, and one or two throne rooms. The Companion ghosts would only appear once our presence was known, and with little chance of sneaking through, we walked into each chamber armed and ready to fight.

The trio of Aela, Farkas and myself only ended once we came upon a door covered in webbing, Farkas pulled me aside to explain he couldn’t go on. “Ever since Dustman's Cairn, the big crawly ones have been too much for me. Everyone has his weakness, and this one is mine.”

“I don’t like them either,” I admitted.

“That is true, but you are also Dragonborn, and you can use your Voice to kill them. Trust me, you don’t want me by your side, frozen in fear.”

“Once the job is done, we’ll come get you so you can at least see the tomb,” Aela offered. Farkas was happy with that before he turned and headed back to the entrance.

“Just like old times,” I said, “Ready?”

Aela said she was, and we put away our weapons, each of us dual casting flames to clear the webbing, then attack the spiders that were lying in wait. I hated them as much as Farkas, and the smell of burned spider bodies was enough to make one gag, but Aela and I made our way forward rather easily. Spiders hated flames, and always retreated when someone used flames against them. The only concern was when the usual giant spider appeared from a hole in the ceiling high above. I kept using flames as Aela took out her bow, and we managed to kill it quickly.

After the spiders, there was another long hall reminiscent of those leaning to a locked door, but instead, there was a simple lever to pull, which opened a gate nearby. This led to one final room, filled with more ghosts, before we climbed a set of steps and into the tomb of Ysgramor.

It was there that we found the spirit of Kodlak Whitemane, warming his hands by a fire. He glanced at Aela and I as we approached. “Greetings, Shield-Brother.”

“What are you doing here, Kodlak? I thought… Well, none of us were sure what would have happened to you.”

“My fellow Harbingers and I have been warming ourselves here. Trying to evade Hircine.”

I glanced at Aela. “How many do you see?”

“Three. Why?”

“I only see Kodlak.”

“You see only me because your heart knows only me as the Companions leader. I'd wager old Vignar could see half a dozen of my predecessors. And I see them all. The ones in Sovngarde. The ones trapped with me in Hircine's realm. And they all see you. You've brought honour to the name of the Companions. We won't soon forget it.”

“Vilkas said you can still be cured.”

“Did he now? I can only hope. You still have the witches' heads?”

“I did, precisely for this reason.”

“Excellent. Throw one of them into the fire. It will release their magic, for me at least.”

I did so, and the spirit of the beast linked to Kodlak was split apart. Of course, the damned thing then tried to attack Aela and I, for some reason leaving Kodlak alone. It was a ferocious bastard, far larger than a normal wolf, and even larger than a werewolf, but with Aela hanging back with her bow, and myself up close and personal, we eventually killed the spirit, ensuring Kodlak was now free.

As it disappeared, Kodlak approached Aela and I. “And so slain the beast inside of me. I thank you for this gift, Ragnar.”

“It makes up for my failures, Harbinger.”

“No, there was no failure. You carried out your instructions as I asked. However, the other Harbingers remain trapped by Hircine. Perhaps from Sovngarde, the rest of the heroes of old can aid me in their rescue. The Harrowing of the Hunting Grounds. It would be a battle of such triumph.”

“I don’t wish to speak for everyone, but I know I’d stand by your side, armed and ready.”

I noticed the grin form. “And perhaps someday, you'll join us in that battle, Ragnar. But for today, return to Jorrvaskr. Triumph in your victory. And lead the Companions to further glory.”

He offered his hand, and the gods allowed me the feeling of his hand grasping my forearm, as much as my hand grasped his. A simple nod, and it was as if an exchange was made. After a final goodbye to Aela, he stood back and simply disappeared.

“Goodbye, Harbinger,” Aela said quietly.

“His presence will be missed.”

She waited a moment before asking, “Did I hear right? Did he say you were to lead the Companions?”

“What do you think of that?”

“You’re the Dragonborn, Ragnar. It’s a perfect fit, and you’ve already proven yourself to all of us. With a cure for all of us now on the horizon, perhaps you can lead us to a new dawn…”

We had a quick look around the tomb, and I found a shield. It felt enchanted, and after checking a journal, Aela said it was the Shield of Ysgramor himself. She added that, as Harbinger, it would be my right to wield the shield in his name, so I was happy to take it. Finding a secret exit, we gathered Vilkas and Farkas, giving them time to look around the tomb too, before the four of us headed out, our grief diminished, pride in having saved Kodlak and sent him to Sovngarde, to start our long journey back to Whiterun.

Chapter 33: The Damned Thalmor

Arriving back in Whiterun, Aela and I celebrated the fact I was now Harbinger in the only way we knew. We invited Lydia into our bedroom, and proceeded to have the sort of threesome one could only dream about. I knew Aela was rather open-minded about being with women, as she had admitted to one or two romances with members of the same sex, but it was a real sight when Lydia quite happily spent quite a lot of time with her mouth at Aela’s pussy as I pounded her from behind. It was only when we were lying back afterwards, the three of us exhausted after at least a couple of hours of fucking, when she admitted that was her first time with a woman.

“Never would have guessed,” Aela joked.

“I just thought of what Ragnar does to me, and applied it to you.”

“I take it that wasn’t your first threesome though?” Aela wondered, “You seemed very open minded.”

“I’ve had two men once before. A couple of city guard. To be honest, I much preferred this time. Ragnar is more than enough with that cock of his.”

“It is wonderful, isn’t it?”

I cleared my throat. “If you two are happy talking about me as if I’m not here…”

“Oh please, as if your ego isn’t already twice the size of this house,” Aela mocked.

“And I’m only being honest, Ragnar. The only reason you haven’t had my arse yet is that it is much bigger than what I’ve had before.”

“Trust me on this, Lydia, you want him there. He’ll be gentle when you want, but when you let him off the leash, by Talos, he’ll ruin you but you’ll love every single second. I never thought I could climax from anal until I met Ragnar. Now… Well, I think I’ll be asking for it instead of him.”

Lydia grabbed my chin so I looked at her. “We’re trying it very soon, Ragnar.”

“Why not now?” Aela asked.

“Two reasons. One, I want to feel completely ready for it. And, two, I don’t particularly want an audience for it. No offence.”

“None taken, but I want to hear all about it afterwards.” She paused a moment before asking, “Want to see him fuck me in the arse?”

“Only if you promise to eat me out in return this time.”

Five minutes later, Aela was lying flat on her stomach, head buried between Lydia’s legs, as I was slowly burying myself in that fantastic arse of hers. I locked eyes with Lydia every so often, and I could see her interest rise with each hard thrust into Aela, particularly as the latter was enjoying it quite a lot. Aela could only take so much before she needed to change position, flipping onto her back, spreading and raising her legs. Lydia moved so she could straddle her face and hold Aela’s legs as I got into position too. I was soon pounding Aela while I could give Lydia some attention at the same time, though she was thoroughly enjoying what Aela was doing with her tongue at the same time.

Aela wasn’t lying about climaxing, as she came hard as I pounded her, so much so that I felt a hand pressed to my stomach to stop me, though she didn’t ask me to pull out. Instead, she refocused on Lydia, bringing her to quite the climax, enough that she had to lean forward against me for support. She eventually sat back, leaving Aela in a ball underneath me, resuming what I was doing, though not as hard as before.

“Where do you want to cum?” she asked when I was looking ready to finish.

“I want to make a mess on your face.”

I wanted to do it, and she loved it when I did too. She laughed away as she got down on her knees on the floor, and Lydia wasted no time kneeling beside her. Standing in front of them, it didn’t take long for me to stroke myself to climax, leaving a mess over both their faces, which they then proceeded to lick off each other. I could only stand and watch, and I think the only reason they didn’t blow me is the fact it had been inside Aela’s butt.

Back under the furs a little later, I started to chuckle. “Is this going to be the life of the Harbinger going forward, Aela?”

She cuddled into me a little tighter. “Maybe. But this was just a treat from me and Lydia for now.”

Lydia was to my other side, as there was no doubt she was staying the night too. “We’ll definitely have to do this again though.”

“I’ll have to thank Jarl Balgruuf for his choice of housecarl. Especially one so willing to take a load on the face, and more than likely take it up the arse.”

“More than likely? Try definitely, Ragnar.” She paused, before asking hopefully, “Tomorrow night?”

“Sure, if that’s okay with…”

“It’s fine, Ragnar. I might just listen in and use one of my toys.”

The next morning, it was time to introduce myself as the new Harbinger to everyone else. Farkas and Vilkas were ready for my arrival, and assembled everyone in the training yard to the rear of the hall. The first thing we told everyone was the success of the mission, and the fact Kodlak was now at rest, his spirit in Sovngarde. We did not reveal the whole truth of the Circle, as the four of us agreed the reaction would likely be negative. Farkas and Vilkas were eager for a cure, and I had already offered to go with them if they wanted to do it soon. Aela was still in two minds, though assumed she too would eventually seek a cure.

I explained that the Kodlak’s room would remain as it was, a shrine to the man, and to all Harbingers who came before him. The ante-room would still be used for meetings and private conversations, but I confessed that I would not require the room, and would not sleep easily in it anyway. Everyone understood and thought it was a fine idea.

It was a relief that no-one was unhappy that I was now Harbinger, most agreeing with the sentiment that having the Dragonborn as Harbinger would be a boon for the organisation. I didn’t have to say too much about what I expected, keeping it simple, that how they performed for Kodlak is how I expected them to continue to perform. There was no disgruntlement as I reminded them of the expectations, and I was left thinking I’d never have to say anything regarding said expectations again. Everyone knew what to do, and considering the four Circle members were now considering a cure of the beast-blood flowing through us, I could only believe the Companions would restore its honour and had a brighter future as a guild.

I was ready to just settle into my role as Harbinger. Vilkas and Farkas readily offered their services, though I insisted they just keep doing whatever they were doing for Kodlak, but I would always be willing to lend an ear to their problems, even give advice, but admitted they were just as experienced as I when it came to matters of the sword and shield.

As for Aela, I think she just loved me that little bit more. At heart, I still didn’t consider myself a good man. I’d done far too much to ever remove some of the stains on my soul. But she did help me feel better about myself at times. Lydia wasn’t as aware of my past, though I knew I’d eventually confess everything. After a few drinks that evening with the Companions, I returned home, Aela letting me know that she would stay at Jorrvaskr, as she knew Lydia wanted me alone that night.

If Lydia didn’t enjoy herself between me walking through the front door, and whenever we finally fell asleep sometime the next morning, then I have no idea how to judge a woman’s reaction. We didn’t just go straight into what we both wanted. I think she really liked me, possibly even loved me, but we spent a long time just enjoying the presence of the other before we even began to make love. She had an almost perfect body, thankfully not a reminder of those that I had lost, but she certainly had an athleticism and flexibility I knew I would appreciate the longer we were together.

When it came to the whole point of the evening, she was very nervous, but after a few minutes, she absolutely loved it. I remained gentle for as long as she wanted, but the sight of her underneath me, legs spread wide, face showing nothing but pleasure as I slowly fucked her arse… I have many memories I hold in my mind, and that was simply another picture to add. And when she finally let me off the leash, she definitely enjoyed it, and I had one of the best climaxes I could remember.

Making love again after waking the next morning, she did let slip how she felt about me, and near enough ran out of the room straight away when my mouth opened a couple of times but I didn’t say anything. I managed to hold onto her before she could flee. I admitted to being flattered, told her that I adored her in return, but that I loved Aela. I then added more of my own history, and the relationships I’d been in before.

“So you’ve had relationships like this before?” she wondered, a little taken aback by my history, or so I thought.

“Aye. So, while I’m not saying this can’t continue, as I want this to continue, while I like you, Lydia, and I do like you a lot…”

“Maybe I’m just being foolish,” she said quietly.

I lifted her chin with a finger and gave her a gentle kiss. “Love is never foolish. As I said, I adore you, Lydia. Already you have made my life so much better. I enjoy your company, inside and outside of the bedroom, and I hope you are by my side for many years to come.”

“But you don’t love me?”

I could only smile. “Maybe there are feelings I choose to keep buried, simply because I don’t want to deal with the fact I am in love two women again?” She smiled before I added, “I will admit to you, though. Aela and I won’t talk about it, not yet, but I plan on marrying her one day in the future, and I want a family with her.”

“But you will, and she will, allow me to be with you too?”

“Maybe. Maybe not. I don’t know, we haven’t discussed what we both clearly want, though I know we both think about it. But I won’t lie. I really like what we already share.”

“Me too. So would you like this to continue?”

“Absolutely! I have had a pair of Nord goddesses before. They were different to you and Aela, but I now have two again. And, no, I definitely don’t want our relationship to stop.”

“I’m not sure I could handle it stopping now. Like Aela told me, you’re very addictive.”

“Then, like with Aela, perhaps not think too far into the future. Let’s enjoy the here and now.”

We sealed our possible agreement with some more lovemaking, Lydia now having no problem with saying she loved me as we made some of the most passionate love since we started our physical relationship. I had a thought when I came inside her again that she was probably more than capable of carrying my child too. I wondered if she would ever consider it. It was a conversation for another time.

Finally leaving the bedroom, Lydia was quite content cooking breakfast, wearing nothing at all in front of me as I sat down, still naked as well. I couldn’t help run my eyes up and down her body. Even her back was exquisite, and I gained a real appreciate of her legs and her arse, unable to stop myself from leaning forward and giving the latter of squeeze or gentle slap. She laughed as I did so, and happily sat on my lap as breakfast cooked, spending plenty of time kissing before we really needed to think about eating.

Dressing a little later, we wandered up to Jorrvaskr, finding Aela in her quarters. She took one look at us and burst into laughter. “I gather Lydia enjoyed herself, Ragnar?”

“We’re doing that together, Aela,” Lydia gushed, “I want to see him with you again, and I want you to watch him with me.”

“Deal!” Aela then surprised me by stepping forward and embracing her. “And I’m glad you enjoyed it. As far as I’m concerned, Ragnar is ours. The three of us will make this work.” Aela then glanced at me, and no doubt my face was priceless, as she stepped back. “Your reaction is amusing, Ragnar.”

“I just thought…”

“You love me, yes?” I nodded. “And Lydia?”

“I adore her.”

“You mean you love her.”

I glanced at Lydia, who was now blushing again, before meeting Aela’s eyes. “It’s…” I trailed off and sighed. “I’ve been down this road before, and it’s not worked. Or something went wrong. Lydia and I have agreed that, no matter what, we are enjoying what we share. Let’s leave it at that for now.”

“Lydia?” Aela asked.

“He knows how I feel about him. And I know, deep down, he feels the same way. But he’s also told me about his past, and his previous lovers, and… his wife… He may never say those words, but there’s no doubt he does feel the same way. It’s all in the eyes. They say what I want to know.”

Aela looked at me again. “So, Harbinger, what’s the plan?”

“Honestly, I have no idea. The Companions can run itself, so I’m left wondering what I do…”

“Do what you’ve always done. But you are Dragonborn. Have you heard from Delphine?”

“Not yet. She’s just up in Riverwood, so I could ride there if I wanted, but she said that she’d be in contact once she had news. I’m content to wait around until she sends word.”

I’ll admit, life was pretty good for a few days, if not a couple of weeks. Despite being Harbinger, I took on a contract or two, enjoying a good fight with a group of bandits that had moved into an abandoned fort west of Whiterun, and another job where I helped a citizen of Whiterun retrieve something that had been stolen. That concerned me, thinking the Thieves Guild were responsible, but in the end, it was another group of bandits targeting the citizen due to not being a Nord. I took delight in putting them down, as the citizen was someone I considered a friend.

As for my personal life, well, I don’t think it could have been better. I never went to sleep without having my dick sucked, or having eaten some pussy, or fucked either Aela or Lydia, or both of them, in all three holes. Some nights it would just be Aela or Lydia. Some nights it would be the three of us. Lydia had discovered a real enjoyment for anal, and I’m not exaggerating. She wanted it nearly each time we were together. As for Aela, there was no doubt she thought about the things I thought about. Marriage. Children. A cure, and a future. We talked about such things in abstract terms nearly every night. We were fooling each other by not talking about it bluntly, but I assured her, once the Dragon Crisis was over, we would discuss everything the very next night.

I asked her about Lydia, and how her involvement in our life would impact us. Aela insisted that she would always be a part of both our lives, and she would never deny Lydia the opportunity to be with me, and she knew I had endless affection for her in return. In the end, she assured me that it would all work out in the end, and that she liked Lydia quite a lot too, so while she might have the occasional pang of jealousy, the over-riding emotion was one of happiness and enjoyment in the lives we shared as a trio.

Around two weeks after sending Kodlak’s soul to Sovngarde and my elevation to Harbinger, a courier walked into Jorrvaskr, looking for me. After handing me the letter, giving him a couple of coin in return, I read its contents and wasn’t surprised to see it was from Delphine. The good news was that she had put together a plan, and asked me to head to Riverwood immediately.

Aela and Lydia both joined me for the ride to Riverwood, both joking about another night spent with the older woman. I retorted, stating with age came experience, and that she’d certainly shown me a thing or two. That made both of them fall silent for a moment before they started to suggest certain things we could do together. Riding with an erection is not very comfortable.

Delphine was surprised to see me so quickly, likely believing I was busy with other things. She had been busy fulfilling the innkeeper act, but once I appeared, she asked me to join her in the hidden basement. Aela and Lydia stayed upstairs, though there were more jokes about me not behaving once out of sight.

“They were not jealous?” she asked once we were at the table.

“No. Why would they be?” Delphine had no answer to that, and could only shrug. “Do you regret it?”

“Not at all.”

“Would you like it to happen again?”

“Honestly?” I nodded. “I’ve thought about it quite a bit.” She leaned forward, adding quietly, “I definitely think about it when I masturbate.”

“So you masturbate, Delphine? Well, I learn something new every day. But we can discuss all this later. What’s your plan?”

She started to laugh, no doubt wanting to say something else about what we’d done, but cleared her throat and the smile disappeared. “I figured out how we’re going to get you into the Thalmor Embassy.”

“Just me? What about my friends?”

“No, only you, Ragnar. While they wouldn’t know my face, I’d definitely attract attention. And, to be honest, I’d want to kill every bastard inside. And the fewer people heading inside, the better, so your friends should stay in Whiterun. Safer for all.”

“Okay, you’re the one planning all this, and I trust you, so we’ll do it your way. How do I get inside?”

The fact I said I trusted her made the smile return for a brief moment. “The Thalmor ambassador, Elenwen, regularly throws parties where the rich and connected cosy up to the Thalmor. I can get you into one of these parties. Once you're inside the Embassy, you get away and find Elenwen's secret files. I have a contact inside the Embassy. He's not up for this kind of high-risk mission, but he can help you. His name's Malborn. Wood elf, plenty of reason to hate the Thalmor. You can trust him. I'll get word to him to meet you in Solitude, at the Winking Skeever. You know it?”

“Aye. I’ve stayed there a few times.”

“While you're doing that, I'll work on getting you an invitation to Elenwen's little party. I’ve been waiting until the moment I knew she would be having another. Meet me at the Solitude stables after you've arranged things with Malborn. Any questions?”

“When’s the party?”

“Four days from now, so you’d better move fast.”

“Any idea of the number of Thalmor inside?”

“Malborn can give a rough estimate, but you’ll be looking at a regiment of soldiers at the very least. Best you do the job as silently as possible. You might be Dragonborn, but you can still bleed like a man.”

“Good point. Considering my past, I’m sure I can get through without too much hassle.”

“You sound confident. Good. The embassy is one of the most heavily guarded places in Skyrim. The Thalmor hate the Nords as much as we hate them. Giving them a bloody nose will make my year.”

“Guess I should head back to Whiterun and get things organised.”

“I understand you’re now the Harbinger?” I nodded. “That’s good cover, even if you don’t look at it like that. But you do realise you will soon draw attention from everyone?”

“I know. I’ll deal with it when it comes.”

I was ready to go, simply giving her a nod, when she said, “Before you go, Ragnar…”

Turning around, Delphine walked around the desk and perched herself back against the table. “Would you care to remain here for a little while?” She sat up on the desk, hiked up her dress and removed her panties, throwing them towards me. “I was wondering if…”

“Yes. Definitely yes.”

My eager response caused the smile to return. “Really?”

“Delphine, putting it bluntly, you are a great fuck,” I replied, already unbuckling my belt as I walked towards her.

Her kiss was as good as I remembered, but like hell was I going to fuck her while she was still clothed, making her laugh as I removed her dress then her bra. I was going to stay at least partly dressed, and pulled her forward towards me as I slid my cock inside her. She bit my chest as I did, trying to stifle the loud moan she wanted to make.

Then, to put it simply, we just fucked. It was fantastic. Delphine definitely loved it. I enjoyed myself too. She eventually had to lie back on the table, my hands wrapped around her thighs, as I just pounded her. Eventually moving one hand to fondle her clit, she must have been turned on the moment she saw me, as making her orgasm didn’t take too long. I kept fucking her through it, then made her laugh even more when I pulled out and came on her. She looked down to see thick ropes of cum stretching from the hair above her pussy to her breast. “By Talos, Ragnar, how much do you unload?”

I managed to find a towel so she could wipe herself down, eventually sitting up so we could share another kiss. Leaning her head against my chest, she said, “I’m going to want it again, you know?”

“After I hit the embassy, wait for me at the Winking Skeever. We’ll spend the night there before heading back here.”

She looked up, another smile. “You’re serious?”

“It’s just sex, Delphine. Aela and Lydia understand and certainly don’t mind.”

“And you seriously don’t mind the age gap?”

I kissed her again before replying. “When I’m hard and my cock is inside you, does age really matter?”

“Well, all I know is that I’m being well fucked by both the Dragonborn and one very handsome young man. God, all this talk…” She looked down and grabbed my cock, dragging me towards her. “Good thing it helps keep you ready to go.”

I walked upstairs about half an hour later. Delphine tried to be quiet, but I’m sure Aela and Lydia knew what I was doing. Orgnar didn’t say anything, and I still didn’t know their exact relationship. I think he just worked for Delphine, ran the bar as she looked after the rest of the place. Once outside, ready to mount our horses, the jokes began again.

“She’s old enough to be your mother, Ragnar!” Lydia exclaimed.

“Probably older, to be honest,” Aela added. She gave me a knowing look, as I’d told her, though Lydia was in the dark about her age.

“Good body for a woman her age, I guess,” Lydia said.

“And it sounds like she definitely enjoys what Ragnar gives her. Still tight and wet, Ragnar?”

“Oh, definitely. And she’s very flexible too. Fantastic arse,” I stated, looking at them with a smirk, before I asked, “Do either of you mind?”

Aela shrugged. “It’s just sex, and it’s clearly helping the relationship you two require to help solve the dragon issue.”

“I can’t really complain either,” Lydia added.

“What’s the plan?” Aela wondered.

I told them what Delphine had explained to me. They were disappointed to hear I would be heading to Solitude alone, but also understood the reason to keep numbers few, and definitely understood the reason why I would be infiltrating alone. They knew my experience as a thief would definitely come in handy, and they were honest that both would probably be distracting once we were behind enemy lines. I needed a clear mind to ensure I came out of it alive.

Leaving the next morning, after a night of fun with Aela and Lydia, I knew it would be a two-day ride to Solitude, choosing to stop in Morthal along the way. A bit out of the way, but I didn’t particularly want to camp out in the wilderness. It was dusk by the time I made it to Morthal, having remained unbothered most of the way. There was still an unsettling air to the city, but I just headed straight to the inn, grabbed a meal, enjoyed a couple of tankards, and headed to bed.

Completing the journey to Solitude the next day, I made it to the stables by the afternoon, and wasted little time heading through the gates and towards the Winking Skeever. I ordered some food and a drink, taking a seat at a table in the corner so I could watch the door. Looking around, I noticed no Bosmer sat down nor hanging around, and despite keeping watch most of the night, listening to the Breton singer, who I think was the same as before, I went to bed without any sign of Malborn.

It was lunchtime the next day before Malborn finally made an appearance. I was seated at the same table as the night before, now at least with a couple of books to stem the boredom. He sat down without invitation, and the first thing I noticed was the fact he was nervous as hell, his eyes darting all over the place before they finally rested on me. “I was expecting someone… different.”

“How do you mean?”

“Doesn’t matter. Here's the deal. I can smuggle some equipment into the Embassy for you. Don't plan on bringing anything else with you. The Thalmor take security very seriously. Give me what you can't live without, and I'll make sure it gets into the Embassy. The rest is up to you.”

“My armour and a dagger is all I will need. They’re in my room.”

He had a backpack with him, so was able to take what I needed. He let me know that he had received a message from Delphine, and that she was waiting at a nearby farm. I took the hint, gave him half an hour to disappear, before I headed to the farm myself. Delphine was waiting for me, wearing the same leathers, tending one of the horses. I stood a couple of metres back and took her in. For her age, she was a fine looking woman. She must have sensed me watching as she eventually turned around.

I couldn’t help laugh at being caught, but apart from smiling as she walked towards me, she gestured for me to follow her, explaining as we walked. “You met Malborn?”

“Aye. Don’t think I’ve met anyone more nervous. Didn’t mention that to him. Thought he’d have shit himself otherwise.”

“He does have every reason for nerves. His neck is on the line, just like yours, and if or when the Thalmor find out he helped, he’s… well, I’m sure you can imagine.”

“Are we all set?”

She nodded. “I have your invitation to the party. But the only way you're going to get past the guards is if they really believe you're an invited guest. Which means you need to look the part, and not be armed to the teeth.” She picked up a backpack. “In here is the finery you will need to look the part. Probably not what you’re used to, but trust me, you’ll look good.”

Delphine had even gone to the trouble of getting me some soap and water, but she didn’t give me a lot of privacy, enjoying the sight of me naked as I cleaned myself top to bottom. She may have taken a cloth to help me wash certain parts… which led to a little bit of making out… The only thing that stopped us fucking was the fact I needed to go soon, and that she also wanted to trim my hair and beard. She sat me down in a chair, and there was more than one glance at my crotch, as I was nursing at least half an erection. We managed to behave… just…

After I was dressed, Delphine looked me up and down. “Well, I think you’re handsome, but getting past the Thalmor is something else. The clothes suit you.”

“Thanks.”

“Come. The carriage is just up the road. The driver is a friend.”

There were no last minute instructions as I’m sure Delphine trusted me enough to get the job done. Instead, she just gave me quite a long hug, kissed me again, told me to be careful, before I mounted the carriage. I gave her a brief wave before the carriage turned the corner and headed towards the embassy. The ride only took ten minutes or so, pulling up outside the embassy, and my eyes immediately took in the Thalmor patrols, counting how many I could see and possible exit points once the job was done.

Hopping down from the carriage, I leaned against the carriage for a moment, feigning looking for my invitation as I continued to watch and assess. I knew, once inside, one wrong move could end everything. I was confident my past as a thief would come in handy, and I knew I’d lost none of my skills. But the Thalmor were a people even I rarely trifled with. I didn’t particularly like them, but considering the war they’d fought against us, I gave them begrudging respect.

Loitering would only draw attention, so I finally headed towards the pair of Thalmor guards. Some Altmer could be quite tall, but I was pleased to see that I was taller still. I didn’t tower over them, but if they were trying to be intimidating through size alone, it didn’t work with me at least. “Invitation, please.” I handed it over without a word. I watched the eyes take in whatever was written. Delphine had assured me it was legitimate, and it was, as he handed it back. “That’s all in order. You may head in, sir.”

I dipped my head in thanks and walked up the path to the door. I heard a drunk behind me crack one or two jokes, though it didn’t distract anyone else. A guard opened the door into the embassy, and I was immediately hit by the smell of cooking food and the whisper of conversation. I had no idea what to expect inside. Delphine had given one or two thoughts, and she was rather disparaging of those of the Empire, and particularly those of Skyrim, cosying up to the Thalmor. I could see her point.

Before I could leave the entryway, I found myself approached by an Altmer in fine clothes, and a fierce looking face, that immediately softened once she noticed I was looking at her. She offered her hand, which I took, keeping my grip loose. “Welcome. I don't believe we've met. I am Elenwen, the Thalmor Ambassador to Skyrim. And you are...?”

Delphine hadn’t given me a false identity as she figured they’d learn my identity soon enough. “I’m Ragnar. Pleased to meet you.”

“Ah yes. I remember your name from the guest list.” No doubt wondering who I was, considering I’d not had a thing to do with the Thalmor before. “Please, tell me more about yourself. What brings you to this... to Skyrim?”

I was about to say I was from Skyrim, or at least I figured my unknown relatives probably were, but before I could reply, Malborn grabbed her attention, asking about wine or something. That flustered, if not angered her, but she forgot all about asking me anything else, simply asking me to enjoy myself.

Heading into the main room, the one thing I could smell in the room was coin. Lots of coin. Not just traders either. There were at least a couple of lords, and probably more than one thane. The one person that took my eye was someone who I could probably consider an old friend. She eventually noticed me, and although her face gave nothing away, her eyes certainly did. Definite surprise, but there was amusement there too, needing to cover the grin forming by sipping at her wine glass.

Taking a glass from one of the waiters, I made my way towards her, giving her a peck on the cheek. “Maven,” I whispered into her ear.

“What are you doing here, Ragnar?” she asked quietly.

“Business, of course.” She gave me a look, knowing I was talking bullshit. “Do you really want to know?”

“No. But I’ve heard other rumours, about who you are. Can you be honest with me?” I nodded. “Are you really him?”

“I am. That’s why I’m here.”

“Don’t tell me anymore. I don’t want to be involved.” She paused before adding, “But it is good to see you.”

“I would ask about business, but I probably shouldn’t. Is everyone well though?”

“They are. I’ll let them know you are well too. Would you like them to know the truth?”

“Sure, I don’t see a problem with that.”

“Good. Now, if you don’t mind, I’m going to go mingle. I’m sure you understand.”

“I might see you around, Maven.”

I mingled with a few other people before heading towards the bar. Malborn played his part well, though I was left thinking he was far too nervous and would eventually draw attention to himself. He said I needed a distraction so he could escort me into the private area of the embassy. Looking around the room, I noticed someone who would be perfect.

It worked a charm, handing whoever the man was a cup of brandy, and he quickly had the attention of everyone, allowing me to slip into a hall connected to the kitchen. A khajit cook started to complain, but Malborn shut her up quickly. I changed out of my fine clothes into my armour, a little sad to leave the clothes behind. Delphine was right. They were the finest clothes I’d ever worn. Now armed with just a dagger, Malborn led me to another door, stating he would close it once I was through. He didn’t wish me luck or anything, as he probably figured I’d end up caught and he’d end up dead.

There was only one patrol that I heard, and the two soldiers split up. Though I would have preferred to do it without bloodshed, I had no problem actually killing Thalmor, and I was helped by the fact they split up. I killed the one upstairs without a noise, hiding the body in a cupboard, and I had a good snoop around, but I found nothing incriminating. Heading downstairs, I caused a disturbance to ensure the other came to investigate. Killing him was slightly harder, and though noise was made, not enough to attract any attention. Storing the body in another cupboard, I had a look around downstairs, but found nothing again.

I’d seen a second building during my very brief reconnaissance, so headed out into the courtyard, aware there would be a patrol. There were few hiding spots, but I managed to time my movements right, my previous life as a thief coming in handy to ensure I stayed unseen. Slipping inside the door of the other building, I gave many thanks to Nocturnal, as I have no doubt she still had designs on taking my soul upon my death, so would help me until I was dead.

Eavesdropping on another conversation, I had to wait a while before I could move forward unseen, heading straight towards what looked like an office, where I found plenty of evidence, though nothing that tied the Thalmor to the dragons. But I found dossiers on Ulfric Stormcloak, its contents rather disturbing, and also Delphine, unable to stop the smile that formed when it read they had no idea where she was. The third was of Thalmor investigations into the dragon issue, and it appeared they were in the dark as much as we were.

But I needed more, and the screams I heard echo through the building suggested someone was being tortured. I’d heard the same noises when I’d been held in jail myself. Everyone had heard rumours about the Thalmor, and what they were actually up to in Skyrim. While they no doubt did investigate Talos worship, there were darker rumours in regards to the presence. And I think I might find evidence of what they were up to.

Heading down a dark stairway, I could hear voices before there was a cry of pain, more than once, before I heard footsteps and then silence. The Thalmor torturer had disappeared, and though I heard whimpering, I searched for any more information. I found another dossier, this on mentioning someone named Esbern, before I creeped towards the cells. The first one was empty, but the second held a man shackled to the wall.

I recognised him immediately as someone I’d noticed around the Thieves Guild. His name was Etienne. I managed to gain his attention, lifting his blood soaked face. His eyes widened as they met mine, putting a finger to my lips as I began to fiddle with the lock. Breaking it was simple, opening it and crouching down, kneeling down as I quickly broke the shackles.

“Once we’re out, I need to know what you know,” I whispered.

“Of course, boss.”

I couldn’t help smile. “I’m no longer that, but thanks. Quickly, before we’re…”

“There’s a hatch nearby where the Thalmor throw the bodies. Perfect way out."

I should have known my luck wouldn’t hold. No doubt someone had found one of the bodies, that’s why I heard more voices before we’d even left the cell. Unsheathed the dagger, I could see Malborn escorted to the edge of the level above, flanked by at least a trio of Thalmor. One wore the robes of a Justicar, and the voice suggested he was the one who’d been torturing Etienne.

Waiting until the Justicar was in the right position, I flung the dagger at him, unsure if it hit the target as I burst towards the stairway. I really should have just taken the hatch and left Malborn to his fate, but there was a small part of me that thought he should walk away too. By the time I made the top of the stairs, the two Thalmor were armed and ready for me. So I used my Thu’um, enveloping both in flames. Taking the dagger from the chest of the Justicar, I buried the weapon in both of their chests, before grabbing Malborn and dragging him with me. He complained all the way but at least he was alive.

Etienne showed me where the hatch was. The three of us dropped down, and managed to avoid the troll that had obviously been feeding on the bodies. Once outside of the cave, I barely recognised where we were, but I figured finding the road back to Solitude wouldn’t be difficult. Etienne thanked me for his rescue. He didn’t know my whole story but would let everyone know that I was responsible for his rescue. As for Malborn, he was happy to survive but his life in Skyrim was over. He would head to Windhelm, as at least there was no Thalmor presence there. After that, he wasn’t sure. I let him know where I lived, and insisted if he needed help to just send word to me and I would do what I could. He thanked me for that, at least.

Heading to the main road, there was a post with signs pointing which way was which. I turned left and headed back towards Solitude, the sun now starting to set, though I wasn’t worried about walking in the dark, the roads this close to the capital being clear of both idiot bandits and beasts that prowled. It was dark by the time I walked through the gates, heading straight for the Winking Skeever.

I’d reserved the room for the night already, but I was surprised to see Delphine already waiting for me. She led me straight back towards the bar, where after we’d ordered drinks, she asked me a million and one questions about how the operation went. She was just like me, cautious and suspicious, as we sat in the only table in the corner, both of us watching the front door.

“So, what did you learn?” she asked eagerly. I placed the dossiers in front of her, staying silent as she read all four. I knew when she read her own dossier, as it made her smile. The Ulfric dossier no doubt made her frown, and as for the dragon dossier, that made her shoulders slump. But it was the fourth and final dossier that provoked the biggest reaction, looking at me with a broad grin that lit up her face.

“Esbern? He's alive?”

“They were torturing some poor bastard about him.”

She sighed, though I think it was with relief. “I thought the Thalmor must have got him years ago. That crazy old man... Figures the Thalmor would be on his trail, though, if they were trying to figure out what's going on with the dragons.”

“What makes you say that?”

“You mean, aside from wanting to kill every Blade they can get their hands on? Esbern was one of the Blades archivists, back before the Thalmor smashed us in the Great War. He knew everything about the ancient dragon-lore of the Blades. Obsessed with it, really. Nobody paid much attention back then. I guess he wasn't as crazy as we all thought.”

“Okay, he’s the guy we want then. Etienne, the guy they were torturing, kept suggesting an old man hiding out in the Ratway below Riften might be our guy.”

“That’s where I’d go if the innkeeper act fell apart. Given your history, I guess I don’t have to give too much advice?”

“No. I’ll have a word with Brynjolf. He knows everyone around. If Esbern is there, Bryn will know him, even if he’s not using his real name.”

“Just one thing, Ragnar. When you find Esbern, if you think I'm paranoid, you may have some trouble getting him to trust you. Just ask him where he was on the 30th of Frostfall. He'll know what it means.”

“I’ll keep that in mind. Now, what do you think about draining these drinks and heading upstairs?”

“I don’t care about the drinks, Ragnar.”

We were upstairs no more than a minute later. We were both naked no more than a couple of minutes after that. I held her in my arms, running my hands up and down her body, still amazed at how wonderful it was despite her age. If I didn’t know how old she was, I’d have figured her older than me but not by such a significant margin.

Lying her down on the bed, I wasted little time placing my mouth where we both wanted it. Delphine cared little about noise that night, and once we started to properly fuck, everyone in the Winking Skeever would have known what we were doing. She proved her flexibility in many ways that night, and after I’d filled her once, near enough begged me to take her arse. Considering how fine her arse was, for a woman of her age, I took delight in fucking her there too. I think she loved that even more, urging me on before I came and practically passed out next to her.

Waking up the next morning, she was still cuddled into my side, waking up as I watched her sleep. The blush that formed gave me a good chuckle, as I wouldn’t have called what happened the night before intimate, more a… I’m not sure what to call it. Animalistic desire? There were no feelings of love involved, we obviously just enjoyed each other physically. I’ll admit I liked the fact she was so much older, as she definitely showed me a thing or two, and she definitely liked the fact I was so much younger and more than willing to fuck her.

After dressing and heading out towards the stables, she had no further instructions, merely asking me to make sure I got to Esbern and brought him out of Riften safely. I would head back to Whiterun first, gather more supplies, let everyone know I was okay, then head back to Riften.

It would be almost like returning home.

Chapter 34: Good Rats

“You’re going to Riften?” Aela asked as we lay together in bed, the same day I’d returned to Whiterun.

“Aye. An old friend of Delphine is in hiding there. I need to find him before the Thalmor do.”

“Will you need our help?”

Our help would mean her, Lydia and possibly other Companions. I pulled her closer and thanked her for the offer. “It’s appreciated, but no. Considering my past, I’m sure some old friends will be able to point me in the right direction, at least.”

“Will you visit any other old friends?”

“You mean Haelga, Karliah or Ingun?” I felt a nod of her head. “If I run into them, I’ll say hello. But I’m not just going to fuck them because I’m there.”

“I wouldn’t blame you if you did. I’m sure you still have affection for Haelga.”

“I do, and seeing her will bring back a lot of good memories. But I’m going there for a job. Find Esbern, get him out safely, then figure out the next step.”

“And your relationship with Delphine?”

“Purely physical, Aela. Never been with a woman as old as her, but you’ve seen her. She’s rather attractive, and her body is fantastic considering.” I gave her another gentle squeeze. “You’re the one I love. If you don’t want me to, I’ll stop. You know I would in an instant, but you also know I like to spread the… love…”

That made her chuckle, at least. “I’m not jealous, Ragnar, simply curious. If I was, I’m sure you’d realise, and I wouldn’t have to say anything.”

“Well, no. But you know I would in a heartbeat, as I said.”

I wasn’t going to head straight to Riften, wanting to spend at least a day or two in Whiterun, specifically with the Companions, fulfilling what I thought were my requirement as Harbinger. The one thing I’d asked of Vilkas and Farkas was to attract more recruits. I thought the Circle should return to five members, but that as Harbinger, I should be above the Circle, so we needed to elevate two people. The twins agreed, and they had contacts across Skyrim, if not across borders, that might help fill the empty beds in Jorrvaskr.

The next evening, I headed up to Dragonsreach after receiving an invitation from Jarl Balgruuf to join him for dinner. I was surprised at the invitation, and extended the it to both Aela and Lydia, figuring he wouldn’t mind them joining me. Figuring dressing in my armour wouldn’t be the right thing to do, and remembering the fine clothes I’d worn at the embassy, I went shopping during the day, and managed to find a shirt, trousers and coat that were somewhat similar, though didn’t feel as nice against my skin. Aela and Lydia both wore dresses, and I couldn’t help chuckle as Aela complained, though made her smile when I let her know how beautiful she looked. “Still prefer my leathers, and I know you do too,” she stated, but happily took my arm as I led her and Lydia up to the grand hall.

I thought we’d be discussing the dragon crisis and other events across Skyrim, but although the jarl touched on certain subjects, it was simply an opportunity for us to get to know each other even better, spending plenty of time simply asking each other about our pasts.

“Would you like complete honesty about everything?” I finally asked, “Lydia doesn’t know absolutely everything either, but considering my position now…”

“Anything you did before becoming a citizen of this city is not my problem, Ragnar. Add to that, you are now Dragonborn, and are likely destined to not only save this city, but Skyrim itself. I think the powers that be can forgive any previous transgressions should you end up fulfilling that destiny.”

After receiving a fresh tankard, I told him the truth of my life since my birth. It took a few hours. He asked a lot of questions. I drank at least three or four more tankards. Aela already knew it all, but Lydia was surprised by some of my revelations. If Balgruuf judged me, he gave nothing away, and after explaining all the way to the day I met him, I trailed off, figuring he knew everything from then.

“So… You were a thief twice?” Balgruuf asked.

“Yes, lord. And, may I say, a bloody good one.”

He leaned forward a little. “Did you ever work in Whiterun?”

“Aye, lord. A few times.”

“But you haven’t lately?”

I couldn’t help smile. “No, lord. Having my head on a block, near enough ready for my soul to head somewhere else, that was a wakeup call. I’m doing my best to restore my honour.”

“And the Brotherhood?” Lydia asked, “Why?”

“After losing Muiri, I guess you can say I lost my way a little. And Astrid… Well, the connection I had with her was something else. My only regret from that time is that she’s no longer with me.”

“I do wonder if General Tullius knows who you really are? I’m sure he’s heard news of a Dragonborn. He might even know your name. But I doubt he’d figure you were at Helgen.”

I shrugged. “If he learns of it, then we’ll deal with that when it comes.” I looked at Lydia. “So what do you think?”

The smile sent a wave of relief through me. “Your past is your past, Ragnar. I will only judge on what you’ve done since I’ve known you. Plus, you do appear… regretful might not be the right word, but apart from the time you were married, would you consider yourself content?”

I thought about that for a moment. “I’m not going to lie, I had a lot of fun as a thief. The people I worked with were generally a good sort. But even I can admit that I lost my way when I was with the Brotherhood. I put that down to losing Muiri and then wanting to be with Astrid.”

“Are you still this Listener?” Balgruuf wondered.

“I guess so, but it means nothing. I don’t know where any survivors disappeared to.” That was the only thing I lied about. I figured the trio that did survive the reckoning at Falkreath Sanctuary had made their way to Dawnstar, but I didn’t particularly want their deaths on my conscience. I would keep their secret safe for now, and since the Emperor was still alive, I believed they would think me dead.

I’m not sure why but I think Balgruuf respected me even more after that conversation, primarily I had been honest about nearly everything. He escorted us to the door and the handshake we shared was warm, his eyes meeting mine and I think I read them correctly. I was Dragonborn. I was the Harbinger. And now I was… Well, perhaps a trusted confidant. I told him my services would always be available in regards to assisting the city. He definitely appreciated that.

Waking early the next morning, I packed a few supplies after donning my armour. Aela walked with me to the stables, ensuring she gave me one hell of a kiss before I mounted my horse. “Don’t do anything stupid, Ragnar.”

I returned a smile before replying. “Thanks for the vote of confidence.”

“You know what I mean. If the Thalmor are involved…”

“Already killed a few of them. Kill a few more if need be.”

“What will you do once you meet him?”

“Find out what he knows and likely escort him back to Riverwood. After that, Delphine will probably have an idea or two.”

I leaned down to kiss her again before digging my heels into the horse and it started to amble forward. As always, the journey took most of the day, unimpeded as the road remained clear of bandits, and I didn’t run into any beasts or monsters that wanted to taste my sword. The stablehand recognised me when I dismounted and handed over the reins, mentioning the fact he hadn’t seen me around for quite a while. I didn’t give away too much, simply stating I no longer lived in Riften.

As it was nearly dark, and I was tired, hungry and thirsty, I headed to the Bee and Barb. I was recognised immediately by Talen-Jei, who insisted I take my old regular position, a tankard of mead quickly placed in front of me. Within a couple of minutes, I glanced to the door to see Haelga had walked in, no doubt informed that of my return. I rose to my feet as she sprinted towards me. The hug was fierce, and the kiss enough to take my breath away.

When she finally pulled back, she had a look in her eyes that suggested she wanted to say something, and I knew what it would be. I probably wouldn’t say no to joining her in the Bunkhouse. “Care to join me for a drink?” I asked.

She sat down across from me as I waved Talen-Jei over. Once she had a drink, she had to ask, “What brings you back to Riften?”

“It’s a long story. I’m here for work.”

“As a Companion?”

“No. Have you heard about the Dragonborn?” Haelga wasn’t dumb, as the smile immediately lit up her face. “It’s part of the reason why I’m here. Need to find someone. A possible ally.”

“When did you find out? You were Dragonborn, that is?”

“Killed a dragon outside Whiterun.”

“You… You killed a dragon?”

I couldn’t help chuckle as her tone spoke volumes. “Not by myself. I had a lot of help, but when we killed it, that’s when I found out. To put it simply, I absorb their souls. Anyway, that’s what is happening with me. What about you? Are you still with… I never knew his name.”

“No, that fizzled out rather quickly. He was nice, but…” She met my eyes and shrugged. “My toys come in handy.” She reached out to grab my hand. “But I’m not unhappy. Not at all. I remember everything fondly. And I just had to come as soon as I heard you were here.”

I squeezed her hand back. “I’m glad to see you too.”

“Where are you staying tonight?”

Another chuckle I couldn’t suppress. “I haven’t thought about it yet. I need to head to the Ratway tomorrow morning though.”

“Want to stay…”

“Yes. Will you be okay with it?”

“Absolutely.”

We didn’t leave immediately, deciding to enjoy dinner together and another couple of drinks. One or two others stopped at the table to say hello. Aranea made an appearance, and we enjoyed a good catch up, admitting she was now working for Brynjolf. Ingun was still in Riften, her romance with Saerlund still going strong, but while both yearned of escaping, they still hadn’t had the opportunity, both watched closely. No-one from the Guild made an appearance, but they rarely entered the Bee and Barb, and I knew I’d probably see them the next day.

Haelga couldn’t wait forever, and after finishing our second tankard, simply grabbed my hand and led me out of the tavern. We managed to behave until inside the Bunkhouse, though as soon as the door was closed, she was all over me. Svana wandered out of her room, no doubt wondering the commotion, and once she saw me, Haelga stepped back for a moment so she could give me a hug too.

“Want to join us upstairs?” Haelga asked. I wasn’t the only one to look at her wild-eyed. “Oh please, Svana. You’ve talked long enough about wanting to enjoy a night with Ragnar. And you may never get another opportunity.”

“But you’re my aunt?!”

“I am, but there’s no reason why we can’t be with Ragnar together.” She looked at me. “What do you say?”

“I think we should head upstairs.”

By the time we made it to her room, Haelga was already down to her underwear. Svana walked in front of me, and I could see her nerves, particularly when she glanced back in my direction. I just smiled the first time, the second time asking if she was sure. The nod returned was very eager, so it was definitely just nerves. Once the door was closed, Haelga suggested I help Svana undress. Not just wanting to strip her, I made sure I eased her nerves at first, embracing her and sharing our first kiss. Hesitant at first, she grew confident very quickly, and once my hands started to wander, and hers did in return, there was no sense of nerves. Haelga joined in so I could kiss her too, before I focused on disrobing Svana.

Once I had her naked, I helped Haelga get completely naked too. Svana had a tight little body on her, breasts no more than a handful, a flat stomach, shaved pussy, and a pair of long legs despite being shorter than both Haelga and I. Haelga I already knew perfectly, but seeing her naked again definitely stirred the loins even more, and I probably had a look in my eye, as the pair undressed me very quickly. When my cock sprang free, I had the usual reaction from Svana, who quite happily stayed on her knees, wasting little time using her mouth.

“Well, someone’s eager,” Haelga stated.

“You’ve talked about it enough, Auntie. Now I finally get to have it inside me.”

“Can I join in?”

“Sure. We’ll bring him off together.”

Svana was enthusiastic but Haelga knew me as well as I knew her, so knew all the tricks to bring me to climax. Once I warned them I was about to cum, Haelga let Svana take control, and she quite happily took a load in the mouth. She looked rather pleased with herself, but what surprised me, and definitely shocked her, was when Haelga grabbed and kissed her. It was only when Haelga looked up at me and opened her mouth that I understood why. After Svana swallowed, she could only say, “You kissed me!”

Swallowing herself, Haelga just shrugged. “Let’s be honest, it’s probably going to get weird tonight. And I wasn’t letting you have his cum to yourself.” Looking up, she asked, “Does that bother you, Ragnar?”

“I’ll be fucking you both regardless, so I don’t care. Svana?”

“How weird?” she asked Haelga.

“Use your imagination, Svana.”

So I’m sure you’re wondering if it got weird, right? It did, though only later. I ate them out and fucked them both, of course. Svana made sure I fucked her first. She was desperate for me to fuck her, having thought about it for a long time. She’d only been with one man before, so I got to teach her a few things. She liked it on her back but loved it when she rode me, and that’s when Haelga enjoyed riding my face at the same time. Svana came very hard while riding me, and I left a load inside her as well.

Haelga wanted to be fucked, of course, but while she liked it in her pussy as much as anyone, there was one thing she wanted above all else. I was happy to fuck her arse as always, but it was while doing that where things got weird, as she made a request of Svana that shocked her, before she asked me what I thought. “Whatever happens tonight stays between us. One time only thing.” I shrugged, adding, “Consenting adults, so do what you want.”

So, a lot of people would think it got rather weird after that. In the cold light of day the next morning, I could only laugh to myself, Haelga lying to one side of me, Svana to the other, and she was eager for a morning fuck, mounting me again and slowly bouncing and grinding. Haelga woke up and watched, masturbating as she watched Svana ride me.

“I can’t believe we did that last night,” Svana stated.

“You weren’t complaining at the time,” Haelga retorted gently.

“You made me cum with your mouth!”

“Only while Ragnar was fucking me. And the favour was returned, if I recall correctly. As Ragnar said, one time only. We don’t have to speak about it once we leave this room.”

Svana stopped and blushed. “The problem is…”

“You liked it?” Svana blushed further but nodded. “Well, I don’t think we should go down that road, as that will only end badly. But what did you like? The fact it was a woman? Or the taboo?”

“Probably the latter. It feels so wrong now but was so naughty at the time.” Svana then looked down. “And your cock is getting harder, if possible.”

I just shrugged. “As you said, it’s the taboo. I’ve had a threesome with a pair of sisters that turned into something like last night. In the moment, you get caught up in everything going on. It’s only later upon reflection you will likely regret some of your actions. It’s only natural.”

“Do you regret it, Svana?” Haelga wondered.

“Honestly? No. Would I want to do it again?” She shrugged. “If it involved Ragnar, it would probably happen again.”

“But you don’t want me alone?”

“No.” I think everyone sighed with relief at that as Svana leaned down and started riding me again. Placing a hand on each arse cheek, she smiled as she knew what was coming, being well and truly fucked before unloading inside her again. Resting on my chest, she whispered, “Good thing I take potions, otherwise you’d probably get a letter in nine months, Ragnar.”

That gave me a good chuckle as Svana slid off me. Haelga didn’t want to miss out, and was quite happy to blow me until I was hard again, hopping on herself. I could watch Haelga ride me all day, and as I’d already cum, she could ride me for as long as she wanted. After her third climax, she had to cry enough, unable to even rest on me as she simply had to slide off my body onto the bed, breathing deeply. “I needed that!” she exclaimed.

“I really should get dressed and go, but I’m finding motivation difficult,” I stated.

“I don’t know about you two, but I am hungry. Breakfast?” Svana asked.

We dressed and headed downstairs, joining the workers, who knew what Haelga and I got up to, though I could see one or two surprised faces with Svana following us, who made sure she sat next to me, whispering very naughty things into my ear, her hand also doing something rather naughty under the table. “Keep doing that, and you’re getting fucked in front of everyone,” I whispered into her ear. She smiled but removed her hand.

Once the rest had left, the three of us enjoyed breakfast, though Svana continued to tease me throughout. It was quite funny, and Haelga knew what Svana was doing, as it was quite obvious. “Can’t get enough of him now?”

“Will you be coming back anytime soon, Ragnar?” Svana asked, the hopeful tone in her voice unmissable.

“I’m really not sure. I have someone in Whiterun now. She’s understanding of what I’m like…” I looked across at Haelga. “What about you?”

“Ragnar, my door will always be open to you. I might have to give Svana one of my toys that reminds me of you though.”

“Tell you what. Let me do what I need to do here, and if I have to remain here again tonight, I’ll stay here again.”

I had to get going. The two escorted me to the front door, Svana hugging me tightly, and the kiss would definitely have led to other things if I didn’t have to leave. Telling me she’d had a great time, she gave my cock a last squeeze through my trousers before she disappeared into her room. Haelga immediately hugged me too, and the kiss we shared was different to her niece, as the feelings we had for each other had not diminished at all. Resting her head against my chest, she said, “I meant what I said. Whenever you’re in town, Ragnar, please come see me.”

“I will, though it will eventually depend on my current relationship.”

“Serious?”

“It’s getting there. We’re waiting until the issue with dragons is resolved before making any major decisions.”

“But she knows what you’re like?”

“I have a housecarl now. I fuck her too.” That made her laugh. “I’ve also enjoyed some fun times with an older woman who used to be a Blade.”

“How much older?” I whispered her age, which made her laugh. “Ragnar! I can’t believe that.”

“She loves to fuck. Very flexible.”

We hugged for a little longer as I enjoyed just holding her again, and I know she didn’t want me to go either. “I love you, Ragnar,” she said quietly.

“I know. My feelings for you haven’t and will never change.” She looked up and I kissed her softly at last time. “But I’d better go.”

Heading through town, I walked by one or two people who remembered me, but made sure my journey down to the Ratway was generally unobserved. I could have used the secret entrance, but I didn’t consider myself a guild member, so figured I’d go to the Flagon first. The tavern was as busy as I’d ever seen it, Dirge actually looking surprised by my appearance though made no move to stop me walking in.

Vekel noticed and waved me over, offering his hand. “Nice to see you, boss. What brings you here?”

“Hoping to see Bryn, actually, though maybe you will know who I’m looking for.”

“Tell me who you want and I’ll let you know.”

“Old guy. Name’s Esbern though wouldn’t be surprised if he’s living under a different name.”

He leaned forward, wiping down the counter but lowered his voice. “Lot of people looking for him, boss. Don't know his name, but he's paid good money for nobody to know he's down here. He's holed up in the Ratway Warrens. Hardly ever leaves the place. Has someone bring him food and such. Crazy old coot, from what I've heard. For that to stand out down here, he must really be off his nut.”

“Who else is looking for him?”

“Bunch of elves. Possibly Thalmor?”

“Shit. Seen them around lately?”

“Not personally, but heard enough whispers that strange folk are prowling around. What’s going on, boss?”

“Lots to tell, but now is not the time. Let’s just say the old man might be very important.”

“Then you’d get moving, boss. I’ll let the others know you’ve been by though.”

I’d never been through the area of the Ratway known as the ‘Warrens’, but knew they were full of the homeless, insane, and all the other forgotten people of Riften. Why Esbern had chosen to hide down there, I could take a guess or two, but I thought there were probably safer places. And the Thalmor were definitely on his trail, as it only took a few minutes before running into a patrol. In the confined spaces of a corridor, there was little I could do except use my Thu’um.

That attracted plenty of attention, though at least it brought the Thalmor towards me. Those that didn’t taste my Voice received my sword instead. The bastards used magic, naturally, but now that I carried the Shield of Ysgramor, I learned rather quickly that it was enchanted, and it protected me from most magic.

It took a little searching but I eventually found the door that likely had Esbern behind it. I needed to thump my fist into the solid door, needing to shake my hand afterwards as it bloody hurt. I had to wait a few second before I heard a voice cry, “Go away!”

“Esbern? I’m a friend. Open the door please.”

“Esbern? Who’s that? My name isn’t Esbern. There’s no-one here by that name. Now go away.”

“Delphine said to ‘Remember the 30th of Frostfall’.”

There was silence for a moment before a small hole appeared in the door, and a pair of wise but tired eyes met mine. “Who are you?”

“My name is Ragnar. And I’m the Dragonborn.”

The eyes widened in surprise. “You'd better come inside. Quickly now. Thalmor agents have been seen in the Ratway.”

I thumbed behind me. “Don’t worry about them. They’re already dead.”

“And Delphine really is alive?”

“She is. And she’s desperate to see you.”

“You'd better come in then and tell me how you found me and what you want.”

It took at least a couple of minutes for him to open the door, as he unlocked a series of locks and bolts. When it finally opened, I was greeted by a tall though very elderly man, who had the look of a scholar rather than a warrior. Beckoning me inside, he slammed the door as quickly as he could, locking at least a couple of the bolts. Once satisfied, he turned and gestured towards an empty chair.

“So, Delphine keeps up the fight, after all these years. I thought she'd have realised it's hopeless by now. I tried to tell her, years ago…”

“She’s been quite busy, particularly since I met her. She doesn’t seem to think it’s hopeless. Why do you?”

“Haven't you figured it out yet? What more needs to happen before you all wake up and see what's going on? Alduin has returned, just like the prophecy said! The Dragon from the dawn of time, who devours the souls of the dead! No one can escape his hunger, here or in the afterlife! Alduin will devour all things and the world will end. Nothing can stop him! I tried to tell them. They wouldn't listen. Fools. It's all come true... All I could do was watch our doom approach...”

“Despite the fact I’m Dragonborn?”

“Well, according to legend, you are the one person who could perhaps stop it all. Maybe… Just maybe…”

“We should leave as quickly as possible. Though I’ve killed some Thalmor to get here, no doubt there’s more of them.”

“Agreed. Let me pack some things.”

“You have a horse?” He shook his head. “Then you’ll need to ride with me, so don’t pack too much.”

He grabbed a couple of books and a coat. He burned a few papers, stating the information wasn’t needed, but shouldn’t fall into the wrong hands. And without further ceremony, he unlocked the door, ushered me through, before pulled it shut, locking it (just in case) before we made our way back to the surface.

I made a quick stop at the Bunkhouse before we left. Haelga was delighted to see me again so soon, but understood when Esbern followed me in that I wouldn’t be staying. We shared a last embrace and kiss, whispering into her ear that I would visit again when I had the time. While she hoped to see me again soon, she understood I had my own life, and though she didn’t know much about the Dragonborn, she figured it was important.

Figuring it was at least noon, I warned Esbern that it would be dark by the time we made it to Riverwood, but he didn’t mind. My horse didn’t mind the extra weight, not that Esbern weighed all that much, feeling skin and bone when I helped him into the saddle.

Riding with Esbern certainly wasn’t boring, regaling me with plenty of lore about the Blades, the Dragonborn and also Alduin. I asked a few questions, mostly about who I was meant to be, and he wasn’t surprised to hear that I’d already been up the Throat to see the Greybeards. His opinion on them did differ to Delphine.

Night had fallen by the time we rode into Riverwood. Helping Esbern down from the horse, we walked into the inn. Delphine was performing her act, though as soon as she saw Esbern, the broom was dropped as the two embraced. “It’s good to see you, Delphine. It’s been a long time.”

“It's good to see you, too, Esbern. It's been too long, old friend. Too long.” She looked past him at me and mouthed ‘Thank you’. I just returned a smile. “Come, I have a place we can talk in private. We have a lot to catch up on.”

Heading downstairs, we gathered around the table. Delphine gestured towards me. “Now then, I assume you know about…”

“Oh, yes! Dragonborn! Indeed, yes. This changes everything, of course. There's no time to lose.” Opening his backpack, he took out a large book. “What we need to find is a place called Sky Haven Temple, constructed around one of the main Akiviri military camps in the Reach, during their conquest of Skyrim.”

“And why are we finding this place?” I asked.

“This is where they built Alduin's Wall, to set down in stone all their accumulated dragonlore. A hedge against the forgetfulness of centuries. A wise and foresighted policy, in the event. Despite the far-reaching fame of Alduin's Wall at the time, one of the wonders of the ancient world, its location was lost.”

“Esbern, what's Alduin's Wall and what does it have to do with stopping the dragons?” Delphine asked.

He looked between us, probably wanting to ask how or why we’d never heard of it. “Alduin's Wall was where the ancient Blades recorded all the knew of Alduin and his return. Part history, part prophecy. Its location has been lost for centuries, but I've found it again. Not lost, you see, just forgotten. The Blades archives held so many secrets...” He trailed off and sighed. “I was only able to save a few scraps...”

Delphine grabbed a map, and using the information from Esbern’s book, was able to pinpoint where Sky Haven Temple probably was. It would be a long journey, and there was no chance we’d be leaving that night. I figured we could also use help, so was going to suggest I grab Aela and Lydia to join us.

“You must be tired, Esbern. Would you like something to eat?” Delphine asked.

“Yes, a little food would be nice before I go to sleep.”

“Ragnar, wait down here while I sort Esbern out.”

The pair disappeared upstairs as I took a seat, flipping through the book Esbern had brought with him. Most of the information went over my head but it was still interesting to read. I’m not sure how long she was gone, but Delphine eventually reappeared. She gestured for me to move my chair, and once there was space, she straddled my lap and gave me one hell of a kiss. “Thank you for finding him,” she said before kissing me again, “You definitely get a reward for that tonight.”

“Is he asleep?”

“Aye, the ride tired him out.”

“I could do with a bite to eat first.”

Heading back out into the bar, Orgnar was not around, but I was happy enough with a little bread, cheese and some fruit. Delphine’s bedroom was that which we always walked through, so once back inside it, having closed the door, it didn’t take long for both of us to get naked. She was very eager that night, surprised when she quite happily fell to her knees to pleasure me. Though I enjoyed it, I wanted to return the favour, lifting her up and having her join me on the bed, swinging her around so I could bury my face in her now bare pussy. She could barely concentrate on blowing me once I was devouring her, and I thoroughly enjoyed making her cum hard.

She turned around, rubbing her pussy along my shaft as we made out. “You are way too addictive, Ragnar.”

“You’re not getting feelings, are you?”

That made her smile. “No, nothing like that. I still can’t believe you’re willing to fuck me, though.”

I made her sit up on me. “You’re kidding, right? You have the body of a woman half your age.” I lifted her up so she could slide down my shaft, both of us moaning as she did. Once she bottomed out, a broad grin forming on her face, I added, “And you are so very, very tight.”

“Ragnar, you have to fuck me right now. And I mean fuck me.”

She meant what she said, as she slid off me onto the bed, spreading her legs, holding them wide and back as I got into position between her legs. Sliding back inside her again, I met her eyes and all she said again was, “Fuck me. Hard.”

What happened over the next few minutes was some of the hottest sex I’d had in quite a while… Well, since leaving Riften anyway. And Delphine had a surprisingly filthy mouth when the mood took her. Pounding her as I was, I was never going to last too long, but she enjoyed the feeling of me thrusting in one final time before I unloaded inside her. She joked again that it was good she could no longer get pregnant. “That’s round one, Ragnar,” she said softly into my ear as I rested my head, “You’re fucking my arse next.”

I lifted my head. “Oh, I definitely like you.”

“As I admitted early on, I dreamed of something like this, Ragnar. The Dragonborn between my legs, his hard cock inside me. The fact he’s a rather virile young man, more than willing to fuck a woman more than twice his age, makes it even better.”

“I’ll admit this is all a little surprising. Definitely not complaining though.”

She was on all fours a few minutes later, where I spent a little time eating her arse before getting her ready. Insisting that I fuck her hard again, I grabbed a handful of hair as I buried my cock in her arse, asked if she was sure, and once I was given the go ahead, started slowly but built to quite the crescendo. She was crying out after a little while, not in pain, but from at least a trio of powerful climaxes, and my own arrived a little later, filling her with another load of cum. We collapsed onto the bed together, still buried inside her, and we both started to laugh. “By Talos, where were you twenty years ago?”

“An orphanage.”

“All this is doing is making me wish I was at least half my age.”

“So we enjoy it while it lasts.”

We were both knackered, so after a quick clean up, and grabbing a drink from the bar, we cuddled under the furs, Delphine turned towards me, her head resting under mine, running my fingers up and down her back. Surprisingly intimate, but I generally was with any lover. “What do your friends think of this? You being with me?”

“They accept it, knowing it’s just sex. Some really hot sex.”

“Hot sex? I’m going to be sore tomorrow, Ragnar.” She lifted her eyes towards mine. “Worth it completely though.”

“You’re the one who wanted me to fuck you hard.”

“I hear no complaints when you’re pounding my pussy and arse for all you’re worth.”

“And you know I’d be perfectly happy eating that pussy all night too.”

“I might have you do that one night. Pussy and arse?”

“Oh, absolutely. Can’t ignore that perfect arse of yours.”

“We really should sleep, Ragnar, but…” She started to laugh. “Honestly, I’m tired but I want to spend as long as we can fucking.”

“Tomorrow morning?” She nodded, kissing me a final time before she turned around and spooned me, no doubt feeling my erection press into her.

“How are you hard again?”

“Wonder of youth and the thought of fucking you again.”

We didn’t that night, and I think we fell asleep at roughly the same time. After another good hard fuck the next morning, we wandered out together for breakfast. Orgnar said nothing except ‘Morning’, but his face said everything. He knew what we’d been up to, though when he met my eyes, the smirk suggested he found it amusing, probably because she was so much older than myself. Taking a seat across from Esbern, he wished us ‘Good morning’ too, but focused on eating first.

“So, you’re sleeping with the Dragonborn?” he asked once he’d finished his meal, causing Delphine to choke on what she was chewing. He held up a hand before Delphine could reply. “It’s no business of mine, Delphine, but you cannot deny it. You’re not very quiet.”

“I’m not going to deny anything, Esbern. That wasn’t the first time, and I hope it wasn’t the last.”

“Well, that’s unlikely, though it will depend on certain things.”

“As long as it doesn’t interfere with what he needs to do,” Esbern added.

“We’re not in love or anything, Esbern. But… Well, look at him. Then add the fact he’s the Dragonborn. Then there’s the fact I’m no spring chicken, yet he was rather vocal about his appreciation for me at the same time…”

“What we do in the bedroom won’t impact anything else, Esbern,” I added, “So this is the plan. We’ll head to Whiterun, gather some supplies and also collect a couple of friends who can help us. You believe this temple is in the Reach, correct?”

Delphine nodded. “Aye, from the information, I believe it’s near a place called Karthspire.”

“So we’ll need to be wary of Forsworn patrols and camps. You ever dealt with them?” Esbern shook his head. That wasn’t a surprise. Delphine had a run-in or two over the years, so knew what to expect. “That’s why I want to collect a couple of friends to help. We’ll need horses, camping gear, and supplies.”

Wandering downstairs with Delphine, she changed, and she knew I took pleasure in watching her disrobe before dressing in her leathers. She then packed up a few supplies before admitting she would likely not return. When asking why not, she said it was likely the temple would become a new headquarters, if it was as Esbern described. Heading back upstairs, Delphine approached Orgnar and handed over a set of keys. “It’s all yours, Orgnar. I probably won’t be back.”

He didn’t appear surprised by that at all. “Sure thing, Delphine. You be safe. You too, Dragonborn.”

“You might see me again one day,” I stated.

Heading outside, Delphine offered to take Esbern while I carried the supplies. The ride to Whiterun was quick, and after stabling our horses, we headed through the gates towards Breezehome. Aela and Lydia were both downstairs by the fire, and were pleased to see me, asking how the mission went. I introduced Esbern to the pair of them, then explained what we were doing next. I didn’t even have to ask, both asking me, “When do we leave?”

Heading upstairs to pack a few things, I was followed by Aela, who shut the door before she hugged me tightly, wanting some personal attention. “So, who did you fuck while you were away?” I gave her a look, which made her giggle. “Please, Ragnar, I know what you’re like. Did you see Haelga?”

“I did.”

“And did you stay with her?”

“Her and Svana, her niece. She’s wanted to sleep with me for a long time. I finally gave in.”

That provoked a reaction. At least a raising of the eyebrows. “Aunt and niece? Well, I guess I shouldn’t be too surprised. And I can only assume you fucked Delphine last night?”

“And this morning.”

“No feelings?”

I couldn’t help smile. There wasn’t concern in her tone, but I understood why it was asked. “As I’ve said for a while, you need only say one word, and I end it with everyone. But, no, there are no feelings. When we’re alone, we like to fuck.” I paused before adding, “Maybe you’d like to invite her to join us? Ever had an older woman?”

“No,” she replied, before lowering her voice, “She must have one hell of a body if you’re still fucking her?”

“Trust me, you will appreciate her when she’s naked.”

“Something to think about for later, at least.” She tightened her hug around me again. “I would like you to myself one night soon. Or maybe for a few nights.”

“When all this is over, Aela, I don’t plan on doing anything except relaxing and enjoying certain things with yourself, and maybe Lydia. And part of me thinks… well… I’m sure you can imagine.”

She looked up, meeting my eyes. “That sounds like a promise, Ragnar.”

“Would you like it to be?”

“But what about…”

“I’ve committed once before, Aela. And if she hadn’t been taken from me, I’d still be married and a father to at least one child, and honestly, we both wanted more. I’ve done it before, and I was happy; I will happily do it again for you.”

“Just me?”

“I know I’m a bastard. But I can easily not be a bastard too.”

She lay a soft kiss on my lips. “Okay. Have your fun for now. I really don’t mind. But once this is over, you’re mine alone.” She paused before adding, “We’re breaking our word about the future.”

“Marriage and children?”

The smile was immediate, lighting up her face. “I think about it often, Ragnar. I want a few. Boys and girls.”

“We’re going to need a bigger house.”

I think that was everything we both needed to say to each other. Once we’d packed up what we needed, I quickly headed up to Jorrvaskr, informing the twins that we might be gone a little while, so they would have run things during my absence. They didn’t mind, figuring I would be gone more often than not while trying to solve the dragon issue.

The other four were at the stables, preparing our horses for departure. Once the five of us were mounted, Esbern now with a horse of his own, borrowing one of the Companions horses, we headed out in a westerly direction.

It would not be an easy journey.

Chapter 35: Secrets

Skyrim from high above was a beautiful sight, and as I clung onto the back of the dragon for dear life, I could take at least a moment to appreciate the beauty, the different shades of green, blue, brown and yellow. Of course, at the same time, I was absolutely shitting myself and hurling all manner abuse at the dragon, mostly yelling at it to get back on the fucking ground.

Somehow, I managed to drag my way up towards the neck of the dragon, driving in my sword or my dagger, hoping the dragon didn’t simply fly vertical. If it did, I was dead. It continued flying horizontal, or near enough to it, though continually turned, no doubt hoping my grip would slacken and I’d fall to my inevitable death. I would have used my Thu’um, but thought that might send both of us crashing to the ground.

Finally, after what felt like hours of flying, the dragon finally started to descend. Arrows were soon being fired at it again, and once I felt it was safe enough to do so, I used my Thu’um, burning the back of its head. That forced it down faster, and once I felt its legs hit the ground, I rolled off onto the ground, using my Thu’um again, as the dragon had eyes and teeth for me.

Scrambling to my feet, I swung my sword wildly, feeling it leave a gash as I took the shield from my back and prepared to end the fight. Lydia and Aela fell in alongside me, both with sword and shield. “Neck,” I stated. I’d fought enough by now to know the scales were thinner, and it was the most exposed. They would distract it and I’d make the killing blow.

Like usual, it didn’t work exactly as planned, and I nearly lost my sword again when the dragon started to thrash about after I’d buried my sword. Lydia stepped forward and drove her own sword up and under the jaw of the dragon, Aela running to the other side of the neck to bury her own sword. That pretty much did it. With so much blood lost, the dragon eventually collapsed to the ground.

Once I’d absorbed its soul, Esbern strode forward to grasp my hand. “It is an honour, Dragonborn. There is no doubt you are the one spoken of in the prophecy.”

“Still don’t quite understand it all.”

“Alduin’s Wall will explain more.”

The dragon attack severely delayed us, so we agreed to ride no more than another couple of hours before camping for the night by the river, as those of us who wanted to could at least wash. With few trees around, Esbern used magic to get a fire started, the rest of us putting up tents before setting out for a quick hunt, hoping to catch one or two things for dinner, though we had supplies ready if we didn’t.

Around the fire after a meagre dinner, as we hadn’t managed to find anything worth eating, Esbern told more of the history of the Dragonborn, the Blades, and also what we might expect at Sky Haven Temple. Delphine did drop a warning, suggesting that the area around Karthspire would likely be an area with Forsworn activity, so we’d have to be careful.

“Dragonborn, I must ask. When you absorb the soul of a dragon, do you feel anything?” Esbern wondered.

“Not really. A slightly warm sensation for a few minutes.”

“Do you learn anything from them? Their language perhaps?”

I shook my head. “No. The ruins that dot Skyrim have things called word walls within them where I can learn a word that is part of a Shout. I may sit down with the Greybeards one day…” Delphine scoffed at the mention of them, which I ignored, “And see if they can teach me their language.”

“You should know as much as you can about your enemy. While you have no doubt learned Delphine isn’t exactly enamoured with them, I believe you can at least learn what is required from the Greybeards to at least understand the dragon language and, perhaps more importantly, you may learn more about Alduin.”

“Do you have any idea what this wall might tell us?” Aela asked.

Esbern could only shrug. “Much of the information written about it has been lost. I retrieved what I could, but the Blades had endless amounts of dragonlore before the Thalmor attacked. I took what I thought was most important.”

“As long as we find Alduin’s Wall and it tell us what we need, we’ll win in the end,” I stated, trying to sound as confident as possible. The words received nods of appreciation. Whether I was actually the leader or not, who really knew. Delphine and Esbern apparently served the Dragonborn, but to be honest, I was following them at the moment. They had a far better idea of what was going on. All they had to do was point me in the right direction and say ‘Kill them’ or ‘Kill the dragon’ and it would be done.

Aela and I shared a tent that evening, though I noticed the longing glance from Lydia, while Delphine was ever more up-front, whispering very naughty things in my ear before she disappeared into her tent, sharing it with Esbern. To my surprise, we didn’t do anything that night, knowing we had an early start, so after a little make-out, she cuddled into me as we fell asleep.

Waking with the sun the next morning, the three women and myself did enjoy a wash in the river, and all the female flesh on display did provoke a reaction. Lydia and Aela were very complimentary of Delphine, and she finally admitted her age to them. They looked at me in shock. All I did was shrug, gesture towards Delphine and ask, “And are you surprised with a body like that? And her pussy is like a vice at times. Hot and tight.”

Delphine had a laugh at my description while Aela and Lydia could only agree with my assessment about her body. Aela then mentioned the idea of Delphine joining Aela and I, and Lydia didn’t want to be left out either. “So we’re having a foursome?” I asked.

“Would you like that?” Aela retorted.

I stepped back so my erection appeared out of the water. “I think that answers the question.” Glancing back, Esbern was sitting by the fire, thankful that he couldn’t see my front, so I added, “But I think we should behave ourselves for now. Could give the old man a heart attack.”

After dressing and breakfast, we packed up camp and resumed our ride towards Karthspire. The cave we were looking for was nestled at the junction of a pair of rivers. And it was there that the Forsworn had decided to build a camp of their own. From our vantage point above them, we could count most of them. The only one that concerned me was a hargraven. Thankfully only the one, but they could be a pain in the arse if not taken by surprise.

 “How do you want to do this?” Aela asked.

“Esbern will use magic. You three use bows. I’ll use my Thu’um.”

Like all hastily made plans, it wasn’t perfect. Attracting the attention of the hargraven, we killed that first as the Forsworn swarmed towards us. After using Unrelenting Force, sending all of them rolling back down towards the river, Esbern and the three woman used magic and arrows before I strolled towards those who remained alive. Most were injured, one or two trying to get to their feet. One of them, wielding two weapons, gave me a brief moment of concern, as he was bloody quick, and I needed to respond in kind. But he was also injured, and couldn’t keep up the performance. I like to think that I at least gave him an honourable death. The rest could get fucked though.

Entering Karthspire cave itself, we came across more Forsworn lurking within. All of us, except Esbern, was now armed with swords and shield and dealt with them relatively comfortably. The camp inside the cave wasn’t an extensive as that outside, and I let Esbern take the lead, as he had the best idea of where we should go.

We did fumble and stumble in darkness for a few minutes before walking out into what looked like old ruins. It was at least the outside of the temple though it was now a case of finding a way in. First, we had to get across a large gap. There was a rather simple puzzle to solve that lowered a stone bridge, the five of us remaining wary as we crossed, figuring there would be traps waiting to catch the unwary.

I was thinking it would be infested with all sorts of creatures, but it was surprisingly clear, entering a large room which had pressure plates on the ground. Esbern consulted his book and told me the symbol for Dragonborn, and that I should follow that. Once across, I pulled a chain, ensuring it was safe to cross. Following a natural corridor, we eventually exited out into what looked like a courtyard, with a gate in front of us, which looked like the face of someone. Esbern was more interested in what was on the ground below us.

“Wonderful! Remarkably well-preserved, too. Ah... Here's the "blood seal." Another of the lost Akiviri arts. No doubt triggered by...well, blood. Your blood, Dragonborn.”

“Should have guessed.”

Esbern then gestured at the gate before making a sweeping gesture at all the artwork on the walls around us. “You can see how the ancient Blades revered Reman Cyrodiil. This whole place appears to be a shrine to Reman. He ended the Akiviri invasion under mysterious circumstances, you recall. After the so-called ‘battle’ of Pale Pass, the Akiviri went into his service. This was the foundation stone of the Second Empire.”

I glanced at all my colleagues. “I’m afraid you have us all at a loss, Esbern.” Under instruction from the old man, he told me where I should cut my hand and drop my blood. Taking the dagger I always kept sheathed, I cut across my palm and watched a few droplets hit the seal below my feet.

It worked and rather quickly, figuring it must have been magic. “That's done it! Look, it's coming to life! You did it!” Delphine exclaimed rather excitedly, “There's the entrance. After you, Dragonborn. You should have the honour of being the first to set foot in Sky Haven Temple.”

Aela handed me the torch she had been carrying and I led the way inside. Esbern could now barely contain his excitement, but he certainly seemed to know his stuff about Akiviri history, left thinking that, once it was all over, I could sit down and learn quite a few things from him. I just thought the temple was enormous, wondering how it had possibly laid abandoned for so long. As it was so large, we all spent time lighting braziers to provide some light. Though I reckon we all wanted to spend time exploring the temple, Delphine led Esbern in the direction of what looked like the wall we had come to find.

Esbern used a little magic to illuminate the entire wall, and he came to a stop as we lined up to look at it. “Shor's bones! Here it is! Alduin's Wall… So well preserved... I've never seen a finer example of early second era Akiviri sculptural relief...”

“You seem to know your art, Esbern,” I stated.

“Much of it is in relation to yourself, or people like you anyway, Dragonborn.”

The wall was extensive and appeared to tell the story of the Dragon War. I’d heard it mentioned once or twice, and while I’m sure Esbern could have held a series of lecture about it, Delphine kept hurrying him along so we could learn how to defeat Alduin. Eventually Esbern stated the wall mentioned that a Shout was used to defeat Alduin, but there was no mention of what Shout it was.

“Have you ever heard of such a thing? A Shout that can knock a dragon out of the sky?” Delphine asked of me. I gave her a look that she couldn’t misinterpret. She nodded and sighed at the same time. “I was hoping to avoid having to involve them in all this, but it seems we have no choice.”

“Who?” Lydia asked.

“The Greybeards will probably know,” I replied.

“What have you got against the Greybeards?” Aela wondered, “I won’t say you’ve openly mocked them, but you’ve made your feelings known more than once.”

“If they had their way, Ragnar would do nothing but sit up on their mountain with them and talk to the sky, or whatever it is they do. The Greybeards are so afraid of power they won't use it. Think about it. Have they tried to stop the civil war, or done anything about Alduin? No.”

“To be fair, Delphine, the civil war has nothing to do with them,” Aela stated.

“And they are not warriors, but they have helped me so far,” I added.

“I think they're afraid of you, of your power. Trust me, there's no need to be afraid. Think of Tiber Septim. Do you think he'd have founded the Empire if he'd listened to the Greybeards?”

“Did he train with them?” I wondered, looking at Esbern.

“Sort of. According to the ancient texts, it was the Greybeards themselves who told Talos that he would rule all of Tamriel.”

I looked again at Delphine. “I’m not afraid of my power. I’ll use it when necessary. But I can see reason for their peaceful nature. Didn’t Ulfric kill Torygg with a Shout?”

Delphine remained silent for a few seconds. “You have a point there. I can’t deny it. But you are no Ulfric.”

I think that was a compliment, or I took it as one, at least. “Right, we should head outside, grab our supplies, as if I need to head back to the Throat, I’ll want to be well rested. It’ll take a couple of days to get there anyway.”

Our horses were tied up back up the hill, but as they had all our gear, we had to lead them into the temple itself. The four of us then explored, leaving Esbern to his wall, Delphine and I eventually finding a door that led outside to a ledge overlooking the canyon below. Moving to stand in front of me, she had a look in her eyes as she ran her hands up and down my body before she slowly dropped to her knees. “What are you doing?” I had to ask.

“You’ll be gone a few days, so I wanted to blow you before you go.”

I couldn’t stop the chuckle. “Seriously?”

“Are you refusing a blowjob?”

“Not at all. Want any reciprocation?”

“When you return. For now, I just want your cock in my mouth and hopefully some cum in my belly when you’re done.”

She had my cock out a little later, and took delight in quickly swallowing my length. She knew what she was doing as she made sure not to bring me off too quickly. Running a hand through her blonde hair, I gazed out over Skyrim as she made love to my cock with her mouth. We were eventually found by Aela and Lydia, who simply stood to the side and watched her pleasure me.

“She looks like she knows what she’s doing, Ragnar,” Aela stated.

“Uh-huh.”

“Are you going to finish in her mouth or on her face?” Lydia wondered.

Delphine answered for me, stopping for only a moment to say, “Mouth”, before she resumed, and now used all the tricks to bring me to climax. Since she’d been teasing me for so long, she didn’t have to wait to receive a load in her mouth, and the smile in her eyes as I looked down at her suggested she was rather pleased with what I gave her. Once she’d given me a little clean up, she packed my cock away, buttoned up my trousers, kissed my cheek, and wandered back into the temple.

“What was all that about?” Aela asked. I could only shrug as the three of us followed Delphine inside.

The furniture we found inside the temple had long since started to rot away, so we built a fire in the main hall and set up our tents around it. We still had plenty of supplies, so ate some dinner and discussed what we’d discovered and what we believed might happen in the future. Everyone had an idea though we agreed all of us could also be incredibly wrong.

Lying with Aela once we all decided to get some shut eye, she whispered, “I’ll admit watching Delphine suck your cock was a turn on. Never thought it would be.”

“You were right. She does know what she’s doing.”

“If she didn’t want the favour returned, how about me?”

“You’d like my head between your legs?”

“Gods yes, Ragnar.”

I’m not sure if Aela could have been quiet anyway, but after a few minutes eating her out, the chances of her remaining quiet disappeared, and it was little surprise we attracted some attention. It was also no surprise when we were joined by another woman. I was expecting Lydia, but Delphine popped her head between the flaps of the tent and wondered if we wanted company. Once she was inside the tent, we all got naked and I found myself on my back, Aela impaled on my cock with Delphine riding my face, positioned so that she could also make out with Aela at the same time.

Delphine came first, admitting she’d already been fondling herself earlier, and she definitely liked it when I started to eat her arse. Aela would always cum riding my cock, and enjoyed at least a pair of climaxes before she cried enough. All that meant is she slid off my cock as Delphine hopped on for a ride, and she was rewarded with my own climax a few minutes later.

“Okay, now I know why you like fucking her,” Aela stated, “And Delphine, you have a fantastic body.”

“For a woman of my age?”

“Yes, but when we eventually have another threesome, I hope you don’t mind me wanting to have a taste of you too.”

I definitely loved my life at times, the thought of Aela going down on Delphine causing my cock to rise to attention. Aela laughed as Delphine simply straddled me again, stating that I now owed her an orgasm since she’d given me two with her body. I agreed, and she rode herself very slowly to another one before she had to cry enough. I didn’t mind as I know I enjoyed watching her, and Aela lay beside me, giving her one or two compliments, and was amused that Delphine had a very smooth pussy. Delphine said I didn’t seem to mind, and she liked it too. Having the pair of them cuddle into me afterwards made me feel like the Emperor himself.

Lydia, Aela and I left the next morning. We’d barely left the temple, the three of us on horseback, heading in the direction of Whiterun, when Lydia started to complain, half-jokingly, about being left out the night before. I kept it simple, stating she could have easily joined us as none of us would have said no. That stopped any further complaints, as Aela added that she didn’t need an invitation to ever join us, except for if we’d explicitly said the night was only for herself and me.

Thankfully conversation moved on as we made our way back east, not heading back to Whiterun itself, but taking the road south that would lead us to Ivarstead. Having cleared out plenty of bandits and wild animals over time, our entire ride was without incident, which was a slight relief, particularly as we crossed the bridge into Ivarstead well after dark. The innkeeper knew our faces by now, and had put two and two together in figuring out who I was, so was quick to offer me the large room with the double bed. After we ordered dinner and a couple of drinks, he appeared rather amused when Lydia and Aela followed me into the bedroom. We didn’t do anything other than sleep.

Our journey up the mountain was the worst yet. The first hour or so was relatively calm, though there was fresh snow fall even to the lower levels of the mountain. Once we were a quarter of the way up, the weather turned nasty. High winds, blizzard like conditions, so bad we could barely see a few feet ahead. All of us wore thick fur coats, but even those barely protected us.

We had to keep going, as we had no camping supplies, and with no caves to take shelter, all we could do was keep our heads down and keep trudging along. I led the way, though always made sure my two companions never fell too far behind. It was a struggle for all of us, and again it was dark by the time the monastery came into view, hidden in darkness by the dark clouds that continued to dump snow on us.

Thankfully it was warm inside High Hrothgar. Arngeir was surprised to see us, but seeing that we were frozen solid, asked no questions, only directing us straight to the nearest fire place as others quickly brought us warm drinks and blankets so we could warm up. “Whatever you need to ask can wait until morning, Dragonborn. You and your friends look frozen.”

“It wasn’t a pleasant walk up the mountain this time, Master,” I stated through chattering teeth.

They had already eaten dinner but offered to cook us something that would warm us up further, but the three of us were falling asleep halfway through eating. Thanking them all profusely, we headed to bed. There was no chance of anything intimate happening, Lydia pilling furs on her bed before crawling underneath. Aela made sure she was moulded into my body, piles of furs above us too, as we fell asleep through sheer exhaustion.

After breakfast the next morning, I asked to speak with Arngeir alone. We walked outside, the blizzard of the previous day replaced by sunlight, blue sky, but bitterly cold temperatures. Pulling my coat tight, we walked towards one of the firepits. Before our conversation even began, eyes turned towards the monastery, as the other three Greybeards approached, though stayed back for the time being.

“What is it you need of the Greybeards, Dragonborn?”

“I need to learn the Shout to defeat Alduin, Master.”

“Where did you learn of that? Who have you been talking to?” he asked quickly, and if I didn’t know him any better, what I said… angered him.

The abrupt line of questions certainly had me blinking in surprise. “The Blades, Master. They are assisting me.”

That earned nothing but a scoff. “The Blades! Of course. They specialise in meddling in matters they barely understand. Their reckless arrogance knows no bounds. They have always sought to turn the Dragonborn from the path of wisdom. Have you learned nothing from us? Would you simply be a tool in the hands of the Blades, to be used for their own purposes?”

“Now hang on a second. As far as I’m aware, all the Blades want to do is help me defeat Alduin. They don’t want to see the world end, nor do I. Do you want it to end?”

“What I want is irrelevant. This Shout was used once before, was it not? And here we are again. Have you considered that Alduin was not meant to be defeated? Those who overthrew him in ancient times only postponed the day of reckoning, they did not stop it. If the world is meant to end, so be it. Let it end and be reborn.”

“But the prophecy says…” I trailed off, figuring he wouldn’t really care what a prophecy said, so I simply asked, “Will you not help me save the world, Master?”

I could see he was angered, but also… well, probably a little saddened. While I respected the Way of the Voice, I knew that in my battle against Alduin I would likely have to stray from the path at times. What I knew at heart is that I would not be a tool for the Greybeard or the Blades. I was my own man and, once I knew the whole truth, would make my own decisions.

“No, Dragonborn,” Arngeir finally stated, “I will not help until you return to the path of wisdom.”

I’ll admit, his response pissed me off. I respected the man, but I thought he was being utterly stubborn and was letting his dislike of the Blades cloud his judgement. I didn’t want to argue with him, but before I could walk away, one of the other Greybeards approached us.

“Arngeir. Rak los Dovahkiin, Strundu'ul. Rok fen tinvak Paarthurnax.”

I didn’t understand what he’d said, but I watched Arngeir for a reaction. His face fell, shoulders slumped. It wasn’t one of defeat, but there was no doubt he was saddened by whatever thoughts crossed his mind. He reached out a hand, beckoning me back to him. “Dragonborn, wait. Forgive me. I was intemperate. I allowed my emotions to cloud my judgment.”

“Nothing to forgive, Master. This issue affects us all in many different ways.”

“Master Einarth reminded me of my duty. The decision whether or not to help you is not mine to make.”

“So can you teach me this Shout?”

He gestured again, taking a seat on a bench near the fire. Once sat down, he shook his head. “No. I cannot teach it to you because I do not know it. It is called ‘Dragonrend’, but its Words of Power are unknown to us. We do not regret this loss. Dragonrend holds no place within the Way of the Voice.”

“What’s so bad about this Shout?”

“It was created by those who had lived under the unimaginable cruelty of Alduin's Dragon Cult. Their whole lives were consumed with hatred for dragons, and they poured all their anger and hatred into this Shout. When you learn a Shout, you take it into your very being. In a sense, you become the Shout. In order to learn and use this Shout, you will be taking this evil into yourself.”

“My past is not altogether clean, Master.”

“While that might be the case, learning a Shout such as Dragonrend will leave marks on your very soul.”

“Who knows of this Shout, if anyone? If not, who can assist me in defeating Alduin? There must be a way to defeat him.”

“Only our leader, Paarthurnax, may know an answer to those questions.” He paused before sighing. “I will be honest, Dragonborn. I do not believe you are ready to meet him yet. There are many reasons why, but there is no point explaining it now. Thanks to the Blades, you now have questions that only Paarthurnax can answer.”

The four Greybeards gathered around the fire as they explained where Paarthurnax was and what I required to make it to the peak of the mountain. I learned a new Shout from them, something called ‘Clear Skies’. Once I had learned it, Arngeir continued. “This is your final gift from us, Dragonborn. Use it well. Clear Skies will blow away the mist, but only for a time. The path to Paarthurnax is perilous, not to be embarked upon lightly. Keep moving, stay focused on your goal, and you will reach the summit.”

“Master,” I stated, offering my hand, “You have my thanks.”

That earned a flicker of a smile as he gripped my hand with both of his. “No matter what, High Hrothgar will always be open to you, Dragonborn.”

“Can you let Aela and Lydia know I’ll be gone a little while?” He nodded as I added, “Hopefully I’ll be back with some good news.”

I had to use the new Shout a few times to clear winds that would have ripped me apart, or so it seemed. Even when standing a few metres away, I could feel the cold. But apart from biting winds, the mountain was clear of wildlife or anything else that may have wanted to attack me. The snow was thick under foot, in absolute pristine condition. I had a feeling the Greybeards never ventured up this way.

I stopped occasionally to take in the view. Though there was cloud cover, through the gaps I could see what felt like the edge of Tamriel itself. I had no idea how high I was, but I could feel I was starting to struggle for breath. Perhaps air gets thinner the higher up one travels? It wasn’t enough to make me ill, but I was noticing a subtle difference.

Reaching the crest, I wasn’t surprised to a word wall, though it was partially crumbling. No surprise considering it was exposed to the elements. But that’s not what grabbed my attention. No, it was the dragon that seemed to appear out of nowhere. I unsheathed my weapon, ready for it to attack, but all it did was hover above the word wall before sitting down, where it then looked at me in silence, cocking its head slightly.

I had a funny feeling, one of amusement, as I sheathed my weapon and strode forward, albeit with a little caution. If the dragon wanted to attack me, it could and would have done already.

“Drem Yo Lok. Greetings, wunduniik. I am Paarthurnax. Who are you? What brings you to my strunmah... My mountain?”

“I’m sure you know who I am. I’d figure a dragon would sense one of their own, for want of a better word.” I chuckled as I added, “Should have known you were a dragon. It explains why Arngeir was so hesitant about me meeting you.”

“You speak true, Dovahkiin. As for the Greybeards, they see me as master. Wuth. Onik. Old and wise. It is true I am old...” The dragon paused, fixing me with its eyes completely as it added, “Why do you come here, volaan? Why do you intrude on my meditation?”

“Alduin has returned. I need to learn the ‘Dragonrend’ Shout.”

“Drem. Patience. There are formalities which must be observed, at the first meeting of two of the dov. By long tradition, the elder speaks first. Hear my Thu'um! Feel it in your bones! Match it, if you are Dovahkiin!”

Paarthurnax dropped down onto the ground and breathed fire against the word wall. I heard all three words it used. “YOL... TOOR... SHUL!” Glancing back, Paarthurnax beckoned me to approach the word wall. “The Word calls you. Go to it.” As I walked towards it, something similar to many of the other word walls, and also when I’d learned words from the Greybeards occurred. “A gift, Dovahkiin. Yol. Understand Fire as the dov do.”

“You have my thanks.”

“Now, show me what you can do. Greet me not as a mortal but as dovah! Do not be afraid. Faasnu. Let me feel the power of your Thu’um.” Shrugging, I took a few steps back and breathed fire into the dragons’ face. Paarthurnax seemed to appreciate that, snorting approval. “Aaah... Yes! Sossedov los mul. The dragon blood runs strong in you. It is long since I had the pleasure of speech with one of my own kind. So, you have made your way here, to me. No easy task for a joor... mortal. Even for one of Dovah Sos. Dragon Blood. What would you ask of me?”

“Can you teach me the ‘Dragonrend’ Shout?”

“Ah. I have expected you. Prodah. You would not come all this way for tinvaak with an old dovah. No. You seek your weapon against Alduin.”

“Tinvaak? Conversation?” The dragon nodded. “Tell you what, once all this is over, I’ll happily sit and talk with you all day, but at the moment, Alduin is doing the gods only know what.”

“Alduin and Dovahkiin return together. But, I do not know the Thu'um you seek. Krosis.” I think that last word might have meant apologies. Paarthurnax continued before I could ask another question. “It cannot be known to me. Your kind, joorre, mortals, created it as a weapon against the dov... the dragons. Our hadrimme, our minds cannot even... comprehend its concepts.”

“Arngeir did mention it was a Shout of hate and perhaps evil. A sign of the times.” The dragon nodded again, perhaps in agreement. “How or where can I learn it?”

“First, a question for you. Why do you want to learn this Thu'um?”

A fair question. According to Delphine, I was to journey across Skyrim, and perhaps Tamriel, slaying dragons. The Greybeards thought I should take a more peaceful route. I already knew I’d never do any harm to Paarthurnax, but I can only guess he wanted to know my motives. “Two reasons. First, I need to stop Alduin.”

“Yes. Alduin... Zeymah. The elder brother. Gifted, grasping and troublesome as is so often the case with firstborn. But why? Why must you stop Alduin?”

Shrugging, I said, “Simply put, I like this world. And I don’t want everyone to die.”

“Pruzah. As good a reason as any. There are many who feel as you do, although not all. Some would say that all things must end, so that the next can come to pass. Perhaps this world is simply the egg for the next kalpa? Lein vokiin? Would you stop the next world from being born?”

“A rather philosophical question for a dragon.” Raising both hands, I immediately added, “No offence. I just had no idea you enjoyed such debates.”

That raised what I figure was a laugh from Paarthurnax. “You have much to learn of the dov, then. There is nothing else but philosophy to a dovah. It is no accident that we do battle with our Thu'um, our Voices. There is no distinction between debate and combat to a dragon. Tinvaak los grah. For us it is one and the same.” He paused, before dipping his head. “You have indulged my weakness for speech long enough. Krosis. Now I will answer your question. Do you know why I live here, at the peak of the Monahven -- what you name Throat of the World?”

“To be honest, I have no idea. Do you like it up here?”

Again, I think that earned a little laugh. “This is the most sacred mountain in Skyrim. Zok revak strunmah. The great mountain of the world. Here the ancient Tongues, the first mortal masters of the Voice, brought Alduin to battle and defeated him.”

“I assume with this Dragonrend Shout?”

“Yes and no. Viik nuz ni kron. Alduin was not truly defeated, either. If he was, you would not be here today, seeking to... hmmm, defeat him. The Nords of those days used the Dragonrend Shout to cripple Alduin. But this was not enough. Ok mulaag unslaad. It was the Kel, the Elder Scroll. They used it to cast him adrift on the currents of Time.”

I’d heard of the Elder Scrolls before. So I asked, “The ancient Nords sent him forward in time? For what purpose?”

“I do not believe it was intentional. Some hoped he would be gone forever, forever lost. Meyye. I knew better. Tiid bo amativ. Time flows ever onward. One day he would surface. Which is why I have lived here. For thousands of mortal years, I have waited. I knew where he would emerge but not when.”

“I can only assume the Elder Scroll can help somehow? How will it help me?”

“Tiid krent. Time was shattered here because of what the ancient Nords did to Alduin. If you brought that Kel, that Elder Scroll back here to the Tiid-Ahraan, the Time-Wound... With the Elder Scroll that was used to break Time, you may be able to cast yourself back. To the other end of the break. You could learn Dragonrend from those who created it.”

I’d heard plenty of crazy ideas before, but this one was quite out there. Find an Elder Scroll? Where in oblivion would I find one of those? And I’d heard enough rumours about what reading a Scroll could do to someone. Blindness. Madness. Even death. All rumoured, but I knew they were artefacts, perhaps even treasures, that should not be trifled with.

“I don’t suppose you’d know where I can find such a Scroll?”

“Krosis.” Okay, that definitely meant ‘sorry’ or ‘apologies. “No. I know little of what has passed below in the long years I have lived here. You are likely better informed than I.”

“I’ll ask Arngeir and see if he can offer any suggestions. I’d stay and ask more about what happened, but time may be of the essence here. At least I’m making some progress now.”

“There will be time to converse upon your return, Dovahkiin.”

Bidding Paarthurnax farewell, I made haste back down the mountain, my mind going over the fact I’d just enjoyed a long conversation with a dragon. I had no idea of the dragon’s history, but the fact he seemed to know Alduin quite well suggested they had perhaps been involved in the Dragon War together. I didn’t know enough about it, but I certainly wouldn’t go asking Delphine or Esbern. I doubt they knew about Paarthurnax, and knowing Delphine’s opinion about dragon’s…

Walking into High Hrothgar, I searched and found Arngeir, the Greybeard meditating in one of the long hallways. He sensed my approach and rose to his feet. “You spoke to Paarthurnax. The dragon-blood burns bright within you. Did he tell you what you wanted to know? Did he teach you the Dragonrend Shout?”

“No, he didn’t know it, but he suggested a way I can learn it.”

“So be it. If he believes it is necessary for you to learn this, we will bow to his wisdom.”

He still didn’t sound particularly happy. I knew he trusted me in all this, but I knew he still worried regarding the motives of the Blades, perhaps still believing I could find myself influenced. The only way I could prove myself is by following what I believed was right. “Paarthurnax mentioned an Elder Scroll was used to defeat Alduin. I don’t suppose you would know where I could find it?”

“We have never concerned ourselves with the Scrolls. The gods themselves would rightly fear to tamper with such things. As for where to find it, such blasphemies have always been the stock and trade of the mages of Winterhold. They may be able to tell you something about the Elder Scroll you seek.”

I was about to ask why he considered them blasphemies, but I’d already had one philosophical discussion that day and didn’t particularly want another. Plus, I figured endless questioning might just rile the old man yet again, so I simply thanked him and went looking for Aela and Lydia. They were in the library, where there were at least a dozen enormous bookshelves crammed with books. Both were reading something, though immediately looked up upon my appearance. I explained the conversation I’d had with Paarthurnax, though left out the fact he was a dragon. That was a subject to broach at a later time. It wasn’t a case of not trusting them. I believed the Greybeards would rather I not share it with everyone, purely for the safety of them and the dragon.

“It’s a little late to head back down the mountain now, so we’ll head down first thing tomorrow. If neither of you have any reason to return to Whiterun, I think heading straight to the college would be the best idea.”

“What about Delphine and Esbern?” Aela wondered.

“I’ll see if I can send them word from Ivarstead, though it will depend on what happens once we reach the college.”

At dinner that night, joining the Greybeards as usual, Aela and Lydia filled the silence with plenty of conversation, tempting Arngeir into providing a few answers. Though the other three couldn’t speak, they couldn’t hide the slight amusement on their faces. While I’m sure they lived happy and fulfilling lives in the monastery, I’m sure they did get lonely at times, and the two women were delightful company.

Knowing we had a long day ahead of us the next day, as though we would probably stop in Ivarstead, I suggested we could make it as far as Darkwater Crossing by nightfall, we behaved that night. Aela slept with me as always, but we remained clothed and apart from the three of us chatting away in the darkness, there was no naughtiness under the furs.

After a quick breakfast with the Greybeards, we bid the four of them farewell and headed back down the mountain. Going down was always much faster, and the weather was clear, barely a cloud in the sky, though it remained cool until we were closer to Iverstead. We made good time, so immediately mounted our horses and rode for Darkwater Crossing, making it to the village by nightfall. There were few buildings, and no tavern, so we joined the few others at the nearby camp.

Knowing that the college was still quite a distance away, we agreed that heading back to Whiterun would probably be the most sensible decision. We could re-supply, I could contact a courier to send a letter to Delphine and Esbern, and then we could make steady progress north.

Walking through the gates of our home having stabled our horses, it felt like weeks since we’d last been home. It hadn’t, of course, barely a week if I remembered correctly, but I had a feeling I would be spending more time away from Whiterun than there the way things were going. Lydia headed to Breezehome as Aela and I walked up to Jorrvaskr. The twins were happy to see us as always, immediately sitting down and regaling us with stories. We had a couple of new recruits and contracts were flowing in, and plenty of coin was being made, enough that the twins wanted to start taking a small percentage. I always found it strange that there wasn’t some sort of chest where coin was kept so we could buy better supplies, so I agreed with the idea immediately.

After enjoying dinner with Aela and Lydia at the Bannered Mare, we headed home, intent on rising early but we knew it was a two-day trip to the college, so as long as we made it to Windhelm by night, it would be fine. With that in mind, Aela readily invited Lydia into our bedroom that night. Instructing me to sit down, I happily watched as the two put on a little show for me, undressing each other before Aela pushed Lydia back onto the bed, where she began to enjoy her pussy, asking if I’d now like to join in.

I did, and Aela was given a little surprise when I grabbed the bottle that now always sat on the bedside table and immediately started to play with her arse. “Oh, straight to that, are we?” she asked, looking back with a look in her eyes that suggested she wasn’t unhappy at all.

“It’s been a while, and I’m fucking you there first, then Lydia gets a turn.”

A few minutes later, I was buried all the way in her arse, Aela barely able to concentrate on eating out Lydia at the same time, as I wasted little time finding a rhythm, and she eventually had to give up and start fondling herself, racing each other to who’d orgasm first. Aela ‘won’ but she was rewarded with an arse full of cum not long later. I fell forward, still buried inside her, so I could actually give her a kiss, hearing her whisper ‘I love you’ in my ear.

Lydia was keen for her turn, so after a quick clean and then time for my cock to recover. Lying back on the bed, I put a pillow under her lower back so the angle was better, with a pillow for her head too, and I was left rather amused as Aela straddled her face at the same time. “Oh, like that, is it?” Lydia wondered.

“Do you want my pussy?” Aela retorted. Lydia replied by wrapping her arms around Aela’s thighs and pulled her down. Aela met my eyes and smiled. “Well, she knows how to eat pussy, at least.”

“Better than me?”

She leaned forward to kiss me. “Ragnar, you make me cum so hard and often, it must have been the gods themselves that gave you that tongue.”

Lydia had a wonderfully tight arse, and I knew that I wasn’t going to last too long, despite just having cum in Aela recently. Despite what I was doing, she brought Aela to climax, and she had to climb off her face, allowing me to lean forward so I could kiss Lydia too. I could taste Aela on her lips at the same time, making her laugh when I mentioned that face. Feeling her wriggle under me, she loosely wrapped her legs around me and whispered, “Fuck me harder, Dragonborn.” That made me raise an eyebrow. She blushed a little at that. “I can see what Delphine means about having the Dragonborn inside her.”

“Like that fact, do you?”

“I love it.” I smiled as I knew what she really meant, but didn’t want to say it, probably because Aela was lying next to us, watching intently, and she knew that, while I adored her, and in some ways did love her, it wasn’t like Aela. “Fuck me, Dragonborn!” she cried a little louder.

I did, watching her face as I increased the speed and strength of my thrusts. Generally, she just met my eyes in return, though there was the occasional wince, but whenever she did and noticing I’d slow, she’d order me to keep fucking her. I pounded her harder until I had to bury myself a final time and unload again. Once I felt myself soften, I could only roll off, breathing heavily and feeling rather sweaty. Lydia simply lay next to me, giggling away. “Well, I’ve just been well fucked by my Thane.”

“And taking it in the arse avoids complications with babies,” Aela added, making both of them laugh, “We might have to leave a little later, Ragnar, or at least ride with a cushion.”

“Hmm, I didn’t think about that.”

“Trust me, neither of us are complaining. We love a good arse fucking from the Dragonborn,” Lydia stated. She turned towards me and wrapped her hand around my shaft. “I’m wondering if you want to do it again tonight?”

I couldn’t help chuckle as Aela added, “If you get a second go, count me in.”

By the time we were finished that night, I can safely say we were all very well satisfied. I felt utterly drained, the two women admitting they would be rather delicate the next day. And we agreed that we would remain in Whiterun for a further day. One, because we did need time to properly relax. And, two, they both admitted that riding a horse after that night wouldn’t be altogether comfortable.

Chapter 36: The Expedition

I figured that entrance to the college wouldn’t be easy, but the Altmer guarding the bridge to the college had a bit of an attitude. She probably took me for an everyday dumb Nord. Not far wrong, to be honest, but still… Altmer reminded me of the Thalmor. Not all of them were, but it was hard to differentiate at times. Lydia and Aela were not with me, and no doubt they’d have found my exasperation rather amusing.

So I played my last card. I didn’t want them to know exactly who I was, but now I had no choice. “I’m the Dragonborn.”

“And I’m the High Queen of Skyrim. You still cannot enter.”

I know I started to smirk, and a concerned look crossed her face as I walked backwards then towards a nearby tree, and breathed fire, watching the flames quickly take hold. After a few seconds, I then breathed frost, immediately extinguishing the flames. Walking back towards the elf, I simply said, “I’m the Dragonborn. I don’t demand entrance, but I do need help from someone inside.”

“What sort of help do you need?” she asked, her tone suddenly friendly. No surprise.

“Is there anyone inside who could tell me where to find an Elder Scroll?”

“An Elder…?” She stepped aside and gestured. “The best person would be Urag, the curator of our library.”

“Thanks.”

To call the crossing to the college perilous would be an understatement. I’d heard stories of the destruction of Winterhold, and the bridge was a testament to that. I assume it may have once been a grand crossing, but it had long since fallen into disrepair, with numerous exposed places. On a windy day, one would have run across to avoid being blow off.

Entering the grounds of the college itself, I observed a conversation between one of the mages and someone, another Altmer, this one obviously Thalmor from the robes he wore and the sneer in his tone. I’ll give the mage credit, though. She gave as good as she got, basically telling the Thalmor to shove it up his arse. I allowed myself a smirk as he walked by.

Walking closer towards her, I know I stopped and stared as the… similarities were uncanny. I knew immediately that she was a Breton. And she was… too much of a reminder. And she noticed me staring. “Can I help you?” I know my mouth opened once or twice, my mouth and throat suddenly very dry. She must have thought I was nervous or something, as she smiled – the sort of smile that near enough brought me to my knees - and asked, “Are you a new student here?”

“Who are you?” I asked, taking a couple of steps closer, unable to take my eyes off her.

It must have been the look in my eyes that made her smile. “I’m Mirabelle, master wizard of this college. And you are?”

“Ragnar. Some call me the Dragonborn.”

“Dragon…” She trailed off before asking, the smile broadening, “I can only assume you’re not a new student?”

“No, but I suddenly have an interest in returning to be one.”

Certainly one of my corniest lines, but she was beautiful, and far too much a reminder of my wife. Still, she took the compliment in her stride, a little colour forming on her cheeks. “What brings you to our college, Dragonborn?”

“I need to speak to someone about an Elder Scroll.” I thumbed behind me. “Your guard suggested I speak to someone called Urag.”

That made her laugh lightly. It was a dagger into the heart. Exactly the same. Did all Breton women laugh like that? “Urag can be very helpful. Just don't antagonise him. Most importantly, he is very protective of his book collection.”

“I’ll be on my best behaviour. Thanks for the help.”

I walked by her, ready to just walked inside, when she said, “Dragonborn?” Turning back, she added, “I would be delighted if you returned to the college one day. As a student, of course.” The smile hadn’t left her face, and all she did was turn and walk away. I watched her for a moment before heading inside, finding a door labelled ‘Arcanaeum’. I figured that meant library, as the other door was labelled ‘Arch-Mage Quarters’.

I expected a library with numerous bookshelves, books piled to the ceiling, and the smell of paper decades old. What I did not expect was an Orc as a librarian. I didn’t have much to do with Orcs, but those I’d dealt with before hadn’t exactly been what I’d call intelligent. And I knew for certain that they were not adept mages. They made Nords look like skilful wizards.

“Never seen you around here before. Who are you?”

“I’m Ragnar.”

“And what do you want?”

Well, he was as gruff as any other Orc I’d dealt with. But there was an inflection to his speech that suggested an education. “I’m looking for an Elder Scroll.”

That made him laugh, which actually relieved me, though I’m sure the laughter was directed towards me. “And what do you plan to do with it? Do you even know what you're asking about, or are you just someone's errand boy?”

“Well, first thing, I’m the Dragonborn.” I held up my hand to halt whatever he wanted to say. “But humour me. I don’t know anything about them, so perhaps you can tell me?”

He gestured to a seat next to him. “Dragonborn eh?” I nodded as I took the empty chair. “An Elder Scroll is an instrument of immense knowledge and power. To read an Elder Scroll, a person must have the most rigorously trained mind, or else risk madness. Even so, the Divines usually take the reader's sight as a price.”

“A price?”

“The simplest way to put it is ‘knowledge’, but there's nothing simple about an Elder Scroll. It's a reflection of all possible futures and all possible pasts. Each reader sees different reflections through different lenses, and may come away with a very different reading. But at the same time, all of it is true. Even the falsehoods. Especially the falsehoods.”

I know I’m not a smart man. I have ‘street smarts’ but actual intelligence? I know I’m slightly lacking compared to others. But what he’d just said? Not a fucking clue. “So… do you have one?”

That made him laugh again. “Of course I bloody well don’t have one. And if it wasn’t for the fact you were Dragonborn, I wouldn’t even consider helping you find one. But, since you are Dragonborn…” He met my eyes.

“Want proof?” I wondered.

“No. Word has reached us here about the summons of the Greybeards, and a vague description of who the Dragonborn is. Suffice to say, you match it.” He paused before adding, “I'll bring everything we have on them, but it's not much. So don't get your hopes up. It's mostly lies, leavened with rumour and conjecture.”

He disappeared for a few minutes as I grabbed a nearby book and glanced over its contents. It was about magic, and therefore I understood very little. Mostly my mind wandered, and I found myself thinking of Mirabelle, and how much of a reminder she was of Muiri. It was scary how similar they looked and sounded.

Urag returned and I could put the book down as he placed two on the counter nearby. Rising to my feet, I had a look at the titles. Ruminations of the Elder Scrolls and Effects of the Elder Scrolls. I had a feeling I wouldn’t understand either. Picking up the first book, I read the first couple of pages before I placed it down and looked at Urag. “The fuck was all that about?”

“Aye, that's the work of Septimus Signus. He's the world's master on the nature of Elder Scrolls, but... Well, he's been gone for a long while. Too long.”

“Where did he go?”

“Somewhere up north, in the ice fields. Said he found some old Dwemer artefact, but... Well, that was years ago. Haven't heard from him since.”

“No-one sent a search party to see if he was still alive?”

Urag shrugged. “It was his decision to go. And it wasn’t college business.”

“Think he’s dead?”

“Oh no. I hope not. Though it’s possible, even likely, his obsession has got him into some sort of trouble. Are you thinking of looking for him?”

“I have to. He might be the only person who could help me track down what I need.” Offering my hand, I added, “Thanks for the help.”

“No problem. And if you really are Dragonborn, you should think about coming to the college. I can tell you’re no mage, so you might learn something.”

Chuckling, I replied, “There’s one reason I might return.”

“A woman?”

“That easy to figure out?”

“I can just take an educated guess as to who has caught your eye. I won’t say who it is, but I have a pretty good idea. Run along now, Dragonborn, and let me know if you do find Septimus alive.”

Heading downstairs and out into the empty courtyard, I had a quick look at the statue, wondering who it was, before I wandered back towards Winterhold. The Altmer who had been standing guard had disappeared too. I found Aela and Lydia waiting inside the The Frozen Hearth, looking rather bored with life. I didn’t blame them, so I’d tried to be quick as possible. After ordering drinks for us all, I sat across from them at the table, looking around and noticing no other patrons.

“Apparently we’re the first visitors in weeks,” Lydia replied to my unasked question.

“What’s the plan?” Aela added, “I don’t see you carrying an Elder Scroll.”

“We need to head north.”

The pair shared a look before Lydia exclaimed, “North? Ragnar, what in oblivion is further north than the college? It’s nothing but ice, snow and possible death.”

“Are you sure?” Aela asked. A simple question, though I’m sure she wanted to ask more.

“The man we need headed north. He’s the only one, I believe, who can point us in the right direction. You don’t have to…”

“No, we’ll join you. It’s just… you know, ice, snow, possible drowning…”

“We’ll be fine, Lydia. We will have to leave the horses here. I doubt riding will be a sensible idea.”

“When do you want to head off?” Aela wondered, “You weren’t gone too long, but the ride from Windhelm…”

“Tomorrow. I wasn’t given an exact location and I don’t particularly want to wander the ice fields in the dark.”

We behaved that night, just like we had behaved when staying overnight in Windhelm. After that night in Whiterun, and the fact both women had been rather tender the next day, though they laid no blame at my feet, they figured that, when on the road, perhaps we should just get the job done then have some fun when back in Whiterun. I agreed, though figured they’d give into temptation first whenever we were not at home.

To prevent the temptation of another threesome, we took two rooms, Lydia by herself, Aela with me as always. It was only later that night, huddled under the furs as even inside the inn the temperature dropped significantly, that I admitted that I’d met a reminder of my past. Aela thought it was quite sweet though still asked, “Did you want to fuck her?”

That gave me a good chuckle. “To be honest, a little bit, but I could never do it, because I’d end up calling her Muiri by accident.” I paused before adding, “But a part of me would like… No, that just isn’t a good idea. Plus, I made you a promise. And replacing Muiri with a lookalike is not a good idea.”

“But what about that part that’s interested?”

I couldn’t help look at her in surprise. “You’re serious?”

I felt her shrug. “Ragnar, whenever you speak about her, I can hear the love you had for her in your voice. Shit, even I curse the gods for taking her from you.” I couldn’t help pull her closer for those words. “I know you love me, and perhaps you love me as much…”

“I do. Trust me, I do.”

I noticed the flicker of a smile in the candlelight as I was adamant. “And I know you do. But I can also see why you would be interested in whoever…”

“Her name was Mirabelle.”

“I can definitely understand why you would be interested in her. And you know that, for the moment, I don’t mind.”

“No. I’m merely musing about a ‘What if?’ I gave you my word, Aela.”

She met my eyes and smiled. “Are you sure? I’m giving you a free pass here, Ragnar, though you’ve never needed my permission to do anything.”

“I was attracted, and I think she knew. I’ll leave it at that for now.”

“Well, if you want to pursue something, you know I don’t mind. And I would definitely understand why if you chose to do so.”

“And that’s why I love you just as much, Aela.”

We both gave into temptation a few minutes later, and any thoughts of my wife, or her lookalike, was forgotten as I focused only on the woman in my bed with me. I still loved and missed my wife, though the feelings had dulled over time. Since the day I’d met her, I’d been attracted to Aela, then enjoyed the sexual relationship we established, and it was little surprise I’d fallen in love with her. I knew I was almost sabotaging myself at times, with the fact I liked to fuck other women, but none matched Aela. I was just a bastard at times.

Aela was in a very good mood the next morning. Maybe it was the sex. Maybe it was the conversation we’d had. Lydia noticed and, while there was a subtle joke or two, we ate a quick breakfast and headed outside. The weather was atrocious, almost as expected, deep snow already lying on the ground, with more ready to join it. The wind was biting, cutting straight through our thick fur coats, but there was little choice. We had to find this Septimus fellow.

Walking down the hill to the shoreline, we had to search back and forth to find solid ice to walk across, and even then, the wrong step would have seen us slide into the freezing water. All three of us were capable of magic, so used our gifts to frost over any gaps we saw, hoping it would give us a little more confidence with each step we took further from shore.

With no idea what we were looking for, we spread apart and looked for any sort of campsite. If not a camp, then perhaps a mine or cave. After a couple of hours walking, where we all had moments of concern, I noticed what looked like an enormous mound of snow ahead. There were no natural formations ahead, but I could only guess that it was some sort of cave. Approaching closer, I noticed an ice-bound boat and the entrance. It was tiny, all of us having to get on hands and knees to get through it, Aela making a joke as I followed her and Lydia in.

Once we could stand up, the tomb was just as cold as outside, and it appeared to be made of sheer ice, my hand freezing straight away when I took a glove off to just touch it. We found Septimus at work beside something that looked positively dwarven, though apart from that, I had no idea what it actually was. But it looked like he’d made a life for himself. The floor was solid ground instead of ice, at least, and he even had a bed, alchemy lab, bookcase and a chest. I wouldn’t call it a home, but was left wondering how long he’d lived there.

Septimus heard us coming, looking at us as we gathered near him, not wanting to scare him, though he lowered his hood, dipping his head in greeting. “Dig, Dwemer, in the beyond. I'll know your lost unknown and rise to your depths. When the top level was built, no more could be placed. It was and is the maximal apex.”

Just like the book he’d written, I had no fucking idea what he was talking about. Not particularly wanting to get into a long conversation, and being left utterly confused, I got straight to the point of the journey. “I’ve been told you’re a leading authority on the Elder Scrolls.”

“Elder Scrolls. Indeed. The Empire. They absconded with them. Or so they think. The ones they saw. The ones they thought they saw. I know of one. Forgotten. Sequestered. But I cannot go to it, no poor Septimus, for I... I have arisen beyond its grasp.”

Still no fucking idea, but I think he said one was nearby, so I asked, “Where is the Scroll?”

“Here. Well, here as in this plane. Mundus. Tamriel. Nearby, relatively speaking. On the cosmological scale, it's all nearby.”

Aela and Lydia both giggled as I groaned. Whether he was being deliberately obtuse, or the years of isolation had left him insane, I could only ask, “Look, I need an Elder Scroll to defeat Alduin. Can you help me or not?”

“One block lifts another. Septimus will give you what you want, but you must bring him something in return.”

“A trade?” Shrugging, I said, “Fair enough, I can do that. What do you want in exchange?”

“You see this masterwork of the Dwemer. Deep inside their greatest knowings. Septimus is clever among men, but he is but an idiot child compared to the dullest of the Dwemer. Lucky then they left behind their own way of reading the Elder Scrolls. In the depths of Blackreach one yet lies. Have you heard of Blackreach? ‘Cast upon where Dwemer cities slept, the yearning spire hidden learnings kept.’”

Glancing at Aela and Lydia, I asked, “Blackreach?” Both shook their head, so I asked of Septimus, “I’ve never heard of Blackreach. Where is it?”

“Under deep. Below the dark. The hidden keep. Tower Mzark. Alftand. The point of puncture, of first entry, of the tapping. Delve to its depths, and Blackreach lies just beyond. But not all can enter there. Only Septimus knows the hidden key to loosen the lock to jump beneath the deathly rock.”

“I’m assuming you’ll give me the key, so how do I get into this tower?”

“Two things I have for you. Two shapes. One edged, one round. The round one, for tuning. Dwemer music is soft and subtle, and needed to open their cleverest gates. The edged lexicon, for inscribing. To us, a hunk of metal. To the Dwemer, a full library of knowings. But... empty. Find Mzark and its sky-dome. The machinations there will read the scroll and lay the lore upon the cube. Trust Septimus. He knows you can know.”

I could have asked him a lot more questions. About the Elder Scrolls. About the Dwemer. Probably about Blackreach. But it was clear the years of isolation had sent him off the deep end. Maybe he was already insane before leaving the college. Only Urag would be able to tell me, but I didn’t care. All I knew was that I had to find this Alftand place and I would hopefully get my hands on a Scroll. Whether it was the one I needed, or whether any Scroll would do, only time would tell.

Thanking him for the information, we headed straight back outside, where my two companions doubled over with laughter. I didn’t blame them, and I’m sure the laughter was also at my obvious frustration. I didn’t think this Dragonborn business would be easy, but being sent across the breadth of Skyrim was starting to get annoying.

Having to be as careful as returning to shore as heading out, it was too late for us to think about returning south, let alone searching for Mzark or Alftand. All the maps were back to Jorrvaskr, plus I figured adventuring through another dwarven ruin might require a little more help. If not the twins or other Companions, then I might see if Delphine wanted to join us.

Walking back into the Frozen Hearth, I shouldn’t have been surprised to see that Delphine was inside waiting for us. After buying four drinks, we sat around one of the tables and quickly filled her in with what we’d discovered so far. “Ever heard of either the Tower of Mzark or Alftand?” I asked Delphine.

“No. But the names alone are positively dwemer.”

“So we’re thinking head back to Whiterun, check the maps to see if they point out where these places are, then we put together an expedition. I don’t think this is going to be easy.”

Delphine nodded. “Good idea, Dragonborn. I would suggest leaving now, but I think a storm is heading this way.”

“Then we’ll wait it out here and leave first thing tomorrow morning. We won’t make Whiterun in a day, but we’ll get as far as we can before we make camp. If we take the longer route, we can camp by the hot springs at least.”

She did ask further questions, particularly about my time with the Greybeards, and the only thing I glossed over was the fact that Paarthurnax was a dragon. I assumed she would freak out if I told her that, probably demanding that I go kill him immediately, so for now, that would be my little secret. Other than that, she was impressed with how everything was going. The only negative was that we had no real idea what Alduin was doing. Apart from the attack on Helgen and the attack on the watchtower outside Whiterun, there had been reports of dragon activity but nothing like on the destruction of an entire city. Strange…

The four of us left at dawn the next day, riding hard for as long as the horses could cope, making good time so that my plan to camp by the hot springs came to fruition, eventually finding a good site to pitch tents just as the sun was setting. Managing to drag a couple of logs by the campfire, we gathered around it to eat dinner, and we’d brought a couple of bottles of wine from the inn before we’d left Winterhold.

“I understand this place holds some fond memories, Ragnar?” Lydia asked.

It wasn’t a bad wound. I remembered that week fondly and I didn’t mind talking about my wife. “Aye, Muiri and I spent a week here. There’s a peak over that way to the west that allows a good view. We had a lot of sex up there. The steam pools around us are also very relaxing. Had a lot of sex in them too.” I paused before adding, “Haven’t been here since, though.”

“So why are we here now?” Aela wondered.

“No reason other than it was the sensible choice. From here it’s not as long a ride as from Windhelm.”

She rested a hand on my thigh. “There are three women and one of you here, Ragnar. Use your imagination. Just one thing, though.”

“Yes?”

“No anal. Not when we will be spending most of tomorrow in the saddle.”

“Speak for yourself,” Delphine stated. Lydia started to laugh as Aela gave her a look. Delphine just shrugged. “I’m a big girl. If he wants my arse, he can have it.”

“And this is proof the gods love me,” I exclaimed.

Pulled upright, the three enjoyed taking off my armour, quickly leaving me in just my underwear, which disappeared just as fast, the three dropping to their knees to each have a turn at taking my cock in their mouth, and that was just the very start of what happened that night.

The three ended up just as naked as myself, and considering there were four of us, we had to get creative so no-one was left out. Delphine wasn’t lying either. She wanted it first, she wanted it in her arse, and she wanted the Dragonborn to fuck her. She got what she wanted in the end, and she loved it when I buried myself and came hard.

Aela wanted to make love in one of the steam pools, so we used a spell to provide a little light. I sat down, Aela straddling me and happily rode me, unsurprised that Lydia and Delphine enjoyed each other sitting beside us. That was rather erotic to watch, Aela laughing as I spent more time watching them than her. “I think your cock is even harder,” she whispered into my ear.

“It is pretty hot.”

“And Delphine knows what she’s doing with those fingers,” Lydia stated with a quiver. Delphine just gave me a look, winked, and I think gave Lydia quite a good climax a few minutes later.

Lydia didn’t want to miss out, so once Aela was satisfied, and practically ready for bed, Lydia lay down by the fire and beckoned me to slide inside her. Once she wrapped her legs around me, she demanded I fuck her. Delphine didn’t want to miss out, sitting on her face at the same time, wanting the favour returned. All three of us enjoyed at least one more orgasm before we simply had to go to bed. Of course, once we had some privacy, Aela wanted a little more, spooning into me, getting me hard with her hand, and positioning herself so I could slip my cock inside her again. She eventually ended up on her back, where the love-making was tender compared to the rest of the night, a real sign of the connection we’d made. After we both came again, we didn’t move, my cock still sort of hard inside her. “Ragnar, when all this is over, I’ll get cured. I’m not sure I can get pregnant otherwise.”

That wasn’t a surprise, so I pulled out and lay beside her, Aela immediately cuddling into me. “Okay. I’ll be getting cured before too long as well.”

“I think Lydia might want a baby too,” she whispered.

“We’ll definitely need a bigger house.”

“Shame Delphine is too old to have children. Otherwise I think you could have three women provide children.” She paused before adding, “I’ve been thinking. We’ve talked about marriage but the fact, even then, I won’t stop anything with Lydia. Not when she’s clearly in love with you. Well, I also don’t want you to give up Delphine.”

“What?”

“There’s no doubt it’s not just sex to her, Ragnar. She’s wanted you, or at least who you are, for years. Now that she has you, do you really think she’ll just walk away? And could you really break her heart like that?”

“Well, no, I guess not. And you are far more open-minded that I give you credit for.”

“We generally don’t live long lives, Ragnar. And while we’re walking this world, I think we should enjoy ourselves.”

“Do you want… you know, another man?”

“No. But I might want the occasional night with Lydia if you’re not around. We’re already pretty good friends. We’ve already made an arrangement. Well, sort of… Do you mind?”

“Double standard if I did.”

“Don’t worry. I don’t want another man. You’re more than enough for me. Lydia clearly won’t want anyone else unless you end it. And Delphine will keep fucking you until she’s not capable of it anymore.” She gave me a big squeeze. “You’re guaranteed a lot of pussy, Ragnar. Trust me on that.”

“What about Haelga?” I wondered.

“Ah, your woman in Riften? Is she still single?”

“Aye. She did have a man for a time, but it didn’t work out. I think she’s kind of hoping I’ll return one day.”

Aela shrugged. “If you can convince her to move to Whiterun… From what you’ve told me, you still love her, right?”

“In a way. Different to Muiri or yourself. We always knew there was a chance it wouldn’t work out in the end.”

“Well, as I said, if you can convince her, you’ll definitely need a bigger house.”

Everyone was in a good mood the next morning over breakfast. Delphine had no problem in going into great detail about how good my cock felt in her arse. Lydia and Aela just laughed as she described it. I probably looked a little smug, and that only increased when Lydia decided to add to Delphine’s description by talking about what we’d been up to in Whiterun before we’d left for the college. I think that Delphine was left a little jealous, which I definitely found amusing.

As always it seemed, our journey back to Whiterun took place in relative harmony, certainly left unbothered by bandits, while any passing Stormcloak patrols recognised two of us as Companions, and were friendly enough. And we must have killed all the wild animals between Windhelm and Whiterun, because we barely saw a goat, let alone a wolf or a bear. Maybe they were getting smarter.

We made it back to Whiterun before sundown, so after dumping our things at Breezehome, we made our way to Jorrvaskr, where we found a few maps and it didn’t take long to locate our next destination. Having a word with the twins, I offered them the chance of joining our expedition, figuring we could be gone a few days, and that if we were heading underground, we’d no doubt run into plenty of Falmer. They leapt at the chance, agreeing to depart the next morning.

After dinner at the Bannered Mare, the three women and I headed back to Breezehome. There wasn’t really enough space for four people, so at the top of the stairs, I waited to see what they would decide. “Ragnar, Delphine readily admits to being rather jealous about what we got up to the other night before we left for the college,” Aela explained, “So I’ll have some fun with Lydia, while you can ruin her tonight.”

I looked at Delphine, who had the broadest smile on her face, though the colour of her cheeks suggested a little embarrassment. “Is that true?” I asked her.

“Lydia went into great detail on the ride back here, Ragnar. So I may have mentioned wanting to have something similar. I did offer for them to join…”

“No, he’s all yours tonight,” Aela stated. She kissed me on the cheek, as did Lydia, before they walked into Lydia’s room. I grabbed Delphine by the hand and took her into my room.

I had her naked on the bed within a couple of minutes, my head between her legs, devouring that mature pussy. She was definitely already turned on, as she was very wet, and I couldn’t help let her know how good she tasted. She held back on her orgasm for as long as possible, wanting my mouth and tongue to pleasure her, but she couldn’t hold it back forever, and she came hard. So hard, I think she may have even started to cry a little bit. I don’t think she did, but there was a definite catch in her voice when she asked me to stop.

She needed a few minutes before getting on all fours, and after getting her ready with my mouth and fingers, I slid my cock in her pussy first, pulling her back and holding her body against mine, running my hands up and down her body, kissing up her neck to her ear, feeling her shudder as she felt my hot breath. “Dragonborn,” she whispered.

“You love me, don’t you?”

I thought that would surprise her, but all she did was nod her head before kissing me. “I waited for years. And to find out he was someone like you… That first night we were together, I couldn’t believe it. Then when I saw that magnificent cock that’s currently inside me right now, I knew.”

“I’ll fuck you for as long as you want me to.”

She removed my hands to get back on all fours, looking back with nothing but lust in her eyes. “Take my arse, Dragonborn. You know where I really want it.”

By the Eight, if she’d been the same age as Aela or Lydia, there’s a good chance we may have ended up together. I’ll be honest in admitting that I didn’t love her. I did like her a lot, but we both knew a romance wouldn’t really go anywhere. I was determined to have a lot of fun with her though, and I know she definitely felt the same.

Her arse was well and truly fucked that night. She loved every minute of it. So did I. I was left utterly drained, as I’m not sure how many times she managed to get me hard to fuck her, and I’m sure by the end, I was climaxing and barely firing anything into her, while she had a number of climaxes herself, as I used my fingers on that pussy and clit to bring her off as often as I could. We had fun trying all sorts of positions, in addition to those we usually used. The last position was Delphine on her back, her hands holding her legs back and wide, a pillow under her back to hold her arse up, as I slowly fucked her for the umpteenth time. How she wasn’t in complete agony, I don’t know, but all she wanted was for me to occasionally kiss her.

“Kept your promise,” she said quietly.

“How so?”

“I’m totally ruined, Ragnar,” she stated with amusement, “I’m absolutely knackered. Way too many orgasms.”

“Want me to stop?”

“Oh no, I’m not complaining at all. I’ve loved every second. Been a long time since a man has fucked my arse so well.” She paused before adding, “Scratch that. No man has ever fucked me this well.”

“Next time, I’m just focusing on that beautiful, bald pussy of yours all night, Delphine. Mouth and cock.”

That made her smile. “Is that a promise?”

“Absolutely.”

She was quite happy snuggling into me as we finally decided to stop and go to sleep. Spooning into me, I ran my hand up and down her body, enjoying how smooth her skin was, all the way past her arse and onto those thighs, which occasionally gripped me tightly, running it back up towards her small breasts. She eventually grabbed my hand and held it to her as we drifted off.

We were joined by Lydia and Aela the next morning, and Delphine was very complimentary of me, going into vivid detail of what we’d done. “Will you be okay to ride?” Aela wondered.

“Of course. I’ll just have to have something soft underneath me for a little while.”

The other two just laughed, and the three compared nights, again nothing but complimentary about me and my skill with mouth and tongue, fingers and cock. All I said was, “You do realise I actually love fucking all of you, well, normally.”

“We know, Ragnar,” Aela stated, “But we can’t help it that we’ve all discovered that we love it when you fuck us in the arse too.”

I thought getting out of bed and ready to leave would be best, otherwise we’d spend all day in bed, doing exactly what Aela described. We dressed and gathered supplies, agreeing to have breakfast at Jorrvaskr before heading to Alftand. There were more new faces than ever at the hall, Vilkas explaining that they were starting to run out of bed, but the coin was well and truly flowing in.

I wasn’t the only one slightly annoyed after we’d checked the maps, realising we were having to head north once again, Alftand lying north-west of Windhelm, with no direct route to it. We all had a horse each, and took a spare that would carry all the supplies we would need, as I assumed we would probably be gone for at least a few days. Vilkas had been doing some research, and he found mentions of Blackreach, and from what he’d learned, the place was meant to be larger than we could possibly imagine.

The twins were pleased to be by our side as we rode north again. As I was still Harbinger, they continued to fill me in with news of what was happening. Neither spent much time in Whiterun, always heading out on jobs themselves. Any new recruits were adapting to the life. There were the occasional fall-outs between members, but nothing too concerning, usually happening after a few drinks had been consumed.

“We both want to be cured,” Vilkas stated.

“No surprise. Aela and I will be cured too.”

I could see that surprised the twins. “I thought…” Farkas started to say before trailing off. “I must ask why?”

“Well, you are aware we are together.” Both nodded. “Once all this is over, we will marry and we want children.”

“So it’s serious?” Vilkas asked, unable to hide the smile.

“I’ve married before. You learn to know when you have the one. I had the one before, but she was taken from me. I found another one, and I won’t let her go either.”

“And the other women?” Farkas wondered. He might call himself dumb, but he wasn’t. I think it was an act half the time.

“Aela says she doesn’t mind. But we’ll see once we are actually married. When I was married to Muiri, she was my one and only, and I’ll admit, I can barely remember being happier. If Aela wants that level of commitment from me, I can easily do it for her."

The twins looked at each other. “Well, this fool is definitely in love. Did you expect it from Aela?” Vilkas wondered.

“I always believed the rumours about Skjor myself,” Farkas replied.

“Don’t let her hear you say that!” Vilkas retorted.

“She readily admits to have taken to the blood. But after Kodlak…”

Vilkas understood why I trailed off. “It’s why Farkas and I want to be cured.”

“When?”

“We would ask you to come with us, as we figured you would at least want a cure.”

“Let’s see how this dragon business goes first.”

We took our time riding, figuring it would take at least two days to make Alftand. We headed west once reaching the outskirts of Windhelm, eventually camping on the shores of Lake Yorgrim. It was bitterly cold, ensuring the fire was enormous, as we all settled around it, making preparations and discussing ideas of what we’d find the next day. Figuring out the probable location, we knew just getting to Alftand would be difficult.

Sleeping wasn’t particularly easy considering how cold it was, despite all the furs. Aela and I didn’t even contemplate taking off our furs. Sex might have warmed us up, but we would have frozen within a couple of minutes of finishing, so we made do with cuddling under the furs.

No-one managed solid sleep that night, so after a quick breakfast, we mounted our horses and began our journey into the mountains. It wasn’t long before we had our heads and faces covered so only our eyes were exposed. The weather was horrendous. Incessant snowfall. Biting winds. Dark clouds that threatened to dump not just inches but feet of snow on top of us. Our pace, slow to begin with, dropped to a crawl as even the horses struggled up the hill, at least half their legs disappearing into the deep snow.

Once we hit the wide plateau, things only got worse. We were now rather high and the temperature had dropped even further, and the blizzard meant we could barely see a few feet ahead. With no real way of knowing which way we were going, Vilkas, Delphine and I yelled at each other over the noise of everything else and agreed to quickly tie ropes to each other’s horses and simply keep moving.

I knew the gods were on our side when, after what felt like hours of riding in blinding snow, we could make out buildings in the distance. I honestly thought we’d been riding in circles, but once I shouted what I saw, there were renewed optimism that we’d make it safely. My horse even seemed to understand as its pace lifted slightly, and with each footstep, the roof of one of the dwemer towers was ever clearer on the horizon.

By the time we made the outskirts of the ruin, the wind had dropped, and the snowfall had lessened. It was clear the ruin was now buried in snow and ice under our feet, but the surprise to us all were the ruined buildings not far from the ruin. After tethering our horses, we explored what looked like an abandoned campsite, and it was obvious it had recently been occupied. The buildings had likely just been ripped apart by the recent blizzard, and the bodies we found were… fresh, for want of a better word.

The wounds on their bodies suggested something else altogether.

“Ragnar, I found something,” I heard Lydia called, turning to see her approach with something in her hand.

It was a journal, written by an adventurer by the name of Sulla Trebatius. It didn’t explain what he was looking for in Alftand, but it suggested that we might find people below in the ruins. I had no idea who the bodies were but none looked Khajit nor Orc, so that discounted a couple of names from the journal.

Since it had been a bitch of a journey, we agreed to make camp while a couple of us would look for the entrance. Delphine and I left the rest to it, finding a wooden bridge leading across to a crevice in the ice. Even near the crevice, the temperature seemed to drop even further, but there was no sign of the previous expedition.

“One question, Ragnar,” Delphine asked on the way back.

“Sure.”

“I thought all the Elder Scrolls had been discovered by the Empire, but were since stolen. So what’s one doing in a dwemer ruin?”

“No idea, to be honest. I don’t think anyone really understands the Scrolls. I certainly don’t.”

By the time night fell, the snowfall had stopped and the clouds had cleared. Of course, all that meant was the temperature dropped further, but at least we wouldn’t be bothered too much by the snow. The fire the twins had built certainly kept us warm most of the night, ensuring all our tents were as close possible, without the chance of accidently being set alight. Like the night before, there was no chance of any intimacy between Aela and I, though I’m fairly sure I heard a couple of moans from Lydia’s tent, who was sharing with Delphine.

“Sounds like your housecarl really does like her fingers,” Aela whispered.

I’m sure my laughter was heard around Winterhold.

The next morning, gathered around the campfire once again, there was little doubt Lydia and Delphine had been intimate. If they thought I minded, I certainly didn’t, though it was amusing when Farkas made a joke about noises in the night, causing Lydia to blush brightly, though Delphine took it in her stride as always.

We packed up the camp and left our things in one of the dilapidated huts. There wasn’t a lot we could with the horses, leaving them in the same hut but covering them all in some furs to at least keep them warm, unsure of how long we would be leaving them alone. Once everyone was ready, we wasted no more time and headed for the crevice and the ruins of Alftand, unsure of what we would discover inside.

Chapter 37: Scrolls

I’m not sure how long Alftand had been abandoned. I knew the dwarves had disappeared long ago, but the ice had well and truly taken hold of the entrance, and we all remained bloody cold as we walked through the crevice, ice to either side, blow and above. The expedition must have been well prepared, as we passed by more barrels, sacks and chests of supplies, but of the people themselves, they must have been further within.

Finding another camp was a surprise, agreeing that they probably escaped into the crevice during a bad storm. If the blizzard we’d experienced was anything to compare, then it was little wonder. What did concern us was all the blood. Pools of it remained unfrozen on the ground, but even more was sprayed on the walls, some even reaching the ice ceiling over our heads.

“Falmer?” I asked Aela.

“No. They’re bastards, but this is something else entirely.”

Delphine put her hand in the firepit. “This hasn’t been lit recently so any survivors are probably further in.”

“I’m guessing we’re going to find bodies soon enough,” Vilkas muttered.

All of us unsheathed a weapon, either one-handed swords or two-handed great-swords. No point using bows in the tight confines, and none of us were mages. The amount of blood was staggering. But where were the bodies?

Moving on, we could soon hear voices, and there was no doubt they were Khajit. They had an unmistakable accent, though I couldn’t ascertain whether it was one or two. It did sound like they were having one hell of an argument and it sounded like it was about skooma. No real surprise there, as they were responsible for the making and distribution of it. Well, usually…

The ice slowly disappeared around us with evidence of the dwemer ruin replacing it. We could hear the dwarven machines still operating all around us, and the spider like machines made an appearance, though with six of us, they were turned into scrap metal with relative ease. A few more of them appeared the further in we walked, a few appearing in front, though a couple also hit us in the rear. Nothing we couldn’t handle, but we made sure to keep the chatter at a minimum, as we could hear them coming down pipes.

We eventually found one of the Khajit we’d heard earlier, standing over the body of another. He turned towards us, the dagger still dripping with blood. I didn’t know if he was responsible for all the blood we saw earlier, but when he charged at the six of us, it was obvious he was drugged up, and there was little chance of asking him questions.

Once the Khajit was dead, which didn’t take longer than a couple of seconds, we searched the pair of backpacks near the other body. Apart from a load of empty skooma bottles, and various odds and sods, we did find a journal. It didn’t give too much information except that the expedition we were following had been on the road for weeks.

Moving on, we continued to find even more supplies, plenty of barrels and sacks full of fresh food, kept fresh by the fact it was still freezing cold. We took some fruit and salted meat, unsure of how long we would be, and later found another journal, this belonging to someone called Umana. It gave us more background information on the purpose of the expedition, but it also suggested supplies were running low – strange, considering we’d walked by plenty – but that there were signs they were being hunted by the Falmer.

We could only keep moving forward, continuing to run into more dwarven machines, includes the larger contraptions that rolled on what looked like some sort of sphere, and could strike with thick metal arms. All of us now carried shields as protection, but even when holding those, it felt they could break an arm at any moment. The further on we walked, the more enemies we ran into, almost as if the ruin itself was coming alive to stop us.

In addition to the machines, there were plenty of traps and other mechanisms to catch out the unwary. We noticed blood by a doorway and it was only quick thinking that stopped a pair of us being impaled by spears that came out of the floor and ceiling. Another room had pressure plates that, if stepped on, released flames from various nozzles. We still found no sign of any bodies, but I’m sure I wasn’t the only one with a sense of foreboding. The ruin was alive, and I knew at heart that it wasn’t just the machines that were going to bother us.

Eventually entering what looked like living quarters, now having left the ice behind, there were stone beds and other furniture as we passed by a series of rooms. It was no surprise that we found another body, this one relatively fresh, his body covered with numerous wounds. Delivered by machine or Falmer, we couldn’t really tell. Vilkas found a journal on his body that suggested they’d fun into both Falmer and machine, though who had actually killed him, we figured it was the Flmer as he mentioned ‘eyeless creatures’.

The ruins of Alftand must have spread across half of Skyrim, and we ended up in an enormous cavern. Looking over the edge of the pathway, the lower levels must have been hundreds of metres below. We still hadn’t run into any Falmer, but walked by chaurus sacs. I could handle Falmer, but I hated the chaurus. Evil creatures which everyone hated fighting.

It was entering this enormous cavern that we found the first bodies of whatever expedition we were following. In addition to the bodies, we ran into Falmer, and the bloodletting began again. The Falmer were vile creatures. I understood a little of their history, but they showed no mercy, so we showed none in return. As we weaved our way ever downwards, we came across more bodies that suggested the Falmer had performed either cruel experiments or even ate their victims.

That certainly stoked the fire in all our bellies, and we fought with renewed ferocity as we also explored every nook and cranny of the dwarven ruin. The sheer enormity of it was breathtaking. There was nothing like it on the surface at all. Even the grandest cities or forts could not compare to what the dwarves appeared capable of.

The Falmer were smart, I’ll give them that much credit, as in addition to fighting them, they also laid traps for the unwary. Thankfully my Companion colleagues could usually sniff out any trouble, so tripwires were cut to spring traps before we walked into them, while we did manage to catch a Falmer or two by surprise, though more often than not, we ended up fighting our way through most chambers.

After battling through caves, we ended up back in the dwarven ruin itself, and it was there that we had to deal with an enormous dwarven contraption, what Aela called a Centurion. It was huge, towering over all of us, and it seemed to have plenty of its own tricks. That’s when I just used my Thu’um, blowing it clear across the room, and the six of us just hacked at it until it stopped moving.

We then found two people bickering among themselves, realising quickly that one of them was Sulla, the leader of the expedition. I’m not sure if they were both crazy beforehand, but they may have spent far too long getting past all the Falmer, traps and everything else, as their argument quickly turned physical. Though Sulla appeared to be better armed and armoured, his colleague fought with undoubted skill, making short work of him. Once she saw us, she roared and charged.

Idiot. I would have preferred to ask her some questions, but she received a sword through her gut instead. A complete waste, to be honest.

Using the dwarven contraption to open the next door, we then walked into Blackreach. And I simply don’t have the words to describe it in detail. It was hauntingly beautiful, left flabbergasted that something so grand could remain undiscovered underneath Skyrim. It boggled the mind how it hadn’t all collapsed, though I figured we were incredibly deep underground.

Noticing a small building directly ahead, we made straight for it. We found a body inside, obviously dead for a long time as the clothing contained only a skeleton, though Aela found a journal that told us his name and reason for being in Blackreach. By now, we were all knackered, and after stoking the fire, we sat down on the floor and enjoyed a little food, suggesting we take watch in turns as the others slept. I offered to take first watch, Delphine offering to join me outside.

We took a seat together, keeping an ear out but it appeared either Blackreach was deserted, or the section we were in was anyway. “I’m glad I’ve kept fit over the years,” she said, sipping at a tankard.

“Finding it tough?” I asked.

She looked at me with a smirk. “I think I’ve proven I can keep up with you, Ragnar, in more ways than one.”

“Can’t argue with that. And I guess Lydia has figured that out too.”

That made her smile. “Well, she’s certainly vocal about certain things and I’m glad she appreciates what I can do.”

“Do much exploring like this though?”

“Rarely. I’ve plunged the occasional Nord ruin but nothing like this. No, this is definitely a first.” She reached out and grabbed my hand. “Thanks, Ragnar, for letting me tag along. The whole act in Riverwood was, quite frankly, boring.” She paused before adding, “The great sex is a real bonus too.”

“No complaints from me either.” I glanced at her and knew she was thinking, but nothing else happened, sharing the tankard of mead and chatting about our lives a little more. I knew she kept some secrets still but I didn’t expect her to be an open book.

We eventually headed in after a few hours, woke up the twins, and once they were outside, Delphine figured joining me in my bedroll would be a good idea, no real surprise that she was naked. But we were both tired after a very long day, and though my body reacted, all she did was settle her body against mine and go to sleep. Waking the next morning, I shared breakfast with the three girls, the twins heading in once food was prepared, and after frankly filling ourselves to the brim, we packed and headed back out.

I’ll admit we were quickly distracted by everything we found in Blackreach. It was clear this was once an enormous dwarven city. That sheer size left me wondering if it wasn’t some sort of capital. It was remarkably preserved, much like other dwarven ruins I had seen, though it was still filled with the Falmer and chaurus I was already used to battling far beneath the surface.

Though we could have possibly spent days exploring Blackreach, I knew we had to find some sort of tower, and after a few hours walking, we finally found what I hoped was the Tower of Mzark. We didn’t make it there without encountering a few enemies, though we were already used to Falmer and dwarven creations, taking a minor wound or two at most for our troubles. The tower looked solid as we approached the main door.

The tower didn’t contain much, though it looked like someone else may have passed through, though not recently as we discovered a skeleton near an enormous sphere inside. Aela found a journal, and though most of the writing had faded, we could make out some passages, which helped us a little when we reached the top of the sphere.

As usual, or so it seemed by now, it was a dwarven puzzle. Remembering what Septimus wanted, we looked around and found some sort of pedestal on which we could place the lexicon. Then we had to figure out how to make the contraption work.

“Are we sure the Elder Scroll is even here?” Farkas wondered.

Good question, I thought, though I wasn’t going to be negative. Looking around, we slowly but surely figured out what we needed to do. Took a little magic, pressing buttons and lining up the glass to the right place, but after perhaps an hour or so of trial and error, we finally managed to make it work and some sort of container appeared that held the prize.

“An Elder Scroll,” Delphine whispered, almost reverently.

“Don’t attempt to read it, Ragnar,” Vilkas warned, “I’ve read stories of people gone mad who even attempted it.”

I simply placed it into my pack and we headed for the exit. As usual, we ended up exiting far away from our entry point, but having left our horses at base camp, we had to trudge our way back to retrieve them before leaving. Considering we were already this far north, I suggested we head to Winterhold, where I could return the lexicon to Septimus at least, before we journeyed south. The others agreed, and I think we all thanked the gods for the clear, bright though bitterly cold weather experienced on our ride back, it having fallen dark and, if possible, even colder by the time we made it to Winterhold.

The late hour meant another night at the inn, and it was obvious we must have been the only regulars, as the innkeeper gave us every room available for a few coins off. I took the big room, joined by Aela. The twins had their own room with two single beds, leaving Delphine and Lydia to share a bed too. We enjoyed a few drinks by the fire, as the inn was almost as cold as outside, and Lydia couldn’t help going into detail about how Delphine made her cum really hard. Even the twins couldn’t help laughing at the rather explicit descriptions, little wonder Delphine and Lydia were soon making out and, to no-one’s surprise, they made their excuses and disappeared.

“Well, those two fucking at least leaves you for me, Ragnar,” Aela whispered in my ear.

That was definite sign for all of us to head to bed. As soon as the door was closed, Aela was all over me. I returned her eagerness by stripping her within about three seconds, and there was no real though of foreplay, as I was pushed back onto the bed, and I’d barely relaxed when Aela straddled my lap and sat down on my cock. We both groaned as she did that, and within a few seconds, she was riding my cock hard and fast.

“By Talos, woman!”

“It’s been a couple of days, Ragnar. Do you blame me?”

I paused for a moment. “No, not at all. Carry on.”

She came really hard and fast, so I think she’d been horny for a little while. All she did once she’d cum was get on her back, spread her legs, and basically order me to fuck her. Gods, I liked her in that sort of mood. And I made sure she was properly fucked for all of five minutes before I needed to cum too.

We lay back afterwards, Aela cuddling into my side, when our eyes met and we burst into laughter. “We both needed that,” she said.

“Aye. No complaints from me.”

I threw on some underwear and ordered us some mead from the innkeeper, and after sating our thirst, we made love a little later, making sure that lasted a lot longer second time around. She was usually bare-faced whenever we went to bed, and I couldn’t help gaze upon her face as we made love. It occasionally made her self-conscious, but I’d just reassure her that she was beautiful. I’ll admit, I had luck when it came to my partners. Muiri, Haelga, Astrid and now Aela. All of them were gorgeous. I had others, of course, but I’m talking the women I adored above all.

Lying back again later, both of us now feeling rather worn out, I broached a subject we’d discussed before, as I had been thinking about it. “Aela, the woman I met at the college…”

“You’ve been thinking about her?”

I sighed. “She’s too much of a reminder. And part of me…”

Aela lifted herself up and rested on my chest. “What do you want, Ragnar?”

“I’m not for a second suggesting leaving,” I whispered, stroking her cheek, “But… There was definitely an attraction. And not just from me. She was… perhaps intrigued, and no doubt knew of my immediate interest.”

“I’ve already said I don’t mind, Ragnar. I know your past. I know what you’re like. You have other women now and you know I will have other partners. Women, of course, but I have a feeling you don’t mind that.”

“What I’m thinking is I drop the lexicon with Septimus then perhaps head to the college?”

“What should we all do?”

“Well, to be honest, after that, I’ll head straight back to the Greybeards and…” I sighed, “There are a couple of secrets that I simply cannot share regarding them. And the one person I definitely cannot take to High Hrothgar is Delphine. She will simply not be welcome there. So in the morning, I will ask everyone to return to Whiterun, though Delphine will likely return to Sky Haven Temple.”

She kissed my cheek. “If that’s what you think is best, then by all means, Ragnar.”

I kissed her back. “Thank you.”

We made love again the next morning, making sure Aela felt completely and utterly loved up by the time we were done. Heading out for breakfast, there was little doubt Delphine and Lydia had fucked all night, and I had a feeling Lydia was now feeling rather enamoured by the older woman. If the twins had heard anything from either of us, they said nothing. As we were eating, I told all of them my plan. The twins agreed that it was fine, Lydia was unhappy but complied, and I think Delphine was a little suspicious but kept them to herself.

The five mounted up outside, letting them know I would return to Whiterun as soon as possible. Delphine said she would return to Sky Haven, but it would be easy to keep in touch with each other. She knew where I lived anyway, and she said she’d journey there every so often if I was gone for a while. Lydia blurted out that it sounded like a fine idea. Yep, definitely enamoured.

I left my horse by the inn and began the long walk north. It was a clear day but bitterly cold, wrapping my furs tight as I started to cross the field of ice separating the mainland from the cave. It took a few hours as the wind was strong enough to almost blow me off my feet into the freezing water, but I made it to the cave safely.

Septimus hadn’t moved, or it looked like he hadn’t anyway. He did notice my arrival, though, and shuffled towards me as I reached into my pack for the lexicon. His thin fingers grabbed it eagerly out of my hands. “Look, that was a real pain in the arse, despite getting the Elder Scroll I needed.” Gesturing at the dwemer thing, I asked, “What is all this about?”

“The box contains the heart. The essence of a god. I have devoted my life to the Elder Scrolls, but their knowledge is a passing awareness when compared to the encompassing mind of divinity. The Dwemer were the last to touch it. It was thought to have been destroyed by the Nerevarine, but my lord told me otherwise.”

“Lord?” I asked, “What lord?”

“The Daedric prince of the unknown. Hermaeus Mora. I thought there were no secrets left to know. Until I first spoke to him. He asks a price -- to work his will. A few murders, some dissent spread, a plague or two. For the secrets I can endure. In time, he brought me here. To the box. But he won't reveal how to open it. Maddening.”

I was left in no doubt that this man was now one hundred percent insane. Whether he was insane before heading to this cave, I couldn’t be sure. So while he’d helped me with the Elder Scrolls, I was pretty much ready to just leave the lunatic to his desires. I figured he’d stay where he was until finally dropping dead. But he continued speaking anyway.

“Extraordinary. I see it now. The sealing structure interlocks in the tiniest fractals. Dwemer blood can loose the hooks, but none alive remain to bear it. A panoply of their brethren could gather to form a facsimile. A trick. Something they didn't anticipate, no, not even them. The blood of Altmer, Bosmer, Dunmer, Falmer, and Orsimer. The elves still living provide the key.”

Now I turned to look at him. “What?”

He shuffled across to his own belongings, walking towards me seconds later holding some contraption. “Bear you hence this extractor. It will drink the fresh blood of elves. Come when its set is complete.”

“You want me to commit murder?”

Look, I know I probably sounded like a hypocrite asking that question considering my past, but I liked to think I’d move on since then. Septimus looked me up and down. “You are a warrior, yes? Take the blood from your enemies. It matters not how it is gathered, but the blood must be fresh when taken.”

I put the extractor in my pack and left without another word. Whether I would do what he wanted, I wasn’t sure, though I’ll admit a little part of me did wonder what was behind that door. Gold and riches? Knowledge and power? Just another trap? Or perhaps an enemy so powerful, that’s why it had been shut away?

Still thinking about it, I barely noticed what happened near the entrance until I nearly ran into it. I can’t describe what it was, but it was definitely ugly. “I am Hermaeus Mora. I am the guardian of the unseen, and knower of the unknown. I have been watching you, mortal. Most impressive.”

I groaned. That’s all I needed. The presence of another daedra in my life.

“Your continuing aid to Septimus renders him increasingly obsolete. He has served me well, but his time is nearing its end. Once that infernal lockbox is opened, he will have exhausted his usefulness to me. When that time comes, you shall take his place as my emissary. What say you?”

“Piss off and find another servant. I’m through dealing with daedra.”

He muttered something and promptly disappeared. I’d probably pissed him off, but that was just further reason not to help Septimus any further. I was through serving daedra. Returning to the inn by nightfall, the innkeeper was surprised to see me now alone, but happily offered me a meal, beer and a bed. It was a little weird going to bed alone. Couldn’t remember the last time that happened!

I headed back to the college the next morning. Wandering over the bridge and onto the grounds, there were a few hooded figures walking around, figuring they were either wizards or apprentices. I stopped one of them and asked after Mirabelle, pointed towards a door that led to the private quarters of students and teachers alike.

Wandering inside, I found on the second floor, reading a book at her desk. I knocked on the wall to gain her attention. When she turned to look at me, my breath caught again as the similarity was uncanny. I knew it was the wrong reason to show an interest, but maybe when I got to know her, the personality would surely be different…

“Ragnar,” she said softly, getting to her feet. I couldn’t help smile at the fact she remembered me.

“Hello, Mirabelle.”

I watched her as she stepped towards me. “What brings you back to the college?”

I almost blurted out, “You”, though I did wonder how she would have reacted. So I said, “Well, I was in the area again so thought I’d stop by.”

“Have you given it some thought, about becoming a student?”

“There’s a better reason for me to consider staying here, Mirabelle.”

She heard the soft tone and I couldn’t help smile when I noticed the blush form. I have a feeling she didn’t receive much attention, or was perhaps so busy, she didn’t give it a thought. “Why don’t I give you a bit of a tour and you can stay for a while?”

I felt my smile broaden as I agreed that sounded like a fine idea. So she showed me around the grounds first. There wasn’t a whole lot to see but I just enjoyed being in her presence, and felt her walk as close as possible to me at the same time. Following her up the stairs to the top of the walls, we gained a great view of the surrounding area. Being that high exposed us to the wind. Noticing her shiver, that’s when I wrapped an arm around her while looping my furs around her body. We stayed up there for quite a while, sharing the occasional word.

I’d already been in the library but she did take me to meet the Arch-Mage, a Dunmer by the name of Savos Aren. I think he barely noticed either of us. Gods only knew what he was doing, but Mirabelle seemed unperturbed by his absent-mindedness.

After exploring one or two other areas, it was time for a late lunch, Mirabelle wondering if I wanted to join her. I answered the question so quickly, it made her blush again. We ended up dining together alone in her room, really getting to know each other in privacy. She asked plenty of personal questions about myself. She already knew I was the Dragonborn, so I admitted I’d been married before, performed some jobs around Skyrim, leaving the darker stuff out. As for herself, she was High Rock born and bred though had made her way to the college at a young age, wanting to become a master wizard.

I could have stayed all day and night, but I eventually told her that I had to leave, showing her the Elder Scroll I’d discovered. She was definitely fascinated by that, wondering what I needed it for. “It might help me stop Alduin and the crisis,” I said.

“We’ve seen the occasional dragon fly by. Should we be concerned?”

“I aim to stop all this as quickly as possible.”

“Maybe you could return after you’re finished?”

I heard an… eagerness to her tone to say yes. So I took a chance myself, leaned forward, and kissed her. She responded immediately. I wrapped an arm around her, holding her close. It was such a reminder that… I stopped. I had to stop. It wasn’t fair on her. I leaned back and looked away. For the first time in months, I felt the oncoming feeling of tears.

“I’m a reminder?” she asked softly.

“And it’s not fair on you,” I replied quietly.

She put a finger to my chin so I looked at her. She simply smiled at me, leaning forward to kiss me again. “I might be a reminder, Ragnar, but I’m my own woman.”

I took a moment to get my thoughts in order before pulling her close again. The only reason I didn’t end up sleeping with her that afternoon is that I didn’t want to just have sex then leave. We made out for a while before I had to suggest I needed to leave, thinking I could leave and make Windhelm by nightfall.

She walked with me all the way across the bridge to the edge of town, where we kissed again. Then I held her in my arms and I nearly called her the wrong name. She heard the catch in my voice, feeling her squeeze me tightly in return. “When it’s all over, return here and you’ll really get to know me, if you’d like.”

“I’d like that, Mirabelle,” I admitted.

We kissed a final time before she turned to walk across the bridge, though she turned back and I saw the smile again. And I knew, then and there, that I’d definitely return. Maybe joining the college wasn’t such a bad idea after all?

---

It was a two-and-a-half-day ride just to make it back to Ivarstead. I was tempted to stop by Whiterun and collect a friend or two but I didn’t want the distractions, nor reveal the main secret of the Greybeards. They were better off simply not knowing for now.

The innkeeper wasn’t particularly surprised to see me when I trudged in, probably looking and smelling like a wet dog, the weather turning miserable as I rode south, whispering ‘Dragonborn’ once I’d taken a room for the night. I simply smirked, grabbing the tankard of beer and planting my arse by the fire to dry out.

I left for High Hrothgar the next morning, the weather still miserable, thick cloud rolling in not long after I’d started to climb the mountain. However, the higher I climbed, the fog did lift, and after a few hours and approaching the old monastery, the weather had at least cleared somewhat. Entering the ancient building, Arngeir soon approached me as I dried off my clothes and furs.

“You have returned, Dragonborn.”

“I have, Master. I will wait here until first light tomorrow before completing the journey.”

“You were successful in your task?”

“Yes, Master. The scroll is with me.”

“Very well. We trust in Paarthurnax, and we will trust in you, Dragonborn. Have you eaten?”

“Not since leaving Ivarstead.”

“Then please join us for dinner.”

It was always quiet at dinner with the old monks, left wondering if they would be the last of their order, or if they would look for and accept new recruits. I wasn’t sure how it worked, though from what Arngeir had told me, it took decades of practice to become one with the Voice. I guess I was getting used to sleeping alone, or perhaps it was the long journey, as I fell straight to sleep that night.

It was a blue, cloudless sky beginning the final part of my journey the next morning. Paarthurnax had barely moved when I made my appearance. Without ceremony, I dropped my pack and showed him the Elder Scroll. I think it was the first time I heard any change in his tone, actually sounding momentarily excited. “You have it. The Kel - the Elder Scroll. Tiid kreh... qalos. Time shudders at its touch. There is no question. You are doom-driven. Kogaan Akatosh. The very bones of the earths are at your disposal. Go then. Fulfil your destiny. Take the Scroll to the Time-Wound. Do not delay. Alduin will be coming. He cannot miss the signs.”

The Time Wound was nearby. Blink and you’d miss it, but if I stood still, I could see a faint ripple. I’m not sure it was some form of magic or something else entirely, but I stood where I needed and opened the Elder Scroll.

I was immediately blinded, but after regaining my vision, I was somewhere else. I was still at the Throat of the World, but it was definitely a different time. In front of me were warriors, ancient warriors, though I could still understand their tongue at least. They were busy fighting off a dragon and discussing Alduin, and I correctly guessed this was the day Alduin was banished.

Alduin eventually appeared and it was then that I learned the words needed for a Shout called Dragonrend, the warriors of old using it to force Alduin to the ground, and it was then that they were able to fight and, more importantly, draw blood.

But they could not kill him, one of the ancient warriors being killed, and it was only then that one of the old warriors used an Elder Scroll, and with what sounded like a spell, Alduin was banished, though not forever. Even the old warrior knew that Alduin would reappear one day.

With a blink of my eyes, I returned to the present day. Before Paarthurnax could ask a question, there was a roar and the black form of Alduin appeared nearby. “Bahloki nahkip sillesejoor. My belly is full of the souls of your fellow mortals, Dovahkiin. Die now and await your fate in Sovngarde.”

Before I could use my newly learned Shout, Paarthurnax took off, straight for Alduin. “Lost funt. You are too late, Alduin! Dovahkiin! Use Dragonrend, if you know it!”

The two old dragons fought each other and it was immediately obvious that Alduin was the stronger. But Paarthurnax wasn’t fighting, he was getting Alduin into position so I could use Dragonrend. I couldn’t help smirk as Alduin forgot I even existed, so caught him by surprise when I used my Thu’um.

“JOOR… ZAH… FRUL…”

Alduin was quickly forced to the ground and I was ready with sword and shield. Alduin certainly had a lot to say, and I had to be careful of his razor sharp teeth and claws, but I certainly got in some strikes of my own. The spell lasted all of twenty seconds or so before it wore off and Alduin started to take off. So I just used my Thu’um again, forcing him down. Paarthurnax took position nearby and used his own Thu’um, Alduin taking damage from both of us.

“Dovahkiin, you call yourself? Arrogant mortal,” he cried, leaning back and taking a hard swipe. I lifted my shield just in time, rolling out of the way. Distracted like I was, I felt the heat of flames, using my furs to wrap myself in a ball, feeling frost cover me at the same time.

Unwrapping myself, it was obvious Paarthurnax had helped me out, looking his way and nodding though Alduin was now in the air again. “Thanks!” I yelled.

“Don’t underestimate him, Dovahkiin!” he warned.

There was another roar and Alduin seemed to appear from nowhere, forcing me onto the ground as he swooped, feeling his claws scratched into the back of my armour. I was on my feet immediately and used Dragonrend again. Now I was just pissed off, closing in on him by the time he’d landed.

“Time to die, dragon,” I growled, going straight for his head. Whack. Block. Thrust. Block. Swipe. Block. I knew I was drawing blood too, doing everything I could to get my sword between his thick scales. Paarthurnax was still helping.

He tried to take off again, and I just forced him back down. Paarthurnax helped distracted Alduin again, turning the dragon so I could now attack elsewhere. Now I was getting the hang of it, I was soon drawing blood from his body and neck, but Alduin was strong, and despite the blood loss, he just wouldn’t go down.

Then he used a Shout, causing the skies to turn red and rocks to fall from the sky. He was a wily, old thing, but I had a trick or two of my own. I didn’t always remember the Shouts, but I did remember this one.

“LOK… VAH… KOOR…”

As soon as the skies turned red, they turned blue once again. Alduin turned and glared at me angrily. I just tapped my sword against my shield. “Your head will look good resting above my fireplace,” I stated.

“You will pay for your defiance!”

He took off, I forced him back down. That happened at least twice more before Paarthurnax stated worryingly, “He just won’t die, Dovahkiin!”

I was thinking the same thing. Any other dragon I’d fought had definitely died by now. So while Dragonrend allowed me to fight and draw blood, it didn’t allow me to kill him. Alduin took off a final time, floating a few feet above my head. “Meyz mul, Dovahkiin. You have become strong. But I am Al-du-in, Firstborn of Akatosh! Mulaagi zok lot! I cannot be slain here, by you or anyone else! You cannot prevail against me. I will outlast you... mortal!”

He turned and started to fly away, and I’ll admit, I let him go. I was exhausted, and if what he said was true, then continuing to fight him was pointless. Paarthurnax rested on the broken wall nearby, and I could see he was bleeding from numerous wounds, jogging over to him. I think he almost laughed at my concern. “I will be fine, Dovahkiin, but thank you.”

“I guess we’re going to need a new plan if I can’t kill him here. Guess I’d better speak with Arngeir, see if he has any suggestions.”

“Dragonsreach, Dovahkiin,” Paarthurnax stated.

“What?”

“Dragonsreach. Arngeir will know what I mean. He can tell you what you require.”

Chapter 38: College

Arngeir was able to tell me what I needed to know about Dragonsreach. It was used to capture a dragon long ago. Guess that’s where its name came from, but knowing what I needed, I bid the Greybeards goodbye and headed down the mountain. It was dark by the time I walked through the door of the inn, and after a short sleep, left just as dawn was breaking, ensuring I made it back to Whiterun within the day.

The first stop I made was Breezehome, where Aela was very happy to see me, though there was no sign of Lydia. My question made Aela laugh for some reason. “Your Housecarl has been decidedly naughty, Ragnar.”

“How do you mean?”

“She’s at Sky Haven with Delphine.”

“You’re serious? They’re getting along that well?”

“I think it’s partly that, partly she doesn’t want to intrude on us. I’ve told her more than once she can have you generally whenever she wants, and I definitely enjoy the three of us together, but they’ve hit it off, so I figured you probably wouldn’t mind.”

“So we have the house to ourselves?” I asked rhetorically. Aela answered by grabbing my hand and leading my upstairs.

Clothing was removed rather slowly as I caressed her body with my fingers or mouth. As soon as we were both naked, she wasted no time dropping to her knees, running my hand through her long hair as she pleasured me with her mouth. My cock felt harder than ever before, or so it seemed. I guess going over a week without sex has its effects. I had to warn her rather quickly I was going to cum, though she didn’t stop for an instant, happily taking and swallowing what I gave her. I groaned rather loudly, figuring they heard me up in Dragonsreach, already thinking I’d just speak to the Jarl tomorrow.

It was a good orgasm, but one good turn deserves another, picking up Aela and gently throwing her onto the bed. She spread her legs immediately, knowing exactly what I was going to do, though I teased her at first, enjoying some time kissing those delightful breasts of hers, all the way down her body before finally focusing on her sex. And she was just as horny as myself, incredibly wet, and her first orgasm of the evening arrived faster than mine. It must have been good too, as she nearly squashed my head with her thighs. I kept eating her out until she had a second one, and after that, she dragged me up so I could slide my cock into her.

“Aye, far too long,” I said to myself.

“Makes it even better when you return though,” she whispered.

It was a hard, fast fuck, and I loved it when she begged for it to be harder or faster. The headboard was soon smashing against the wall, Aela with her arms around my back but her legs spread wide, shuffling so my cock felt even deeper inside her. “Fuck that feels good,” she moaned. I just kissed her, unable to really form a coherent sentence. “Cum in me… please, Dragonborn,” she added.

Like that wasn’t going to happen, but I was kind enough to deliver what she wanted only a couple of minutes later. That properly knackered me for the time being, rolling off her as she immediately turned and cuddled into my side. After taking a few deep breaths, I said, “Give me a few minutes to recover!”

She gave me a few minutes before journeying down my body, using her mouth to bring me back to life completely. When she looked up as my cock was in her mouth, the look in her eyes spoke volumes. I caressed her cheek and told her that I loved her. She had to remove my cock such was the breadth of her smile.

Straddling my lap, she teased me a few times, running her pussy along my shaft before finally lifting herself up and slowly sinking down. Fuck, it felt good. Resting her hands on my chest, this was now all about her, so after adjusting my legs and gently holding her hips, I let her dictate the tempo.

“Best cock ever,” she stated.

I simply smiled and watched her ride me. I had to pinch myself sometimes, the fact I was with another gorgeous woman who loved everything we shared. I must have had a look in my eye as she leaned down to kiss me, running my hand through her red hair, resting the other one on her arse. I started to thrust up into her at the same time.

“Gods yes, Dragonborn,” she moaned, “Fuck your huntress.”

She was moaning loudly into my mouth within a few minutes, needing to break our kiss, the change in her breathing suggesting she was getting close. “Holy shit,” I whispered.

“Need another release?”

“You do this to me, Aela.”

She kissed me again before she sat back slightly, and her body movements suggested her orgasm was imminent. We wouldn’t cum together, that was something you read in tales, but once she started to orgasm, she grabbed my hands and let me pump her until I came again.

Collapsing forward onto me, we lay pressed together, hot, sweaty and sticky, sucking in deep breaths but otherwise remaining silent for a while. Running my fingers up and down her back, I felt her shuffle or shudder occasionally, eventually starting to giggle. “Holy shit, I’m sensitive right now,” she whispered.

“And that’s a good thing,” I whispered back. She lifted herself up, my softening cock falling out. She did groan for a second, meeting her eyes as she pouted. “I’m only a man, Aela,” I joked. That made her giggle again.

After cleaning up as always, we lay back down under the furs, Aela spooned against me. I’d definitely had enough, as even her perfect arse didn’t provoke a reaction. “Did you go to the college?” she asked.

“Aye, I did.”

“And?”

I asked her to turn around before asking. “There’s definitely something,” I admitted, before grabbing her hands, meeting her eyes, “But nothing like we share.”

“But?”

I heard the concern. I caressed her cheek. “No but. If anything happens, it will be fleeting. And she already knows about Muiri. It’s why I’m still hesitant about doing anything. But I have an invite back.”

“Do you want to be with her?”

I never lied to any woman I loved. “Yes, I do.”

“Maybe I’ll come join you then?” she asked with a smirk.

“If you don’t mind hanging around a bunch of mages!”

“Hmmm… Maybe the inn, then. Though Winterhold is rather dull.”

“It’s something to consider. And I’ll always be honest with you about things like that.”

She turned back around and snuggled into me, making sure I held her nice and tight. After saying goodnight, she fell asleep rather quickly so I guess she was content with everything. I fell asleep quite quickly as well.

After breakfast the next morning, I dressed and headed up to Dragonsreach, stopping to speak to the occasional citizen, many asking about what was happening regarding the dragon situation. I said I was dealing with it but there were one or two other issues that needed resolving.

The conversation with Jarl Balgruuf went about as well as expected. He thought the idea of trying to trap a dragon was insane, but for some reason, he believed I was capable of doing it, and trusted me with the lives of himself, his children and his citizens. But nothing is ever that simple, I’d learned that long ago.

“I want to help you, Dragonborn. And I will. But I need your help first.”

“I knew your help would come at a price, sir.” I held up a hand to stop an argument. “I mean no disrespect, but I’m assuming the safety of your city is on your mind.”

“Ulfric and General Tullius are both just waiting for me to make a wrong move. Do you think they will sit idle while a dragon is slaughtering my men and burning my city?”

I didn’t have to think long about an answer. “What do you propose I do?”

“Getting both sides to agree to a truce will be difficult at this point. The bitterness has gone too deep. Maybe... hmm... what of the Greybeards? They are respected by all Nords. High Hrothgar is neutral territory. If the Greybeards were willing to host a peace council then maybe Ulfric and Tullius would have to listen.”

“It’s a long shot but I don’t particularly want to involve myself in the war myself.”

“You don’t have allegiance to the Empire?” he asked, surprised.

“Not particularly, but I also think Ulfric Stormcloak is picking a fight with the wrong enemy.”

I noticed the raised eyebrows. “You mean the Thalmor?”

“I’ve been into their embassy. I’ve witnessed what they do. Before that, I didn’t give them a thought. Sure, I saw them around occasionally, and their arrogance knows no bounds, but I was live and let live. Now, I won’t hesitate killing the bastards. So, Ulfric can preach about independence but, personally, I think he’s an idiot.”

“So, the Greybeards?”

“I’ll talk to them.”

“Good. Know the story about Dragonsreach?” Shaking my head, he continued. “According to legend. Although I never thought to put the tale to the test. Jarl Olaf One-Eye it was, who later became High King. They say he Shouted it into submission in single combat atop Mount Anthor and brought it back to Whiterun. Numinex was the dragon's name. That's his skull decorating the main hall.”

“Should I leave the letter writing to someone else?”

That made him smile. “Aye, I’ll have Proventus write letters on your and my behalf, requesting their presence, though only once you’ve returned from High Hrothgar confirming the Greybeards will help.”

Returning to Breezehome, I informed Aela of what I needed, and she insisted on joining me this time. After quickly packing, we departed directly for Ivarstead though only making it long after it had gone dark. It was a tiring day, so all we did was sleep after taking one of the available rooms, waking early and beginning our long climb up the mountain. Arngeir was surprised to see me again so soon, but when I said I had a request, he was immediately suspicious of what I was about to ask. To be honest, I didn’t blame the man.

Taking a seat at the table, I explained what I needed. “I need your help to stop the war,” I said.

Arngeir looked perplexed, even amused by my statement. “You misunderstand our authority. The Greybeards have never involved themselves in political affairs.”

“The problem is I need Dragonsreach to capture the dragon. But Jarl Balgruuf won’t help me as long as the war continues to rage. I understand his reasons, which is why I’m here asking for your help.”

He nodded. “I see. This dragon you seek to catch will lead you to Alduin, but without the Jarl’s help…”

“Despite what you may believe, Master, the people down there respect you and your order. Your words will carry weight. They will listen to what you have to say.”

“But will they listen to you, Dragonborn?”

“They’d better, otherwise I’ll take on board what you said earlier, and simply let the world end if that is what the gods desire.”

He remained silent for a few minutes before nodding. “Paarthurnax has made the decision to help you. This is the road we have to walk. Even the Greybeards must bend to the winds of change, it seems. So be it. Tell Ulfric and General Tullius that the Greybeards wish to speak to them. We will see if they still remember us.”

“Things still need organising with them but knowing you agree should make things easier.”

“We will begin preparations once we receive word the two sides will agree to meet.”

There was no point waiting around, Aela and I heading straight back down the mountain, arriving back in Whiterun the next evening. Lydia was waiting for us in Breezehome, and I first informed her of everything I was involved in. “So you’re going to be playing the role of peacemaker as well now?” she wondered.

“Seems so. And, as I told others, I have no interest in involving myself in the war of lords and their lands.”

After letting Ulfric know the Greybeards would host the peace council, he let me know letters would be written, requests made, and that he’d let me know when he could. But he figured there would be negotiations before the actual council would convene, so suggested I keep myself busy until he sent word. Waiting was something I was somewhat used to by now, so I headed straight back to Breezehome, where Lydia was busy cooking dinner.

“Enjoy yourself?” I wondered after taking a seat by the fire.

“I did. Delphine is quite the lover.”

“You could have stayed longer with her. I wouldn’t have minded.”

“No, I have my role here, Ragnar.” She looked at me, noticing my smile at the use of my name. “Plus, Aela suggested a threesome tonight. I’ve missed that big cock of yours too.”

She didn’t actually have to wait, as I stood up and close to her as she cooked, leaning down to her ear. “Why wait?” I whispered.

I grabbed her hand, leading her to the table, sitting her down on it. She kissed me immediately as belts were unbuckled, clothing taken off. Once I had her down to underwear, her panties were quickly removed and I slid my cock inside her. She moaned as I did so, wrapping her arms and legs around me as I fucked her. “Gods yes,” she cried, “Fuck me, Dragonborn.”

That got Aela’s attention, hearing her come down the stairs to find me buried inside Lydia. I felt her body press into mine, understanding she was now naked as well, as I turned Lydia around, bending her over the table. “Fuck that pussy, Ragnar,” Aela urged.

Holding onto Lydia’s hips, I pounded her hard, our skin slapping together, holding one of her wrists back so she’d look back at me. The eagerness on her face told me what she wanted. A hard, fast fuck. Aela moved so she could get under Lydia and she was soon pleasing her as well.

“By the Nine, I’m going to cum!” Lydia exclaimed.

She came, and she came rather quickly. Feeling her squeeze my cock, that only hastened my orgasm as well, burying myself each time as I unloaded inside my housecarl. Collapsing forward, I left my cock buried inside her as I gently rested on her back, giving her cheek a gentle kiss. “Okay, you are better,” she whispered, “Just don’t tell Delphine. Nothing can replace your cock.”

The idea of dinner was abandoned as the three of us headed upstairs. It was a fun night, each woman taking their chance to ride my cock or face, while I loved having one of them on all fours as they ate the pussy of the other one. One of the best moments was not even being involved but watching the pair eat each other out. Probably one of the sexiest things I’d ever seen, though once they’d cum once together, they insisted I join in.

Lying back later that night, a woman in each arm, I told them that I would be without any real role until the two sides agreed to the council, so I figured I might head north. “What for?” Lydia asked, unaware of what happened.

“Ragnar might be attending the college,” Aela stated, hearing the humour in her tone. Lydia laughed, and I couldn’t be offended. I was definitely no mage. I couldn’t remember the last time I’d even used a basic spell. Everyone was capable of magic but some were more talented than others.

“Do you want to join us?” I wondered.

“Aela is going?”

“Aye,” Aela replied, “And I echo the question. You’re welcome to come.”

She was silent for a moment, probably thinking she’d get in the way. “Lydia, I wouldn’t ask you to join us if it was going to be a problem. Aela already knows why I’m going, and she’s fine with it. Plus, if I’m busy doing other things, you can keep each other company.”

“And I wouldn’t mind you using your tongue on me again,” Aela added.

Lydia blushed. “Delphine did provide some tips on how to eat pussy. And, I’ll admit, I thoroughly enjoyed what she did to me, and I could do it to her all the time.” Hearing that just made my cock hard, both girls laughing away as the tent appeared in the furs covering us. “Want to hear some more?” Lydia wondered.

“Definitely,” I replied.

Lydia went into great, graphic detail, enough that I lasted all of five minutes before I was eating out both women at once. Aela loved every second while I’m glad to say Lydia had no complaints either, particularly enjoying it when I focused on her arse, considering that is something she mentioned Delphine enjoyed doing to her. “You’ve got to fuck me there again,” Lydia moaned as I rimmed her. I agreed before continuing, eventually giving her quite the orgasm, and she was the first to fall asleep a little later.

The next morning, after informing the Jarl of my intention, the three of us packed some supplies and headed north. As we didn’t really have to rush, we made it as far as Windhelm, staying there overnight before completing the journey to Winterhold the next day. Neither woman was interested in joining me at the college, so the next morning it was only myself who headed back across the bridge.

Heading straight for the private quarters, I found Mirabelle in her room once again. When she turned upon sensing my presence, the smile that appeared instantly made my heart flutter, and when she stepped forward to hug me, then kiss me, everything felt right in the world once again. “I didn’t think you’d return so quickly,” she whispered, resting a hand on my chest as she looked up at me. I’ll be honest, when she did that, I saw Muiri. The only thing missing were the faint tattoos across her cheeks.

So I kissed her again. Hard, enough that I forced her back against the wall. She seemed to enjoy it, whimpering into my mouth, and I’m not sure what held us back, as while I wanted to strip her naked and do many things to her, I made do with just holding her close to my body so she would at least feel how my body reacted. “Gods,” she breathed upon breaking the kiss.

“Sorry,” I said quietly.

“Gods no, don’t apologise, Ragnar.” She ran a hand down my cheek. “It’s been a long time since anyone has shown such an interest.”

Kissing her softly, I added, “Guess I should let you know that I’m interested in joining the college.”

The smile lit up her face. Lit up the entire room. “Well, I think there would be no finer student than the Dragonborn himself joining our college. How adept are you at magic?”

“Honestly?” She nodded. Gesturing, I said, “I’m adept at wielding sword and shield, or if needs be, my fists. Magic? Not so much.”

“Then you will prove to be an excellent student.” She put a hand on my chest, gently pushing me back. “Follow me, I think you should join the newest bunch of students. Tolfdir should be instructing them now in the Hall of Elements.”

She continued to speak as we made our way towards the main hall. Where students lived was the Hall of Attainment. Mirabelle lived in the same quarters with all the other instructors. She offered robes which I declined, preferring my furs and armour. I did provide evidence I knew at least a couple of spells, but I think she already knew I was no mage. Before entering the main hall, she grabbed my hand and turned me back towards her. “Ragnar, do you plan on remaining here for a while?”

“It’s why I journeyed here. The whole dragon crisis has hit a snag.”

“Would you like to join me tonight?”

“Gods yes.”

“Call me Belle.”

“What?”

She grabbed my hand, giving it a squeeze. “Just so you’re… not confused…”

I lifted my other hand to caress her cheek. When she closed her eyes and smiled… I knew I was a lost cause. “Okay… Belle…” When she opened her eyes, I could have kissed her. Taken her then and there. Or burst into tears. So I did the first thing, and when I felt her hands wrap around me, I knew right away that I was already falling in love with her. Perhaps for the wrong reasons. Definitely for the wrong reasons. But that was just to start with, or at least that’s what I thought.

“I’ll see you tonight, Ragnar,” she whispered upon breaking the kiss, my hand still resting on her cheek.

“Part of me already thinks why wait…”

“You should head inside,” she retorted with a smile, “Perhaps you’ll prove a better mage than you believe.”

I didn’t believe that at all, but I let her go as she turned and walked away, looking back and smiling before disappearing through the door. I gave my head a shake before turning around myself. I hadn’t wanted someone so much since… Well, I guess the first time I’d met Aela, so not that long ago. But there was something else deep inside that I’d buried long ago. Mirabelle wasn’t the answer, and it would be unfair on her to think she was. I think it was the heartbreak and regret from what happened, and while I’d mourned her, I don’t think anyone can really get over such a sense of loss.

I joined Tolfdir and the other students in the main hall. I could barely concentrate on what the old man was saying so was caught off guard when he asked me, “You’ve been quiet so far. What do you think we should do?”

Caught completely unawares, I looked at my fellow students first before replying. “I see nothing wrong with doing something practical at least.”

That made me an instant hit with my fellow students. Tolfdir’s reply suggested he wasn’t convinced, but I now listened in as my fellow students argued about doing something practical. Tolfdir relented and we eventually spent some time learning about wards. I had no idea what they were but Tolfdir taught me a basic one so I could at least participate in the lesson. We continued training with that the rest of the afternoon. It was nothing exciting, but I got to know him and my fellow students a little bit more. Only at the end of the day did he finally suggest something a bit more adventurous.

“I think perhaps we're ready to begin exploring some of the various applications of magic throughout history. The College has undertaken a fascinating excavation in the ruins of Saarthal nearby. It's an excellent learning opportunity. I suggest we meet there tomorrow morning after breakfast, and see what awaits us inside. That's all for now, thank you.”

We’d obviously been at it for a long time as it was dark by the time we walked outside. Heading back to the Hall of Attainment, my fellow students remained on the first floor as I made my way up. Mirabelle was at her desk as always, so it seemed, though leapt to her feet as soon as she saw me. “Hungry?” I asked.

She was, so we headed downstairs for dinner first, joining fellow students and wizards. If they assumed anything between the pair of us, they kept it to themselves. We ate quickly and headed back upstairs. I didn’t think we would have any privacy, raising that question with Mirabelle. She simply smirked, waved her hands, and some sort of… I’m not sure appeared. “Now no-one can see in,” she whispered, stepping closer to me.

“Are you planning something, Belle?”

“I thought you had the plans in mind, Ragnar.”

“Oh, I have a few things in mind.”

“And what are those?”

The next kiss definitely shared any feelings we already had for each other, and certainly didn’t lack for passion. My hands were quickly exploring her body, her own eagerly exploring mine. I had her robes off quite quickly, glad she only had underwear beneath her robes. Undressing me took a bit longer, and I felt her hands run up and down my arms and chest. “Gods, you are a warrior,” she whispered.

I gently rested her back on the bed before she lay flat, continuing to kiss her as I slowly removed her underwear. Once I had her naked, she turned a little shy, wanting to cover herself up. I sat back on my knees and asked her to remove her hands. “You’re beautiful,” I stated quietly.

And I spent the next however many minutes showing her how beautiful I thought she was, covering every inch of skin with kisses and caresses. She made plenty of noise at the same time, though I don’t think either of us cared. Her breasts were not large, but I enjoyed fondling, kissing, even nibbling them. Her stomach was flat. Her legs were fantastic, with more definition than I thought. But it was when I focused on her pussy… She kept her hair trimmed, it was brunette like her hair, and she tasted divine. I’ll admit, I nearly came when I started to eat her out, and that’s when the mind realised it was Belle, not Muiri.

“Ragnar,” she breathed.

I moved up to kiss her. “Belle,” I whispered back in return. She opened her eyes and smiled. “That taste is definitely you,” I added, which earned nothing but the sort of smile that would make anyone’s heart flutter.

“Make me cum, Ragnar,” she demanded gently.

Doing that wasn’t particularly difficult, considering how turned on she already was. I used my hands to keep her legs spread, only using my mouth. And I loved it when she started to gently gyrate as I ate her out. She continued to breathe my name as I did, and when she started to moan she was about to cum, all I did was focus on her clit. That sent her overboard, and I think she enjoyed quite the orgasm, feeling one of her hand grab my hair to hold me in place, in one moment pleading not to stop, in the next asking me to stop.

“Oh gods,” she cried quietly. I kept going until she finally lifted my head from her pussy, so I made do with kissing up her body, feeling her shake and shudder, before my head rested just above hers. She opened her eyes, noticed me, and grabbed my head to kiss me hard.

I can only describe what happened next in one simply way. We made love. I watched her face as I gently slid my cock inside her, watching her lips part before she gasped as I buried myself. Her hands rested on my back, fingers digging in, as I started to slowly thrust into her. “Belle,” I moaned quietly.

She lifted her legs, resting them against my side, feet just about resting on my back. “Gods, Ragnar… How big are you really?” she asked quietly.

I didn’t reply, simply focusing on being inside her. All thoughts of Muiri had thankfully disappeared. Now I was just with Mirabelle, or Belle. My mind had finally caught up with reality, and I could now appreciate the woman I was now with… or inside. But I knew I’d also fallen for her big time already because of the reminders before.

Knowing I probably wouldn’t last too long, I rolled onto my back, taking her with me, and she gasped again upon settling down. “Holy shit,” she murmured, before resting a hand on my chest and starting to ride me.

Reaching up, I caressed her cheek, Belle moving her head into my palm. “You’re so beautiful,” I whispered. She was. I never lied to any girl I was with, but I meant it completely with her.

Her eyes started to flutter as she leaned forward, wrapping my arms around her. “Gods, I shouldn’t have these feelings already,” she mumbled into my chest.

Gently thrusting into her, I didn’t say anything. To be honest, I didn’t trust myself. When she lifted her head to look into my eyes, I could read hers quite easily. She was already feeling the same way. I knew I was in deep trouble, but right then and there, I didn’t care one little bit.

Running my hands down her side, I rested them on her tight little butt, earning a smile when I gave her cheeks a squeeze. I started to fuck her a little harder, Mirabelle simply resting her hands to either side of me, her face not far above mine. “Are you going to cum in me, Ragnar?”

“Gods yes.”

“I’m going to cum again too.” That made me smile. “Ragnar, I…”

“You’re feeling things?” She nodded. That made me smile instead. “Me too, Belle.”

“Hold me after we’ve both cum.”

“Of course.”

She came again, watching her body shudder and writhe on top of me. I’d only seen something as beautiful with the women I’d loved before, or still loved now. “Cum in me,” she whispered, not complaining when I grabbed her arse tightly and started to really fuck her. All she did was smile, grunting slightly as I did fuck her quite hard, but I came rather quickly as well, feeling the need to hold her tight and really kiss her as I did so. It was such a good one, how it didn’t start leaking out of her in other places, the thought made me laugh afterwards.

Resting on my chest later, my fingers trailing down her back, she asked, “Is it the same for you?”

“Definitely,” I replied.

“Your other girls, what do they think?”

“They already know all about you, Belle.” That made her lift her head, the same smile that made my heart flutter. I caressed her cheek again. “I knew the first time we spoke.”

“So did I,” she admitted softly.

After cleaning up, she snuggled into me as I held her. There were so many reminders, it took a lot of self-control not to do something completely stupid. I think she understood as well, enough that she turned around for a moment to stroke my cheek and kiss me. “I understand,” she stated quietly, grabbing my hand and placing it on her chest, “Belle.”

“I know.”

“But I understand, Ragnar. And if you need to, let it out.”

“Are you sure?” She nodded, and I pulled her tightly towards me. When I felt her hands on my back, gripping me tightly… “Sorry,” I muttered.

“No, never be sorry for what you once felt. But I hope you might feel the same way about me one day.”

“Oh, those feelings are already there,” I mumbled, holding her tight in return.

We fell asleep like that, her head nestled under my chin, holding each other as tightly as possible without being uncomfortable. Waking the next morning, it was amazing how natural it felt to wake up beside her, and after she used magic to light a couple of candles, we made love again. I’m not sure how long it lasted, but I definitely gave her a couple of orgasms, and by the time I’d cum a second time, she suggested with a giggle that we’d probably missed breakfast. That I didn’t mind, as we ate together at her desk, both of us still naked, before she suggested I really should meet up with Tolfdir.

Knowing where Saarthal was, having already consulted a few maps, I headed straight back towards Winterhold, heading towards the inn where Aela and Lydia were waiting. They already looked utterly bored where they were, so I suggested that they should just head home. “Look, I don’t know what’s going to happen here, but if you let Balgruuf know I’m here, a letter can reach me in a matter of days. No point you hanging around.”

“You fuck her?” Aela asked. I nodded, and all she did was smile. “And I bet she loved it?”

“It was…”

All Aela did was kiss my cheek. “I’m sure it was,” she said softly, “Just don’t do anything stupid.”

That made me laugh. “I’ll be home before you know it.”

Lydia then kissed my cheek. “I’ll make sure she isn’t too lonely.”

“And now I have visions in my mind,” I stated with a laugh.

The girls packed and I gave each of them a hug and kiss before they mounted their horses. They didn’t ask how long I would be, just asking them to let me know if there was any news regarding the council. I figured it would take quite a while to get both sides to agree, their own self-interests taking precedence over a situation which could destroy us all.

After watching them disappear over the horizon, I left my horse by the inn and walked to Saarthal. The snow-capped peaks towered over me as I trudged up the hill, the great white expanse appearing as I crested the hill. I could see the enormous pit where Saarthal had been dug up so headed there, finding a couple of students waiting outside. Apparently Tolfdir was on his way but didn’t walk particularly fast. I chatted away with them, getting to know their names and what they were learning. I didn’t give away that I was Dragonborn, just letting them know my name and the fact I didn’t know a lot of magic. That led to titters of amusement.

Once Tolfdir, he explained what we would be investigating. It didn’t sound particularly interesting, but having adventured through a few ruins, I figured we could find some coin or jewels. Tolfdir noticed the sword at my hip. “Expecting trouble?” he wondered.

“Entering ruins like this? Every time.”

As we entered the ruin, it was clear they’d been excavating for some time, though whether they’d actually found anything of real importance, I wasn’t sure. Tolfdir explained some of the history of Saarthal, as I don’t think any of us knew its history. I certainly didn’t.

“As some of you may know, Saarthal was one of the earliest Nord settlements in Skyrim. It was also the largest. Sacked by the Elves in the infamous ‘Night of Tears’, not much is known about what happened to Saarthal. This is an exciting opportunity for us. To be able to study such an early civilization, and the magics they used... Well, are there any questions before we begin?”

No-one did, so we were assigned jobs. I was sent to help someone called Arniel Gane, and like usual, it sounded like a simple task but ended up with me trapped in some sort of room. Tolfdir appeared, and after explaining what happened, he suggested I put on the necklace. Upon doing so, there was a red aura emanating from where I’d picked up the amulet.

“Do you see that? Some kind of resonance between you and the wall. It must be connected to the amulet! I wonder what effect might your spells have?”

I knew a basic fire spell so used that, the wall crumbling away in an instant, the gates opening to allow Tolfdir through. He was immediately interested in the new passage, wondering why it had been closed off. Following the secret tunnel for a few minutes, we ended up in a much smaller room. I immediately recognised the four sarcophagi at each side, and the altar in the middle. I’d been in enough ancient ruins and immediately unsheathed my sword. Tolfdir gave me a look…

Then something weird happened. Tolfdir was busy turning around to talk to me when he suddenly froze in place. There was a form of bright light and a strange looking man appeared in front of me. Judging by the robes he wore, I figured him for a mage.

“Know that you have set in motion a chain of events that cannot be stopped. Judgment has not been passed, as you had no way of knowing. Judgment will be passed on your actions to come, and how you deal with the dangers ahead of you. This warning is passed to you because the Psijic Order believes in you. You, mage, and you alone, have the potential to prevent disaster. Take great care, and know that the Order is watching.”

As quickly as he appeared, he disappeared, Tolfdir completing his turn though he immediately guessed something had happened. Explaining what I’d been told, he was just as perplexed as myself, wondering why the Psijic Order would contact anyone considering they had no history concerning Saarthal. I asked who they were, and he told me what he knew about them, which was enough to suggest they’d be powerful enough to contact me in the manner they had.

The sarcophagi in the room did open, killing the four draugr rather quickly, Tolfdir proving his skill with magic. I trusted in my sword arm, Tolfdir mentioning I appeared to be rather skilled as we followed the next tunnel. That’s when I let him know who I really was. He didn’t express any major surprise, and considering I was still wearing armour instead of robes, he figured I wasn’t particularly a mage.

“Why did you join the college?” he did wonder.

“Two reasons. One, a peace council is being convened. Jarl Balgruuf of Whiterun is sorting it out, and it will take some time to get it organised. Two, Mirabelle.”That made him stop. “Miss Ervine?”

“Aye.”

The old man smiled. “Ah, I understand. She’s a fine woman.”

We ended up in an ever larger room, full to the brim with sarcophagi. Looking up, there must have been thousands of them. And, of course, as soon as we were halfway across, the gate behind us closed, lids collapsed to the floor, and draugr flooded our position. We turned back to back, warrior and mage as one. I did my best to protect the old man, though I don’t think he really needed it, though he thanked me afterwards, once all the draugr were dead, and he was busy healing one or two wounds I’d taken.

“Certainly haven’t done anything like this in a while,” he stated with a chuckle.

“You get used to it.” I paused before asking, “What do you think is here?”

“I have absolutely no idea.”

We ended up passing down hallways I’d seen in numerous ruins before, the occasional draugr waking up to fight us. But we eventually made it through to an enormous chamber, and it was there that was discovered a glowing, magical sphere. It was while walking down stairs to approach it that the draugr sitting upon the throne woke up. I’d dealt with similar draugr before, but I was immediately concerned when I swung and my sword went straight through it. So I tried a Shout, and that didn’t work either. Raising my shield, I immediately retreated.

“Ideas, Tolfdir?” I called. He tried a magical attack, which did nothing but grab the attention of the draugr.

“The sphere. It must be connected!”

“Do what you think will work. I’ll keep the thing occupied.”

Whatever Tolfdir did worked quickly, as after another couple of swings, the next one landed, the draugr growled, and I smiled to myself. Then I used my Thu’um, blowing the draugr backwards against the word wall, and I hacked off its head, not wanting to find myself in a long, drawn out battle. After learning the word, I turned back to Tolfdir. “I noticed the glow. I assume it was connecting to you?” he wondered.

“Aye. These ruins usually have this type of wall. I’ve learned a few words over time.”

“Right. Well, what we need to do is figure out what this sphere actually is. It appears inert for now, but what you should do is head back to the college and alert the Arch-Mage regarding this discovery.”

I would rather have stayed and he sent one of the other students, but he was confident we’d taken care of the main threats, so I found the usual exit and headed back to the surface. There was still plenty of light, and though the snow was deep on the ground, I managed to jog most of the way back to the college, sweating profusely under my armour.

Explaining what we found to the Savos, the Arch-Mage, was difficult as I had no idea what it was, and quite frankly, he didn’t seem all that bothered. He seemed to realise I was one of the new students, though, and I guess to keep me occupied, suggested I head down the library to speak with Urag, thinking he might be able to help.

No idea why I was now central to events, but it wouldn’t do any harm to investigate. As I headed downstairs, I ran into one of the Faralda, the Altmer that had originally stopped me when first trying to enter the college.

“Just a warning, Dragonborn.”

“Oh, what?”

“Ancano, that Thalmor who is present at the college, has been asking after you.”

“Did he say what about?”

“No to me, but a little bit of advice. Mind what you tell him.”

“Thanks for the warning. I get what you mean.”

That earned a smirk. “Between the two of us, there are rumours about him. That this ‘advisor’ position he has is a sham, an excuse. That what he’s really doing is spying for the Thalmor, trying to feed them information.”

“That wouldn’t be a surprise at all, but why is he here anyway?”

“Unfortunately, the Arch-Mage couldn’t stop the Thalmor having a presence here.”

“I won’t tell him a thing. Don’t worry.”

“Good. Last thing we need is more of the bastards showing up.”

Urag has information for me, none of it good. Students must have returned during my conversation with the Arch-Mage, as he was already aware that we’d found something in Saarthal, and that what I needed wasn’t currently in the library. The book or books I required had been stolen by a former student, and considering he knew who I was, he suggested I’d be just the person to go locate them. I couldn’t stifle the groan, earning a chuckle from the Orc, but without any other option, I agreed to do it.

Just as I was about to head back to the Hall of Attainment, thinking I’d spend some time with Mirabelle, I was stopped by Ancano. I’d seen him around once or twice, but now I got a good look at him. Arrogant, sneering bastard was what I immediately thought. Whether he knew exactly who I was or not, I wasn’t too sure yet.

“You there. I have questions for you. You were in Saarthal, yes? It has come to my attention that something was found there.” I just gave him a withering look and remained silent, noticing his eyes narrow in return. “I know full well that you have. Please do not insult my intelligence. Tolfdir is still there now, is he? I shall expect a full report when he returns.”

“Finished?”

He waved a dismissive hand. “You may go now.”

I stepped forward straight towards him, only diverting at the last second, making sure my shoulder crashed into him. I know I knocked him backwards, as I was a bigger, broader man. I sensed him turn and he laid a hand on my shoulder. Reaching for it, I grabbed and twisted his fingers as I turned around. “Touch me again, and I’ll break more than just your fingers.”

“You wouldn’t…”

I bent his fingers back further, earning a cry of pain. “I take it you already know who I am, being as intelligent as you are.” I leaned forward, close to his face. “I would suggest you do not fuck with me. I know all about you Thalmor. Trust me on that.” I let him put two and two together.

“You!”

“The day of reckoning will come soon, Ancano. I would suggest you stay out of my way for the time being. Unlike everyone else here, I will have no problem putting you on then in the ground if you turn out to be a nuisance. And, trust me on this, I can kill dragons. Killing you will be nothing.”

Letting go of his fingers, I made sure he took a step back, watching him shake his hand. I walked backwards, expecting him to attack, but all he did was glare at me before I disappeared down the stairs.

I’d probably just done rather stupid. Don’t get me wrong, I didn’t mind most elves. But the Thalmor could go fuck themselves. And I knew I’d just made an enemy.

Chapter 39: Eye of Magnus

Watching Mirabelle slowly ride me was too much a reminder at times. But, by the Nine, was she beautiful when doing so. And she loved it just as much, particularly when I ran my hands gently over her body, caressing erogenous and non-erogenous zones alike. She constantly leaned forward to kiss me, and I loved hearing her little gasps and moans as we made love. I had no idea how long this would last, as I knew I wouldn’t remain at the college forever, but I think we’d both take complete advantage until then. After that, I don’t think either of us really knew.

Watching her orgasm a little later made me smile, eventually having to cry enough as she settled down on my chest. I just ran a finger softly up her spine, feeling her take a few deep breaths, breasts pressed into my chest. “Give me a couple of minutes, then I want more,” she murmured.

“On your back this time?”

“Gods yes, Ragnar. And you know why too.”

She was on her back a few minutes later, again watching her face as I fucked her harder and faster now, the kissing frequent and passionate, and she knew I wasn’t going to last long now. Holding her legs back and wide, she commented on how deep and thick I felt inside her. I always loved hearing things like that from the women I was intimate with.

My orgasm, when it finally arrived, was out of this world, barely able to hold myself up when I was done, my arms shaking from the effort, Mirabelle simply wrapping her arms and legs around me to hold me in place, continuing to make out.

Finally pulling out, I collapsed onto the bed beside her, feeling her roll onto her side, hand on my chest as I wrapped an arm around her, pulling her tight. “Good thing I take potions, Ragnar,” she stated with humour.

“I can’t help it if I find you irresistible.”

“It’s been a long time since someone has.”

“Don’t mess with other mages?”

“Definitely not students, while you’ve seen my fellow practitioners. They are nothing like you, Ragnar.”

“You’re not so bad yourself.”

She lifted her head up, asking, “Not so bad?”

“Okay. Utterly fucking gorgeous.” That earned a smile and a kiss, at least.

“Are you leaving tomorrow morning?”

“Aye. Urag gave me some information over dinner about where he thinks Orthorn went. I might stop by Whiterun and get some help. If I’m going up against mages, I’ll need it.”

“Is any of your stuff enchanted?”

“Not particularly.”

That made her giggle, probably because I was stupid for not doing that. “I know there is a wizard at Dragonsreach. He was an instructor here a long time ago. Get him to enchant your armour and shield to protect against magic attacks, at the very least. Keep you a little safer.”

“Anyone would think you cared.”

“I want more nights like this, Ragnar. Many more nights before you have to go.” Now I met her eyes. She returned a crooked grin. “I’m not stupid, Ragnar. I know this isn’t forever. You’re not a mage. I know that. You know that. But that doesn’t mean I don’t want to enjoy your presence here for as long as possible.”

She watched me dress and prepare for another journey the next morning, giving me a very long kiss before I told her I’d be back shortly and I headed back to Winterhold. My horse was still tied up, the innkeeper having kept it fed, and it was the usual two-day ride back to Whiterun. Apart from thinking about Mirabelle most of the time, I did wonder if I’d pushed things too far with Ancano. No doubt he now had my number and it wouldn’t have surprised me if he’d complained to the Arch-Mage about me. What I assumed is that he was definitely up to something. I just didn’t know what.

Aela and Lydia were both surprised but happy to see me, and immediately offered to help me once I explained what was required. First thing I did was head to Dragonsreach. I had a quick chat with Balgruuf, who told me that letters had been sent but negotiations just to get both sides to the table had begun. He didn’t expect any movement for a while. So I spoke to Farengar instead, asking about enchantment. I noticed the excitement light up in his eyes when I asked, and he quite happily enchanted my armour and shield. For a price, of course. Nothing was ever done for free.

Aela was at Jorrvaskr, looking over a map, trying to figure out where our destination was. “Fellglow Keep, correct?”

“Aye.”

“Okay, never heard of it myself, but it appears to be not far from here.” She pointed at the river that ran to the east the city. “Valtheim Towers is here. The Keep is on the opposite side. But with no bridge across, we’ll have to follow the road north then head east overland.”

“Easy enough.”

“And we’re dealing with mages?”

“Aye.”

“And all this for some books?”

I couldn’t help smirk. “Aye. Someone stole them.”

She gave me a look then chuckled to herself. “I guess you’ve done worse things for the Companions.”

“We found something in Saarthal. Don’t ask what as I can’t really explain it. But the curator of the library suggested these books might help figure it out.”

I think the two girls had missed me, despite only being gone for a few days, as I had both in my bed that evening. And in addition to putting on a nice little show for me, as I loved watching the pair of them together, Lydia kept her word as while Aela was underneath her, and they continued to eat each other out, I got to fuck her arse.

It took a little time for her to get used to it. Delphine certainly took my cock a lot easier. But once she was used to it, I had her begging to give it to her harder and faster. I was rather impressed, Aela eventually moved to watch me fucking Lydia nice and hard.

“You feel enormous up my butt, Dragonborn,” she moaned.

“And you have a fantastic arse, Lydia.”

With her head down on a pillow, looking back at me, lust and desire in her eyes, I felt Aela lean against me from behind, whispering dirty words into my ear. I just turned and kissed her, growling into her mouth, before suggesting she was next. Her eyes lit up at the thought.

“We’ve actually prepared, Ragnar,” Lydia managed to state between my thrusts.

“We’ve missed you and figured we’d give you a little treat. Though I think we should walk tomorrow, not ride.”

By now, Lydia was on the verge of orgasm, using one of her hands to bring herself off. I was surprised I’d lasted as long, and once she did start to cum, squeezing my cock for good measure, that pretty much set me off at the same time. She squealed, suggesting she loved the feeling as I unloaded deep inside her, and I eventually stopped moving though left my cock buried in her until it started to slightly soften.

Pulling out, I leaned back and spread her cheeks. “What do you think, Aela? Well fucked?”

“Definitely, Ragnar. I think she could definitely do this again too.”

“Gods yes,” Lydia moaned, “Do all three of us one night, Ragnar. Me, Aela and Delphine. Hard anal, all night.”

I glanced at Aela, who just smirked. “Oh, she discovered one or two things with Delphine, while Delphine was rather explicit in what you’ve done with her too.”

Lydia proved herself even further by turning around and swallowing my cock, looking up at me with such devotion in her eyes, I could only gently caress her face. It didn’t take her long to get me nice and hard, and Aela was soon on her hands and knees as well. “Maybe not as hard as Lydia for now,” she said.

I couldn’t remember if we’d done this before or not. I think we had, but I was certainly gentle with her to begin with, thrusting in nice and slow but making sure each one was deep. She was quickly sat up and leaning back against my chest as I used my right hand to fondle her pussy, though Lydia soon got into position to help with that.

“Ragnar,” Aela breathed, “And your tongue, Lydia…”

After a few more minutes, Aela wanted it harder and faster. I didn’t ask if she was sure as she had no problem telling me what she wanted. I held her tight as I was soon fucking her just like I’d fucked Lydia. She did wince more often but never told me to stop, and she came hard after a few minutes, though I think it was more to do with Lydia than myself. She eventually asked to change, lying on her back, asking Lydia to sit on her face while I lifted her body so I could fuck her and make out with Lydia at the same time.

Having already cum once, I lasted even longer, Lydia enjoying an orgasm while riding Aela’s face, while Aela came again as Lydia continued to fondle her. I eventually had another orgasm later, and I just pulled out and sat back as the two women ate each other out again, turning down Lydia’s offer to blow me again as, to be honest, I’d had enough.

Both girls were in rather good spirits the next morning at breakfast, Lydia humming away as she stirred the pot, Aela also humming a tune as she set the table. I tried to help but was told in no uncertain terms to just sit by the fire. That led to me occasionally bothering Lydia, who simply giggled and whispered, “I can’t wait for you to fuck me like that again.” I must have had a look in my eyes as she simply smiled, adding, “But not right now.”

After breakfast, we headed out without any further delay, the walk to where we needed to turn off the road no more than an hour. Approaching the fort itself, Aela took out her bow and suggested caution. A good idea, as due to the beast blood in our veins, we could pick out the guards from a distance. Aela had always been a great shot, and put an arrow through the chest of the nearest one. That attracted the attention of the other, and though we were not particularly hidden, Aela put her down before she could attack us.

Slipping inside the dungeons, we realised it was infested with mages, and I was left thankful I’d enchanted my gear, as I found blocking magic far more difficult than a sword or an axe. Aela didn’t normally used a bow indoors, but it certainly helped regarding mages, who were flinging all sorts of attacks in our direction.

“I hate mages,” Lydia muttered after we killed another one.

Finding vampires was a real surprise. I’d had to deal with one or two during my time as a Companion, so I knew what I was looking at straight away. And while they appeared docile in their cages, I knew letting them out would probably be a mistake. But I also figured they could actually prove a help to begin with.

So after brief negotiations, I chose to let them out. And they did as I wanted, hunting down the mages in the next room. The three of us stayed back until all was silent, walking in to see blood, death and destruction. Only one of the vampires lived, and I kept my word, letting her go though warning her to avoid any town or city in Skyrim. She gave her word, though whether it meant anything, I guess I’d learn soon enough.

The noise had dragged most mages in the keep towards it, so we had empty hallways to follow before arriving at another bunch of cells, within one was the man I was looking for. “You Orthorn?” I asked for clarification.

“Yes, yes. Please, you have to help me! Did the Arch-Mage send you? You don’t look like a mage…”

“I’m here for some books you stole.”

His face fell. “Oh… right…”

“Where are they?”

“I don’t have them anymore. She took them.”

“She? Who is she?”

“The Caller! She’s the one who put me in here. They threw me in here until they were ready to use me in one of their experiments. This wasn't supposed to happen. I thought they wanted my help, not to use me as a test subject!”

I didn’t really care about rescuing him. Urag certainly hadn’t mentioned anything about it. But I guess I’m not a complete bastard, so I found the lever than opened the cage door. “You’d better follow us.”

“Um…”

“If you don’t, I’ll just finish what they were about to start.” He sighed in resignation. “Look, just stay close. I’m not expecting you to fight.”

We didn’t run into too many mages after that, and those that we did were handled quickly and, not to sound arrogant, rather easily too. Climbing a set of stairs, I assumed we were heading up a tower, though remembering the keep itself was below ground, we must have been deep underground before heading up.

Entering the large chamber, there was a lone pedestal in the main room, while side rooms contained a pedestal each, on which laid a book. Next to the lone pedestal in the main room stood a hooded figure. As it was dark, I could only guess it was a woman, her voice quickly confirming that as fact. “So, you're the one who barged into my home and laid waste to my projects. How nice to meet you.”

I recognised sarcasm, so I just asked, “And you’re the one they call ‘The Caller’? Interesting name.”

Folding her arms, she just asked, “Do you have a reason for making such a mess?”

“Aye, you have some of my property,” I replied, gesturing at the book next to her.

“So you're just one of Aren's lackeys? That's disappointing. You show real promise. You come here, kill my assistants, disrupt my work. You've annoyed me, so I don't think I'll be giving you anything.”

“Look, as you said, I’ve just killed all your assistants. My beautiful colleague next to me already has her bow ready to fire. Orthorn… well, I’m not sure if he’s one for revenge, but I can only guess he’s not particularly pleased. And you don’t want to fuck with me as I’m the Dragonborn.”

“Oh…”

“That’s right. Oh… So you can give me the books and I’ll leave peacefully, or you can continue to be a sarcastic so-and-so, and I’ll just have to kill you. Four of us, one of you. The odds are not in your favour.”

For once, I had an enemy who had some brains. With a sigh, she gestured and said, “Fine, take your damned books. But I will issue my own warning. Return here again and you will face my wrath.”

“Trust me, lady, I have no intention of returning here. Do whatever you want.”

Grabbing the books quickly, in case she changed her mind, we found the exit and gathered after walking towards the road back to Whiterun. Orthorn made it clear he didn’t want to follow me. All I suggested was that returning to the college sooner rather than later would perhaps be the best idea, because frankly, he was an idiot. The three of us turned back towards Whiterun and I left him there. He never ended up following us, so I figured he went the other way.

Neither girl asked if they should join me back at the college, as I didn’t particularly know what was going to happen next anyway. After enjoying a good fight, we enjoyed ourselves even more that night, and I guess I shouldn’t have been that surprised that I found myself buried in Lydia’s arse again, though this time she rode me hard and fast while Aela sat on my face, the pair swapping positions once I’d left a load inside Lydia.

“Okay, that’s already a little addictive,” Lydia stated lying back once we were done, “No wonder Delphine was always up for it.”

“She has a fantastic arse for a woman her age,” I added, “And she let me know quite quickly she loved it there just as much, if not even more that tight pussy of hers. But she also liked it hard and rough, really giving it to her.” I had to stop thinking about it, otherwise I’d get hard, and I needed the sleep.

“Hmmm, she does have one nice pussy,” Lydia stated, “Though yours is very nice too, Aela.”

“I’m sure you’ll enjoy it again while Ragnar is gone.”

“Long as you put some fingers up my arse again while going down on me.” I couldn’t help but laugh, Lydia giggling as well. “At least I’m honest, Ragnar.”

“You ever want more than one man?” I wondered.

“Only if you agreed to it. Why?”

“I’m thinking things right now, that’s all.”

“You’re the only man I want, Ragnar,” Aela added, though I already knew that. But if Lydia was keen to experiment and have fun…

“We’ll talk about it when I get back, Lydia.”

Both women were incredibly suggestive the next morning over breakfast about what they would be doing. I knew what they wanted, but I really needed to go, so while they both pouted, they walked me to the stables and, after a long kiss and hug with them both, I mounted up and headed north.

Making it Winterhold around noon the next day, I left my horse by the inn as usual and wandered into the college. Though I wanted to see Mirabelle, I did figure returning the books immediately would be best, though I noticed that the orb had somehow been transported from Saarthal to the college, noticing Tolfdir still taking keen interest in it.

Urag was pleased to have his books back, at least. “I'll look these over, and inform Mirabelle if I find anything relevant.”

“Mirabelle? Is she involving herself too?”

Urag gave me a look. “I would think it’s concern over you rather than anything else, Dragonborn.”

I couldn’t help the smirk. “Can’t get anything past you.”

“That woman is smitten. It’s actually nice to see. Always thought she was rather lonely myself.” Clearing his throat, he continued. “Anyway, ‘Night of Tears’, I remember this one. Well, isn't that interesting. Did you read it yourself?” I shook my head. “If I recall correctly, that has some interesting implications. You should mention that to Tolfdir.”

Figuring that was the best course of action, I headed back to the main hall to find Tolfdir simply staring at the order, transfixed by its wonder. I wouldn’t call it beautiful but I was left wondering, probably just like everyone else, what in oblivion it actually was.

“Tolfdir?”

He turned and smiled. “Ah, Dragonborn, good to see you.”

“Urag suggested I come see you about a book I’ve just managed to return. A book called ‘Night of Tears’.”

“Is that the one about something buried beneath Saarthal? Something that men and mer fought over? I'll have to make a point of re-reading it. I don't recall the details.”

“I didn’t read it but I would assume that’s the one.”

“Hmmm.” He looked back at the orb. “I just can't seem to tear myself away. Whatever it is, its beauty is like nothing I've ever seen before. If you'd allow me to indulge myself for a moment, I thought I might make a few observations...”

“Explain away. I’m no mage, as I’m sure you’ve realised, but I’ll admit to a level of interest in regards to whatever this thing is.”

As we walked around the orb, Tolfdir continued. “I'm sure you've already noticed the markings. They're quite unlike anything we've seen before. Ayleid, Dwemer, Daedric... Not even Falmer. None of them are a match. Quite curious indeed. Now, I'm not sure you're quite as attuned as I am, given my extensive years of experience, but can you feel that? This marvellous object. It practically radiates magicka, and yet it's unlike anything I've felt before. Arch-Mage Aren is already hard at work, and hopefully we'll have more information soon.”

Savos left his quarters? I found that hard to believe. I hadn’t seen him anywhere else except there. Tolfdir continued to prattle on and I eventually lost interest but didn’t want to be rude. However, his monologue was interrupted by someone I didn’t particularly want to see again. Ancano made his presence known, requesting though basically ordering Tolfdir shut up so he could speak to me. Tolfdir was incensed but I calmed him down, suggesting it was okay and that we could talk later in privacy. He still wasn’t happy but sensed he should make himself scarce.

Once alone, I bluntly asked, “What do you want?”

By the Nine, the man was an arrogant bastard, the sneer as he peered down his nose at me wanting to break it in return. “I need you to come with me immediately. Let’s go.”

I didn’t move a muscle. “And I don’t take orders from anyone. So unless you explain exactly what you want, I’ll decide whether I follow you or break some bones instead.”

“You wouldn’t dare…”

“Want a repeat of the other day?”

He remained silent, a defiant glare, before he cleared his throat. “Fine. I'd like to know why there's someone claiming to be from the Psijic Order here at the College. More importantly, I'd like to know why he's asking for you specifically. So we're going to go have a little chat with him, and find out exactly what it is he wants.”

“Hmmm. I seem to remember you’re just an advisor,” my tone dripping with sarcasm, “So I fail to see what any of this has to do with you anyway.”

I knew I was riling him as he took a deep breath before stepping forward. Brave man. “Technically, that is true. But I still report to the Aldmeri Dominion, I cannot ignore this situation.”

“Figured you did exactly that. Guess it would be that bitch at the embassy, eh?” His eyes narrowed further, if that were possible. “Aye, had the opportunity to have a good look around.”

“You are trifling with powers you cannot comprehend, Ragnar of Whiterun.”

Now it was my turn to smirk. “Ah, done your research, I see”

“Yes, I know all about you and the little life you’ve built for yourself.” He stepped closer and dropped his voice. “I also know other secrets too.”

He was in the perfect place, so I balled a fist and put it into his gut. As he groaned and leaned down, I put my lips to his ear. “Aye, I do have secrets. And if anyone learns of them, they will not be able to recognise your body once I’m done with it. Understand?”

“You’ll pay for that.”

I lifted his head up by his hair. The hatred in his eyes made me smile. “I’ve heard similar threats before but I’m still standing, while my enemies are dead. So I will go see this monk because I choose to, interested as I am as to his presence. But I’ll warn you, Ancano. I don’t quite know why you’re here yet, but I’ll figure it out, and once I do, you’ll learn the Dragonborn has no fear of the Thalmor.”

I let his hair go and walked by him. I figured he was following me, but I didn’t care. I was greeted by the Arch-Mage first, though noticed he and everything else around him quickly froze in place as the Psijic monk approached me, holding up a hand.

“Please don’t be alarmed. I mean you no harm. It is simply good to meet you in person.”

“You too but I would like to know what you want with me?”

“I merely wish to speak to you but time is short. I've given us a chance to speak privately, but I'm afraid I can't do this for long. We must be brief. The situation here at your College is of dire importance, and attempts to contact you as we have previously have failed. I believe it is due to the very source of our concern. This object, this Eye of Magnus as your people have taken to calling it. The energy coming from it has prevented us from reaching you with the visions you have already seen. The longer it remains here, the more dangerous the situation becomes. And so I have come here personally to tell you it must be dealt with.”

“I have to be blunt and ask what any of this has to do with me? I assume you know who I am.”

“I do but it is you who set this chain of events in motion at Saarthal.”

“Oh…”

“You must understand, the Psijic Order does not typically... intervene directly in events. My presence here will be seen as an affront to some within the Order, and as soon as we have finished, I will be leaving your College. I'm all too aware that my presence has aroused suspicion, especially in Ancano, you Thalmor associate. Nevertheless, my Order will not act directly. You must take it upon yourself to do so.”

“Okay, I’ll help but I don’t know what to do to help.”

He nodded in understanding. “Unfortunately, the future is as obscured to us as it is to you. The overwhelming power of the Eye makes it difficult for us to see. I fear I have already overstepped the bounds of my Order, but I will offer this: seek out the Augur of Dunlain here in your College. His perception may be more coherent than ours.”

“Okay, I could ask more questions but I’m sure some in the college can help me.”

“I am afraid I must leave you now. We will continue to watch over you, and guide you as best we can. It is within you to succeed. Never forget that.”

As soon as it began, life returned as I looked around. Aren stared at me, and I think he had an inkling that something just happened. As for Ancano, he breezed by me, and started demanding answers from the monk. Considering he was now an ally, I didn’t appreciate the tone of his next question.

“Don’t play coy with me, monk. You asked to see a specific member of the College.  Here he is. Now what is it that you want?”

“I’m afraid there’s been a misunderstanding. I really should just take my leave.”

Ancano stepped forward, so I did the same thing, grabbing the Thalmor by the shoulder, digging my fingers into where it would hurt the most. “You leave with the thanks of this College. Please enjoy a pleasant trip home,” I stated, keeping my tone friendly. Ancano struggled so I just dug my fingers in harder as the monk walked by.

Once he disappeared out the door, I let go of Ancano, who knew better than to antagonise, simply complaining to the Arch-Mage, who looked rather confused by events. I did feel a little sorry for him, but considering he’d proven to be rather useless at everything except actual magic, and I was being left to sort all this shit out, I left the pair to it and headed back to quarters.

Mirabelle was in her quarters as usual, greeting me with a long and tight hug, explaining she’d just finished teaching for the day. We ate dinner by ourselves that night instead of joining the others, before heading upstairs to the walkway once it was night time so we could gaze upon the stars. It was bitterly cold this far north, making sure we were both wrapped up in furs.

“This already feels so normal,” she whispered, “The thing is, you’re no apprentice. We can both admit you’re not a mage, that’s why I can sleep with you and not feel any guilt.”

“I assume you don’t normally sleep with students?”

She looked up and smiled. “Ragnar, before you, I’d gone so long without someone, I thought it might never happen again. Thank the Eight you walked into my life. It’s why I leapt on you the first chance I had.”

“No complaints from me either.”

She sighed before continuing. “The one thing I’m trying to do is not fall in love, because I know you won’t be here forever.” She looked up again. “You don’t have to say anything because we both know the truth. So I will simply enjoy every day you’re here until you finally have to leave and solve the problems out there.”

“You could come with me?”

That made her laugh but she shook her head. “No. My life is here, Ragnar. I love teaching magic and I like being surrounded by fellow mages. I feel safe here. Skyrim isn’t really hospitable to those gifted with magic, so unless I managed to find a Jarl who wanted an arcane advisor, I think it’s best I just remained here.”

“Well, I’d have a reason to visit, at least.”

“And you would always be welcome in my bed. I might not have you forever, but I’ll make damned sure I can have you when the chance presents itself.”

Heading downstairs when it simply became too cold to remain outside, Mirabelle cast the privacy barrier first before we slowly undressed each other, our mouths rarely apart as each article was removed. Once I had her naked, I lay her back on the bed, and while I would have enjoyed teasing her relentlessly, I could see she was soaking wet by the candlelight, and she asked if I could just begin straight away.

Good thing I loved her taste so happily trailed my tongue down her body towards her pussy, and I know I moaned myself when tasted her again. It didn’t take long for her to start making some appreciative noise, and her first orgasm took no longer than a few minutes. Hearing her giggle made me laugh, admitting she was rather turned on upstairs, the only reason we didn’t do anything up there being it was simply too cold.

I kept eating her out, and I didn’t count the orgasms. My jaw started to hurt after a while, so I used my fingers as well, loving the noises she made, the shudders and shakes of her body, the way she arched her back and moaned when I did something right. “Gods,” she would breath, or perhaps she’d breath my name, either my real name or Dragonborn, the sort of little things that simply made my cock rock hard.

“I need you inside me,” she finally whispered, wasting little time moving up her body and blindly sliding inside her. I groaned loudly when I buried myself.

“Two minutes,” I joked. She kissed me hard, no doubt tasting herself, as I slowly made love to her.

I was wrong by a couple of minutes, but I didn’t last long at all the first time. But considering how turned on we both were, I remained rather hard and just kept on going. Our lips again barely parted, feeling her fingers dig into my back and her legs wrap around me.

“I love you,” she whispered upon breaking the kiss. So much for not admitting it.

“I love you,” I whispered back, and I meant it. She blinked rapidly when I answered back, kissing me softly.

Rolling onto my back, taking her with me, I adjusted my legs so she could ride and kiss me at the same time. She looked absolutely stunning, her skin glistening with sweat in the low light, her lips parted and eyes alive as she looked into mine. I caressed her cheek, running a hand through her short hair. It was at times like that I remembered.

“I look just like her?” she asked softly.

“Aye. Plenty of similarities.” Kissing her, I added, “But you are most definitely Belle.”

That made her smile, and when she leaned back, moving my hands to her hips, I knew we were both going to enjoy the next few minutes. Watching her bounce up and down on my cock, her small breasts jiggling, with all the noise she made in addition to that, it was no surprise she enjoyed another orgasm. She only stopped briefly before continuing, only asking to change when I suggested I was close.

When she hopped off and got on her hands and knees, that was the signal she wanted to be fucked. Getting into position behind her, I leaned over her body, putting my lips near her ear. “You’re so tight like this, Belle,” I said softly.

“And your cock feels enormous,” she moaned back, “Fuck me, Dragonborn.”

“Love it when you call me that.”

I did as she requested, and I lasted all of five minutes before I buried myself one last time and erupted. We ended up collapsing ono the bed, keeping myself from squashing her by using a forearm. When I made to get off her, she asked for me to stay inside her for just a little longer. “I love the feeling when we’re connected,” she stated.

Once I was soft and fell out, we cleaned up first before snuggling. Running her hand up and down my chest, her head nestled between shoulder and head, she whispered, “I meant it.”

“So did I, Belle. Trust me, so did I. It’s why I’ll definitely be coming back time and again.”

“And your other women?”

“Know all about you already and understand. Our lives are short. I have loved before and I’m glad I have found love again. Aela has no problem with me being here like this with you.”

“Part of me wants to tie you to the bed so you can’t leave.”

“Part of me probably wouldn’t complain about that.”

We chatted a little longer before turning onto my side so she could spoon against me. I loved holding her body against mine. She was rather delicate and she certainly enjoyed being held in my arms, constantly running her hands over my body. As she said often, I was definitely no mage. I was her warrior.

The next morning over breakfast with the others, I finally broached the subject I actually wanted to talk to her about. The glare she returned was not pleasant. “That's nothing you need to concern yourself with.” Then she seemed to remember who I was and I’d only ask for a good reason. The first thing she did was kiss me and apologise. “Sorry… sorry, it’s just…”

I chuckled as she stumbled over her words, obviously embarrassed. “I’m assuming it’s a sensitive subject?”

She grabbed our plates, taking us back to her quarters. She didn’t use magic for privacy, simply sitting at her desk and keeping her voice low. “It’s not something most of us discuss, Ragnar. It is definitely something easily misunderstood by those who don’t understand. The Augur is down in the Midden, an area below the College.” Then she grabbed my hand. “Ragnar, I know who you are and all, but I can only recommend you go down there unless it’s absolutely necessary.”

“It’s to do with the orb.”

“I thought so.” She sighed. “Okay, I know how good you are. But, please, be careful when you go down there. No-one does willingly.”

She suggested I definitely go down armed and armoured, leading me to the trap door that was the main access point from the college. She kissed me before opening it, suggested again that I be careful, before I climbed down the ladder.

It was utterly freezing as most of the walls were sheet ice, and I quickly understood her caution as the Midden was infested by things that didn’t appreciate my presence. Nothing too concerning, and it was the sheer cold that I found more bothersome. It was worse than the night before on the walkway!

It took a while, and one or two wrong turns, as the Midden felt like a maze at times, but I finally arrived at a locked door, and only then did a deep voice speak from behind it.

“Your perseverance will only lead to disappointment.” I tried the door again. I needed answers from whatever this Augur was. He could either open it or I’d use my Thu’um. “Still you persist? Very well, you may enter.”

The door opened without me touching it again and it was only then that I learned what the Augur of Dunlain really was. I really can’t explain it, but he or it was a floating mass of… something. Energy? Magicka? I couldn’t be sure as it was beyond my understanding. Before I could even ask a question, it was almost like it could read my thoughts.

“I am that which you have been seeking. Your efforts are in vain. It has already begun. But those who have sent you have not told you what they seek. What you seek.”

“And what is it that I’m seeking?” I asked, wondering how much it already knew.

“You see that which all who wield magic seek. Knowledge. You shall find this: Knowledge will corrupt. It will destroy. It will consume. You seek meaning, shelter in Knowledge. You will not find it. The Thalmor sought the same thing, and it shall lead to his end as it has so many others.”

Hang on, that definitely captured my attention! “Thalmor? You mean Ancano? What did that arrogant bastard want?”

“He seeks information about the Eye, but what he will find shall be quite different. His path will cross yours in time, but first you must find that which you need.”

“And what is it that I need?”

“You, and those aiding you, wish to know more about the Eye of Magnus. You wish to avoid the disaster of which you are not yet aware. To see through Magnus' Eye without being blinded, you require his staff. Events now spiral quickly towards the inevitable centre, so you must act with haste. Take this knowledge to your Arch-Mage.”

I didn’t mind taking instructions like that. The Augur was clearly powerful and apparently all-knowing. I almost believed he could predict the future. After giving thanks, which was greeted with silence as the light that appeared when he spoke dimmed immediately, I quickly made my way through the Midden, finding the ladder that led me back to the surface.

Heading straight for the Arch-Mage’s quarters, he was busy doing whatever he did during each and every day, and barely seemed to sense I was even standing near him. I eventually cleared my throat to gain his attention. “Arch-Mage, I have some news and information for you.”

He didn’t look up from what he was ready though did ask, “Really? And what might that be?”

“We need to find the Staff of Magnus.”

I must have told him something quite ridiculous as the old man chuckled. “While I’d certainly love to have such a powerful staff, I’m not really sure that would be of any use to us.”

“I was told the staff is connected to that orb we found.”

Now I had his attention, finally looking up, greeting me with a curious eye. “Oh, and who told you all this?”

“The Augur of Dunlain.”

“Did you really? And he specifically mentioned the Staff of Magnus?”

“Aye. It is of vital importance to what’s going on here.”

He seemed surprised, though considering I don’t think he had a clue what was going on around the college, Mirabelle basically ensuring things ran smoothly, I wasn’t surprised myself. “I... I'm impressed with your initiative. Of course, someone will need to follow up on this.”

“Aye, I figured it’ll be me. What do you suggest?”

Now he was interested and intrigued, leading me towards his bookshelves. He eventually picked out a dusty old tome, flicking through the pages. Whether it was information for me or not, I’m not sure. “Something as specific and ancient as the Staff of Magnus... I'm not sure we'd ever find something like that... I seem to recall Mirabelle mentioning the staff somewhat recently. Why don't you see if she can tell you anything?”

I figured she would be involved again. “I’ll go have a word with her then.”

“I’ll see if I can find anything in these books, but to be honest, considering how ancient the staff is…” He then turned away and seemed to forget I was present within a few seconds. I left without a word.

Mirabelle was busy teaching a class, so I headed back to Winterhold, asking the innkeeper if I had any letters. There were none, so I sat down and enjoyed a couple of tankards instead. Winterhold being as isolated and small as it was, I was the only one in there the entire time.

I returned to the college once night had fallen, enjoying dinner with my fellow students before heading to Mirabelle’s quarters. Pleased to see me as always, I had to stop her before we were intimate. “I need to ask you a couple of things. About what’s going on with that orb.” We sat together on the bed before I asked, “Do you know anything about the Staff of Magnus?”

She wasn’t stupid, though did ask, “Did Savos send you in my direction?”

“Aye. He said you’ve mentioned it recently.”

That made her chuckle. “Recently? It was months ago, Ragnar. I only brought it to his attention when the Synod showed up looking for it. They were apparently under the impression we were keeping it in a closet somewhere.”

“There’s a chance the staff is connected to the Eye of Magnus?”

“The what?”

“That’s what the Augur called the orb we found.”

“Just what is going on, Ragnar? The Eye of Magnus? The Augur of Dunlain being involved? And Ancano is… I’m not sure, but I definitely don’t trust him.”

I shuffled closer and grabbed her hand. “Do you trust me?” I asked softly.

“More than anyone.”

“Something is going on here, Belle. And I think it could even prove more dangerous than the dragon issue. I need your help regarding the staff. Whatever you can tell me might just help me end whatever danger is looming over the horizon.”

“Well, it's said to be very powerful. Has the capacity to store an incredible amount of magical power, as the story goes. But it's more myth than anything at this point. I've no doubt it actually exists, but no one has seen it in what, decades? Longer? I'm not sure. The only time I've heard it mentioned was when those Synod characters showed up some months ago looking for it.”

“That’s the second time you’ve mentioned the Synod. Who are they and what did they want?”

“Mages based out of Cyrodiil. They fancy themselves the Imperial Authority on magic these last few hundred years. My understanding is that all they really do is make noise in an attempt to curry favour from the Emperor. Lots of politics, little magic. I was quite surprised to find them on our doorstep. They seemed amiable enough, but their line of questioning made me... Well, to be honest, it made a little uneasy considering the power they believe they wield. It became clear they're trying to hoard powerful artefacts, looking to consolidate power.”

“So no-one knows the location of the staff?”

“No one here does. The Synod seemed convinced it was somewhere here in Skyrim. They inquired about the ruins of Mzulft, but that's all I remember. It sounded like they were heading there, though they were rather secretive about why. I suppose if you're intent on looking for the staff, there's a chance they might be in Mzulft yet. Just don't expect them to be cooperative.”

“Mzulft? Sounds like another dwarven ruin.” I groaned before adding, “Great.”

“You’ll go looking for it?”

“I have to, Belle. The Augur and the Psijic monk…”

“The who?”

“He visited recently and gave me some information. I thought you knew?” She shook her head. “Well, it’s not that important, but the warnings about this orb were quite explicit. And the Augur suggested Ancano is interested too, and that he’s a probable danger. The staff and this orb are linked. I guess it will help control it? I don’t know. Savos is doing some of his own research, though he’s easily distracted it seems.” I wrapped an arm around her. “Guess that’s why you run things,” I whispered.

“When will you leave?”

“Tomorrow morning. I’ll definitely need help heading into Mzulft, so will head back to Whiterun.”

“Can you handle a night of lovemaking before then?”

That made me chuckle before I kissed her. “I’m hoping one last time in the morning too.”

The grin made my heart flutter. “Definitely, Dragonborn.”

I departed the college the next morning with a spring in my step, whistling a tune, eager to return as quickly as possible. And, I’ll admit, mostly so I could spend more time with her, but if I solved the issue with the orb, then that would be good too.

Chapter 40: Projection

“You’re back?” Aela asked, looking up from the book she read by the firepit. She must have been cold as she was covered by some furs.

Hanging up my coat first, I leaned down to kiss her. “I have another task to complete for the college. Dwarven ruins. Dangerous. Risk of death. Figured you might be interested.”

She smiled. “You know me, Ragnar. Always up for some adventure.”

“Good. We’ll probably head out tomorrow, if you’re up for it.” Looking around, I asked, “Where’s Lydia?”

“She’s upstairs. We have a visitor.”

“Who?”

“Delphine.”

“Ah. Are they having fun?” I listened but didn’t hear intimacy upstairs.

“We did have some recently.”

“We?”

She smiled again. “Ragnar, I’m down here because my pussy is red raw right now.” She pulled back the furs and spread her legs. Her pussy had definitely received some attention, and recently. “Two pairs of hands, fingers and tongue is enough at times.” I leaned down and brushed my hand over her sex, making her gasp before she kissed me. “I’d love to, but she’s a little sore right now.”

“Mind if I head upstairs then?”

“Soon as she sees you, Delphine will want to fuck.”

“And you?”

“If I hear you having a really good time, I might just have to join in later.” She pulled the furs back to cover herself. “Once I hear you with them, you know what I’m like, Ragnar.” She paused before asking, “How is Mirabelle?” Now it was my turn to smile, and she knew me well enough by now. “And that is no surprise, Ragnar.”

“Part of me thought it would be because of Muiri. No, Belle is very much her own woman. Took the heart and head time to figure all that out.”

“So what will you do?”

“Enjoy her company for now. We both now it will not be a permanent thing. It can’t be considering our lives. She won’t leave the college and, while she is a reason to remain, I’m no mage.” Leaning down to kiss her again, she just told me to have fun if I wanted to.

Checking Lydia’s room first, I guess it was no surprise to find Lydia and Delphine lying together naked on my bed. Both looked at me and smiled. “Good to see you, Dragonborn.”

“You too, Delphine. Looks like you’ve made yourself comfortable.”

She turned onto her back and spread her legs, giving me a good look at her bald pussy. Seeing it glisten made me lick my lips. “Had to get some attention from your lovely girls. Though now that you’re here…”

“Anyone would think you have a one-track mind at times, Delphine.”

“I haven’t had the delights of your cock for a while, Dragonborn.” She glanced at Lydia. “And my young lover here was telling me about what she’d told you recently.”

“Oh…”

“Oh indeed, Dragonborn. My young lover here has been quite explicit in what she wants.” She ran her hand down Lydia’s back towards her arse, giving one of her cheeks a squeeze. “To put it simply, Dragonborn, she wants you to fuck her arse again. Once you’ve done that, you know I’m always ready for it.”

I started to strip straight away. “Well, if you’re wanting that, then…”

Both women moved immediately towards the end of the bed, helping me take off my pants, my cock springing free. Delphine greedily took it in her mouth, though Lydia got her turn quickly enough. Having two women blow you is quite exciting, and I was rock hard almost instantly. If I was doing what they wanted, I certainly didn’t want to waste a load in their mouths, so pulled back once I’d had enough.

“Are you going to take her arse straight away, Dragonborn?” Delphine asked in a rather sultry tone.

“You’re both getting your arses fucked tonight. Pussy isn’t on the menu.”

“Gods yes,” Lydia moaned before looking up at me and smiling.

“Maybe not for you, Dragonborn, but my young lover here can certainly give mine some attention until I take your cock.”

Delphine lay back on the bed, Lydia turning around on all fours, immediately burying her head between Delphine’s legs. She just met my eyes and winked as I got behind Lydia, Delphine handing me the bottle needed. “Just so you know, we’re prepared, Dragonborn,” Delphine stated, “It was something I suggested to your girls. They should always be ready for the Dragonborn to fuck their pussy or arse.”

Pouring some oil on Lydia, I massaged her cheeks first, earning a few moans before I spread them and lowered my mouth. She definitely enjoyed it when I rimmed her, Delphine exclaiming slight surprise I didn’t just start fucking her. Though I enjoyed that, I let my fingers do some work too, Delphine suggesting I finger her hard as well, really get her ready.

After slicking up my cock, I got Lydia into position and put my cock at her tight little hole. “Who owns your arse, Lydia?” Delphine asked.

“Ragnar.”

“Do you want it hard?”

“Gods yes. I want him to ruin my hole.”

Delphine looked at me and smiled. “I think we might have a real anal queen on our hands here, Dragonborn. She spoke about it quite a lot since I arrived.” I gently slid my cock into Lydia, earning a gasp and a long moan as I buried myself quite quickly. “She’s tight, isn’t she?” I nodded as she added, “Think you’ll loosen her up nicely today though.”

“Just remember you’re next.”

“You’re going to fuck me so hard, Dragonborn, you’ll put me into a sex coma afterwards.” I gave Lydia a few slow but hard thrusts, at least letting her get used to me. “That’s right, Dragonborn. Get her nice and ready.”

“Fuck me, Ragnar,” Lydia moaned.

So I got into position that would really let me do that, giving her a few more hard thrusts. Then I picked up the tempo, earning even more moans as I pounded Lydia’s tight little arse. It felt fantastic, the sound of my skin slapping against hers, seeing her cheeks wobble as I pounded her. Delphine watched on looking rather impressed, Lydia rather incapable of doing much else at that moment.

I was rather turned on by it all and felt an impending orgasm quite quickly. That just made me go even harder and faster, Lydia now grunting her way through the assault on her arse. “Oh, she’s enjoying it, Dragonborn,” Delphine stated.

“Fuck yes. I’ll want this all the time.”

“Still want three at a time?” I wondered.

“As long as you’re there and in my arse, yes. Fill my holes completely, Ragnar. I don’t care who the others are.”

I leaned forward completely so my mouth was near her ear. “Who owns your arse, Lydia?”

“You, Ragnar.”

“Any time I want?”

“I’ll never say no.”

“Maybe the three guys could just fuck your arse continuously?”

“Gods yes. I don’t want you to stop now.”

“Fucking hell, Lydia…” Delphine exclaimed quietly.

I came hard soon afterwards, the sort that left me feeling rather breathless and quite tired straight away. Lydia wanted me to remain inside her for as long as possible though I eventually had to pull out. Delphine suggested I check what I did, leaning back and spreading her cheeks. She was nice and red. “She’ll take it again too,” Delphine added, who immediately got on all fours and started to suck my cock. Looking up, she said, “I know you’re clean and I love to suck your cock.” Lydia turned onto her back and watched, a slightly dazed look on her face though she smiled when our eyes met.

“Give me a few minutes, Ragnar. Feeling a little tender.”

Though I could usually stay pretty hard, Delphine was an expert cocksucker and she had me rock hard again quite quickly. She grabbed the oil and used her hands to get me ready. While she was doing that, I felt a presence at my back as arms wrapped around my chest. “Going to fuck her now?” Aela whispered in my ear.

“I think tonight is nothing but anal.”

“Oh, well I might just have to join in then.” She paused before adding, “Lydia looks well fucked already.”

“He’s ruined my arse,” Lydia giggled, “But I’m having another go later.”

Delphine turned around, presenting her arse to me. “Just stick it in, Dragonborn. Fuck me as hard as you can.”

Aela let me go and sat down next to Lydia, both leaning against the headboard. They were sitting rather provocatively, legs spread and Aela was still rather red. Lydia’s looking completely wet, and I wasn’t sure if she’d had an orgasm or not, focused as I was on my own. I licked my lips without realising, earning a grin from Lydia. “Not tonight,” she said, guessing what I was thinking.

Sliding my cock into Delphine, as soon as I was buried, I leaned forward. “Sure?” I asked quietly.

“Own my arse, Dragonborn.”

So that’s what I did. I started out hard and fast. I was expecting her to cry out, but all she did was kiss my cheek and breath, “Fuck yes that’s good.” Considering I’d taken her arse a number of times by now, I wasn’t surprised, though I’m sure the other two might have been. Delphine loved every second, and I wasn’t gentle at all, earning plenty of grunts in addition to the moans of enjoyment she made. Considering I’d cum once already, I was going to last a lot longer this time, the other two women simply watching as Delphine was well and truly fucked.

Sitting back slightly, I just forced Delphine lower down, her arse still up, really driving my cock into her. “Fuck yes!” she cried.

“By Ysmir,” Aela muttered.

“Oh, you have no idea how good it feels,” Delphine murmured, though stopping between each word or two as I thrust into her.

I gave one of her cheeks a slap for good measure, grabbing her long blonde hair with my other hand, not enough to hurt, but she smiled when I did so. We were both now sweating heavily, Delphine’s skin glistening in the candlelight. Aela looked completely turned on, and she was now fondling herself. Lydia was now recovered and playing with her arse, which made me chuckle for a moment.

“Cum in me,” Delphine pleaded, her own hand now fondling herself.

“Only after you’ve cum.”

I could see her shoulder move faster, and when I felt her start to squeeze my cock, I knew she was enjoying an orgasm. She pleaded with me to keep going, so that’s what I did, and she kept fondling herself too. In fact, she was enjoying herself so much, she had a second one quite quickly and I think that one was even better. “Don’t ever stop, Dragonborn,” she moaned.

“Aye, you definitely own her arse, Ragnar,” Lydia stated.

“Gods yes. Forget my pussy. He can fuck my arse each time,” Delphine cried.

I came hard a couple of minutes later, the sort of orgasm that causes me to nearly pass out. I collapsed on top of Delphine, just catching myself though we ended up lying flat on the bed together, cock still buried deep inside her. Breathing deeply together, I simply kissed her cheek. “Some would say I’m too old for this,” Delphine joked softly. “Aela, can you wait until Lydia has another go?”

“I don’t mind at all. Watching is exciting enough.”

I pulled out as Delphine again turned around, though this time Lydia joined in. I noticed the slightly surprised look on Aela’s face as the two women sucked my cock. It took a little longer to get me rock hard again, but once I was, Delphine asked me to lie down.

Aela took that as a good time to sit on my face, so while I pleased her, I felt hands oil up my cock again before I assumed Lydia straddled me. “Dragonborn, you don’t have to move. Lydia will be doing as I say. Isn’t that right, Lydia?”

“Of course, Delphine.”

“You will take his cock in your arse and you will ride it as hard and as fast as possible.”

“That sounds wonderful.”

“Who owns your arse?”

“Ragnar.”

“Who owns your pussy?”

“Ragnar. Though you’re like the co-owner, Delphine. And you know I love your fingers in my arse as you pleasure my pussy.”

“By Ysmir,” Aela muttered.

“Lydia knows what she wants,” Delphne stated, “Will you suck his cock once he’s cum in your arse?”

“Always, Delphine. In my arse. In your arse. In Aela’s arse. I’ll always suck his cock afterwards.”

I felt her lift herself up and slide down my cock, rather quickly, to be honest. Then she did as she was told, feeling her really drive down on my cock each time. Aela swung around so I guess she could watch, while I could only sense what was going on, as I focused on pleasing her. Lydia was moaning quite loudly, and I assumed Delphine was probably fondling her too.

“You will keep going through your orgasms until Ragnar cums. And he won’t be cumming for a while.”

“I don’t want to stop,” Lydia groaned.

“I didn’t think so. How does it feel?”

“It hurts so good, Delphine. I feel tingles all over my body.”

Aela eventually moved, suggesting she’d get herself off, so I could watch. Lydia was riding me so hard, I did wonder if it didn’t just hurt. Delphine’s hand was rubbing Lydia’s pussy so fast, it was little wonder she sounded so excited and likely on the verge of another orgasm. Watching my cock disappear into Lydia so quickly excited me just as much.

“I think we should make your pussy a no cock zone, Lydia,” Delphine suggested.

“Right now, I can only agree,” Lydia breathed.

Watching Lydia was mesmerising. She was absolutely gorgeous, breasts jiggling away, her skin slick with sweat from her exertions, dark hair plastered to her forehead, cheeks red, lips parted, a look in her eyes that told me numerous emotions being experienced at once.

She came hard, I mean really hard, though Delphine did not relent with her hand. Lydia cried out and I thought she might want to stop, but she kept on going. “Oh god,” Lydia moaned. I thought she was about to cry. She must have noticed my look. “Not tears of pain,” she added.

Her second orgasm nearly made her pass out, her body shuddering, almost writhing on top of me. Delphine relented as Lydia fell forward. Adjusting my legs, she simply met my eyes. “Cum in me… please…” she pleaded, “Hard as you can.”

Placing a hand on each cheek, I did what she wanted. She kissed me hard as I did so. “I love you,” she whispered.

“I love you too,” I replied. I’m not sure either of us had shared those words before. Thing is, I did mean them in return. I did love her. Probably not the same as Aela, Muiri or Astrid, but I felt genuine affection and love for her. And it wasn’t a surprise to hear those words from her.

Running my hands from her arse to her back, she kissed me again, now begging me to cum. I was now really driving my cock up into her, and she was moving down to meet my thrusts. I noticed her wince every so often, so I figured it was now starting to take its toll. Grabbing her by the cheeks again, I upped the tempo as much as possible. This time she did cry out, but I grunted, letting her know I was close. When I did cum, I roared loudly, grabbing and holding her tightly as I buried myself again and again until I was done.

Collapsing onto my chest, we simply lay together breathing. I was now feeling exhausted. Lydia was practically passed on top of me. My cock softened quickly and fell out of Lydia, feeling the bed move as Delphine started to blow me. “Had enough,” I said quietly. Delphine immediately stopped.

“Aela?” she wondered.

“Oh, I’ve already cum a couple of times, Delphine. It’s fine, and to be honest, I’m not sure I want what you two have enjoyed.”

“Well, considering what I can see down here…” Lydia then moaned as I noticed Delphine rim her as well. “You’ve left quite the load here, Dragonborn.”

I didn’t say anything as I cuddled Lydia. I felt her move slightly, her legs a little tighter by my sides. “I meant it,” she whispered.

Kissing her damp forehead, I whispered, “So did I.” That made her lift her head and the glistening eyes finally produced a couple of tears, giving her a soft kiss as I used a thumb to wipe them away. “How could I not?"

“I just thought…” She trailed off, looking at Aela.

“Oh please, Lydia. You’ve liked him since the day you moved in here, and falling for him isn’t a surprise at all. And considering tonight, I guess you have something you can now physically enjoy together.”

Leaning forward, Lydia did whisper into my ear, “I do want you in my pussy too.”

I heard a slap, Lydia squealing as Delphine stated with humour, “I heard that!” Pausing, she added, “Though understandable.”

Lydia finally rolled off me, cuddled into my side, and promptly fell asleep. I made sure I covered her up, giving her another kiss on the forehead. Aela and Delphine stayed with me, the former also falling asleep quickly, admitting she’d enjoyed innumerable orgasms before and after my arrival, so it was little wonder.

That left Delphine and I together, and she eventually grabbed my hand and led me downstairs, both of us still naked. She turned to kiss me before asking, “Dragonborn, do you want to fuck me outside?”

“Where?”

“By the Gildergeen. It’s the middle of the night. I doubt many people are around.”

It sounded like fun, so Delphine grabbed a bottle, so I knew what she wanted, and we headed outside. Whiterun was dark at this time of night, as few torches were left burning. The area around the Gildergreen did have a little light, so we found an angle that would leave us mostly in darkness.

Leaning against the tree, placing her hands on it, I got behind Delphine and rimmed her first, causing her to moan and cry out, so I guessed we were not being quiet. “I want your cock,” she finally moaned.

I was gentle as I slid it in but I waited barely thirty seconds before pounding her again. No surprise we were eventually caught. I think it’s what Delphine wanted, being with the Dragonborn pounding that tight arse of hers.

“Oh, Dragonborn,” the guard stated.

“Aye. Just enjoying the stars tonight.”

“And your… lady friend?”

“She wanted to enjoy them too. And we got a little carried away.”

“Well, not for me to involve myself in your affairs, Dragonborn. You enjoy yourself now.”

“Fuck me, Dragonborn,” Delphine moaned.

The guard quickly moved off and I could hear his laughter. I guess being who I was came with one or two perks. Perhaps he was worried about telling me to stop. We kept going for another ten minutes before both of us admitted that it was actually rather cold, so we headed back to Breezehome. Once inside, I led her to the table and bent her over. Giving one of her cheeks a slap, she moaned before I asked, “Who owns your arse?”

“You do, Dragonborn,” she replied softly, a change in tone that was a little unexpected.

“Are you like Lydia, wanting my cock there all the time?”

“By Talos, yes. Every time.”

I slapped her other cheek. “What about your pussy? Want my cock there too?”

“Gods yes. You own my pussy and arse, Ragnar.” That gave me a pause. She rarely called me by name. I did slip my cock into her again, fucking her as hard as before, though eventually lifted her so her back rested against my chest. “I own you, Delphine. Like the others.”

She paused before saying anything, and only then did I notice the rapid blinking. “I love you,” she whispered.

That caused me to stop immediately, taking my cock out and sitting her on the table, sliding back into her arse. “What was that?” I asked softly.

She grabbed my head and pulled me down to kiss her. “I love you, Ragnar.”

I stopped and cupped the back of her head. “Say it again.”

She smiled, but I noticed her eyes glisten as she whispered, “I fucking love you, Ragnar.” Caressing her cheek, I simply smiled. I didn’t feel the same way and I think she knew, but I gave her a soft kiss as I held her close to my body. “I tried my best not to have these feelings but…” She breathed deeply and I heard the catch of a sob.

I let her go and grabbed a nearby cloth, giving my cock a good clean, before returning. She smiled as she spread her legs, and I gently slid my cock into her pussy, burying myself before remaining still. Still caressing her face, she continued. “I waited for you for so long, Ragnar.”

“Me or the Dragonborn?”

“Both. I mean, have you seen yourself? A virile young warrior like you. Not only are you courageous yet kind, and simply a thoroughly decent young man, you’re the Dragonborn, the man destined to save us all. You could have any woman you want. You at least have three right now you could enjoy at any time. Yet, right now, you’re here with me, someone old enough to be… well, you know, and yet I have a feeling I could enjoy this for a long time yet.”

“Not unless you have plans to leave.”

She kissed me again. “You own me, Ragnar, like the others. Not like a slave. But you own the physical things. Definitely my pussy and arse, that’s for sure. But my heart as well. As I said, I waited for so long for you to arrive in my life. I thought it was never going to happen.” Running her hand around my back, she left it on one my cheeks and motioned for me to move. “We’ve already fucked so much, if I was younger, I’d already be pregnant.”

I raised my eyebrows. “You’ve thought about it?”

That made her choke up again. “Never did until we were intimate the first time. Now I feel regret for the first time. I can only think about what if you’d come into my life long ago. I just don’t want this to stop.”

I held her tightly towards me, feeling her arms and legs wrap around me as we made love. “This won’t stop until you say so, Delphine. We can fuck hard like we have. Or we can do something like this. We can have fun or we can be serious. Whatever you want until you say so.”

“Would you really want to be intimate when I’m withered and grey?”

“I’ll be older by then too.”

She kissed me again. “Cum in me, Ragnar,” she breathed.

As I gently fucked her, I used one of my hands to fondle her. With everything expressed, it was little wonder she cried softly as I made her cum, and I did stop for a moment to simply hold her. She looked up and smiled as I cradled her head. “You are beautiful,” I whispered. In the low light of the fire, I thought she was gorgeous. That just made the smile broaden.

“And I have to pinch myself each time we’re like this. So long, Ragnar. And now the Dragonborn is with and inside me.”

The Dragonborn came inside her a couple of minutes later too. She was now physically and emotionally drained, so I suggested she hold onto me tightly, her arms and legs around my body, as I carried her upstairs. Good thing she was light. Back in my bedroom, I managed to pry her off my body and lay her down next to Lydia. I kissed her cheek as she whispered her love for me again.

“About time,” Aela whispered, little surprise she was awake.

“Known it since the day we met,” Lydia added. I guess they both heard us downstairs.

“Can’t deny it anymore,” Delphine said softly before she spooned against Lydia, little surprise both were asleep quickly.

I lay against Aela, spooning again her, wrapping my arms around her body. “Big night, Ragnar?”

“Aye. A great night too.”

Any plans to leave for Mzulft ended, considering how long it had been. All three women were in great moods the next morning, in particular Lydia, who whispered into my ear that she was feeling rather tender. As for Delphine, she just glowed. It was lovely to see.

Figuring it was best to avoid anything sexual for the day, as I did want to leave the next day, I headed up to Jorrvaskr, figuring I’d at least deal with something spoken of the previous night. I found the twins in their rooms and escorted them to Kodlak’s old ante-room. Once we had privacy. I wasted no time broaching the subject.

“You two know Lydia, right?”

“Your housecarl? Aye, she’s a fine woman, Harbinger,” Farkas replied.

“She’d certainly make any man quite happy,” Vilkas added. I assumed neither knew our true relationship then.

“Would either of you like to be intimate with her?” The looks of surprise made me chuckle. Before they could question, I added, “Truth be told, Lydia and I are intimate on occasion, and she has expressed a desire to be with three men at once. I will obviously be one of them. I can’t think of two better men to join us.”

“You’re serious?” Vilkas asked.

“Of course. This is not joking matter.”

“And she is okay with the two of us?” Farkas wondered.

“She knows I will pick men I trust.”

“If we do, I would rather be clean first, if you know what I mean,” Vilkas stated.

“Cured?”

“Aye, Ragnar. Farkas nor I has been intimate with a woman for quite a while due to our blood. It is a matter of honour, and we should not enjoy pleasures of the flesh while…”

“That sounds familiar,” I muttered.

“Aye, I know,” Vilkas added, “But there are slight differences. If you are available to help us, the sooner we are clean, the sooner we can join Lydia and yourself.”

Nodding, I suggested that was a good idea, though explained my current situation. They were understandable, so thought that, once the situation at the College was resolved, we could journey north to cure them. It was another good idea, so we shook hands to seal the deal.

To say Lydia was excited by the idea was an understatement when I told her later. “I thought you would… you know…”

“It’s something you want to do, Lydia. And they are two men that I trust. The only problem is it won’t happen soon. I have the College situation to sort out, then there is something personal for them to attend to. Once all that is resolved, we can enjoy the night you have planned.”

Doing all this earned a hug, kiss, and further fun with my three girls later that afternoon and evening.

---

“Well, at least we’re not in a snowbound frozen wasteland this time,” Aela muttered.

Finding Mzulft hadn’t been all that difficult once we’d consulted a map. Aela and I had mounted up and chatted away for most of the ride. As for Lydia and Delphine, well… they were both rather quiet after events of the previous two nights. During night two, I’m not sure who had taken it harder, but both had winced noticeably when mounting their horses, and they spent plenty of time with their butts not resting in their saddles.

After finding a place to tie up our horses, shielding them from the worst of the weather, we searched the exterior, hoping for any sign of the Synod researchers, but finding nothing, we walked towards the entrance and headed inside. The four of us were armed and armoured, ready for the usual enemies that generally lay in wait inside any dwarven ruin. But it always paid to be cautious as well.

I guess we shouldn’t have too surprised that we found a body near the entrance. The robes of the mage were bloodied, and I didn’t bother checking for wounds. The surprise was when he took a breath, looking up at us, blinking rapidly. “Crystal… gone…” he whispered, and the shudder of breath suggested he was barely hanging on.

Getting down on one knee, I asked, “What crystal? Who are you?”

“Find… Paratus…”

“Is he a Synod researcher?”

I don’t think he even heard our questions. “The Oculory…. In the Oculory…”

His head dropped to the side. Checking for signs of life, it was obvious we’d found him at deaths door. Resting his body on the ground, we found his pack nearby. A cursory check delivered some sort of journal or research log. I handed it around after I’d read it. “Any idea what a focusing crystal is?”

All three shook their heads. “Guess we needed a mage after all?” Aela wondered, and I heard the tone.

“Aye. Oh well…”

“What about this Mirabelle I’ve heard mentioned?” Delphine asked, and she couldn’t hold back the smirk.

“She’s not one for adventuring through ancient ruins.”

“But she’s quite happy to fuck one of her students?” Lydia joked.

“Aye, she is. No complaints from me either.”

“Despite the fact you’re clearly not a mage as well,” Aela stated.

“Can you blame her though?” Delphine wondered. All three women looked at me.

“No. Definitely don’t blame her,” Lydia replied softly, “My arse has been sore all day!”

“Doesn’t help when you have it fucked before breakfast as hard as last night,” Delphine exclaimed.

“Not like you haven’t looked uncomfortable!” Lydia retorted, “You’re an anal addict as much as I am! I remember him giving you two loads in succession last night. I’m surprised you can even walk today!”

Clearing my throat, I gestured to the door. “Shall we?”

“This is why I prefer my pussy,” Aela whispered into my ear, causing me to chuckle.

It was your typical labyrinth, full of traps to catch out the unsuspecting, the usual pressure pads on the ground or doors that had tripwires which would cause sharp things to spring and stab you. If it wasn’t the traps, it was the dwarven machines that woke up and attacked without mercy. Luckily we had a good system with Lydia and I armed with sword and shield, Delphine and Aela armed with dual weapons. If we needed to take things down at distance, they could use their bows.

We found more bodies as we adventured, and I eventually stopped counting how many we’d found. None of them appeared armed, so I assumed they all attempted to use magic, but the blood suggested they’d been cut down rather easily. One or two bodies had also been defiled, and upon entering some natural caverns, which I normally found in these sort of ruins, we found evidence that suggested one or two had been taken and tortured, whether for information or simply for fun, we could only guess. When we found body parts, Lydia and Aela both looked queasy. Delphine didn’t know much about the Falmer but guessed they may eat those taken.

As always, the ruin was infested with creatures, Falmer or chaurus, while the occasional dwarven machine proved more than a nuisance than any real danger. Lydia and I had long ago established a good routine, with the other two providing cover and watching our flanks. Fighting Falmer always took more concentration, the bastards usually coating their weapons in poison, and I’d read more than one story of an adventurer who’d been wounded. It never ended well.

Walking through what appeared to be a Falmer settlement, as there were a number of their huts, I remembered the journal and the focusing crystal, and considering it wasn’t in the pack, I suggested it was taken by the Falmer. For what reason, I didn’t know, as we rarely found coin or jewels on them, and as they couldn’t see, I didn’t think they would have taken it to show off.

I’ll happily admit that we slaughtered the bastards as we passed through, taking time to check each body, each hut and any chest we found. And the bastards had taken it, finding it in the chest of a now dead shaman. I’m not sure what religion the Falmer believed in but I’d seen quite a few shaman during my time adventuring through these ruins.

Arriving at a locked door, I could only groan as that meant searching for the key. Knowing it would probably be in the hands of the Falmer, we searched and cut down any we could find. But when we didn’t find the key anywhere, it was slightly concerning as the place was a maze, and I was more worried about getting lost.

What I didn’t want to find was a Centurion. And unlike when I normally found them, and it was possible to sneak by, this one woke up as soon as we walked through the door. It waking up attracted the attention of numerous other machines, so while I focused on the Centurion, the three girls watched my back.

I have no problem admitting that I ‘cheated’ and used my Thu’um. Once I had it on the ground, I used it again before beginning to hack away. Centurion were made of strong stuff, though, and it took more than just a few whacks of a sword to kill it. Whenever it tried to get up, I used my Thu’um again. I’m sure the gods would understand my constant use of my gift. And I’d agreed with the Greybeards that I would not use it against man. Mer? Hmmm… maybe. Depended on the situation.

Once the floor was littered with dwarven parts, I found the key in a chest along with a few other goodies, the dwarves having collected numerous jewels, and also soul gems, which I found surprising, before we headed back to the locked door. Part of me thought something even bigger would be waiting, but no, there was only an empty corridor.

There was another locked door at the end. I could only groan as I figured there’d be no key for this one. So I did the only thing I could think of. I pounded the door with my fist. We had to wait for a reaction but we eventually heard a voice. “Gavros? Is that you?”

“Open the damned door, Paratus!”

There were a couple of clanks as the door was unlocked, a man in hooded robes soon appearing in front of us. The eyes took us in immediately, four armed, armoured people, no doubt covered in sweat and blood. He took an involuntary step backwards. I didn’t blame the man. “What are you doing here?” he asked, not appreciating the accusing tone in his voice, “And where is Gavros?”

“He’s dead.”

His face fell and he was smart not to blame us. “It was the Falmer, wasn't it?”

“Aye. We found him by the entrance.”

He sighed, running a hand down his face. I probably wasn’t the only to notice he was a tired, old man. “If Gavros is gone, there's no hope. He was supposed to return with the crystal. Without that, all our efforts are wasted. And you. If you're here for treasure, or wisdom, or anything, I'm afraid you've wasted your time.”

“We’re not here for treasure.”

“Oh, then what are you here for?” he asked, once again suspicious regarding our sudden appearance.

“Looking for you actually.”

“And just why would you be doing that? Oh, it doesn't matter now. Gavros is never coming back, and he was supposed to have the crystal. Without that, we're lost. It's all been for nothing. So congratulations, whoever you are, you've found the Synod. Just me, alone, surrounded by angry machines and angrier Falmer.”

As he was ranting, I reached into my backpack to retrieve the crystal. It was only when I offered it to him that he seemed to finally realise. “You found... How in the world... That's it. That's it! I don't know who you are, but you may have just saved this little project... In fact, who are you, anyway?”

“I go by many names but let’s just say I’m from the College of Winterhold.”

That made the old man snort in derision, enough to earn a titter or two from my girls. “You are, are you?” He looked me up and down. I didn’t look like a mage so I wasn’t surprised he probably wouldn’t believe me. “Savos wouldn't even grant us an audience when we came to you, but now you come here expecting something from me? I don't much like this, I'll tell you. But you saved my skin, so maybe I can overlook the past for now. Come on, I'll explain on the way.”

Falling in alongside him, my girls in our footsteps, I asked, “So what are the Synod doing here anyway? Didn’t have you as a bunch of adventurers.”

“I am on official business of the Grand Council of the Synod. That's all you need to know.”

“If I tell you what I want, you can tell me what you’re here for.”

He looked at me as we walked before nodding. “Seems fair. So why are you here?”

“We’re looking for the Staff of Magnus.”

That made him stop. “Seriously?”

“Aye.”

“Well, I think you’ve come all this way for nothing as it certainly wouldn’t be here.”

“True, but it’s possible there will be clues to where it could be.”

We began walking and finally entered another chamber, filled with another dwarven marvel of engineering. “Here it is. Magnificent, isn't it? Took an incredible amount of work to get it running again. Now I'm hoping it'll all be worth it. Place the crystal in the central apparatus, and we can start the process for focusing it.”

I found the slot for the crystal quite easily, and once in place, the machine started up. Having no idea what to do, I left it to Paratus to focus the beams of light into the right places, the three girls standing alongside me as we watched. When the three beams were in the right place, there was a large beam of light that projected something onto the wall nearby. As we gathered around, Paratus barged through and it didn’t take long for him to be unhappy.

“What's this? These results... They're not at all what they should be. This projection should be lit up like the night sky. Something is creating an incredible amount of interference. Something in Winterhold, it looks like. What are you playing at? Is this some attempt to stall my work?! So, what is it? What have you done? Did you know what we were attempting? Are you here to make sure your plan worked, that our efforts have been for nothing? Well, explain yourself!”

I gently grabbed him by the shoulder to face me. “Calm down, mage. I don’t have to explain a damned thing.”

“You and your College have ruined years of my work, I've lost friends and colleagues to the Falmer, and you want me to calm down?”

“I’d listen to Ragnar, mage, lest you want a slap,” Aela warned.

He looked at her before looking back at me. “You said you’re from the College, correct?” I nodded, and he looked back at the protection. I noticed the slight smile as he looked back at me. “You have something at your College, don't you? Something immensely powerful. Beyond anything I'd anticipated. What is it?”

“We do. It’s called the Eye of Magnus.”

He blinked in surprise for a few seconds. I doubt he expected that honest answer. “The Eye of Magnus? Well, I suppose if that means what I think it does... Well, that's interesting…”

“So the staff, can you help us or not?”

He gestured briefly at the projection. “Instead of projecting the sky, we project all of Tamriel, and then harness the latent energies to overlay the positions of...” The four of us must have returned a blank look, so thankfully he moved on. “What's important is that all of this work was designed to reveal to us sources of great magical power. Purely to help safeguard the Empire, of course. And yet, in the end, only two locations have been revealed to us. One is your College. The other... Well, that can only be Labyrinthian.”

“The staff is there?”

He shrugged. “More than likely. So, mage from Winterhold, despite your intentions I've beaten your little game. Even if all you've said here is lies, I know you have something in Winterhold the Synod Council will be very interested in. So fine, trudge off to Labyrinthian in search of your Staff. I shall return to Cyrodiil and deliver my full report to the Council. This is not over, I assure you.”

Now I gave him a slap. Not too hard, but enough to shock him, before putting a finger into his chest, making him step back against the wall. “I don’t appreciate threats from lunatics. I don’t know if it’s the isolation or if you’re just crazy, but I think it’s best you do head back to Cyrodiil for your own safety. Think of doing anything regarding the College, though, and you will have the Dragonborn to deal with.”

“Hmph,” he snorted and I suggested to my girls that we should leave.

We found an exit as usual, a shortcut back to the entrance. It was dark by the time we exited, and as we were miles from the nearest town, we put up some tents, laid out the bedrolls, built a fire, and settled down for the night. We agreed that we’d head straight back to the College in the morning.

Chapter 41: The Staff of Magnus

“What the fuck is that?” I asked no-one in particular as we approached the college. My three girls had joined me as they now wanted to see what was happening through to its conclusion. Plus, I think they wanted to meet Mirabelle and make their own judgement.

Mirabelle was standing outside the Hall of Elements with nearly everyone else from the College, sensing my presence as she turned when I approached her. She smiled though didn’t hug or kiss me in front of her colleagues or students. “What’s going on?” I asked again.

“I don’t know. It’s like a ward or something, but who’s casting it? Ancano? How?”

“I bet it’s that Thalmor bastard,” I growled, unsheathing my sword, “Time for him to die.”

“I want this down now!” Savos demanded, finally acting like a damned leader, “I want to know what he's doing in there!”

“So it is that Thalmor bastard?” I asked.

Savos nodded. “He's in there, doing... something. We don't know what. We're trying to get in now. I will have his head for this, I assure you. Help take this down, will you? We're throwing everything we can at it.”

I wasn’t going to bother with magic though looked at my colleagues for help. Aela was probably the most adept of our group, though Delphine showed she had a little talent. With all the students and teachers joining in, the ward slowly but surely withered until it finally disappeared completely.

Charging towards the Eye, we gathered around Ancano, who was doing something to the enormous sphere. “Time for you to die, elf,” I growled, though felt a hand on my shoulder to stop me swinging.

“Ancano! Stop this at once!” Savos ordered, stepping towards the elf. “I command you!”

As he reached out to touch him, there was an almighty explosion. I have no idea what it was, but my world turned black for a few seconds before I woke up, giving my head a shake, my ears still ringing, hearing someone call out my name. Faces appeared in my vision as I was helped to my feet by Aela and Mirabelle.

“You guys okay?” I asked.

“I think we’re all fine,” Aela replied.

Mirabelle didn’t look well, and a cursory check of her robes showed a nasty wound. “Don’t worry about me.”

“Like hell I won’t. I’ll get Colette to heal you.” She looked ready to argue so I kissed her softly. “Don’t argue with me now.”

“Okay, but we’d better find Savos. I can’t see him anywhere.”

“And Ancano?”

“He’s somehow connected to the Eye and simply too powerful.”

We found Savos, or what was left of him, on the pathway leading to the hall. He was missing his head, both arms, a leg, and his body had been torn to shreds otherwise. I could only guess that Ancano had focused the blast on him over everyone else. While I had no love for the man, I was still pissed off. He didn’t deserve to die in such a brutal manner.

“We need the staff, Ragnar,” Mirabella stated, “Only that will stop him.”

Tolfdir appeared through the crowd, quickly inspected the body, before he noticed Mirabelle on my arm. “Something's happened to Winterhold. It must be whatever Ancano did. You need to get out there and make sure it's safe. Quickly now, quickly! I'll take care of Mirabelle and see if we can't put a stop to this!”

I handed her over, and this time she had no problem kissing me in front of everyone. “Be safe and come back to me,” she said softly.

Gathering the students, I told them exactly who I was, though I think one or two already knew, and asked if they would help us defend Winterhold. A few of them grumbled but realised it was the right thing to do, and I suggested their magic would help my colleagues and I.

We ran as a group towards Winterhold, finding it under attack from some sort of magical… things, though Faralda called them wraiths, Arniel calling them wisps. Whatever they were, I left it to the mages to deal with, though swung my sword whenever one came too close for comfort. There were quite a few of the little things, but the mages worked together well, and most of the things were soon on the ground, creating small pools of… something where they died.

With the danger to the town now passed, I started issuing instructions to both students and teachers, finding it slightly amusing they were obeyed without question, assuming it was because they knew who I was. I took Faralda and my three girls back with me where Mirabelle and Tolfdir kept watch on whatever Ancano was doing. “It’s sorted,” I said briefly, Mirabelle glancing my way and smiling.

“We need to get our hands on the Staff of Magnus,” she stated.

I heard it. So did my girls. “We? Are you sure?”

“Tolfdir can hold the fort here with the others. I’ve been sitting on the sidelines for too long. And I want to adventure next to the Dragonborn at least once.”

I grabbed her hand and squeezed it. “Okay. We’re heading to Labyrinthian.” I swear her face drained of colour at the name. “What?”

“Are you sure that’s where it is? That can’t just be coincidence.”

“What are you talking about?”

She looked at where Savos had been lying, though he’d since been taken away. “Savos. Before he died. He gave me something just a little while ago. He told me it was from Labyrinthian, and that I would know what to do with it when the time came. I think... I think he meant this for you, then. I'm not sure why, but there was something very personal about it for him. Also, I think you should take this amulet. It belonged to Savos, but I think it would do you the best now.”

I took the first object she mentioned but gave her back the amulet, closing her fingers over it. “I think the next Arch-Mage should have this,” I stated softly.

“I don’t know…”

Turning back to my girls, I added, “We’d best return to Whiterun, gear up, and the five of us head straight for Labyrinthian. We get the staff, return here, and kill Ancano.”

There was firm agreement to my plan, so after a quick conversation with Tolfdir, Mirabelle packed one or two things and we quickly made our way back to Winterhold. It was still light, but with only four horses, Mirabelle had to ride with me. Despite the situation, she seemed rather excited about the journey, riding as far as Windhelm, where we stopped for the evening, before continuing our journey the next morning.

Making it to Whiterun by evening, we had little choice but to wait until the next morning as we needed the rest. I didn’t mind riding at night, but a long day in the saddle was tiring. Breezehome seemed much smaller with five people in it, and after dinner, there was the amusing spectacle of trying to organise where everyone would sleep.

“Lydia and I can take her room,” Delphine suggested.

“No sex?” she whined, albeit with a cheeky grin.

Delphine looked at me. I just shrugged. “Aela?” Delphine asked.

“I think it depends on our new guest.”

I looked at Mirabelle, who started to blush as the four of us looked at her. “Oh… I’ve never…”

“Question answered. Lydia, with me. I can give your arse plenty of attention with my fingers.” Mirabelle gasped as Lydia giggled, walking out hand in hand with Delphine. “We’ll try to keep the noise down.”

I closed the door and turned back to Aela and Mirabelle, the former already stripping though keeping her underwear on. Mirabelle looked at me and I started to disrobe too. “We’ll keep our underwear on unless you want…”

“Yes,” she said quietly.

“Okay. Aela will join in though.”

“That’s okay. You’ve told me all about her.”

“As much as he raved about you, Mirabelle,” Aela added sweetly, making Mirabelle blush again.

Lying back between the pair, I spent time kissing both of them before my underwear was removed and Aela began to suck my cock. Mirabelle did it on occasion but I suggested she sit on my face. She loved that idea, so I shuffled down slightly as Mirabelle straddled my face and offered her pussy. She must have been thinking about it as she was already wet, gasping loudly when my tongue touched her. “Ragnar, you cock is really hard. You really like her!”

“I love him,” Mirabelle moaned.

“So do I,” Aela added before I felt her lips around my cock again.

Mirabelle was soon gyrating on my face, enjoying what I was doing with my tongue, while Aela had always been an expert with her mouth and tongue, little wonder I was getting ready to cum myself. By now, Mirabelle had a firm grip of my hair and was riding my face as much as I was eating her out. Whether Aela wanted to say something or not, I’m not sure, as my cock must have been down her throat, feeling her nose press into my groin, and I could only moan into Mirabelle’s pussy as I felt the oncoming release.

Aela swallowed every drop I gave her. Yes, she did squeal when the first shot fired into her mouth, catching her by surprise, though I felt her lips clamp tightly around my cock and she audibly swallowed. Mirabelle came at nearly the same time, crying out as I felt her shudder as I held onto her thighs. Once she’d taken some deep breaths, she moved off my face to kiss me. “Holy shit,” she murmured.

Aela kept blowing me as Mirabelle and I both looked down. She just looked up, resting my cock against her cheek. “Already swallowed. Got to get you hard to fuck us both now. I’m thinking Mirabelle has your cock first and I’ll ride your face this time. The only question is… Mirabelle, have you kissed a woman before?” She shook her head. “Okay, well, I’m going to ride his face backwards, as he might like rimming me at the same time…”

“Eat that arse? Gods yes!” I exclaimed.

“You like doing that?” Mirabelle wondered.

To prove a point, without saying a word, I sat up and turned Mirabelle over, lifting her arse up and licked it. She moaned when I did so, Aela handing me some scented oil, which I poured onto Mirabelle, before I went to town on her arse. She was soon moaning loudly, pushing back into my mouth. “Gods,” she breathed.

“Good, isn’t it?” Aela asked, on all fours next to her.

“He mentioned the fact the other two loved anal but… I had no idea and that’s just his tongue.”

“Oh, his cock is an entirely different matter, but it’s good that you’re being open-minded about it.”

“What about you?”

“It’s something we do occasionally. I prefer that cock pumping my pussy.”

“Ragnar,” Mirabelle breathed, “I need you inside me now.”

I licked all the way up her back until my lips rested by her ear as I gently slid my cock inside her. “Good?” I whispered.

She grabbed one of my hands, holding it to her chest as I started to fuck her. Aela simply lay to the side and watched, Mirabelle turning to kiss me. I eventually sat back, taking her with me, Mirabelle resting against my chest as I ran the same hand down to her pussy. “Yes,” she hissed, my fingers starting to tease her as I fucked her. Now Aela sat up in front of Mirabelle and softy kissed her. Mirabelle obviously hesitated at first, but when Aela moved her hand down to replace mine, the next kiss was met with no hesitation at all.

“Fuck her, Ragnar.”

“Yes, fuck me, Ragnar,” Mirabelle exclaimed, “Cum in me like always.”

“I love you,” I whispered into her ear, “And I love you,” I told Aela.

Aela did nothing more than kiss her and fondle her a little bit, obviously not wanting to push the boundaries too far, and I think Mirabelle was just caught up in the moment. She’d never mentioned any real interest in women prior, though that didn’t mean anything anyway from what I’d learned with numerous previous lovers. But what Aela and I were doing made her cum again and hard, needing to turn her head so I could kiss her, before Aela moved out of the way, Mirabelle fell forward, and she begged me to fuck and cum inside her.

She got what she wanted a few minutes later, burying my cock inside her again and again before releasing, gently resting on top of her once I was done, kissing her cheek before resting my head against hers. “By the Nine, Ragnar…”

“Good?”

She squeezed my cock with her pussy. “Part of me always wants you inside me. Not practical, but I can’t help the thoughts.”

“We have the same thoughts,” Aela added.

Mirabelle looked up. “Thank you.”

“Oh, I can see the affection you have for each other. And I’m happy to wait for my turn. One thing I know about Ragnar is it won’t take him long to get hard for me and I’ll ride him hard and fast until I cum a couple of times, then he’ll cum again too.”

“I’d like to see that.”

This time, Mirabelle pushed me onto my back and moved down to pleasure me with her mouth. Watching her do so filled my heart with joy. As I said, she did it rarely, and that was only because I enjoyed doing it to her so much, it was a subject rarely broached. She showed plenty of enthusiasm though, and my cock was rock hard within a few minutes. She was pleased with her work, lying next to me as Aela quickly hopped onto my cock.

She wasn’t exaggerating either. She rode me hard and fast once she was comfortable, I think caught up in the moment, and perhaps slightly showing off in front of Mirabelle. As Aela rode me, Mirabelle was quite complimentary of Aela, but showed no sign of wishing to be intimate with her, and Aela insisted that she didn’t have to be. Aela rarely was except if we invited Lydia into our bedroom.

Aela came quicker than usual but kept on riding me through it, Mirabelle giggling as Aela shuddered through her orgasm. “Well, an understandable reaction,” she whispered before kissing me, “Your cock is magnificent after all, Ragnar.”

“Gods yes,” Aela muttered as she leaned down, hands on my chest. That was a signal to bend my knees, put my hands on her arse, and start to pump her. “Fuck me!” Leaning down to kiss me, she rested her head on my forehead as I slammed my cock into her, loving the little gasps and moans she was making. Mirabelle was still snuggled into my side.

“Does it feel good, Aela?”

“Gods, Mirabelle, I think you have a good idea…”

“Are you going to cum?”

That made Aela giggle. “Definitely. Though I’m hoping Ragnar will soon too.”

“Not too much longer,” I grunted.

We nearly came together, Aela enjoying another orgasm and while she was still experiencing it, I buried my cock and unloaded inside her again. Aela collapsed onto my chest, wrapping my right arm around her, holding Mirabelle close to me with my left. “Fun night,” I joked, earning giggles from the pair of them.

“Perks of being Dragonborn perhaps,” Aela added. Aela slid off as both girls snuggled into my side. “I think it’s clear visits to the College will be compulsory,” she continued, “It’s clear you two love each other as well.”

I glanced at Mirabelle, who simply blushed. “I understand if…”

“No. I know Ragnar and I have a future, but I have no expectations of him being just with me. He’s intimate with Lydia, I have no idea how long the thing with Delphine will last, and I know there are other women out there who will take his fancy. What I do know is that, most nights, he will be sleeping at my side.”

“You’re a very understanding woman, Aela. I admit to already feeling pangs of jealousy.”

“You get over it because, when you’re alone with Ragnar, you are the only woman in his world at that moment.”

“You’re right there,” Mirabelle whispered, snuggling into me a little more.

And that’s how we went to sleep.

Aela and Mirabelle were both rather happy in the morning, while Lydia was her usual explicit self, regarding what she’d been up to with Delphine. I think she was trying to provoke a reaction, as in bending her over and giving her arse a good fucking, but we needed to leave for Labyrinthian. I had been past the complex at least a couple of times but never stopped to explore it.

Mounting up, Mirabelle once again rode with me, and while nervous about the potential fight to come, she was excited about joining me on an adventure. It was a bitterly cold day. If I believed in omens, the dark clouds overhead suggested troubled times ahead. Mirabelle sat in front of me, holding her with one arm, the reins with another, Aela riding alongside with Lydia and Delphine behind.

Despite the seriousness of the situation, we still managed to chat away, cracking the occasional joke, as we slowly approached the massive complex. By the time we arrived, a snowstorm had descended, reducing visibility and, somehow, it felt colder than ever. “Anyone ever been here?” Mirabelle asked.

I’m surprised anyone heard her over the howling wind. “Once on a contract,” Aela replied, needing to raise her voice, “Didn’t enter the main barrow. I passed through it and over the hill to a nearby camp. Had to take out some bandits.”

We eventually had to dismount and lead our horses up some stairs towards the entrance, tying them to a pillar and leaving some furs on them so they were kept warm. As we approached the main door, I took the object Mirabelle had given me from my pack. However, as we approached, ghostly figures seemed to appear out of nowhere, and Mirabelle gasped, stating one of them was a younger vision of Savos. Listening to the conversation, it was obvious they were here for various reasons. Once inside, the figures returned again, Savos stating they could find various objects, though mentioned nothing about a staff.

“Guess they were adventurers themselves,” Lydia stated. Mirabelle murmured agreement.

Walking forward, we were greeted with what felt like innumerable skeletons. Even Mirabelle had dealt with such things before, so wasn’t surprised and showed her skill immediately as an elemental mage, raining fire down on the skeletons, though she left enough for the rest of us. Walking through an archway, we were greeted by more skeletons… and a skeleton dragon.

I took care of that quite quickly with a couple of Shouts, Mirabelle continuing to rain fire while Lydia watched my back as I dealt with the dragon. Aela and Lydia had bows out, hearing them firing from a distance.

Once the dragon was dead, not taking a soul as it was clearly an undead creature. Gathering around it, I couldn’t help look at Mirabelle. “Holy shit!” I exclaimed.

“What?”

“How good are you?!” That made her blush. “I think you should join us more often!”

“We could definitely use a mage during some of our adventures,” Aela added.

“Well, it will all depend on what happens next with the College,” Mirabelle stated.

The ghostly figures appeared again, mentioning one of the six had died in the previous chamber. Moving on, we found an etching on a pedestal, a stone tablet mentioning a great city by the name of Bromjunaar. I asked if anyone knew of the city but no-one did. “Something to do with the Dragon Cult probably,” Delphine suggested, “This complex is positively ancient. Pre-First Era I reckon.”

Moving on, remaining ever vigilant now, as in addition to the usual enemies, traps were also waiting to catch the unwary. Continuing our descent, I was surprised when a voice suddenly called out. Knowing the dragon language, I understand what it said.

“Wo meyz wah dii vul junaar?” it asked.

“Who comes to my dark kingdom?” I added.

“And the voice belongs to?” Mirabelle asked.

“Guess we’ll find out soon enough,” I muttered.

Making our way through the closed door after figuring out it was opened by magic, we entered an enormous chasm, full to the brim with enemies. Draugr patrolled the tunnels, Aela and Delphine taking them out from distance, attracting the attention of others that Mirabelle, Lydia and I could deal with. Since entering, Mirabelle had shown absolutely no fear, and I couldn’t help but be impressed, though I think she was proving something to herself, but also to me. She had no reason to regarding me, at least.

Draugr infested the chasm, like every other ruin I’d been through since arriving in Skyrim so long ago. None really caused us concern, even those who possessed the power of the Thu’um, as I could fight fire with fire regarding that, laughing away as I sent draugr flying end over end, usually unable to get up before one of us had put a sword through it.

Coming to another door, the voice echoed again, deep and trying to be menacing. “Nivahriin muz fent siiv nid aaz het. You do not answer... Must I use this guttural language of yours? Have you returned, Aren? My old friend?”

I put a finger to my lips and shook my head. Now that he was speaking the common tongue, I didn’t want the owner of the voice to know who was coming. At least, not yet. Entering a natural cavern, we continued to make our way through skeletons and draugr. At one stage, we must have passed through what must have once been an ancient crypt, and it was there that the voice spoke again.

“Do you seek to finish that which you could not? You only face failure once more...” The voice then paused as it seemed to finally understand. “You... You are not Aren, are you? Has he sent you in his place? Did he warn that your own power would be your undoing? That it would only serve to strengthen me?”

Passing through another of those magical doors, the ghostly figures appeared again, their numbers having dwindled to only three, Savos being one of them. The survivors talked amongst themselves, Savos urging them to continue forward, simply as going back would be folly. But it was obvious they had all been out of their depth. “He was a fool,” I muttered.

“Wonder what happened to those two?” Aela wondered. I gave her a look which she could easily interpret. They either died or… something else. It appeared the dead Arch-Mage held more than one secret.

“Know anything about this?” I asked Mirabelle as we moved on.

“Not a thing, Ragnar,” she replied, a little defensively. I grabbed her hand, giving it a squeeze of reassurance. “But now I understand why he gave it to me. He knew this was always going to come back to haunt him.”

The deep voice continued to taunt as we moved on, find a Word Wall a little later, as we continued to battle endless draugr, and for a change, found a couple of trolls too. We were either deep underground, or perhaps the complex had been dug into the side of the mountain. We’d been walking for at least a few hours now, and I knew I wasn’t the only one feeling the strain. Mirabelle was covered in sweat, her robes clinging to her body. Lydia continuously wiped her brow, Aela’s face paint had half-disappeared due to sweat dripping down her face. Delphine asked us to stop every so often, admitting she hadn’t worked this hard in years.

We ran into the ghostly visions once again, the three appearing to make an agreement that they would die together. Knowing that didn’t happen, I now figured out what perhaps happened, though kept my thoughts to myself. But what we all figured out was that the door ahead led to the deep voice.

Entering an enormous chamber, I’ll admit to slight surprise at what we found, Mirabelle explaining what it was. “They’re keeping what that is…”

“Dragon Priest. It’s a fucking Dragon Priest,” Delphine exclaimed, “I thought they’d all been kill eons ago!”

“Those two,” Mirabelle continued, pointing, “Are projecting energy, keeping the Dragon Priest enclosed.”

“Can we get at it now?”

“No. We’ll need to interrupt those two, release the Dragon Priest, and kill it conventionally.” Walking up the stairs, Mirabelle added, “They’re enthralled by magic. We’ll have to… you know…”

“There’s no other way?”

“No. Savos no doubt cast the spell, keeping them here to keep the Dragon Priest at bay, so he could make his escape.”

“Okay. You and I deal with the Dragon Priest then. Aela and Delphine, you’ll cut down these wizards. Once you’ve done that, you’ll help us with arrows. Lydia, you’re with us too. No-one do anything stupid. This thing must be powerful. I’ll give the signal when we’re ready.”

The five of us got into position and I finally got a good look at the Dragon Priest. Though trapped, it could still turn to look at me. I simply smiled at him and got into a fighting stance, gesturing towards the other two. It didn’t take them long to deal with the enthralled wizards, the energy shield disappearing instantly, releasing the Dragon Priest. He exclaimed something which I understood as his name, and immediately attacked us. Mirabelle replied with magic of her own before I used my Thu’um.

“You asked who I am? Dragonborn, motherfucker. That’s who you’re up against.”

Lydia joined in as we went straight in, Mirabelle assisting, this time with a ward shield that protected us both. Arrows also rained down on Morokei, but the bastard was fast and strong, and soon he had us running across the chamber chasing him.

“Keep still, you piece of filth!” Lydia exclaimed. I simply laughed at the expression, wondering where she got that from.

“He’s carrying the staff!” Mirabelle added. That was good news. I’d have been rather pissed off if we’d come all this way, fought the Dragon Priest, only for the staff not to be present.

I’m not sure how long we fought Morokei for, but when one of his attacks got through and hit Mirabelle, I’ll admit, I saw red, and after that, he didn’t stand a chance. I used my Thu’um time and again, Morokei simply unable to fight back, as I got in close and swung like a madman. I kept swinging even after he went down, only stopping when Lydia grabbed my forearm.

“It’s dead, Ragnar.”

“Just making sure. Piece of shit.” I took a deep breath. “Check its body, get the staff.”

I walked back to Mirabelle, nursing a nasty wound, though Aela was already at her side. She looked at me, slightly concerned. “It’s bad, Ragnar, and I can’t heal it alone. We need to get back to the College.”

Picking Mirabelle up in my arms, Lydia walked over carrying the staff and something else, and we climbed the stairs to what I assumed was the exit. Through a couple of double doors, and it started to get cold, so figured we were approaching the surface. We passed by Savos, apologising to those who’d left behind, before his ghostly figure blinked out of existence. I’ll admit to feeling nothing despite knowing he was now dead. He was responsible for half the mess we were in anyway.

Our day didn’t get particularly better as the Thalmor decided to make their presence known at the same time. The idiot thought he could take on all five… well, four of us. “So, you made it out of there alive. Ancano was right, you are dangerous. I'm afraid I'll have to take that Staff from you now. Ancano wants it kept safe... Oh, and he wants you dead. Nothing personal.”

“Can you stand?” I asked Mirabelle.

“I can while you deal with this idiot.”

I gently placed her down, turned towards the Thalmor… and used my Thu’um, blowing him backwards against the wall. He didn’t die straight away, though I used enough force to ensure he’d broken a few bones. Using a foot to turn him onto his back, I could only laugh at his predicament. “Did Ancano not tell you who I am?” The eyes simply glared back at me. I gave him a friendly wave. “I’m the Dragonborn, and I’ll make you a promise. Whatever hell you will soon be arriving in, Ancano will be following you shortly.”

“You’ve started something you can never finish, Dragonborn.”

I didn’t answer with words, simply unsheathing my sword and aiming for his neck, decapitating him with one powerful swing. I was tempted to take his head, but Delphine suggested we should make haste, Mirabelle leaning against Aela, and she didn’t look well. Picking her up again, we found ourselves back towards where we had entered hours ago. It was now the middle of the night and absolutely freezing. Gathering the horses together, I tried sitting Mirabelle down but she cried out in pain, and as worn out as she was, couldn’t summon magic to even heal herself.

I found a torch, lit it, and went searching for anything to help, eventually finding a small cart. Using rudimentary means, we managed to hitch it to my horse, and after laying Mirabelle down in the back, covered in furs, we began the journey back to Winterhold. “No stopping,” I ordered. My other girls agreed to sleep in shifts, tying horses in a line with my horse and cart at the rear. I stayed with Mirabelle, holding her as she slept.

The journey took all day, arriving in Winterhold the next evening. Mirabelle was still alive but in a bad way, and I barely noticed what was happening at the College until Aela and Lydia both shouted out to get my attention. Bringing our line of horses to a halt near the inn, I clambered out of the cart to look at what they could see.

“It’s an energy force field,” Faralda explained, “And Ancano is right in the middle of it.”

“Where’s Colette?”

“Why do you…” She looked at my face and immediately pointed her out. After explaining what was going on to Colette, she joined me back at the cart. She proved her skill within minutes, the wounds across Mirabelle’s chest and stomach healing immediately. One Colette stated she was done, Mirabelle sat up with my help before I helped her to her feet.

“Okay?” I asked. She responded by giving me one hell of a kiss. “I’ll take that as a yes.”

“I’ll take the staff. You get ready to kill Ancano.”

“It’s going to get bloody.”

“I don’t care what you do to him, Ragnar. Never liked him. Time for him to die.”

Approaching Tolfdir and the rest, we explained the plan. Mirabelle would use the staff to dispel the barrier, then we would go on the attack. Once we were all in position, Mirabelle did whatever was required to get the staff working, and the mages helped out by using all manner of elemental magic. Whatever they all did worked, as the barrier slowly but surely diminished, allowing us access to the bridge before it suddenly disappeared altogether.

That allowed us to race for the Hall of the Elements, where I brought everyone to a halt. “Tolfdir, you and the rest wait out here. If Ancano comes out alone, that means we’re all dead, and you kill him.”

“Right you are, Dragonborn.”

“Mirabelle, you take the staff. The rest of you, cover me. Ancano is mine alone.”

“Following your lead, Dragonborn,” Delphine replied.

Entering the hall itself, I had no idea what Ancano was actually doing, but whatever it was, it wasn’t good. The Eye looked… angry, for want of a better description, though Mirabelle suggested he was trying to activate it. What that would mean, no-one knew, but probably nothing good, considering it had been buried at Saarthal for millennia.

I went straight for Ancano, and he saw me coming. “You've come for me, have you? You think I don't know what you're up to? You think I can't destroy you? The power to unmake the world at my fingertips, and you think you can do anything about it?”

I took a swing at him and my sword went straight through his body. I swung again, and there was the same result. Ancano merely smirked, the same arrogant look in his eyes I noticed the first time we met. “I am beyond your pathetic attempts to hurt me. You cannot touch me.”

“Mirabelle. Use the staff on the eye. That must be the connection.”

She used the staff as requested. I’m not sure what sort of magic it was, but whatever it was, it worked as his connected to the Eye was quickly severed.

“Still you persist? Very well. Come then. See what I can do now.”

Before the bastard could even move, he found himself enveloped by electrical energy emanating from the hands of Mirabelle. “Kill the bastard, Ragnar.”

The currents flowing through him eventually forced him to his knees. Asking Mirabelle to stop, I had Aela grab his arms, and with one swing, I chopped off his hands. As he cried out in pain, Aela and Delphine lifted him to his feet, and I stuck my sword into his gut and disembowelled him. Falling to his knees as the pair let him go, he tried to keep his guts in with his stumps. As he looked down, I called his name. He looked up, and the last thing he would have seen was the sword aimed at his neck.

His head went rolling along the ground, eventually smacking into the wall. His body collapsed to the floor, and though I thought about hacking it to bits, he was dead and that’s what I wanted. Still, I did walk over to pick up his head, before dragging his corpse out of the hall, taking it outside and to the bridge. Dumping his body over the edge, I flung his head as far as I could before turning back to the hall.

Everyone had watched though no-one said a word, most probably happy that Ancano was now dead and no longer a problem. Whatever Ancano had done to the Eye, it still looked on the verge of doing something catastrophic. Mirabelle tried using the staff, but whenever she stopped, the Eye started doing whatever it was doing again.

“What do we do?” I wondered.

“I don’t know,” Tolfdir replied, everyone now gathered around the Eye. I don’t think it was on the verge of exploding but… Well, who knew what was going to happen.

That’s when the Psijic Order decided to show up, Quaranir leading two others into the hall. He approached me and offered his hand. I grasped it as he said, “We knew you would succeed. Your victory justifies our belief in you.”

“Thanks.” I gestured as I asked, “But what do we do about that thing?”

“The Eye has grown unstable. It cannot remain here, or else it may destroy your College and this world. It must be secured. Ancano's actions prove the world is not ready for such a thing. We shall

safeguard it for now. You now have the opportunity to maintain your College, and carry on with your lives. You have our gratitude, Arch-Mage.”

I heard a gasp or two as I simply asked. “Um, what?”

“You have proven yourself more than worthy to guide the College of Winterhold, Dragonborn.”

“Look, while I appreciate the sentiment, I think everyone in this room knows I am no mage.” I gestured to Mirabelle. “Miss Ervine here has helped every step of the way and also helped me end Ancano. If anyone deserves to be Arch-Mage, it is her.”

He glanced at Mirabelle for a few seconds before nodding. “Hmmm. I would assume you would not maintain a continuous presence at this College, Dragonborn.”

“Highly unlikely,” I stated.

“Very well. Miss Ervine, do you feel capable of rising to the challenge of leading this institution?”

“Absolutely. All I want is the chance to prove it,” she replied confidently.

“So be it, and it is done.”

Without another word, the three Psijic monks moved the Eye by magic out of the hall, all of us following the trio outside. With a little more magic, they and the Eye were enveloped by a bright light and, in an instant, they disappeared.

I think the one emotion we all felt was relief in the end. At least the world wasn’t going to end due to the Eye. As for the dragon issue, well, that still needed resolving.

Chapter 42: Love Triangle

Mirabelle made herself at home in her new quarters straight away. Aren’s stuff was politely packed up and put into storage and she moved her possessions in the day after the funeral. Tolfdir was elevated to her previous position with the assurance that she would very much retain her hands-on approach to dealing with the College. To say she threw herself into her new role would be an understatement. The change in leadership was easily noticeable after only a couple of weeks.

I was around to witness it as, receiving no word from Balgruuf, we remained at the College until we were informed that both sides agreed to the summit. Until then, I was enjoying life at the College. I didn’t attend any lessons, but Aela and Lydia did, wanting to learn a few new spells and get better at the ones they already knew. Delphine wasn’t particularly interested in magic but attended some lessons simply to keep herself busy, and if she learned a thing or two, even better.

To keep myself busy, I would occasionally go hunting, sometimes taking Aela with me, sometimes going alone. Winterhold was boring so I did make the occasional trip to Windhelm, catching up with Suvaris after all this time. Each time, she was delighted to see me, and I’m sure my girls thought I was sleeping with her. I merely insisted I could be friends with a woman and not involve sex. It didn’t happen often, of course. Even I can admit that.

Of course, when Mirabelle moved into her new quarters, I went with her. And, to my surprise, Aela was also offered the chance to join. Not wanting Lydia and Delphine left out, a second double bed was moved into her quarters so they could join in the fun. But to all our amusement, it appeared all my good deeds hadn’t gone unnoticed by others at the College, Mirabelle raising it with me over breakfast one morning.

“Who?” I wondered.

“Brelyna for one. You have a real fan there as she’s always asking after you. And Faralda definitely likes you too. She’s been rather… blunt, for want of a better word, about what she wants. Of course, she knows we are intimate but has easily figured out you are with others too.”

I looked around the table before asking, “Okay, so…”

Mirabelle simply smirked. “I know what you’re like, Ragnar. Just thought you’d like to know.”

Looking at Aela, she added, “Well, you’re surrounded by Nords and a Breton. Figured you might like some nice, hot Dunmer and Altmer pussy too. I know you definitely like Dunmer after hearing stories of Karliah.”

“So you’re organising my sex life now?”

“Merely giving you options, Ragnar,” Mirabelle stated, “Though I would prefer you warm our bed each night. But you must be getting a little bored around here.”

“It’s peaceful here. I like the isolation. And being surrounded by mages isn’t all that bad.”

I did wonder if they were teasing me about the two names they mentioned so put it to the test the same day as I sought out Faralda. Within ten minutes of talking to her, I realised they were definitely telling the truth as she wasn’t shy in coming forward. Within an hour, we were making out in the privacy of her room. She did ask if it was okay and I assured her it was fine.

I’ll admit she had a fine body on her. A fantastic set of breasts and a pair of legs that were longer than you’d think. And she loved to fuck and was quite vocal during, particularly when I was pounding her and she was very complimentary about the size of my cock. We enjoyed a couple of orgasms each and it was only after we’d done the deed that she admitted she hadn’t been intimate in a long time, but the thought of sex with the Dragonborn was too tempting to turn down.

As for Brelyna, getting her into bed took a little more work as she was incredibly sweet but also very shy, and I think surprised by the attention I gave her. I thought what I wanted was obvious, but while she may have been suggestive with Mirabelle, she made me wait at last a few days before I finally got her into bed.

Once I did, though, it was worth it. She was rather attractive but once naked, she was drop-dead gorgeous, the body on her a nice surprise considering she was always in robes otherwise. Down on her knees as she sucked my cock, she happily took a load on her face before I returned the favour, enjoying the taste of her pussy, a real reminder of Karliah.

We then enjoyed what can only be a sex marathon, enjoying plenty of orgasms each before we simply had to cry enough. She proved rather flexible, getting into some interesting positions as she took my cock hard and fast. She was aware it was probably only a one-time thing, just like Faralda, but was pleased she’d had the chance to sleep with the Dragonborn.

My girls knew I was up to all this and simply asked if I enjoyed myself each time. I still went to bed with Mirabelle and Aela each night. Sometimes we’d be intimate. Sometimes I’d join Lydia and Delphine. Sometimes it would be Lydia and Aela.

What Mirabelle learned is that she loved to watch me with Lydia or Delphine and what they particularly enjoyed with me. I learned she did that as she admitted privately that, one night soon, I would have the opportunity to take her anal virginity. I assured her she had nothing to prove, but she reassured me that she was making the decision based only on what she wanted, though she knew I would like it too.

I knew it was going to happen one night after dinner, when Delphine suggested the four of them should ‘go prepare’. As Delphine had said long ago, they would always be prepared for the Dragonborn, all four of them kissing me before they disappeared, instructing me not to head upstairs for fifteen minutes.

Twenty minutes later, I headed upstairs to find the four of them waiting for me, sitting on the side of the bed, each with a cup of wine in hand, all of them naked and, by the glistening of their skin, I would suggest maybe a little oil. They handed me a cup of wine first as Mirabelle placed hers down and immediately got down on her knees, starting to take off my trousers, as the others helped me undress the rest of me.

Once naked, Mirabelle eagerly swallowed my cock. “She wants you to cum on her face first,” Aela whispered into my ear, “Then she’ll watch you fuck Lydia and Delphine before you take her arse too.”

“And you?”

“She’s going to eat my pussy.” I looked at her wide eyed. “She wants to try it. If she likes it then it’s something new we can do together. If not, at least she can say she’s tried it.”

Mirabelle stopped sucking for a moment. “You liked that thought, didn’t you?”

“Loved it, Belle.”

“Good.” And she happily resumed blowing me.

Surrounded by naked women, I couldn’t just stand there, so eventually started to fondle Aela, which she particularly enjoyed, while next to me, Lydia was eating out Delphine’s arse, the older woman glancing my way and winking. “She’s got real talent with that tongue of hers,” she moaned.

With everything going on, I was never going to last as long as normal, eventually having to warn Mirabelle I was close. She sucked me until the last second when I pulled out, stroked perhaps half a dozen times, then left large streaks of cum all over her face. She squealed as I did so, immediately using her tongue to lick up anything around her mouth as Aela got down on her knees and licked up some of the rest before they started to kiss. My cock barely went down watching that.

Delphine replaced Mirabelle, as she always loved sucking my cock, while Lydia got on all fours on the bed. Moving closer to her, it was my turn to eat some arse, getting Lydia ready for my cock. Mirabelle, now with a clean face, and Aela sat back to simply watch events unfold.

Delphine eventually moved next to Lydia, and I focused on her arse for a little while before Lydia moved in front of Delphine, receiving attention from her, mostly fingers to get her ready for my cock. Delphine could barely concentrate at times, as I focused on her pussy as well, just to tease her.

Lydia was now desperate for my cock, so I sat behind her, giving her cheeks a good slap before teasing her with my cock, sliding it inside her pussy to start. She loved it though was begging me to fuck her arse after only a couple of minutes. Sliding three fingers into her arse, she was soon moaning loudly as I pumped both holes.

“Damn, she really likes it,” Mirabelle stated.

“This is just the start,” Aela added.

“Please, Ragnar,” Lydia moaned.

“Please what, Lydia?”

“Please fuck my arse. I really need it.”

I relented quite easily as, to be honest, we hadn’t done it in a while and I really wanted to fuck her arse!

Pulling out of her pussy, she bent her head right down onto the pillow as I slid my cock into her arse nice and slow, hearing her moan as I buried myself. She didn’t need to be asked if she was ready, Lydia was always ready to have her arse fucked. The tempo straight away was hard and fast. Delphine urged me on to really fuck her. Leaning forward a bit, I was soon slamming my cock into her.

“Gods yes,” Lydia moaned, “Just like that, Ragnar.”

“Wow,” I head Mirabelle exclaim quietly.

Having cum on her face, I knew I would last quite a while with Lydia, and I also knew she wouldn’t want to move from that position. I’ll admit, it was tiring work at times but she never even suggested stopping, my cock pumping into her time after time. Delphine did sit behind me, wrapping an arm around my chest. “Her arse feels nice and tight?” she asked quietly.

“Always, Delphine.”

“You love fucking it?”

“Definitely. Glad she enjoys it so much.”

“Every time, Ragnar,” Lydia moaned, “Gods, your cock always feels enormous when buried in my arse.”

“And it’s my turn next, Ragnar,” Delphine added, “Want me to ride your cock?”

“Whatever you want, Delphine.”

“Ride it so hard it hurts, that’s what I’m thinking. You know I like the pain, Ragnar. Shame I never met that Haelga of yours. I think we might have got along rather well.”

“Harder, Ragnar!” Lydia exclaimed.

I had to change position slightly, and I was soon giving it to her harder than ever. I noticed the stare of Mirabelle, simply smiling at her, as I now had Lydia grunting with each thrust. “Gods!” she moaned. Not a complaint of pain, she was absolutely loving it. “Don’t stop, Ragnar. Don’t stop until you cum!”

I couldn’t last forever, not fucking her like that. I let her know and all she did was whimper, telling me not to stop until I exploded inside her. The sound of my skin slapping hers as I fucked her was now the only noise in the room except my groans and her rather loud moans. Once I felt the point of no return, I’m fairly sure I managed to fuck her even harder for the last minute or so before I buried myself and felt my cock explode inside her. “Holy shit!” I cried as I started to feel a little light-headed, needing to rest on a forearm as I felt my cock pump what felt like an enormous load.

Sucking in some deep breaths, I patted her on the side so she could lie down on her front, taking me with her. She rested a hand on my arse so I didn’t pull out just yet. Kissing her cheek, she simply turned and smiled. “That’s going to hurt in the morning. Totally worth it though.”

I finally pulled out and Delphine just had to have a look, spreading her cheeks wide. “Damn, Ragnar, you’ve left her nice and red there. That is one well fucked arsehole.” She looked at my cock. “Though I think Lydia should now clean you off since she got what you wanted.”

Lydia eagerly turned around and my cock disappeared instantly, looking up at me with such devotion in her eyes, I could only caress her cheek before resting my hand on the back of her head. Delphine got behind Lydia again, causing her to moan, as it was clear she was also cleaning Lydia too. My girls sometimes…

She didn’t blow me for long as there was little chance I’d go soft, at least for now. “Is it always that hard?” Mirabelle wondered.

“I love it,” Lydia replied, “I like it sometimes when we make love that way, but I prefer it when he grabs my hair, slaps my arse, and just pounds my arse like no tomorrow. Of course, it makes riding a horse the next day uncomfortable, but at this moment, I’m feeling complete bliss. Never knew I could cum from anal until I met Ragnar. Now I cum really hard from it.”

Laying down, Aela and Mirabelle leaned over to kiss my cheek, Lydia getting up to go and lie on her own bed, clearly exhausted from the hard fucking I’d just given her. Delphine applied some more oil to my cock, getting it nice and slick, before she straddled my groin. “You won’t need to move, Ragnar. I am riding this cock until I cum. If you don’t cum, you can always wait until Mirabelle has her chance.”

“Want me to play with your pussy?”

“No, I can do that. You are simply providing the big cock for me to use.”

“Fair enough.”

I always enjoyed watching a woman lower herself down on my cock, and the added fact that it was her arse gave it an extra thrill. Once she was settled down on my lap again, she did lean forward to give me a soft kiss, before adjusting herself so her feet were flat on the bed. I smiled, as I knew that just adjusted the angle, making it feel even deeper, according to her and Lydia anyway.

She slowly but surely built up a tempo as she rode me, moaning softly to begin with, complimentary as always. Mirabelle moved closer to watch, amazed at the sight of my thick cock disappearing inside her. “Wow,” she whispered again.

“Wait until it’s your turn, Mirabelle,” Delphine moaned, “Gods, you’ll be addicted in no time.”

“Speak for yourself,” Aela joked, “I have a perfectly good pussy for him to use.”

Delphine was soon slamming herself down onto my cock, not going particularly fast, using one hand to balance herself, the other to play with her pussy. I folded my hands behind my head and simply watched. She asked me to adjusted my legs slightly, which I did, and she started to ride me faster at the same time.

“Oh gods,” she cried softly.

“She’s really enjoying it,” Mirabelle stated quietly.

“He’s going to make me cum and pass out,” Delphine added.

The three of us just watched Delphine ride me for as long as it took her to cum. I thoroughly enjoyed the feeling but, after the load I’d just left in Lydia, I didn’t particularly feel capable of cumming again so soon. As for Delphine, she did cum and it must have been rather enjoyable, continuing to fondle her pussy and she never stopped bouncing on my cock, only doing so when she wanted to change position slightly, back on her knees and leaning forward.

That’s when I reached down, grabbed her arse, and I started to fuck her. She moaned loudly before kissing me hard, asking me to fuck her as hard as I could. I was soon slamming my cock up into her, and to her credit, she kept on meeting my thrusts. I noticed her wince every so often, but just like Lydia, any pain was worth the pleasure.

“Oh Gods, I’m having…” She couldn’t even finish the sentence, her entire body shuddering though she managed to moan, “Don’t stop!” So I didn’t, continuing to fuck her hard until she collapsed onto my chest, a sweating, moaning mess. That’s when I finally stopped pounding her, though I left my cock inside her as always.

“Um, Ragnar…”

“Mirabelle, you don’t need to follow their example.”

“Okay. Just making sure.”

Delphine lifted herself up off my cock and flopped onto the bed at my side. Lydia got off their bed and wandered over, doing what Delphine had done to her. “That’s one well fucked arsehole, Delphine.” Lydia then put fingers inside her. “Gods, Delphine, I could probably fit a fist up there right now.”

“Not a good idea,” Delphine murmured into the pillow.

“Aren’t you going to clean up Ragnar?”

“You do it.” So Lydia quite happily did, before she did the same thing to Delphine. I think Delphine was out of it, as she barely moaned.

“Think you wore her out, Ragnar,” Aela stated with humour.

“I barely did anything, just provided the cock as requested.”

Delphine eventually got up and walked over to their bed, Lydia joining her. As for the three of us, Mirabelle rolled over to my other side so I had a girl either side of me now. “Um… So…”

Aela grabbed a cloth and washed my cock as I focused on Mirabelle, showering her entire body with attention. She was obviously turned on from watching everything, as when I spread her legs, her pussy was glistening and quite red, admitting she had been playing with herself. I hadn’t even noticed. When I lowered my mouth to her pussy, the gasp she made told me she wasn’t going to last long at all, and making her cum quite quickly always gave me a confidence boost. Aela lay to her side and watched, though Mirabelle kissed her hard as I made her orgasm.

“I should probably enjoy Aela first,” she suggested, “I want anal to be the last thing tonight.”

I didn’t want to distract Mirabelle too much so Aela lay back as she got between her legs. I stayed behind Mirabelle, not to fuck her, just to tease and fondle her. Aela was clearly turned on as well, and if Mirabelle hadn’t been there, I’d have buried my face without hesitation. But Mirabelle proved to be rather eager herself, and I was impressed when she made Aela moan quite quickly.

“Wow,” Aela murmured, “You’re pretty good already.”

“I know what I like so assumed… you know…” She glanced back. “You can show my pussy some more attention if you want, Ragnar.”

Like I’d say not to that request, so while Mirabelle pleasured Aela, I pleasured her. Mirabelle soon had Aela moaning constantly, and from the compliments, I think she was proving to have a rather hidden talent. As for Mirabelle, well… “I love the taste of your pussy, Aela,” suggested she enjoyed it very much too.

“Threesomes. Lots of threesomes. And more,” Aela moaned, “And I’m definitely returning the favour, Belle.”

I stopped as I wanted to watch, eventually lying in the perfect position to see Mirabelle using her tongue. She glanced my way every so often and smiled, noticing she was using one of her hands to fondle herself, enjoying the sight of Aela shudder, her body slightly convulsing, at the attention of Mirabelle and her mouth.

“By Ysmir,” Aela moaned, “Going to cum. Keep doing that, Belle. Just like that.”

“She’s good?” I wondered.

Aela glanced at me. “Oh, she’s definitely doing this again, Ragnar. She’s marvellous.”

Mirabelle didn’t say anything, now eager to get Aela to orgasm. Aela reached forward, gently grabbing her hair. “Like that, Belle. Gods, you’re so fucking good at this.” Then she moaned loudly, and quickly announced she was cumming. Mirabelle didn’t relent until Aela lay back and had to cry enough, Mirabelle lifting her face, Aela’s juices running down her chin. She looked at me but I gestured to Aela, Mirabelle moving up so the pair could kiss, no surprise Aela ran her tongue over Mirabelle’s chin.

“Okay, that’s one of the hottest things I’ve ever watched,” I admitted, “And I’ve seen women pleasure each other before.”

Aela was by no means done, though, and kept her word as she was soon on her back, craving my cock, as she had Mirabelle sit on her face. Mirabelle sat facing me so that while I fucked Aela, I could kiss her. Watching her face as Aela ate her out was beautiful to watch, and I didn’t fuck Aela too hard so she could focus most of her attention on Mirabelle. I couldn’t help smile as Mirabelle made a series of cute sounds. “Good?”

“Uh-huh,” Mirabelle murmured, before she opened her eyes and whispered, “Prefer your cock though.”

“Oh, that’s irreplaceable,” Aela managed to say before resuming.

I waited until Aela made Mirabelle cum before really giving Aela some attention. Mirabelle moved so I could lean forward and make out with Aela, tasting Mirabelle on her lips at the same time. Feeling her legs wrap around me and a shuffle of the body, I didn’t fuck her too hard, and she told me not to worry about her orgasm. Since Mirabelle had given her one, she just wanted to enjoy my cock and, of course, for me to cum inside her.

Mirabelle lay to the side and watched us make love. Sometimes I’d kiss Mirabelle. Sometimes Aela would kiss her. Hearing noise from the other bed, it was no surprise that Lydia and Delphine had gained a second wind and Lydia was now on all fours, Delphine sat behind her, fingers buried in both holes.

I kissed Aela as I climaxed inside her, feeling her arms wrap around me too as her legs held me in place. Lifting my head up slightly, I just looked at her face, a contented smile appearing. “I love you,” I whispered, turning to Mirabelle, “And I love you just as much.” Mirabelle simply hugged me as Aela echoed those words back.

Now feeling a little tired, I eventually pulled out and lay down, asking for just a little rest before Mirabelle received what she wanted. To help me out, Mirabelle quite happily rested above me in the opposite direction so that while she pleasured me, I could do the same to her. To be honest, after ten minutes of that, I felt reinvigorated, though I asked her to stop pleasuring me while I kept doing it to her. Aela got into position so we could both do it, moving her slightly so Aela could focus on her pussy while I got a taste of her arse again. Mirabelle loved every second of it.

Before we could make her cum, Mirabelle swung around and lowered her pussy down onto my cock, gasping once I was buried. Leaning forward, hands to either side, she begged me to just fuck her. She must have been completely turned on, as while we did fuck on occasion, even I would admit most of our time together was rather tender compared to anything I shared with Lydia and Delphine. But I would never refuse her a thing, and grabbing her by the arse, I gave her what she wanted. She leaned down, needing to kiss me every so often, though spent more time moaning than anything.

“I love your cock,” she whispered.

“Well, I love your pussy,” I replied with humour.

“I hope it loves my arse soon.”

“Oh, it will, trust me, Belle.”

It was a hard, fast fuck, and I think she wanted to make herself cum before we arrived at the main event. She eventually sat back and rode me hard, fondling her clit at the same time, and her orgasm must have been good, as she soon collapsed back onto my chest when she was done. I just held her, though she was sensitive as always, feeling her breath deeply as she recovered.

As my cock was still buried inside her, Aela moved around and I noticed the application of oil before she lowered her mouth. Mirabelle remained lying on me but gasped as Aela used her tongue to start before I noticed the use of her fingers. “You should ride him like this, Belle, that way you can control the tempo.”

“Uh-huh,” Mirabelle muttered.

“And if it’s too much, or you don’t enjoy it, stop. Trust me on this, Ragnar doesn’t want to hurt you, and you definitely have nothing to prove.”

I gave her a squeeze for emphasis. “She’s telling the truth,” I whispered, “Nothing to prove. You know I already love everything we share.”

Mirabelle looked up and smiled. “I want to do this for us. But if I don’t like it, I’ll stop. I promise.”

Still buried inside her, she lifted herself up and I felt Aela grab the base of my cock before I felt the tip placed somewhere it had never been before. Mirabelle looked unsure for a moment before she kissed me, resting her forehead against mine as I held her in my arms. She moved slightly as I felt the head of my cock slowly but surely pop inside her. “Slowly,” Aela stated, “Take it very slow.”

My head inside, she stayed still for a while before lowering herself down a little bit more. I noticed the grimace on her face appear before she kissed me again to reassure me. She was taking it carefully and slowly as suggested, moving back up before lowering herself down again, simply getting used to it. “Fucking hell,” she exclaimed quietly.

“Are you okay?” Aela asked.

“He feels absolutely enormous.”

“He would in a virgin hole like yours, Mirabelle. As I said, just take it nice and slow.”

She didn’t take my whole length, but once she was comfortable, she slowly started to ride me, still taking it nice and slow. But I watched her face, and while she thought she was comfortable, she was wincing and grimacing far too much for my liking. She noticed my concern and, when she started to get upset as she came to a stop, I simply cuddled her tight. “Sorry,” she whispered.

“Never apologise,” I whispered back as I lifted her up carefully, my cock falling out of her. I felt Aela immediately apply a cloth to clean me, and once she was satisfied, she helped me slide back inside Mirabelle’s perfect pussy.

“I so wanted to do it for us,” Mirabelle whispered, hearing the catch in her voice.

I lifted her up so she could see my face, using a thumb to dry her cheeks. “While I would have loved it, I do prefer what we’re doing now. Aela is the same, she much prefers what I would call the ‘normal’ way. And don’t let what Lydia and Delphine say go to your head. They love anal but they also love regular sex too.”

Mirabelle settled down on my chest again, Aela cuddling into our side, and I think that was the lovemaking over for the night. I’m glad she tried it but, honestly, I didn’t mind one bit. I had Lydia and Delphine for that and we had our fun together. What I shared with Aela and Mirabelle was something a little more.

Spooning against me that night, Mirabelle was in the middle, holding onto her tight, Aela facing towards the pair of us, also cuddling into Mirabelle. “Well, we’ve learned that Mirabelle loves the taste of pussy, at least,” she joked, earning laughter from the pair of us.

“I’d like to do that again sometimes, the three of us that is.”

“Any time you want, Belle,” I said.

“I love you,” she whispered.

“And I love you, Belle. And I love you, Aela. More than either of you could probably imagine. One thing, Belle.”

“Yes?”

“I’ll do whatever I can to make sure I visit as often as possible.”

“Or I could find a way to move to Whiterun while maintaining my position here.”

“You might need a bigger house, Ragnar,” Aela suggested.

“Not a bad idea. Something to think about.”

Mirabelle fell asleep first, Aela remaining awake for a little while. “Do what you can to convince her to join us,” she whispered, “I really like her too.”

That made me smile as Aela cuddled into Mirabelle, eventually drifting off to sleep. Well, sounded like things were getting serious between the three of us, and there were the other two to think about as well!

*****

The life of the Dragonborn was rather simple as I remained at the College. I had Mirabelle and Aela, two women I loved and adored, to keep my company, while Lydia and Delphine entertained each other but loved to join in sometimes. Out of the bedroom, things did get a little dull so Mirabelle tried to keep my occupied with odd jobs.

But my life was about to take a strange turn a month or so after the Ancano business had been dealt with. By this time, Mirabelle, Aela and I were practically in a three-way relationship, and most nights, we made love together in various different ways. Lydia and Delphine were occasionally involved, though I never went to sleep with them, so our time together was generally at different times, and to be honest, I must have fucked Lydia in the arse whenever we were together, Delphine still wanting it split fifty-fifty.

I was outside going through some practice drills when I noticed an orc walk through the main gates. We never received orc visitors, but considering he was alone, I could only hope and assume he wasn’t around to cause trouble. His eyes locked with mine and he came towards me, giving me enough time to take in his uniform. It was unlike any other I’d seen before.

“You Ragnar the Dragonborn?”

I looked him up and down again. “Might be. Who are you?”

“Name’s Durak. I’m here representing the Dawnguard.”

“Dawnguard? Never heard of them."

“We’re vampire hunters. We search out destroy those bloodsucking scum wherever we find them.”

“Well, I’ve been here for a while, but even before, I haven’t seen many vampires running around.”

“Well, I guess the Dragonborn does have other priorities. Haven’t you heard about the Hall of the Vigilants being destroyed?” I shook my head. News didn’t make its way up to the College fast, if at all. “They never took the vampire threat seriously and now they’ve paid the price for it.”

“Dawnguard? Vigilants? Vampires? I’m sorry, Durak, but I must be completely out of the loop here.” Gesturing, I added, “Why don’t we head inside, have a tankard, and you can tell me what this is all about.”

Escorting him to our quarters, Mirabelle was busy at work, greeting me with a kiss before asking who our visitor was. I introduced him then left her to her work. Aela was reclining on a chair, reading, while Lydia and Delphine were… somewhere else. They often did whatever they wanted. Taking a seat at a table after pouring some mead, Durak explained more.

“Okay, so the Vigilants, their full name being the Vigilants of Stendarr, one of the Eight, generally hunt down daedra worshippers and other people with links to any daedra. Explains why they all got killed when going up against vampires. They are a whole different kettle of fish. Anyway, the rise of this vampire menace is why our leader, Isran, has re-established the Dawnguard. We are an order of serious vampire hunters. We don’t fuck around.”

“And you want me because?”

“With the Dragonborn in our ranks, it will help us recruit more people in addition to we believe you will help us eliminate the problem for good.”

“Do you just want me or can my colleagues join too?”

“The more numbers, the better. Are they warriors?”

“Aye. Aela is a Companion. Lydia is my housecarl and a fearsome warrior herself. Delphine is… Well, let’s just say she has plenty of experience.”

“And your lady mage colleague?”

“I have to run the College. But I think it’s a worthwhile cause, Ragnar. Plus, I think we can all be honest and say you are getting bored here.”

“She’s right. Okay, I’m in. Where am I heading?”

“Head south towards Riften then east of the city. You’ll eventually find a cave entrance. Once through that, you’ll quickly see Fort Dawnguard. Have you got a map?” After handing it over, he was polite enough to indicate the location of the entrance. “I’ve got some more recruiting to do but I’m sure I’ll see you there soon.”

“Aye, I’ll be there in a few days."

We shook hands and he departed as Aela got to her feet. “Want me to come along?”

“Want to join?”

“Aye. It’s peaceful here but I’ll admit I’m craving some action.”

“I’ll tell Lydia and Delphine when they get back. They might be interested.”

They returned at nightfall. I didn’t ask where they’d disappeared to as it wasn’t my business, but considering Lydia couldn’t stop grinning, I figured they’d gone somewhere and been rather naughty. Even after all this time, the fact they’d hit it off so well amused me, though both admitted it wasn’t love. They just loved to fuck. So I explained to them our visitor and if they wanted to join me. Both leapt at the chance, easily admitting that they were growing a little bored with the lack of adventure. With the three on board, I suggested we leave the day after next.

The next evening, the other three went to sleep with the students and teachers, leaving me alone with Mirabelle. She had wanted Aela to stay as always, but Aela insisted she have me alone for our last night together in a while. That earned Aela one hell of a kiss that left her a little speechless. While they both loved me, there was clear affection between the pair too. Hard not to considering the lovemaking we now shared.

While we did make love a few times, most of the night was simply spent cuddling, loving nothing more than lying face to face, Mirabelle as close to my as physically possible, and we quietly talked about everything and nothing at once. She admitted that she was going to miss me likely crazy, and confessed she was already looking into options for when I would inevitably leave for good. I knew she was serious about wanting to be with me permanently but I still didn’t know how it would work.

Waking the next morning, we enjoyed breakfast together before I packed the few things I’d brought with me. She escorted me outside, where we met the others and our horses were now waiting, having moved them from outside the inn long ago. She hugged Lydia and Delphine goodbye and had no problem sharing a rather tender kiss with Aela. Then she kissed me and that’s when she started to cry. Aela whispered something and I heard the three ride their horses away.

“Sorry,” Mirabelle whispered, I think trying not to sob or laugh, so it was half and half.

“I’ll be back as soon as I can,” I assured her, caressing her face as always, earning that gorgeous smile I wanted to see.

“Too used to you being here with me all the time.”

“I’ll miss you like crazy too. Would you like Aela to stay? I can ask her.”

“While I would like that, I know she’s bored as much as you.”

“I honestly don’t think she’d mind.”

“Are you sure?”

“I don’t want you feeling lonely without all of us here.”

“Okay.”

So I quickly jogged back down the bridge and spoke to Aela. She was surprised at the request but, after telling her that I didn’t want Mirabelle to feel alone, she immediately agreed, preferring to feel bored rather than leaving Mirabelle feeling awful. Mirabelle couldn’t help smile when I returned with Aela in tow, the pair sharing a warm embrace before they hugged me together.

“Thank you, Aela,” I stated.

“No problem. Mirabelle and I can enjoy some alone time together, get to know each other without your presence.”

“I’d never even been with a woman until I met Ragnar. Now you’re in my life…” Mirabelle trailed off and kissed her again. “Well, suffice to say, I’m glad he introduced you to me.”

“Ditto,” Aela said before adding, “Now, Ragnar, don’t go doing anything stupid.”

“Yes, we expect you back here with all four limbs and that wonderful cock of yours ready to make love to us when you return.”

“I’ll do my best.”

“And while you have Lydia and Delphine with you, if you happen to find a girl or two that takes your fancy, you just do your thing,” Aela added. I couldn’t help chuckle as both hugged me tightly again. “Goodbye, Ragnar. We’ll miss you.”

“Too much,” Mirabelle whispered, and I heard the slight catch in her voice.

“Go, Ragnar. I’ll take care of her.”

Giving them both a last kiss, I mounted up, looked and smiled at them a final time, before I dug my heels into the horse and it moved forward. I did look back and wave, earning a wave and a blown kiss in return. Joining Lydia and Delphine without Aela, they didn’t say anything at first as we began the journey to the other side of Skyrim.

“So, just us three?” Lydia asked once we’d left Winterhold far behind.

“Aye.”

“Gods, we’re going to get our arses seriously fucked now, Delphine.”

She just laughed out loud. “Lydia, I think you have a one track mind sometimes.”

“Are you not thinking this is a great opportunity?”

“While I am thinking about it, I’m also worried about this vampire situation. They are not an enemy I’m used to fighting.”

“Guess we’ll find out more when we arrive.”

We rode as far as we could that day, eventually stopping halfway between Windhelm and Riften, or at last that’s what I thought. After making camp and dinner, Lydia made it obvious what she wanted that night and, let’s be honest, that’s exactly what she got. Delphine didn’t want to be left out. It was a night of no holds barred anal sex, so when mounting our horses the next morning, it was rather amusing that they needed something to cushion their saddles, though neither of the complained. In fact, they were nothing but complimentary and rode with smiles most of the day.

Making the entrance to the cave the next afternoon, we managed to get our horses through the chasm and entered a rather idyllic setting. It didn’t take long for the fort to come into view and I couldn’t help whistle at its size. “Bloody enormous!” Lydia exclaimed.

“I’ve been past here before,” Delphine admitted, “But this used to be nothing but ruins. Someone has put in some serious work to get this up and running again.”

We passed Durak on our way to the fort, bringing our three horses to a halt. He was firing a crossbow, something I had seen used long ago, and he said it was one of the best weapons for killing vampires. He told us we’d each get our own crossbow once we were part of the Dawnguard. I had a feeling there might be an initiation, despite the fact I was the Dragonborn.

Dismounting our horses at the steps leading up to the main gate of the fort, we tied them up and wandered inside… and into the middle of an argument.

Chapter 43: Prey

“Why are you here, Tolan? The Vigilants and I were finished with each other a long time ago.”

“You know why I’m here, Isran. The Vigilants are under attack everywhere. The vampires are much more dangerous than we believed.”

Isran scoffed in derision. “And now you want to come running to safety with the Dawnguard, is that it? I remember Keeper Carcette telling me repeatedly that Fort Dawnguard is a crumbling ruin, not worth the expense and manpower to repair. And now that you've stirred up the vampires against you, you come begging for my protection?”

Okay, I could perhaps understand his anger but he was being a bit of an arsehole. Tolan just sighed, either in defeat, exasperation, or both. “Isran, Carcette is dead. The Hall of the Vigilants… Everyone… They’re all dead. You were right, we were wrong. Isn’t that enough for you?”

Thankfully, Isran did back off. “Yes, well… I never wanted any of this to happen. I tried to warn all of you… And despite what you might think, I am sorry, Tolan. You did lose some good people.”

“Thanks,” Tolan stated, and he walked past us, giving me a curious glance but didn’t say anything. That’s when Isran finally noticed our appearance, walking towards the three of us.

“Who are you lot? Why are you here?”

“I’m Ragnar the Dragonborn. You sent Durak to look for me.”

“I did. I didn’t expect you to arrive so soon. And your friends?”

“I’m Lydia, his housecarl.”

“I’m Delphine, former member of the Blades.”

Isran raised his eyebrows at that confession. “Thought your order had been wiped out by the Thalmor.”

“We pretty much were. A few of us managed to survive. Now I help the Dragonborn in regards to the dragon crisis, but that’s reach an impasse, so we’re doing what we can to keep busy until a breakthrough is reached.”

“Fair enough,” he said before looking back at me, “You dealt with vampires before, Dragonborn?”

“One or two but most of my enemies, while undead, don’t try and bite me.”

“Hmmm. Well, considering who you are, and rest assured I’ve done my research, I can readily admit we need your help. Our numbers are few and the vampires have grown bold. But if you haven’t really dealt with them before, I don’t think I should even throw you into the middle of the fire just yet.”

“What do you have in mind?”

“Ever heard of Morthal?” Nodding that I had, he continued. “Something strange going on around there. People disappearing. Rumours of the undead walking at night. Quite frankly, it stinks of vampires. Care to travel there and root them out?”

“Sure.”

“Stay here tonight. Plenty of rooms available. What about your colleagues?”

“We’ll stay with him,” Lydia stated eagerly.

Isran just grunted, told us what time they served dinner, before suggesting we pick up a crossbow each, as they came in handy. Otherwise, we were free to explore for the time being. The fort was enormous from the outside and a maze of rooms on the inside. Grabbing our things from our horses, we eventually found a room with some privacy, but there was no furniture, so laid out our bed rolls for later that evening.

During dinner, we got to know some of the others, all joining the Dawnguard for different reasons. Isran explained a little of the history of the Dawnguard, from its original formation, to it being abandoned, and its subsequent revival. But he was right that their numbers were currently few, and he admitted most people were afraid of vampires, even the bravest of warriors. He didn’t blame most people as vampirism was a cruel disease.

Heading to bed that night, any idea of an early, quiet night was quickly abandoned when Lydia shut the door and immediately disrobed, getting on all fours on her bed roll. “I need you, Ragnar,” she moaned, looking back at me with the sort of eyes I knew well.

“Bring some oil?” Delphine laughed as it was a stupid question, though she stripped off too. I dragged her close and kissed her. “Still love your body too, Delphine.”

Both women were on their knees and swapped sucking my cock, wondering if they wanted me to cum now or later. Delphine suggested now, so they kept swapping until I was ready to blow and I covered Lydia’s face in cum, Delphine helping clean her up by licking it all up then sharing it with her.

I then sat back as Lydia was turned around and Delphine buried her face in her arse while finger fucking her pussy hard at the same time. Lydia enjoyed that, but when she started to finger fuck her arse, she was quickly begging for my cock. Delphine got underneath Lydia so she could eat her out while I got into position, gently sliding my cock inside her arse. That would be the only time I would be gentle.

Grabbing her hair, I pulled her head back before slapping her arse. “Who owns yours arse?”

“The Dragonborn does.”

“How much do you love his cock in your arse?”

“More than you could imagine.”

“Every day and night?”

“Oh, I’d love that, Dragonborn.”

“And you’ll suck my cock afterwards?”

“Every time without fail. I’ll suck it after you’ve fucked Delphine as well.”

Letting go of her hair, she rested forward and focused on Delphine’s bald pussy as I started to fuck her, holding her tightly by the hips and thrusting into her nice and hard. With Delphine pleasing her pussy, it was little wonder her first orgasm arrived quite quickly, but she never asked me to stop. All I did was change position every so often to change the angle, always increasing the speed and power of my thrusts. Soon she could barely focus on Delphine.

“Holy shit,” she grunted.

“You love this,” I stated.

“Gods yes. Make it hurt, Ragnar. I love it so much.”

I was now slamming my cock into her, Delphine still eating her out below. Lydia came a second time, her entire body quivering, though she begged me to keep fucking her. Her back was now covered in sweat, turning back to look at me, her dark hair matted to her forehead. “Gods, I love it when you’re in my arse like this.”

“You won’t be able to ride your horse tomorrow.”

“I hope so. That’s means I’ve been properly fucked tonight.”

She never wanted it any other way than on her knees now, not wanting to ride me and definitely didn’t want it on her back. No, on her knees, with me driving my cock into her. Delphine was now fingering her at the same time I fucked her, Lydia having yet another orgasm. Usually my girls gave up after three, but Lydia wanted more. I wasn’t quite ready to cum yet so was happy to oblige.

Leaning forward, resting on my forearms, anyone walking in would have been greeted by quite the sight of my arse lifting up constantly, slamming my cock into the arse of Lydia. Kissing her softly on the cheek, she turned so she could kiss me. “So good,” she grunted.

“Consider me impressed.”

“Going to be sore tomorrow. So worth it right now. Gods, your cock always feels enormous when inside me like this.”

“And I love your tight little arse, Lydia.”

She kissed me again before asking, “Going to cum in it like always?”

“I’m going to bury it and explode soon enough.”

“I can’t wait to clean your cock afterwards. Guessing Delphine will clean my arse.”

“Every time, Lydia,” Delphine stated.

Lydia managed to have another orgasm before I finally had mine, and I think that last one did wear her out. I nearly passed out after my orgasm, making sure I didn’t squash her afterwards, needing to pull out and fall to her side, glancing to see Delphine was already doing her thing. I managed to move myself so Lydia could swallow my cock, doing so with a big grin on her face.

“I think that’s the most well fucked arse I’ve ever seen,” Delphine stated.

“Don’t think we’ve ever fucked for that long before.”

“I think Lydia was laying down a challenge, Ragnar.”

“I’m going to need some recovery time here.”

Lydia rolled onto her back and started to giggle. “Yep, starting to feel a little pain here. Fucking hell, worth it though. I have tingles all over my body.”

“You ever just want it, you know, normally again?” Delphine wondered.

“Honestly, I wouldn’t mind if he just fucked my arse every time we’re together. You know how good it is, Delphine. I’ve always wanted a man who could fuck me properly like this. Now that I’ve got him, I want it all the time.”

“Fair play, just wondering.”

“You, Delphine?” I wondered.

“Can I be honest? I just want your mouth tonight. Haven’t done that much lately.”

Delphine got exactly what she wanted, and to be honest, I think my cock appreciated it. I loved going down on any woman I was with, and Delphine certainly appreciated the talent and little tricks I’d learned over the years. She did offer Lydia the chance to sit on her face, but Lydia was exhausted by now, quite happy to watch me go down on Delphine and eat her out through a number of orgasms. Once satisfied, she offered to return the favour, but while I was hard, I was also feeling rather tired too.

We couldn’t sleep together because of the bedrolls, but made sure they were as closed possible, both women cuddling as close as they could to me, Lydia eventually getting up and sliding into my bedroll for warmth, Delphine then spooning against her by opening her bedroll. Somehow, we made it work.

Waking up hard as always the next morning, Lydia surprisingly didn’t want anything so I fucked Delphine instead, leaving a load inside that wonderful mature pussy of hers before we dressed and headed downstairs for breakfast. If anyone heard us the previous night, no-one mentioned a thing, Isran wishing us good luck as we headed out the door.

Morthal was longer than a day’s ride away so we agreed to ride for Whiterun, stop for the night, and continue the next day. That gave me the opportunity to speak with Jarl Balgruuf, and also speak to the twins too, as I remembered I still needed to assist them. The ride to Whiterun was pleasant enough, and I’ll admit to being half tempted about stopping in Riften and perhaps visiting an old friend. But that would have been unfair on her, so while tempting, we rode west without stopping.

Walking through the gates for the first time in quite a while, I was greeted by numerous faces, all apparently delighted to see me. Adrianne and Ysolda both gave me a hug as I made my way to Breezehome, and after dumping my stuff there, walked through the market where Carlotta even stopped me to say hello, and this was a woman who knew my reputation and had no problem telling me she was off-limits.

Jarl Balgruuf was full of questions about what I’d been up to recently, and after filling him in with all the drama of the College, and now my new job with the Dawnguard, he let me know the state of play regarding the summit. “Tullius and the Empire have agreed to the terms I laid out and which you agreed to. Ulfric is playing a delaying game, apparently wanting more assurances regarding his borders during any possible cease-fire.”

“Is it just politics?”

“Aye. Ulfric will agree eventually. I was going to suggest going up there and knocking him about, but I don’t think that’s particularly advisable right now.”

“Well, I have other things to do so I’ll leave it in your capable hands.”

“Soon as there is agreement, I will send a message. Where are you right now?”

“All over the place, to be honest, but if you send a message to the College, it should reach me eventually.”

After visiting Dragonsreach, it was time to drop into Jorrvaskr and catch up with some Companions. I found the twins, both rather pleased to see me, reassuring them that I hadn’t forgotten their request, but that I was simply tied up doing many other jobs at the moment. They didn’t mind, as they’d lived with the blood long enough, a few more weeks or months wasn’t a big deal. They enjoyed running the outfit in my absence, and let me know about some contracts undertaken, and the fact a few new members had been recruited. News the Dragonborn was a Companion had spread, many eager to join the organisation to earn coin and glory.

Lydia, Delphine and I decided we’d head up to the Bannered Mare for dinner and drinks, where I caught up with plenty other townsfolk. Most hadn’t seen me for a while, so I let them know what I’d been up to. Many were concerned about the dragon issue, as there were always sightings, and news of attacks across Skyrim. I let them know some vague details, but assured them the dragon issue would be solved and they would be safe in their homes.

Returning to Breezehome after a good night out, with a lot of food and drink, and I even danced with Lydia and Delphine at one time, we fell into bed together and enjoyed a good, old-fashioned threesome, with Delphine on my cock, buried in her pussy, while Lydia enjoyed gyrating on my face. After they’d both cum a couple of times, I fucked Lydia, amazingly also in her pussy, as she ate out Delphine. It wasn’t an all-night event, simply enough for us all to cum a couple of times before going to sleep.

Heading out again the next morning, Adrianne did ask when I’d be back next. I was honest and couldn’t say when, but assured her that Whiterun would remain my home. It was only when we were back on the road west that Delphine asked, “So who out of all those women have you fucked?”

“None of them, actually. Wait, no, did you speak with Jenassa?”

“No, never met her. That Adrianne seems to like you.”

“She’s married!” Lydia exclaimed.              

“And she’s only a friend, considering we’re neighbours and all.”

“What about that Ysolda? She seems to fancy you!” Delphine retorted.

“Only a friend. I can be friends with women and not fuck them.”

“That waitress was giving you the eye all night too,” Delphine suggested.

“Saadia? Sure, she’s attractive but never given any indication of being anything but the woman who brings me food and drink. Look, the pair of you, Aela and Mirabelle are certainly enough for me. Sure, I might like the occasional dalliance with another woman if the mood takes me, but I don’t fuck every woman who shows a whiff of interest.”

“Only most of them,” Lydia stated with humour.

Shrugging, I could only admit that was true.

I’d been past Morthal a few times but couldn’t honestly remember if I’d ever stayed the night in town. I don’t think I had. Riding down the hill towards the centre, it was a rather dreary and drab looking place, and I felt a chill as the temperature seemed to drop a number of degrees within a couple of minutes. We came to a halt due to a large crowd outside what looked to be the Jarl’s residence, edging closer so we could gain an understanding of what was being said.

Something sinister was definitely going on. The townsfolk were definitely incensed, and the steward trying to placate them barely managed to do so. The group eventually split up and we dismounted and walked our horses to the inn, tying them up before heading inside. Delphine tapped my shoulder and gestured to the burned down house nearby. Maybe that was the cause of concern?

The inn was practically deserted, though it was only mid-afternoon, so figured it would be busier in the evening. After taking two of the rooms available, I figured asking the innkeeper what was going on might help, particularly the burned down house. “Hroggar's house? It burned down not too long ago. It's a real pity about his wife and kid. The screams woke half the town. Most folk won't go near it now for fear it's cursed.”

“Oh no,” Lydia whispered.

“Any idea how the fire started?” I wondered.

“Hroggar claims it was a hearth fire. Some folks say Hroggar started it himself.”

“And why are some folks saying that?”

“See, he's living with Alva now. That started the day after the fire. It isn’t right, moving in with a new love the day after your kin die like that.”

“Two plus two makes four, Ragnar,” Delphine muttered.

“I don’t suppose any proof was found linking Hroggar to it?” I asked.

“None,” the innkeeper replied, “But I know our Jarl would certainly appreciate someone looking into it.” She paused, looking the three of us over before asking, “Who are you anyway?”

“I’m here on behalf of the Dawnguard.”

“Oh… Never heard of them. What do you do?”

“Hunt vampires.”

It was amusing watching the blood drain from her face before she asked quietly, “Are there vampires around here?”“That’s what we are here to find out.”

“Definitely speak to the Jarl. She’ll want to know you’re here and if you can help us.”

I figured going to the Jarl straight away couldn’t hurt. Introducing ourselves as Dawnguard, she admitted to hearing rumours of our re-formation and had expected us to arrive eventually. She gave us permission to investigation and interrogate, though there were obvious limits as to what we could do regarding the questioning of the townsfolk. Otherwise, all she wanted was the situation resolved, one way or another.

Though the three of us didn’t know a whole lot about vampires, one thing the three of us agreed is that they usually worked at night. So we headed back to the inn for a nap, waking in time for dinner before we started to patrol the town, my werewolf vision certainly helping as there was very little light, a gloom seeming to overcome the entire town.

It was only when I hear a slight cry from Lydia that I started to worry, finding her in the ruined house, talking to the ghostly form of a young girl. “This is Helgi, Ragnar,” Lydia whispered, getting on one knee beside her. Delphine also appeared at our side. “She was telling me what happened.”

What Helgi told us was chilling, and even I would admit, rather upsetting, as she discussed her own death. She was quite happy talking to us until her tone changed, and it was weird seeing a ghost suddenly become afraid. But she seemed to trust us, asking us to find her so she could tell us the rest of the story.

The first person I went to find was her father, Hroggar. I told him that I’d seen his daughter’s spirit, and asked one or two rather harsh questions about what happened. The indifference he showed when replying earned him a fist in the jaw, Lydia and Delphine both stepping in as, quite frankly, I was ready to choke the man.

So I went to see the Jarl instead. Surprisingly, she believed that we’d seen a ghost, admitting she believed in many paranormal things, and that her spirit spoke to us as she wanted to help. Providing details of where she was buried, we found ourselves walking up to the graveyard overlooking the town, and it’s there that we found a child’s coffin dug up out of the ground, and a woman trying to pry open the lid.

All three of us unsheathed our words as the woman turned towards us. No idea who she was, but it was obvious she was a vampire. Seeing the three of us, she did the stupid thing of attacking us immediately instead of running, and she died after Delphine and I both ran a sword through her. Kneeling next to the coffin, we heard the voice of Helgi again, this time thanking us for finding her, and that she would now go to sleep. I helped placed the coffin back down into the ground, finding a shovel to cover the coffin. It was while doing this that we were found.

“What are you doing?” a voice accused.

I didn’t take kindly to the tone after everything, turning to see at least half a dozen torches and perhaps a dozen people. I pointed at the body. “She was a vampire. She dug up this coffin to do god knows what. We killed her and I’m currently burying the child again.”

One of the men cried out, “Laelette!”, falling to his knees by the body, cradling her head, “I thought she’d run off to join the Stormcloaks, not… Not this…”

“Something is going on here…”

“Thonnir. My name is Thonnir.”

“Something is going on here. A mother and child lay dead. And now your wife is caught up in all this. How the hell did she end up a vampire? Anything strange going on before all this? You mentioned the Stormcloaks…”

He remained quiet before resting the head of his wife on the ground, standing up to meet my eyes. “Hmmm. The only thing I can think of is that she started to hang around Alva a lot more, but I fail to see what she has to do with any of this.”

“Could Alva be the vampire responsible for all this?”

He scoffed. “Preposterous!”

I gave Lydia and Delphine a look in the darkness, neither saying a word in reply. “Look, I’ll finish burying Helgi and speak to the jarl. The rest of you should return to your homes for now.”

They broke up begrudgingly, perhaps with more questions, but I simply picked up the shovel and resumed throwing dirt into the hole. Once that was done, I needed a drink, so the three of us returned to the inn. “I don’t care what that man says. Alva has to be involved.”

“So what do you intend to do?”

“It’s late now, and I want some sleep. So we’ll go speak to her in the morning.”

It’s not surprising the three of us didn’t particularly want to be intimate that night. In fact, I went to bed alone, both my girls understanding why. I woke early the next morning, the three of us dressing, eating a small breakfast, then heading straight for her house. I was still in a mood after the night before. Finding her house, I knocked on the door, to be greeted by Hroggar again, unable to stop the smirk at the bruise on his face from where I’d hit him.

“Piss off,” he stated, trying to close the door in my face.

All I did was kick the door into his face and hit him again, this time a body shot that left him crumpled on the ground. A quick search revealed little, so I headed down the stairs. Finding a coffin wasn’t a particular surprise, but I was disappointed to find it empty except for a journal. After reading its contents, I headed straight back upstairs. “We need to speak with the jarl immediately,” I stated, before bending down and grabbing Hroggar by the hair, “And you should consider yourself extremely lucky that you’re not dead.” I did slam his head into the floor to knock him out, then I left him alone. If he was under some sort of spell, he wasn’t entirely responsible for his actions.

The jarl was rather displeased once she’d read the contents of the journal and asked for one more favour. “Find this Movarth and eliminate the threat to my people.”

“Gladly,” I replied.

Heading outside, it wasn’t a real surprise that news had spread and quite a few townsfolk were brandishing weapons, wanting to help us. “We want to help,” Thonnir stated.

“Can any of you actually fight?” There were one or two murmurs, but most were only farmers or tradesmen. “Look, I appreciate you want to help protect your town, but the three of us are professionals.” There were more grumbles, but I noticed weapons being lowered. “Go home and protect your loved ones. You will know when the threat has been eliminated.”

Thonnir was the last one to relent, and I didn’t particularly blame him, but he wasn’t carrying a weapon, he was carrying a fork used to shuffle hay about. I had a quiet word with him before patting him on the shoulder. He looked deflated and I couldn’t blame him, so promised that I would avenge his wife in his name.

It was rather chilling how close the vampire lair was to the town. No wonder they’d been able to prey upon them so easily. Having not fought inside a vampire den before, I suggested my Thu’um would get a real work out. My two girls agreed, Delphine opting to use her bow, while Lydia would remain by my side, by chose to use magic. That made me smirk. “I learned a lot at the College, Ragnar,” she admitted.

“Consider me impressed. Thought Nords hated magic.”

The vampires inside the lair didn’t stand a chance against a rather angry Dragonborn and his two allies. It was obvious they’d been preying upon travellers, merchants and anyone else they could get their hands on, as we found a pit of decomposing bodies, and it was obvious they were not townsfolk, as no-one had mentioned that many people disappearing.

By the time we got to Movarth, the three of us were not in a good mood, and quite frankly, he didn’t stand a chance. Delphine put a couple of arrows into him, Lydia ignited him with flames from her palm, and I used my Thu’um, blowing him back into the stone wall, hearing the crack of bones. The three of us stood over his body, where I simply took his head before Lydia burned his remains.

We found Alva in what can be described as their living quarters. The journal had explained what happened to her. She was almost an innocent victim in all of this, but she was still responsible for events that happened in Morthal. She was a vampire…

But I couldn’t kill her, because of that innocence. Movarth was the corrupting force. But Alva couldn’t return to Morthal after everything that happened. “Is there a cure?” I asked.

“None that I’ve ever heard of,” Delphine stated.

“You’re going to let her live?” Lydia asked.

“Movarth is responsible for all this. Once he corrupted her, she didn’t stand a chance. I almost pity her.”

Alva was scared to death and certainly hadn’t put up a fight. I’ll admit, I felt sorry for her. It was weird feeling that for a vampire. I put the sword to her throat. “I will let you live, Alva, but find yourself warned. If I hear of anyone else in Morthal disappearing, acting strangely, or of people going missing in and around Morthal, I will return here and end you in an instead. You understand?” She nodded. “I’m going to make sure the bodies in here are collected and buried correctly. During that time, I would suggest making yourself scarce.”

“Thank you,” she said meekly.

“Don’t suppose you know if there’s a cure?” She shook her head. “Might be worth trying to find one. If you walk back into town unaffected, they might just forgive you for the mess you caused.” She nodded again and I lowered my sword.

“Being far more magnanimous than I would be,” Delphine stated as we walked out of the lair.

“She might be a vampire, but there was still enough human in her that suggests the guilt will eat her up.”

Returning to the jarl, she was happy to hear everything was resolved, though it had come with a heavy cost. I admitted that Alva was left alive, as I believed the journal did exonerate her for the most part. The jarl was surprised I’d done that, thinking we’d just kill any and all vampires without hesitation. I just didn’t have the hate in my heart for them like other people. We were rewarded with a lot of gold, while she had figured out who I was, and suggested she might have more work for me in the future. I liked the sound of that, as I liked keeping busy, and with a final thanks, we headed back to the inn for the evening.

Feeling in a much better mood that evening, after dinner and a couple of drinks, I found myself dragged to the bedroom by both Lydia and Delphine. Clothes were removed rather quickly, both women falling to their knees to pleasure me. “I don’t want to cum like this,” I said, making them both smile.

“Oh, and where do you want to cum?” Lydia asked.

I leaned down close to her face. “Your arse is about to get seriously fucked, housecarl.”

She sat up to give me one hell of a kiss. “Just what I wanted to hear,” she breathed.

Both women had made it clear that they only wanted anal that evening, and I was prepared to give it to them. Lydia got into her usual position on her knees, head down but looking back, though I left it to Delphine to eat her arse for a while and get her ready. Once I was lubed up, I slid my cock inside her arse and wasted no time fucking her. It didn’t last too long, five or ten minutes at most, enough that she could get herself off as she played with her pussy at the same time, before I buried myself and left quite the load inside her. Leaning down close to her ear, I promised that was only the first one, which earned quite the smile.

Lydia cleaned my cock as always, no real surprise I remained hard. Lying back on the bed, I was oiled up again before Delphine straddled my lap, instructing me to thrust up as she bounced down. I was willing to do what she wanted, unable to stop the groan as my cock slid inside her arse. Planting her feet on the bed, I knew my cock was deeper inside her, and once I’d readjusted my legs, I gave it to her as hard as she wanted.

“Fuck… yes… Dragonborn,” she managed to grunt, unable to stay in that position for too long, needing to rest onto her knees, leaning forward to kiss me, as I continued to pound that arse.

“Fuck her, Ragnar. Make it hurt!” Lydia cried.

“Already does but fucking hell, it feels wonderful,” Delphine moaned before giving me another passionate kiss.

Both women had learned to their pleasure that they could orgasm from anal. Sometimes it did require a bit of work otherwise, but when I gave it to them like this, their orgasms were as good as ever. Delphine eventually had to bury her head next to mine as I held her tightly, thrusting into her so hard and fast, I thought I would cum again too. She moaned loudly, feeling her squeeze my cock, and she came hard instead. I kept pumping her until she quietly asked me to stop, suggesting it was getting to be a little too much for her. Lydia did her usual thing of taking out my cock, sucking that for a while, before making Delphine moan as she cleaned her arse too.

“I’m always impressed when you take it like that, Delphine,” Lydia stated, lying next to us as Delphine rested on my chest.

Delphine simply leaned across to kiss her before stating, “Like I am when you take four fingers in your arse as I eat you out.”

“By Talos, that’s always so good too.”

“Get into it, do you?” I asked.

Both looked at me and I think started to blush. “Well, you see, Ragnar… Um…” Lydia trailed off.

“Would it surprise you if I said we’ve fallen in love?” Delphine wondered. Lydia definitely blushed while I just smiled.

“Not at all. I figured there was something going on between you two.”

“We both love you too, but… Well, we know it’s different with us compared to Aela and now Mirabelle. And before you say anything, we understand. But it’s obvious we both enjoy similar things, and we’ve really hit it off in recent weeks. Though there is one thing…”

Delphine rolled off me, grabbing a nearby cloth to wipe me down and oil me up again, before Lydia sat on my cock again. She moaned as I slid inside her arse, though she didn’t move once my length was inside her. “Gods, I’ll always love this though,” she murmured.

“You were saying?”

“Oh, right… Um… Delphine is obviously too old to fall pregnant. I’m the right age so…”

“No problem.”

Lydia smiled. “You didn’t let me finish!”

“You want a baby with Delphine and want me to be the father.” I shrugged. “Sure, no problem. Happy to help. Though that means I’d actually have to have the delights of your pussy again.”

Lydia blushed again, and there was another revelation. “Ah, you’re probably wondering about the constant anal. You see, while I do love it, Ragnar, and I’m sure that’s not a surprise, Delphine and I did agree that, for the most part, my pussy is for her, and hers is for me. Neither of us can give up sex with you, so agreed that you can just fuck our arses all the time, and you would get the occasional treat of our pussies every now and then. Sound weird?”

“Not at all.” I looked at Delphine. “You’re quiet?”

“Lydia is speaking for us both, Ragnar. I’ll admit that I’m besotted by her, and the sex we share is… Well, it’s similar to with you, actually, but with a woman instead. And Lydia helps bring out my dominant side, while she loves to be submissive. Probably not like you and Haelga, nothing like that, but Lydia does like me to be in control.”

“Why don’t you show me?”

“Cum in me first, Ragnar, then we will.”

Lydia rode me slowly at first, which was unusual as she was always on her knees otherwise. But she seemed to really enjoy it, taking her time and I’ll admit that I loved watching her ride me. It got quite passionate at times with the kissing, running my hands all over her body, lips and tongue enjoying her breasts. Delphine joined in at times, particularly when Lydia sat up, leaving it easy to fondle her pussy and kiss her neck. It was sensory overload for Lydia and the fact she had attention from two people definitely made her orgasm even better. While my cock was still inside her, she kissed Delphine with more passion than me, and seeing how they looked at each other, she was definitely telling the truth.

The pair then put on a show for me, and while I fucked them, the two of them definitely made love. It was… beautiful to watch, Delphine in complete control, Lydia submitting to her desires, but it was Lydia who received most of the attention. When they eventually started to pleasure each other at the same time, I could only sit back and appreciate it. And, to be honest, I think they forgot I was even there for a while. I certainly wasn’t offended, enjoying what I was watching and seeing love blossom between the pair. I have no idea how many times both of them orgasmed, but once they wore each other out, they lay side by side, holding each other, and I almost thought I should go into the other room. I stood up and nearly did when they told each other how much they loved the other.

“Don’t be stupid, Ragnar,” Delphine stated, patting the bed beside her, “We tell each other each time we’re intimate.”

“Feels like I’m intruding, to be honest,” I admitted.

“Just like you, Ragnar, we can love more than one person,” Lydia added, “But we’re in love with each other. Just like you’re in love with Aela and Mirabelle.”

“Once the dragon crisis is over, Ragnar, we’re hoping you can help us.”

I kissed Delphine on the forehead. “You have my word and promise.” Leaning over her, I kissed Lydia on the forehead. “And you’ll make an excellent mother.”

“Thank you,” she whispered, watching her snuggle into Delphine. It was beautiful but still strange to see. Completely unexpected but, if they were happy, then I was happy for them in return.

All three of us were in a good mood the next morning over breakfast, the innkeeper going so far as to suggest why we would be. That just made us laugh, as we figured someone was bound to hear us. Mounting our horses a little later, we agreed that we’d push our horses to make it back to the fortress instead of stopping halfway. If we arrived after dark, so be it. We’d report back to Isran about our success the figure out what to do next. I wanted to return to the College but it would depend if there was any news.

The sun had disappeared at least a couple of hours ago by the time we made it back to the fort. The path wasn’t particularly well lit but there were plenty of torches and braziers lit up as we tied up our horses and headed inside. We found Isran in the practice room and he was pleased to hear of our success. I didn’t tell him we’d let a vampire go, believing he’d think we were nuts, stupid, or both.

Even better news was that, for the time being, he had nothing for us. Sure, he suggested we could go hunting for vampires, but he was waiting to hear back from Tolan regarding a possible vampire location, but until he heard word, he wasn’t prepared to move. Delphine and Lydia suggested they would remain at the fortress and I could head back north.

I left the next morning.

It was the usual two-day ride heading that far north, spending the night in Windhelm as usual. I was half-tempted to walk up to the Palace of the King, clip Ulfric around the ear, and tell him to get his arse up to High Hrothgar, but I had a feeling they’d take one look at me and simply tell me to piss off. So I went to the tavern instead.

Horses could now be taken over the bridge, as a small part of the courtyard had been turned into an area where they could be kept. Heading inside, I bounded up the stairs and entered the Arch-Mage quarters, and couldn’t help smile when I heard certain noises. Walking slowly, the bed eventually came into view. Clothing was strewn all over the floor. Aela was naked, laying back with one hand fondling a breast, the other between her legs, stroking Mirabelle’s hair. She was lying down on her front, her head buried between Aela’s legs, quite obviously eating her out as Aela was making quite a bit of noise.

Aela eventually sensed a presence as she looked at me, and although surprised, she simply smiled and beckoned me forward, gesturing for me to undress. She whispered something to Mirabelle, as she lifted her head and also smiled, before resuming what she was doing.

“She’s getting very good at this, Ragnar,” Aela moaned softly before she kissed me.

“I can see that. Are you enjoying it, Mirabelle?”

“She will be the only woman I’ll do this too, but I can’t lie… She tastes fantastic.”

“I’ve already made her cum twice,” Aela stated with a giggle.

“So you’ve been enjoying yourself?”

“Missed you a hell of a lot more. No offence, Aela.”

“None taken, Miri.” I gave her a glance. “You call her ‘Belle’. I’ll call her ‘Miri’. And I feel the same way too. Place isn’t the same without you here, Ragnar. Think you can concentrate while he slides inside you, Miri?”

“Why don’t I get on my back and you sit on my face?”

“Now that is an invitation!”

Mirabelle turned around, Aela waiting a moment so I could slide inside her, Mirabelle eager to kiss me at the same time. “You being gone made me realise how much I actually love you,” she whispered.

“Okay, no face sitting,” Aela stated straight away, “You two need to make love, then once he’s recovered, it’s my turn. Then we’ll have a threesome.”

Unlike the sex with the two down at the fortress, this was tender and far more loving, Mirabelle simply wrapping arms and legs around me and enjoying the feeling of my cock slowly thrusting inside her, our lips barely parting except to breathe and share sweet nothings. And, I’ll happily admit, I much preferred sex with her like this.

Like usual, I ended up on my back so she could ride me to orgasm, running my hands up and down her body and giving her beautiful breasts plenty of attention, always earning a gasp when I sucked and nibbled at her very hard nipples. “Gods,” she moaned, leaning down as I held her to my body, “How long are you here for?”

“I’m not sure. I would like to say as long as you want.”

“Forever would be best.”

Placing a hands to either side of me, she soon had a face of concentration as she worked up a tempo, and once her lips started to part, her breathing changed, and her body started to shudder, I knew she was getting close. The surprise was when a tear or two started to fall down her cheek, so I gently wiped those away. “Been a few days,” she whispered, “And it’s always like this with you, Ragnar.”

“You’re going to make me cry now, Miri.”

“Don’t tell me you don’t feel…” She couldn’t finish the sentence as she cried out, feeling her pussy squeeze my cock as she started to cum. “Oh Gods!” she cried out, and to her credit, she kept on riding me until she simply couldn’t continue, gently lying herself down on my chest.

I kissed her cheek and whispered how much I loved her. The smile I received in return… Well, it certainly made my heart feel ten times bigger.

I was surprised Mirabelle moved so quickly, but she insisted Aela had to receive the same treatment as herself. Aela didn’t want me to move, simply sliding herself onto my cock, the kiss I shared with her just as passionate. “Already horny so it’s going to be hard and fast until I cum,” she said softly, “Helps that Miri had me going earlier. She had a very talented tongue.”

“Good as mine?”

“I think she learned from you!”

Since I hadn’t cum either, I knew I wasn’t going to last either. Aela didn’t lie though, not requiring me to do all that much, simply enjoying riding my cock, grinding away at the same time, leaving enough space so I could fondle her clit at the same time. That was more than enough to bring her to orgasm quite quickly, though she kept riding through it, eventually not moving but insisting that I now fuck and cum inside her.

I lasted two minutes before I enjoyed a thoroughly good orgasm myself.

Lying back a little later, they asked me about the Dawnguard and I told them a little about who they were, what they were about, and what I’d been up to. They didn’t ask me anything about what I’d done with Lydia or Delphine, they knew I was with them and didn’t need details. Though I did tell them about one or two things. “Would you be surprised if I told you they were in love?”

Mirabelle didn’t know them well enough but Aela was definitely surprised. “What about you?”

“They still love me but they are in love with each other. It’s different. Much like I’m in love with you two but…” Mirabelle just squeezed me tight as I kissed her forehead. “Is it really much of a surprise?” I asked softly.

“I knew but hearing you say it…”

I kissed her again before continuing. “Anyway, they’re happy to continue our thing but… Well, Lydia did request one thing. They want a child.”

That surprised them both though they were not by the fact they wanted me to be the father. “I take it you agreed?” Aela asked.

“Do you mind?"

“Not at all. I assume it will be once all this is over though?”

“Of course.”

“And us?” Mirabelle asked quietly. I looked at her as the hopeful look she returned melted my heart.

“Do you want one?”

“More than one. Aela and I have talked about it. Once she’s cured…”

“She told you?”

“She told me everything, Ragnar. So, once she’s cured, we both want children with you. One big family. I think you’re definitely going to need a bigger house.”

“Aela?” I asked.

“I will always be a Companion, but I want to be a mother like all the women who came before me. I want to feel a little son or daughter growing inside me.”

I held them both tightly in an arm each. “Okay, then that’s settled, as the thought doesn’t scare me as much as I thought. Once everything is over, I’ll think of a way for all this to work. Mirabelle, what about your work here?”

“I’ll share responsibilities with Tolfdir. I’ve already discussed it with him.”

“One thing, Ragnar. You can’t marry both of us, so Miri and I agreed that we won’t get married. We will simply live together as man and wives without requiring any blessings. And if you meet anyone else…”

“Two is enough.”

Aela giggled. “Sure it is, Ragnar. And Miri agrees.”

“You do?” I asked, unable to hide the surprise in my voice.

“I’d rather you didn’t have too many, otherwise we might not see you often, but we understand what you are like. Maybe… one or two more at most. Only if you really like or even love them.”

“Well, you two are enough, with the occasional dalliance with Lydia or Delphine. But… I guess we’ll see what happens.”

Silence eventually descended, Aela the first to fall asleep. I felt Mirabelle was still awake, looking her way, her eyes saying everything as I gave her a gentle kiss. “One last thing, Ragnar,” she whispered.

“What?”

“I want to try again. I gave up too easily last time.”

I smiled. “Okay. Whenever you want, but as I said…”

She smiled too. “I know. Even if it’s only the once, I want to try and actually do it. I want to feel you cum in me there.” She grabbed my hand and laid it on her stomach. “Then once the crisis is over, you can cum in me and put something in me there.”

I know my smile broadened as I kiss her deeply, resting my head on her forehead. “I can’t wait.”

Her smile was infectious as she whispered, “Me too.”

Despite all the issues I was facing, what with vampires, dragons and gods know only what else, I couldn’t help but believe there were good things in my future. After having loved and lost more than once, perhaps the gods were finally going to allow me some happiness for once in my life. If they robbed me of a third chance, I knew I would curse them for the rest of my life.

Chapter 44: The Friendly Vampire

My time with Aela and Mirabelle lasted only a matter of days before the College received a visitor and not one I was expecting. I was in the courtyard, going through some practice drills to keep me sharp, Aela and Mirabelle sitting together, watching me work, when a stranger walked through the gates. Mirabelle rose to her feet to greet them and both soon approached me.

“Ragnar the Dragonborn?” the man asked.

“Aye. Who are you?”

“Vigilant Tolan. You would have seen me at the Dawnguard fortress when you arrived a while back.”

I shook his hand. “I remember. Isran gave you a rough ride.”

“You get used to his demeanour but his heart is usually in the right place.”

Gesturing for us to get warm, we headed to Mirabelle’s quarters, Aela also following us inside. Once sat at a table with mug of ale in hand, Tolan explained what he was there for. It wasn’t a particular surprise. “But why come all this way?” I wondered, “Lydia and Delphine…”

“Are currently engaged with another mission. And Isran wanted the Dragonborn to handle this. Something has the vampires searching the length and breadth of Skyrim, and the fact they are so focused on this place has him concerned. He wants us to head there immediately and find out what has their interest.”

“Okay, not a problem. Where are we headed?” Finding a map, he indicated where it was. It would be quite the journey without any real direct route. “I’ll need time to prepare.”

“That won’t be a problem. I can meet you there. When can you leave?”

“I’ll leave at dawn tomorrow. Do you wish to stay here?”

“Thank you but no. I will visit the old hall and pay my respects to the dead before heading to the cave. There should be a spot or two around to make camp.”

He departed almost immediately and I started to put some things together as I knew the region. It was nothing but mountains, deep snow and bitterly cold winds. Add to that the fact wherever we were heading would likely be infested with vampires, I went so far as to make sure all my weapons and armour were still enchanted. Mirabelle giggled at my concern and assured me everything was fine.

I slept early that night in preparation for departure at dawn, sharing a bed with my two loves but all we did was snuggle, chat and eventually go to sleep. I woke before first light, trying not to wake either of them, though both did, and I gave both of them a kiss and told both how much I loved them before I wandered outside.

It was a bitterly cold morning. Most were this far north in Skyrim, ensuring my furs were wrapped tightly to my body over my armour. It was at times like this that you were thankful horses in Skyrim were such hardy beasts. While man would suffer in the cold, a horse could keep riding all day if you didn’t push it too hard.

For once I headed south then west in the direction of Dawnstar, though eventually turned south again. The route did take me close to the Hall of the Vigilant, so rode past it to inspect the damage. There was little left of it, and bodies still lay frozen in the snow, Vigilants and vampires alike. Finding the path that led up the mountainside, I checked the map and knew I was in the right place when I found signs of a camp, but no Tolan.

“Where is he?” I muttered to myself, “Hope he hasn’t decided to head in alone.”

After dismounting and securing my horse to one of the only trees around, I unsheathed my sword and headed inside. My fears were soon realised as I found Tolan dead after I’d killed a couple of vampires on patrol. Checking his body, I found nothing on him except a Necklace of Stendarr, a couple of potion bottles, and his sword at his side. He’d gone down swinging, as there were at least three other vampire bodies around. I rested a hand on his chest and said a short prayer to the gods.

Heading further in, it became apparent that this was no cave but possibly an ancient crypt. The only difference is that there were no draugr about so I had no idea to who it would be for. I found more vampires within, and as I passed through a graveyard, a few skeletons decided to wake up as well. Killing them was easy, the vampires not so much, always careful not to take wounds lest I be infected, though I wasn’t sure if the beast-blood still flowing through my veins would prevent that.

I’d been through enough crypts and ruins to know what to expect, and not to stumble into any traps, my eyes always alert to danger. I ran into a few more skeletons and far stronger vampires, the sort that wouldn’t go down without me nearly requiring hacking them to death. No idea how many of the bastards I’d killed already but it was obvious to me that they’d come in force, so whatever they were searching for must have been of vital importance. I had listened into conversations but had learned little so far.

Entering a new chamber, this one was quite simply enormous, the architecture completely different to anything I’d seen before. A few more vampires were about, so I took care of them first, finding the body of another Vigilant. Checking him as well, it was obvious he’d been tortured before his death, closing his eyes with two fingers and whispering a short prayer again.

Heading into the main feature of the grand chamber, it wasn’t too difficult to figure out the mechanism to unlock whatever was hidden, with a giant stone monolith eventually appearing out of the floor beneath my feet. Opening the lid was quite easy, and I was awestruck when… She was absolutely gorgeous and appeared to be fast asleep. I also knew she was a vampire immediately but when she fell forward, I couldn’t help but catch her, hearing her surprise as she woke up.

“Oh…”

“Um…”

I let her go, feeling slightly embarrassed for both of us, as she gently pushed herself back. I looked at her face and I knew, then and there, I was in trouble. If she knew I was gazing at her, she ignored it as she simply asked, “Who sent you here?”

“Who were you expecting?” I wondered.

“I was expecting someone like me, at least.”

“No, I was sent here by another group, called the Dawnguard.”

“And they are?”

The question made me uncomfortable. “Um…”

“Vampire hunters?”

“Aye…”

“So what will you do with me then?”

“I won’t kill you. Though I do wonder why I found you in there? I was expecting… Well, to be honest, I wasn’t sure what to expect.”

“It’s… complicated. And I’m not entirely sure I can trust you yet. But if you want to know the whole story, help me get back to my family’s home.”

I can’t believe I was about to agree to helping a vampire get home, but I probably wasn’t thinking straight. She might have known that and immediately taken advantage of it, but remembering what Mirabelle had told me a few days before, I guess I’d just found a third. I didn’t even know her name, but she was beautiful, obviously friendly, considering what she was, and her voice was silk.

“My family used to live on an island to the west of Solitude. I guess they probably still do.”

“Bit of a long ride but it’s doable.”

She offered her hand. “My name is Serana.”

I grasped her hand. She had very soft, almost delicate hands, but you could feel the lack of warmth. “I’m Ragnar. Nice to meet you.”

That made her smile and I damn near collapsed. “Nice to meet me?”

I know I blushed and her smile increased. Yep, she was definitely going to take advantage of me. Good thing I was sent here. If it had been Isran, she’d already be dead. I suggested we should move, unsheathing my sword, immediately letting me know that she had magical talents. Wasn’t a particular surprise but I was interested to see how powerful she was.

I’d noticed the Scroll on her back but didn’t mention it. As we made our way forward, killing the occasional vampire or other monster, surprised she didn’t mind killing her own kind, we did chat about herself, as I was wondering how long she’d been hidden away.

“Good question. It’s hard to say. I feel like it was a long time. Who is Skyrim’s High King?”

“That’s actually a matter of debate. There’s been a war for a while now.”

“Oh, wonderful, a war of succession,” she stated sarcastically, “Good to know the world didn’t get boring while I was gone. Who are the contenders?”

“The Empire supports Elisif of Solitude, but there are many in Skyrim loyal to Jarl Ulfic Stormcloak of Windhelm.”

Whatever I said made her stop and ask, “Empire? What Empire?”

I could only look at her, now wondering how old she really was, as I said slowly, “The Empire from Cyrodiil.”

Her eyes widened in surprise. “Cyrodiil is the seat of an Empire? I must have been gone longer than I thought.” I added up in my head how long she could have been gone. I knew the First Empire was at least four thousand years ago so that made her… positively ancient. “Yes, I’ve been asleep longer than planned. I need to get home and figure out what’s happened.”

We moved on, continuing to chat but it was obvious Serana was keeping most secrets close to her chest. I didn’t mind as I certainly hadn’t done anything to gain her trust yet. But I think she liked someone to talk to, so I told her little bits about life in Skyrim though kept my own secrets for the time being. As we walked along, Serana was bright and chirpy for a little while before she started to fade.

“This feels like the right way. I was starting to worry. Does the air feel…” She came a stop, leaning against a wall. “Does it feel heavy down here? I’m a little woozy, but it might just be from waking up.”

I immediately stopped and was by her side in an instant. “Are you okay?”

My concern earned a smile. “I’ve been asleep a long time, Ragnar. Guess the body is just catching up.”

“Take your time. Few deep breaths.”

“Dealt with vampires before?”

I heard the humour in her tone. “Well, I’ve met one or two in my time. They haven’t always been as friendly as you.”

“Glad you think I’m friendly.”

“Well, you haven’t tried anything with me yet, so we’re good for now.”

We moved on, dealing with a few more enemies along the way, but as we entered a tunnel, I soon felt a light breeze, and the temperature certainly dropped from that felt deeper in the cave. Exiting the cave, I certainly took a deep breath of fresh air. I wasn’t sure if Serana was breathing or not, and wasn’t dumb enough to ask. My question was answered when she exclaimed, “Ah, it’s good to breathe again!” I must have given her a look as she actually giggled at my reaction. “Even in this weather, it’s better than the cave.”

Finding where my horse was waiting wasn’t too much of a problem, but I’d been in the cave longer than anticipated, as it was already growing dark, and the weather was closing in. Mounting my horse, she climbed on behind me, holding me around the waist as we started our descent down the mountain. “We’ll have to camp for the night,” I stated over the howling wind.

“That’s fine. I don’t really feel the cold.”

“Oh, right.”

I kept riding until it was simply too dark to see and we simply had to make camp. The wind was still howling, but I managed to put up the tent, while Serana used magic to light a fire. We made sure it was big that I wouldn’t freeze while she didn’t mind the warmth either. I’d brought some supplies with me, figuring I’d be on the road a few days at least. She didn’t want anything, so I snacked as we sat by the fire.

“So who are you, Ragnar?”

“Why do you ask?”

“Because I know you’re not just this Dawnguard vampire hunter person.”

I glanced at her beside me before replying. “You’re right, I’m not. Ever heard of the Dragonborn?”

“No. Who or what is that?”

“Apparently someone destined to save the world.”

“What else?”

“According to lore, they are someone born with the blood and soul of a dragon, bestowed upon them by Akatosh. My role is simple. I am the Last. My fate is to save the world from Alduin, the World-Eater. Not exactly going to plan right now for reasons outside of my control.”

“You sound… I’m not sure…”

“Well, I guess I can honest. I’m not a particularly good man, despite trying to live with honour these past few months. I have done many things which, if learned by the ordinary folk, would lead to either a scaffold or chopping block. I have done my best to live a good life recently but… Temptation is always around.”

“You’ve already accepted me despite what I am, Ragnar. I think that is the sign of a good person.”

“Helps that you’re cute,” I stated bluntly, glancing in her direction. She gave no reaction, or at least one that I recognised. “And I’m not a complete bastard,” I added, “Most people that I kill deserve it.”

“So you don’t just kill vampires because of what they are?”

“To be honest, no. I had to deal with an issue just recently. I let one live as she was an innocent victim in events that took place. I gave her a warning then let her go.”

“Another female vampire, Ragnar?”

I glanced in her direction again. This time she looked at me with a smirk. “I’m a sucker for a beautiful woman.” I’m not sure if she was capable of blushing, but the smile broadened and she had to look away. “Anyway,” I looked up and gestured, “This just gives me an opportunity for some star gazing. Have the two moons and millions of stars to feast upon. Nights like this can’t be beaten.”

She shuffled closer to me. “What do you think about when looking at them?”

“I’ll be honest, not a lot. Though one can’t help wonder at the size of the cosmos above us. Are we all there is or are there other worlds out there?”

“And here I thought you were just some dumb brute.” I glanced at her again and the smile remained. I couldn’t help return the smile. “You should get some sleep. I’ll stay up.”

“You sure?”

“Ragnar, I’ve been asleep for a long time. This is the first time I’ve seen the night sky in however long. Get some sleep. I’ll wake you at dawn.” As I lay down, she added, “And don’t worry, I won’t bite during the night.”

I had to resist retorting with one or two suggestive comments, just bidding her goodnight instead.

We continued to chat away the next day as we rode westwards, leaving the snow and bitterly cold winds behind. I kept to the main roads, and Serana covered herself though the sun wasn’t exactly shining. It took most of the day to finally make the small dock she told me about, finding the boat hidden within some rocks. I checked it for any leaks before we climbed aboard and I rowed us across the channel.

Tying the boat to the dock on the island, I couldn’t help but gaze up at the castle. It was enormous. “You actually live here?”

“Aye, this is it. Home sweet… castle.” I just whistled my appreciation, which made her smile again. “Come on, we should head inside.”

I knew she was a vampire and I guess I should have figured it out before she needed to tell me. Grabbing my forearm, she brought to a stop. “Listen, Ragnar, before we go in there…”

“Are you okay?”

The same smile appeared, the one I was already falling for. Even as pale as she was, there was no doubting her beauty. And, for some reason, I found her red eyes… captivating. “Thank you for asking, Ragnar,” she replied softly, “Before we go in, I just wanted to thank you for getting me this far. But after we get in there, I’m going to go my own way for a while.” My face definitely dropped in disappointment. “I know your friends would probably kill everything in there. I’m hoping you can show more control than that. Once we’re inside, just keep quiet for a bit. Let me take the lead.”

Crossing the drawbridge, the gate was opened as we approached, the watchman calling out that Serana had returned home. I noticed him look at me, and I had to consciously keep my hand away from my sword.

Heading inside, I was greeted by a scene of horror. Serana looked unaffected by all the blood, the room full of her kind. But unlike her, most of them were ghastly and fucking ugly. I definitely grabbed their attention, some hissing in my direction, though once they realised it was Serana who had returned, they obviously waited for the reaction of whoever was in charge.

Walking down the stairs to the dining room, I was thankful I couldn’t see any fresh corpses, and I was doubly thankful to be with Serana, though if required, I would have just used my Thu’um and cut my way out. A well-dressed vampire stepped forward with arms stretched out to his side.

“My long lost daughter returns at last! I trust you have my Elder Scroll?”

I had to bite my tongue as I was about to… “After all these years, that’s the first thing you ask me?” Serana retorted, before sighing, “Yes, I have the scroll.”

“Of course I’m delighted to see you, my daughter. Must I really say the words aloud?” I had to bite my tongue again. “Ah, if only your traitorous mother were here, I would let her watch this reunion before putting her head on a spike.” His eyes then fell on me, and I knew this wasn’t going to end well. The eyes gave him away. “Now tell me who is this stranger you have brought into our hall?”

“This is Ragnar, my saviour. He is the one who freed me.”

“For my daughter’s return, you have my gratitude, Ragnar. I am Harkon, lord of this court. By now, I’m sure my daughter will have told you what we are.”

“Hard to miss, but yes, I know what you are.”

He then went on a long ramble about how powerful his court was, blah, blah, blah. I feigned interest but all I wanted was out. That was until he suggested I be rewarded for returning Serana, and offered to turn me into a vampire. I had to swallow down the laugh at the ridiculousness of it. He mentioned he could sense I was already a werewolf, and transformed into a rather demonic looking vampire as apparent proof of his greatness.

“No thanks. Don’t particularly want to a remain a werewolf. You do you, but I’m not interested.”

Things happened very quickly. There was a cry of ‘Seize him!’, I unsheathed my sword, and swivelled as a number of vampires moved in my direction. Serana cried out that I should be let go. That gave Harkon pause. “You wish to save this mortal?”

“He saved me, father, and brought me home. He at least deserves to walk out of this castle and to return home.”

The vampires had stopped, obviously waiting for orders. He made everyone wait before stating, “Very well. You will live this day, Ragnar. But consider yourself warned. You return to this castle again, you are prey. Understand?”

“Have no desire to return anyway but I hear your warning.”

“Good. Then you had better leave now. Some of my underlings are getting hungry.”

Keeping my sword in hand, I walked backwards out of the hall. The door was at least opened for me so I could walk out. Only when it was closed did I turn around, the watchman echoing the warning about ever returning. I didn’t sheathe my sword until I was beside the boat, and was ready to just cast off and start rowing when I heard someone call my voice.

Turning around, I noticed Serana jogging in my direction. The first thing she did was hug me tightly. “I’m sorry.”

“For what?” I asked as I completed the embrace.

“For what happened. I didn’t really believe he would try and do that.”

“I’m still alive and breathing. Thanks for stepping in to stop him.”

She looked up at me, those same red eyes. “Thank you, Ragnar,” she said softly.

“Not a problem. Not every day I get to escort a rather…” I cleared my throat. “Well, at least I got you home safely.”

She rested her head on my chest and gave me a squeeze. “You never know; I might see you around again someday.”

“And a whole lot of me would like that.”

She let me go and took a step back. “Be safe, Ragnar.”

“I will. Good luck with your father.”

She sighed. “Thank you. I’m definitely going to need it. Hope to see you again.” And with those final words, she turned around and started to walk back to the castle.

“If the gods are kind, they’ll definitely bring you back into my life,” I muttered as I climbed aboard the boat and rowed back to shore.

Knowing I would have to return to Isran and let him know what happened, I rode as far as Whiterun, making it long after it had gone dark, stabling my horse and heading straight for the Bannered Mare. Helping myself to a meal and drink, I found myself joined by Ysolda, who proved to be rather flirty as usual, and when she told me about her divorce, I think she was flat out suggesting something, particularly as I was quite obviously alone. But, to be honest, though part of me thought about taking her back to Breezehome and just fucking her brains out, I actually found myself not particularly in the mood. So while I did escort her home and we did share quite the kiss, she entered her home alone and I headed home alone too.

Walking into the fortress the next day after another long day in the saddle, I was first greeted by a group of vampires actually going on the attack. Coming in from behind, I cut at least two down, noticing Lydia and Delphine were helping defend the fortress. We made short work of the attackers, counting around a dozen bodies once the fighting was over. Catching up with those two first, the three of us glad the other was safe, I found Isran inside, wiping blood of his sword, and reported to him what I found. He was surprised that I’d found someone instead of something, but when I told him I escorted her home, I think he almost threw a fit.

“Why not just kill her and him?” he growled.

“I might be the Dragonborn, but I was one man in a hall full of vampires, and I’m not sure how powerful that Harkon is. I could have fought him and I may have just ended up a vampire or dead.”

He grunted and eventually nodded. “Hmmm. If they are as powerful as you suggest, we’re going to need a lot more help. I’ll need to put out some feelers, see if I can contact some old friends.”

“Need me around for now?”

“If you want to head north for a while, by all means. Your two other friends have suggested they’ll just stay here for now, so if anything urgent arises, I can ask them to cover.”

“Thanks.”

Of course, I wasn’t just going to leave then and there. I hadn’t seen Lydia or Delphine for quite a while, and after dinner that night, both were eager for me to join them in their own private little section of the fort. At least there was now furniture, and after undressing, the three of us fell onto the double bed together. Lydia ended up between my legs, pleasuring my cock with her mouth, while Delphine sat on my face, eager for me to make her cum with my tongue.

“Definitely missed this,” Lydia stated before swallowing my length, “And I definitely need it in my arse again.”

“Me too,” Delphine moaned, continuing to gyrate on my face. I now had my hands wrapped around her thighs, using all the tricks I’d learned to make her cum hard. “Gods, Ragnar…”

It was a race to see who would cum first, and thankfully eating out Delphine was a good distraction, as Lydia had proven time and again to be an expert cocksucker. Delphine came first, and she enjoyed a rather good orgasm, sliding off my face quite quickly though immediately kissed me, enjoying the taste of herself on my lips and chin.

I then gestured to Lydia, who swung around so I could eat her out too as she blew me. I wasn’t going to last too much longer, and after I came in her mouth, I brought her off as well, enjoying the first taste of her pussy for quite a while.

“That was our treat, Ragnar,” Lydia stated as she settled down next to me, “It’s been a while since you’ve pleasured us with your mouth.”

“Treat for what?”

“Do we need a reason?”

“I guess not.”

“But your cock is only going in our arses the rest of the night.”

She wasn’t lying, as once I was rock hard and slicked up, Lydia got into her usual position, and after gently sliding my cock into her as always, I fucked her hard and fast, just the way she liked. Delphine sat behind me, resting her body against mine, whispering rather dirty thoughts into my ear. Having already cum, I lasted quite a long time, enough that Lydia actually wanted to switch, having me lie down and she rode me. I had a feeling she was growing to enjoy that position just as much. As she rode my cock, Delphine used her hand, and it was no surprise Lydia came hard again. She didn’t stop, though, insisting I cum in her arse before she stopped.

“Even then, won’t want to stop,” she moaned.

“By Talos, Lydia, you are addicted,” Delphine stated with a laugh.

“The only thing that would make it better is a mould of it then you could fuck me with it.”

It was stated so earnestly, Delphine could only smile before gently kissing her. “Is that possible?” I wondered.

“Guess we’ll have to think of something,” Delphine stated, kissing Lydia again, resuming her fondling of her pussy.

To be honest, if they did something like that and they felt like they no longer needed me, I’d be sad but it might even be best for them. Once I felt the urge to cum again, Lydia leaned forward and held on tight as I pounded her, enough to make her groan and even cry out a couple of times, though she practically ordered me not to stop until I’d cum. When I did, it felt wonderful, the sort of release that instantly makes my eyelids feel very heavy. Lydia settled down on my chest, Delphine lying beside me.

“Ragnar, what I mentioned… Would it bother you?” Delphine wondered.

“I assume you mean if you did something like that, it would end what we do.”

Lydia and Delphine shared a glance. “We both love you, Ragnar, but your future lies with others and, to be honest, we want to see if we can commit to each other only.”

“Well, we can make this a final fling, if you want… Or we can end it later?”

Lydia and Delphine shard another glance. “We don’t have to end it right now,” Lydia replied, Delphine nodded her agreement, “It’s just a thought for the future.”

Lydia eventually climbed off, both girls cleaning my cock before I was oiled up again and Delphine climbed on. In her usual position, my cock was soon deep inside her arse as always, Lydia simply cuddling into my side so I help fondle her pussy instead, which she definitely appreciated. “Yes, let’s not be hasty,” she moaned, mesmerised by how fast she was riding me.

While loving that position, she eventually climbed off and lay down, having Lydia sit on her face facing me, lifting and spreading her legs. I got into position and, after sliding back inside her, pounded that mature arse, and it was little wonder she came quite quickly. She couldn’t even focus on pleasuring Lydia, who took great delight in opening up Delphine so my cock went ever so deep.

“Fuck that arse, Ragnar,” she cried quietly.

“So deep,” Delphine moaned.

“Can’t wait to fuck her with your cock, Ragnar,” Lydia stated, the smirk on her face suggesting she might take control for once.

“Gods, the thought of you fucking me, Lydia…”

That thought definitely helped as Delphine enjoyed another orgasm, and to my surprise, she slowed down and stopped, claiming she’d already had enough. Considering I had been absolutely pounding her, I think she was probably a little sore. Realising I hadn’t cum, Lydia wasn’t going to turn down the opportunity of taking another load, so as Delphine remained in position though now lying flat, Lydia got on all fours and, as I fucked her, the pair of them made out.

“Should see her face, Ragnar,” Delphine stated, “She loving it.”

“Every time,” Lydia moaned. Grabbing her tightly by the hips, the sound of skin slapping skin echoed around the room. Lydia leaned down slightly, continuing to make out with Delphine. “Fuck yes,” Lydia cried, “Fuck my arse, Dragonborn!”

“Ruin her, Dragonborn!” Delphine added.

 I changed position slightly to really drive my cock into her, leaning forward myself to see Delphine smile up at me, Lydia resting her head next to hers. I sometimes wondered how both of them handled what I did at times, but they loved it, so did I, so I certainly wasn’t going to complain. “Fucking deep,” Lydia groaned.

“How deep?” Delphine wondered.

“Deeper than ever, or so it feels.” Lydia then kissed her hard, hearing her moan into her mouth, before needing to break the kiss. “Gods, my arsehole feels totally stretched out!”

I pulled out for a second and had a look. “Yep, my work here is nearly done,” I joked.

Sliding it back in, I resumed the same position, deep, powerful though slower strokes, really making Lydia groan and grunt, now begging for me to cum inside her. My orgasm wasn’t too far away, but I was going to enjoy it for as long as possible. Leaning down again, I kissed Delphine before putting my lips to Lydia’s ear. “Want me to cum?” I asked quietly.

“Part of me says yes, part of me says no.”

“While I would like you to say no, I will cum soon.”

“Fill my arse up, Dragonborn. You know how much I love it.”

She got what she wanted a couple of minutes later, and once I was done, I could only pull out and roll off to the side, feeling completely exhausted. To my amusement, Lydia spun around and lowered her arse. “Clean me,” she demanded gently.

Delphine came her a slap in the arse. “Someone is getting bossy.”

“Just wanted to feel your tongue in my arse, Delphine.”

Delphine grabbed her cheeks and spread them. “Well, I must say this is one well fucked arse, Ragnar. And you’ve left behind quite the load again.” She ran her tongue up before adding, “A tasty load as well. I think Lydia should clean your cock though.”

She did just that, and once we cleaned up, the two girls snuggled into me on either side like usual. Delphine was the first to drop off to sleep, leaving me awake with Lydia. “Are you mad?”

“About what?”

“About what we talked about. You know, not doing this anymore…”

“It’s your life together and your decision. I enjoy what we share, but if you wish for it to stop, then I respect that. The one thing you can still rely on is that I will get you pregnant so you can have a child together.”

She kissed me on the cheek. “Thank you for being so understanding.”

“Trust me, I simply return the understanding I have received from the many women I’ve been with.”

“Will you head north tomorrow?”

“Aye. Then we’ll wait and see what happens next. Frankly, I hope I get word soon from Jarl Balgruuf regarding the peace summit. I keep hearing rumours of dragon attacks. I know one recently attacked Markarth, and there is apparently one near Windhelm.”

“Well, make sure you tell Aela and Mirabelle hello from us.”

I left early the next morning, Isran suggesting he would contact me by letter once he’d located the people he needed. I didn’t ask why he didn’t just find and talk to them himself, but considering what he was like, I figured they wouldn’t want to talk to him. Why not send the Dragonborn instead? Delphine and Lydia both saw me off from the steps of the fortress, and I was getting used to riding alone once I turned my horse north.

I pushed my horse hard most of the morning, as I was hoping not to have to stay in Windhelm. By the time I made it to the outskirts of the city, there was still enough light for me to make the decision to keep going. I didn’t make Winterhold until well after dark, the temperature plummeting once the sun disappeared, wrapping myself up in thick furs to keep warm.

Entering our quarters, as that’s what Mirabelle insisted they were the day we moved in, I warmed myself up by the fire to start, attracting the attention of both women. Receiving a kiss from each of them, I was quickly undressed and escorted to bed, though all they wanted was to cuddle into me from either side. I certainly wasn’t going to complain, just loving their naked bodies pressed into mine. We lay in the darkness.

“So… um… I met someone.”

“Oh, who?” Aela asked, always curious.

“Well, you see, the thing is…” Mirabelle laughed lightly as I stumbled over my words. “You’re going to think this is weird.”

“How weird?” Mirabelle wondered.

“Okay, so the cave I was sent to with Tolan. Remember him? Well, inside this cave were a lot of vampires and others things, and once I killed all them, I had to figure out a puzzle. Once I completed that, something arose out of the ground and it contained a woman.”

“A woman?” Aela asked in surprise.

“Aye. Not just any sort of woman though. She was… She was absolutely beautiful.” I paused before adding, “She was also a vampire.”

There was silence before Mirabelle asked, “You’re attracted to a vampire? I thought the Dawnguard killed them?”

“Yes, to the first question. Told you it was weird, can’t deny it though. And while Isran might want to kill every ‘blood sucking fiend’, as he calls them, she was surprisingly friendly in addition to her beauty, and simply wanted to be escorted home, which is what I did. Found out upon arriving that he father is some sort of Master Vampire, and where she calls home is infested with her kind.”

“Where is she now?”

“She remained there. Honestly, doubt I’ll see her again, but I thought I’d be honest. Figured you might appreciate the story. Ragnar attracted to someone he can’t possibly be with.”

“You did a good thing, Ragnar,” Mirabelle said softly, kissing my cheek, “Further proving you are a good man at heart.”

She knew all about my history. Any woman who I was intimate with had to know the whole truth. I thought it would have made her run a mile, or at least led to me being exiled from her life, but like Aela, she accepted the past, realising I was now on a different path, the better path. Aela simply kissed my cheek and cuddled into my side. She knew me just as well.

“How long are you here for?” Mirabelle wondered.

“I’m not sure. Isran is busy putting together plans so I’m simply waiting for the summit to begin.”

“Well, I’m sure Aela and I can keep you occupied until then.”

They were not lying, and while Mirabelle certainly meant regarding matters in the bedroom, she spent a couple of days convincing me to apply myself into learning some more magic. I was sceptical at best, but the smile on her face when I finally agreed made it worthwhile. Aela was proving to be rather gifted with magic herself, finding enjoyment in learning a variety of new spells, though she said her trust would still be in her bow though learning new things wasn’t a bad idea.

It was at least a couple of weeks before I received my next letter, and it was one I’d been waiting what felt like months for. Jarl Ulfric had finally agreed terms and the summit would begin as soon as I was ready. Showing the letter to Aela and Mirabelle, they knew I’d have to leave again. I was tempted to take Aela with me, as I thought it would be worthwhile having some Companions, but to be honest, I didn’t want to take her away from Mirabelle, their affection for each other now rather obvious to everyone. I’m not sure they loved each other, but they sure liked each other a lot. They proved that by putting on the occasional show for me, and by now, Mirabelle was as much an expert of Aela’s body as Aela was of hers. Whatever attraction they had for each other, though, was nothing compared to theirs for me, and I’m not being arrogant saying that. Aela constantly wanted attention, which I was happy to provide, while I was nothing short of a major distraction for Mirabelle, though she never raised a single complaint.

Not knowing how long I would be gone again, the last night before departure was an all-night threesome, where we simply enjoyed each other’s bodies. Whether we all received equal attention or not didn’t matter. What I loved was they both got on their knees to pleasure me, Mirabelle taking a load on her face which Aela licked off then shared with her. Mirabelle and I then pleasured Aela, before Aela and I returned the favour to Mirabelle.

Then we made love, both women taking their time riding me to a couple of orgasms each. Mirabelle did mention again wanting to try anal, but I suggested we keep that for a special occasion. Aela admitted she wasn’t really that keen on it anymore, as she much preferred our regular lovemaking, instead using her flexibility to get into various positions she suggested made my cock feel bigger and deeper inside her.

Leaving was always tough, as although I might fool around away from them, I missed them every single day I was away. Mirabelle always insisted she wouldn’t cry when I left, and of course, she would end up shedding a tear or two, Aela and I comforting her before I departed.

“Stay safe, Ragnar,” Aela stated.

“Of course. Once the summit is over, I’ll send word of what I’m up to next. Things might happen quickly once the summit is over though. The dragon menace has to end and quickly.”

They both waved me off as I crossed the bridge and started on the road south to Whiterun. From there, it would be the usual ride to High Hrothgar. I could only hope that both sides would come to an agreement. If not, the Dragonborn might just have to play hard ball to get what he wanted.

Chapter 45: Schism

“Good to see you, Dragonborn,” Balgruuf stated as he approached me with hand outstretched. Grabbing it, I couldn’t help but grin.

“About time the two sides agreed.”

The older man groaned. “Ugh, this is why I keep my city neutral in this stupid war. At least the Empire came to the table quicker. It’s taken some serious arm twisting to get Ulfric to agree. I can see his concerns but, right now, there is a far bigger issue that needs resolving.”

“So we leave tomorrow morning, correct?”

“Aye. We’ll set everything up in preparation for the end of this week.”

“Who is coming from Dragonsreach?”

“Myself and Irileth, plus a small contingent of guards. They will provide security. The Imperial and Stormcloak representatives are limited to a small body of guards. No soldiers will be allowed within the monastery itself. Will you be bringing anyone?”

“No, just myself. If anyone wants to pick a fight with the Dragonborn, I’ll just Shout them off the mountain.” That made him laugh, at least. “But the whole idea is to negotiate a cease fire, so I’ll refrain from violence unless provoked. I don’t think either side will be that stupid.”

Invited for dinner and a drink, I would have been stupid to decline, and I didn’t return to Breezehome until much later that evening, having enjoyed a long conversation with the Jarl about everything I’d been up to. He was rather impressed with how busy I’d been, and in particular was interested to hear about the Dawnguard. “Haven’t heard anything about a vampire menace,” he admitted.

“Nor had I, but they tracked me down and asked for help. Once I have this dragon business sorted out, I can focus on that.”

“What about the war? Any chance you might become involved?”

“No. It’s not my fight. Or, at least, it isn’t yet. Neither side has attempted to recruit me.”

“If push came to shove, who would you rather support?”

“We’re stronger together.”

The Jarl just smiled, perhaps surprised by my answer. I think a lot of people thought, by me being a Nord, that I had returned to Skyrim to join the Stormcloaks. Couldn’t be further from the truth. The banning of Talos worship didn’t affect me all that much, though I’d started using ‘By the Nine’ the longer I’d lived in Skyrim. The only thing I was annoyed by was the presence of the Thalmor. Ancano was now dead, but I’m sure the Thalmor knew exactly who I was.

The next morning, I left Whiterun with the Jarl, Irileth and a few guards. We made good time, and avoided stopping in Ivarstead, the Jarl insisting it would be possible to ride our horses the entire way up the mountain. I was hesitant at first, as the path did narrow significantly in places, but he was proven correct as we made the summit after dark, but with everyone still mounted, no-one having crashed over the side of the mountain.

The Greybeards were aware of our arrival, and I made introductions before people were shown to their quarters. We enjoyed a late dinner before turning in for the evening, as preparations would be made the next day for the arrival of the two sides.

I knew Arngeir was still unhappy about hosting the summit. Part of me didn’t really blame him, and he was unhappier when both sides arrived on the same day. Arngeir, Balgruuf and I all insisted that weapons would remain outside, as would guards. I would guarantee the safety of Jarl Ulfric and General Tullius, as would their second in command. There were grumbles but they gave in to those demands.

I did receive one or two surprises of my own, though. General Tullius arrived with Jarl Elisif of Solitude. I’d never met her before and… Well, in a well repeated line, she was absolutely gorgeous, and I definitely made sure to introduce myself. I was widowed long before, as was she, and I did wonder if she had any suitors. Getting ahead of myself like usual, but she was friendly in return at least, asking one or two questions about the Dragonborn. That’s when I grew bold. “Perhaps I could tell you over dinner one evening,” I suggested.

Balgruuf overheard and nearly burst into laughter at my confidence. Elisif blushed. “Let’s see how these negotiations go first.”

“Hmmm. Maybe I now have a reason… No, can’t go playing favourites now.”

The second surprise was the fact the Thalmor were present. I kept quiet about that for now but it was amusing when Elenwen recognised me immediately, though she was smart enough to keep her mouth shut. It would be embarrassing for them to know the Dragonborn had infiltrated their embassy so easily.

The third surprise happened on the morning of the summit, when Delphine, Esbern and Lydia walked through the doors of the hall. I hadn’t left them out on purpose. To be honest, I just hadn’t thought of them. Delphine didn’t look particularly happy with me, and I knew I’d probably have to apologise or at least bring up an excuse. Still, I shook Esbern’s hand, asking after his health, as the old man was looking frail. Lydia gave me a kiss on the cheek.

Standing back next to Arngeir, Delphine’s eyes moved from me to him. I wouldn’t say it was a look of disdain but she certainly let her feelings show. “So, Arngeir, is it? You know why we're here. Are you going to let us in or not?”

“You were not invited here. You are not welcome here.”

“We have as much right to be at this council as all of you. More, actually, since we were the ones that put the Dragonborn on this path.”

“Were you? The hubris of the Blades truly knows no bounds.”

“If it were up to you, the Dragonborn would sit dreaming on this mountain doing nothing!”

“Now hang on a minute…” I started to say. She knew how much I respected the Greybeards and she was now intentionally provoking a fight, something we didn’t really need.

Esbern sighed. “Delphine, we're not here to rehearse old grudges. The matter at hand is urgent. Alduin must be stopped.” He looked at Arngeir, eyes flocking to me too. “You wouldn't have called this council if you didn't agree. We know a great deal about the situation and the threat that Alduin poses to us all. You need us here if you want this council to succeed.”

“Dragonborn?” Arngeir asked.

“I’ll be honest, I simply didn’t think of inviting the Blades, simply because this summit is about a peace agreement between the two warring sides. However, Esbern does have plenty of knowledge to share regarding Alduin and the dragons, so while Delphine might insist on joining, I actually think their presence would be worthwhile.” I looked at Delphine and she returned a grateful nod of the head.

Arngeir probably didn’t want to hear that but relented with a weary sigh. “Very well. You may enter.”

With everyone in the hall, it left Arngeir and I alone. I grabbed him softly on the forearm. “You have my thanks, Master.”

He shook his head. “I should not have agreed to this, Dragonborn. But we do trust you. Be honest, though. Do you truly believe this will bring lasting peace?”

“No.”

“At least you’re honest and a realist then. They are not yet tired of this war yet. More young men and women will be sent to their deaths and blood will continue to flow across this land. Do you know the ancient Nord word for war? ‘Season Unending’. So it has proved.” He patted my shoulder. “Go take your seat at the head of the table, Dragonborn. It is you that has convened the men and women of power. It is you who should lead this summit.”

Walking into the large room, the two sides glared at each other from opposite sides of the table. Delphine, Esbern and Lydia sat at the opposite side to where I would sit. Arngeir was at my side and he started to open the summit. “Now that everyone is here, please take your seats so we can begin. I hope that we have all come here in the spirit of...”

He couldn’t even finish his introduction before there was an argument, Ulfric immediately blowing up about the presence of the Thalmor, Elenwen retorting that she had every right to be at the summit, Tullius adding his support. Arngeir looked at me. “Perhaps this would be a good time to get the Dragonborn's input on this matter.”

Getting to my feet, I looked at both sides before looking at Elenwen. “While nothing would please me more than kicking the Thalmor Ambassador not only out of this monastery, but all the way back down the mountain, unfortunately doing that will gain us nothing. The Thalmor will learn of what transpires here, Jarl Ulfric. However, the Thalmor representative will sit there, shut up, and leave the negotiations to me.”

“How dare…”

“I said shut up. Don’t make me change my mind.”

She glared at me and all I did was smile in return. “Very well, Dragonborn. I guess I can agree to that,” Ulfric stated. Tullius simply nodded, so I sat back down. But it didn’t take long for the next argument to flare up, and I’ll admit, I was ready to just start banging heads together. Instead, Arngeir leaned forward and spoke clearly. “Are we ready to proceed?” All other voices fell silent and, finally, he was listened to. “Jarl Ulfric. General Tullius. This council is unprecedented. We are gathered here at the Dragonborn's request. I ask that you all respect the spirit of High Hrothgar, and do your best to begin the process of achieving a lasting peace in Skyrim. Who would like to open the negotiations?”

“Yes, let's get down to it. We want control of Markarth. That's our price for agreeing to a truce,” Ulfric demanded. Before anyone could say anything, I just started to laugh, shaking my head. Everyone turned to look at me. “Something funny, Dragonborn?”

I just looked at him. “No.”

“No?”

“No. You do not get Markarth as the price for this.” He made to stand up. “Sit down, Jarl Ulfric. We are not done here.” He glared at me, no doubt not used to being spoken to in such a manner. I stood up as he sat down, resting my palms on the table and leaning forward. “I will put this very simply. I don’t give a shit about your civil war. I have not involved myself. However, I will not sit here now and have a negotiating tit-for-tat, where you might trade one province for another and make continuously ludicrous demands. Instead, you will listen to my demands. Arngeir, the map?”

Unrolling it in front of me, using mugs to flatten it out, I stood back and gestured as I spoke.

“These are your current positions. In the middle is Whiterun, neutral. Once the treaty is signed, all forces loyal to the Empire or the Stormcloaks will vacate Whiterun Hold within three days.”

“You can’t…”

I looked at Tullius. “I just did. If I find a single soldier from either side still in Whiterun Hold, Jarl Balgruuf will order their arrest. Whiterun is a neutral city and its hold will be treated as such.

From the map, the western half of Skyrim is under Imperial control, the eastern half is under Stormcloak control. To ensure peace is maintained while the dragon crisis is solved, all Imperial camps within Stormcloak territory will be cleared, and vice-versa regarding Stormcloaks in Imperial territory. There will also be no patrolling within a kilometre of either border, nor towards Whiterun Hold.”

“And what do we get out of this?” Ulfric asked.

“What you get is safety from dragons burning down your cities and killing your people. Because, trust me on this one, if you don’t agree to these demands, I will calmly sit back and watch dragons run amok. I am not involving myself in your petty squabbles. The only one here I empathise with is Lady Elisif, as she has suffered tremendous loss due to this war.” I glanced her way, receiving a heartfelt smile and nod of the head. “You can either agree to these terms and I get the job done, or you don’t, continue your war and the dragons will never go away. In fact, Alduin will end the world as we know it.”

I sat back down and listened as the summit pretty much dissolved into chaos. Tullius and Ulfric traded a series of barbs, and I was glad Galmar wasn’t armed, as I think he was just about ready to start swinging. Delphine and Lydia just looked on, actually embarrassed by the behaviour. I think Arngeir was about to suggest I involve myself when Esbern rose to his feet.

“Stop! Are you so blind to our danger that you can't see past your petty disagreements? Here you sit arguing about... Nothing! While the fate of the land hangs in the balance!”

“Thank you, Esbern,” I stated, rising to my feet again, “I suggest you all take a seat and listen to our learned colleague here. Perhaps then you will understand why you should agree to my terms.”

He nodded at me before continuing. “Don't you understand the danger? Don't you understand what the return of the dragons means? Alduin has returned! The World-Eater! Even now, he devours the souls of your fallen comrades! He grows more powerful with every soldier slain in your pointless war! Can you not put aside your hatred for even one moment in the face of this mortal danger?”

“A pretty speech but…”

“Shut up, Ambassador,” I stated. She glared in my direction but was wise enough to heed my warning.

Esbern’s words finally hit home and it didn’t take long for both sides to agree to my terms. Arngeir wrote them all down, repeating my demands. I don’t think either side was particularly happy but that was not my concern. With the war halted, Whiterun could now assist me. That is what mattered.

Once both men signed on the dotted line, Arngeir and I also adding our signatures, and it wasn’t a real surprise that most people made their way straight for the exit. Arngeir and I were eventually left alone, though when Elisif walked back in, I rose to my feet and approached her. “About what you said earlier, Dragonborn…”

“My name is Ragnar.”

“I would be interested in hearing about some of your adventures, if you would care to join me in Solitude one evening.”

I couldn’t help the smile as I replied, “I am rather busy at the moment but…”

“Whenever you have time, Ragnar. Perhaps a day or two of warning at most will suffice.”

“I find myself having something to look forward to then.”

All she did was smile, wish me a good day, and walked out the door. I watched her walk away before I wandered out into the main hall. Ulfric had already left, Tullius obviously giving that group a little time before they followed them out. But my attention was taken by Delphine and Esbern, both approaching me and Arngeir.

“We know who Paarthurnux is, Ragnar.”

“Okay…”

“You do know what he is responsible for, correct?”

“I do but we are talking of events thousands of years ago.”

“Of which he is still guilty and justice has not been served.” I said nothing to that as I already knew where the conversation was heading. “The simple fact is that he helped Alduin during the time of the Dragon Rule. He committed atrocities still spoken of today. The losses we experienced then demand that he pay the price now.”

“You dare ask within these walls,” Arngeir stated, unable to hold back the anger in his tone.

“Paarthurnax is guilty of crimes so heinous, just reading about them made my stomach turn. He is as guilty as Alduin. Therefore, it is your solemn duty, Dragonborn, to kill him in your role as the dragon slayer.”

“Get out at once!” Arngeir nearly shouted.

“Gladly, though only once the Dragonborn confirms or denies my request.”

I couldn’t help sigh. “I can’t believe you just asked me to do that, Delphine,” I stated sadly, “And to do that in of all places…”

“He deserves to die, Dragonborn.”

“No, he doesn’t.”

“So you refuse my request? You would dishonour all those who sacrificed their lives to end the dragon cult. You will put the life of a dragon over them?”

“That is unfair, Delphine, and you know it is. Paarthurnax has spent eons making up for his mistakes.”

“Mistakes?” she exclaimed, “He was responsible for the murder and butcher of untold numbers!”

“While I will not claim Paarthurnax is innocent, you know as well as I do that my soul is stained. I’m sure Tullius recognised me during the meeting but wisely kept it to himself. Paarturnax has overcome the evil within through great effort. To now murder him for…”

“It is not murder if a dragon is killed.”

“I am one of the dragon blood and dragon soul, Delphine. That is what the Dragonborn is. Dragon in mortal form. Therefore, the dragons are, in many ways, my kin as much as a human is. No, I will not murder him, nor will I kill him because you demand it.”

“Then we are at an impasse, and I cannot continue to support…”

“What are you doing, Delphine?” Lydia asked.

“I am doing what is right, Lydia. I cannot stand by and watch him let a dragon live who deserves to die. If he chooses the dragon over us, then I will no longer stand by his side in this fight.”

“No, I can’t do that.”

“Can’t do what?” Delphine wondered.

“I cannot abandon Ragnar like that. He is still my Thane. It is my duty to remain at his side.”

Delphine knew what she meant, and though she tried to keep her face straight, those words crushed her. Her voice broke as she stated, “So be it. That is your choice.”

“You’re making me do it, Delphine,” Lydia said quietly, a catch in her voice too.

“Delphine, maybe…” Esbern started to say.

Delphine stood straighter and looked at me. “No, Esbern, the Dragonborn has made his choice. Very well. We will return to Sky Haven Temple and we will recruit those who wish to join the Blades. If you come to your senses, Dragonborn, we will welcome you back with open arms. If not, then as far as I’m concerned, Sky Haven Temple is not open to you nor your allies.”

“Delphine, please…” Lydia whispered, and the heartbreak in her voice nearly broke me.

“I am sorry, Lydia, but I will not stand for that dragon remaining alive. It is his role as the dragon slayer to end the dragon menace. Choosing to let one live, no matter which dragon, is one too many. The only place they belong is back in the ground.”

“I love you,” Lydia pleaded, and only then did Delphine nearly break herself.

“And I you,” Delphine stated, her eyes glistening for a moment before she blinked, her gaze defiant in my direction again, “But matters of the heart cannot get in the way of what is right.”

“You are nothing but a fool,” Arngeir stated, “Begone from this hall at once. Never return.”

“Gladly,” Delphine stated, and without another word, she turned and marched out of the monastery.

“I am sorry, Dragonborn,” Esbern stated quietly. I shook his offered hand, not blaming him for what just happened, before he walked outside.

Lydia burst into tears and all I could do was offer her the comfort of a hug, feeling her hold me tightly. “I’m sorry,” I whispered.

“I truly love her,” she sobbed, “She’s just thrown away everything.”

“I am sorry, child,” Arngeir stated softly.

I’m not sure how long I held Lydia for in that hall before she calmed down. “She might come to her senses,” I suggested later at the dinner table.

“I doubt it,” she replied softly. To be honest, she was probably right.

Heading to bed that night, it was no surprise she wanted my comfort. Not in the way you are thinking. She remained dressed as she joined me under the furs, simply wanting me to hold her as she started to quietly cry again. I didn’t really know what advice to offer her. I’d been through my own heartbreak more than once, but the only words I could offer would sound empty.

Leaving the next morning, Lydia insisted on riding with me, simply wanting my comfort for the entire ride. Balgruuf had left with the rest the previous day, so it was only us two making our way down the mountain. Once we were on the main road back to Whiterun, Lydia perked up slightly. “I don’t know what I should do now…”

“Breezehome is your home as much as mine.”

“It feels like forever since I was last there.”

“Feel the same way at times. Spend more time up north at the moment.”

“Guess Delphine isn’t part of the Dawnguard anymore,” she muttered. Giving her a gentle squeeze, she added, “Maybe I should… I don’t know…”

“You’re not alone, Lydia. Remember that.”

She leaned back and kissed my cheek. “Thank you, Ragnar.”

We made it back to Whiterun by nightfall. After stabling my horse, we headed to the Bannered Mare first for a meal and drink. She was obviously still depressed, but found amusement in Ysolda’s obvious attempts at flirting with me, going so far as to suggest I should take her up on the offer being made. Instead, Ysolda went home alone and I escorted Lydia back to Breezehome.

I wasn’t dumb enough to try anything with Lydia, and she quickly disappeared to her own room. I was lying back in bed reading a book by candlelight when she appeared in the doorway a little later. Again, she wanted nothing from me but company and perhaps some cuddles. I could do that, realising what she was going through. If she wanted anything more, I’d probably give it to her, but I knew it would probably make her feel worse. Using me as a rebound was a bad idea for all involved.

Being woken up by a pair of lips around my cock is always a pleasant way to wake up, lifting the furs to see Lydia giving my hard cock a thorough going over. Once satisfied, she simply climbed on, lowering herself down, and definitely enjoyed the feeling of her wet, warm pussy once again. All I did was bend my legs slightly and lie there, letting her do whatever she wanted.

I’m not sure if she was just horny or something else, but I would have to say I was pretty much just used for the next few minutes, Lydia leaning forward and simply riding my cock hard and fast. Within a few minutes, I could see she was both horny and upset, and when she had an orgasm, she collapsed onto my chest and shuddered, not only from her orgasm. “Hold me,” she whispered.

That I could do, her body pressed into mine as I wrapped my arms around her, holding her tightly, feeling her squeeze my cock as she would occasionally move. “It gets better,” I said softly.

“Just needed… something this morning… something…”

I shushed her gently. “You don’t have to explain. And I certainly don’t mind.”

“You’ll always have affection for me?”

“Of course. Why wouldn’t I?”

She lifted herself up slightly to look at me, a crooked smile forming but it was the first one I’d seen since High Hrothgar. “Can I be blunt, Ragnar?”

“Sure.”

“Can you fuck me now?”

I answered by grabbing and rolling her over, feeling her legs spread wide as I gave her what she wanted. Grabbing the back of my head, she pulled me down to kiss her. “Fuck and cum in me, Ragnar,” she pleaded.

“Still addicted to my cock?” I asked as I started to pump her.

“Guess you can now have my pussy and arse again.”

“I do love your pussy, Lydia.”

That earned a genuine smile. “Hope you use your mouth later. Maybe not after you’ve just cum in it though.” She kissed me again. “And you have to fuck my arse again too.”

“Oh, we will definitely keep doing that. Get you on all fours, your fantastic arse raised in the air, head buried in a pillow, and I’ll just pound you the way you like it.” That earned another rather nice kiss. “Nice and deep…”

“Like right now,” she moaned, “Gods, I have missed this. Your cock buried deep in my pussy, Ragnar.” She paused before adding, “Thought it was worth it…”

I gave her a gentle kiss. “Well, whenever I’m here, you can enjoy it when you want.”

She wanted cum and she received what she wanted a few minutes later. All she did was wrap both arms and legs around me, holding me in place, as I took the usual minute or two to recover. “Don’t move,” she whispered, feeling her squeeze my cock, “Keep it inside me. You usually stay quite hard anyway.” Pushed off her a little later, she simply got on her hands and knees instead. “Not my arse but I definitely want you to fuck me in this position.”

While I did fuck her as she requested, it wasn’t the hard, brutal fuck like I gave her when inside her arse. She loved it, of course, but when I pulled her back to rest against my chest, I almost stopped as she started to get upset. “She would hold me in this position and fondle me,” she whispered, “Feeling her lips on my neck, hot breath in my ear, whispering all sorts of naughty things. Gods, she had a way with her fingers. And her tongue! By Talos, I’ve never been with someone so talented.”

I slowed down my tempo so my thrusts were slow and gentle. “But, I’ll admit, your cock is still the best, Ragnar. I agreed with Delphine regarding what she said because it made her happy, and I wanted to be truly committed. But there was a large part of me that never wanted to give you up.”

“I’ll confess and admit I was rather sad when you told me you wanted our relationship to end.”

“Well, she made her choice and now I have your cock inside me once again.” She turned her head so I could kiss her, feeling her hand caress my cheek. “Her loss is my gain. My pussy is only yours from now on, Ragnar. I know there’s…”

“Don’t, Lydia. Let’s just enjoy each other when we can. No pressure to do anything. We’re two people who have an attraction and enjoy fucking each other. Let’s just keep it simple.”

“I can agree to that. One thing…” I raised an eyebrow. “I’ve taken a load in my pussy. I want one in my mouth now.”

So I pulled out and she turned around, still on all fours, as she pleasured me with her mouth. I simply caressed her hair, looking down as she looked up, telling her how beautiful she was, letting her know how good she was at sucking my cock, and assuring her I would always be keen to fuck her. I wouldn’t use the term ‘make love’. While we did love each other, it was nothing like that I shared with others. We both knew that, so I figured we probably wouldn’t say those words. We would state ‘affection’ and other similar terms, but know what each other meant.

She took a load in the mouth eventually, going so far as to open her mouth, show me the contents, then make a big scene as she swallowed it before sitting up on her knees to give me a hug. “Still love the taste of your cum, Ragnar,” she stated with a giggle.

“You have exceptional talent at sucking my cock, Lydia.”

We lay together for a little while before she got up, insisting that she would make breakfast. “You are my Thane after all, Ragnar.” She didn’t put on anything, watching that fantastic arse of hers walk away, though she did turn and blow me a kiss. “And I know you’re watching.”

“I love what I see, Lydia.”

I headed down myself a few minutes later, Lydia stirring a pot over the fire pit. I wrapped my arms around her, giving her a kiss on the cheek. “Smells good.”

“Nothing extravagant but I’ve worked up an appetite. Your cum isn’t enough to fill me up.” I ran my hand down her stomach towards her pussy, earning a giggle. “Not now, Ragnar. We need to eat.” She did turn to add, “And my pussy isn’t on the menu at this minute. Later it most certainly is.”

Over breakfast, I suggested that I would catch up with Balgruuf, establish a plan, then figure everything out. After dressing a little later, Lydia gave me a tight hug before I walked out the door. “Thank you, Ragnar.”

“For what?”

“For making me feel so much better about everything. It still sucks but… Well, with you, it doesn’t feel as bad.”

Checking my pack I’d taken to High Hrothgar, I found a journal that certainly wasn’t mine. Sitting down to read its contents, I quickly realised it was from Esbern, and I think he had anticipated what happened at High Hrothgar. He first apologised for what happened, though understood the reasons why Delphine made the request, before he added the main reason for the journal. It contained every bit of dragon lore he thought applicable to what I needed to do, and more importantly, he knew what I needed in regards to capturing a dragon. I would need to Shout the name of a dragon and they would be compelled to answer my challenge. Their pride would demand it.

Balgruuf was expecting me and I stood by a map of the city with Irileth as he explained his ideas. Guards would line the walls and report on any dragon sightings. Civilians would be kept indoors to prevent any innocent casualties. His guards would follow my lead and would only fire at the dragon should I fall. Otherwise, they knew that I must fight the dragon and capture it.

We toured the walls, checking fortifications, speaking to the men, suggesting plans for if the worst happened. Most of the city was stone and wood, and much of it would burn quite easily. I only hoped the summoned dragon would only have eyes for me. The trap was in Dragonsreach but it could find itself distracted by such a tempting target.

“I’m trusting you with my city, Dragonborn.”

“I know, lord.”

“I’m sure it will work. It’s just the thought of actually summoning a dragon.”

“Once we have it trapped, I won’t delay in getting the information we need.”

“What then?”

“I really don’t know. It will depend on what the dragon has to say.”

“Hmmm. Never thought I’d witness the Dragonborn talk with a dragon, but then again, I never thought I’d see the day dragons would return to Skyrim.”

I returned to Breezehome once the sun was starting to set, agreeing that dinner at the Bannered Mare would be a good idea. I’m sure her heart was still broken but Lydia was in a good mood, enjoying a hearty meal, a few tankards, and we even danced to a couple of songs. I think she was enjoying the attention from me, and definitely because it was only her. Even Ysolda stayed back, no doubt assuming correctly that my focus was on Lydia that evening.

Returning to Breezehome quite late, Lydia waited until I closed the door before leaping on me. Clothing was discarded as we made our way up the stairs, so by the time we were in my bedroom, we were naked, and she let me know exactly what she wanted.

It was foreplay, but while she may have enjoyed attention all over her body, she pushed my head down to her already very wet pussy. She moaned loudly when I ran my tongue along her slit, and then I simply buried my head and went to town. “Yes, Ragnar,” she cried quietly.

“I’m going to make you cum all night.”

“Please,” she whimpered, and I think she was rather turned on, as within only a few minutes, I had her on the verge of her first orgasm.

I knew her body quite well, so while I generally liked to use only my tongue, I did slide a couple of fingers into her. She loved that straight away, her moans getting louder, her body writing, and when I finally focused on her clit, that sent her overboard. Squeezing her thighs, I managed to prevent them squashing my head, her back arching sharply for a brief moment.

“Don’t stop,” she moaned, “Make me cum again.”

I definitely wasn’t going to stop, though I did take out my fingers and gently start to rub her arsehole. That made her giggle but the request to put them in her arse wasn’t a surprise. I had to be gentle but I soon had fingers in her arse as my tongue pleasured her pussy. She was now experiencing nothing short of ecstasy, and her second orgasm was even better than the first.

“Keep going!” she pleaded, and I heard the catch in her voice. I stopped and she immediately looked down. “It’s okay, Ragnar. Just releasing some more. I want you to keep going.”

Pumping my fingers a little harder, she actually sat up slightly to hold my head in position, almost trying to rub her pussy into my face. I could feel my chin was covered in her juices. I felt her move and she offered the bottle of oil. “For your fingers,” she suggested.

Coating all four in oil, I took my time sliding in the third one before adding the fourth. Once I had all four in, she went wild as I finger fucked her arse while eating her out. My jaw was getting sore, and my cock was achingly hard, but tonight was all about her. If she asked for my dick, she’d get it. Otherwise, I would just keep going, and I eventually stopped counting her orgasms. I’ll admit even my arm got a little sore, but somehow, Lydia just kept going. She was now covered in sweat, her breathing ragged, barely able to state a coherent sentence. I’m not sure how long we’d been going before she had yet another orgasm before she finally cried enough.

Sitting back on my knees, I could only look down at her. She was beautiful, and the blush was a slight surprise when she noticed me looking at her. “Holy shit!” she exclaimed quietly before she looked down, “What about you?”

“Take a few minutes, Lydia. I’m fine.”

“What would you like? Pussy, arse, or mouth?”

I smiled as I ran a finger along her slit, causing her to shudder but smile as well. “That’s what I want from now on, Lydia. I love fucking your arse but that’s where my cock wants to be inside. It’s warm. It’s wet. It’s incredibly inviting.”

Reaching out, I fell forward to kiss her, no surprise that she shuffled and my cock easily slid inside her. I lasted two minutes. I have no problem admitting that. She didn’t mind at all, understanding that I’d just pleasured her all night, so was bound to be incredibly turned on myself. While I tried to apologise, she insisted it was fine, though giggled when I rolled off and feigned snoring.

Cuddling into me later, running her hand up and down my chest, giving her gentle squeezes in return, she released a contented sigh. “I like it this way,” she whispered.

“How do you mean?”

“Guess I went a little crazy there for a while. Did you mind?”

“Not at all.”

“But like this… Ragnar, can I ask a serious question?”

“Of course.”

“Will you still have a baby with me?”

“Definitely. As I said, you’ll make a fantastic mother, Lydia.”

“Thank you,” she said softly.

“Think I might be having a few children, the way it’s going.”

“Aela and Mirabelle?”

“Aye. Will definitely need a bigger house.”

Turning onto her side, she spooned into me, wrapping my arms and holding her tightly against me, her hands running up and down my arms. She sighed again, and I was going to ask what was on her mind, but I guessed what she was thinking about, so I left it alone. She fell asleep before me, no doubt worn out, and I started to think about what would happen in a few hours’ time.

Next morning, we shared a hearty breakfast before dressing and heading to Dragonsreach. Like me, she was armed and armoured, no doubt expecting to be at my side once the dragon answered my Shout. I simply thanked her as we walked up the stairs, Lydia replying that she wouldn’t miss it for the world.

Jarl Balgruuf was waiting for me, and after shaking hands with both of us, escorted us upstairs and out onto the grand balcony. Irileth was waiting there alongside a small group of guards. I’d already been through how the trap would work, but Balgruuf explained it again for the guards and Lydia, the latter insisting she would stay by my side until the end. Once again, I could only thank her.

There was no point delaying, Irileth ordering the guards into position and Balgruuf shaking my hand again before retreating to safety. He wanted to stay but both I and Irileth flatly denied him the chance. Whiterun needed him alive.

Walking to the edge of the balcony, I used the Thu’um given to me by Esbern, and then simply waited for a reaction. It took a little time, hearing one or two questions from impatient guards behind me. But when I heard the roar in the distance, I knew my challenge was being answered. An enormous dragon appeared on the horizon, and it wasted next to no time coming into attack. Of course, I had an advantage by using Dragonrend, forcing it to the ground more than once, the guards unleashing a hail of arrows, Lydia now by my side as we stabbed and cut when the opportunity arose.

The purpose was to trap the dragon, so Lydia was the first to pull back into Dragonsreach, and I slowly pulled back, the dragon continuing to breath fire in my direction, enchantments and my armour protecting me from most of the heat. I knew the dragon would be over-confident, and simply didn’t see the trap waiting for him. As soon as I gave the signal, the trap fell and before he even knew what was happening, the dragon was left immobile.

“Zok frini grind ko grah drun viiki, Dovahkiin.”

“Apologies, I don’t understand.”

“Ah. I forget. You do not have the dovah speech. My... eagerness to meet you in battle was my... undoing, Dovahkiin. I salute your, hmm, low cunning in devising such a grahmindol – stratagem.”

“Your name is Odahviing, correct?”

“Yes. Zu'u bonaar. You went to a great deal of trouble to put me in this... humiliating position. Hind siiv Alduin, hmm? No doubt you want to know where to find Alduin?”

“That’s the only reason why you’re trapped. I must face Alduin and finally end the threat.”

“And the other dragons?”

“It will depend on them. But, for now, my focus in Alduin.”

“He has travelled to Sovngarde to regain his strength, devouring the sillesejour... the souls of the mortal dead. A privilege he jealously guards... His door to Sovngarde is at Skuldafn, one of his ancient fanes high in the eastern mountains.”

I turned to Balgruuf. “Lord, please ask everyone to find anything they can on Skuldafn. And quickly, please.”

“Of course, Dragonborn.” He turned to Irileth and practically every guard disappeared.

“Mindoraan, pah ok middovahhe lahvraan til. I surely do not need to warn you that all his remaining strength is marshalled there. Zu'u lost ofan hin laan... now that I have answered your question, you will allow me to go free?”

“Not yet. I want to know everything about Skuldfan first.”

He snorted, knowing he was going to have to tell the whole truth. “There is one detail about Skuldafn I neglected to mention. Only this. You have the Thu'um of a dovah, but without the wings of one, you will never set foot in Skuldafn. Of course, I could fly you there. But not while imprisoned like this.”

“So you want to be released after all this?”

“Indeed. Orin brit ro. I cannot leave here until you defeat Alduin, which you cannot do without my help.

Zu'u ni tahrodiis. It was you that lured me here and took me prisoner... vobalaan grahmindol. I have done nothing to earn your distrust.”

“True. I can’t deny that, I guess.”

I waited to make my decision, though. Leaving the dragon, I wandered back downstairs to find nearly every book from Balgruuf’s library on the table. While extensive, he admitted only a few books might contain even a mention of Skuldafn. He’d never heard of it before, nor had Irileth, Farengar or anyone else in his court.

In the end, everyone had to admit defeat. There was absolutely nothing about Skuldafn. It had probably been abandoned thousands of years ago, and was therefore a good base for Alduin. “Want to come with me?” I asked Lydia.

“You’re serious?”

“I have no idea what I’ll be facing. If we could wait, I’d go collect Aela at least, but we have Odahviing here now. It’s time to end this quickly so Skyrim is safe.”

We headed back to Breezehome, gathering anything we could think of to carry, including food and drink, as I figured we’d be gone for at least a little while. I wrote a quick letter for Aela and Mirabelle, asking Balgruuf to send it immediately. With any luck, they’ll receive it and head to Whiterun in time for our return.

The order to release the dragon caused a little consternation. Didn’t blame the guards considering all the trouble we’d gone through to trap him, but Balgruuf repeated my order, and Odahviing was quickly released. He was clearly pissed off, though kept his word, simply turning around and lowering his neck, allowing Lydia and I to clamber on.

Balgruuf approaching with an outstretched hand, shaking Lydia’s first before grasping mine. “May Kynareth guide you while you pass through her realm!”

“Ready, Dovahkiin?”

“Let’s fly, Odahviing!”

“Zok brit uth! I warn you, once you've flown the skies of Keizaal, your envy of the dov will only increase. Amativ! Mu bo kotin stinselok.”

We took off and soon the lands of Skyrim were far beneath us. He wasn’t lying. I would probably spend the rest of my days wishing that I also possessed the ability of flight.

Chapter 46: Showdown in Sovngarde

We must have flown for quite a while before landing in Skuldafn. Odahviing wasn’t going to take us any further, and after thanking him, he took off, leaving Lydia and I on our own. The first thing that greeted our eyes, apart from the enormous ancient temple, though now an enormous ancient ruin, were two dragons that looked at us but did… nothing.

Though we unsheathed our swords and moved forward, the two simply watched our progress. I wasn’t going to do anything to rile them as, quite bizarrely, they seemed watchful but intent on letting us progress. Perhaps they were aware of my mission to end Alduin and… actually agreed with it?

The dragons may have let us past but Skuldafn was infested with draugr. And these were not your usual run of the mill draugr that I could take out on my own. Nearly all of them were the Deathlord variant, if not even stronger, or so it seemed. I must have used my Thu’um constantly simply to give Lydia and I a chance, as more than once, we found ourselves backed into a corner as the bastards swarmed us. We both took wounds, thankful she knew a little magic to first heal herself, then heal me. It was at moments like that I definitely wished we had Aela and Mirabelle with us.

In addition to the endless draugr, we must have had to solve more than three or four puzzles, and these were not your ordinary, simple puzzles either. No, Skuldafn was a maze, a death trap, and a head scratcher. I think it was blind luck that allowed us to progress half the time. At least I found a word wall, though, so it wasn’t all bad.

Getting through took hours so that, by the time we seemed to reach the end, it was dark outside. We agreed to head back into the temple and find somewhere to sleep. We hadn’t brought any camping supplies but managed to find some old blankets as I figured, as high and as isolated as we were, it was bound to be freezing. We managed to get a fire going to provide some warmth.

“Thanks for bringing me along, Ragnar.”

“I needed your help, Lydia. Plus, I guess you’ve missed out on some of my adventures.”

“And I’m guessing there’ll be many more once this is done.”

“Definitely. I think we both know that my life isn’t particularly boring.”

Though she cuddled into me later that night, there were no other shenanigans as we wanted to rise as early as possible. The sun had risen though the temperature hadn’t when we walked outside the next morning, both of us well rested despite lying on a still rather cold stone floor. In the distance we could see a shaft of light ascending into the heavens, realising that was the way to Sovngarde. Any thoughts of it being an easy walk from there ended when we met the Dragon Priest guarding it.

The good news for us is that we caught him unawares, and as I managed to Shout him out of the way, Lydia made a desperate dive for the staff, knowing that was where he drew most of his power. Without his staff, he was rather pathetic, and Lydia took delight in using the staff on him in return. She gave me space and time to end the Dragon Priest, taking his mask as reward, before we approached the portal. Taking her hand in mine, we stepped forward and immediately ascended to Sovngarde.

I knew within five seconds of arriving that I would want to return when I died. Whether I did would depend on the gods, and perhaps my actions going forward, but I was a Nord, and this was definitely the heaven I wanted. As for Lydia, I think she may have needed a moment to compose herself, noticing that she needed to wipe her cheeks. I didn’t say anything as I completely understood the reaction.

We immediately started to wander through the dense fog, and I’ll admit to some surprise that we found people within it. Running into a couple of soldiers first, we offered to escort them and we soon had three or four with us before we ran into Kodlak.

I shook his hand before we embraced, and that was my turn to perhaps wipe my cheeks once we’d released each other. As lost as everyone else, I offered to help escort him too. Through the mist we also found High King Torygg, who explained in great detail what happened the day he died before he asked after his wife. I let him know she was well, and that seemed to please him, eventually joining out merry band. By the time we made to the bridge leading over towards the Hall of Valour, we must have numbered at least a dozen.

It was there that we were greeted by Tsun, all of us taking a knee before the God of Trials. And I knew that, since he was guarding the bridge, one of us would need to fight him to cross.

“What brings you here, wayfarer grim, to wonder here, in Sovngarde, souls-end, Shor's gift to the honoured dead?”

“I am here to end Alduin’s threat to our world.”

“A fateful errand. No few have chafed to face the Worm since first he set his soul-snare here at Sovngarde's threshold. But Shor's restrained our wrathful onslaught -- perhaps, deep-counselled, your doom he foresaw.”

“I seek entrance to the Hall of Valour.”

“No shade are you, as usually here passes, but living, you dare the land of the dead. By what right do you request entry?”

“I am the Dragonborn.”

He smiled at that reply. “Ah! It's been too long since last I faced a doom-driven hero of the dragon blood.”

“May I enter?”

“Living or dead, by decree of Shor, none may pass this perilous bridge 'til I judge them worthy by the warrior's test.”

It was not a fight to the death, though I’m not sure I could have killed him anyway. It was merely a test of strength, skill, but I think most importantly, heart. I could feel every strike of his sword on my shield through every fibre of my being. I did not use my Thu’um against a god, trusting in my sword arm to prevail. And, somehow, after a long battle that left me dripping with sweat, he took a knee of his own, stating I had proven my worth as a warrior.

Grasping my forearm as I did the same, he smiled at me again. “You fought well. I find you worthy. It is long since one of the living has entered here. May Shor's favour follow you and your errand.”

“Thank you, Tsun, God of Trials.”

“Perhaps when you return in many years’ time, we can battle again.”

“Something to look forward to upon my death.”

Our group crossed the bridge, entering the Hall of Valour as a group. We stopped as nearly the entire hall seemed to fall silent upon our entrance, a lone man, broad, strong and wise, stood up and approached our group. Hand outstretched, he immediately came towards me. There was no need to introduce himself as I grasped his forearm in return.

“Welcome, Dragonborn!”

“You honour me, Ysgramor.”

“Nonsense. It is you who honour us with your presence.” He fell silent and looked over our group. “Kodlak Whiteman, Harbinger of the Companions. It is good to see you here after your trials and tribulations?”

“Thank you, sir. It is thanks to Ragnar that I am here today. My only regret is that many of my kind remain trapped.”

“They will not remain trapped for eternity. Once the Worm is defeated, a Harrowing is required, don’t you think?”

“I long to see that day, sir.”

“Lydia of Whiterun, it pleases me to see you by the Dragonborns’ side.”

She fell to a knee immediately. He chuckled as he stepped forward, gently grabbing her forearm. “Come now. It is we who should take a knee before you. You who has stood by the Dragonborn as he takes on his greatest foe.”

“You honour me, sir.”

“And we are honoured to have such esteemed company, despite the fact they are many years early in their arrival.” He paused and the sigh probably wasn’t a surprise to any of us. “Our door has stood empty since Alduin first set his soul-snare here. By Shor's command we sheathed our blades and ventured not the vale's dark mist. But three await your word to loose their fury upon the perilous foe. Gormlaith the fearless, glad-hearted in battle; Hakon the valiant, heavy-handed warrior; Felldir the Old, far-seeing and grim. I believe you know them already.”

“Aye. I wish to meet then as soon as possible.”

Ysgramor grabbed me by the shoulder, told the rest they should join in the revelry, as I was escorted towards the three warriors I had seen through the Time-Wound.

I was introduced to Gormlait first. “At long last! Alduin's doom is now ours to seal. Just speak the word and with high hearts we'll hasten forth to smite the worm wherever he lurks.”

Then Felldir. “Hold, comrades. Let us counsel take before battle is blindly joined. Alduin's mist is more than a snare; its shadowy gloom is his shield and cloak. But with four Voices joined, our valour combined, we can blast the mist and bring him to battle.”

That sounded like a good idea, nodding as I was introduced to Hakon. “Felldir speaks wisdom. The World-Eater, coward, fears you, Dragonborn. We must drive away his mist, Shouting together, and then unsheathe our blades in desperate battle with our black-winged foe.”

Now that sounded like a mighty fine idea.

Before departing, I shared a tankard with Ysgramor, Kodlak, Torygg and all the others we had gathered, and all the men and women within the hall. Some names I recognised but most were strangers. I knew that when I next completed this journey, I would know them all, and we would be kin for eternity. Ysgramor raised his tankard and wished the five of us good luck, and spoke confidently about our pending battle with Alduin. The five of us downed our tankards and, with roars in our ears, walked out of the hall and back across the bridge.

“The eyes of Shor are upon you this day. Defeat Alduin, and destroy his soul-snare.”

I would have invited Tsun to join us, but he was still under orders from Shor. Therefore, it was up to us five to seize the initiative and win the day. We walked to a nearby clearing, such a reminder of Skyrim somewhere below us, and it was there that I Shouted to clear the sky and hopefully draw Alduin towards us.

With the mist clearing, mountains rose in the distance, the water as blue as any ocean and sky, the fields around us a mixture of colours as grass and flowers bloomed. Yet in the distance, we heard a roar, weapons unsheathed as we knew Alduin approached. The black beast appeared in the distance but dared not come closer, instead using his Thu’um to cause the mist to descend upon us again.

Now the four of us Shouted, the mist clearing quickly. Lydia urged Alduin to fight us and I could not fault her bravery. Alduin still dated not show his face, replying with his Thu’um, the mist once again forming, but the five of us could see it was not as thick.

“One more time, and the World-Eater must face us!” Felldir cried.

The four of us Shouted again, the mist appearing to clear completely. Alduin responded but the mist would not reform. “Come and face us, coward!” I called. It was not my Thu’um, but I knew he would respond.

The black beast appeared over the nearby mountain, descending at speed towards us. He was immediately over-confident, and did not reckon on Dragonrend. I Shouted and caused him to crash to the ground, the five of us on him in an instant. He gave as good as he got, claws looking for skin, teeth waiting to tear us to shreds. The three warriors of old knew all his tricks, and Alduin could not gain an advantage. Lydia was by my side, and we did not need to share a word, attacking and defending as one.

Alduin Shouted, the sky turning red as rocks fired towards our positions. Once again, it was a matter of using my Thu’um, and I’m sure Alduin roared in frustration as the skies clear, and he attempted to take off. He couldn’t do that either, as I simply used Dragonrend to drag him back to the ground.

Alduin thought he could taunt us, but the three warriors of old barely said a word. Lydia was concentration personified. As for myself, I was simply looking for the killing blow. We slowly gained the upper hand as Alduin never managed to get off the ground, and with each passing minute, he received further wounds, red blood dripping down his black skin as he slowly but surely started to weaken.

I believe he underestimated us. Perhaps even underestimated me. I couldn’t really blame him. I was only a man, after all. But as he weakened, he turned desperate, and that left him exposed. Dropping my shield, I unsheathed my dagger and used that to clamber onto him, finding purchase within his scales. The other four kept him distracted as I moved my way up onto his neck, ensuring I stabbed him each time, drawing ever more blood. He tried to shake me off, but I made sure my blade was dug in deep, the other four gaining his attention long enough for me to move. Once I was position, I’m sure his eyes looked up into mine. At that moment, I looked into evil personified.

“Your soul is mine, Alduin!” I roared as I drove my sword down into his skull.

“Zu'u unslaad! zu'u nis oblaan!” he cried as I quickly dove off and rolled away, just in time to see him slowly disintegrate, first his scales falling off, then his skin tearing apart, before his very bones appeared to evaporate into thin air. There was a loud crack of thunder and then… nothing. He was gone. I did not absorb his soul, but I didn’t really care. Far as I was concerned, he was now dead.

Lydia got down onto her knees and embraced me first, kissing my cheek before we rose to our feet, where I was greeted by the three warriors of old, grasping the forearm of each as they congratulated me on my success. I walked to a nearby stream and cleaned off the blood, simply taking a few moments to contemplate what we’d just done. No-one would probably ever believe it, but I didn’t mind. Skyrim and the world was safe. That was all that mattered in the end.

Walking back towards the bridge, Tsun was waiting for us and it was obvious how the battle had ended, offering his hand as I grasped it immediately. “This was a mighty deed! The doom of Alduin encompassed at last, and cleansed is Sovngarde of his evil snare. They will sing of this battle in Shor's hall forever.”

I simply smiled as I glanced across the bridge to see the hall had emptied, raising my hand in their direction, greeted by an almost deafening roar. The warriors of old shook my hand one last time before they returned across the bridge, leading the cheers as my name was shouted over and again. Not the name given to me long ago, the name I had earned at Helgen and what I would probably be known as for the rest of my life.

And then Tsun told us that we had to leave. I’ll be honest, part of me wanted to stay, but he assured me that my soul would return one day, and that Lydia would return by my side. That seemed to please her, being a Nord warrior at heart. He thanked me one last time before he Shouted in my direction, and I was once again engulfed by a bright light…

---

We were surrounded by dragons but none attacked us. Instead, they seemed to be chanting, perhaps they were singing. The strange thing is, I could understand them. I knew they were using the dragon tongue, yet while I could comprehend what they were saying, Lydia just had a blank look on her face. In fact, she looked a little frightened. I didn’t blame her though, once the dragons were finished, I assured her that they were now friends. Sort of…

Paarthurnax landed nearby. “So, it is done. Alduin dilon. The Eldest is no more, he who came before all others, and has always been.”

Part of me thought he sounded rather said. Part of me understood, to a degree. “He had to be destroyed, Paarthurnax. I was not going to let him end the world as we know it.”

“Of course. Alduin wahlaan daanii. I would not have helped you if I thought otherwise. You did what was necessary. Alduin had flown far from the path of right action in his pahlok -- the arrogance of his power. But I cannot celebrate his fall. Zu'u tiiraaz ahst ok mah. He was my brother once. This world will never be the same.”

“Perhaps, but I believe the world is now better, and safer without his presence.”

“I am glad you believe that. At least it will continue to exist. Grik los lein. Even I cannot see past Time's ending to what comes next. Niid koraav zeim dinoksetiid. We must do the best we can with this world. What are your plans regarding the dovah now?”

“I will abide by the Greybeards and the Way of the Voice. There will be peace between us if your kind desires it. But I cannot convince your kind alone.”

“Many of the dovahhe are now scattered across Keizaal. Without Alduin's lordship, they may yet bow to the vahzen... rightness of my Thu'um. But willing or no, they will hear it!”

“Those that wish to fight will know where to find me. Those who want peace will have no issue with me.”

“I will pass on your message, and your warning, Dovahkiin. Until next we meet.”

And with that, he ascended into the air and slowly disappeared his view. I guess his role assisting the Greybeards was over. With Alduin now dead, Paarthurnax was now free to do as he wished. And I believed him. He didn’t fear me, but having killed Alduin, he knew what I was capable of. I liked to think he didn’t want to fight me himself.

As he disappeared, Odahviing appeared, landing next to me. Lydia nearly cried out in fright before realising who it was. He didn’t have much to say but he acknowledged the power of my Thu’um in addition to the fact I’d managed to kill Alduin. While he didn’t exactly say he was an ally, he did suggest he held some sort of hope that peace could be maintained. He did mention the Blades, and I replied that I’d do my best to control them. He wasn’t particularly convinced, knowing more than I thought he would, but if others were stupid enough to attack a dragon, then more fool them. I simply thanked him for his help before he too ascended into the clouds and disappeared from view.

Now alone, Lydia gave me another tight hug before suggesting we should head home. The first stop would be High Hrothgar, where we stopped for the night, letting Arngeir know what had happened. Despite everything, he was pleased to hear of my success and happy that the world was not ending. Asking if I would continue to follow their teachings, I assured him that I would, only using my gift when I thought necessary. Telling him that I hoped for peace between man and dragon, I think the respect of the old man increased ten-fold. Leaving the next morning, I simply promised I would return as often as I could.

Without horses, it was a long walk back to Whiterun, stopping at Ivarstead after descending the mountain, only walking through the gates of Whiterun the next evening having basically marched since dawn. It was surprisingly quiet, barely a soul around, as we walked first past Breezehome, the Bannered Mare and then Jorrvaskr. I don’t think we even saw a guard pass by us.

It was only when approaching Dragonsreach that we figured something was up, the guard to either side surprised by my appearance. “Dragonborn?” one of them whispered. To my surprise, the pair crossed an arm over their chest, bowed their heads then took a knee. “You return?” the other asked.

“What? I’ve only been gone a couple of days?”

“No. No, you haven’t. You should head inside."

Doing as he suggested as they stood and opened one of the doors, Lydia and I walked in to see nearly all of Whiterun inside. Jarl Balgruuf was in front of his throne, saying something, though when he saw me, his voice trailed off and nearly the entire hall turned to look at me.

“Ragnar!” I heard a voice cry, Mirabelle appearing and sprinting towards me, Aela following immediately. Both of them crashed into me almost at once. The fact both of them were already crying surprised me.

“Well, hello to you too!”

“We thought you were dead!” Mirabelle sobbed.

“You disappeared after you left on the dragon,” Aela added.

“But it’s only been…”

“You’ve been gone a fortnight, Dragonborn,” Ysolda added as people started to crowd around me.

I could see Balgruuf make his way through the crowd, my two girls letting me go. Before he shook my hand, he performed the same gesture as the guards outside, though he did not take a knee. Grasping his hand, he simply said, “Though we’d lost you, Dragonborn.”

“Two weeks?” I asked, not understanding why or how.

“Aye. You left on that dragon then… nothing. Aela and Mirabelle arrived within a day or two of me sending that letter, then after a week, we thought the worst.”

“So what’s going on here then?”

Balgruuf chuckled. “Well, to be honest, welcome to your funeral, Dragonborn. And Lydia, you were included as well.” Balgruuf turned to the assembled crowd. “People of Whiterun, the Dragonborn lives! Salute him!”

Everyone, even Mirabelle, Aela and Lydia, crossed an arm across their chest, bowed their heads as they took a knee. Looking around, I noticed Farkas and Vilkas were there, Adrienne, even Irileth performed the gesture. I stood there, not really sure what to think. “You will do us the greatest honour if you remain in our city, Dragonborn. Though I will understand if you… desire a bigger house.”

He said that with such a look on his face, I couldn’t help chuckle, obviously more than aware of my personal situation. “If I do ever move, perhaps Breezehome can become sort of museum?”

People rose to their feet and my hand was then shaken so much, I’m sure it turned red by the end. Balgruuf announced that, instead of a funeral, there would be a celebration within three days, while he would also ensure the announcement of my victory was sent far and wide. He knew it would probably ensure the restart of the civil war, but the people deserved to know they were now safe.

The crowd slowly filtered out of Dragonsreach until there was only myself, my girls and the jarl. Though he wanted to hear all about it, he said I could share my stories with everyone during the celebration. He figured I would like to spend time with my girls. The look in their eyes suggested he was exactly right.

Walking into Breezehome, I was escorted by hand straight upstairs, my three girls all hugging me together. Aela and Mirabelle had obviously heard about Delphine so immediately accepted her into our little group. “We know you love him, and he loves you. Perhaps differently to us but does that really matter?” Aela said.

I’ll admit clothing was removed rather quickly, the three girls falling to their knees once my cock sprang free, Mirabelle immediately swallowing my length. “This is what will happen tonight, Ragnar,” Aela stated, “I think it’s obvious what is going to happen first, but we’ll leave it up to you regarding who receives your load and where. Then… Well, I’m hoping you’ll make love with me next then…”

“Me next?” Lydia asked hopefully. Aela smiled and nodded.

Mirabelle removed my cock from her mouth. “I want to try again tonight, Ragnar, so you can be with me last.”

I leaned down to caress her cheek. “I’ll be gentle.”

Mirabelle made love to my cock with her mouth, doing thing with her lips and tongue that drove me wild. Aela and Lydia sat on their side by side, simply looking up, devotion and love in their eyes. I think, at that moment, Lydia had well and truly moved on from Delphine and was now definitely back in the fold as one of my girls. And, to prove that, once I was ready to cum, Mirabelle allowed me to stroke myself to a climax, gently grabbing Lydia to cum on her face. She loved it, and swallowed my cock once I was finished to clean me off. Mirabelle and Aela both helped clean her face, which was incredibly erotic to watch, before Mirabelle and Aela started to make out. That caught Lydia by surprise.

“Oh…”

“Ah, you see, we’ve been living as a proper three-person relationship,” I stated, “And these two certainly have a lot of affection for each other.”

I’m not sure if she was caught up in the moment, but Mirabelle turned to Lydia and then kissed her. I was surprised, as was Lydia. Aela just giggled as Lydia took a few seconds to respond. Mirabelle must have noticed my face as she broke the kiss and smiled. “Well, if we’re now going to be four people in this relationship, I best get used to her as well.”

“Three of you together at once. Not right now but…” I trailed off as the three girls just laughed.

“I thought you…” Lydia was still surprised, before she leaned closer and added quietly, “Do you eat pussy?”

Mirabelle lowered her hand and stuck a couple of fingers into Lydia before taking them out and sucking them clean. “I adore Aela’s and I think I’ll grow to adore yours as well.” She looked at me again. “But Aela and I love something and someone a whole lot more.”

Ending up on bed together, Aela on her back, my head was quickly between her legs, while Mirabelle lay back with Lydia wanting a taste of her pussy in return. I could barely focus on Aela at times, Mirabelle certainly making a lot of noise. She did that because she knew how much it excited me, plus there is no doubt Lydia knew how to eat pussy.

“Focus, Ragnar!” Aela demanded gently with a giggle.

“Sorry, it’s very distracting,” I retorted before continuing what I was doing.

I soon had her moaning, though, one of her hands gently grabbing my hair to hold my mouth in place as she gyrated slowly. I think all my girls were rather turned on as Mirabelle had her first orgasm quite quickly, hearing Lydia giggle as she mentioned that very fact, before I notice the two start to make out. Aela enjoyed her first orgasm only a couple of minutes later, and though I would have been happy to continue, she reached forward to pull me up, my cock sliding inside her as we moaned together.

“By Ysmir, it feels like forever,” she whispered as I leaned down to kiss her.

Feeling her legs wrap around me, our lovemaking was gentle and tender. I had no desire for anything else, wanting to show all three of them how much I loved and adored them. Aela realised quite quickly what I was doing and couldn’t stop running her hands up and down my arms or back. In fact, at one stage, she seemed to be getting rather emotional, needing to blink rapidly more than once. “I love you,” she whispered, “And I thought…”

By now, Mirabelle and Lydia had stopped and shuffled closer, Mirabelle kissing Aela on the cheek, Lydia moving to the other side and doing the same. “My three girls,” I stated softly, “Luckiest man alive.”

“Cum in me,” Aela said quietly, “Please…”

“Of course,” I replied, leaning down to kiss her.

“I want a cure, Ragnar. I want…”

“Me too,” Mirabelle added.

“More than one,” Lydia stated.

“Definitely need a bigger house,” I stated with a chuckle.

I came in Aela as she wanted, burying myself and groaning quite loudly. Thinking about it, I hadn’t had sex in quite a while, something rather unusual, so little wonder I probably didn’t last as long as usual. Aela wrapped arms and legs around me tightly to keep me in place, covering my face in kisses, now not allowing herself to stop the tears. “I thought you were gone,” she whispered, her voice catching more than once. Mirabelle cuddled into us as well, Lydia simply joining in to complete the hug.

Though she would have liked to keep me in place all night, she eventually released her arms and legs, though I didn’t move straight away, which earned me a smile and a kiss, before I did need to at least sit back on my knees and rest for a few minutes. My cock remained hard as a rock despite my orgasm, noticing Lydia eagerly looking at it. “Give me a few more minutes,” I suggested.

“I am riding that thing to orgasm, Ragnar. In fact, more than one!”

“As long as it’s your pussy.”

“That’s yours now, Ragnar. Though I love it in my arse, you are going where I want it most except on the odd occasion from now on.”

“I would ask but…” Mirabelle trailed off.

“It’s a long story. I can tell you tomorrow. Let’s just say that Ragnar will be my sole focus from now on, though I’ll always be up for a little fun with you two. I’ve enjoyed Aela before and will definitely enjoy some more fun with you, Mirabelle.”

“I think the gods finally love me,” I joked.

“Saving the world will do that,” Aela said with a smile, simply lying back and she seemed to just glow.

“First thing we do is get you cured. Farkas and Vilkas can join us. Why don’t we all get cured together?”

“That sounds like a fine idea. The Companions can finally be restored to how they should be.”

Eventually Lydia couldn’t wait any longer, finding myself dragged onto my back, and she wasted little time sliding down on my cock. Mirabelle and Aela lay to either side, watching Lydia actually take it nice and slow for a change, slowly rising then slowly falling. Her face was priceless and I simply enjoyed watching her enjoy it.

“Gods, I can actually feel it stretching me out doing it this way,” she whispered.

“He does have quite the cock,” Aela added.

Mirabelle leaned close to my ear. “I can’t wait for it to be in my arse a little later.”

“You three will be the death of me.”

Lydia barely picked up any tempo, and I’ll admit, I loved watching her take it nice and slow. The only thing I did was bend my legs so she leaned forward, watching her face and the expressions she made. I would occasionally thrust up, but just like her, nice and slow. That did was earn an even bigger smile or perhaps quite the kiss.

Somehow, I’m not sure, but she eventually whispered that she was going to cum, and admitted further that it was going to be big. Resting a hand on her arse, the other on the back of her head, I leaned up to give her another kiss. “Feel good?”

“It feels wonderful, Ragnar,” she replied quietly, followed by another moan, “It’s going to be a big orgasm. I’m doing what I can to hold it back for now. Just get ready to catch me when I’m finally done.”

She started to ride me just a little faster, grinding at the same time, knowing what it was doing to her. Mirabelle and Aela simply watched, dropping the occasional comment about how good I must feel. Lydia could only moan or whisper agreement to whatever they mentioned.

Only when she was getting close to did she really start to ride me, both my hands now on her arse as she leaned forward, hands to either side of me. “I want to cum, Ragnar…”

“I’m not stopping you.”

“I’d like more than one, but to be honest, this is going to be a big one. Gods, your cock is just fantastic.”

I leaned close to her ear. “And your pussy is tight, wet and warm, Lydia. I love the fact we can both enjoy it again.”

She kissed me, whimpering into my mouth as I felt her start to clench around my cock. She didn’t break the kiss until she needed to moan loudly, her body starting to shudder and I thought even I could feel the orgasm that ripped through her body. She shouted quite loudly to the heavens and god above, riding me faster until she simply couldn’t do anymore before she gently collapsed onto my chest, unable to say or do anything except suck in some deep breaths. I wanted to hold her, but she admitted to feeling very sensitive, asking me to wait just a minute or two.

When she was ready, she grabbed my hands to hold onto her, and she sighed in contentment when I held her tightly to me. “I’ve missed this,” she admitted softly, “It was… different with… you know who…

“So you would like this more often then?”

“Maybe the occasional hard fuck in the arse, as we can both admit to enjoying it, but what we just did…” She sat up and put my hand to her chest. “I’m not sure if you feel it, but my heart is racing. And it’s not just the great orgasm you just gave me. It’s… feelings. Lots of feelings, Ragnar, that I kept suppressed while I was with… her.”

Sitting up, I felt my cock fall out of her as she sat down on her knees as I moved back to rest my back against the headboard. Turning around, she then rested against my chest as Mirabelle and Aela scooted closer. “How many more?” Aela wondered.

“Huh?” I wondered.

“Three,” Lydia replied, “Seven days of the week. Ragnar can have six girls.”

“What?” I asked, surprised.

“He’ll need his rest on the seventh day, obviously,” Mirabelle added.

“You’re being serious here?”

“Yes,” the three replied in unison.

“You three are more than…”

“We know,” Aela interrupted, “But we’re merely saying that if you do meet and fall for another girl, we will happily accept her into our little arrangement. With any luck, she’ll like us too. Trust us, Ragnar, if you’re with one of your girls alone, we can certainly find enjoyment in each other.”

“We just don’t need another man,” Mirabelle added.

“I still want the foursome, if that’s still on the table,” Lydia stated.

“That’s fine. I’ve never had a problem with that.”

“Anyway, enough chatter, girls. I believe Mirabelle wants something nice and large in her arse,” Aela stated, “And I think we should get her nice and ready, Lydia. Ragnar, you just sit there and watch.”

Aela lay down on her back, Mirabelle immediately getting into position, wasting little time lowering her face to her pussy. While Aela returned the favour, Lydia was in position behind Mirabelle, first lowering her mouth to her arse. I watched Mirabelle’s reaction, first looking at me before she looked back at Lydia. “I take it you’re an expert?” she moaned.

Lydia stopped for a moment, leaning forward towards her ear. “I’ll get you so turned on, you’ll be begging him to fuck you in the arse.” Lydia looked at me with a smile while Mirabelle lowered her face back to Aela’s pussy. Somehow, I managed to watch all this without stroking myself.

With all the attention she was receiving, I was surprised Mirabelle could concentrate. Aela certainly enjoyed eating her out, Lydia doing the same to her arse before she asked for the bottle of oil, and started to use her fingers. “To get you ready, you’ll take all four, Miri,” Lydia stated.

“Yes,” Mirabelle hissed, already moving her arse in a way that suggested she was definitely enjoying the attention. She was now rather distracted and wasn’t paying much attention to Aela, so I thought I’d do the right thing and help out. I would please Aela for a while before kissing Mirabelle, who would joke she could taste Aela on my lips.

Position where I was, I couldn’t exactly see what Lydia was doing, only being told she soon had three fingers in Mirabelle’s arse, watching her face as Lydia finger-fucked her, and when she received four, she did wince at that before slowly adjusting. That’s when I had to have a look for myself, sitting next to Lydia, four fingers definitely buried in her arse. That’s when I applied some oil to my cock.

“Aela, you should move for this,” Lydia suggested as I replaced her, rubbing my cock up and down Mirabelle’s crack.

“Ragnar,” she moaned quietly, moving so Aela could get out of the way.

Part of me wanted to see her face down, arse up, but I wasn’t going to fuck her like that. I teased her for a little bit before putting the head of my cock at her tight, little hole, and very gently slid the head of my cock inside. She gasped when I did so, turning back and smiling this time, no sign of the wincing and pain she had shown last time. I think we had prepared her better this time.

I slowly, very slowly started to slide a bit more in, stopping to let her adjust, pulling back so would get used to that, then slid a bit more in. “Gods,” she moaned, and it was the tone that let me know she was already enjoying it, “Your cock feels enormous, Ragnar.”

Once she had taken enough, or so I thought, that’s when I reached forward and gently pulled her up against my body, kissing her neck and her check before she turned to face me so I could kiss her. Running my hands up and down her body, I slowly started to fuck her. Nothing like what I’d done with Lydia. I was incredibly gentle. If it was the only time we did this, I wanted her to have fond memories.

“Oh gods,” she cried quietly, “I had no idea…”

“Feels good?”

“I feel tingles everywhere, Ragnar.” I purposely slid more inside her as I’d been holding back. That made her moan loudly. “Oh gods, that feels wonderful!”

I turned her head to kiss her, not surprised she needed to whimper into my mouth. Once I felt her take my entire length, I couldn’t help smile as I kissed her, and that simply made her smile in return. “His whole cock is inside your arse,” Lydia stated.

“Every hole now, Ragnar,” Mirabelle stated softly, “I love you.”

“I love you too.”

Holding her against me, I gently made love to her. I was definitely going to cum. My cock buried in her arse like that? I was surprised I hadn’t cum already. And wanting her to cum as well, I slowly started to fondle her at the same time. Within a couple of minutes, her body movements were suggested an impending orgasm. “A little faster,” she moaned, “Not too hard though.”

I picked up the tempo slightly, just enough for both of us to really enjoy. “Fuck, Belle,” I groaned.

“You want to cum in my arse, don’t you, Ragnar?”

“More than anything!”

“I want to feel it too, Ragnar.”

My right hand continued to fondle her but I held her tightly with my left arm, continuing to kiss her. I picked up the pace a little more, and I knew I wasn’t going to last much longer. “Cum in me, Ragnar. You’ll stay hard enough for me to ride.”

“I don’t think it’ll go soft at all.”

I could feel my orgasm approaching fast, whispering in her ear that I was going to fill her up completely. That made her giggle, urging me on to finish inside her. I probably started to fuck her a little harder, and she was getting used to it by now that there was no negative reaction. When I finally did cum, it was one of the best orgasms of my life, or so it felt anyway, burying myself completely, causing her to cry out a little, though I think she was on the verge too, as my hand was going to town on her pussy at the same time.

Then I had to stop for a moment, holding her tightly against me, cock definitely buried completely, and I knew it wasn’t going to go down anytime soon. I was far too turned on by what I was doing with her.

“That was awesome,” she whispered.

“Totally hot,” Lydia added.

“Gods, makes me want to enjoy it again sometime,” Aela I think only half-joked.

Mirabelle simply leaned back against me, not wanting us to separate for a second, my hands now gently running up and down her body. “Gods, I love you,” she whispered, “I thank them every day for that moment you walked into my life.” She surprised me by reaching forward and pulling Aela towards her, the pair sharing a tender kiss. “And I love you too, Aela.”

I’d never heard her share those words with her. Aela simply smiled before replying with the same words in return. I turned to Lydia, beckoning her to join us, kissing her first before she kissed Aela and Mirabelle last. “And no doubt all three of us will love you soon enough,” Aela added.

“I think the rather tender anal sex has really got to her, Ragnar,” Lydia stated.

“He is still buried in my arse, and I really want to ride him now.”

Asked to move onto my back, I made sure I was sitting up slightly as Mirabelle straddled my lap. After the application of some more oil, it was surprising even to me how easily she took my cock a second time. She didn’t ride me anywhere near as hard or as fast as Lydia was capable of, but she was doing all she could to ensure she enjoyed every second. What certainly helped was the fact Aela and Lydia sat on their knees beside her, each of them taking turns to kiss and fondle her. Her breasts received plenty of attention, including from myself, while her pussy had at least two hands paying attention to it at times. Little wonder she came hard after only a few minutes, though she did not stop riding me.

However, she did lean forward a little later after a second one, resting on her forearms with her face close to mine. “Ragnar, I’m not sure I can take another orgasm, and I’m not sure if you’ll have one, so I want you to do something for me.”

“Anything.”

“For the next couple of minutes, I want you to fuck me.”

I wouldn’t question the request. It was what she wanted. So, grabbing her tightly with one arm, my other resting on her arse, I adjusted myself into a comfortable position, and making sure I was kissing her as a distraction, slowly but surely started to fuck her. She was whimpering within seconds, and I knew it was probably hurting her a little bit, but she never asked me to stop, only breaking the kiss to release a couple of curse words. “Holy fuck, it feels…”

“Yes?”

Her face broke out into a smile. “It feels wonderful, Ragnar. But…”

“Want me to stop?”

“No, give it another couple of minutes. I can handle it.”

Both hands now rested on her arse and it felt like I was really giving it to her. I watched her face carefully, and once I could see it was becoming quite uncomfortable and painful, she must have seen my reaction and nodded for me to stop. I did so immediately, though she made sure to sit down on my lap so my cock was still buried inside her before she lay down on my chest, moving my hands from her arse to her back, holding her tightly like I always did when she rode me like that.

“That was a little much, but I’m glad I found my limit.” I just gave her a gentle squeeze, hoping she hadn’t hurt herself. “Thank you, Ragnar, for doing that. I know you were concerned.”

“The last thing I ever want is to her you. Any of you. I’ve told you we don’t need to do this unless you do get real enjoyment out of it.”

“Perhaps just for special occasions or… well, I much prefer you somewhere else, but I’m glad we did it tonight.”

I glanced at Aela. “I agree, Ragnar. One of those things we’ll do occasionally.”

I glanced at Lydia. “You know how much I do love it, Ragnar. But if we do end up sharing a night like how we used to, I’ll be honest and admit that I’d rather do it in privacy.”

“Part of me doesn’t want to get off. It still feels wonderful though is started to get painful.” Her body eventually told her to move, though, but she still groaned with disappointment as I watched her lift herself up and my cock eventually fell out of her. All she did was settle back down again as Aela grabbed a cloth for nearby, simply to clean her up. Not due to any major mess except for cum leaking out of her. My girls had obviously prepared.

After all that, I think we were exhausted. I certainly was as my cock softened rather quickly. Lydia stood up and bid us goodnight. If she thought that was going to happen, she thought wrong, Aela grabbing her forearm and pulling her back onto the bed. “Like hell you sleep alone,” she insisted. I think, in that moment, Lydia realised that both my girls were serious. Lydia was now part of the relationship.

Going to bed with three women was a bit of a squeeze, suggesting we might need a new bed, or perhaps there would need to be sleeping arrangements. Both Mirabelle and Aela suggested no issue with sleeping with Lydia, and I knew they would quite happily share a bed with each other too. Adding more girls, if that ever happened, could make it a little awkward.

But I like to think we all enjoyed blissful sleep that evening. After everything, I think that was deserved.

Chapter 47: Peace of Victory

So much for a simple celebration of my victory. The party that took over Whiterun must have lasted for at least three days and nights. The entire town joined in the festivities, and I don’t think anyone to this day would know how much food and drink was consumed. Dragonsreach was opened to the public, the long tables rarely empty, Balgruuf ensuring a never-ending supply of meet and ale at the very least.

What amused me most during some of the celebrations was dancing with most of the women in Whiterun, and despite the fact they knew I already had three women I was intimate with, I think every single one propositioned me. The likes of Ysolda wasn’t a surprise. In fact, I think she was now rather desperate to sleep with… No, she wanted to be fucked, as that’s exactly how she put it to me. It was a very tempting offer. Carlotta, who generally made it known her sole focus was her daughter, quite clearly felt me up as we danced to some music, whispering it had been too long since she’d had cock inside her. I’d always fancied her and it took some willpower not to give in immediately.

Then there was Adrienne, who was married to a man I respected, insisting he had already agreed to a threesome. We’d always got on well, being neighbours, and I didn’t want to ruin any of that by bringing sex into the equation. She then suggested a foursome if one of my girls wanted to be involved. I did consider asking Lydia about that…

I could name them all but I’m sure by now you have at least some understanding of my… I hesitate to say predicament, but I managed to say no to them all, frankly because Lydia, Aela and Mirabelle went out of their way to keep my balls empty the entire time. If I wasn’t eating, drinking, talking or dancing, I was in Breezehome fucking one or two of them.

The collective hangover at the end of festivities would probably be talked about for years to come. Everyone had a great time and that was the most important thing. One crisis was over, and while others loomed on the horizon, for the moment, Whiterun was safe.

It was probably a week after that I was approached by the other members of the Circle, Farkas and Vilkas hoping we could go cure ourselves as soon as possible. With nothing else on my plate, I figured a journey north would be perfect. What I didn’t like was, after telling Mirabelle about it, she suggested that she should really return to the College for a little while.

The good news was that she had sent letters out to every jarl, asking if they wanted an arcane advisor. So far, she had heard positive news from the Jarl of Falkreath. It was closer than the College but it still wasn’t Whiterun. We promised to speak about our future and decide what we all wanted to do. But at least we had a plan of what to do in the immediate future.

Three days later, with enough supplies to last us at least a week, I led what felt like a small convoy of Aela, Lydia, Mirabelle, Farkas and Vilkas, heading east then north, as we would stop at the College first, before heading to the Tomb of Ysgramor, where the four of us would be cured. It was surprising how completely on board Aela was regarding the cure, as when we had first met, she’d been adamant about not seeking one. She had mentioned something about wanting ‘clean’ children. I wasn’t sure if the curse could be passed on or not, like how I wasn’t sure if any children I sired would also have my gifts. Time would tell, I guess.

We made it to the College in a couple of days, and it was there that Aela told me that the rest would move on and camp by the shore near the tomb, leaving me alone with Mirabelle. I knew why but I still questioned the decision.

“Because we don’t actually know when we’ll be back, so spend some time with her alone,” she suggested.

“Not you too?”

“No, Ragnar. Just you and Mirabelle. Take your time with each other. If you spend a couple of nights, I’m sure we’ll survive regardless.” I couldn’t help but give her a kiss before she led the other three down the side path. Mirabelle and I led our horses over the bridge, leaving them in the area now designated to leave the horses of those visiting, before heading inside out of the cold. Tolfdir learned of our arrival and made his presence known rather quickly, but he didn’t have much to report, only that a few had learned the Dragonborn was a student and had arrived in recent weeks.

We dined alone in her quarters that night before heading upstairs to gaze upon the night sky, taking an enormous rug so we could sit down then wrap ourselves up in furs. We shared a bottle of wine as we chatted away, and in those moments, I could forget about everything and everyone else. There was only Mirabelle. Ever so briefly, I would also think of Muiri, not comparing the two, but simply think of all the things we could have done together if she hadn’t been taken. Nowadays, whenever I did think about her, it was only to regret the life we hadn’t been able to share together.

When it simply grew too cold, we headed back to her quarters where, to put it simply, we made love. By now, Mirabelle loved getting on her knees to pleasure me. When we first started being intimate, she’d rarely done it, admitting over time that it was simply a confidence thing, thinking she wasn’t good at it. I assured her that technique didn’t particularly matter, it was the fact she was willing to do it. And, of course, I always returned the favour, though she knew I loved going down on her regardless.

We made love for what felt like hours. My body was a marvel nowadays, my cock able to stay hard despite enjoying a tremendous orgasm, occasionally switching positions so Mirabelle could either ride my cock, which she adored, or she had learned to enjoy being bent over on her knees, though I usually lifted her up so she could lean against me. We both loved that position.

Though we may have longed to last all night, we simply wore each other out over time, but cuddling at the end was the best way to finish the night. In those moments, we might lay in contented silence, or chat about things that didn’t really matter. That first night, though, she did broach one subject I had actually expected since we’d made love the first time.

“Tell me about her.”

I knew who she meant. Mirabelle knew the basics about Muiri but I had never gone into great detail, understanding that it was still a wound after all this time.

That night, though, I told her everything. She knew most of my history, but I told her every little detail. Of how we’d met. How I’d killed for her. How I’d courted her. How we’d fallen in love. Married. Fallen pregnant. Then how she was taken from me. And how I took revenge. She knew parts of the story but had never heard the whole thing. I no longer wept telling the story. Nowadays, I only thought of the good times we’d spent together. I could close my eyes and still see her standing before me at the altar in her white dress. Occasionally, my mind would drift and I’d think of the better times and… well, I would have a natural reaction.

Muiri pulled me onto my side so she could spoon into me. “I can still hear how much you love her,” she whispered.

“Always will, Belle.” I kissed her cheek. “But now you are my Breton goddess. She would definitely approve.” I paused before adding, “And I love you just as much as I did her.”

She didn’t say anything for a while until I heard a sniff, rolling her over to see her eyes glistening in the candlelight. She kissed me softly but couldn’t really say anything, so I just held her tight to my body. “And I’d marry you in a heartbeat too,” I stated softly, “Though… I’m not sure… You know…”

She still couldn’t say anything so rolled onto her back, taking her with me, and she made sure my cock slid inside her. Legs immediately wrapping around me, arms around the back of my neck, she never stopped kissing me as we made love again. It was only when she must have approached another orgasm that she took a break. “I’ve stopped taking potions, Ragnar,” she whispered.

I could only smile before replying, “Okay.”

“I want our child. I want our children. I wanted this role here at the College. Or, at least, I thought I did. But I want what we share and what we will have in the future together a whole lot more.”

“You don’t have to give this up,” I assured her.

“I know. But I do so willingly because the most important thing in my life now is what we have. So as soon as you know where your future is, I will be there by your side, Ragnar.”

I rolled onto my back, taking her with me, bending my knees as she leaned forward. I slowly pumped into her, her face inches from mine. “Sound serious, Mirabelle.”

“I want to be your wife, Ragnar. But I know Aela has the same thoughts.”

“So what do we do?”

“I’m not sure yet. Right now, I just want us both to enjoy this.”

She was my Breton goddess as she rode me that night, particularly when she sat back and I ran my hands up and down her body, eventually sitting up so I could focus on those wonderful breasts of hers, and in my desire, I may have left a mark or two on her neck, which simply made her giggle. We both lasted quite a while that final time, Mirabelle enjoying at least a couple of orgasms, before she ended up on her back, begging me to fuck her. We rarely did the really hard stuff, but when she grabbed the back of my head and practically growled at me to fuck her, she got well and truly fucked for all of a couple of minutes before I practically exploded inside her. Breathing deeply together afterwards, she did start to giggle, suggesting she’d definitely fallen pregnant that night, and she’d let me know in due course.

The next day, Mirabelle spent most of her time catching up on College business and I did what I could to prevent boredom. I spent a lot of time bothering Urag in the library, much to my amusement, and chatted away with Tolfdir for some time as well, realising I was no mage but happy I was at least showing an interest. He knew I had some basic knowledge but trusted in my sword arm above all else.

Mirabelle and I had what I could call a romantic dinner that evening. Small table. Candlelight. Two bottles of wine. Some rather delicious food. And we talked and talked for what felt like hours, and I think with each hour, I fell in love with her a little bit more, just gazing as her face was lit up by the candlelight, and I definitely made her blush on more than on occasion.

Eventually, I just took her by the hand and led her towards the bed, slowly stripping off her clothes as we kissed, moving my lips down to every exposed bit of skin before laying her back on the bed once I had her naked. I ignored her already soaking wet pussy, focusing on every other part of her body, from her fingers to her little toes, and everywhere in between.

“Please, Ragnar,” she begged quietly, knowing what she wanted. I simply moved up and kissed her softly on the lips, which made her smile. “You’re such a tease.” She paused before adding, “And I love you even more for it.”

I moved down and tasted her, earning a loud moan as I wasted little time eating her out, my tongue delving her depths, ignoring her clit for the time being, as that would be my main focus once she needed release. I simply enjoyed her taste, holding onto her thighs as she writhed above, barely able to say five words without another moan, with plenty of short compliments about my talent, or she’d simply thank the gods for what was happening.

“I need to cum, Ragnar. Please make me cum,” she pleaded. I could keep teasing her, of course, but I loved making her cum. And cum hard. I generally didn’t like using my fingers nowadays, preferring just my tongue, but I had a feeling if I did tonight, it would be a big one.

Sliding a couple of fingers inside her, I used my tongue on her clit as I probed her for her g-spot. I knew where it was. I knew her body as well as she knew mine. She tried to clench her legs, using my free arm to keep them apart, her back arching instead as she mumbled almost incoherently. “Oh gods,” she cried out, and I knew she was getting close. “Right there, Ragnar. Don’t stop… Please don’t stop…”

Like that was ever going to happen! My focus was entirely on her and making her cum. She knew I would happily do it every night if she wanted, and right then and there, I could have happily made that promise and she definitely would have accepted it. Instead, I felt her start to clench my fingers, her hands tightening the sheets underneath her, body writhing even more.

“Oh gods,” she cried out, “Oh Ragnar…”

It was… beautiful. Glorious. Wonderful. I think perhaps the best orgasm I’d given her. She writhed and shuddered as I did not relent at all. My fingers were only gently probing her, my tongue only gently flicking her clit. I think it was perhaps that which made it better. It took her a long time for her to ask me to stop as she shuddered her way through I think a second one immediately, or perhaps it was the first that just didn’t stop.

“Okay,” she finally managed to whisper. Taking my fingers out, I cleaned those first as I slowly kissed up her body, feeling her shake as she was still very sensitive. When my face hovered over hers, she leaned up to give me a soft kiss, noticing her eyes glisten in the candlelight.

“I love you so much,” she whispered. It was said with such feeling, so much emotion, it nearly got to me immediately in return, leaning down to kiss her deeply, feeling her arms wrap around me to hold me in place.

I gave her a couple of minutes before she reached down, guiding my cock inside her. And then we made love. As turned on as I was, I warned her I wasn’t going to last long the first time. She didn’t mind, knowing I’d probably stay rock hard, adding with a smile that all she would do is make sure I rolled onto my back. Feeling her legs wrap around my, my thrusts were deep but slow and gentle, simply enjoying the feeling of being inside her, as much as she enjoyed me being inside her.

“Cum in me, Ragnar,” she breathed.

“I love it when you say that.”

She smiled, almost shyly. “That way, I know I’m yours forever.”

“I always thought of you immediately before a fight. I must return to Mirabelle. The final thought before I fought.”

I think that damned near made her cry again, covering that up by dragging my head down to kiss her again, before she rested her forehead against mine, her eyes simply staring into mine as I started to thrust a little faster, my climax quickly approaching. “Ragnar,” she breathed.

“I love you,” I whispered. Those were the final words before I finally did cum, burying myself as I kissed her hard, stifling the groan, her arms and legs tightening around my body to keep me in place. Once I was empty, and she was likely rather full, we lay joined together for a while, continuing to kiss, her hands caressing my body, running over muscles or scars earned over the years.

Pulling out, I was still rock hard so I was gently pushed onto my back next to her, Mirabelle eager to straddle my lap and sit down on my cock. All she did was lean forward as I adjusted my legs, watching as she ever so slowly started to ride me. “I’m going to make this the best orgasm ever,” she stated quietly, “You’ll have to catch me once I’m done, Ragnar. And I’m definitely going to cry again.”

“I’ll help dry the tears.”

“It’s emotional, Ragnar. You…” She had to stop, noticing the deep intake of breath. “I’m already used to having you with me every day.”

Reaching up to caress her cheek, that earned an instant, heart-warming smile. “We’ll work it out. I promise.”

I kept caressing her face as it soon turned into one of concentration as she slowly rode me, rarely picking up the tempo, never the hard, fast fucking I shared with others. I’ll admit, with Mirabelle, there was definitely a deeper connection shared. I loved Aela but, hand on heart, if I was made to choose, I’d choose Mirabelle every single time. I think she knew that, as well, though I knew she would never ask me to make that choice.

She was beautiful riding me, drinking in her body, watching how it reacted each time she descended my cock, her face light up when it hit the right spots inside her, lips slightly parted as she breathed, or even panted, her body lit up in candles with a slight sheen of sweat, loving the feeling of being buried inside her, so tight and warm.

“Ragnar,” she breathed, and I knew she was getting close.

“Hold it back. Make it big.”

“Trying,” she mumbled, “But I already want to cry.”

My hand was still on her cheek, so I caressed it again. “So cry. Nothing wrong with it. I’ll kiss away those tears.”

That simply earned a crooked grin, body movements she was making suggesting she wanted to cum but was definitely holding it back. No idea how a woman did that sometimes. Only when she was about to orgasm did she start to ride me a little faster, and when her tempo changed, that’s when I knew. Moving my hands, I let her concentrate on riding me, moving my eyes from her body to her face. When she her mouth started to open, and the groan seemed to arrive from deep inside her, I knew it was going to be a big one.

“Gods,” she moaned, now riding me faster still. “Oh gods…”

“Keep going, Mirabelle!” I urged gently.

“Oh Ragnar, I can’t…”

“Keep going, Mirabelle.”

Now she started to cry, but she kept on riding. I think she never wanted to stop. I certainly didn’t want her to. I could have watched and enjoyed this for every minute of the rest of my life. She rode me until her body simply gave up on her and she couldn’t help but fall forward onto me, her body continuously shaking as her orgasm ripped up and down her body. I wanted to hold her, but the lightest brush of her skin made her almost yelp, whispering she’d never felt so sensitive before. I thought about taking my cock out, but she insisted it remain inside her.

Once she felt relatively normal, she grabbed my hands to wrap around her, feeling her heart beat rapidly. I just held her tightly, feeling her shudder occasionally, before she lifted her head and I kept my promise, drying those tears with a thumb or a kiss. “I’m spending the rest of my life with you no matter what, Ragnar,” she whispered before leaning down to kiss me.

I’d always believed her but, in that moment, she’d never sounded so adamant. So I just nodded, holding her against me as she rested her head on my chest.

Leaving the next morning was probably the most difficult time so far. I could have just walked to the tomb, but figured I probably wouldn’t be returning to the College immediately after, so packed my supplies before saying goodbye to Mirabelle. When we hugged, part of me, and I mean a large part, simply didn’t want to let her go. At that moment, though I would have been completely bored staying there, I would have done so for her.

And she seemed to read my mind. “Go, Ragnar,” she whispered, “I love you.”

“I’ll be back as soon as I can. You have my word on that one.”

“And if you’re not, simply write me a letter, telling me what you’re up to. Just hearing from you will keep me going until next we meet.”

I kissed her a final time, then simply caressed her cheek as our eyes met, she smiled, then gently pushed me back with one of her hands. “Go, Ragnar. Your friends need your help.”

Not wanting to ride across the bridge, as more than once a horse had nearly toppled over the side with us mounted, I took the reins and started to lead it across, only turning to see Mirabelle waving me off once before I made it to firm ground, where I mounted up and followed the path down the side of the hill.

It was only a short ride along the shore to the tomb, only having to spend some time finding a safe place to cross, as the tomb was on its own island, and the water could be quite deep only metres from shore. Finding a crossing, I hugged the opposite sure before the tomb came into view, noticing the horses tied up, covered in furs to keep them warm. My friends were camped below, not inside, to my surprise. After greeting them and asking why, the three Companions admitted they did not wish to make camp in Ysgramor’s tomb, believing it would be disrespectful to do so within his place of rest.

Heading inside, we took the shortcut straight to the tomb, Lydia joining us, as it was no longer a secret to her we were werewolves, and the fact we were curing ourselves was a good thing. Standing around the brazier, lit by blue flames, we agreed that I would be cured first, simply because I was the last to undertake the ritual, therefore the wolf inside shouldn’t be as strong. I would be out of it once the spirit fought back, so the four armed themselves before I threw the head onto the flame.

“How do you feel?” Lydia asked, once the wolf spirit had been killed and I stood up.

I took a deep breath and gave my head a shake. My hearing felt… human. But it was also quiet. I wasn’t quite sure how to explain it, but I simply felt human again. And I think perhaps I had this silent rage within that had now disappeared. I felt normal. That’s the easiest way to put it. “Much better,” I replied.

We focused on the twins next, Farkas then Vilkas. The wolf spirit within each was strong but the four of us managed to defeat it without much hassle. The twins were certainly happier once they were cured, the first thing they stated suggesting they would look forward to Sovngarde, joining Kodlak, and rescuing all the lost Companions.

Last was Aela, and we all knew this would be the toughest fight, as she had taken most to the blood. I assured her she would be just fine once she was cured, but gave her a final kiss and a hug before she threw the head onto the fire. The wolf spirit that left her was enormous and vicious. Vilkas went down from an enormous swipe of its paw, while it leapt onto Lydia, forcing her down, and it was only a well-timed, and well-placed use of my Thu’um, that kept her alive. I beckoned the wolf spirit towards me, distracting it so the others could attack it. Once weakened, I drove my sword into its head, and it blinked out of existence.

It had taken as long as we expected, exiting the tomb to be greeted by sunshine, though it was still bitterly cold as always. Leading our horses to the opposite shore, Aela wondered if I wanted to head back to the college. I smiled before replying. “No, I think I have a few things to take care of first. You’re more than welcome to join here though.”

“I think I’ll stay with you this time, Ragnar,” she said.

“Which way?” Farkas wondered.

“Head west towards Dawnstar. There’s a path leading south, then we can hit the road eventually and make our way home. A bit longer but something different for once. Not like there’s any rush nowadays.”

It took two days for us to make the journey back to Whiterun, none of us in any rush to return as, apart from Companion business, I found myself at a loss of what to do next. Sure, the Dawnguard probably had work for me, but Isran had said he would get in contact with me, and after everything with Alduin, I figured I deserved a long break from being tasked with perhaps saving Skyrim a second time.

I lasted about a week back in Whiterun before suggesting I wanted to head back north. No fault of Aela or Lydia, as we’d had plenty of fun each night since our return, and I kept busy by going out hunting with Aela nearly every day. I asked if they would like to join me. Aela leapt at the chance, admitting she missed Mirabelle in our lives as well. Lydia was unsure until I assured her that she would certainly find herself involved if she joined us. I think she did in the end simply because she wanted to be with me.

Leaving instructions with the twins to send contracts up north, so we at least contributed to the workload, the three of us packed up our belongings, as I suggested we might not be back for some time. The girls were not surprised by that at all, and were happy to follow me north all the same. I was polite enough to let Balgruuf know I would be disappearing for a while. He just wished me good luck and hoped I would return sooner rather than later. I assured him that Whiterun was still my home.

We took the usual route, heading towards Windhelm before circling around and heading north to Winterhold. It was a two-day journey, taking it slow most of the time, as while I was keen to get there, we were also not in any particular rush. Absence did make the heart grow fonder, after all. There was some light teasing from the two girls about the fact I was already returning north, as they knew I was bored rigid most of the time, but by now understood I could put up with that if I was with her, and with them all.

Dismounting before we crossed the bridge, we secured the horses before heading inside, the sun having already disappeared, the temperature continuing to plummet with each passing minute. We headed straight for Mirabelle’s quarters, and I don’t think any of us expected to walk in and find what we did. Mirabelle was on her bed and was quite clearly having a lot of fun masturbating. The toy sliding in and out of her pussy was a walrus tusk clearly shaped into a cock, and the three of us watched as it was soon quite obvious who she was thinking about. My name was stated every few seconds.

So I quietly approached the bed and sat down. Admittedly, I did give her a fright when she opened her eyes before I quickly leaned down and kissed her. She simply smiled and continuing to fuck herself. “I’ve missed you,” she moaned.

“I can see that. When did you get that?”

“I had it specially made a while ago. I’ve kept it hidden for every time you’ve disappeared.” Aela and Lydia sat on the other side of the bed, Mirabelle smiling at them before looking back at me, still slowly fucking herself with the dildo. “I need to cum, Ragnar. I’ll cum, then we can talk.”

“Want any help?”

“Just watch me.”

So that’s what I did, the three of us sitting back as Mirabelle fucked herself with the dildo, but with the three of us there, she definitely put on a show. I could only run my eyes up and down her body, taking in every movement she made, particularly as she increased the speed of the thrusts into her, though her eyes never stopped looking at me. “Ragnar,” she breathed. I did involve myself by kissing her, and when my hand moved down her body, she eventually let me take control of the dildo so she could grab my body.

“This is different,” I admitted softly.

“I’ve been lonely without you,” she whispered.

I increased the speed of the thrusts. I was now rock hard and desperately wanted to do something. I think she was teasing me by not letting me do anything else except kiss her and use the dildo. So I eventually lay down beside her, wrapping my arm around her while using the dildo with the other. She loved that and when the two girls lay against her back, she was definitely turned on.

“Gods, I need to cum, Ragnar,” she breathed.

“Then cum for me, Belle.”

“Can you pleasure me with your mouth afterwards?”

“All three of us can if you want.”

“Oh, I like the sound of that.”

“We’re staying here for the time being, Miri,” Aela added, “No more coming and going, not unless we have a job to do.”

Mirabelle just looked at me and started to blink. “Really?” she asked softly. I just nodded and that earned me one hell of a kiss before she needed to hug me tightly.

It didn’t take much more to make her cum. I think it was what I was doing plus the fact we were there which certainly helped her. I removed the toy and handed it to the girls, who took great delight in licking it clean, complimenting Mirabelle in regards to her taste, before casting a keen eye over the dildo and both were adamant it looked like mine. Mirabelle simply blushed and shrugged.

Dressing was probably a good idea, because if she had remained naked, it would have ended with all of us naked and forgoing dinner and everything else. After she dressed, we headed downstairs and towards the dining hall. Everyone was surprised to see we had returned so soon but were glad we had done so, Tolfdir even remarking that Mirabelle had been quieter than usual during our absence. That just made me feel even worse for leaving.

The four of us eventually gathered up on the roof, wrapped up in furs, sipping at wine as we watched the stars. It was another clear night, no wonder it was so cold, but the view was spectacular.

“Why have you come back so soon?” Mirabelle finally asked.

“Couldn’t stand being away. So if you’re serious about coming with me, then I can certainly remain here with you until we decide what to do next.”

She hugged me tightly again, quickly joined by the other two. “I’ve already made up my mind, Ragnar. It’s just getting everything in order that would allow me to leave but maintain some sort of position here. If it doesn’t work, Tolfdir doesn’t want the job but I know one or two others who are more than capable of rising to the challenge.”

“Are you sure?” Aela asked. She already knew what I thought.

“I know what I want, Aela. I don’t need to be here to practice magic, and there are plenty of places, even in Skyrim, where I could still teach the practicalities of magic. My life is not defined by the role I maintain here. I’ve loved every minute here, but my belief is that matters of the heart are far greater and mean so much more to me.”

The next morning, I was standing on the elevated walkway, looking out over the surrounding countryside, sipping at a hot drink, when I was joined by Aela. I glanced her way and she looked ready to share something rather important. I knew her that well nowadays.

“What are you doing, Ragnar?”

I knew exactly what she was asking so I feigned ignorance. “Enjoying a hot morning brew before deciding what to do today.”

Glancing her way, at least she smiled for a moment. “You know what I’m talking about, Ragnar. That woman fucking loves you so much, and yet here we are, the four of us, when to be honest, it should only be you two.”

“She doesn’t mind the arrangement. Don’t forget she has a lot of affection for you too.”

“Nothing like you, Ragnar. This is a woman ready to give up everything to be with you. She will follow you wherever, wants to start a family, and simply wants to settle down. And yet… here we are, her, you, me and Lydia. Part of me just doesn’t feel it’s right.”

“Do you want to end things between us?”

She didn’t hesitate. “No. Not at all. If it did, I’d be crushed. But… That part of me that empathises with her, can see how she really does feel about you.”

“Don’t you love me too?”

“Like no-one else, Ragnar. But I can also see how she looks at you. And, to be honest, I see how you look at her.”

“I don’t look at you the same way?”

“You do but…”

I finally reached across and pulled her towards me. “I’m not giving you up, Aela, and I’m not letting you push me away. Mirabelle has been perfectly clear about everything. She wants to be with me but she certainly enjoyed having yourself and Lydia in our lives too.”

“I just don’t know, Ragnar…”

To prove my point, I grabbed her hand and led her back downstairs, Mirabelle already busy at work. Asking Aela to tell her what she’d just told me, she barely got halfway through what she told me before Mirabelle stood up and kissed her. And I mean the sort of kiss that had Aela responding immediately. I stood there, folded my arms, and waited for them to finish.

Only when breaking apart did Mirabelle state, “You are so wrong, it’s not even funny. We are currently a threesome, Aela, and we always will be. I can see how much Lydia loves Ragnar, despite slight denials that she’s only here because of her duty, but her tune will change eventually. And I know Ragnar might fall in love with one or two others. What you need to realise, Aela, is that I consider myself blessed by the gods that you are both in my life right now. I would never, ever ask you to give him up, and I hope you don’t think I’m going to let you walk away either, because I can assure you, my feelings for you are incredibly strong as well.”

I watched Aela as Mirabelle laid out the truth. By the end, she needed to wipe her eyes before they held each other. “Sorry,” Aela finally murmured, “I just thought… I see how you look at him…”

“I see how he looks at you as much as he looks at me, Aela. And I know one thing. He’d die for both of us.”

“I’d kill anyone who’d harm a single hair on your head,” I stated, rather vehemently to prove my point.

“Want me to prove how much I want you here with me too, Aela?”

As Mirabelle led her towards the bed, I took that as my cue to leave. Mirabelle did ask if I wanted to watch, but I suggested they should have some privacy. Aela ran towards and give me a hug before I left, holding her tightly as I knew she released a couple of tears, murmuring at apology to me as well. I just kissed her forehead and assured her that it wasn’t necessary, but now she knew how Mirabelle really felt.

I disappeared for a few hours, walking down the coast, eventually finding an old shipwreck. I think it had once been inhabited by bandits, though the bodies suggested they’d been killed, the wounds suggesting it might have been a fellow bandit gang, or perhaps a Companion contract I wasn’t aware of. Due to the cold, the bodies were simply frozen. I had a look around but didn’t find all that much worth taking back.

Before returning to the College, I stopped in Winterhold for an ale, the innkeeper informing me that news had filtered north about the success of the Dragonborn. I was surprised she didn’t know who I was, but it wasn’t like I went around announcing it. Only those closest to me, and those who needed the information, actually knew the truth.

Returning to the College once it was dark, I found my three girls in our quarters, sitting at the large table, enjoying dinner. I joined them as usual, asking about their day. Lydia was still learning magic, Mirabelle and Aela shared a glance and suggested they’d had a fun afternoon. “Yeah, they certainly were when I walked in,” Lydia stated.

“Oh, and what did you do?” I wondered.

“I just watched, to be honest. There was something about it that suggested it was only about those two.”

Aela met my eyes and returned a shy smile. Mirabelle grabbed my hand, giving it a squeeze. “She’s convinced, Ragnar. The four of us here will stay together, no matter what.” Leaning close, she added, “I think the two orgasms I gave her with my mouth convinced her.” I needed to shuffle at that thought, Mirabelle letting go of my hand and placing it on my crotch. “Want to fuck all three of us tonight?”

“As soon as we’ve finished dinner, I’m getting all of you naked, then you’re getting on your knees.”

“Oh, now that sounds like a good way to start the evening.”

“Anal?” Lydia wondered, to the amusement of the two others.

“If you want, Lydia. You know I won’t say no to it.”

“Yes, definitely anal then. Been a while since you’ve fucked my arse nice and hard. Mirabelle?”

“Oh no, my pussy needs some attention tonight and it craves something long, thick and attached to a rather nice body. What about you, Aela?”

“On my back, though I want you on my face, Mirabelle. Need to return the favour, after all.”

Mirabelle leaned across, gave her one hell of a kiss, and assured her it was a deal. Unsurprisingly, dinner was finished either rather quickly or not finished at all, as quite frankly, none of us could concentrate after that.

The next few hours solidified the fact we were now a foursome, Lydia very much now one of my three girls, and the two others showed her plenty of affection. As for myself, while I was the centre of attention most of the time, I could quite happily sit back and watch two or three of them pleasure each other. There was no doubt Mirabelle and Aela loved me completely. As for Lydia, I believe she already did but had trouble admitting it, particularly in front of the others. I might have to talk to her later, but she loved the fact she received just as much attention and affection as the other two.

I felt like a king as we went to sleep that night, surrounded by the three women I loved above all.

Chapter 48: Cold Skin, Dead Heart

I enjoyed at least a few weeks of peace at the College with my three girls, and it wasn’t the continuous fuck-fest you may imagine. Not saying we didn’t make love, fuck or even enjoy some group sex at times, but once Mirabelle let Aela know her true feelings on the matters, Aela never raised it again, while Lydia found herself as part of our little foursome very quickly.

And I managed to stave off the boredom mostly. When Mirabelle was busy working, I’d head out and explore the area. I found a few shipwrecks along the coast and felt like an adventurer once again. Aela and Lydia would occasionally join me, and on the rare occasion, we’d find ourselves finding a nice little treasure trove of goodies. We always went armed, as more than once, we’d stumble across a bandit camp that required clearing. We also found other camps that had already been wiped out, figuring it was down to fellow bandits or possibly the Companions.

Aela and I would also go hunting occasionally, though the bleak snow landscapes didn’t offer all that much. We’d find the occasional cave, though we were always careful entering those. I could tackle most things but neither of us wanted to wander into a bear pit.

As for Lydia, she surprised me by really focusing on developing her magical talents. When I asked her why, she was suddenly shy before admitting she was learning so, if the worst ever happen, that is I was injured, she could at least heal me before I received medical treatment. Plus, she admitted to enjoying learning magic, and her teachers were full of praise when I asked about her progress.

But I knew it wouldn’t last. Not that anything bad was going to happen, but my fate did not rest in my hands, and I knew that, one day, I’d end up being dragged away again.

It happened one afternoon. I was enjoying some alone time with Lydia. She was on all fours, just the way she liked it, while I was fucked her hard from behind. When we were alone together, we would mix up what we did. Sometimes it would soft and tender, other times it was a hard, fast fuck. We agreed that we both liked anal, but I would leave it up to her to decide what she wanted, as I was happy either way. Today, she was getting fucked hard in the arse.

Lydia lowered her head down as I really started to drive into her. She would grunt, groan and moan the entire time, but loved every second, particularly when I leaned forward and started to mention rude things into her ear. She was always very agreeable while I pounded her arse.

“Well, I should have expected this,” I heard Mirabelle state, feeling her sit on the bed next to me, giving me then Lydia a kiss on the cheek. “Is it good, Lydia?”

“By Ysmir, Miri, you should try it sometime…”

I glanced at Mirabelle, who smiled at me. “Occasionally, I’ll see him do this, and a small part of me thinks ‘Gods, I’d love him to just pin me down like you and absolutely fuck me’. But, as I said, a small part. I’ve enjoyed him in my arse more than once now, but what he does with you is… something else.”

Leaned across to kiss her. “And you know I loved making love to you like that. What Lydia and I do…” I stopped talking as I gave her a few hard, slow thrusts, “Well, it is different.”

“Anyway, I don’t mean to interrupt, but a letter has arrived, Ragnar. Wanted you to know now as it’s from the Dawnguard.”

That brought my fucking to a halt. “Know what it says?”

“Of course not, Ragnar. It’s your letter. It’s on the dinner table for when you’re finished here.”

“Want to join in?” Lydia asked, able to speak since I wasn’t moving.

“No, you two have fun. Let me know what the letter states, Ragnar. I have a feeling…”

“Aye, I’ll probably be leaving soon.” All Mirabelle did was kiss my cheek before leaving. Turning my attention back to Lydia, I leaned forward and kissed her cheek. “Nearly had enough?”

“Aye, my arse is feeling a little tender now. Need to cum?”

“I’m close. Where would you like it?”

“On my face this time.”

So I pulled out as Lydia got on her knees and started to please me. She knew how to bring me off quickly, and within a matter of minutes I left a load on her face. She enjoyed that, lying back, giggling away, as I cleaned myself up before grabbing the letter from the dinner table.

It was as I expected. Isran wished for me to return to Fort Dawnguard as soon as possible as he had a task apparently only the Dragonborn could complete. For some reason, he asked for me to come alone, explicitly stating not to bring anyone else. I wondered why, but I figured Aela and Lydia would be happy to remain anyway.

I told the three of them over dinner. Mirabelle expected it so didn’t get upset. I think Aela was miffed about not being invited. Lydia was adamant about joining me no matter what before I suggested she should just do the letter stated. She wasn’t happy but agreed to my request.

Not wanting to hang around, as I’d never end up leaving, I departed the next morning, my three girls joining me as I packed the bag onto my horse before I cuddled Lydia first, who whispered that her arse was still sore after the day before, Aela, who told me to be safe and return, before finally Mirabelle, who simply said that she loved me. Grabbing the reins, I led my horse across the bridge before mounting up to begin the long journey south.

I was tempted to visit Riften before heading to the fort, perhaps to see an old friend, but I knew that would be opening old wounds, so although I rode towards the gate, I eventually turned off and headed to the fort. Perhaps one day I would drop in, though hopefully she has found someone by now.

A stable had been built near the fort where I could leave my horse, so after leaving it safe and sound, I headed into the fort, finding Isran in the practice room. I didn’t announce myself, simply watching him work, impressed with his technique, before he finally sensed my presence. “Ah, Dragonborn. Good of you to come so quickly.”

“Well, your letter sounded urgent so I figured I’d leave immediately.”

Grabbing a cloth, he wiped his face before I followed him into the dining hall, a tankard each placed in front of us by one of the servants. He took a sip before continuing. “I know it sounded like an odd request but there is a reason why. I received a letter from Solitude two weeks ago, asking for you specifically.”

“Oh, what for?”

“Apparently there is a vampire problem and they asked for you specifically. And only you.”

“Why?”

Isran shrugged. “No idea but the letter was explicit. Send only the Dragonborn. Considering where the letter has come from, I guess it’s either General Tullius or Jarl Elisif who has made the request. It had both their signatures on it.”

“Guess I should leave soon then.”

“Aye. Rest up tonight and get there as soon as you can. No idea how urgent it is.” Before I could get up, he did state, “Your friend Delphine has been around recently.”

“What makes you mention that?” I wondered.

“Well, it’s clear there’s been a falling out since she’s only working by herself nowadays. I haven’t questioned her as to what happened but she’s been rather moody whenever she returns.”

“Where is she now?”

“She has no real mission so she’s out hunting for vampires or is working for that group I knows she is with. Far as I know, anyway. Care to share what happened, because from what I remember, you were rather friendly, including your other friend, Lydia.”

“She requested me to perform an action I would not consider doing. She chose to end our relationship because of my refusal. I hold no real ill feeling towards her though the same cannot be said for others. I simply won’t do what she asked. She chose to walk away.”

“Well, as long as it doesn’t affect what we’re trying to do here.”

“It won’t. I just don’t think we’ll work alongside each other very often from now on.”

That satisfied him and he left me to it. I joined the rest for dinner later that evening before retiring to a spare room. Isran and the rest had been busy as the fort now looked lived in, at least, and from the new faces at the dinner table, they’d certainly been recruiting. I hadn’t heard of too many vampire attacks, but I had a feeling they attacked people outside of cities. Far easier to grab the lone traveller than attempt to grab someone behind city walls.

I departed the next morning, looking over a map to figure out the best route to Solitude. Which route I did take, it would be one hell of a ride, ensuring I had a tent as I figured I’d be camping for at least two nights. Travelling by myself wasn’t a big problem. Sure, I missed my girls at times, but when I was in the middle of nowhere with just my tent and a campfire, able to gaze upon the night sky, it was those brief moments that I actually felt a sense of peace. And now that I was cured, I was certainly sleeping like a log. Never realised how interrupted my sleep was until the night after I was cured.

Approaching Solitude three days after I’d left Riften, I stabled my horse as usual before heading inside. Compared to Whiterun, the capital was a hive of activity, needing to thread my way through the marketplace, ever so crowded with people wanting to buy fresh produce. The path towards the Blue Palace was a little quieter, at least, though there was plenty of noise coming out of the Bards College.

Walking into the Blue Palace, a guard asked me to hand over any weapons, giving him my sword, dagger and shield, before I was led upstairs. “Who are you?” I was then asked.

“Ragnar Dragonborn. I believe I’m expected.”

“Ah, yes. Sybille Stentor wishes to see you. She is currently in her quarters upstairs. Go left once at the top, then it’s the third door.”

Knocking on the door, I waited for it to be opened. It eventually was. “Who are you?” she asked.

“Ragnar Dragonborn.”

“Ah, you’ve come at least. Please,” she stepped to the side, “Come right in.”

Doing as she asked, I walked in and quickly looked around. No doubting she was a mage with all the magical paraphernalia around the room. I knew enough to recognise soul gems, for example. Taking one of the spare seats, she poured me a cup of wine before sitting across from me. “Nice of you to come all this way, Dragonborn.”

“No problem but I do wonder why I’m here. Didn’t think Solitude would have problems with vampires.”

“Well, there are a few reasons why your presence was requested. I’ll get to the first one immediately. General Tullius knows exactly who you are.”

I couldn’t help smirk. “I figured.”

“He’s going to join us shortly as he would have been notified of your arrival once you gave the guard at the door your name. Don’t do anything stupid.”

“I won’t but I do wonder what he wants now.”

“But that does relate to the second thing. Elisif has not stopped talking about you since she returned from the council you held at High Hrothgar. And I mean every single day, Dragonborn. There is no doubt in my mind that woman is… well, I’m sure you can imagine.”

“Is that why you invited me here?”

“I care about those I work for and do not wish to see them hurt. So there was an ulterior motive, which is that I wanted to cast my eye over you first before agreeing to anything that Elisif might want.”

“I also have personal circumstances as well.”

Before she could ask what, there was a knock at the door, General Tullius walking in, followed by a woman in Legion uniform. She stood at the door while Tullius took a seat at the table, Sybille pouring him a cup of wine as well. He looked at me in silence for at least a couple of minutes. I just returned the look, though kept my face friendly.

“Soon as I walked into High Hrothgar, I knew it was you. The assassination attempt. What happened at Helgen. And now you’re the Dragonborn? I think it’s the Eight playing a ridiculous prank on us all.” He sighed. “And now my hands are tied. I cannot possibly arrest the Dragonborn, charge him again with the same crimes, and then see him executed. The people will not stand for that, not after you saved the world.” He sighed again. “And then there is Lady Elisif. I don’t know what you said or did, Dragonborn, but that woman is contemplating doing something very stupid. I’m sure Sybille has already shared a detail or two.”

“She has.”

“I walked in here in two minds, Dragonborn. Part of me still think you should see the inside of a jail cell for a long time to come. But the other part of me has been told of the good deeds you have done since Helgen. Becoming a Companion and then Harbinger. The work you did against Alduin and ending his reign of terror. And I understand you are now a member of the Dawnguard. So I guess you are restoring your honour. But there remains one question, and I wish for an honest answer.” I nodded for him to continue. “Did anyone from the Dark Brotherhood make it out alive?”

“Before I reply, I want a guarantee.”

“Name your price and I’ll see if it’s agreeable.”

“Quite simple, really. Once I reply, that is a line through everything. I have a clean slate. I like to believe I have cleansed my conscience, my soul, over the past months doing what I’ve done.”

“Indeed. Even the Emperor has heard, knowing exactly who you are. He wishes to meet with you again. Preferably this time without his best soldiers in the same room.”

“Really? He does?”

“He wishes to meet the man that saved Skyrim and possibly his Empire. Of course, there will be certain… restrictions if you were to meet him. But I can assume you no longer desire to kill the man, at least.”

“No. Performing another assassination will simply undo much of the good work I’ve done.”

“So, the Dark Brotherhood?”

“If you can give me a map?” Tullius asked Rikke, who headed outside and returned quickly. Rolling it out across the table, I pointed with a finger. “You’ll find the last sanctuary there. A hidden door and a phrase you need to get inside. You won’t find many people in there, and without me, they can’t receive contracts. Burn the Night Mother’s body would be my best suggestion, then dump the ashes into the sea.”

“I understand one of them is a child?”

“Aye, but she’s a vampire. There should only be two others in addition to her.”

“And that’s it?” I nodded. He turned to Rikke. “Have a detachment of men prepared to leave at once. This time, we leave nothing to chance.”

“Aye, sir. I’ll head out immediately.”

After she departed, he turned back to me. “As for you, Dragonborn, the slate is now clean. The Emperor has already instructed me not to arrest you, and as far as he is concerned, your previous actions are forgiven, not entirely forgotten. He also suggests you stay on the right path going forward. As for myself, I’m still in two minds, but I cannot forget the fact that, thanks to actions you have taken, the dragon threat has ended. For that, I can only say thank you.”

“Don’t need any thanks but I appreciate it all the same.”

“Very good. Now, I know Sybille wanted to speak with you, so I’ll leave you to it.”

Once he departed, Sybille got straight to the point and, to be honest, it sounded rather simple and was left wondering why they needed me to do it. When I raised that point, Sybille simply smiled. “A simple test, Dragonborn. That’s all. I want to know if myth matches reality.” She obviously ran her eyes up and down. “On appearances alone, you definitely meet what I thought. I’m a sure a few vampires won’t be too much trouble.”

Putting a cross on my map and with some vague directions, I headed out of the Blue Palace, back through Solitude, to the stables and mounted my horse. Finding the cave wasn’t particularly difficult, though I did run into one or two creatures of the forest on the way, including a spriggan. I’d dealt with more than one over time, but they could be tough to kill, particularly if there was more than one.

Wandering inside, it was rather dark, and it was only at times like these that I missed the enhanced senses provided by the werewolf blood. Thankfully, there were braziers providing some light so I could at least move forward with caution, sword already unsheathed, ready to strike. The first chamber I entered was empty, though the skulls suggested something untoward might be found further in. Following a long tunnel, it emptied into a larger chamber, where I could see an altar and a few pews. I counted at least ten vampires, but first, I needed their attention.

Cupping my mouth, I just yelled, “Hey, vampires!”

All heads turned towards me and a loud hiss erupted as I just returned a sarcastic wave. Moving as one, all of them headed my way, including the one standing at the altar, wearing robes, so I assumed he was the Master. Once they were all in range, I simply used my Thu’um.

YOL – TOOR – SHUL

Most of them dropped to the ground, their screams echoing around the cave as they burned. Only the Master Vampire managed to escape the fury of the flames, raising my shield just in time as he cast a spell. Wasting little time, I closed in on him, and he realised quickly that he was unarmed against someone far more powerful. I could have used my Thu’um again, but I wanted to kill him myself, making him back up until he could go no further. He attempted another spell, stupidly holding out his hands. Without protection, I simply ran him through with my sword. His hands going down to cover his wound, I quickly adjusted and took his head.

There was no point looking around. All I did was make sure all the others were dead before leaving, so that meant hacking off some heads. All in a day’s work, I thought, walking out, still wondering why I’d been requested to handle such a simple task.

Making it back to Solitude with just enough light in the sky to see where I was going, I headed straight to the Blue Palace to let Sybille know the cave was cleared. Knocking on her door again, she didn’t seem all that surprised to see me again so quickly, ushering me in to sit down, handing over another cup of wine.

“I take it the cave is cleared?”

“Aye, was a simple task.”

“Filthy creatures, aren't they? Living in the darkness, like they do. So uncivilized. I prefer finery. Like this,” she said, gesturing around the room.

But something about what she’d just said… Sipping at my cup, I gazed over the rim at her, face hidden by the hood. Something about those eyes which stared back into mine. Before I could say anything, she continued. “I’ve heard rumours about you, Ragnar Dragonborn. Well, not rumours. I hear things, like the arrangement you currently have at the College. Your long list of, shall we say, lovers. And I know Elisif wants… Well, what she wants and what she can have are two very different things. But I certainly won’t be letting you get your claws into her without…”

“Without what?”

She stood up and walked to the door, locking it, before returning to the table, resuming her seat opposite me. It was only then that she removed her hood to reveal what she was. My first thought was that she was absolutely beautiful. Long brunette hair. Yellow-orange eyes. A face that seemed carved by a master sculptor. The smile was both confident yet nervous. Strange.

My second thought was that she absolutely, categorically, a vampire. No doubt, one hundred percent fact.

My third thought amused me, as I think she wanted to fuck me.

“I am what you think, Ragnar. And I’m sure that leads to many questions in that head of yours. I’ll put it simply. I have been a vampire for a long time now and have managed to keep it a secret. No-one knows how old I am but I’m old enough to have seen a lot of friends die over the years. I won’t tell you how I became one, that’s not important. What I can tell you is that I have done and will do nothing to jeopardise my position here. I loved Torygg, I loved his father, and the man who came before him. I have served Solitude before and will do so until my dying breath.”

“Why be honest with me if no-one else knows?”

She smirked. “I wanted to get my hands onto you before Elisif decided to make her feelings known. Treat me well tonight and I’ll speak nothing but glowing terms.”

I sipped at my wine a little more. “I take it this is what you actually asked me here for?”

“Yes and no. As I said, I’ve heard much about you, Dragonborn. The only question I have is… Would being with a vampire be too much?”

I shrugged. “Never been with one before, though that’s because most of them are trying to kill me, and none of them are, quite frankly, as gorgeous as yourself.”

She couldn’t blush, but she certainly looked away, left thinking that was the first compliment she’d received in a long time. “I know most of the people here only tolerate me, but I can’t let people get close because of what I am.”

“That doesn’t really scare me.”

Standing up, she rounded the table and offered her hand, as I got to my feet. She stood a lot shorter than me, and I figured her for a Breton. Certainly not a Nord, at least. “I want everything tonight, Ragnar. Know what I mean?” I just nodded, unable to stop the chuckle. “As I said, I’ve heard stories, Dragonborn. Again, I’m wondering if myth matches reality.”

I leaned down to kiss her straight away, definitely catching her by surprise, before she responded, not waiting long to mould her body into mine. I’ll admit, it was a little weird at first, because of what she was, and she lacked certain things in comparison to, say, someone alive. Still, I’ve done weirder things in my life.

What I quickly understood was that she was keen, very keen, to get down to business, her robes disappearing rather quickly and she was in quite a hurry to get me undressed at the same time. It was only once she had me naked that she stopped. “Oh my,” she whispered, grasping my now very erect cock, “I’d heard rumours…”

“Even this far?”

She smiled up at me. “Ragnar, the Dragonborn has gained a reputation not just for his fighting prowess.” She stroked me a few times. “What are the chances of you…”

“I usually stay hard after I’ve cum, Sybille. Won’t be a problem.”

I think she hurt her knees the speed at which she dropped to them, and when I felt her take my cock in her mouth, I couldn’t help the groan. She might not have been with a man in a long time, but she certainly hadn’t forgotten how to please one. I simply looked down as she looked up at me, caressing her hair as she slowly took my length.

“Can’t remember the last time I sucked cock,” she said before resuming.

“Well, you’re the first vampire to ever suck my cock so…”

She had me going within a few minutes, and that’s when she did stop to ask, “Would it bother you if… you know…”

I surprised her by leaning down, gently picking her up, and carrying her to the bed. I lay down as she joined me, though swung herself round, offering her pussy to me. What surprised me is that she was completely bald and very wet. I didn’t know all that much about vampires, but if I could make her cum, then that could only be a good thing. So I buried my face and used all my own expertise, and it amused me when she could no longer concentrate on blowing me.

“Ragnar,” she breathed.

“You taste rather nice, Sybille,” I stated before burying my face again.

“Oh gods,” she cried out a little later, “I haven’t had anyone make me cum… in…” She cried out again, and I was surprised at how quickly she was approaching an orgasm. “Make me cum and I’ll continue,” she pleaded, “Make me cum, Ragnar. My god, I need it.”

I flipped her over and buried my face again, making sure I looked up her pale body, her eyes boring into mine as I focused on her clit, sliding two fingers inside her to find the other spot. That drove her wild, back arching, body writhing, and I hadn’t lied. She tasted like, well, any human or elf I’d been with.

She came hard, her thighs gently squeezing my head as she clenched my fingers, though asked me to keep going until she couldn’t take anymore. Withdrawing my fingers, I sucked them clean before I felt a hand ask me to move up, not surprised by the urgency of her kiss. Any thoughts of me being blown ended when she used her other hand to guide my cock inside her. I wasn’t going to complain, as I groaned loudly when I entered her.

“Oh god, Ragnar,” she moaned.

“You’re telling me,” I groaned. She was so very tight. It felt wonderful.

“How big is your cock?!” she exclaimed, as I slowly buried myself, “My god, I haven’t felt anything like this in years.”

Once I was buried, she immediately wrapped her legs around me, and begged for me to fuck her. So that’s what I did. I wasn’t going to last long that first time, as her blowjob had nearly got me off to begin with, but I knew I could cum and keep going. So that’s what I did, lasting barely five minutes before I buried myself and unloaded inside her, feeling her arm and legs both wrap around me tighter as I did. Then I simply kept going, which earned a smile from her, holding her hands back on the pillows as I started to pump into her harder and faster, watching her face for any reactions.

Rolling onto my back, taking her with me, she definitely loved the new few minutes as she started to ride my cock. And, I’ll admit, she looked beautiful. Obviously very pale but, if not for the eyes and the occasional showing of teeth, you’d never have guessed she was a vampire. Breasts were about a handful, sitting up so I could pleasure her there as she continued to ride me. Grabbing a handful of her arse, which was firm but soft enough to grab a handful.

She came again, in fact she came twice while riding my cock before she cried enough for a little while, pushing me flat while she lay on my chest. Holding her was a little strange as she did feel cold, though I put it out of my mind. With my cock still buried inside her, it felt rather nice.

“As I said, Ragnar, I want to be pleased completely,” she said a little later, “How do you want me?”

“On your knees.”

She complied immediately, getting on all fours, though lowering her head so she could look back at me. She had a little oil for me to use, assuring me nothing else would be a problem because she didn’t eat. I had a chuckle, as I hadn’t thought of that bonus. She gasped when I prodded her and grunted when I gently slid my cock inside her. I took my time, letting her get used to it, watching her face, amused by the fact she was immediately loving it.

Burying myself completely, I leaned forward to rest my lips by her ear. “So, if I’m understanding you correctly, you want your arse fucked by the Dragonborn?”

“Right now, more than anything.” Moving her face, I gave her a soft kiss before giving her a hard thrust. She grunted but smiled. “Just like that, Ragnar. I’m yours for tonight.”

“Just tonight?”

“I can’t get attached, Ragnar. Not if Elisif… you know…”

“Best make the most of it then.”

I didn’t fuck her like I did Lydia or Haelga. I made sure it was pleasurable for the both of us. Sitting back, I took her with me so her back was against my chest, holding her with one arm, gently fucking her. She turned her head so we could kiss me. Resting a hand on her chest, I said, “I’d love to feel a heartbeat with what we’re doing right now.”

It was the wrong thing to say as, within a few seconds, I felt her shudder and choke back a sob. I immediately stopped, though she reached behind. “Don’t,” she mumbled, “It was said with kindness, not cruelty.”

“Sorry, I didn’t…”

She turned to look at me. “No, don’t apologise,” she said softly, caressing my cheek, “For the first time in a long time,” she grabbed my hand, putting it back on her chest, “I would like to feel it too, because I think it would be going very fast right now.” She kissed me before adding, “Keep going, Ragnar. I want to feel you cum in me again one last time.”

I lay back down and she hopped on, and once we got comfortable, she slowly rode my cock as we made out constantly. I eventually felt the need to cum again, and she loved having her arse fucked hard and fast for a good few minutes before I came again. That was me done for the night then and there, as I was exhausted, though she kept my cock inside her until it finally softened and fell out. After we cleaned up, I was ready to just get dressed and go, not thinking she’d want me to actually stay.

That’s when she grabbed my hand and pulled me back to her bed, spooning against me as she covered us with the blanket. “I didn’t think…”

“Do you mind?”

I softly kissed her neck. “Not at all.”

We lay in silence for a while before she then unloaded on me. She told me everything. How long she’d likely been alive. How she’d become a vampire. How she’d killed the person responsible. How she had adapted to life as a vampire while living at court. How she’d seen so many people come and go. Then she told me about what happened that day when Torygg died. It was obvious she carried tremendous guilt over what happened. It certainly wasn’t her fault.

“Do you think I’m evil?” she asked softly.

“Not at all. I don’t think all vampires are evil. Some are the way they are through an evil act. You, Sybille, are trying to do what is right.”

She turned around to look into my eyes. “I’ve never told anyone any of this, Ragnar, yet within one night, I’ve told you everything.”

“I have a gift, it seems.” That made her giggle before leaning forward to kiss her. “But I’m honoured you chose me to share it with.”

She cuddled in closer as I held her in my arms. “I can’t get attached, Ragnar. It will just be too awkward. I know Elisif is already thinking things regarding you. So, after tonight, we will act like tonight never happened. Despite how hard it’s going to be.”

Lifting her chin, I said, “We could make love in the morning before I go?”

She caressed my cheek and kissed me again. “I’d love that,” she whispered. Snuggling down into me, she fell asleep rather quickly. I held her, gently stroking her back, going over what had just happened over the previous few hours. How the hell was I going to explain this one?

After we made love the next morning, Sybille and I dressed before she checked the coast was clear. She was polite enough to escort me to the front door, where she offered her goodbyes. “You have my thanks for taking care of that problem, Dragonborn,” she announced, one or two guards in close enough proximity.

“It was no problem, Miss Stentor. Glad to be of assistance. If you need me again, you know where I am.”

I was surprised at myself that part of me wanted to kiss her goodbye. Looking into her eyes, she definitely wanted the same thing. We had to make do with a quick hold of the hand and a gentle squeeze. “Farewell, Dragonborn, and thank you,” she said softly.

“I’m sure I’ll see you soon, Sybille.”

“I hope so.”

It was a long trip back to Fort Dawnguard, and I had a lot of time to think about what I’d just been up to. I knew from my track record that I’d slept with most women I’d met quite quickly, but sleeping with a vampire was something else altogether. Strangely, it didn’t feel too much different apart from one or two obvious difference. But we’d clearly made a connection as well. I did wonder if, despite what she said, I’d warm one side of her bed again at least. As for what she said about Elisif, I’d find it rather difficult to say no to her. From our brief meeting, I remembered she was beautiful, and was left wanting to get to know her better. From what Sybille shared, it might come to fruition eventually.

Back at Fort Dawnguard, I once again arrived with the fort under attack from vampires again. Dismounting my horse, I ran in and joined in the fight, cutting down one vampire after another. Once I had some space, I used my Thu’um as well, which certainly attracted attention. With the others joining me, we formed a line and beat them back. The vampires broke quickly and tried to run, taking crossbow bolts in the back for good measure.

“Good timing, Dragonborn!” Celann stated, clapping me on the shoulder.

“You were holding your own. Just figured you could use some help. Isran inside?”

“Aye, he was getting ready in case they made it in. You should make your report.”

He was as gruff as always but was pleased to hear my mission was a success and that I’d spread the good name of the Dawnguard. “No doubt word will spread and we’ll find more requests. In fact, we’ll find ourselves tasked with non-vampire threats if we’re not careful.”

“Anything new for me?”

“Yes, but for now, rest and relax. I can tell you in the morning.” He paused before adding, “One more thing. Delphine is here.”

“That’s not a problem. I’m sure we can be civil.”

“Just making sure. I don’t want falling out in the ranks.”

The first thing I wanted was a meal and a drink, heading to the dining hall, grabbing a plate, with plenty of meat, potatoes and vegetables, and a large tankard of ale. Having survived on only a little food during the journey south, I was feeling rather hungry. I enjoyed a couple before I retired for the evening, heading to one of the towers where I was assured of some privacy.

Or, I did have some until there was a knock at the door. I knew who it would be, slowly opening the door to see Delphine standing there. “Hello, Dragonborn.”

“Hello to you.”

“Can we talk?”

I wasn’t going to just agree. “About what?”

“Everything that’s happened since… the summit...”

I made her wait a few seconds before finally nodding, stepping to the side. “Come in.”

She took a seat at the table. I’d brought some wine with me so poured us both a cup. Taking a seat opposite her, I sipped at mine and waited for her to speak first. “How’s Lydia?” she finally asked.

“She’s doing well. She’s currently at the College with Aela and Mirabelle.”

“Has she…”

I shook my head. “You broke her heart, Delphine. Trust me, she’s spoken to me a lot over the past couple of months. She won’t forgive you for what you did. Neither will I for breaking her heart.”

She nodded, and I noticed the sadness on her face. “I understand. Of course I do.”

“Delphine, what do you want? You made your feelings quite clear at High Hrothgar. Paarthurnax is still alive and I won’t kill him. Don’t waste your breath…”

“I’m not here about that,” she stated, interrupting me, though I heard the quiver in her voice. When I met her eyes, she blinked and looked away. “I just knew you were here… and I’ve been so lonely since…” She sighed. “I should have known asking that, where we were…” Then her demeanour changed instantly as she met my eyes. “But my opinion hasn’t changed on the matter.”

“Then why are you talking to me now?”

“Because, despite that, I do miss you, Ragnar. And Lydia. And the girls.”

Now it was time to be callous. “That’s your fault, Delphine, not mine. You should have known I would not react well to such a request.”

“Actually, I didn’t think you would react that way at all. But I guess you have a different idea of what the Dragonborn is to me. And it appears there isn’t much I can do or say that will change your mind. So I guess we find ourselves at an impasse.”

“Delphine, I will put this categorically so you understand. I will not kill Paarthurnax. I would go so far as to say I’m willing to let dragons live in peace if they leave us alone. Do you not understand that we are kin?”

That surprised her. “You really think so?”

I shrugged. “I have the soul of a dragon. Their blood runs through my veins, or at least that’s what I think. And Paarthurnax helped me take down Alduin. I think, that alone, means he deserves our understanding.”

“Despite the untold thousands he killed and the misery he brought to the land during the time dragons ruled?”

“You’re talking eons ago, Delphine. Some things are better left in the past.”

“I don’t believe so.”

Silence fell between us. She had perhaps hoped I may have changed my mind. I could see she was disappointed that I hadn’t. “The Blades, Delphine. What are you doing with them?”

She met my eyes. “That’s none of your business, Ragnar.”

I leaned forward, crossing my arms on the table. “Don’t start getting any ideas, Delphine. Yes, we were lovers once, and I considered you a good friend. But the Blades are an idea also better left in the past. The Dragonborn is not or is no longer a dragonslayer, and neither are the Blades. Not anymore.”

She met my eyes as I leaned back, sitting comfortably once again. “I’m hearing a subtle threat in your tone, Ragnar.”

I sighed, pinching the bridge of my nose. “I’m not threatening you, Delphine. But I do wonder what you intend to do with the Blades. If you want to give the Thalmor a headache, by all means. Want to involve yourselves in the civil war, I’m sure the Empire would appreciate it… perhaps. But dragons are no longer your concern. Leave them alone.”

“If they attack us or any human settlement, we will kill them.”

“I can agree to that. But if you dare go hunting…”

“Now that is a threat, Ragnar.”

“Take it that way if you wish, Delphine. I guess we should just be honest about what we believe.” I leaned forward again. “But do not think for a second I will hesitate should we see each other across the field.”

She sculled the rest of her cup. “I do not wish to make the Dragonborn an enemy, Ragnar. But the Blades still fight for certain ideals,” she said, standing up. I did so too as she walked to the door, opening it and stepping through before turning around to face me. “I do not wish for us to fight, Ragnar. But what you say is… unacceptable to the order. And to me.”

“So be it. That’s on you, Delphine. I’ve made my thoughts crystal clear now. We both know where we stand regarding the matter.”

She sighed. “That we do. Will you be working with the Dawnguard again?” I nodded. “Would you hesitate working with me?”

“On Dawnguard business? No. I can be professional, as I’m sure you can be too. If our focus is on vampires and them alone, then we can simply do the job required.”

She nodded. “Okay, I can do that.” She paused before meeting my eyes. “It was good to see you again, Ragnar.” I merely nodded at that before she added, “Goodnight.”

“Goodnight.”

She turned and walked away as I closed the door. Sitting at the table again, I poured another cup and sipped at it, mulling over what the future could bring. I didn’t want to fight Delphine. She’d pissed me off with her request, and hurting Lydia how she had was near unforgivable, but a small part of me reminisced about our time together. It was unfortunate it had to end how it did, as we had really liked each other.

No matter, relationships start and finish all the time. My focus was the vampire menace for now. Once that was over, I would return to my girls and live happily ever after. Or, that was the hope at least…

Notes:

The meeting between Delphine and the Dragonborn was originally going to be much different, but I have a feeling some readers want to see a reckoning of sorts between the pair, so it has required some editing of this and maybe future chapters. We’ll see what happens…

Chapter 49: Recruitment

Notes:

Kudos is lovely and all but I much prefer to read your comments. I generally reply if it needs one. :-)

Delphine and I departed the next day after Isran told us who to find. Our first target was a man named Gunmar. He apparently lived in Markarth. Our other target was a woman named Sorine Jurard. Isran hadn’t been able to pin down her exact location but suggested Gunmar may have a good idea.

It was a two-day journey across the south of Skyrim. The first day was rather quiet between Delphine and I, she being rather tentative to start any sort of conversation. It wasn’t surprising considering how our conversation the previous night had gone. There were still feelings involved, probably from both of us, and I still found her attractive. But it was hard to think positively considering her thoughts regarding matters.

Our first night in camp was interesting. I say that because it was obvious, to me at least, that Delphine wanted things to continue from before. I wasn’t particularly interested in resuming even a physical relationship, though if she was suggestive enough, or gave me enough booze that I changed my mind, then perhaps it would happen as my main fault is that I love to fuck. Though we chatted over the campfire and enjoyed a bottle of wine, nothing untoward happened as we went to bed in our own tents.

Memories of Markarth were generally painful for a variety of reasons, so I wanted to be in and out rather quickly. However, after finding Gunmar’s residence, and knocking at his door a few times, a neighbour told us that he’d left a couple of days prior. The neighbour was full of information, suggesting that he was tracking a bear responsible for some recent attacks around the Hold.

It took us another day to find him, sat on a rock with the entrance to a rather ominous looking cave nearby. Dismounting, we approached him and he immediately advised caution, as the bear he’d been chasing was in the nearby cave. When I introduced myself and told him we were from the Dawnguard, I think he almost burst into laughter.

“Isran? Needing someone else's help? Never thought I'd hear that. I'm afraid he's a few years too late. I've moved on. I have more important business to attend to. Besides, he can handle anything alone! He assured me so himself. What could he possibly need my help with?”

“Vampires.”

That one word definitely gained his attention. “Oh… Well, that certainly isn’t good news. Tell you what, you help me with this bear and I’ll join you.”

“Not so fast. We need to find someone else.”

“Let me guess. Sorine?” I nodded, the big man smiled in return. “Ah, should have known. Isran must be worried if he’s wanting both our help.” He then looked me up and down. “Who are you anyway?”

“Ragnar. I’m also the Dragonborn.”

“The Dragon…” He held out a hand, grasping each other by the forearm. “Well met, kinsman.”

“This is Delphine. She is a former Blade and also part of the Dawnguard.”

Shaking her hand, he did ask, “I thought they were all dead?”

“Most of us are. A few of us managed to survive.”

“Aye. That’s some good news. Anyway, this bear. Think you can help?”

“Sure, lead the way.”

As we entered carefully, Gunmar explained the bear had been attacking travellers for weeks and clearly had the taste for human blood. He also believed the bear was likely part of a pack, so we’d best be careful. I assured him that, if needs be, I’d just use my gift to ensure we didn’t die.

The bear he’d been tracking was enormous, the largest bear I’d ever seen. And he had friends. Four of them, and it was clear they looked at we three humans and saw another meal. Before Gunmar thought about just running and charging, I used my Thu’um twice, first blowing them backwards before setting them alight with flame. I won’t say the fight was easy. None of us escaped without injury. But the five bears lay dead by the end and we managed to stagger out, dripping with both blood and sweat.

“Glad you showed up, Dragonborn. Don’t think I could have taken them alone,” Gunmar stated, taking a seat on a rock.

“Aye, never seen bears that big before.”

We sat in silence, drinking some water, feeling sweat or blood drip down various places of my body. Glancing at Delphine, she had a couple of grazes along her arms, otherwise she looked okay. Gunmar didn’t have a horse with him, but had one back in Markarth, so we headed back there first. It was dark by the time we walked through the gates. He didn’t have any spare rooms available, so Delphine and I headed to the Silver Blood Inn, where it got awkward, as they only had one room available.

Gunmar did join us for dinner and a few drinks before he returned home, agreeing to meet at dawn. He had a vague idea of where Sorine might be working, but he figured we might be on the road for a day or two. Once he departed, Delphine and I headed to our room. At least we had a double, but sharing a bed was always going to be awkward, particularly once we both started to undress.

Down to my underwear, that’s when she made her move, striding towards me before running her hands up and down my chest. “Been a while since we’ve been like this,” she stated softly.

“Aye, it has. You still have quite the body on you, Delphine.”

Reaching into my underwear, she gently grabbed and started to stroke my cock. There was an immediate reaction as I just looked down at her. “I know with everything that happened…”

“What do you want, Delphine?”

“What I want is to suck this cock of yours, Ragnar, then I want you to fuck my arse. And I mean hard.”

I couldn’t help chuckle. “What, some sort of punishment?”

“I know it’ll never be like it was. I’m figuring you’re angry with me, so I’m thinking an angry fuck…” She met my eyes as she asked, “Interested?”

I leaned down and kissed her hard on the lips, her hand quickly moving from my cock so she could wrap both arms around me. I returned the gesture, pulling her towards me. It was the wrong thing to do. I knew we shouldn’t be resuming… Breaking the kiss, I had to tell her. “We do this, we don’t tell anyone. I don’t like lying but the reaction…”

“I don’t plan on seeing any of them again, Ragnar. I will help the Dawnguard then do what I need to do otherwise. All I want now is your cock inside me.”

“Okay.” I kissed her again, underwear was quickly removed, and she ended up on her knees, licking up and down my shaft. “You were always very good at this, Delphine.”

“Aye, I was. And I’m hoping you’ll give me a load soon enough.”

Watching her swallow my cock, she was always going to get one, but she took her time trying to bring me off, seeming to just enjoy having my length in her mouth again. I certainly wasn’t going to complain about that. “Gods,” I groaned.

Resting my cock against her cheek, she looked up and smiled, before she resumed. Reaching around the back of her head, I didn’t thrust into her mouth but she did let me control her head. Whatever she was doing, it was driving me wild, and I warned her rather quickly that I was going to cum. She seemed to clamp her lips around my shaft as I started to gently thrust into her mouth, and she received what she wanted soon enough, groaning loudly as I emptied myself.

“Fucking hell,” I stated, my legs immediately feeling weak. She happily moaned and audibly gulped before she removed her mouth, though licked up and down my shaft, cleaning up any residual cum.

“Forgot how good you taste, Ragnar.” Stroking my shaft, she added, “And it looks like you’ve stayed quite hard.”

“Bring oil?” She blushed immediately, so I asked, “Did you plan this?”

“Not like this but I was hoping to get my arse fucked eventually. If it took too long, I was just going to be blunt and offer it to you on a plate.”

“Want your pussy eaten first?”

“By the Nine, yes,” she whispered.

So she laid back on the bed, spread her legs nice and wide, her pussy already glistening under the candlelight. I kissed her first before moving down her body, giving her breasts plenty of attention, before finally tasting her once again. She moaned loudly, keeping her legs nice and wide, though urging me on to eat her out and make her cum.

I remembered her body well, particularly what she liked. I wanted to get her off fast and more than once. Sliding a couple of fingers into her, that drove her nuts, and once I found her spot, I made her cum even quicker than I expected. “So fucking horny,” she moaned.

“That’s a good thing,” I stated before continuing to pleasure her.

“One more, then focus on my arse, Ragnar. I love it when you do that.”

That sounded like a fine idea, so once I made her cum again, I flipped her over and started on her arse while coating my cock in oil at the same time. She could see what I was doing and made sure she was on all fours. I ate her for a little while before she practically begged me to fuck her.

Sitting back, she rubbed her arse against my cock, looking back with the smirk I remembered rather well. Pushing her forward, I prodded her with my cock, and she pushed back, desperate for me to enter her. So I gave her arse a hard slap. “Good things come to those who wait, Delphine.”

“Please, Ragnar,” she begged.

I leaned forward, running my cock against her crack as I leaned close to her ear. “How much do you want it?”

“Like nothing else, Ragnar. More than I want my next breath.” She paused. “I’ve missed you fucking my arse constantly.”

She pushed back, and I managed to blindly slide my cock into her. She gasped as, while I tried to do it gently, I didn’t let her get used to it. I didn’t slam it in, but I slid my full length into her rather quickly. “Oh fuck,” she groaned. I buried myself rather quickly and let her at least get used to it. “Holy shit, you feel as big as ever.”

“Ready?”

“Fuck me hard, Ragnar. I want it to hurt.”

“Are you sure?”

She turned her head to kiss my cheek. “Hard as possible. Make me cry. And I want to know you’re angry with me when doing it.”

I wasn’t going to ask if she was sure. She knew what she wanted and, if that’s what she wanted, that’s what she was going to get. She settled down, resting her head on her arms, as I rested on my forearms, letting her get used to the angle, before I just started to slam into her.

Within a few minutes, she was moaning and grunting, and I knew it was hurting, as I was not being gentle, holding nothing back at all. Even with Lydia at our wildest, I always held something back. She knew, just liking it nice and hard, but she knew I didn’t want to hurt her. Tonight, Delphine was getting what she wanted, and I wasn’t going to be as kind as I used to be.

“Fuck!” she cried quietly.

“This is what you wanted, Delphine.”

“Gods, yes, Ragnar. Keep going!”

She eventually lowered herself down, lying flat on the bed. When I slammed into her a few times, that got a reaction that I was expecting. “Fuck,” she cried, and I heard the catch in her voice, “Oh god…” I kept on going and she could barely get words out. “So good, Ragnar.”

I could feel myself dripping with sweat now as I was putting everything into it now. I watched her face and when she turned to look at me, I saw her eyes. She blinked rapidly, thought it didn’t clear her eyes completely. “I’ll cum soon,” I assured her.

“Don’t pull out once you’re done. Keep it inside me.”

Leaning down closer to her face, I gently kissed her as I continued to pound her, feeling my orgasm approaching rather quickly. I think she appreciated the soft kisses, her moans and grunts rather soft by now as I think she was rather worn out herself. As I said, I wasn’t being gentle at all.

“Oh god,” I groaned.

“Yes, Ragnar,” she cried quietly.

I groaned loudly as I thrust hard one last time before I felt a torrent erupt from my cock, keeping it completely buried. I think Delphine may have even yelped during that final thrust, though immediately reached back with a hand to make sure I stayed inside her. I groaned a couple of more times before I finally felt empty, slowing resting on my forearms so I didn’t squash her underneath. It was only when it was rather silent that I heard her sob. I… I didn’t want that reaction… So I gently caressed her head as she turned to look at me. I understood why, having learned during my time with Haelga, but I never liked to see tears.

“Thank you,” she said softly.

“I hesitate to say you’re welcome…”

“I needed that, Ragnar. So did you, from what you just did.” I felt her squeeze my cock. “And you’re still quite hard.”

I couldn’t help chuckle. “If you want to keep going, I won’t say no.”

“I’ll need a few minutes…”

I finally pulled out and rested on my back, Delphine taking a few moments before she sat up and straddled me though only rested on my cock, leaning forward so she could lie on my chest. I ran some fingers up and down her spine, hearing her sigh as she snuggled against me. “So you enjoyed that?” I wondered.

“Immensely. Once I’m ready to go again, all you need to do is lie there this time. I’m going to ride your cock hard and fast. You won’t even have to fondle me.”

“Though I like doing that.”

“I know. If this happens again, next time you can destroy my pussy.” I couldn’t help chuckle at how bluntly she put it. She’d always been honest from the day we started fucking “What can I say, Ragnar? I loved it when you fuck me hard. I went so long without…” She trailed and looked up into my eyes. “How in oblivion are you here with me now?”

I grabbed her firm arse. “Well, this is fantastic and I love to fuck it. Then remember that, despite what happened, I still find you rather attractive, Delphine. And the fact you like to fuck is a real bonus.”

“I’m just glad you still want to fuck me, Ragnar. After what happened, I’ll take what I can get.”

“It’ll just be different this time around.”

She smiled before saying, “I know and understand. But since you’re hard and my arse needs filling, I think we should continue.”

Grabbing the base of my cock, she quite quickly slid it inside her and lowered herself down. Even I couldn’t help look at her in surprise as she planted her feet down on the bed, gestured for me to grab her hands to balance her, then she rode herself hard and fast straight away. She couldn’t do that position forever, as it put a tremendous strain on her legs, but watching my entire length disappear inside her arse each and every time, and she was slamming herself down into me, I couldn’t help but be impressed.

She eventually had to switch to a more comfortable position, resting on her knees and leaning forward, where I could reposition my legs too. Taking her with me slightly so I could sit up a bit, she slowed down enough that we could at least make out a little, and she didn’t stop me when I started to fondle her. “You going to cum again?” she asked quietly.

“Not yet. You?”

“If I cum again, it’s going to be big, and I won’t be able to continue.”

“That sounds fine. If you need a shoulder…”

I started to thrust up slightly as she rode herself harder still, my thumb rubbing her clit fast. Her body shuddered and writhed as she tried to keep a steady rhythm, listening to her breathing to know when she was going to orgasm. Wrapping both arms around the back of my neck, she kissed me hard, really slamming herself down onto my cock, moaning into my mouth but desperate to keep kissing me. I had one hand fondling her, the other resting on her arse to keep her steady.

Breaking the kiss, the moan released told me she was close. “Keep going,” I urged gently.

“So good, Ragnar,” she groaned, but she kept going for a couple more minutes before she just couldn’t hold it back any longer. I could only watch, rather impressed, as the orgasm seemed to take over her entire body, before she collapsed onto my chest, feeling her body rise and fall as she breathed deeply, unable to say anything.

Wrapping my arms around her, she sighed as I gave her a gentle squeeze, feeling her knees squeeze me in return. Since I hadn’t cum, my cock was still hard and buried inside her, though she made no movement to remove it yet. “I haven’t cum that hard in a while,” she admitted.

“Glad you enjoyed yourself.”

“You need to cum?” I shrugged so she offered to blow me once she’d taken a few minutes. That sounded like a deal. Once she was ready, she sat up and my cock fell out, and I was surprised when she spun around and immediately swallowed my length. I did tickle her pussy with my tongue, just to distract her slightly, but I’ll admit, I did want to cum in her mouth.

Eventually I did stop and just concentrated on what she was doing to me. I’d always joked that with age came experience because she was an expert as far as I was concerned, or perhaps she just learned my body and what I liked rather quickly. It didn’t take long for me to let her know I was going to cum and she received a second load that night, which she again happily swallowed down.

We definitely needed a clean up after all that, sitting at the table and sharing a bottle of wine. She winced when sitting down, though told me that was exactly what she wanted. We finished the bottle before heading back to bed, Delphine spooning into me and, as I held her, it felt just like how it was prior to what happened at High Hrothgar.

The next morning wasn’t awkward at all, dressing in silence, sharing the occasional glance, before heading out to the bar for breakfast. Gunmar wandered in while we were eating, finishing whatever we were chewing and heading out straight away. Mounting our horses, Gunmar led the way as he had the best idea of where to find Sorine.

Riding for most of the day, we ended up approaching an orc camp by the name of Mor Khazgur. While orcs were not particularly friendly, they would only attack if we showed aggression. Thankfully we didn’t approach their gates, eventually turning off the road and dismounting, Gunmar stating there was a dwarven convector nearby.

We found Sorine near what looked like her camp. If she noticed our approach, she didn’t even glance our way, apparently distracted by something. It was only when she appeared to notice Gunmar that she turned to greet us. “Well, never thought I’d see you again, Gunmar.”

“How are you, Sorine?”

Just those few words, and how they were stated, told me everything about these two. They’d either been intimate or had a very close relationship. As for Sorine, she was definitely Breton, and another in a long line of cute Breton women I’d come into contact with. “I’m well, Gunmar. Who are you friends?”

“This is the Dragonborn. He’s here with the Dawnguard.”

“Isran sent me,” I added, “He needs your help.”

“Isran? Wants me? No, you must be mistaken. He made it exceedingly clear the last time we spoke that he had no interest in my help. I find it hard to believe he's changed his mind. He said some very hurtful things to me before I left.”

“Vampires have returned. I found one with an Elder Scroll. I’m not sure what’s going on myself, but Isran is concerned.”

She sighed and I guess part of her felt some responsibility, just like Gunmar. “The guy was a bastard. Gunmar can tell you all about it.”

“He said some pretty nasty things, Ragnar,” Gunmar added.

“Look, I haven’t known him as long as either of you. I can tell he’s a bit of a bastard. But I just put it down to the fact he’s blunt, doesn’t worry about feelings, and he’s concerned about the vampire menace. I’m willing to look past his faults if he’s willing to work with you guys again. He’s asked for your help for a reason.”

“What do you think, Sorine?” Gunmar asked.

“I’ll do it for two reasons. One, it’s the right thing to do. And, two, well, you’ll be there, Gunmar. Guess someone will have my back.”

“Got a horse anywhere around here?”

That made her laugh before she said no, so Gunmar offered to take her. He’d brought some camping gear, figuring it would be a long journey back, so we found a road heading east and made our way back to Fort Dawnguard. I didn’t ask them too many personal questions, at least about Isran and what happened before, but did ask about what they’d been up to since. Gunmar worked as what could only be called a pest controller, usually helping sort out issues with wild animals. I did ask why he hadn’t thought about joining the Companions, but he didn’t want to leave Markarth. As for Sorine, her interest was in the Dwemer, so she spent most of her time in and around the ruins that dotted the landscape of Skyrim. She admitted to often working alone, which was sometimes dangerous, but she wasn’t interested in hiring help. She wasn’t interested in treasure, simply wanting to know more about Dwemer machines and how they worked.

We camped past Whiterun that evening, and it was obvious within a couple of hours that Gunmar and Sorine had been rather intimate before. It was the way she looked at him, and while he tried to be subtle, there was no missing he was giving her the eye in return. The four of us disappeared into our tents together, Gunmar and Sorine sharing one, Delphine and I another. We slept separately, chatting quietly as we waited for the obvious noise. I think they were trying to be quiet.

“Oh, Gunmar!” a feminine voice exclaimed, followed by a loud shush. Delphine and I tried not to giggle as it was obvious what they were doing. Good for them, I thought. I figured they were reconnecting after a long time apart.

“Fuck me, Gunmar!” was moaned a little later. Gunmar didn’t bother shushing her this time.

Delphine and I had to wait for them to be quiet before we drifted off to sleep. Joining them the next morning, the smile on Sorine’s face suggested she was in a rather good mood, while Gunmar was certainly lighter on his feet. “I assume that wasn’t the first time?” Delphine asked. I stifled a groan while Sorine just smiled, wrapping an arm around Gunmar’s waist.

“No. That was just the first time in a long time. Worth the wait though.” Gunmar just gave her a look as she turned to look at him. “What? Gunmar, we were always good together. I’m not going to deny it.”

“Have you not been with anyone else?” I wondered.

“No,” she replied.

Now Gunmar looked at her in surprise. “What? Why?”

“Do I really need to explain, Gunmar?”

He looked confused for a few seconds before the smile slowly formed. “No, I guess not.” He then cleared his throat, looking away but the smile didn’t disappear. I think they needed a long discussion in private, as while he might not have given it much thought, she definitely had.

“Anyway, I’m guessing we’ll make it to the fort today and learn what’s happening?” Sorine wondered.

“Aye, he’ll explain in further detail his ideas. We were just sent to get you,” I replied.

We made it to the fort by dusk, all of us weary in the saddle, two full days enough to leave you rather sore by the end. Leaving our horses in the stables, we wandered up the stairs into the fort, Isran already waiting for us, though standing up on the walkway above, obviously warned of our approach. Gunmar looked up, already frustrated by our welcome.

“Okay, Isran, you’ve got us here. What do you want?”

“Just a moment. Hold it right there.”

Before we knew it, we found ourselves enveloped by rather bright light. I knew it wasn’t the sun as it was growing dark outside, so I was left wondering what it was. “What the hell are you doing, Isran?” Sorine called.

“Make sure you’re not vampires. Can’t be too careful.”

“Oh, for fucks sake, Isran, we only left a few days ago,” I murmured. I didn’t particularly want to get into a fight, but the man was obviously paranoid.

The light eventually disappeared and he continued. “So, welcome to Fort Dawnguard. I'm sure you've heard a bit of what we're up against. Powerful vampires, unlike anything we've seen before. And they have an Elder Scroll. If anyone is going to stand in their way, it's going to be us.”

“This is all well and good, but do we actually know anything about what they're doing? What do we do now?” Sorine asked, getting straight to the heart of the matter.

“We'll get to that. For now, get acquainted with the space. Sorine, you'll find room to start your tinkering on that crossbow design you've been working on.”

“Remember that, eh?”

“Aye, and I know you’ll build something that’ll wipe those blood sucking bastards out. As for you, Gunmar, there's an area large enough for you to pen up some trolls, get them armoured up and ready for use.”

“Aye, I’m sure I’ll get my hands on some that won’t be too hard to handle.”

Shaking both their hands, they wandered off, as it was clear Isran had something to tell. “As for you, Dragonborn, we're going to get to the bottom of why a vampire showed up here looking for you. Let's go have a little chat with it, shall we?”

Delphine suggested she would make herself scarce as I walked up the stairs, Isran waiting for me before leading me to a closed door. He unlocked and opened it, gesturing for me to enter. What I found made my blood boil, and before he knew what was happening, I had my sword in hand, pointed at his throat. “You’d better release her now,” I growled.

“What?”

“Unshackle her right now,” I demanded. It wasn’t just the fact she’d been shackled that angered me that much.

“It’s a…”

I put the tip to his skin. “One more word, Isran, and I swear to the Nine, you won’t live to take another breath. Unshackle her then get the fuck out of here.”

I think he wanted to argue but he would have seen my eyes, heard my tone, and considering who I was, he knew I wasn’t someone to fuck with. He carefully walked past, taking the shackles from her wrists, Serana falling to the ground. He handed me the keys and sensibly exited the room. I didn’t give a shit what he thought right now.

Sheathing my sword, I immediately went to Serana. Gently lifting her up, placing a finger up her chin, I made her look at me. “I’m sorry,” I whispered.

“Guess I should have expected this sort of welcome considering what I am.” Grabbing a nearby cloth, I tried to wipe away some of the blood, though wondered if vampires would be left with bruises. “Nice to know someone here cares.”

“I told him you were friendly.”

“I don’t think he knew exactly who I was.” I did my best to clear away all the blood before helping her up. She was a little unsteady for a few seconds before taking a deep breath. “Thank you, Ragnar.”

“Why are you here, Serana?”

“I’ll tell you first before I share the news with anyone.” There were a couple of chairs so we sat down before she continued. “It's about me. And the Elder Scroll that was buried with me. I'm guessing you figured this part out already, but my father's not exactly a good person. Even by vampire standards.”

“That’s putting it mildly.”

“He wasn't always like that, though. There was... a turn. He stumbled onto this obscure prophecy and just kind of lost himself in it.”

“Another prophecy? Been at the centre of my own.”

That made her smile, which made me smile in return. I really am a fool. Or just a sucker for a pretty face. Hers was very pretty, even with the remains of blood. “It's pointless and vague one, like all prophecies. The part he latched onto said that vampires would no longer need to fear the sun. That's what he's after. He wants to control the sun, have vampires control the world.”

“Well, he sounds rather delusional than anything else.”

“Maybe not completely. The prophecy said that vampires would no longer need to fear the sun. For someone who fancied himself as vampire royalty, that's pretty seductive. Anyway, my mother and I didn't feel like inviting a war with all of Tamriel, so we tried to stop him. That's why I was sealed away with the Scroll.”

“Oh, well, when you put it like that…”

“Something about you makes me think I can trust you. I hope I'm not wrong.”

“You trust me?” I asked, unable to hide the surprise in my tone.

“You’ve only been a help so far since I woke up. You took me home. You listened to me. And you were… nice when you walked in here.”

“You didn’t deserve that sort of treatment when obviously coming to help.”

“I’m going to need your help convincing your leader that I’m here to help, and that he needs to listen to my warnings. My father has plans, big plans, and unfortunately for both of us, waking me up has now brought those plans to fruition.”

I was sceptical that Isran would listen to a vampire, but if she needed help convincing him, I was going to do what I could. We found Isran downstairs, and I noticed he was flanked by a couple of others, and once Serana and I sat down, two more were at the door leading out. He glanced at Serana before glaring at me. “I don’t appreciate being threatened, Dragonborn. The only reason you’re sitting there now is that I know what you’re actually capable of.”

“I will not apologise. I don’t appreciate when someone hurts a friend of mine.”

“This… thing… is a friend?” he scoffed.

“Yes.” I could feel Serana looking at me but kept my eyes on Isran. “I helped her get home. She has obviously come here to help us.”

“What in oblivion could she tell us?”

“Well, if you spoke to her instead of beating her, maybe she could tell you?” I asked sarcastically, feeling my temper rise again.

He could obviously hear my tone so, after glaring for a few more seconds, he turned away, looking at Serana. “Okay. Speak quickly.”

Serana repeated what she told me, Isran barely raising a question, so she finished rather quickly. Isran remained silent. Whether he was thinking or not, I’m not sure. I guess he was trying to put aside his prejudices, deciding whether to believe a vampire or not. So he looked at me before asking, “Now tell me, is there any reason I shouldn't kill this bloodsucking fiend right now?”

“For fuck… Isran, did you not hear a word Serana just said?”

“Why, because of that story about the prophecy? About some vampire trying to put the sun out? Do you actually believe any of that?”

“Considering I’m part of a prophecy myself, yes, I do believe it. And I’ve met the man, albeit only briefly, and there’s no doubt he has something in mind regarding the Scroll, considering that was his first question when Serana returned.”

He remained silent again, and he had to know I was right. I was the one who’d located Serana, met her father, and it was obvious I trusted her. So if he trusted me, he had to trust her. Finally, he grunted. “Fine, Dragonborn. But you'd better know what you're doing. It can stay for now, but if it so much as lays a finger on anyone here, I'll hold you responsible. Got it?” Then he turned to Serana. “You hear me? Don't feel like a guest, because you're not. You're a resource. You're an asset. In the meantime, don't make me regret my sudden outburst of tolerance and generosity, because if you do, your friend here is going to pay for it.”

“Thank you for your kindness. I'll remember it the next time I'm feeling hungry,” she retorted. I didn’t know whether to groan or laugh. I watched for his reaction, and a brief smirk did appear before he waved away everyone around us.

“Okay, you seem to have an idea forming in that head of yours. What do you propose?” he asked.

“The Scroll I have with me should lead us to something that can help us. Obviously, none of us here can read it.”

“Who can?” I asked, as I didn’t have a clue.

“The only people I know are Moth Priests. They spend years preparing before they start reading, but that doesn’t help us here, as they are all based in Cyrodiil.”

“Moth Priests eh?  Tell you what, I’ll start investigating and let you know what I can find out,” Isran stated, sounding rather conciliatory. I guess ending the threat mattered most right now. “I have some friends around Skyrim who might be able to give us the information. It might take some time though.”

“That’s fine. Might give me enough time to make a trip north.”

“If you’re going to the College, Ragnar, you might want to have a word with Urag,” Isran suggested, “The orc knows his stuff, and if there’s anyone who’d know if a Moth Priest was in Skyrim, it would be him. If he does tell you anything, make sure you let me know before you go riding off to find him.”

“Good point,” Serana agreed, “If we’re looking for one, my father will be too.”

“Okay, we’ll leave first thing tomorrow,” I stated.

I found Delphine and let her know what was happening. She didn’t ask to join me and I didn’t invite her either. She knew that part of her life was over, but Isran found her things to keep her occupied, and if need be, she would happily return to Sky Haven Temple. Serana and I shared a room that night, taking separate beds, so Delphine didn’t approach me that night. To be honest, I wouldn’t have accepted an invitation anyway. I was already thinking I’d put my foot in it as I knew I couldn’t lie to my girls.

The next day, this time Serana with her own horse, we headed north. Knowing we couldn’t stay in Windhelm, as Serana mentioned not wanting to stay within a city, I made sure we had a tent, bedrolls, and plenty of furs to keep us warm, as we’d likely end up camping where it was rather cold. Even pushing our horses hard, we’d never make the College in a day.

We eventually camped to the west of Windhelm, finding shelter under a rocky outcrop though we still need a tent. After building a fire, I cooked myself some meat. I offered Serana some, but she said it was okay as she didn’t really eat. I knew what a vampire required so I did ask about her… feeding habits. She was honest about what she did before she went to sleep, admitting she had not fed since waking up. I asked if that made her weaker, and she said it was fine. She could go weeks without needing blood. If she was around me, she would probably enjoy eating raw meat, as animal blood was precisely that.

We didn’t share a bedroll that night but did share the bundle of furs I’d brought along, continuing to chat away, getting to know each other, though I knew Serana kept a lot buried. I probably did most of the talking, sharing my adventures, and I found myself being rather open and honest from the get go, making her giggle more than once as I explained some of my shenanigans. But she admitted that it did sound like I lived life to the fullest and tried to enjoy myself at least.

Arriving at the bridge sometime the next afternoon, we dismounted and led our horses across. Aela and Lydia were in the courtyard, appearing to go through some drills, quickly forgotten once they saw me. Within a couple of seconds, I was being cuddled very tightly by the pair of them. I couldn’t help laugh as they were rather happy to see me. Once I’d given them both a light kiss, I nodded in the direction of Serana. “We have company,” I stated. They let me go and stood back as Serana stepped forward. “This is Serana. Serana, this is Aela and Lydia.”

“She’s a vampire!” Lydia exclaimed, Aela immediately digging her in the ribs.

“Nice to meet you,” Aela stated, offering her hand, Serana waiting a moment before grasping it. “What brings you here with Ragnar?”

“Dawnguard business.”

“Ah, that’s why he left a while back. I take it things have progressed, Ragnar?”

“Sort of. The fun has only just begun, I think. Anyway, where is Mirabelle?”

“Inside as usual, hard at work. She’ll be happy to see you too.”

“I’ll introduce Serana and catch up with her. Dinner later?”

“Of course, Ragnar. The three of us dine together every night.”

Leaving them to resume their training, though I had no doubt they’d just end up gossiping, I led Serana inside to our quarters. Mirabelle was busy reading a book though heard me approach, immediately getting to her feet, taking her in my arms to give her a kiss, holding her tight to me as always. “I’ve missed you,” she whispered.

“I missed you too,” I whispered back, giving her another kiss.

Then she noticed Serana, noticing her immediately blush and take half a step back. “Who’s your friend?”

“Mirabelle, this is Serana. I mentioned her a while back.”

“Oh, I remember.” Mirabelle was immediately friendly, stepping forward, offering her hand. “Nice to meet you, Serana.”

“You too,” Serana replied, and I could see she was surprised at the welcome she’d received so far.

“I’m glad you’re back, Ragnar, but what does bring you back here with your friend?”

“Well, Isran has to find out one or two things, so I figured I could return here for a couple of days, though he mentioned Urag might be able to help me. But that’s for later anyway. How have things been here?”

Leading me by hand, we sat side by side on the bed, Mirabelle gesturing to the now empty chair. “I’ve been very busy getting things in order for when I eventually leave.” I nodded without saying anything. “Aela and Lydia have kept themselves entertained too. How about you?”

“Oh, I have one or two things to share. Not right now though.”

She glanced towards Serana before looking back at me. “Have you slept with her already?”

I couldn’t help chuckle. “No, Belle.” I glanced towards Serana, who appeared very surprised by the question. “I’m merely helping her, and she’s helping me.”

“We’re just friends. I trust him,” Serana added, and I could hear how awkward she was already.

Mirabelle noticed. “Apologies, Serana, but when Ragnar finds himself with a beautiful woman, it usually happens quite quickly.”

“Oh…” Serana trailed off.

I cleared my throat. “Anyway, I’m assuming dinner will be soon, so we can catch up at least.”

“Of course. There are a few spare beds. Why don’t you relax and I’ll show where she can sleep while she’s here?”

“Sounds like a good idea. Serana?”

“That’s fine, Ragnar.”

I hadn’t taken all that much, I just assumed Mirabelle wanted to chat with Serana alone for a few minutes. She returned, I assume having left Serana in privacy, immediately hugging and kissing me again. “I can see why you like her, Ragnar. She’s very pretty. I’m surprised you haven’t fucked her yet.”

“Our relationship isn’t like that.”

“Yet…”

“I honestly don’t think she sees me that way. Anyway, it’s good to have at least one or two women who I can call friends without fucking them.”

“Do you want to fuck her?” I just looked at her. She smiled in return. “Well, no surprise. I didn’t lie when I said she is very pretty.”

That evening over dinner, I shared what I’d been up to. The girls naturally worried about the rise of vampires, assuring them that I’d do everything humanly possible to stop it. But I was also honest about one or two other things. I admitted to sleeping with Sybille, though left out the part about her being a vampire. That wasn’t for me to share.

However, I had to take a deep breath before admitting that I’d also been with Delphine. Mirabelle didn’t share an opinion. Aela just shook her head, I think muttering I was a fool. Lydia was most upset, immediately on the verge of tears, before she stood up and walked out of the room. “Shit,” I muttered.

“I’ll go talk to her,” Aela suggested.

“No. I was the one who did it. I should.”

I headed outside and upstairs towards the elevated walkway. Lydia had been smart enough to grab a large fur to wrap herself up in. Even in the near darkness, when she turned to look at me, I could see the tears falling down her cheeks. “I didn’t think you would, not after what happened…”

I sighed. “Well, we ended up needing to share a room and… it wasn’t loving, Lydia. I mean, we’ve had some pretty hard sex, but there’s always feelings. What happened in Markarth was… angry, for the most part anyway...”

She nodded before asking, “Did she ask about me?”

“I told her the truth. She broke your heart.”

Lydia sniffed. “She did. She’s a bitch.” She turned to face me. “I can’t demand anything of you, Ragnar, but I will ask.”

“If you don’t want me to again, I won’t, Lydia. You are far more important.” With those words, I wrapped her in a hug. “It was a moment of weakness, which I obviously suffer often. And, well… You remember…”

“I do,” she whispered, “But I can’t stand the thought that you would be intimate with her again.”

“So I won’t be again. I give you my word. If she asks, I will say no. What happened in Markarth will be the final time.”

“Anyone but her, Ragnar. I don’t want her to have you again. She can suffer alone for what she did.”

“Okay.” I just held her in the darkness until she seemed to settle down. I knew it would upset her but I didn’t anticipate as much. The request not to do it again wasn’t a surprise. It was a request I could easily accept. Lydia was far more important to me and, if I did it again, I’d feel nothing but guilt, certainly couldn’t lie to her about it, and it would probably spell the end of our relationship. Aela and Mirabelle probably wouldn’t be particularly happy either.

“Suppose you fucked her arse?” she mumbled into my chest.

“Aye, of course.”

That did make her chuckle briefly. “Well, can understand why you did from that perspective.”

I leaned down to her ear. “Your arse is better,” I whispered. That made her giggle again as I squeezed her a little tighter. “So to prevent any temptation, I won’t work with her anymore. And she knows she won’t be coming up here again.”

“Good. And Aela may not have said anything but I know she’ll be thinking the same as me.”

“And that’s fine. Trust me, it’s not a problem. If it was, then I’d tell you.”

“If you need to fuck someone in the arse, Ragnar, I’m always available. Well, when you’re here.” She looked up with a lopsided grin. I just wiped her cheek and gave her a soft kiss. “I’m not being dramatic, am I?”

“Not at all. Come on, we should head back in. It’s bloody cold out here.”

Heading to bed later that night, I was surprised when Aela and Lydia suggested I should go to bed with Mirabelle, those two going to bed together. Once in bed, Mirabelle simply spooned herself against me as I wrapped my arms around and pulled her tight to my body. “I’ve missed you so much,” she whispered, “But I just want you to hold me tonight. Is that okay?”

“Love it when you fall asleep in my arms, Belle.”

“Good. We’ll make love in the morning. Best way to start the day.” She paused before asking, “How long are you back for?”

“I’ll make sure it’s a couple of days before we leave.”

“Sounds perfect. Might have to spend an entire day in bed, though we’d have to include Lydia and Aela of course.”

“Of course.”

We made love the next morning as soon as we both woke up, Mirabelle a vision of beauty as she climbed onto my cock and slowly rode herself to her first orgasm, simply holding her against my chest as she took some time to recover, waxing lyrical about my prowess and how much she just loved my cock. Any thought of breakfast ended when Aela and Lydia eventually joined us, and Mirabelle wasn’t lying about spending all day in bed. I don’t think any of us dressed until after lunchtime, and by then I was drained, my cock was a little sore, and the three women were exhausted. Not a bad way to start the day.

Chapter 50: Priest

We remained at the College a little longer than I expected, which gave me plenty of opportunity to enjoy time with my girls. And I guess, with Serana being with us, she was always bound to walk in on us eventually, as we said she was free to come and go as she pleased, considering she was gifted in magic, Mirabelle rather interested in what she could do.

It was a few days after our return and I was in bed with Mirabelle and Lydia. Mirabelle was in her usual spot, that being sat on my cock, gently riding herself to another orgasm, Lydia sat on my face, though positioned so she could make out with Mirabelle. She also did that as I could pleasure both pussy and arse, as Mirabelle did like to watch Lydia be fucked in the arse by me. I think she was still building up the courage to have a go herself again.

Both women were making quite a bit of noise and it probably took a while Serana to make her presence known. I’m not sure why she didn’t just walk in, notice what was going on, then walk out, but it was only when Lydia stopped grinding on my face, and Mirabelle stopped moving seconds later, that I wondered what was going on. “Ragnar, we have company,” Lydia stated, lifting herself up off my face.

That was when I turned to see Serana, watching us rather intently, her jaw dropped slightly. If she had been capable of blushing, I think her cheeks would have been bright red.

“Sorry for intruding,” she stated.

“Not at all,” I stated, “We were just…”

She looked incredibly awkward just standing there. Mirabelle patted the bed next to us. “Come take a seat, Serana.”

“Oh, I couldn’t possibly…”

“You don’t have to do anything other than sit,” Lydia added, “But you’ve clearly been watching for a little while. I sensed someone was around. That’s what I get for closing my eyes because his tongue is just too damn good.”

Serana eventually managed to walk the small distance to our bed, sitting down close to Mirabelle and I. Lydia lay down next to me as Mirabelle leaned forward, sliding my hands down to her arse, and she slowly started to ride me again. “Gods, your cock feels wonderful as always,” she stated softly before kissing me, “And I can taste Lydia too.”

I focused mostly on Mirabelle but my eyes did occasionally wander towards Serana. She watched with interest but made no sign of wanting to involve herself, so I eventually just focused on Mirabelle entirely. She felt as wonderful as ever, a wet, tight pussy that was desperate for my cock. She tried to play the innocent at times, being corrupted by the Dragonborn, but she loved to fuck as much as me, and liked to surprise me on occasion, which I always loved.

Kissing me harder, I knew she was approaching another orgasm and I wasn’t going to last much longer either. “I love watching you two make love,” Lydia said, “It’s so wholesome.”

“Helps that I love him more than anything,” Mirabelle stated, leaning down to kiss me again, this time to cover a loud moan. She was definitely getting close, as I grabbed her arse and started to thrust up into her a little faster, causing her to break the kiss and breathe deeply. “Fuck, that’s good, Ragnar.”

“I’m close, Belle. Really close,” I whispered.

We nearly came together, which is always a nice thing to happen, Mirabelle breaking first, feeling her squeeze my cock as she enjoyed another orgasm, which nearly sent me over the edge immediately, groaning loudly as she sank down on my cock as I came inside her. Her kisses were a little desperate after that, holding her close, not wanting to break apart at all. She was usually very sensitive after orgasm but her wanting to be held and touched was more important. She lay on my chest afterwards, both of us taking in some deep breaths, causing her to shudder as I ran my fingers up and down her back, kissing her forehead as she relaxed.

“That was… That was beautiful,” Serana whispered, “I had no idea sex…”

“Have you… I mean…” I wasn’t sure how to frame the question as I wasn’t sure about that part of her history.

She looked away before saying softly, “I’ll tell you later, Ragnar.”

“You can stay though,” Mirabelle offered, “If how we are doesn’t offend.”

Serana looked back, this time with a smile. “Not at all. It’s just…” She trailed off and sighed. “I should go.” She made to stand up but I gently grabbed her hand. “Ragnar?”

“You don’t have to go, Serana.”

I could see she was immediately getting upset, so I let go of her hand. “It’s not you, Ragnar. Not any of you. I really did enjoy watching the love between you. I just…” She trailed off and simply walked out before any of us could say a word.

“Do you think it’s because she’s a vampire?” Lydia wondered.

“No. I’ve seen that sort of reaction before,” I replied. I’d seen enough bad shit in my life to recognise the signs. She was a woman hurting.

Mirabelle slid off me, and I held both of them in an arm each. The mood had dimmed and they could see I was thinking. “What do you think, Ragnar?” Mirabelle finally asked.

“From her body language alone, she’s been hurt badly. I think that’s why she watched us, to see that sex was… pleasurable. Enjoyable. Loving.”

“So you think…” Lydia was about to ask but trailed off.

I sighed. “Yes. Exactly that. I don’t think it’s the fact she’s a vampire. She’s been hurt. But I can’t go asking about it. She’ll have to broach the subject with me.”

The three of us eventually dressed, leaving Mirabelle to her work, Lydia disappearing to find Aela, and I went to find Serana. I eventually found her on the elevated walkway above the College, gazing out of the sea. She turned as I approached and smiled. I stood behind her and wrapped her in a hug, and it pleased me when she leaned back, feeling comfortable. “Whenever you’re ready to tell me, Serana, I’ll be there.”

She ran her hands along my arms. “Thank you,” she whispered. Then she turned around to face me. “Do you want to be with me like that, Ragnar?”

“Yes. Absolutely,” I replied immediately. She smiled as I gently wrapped an arm around her waist. “But only on your terms, Serana. If you don’t want to, then we won’t. You can always trust me to be your friend.” That made the smile broaden. “But if you wished to be intimate with me like that, it would make me an incredibly happy man.”

“And the others won’t mind?”

“Not at all. They know that I like you and they have accepted it already.”

She rested her head against my chest as I wrapped in her a hug, feeling one of her hands rest on my back. “It’s a long story, Ragnar, and I need confidence just to even share it. I do want to… but it’s very…”

I shushed her. “It’s okay, Serana. The last thing I want is for you to be upset. Gods forbidding, I do it. Take your time. The moment you need to share, all you need do is grab my hand and take me to wherever you want to tell me.”

She took a deep breath and relaxed against me. I just enjoyed holding her in my arms. We hadn’t even kissed yet I knew I wanted to be with her like the other girls. Being a vampire? Didn’t care. She’d already made note of the fact Aela and I had been cured. She’d recognised it immediately about me but didn’t find it worth mentioning. She was surprised by Aela being cured though.

Mirabelle offered her to watch us again, this time only Mirabelle and I together. It took a while for Serana to agree before she admitted she wanted to see how two people really made love. We didn’t put on a show for Serana a couple of nights later, we simply did what we always did. Mirabelle pleased me first on her knees, and that was the first time Serana got a good look at my length. When Mirabelle swallowed my load, I noticed her eyes widen in surprise. “Oh, I had no idea.”

“I love his taste,” Mirabelle stated, “But he loves mine even more. Don’t you, Ragnar?”

I proved how much by gently throwing her onto the bed, spreading her legs, and immediately burying my face for a minute. The noises she made suggested she enjoyed it immensely, before I kissed up her body, enjoying her breasts for a little bit before I kissed her. “More teasing or…?”

“Ragnar, you already know the answer to that question.”

Holding her legs nice and wide, her pussy glistening in the light, I thoroughly enjoyed the next few minutes. It could have been a few hours and I wouldn’t have complained. The noises Mirabelle made turned me on even more, and I loved it when she gently pushed down into my face as I ate her out. “Gods, I love your tongue, Ragnar,” she moaned.

I would glance every so often to see Serana watching intently before refocusing on Mirabelle. Her first orgasm was big, very big, enough that she asked me to stop for a little while. That just meant I could kiss her, teasing her entrance with my cock at the same time. “One more with your mouth, Ragnar…”

She knew I loved doing it anyway, so I kissed back down her body, this time avoiding her pussy as I kissed all the way down to her delicate little feet, doing the same to both legs, before I turned her over, earning giggles as I kissed all the way up her back as well before leaning down to her ear. “I love you, Mirabelle,” I whispered.

“I love you too,” she whispered, and I heard the catch in her voice, turning her around to kiss her, feeling her arms wrap around me, “So much, Ragnar.”

Kissing back down her body, when I licked her again, the moan she made suggested her next orgasm wouldn’t take long and would be even bigger. I put all my years of experience into making her cum hard. She helped me by grabbing her legs and holding them back, urging me on to make her cum. Her voice caught more than once as I looked up, her eyes glistening as she sometimes got rather emotional when we made love.

“Oh gods!” she cried out, head rolling back as her back arched, “Ragnar…”

I didn’t reply, continuing to do what I knew was working. Mirabelle looked back down, nothing but love but also absolutely desire in her eyes. “Make me cum, Ragnar. Gods, I want to cum so much.”

She got what she wanted a couple of minutes later. Watching her orgasm like that was a thing of beauty, and I would keep going until she finally cried enough, usually a tap on the head or she’d manage to use words. I’d sit back for a moment and watch her body shake and shudder, the smile on her face one of absolute pleasure, before she’d look at me and hold out her arms, lowering myself down so we could share another kiss. Running my hand through her hair, she’d just looked at me and I couldn’t help the smile I’d return.

“Is it always like that?”

To be honest, I’d forgotten Serana was in the room. I think Mirabelle had too. We both turned towards her and nodded. “When we’re alone together, yes,” Mirabelle stated, “We have a real connection.”

“I’ve never seen anything like it.”

“Do you want to come closer when we make love?” Mirabelle wondered.

Serana thought briefly before she brought the chair closer. Being positioned as we were, it didn’t take much for me to slide my length into Mirabelle, hearing her gasp as always as I slowly buried my cock inside her. “Gods, I will never, ever get tired of this feeling,” she murmured.

We made love softly, tenderly, as we both knew that is what Serana wanted to see. She certainly wouldn’t have wanted to see me with Lydia at times. I have a feeling that would have been a reminder she didn’t want. Instead, she watched me with Mirabelle, the constant shows of affection and expressions of love. The most Mirabelle would do is wrap her legs around me, feeling her ankles slightly dig into my lower back. The change in angle would make her gasp, exclaiming softly how deep I now felt inside her. I’d only state she always felt hot and tight, which made her blush, even after all our time together.

But what we both knew is that Mirabelle loved to ride me. She could cum on her back, but when she rode me, she came a lot harder. There was the added bonus, which made it better for her, is that after she came, I would hold her tightly against me. She loved being on her back, running her hands up and down my arms and down my back, but when she wanted to enjoy a bigger orgasm, she asked me to roll over. I never complained, as there was nothing sexier than watching her ride me.

“Oh Ragnar,” she moaned as she lowered herself down.

“Gods,” I groaned in return.

Positioning my knees, she stayed sitting up as she started to gently bounce up and down on my cock, running my hands up and down her body, fondling her breasts. I eventually moved back enough that I was sitting up slightly so I could lick her nipples and breasts, feeling one of her hands wrap around the back of my head as I did so.

“You love them, don’t you?”

“I know just using my tongue here gets you hot.”

That made her giggle. “Ragnar, you figured out my body so quickly…” I stopped so I could kiss her, wrapping both arms around her as she continued to slowly bounce on me. “I can’t wait for you to cum in me,” she whispered.

“I love it when I do, Belle.” That made her smile as we held each other as she continued to bounce. I eventually lay back a bit as she leaned forward, changing the angle, earning a gasp and a smile before she started to move a bit faster. Running my hands up and down her back, just that sent tingles up and down her body, or so she told me, and I started to match her by thrusting up, as I desperately wanted to cum inside her again.

“Oh god, Ragnar,” she cried, and I knew she was getting close, particularly as she started to bounce a little harder and faster, feeling her start to squeeze my cock, “It feels so fucking good.”

Admittedly, that made me giggle, as Mirabelle rarely cursed, even while being intimate. She must have been really enjoyed it to curse. “You love my cock, don’t you?”

She kissed me hard before reply. “So fucking much, Ragnar,” she replied, resting her forehead against mine, looking deeply into my eyes, “I’m going to cum any second now.”

“Cum for me, Mirabelle. Cum for your Dragonborn.”

She kissed me hard again. “Only if you cum inside me.”

“Guaranteed.”

“Flip me as I cum and fuck me.”

“I’ll last thirty seconds.”

That made her giggle before she moaned, feeling her arms wrap tightly around me. “Oh gods!” she exclaimed, “Holy…” She couldn’t finish as I felt her squeeze me with her entire body, or so it felt. She kept on riding me though until she told me to flip her onto her back.

Once I did that, she continued to hold me, now begging for me to finish inside her. That wasn’t going to take long as all, thrusting away for all of a minute or so before I buried myself a final time and came so hard, I practically passed out, thankful I’d been resting on my forearms. Feeling her gently kiss my forehead and cheeks, I lifted my head to look at her face, eyes glistening once again. I used a hand to gently dry her cheeks, a mixture of sweat and tears. “Why is it always so damned good, Ragnar?” she asked softly before we kissed.

We lay like that for what felt like a while before we turned to look at Serana. Again, we had forgotten she was there in the middle of our lovemaking. She was wiping her own cheeks. “So that’s how two people are meant to love each other,” she whispered.

Mirabelle patted the bed next to her. “Come lie next to me, Serana.” She was hesitant for a moment before she did as asked. Obviously, she was a little awkward considering I was still inside Mirabelle, and admittedly, I was still rock hard, but she kept her eyes focused on Mirabelle. “I’m not sure what happened, and I know you’ll tell Ragnar later. But trust me, this is how two people who love each other express themselves. Sure, we sometimes turn it up a notch or two, but tonight, we wanted to show you how lovemaking can be tender and gentle. Sure, we both love a hard, fast fuck at times, but I had a feeling that isn’t what you wanted to see.” Serana nodded as Mirabelle then stated, “I know Ragnar wishes to be intimate with you, Serana. So do the other girls. And, I’ll be as honest as I can. You will have no better lover if you choose to be intimate with him in return.”

If Serana had been capable of blushes, she’d have turned as red as tomato, or at least I think so. I’d already told her, of course, but I think hearing it from Mirabelle was something else. “There’s a lot to share,” Serana stated quietly.

“I’m sure there is. Ragnar will listen. He listens to all of us. And he’s incredibly patient. Don’t rush into anything. If you never feel comfortable, then he’ll be your friend. Your best friend. But, trust me on this, Serana, you will want him like how I am with him now. When he’s inside you, there is honestly no greater feeling. And when you’re making love, you are the only thing he thinks about. Nothing else matters except your pleasure. He will make you cum as often as you can handle it.”

Serana met my eyes then immediately looked away. That was my opportunity to pull out, roll onto my side and have Mirabelle spoon into me. “Still hard, Ragnar,” she whispered.

“When am I not for you, Belle.”

She reached behind and teased me by placing the tip at her arsehole. “Bet you’d like this, wouldn’t you?”

“Oh…” Serana whispered.

Belle giggled. “It’s not something we do very often, but he’s so gentle when he takes my arse. He denies it, but I know he loves it when we make love that way.”

I gave her a gentle poke, which made her gasp, before I leaned down to her ear. “One day, I will fuck you like I do Lydia.”

That made her spin around and kiss me, looking in my eyes, now rather lustful. “Pin me down and fuck me?” she asked before kissing me hard again. I grabbed her arse and pulled her into me. I looked at Serana, who looked rather surprised.

“It can be like this too. Occasionally, I’ll just wander into our quarters, pin Mirabelle to the desk, and have my way with her.”

“I love it like that too, Serana. But we didn’t think… Well, it’s different, of course.”

“No, I’m beginning to understand.”

Mirabelle settled down into my arms, resting her head against my chest. I just looked at Serana, and I could see her looking up and down Mirabelle’s body. “You are beautiful, considering I’ve now seen you from all sides.”

Mirabelle flipped around, shuffling her are into my crotch as I held her again. “Thank you, Serana. Maybe one day in the future, I’ll see you like this too.”

Serana just smiled. I wasn’t sure if she’d ever want intimacy. I guess it would depend on what I was told. Mirabelle happily lay in my arms and asked a few questions, nothing too personal, aware that some topics were rather taboo when it came to Serana. She happily answered what she could, growing ever more comfortable in the fact we were both naked, though I think Mirabelle was covering me up to prevent it being too awkward. Helped she was so damned gorgeous, she was a welcome distraction.

We eventually had to clean up and dress, and that’s when I could feel Serana really drink me in as I stood up. I glanced her way but kept my face blank, noticing her eyes move up and down quite a few times before she stood up. “I really should go,” she said. She wasn’t being awkward; she’d just seen enough.

“We can talk about the next step tonight, Serana. I think we’ll have to go shortly.”

“Of course. Just us two?”

“Aye.”

That made her smile. “Okay.” She seemed rather pleased with that as she walked out.

“She’s attracted, at least,” Mirabelle stated as she did up her robe, “Of that, there is absolute no doubt.” She hugged me again once I was dressed. “Though how could she not be. If not for whatever happened in her past, I think she would have been underneath you tonight at some stage. Is that a nice thought?”

“It is. I won’t lie about that. I care for her and… I want to help her.”

That made Mirabelle smile, the sort of smile that lit up her face. She placed a hand on my chest. “You have a good heart, Ragnar the Dragonborn. And once she’s given you hers, give her yours like you have me.”

“You really don’t mind?”

“Ragnar, I know you have strong feelings for her already. And I think she’s already got them for you but she’s unsure because of everything else. I just don’t think she’ll be as open regarding certain elements like myself, Aela and Lydia, at least to begin with. But, rest assured, Ragnar, she will be number four. She’s a lovely woman and I would like to see her with us permanently.”

“Even though she’s…”

“Honestly, Ragnar, you wouldn’t even realise that about her except the fact she’s rather pale and her eyes.”

The next day, Serana and I discussed the next plan of action. Urag finally had information for us, letting us know a Moth Priest was coming in from Cyrodiil. He would make his way to Solitude first, to meet with General Tullius. After that, he wasn’t sure, surprised he wasn’t going to come to the College first, though the College and Moth Priests didn’t exactly have a lot to do with each other.

The best idea I could think was to head to Solitude and hope the Moth Priest was still there. If not, we’d just have to ask for his next destination and hope we can catch up with him quickly. All we could hope is that he would prove to be helpful. I guess if we explained everything, he should understand. We let Mirabelle, Aela and Lydia know what was going on. Lydia was no longer interested in helping out the Dawnguard, the whole affair with Delphine leaving a bad taste in the mouth. Aela had never really joined, and the three were happy to stay at the College, though Aela and Lydia suggested they might return to Whiterun soon, as both were starting to miss home. They both had a key to Breezehome but suggested, once it was over, I would return to the College first. They expected that.

Serana and I departed the next day, my three girls each giving me a long hug, and a deep kiss, wishing Serana and I good luck, before we led our horses across the bridge, mounted up, and followed the road south for a little while before heading west. We made it to Solitude within the day, though it was dark by the time we stabled our horses.

I could sense Serana was nervous as we approached the gate, but was surprised when she sought out my hand. Yes, we’d hugged at the College, and she’d been close when intimate, but that was caught up in the moment. She generally avoided being touched at all. When she came in very close, she whispered, “Don’t let go.”

“Are you okay?”

“I don’t like crowds. Make me nervous.” Didn’t even think about that. She squeezed my hand. “I’ll be okay as long as you’re with me, Ragnar.”

I swear, sometimes she was a mind-reader. I’m not sure if that was a good or a bad thing sometimes.

We headed to one of the taverns in town and grabbed a room. There was only one available, but Serana didn’t seem phased by that at all. I asked for a meal and drinks to be brought to our room, and figured I’d ask about the Moth Priest at the same time. I was amazing what innkeepers learned, and just our luck, he knew exactly who we wanted.

“Aye, I know of him as he stayed here just a couple of nights gone. Said he was heading south to Markarth. Not sure what for.”

“So he left yesterday or the day before?”

“Day before. He was going as far as Dragon Bridge, then he was hoping to get some sort of escort further south, particular as it’s bandit country once you cross the bridge itself.”

“Well, at least we have some idea where he’s headed. Thanks.”

I let Serana know what I’d discovered one I returned to our room, finding she was actually eating some of the meal I’d bought for her. Again, I hadn’t thought and it must have showed on my face. She smiled at me. “I appreciate the thought, Ragnar. And I can still eat. It’s just it doesn’t really do anything for me.”

Sitting down, I asked, “Can you taste anything?”

“Actually, more than you’d think. I can eat for the enjoyment without having to watch my figure.” That gave me a good chuckle as I poured her a glass of wine. “And I can drink as much of this as I want and not get drunk.”

I didn’t drink too much and we did go to bed early. I thought she would be awkward again, considering there was only one bed. She did take off her robes but left on a thin shirt and what looked like short pants. I only wore underwear as that was most comfortable. Getting under the furs, she did turn to face me though didn’t come too close, at least to start with.

“It’s a little weird, Ragnar.”

“I can sleep on the floor…”

“No!” she exclaimed quickly, causing me to raise my eyebrows. “That won’t be necessary. I trust you.”

I smiled and suggested I blow out the candle to get some sleep. Once we were in darkness, I was just going to let myself drift, but Serana couldn’t seem to get comfortable, and even in the darkness, I could see her slowly but surely getting closer to me. Eventually I heard her quietly asked, “Are you awake?”

“Aye.”

“Can you… hold me?”

“I can, but if I hold you all night, you might… In the morning…”

“I’ll try not to freak out,” she stated with humour.

She wriggled until she was moulded against my body and I could wrap my arms around her. Once I did, I heard and felt her sigh, and I hope it was one of contentment. I caught a scent of something in her hair, and I was fairly sure she constantly wore perfume, as she always smelled lovely. Mostly I just willed my body not to react to her being so close to me.

“Thank you,” she whispered. I just grunted, not trusting my voice. And she fell asleep rather quickly, so I think she got what she wanted. I managed to fall asleep a little later.

I woke up with a raging hard on the next morning and immediately moved away from Serana. That woke her up, thankful I’d already moved, and she did wonder why. “I’m hard,” I stated bluntly, so she’d understood.

“Oh…”

“I didn’t want you to freak out.”

“Well, I’ve seen it before, Ragnar. I just haven’t felt it against me. So… I feel cold like this, so rest your body against mine.”

“Are you sure?”

She didn’t reply but noticed the head nod, so I carefully moved my body against hers. She definitely gasped when I pressed against her, and I think she fought a battle of wills not to move away. When I was pressed against her, I gave her a gentle squeeze. “Did you sleep well?”

“I haven’t slept that well in… well, a long time. I think it was the company.” She paused, letting the silence continue until she said something that startled me. “Ragnar, I’ve been thinking a lot lately.”

“About what?”

“Watching you and Mirabelle… I want that.”

“You do?”

“I do. But it’s a big step and… I still have to tell you everything. I can’t do it before then because, once I’ve told you, I’ll feel better and you’ll understand. After that, if you still want to be with me…”

“Absolutely,” I stated softly.

“I always wondered if I’d find a man who accepted me how I am. Being a vampire limits your options. Even before I was a vampire, we were a weird family and… well, let’s just say I didn’t have many opportunities. I spent most of my time experimenting with magic and other things.”

“Were you…” I sighed. I just couldn’t ask the question without making her open up about everything.

She flipped over so she was facing me. “I’ll tell you everything soon and you can ask me any question that’s on your mind. Okay?” I nodded, which earned a smile. Then she surprised me completely by leaning forward and giving me a soft kiss. Didn’t last more than a couple of seconds but it left me speechless. “And I had to do that just then because, if I didn’t, I was going to go crazy. Since the day you opened my tomb, Ragnar, I’ve felt safe in your presence.”

I gave her a hug before suggesting we get up for breakfast. She thought that was a good idea, as finding the Moth Priest was what we were there for. I did watch her get out of bed, and she certainly showed more skin than I’d seen so far. Again, very pale, but she had a lovely, lithe figure, rather slim to be honest. She noticed me looking and smiled at me again before she started to assemble herself in her robes. I got up, dressed in my armour quickly, before heading downstairs to grab us a plate of food.

Breakfast eaten, we headed out, grabbed and mounted our horses, and headed straight for Dragon Bridge. We asked about the Moth Priest and were told he’d departed the previous day. I figured he wouldn’t have made Markarth so we might find remnants of a camp. Crossing the bridge and joining the road south, we eventually found remnants of something far worse.

A dead horse. A couple of dead bodies. An overturned cart. And a lot of blood. We dismounted and investigated, finding a satchel that definitely belonged to the Moth Priest, according to Serana anyway. I checked the bodies and found bite marks. I let Serana know and she simply sighed.

What we could do was follow the blood trail. The amount of blood was concerning, though Serana was confident that they wouldn’t want to kill the Moth Priest as her father would have been after him for the same reason as ourselves, therefore taking him alive was critical to their success. The blood trail eventually led us to a nearby cave, tying up our horses outside before I unsheathed my sword. “We kill everyone and take the priest,” I stated.

“Definitely,” she agreed, and I think she was definitely going to enjoy the next few minutes.

Wiping out the vampires inside wasn’t too difficult. Sure, one or two caused a momentary concern but with my strength and Serana’s magic, they didn’t stand a chance. What did concern me was that Serana recognised a couple of them. Her father’s lieutenants, she called them. And if he was now sending them out into the world, he was proving to be deadly serious about the prophecy. Trying to question them proved fruitless as they were dead.

Freeing the Moth Priest wasn’t too difficult, Serana understanding the magic used and the barrier disappeared quickly. What we didn’t expect was the priest to attack us. He was an old man, and I’d sheathed my sword, so all it took was a quick slap to snap him out of whatever spell still lingered. He was very apologetic as I helped him to his feet.

“You okay?”

“I'm quite alright, thanks to you. Dexion Evicus is my name. I'm a Moth Priest of the White Gold Tower. These vampires claimed they had some purpose in store for me, but they wouldn't say what. Probably hoping to ransom me, the fools. Now tell me, whom do you represent, and what do you want with me?”

“I’m the Dragonborn, I’m working with the Dawnguard, and we need you to read an Elder Scroll.”

“You have an Elder Scroll? Remarkable! If my knowledge of history serves me, I recall that the Dawnguard was an ancient order of vampire hunters. I will be happy to assist you with your Elder Scroll. Just tell me where I need to go.”

“You can ride with me, Dexion,” Serana offered, “We’ll escort you back to Fort Dawnguard.”

“Oh, that’s very kind of you. I’m afraid those vampires killed my escort and means of transportation.”

“I managed to pick up one or two of your things from your satchel,” I added.

Heading outside, there was still plenty of light, so after mounting up, we immediately made our way south-west in the direction of Riften. We wouldn’t make it in a day, agreeing to rest up in or around Whiterun and completing the journey the next day. We did eventually spend the night at Breezehome, Dexion taking Lydia’s room, Serana happily joining me again. There was nothing further than the night spent in Solitude, though she quickly spooned into me before going to sleep, and didn’t run away with fright when waking in the morning, though she did turn around to stop me poking her.

Dexion provided plenty of conversation along the road to Riften, asking me plenty of question considering he now knew who I was. I told him the basis and it appeared news about who I was had made it to Cyrodiil. I guess that wasn’t terribly surprising.

It was dark by the time we made it back to Fort Dawnguard, our arrival announced as Isran was waiting for us. Recognising that we’d brought an old man with us, he was surprisingly kind, suggesting we rest up before he read the Scroll. Surprisingly, Dexion was keen to do it immediately, stating he was trained in such matters, and the sooner he read it, the sooner he could relax. Isran looked at me, I just shrugged, so Isran agreed to do it straight away.

Serana handed him the Scroll as everyone gathered around, ready for him to start the reading. I have no idea if he had to go through any mental or physical preparations, but he opened it within a few minutes and began to state what was on the Scroll.

“Now, if everyone will please be quiet, I must concentrate.

I see a vision before me, an image of a great bow. I know this weapon! It is Auriel's Bow!

Now a voice whispers, saying "Among the night's children, a dread lord will rise."

In an age of strife, when dragons return to the realm of men, darkness will mingle with light and the night and day will be as one.

The voice fades and the words begin to shimmer and distort. But wait, there is more here.

The secret of the bow's power is written elsewhere. I think there is more to the prophecy, recorded in other scrolls.

Yes, I see them now... One contains the ancient secrets of the dragons, and the other speaks of the potency of ancient blood.

My vision darkens, and I see no more.

To know the complete prophecy, we must have the other two scrolls.”

He closed the Scroll and appeared to weaken considerably, Isran stepping forward and gently helping him remain standing. “Come on, old man. You should get some rest.”

Before he left, I made sure to shake his hand and thank him for his help, Serana doing the same. Only when she did that did he seem to realise what she was, but he didn’t make mention of that face, simply nodding his head in our direction, no doubt understanding why a vampire would be helping us. As Isran led him away, Serana grabbed my hand and led me away from the group.

“I think I know where we can start looking for one of the Scrolls,” she whispered.

“Where?”

“We need to find my mother, Valerica. She’ll definitely know where it is, and if we’re lucky, she actually has it herself.”

“But you said you don’t know where she went?”

“The last time I saw here, she said she’d go somewhere safe, somewhere that my father would never search. Other than that, she wouldn’t tell me anything.”

“Sounds like she was being cautious. Considering your father and all… What is your exact relationship with him?”

She grabbed my hand again and led me to one of the benches along the wall, sitting down before she replied. “He’s been obsessed with the prophecy since he found it. And let’s just say a few thousand extra years of obsession hasn’t helped.”

“It sounds like he doesn’t care about you at all, Serana.”

It was a blunt remark, but she grabbed my hand, giving it a squeeze. “I hoped that if he saw me, he might feel something again. But I guess I don’t really factor in at this point. I don’t think he even sees me as his daughter anymore. I’m just… a means to an end.”

Those last sentences were so sad, I could only sit closer and give her a hug, feeling her arms immediately wrap around me in return. When I kissed her cheek, she leaned back slightly and smiled. “At least someone looks at me like… I mean something,” she said softly. I was ready to kiss her again, and I mean a proper one, when Isran reappeared. He cleared his throat to gain our attention.

“Dexion mentioned the names of the two Scrolls. One is the Dragon Scroll. The other is the Blood Scroll.”

“Dragon Scroll? I might already have that one,” I replied.

“You do?”

“I had to get one regarding the whole dragon crisis. It’s currently in a chest in Whiterun. I’ll grab that one when we return with the other one. Serana has a lead we’ll investigate.”

“The quicker you do, the better. I have no doubt the vampires will now be spreading far and wide, looking for any advantage they can find.”

“We’ll leave first thing in the morning.”

That’s what we did, planning our route carefully so we could get to the castle as quickly as possible. We rode fast for Whiterun that first day and I was glad to be back in Breezehome so quickly. There was still no sign of Aela or Lydia, so Serana and I had the place to ourselves. We were both weary after a long day in the saddle, but it was while we were sat by the fire that Serana asked, “Have you ever wondered about how I became a vampire?”

I had a feeling this was going to be the talk she wanted to have. “I’ll admit to some curiosity.”

“If you’ve ever wondered where vampirism came from, it obviously has something to do with a daedric lord. The first vampire came from Molag Bal. She... was not a willing subject.”

“You mean she was raped?”

She nodded and I immediately understood, though let her continue. “But she was still the first. Molag Bal is a powerful daedric lord, and his will is made reality. For those willing to subjugate themselves, he will still bestow the gift, but they must be powerful in their own right before earning his trust.”

I grabbed her hand. “So how…?”

“Molag Bal has many desires. One thing he desires above all else are virgins. And to become a Daughter of Coldharbour, one must submit completely. The ceremony is…” I expected tears. Instead, she took a deep breath, steeling herself for what came next. “I was raped, Ragnar. Think of the most brutal thing to ever happen to anyone you know, then double that. Double it again. And again. And again. And again. Then you might understand what happened. I was… to say fucked by a daedric lord doesn’t even begin to describe what happened. I was defiled beyond anything imaginable. Every orifice I had he took. By the end, I was left bleeding, bruised, battered. A shell of what I once was. But I survived, and I became what I am.

Then my father…”

“No…”

That’s when the tears did fall, watching her wipe them away. This next part did hurt. “To prove himself to his master, he raped his own daughter. My mother stood to the side and did nothing but watch, devoted to him as much as my father.”

“She approved?”

“Her approval did not matter. Molag Bal demanded it so it was done. And like his lord, my father was not kind.”

“Was that…”

“The only time?” I nodded. “Yes. We were not that sort of family. He did it because his lord demanded it. Even at the time, I understood why. I hated him for it, but we were all involved in the worship. I just… I had been told what would happen but not to that extreme. But I didn’t expect my father…”

I asked the one question that I’d had on my mind for a while. “Do you regret it?”

“Becoming a vampire?” The question clearly startled her. “Nobody's ever asked me that before. I... I don't know. I think... mostly I hate what it's done to my family.”

“I guess something like that would change things.”

“My father's not exactly the most stable, and eventually he drove my mother crazy with him. And it all ended with me being locked underground for who knows how long. It's definitely been a bad thing, on the whole.” She paused before asking, “So what do you think of me now?”

I gave her hand a gentle squeeze. “Serana, you have a strength and spirit I simply didn’t imagine. For anyone to go through that and simply survive… But you have thrived.”

“I’ve never told anyone that before, Ragnar. I’m glad I told you.” She took a deep breath. “I feel like a weight has just been lifted off my shoulders. I’ve carried that around for a very long time.”

“I guess it might explain one or two things too.”

“About being touched?” I nodded again. “For a very long time, I didn’t like being hugged by anyone. But I felt safe with you from the moment we met, Ragnar. It still took time for me to get used to you, but I felt at ease rather quickly. When you held me in your arms that night at the College, overlooking Winterhold, I had never felt so safe with anyone. I knew this was a man who would fight until his dying breath for me.”

“You’d be worth every drop of blood.”

That made her smile before she grabbed my hand and led me upstairs. I didn’t expect anything, not after that sort of confession, but when she closed the bedroom door and led me towards the side of the bed, starting to help me take off my armour was a surprise. Once I was down to my underwear, she stopped, but grabbed my hands and placed them on her robes. She didn’t have to tell me what she wanted, but once I’d removed her robes, I could see her shaking. I understood why, so I stopped to give her a hug. “I feel safe,” she whispered, “Take off my shirt and short pants, Ragnar. I want to sleep next to you in only my underwear.”

“Are you sure?” I had to ask.

“I’m sure.”

I was gentle as I removed them. Once standing before me, I wrapped my arms around her again. She wasn’t exactly cold, but she wasn’t like me and warm either. Resting her head against my chest, she giggled as she could feel my heart was racing. Leaning back slightly, I looked into her eyes and immediately lowered to kiss her. She responded immediately, moving her hands up my back as I held her tightly towards me. When I introduced my tongue, that made her giggle. It didn’t last too long, but it was another small step.

Grabbing my hand, she sat down and shuffled to the side, allowing me to join her under the furs, immediately spooning back into my body, making sure I held her tightly in my arms. “Can you wait for me, Ragnar?”

“Of course,” I replied softly.

“It all happened a very long time ago but the scars have taken a long time to heal. I can still close my eyes and… see him. Molag Bal. I want to close my eyes and see you instead.” I just gave her a gentle squeeze. “I want to make love, Ragnar. Just like that night I watched you and Mirabelle. I want that more than anything. To feel loved by the man I share my bed with.”

“Whenever you are ready, Serana. I can happily lie here like this with you and never complain.”

“You really like me, don’t you?”

“I do.”

I knew she smiled. I just knew. “That feeling is more than mutual.”

I wonder if she meant that she actually loved me.

Notes:

On that note, this story is going on hiatus for a little while. Couple of reasons. First is that I'm nearly out of chapter to upload so I need to do a little more writing. Second is that I have quite a few stories on the go and all this writing and uploading is a little exhausting. So I'm going to be putting most works on some sort of hiatus, focusing only on one for a little while.

There will be occasional updates for this but not at the current weekly frequency.

Chapter 51: Serana

It had taken another two days to cross Skyrim to arrive at the docks where the boat for the castle still sat in the calm water. Tying our horses, ensuring they had enough food to survive, I rowed us across, both of us wrapped in furs as the weather had turned on our way north. Once docked, Serena led the way, having told me all about the castle on route, telling me about the secret entrances, hallways and rooms, and she was quite proud of the fact that she knew more about the castle than her father. She was confident we’d get in and out without being noticed.

Walking together, the castle towered over us, craning our necks to see it. “Castle looks big from down here,” she said.

“Someone compensating?” I joked.

She gave me a look and smiled. Then my face fell as I immediately remembered. She noticed and grabbed my hand. “Don’t,” she said, “Because I know what you meant.”

“It’s just… you know… I feel like I should watch…”

“I’m not going to take offence to every bad joke, Ragnar. Trust me. I told you because I wanted to. I’ve already moved on.” She stopped and gave me a hug. “I know it was a shock,” she added softly.

“It made me… angry. Probably nothing like you.”

“My anger disappeared a long time ago now, Ragnar. Now I just want…” She sighed. “I just want an end to all this madness.”

There may have been a secret entrance into the castle but between that and where we wanted to be, there were still plenty of traps and monsters waiting for us. Serana at least knew how to deal with the traps, ensuring they were reset once we passed them, while the enemies we dealt with were those I generally fought. We did fight one or two what she called ‘feral’ vampires, likely those cast out of her father’s presence.

The part of the castle we were going through was practically ruins, amazing some of it was still standing. But it was when we exited out into the courtyard that I realised finding her mother might be more difficult than imagined, and it was the first time I saw Serana truly upset.

“Oh no... What happened to this place? Everything's been torn down... the whole place looks... well, dead. It's like we're the first to set foot here in centuries.” I watched her walk around, upset and possibly a little confused. She grabbed my hand and led me to what had once been a huge set of double doors, now boarded up. “This used to lead into the castle's great hall. It looks like my father had it sealed up.”

“Why would he do that?”

She gave me a look and probably didn’t feel confident enough to answer. She led me towards the now obviously dead garden. “This was my mother's garden. It... do you know how beautiful something can be when it's tended by a master for hundreds of years? She would have hated to see it like this.”

I couldn’t think of something to say without being completely corny with perhaps a little sweetness on top. Again, she gave me a look. I swear she always knew what I was thinking. We continued to walk around, searching for a way through, when she stopped next to what looked like a sundial but wasn’t, explaining it was a moondial.

And it was a puzzle, as there were some crests missing that we found around the courtyard. Once they were in position, a secret passage entered, one Serana had no idea existed. It felt like we continued to climb after that, battling our way through numerous gargoyles, skeletons and other creatures that reacted to our presence. With her magic and my brawn, we made short work of nearly everything, only the gargoyles causing concern if more than two or three woke up at once.

It was a long climb, and we had to find the key for more than one secret entrance on the way, her mother obviously paranoid about her father finding her. But we eventually came to a door that looked different to the rest, and it was after passing through that we entered some sort of laboratory. That’s when Serana seemed to get a little excited.

“Look at this place. This has to be it! I knew she was deep into necromancy. I mean, she taught me everything I know. But I had no idea she had a setup like this.”

I found my hand grabbed again as I was led around. While it had clearly been abandoned for a long time, everything on display seemed like it had only been picked and bought yesterday. Probably something to do with the air. Or magic. Serana led me from shelf to shelf. “Look at all this. She must have spent years collecting these components.”

“They look fresh too.”

“Mother would have made sure everything would have survived a million years. The air does feel a little different in here.”

Stopping near something on the ground, she slowly walked around it. “And what's this thing? I'm not sure about this circle, but it's obviously... something.”

I had no idea so asked, “Where do you think your mother is? She’s clearly not here. From the looks of it, she hasn’t been here for a very long time.”

“No, you’re right. Let's take a look around. There has to be something here that tells us where she's gone. I remember she used to keep a small journal. Let’s see if that’s hidden around somewhere.”

She let go of my hand as we wandered around the laboratory. As we did, I asked a few questions about her mother and what she researched. Serana mentioned necromancy again. I had a feeling Serana was also interested in it though she’d certainly not used any sort of spells in front of me. Maybe she thought I’d judge her over that?

I eventually found the journal, hiding in plain sight. Handing it over, Serana got excited again as it pretty much explained what her mother was looking for and, more importantly, what we would need to find her. The circle on the floor was a portal, and all we needed was some ingredients we found located around the laboratory. When it came to needing her mother’s blood, it took me to suggest that she shared the same blood. That made her smile and kiss me for such a smart idea.

As she prepared the formula, she told me more about the Soul Cairn, as it was obviously something well outside my realm of knowledge. I did wonder if even Mirabelle knew what it was. Apparently it was a realm of Oblivion, run by a group called the Ideal Masters. Having learned about her father, all too much in some instances, I thought I’d ask about her mother.

“What will we do when we find her?”

That made her stop and think. “I've been asking myself the same thing since we came back to the castle. She was so sure of what we did to my father, I couldn't help but go along with her. I never thought of the cost.”

“You were never asked?”

She gave me a look but scoffed. “No, I was told, not asked. I guess they were both pretty selfish. She was practically smirking as we left home. Almost like she was proud of herself. Like she didn't want to just stop my father... she wanted to stick it to him, too.”

“Guess you might have to have words with her too.”

“Well, unlike my father, she might actually listen to me. Probably not though.” Once the concoction was complete, she placed it into the vessel and the portal opened up. It was like nothing I’d seen before. “By the blood of my ancestors... She actually did it... created a portal to the Soul Cairn. Incredible,” she stated in awe.

Like usual, I led the way but, this time, I paid for it immediately. At one moment, I was stepping down. The next, I was flat on my back and feeling rather sore. Serana was at my side immediately, looking down at me with concern. “Okay, what happened?” I groaned.

“Now that I think about it... I should have expected that. Sorry. It's hard to describe. The Soul Cairn is... well, hungry, for lack of a better word. It's trying to take your life essence as payment.”

She helped me to my feet, giving my head a shake. “So I can’t get in?”

“There might be, but I don't think you're going to like it. Vampires aren't counted among the living. I could probably go through there without a problem.”

“Ah, so... I become a vampire?”

“Not your first choice, I guess.” I just shrugged. She clearly gave it a little thought before continuing. “We could just "pay the toll" another way. It wants a soul, so we give it a soul. Yours.”

“I’m not sure if that sounds better or worse.”

“My mother taught me a trick or two. I could partially soul trap you, and offer that gem to the Ideal Masters. It might be enough to satisfy them. It would make you a bit weaker when we travel through the Soul Cairn, but we might be able to fix that once we're inside. Maybe.”

“Can I give it a little thought?”

“Take your time.” She grabbed my hand, giving it a squeeze. “I'm sorry. I wish I knew a better way, something that would be easier for you. Just know that... whatever path you choose, I won't think any less of you. Sometimes things just have to be done. I know that better than anybody.”

I walked away for a few minutes as, well, part of me was intrigued by the first option. I made up my mind but continued to think it over, and once I returned to Serana, who watched me intently, I asked, “Is there a cure?”

She nodded. “There is but you need to find a mage capable of performing the ritual. I don’t know of one myself.”

“As long as there is a cure. For me, that is.”

“Are you saying…” She didn’t complete the question as I just nodded. “Are you sure, Ragnar? I mean, really sure about this?”

I stepped forward and gently dragged her towards me, moulding her body into mine. Leaning down to her ear, I whispered, “I trust you, Serana.” She hugged me tightly in return.

“Turning someone is a very... personal thing for vampires. It's intimate. For us.”

“How intimate?”

She proved it by kissing me. And this was no ordinary peck, like what we’d done before. This was a proper kiss, the sort that caused my body to react and I was left with no doubt of her feelings for me as we did. Breaking apart finally, she looked into my eyes and caressed my cheek. “I promise to try and make this as painless as possible. Hold still.”

She kissed me again and, once she figured I was comfortable, she didn’t delay and, well, bit me. It hurt a little bit. Actually, it hurt a lot. But it wasn’t just that. I felt… weird. Very weird. Then I passed out for a while.

Coming to I’m not sure how much later, I felt… dead. I checked for a heartbeat and found I didn’t have one. All the aches and pains had also disappeared. No hunger. No pain. No… anything. Serana offered her hand and helped me to my feet. “How do you feel?”

“Different. Guess it’ll take time getting used to.”

“As soon as we’re done here, we’ll look into getting your cured, Ragnar.”

Now entering the Soul Cairn was easy. And it was like nothing I’d ever seen before. To call it weird would be an understatement. And passing the lost souls was a little disturbing. We walked and talked as always, Serana telling me what she’d learned about the Soul Cairn, her mother obviously having experimented for years about trying to find entrance, and it was obvious that Serana had had more than a passing interest in it too.

I had to ask one simple question. “Are you sure your mother has the Elder Scroll?”

“No, but there's no way she would have left it in Tamriel. She wanted to get it as far away from my father as possible. I can't imagine a better place.”

“What if she doesn’t?”

“Then we find out where she hid it. If she's still alive... well, as alive as she was before. Or is now. Or... you know what I mean.”

She was cute when stumbling over her words, unable to stop the chuckle. All she did was grab my hand and give me a gentle bump. We walked for what felt like hours, and I had suggested we head to what looked like buildings. If she was going to be anywhere, she’d be there. We stuck to what looked like paths, not trusting anything around us. In the distance, I could see numerous towers. Lightning, or what looked like lightning, spread across the sky. The place was eerie. I don’t know how anyone would feel comfortable living there.

The reunion when we found her mother was about what I expected. A little warmer than when I delivered her to her father, but any sort of welcome would have been better than that. What concerned me is that she appeared trapped behind a barrier. Valerica immediately started to worry about Serana and why she was there before she turned her attention to me. Immediately suspicious of me, she wondered why I was with Serana. In fact, her mother was rather unhappy I’d been brought along at all, and she pissed me off when starting to question my motives, particularly after explaining Serana’s role in the prophecy. Basically, the pair of them were pure-blooded vampires, Daughters of Coldharbour as Serana had already explained, and that the prophecy her father obsessed with required her blood. It was why Valerica had hidden herself away, as she was pure-blooded too.

“You’re saying that Harkon means to kill Serana?”

“If Harkon obtained Auriel's Bow and Serana's blood was used to taint the weapon, the Tyranny of the Sun would be complete. In his eyes, she'd be dying for the good of all vampires.”

“Like hell I’ll let that happen.”

“And how do you intend on stopping him?”

“I’ll kill him.”

She scoffed at me. “You care nothing for Serana or our plight. Whether or not you've become one of us in order to survive the Soul Cairn, you're still a vampire hunter at heart. You're here because we're abominations in your mind. Evil creatures that need to be destroyed.” She turned to Serana. “This stranger may call himself a vampire, but he knows nothing of our struggle, Why should I entrust you to him?”

“This "stranger" has done more for me in the brief time I've known him than you've done in centuries!”

“How dare you! I gave up everything I cared about to protect you from that fanatic you call a father!”

“Yes, he's a fanatic... he's changed. But he's still my father. Why can't you understand how that makes me feel?”

The heartbreak in her voice… It was only because of her mother that I didn’t immediately go to hold her. “Oh, Serana. If you'd only open your eyes. The moment your father discovers your role in the prophecy, that he needs your blood, you'd be in terrible danger.”

“So to protect me you decided to shut me away from everything I cared about? You never asked me if hiding me in that tomb was the best course of action, you just expected me to follow you blindly. Both of you were obsessed with your own paths. Your motivations might have been different, but in the end, I'm still just a pawn to you, too.” The heartbreak in her voice broke me, and when she looked at me and I saw the tears, I went to her as she went to me, feeling her head bury itself into my chest. Her mother wisely stayed quiet. I’m not sure how long I held her before she raised her head, turning to look at her mother. “I wanted us to be a family again. But I don't know if we can ever have that. Maybe we don't deserve that kind of happiness. Maybe it isn't for us.” She looked at me again. “All I know is that I now have Ragnar here with me. He’ll do anything to help me, to keep me alive.”

“I'm sorry, Serana. I didn't know... I didn't see. I've allowed my hatred of your father to estrange us for too long. Forgive me. If you want the Elder Scroll, it's yours.”

Valerica then gave us the bad news, that to dispel the barrier, we needed to kill the Keepers. Three of them in fact. She could at least point us in their general direction and wished us luck, and actually sounded like she meant it. As we walked away, I asked Serana about the reunion, and she admitted it felt good to get things off her chest. From what she said, she’d always been closer to her mother anyway, and even before the ritual with Molag Bal, she hadn’t been close with her father. After what happened, she obviously put even more distance between them, and admitted that she was simply caught in the middle between two power-hungry parents, both obsessed with their own path. I could only feel sorry for her.

Finding and killing the Keepers wasn’t all that difficult. They were big, ugly bastards, and not wanting to waste too much time, I used my Thu’um three times, simply blowing them off the enormous towers on which they resided. Serana joked, calling it cheating, but neither of us wanted to get into long battles. I just wanted the Scroll and to get out of the Soul Cairn. Serana could see I was a little uncomfortable being a vampire, simply holding my hand whenever we walked.

After killing the third one, we returned to her mother, who appeared surprised we’d done the job so quickly. That’s when I gave my own revelation about who I was. She didn’t know all that much about the Dragonborn, so I gave her a show of my own power. Whether she was impressed or not, I’m not sure, but she was certainly more friendly than before, even answering a few questions I had about how she’d become trapped in the Soul Cairn.

Then she revealed that the Scroll was hidden away elsewhere, in a place called the Boneyard. And that we should watch out for a dragon named Durnehviir, who would now be investigating due to the deaths of the Keepers. Apparently he was as tied to this place as she was. That didn’t sound good.

Crossing the courtyard, there was a sound I knew all too well, unsheathing my sword as a dragon appeared above us. No ordinary dragon, there was something magical about him. I simply issued instructions to mother and daughter, using my Thu’um next to bring the dragon down.

He was powerful, I’ll give him that, but had no answer to the power of my Thu’um. With the magical abilities of mother and daughter with me, killing the dragon took time, but they were a welcome distraction, allowing me to get in close and quickly land the killing blow. Once dead, I didn’t absorb the soul, figuring that the dragon wouldn’t have had one.

Turning to the other two, Serana simply smiled while Valerica looked at me in what I would call wonder. “Forgive my astonishment, but I never thought I’d witness the death of that dragon.”

Still, it was good news, and her mother was able to find the Scroll, handing it over to her daughter. We walked back to her now open prison, turning to both of us. “You both should be on your way. Stopping Harkon is the most important thing.” Serana looked a little unsure before finally stepped forward to give her mother a hug. When Valerica closed her eyes, I knew what that gesture meant. “I should speak alone with this Dragonborn friend of yours, Serana. Can you give me a minute?”

“Sure.”

Serana walked away, giving me space, Valerica gesturing for me to come closer. “You love her?” she asked bluntly.

“I do,” I admitted, unable to stop the smile, though I realised I’d just told her mother before telling Serana.

But, still, it made her smile. “She loves you. There is no doubt in my mind. The way she looks at you…” She paused a moment. “You were human before this?”

“Serana turned me before entering. I plan to cure myself.”

“And Serana?”

“Is under my protection. What she wants to do is her decision.”

She stepped forward to grab my hand. “I can’t make you promise, but please, Dragonborn, ensure my daughter lives. I know I’ve made some terrible decisions, her father more so, but the most important thing is my daughter. Do not allow her to be sacrificed on the whim of some mad man.”

“You now know about my gift. Harkon will rue the day he even thought about this prophecy.”

“Don’t get over-confident, but with you at her side, I can rest easy for a while.”

“Once all this is over, if Serana wants to, we can return here and take you home.”

She smiled. “And I can see exactly why she loves you. I was hesitant at first, Dragonborn, about your motives. But… I’m glad you are by her side.”

Returning to Serana, we would have just walked out of the Soul Cairn, but we were stopped by Durnehviir. I was ready to fight him again before he asked to simply speak with me. It was another long and rather interesting conversation with a dragon, and his was another sorry tale of how he ended up trapped in the Soul Cairn. Having bested him in battle, like Odahviing, he offered his services. If I Shouted his name, he would be released from the Soul Cairn, at least briefly. Being a noble animal, and blood kin to me, I could only reply favourably to such a request. That pleased him, giving me thanks, before he flew away.

Returning to the world of the living, we made haste leaving the castle, thankful that it was dark upon arriving outside, so after rowing across the river, I could put on my own hood to protect me from the sun. Serana was immediately concerned as I obviously didn’t know all the dangers. I said we should make it to Riften as soon as possible. I would enter Whiterun under cover of darkness, grab the Scroll from Breezehome quickly, but we’d avoid population centres for our own safety.

We chose to travel at night. Serana understood my caution. I was rather well known and if people realised what I was, it would end very badly. Getting into Whiterun wasn’t too difficult, as I knew of a hidden entrance, avoiding the patrols as I made my way to Breezehome. It seemed quiet but when I headed upstairs, Aela was fast asleep in the main bedroom. I tried to grab the Scroll as quietly as possible, but she woke up as I was leaving.

“Ragnar?” she asked sleepily.

“Got back to sleep, Aela,” I whispered.

“I haven’t seen you in ages.”

I shushed here. “Please, Aela. Go back to sleep. I was never here.”

“What? Ragnar, what’s wrong?”

“If I turn around, you’ll freak out. Please, just… trust me on this.”

I heard light footsteps and a gentle hand on my shoulder. “Ragnar, what did you do?”

I sighed. “I didn’t want you to see, Aela,” I said softly, before slowly turning around, my head lowered. I lifted it slowly so she could see. “I had to do it to help Serana.”

“You’re a… a vampire…?” I heard the disgust in her voice.

“There’s a cure, Aela. But I needed the Scroll. There’s more to this than you could possibly imagine.”

She nodded. “Then you should go.”

I turned and left immediately. There was no point staying. I heard the tone but the look on her face said everything. She could accept Serana being a vampire but there’s no doubt her opinion of me changed in an instant. I would have to be cured before even thinking of returning.

Returning to Fort Dawnguard took a little longer than usual because we travelled at night and generally avoided major routes, but I really should have thought about how they’d react upon returning and I was a vampire. Isran freaked out. I mean properly freaked out, and I found myself surrounded quite quickly by a dozen swords, ready to cut me down. Luckily, having both Scrolls in our possession, willing to hand them over, we managed to explain everything that happened since leaving. He was sceptical about the whole ‘needing to be a vampire’ thing, but I assured him I would seek out a cure. He didn’t know anything about that, and said that while still being a vampire, the fort would be off-limits for me. He didn’t count Serana as he gave less than a shit about her.

Still, with the Scrolls, we would have been able to make our next move after the reading. Unfortunately, Dexion had blinded himself in his haste to assist us earlier. But all was not bad news, as he at least knew how to help us going forward. We would have to find an ancient glade and it would be there that I could read the Scrolls and discover what we needed to do next. With that information, Isran pretty much told me to piss off until I was cured.

Thankfully, Sorine and Gunmar both stepped forward and were able to tell me what I needed to do. “There is an elf by the name of Falion. He lives in Morthal. Speak to him. He’ll be able to help you,” Sorine explained.

“Thanks.” Turning to Serana, I said with a sigh, “Guess we’re camping out again.”

“More time alone with you isn’t a bad thing, Ragnar.”

Heading back out, we mounted our horses and took off immediately. Serana understood that I wanted to be cured immediately, and I wasn’t dumb enough to suggest she get cured as well. Whether she was happy or not as a vampire wasn’t something I should involve myself in. That was a decision she would make for herself.

We left our horses outside Morthal and made our way in by darkness, avoiding patrols until arriving at Falion’s house on the edge of town. Knocking on his door, he was startled to be greeted by two vampires. Quickly explaining how I was and what I wanted, he immediately agreed to help us without delay.

He led us into the middle of the nearby forest towards what he called a summoning circle. Ordering me to stand in the middle of the circle, he warned me that what was about to happen would be painful but that I would be ‘clean’ come the end of it. Raising his hands into the air, he began to chant:

“I call upon Oblivion realms. The home of those who are not our ancestors. Answer my plea!

As in death there is new life, in Oblivion here is a beginning for that which has ended.

I call forth that power! Accept the soul that we offer!

As the sun ends the night, end the darkness of this soul, return life to the creature you see before you!”

I cried out in pain. Actually, pain doesn’t even begin to describe what happened, quickly falling to my knees before I passed out. I’m not sure how long I slept for, but I was gently shaken awake, seeing Serana looked at me with concern. I simply reached up and brought her face close to mine to kiss her. “I could get used to wake up like that,” I whispered. That simply earned another of those beautiful smiles.

Helping me to my feet, Falion simply stated the ritual was complete and I was human once again. He then offered the same service to Serana whenever she was ready. She didn’t say anything, looking at me as if waiting for me to say something. I shrugged. “It’s your choice, Serana. I certainly won’t force you to do anything.”

Now cured, we immediately made our way towards the glade Dexion mentioned. I’ll admit to having a spring in my step, checking to see that I did have a pulse, Serana adding when she held my hand that it was warm once again. We headed south towards Falkreath, finding the position of the glade thanks to the information provided by Dexion and others. Tying up our horses’ upside, the way into the glade was a narrow passage, but upon exiting, I heard the intake of breath from Serana.

“Wow. Look at this place. No one's been here in centuries. I doubt there's any other place like it in Skyrim. It's beautiful.”

She looked at me, an enormous smile on her face, grabbing my hand as she led me down into the glade itself. The colours on show were a kaleidoscope. She was right, it was utterly beautiful, but also incredibly peaceful. Coming to a stop and closing my eyes, you could only hear the water running nearby, perhaps a bird or two chirping, maybe an insect, but that was about it.

Any idea of just getting on with it ended when we noticed the thermal pools, and there was no doubt the water would be very warm. “I’ve never had the opportunity to bathe in such waters. Have you?”

“Once or twice. Definitely worthwhile.”

“Can we do it now?”

“I’m in no rush to leave.”

I was surprised that she immediately started to disrobe, quickly standing before me in nothing but her underwear. Without her boots on, she was a little shorter than me, and I just watched as she dipped a foot into the water. “Oh my, that’s so warm, Ragnar!” she stated excitedly, watching as she eventually lowered her entire body in, going so far as to duck her head under. When she reappeared, hair slicked back and looking at me, there was definitely a reaction. “Going to join me?”

I fell over in my haste to undress, earning a giggle from Serana, before I quickly joined her in the water. We managed to find somewhere to sit, relaxing back against the side, Serana immediately leaning against me, placing a hand on my chest. “Well, the water is warm and now you are too.”

“Certainly is relaxing.”

I’m not sure how long we sat back in the water, my arm wrapped around Serana, but she eventually moved, slinging a leg over me as she sat on my lap. She just looked at me in silence for a few seconds before lowering her lips to mine, and the kiss was immediately full of passion and… need. Running my hands up and down her back in return, she would definitely have felt the reaction of my body, but when she did, she kept kissing me but couldn’t help smile.

Breaking the kiss, her face close to mine, she whispered, “Ragnar, I want this. I want you.”

“I can grab the rugs from the horses.”

“Grab everything. We’ll stay here for a while.”

I got up and ran so fast, I’m sure I heard her giggle, grabbing everything I could think of before making my way back. I placed the furs down on the ground near the water before helping Serana out. “Take everything off,” she asked.

Taking off her bra, I’ll admit my hands were shaking slightly as I didn’t want to mess this up at all. Once her breasts were freed, I had a look. Her nipples were hard and looked bright pink against her pale skin. I teased her by leaning down, taking one in my mouth. She gasped when I did that. “Oh,” she breathed, “Oh my…”

Moving back up, I kissed her again as I helped take off her panties, feeling her step out of them, running my hands down her back before gently grabbing her arse. She smiled as I kissed her, pressing her body into mine, gasping again when she felt my cock press against her. I was surprised when she helped take off my underwear without hesitation, so the next time she pressed against me, it was the real thing. We both took a step back. Serana had seen me naked before, but never in a situation like this. As for Serana, she was absolutely gorgeous. I drank her body in. She had some fur above her sex, neater than I expected. She was slim but her breasts were bigger than I imagined. Her skin was practically unblemished. A goddess.

Grabbing her hand, I laid her down on the furs before I rested above her, giving her a kiss. “Would you like to know what I’m going to do?” She smiled and nodded. “First, I’m going to kiss every inch of your body.” She couldn’t help giggle. “Then I’m going to pleasure you with my mouth. A cruder way is to say I’m going to eat your pussy, Serana.”

“Oh…”

“Once I’ve made you cum a couple of times, we can make love the rest of our time here.” Giving her a gentle kiss, I added, “If at any time you feel uncomfortable, tell me, and I’ll stop.”

“I won’t…”

I kissed her again. “Serana, this is a big step. I know why you want to do this with me.”

“I love you,” she whispered.

“And I love you.” The smile returned warmed my heart more than I could have imagined.

She ran her hand until it rested on the back of my head. “You are my first, Ragnar. My first love. And my first… real partner. After today, when I close my eyes, I will only think of you.”

“I hope so.”

“You’ve helped mend my heart, Ragnar. Now I will give you mine if you give me yours.”

“Absolutely.”

I kissed her softly, immediately turning more passionate, earning a moan once I broke it and moved down her body. And I didn’t lie. I kissed her all over, earning plenty of giggles as I went so far as to kiss things like her fingers. Kissing down her body, she would occasionally moan or gasp, having not been touched in such a way ever. I avoided her sex, heartened to see she was incredibly wet already, teasing her as I kissed her upper thighs, almost making her beg me to touch her.

“Ragnar,” she breathed, and I knew she was enjoying every second.

Gently spreading her legs, she met my eyes and returned a shy grin. When I lowered my head and tasted her, she gasped loudly as I gently started to pleasure her. She was utterly turned on my now, and I felt harder than I had in my life. Keeping her legs spread, I was soon tonguing her depths, feeling one of her hands gently rest on my head as she started to move her body to what I was doing.

“Oh gods,” she cried softly, “Ragnar, it’s so… so good…”

“I want you to cum for me, Serana.”

“I can’t remember the last time…”

I’m sure she’d only ever cum from pleasing herself. And I’ll admit I was now desperate to make her cum. Not for me, but for her, so she could finally understand how enjoyable sex could be between two people, and that I would do anything to please her. Mouth now clasped to her pussy, I was teasing her relentlessly and switched it up a gear by starting to tease her clit. That immediately sent her wild, hearing her cry out as she almost couldn’t cope.

“Ragnar,” she choked out, and I knew it was going to be huge, and she was going to cry. I didn’t mind that, feeling her hand now grab my hair. “Oh Ragnar, keep going.”

I kept going until she had an orgasm. It was likely the first one she’d ever experienced with another person. And I kept going, which did surprise her, hearing her choke back a sob as she begged me to keep going. “I want another one like that.”

Lifting her body up a little, I readjusted so our eyes could now meet. The love, lust and desire in hers drove me wild in return, upping the tempo of what I was doing to her. Her taste was like nothing else I’d had. I could have done it every minute for the rest of my life. I let go of her legs as she placed them on my shoulders, as she started to grind against my face. She came again quite quickly, this time her legs squeezing my head a little bit. Then she had to cry enough as I lowered her to the ground, gesturing towards me to hold her as she had a little cry on my shoulder.

“Gods, I definitely love you now,” she whispered.

“You’re just saying that because I made you cum.”

She giggled again. “First man to ever do that.” She paused before adding quietly, “First and last.”

“That’s it then?”

“Ragnar, I love you, and I say that knowing your entire life. I know Mirabelle is thinking lifelong. I don’t know about the other two, but I’m with Mirabelle on this. I don’t want anyone else. I know that already. I knew before you just did that to me.”

I kissed her as I shuffled slightly, placing my cock at her entrance. I heard her take an intake of breath, meeting her eyes. “Ragnar, I wanted to do this while a vampire because I wanted to be sure. But… Once we’ve dealt with my father, I’ll think about getting a cure.”

“You will? It’s your choice but I love you as you are. I don’t love you expecting you to change.”

She kissed me before nodding, the signal I wanted. Slowly and carefully, I slid my cock inside her, stopping every so often as she adapted to my size. Her hands were running up and down my back, her lips not letting go of mine as we kissed, and I eventually started to gently thrust, not giving her my whole length yet. When she moaned into my mouth, and I felt her smile again, I knew memories of the past would slowly dim with each time we made love.

She gasped loudly when I buried myself completely, stopping and both of us looking down. “You’re inside me, Ragnar,” she whispered.

“Gods, you feel wonderful, Serana.”

That made her giggle again. I was enjoying that sound more and more each time. “You feel… enormous, Ragnar, but also… It’s like I was made for you.”

Grabbing her legs, I placed her feet just above my butt, making her groan as the angle changed. “Oh gods,” she whimpered, “Oh gods, how does that…” She trailed off and kissed me hard. “Make love to me, Ragnar. I need to feel you… I need you to make me yours.”

I knew what she meant, so started to gently thrust into her. She moaned and whimpered as I did, no doubt feeling a thousand different things, and I could see the emotion in her eyes and on her face. I just gazed into her eyes constantly, watching for any negative reaction, but the near constant smile on her face, the constant affection she showed, the fact her hands never left my body, the feeling that she squeezed my cock inside her, everything proved to me that she loved and enjoyed every second.

Being as turned on as I was, the fact I lasted five minutes made me feel pretty damned good, and I had to warn her I was going to cum myself. She just kissed me, nodding again, feeling her legs tighten around me. I barely had to pick up the tempo as I felt the approach, only breaking it to tell her I loved her.

That made her smirk. “You’re just saying that because you’re about to cum inside me.”

“First time of many, I hope.”

“Today or forever?”

“Both!”

That made her giggle, leaning down to kiss her before I had to stop and groan, gently burying my cock as I came hard. It was the sort of toe-curling, mind-clearing orgasm I had often enjoyed with Muiri and Mirabelle, the sort that expressed the love I felt for them. The fact I now experienced the same euphoric high with Serana told me everything I needed to know about how I felt about her. Serana simply wrapped her arms and legs around me, holding me tight to her body.

“Good memories now,” she whispered.

“And we’ll make many more going forward,” I added softly.

I was still rock hard as always and she groaned slightly when I pulled, lying on my side next to her and pulling her against my body. She wiggled her butt against me as I held her. “No going back now, Ragnar,” she warned with humour.

I just kissed her neck, feeling her move her head slightly as I gently bit down. That made her giggle then gasp as she definitely liked that. “I’m going to learn everything about your body, Serana. Every little zone that produces noises like that.”

“I love the sound of that, Ragnar.”

We lay in silence for a little while before she turned around and gently pushed me onto my back. Without a word, she straddled my lap, feeling her pussy rest against my cock. “I remember watching Mirabelle and this is what I wanted to do most of all, Ragnar.”

“I’ll admit I’ve often thought about this too.”

She lifted herself up, grabbing the base of my cock and placing it at her entrance. She gasped as the head of my cock popped inside her again, moaning a few times as she slowly lowered herself down until my cock was inside her completely. She looked down before looking at me, an enormous grin on her face. “Oh Ragnar, I could definitely do this all the time,” she stated softly.

Leaning forward, she kissed me as I adjusted my legs, running my hands down her back, resting one on her arse as I caressed her face with the other. “You are beautiful,” I whispered. Her lower lip trembled. “What?” I asked softly.

“The way you look at me, Ragnar. What you tell me. How you make me feel. For so long, I thought… I was…” I gently brought her down to kiss me as she slowly started to ride me. “I never thought I’d ever experience this,” she added.

We didn’t share many words for the next few minutes, Serana slowly riding my cock, enjoying every second. She never picked up a fast tempo and I didn’t want her too, one hand still on her arse, perhaps caressing her back, the other still gently stroking her face or around her hair. The way she looked at me in return, I’d never felt my heart swell with such feelings of love. Only with Muiri and Mirabelle had I felt anything as close. That’s nothing against Astrid, Aela or any other woman I’ve been with, but I knew over the years, those were the two I loved the most. And now Serana? Well, I think I might have loved her the most. It was a close thing between the three. I’d never tell them that, of course.

“Ragnar!” she cried, starting to ride me a little faster, and I knew she was already closing in on another orgasm. I don’t think it was just me. I didn’t have a magic dick. No, it was definitely the feelings she was experiencing at the same time. For the first time in her life, she was being intimate with someone she loved and with someone who loved her back.

“Cum for me, Serana. Then keep going,” I gently urged.

“I’ll never want to stop if it’s always this good.”

“I hope it gets better.”

She leaned down to kiss me, running my other hand down to her butt, gently grabbing and starting to thrust into her. That made her gasp loudly, whimpering into my mouth before needing to break the kiss. “Oh gods,” she moaned.

“Cum for me, Serana,” I whispered.

Her eyes looked into mine and I knew she was close, the way her mouth opened as she released what sounded like a guttural groan, feeling her pussy grip my cock tightly as she started to cum. She kept on riding me and I kept on thrusting into her, Serana now resting on her forearms as I moved a hand up and down her back. “Keep going?” I asked.

“Gods yes, don’t stop,” she croaked, her voice heavy with emotion again.

Holding her tight to me, I whispered into her ear that I loved her. She could barely repeat the words back for a time before raising herself up on her palms. She surprised me by starting to ride me a little faster so I stopped moving. “I want to cum again,” she stated.

“I’m not going to stop you.”

“And I want you to cum in me again.”

“Trust me, that’s definitely going to happen.”

Watching her ride me faster, my cock disappearing and reappearing inside her, I kept my focus on her face and she was loving every second, and no doubt experiencing all sorts of different things as my cock plunged her depths. She changed position slightly, leaning back and I held her hands to keep her balanced, and she really loved that, crying out loudly as she really started to ride me.

Gods, she was beautiful. I’ll admit, a little part of me hoped that, one day, I could have her and Mirabelle together. If that happened, I could die the next day a happy man. But I refocused on her, and she surprised me when falling forward again, running my hands down her body, she whispered, “Fuck me, Ragnar. Not… You know… I’m going to cum very soon.”

I thrust up into her a little harder than earlier. She smiled and nodded, so that suggested it wasn’t too much. I probably did that for around five minutes before she came again, the kiss we shared so full of feeling, it near enough made me cum. She kept kissing me, whispering for me to cum inside her, so with a hand on her arse, the other wrapped around her back, I did fuck her a little harder still. She didn’t mind that at all, again appearing to enjoy it, knowing I was enjoying it too, and that I was definitely going to cum.

After I’d left another load inside her and relaxed back, she rested on my chest, still joined together, running a finger gently up and down her back. I was going to take my cock out, but she pressed down, insisting that I leave it inside her, at least until I went soft. “Won’t happen while I’m still inside you, Serana.”

“Well, then we’ll remain joined until we need to move.”

We did eventually need a break, simply as I needed a drink and something to eat, but we made love again later that night. We spent the rest of the next day making love too. It took us two nights before we finally completed the ritual and I found out what we needed to do next. We left the glade hand in hand, our relationship now confirmed. Mirabelle already knew how I felt about her, but I was glad we’d confirmed our love for each other.

Now I knew we would have to face her father and that we’d likely have to kill him. What I assured Serana is that I would be by her side every step of the way. After that, whatever she wanted to do, she would have my support.

Chapter 52: The Bow

Serana and I agreed that there was no time to lose. We had our next objective, Darkfall Cave. I consulted my map and tried to remember what I’d seen from the Scroll. “There, to the west. I know there’s an Orc stronghold in the region. We’ll have to skirt that and find the entrance.”

“Should we just head straight there?”

I checked our supplies on the back of our horses. “I’m sure we have enough food to last a couple more days. But the sooner we solve this issue, the better. We’ve managed to remain a step ahead of your father so far, but our luck will run out eventually if we keep pushing it.”

Having spent an entire day relaxing with each other, we set off sharing a good mood, though I’m sure it disappeared once we were an hour into our ride and the weather closed in. The rain was little more than drizzle, but the wind was howling and it just turned into a grey, miserable day. We made good progress but still had to camp that evening, no rain but the wind still beating down on us. Having enjoyed two enjoyable nights together, we didn’t need a verbal agreement that all we wanted that night was to snuggle under the furs to try and keep warm. Well, keep myself warm. Serana didn’t really feel the cold.

We passed a Forsworn camp the next morning, not overly concerned if they saw us or not. Considering who I was and the power Serana could wield, we’d handle a few of them. Or bandits. Or even the Orcs if they decided to be feisty. Turning off the only road in the area, I led the way and it was perhaps blind luck that we eventually found the entrance to the cave we needed. This region of Skyrim was spectacular, and I watched Serana take it all in. She made one or two general comments about how pretty it all was, but I think she was still just taking enjoyment from the fact she was no longer in that tomb.

Dismounting and tying our horses to the nearest tree, we approached the entrance to the cave.

"Dark," Serana muttered, "I'm tired of fumbling through the darkness."

"Do you really think the bow is simply in this cave? I’m not particularly convinced this is the resting place."

She shrugged. "Unlikely. What do you think?"

"I have a feeling this won't be easy."

"When is it ever easy?"

"Hmph. Point taken. Shall we?"

"Let's go."

Unsheathing my sword, shield attached to my forearm as always, I led the way in, Serana finding a torch and lighting it to help guide our way. There was no sign anyone had been in the cave for eons, no campsite outside to suggest adventurers were inside, and nothing inside the cave itself to suggest there were recent visitors. Coming to a rickety looking bridge, I glanced at Serana and shrugged. It was the only way ahead.

Should have known better, of course. We were not even halfway across when the bridge simply gave way. I think it would have done so even if only one of us was crossing, so it was perhaps lucky that we were both on the bridge. Thankfully, we landed in water rather than on the ground, chilled to the bone immediately as it was freezing, and we were sent tumbling the gods only knew where. I definitely collided with more than one rock, so that by the time the current subsided and I could drag myself to shore, I was feeling rather sorry for myself, collapsing on my back, Serana managing to clamber out of the water and collapsing next to me.

“Well, that was fun,” she stated sarcastically.

We moved on, following the river as it was the only way forward. This section of the cave wasn’t empty, dealing with a few spiders along the way, Serana and I combining our fire skills to take care of them quickly. Finding a path that finally led us away from the river, we ascended for a time before coming upon the remains of a campsite. Serana lit a fire that could at least warm us up and that only highlighted the ghastly scene around us.

“Trolls or something similar,” I muttered. Blood was everywhere, the bodies ripped apart. I’d seen more than one troll attack over the years to recognise the signs. Opening my small pack, all the food I’d brought along was soaking wet, and with nothing to cook it with, I didn’t bother trying to eat anything.

After warming up, we moved on and eventually ran into a couple of trolls, making short work of them. Guess I let a little anger bubble up after what we’d found at the campsite, hacking both of them apart once they were dead. Serana just looked at me, returning a shrug before stating, “Okay, maybe what we found pissed me off a little bit.”

Torch scone guided our way forward, and as they were lit, we assumed someone living must be ahead. I didn’t think it would have been torches left by the bodies we had found. I doubt anyone would have got past the trolls, unless they were searching for Auriel’s Bow as well, and if they’d found the trolls, the trolls would have been dead.

We received our answer a few minutes later, and it was a discovery that perhaps changed history in an instant. The figure ahead turned towards us as we approached. He looked elven, that much was obvious. But he looked unlike any elf I'd seen before. He gestured at both of us. "Come forward. You have nothing to fear here."

Realising I still had my sword to hand, I sheathed it and walked forward to meet the elf, looking around the cavern where he appeared to make his home. I was left wondering what he was doing so deep in this cave.

"Who are you?"

He bowed. "I am Knight-Paladin Gelebor. Welcome to the Great Chantry of Auri-El."

I raised eyebrows at the name. "Auri-El? Who is Auriel?"

"Ah. He goes by many names. Auriel, Auri-El, Alkosh, Akatosh. So many different names for the sovereign of the Snow Elves."

We learned much from Gelebor. A short history of his race and what happened to them. Driven underground by Nord invaders. The alliance with the Dwemer, who exacted a terrible price upon the Snow Elves for their assistance. An agreement to the blinding of their entire race. I couldn’t believe the Snow Elves would agree to such a price, but given they could not win a war against the Nords alone, it was believed that an alliance with the Dwemer would grant them victory.

Where we stood was a wayshrine that would grant access to the Chantry of Auri-El. He knew why we were there. For the bow. He also knew what Serana was, but that did not concern him. He sensed we’d come to save the world, not destroy it, so was therefore willing to trust us in our quest. However, before he allowed us access, he asked us for a favour.

He wanted us to kill Arch-Curate Vyrthur, who just happened to be his brother. “But you two may be the last Snow Elves?” Serana wondered.

“Our species is extinct, child. We are all that remains. If I am to be the last Snow Elf that lives, so be it. But my brother has been corrupted by the Falmer. I have seen him at the Chantry, waiting silently for something. Of what? I do not know. It has been many centuries since we last spoke. I have remained here ever since, vigilant.” He paused before meeting my eyes. “Will you grant me this favour, Dragonborn?”

I should have known he would sense who I was. And I agreed to his request. I assumed he would only ask if it was absolutely necessary. He performed a small ritual that opened the wayshrine, instructing us on what we would need to do to open further wayshrines. We would need to locate them all before we would be granted access to the chantry itself. He had no idea what we would find inside, only that his brother would be waiting for us at the end.

Stepping into the portal, we were instantly transported to another cave. We wasted no time heading forward, Serana finding another torch, helping light the way forward. "Did you feel the magic… flow from him?" she asked.

"No. You know I don't have those sort of heightened senses when it comes to magic."

"Despite your position at the College?"

I looked at her and noticed the smirk. "Mirabelle is the Arch-Mage, not me. I barely know half a dozen spells." I held up my fists. “If I need something doing, I’ll use these first.”

"There is no doubt he was powerful. Far more powerful than we even glimpsed. I wonder how long he's been standing guard there? It must be terribly lonely…" I looked at her, hearing her tone, as she shrugged. "I just know how it feels." I wrapped an arm around her waist, giving her a gentle squeeze. “I had to wait a long time, Ragnar. A very long time. And the man who finally released. Maybe the Divines had something to do with it?”

The Falmer had taken over this section of the cave. Little wonder, I guess, if it had long ago been inhabited by the Snow Elves. And as always, the bastards seemed to sense our approach and did not hesitate in attacking us. Serana focused on her magic as I bloodied my sword, cutting a way forward, Serana never more than a step behind. More than once, we found ourselves almost circled, and that’s when I would resort to using my Thu’um. Though I hesitated using it against man or mer, I considered Falmer little more than monsters, despite what had caused them to be turned into such horrific monstrosities, so I had no problem using my gift against them.

The Falmer were but a mere memory as we descended into a new section of the cavern. It brought both of us to a standstill as, while its beauty was different to the glade, it was still awe-inspiring. Certainly enough for Serana to stand next to me and grab my hand. "I've never seen anything like it before," she whispered.

"We seem to have luck in seeing a lot of things neither of us have seen before."

She simply leaned against my shoulder. "You know what I mean," she said softly, "This is the kind of thing I've been wanting to see. Makes everything worth it."

Neither of us felt like moving for at least a few minutes. Animals of the like neither of us had ever seen before scampered around, most running away at the mere sight of us. I was sure I saw a bright coloured sabre cat on a ledge away from us. It looked fast asleep, and even if it was awake, didn't appear interested in our progress. We wound our way through this peaceful place, walking towards and around a large pool of water, ending up following another passage until we approached what appeared to be another wayshrine. In front of the wayshrine was what appeared to be a ghost, just as Gelebor had told us.

We performed the ritual as instructed by Gelebor and a new portal opened up.

"Behold Auri-El's gift, my child. May it light your path as you seek tranquillity within the Inner Sanctum. May Auri-El's brilliance illuminate your path."

I gave thanks to the ghost before we passed through the portal. What greeted us on the other side was nothing short of spectacular. We again came to a standstill to take in the view. “Wish they could have seen this,” I muttered.

“Who?” Serana asked softly.

“Muiri. Astrid. Mirabelle. Aela and Lydia. They would have loved a view like this.”

“You mentioned Muiri first…”

I glanced in her direction. “I stopped wearing the ring but… I chose her what feels like a long time ago now. She’s the only reason I’d return to Riften, to visit her grave. But the priestess tends the garden that now grows on it for me. Wherever she is, I know she’s looking down and smiling. And she’d definitely approve of my partners.”

To be honest, we did get a little lost over the next few hours, lost enough that light started to fade and we had to think about making camp for the evening. We eventually found a small cave that would provide just enough protection from the cold, Serana lighting a fire while I headed out and went searching for food. I hunted one of those brightly coloured deer and cheated a bit, using my Thu’um to bring it to a stop before burying my sword into it. Dragging it back to the cave was a pain in the arse, but Serana helped me prepare some meat for dinner.

It was beyond freezing by the time the sun disappeared, huddling together under the furs that had thankfully dried out. We hadn’t brought any camping supplies so would have to just lie as close to the fire as possible during the night. Lying side by side, we did enjoy a little kiss and a cuddle, but went no further than that. The idea of stripping off any clothing wasn’t particularly appealing due to the temperature, though I did joke about sharing body heat, until she mentioned she had none to share.

“Spoilsport,” I muttered before she turned around and moulded her body back against mine.

“Do you think about the future, Ragnar?” she asked a little later.

“All the time, to be honest.”

“Am I part of it?”

“Definitely.”

“You’re part of mine. Not just you. I know there will be others. I’ll try not to be too jealous at first.”

“Mirabelle gets jealous sometimes, readily admits it, then we talk about it. But she is adamant about never making me choose. She knows how much Aela loves me, and it’s obvious to me the affection they have for each other. And she knows the relationship between Lydia and I is getting closer and closer. And she has already accepted you, Serana.”

“Why did you only choose Muiri?”

“It was the right thing to do at the time. I’ve told Mirabelle I’d do the same thing, but as I just said, she’s adamant. It helps that she’s been intimate with Aela. Muiri was only ever with me, never being interested in involving others. When she was taken from me, I thought I’d never love again. Part of me doesn’t want to choose only one simply because I think the gods will take her from me again. I also know I’m a selfish bastard at times but…” I trailed off and sighed.

“Helps you are a good man, Ragnar. And if everyone agrees to the arrangement, then what’s the harm?”

“So… you don’t mind?”

“Not at all.” She paused before adding, “I’ve obviously never been with a woman.”

“I know that.”

“I would like to try.”

“You would?”

“Maybe Mirabelle? I think she’s very sweet. And rather attractive.”

“I think it’s something we’ll need to discuss later.”

“Does the thought of Mirabelle and I… excite you, Ragnar?”

“Behave, Serana.” I heard her giggle as I kissed her cheek. “But I find the idea of two women I love very much being intimate with each other rather appealing.”

Thankfully, we both went to sleep a little later. Any more talk like that and I would have wanted to have some fun with her, enjoyed it at the time, that have our arses frozen solid due to the weather.

Waking the next morning, I had little food to eat while Serana suggested she was fine to just pack up and move on, so that’s what we ended up doing. It was bitterly cold that morning, both of us wrapping ourselves up in furs to keep the worst of it at bay. Even with my Nord blood, I felt chilled to the core. We were high in the mountains, snow as far as the eye could see, wind whipping into our faces. Despite the beauty surrounding us, we both felt rather miserable.

Approaching a vast frozen lake, I closed my eyes and almost sensed something resting underneath it. And I didn’t trust walking over ice at the best of times anyway. I told Serana what I was thinking and we agreed to circle the lake.

Finding another couple of wayshrines during the morning, we ended up making our way through another cave full of Falmer. I hacked and slashed our way forward, Serana using all her tricks of the trade to help us ever onward. Even deep in the caves it was freezing, though it was hard work at the same time, my entire body bathed in sweat as fighting was hard work. I took a couple of minor wounds, thankfully none of the weapons being poisoned.

It felt like we fought our way forward of hours, passing through what felt like an enormous Falmer camp. Any idea of trying to sneak through ended quickly, and I think Serana took even greater delight in killing the enemy. I think any sympathies we might have felt for their plight ended the first time they simply chose to attack us.

We staggered through a final cave, fighting off the last remnants of Falmer resistance, scrabbling over the loose rocks and stones. I stopped and looked behind me, offering my hand to Serana, helping her up as we effectively moved on hands and knees, breathing deeply, both of us nearly exhausted. In fact, not even nearly. I was knackered. I know Serana was on the verge of flagging as well.

"Just a little further," I stated.

"I know. It's just been a long day."

"That and more. Remind me that we need to rest when all this is over."

"Deal!"

The fifth and last ghost was waiting for at the wayshrine. After performing the ritual again, we moved onwards, the Inner Sanctum lying ahead. It was another example of long-lost Snow Elf design, an architectural masterpiece that was, somewhat amazingly, still in good repair. Perhaps the cold weather helped keep it in one piece? We slowly cross the bridge, taking in the magnificent view to either side before turning our attention to the building in front.

"I've never seen a building like that before. It looks like some kind of temple. Never saw anything like this back on the island," Serana stated.

"It's certainly impressive. Only place grander would be the Imperial Palace.”

"I would assume this must be the chapel, if that's what the Snow Elves called such a place of worship."

"I'm not sure. I think the chapel may be further in."

"Guess that means more exploring?"

"Ragnar Dragonborn, ever the adventurer. Very well, lead the way."

We climbed the steps and entered a courtyard. It was empty, as expected, and again the building surrounding us appeared to be relatively intact and well preserved. In the middle of the courtyard was a statue. We came to a stop in front of it.

"That is a statue of Auriel, but it's using the older signs of his power. This temple must be ancient. The bow has to be in here," Serana stated quietly next to me.

"I'll admit I know little to nothing about elven traditions. What do you mean by the 'old signs'?"

"I only know a little myself. But look at the statue, the representation of Auri-El. It's positively elven. Enter any chapel of the Divines and Akatosh is represented completely differently. Man and mer both share faith in the same god, but refer to him in different names and attribute different qualities to him. Then look at what the statue is holding. The elves, from what I know, believe Auri-El was involved in the creation of the mortal world as we know it. Shrines in Skyrim towards Akatosh are those of a dragon. Any stained glass make reference to the dragonblood, of man and dragon combined."

As I'd said, I knew next to nothing so, whether she was right or wrong, I wasn't bound to raise an argument. Instead, we simply moved on past the statue, climbing another set of steps into the chapel.

The inner sanctum was nothing like the outside. Everything was frozen. Numerous Falmer and chaurus stood still as statues, encased in ice. It was bizarre, if not a little eerie. The roof had slightly caved in and there was little light, adding to the gloom and sense that all was not as it seemed.

"I wonder how long they've been like this? And I thought the Soul Cairn was creepy," Serana muttered to herself.

In the middle of the room was another shrine, Serana stating it was to Auri-El. It looked the same as the symbol held by the statue out front, so that made sense. It was also surrounded by numerous frozen Falmer and I had a bad feeling they were all going to instantly thaw and start attacking. I felt an almost overwhelming need to reach for my sword and simply start swinging. But I refrained… for now…

We spent a few minutes exploring the darkness, though the occasional shaft of light appeared through gaps in the ceiling. There were frozen Falmer everywhere, Serana concluding that it was definitely magic – powerful magic – which was keeping them in place. I was just thankful they remained frozen as we walked by, ensuring we didn't get too close in case our proximity caused them to wake up.

The chantry was enormous and we found ourselves lost more than once, doubling back on ourselves or simply heading down hallways that turned into dead-ends. But we finally found the right passage and, with even more frozen Falmer surrounding us, we approached the only other living thing in the chantry, sat upon a frozen throne.

Only the second Snow Elf I knew was still alive.

I could feel his gaze upon us as we slowly approached his throne. I couldn't see his eyes but knew he was watching us intently, wondering what we were going to do. I was still unarmed, so was Serana. I know Gelebor wanted us to kill him but, I'll admit, I wanted to be given a reason to kill him. He barely moved as we crossed the floor towards him, only showing an interest in us when we came to a stop at the small set of stairs below his throne.

"Did you really come here expecting to claim Auriel's Bow?" he asked.

I shrugged. "Well, yes."

He laughed, mockingly. "You've done exactly as I predicted and brought your fetching companion to me."

I glanced at Serana before looking back at Vyrthur. “What do you want?”

“I only ever wanted her. Thank you for bringing her to me but I believe you usefulness is now at end. Before you die, believe me when I say you do have my undoubted thanks for being a very acceptable pawn."

All those frozen Falmer woke up. I unsheathed my sword and fought, Serana joining in. Over the sound of fighting, Vyrthur continued to taunt us, me in particular, though I’d learned long ago to ignore such attacks. He was simply an annoying distraction for now. As the intensity of fighting increased, the ceiling above us started to collapse, and it was only blind luck that saved me from being crushed by falling masonry.

That gave Vyrthur time to escape, Serana and I finishing off the last resistance before making our move. We climbed over pieces of the fallen roof above us, eventually finding the way that would lead us to the balcony upon which Gelebor had observed his brother for centuries. Beside him was a wayshrine, I guess the final one that lead us back to the very start of our journey. We stood before Vyrthur, sword in my hand, Serana ready to unload a spell with hers. He looked between us, no doubt taking into account both of us were armed and ready to attack if necessary.

"Give us the bow!" Serana demanded. Fairly reasonable, in my mind.

The last bit of confidence appeared as he stood tall and simply sneered at both of us. "How dare you. I was the Arch-Curate of Auri-El, girl. I had the ears of a god!"

Serana simply waved her hand in the air, a mocking gesture. "Until the 'Betrayed' corrupted you. Yes, yes. We've heard this sad story."

He laughed. The bastard actually laughed! "Gelebor and his kind are easily manipulated fools. Look into my eyes, Serana. You tell me what I am."

I looked as well and we shared a glance. Her surprise matched mine. Mostly because I hadn't been close enough to see his eyes. I'm surprised she hadn't picked up on it, though. "You're a vampire?" she asked quietly, "But… But Auriel should have protected you…"

He got angry and I thought he was about to attack. "The moment I was infected by one of my own Initiates, Auri-El turned his back on me. I swore I'd have my revenge, no matter what the cost."

I couldn’t help laugh at the idea. "Hang on a minute there. Are you saying that you wanted to have you revenge on, of all things, a god? Are you mad?"

"Auri-El himself may have been beyond my reach, but his influence on our world wasn't. All I needed was the blood of a vampire and his own weapon, Auriel's Bow."

"The blood of a vampire. Auriel's Bow. It was you? You bastard! You created that prophecy? You're the one responsible for destroying my family!"

He stepped forward menacingly, surprising considering he was outnumbered and I was very prepared to kill him. "A prophecy that lacked a single, final ingredient. The blood of a pure vampire. The blood of a Daughter of Coldharbour."

I struck so fast, neither he nor Serana would have seen the swing. From hip to shoulder, straight across his chest. He spun and collapsed face first onto the ground. Serana glanced at me for a second. “Fucker had it coming,” I growled.

Serana crouched down and turned him over to see he was still alive, though not for long. She took the dagger she kept hidden as she got down on one knee. His eyes looked at me only for a moment. “Look at me, Vyrthur,” she whispered, “You were waiting all this time for someone with my blood to come along. Well, too bad for you. I intend on keeping it.

And, with those final words, she slid the dagger across his throat.

Gelebor arrived a few minutes later. The first thing he noticed was his dead brother, and we had to explain the realities of the situation, what he actually was, the prophecy and the reason why everything had come to pass. He understood, though saddened by the fall of his brother, he cast a spell to reveal the bow, handing it to Serana. “Would you like it back when we’re done?” I asked.

“No. You have earned the right to keep it, and I trust it is in safe hands. Protect it like I have. That’s all I can ask.”

“What will you do now?” Serana asked, “You are the last of your kind.”

"Even with Vyrthur gone and the Inner Sanctum destroyed, my duty as a Knight-Paladin of Auri-El remains. I've been sworn to protect this vale and everything it represents until I die."

I offered my hand, Gelebor accepting it immediately. “I wish you well, Knight-Paladin.”

“And I you, Dragonborn.”

He opened the wayshrine for us, giving us last minute instructions to find our way out of the cave. It was dark by the time we made it back to our horses, but as our tent and bedrolls were still packed away, we could at least sleep in comfort that night.

I still had some meat left over from the deer I’d caught. After cooking and eating that, we’d already put the tent up, so we headed inside. Serana was… eager. I guess having spent so many days together, the attraction was only going to increase. We wasted little time undressing ourselves and each other, mouths almost clamped together before I laid her down on the ground. I was going to move down to eat her out but she grabbed my hand and pulled me forward, the head of my cock at her entrance. I raised an eyebrow before she reached down and made sure I slid inside her.

“Make love to me,” she whispered.

Apart from her fingers pressed into my back and her heels digging into me further down at times, the only movements were my thrusts into her, setting a decent rhythm, our constant kissing and… that’s about it, to be honest. The only time we moved properly was when she wanted to ride me. She had found a real joy for doing it at the grove, and after I’d cum in her once, relaxing with my cock still inside her, as she simply loved the feeling, I pulled out, flipped over, and the smile on her face when she slid down my cock again was nothing short of heart-warming.

And she really loved riding my cock through a couple of orgasms. The little sounds she made before and during were adorable. But she had no problem expressing herself. I was doing everything I could to show her, each and every time, that sex was enjoyable, particularly when shared between people who loved each other. And the one thing I wanted to ensure was that she orgasmed. I liked to think I was a considerate lover in that respect. I loved to have sex, admittedly with different women, but no matter who I was with, I always tried to make them cum.

Serana came more than once in the tent that evening. By the time she was done, I held her body to mine as she admitted to needing sleep as I had worn her out. “Wish I had a heartbeat right now,” she whispered, “Because it would be very fast right now, Ragnar.”

The next morning, we packed and headed east. We would need to report into Fort Dawnguard and make preparations for whatever was to come next. Her father had to be dealt with. We could have done it alone, in my opinion, but showing up with the Dawnguard at our backs would be a good thing. We’d never make the journey in one day so I suggested we stop in Whiterun. There was no sign of Aela, finding a note from her on the bed that stated she had headed north to the College. No real surprise there.

Having the place to ourselves, the first thing we did was wash, then we ate, then we headed upstairs.

Serana had her pussy well and truly pleasured that evening. Once I’d taken off her clothing, I laid her down on the bed, spread her legs, and simply devoured her. No idea how many times I made her orgasm. All I know is that I spent a very long time pleasing her like that. Barely used my fingers, only my tongue. When she finally asked me to stop, I slowly kissed up her body before I met her eyes, no surprise that she was eager to kiss me after all that.

She wanted to make love after that. I lasted maybe two minutes before I came hard inside her. We both giggled about it as I expected it to happen. All she did was wrap her legs tightly around my hips to keep my in place inside her as I barely softened. “I never thought I’d love the feeling of a man inside me, Ragnar,” she said quietly.

“Well, I definitely like being inside you, Serana. You have one tight pussy.” She would have definitely blushed if she’d been capable, looing away a little embarrassed. “Do you not like the sound of that?”

“I’m just not used to it, Ragnar. But I love the fact you love my pussy so much.”

We made love again a little later before going to sleep. And then again the next morning before we had breakfast and continued our journey east. It was a bright, sunny day, and I could see Serana wanting to take off her cloak to simply enjoy soaking in the warmth. It was the one subject I hadn’t really dared approach her about. Whether she wanted to remain a vampire or not was her choice only. But I will admit that part of me hoped she would get a cure.

It was late afternoon by the time we approached the fort. I’d been a vampire the last time I’d been there, so they were pleased to see I’d been cured. Everyone was used to Serana by now, realising she was an ally, so while they were not overly friendly towards her, her presence was at least more than tolerated. And when she showed Isran the bow, I think his own opinion changed completely, and this was a man who detested every vampire he met.

“May I see the bow?” Serana unrolled the bow from the rugs that were covering it, laying it on the ground. “You have gone to great lengths to obtain this. May I hold it?”

“Of course,” Serena replied.

To say he handled it with near reverence was an understatement. "It's beautiful. I've never seen anything like it before," he whispered.

"With this weapon in our hands, we will ensure the prophecy can never been fulfilled," Serana stated.

"It's time to make our move, Isran. No more delays," I added.

He kept a hand on the bow as he cast an eye over Serana. "Indeed. The day hasn't been won while Harkon still walks Tamriel. But what of Serana? Can she be trusted to lift a blade against her own kind? Her own family?"

I looked at Serana and she simply grinned. "Isran, you've just answered your own question."

Isran looked utterly confused. "I have?"

"You just called me Serana. You've never referred to me by name. You referred to me as 'she', not 'it'. To you, I must now be someone, not something. You may not and never trust me completely, and even after all this I will not hold that against you, but I can assume I have your respect at the very least."

Isran considered her words before he nodded. "You're right. You do have my respect for everything you have done for the Dawnguard. And, after everything you and the Dragonborn have done for us, I believe it is only right that you should have the bow to face your father."

"Thank you."

Then he looked at me. “I do have some news for you. Delphine returned a while back and stated she would not be returning, stating she would be focusing on her business with the Blades. Though saddened to lose someone of such skill, I assume this might make your life easier.”

“A little, I guess. I’m not surprised.”

“Very good. I will speak to the rest and we’ll start to organise our departure. Some friends of yours arrived the other day. I believe they are from the Companions and they wish to assist us.”

Serana and I headed straight upstairs, opening the door to reveal Aela, Lydia and the twins, Vilkas and Farkas. The last time Aela had seen me, I was a vampire. Her face lit up upon seeing me, running forward and leaping into my arms, immediately embracing her in return. “Thank the Nine,” she whispered.

“I said it was only a temporary measure,” I said quietly. Lydia stepped forward for a hug as well before I shook hands with the twins. “Okay, what brings you all here?”

“Well, Aela obviously knew you were up to Dawnguard business and I’d been involved before, so we figured you might need our help. We arrived here to learn you’d been gone a few days already.” She paused before adding, “We were here when Delphine made her last visit.”

“Did you speak to her?”

“She tried speaking to me. I was polite enough to hear her out but I told her to just leave. As far as I’m concerned, we’re done. I think she held out a little hope I might change my mind if we saw each other. She was obviously wrong. I think she was a mixture of angry and heartbroken by the end of it.”

“Do you know the plan, Ragnar?” Aela asked.

“Isran is speaking to the others now. He’ll come up and tell us later probably, but we’ll be leaving as soon as feasibly possible.”

We headed down for dinner after a good catch up, Isran filling us in with his idea. Rather simple. We pack our supplies and everyone heads to the north-west, crosses the strait, then we take the castle, Serana and I taking the bow to deal with her father while they took care of everyone else. Sometimes, the simple plans worked best.

Though an early night should have been the right option, I was busy chatting with the twins regarding Companion business but noticed Lydia, Aela and Serana in conversation, pleased the latter was immediately accepted as one of my girls. But there was no doubt Lydia was mentioning something, as Serana gave me a couple of glances, and heard more than one whispered exclamation from her. When I looked at Lydia, and noticed the smile on her face, I immediately knew what she was talking about.

The three eventually joined me and the twins, Lydia to one side of me, Serana and Aela to the other. “So, Ragnar, I’ve just been telling Serana about what we talked about long ago. I’m thinking tonight is the night,” Lydia stated.

“And before you worry, I’m absolutely okay with the idea, Ragnar. I know I’m not your only girl,” Serana added.

“She can stay with me tonight. Don’t think I’ll have my pussy played with, but maybe she’d like to get naked with me at least,” Aela stated in a rather sultry tone.

I simply looked up. “Dear Divines, thank you for blessing me with your gifts.”

Lydia just dug a gentle elbow into my ribs before she asked, “Are you okay with the idea?” I nodded. “Vilkas and Farkas already know. We chatted about it on the way here. They were surprised and just wanted to hear you were okay with the idea before we go ahead with it. It’s a one-time thing. I… want to settle down after this. With you and the girls, Ragnar.”

I looked across the table. “You two are interested in doing this?”

“Well, we do find Lydia attractive, Harbinger,” Vilkas replied.

“And we have enjoyed a woman together before,” Farkas added, “A third man will be something different.”

That sorted it. We bade everyone else goodnight as we headed to what was effectively ‘my’ wing of the fort. Aela and Serana both hugged me, wished me a good time, before they headed off to the spare room. They were already giggling away, pleased that the two were already getting on well. They’d met before at the college, but I’d noticed Mirabelle had taken a real shine to Serana immediately.

Entering our room, I suggested Lydia take charge simply because she knew what she wanted and the three of us were in there for her. “Okay, strip, the three of you.”

I didn’t hesitate. The twins shared a glance, shrugged, and did the same. The bodies of three warriors were quickly exposed. Hard muscle. Plenty of scars. The twins had black hair on their head and chest hair. Being a blonde, my hair was light and not as prevalent over my chest. We each looked at the cock of the others due to simple curiosity. Vilkas chuckled. “Well, Ragnar, looks like you’ve been blessed with more than one gift.”

“Aye. But you have to know how to use it, Vilkas.”

“True.”

Lydia didn’t stand on ceremony, stripping off herself, and the three of us definitely approved when she was standing naked before us. When she dropped to her knees, I knew what to do, the twins following my example, as she was quickly blowing one of us and stroking the others. “She’s very talented,” I told the twins, “And she’ll swallow what you give her.”

“Oh, I’m blowing all of you to completion, then we can fuck afterwards,” Lydia stated.

She focused on me first, taking great delight in swallowing my entire length as usual, which always pleased her. And she proved to be just as talented as ever, as she soon had me moaning quietly, relying on only her mouth, her hands still stroking the twins. I ran a hand through her hair and gently started to thrust at the same time. “Lydia,” I whispered.

“She’s pretty good, Ragnar?” Farkas asked.

“Trust me, you’re going to last five minutes once she focuses on you.”

I warned her I was getting close but all that made her do was double her efforts, eager to take the first load in her mouth. She’d blow us, make us cum, because she knew we’d last longer fucking her. I groaned a couple more times before I warned her I was about to cum. She moaned herself when the first shot hit the back of her mouth, groaning loudly that the Aela and Serana probably heard me. Lydia kept sucking me until I was empty and she’d cleaned my cock, licking up and down my shaft a few times. “By Ysmir, I love your cum, Ragnar,” she breathed.

The twins just looked at me and I shrugged. “Well, she’s blow me a lot. Swallows it more often that not if I cum in her mouth.”

I let her focus on the twins as I headed to her pack where I knew she kept the oil we needed. As she busied herself blowing Farkas, I sat behind her, gently playing with her breasts before I moved my hand down to her pussy, no surprise at all she was already soaking wet. That made her stop blowing Farkas for a second. “Ragnar… you’re distracting me…”

“I’m just getting your arse ready, Lydia, but I can’t help playing with that pussy of yours.”

She suggested we change slightly, moving over to the bed, where the twins sat on their knees, Lydia on her hands and knees before them, while I got behind Lydia. With what was now on display, the only thing I was going to do first was eat her out. It distracted her but she was eager to finish the twins off as well, so it was a race as to who would cum first. I then surprised her by moving from her pussy, pouring a little oil, then I figured I’d just eat her arse. That set her off big time. “Oh gods,” she moaned.

“Keep blowing the twins, Lydia,” I ordered.

I watched her head bob up and down even faster on Farkas, little wonder he didn’t last much longer. As soon as she’d taken his load, she immediately switched to Vilkas. He looked rather turned on, so didn’t think he’d last long. Pouring a little more oil on Lydia, I slid a couple of fingers into her arse and she was already eager for more than just those. Farkas sat beside me and slid a couple of fingers into her pussy.

It was too much for her and she came hard. Somehow, she kept blowing Vilkas, who was rather turned on by the fact Lydia had just cum, and he left his load in her mouth at the same time. Lydia then just bent her head down onto the mattress as the three of us fingered her together, my fingers just buried in her arse, Farkas in her pussy, while Vilkas positioned himself to fondle her clit. “Oh gods!” she cried out.

“Wait until we’re all inside you,” I said.

“Can’t wait to fuck her, Ragnar,” Farkas stated.

“We’ll make her cum again, then we’ll do just that,” I added.

She didn’t last long, far too much attention being given to her, looking back, her eyes smouldering with nothing but unbridled lust and desire. When she came again, I think it was even stronger, as she asked us to stop once it had passed through her body. We removed our fingers as she collapsed to the bed, breathing deeply, her cheeks bright red, slight sheen of sweat on her forehead, strands of brunette hair stuck to it.

Honestly, she looked beautiful in that moment. I think she knew the look I was giving her, as she returned a sweet smile.

“Who wants my pussy?” she asked, “Before you ask, Ragnar gets my arse first.”

Vilkas eventually lay down, Lydia positioning herself and sliding down his cock, and she was immediately full of compliments. Farkas positioned himself so she could blow him again, Lydia happily starting to ride Vilkas as I oiled up my cock, getting behind Lydia, giving her firm arse a good slap. She glanced back and grinned. Pressing my cock to her arsehole, she stopped riding Vilkas so I could slide it in slowly.

Once I was buried, she asked Vilkas and I to start fucking her. I grabbed a handful of her hair, though didn’t move her head too much so she could still give Farkas attention, noticing the hands of Vilkas on her hips. Then we fucked her, establishing a rhythm, alternating our thrusts. Lydia absolutely loved every second, lasting all of two minutes before Farkas simply couldn’t be given attention. Lydia sat up enough so I could lean forward, kissing up her back and neck before she turned so I could kiss her. “I love it when you fuck my arse, Ragnar. Makes it even better when someone’s in my cunt at the same time.”

“You enjoying yourself, Vilkas?” I asked.

“Lydia is quite the woman,” he grunted.

I kept a gentle hand around her throat as she kept looking back at me, her face stating only one thought. She was loving it. Absolutely loving it. So I decided to go a little harder and faster, her face lighting up. “I remember when we’d fuck like this constantly,” she moaned.

“It’s been a while.”

I eventually let her go as she fell forward, resting on her forearms, as I repositioned, almost crouching as I really started to pound her, hearing her ask Vilkas to do the same thing. She was making plenty of noise, all of is positive, appreciating everything we were giving her. Vilkas was the first to cum, Lydia simply resting on his cock, waiting for me to cum as well. I lasted a little longer, by the end I was really hammering my cock into her.

After I’d cum in her as well, I had to pull out immediately and collapse onto my back as Lydia lifted herself off Vilkas and lay down herself, giggling away. “Well, that’s both holes well and truly fucked.” She paused before adding, “You’ll get your chance, Farkas. I know I couldn’t focus on you.”

“Oh, I was enjoying just watching, Lydia. Consider me impressed.”

“I wouldn’t mind a twin spitroast once your brother has recovered. You can fuck me and I’ll blow your brother.”

“I’ll sit that one out.”

“No problem, Ragnar.”

Vilkas took around fifteen minutes to recover before Lydia was back on her hands and knees. As the three enjoyed themselves, I snuck out and headed to the other room, poking my head through the door to see Aela and Serana were already under furs, though the former pulled back the covers to show they were naked. “No, we’re not doing anything else. I just wanted to see Serana in all her glory, and she approved of me.”

Serana simply stared at my oil covered cock, so I closed the door and approached the bed. “Don’t worry, I’m not here to sleep with either of you,” I said, taking a seat next to Aela, “I’m giving those three a little space. She’s being spitroasted.”

“What did you do with her?” Serana wondered.

“Double penetration. That’s one in the front, one in the back. She did try to blow Farkas, but found those of us fucking her rather distracting.”

“And I assume you were giving her anal?” Aela asked, a knowing smirk on her face.

“Of course.”

Serana leaned into Aela. “She really likes it?” she whispered.

“Oh, she absolutely loves it, Serana. I’ve been witness to it, when Ragnar is just utterly pounding Lydia in the arse. Even I wince at what she can take, but she just seems to love every second. No woman is the same, after all. But before you worry, Ragnar certainly doesn’t expect that from everyone or anyone. He does it with Lydia because she loves it, though I’m sure he’ll admit he does enjoy himself.”

“Definitely. But she said tonight is the final fling before she calms down.”

Aela smiled. “Ah, someone has motherhood on their mind.”

Serana raised her eyebrows at that admission. “Really?”

“Oh, Serana, Ragnar is going to be fathering a number of children with different women. Trust me on that one.”

Serana looked at me, a little embarrassed. “Oh… I’ve never really considered…”

Leaning over, I kissed Serana on the cheek, then did the same to Aela. “Right, I’ll go back and join those three. I’m sure there’s a way I can involve myself. Get some sleep and I’ll see you in the morning.”

Walking back into the other bedroom, Lydia now had a cock in her arse and a cock in her pussy, Farkas now underneath her with Vilkas pounding her arse. She noticed me approach and gestured, so I kneeled beside her as she happily started to suck my cock. “Guess this is just what you want, right?” She made an agreeing sound and managed to blow me despite the treatment she was receiving.

“By Talos, her arse is fantastic,” Vilkas grunted.

“And you can certainly fuck it well, Vilkas,” Lydia replied before resuming her blowjob.

Farkas was now really pounding her at the same time, little wonder he was on the verge of an orgasm. Vilkas started to meet his twin’s movements, and I think they were aiming to cum in her at roughly the same time. She had to stop blowing me for a while as it was simply too much for her, crying out in joy as they really started to pound her, Farkas eventually finishing first, but Vilkas didn’t last much longer before he buried himself and came as well.

I think that pretty much ended the night. Lydia had got what she wanted, but I could see she was tired and also starting to feel the effects of two large cocks pounding both her tight holes. She stood up and staggered slightly, cum dribbling out of her, which made her do nothing but giggle. “Well, I have to say that I am one well fucked women. Thank you.”

The twins didn’t hang around long after that, giving themselves a quick wipe down before sharing a hug and kiss with Lydia before disappearing out the door. It all happened so fast, when Lydia closed the door and locked it, leaning back against it, she just smiled as I sat down before walking towards me. She leaned down and gave me a soft kiss. “Thank you, Ragnar.”

“Well, while I would say you’re welcome, it was just for you, Lydia.”

“That will be the only time. I’ve done it now, but now I only want to be with you and the girls. You will be my only man going forward. And once this is over, I think we all have things to discuss, right?”

“We do. Quite a few things to talk about.”

“Now while I would like to make love now, I think it’s best if we just went to sleep and we can make love when all this is over. I know Aela will be gagging for it by then, and I can see how affectionate you and Serana are. You’ve made love?”

“We have.”

“Good. That woman needs someone to love her. No idea what she’s been through, but I can only suggest it’s been horrific.”

After we both cleaned up properly, she snuggled into me once we were under the furs, wrapping an arm around her as she trailed her fingers up and down my chest. We rarely went to bed just the pair of us, and it was a nice feeling, something I knew she would enjoy. Left exhausted by the events of that evening, there was no surprise that she fell asleep quickly. I took a little longer, left thinking about what was going to happen upon arriving at the castle.

The only thing that mattered was defeating Harkon and ending the madness.

Chapter 53: The End of Madness

There was no direct road leading from Fort Dawnguard to the shoreline that would lead across to Castle Volkihar. That meant horses were loaded down with supplies as well as soldiers, so it ended up taking three whole days, not helped by the weather that slowed our progress to a crawl more than once. But we travelled in quite a large number, the ranks of the Dawnguard swelling since my first days with the organisation.

Arriving on the exposed and desolate north-west coast of Skyrim, the closest fortification was Northwest Keep, which I knew was inhabited by the Thalmor. Though I would have loved nothing more than clearing it out, now wasn’t the time to go picking another fight. Not yet, anyway.

We camped a final night, making final preparation for the next morning, agreeing to travel across at first light.

Getting across wasn’t a major problem, agreeing to just take a few soldiers over on the boat and making sure we were not seen doing it. I was sent over first with Serana, scoping out the area around the castle, but there were no obvious patrols, so we simply remained on the beach, establishing a perimeter, until the others joined us. Including Lydia and my three Companions, there were perhaps forty of us in total. More than enough to take the castle in my opinion.

Crouching behind a boulder, the bridge leading to the castle around one hundred metres away, Isran asked Serana, “Will they see us approach?”

“To be honest, they probably already know we’re here.” She looked at me. “Ragnar, all I can suggest is that you clear a path to the main gates with that gift of yours. Once we’re inside, Isran, you take everyone and head to the main hall and then push them back. Ragnar and I will peel off. I know where my father will be waiting for us. He’ll want to face me alone, hoping to convince me to give up the bow.”

“Okay, I’ll have a last word with the men, then we’ll make our move,” Isran said, moving off.

I stepped closer to Serana. “You ready for this?” I asked quietly.

She took a deep breath. “Always knew this day would come eventually, when I’d have to choose between my father or my mother. But he’s insane, Ragnar. He’s been consumed entirely by this ridiculous prophecy. I see no other way of dealing with this other than killing him.”

“Can you do that?”

She met my eyes. “I haven’t come all this way to hesitate now. It… won’t be easy. He’s still my father. Somewhere deep inside is the father I grew up with and adored. But that’s far too long ago now. Far too much has happened between then and now. I can’t forgive him, no matter what he tries to say.”

“I’m by your side all the way.”

She leaned over and kissed my cheek. “Thank you, Ragnar.”

Unsheathing my sword, I heard the call of ‘Forward!’ from Isran, Serana and I leading the Dawnguard towards the bridge. The gates ahead opened, vampires flooding out to meet us. The gargoyles to either side of the bridge woke up at the same time. I gestured for Serana to hang back a couple of steps as I strode forward confidently. Once they were in range, I unleashed my Thu’um.

YOL – TOOR – SHUL

There were immediate cries as vampires and gargoyles found themselves doused in flames. With a final cry, we rushed forward, hacking and slashing our way forward. Serana was firing all manner of spells. Recognising fire worked best against her own kind, it was amusing to see flames shoot from her palm, enormous fire balls flung into the distance, leaving those close for us to deal with swords, axes and shields.

Getting across the bridge didn’t take too long, in all honesty. Once we had the upper hand, Isran yelled for Serana and I to break through and make for her father, the Dawnguard would deal with everyone else. Taking Serana by the hand, I stabbed and hacked my way forward, making it through the gates, quickly followed by Lydia and the three Companions, who veered off one way as Serana told me to head left.

We entered the chapel cautiously, our eyes searching left and right for any sign of Harkon. She pointed ahead towards what I thought was a fountain. When I stated that sentiment, she shook her head. "That is no fountain, Ragnar. It is a shrine to Molag Bol himself." Waiting next to the shrine was Harkon. Or, it may have been Harkon. "And there is my father. In his other form, naturally."

I stepped towards the middle of the room, confidently if not arrogantly, my bloodied sword pointing down for the moment. Serana stayed at my side, matching each of my steps with her own. She took the bow from her back, taking an arrow and nocking it, readying to fire when required. Surprisingly, Harkon spread his arms wide.

"Serana, my darling daughter. I see you still favour keeping a pet."

"You know why we're here, father. It's time to end this madness, once and for all."

"Of course I know why you're here. You disappoint me, Serana. You've taken everything I've provided for you and thrown it all away for this pathetic being."

That was the second jibe he had sent in my direction in a matter of seconds. My hand gripped my sword that little bit tighter and it took all the self-control at my disposal not to charge forward or just unleash my Thu’um and begin hostilities. Serana must have noticed the slight change in my body language as she moved a hand from her bow to my sword hand. It was the briefest of touches but one her father couldn't have missed.

"Provided for me? Are you insane? You've destroyed our family and brought terror to the people of Skyrim, all over some prophecy that you barely understand. But let me tell you something, father. I do now understand the prophecy. I know who was responsible. And he is now dead. So I say this. No more. I'm done with you. And you will not touch Ragnar. Not now. Not ever."

He hissed. "So, I see this dragon has fangs. Your voice drips with the venom of your mother's influence. How alike you've become."

She scoffed, almost laughed at him. "No. I'm nothing like my mother, because unlike her, I'm not afraid of you. Not anymore. Not with Ragnar by my side."

He looked in my direction. "It appears I have you to thank for turning my daughter against me. I knew it was only a matter of time before she'd return with hatred in her heart."

"You don't need to thank me. She reached this point on her own. Your pathetic attempts at parenting were more than enough to lead her along this path. All I've done is help her and show her there is another way."

Her father scoffed. "You don't care about Serana. You're only interested in the power of the bow."

"That's where you're wrong. I care next to nothing for the bow. It is a means to an end. But you... You don't just threaten our existence as humans, you threaten Serana herself with your stupid prophecy. The simple fact is that I won't let you hurt her. Not anymore. And never again."

"The vampire hunter will protect and care for the vampire? You'll kill her as soon as you're done with me."

"That's not going to happen. I'd never harm Serana. I will only ever stop those who would cause her harm."

"And why is that?"

"Because I love her."

He laughed long and hard at those four words. All that did was infuriate me further. I'm tired of people laughing at me. If Serana or someone I know, respect, or love does it, it's not meant to offend me. Sometimes, I am an idiot and say silly things. But when a foe does it to mock me, it simply leaves me wanting to cut them in half. "You... love my daughter? You love a vampire?"

"I love her enough to die fighting you if that is what's required. I love her because of who she is, not what she is. That's never bothered me. And she knows that."

"And what do you think of all this, Serana?"

"I love him too." I couldn't help but smile when she said those words without hesitation, considering it was her father. "And together we're putting an end to your madness."

He shook his head, almost sadly, not that I felt an ounce of pity for him. "Then my daughter is truly lost. She died the moment she accepted a mortal into her life."

I’d like to say that it was a long fight, that it was honourable, that we fought heroically, that it would be sung by bards for centuries to come. But it was nothing like that. It was an ugly, brutal fight. It always would be against a creature such as Harkon. He was powerful, able to withstand the power of my Thu’um more than once. But he could not withstand bloodied arrows that were fired by Serana.

He summoned his own creatures, of course. Powerful gargoyles that left me distracted, leaving Serana to face her father alone. The one clear memory I have of that fight is when he attacked her while I was distracted by a pair of gargoyles. All I remember is her scream as she took the full brunt of an attack I didn't see. I remember glancing back to see her crumple to the ground and fearing that she was dead. And then the rage built within. The sort of rage that felt like my blood was boiling. The two gargoyles I was fighting were dead in seconds. Then I focused all my anger on Harkon. He appeared pleased with himself as I faced him down, casting another concerned glance towards Serana.

"She will recover eventually. And then I will ensure my victory by using the bow. Her sacrifice will ensure the dominance of my kind."

"Over my dead body."

He laughed at me, which simply increased my rage further. "My dear boy, that's exactly what I'm planning."

"Your kind will soon be extinct."

He scoffed at the remark. "And what of your supposed love for Serana?"

"I know what she is. But I love her for who she is. And she will always be under my protection. From you. And from anyone out there."

"Pathetic. You will never understand the power that she or I wield."

"I know enough." I raised my sword. "Now, enough talk. Let us end this, once and for all."

I ignored all the wounds I would receive. I know blood was dripping from me in the end. Somehow, I still don't know how, I survived the fight. But I didn't get the killing blow. I'd done enough to wear him down through sheer bloody mindedness. But it was Serana who got in the fatal shot. Unbeknownst to her father or myself, she had woken up and managed to move herself into a seated position. It was only when she called out my name that I knew what she was doing, pushing Harkon back enough to see an arrow fly into his chest. Then another one joined alongside. Then a third and fourth. I stepped back as a bright light appeared in his chest and I took a few steps back as a blood curdling scream escaped his mouth.

He then seemed to disappeared into a fine mist, for a brief few moments, before he reformed as a swarm of bats, which flew around the chapel twice. I tracked the bats, waiting to attack wherever they landed. They stopped near the shrine and I followed. He formed into Harkon, the more human looking kind, as blood poured from the wounds in his chest, from out of his mouth and nose, and I knew the end was near. I felt a presence alongside, glancing to see Serana still armed with the bow. She said nothing as she simply raised it and fired a final arrow, right where his heart may have once been, a long time ago. That ended it as he cried out one final time, saying only his daughter's name, before he dissolved into nothing more than a pile of ash.

Serana seemed to stagger and I threw an arm around her waist as she leaned into me. She gestured with her head and I helped her forward towards the remains of her father. "I'm sorry, father. But you left me no choice," she muttered quietly. Then she turned towards me. "Hold me. Please," she nearly pleaded.

She shed no tears for the man but I wrapped both arms around her, resting her head against my chest, both of us breathing deeply as it had been quite the fight. We heard no sound from outside, figuring the fighting had ceased out there as well. Taking her by the hand, I led her outside, where a few Dawnguard were walking around, putting their swords through the few bodies that may have still caused a problem. Aela, Lydia and the twins glanced in our direction and grinned, Isran approaching us.

“It’s done?” We both nodded. “Then it’s finally over, and the prophecy dies with him. I’m… sorry you had to kill your own father.”

“My father died a long time ago, Isran. Our family did, the day we underwent that ritual. What he did to me, what he did to us… We gave up our humanity to become what we are.”

“So what will you do now?”

Serana glanced up at me for a moment. “There are one or two things I must do before I move on with my life. To be honest, I’d like nothing more than to burn this castle to the ground, take it down stone by stone. Nothing but bad memories now. What I do know is that it isn’t home, not anymore.”

“Would you like to keep the bow?”

Serana shook her head and immediately handed it over. “It should be protected by the Dawnguard. I know we haven’t seen eye to eye, Isran, but I know your group will keep the people of Skyrim safe in the future.”

“And what about you, Ragnar? I assume your time with us is at an end.”

I nodded. “The crisis is over, Isran. I think you have plenty of soldiers ready to keep Skyrim safe. The main source has been eliminated but there are still vampires lurking in the shadows.”

“We’ll keep Skyrim safe, Ragnar. Don’t you worry about that. For now, we’ll mop up operations here and then return to Fort Dawnguard. Whatever happens next, trust that our fort is always open to you both.”

As he disappeared, Lydia and Aela approached. “So what now?” Lydia asked.

“I have one more thing I need to do,” Serana stated, “I need to tell my mother that it’s now safe. I’m hoping she’ll return with me though I’m not sure where she’d like to live considering there’s no-one here now.”

“Would she get a cure?” I wondered.

“Hmmm. I’m not sure, to be honest. I can always suggest it.”

“Where will you go after this?” Aela asked.

“The College. Why don’t you and Lydia head there and wait for me?”

“We’ll do just that. Gods, she is going to be so excited when you get back, Ragnar.”

“I know; it’s been a while since I was there but this needed resolving.”

Lydia and Aela hugged us both, then we shook hands with the twins, before Serana and I made our way back through the castle towards the laboratory. I didn’t particularly want to be turned into a vampire this time, so she offered to soul trap me. It was a simple, painless spell, and we entered the Soul Cairn without a problem. Having cleared out anything dangerous during our first visit, the path to her mother was clear, though I still found the place weird, even spooky.

Valerica was busy reading a book when I cleared my throat. She turned and stood up immediately, approaching us with a curious look on her face, no doubt eager to hear what we told her. “Harkon is dead,” I stated.

"Harkon is dead," I stated.

"Are you certain?"

"He's dead, mother. He died by my hand."

She breathed a sigh of relief. "Good."

"You're free to leave now. The only question is what you’d like to do?”

“I… I honestly don’t know. I thought I’d be trapped here forever.” She paused before asking, “What will you do, Serana?”

She looked at me and smiled. “I’m going to be cured, mother. I’ve lived a very long time now. But I want to live again.”

I looked at Valerica. She smiled. “Maybe it’s time we both did that?”

“Really?” Serana asked in surprise.

“Being what we are has done nothing but bring us both pain. It’s destroyed us, Serana. It’s never been worth the price. Maybe if we restore ourselves, we will find our way in the world once again.”

“Come with us,” I suggested.

“Let me grab a few things and I’ll join you at the exit.”

As we walked back alone, I had to ask, “Are you sure?”

“Ragnar, I want you to feel my heartbeat when we make love. Of course, that’s not the only reason. I’ve live a long life, and there are downsides to immortality. Watching friends and loved one’s die most of all. And I don’t want to see that happen to you nor the girls."

“So we’re all going to grow old together?”

“I’d love nothing more, Ragnar.”

Valerica joined us at the steps leading out. Climbing out and seeing the state of the laboratory, I think she understood just how long she’d been gone. Leading her through the ruins of the castle, I thought she might have felt sadness or disappointment. Instead, she felt only anger at her husband, blaming him for everything that happened. “I willingly became a vampire,” she added, “I will add that much…” Then she stopped and took Serana by both hands. “What he did to you… I’m sorry, Serana. My only daughter defiled…”

Serana hugged her mother tightly. “I forgive you,” she whispered, “My father was too powerful, even then. Stopping him was impossible. I can’t blame you for it. I blame him.” She leaned back. “Besides, Ragnar has shown me… um…”

Valerica looked at me. “You have made love to my daughter?”

“I have.”

The smile was a surprise. “Good. I’m glad she has a man in her life who will show her love in such a manner.”

Making our way back to the main hall, the bodies lay strewn across the floor, along with the dried pools of blood I remembered seeing from the endless victims. Valerica did wonder where Harkon lay, explaining that there wasn’t a body left, just a pile of ash. Otherwise, she realised there wasn’t much for her to collect for leaving, as Harkon had spent a long time destroying any sign of her presence.

Crossing the bridge and turning back to the castle, Serana did ask, “Don’t suppose your gift is powerful enough to destroy it?”

“I don’t think so.”

“Well, it can just lay abandoned then.”

“Where will you go, Valerica?” I asked.

“I’m honestly not sure. Let’s worry about a cure first then I’ll concern myself with what we would do next.”

Horses were waiting on the opposing shore for us, thankfully with some supplies, so we agreed to just make camp for the evening and begin our journey east the next morning. There was a little food I could eat, the three of us around the campfire. Now that she was free of her cage, I’ll admit that Valerica was delightful company. A little bitter about things, naturally, but she was pleased to see her daughter was now awake and enjoying life. She asked me plenty of questions and I think she was overall impressed by what she heard.

There were two tents, so Valerica took one, Serana and I the other. It was still a little cold so we didn’t strip off completely for bed, cuddling under furs. I didn’t particularly want to make love with her mother in the other tent, but that didn’t stop me from giving Serana some attention with my fingers. She loved the fact I was willing to do it for nothing in return, covering her light moans by kissing her.

Once I’d given her an orgasm, she simply cuddled into me for a few minutes. “Will it always be like this?”

“I hope so. Can you… handle sharing me?”

“I’ll learn, Ragnar. Remember, I watched you make love with Mirabelle, and the way you looked at her… well, you look at me the same at least. It will take some adjusting, but I just want to be cured.”

“What will your mother do?”

“I’m not sure, but… do you mind if wherever we end up, she comes with us? We spent so long apart and you’ll probably realise we’re quite alike.”

“I don’t mind if it makes you happy.”

We eventually gave into temptation and made love a little later, enjoying the feeling of sliding my cock inside her, feeling her legs tight to my body as we kissed a little, tried to keep the noise down, and when she enjoyed an orgasm while on her back, the smile on her face… it was something I’d remember for the rest of my life.

Waking the next morning and stepping out into bright sunlight, Valerica was sat by the fire. I took a seat, breaking apart some bread, offering her some which she politely refused. She kept giving me looks, which I couldn’t interpret, so she eventually stated rather bluntly, “You made love to my daughter last night.”

I wasn’t going to be embarrassed by it. “We made love.”

“You don’t mind the fact she’s a vampire?”

“No. It never has bothered me, to be honest. I look past what she is. There’s more to her than red eyes and fangs. It might not beat, but she’s got a big heart. She’s intelligent, undoubtedly brave, and there is a… goodness, for want of a better word.” I glanced at Valerica. “I’m sure she’s taken some of it from her mother.”

“No, Serana is how she is because of who she is. Harkon and I… we were good parents to start with, or at least I like to think so. But because of who we worshipped… I was always a devotee, but Harkon was something else. And once he started to learn about the power he could have, his obsession overtook everything else important in his life.” She paused before asking, “Did… Serana go into detail about… the ritual…”

“She did. Perhaps the main reason why I wanted to kill him. To do something like that to your own flesh and blood…”

Valerica looked away over the water. “I’ll never get over the guilt of just standing there, doing nothing. But it was a daedric god. And then when Harkon was ordered, but he seemed to relish the prospect, I knew in that moment I’d lost my husband. But all it did was prove how strong my daughter is.”

“I’m nothing but resilient, Mother,” Serana stated as she walked out of the tent, taking a seat next to me, “But can we please drop the subject.”

“Of course. I’m sorry, I just wondered if he knew.”

“Ragnar knows nearly everything about me and about us, Mother. There are no secrets between us, because we trust each other.”

“Good.” She took a deep breath. “Okay, so what’s the plan?”

“We ride to Morthal so Serana is cured,” I replied, “Will you be undergoing the ritual too?”

Valerica hesitated a few seconds before nodding. “It’s about time we put an end to all of this. What we became cost me nearly everything. It’s time to undo it all. I’ll live out my final years in peace, knowing my daughter is safe.”

“Okay, let’s pack up camp and head off.”

“Serana, you ride with Ragnar. I’ll take the spare horse.”

I gave Serana a glance. “No feeling me up while we’re riding along, Ragnar.” She paused before adding, “Well, as long as Mother doesn’t see.”

To her credit, Valerica simply laughed as I stood up and started to pack up camp. Once the tents were packed, the fire doused, and we were all dressed for the journey, we saddled up and began the long journey back east. Once on the main road, we dug our heels into the flanks, as I wanted to make it to Morthal within the day at least. The Nine were kind to us that day, bright sunshine and a light breeze the entire journey, no animals trying to attack us, nor did we run into any patrols that tried to ruin our day.

Valerica didn’t particularly want to stay at the inn, as I did warn both about the vampire troubles that had plagued the town a while ago, so we agreed to camp some distance away, ensuring we would remain undisturbed for the evening. I did walk into town to grab some supplies, food and drink for the three of us, including some beer as I didn’t mind the idea of wetting my whistle for the first time in a while.

Sitting around the campfire a little later, Serana with an arm wrapped around my waist, leaning her head against me, Valerica made us both chuckle when she said, “Do you know how long it’s been since I was with a man?”

“Hands off Ragnar, Mother.”

“Oh, I’m not suggesting anything of the sort, Serana. But I did hear you two last night and I couldn’t help but remember the good times with your father. So long ago now.” She looked at me. “I was quite the beauty back in the day, Ragnar. Harkon wasn’t the only man hoping to gain my hand in marriage.”

“Well, I wouldn’t kick you out of bed regardless,” I stated.

That made her look away, a little embarrassed, while Serana dug me in the ribs. “Behave, Ragnar.”

“What? I’ve bedded mature women before, Serana. I’m just saying, just because a woman has some years on me doesn’t mean they’re not still attractive and worthy of the attention.”

“How old are you?” Valerica wondered.

“To be honest, I’m not sure, but I think I must be around twenty-five winters or so by now.”

“Have you sired any children yet?”

“None that I know of. There was one woman, my wife, but…” I trailed off.

“I understand. Seems like we’ve all lost something.” She paused a moment. “You were married?”

“Feels like a long time ago now, but yes, I was married. She was pregnant when she was taken from me.”

She didn’t ask how, assuming correctly that I didn’t particularly want to discuss it. “Would your children carry your gift?”

Shrugging, I admitted, “I have no idea, to be honest. I haven’t really asked anyone if it does. But I think I’m called the ‘Last Dragonborn’ for a reason. Defeating Alduin ensures the world is now safe, so I guess there isn’t a reason for any more of me required after this."

“Would you like to have a child or children with Serana?”

I could only stare at her wide-eyed. Serana sat up. “Mother! Please!” she exclaimed, definitely embarrassed.

“It’s a perfectly natural question to ask, Serana. You are intimate and clearly wish to pursue a relationship with each other. And the result of being intimate can be children, so it’s something you will already be thinking about, even if you don’t discuss the subject.”

“I’m not sure if I could even have any after I’m cured.”

“I don’t see why not. You are the same age you were when you went through the ritual. Nothing has changed since that day. In fact, I think the time you spent in seclusion probably helped you.”

I glanced at Serana. “You do maintain a youthful… well, I wouldn’t say glow, not until you’re cured, but you remained absolutely gorgeous, Serana.”

If she was capable of blushing, I think her face would have turned bright red. Valerica chuckled. “Well, at least he’s got good vision at least. And some brains.”

Valerica suggested she didn’t particularly want much sleep, wanting to stare up at the stars and moons, things she hadn’t seen in a very long time, so Serana and I headed to bed a little later. We didn’t make love that night. Didn’t do anything except snuggle together under the furs, cracking some awful jokes that made her giggle, before we did enjoy a little make out session. “Tomorrow or the day after, I’m going to be human again, Ragnar,” she whispered, looking into my eyes.

“What colour are your eyes?”

“I… don’t remember, to be honest. It would be nice to see myself in a mirror again, see what I look like.”

“As I said, you’re beautiful, Serana.”

She smiled but said, “Ragnar, you don’t have to…”

“Just telling you what I think and feel. I do that with all my girls. If I think you’re beautiful, I’m going to tell you.”

“Guess I should just get used to compliments?”

“If I deem it necessary to tell you, yes.”

She went to sleep with a grin on her face at least. After breakfast the next morning, I was sent to find Falion. He remembered me from when I’d be cured, and after explaining what I needed, he told me that it would only be done in the evening, in the light of the moon. Informing Valerica and Serana of what I was told, the pair decided to head off together as Valerica suggested the area would be good for ingredients in any alchemy she would want to do at a later date. I headed into town and the inn, taking the afternoon to myself, for no other reason than to sip a couple of tankards and catch up with any information that might have travelled in from elsewhere in Skyrim. Thankfully, Morthal itself was now peaceful after the incidents I’d dealt with before. Other than that, the only main concern for many people was the resumption of hostilities between the Empire and Stormcloaks. The peace was still holding, however tenuous, but everyone knew it wouldn’t hold forever.

Returning to our campsite at dusk, mother and daughter were sat by the campfire, chatting away, both looking up and smiling at me as I sat down next to Serana, immediately taking my hand and leaning into me, her mother looking on approvingly. “Never thought I’d see my daughter so happy.” She paused before continuing. “Ragnar, I’ve been discussing a request with Serana. It’s going to sound strange.”

“I can take a guess.”

“You can?”

“I’m assuming it’s to do with Serana and I being intimate. I can understand why.”

“The only time I’ve ever witnessed it, I watched my daughter defiled by a daedric god and then her own father. I know it’s a weird request, but I want to see my daughter… treated with love and respect. Does that sound strange?”

“A little, but as Serana said herself, you were a strange family at times.”

“That’s true. So…”

I glanced at Serana. “Does she want to watch now or…”

“No, when we’re all human again,” Valerica stated, “I watched her defiled to become a vampire. I want to see her loved when she’s human again.”

“You don’t want to join in?”

“Ragnar, stop teasing,” Serana stated.

“A strapping young man such as yourself, I’m not sure I could contain myself anyway,” Valerica stated, “But no, the request is strange enough as it is, considering it will be my daughter, but… I still see what was done to her when I close my eyes, hear her screams of pain and agony, her pleading to us… To know I will now watch her pleasured by yourself, and that she will only feel love and joy…”

I gave it some thought. “You’ll be cured this evening. Tomorrow, we’ll ride to Whiterun. I own a house there. We’ll spend the night before heading north.”

“Are you sure?” Serana asked.

“I’m not worried about myself, Serana. You’re aware of my track record. If you’re comfortable with the idea, then so be it.”

She leaned back then closer to my ear to whisper, “I think Mother will want to involve herself, make it even weirder.”

I glanced at Valerica, who met my eyes but simply grinned. I don’t think she heard but probably figured out what Serana said.

The conversation thankfully moved on, nibbling away at a little food, drinking a little wine, before it was time for us to meet Falion. Having been through it all once, I knew what to expect. Introducing Serana and her mother, he guessed correctly that they had been vampires for much longer, so while the ritual would work, because the disease was ingrained in their bodies, the process would be far more painful, but he assured them that the pain would be worth the price of feeling human again.

Serana offered to go first, desiring to be human again. I would have liked to be close to her, to provide comfort, but Falion said only she must be in the summoning circle for the ritual. Seeing my concern, Valerica grabbed my hand and assured me that, although Serana would feel pain, it would be momentary compared to what she’d been through to become what she was.

When she screamed in agony, I near enough punched out Falion. He sensed my discomfort, even anger, and assured me she was okay, but the disease must be purged completely. She cried out again and again, Valerica squeezing my hand even tighter, to prevent me from leaving. The angle that her back arched was unbelievable, wondering if it would not break. But as quickly as it started, she collapsed to the ground. Only then did Valerica let me go as I rushed to the side of Serana, lifting her head up into my lap. I waited until she came around, and in the darkness, she opened her eyes to reveal they were blue. Caressing her face, I felt warmth, and moving my fingers to her neck, I felt a heartbeat.

“The ritual is complete. She is human once again,” Falion stated quietly.

“Thank you,” I whispered.

Standing up, I helped Serana to her feet. The first thing she did was kiss me, and we both grinned as I felt her warm lips on mine, pulling her tight into my body. “I feel alive, Ragnar,” she breathed upon breaking the kiss.

Taking her by the hand, we moved out of the way as Valerica stepped forward to undergo the same ritual. It was the same as Serana, her cries echoing around, and I did wonder if anyone in Morthal heard and felt it worthy of investigating. Once it was complete, we both stepped forward to help her up. She had blue eyes, just like Serana, but the smile on her face certainly lit up her features. “Human again,” she whispered, “And it was absolutely worth the agony.”

The three of us thanked Falion profusely. He waved it away, good naturedly, assuring us that he’d simply done us a favour. He headed back to Morthal as we returned to our campsite. Both women were exhausted after their ordeal so it was little wonder both just wanted to sleep.

I woke first the next morning, leaving Serana to sleep, Valerica waking up to join me. She admitted to being hungry, so I suggested that once Serana woke up, we head into town and get a proper meal. Now that she was as human as I was, she could mix with people again. “I haven’t done that in centuries, Ragnar. It’s going to take some adjusting, being around people again.”

“You’ll be fine. How do you feel otherwise?”

“It will take some adjusting, having been a vampire for so long. I’ll have to deal with things like being hungry and thirsty. Vampires sleep, at least, so that’s not a problem. And at least I can be in sunlight now.”

Serana joined us a little later, immediately taking off her hood. The sun was out so I watched her look up, close her eyes and simply smile. Then she looked at me and it broadened. “I love it when you look at me like that, Ragnar.”

“Well, it’s nice to see the sunlight on your face. You already have colour back in your body. Now you’ll just need a tan.”

“You don’t like my pale body, Ragnar?”

“Oh, I love it. Just a suggestion.”

We packed up camp and headed to town, Serana admitting her own hunger, and it was amusing to see them select a number of items to eat, and even funnier when they both sat back eating their fill. But they appreciated the taste of everything and joked that both would probably put a little weight on if they ate too much, too quickly. But now that the hunger had been sated, we mounted up and continued our journey to Whiterun.

The city was as busy as ever as we stabled our horses, leading them up the path to the main gates. I was recognised by the guards as always, taking the two women on a quick tour, receiving plenty of hearty hello’s from the shopkeepers and residents. I’d barely been in Whiterun for months, so while not a stranger, I received plenty of questions about what I’d been up to recently.

After shopping for the evening meal, we headed to Breezehome. Any idea of food ended when Serana grabbed my hand and led me upstairs, Valerica following, seeming to realise what Serana wanted. She kissed me hard, her hands immediately going to my cloak to take that off. It took a few seconds for my mind to catch up with what she was doing.

I took my time undressing her. Every piece of exposed skin was caressed and kissed. First her coat and hood. Then her blouse, exposing her pale arms and chest, still in a bra. Then I took off her boots, socks and skirts, exposing her pale legs, still in her panties, while I removed all of my clothing. Valerica was sitting nearby and got a good look at my body at the same time. “Wow,” I heard her whisper.

I didn’t look at her, eyes only for Serana, blue eyes like the ocean I’d see in my dreams. When she started to blush, I couldn’t help chuckle. Then she knew why I was laughing and joined in, gently pulling her tight to my body. “Now you’re warm too,” I whispered.

“You’re still warmer.”

Lowering ourselves to the bed, I removed her underwear, sat back on my knees, and just drank in the sight. “Your daughter is beautiful, Valerica.”

“I know she is.”

Her breasts were just perfect on her body, having her nipples harden within a couple of minutes, giving them plenty of attention as I moved up and down from her lips, her neck and further down. Kissing down her body, I teased her by breathing on her sex but avoiding it, making her groan and squirm as I kissed up and down her legs. “Please, Ragnar,” she breathed.

“Please what, Serana?”

“Please… focus on my pussy.”

“You want me to lick your pussy, Serana?”

“Make me cum, Ragnar…”

“Oh my…” I heard Valerica mutter to herself.

I lowered my head and tasted her for the first time as a human. It was different, naturally, most notably because she was warm. And she was definitely turned on by everything I’d done to her. She moaned loudly as I ran my tongue along her slit, tickling her clit for a moment, before focusing simply getting on with the job. I soon had her writhing in my arms, holding her place, feeling one of her hands run through my hair. “Ragnar,” she breathed.

I had the idea of sliding a couple of fingers inside her, to find her special spot, but I wanted her to cum with just my tongue, and once I figured she was nearly there, I focused most of my attention on her clit. Jackpot, as far as I was concerned, as she was soon almost forcing her body down into my mouth, my tongue flicking across her clit, sending jolts of pleasure up her body.

Then she orgasmed, and it was nothing short of spectacular. To my surprise, she begged me to keep going, so that’s what I did, and that’s when we both learned that she could cum quite quickly and often once the first one hit. It seemed just like one long orgasm, in all honesty, so she did have to ask me to stop around ten minutes later as she already sounded exhausted. I stopped immediately and left soft kisses up her body before I rested above her, watching her eyes open and the smile forming, leaning up to give me a soft kiss. “I love you,” she whispered.

“You’re just saying that because I made you orgasm.”

“More than once, Ragnar,” she retorted softly.

“But I love you too.”

Then we heard a sniffle, both of us glancing to see Valerica wiping her eyes. She just looked at us and smiled. “I… had no idea. It’s been so long since I’ve seen something so beautiful.”

“Come closer when we make love, Mother. It’s okay.”

“Are you sure?”

Serana looked at me and I nodded. “I’m sure, Mother. When we make love, I only think of Ragnar, and when we’re apart, and I close my eyes, I only see him now. What happened is in the past.”

Serana and I moved so Valerica could sit comfortably on the bed. Once she was settled, I positioned myself and slid slowly into Serana, unable to stop the groan as my cock was now sheathed in a warm and very wet, tight pussy. “Oh gods,” I muttered, “Serana, I’m not going to last long.”

“Good?”

“Perfect,” I replied, leaning down to kiss her.

Then we made love. Serana never stopped smiling, feeling her warm hands move up and down my arms and on my back, her warm legs wrapped loosely around my body. Her body took on more colour the longer we made love, seeing sweat form on her forehead for the first time. I was right, I didn’t last long, maybe five minutes, not that embarrassed me. Once I did finish inside her, I barely softened, and simply kissed her until I was ready to go again.

Serana had already learned she loved riding me, so I pulled out and that’s when Valerica got a good look at my cock for the first time. “Wow,” she exclaimed in a whisper.

I met her eyes and grinned. “I do like that reaction.”

“May I… um…”

“Do you want to touch me, Valerica?”

She glanced at Serana. “Go on, Mother. I know you want to. Just be mindful that it’s been inside my pussy so it’s my juices all over it.”

I glanced at Serana, wide-eyed. “Oh, I love you even more now.”

Feeling Valerica’s warm hand around my cock wasn’t something I’d planned on happening, but she was definitely intrigued, and her starting to stroke me wasn’t a surprise either. I glanced at Serana again, and she just laughed. “Gods, I should have known. Mother, are you getting ideas?”

“I’m sorry, Serana. It’s just…”

She rolled over and kissed her on the cheek. “Okay, I’m going to ride him, then if you’re interested, you can enjoy him afterwards.”

“Are you sure?”

“I think you need some tenderness, just like myself. Don’t you think?”

Valerica looked at me. “Would it be okay with you?”

“Take your clothes off.”

Valerica grinned then stripped as quickly as she could, standing beside the bed in nothing. She was a fine looking mature woman, and I definitely approved. Lying down, Serana slid down my cock as Valerica sat beside us, watching as Serana started to slowly ride my cock. “How does it feel?” she asked.

“Filling is how I’d describe it,” Serana half-moaned, “It’s long and thick, and touches me in the sort of places that make me orgasm. You’ll love it, Mother.”

Serana then leaned down to kiss me, resting on her hands as I ran mine down her back to her arse, gently thrusting as she controlled the rhythm. I couldn’t help gaze into her blue eyes constantly, though that just added to the other sensations I was feeling at the same time. “Fuck,” I grunted.

“Good, Ragnar?” she asked.

“As I said, your pussy is just perfect, Serana. I love eating you out and then I love doing this.”

“I want an orgasm, then I want to feel you orgasm again. Then you’re making love to my mother. How does that sound?”

I glanced at Valerica, who blushed and looked away. “I would think I was a very lucky man, Serana.”

Serana eventually had more than one orgasm, riding herself quickly though not too hard, loving it when she sat up and just bounced away, one hand on her hip, the other gently playing with one her breasts, which just made her giggle for a moment. When I was getting close, she leaned forward and let me take control, smiling when she felt me orgasm and leave another load inside her, before she rested her head on my chest as we both cooled off. I felt her squeeze me, laughing to herself. “Still so hard, Ragnar. I’m impressed.”

“Helps that it’s inside you, Serana.”

She eventually sat up and moved off my lap. Valerica made to just get on me but I moved and laid her down as Serana laid down next to her. She met my eyes and grinned as she turned onto her side. “Mother, I think Ragnar wants to pleasure you with his mouth first. Would you like that?” Valerica just nodded, a little embarrassed, a little overcome, I think. “Ragnar, treat my mother like you’d treat me. Why don’t you kiss her first?”

It was a little awkward at first, simply because Valerica was so overcome, but once she got hold of her wits, she proved to be an excellent kisser. And she loved every second I gave her attention, all over her body, but I knew she wanted what I’d done to Serana earlier, spreading her legs before I lowered my mouth.

She didn’t last long. I think she was far too excited and it had been far too long for her since anyone had shown her that sort of attention. And the sounds she made as I ate her out then made her cum were simply adorable, enough that Serana couldn’t help giggle. I didn’t waste time making love with her, giving her all of a couple of minutes before I slid my cock inside her. That’s when she blinked rapidly after I’d buried myself. I knew I hadn’t hurt her, it was just a big moment.

“I can’t remember the last time Harkon…” She met my eyes. “Young man like yourself… shouldn’t be with me…”

“Oh, hush, Mother. I knew you wanted this as soon as you said you wanted a cure. I will share Ragnar with other women. Sharing him with you tonight is not a big deal. And I wanted you to experience some love like I have with him.”

Valerica ran her hands up my arms until they cupped my face. “Make love to me, Ragnar.”

So that’s what I did. And as I’d cum a couple of times, it lasted quite a while, enough that she wanted to ride me just like Serana, and that’s when she learned that she really enjoyed it, the next orgasm arriving even bigger than the one experienced while eating her out. Little wonder she had to stop as she broke down in tears, Serana sitting up and hugging her tightly. “Such a waste,” Valerica murmured.

“Keep riding him, Mother,” Serana insisted gently, “Enjoy it for as long as you can.”

Valerica eventually had another coupe of orgasms before she leaned forward and gave me time to finish myself. When I came inside her, she kissed me hard, a hot passionate kiss that was a little unexpected. Then she rested herself on my chest as Serana scooted over so I could wrap an arm around her. “Well, mother and daughter on the same night, Ragnar,” she joked.

“I always say I’m a very lucky man.”

“I don’t know what to say,” Valerica murmured.

“You don’t have to say anything, Mother. But how do you feel?”

“Wonderful. I can feel my heart beating. I don’t think it ever beat this fast before we changed. I can’t remember feeling any sort of happiness. Now I’m with my daughter and the man she loves, but he’s also shown me such tenderness.”

Valerica eventually lifted herself off me and lay on my other side, one of her hands trailing up and down my chest, joining one of Serana’s. No surprise I started to drift off as Serana snuggled into me, feeling the strain herself. “Think we could do it again tomorrow morning?” she asked through a yawn.

“I don’t see why not. A little fun in the morning before we head north.”

“Will… I be included?” Valerica wondered.

“Of course, Mother. You’re already naked and watching you ride Ragnar was rather exciting. I haven’t seen you smile so much in centuries.”

“Thank you, Serana,” she whispered, “I love you.”

“I love you too, Mother.” She kissed my cheek. “And I love you, Ragnar.”

Yes, I was a very lucky man indeed.

Chapter 54: Returning Home

We arrived at the College two days later. It was a day’s ride to Windhelm, where we booked one room and continued the fun from our night together in Whiterun. It never got weird between Serana and Valerica in the sense they were intimate, but I did get to enjoy a proper mother-daughter threesome, Serana happily sitting on my face as Valerica enjoyed riding my cock again. She knew it wasn’t going to last long, that I had an arrangement with those waiting for me at the College. Asking what her age was when she was turned into a vampire, I admitted she wasn’t even the oldest woman I’d slept with anyway.

“Who was the oldest?” she asked during our ride between Windhelm and the College.

“A woman by the name of Delphine. She had a couple of years on you, at least.”

“So age isn’t a problem?”

“Well, I won’t sleep with anyone too young. There are rules, after all. And I won’t go too old, as there has to be an attraction. But when you’re a young man, older women are seen as better lovers simply because they have experience. I used to visit a particular tavern back in Cyrodiil that catered to my needs. I was friendly with one of the girls there, she was a regular, but the Madame who ran the place was an older woman, and when I asked her about enjoying time with a mature woman, I’d been regular enough that she took me by the hand and enjoyed me herself.” I paused and definitely smiled at some memories. “With age comes experience.”

“How many women have you slept with?”

I glanced at Serana, who looked at me and grinned. “Ragnar, two things. One, I’m not going to be jealous as I share you already. Two, I’m certainly not going to judge as I’m aware of your history.”

I looked at Valerica. “I’ll be honest; I don’t have an exact number in my head. Since arriving in Skyrim, I can at least list all the names. Ingun, Haelga, Jenassa, Karliah, Astrid, Muiri, Aela, Lydia, Delphine, Mirabelle, Faralda, Brelyna, Sybille then you two.”

“But you only married Muiri?”

“Yes. I was with Haelga for a long time but she didn’t want to marry. We’ve been on again, off again for a long time. Can’t remember the last time I saw her, to be honest. Now I’m with Aela, Lydia, Mirabella and your daughter. I don’t plan on any more but sometimes things change.”

“And you are okay with this, Serana?”

“I know he loves me, Mother. You’ve seen how he looks at me. I’ve seen how he looks at Mirabelle, Aela and Lydia. Trust me, this man is in love. He just happens to be in love with more than one person. Who is to say you can’t love more than one person?”

Valerica was silent before stating, “I had no idea my daughter was so open-minded. Consider me impressed.”

“I’ve had his company for quite a while now, Mother. I know Mirabelle will definitely be missing him. I think she’ll be stealing him away for a couple of nights at least.”

She was proven right as we rode our horses into the courtyard of the College. By the time I’d dismounted, Mirabelle had raced out of the building and almost slammed into me, arms and legs wrapped around me, definitely needing a tight hug and a very long kiss. It was only when Serana started to giggle that Mirabella extricated herself from me, and she proved nothing could get past her. First, there was a gasp before she whispered, “Ragnar, she’s… got colour…”

Serana stepped forward, took Mirabelle’s hand and put it to her throat. Mirabelle gasped again before she hugged her without hesitation. Serana was surprised for a moment before returning the embrace. “Thank Ragnar. He kept me alive. He’s done nothing but help me since waking up.”

Mirabelle held her by the shoulders. “Have you slept with him?” Serana couldn’t help but blush as she nodded. “Good. How was it?”

“The best thing ever,” Serana whispered. Then she cleared her throat. “Mirabelle, allow me to introduce my mother, Valerica. She was like me too, but chose to be cured.”

“Delighted to meet you.”

“We’ve heard a lot about you from Ragnar,” Valerica stated, sending a glance my way.

Mirabelle chuckled. “Sleep with you too?”

To see her jaw drop was rather amusing. I definitely chuckled as Mirabelle simply stepped back beside me as I wrapped an arm around her. “Yes, I enjoyed his company too. I can’t deny it,” Valerica finally said, the smile that formed surprisingly shy.

“Well, I don’t blame him. Mother and daughter are beautiful women, after all. Come, we should head inside. Aela and Lydia are upstairs, Ragnar. They thought I should head down here to meet you first.”

Heading inside and up to her quarters, Aela and Lydia hugged me, then inundated Serana and her mother with questions about being cured. They figured out rather quickly that I’d slept with both of them, not that it caused any sort of issue, Serana readily accepted as another of ‘my girls’. Valerica admitted she didn’t really know what she would do with her life now. When Mirabelle suggested working for the College, Valerica admitted her avenues of investigation regarding magic would likely be frowned upon. Mirabelle figured out what she meant rather quickly so let the matter drop. “Well, you can always practice any magic you want besides that,” she added.

“Thank you. I may just avoid practicing magic for a while and focus on alchemy. Do some good for the world.”

Having arrived rather late in the day, the six of us enjoyed dinner before Aela and Lydia suggested they would leave Mirabelle and I alone, Serana and Valerica taking the hint and leaving with them. I glanced at Mirabelle, surprised she started to blush. I pushed my chair back and she immediately sat on my lap, enjoying another soft kiss from her. “I’ve missed you,” she whispered.

“I missed you. I always think about you when not here.”

“Even when you’re with Serana?”

“Of course. When I’m intimate with Serana, I only think about her. But I’ve seen things that made me wish you were there with me too.”

That made her smile before she kissed me again. “So we’re safe from vampires now?”

“We are. And for the moment, my plate is empty. Dragons are no longer an issue. Vampires are no longer an issue. I handed the location of the Dark Brotherhood in, so assassins will no longer be an issue. To be honest, I don’t really know what I’m going to do now. I can’t live in Whiterun, the house is too small for all of us, though I guess I could do Companion work if we found somewhere close by to live.”

“You’re thinking, Ragnar?”

“Are you sure you don’t mind leaving here to come with me?”

“I’d leave tomorrow if you wanted. I can practice magic wherever we live.”

“Let me give it some thought.”

But that was for later. What I wanted to do most of all was slowly undress Mirabelle Ervine then enjoy her body. First thing we did, though, was ensure I was clean, so she boiled some water, ordered me to strip off, then enjoyed washing me down. Though I tried to maintain an air of cleanliness, usually just taking a dip in any pool of water I could find, this was a thorough clean, mixed with a little massaging, to be honest, feeling her fingers dig into tired muscles.

Once I was clean to her satisfaction, she stayed on her knees, looked up into my eyes, and slowly started to suck my cock. I couldn’t help grin down at her as she really took her time, her eyes open wide, bright and full of love for me, as I’m sure mine were for her. “Are you going to finish me?” She didn’t stop, simply nodding. “You want it in your mouth?” She nodded again. “Okay.”

The only thing I did was run my fingers through her hair, earning a smile, otherwise I let her control the tempo. She was eager to blow me, but definitely eager for me to finish as well. And despite the sex I’d enjoyed with Serana and Valerica, there is still something about a woman willingly dropping to her knees to suck your cock that is… awe-inspiring.

I groaned a couple of times, warned her once, but all that made her do was bob her head up and down faster, her eyes still looking up at me. When the first blast erupted into her mouth, she even giggled, before I groaned again as I felt myself empty completely. She kept on sucking me, hearing her swallow, before my cock finally popped free, grabbing the base as she licked up and down my shaft for another couple of minutes. “I love you,” she whispered.

“Oh, I definitely love you even more now for that,” I retorted with a chuckle.

Helping her to her feet, I kissed her as I ever so slowly started to undress her. I loved just touching her soft skin with my hands, knowing how rough they must feel compared to her delicate hands on mine. Once she was down to her underwear, she took my hand and led me to our bed, where I undid her bra first, spending time focusing on her breasts. I loved her breasts, perfect for her body, pale skin with pink nipples, which were always nice and hard whenever we made love. And she made delightful little noises whenever I gave them attention.

Her stomach was soft as I kissed down it, kissing over her panties, which made her giggle, inhaling her scent, feeling my cock harden even more, if possible. “By Ysmir, just your scent drives me insane, Belle,” I whispered. I looked up to see her blink rapidly. “What?” I asked softly.

“Just really missed you, that’s all. Keep going,” she whispered back.

I slowly lowered her panties before gently pushing apart her legs, delighted to see her pussy glisten in the candlelight, watching her chest rise and fall in her excitement, meeting her eyes as they sparkled, the colour in her cheeks as she was definitely turned on by now.

I couldn’t help grin as I asked, “How many?”

“Just keep going until I pass out, Ragnar.”

I leaned forward and kissed her. “I’ll keep going until my jaw is in agony. How about that?”

“I love the sound of that. Then we’ll make love?”

“The rest of the night. Just me and you. Tomorrow night as well.”

“And the others?”

“Will have their chance, we both know that. But I’ve just returned, and you are… you, Belle. My Breton goddess.”

I kissed down her body before I finally reached her sex, warm and very wet. That first taste of her made me groan as well. I’d happily go down on this woman every day for the rest of my life and expect nothing in return. I was so turned on by her, I’m surprised I didn’t cum just from eating her out. It’s sometimes hard to describe what I’m doing as I’m just doing what comes naturally and what works. All I know is that pretty much anything I did worked, making her moan, giggle and squirm, begging me to keep going and always wanting more. I made her orgasm with only my tongue first before sliding in some fingers and looking for that sweet spot. I knew her body so well by now, I knew exactly where it was and what to do.

And I did as she asked. I made her cum over and over again, fingers finding the spot, my tongue teasing her clit, my face and beard coated in her juices, my cock so hard, I thought I would pass out from blood loss, and still she wanted more of me. She shouted my name more than once, exclaimed to the Divines how much she loved me, how much she loved what I was doing, and how much she wanted to ride me later, which gave me something to look forward to.

By the time she murmured that she simply couldn’t take anymore, my jaw ached, my arm was feeling a little stiff as my fingers had been inside her for a long time, my back was sore from being at a slightly funny angle, and I’m sure I’d smell her scent on me for a few days as I’d spent so long between her legs. Kissing up her body, making her quiver as she was ever so sensitive still, I rested on a forearm as I watched her slowly recover, her eyes eventually meeting mine.

She needed more than a few minutes to settle down, feeling her heart beat race along. But she eventually reached down, gently grasped my cock, and guided it inside her, breathing deeply as I buried it slowly. Once completely joined, she ran a hand down my cheek, smiling away. “It’s home again,” she whispered.

I lasted two minutes at most. No surprise, considering I was ready to blow while eating her out. She didn’t mind, realising how turned on I was, and considering what I’d just done, I don’t think she was going to complain anyway. But even though I did cum, I kept on going, feeling her legs wrap around me, fingers digging into my back as I slowly but surely established a rhythm we could both enjoy thoroughly.

“Definitely missed this,” I muttered.

“My tight, wet pussy, Ragnar?"

I met her eyes and smiled. “Your tight, wet, Breton pussy, Belle. And your tight little body I just love to show attention to.”

“Like my breasts?”

“Perfect.”

“And my arse?”

“Best reason to watch you walk away.”

“My legs?”

“Love them when they’re wrapped around my body, though always love your thighs by my head when eating you out.”

“My fingers?”

“Love them digging in my back when I know you’re enjoying our lovemaking.”

“My feet?” she wondered.

“Delicate little things, just like the rest of you.”

“So all of me?”

“As I say, goddess.”

Rolling onto my back, taking her with me, she actually couldn’t ride me for that long. She came after a little while and simply had to stop, laughing to herself that she probably shouldn’t have had me eat her out for so long. But she didn’t ask me to withdraw, lying down on my chest as I ran my fingers up and down her soft back. “I’ve missed this,” she whispered.

“I know. Sorry I was gone so long, but getting here and back from wherever I was…”

“You’re back now, and from the sounds of it, for a while at least.”

“We’ll figure it out, Belle. We’ve made it work so far, we’ll keep making it work.”

We mixed conversation with lovemaking for the rest of the evening. Sometimes we’d just make love until we were tired and wanted to talk some more. Sometimes we’d fuck, hard and fast, both of us desperate to cum. It was definitely late by the time we both agreed that we’d had enough. My cock was starting to feel the strain, while she admitted to being a little sore between her legs. We washed up quickly before snuggling under the furs, Mirabelle moulding her body against mine, holding her hands in mine as they rested against her chest.

“Ragnar, can I ask about something?”

“You can ask me anything, Belle. You know that.”

“I’ve stopped taking my potions. I told you a while ago. So there’s a chance during any lovemaking going forward that I will eventually be with child.”

“Good.”

She was silent for a few seconds. “Okay,” she whispered.

“Were you worried?”

“A little bit, wondering if you changed your mind.”

I leaned down to her ear. “You will make a fabulous mother.”

“So will Lydia. You should be with her tomorrow. She’s stopped taking them too.”

“You sure?”

She nodded. “I get you tomorrow night. The day is yours to do what you want. Just don’t wear yourself out. And try not to fuck her arse too much. Babies are not made that way.”

I couldn’t help burst into laughter, which made her laugh too, flipping over so I could look at her, a last kiss before she snuggled closer. I think we fell asleep the same time, both of us exhausted after hours of intimacy.

I was amused the next morning when we sat ate breakfast at the table, surrounded by five women, knowing I’d been intimate with all of them more than once. Aela, Lydia and Mirabelle seemed to get on ever so well now, while Serana and Valerica were already mending their somewhat fractured relationship. I eventually just sat back and sighed, earning a couple of curious glances, but they realised I was simply content with life. Nothing in the back of my mind about dragons or vampires. Nothing I knew of that would pull me away from those I loved the most. Sure, I still wanted to feel that sense of adventure, and would likely continue working for the Companions in the future, but for now, I was going to reward myself with some peace and quiet.

Mirabelle had classes during the day, Serana and Valerica leaving with her. That left me with Lydia and Aela, the latter kissing Lydia then myself on the cheek before suggesting she was going to head out. Once we were alone, Lydia and I looked at each then just burst into laughter. “Do you think they’re suggesting something, Ragnar?”

“Mirabelle did mention I should spend today with you, but that doesn’t just have to mean sex.”

“Want to head upstairs?”

“Now that is a fine idea.”

Taking her hand, we climbed the stairs and eventually arrived at the perfect viewpoint, looking north over the iced over sea. We must have stood there together for quite a while in silence, completely comfortable, eventually wrapping an arm around her and pulling her closer. “What are we going to do now, Ragnar? I ask because I know you’re someone who can’t just sit around. You’re going to get restless and want to adventure somewhere.”

“Not sure, to be honest. What’s the word in Whiterun about the civil war?”

“Whiterun remains safe but there are rumours of clashes between Imperial and Stormcloak forces. Skyrim is now safe so I guess they think the cease fire no longer applies.”

“And I just know both sides are going to try and drag me into their conflict.”

“Would you support either side?”

“Honestly, I don’t know. The worship of Talos hasn’t really bothered me one way or the other until my first run-in with the Thalmor. Fuck those people. So now I make a point of saying the Nine Divines again. Yourself?”

“Well, I’m no Stormcloak supporter but I understand why they fight. But if we turn against the Empire, we’re as isolated as Hammerfell. I guess if we became independent, we could work with them against the Thalmor, but I’d rather be with the Empire and bring Hammerfell back into the fold. We’re stronger together with four nations instead of three, or worse only two, particularly against the Dominion.”

“Had no idea you were such a strategist, Lydia.”

“It’s why I don’t support the Stormcloaks. If the Empire collapses completely, it will assure Dominion control of Tamriel in the end. We’d just end up trading one ruler, who at least treats us decently, for another ruler, who will no doubt subjugate us to their rule. No matter what, if the Thalmor ever got ideas about actually invading us, I’d fight until I no longer draw breath.”

“So if push came to shove, and I did find myself asked or forced to involve myself, I should support the Empire.”

“I think it would be the best option, Ragnar. Having the Dragonborn within their ranks… I’m sure the Emperor would get ideas about restoring certain borders.”

“Well, as long as I’m not too old. I do want to retire eventually.”

“Become a farmer or something?”

That idea made me chuckle. “I wouldn’t even know where to begin.”

The weather turned as we stood there, the wind kicking up and snow started to fall, so that was a good excuse to head back inside. Heading back to our quarters, we gave into temptation and stripped off rather quickly, Lydia practically dragging me onto the bed with her, mouths clamped together as her hand gently stroked my quickly thickening cock. Breaking the kiss, she whispered, “Fuck me.”

I raised eyebrows. “No foreplay?”

“I just want your cock inside me, Ragnar. I’ve resisted for a couple of hours.”

So I slid my cock inside her. Once we were both comfortable, we fucked. It was… great. Fast. Hard. Sweaty. Erotic. Her language was still vulgar at times. We changed into a number of different positions. I came inside her a couple of times, and she came a lot more. We only stopped because we simply needed to stop, Lydia mentioning she was starting to feel a little tender, her pussy having taken quite the pounding. As we lay back, Lydia on her side, arm thrown across my chest as I hugged her close, she whispered, “First time we’ve done that properly in a while. Just me and you. No focus on anything except where your cock should be.”

“So I take it anal won’t be the usual thing like it used to be?”

“That was when I was with Delphine, Ragnar. I’ve had fun with Aela and Mirabelle, but it’s different with them. We like each other, but it’s just fun. My focus is you.” She paused for a moment. “I’m trying to figure out when I’ll be ready to fall pregnant. Whatever the case, you’re guaranteed a lot of sex. Mirabelle really wants a baby. In fact, she wants more than one. So do I. Aela won’t talk about it too much, but she wants nothing more than a daughter.” She looked up and asked, “Have you talked about it with Serana?”

“Sort of. She’s not sure if she can.”

“I’ll talk to her. You’re obviously aware of those days’ women have. Now that she’s human again…”

“It’s been so long; she’s probably forgotten all about that. I think she could do with a womanly chat with all of you, to be honest.”

“Do you want a child with her?”

“Yeah, I do. I think she’d make a terrific mother. She has a lot of love to give. Valerica would probably love to be a grandmother as well.”

“If we all live together, we’re going to need a big place.”

“Could you all handle living together?”

The question made her giggle. “Ragnar, we’d love nothing more. Trust me, there’s a good chance you would go to bed with two women a night, not for sex, I just mean to sleep. Sometimes only one of us, sometimes all of us.”

“Sounds like I’m going to have one hell of a life.”

“You’re the Dragonborn, Ragnar. Helps you’re also a good man, a bloody good fuck, and easy on the eye.”

I looked her up and down. “You’re pretty fucking fit yourself, Lydia.”

“Talk like that is going to have me on your cock rather quickly, Ragnar.” We both looked down. I was obviously rock hard. “Well, it would be a shame to waste it,” she added, sitting up and slowly lowering herself down, moaning softly as I was buried inside her again. “Perfect as always,” she whispered, holding onto both my hands before taking a deep breath. “Okay, one more orgasm, then I really should stop.”

We were still lying back, basking in the glow of having enjoyed some really good sex for a couple of hours, when the rest arrived for lunch. Aela walked over to give me a kiss, and couldn’t help herself by giving my cock a stroke. “This afternoon?” she asked quietly.

“I don’t think I could handle him anymore for now, Aela. He’s all yours.”

“Just don’t wear him out too much,” Mirabelle stated from the table.

“Look, I think we know Ragnar can keep us pleased all night without needing to use what I’m holding right now.” She leaned down to kiss me again. “Feels like forever since we were last intimate…”

“I’m with Mirabelle tonight. I would invite you but… How about tomorrow night, just me and you?”

Her face lit up, she gave me another kiss, and that definitely seemed to please her. “Told you, Ragnar. You will never go to sleep alone,” Lydia stated quietly.

She wasn’t wrong. Aela and I made love that afternoon. It must have been good, or somewhat special, as it was the first time in a long time I saw her almost cry. Snuggling into me afterwards, she admitted that she’d simply missed me more than she could imagine. The only thing that helped was that she got along so well with Mirabelle. The two were not intimate often, simply enjoying each other’s company, which pleased me no end.

Though Mirabelle and I were intimate that night, most of it was spent simply cuddling together, chatting about anything and everything that had happened to us, but we also spoke in length about our future. We were committed to each other, that much was obvious, and it was simply a case of what and where we would end up.

That was my life for at least a month. It wasn’t endless sex, though I’m not going to lie and say I didn’t enjoy a lot. There was an extensive library I could peruse at my leisure. I kept myself sharp by sparring with Aela and Lydia. Serana threw herself into her magic and alchemy alongside her mother regarding the latter, and with Mirabelle the former. Lydia was still applying herself in regards to learning magic, simply because it interested her. As for Aela and I, we would sometimes head out at dawn, climbing the nearby mountains, or walking across the vast white, empty expanses, hunting for anything that took our fancy. Sometimes we’d find a ruin worth exploring. Sometimes we’d run into bandits and enjoy a good fight.

Word that the Dragonborn was at the College spread, Mirabelle informing me that applicants and the number of students increased dramatically since the first day I’d arrived. Soon the halls and dorms were full of students wishing to study magic. They came from all over Tamriel. Breton. Dunmer. Cyrodiilian. Redguards. Bosmer. Khajit. Even Altmer arrived, though they were queried as to their allegiance, as we did worry about Thalmor spies.

I did take in the occasional class myself, but although I didn’t fear magic, appreciating it had saved me on more than one occasion, I wasn’t particularly interested in learning. I trusted my sword arm and my Thu’um to save me. And if I was ever injured, I figured Lydia could just heal me.

It was rather relaxing but I knew it was never going to last. But it wasn’t a crisis that eventually dragged me away from the College. It was a letter. A courier arrived one day, a backpack full of letters as always, but one was addressed specifically to me. That gained the interest of my girls, as although word had spread that I was residing at the College, I knew they immediately worried that I was going to be summoned to solve some issue.

Surprisingly, it was a letter from Jarl Elisif herself, requesting my presence at the Blue Palace in Solitude as soon as possible. That left me scratching my head as to why. Even the girls wondered what Elisif would want me for. Sure, I’d made a slight impression on her more than once, but I didn’t actually think anything would happen there. I might have enjoyed a night with Sybille, but I had a feeling she was just interested in the myth of who I was. Maybe I matched the myth, but I still thought nothing of it.

“Well, you can’t ignore a summons, Ragnar,” Aela said, “It would be bad form if you did. She obviously has a reason for you to attend.”

“Hopefully it’s nothing important. I really hope it isn’t something about the civil war.”

“You really don’t want to involve yourself in that, do you?”

I sighed. “Not really, Aela. But I have a feeling, one day, I’m going to find myself forced to choose a side. I’m going to be a pawn again. I just feel it in my bones.” I looked at the letter again. “It asks that I arrive within the week, so I might as well just leave tomorrow. Sooner I get there, sooner I can come back.”

“Will you want company?”

I met her eyes and smiled. “While I would like to say yes, I have no idea what it’s about so, for now, I’ll just go solo. If I need any help, I’ll send a message.”

That final night was spent with Mirabelle. I probably spent more nights with her than anyone, and she was confident that, within a couple of months, she might be able to share some good news. Lydia was also confident, while the three had sat down with Serana and reminded her of some womanly issues she might have forgotten about. Apparently it was a rather amusing conversation as they discussed plenty of things, but Serana also sat down with me and confirmed her desire to have children as well. I think the Dragonborn was going to be the father to quite a few children…

Leaving before dawn the next morning, my four girls plus Valerica were up to see me off, giving all of them a long hug before I mounted up. They wished me good luck before I disappeared over the bridge and began the long journey west, planning to make it within the day, though I knew I’d likely arrive after nightfall.

It was a sunny though bitterly cold day, the only exposed part of my body being me eyes, keeping my mouth and nose covered with a scarf, hands in thick gloves. I kept the pace of my horse at a smooth, consistent place, not particularly wanting to stop too often. Skyrim horses were hardy beasts anyway, usually able to ride for an entire day without needing to stop.

I passed by forts and camps though no-one approached me as I made my way past. I did skirt by Dawnstar before needing to turn south then west again. It was dark by the time the lights of Solitude appeared high above me, and it was rather late by the time I’d stabled my horse and headed through the main gates. I’d rarely been to Solitude for any reason other than some sort of assignment, so wondered if I might have time to actually take in some of the sights available.

Approaching the entrance to the Blue Palace, the pair of guards immediately viewed me with suspicion. I guess arriving late would have them wondering what I wanted. Before they could ask, I dug the letter out of my backpack and handed it over. “Oh, Dragonborn! We didn’t recognise…”

“I know my face isn’t well known everywhere. It’s fine.”

“The palace is closed, Dragonborn. You’ll have to return in the morning. There should be room at one of the inn’s.”

“Try the Winking Skeever,” the other guard suggested, “Good ale, tasty food, warm beds. Can’t go wrong.”

“Thanks. I’ll do just that.”

I’d been to the same tavern long ago, more than once, to be honest. This time, I walked in, paid for a room, grabbed a plate of food and tankard of ale, found an empty chair and listened to the bard. The place was full of revellers and drunks, the usual clientele one would find in such places. A couple of women also walked from table to table, no doubt offering their services, whether using a room at the tavern, or they’d escort them to another building close by. A couple did approach me but I declined politely.

After breakfast the next morning, I headed to the Blue Palace. The pair of guards greeting me were different, and a little friendlier than the night before, gesturing for me to enter after I’d shown them the letter. Heading up towards the throne room, Sybille was the first one to notice my entrance, immediately approaching me. “Good to see you, Dragonborn.”

“You too, Sybille. I’m sure you know why I’m here.”

“I am. Jarl Elisif is currently dressing. If you’d like to take a seat, I’m sure she’ll explain the reason for your summons once she’s taken her seat.”

“And here I thought it was all a ruse for you to get me back here,” I said quietly.

“Behave, Dragonborn,” she retorted quietly, though she lifted her face enough that I could see the smile on her face.

“Can you blame me?” I’ll admit I remember our night together rather fondly. The woman I was intimate with that night did not match the reputation I’d heard.

She didn’t reply to that as I took a seat on the empty bench. Elisif appeared from the nearby hallway around ten minutes later. She glanced my way when walking in and couldn’t hide her surprise. I guess she thought I would have taken longer to answer her summons. Once she’d take a seat on her throne, I was called forward by her steward.

“Thank you for arriving so quickly, Dragonborn.”

“I assumed it was an urgent matter so began my journey the day after your letter arrived. May I ask what matter is so urgent?”

“Of course. Word has reached us about strange magics occurring at a nearby cave, named of Wolfskull Cave. Now while I would normally leave this to my guards to deal with, a scout entered the cave and managed to get word to us that they appear to be trying to summon Queen Potema, otherwise known as the Wolf Queen of Solitude. One of history’s most evil characters.”

“Okay, I assume you want me to head to the cave and deal with these people?”

“It may seem like a simple operation, Dragonborn, but with the magic possibly involved, we decided someone with your power would be more capable of dealing with this issue. The concern is that this may not be the end of the issue, though if you can stop any sort of summoning, then maybe there is no other cause for concern.”

“Where is Wolfskull Cave?”

She turned to her steward. “Firebeard, show him where it is on the map.”

It was west of Solitude, close enough I could walk there, deal with whatever was going on, and be back within the day. Before leaving, Sybille did grab my wrist and pull me to the side, half-suggesting it could all be a giant waste of time, but Elisif had invited me for two reasons. One, she was concerned in regards to anything about Potema. And two, she wanted to meet me in person officially.

Heading out into Solitude, I made straight for the gate and decided to ride my horse. It took barely twenty minutes to reach the cave, dismounting and finding a tree to tie the reins too. A couple of skeletons stood guard at the entrance, taking them down without breaking a sweat.

It was another dark cave I found myself stumbling through, and it didn’t take long for me to run into the first lot of mages no doubt intent on stopping me from learning what they were up to. That’s when I had to take out my enchanted shield, to block their magic and fire spells. They had brains, at least, trying to stay out of distance though I showed my own turn of speed by closing the gap between us. They usually went down with one aimed swing.

I ended up exiting the narrow cave tunnels into an enormous cavern, and if I didn’t know any better, there was a crumbling fort. I had no idea who or when such a fort would have been constructed, but my attention was then taken by the loud chanting below me and eerie blue light that suggested something was going on that I needed to take care of immediately.

"Wolf Queen. Hear our call and awaken. We summon Potema!"

"We summon Potema!"

"Long have you slept the dreamless sleep of death, Potema. No longer. Hear us Wolf Queen! We Summon You!"

"We summon Potema!"

Definitely not good and Elisif was definitely showing intelligence by summoning me. I doubt Sybille would want to hear that she was incorrect, though if these were powerful mages, perhaps they had blocked her own efforts to find out if the rumours were true.

Entering the fort, I now faced draugr and mages, and I was soon hacking my way forward. A couple of the draugr were those big bastards that took more than a couple of swings to take down. Against them, I’d use my Thu’um, and that drew the attention of more mages. I didn’t want to use my Thu’um against humans, wanting to keep my word to the Greybeards, but I needed to get this ritual shut down fast, so chose to just blow them backwards into walls, leaving their battered bodies behind.

It appears those taking part in the summoning were not aware of what was taking place below them. Once or twice, a bolt of flame or an ice spike came too close for comfort. I hated fighting mages far more than draugr, simply because there was sometimes little one can do to prevent a spell. Cold spells didn’t bother me all that much, but everyone is concerned about being burned by flames.

"Yes! Yes! Return me to this realm!"

I have a feeling that was Potema. So if she was dead, where was she speaking from…?

"As our voices summon you the blood of the innocent binds you Wolf Queen!"

"Summoned with words. Bound by blood."

"What! What are you doing?! You fools! You cannot bind me to your wills!"

"Summoned with words. Bound by blood."

"You ants don't have the power to bind me!"

Aye, best to end this ritual before she’s unleashed on the world again. No doubt she would have plans. Heading up a set of stairs, I noticed bright blue light ahead, and I heard the necromancers grow concerned at a presence. I burst onto the roof of the tower, charging straight for the nearest mage, colliding with them hard enough to send them stumbling back and over the edge. I then turned and used my Thu’um.

Most of them died quickly but the ritual master was made of harder stuff. She was an elderly woman, which was a surprise, and immediately used magic to bring the dead back to life. I knew the easiest way to stop everything was kill her, so that’s what I did. She used the wrong spell against me, cold instead of flames. I laughed it off, put my sword through her chest, and the blue light disappeared through a hole in the roof of the cave.

Then it was quiet.

“Well, at least it wasn’t a complete waste of time,” I muttered.

I managed to find an exit that led me back towards the entrance, collected my horse that will still waiting for me outside, and slowly rode back to Solitude. It was perhaps still only mid-afternoon by the time I walked back through the gates, and I was allowed to enter the Blue Palace without being questioned.

Elisif wasn’t sitting on her throne when arriving, though my arrival must have been announced, as she walked into the throne room within a couple of minutes, taking a seat and looked at me with interest. “What did you find, Dragonborn?”

“Well, whoever told you about what was going on in Wolfskull Cave was correct. There were necromancers trying to summon Potema.”

“By Ysmir,” she whispered, “Did you stop them?”

“Yes, I think I stopped them before they were able to summon her.”

“Then the people of Solitude can only thank you for your service, Dragonborn. Will coin suffice as payment? Or perhaps you would like to join me for dinner this evening?”

“It’s been quite a while since I enjoyed dinner with a Jarl. I’d be honoured to join you, Jarl Elisif.”

The smile that immediately formed was surprisingly shy. I had a feeling she was still nursing a crush, despite the fact I assumed she would have heard about my private life. It didn’t seem to be any real secret. “Please return this evening. Do you have clothing to wear?”

I looked down over my blood spattered armour. “I’m sure I have something more appropriate than this.”

Heading back to the Winking Skeever, I was thankful I’d thought about any eventuality. My clothing was nowhere near as fine as that worn by Elisif but it would do for the occasion. Figuring I couldn’t change show up with a change of clothing, I also had a quick wash, even going so far as to trim my beard and run my fingers through my hair to get rid of some of the knots. I generally kept my hair a little shorter nowadays but it could still be a real mess after a fight.

Otherwise, I waited around until the sun disappeared before heading back towards the Blue Palace. I was expecting to be taken towards a grand dining hall or something. Instead, I was led towards a set of doors where another steward met me. “Where is everyone else?” I asked him.

“You are dining with the Jarl in her private chambers, Dragonborn.”

“Just the two of us?”

“Yes. Were you unaware?”

“A little. I was expecting company.”

“No. Jarl Elisif wanted to dine with you alone. I assume it’s simply to get to know the Dragonborn.”

“Okay,” I said with a shrug. If that’s what she wanted…

It seemed to be her own private wing. There were three doors, one I assuming her bedroom, another perhaps a study, and the room I was led into was a dual living and dining room. There was a table with six chairs around it, though the table had already been set. Assuming she would sit at the head of the table, I was shown to a seat beside her. At least I wasn’t expected to sit at the other end. That would have just been awkward.

Elisif appeared a few minutes later, standing as I should as she walked in. I wasn’t sure if I should shake her hand, kiss her cheek, or merely wish her good evening. I went with the safe third option, though was polite enough to show her into her seat. Stewards hovered around, and when one offered to pour the wine, I figured I’d do it instead. That surprised her, and the stewards were immediately dismissed, only returning later with each course.

“I’ve heard many stories about the Dragonborn, Ragnar…”

“Oh no, we’re not going to spend all night talking about my life, Jarl Eli…”

“We’re in privacy here. Call me Eli…”

“Only if you call me Ragnar.”

That made her smile. “What would you like to know, Ragnar?”

“Well, I don’t know much about you except what I’ve been told.” I paused a moment. “I understand we’re both widows.”

That made her jaw drop slightly. “You lost your wife?” I nodded. “I’m sorry.”

“I’m sorry too, for both of us. I understand it was Jarl Ulfric…”

She paused a moment before sighing. “It feels like a long time ago now. My period of mourning ended long ago. But watching your husband killed in such a manner never really leaves you. The thing that helps most is keeping Solitude and its people safe. If I keep my mind occupied, I don’t have to worry about other things, like finding a suitable husband. I obviously have pressure to marry again.”

“I’ve heard the rumours. Pressure from the Empire?”

“Though I could rule alone, I have a feeling they want a strong Nordic male presence next to me. Some believe I am too young too rule, or too inexperienced to handle the pressure of ruling. Others see me as little more than a puppet of the Empire.” She sighed and then chuckled. “Apologies, I’m sure you don’t want to sit there and listen to my worries.”

“How do you think I felt learning about being Dragonborn and the fate of existence rested on my shoulders? Trust me, it isn’t easy.”

“Yet you prevailed.”

“Sometimes, I was lucky. And I didn’t always do it alone. I have some good friends who have helped me many times.”

“You were married, though?”

“I was. Muiri. She was… taken from me. It’s a long story. To be honest, my life is a long story, not all of it pleasant. I’m sure you’ve heard.”

“I have. There was an ulterior motive to inviting you to Solitude. Yes, I needed that issue dealing with, but to be honest, that could have been handled by my guard or we could have hired mercenaries to deal with it. The Emperor will be arriving again within two days and he wishes to dine with you.”

I met her eyes. “I take it you know my history.”

“I do. It does not concern me, Ragnar. Your slate is now clean. Everything you have done since Helgen has restored your honour. You saved all of us. I think anything that happened before can be forgiven.”

“Thank you.”

“What are you doing with yourself now, Ragnar?”

“I’m living at the College of Winterhold with… my partners.”

She must have known as all she did was chuckle. “I have heard the rumours, Ragnar. If I may be so bold, how many?”

“Four.”

“And they are happy with the arrangement?”

“They appear to be and I heard no complaints.” She blushed at the innuendo. “All four of them desire children. I may end up with a rather extended family.” I paused before asking, “And you? Any potential suitors?”

“I will not be forced into a relationship; I’ve made that opinion clear.” She paused, clearly thinking. “There is one potential suitor I am interested in. But I’m not sure they would find him acceptable.”

“Why is that?”

“There are a few things that could pose a problem. For now, I will hold my tongue.”

Finishing our meal, we left the table and moved towards the fireplace, taking a seat on the lounge, Elisif at one end, myself at the other, nursing a glass of brandy each. She sat looking into the fire, and though I’d kept the conversation flowing, she did look a little… sad. “Something on your mind, Eli?”

She looked at me and smiled. In the light of the fire, she was rather beautiful. “It’s a lonely existence, Ragnar. Being Jarl. The thing is, I loved my husband. Yes, the marriage was arranged, but he courted me before taking my hand. But nearly everyone who surrounds me, they are not friends, it’s just a job. Sure, they want to keep me protected and wouldn’t want my death on their hands, but would they care if I was replaced? I doubt it. And my friends from before I was married, they now live their own lives. Many I haven’t seen in a long time now.” She sighed. “Then there’s this civil war and the Empire have their own designs. I don’t particularly trust General Tullius. No doubt he’d replace me if he thought it worthwhile. I think the only way I can continue to care for the people of this city, and Skyrim in general, will eventually be marrying someone they approve. But I want to marry for love, not just because he happens to suit the Empire’s desires.”

I leaned forward to place down my glass before shuffling across to sit closer to her. She watched me with interest before I wrapped an arm around her, pulling her in close. I knew how she felt, the loneliness that came with responsibility. You couldn’t really talk to people about it because there was a chance they wouldn’t understand.

“Thank you for dining with me tonight, Ragnar.”

“Well, I’ll be around for a couple of days now so we can do it again tomorrow night.”

“I’d like that. You’re a good listener.”

Well, that once had a difference connotation, but I’d had a feeling she had a lot to say. All I needed to do was ask the right questions. In privacy, she was good company, could crack a joke and it helped she was a real beauty as well. But I certainly wasn’t going to think anything other than that. I certainly wasn’t someone she should involve herself in. It would make both our lives far too complicated.

We eventually agreed to end the night as we couldn’t stay up all night, though I’m sure she would appreciate the company. Escorting me as far as the doors to her private chambers, again I wasn’t sure exactly how to part, but I took a chance and leaned down to kiss her cheek. Leaning back slightly, she met my eyes and simply smiled. “Goodnight, Eli.”

“Goodnight, Ragnar. Same time tomorrow night?”

“I’ll have to buy some new clothes. Can’t show up in the same one’s eh?”

That made her chuckle. “Well, others might take notice. It won’t bother me though.”

“Well, I’ll give it some thought. I’ll see you tomorrow.”

The palace was otherwise deserted except for a couple of rather bored looking guards standing at attention. Heading out into the cool night air, I knew she meant me when talking about the potential suitor. Her interest was clear but not overly obvious, but I knew she couldn’t seriously suggest me as a potential suitor. My past may have been forgiven but definitely not forgotten.

The Winking Skeever was still doing business though it was winding down, enjoying a tankard before heading to bed that evening.

Chapter 55: The Widow

With a full day in Solitude to occupy my time with, the first thing I did was shop for some new clothing. I eventually ended up in Radiant Raiment. The woman behind the counter was rather stuck-up, but once I put down the bag of coin I was willing to spend, her attitude changed quickly and she was ever so helpful. I walked out with a new coat, shirt, trousers and even some rather expensive leather boots. I put all those in my room back at the inn before going for a wander around Solitude.

I ended up in the Bards College, for the only reason that I heard someone singing from inside. The man in charge asked if I was interested in applying, which made me laugh, as I can’t sing and certainly can’t play an instrument. However, when he learned who I was, he was almost insistent I join as he believe I might be able to help him with a problem. “Look, although I’d like to help, I am currently in the employment of the palace,” I said. A little white lie, but I knew Elisif was probably going to ask another favour in the end.

“Ah, I understand, Dragonborn. But if you could consider helping us at a later date, it would be appreciated.”

“I’ll do what I can, but right now, I will probably be busy with other work.”

I still had a couple of hours to fill before I was required to attend the palace once again so I spent it lying back in my room at the inn. There was a bookshelf that I took a good look at, eventually selecting one to read, nursing a tankard of ale at the same time. When I noticed the light starting to fade outside, I had another quick wash before slipping into my new clothes, definitely liking the feel of the new boots I’d purchased.

Heading up to the palace once the sun started to set, I was greeted by Firebeard, her head steward, who simply instructed me to head to her private chambers, where she would meet me. Walking into the dining room, she was already sitting, waiting for me. The smile that lit up her face at my appearance even caught me by surprise, walking towards me, stopping barely a couple of paces away. I stepped forward and kissed her cheek again. “Nice to see you again so soon,” I said quietly.

“Thank you for coming, Ragnar.” She glanced back at the table. “I was thinking a simple dinner tonight. You’re not interested in formalities, are you?”

“Not at all. The pleasant company is enough.”

She met my eyes and smiled rather shyly before gesturing to the table. I made sure she was sat first before taking my own seat, stewards walking with a few plates, a couple of bottles of wines, before they headed out, shutting the doors, giving us complete privacy.

We made small-talk as we ate but I had a feeling we were not particularly interested in food as we eventually made our way over to the lounge, opening a bottle of brandy, and this time she made the move to immediately shuffled over, resting against me. I transferred my cup to my left hand and wrapped my arm around her. “This is already too comfortable,” she said quietly.

I figured there was no point beating around the bush. “You were talking about me last night, weren’t you?”

“I still remember the first time we met, you walking into the room. The last time I felt anything like that was with my husband. You just had this presence, Ragnar. And I was left thinking… I don’t know… you might have liked something about me.”

“I think you’re incredibly sweet to start off with, and you’ve dealt with everything thrown at you with courage. And when you told me last night about how lonely you felt, my heart went out to you.”

“I can’t talk about anything like that to people in the palace.  Any sign of weakness would be leapt upon. It’s difficult to trust anyone.”

“Yet you trust me?”

“You’re not part of the palace, Ragnar. You’re a stranger to the intrigues that take place. But I know you’re a good man.”

“I try to be nowadays though I’m sure some still look down in regards to certain aspects of my life.”

“That’s the only difficulty I have when it comes to you, Ragnar. But you were honest with me straight away, which I did appreciate. So many would have lied or outright denied it.”

“Who knows I’m here tonight?”

“Only Firebeard should be aware. He’s one of the few I trust within these walls. The guards may have noticed your arrival but they’re wise enough not to say anything.”

“One would almost think I’ve been snuck in here.”

I looked at her as she looked back at me. “It’s been… too long since I was with a man, Ragnar,” she whispered, “Just your arm around me now is sending all these good feelings through my body.”

Placing the cup down on the table next to the lounge, I turned towards her and she responded immediately to my kiss. Straight away, I knew she was a good kisser. And I knew she was as interested in me as I was with her. She broke the kiss only for a moment to place her own cup down before she leaned back towards me, her mouth hungry for mine. It barely took a couple of minutes before I had her laying back on the lounge, and I had a feeling she was eager for other things to happen.

“Ragnar, would you like to stay the night with me? I know it’s quick…”

“I’d be delighted, Eli. Trust me, the attraction is returned.”

“Should we move to my bedroom then?”

“I’ll carry you.”

Lifting her up was easy, hearing her laugh out loud, and that was just an arrow to the heart. Such a natural sound, and I wondered how often she did laugh. Carrying her was easy, managing to open the door then kicking it shut behind me before I placed her down, sitting on the bed. We resumed kissing as her hands were fast to taking off my clothes. First my coat and shirts, her hands immediately running over my upper body. She definitely liked my arms, her fingers tracing faint scars across my chest and back.

“Warrior,” she breathed.

“I’ve spent most of my life fighting, one way or another.”

Standing her up, we resumed kissing as I definitely enjoyed undressing her. Hadn’t had the chance to undress someone in such a lofty position as a Jarl before. I drank in her pale, smooth skin, perfect in nearly every way. Once I had her down to her underwear, she started to blush again, but I think it might have been the way I was looking at her. Then her hands eagerly undid and lowered my trousers, and she ran a hand over the tent in my underwear. “Oh my…” she breathed, “May I, Ragnar?”

“Of course.”

She lowered my underwear and made another sound of appreciation, standing up and gently grasping it as I leaned down to kiss her, growling into her mouth when she gave it a gentle squeeze. “It’s been… it’s been so long since I’ve done anything with a man, Ragnar. Years…”

“Time we rectify that, Eli. Want to know what I’m going to do next?” She nodded eagerly. “I’m going to take off your bra and panties first because I want to see you naked. Then I’m going to lie you back on the bed and just caress your entire body. Then I’m going to use my mouth on certain parts I know will love… then I’m going to spend time between your legs.”

“With your mouth?” she breathed.

I leaned down close to hear ear. “I aim to make the Jarl of Solitude cry out my name as I make her cum,” I whispered.

“Then we’ll make love?” she whispered with desire.

I leaned back and met her eyes. “You want to make love?”

“With the Dragonborn? More than anything… But with Ragnar, the man in front of me? Even more than that.”

“Made an impression?”

“I know you’re a good man, Ragnar. You’ve hidden nothing from me. Been completely honest. What I know is that you are honourable and have a lot of love to give.”

I kissed her again, feeling her body mould into mind as I undid her bra, throwing that on the ground as we both helped take off her panties. She giggled as my cock pressed into her before we ended up on the bed together.

And I did exactly what I told her. Her body was spectacular, soft and smooth. She definitely wasn’t a warrior, living a rather easy life in the palace, but she was still fit. Her breasts were marvellous and she definitely loved the attention I gave those, her hand running through my hair as each nipple received plenty of attention as I used my hand to slowly start to fondle her, appreciating how wet she already was.

Moving down her body, trailing gentle kisses over her stomach, I appreciated the short, blonde hair above her sex as I pressed my nose to her groin and inhaled. “Gods, that’s wonderful, Eli,” I whispered. She couldn’t help giggle. “I can’t wait to taste you…”

“Please,” she breathed.

I teased her to start off with, just flicking her pussy, enough to get a good taste regardless. Gods, either every woman I was with just tasted sensational or… I don’t know. But I knew straight away, just like Mirabelle, Serana, Lydia and Aela, I could happily eat her out every day the rest of my life. It was too much for her, of course. So long since she’d received this sort of attention, she was soon writhing on the bed, and her orgasm arrived rather quickly. It must have been a big one as she immediately asked me to stop, sucking in a series of deep breaths.

Kissing up her body, I rested on a forearm as I met her eyes. “I’m doing that again,” I said. She couldn’t help chuckle. “Seriously, Eli, I want to make you cum like that again.”

“No wonder you have four…”

“I do it for them too.”

She leaned up and gave me a gentle kiss. “Give me a couple of minutes. I haven’t had an orgasm that strong since… well, I might have given myself one or two, but it’s much better when someone else does it for me.”

“The idea that you masturbate is a pleasant thought, Eli. A Jarl wouldn’t normally admit such things.”

She gave me another gentle kiss. “After meeting you, Ragnar, you were often in my thoughts.” She made an obvious glance at my cock. “I didn’t think you were that big, to be honest.”

“I’ll be gentle when we make love.”

“But you said something about pleasing me again with your mouth.”

“It would an honour, my lady.”

She giggled again as I kissed down her body and resumed eating her out. This time, I think she tried her best to hold back her orgasm, which I didn’t mind whatsoever, as it was a good excuse to just enjoy her taste even longer. Eventually placing a hand on each thigh, I pushed her legs wider and looked up as she met my eyes. “Don’t stop,” she breathed, and I could read from her body language that she was getting close.

She came again, crying out even louder if possible. It was even better as, this time, there were a couple of tears as well. That made me stop immediately, kissing up her body quickly, before I rested above her, using my thumb to wipe her cheeks. She looked at me and grinned. “Sorry, just… a lot of emotions flooding my mind and body right now.”

“Never apologise for being happy but also thinking and feeling other things.”

I rested on my side and she immediately turned and shuffled into me, holding her tight to my body. “I’ve been so alone,” she murmured into my chest, running my fingers up and down her back.

“The fact you feel that way… breaks my heart, Eli. Someone like yourself…”

She looked up and returned a crooked grin. “I took too long to ask you to come see me. We could have done this a long time ago.”

“Eli, my life…”

She shushed me. “Not now, Ragnar. We can discuss that later. Tonight, I just wanted this. I wanted you.”

“I’m glad you did, because I definitely wanted you tonight in return.”

She rolled onto her back, taking her with me, and I slid my cock inside her slowly, watching her face light up as my cock disappeared inside her. Hot, tight and wet, like all the women I had the pleasure of being intimate with. Once I buried myself, she immediately lifted her legs, feeling her lock her ankles behind me. As we made love, our mouths were rarely apart, her fingers digging into my back as I slowly built a rhythm we could both enjoy. She only broke the kiss when realising I probably wasn’t going to last long. “Inside me, Ragnar. I have potions…”

“Anywhere else would be a waste, Eli.”

That made her giggle before she kissed me again. There was absolutely no reason to pound her senseless, I was going to cum easily as I was completely turned on by her. Lasted perhaps ten minutes before I warned her I was close. That’s when she released her legs and show her flexibility, bending her knees then pulled them back, holding them in place, a signal to go a bit faster so I could cum.

I did, of course. No chance of it not happening, burying myself a final few times as I erupted inside her. Then I had to just rest for a couple of minutes, feeling of her hands trail up and down my back, soft kisses on my cheek and neck, her legs wrapping around me again. “Worth the wait,” she whispered, “You have a great cock, Ragnar.”

I lifted my head and chuckled. “Well, your pussy is on fire, Eli.”

That caused us both to laugh before we shared another kiss. The smile on her face was infectious. She looked genuinely happy. It wasn’t just what we’d done. I felt a genuine connection with her and I could only hope she felt the same way.

We made love the rest of the night. She wasn’t particularly adventurous, not that I expected it during our first night together, but she definitely enjoyed riding me, like most women I shared a bed with. Watching the Jarl of Solitude ride my cock was a sight to behold, and watching her cum riding said cock was simply glorious. Once I’d cum in her again after she’d ridden herself to exhaustion, only then did we finally agree to stop, taking a few minutes to clean up before snuggling together under the blankets, her body moulded back into my chest.

“I can’t remember the last time a man held me while we slept,” she whispered.

“Well, I can certainly stay a few more nights, Eli. My girls will miss me but they’ll understand.”

“How are they so open-minded?”

“Honestly, you’d have to ask them, but they’ve always accepted me and my faults. I... find it difficult, the idea of committing completely, after Muiri. And I love all of them, Eli. I mean I’m in love with all four of them. Choosing one is impossible.”

“Could you ever love me?” she asked ever so quietly, I almost missed the question.

I sat up and gently put a finger to her chin. I could just about see her eyes in the darkness. “I like you a hell of a lot already, Eli. We’ve just made love all night, and I plan on doing it again while I’m here. Get to know me more, I’ll get to know you… But can you accept my life?”

“I can only try… I like you, Ragnar. Definitely like you after tonight.”

“Then we’ll take it day by day. If it’s too hard for you…”

Continuing to talk about it probably wasn’t the best idea considering how late it was, so I settled back down though she turned around, resting her head under my chin, against my chest, my hands gently caressing her back. Yeah, I really liked her already. She was sweet, beautiful, and her heart was in the right place.

We woke early the next morning, simply because it was expected of her. We snuggled for a few minutes before there was a knock at the door, her steward asking if she was up. “Do they know I’m here?” I whispered.

“They will in a few minutes, Ragnar. You’ll be a subject of gossip now. No-one will bother you about it thought. I’ll make sure of it.”

We dressed together before walking out of her bedroom and into the dining room. There were three stewards, all of them trying to hide their surprise at my appearance. Once we were sat down, plates of food were placed in front of us. We ate in relative silence, though Elisif couldn’t wipe the slight grin of her face, and I eventually took hold of her hand, giving it a squeeze. That just made her face light up even more.

Upon finishing eating, she made a surprising request. “Grab your things from the inn and bring them here, Ragnar.”

“Seriously?”

“Dinner with the Emperor is tomorrow night, so you can stay here with me until then. After that, we’ll figure out what comes next. But I’m the Jarl, and if I want your company, then I’m having it.”

I couldn’t help grin. “Oh, I like this side of you, Eli. Knows what she wants and takes it.”

She leaned forward and kissed me. One hell of a hot, passionate kiss, the sort that may have led to other things before she pulled back an inch from my face, her eyes almost boring into mine. “Damn right, Ragnar. And I want you with me for as long as I can have you.”

“I’ll go get my things and bring them back. Um… Should I stay out of the way or…?”

“You can look around the palace if you like, but these chambers are yours. Relax and unwind if you want. I’ll try and get away when I can.”

We wandered out together, earning more curious glances as to my presence. I headed out straight away, grabbed my things from the inn and walked straight back to the palace. Noticing me walk in with my backpack and weapons, Firebeard had obviously been informed as he met me and led me into her private chambers. “It’s not my place to say anything, Dragonborn… You are aware this will start rumours and gossip.”

“I was warned.”

“I’ll issue one warning myself. We all care about Jarl Elisif and don’t wish to see her hurt again. She lost her husband and spent a long time mourning him. I’m sure you’re aware her selecting a potential suitor without the Empire giving their stamp of approval could cause problems.”

I turned and nodded. “I understand. I don’t want to cause her problems.”

“Good.” He paused and a slight grin formed. “Haven’t seen her smile this much in a long time, Dragonborn. Thank you, and I mean that from the heart.”

“She’s a good woman and deserves some happiness in their life.” I paused before adding, “I’m not sure I’m that man, but I won’t hurt her.”

I spent most of my time wandering the palace. A locked off section had me wondering what was hidden by the door, but I didn’t have a key, and it didn’t cause enough curiosity for me to go searching around, asking for a key. I did enjoy a long lunch with Elisif before I spent the afternoon taking advantage of the extensive library, and that’s when Sybille made her appearance, taking a seat next to me on the lounge.

“So you’ve slept with Elisif now,” she stated.

“I have.”

“I suppose Firebeard has given you a warning?” I nodded. “I guess I don’t need to as well. She’s young and I think a little naïve, but her husband was a good man and she is trying to carry on some of his good deeds.” She paused again. “Elisif is a lucky woman, Ragnar. I remember our night together fondly.”

I gave her a look, meeting her eyes hidden under the hood. “I do too, Sybille.”

“No matter what happens, Ragnar, just make sure she’s safe. I was loyal to her husband most of all, but she deserves some happiness after everything that happened to her.”

I found it amusing I’d now received two warnings from people close to her, left thinking she did have people who cared for her. Her day ended earlier than I expected, realising she’d met with petitioners for most of the afternoon. I was busy reading on the lounge when I felt arms around my neck and a kiss on my cheek, a questions about what I was reading. I completely forgot once I’d taken in the scent of her perfume.

Dinner was a simple affair much like the previous evening, ending up the lounge by the fire before we decided to lie on the rug, lying together with a little making out, which turned into my hand disappearing under her dress, moving the band of her panties out of the way, my fingers teasing her as we made out. “I’m feeling up a Jarl,” I whispered into her ear.

“I’m being felt up by the Dragonborn,” she whispered in return.

My fingers ended up inside her and I eventually made her cum by doing that. She made these adorable little noises when getting excited, and needed to kiss me hard when she finally did orgasm as no doubt people outside might hear. When I took out my fingers and sucked them off her juices, she definitely blushed. “What?”

“It’s just… you really… like my taste so much?”

I proved it by lifting her dress, basically ripping of her panties, and eating her out to another orgasm. She didn’t bother trying to hide her cries that time.

Finding myself dragged to the bedroom afterwards, she tore off my clothes and lowered herself onto her knees. And that’s when I found myself blown by the Jarl of Solitude. She was a little unsure to start with. She was good, very good, but she was obviously worried about her technique and skill. I eventually got down on my knees and caressed her cheek. “Eli, you’re willing to do it for me. That’s enough to get me very excited, trust me.”

“I want to make you cum with my mouth, Ragnar,” she said, again looking a little shy at saying something so erotic.

“Trust me, it’s going to happen, Eli.”

Whatever she lacked in skill, she made up with in enthusiasm, that’s what mattered. She wanted to do it. She was happy to do it. I warned her when I was close. She didn’t want to swallow it, not that first time. And it was something I never expected. The surprise? She wanted it on her face. So she got what she wanted a couple of minutes later, and the giggles she made after I’d left a few thick white -ropes had me chuckling as well.

After we cleaned her up, any clothing remaining was discarded and we tumbled into bed again, making love the rest of the night. It wasn’t always as gentle and tender as the previous night. Well, Elisif made her feelings clear when she grabbed the back of my head, kissed me hard, then practically growled, “I want the Dragonborn to fuck me.” I must have looked at her wide-eyed, as she blushed a little bit, before adding, “I loved last night, Ragnar. But I really want it hard and fast. Know what I mean?”

I leaned down and gently kissed her. “Oh, I know exactly what you mean.” I moved my arms so I was holding her legs back and wide, completely leaving her exposed. The smile on her face suggested it was exactly what she wanted. Running her hands up my arms, she eventually just left them on my shoulders as I shuffled slightly. “Ready?”

“Make me cum harder than ever, Ragnar.”

“I’ll do my best.”

By the time I was done doing my best, we were both sweaty, deep breathing messes. I hadn’t hurt her though I was fairly sure she’d be feeling a little tender the next morning. She’d learned that she could cum on her back, at least. I’d cum more than once but managed to stay hard and just keep on fucking her. But we agreed that we simply had to stop as we were exhausted.

Pulling out and lying back, we started to chuckle as she turned onto her side, throwing an arm over my chest. “By Talos, I haven’t been fucked like that in far too long…”

“By Talos?” I asked, giving her a glance.

“I’m a Nord, Ragnar. In private, I’ll say what I want.” She kissed my cheek. “I needed that, Ragnar. Thank you.”

“No need to thank me. I’m here willingly and I definitely enjoyed fucking the Jarl of Solitude.”

I felt her breath in my ear. “I want to ride you on the throne,” she whispered.

“Now?”

“Part of me wants to say yes… But there are guards. I’ll ask the throne room to be empty tomorrow night when we return from dinner with the Emperor.”

“I had no idea you were so naughty, Eli.”

“I can be, but obviously there are expectations in regards to my behaviour. I’ve learned that to my cost since being thrust into the role. All I want is a modicum of happiness. I don’t think that’s too much to ask.”

I paused, trying to find the right words. “Eli, I’m not sure… My life how it is… It could end up being just too complicated. You’ll receive too many questions and they’ll try and tear my life apart. Are you sure you want to pursue this?”

“At the moment, I can only say hand on heart, one hundred percent yes. I haven’t connected with anyone like this since Torygg, Ragnar. And I didn’t sleep with him anywhere near as quickly.”

“There’s no shame in wanting to enjoy sex with someone quickly, Eli. I know within a few minutes whether I’m interested in a woman that way or not. If I am, and it happens quickly, and better yet it’s good, then I can feel content in my decision. Sex is something to be enjoyed.”

She snuggled into my side. “Good. That’s sorted then. We’ll base it on sex to start with and go from there. Maybe I’ll just keep you locked in a room all day then drag you to my bed at night.”

“You know, I don’t half mind that idea.”

She yawned, both of us turning so she was spooned against me. “Well, I’d better not dream about it, otherwise I’ll wake up during the night and require your attention again, Ragnar,” she said sleepily.

“I’m sure I’ll rise to the occasion, my Jarl.”

That made her laugh before we both eventually drifted off.

The next morning was all about preparations for the dinner that evening. Elisif and I would not be the only guests. Each Jarl that still owed allegiance to the Empire had been invited, while various dignitaries from each Hold was also invited. General Tullius would also be in attendance, and he was an early visitor to the palace, realising within a couple of minutes that he hadn’t exactly forgotten that I’d tried to kill the Emperor a couple of years back. Was it a couple of years now? Otherwise, the only request he made was to wear something befitting my position as the Dragonborn. I didn’t know exactly what he meant, so I figured he just meant clean clothing appropriate for meeting the Emperor himself.

Elisif eventually took time out during the afternoon, summoning a seamstress and fixing up the clothing I’d bought to make me slightly more… regal, I guess the word would be.  But she was pleased with the result, at least, then when it was time, I was escorted into her bedroom where I watched her get dressed. The underwear she put on suggested she had ideas for after dinner that night.

History was repeating itself when I departed that evening with Elisif, a guard to either side as we made our way from the Blue Palace to Castle Dour. All the guests were waiting in the small courtyard, the same place where guests had gathered for the wedding of Vittoria Vici. To be honest, it was all just a little too weird. Sure, what I’d done happened a number of years ago, but I still had a bad feeling this was all a trap. I knew Elisif had been there that day and she would know what I’d done.

She must have recognised my discomfort. Though we’d arrived together, no-one would have had a clue what we’d been doing the past couple of nights. She leaned in close to me. “All is forgiven, Dragonborn,” she whispered, “Trust me on this.”

“I do. It’s just… awkward. I know what I did, Eli. So do a lot of people.” I met her eyes. “So do you. I don’t really understand. I should be in chains in a dungeon.”

“You’ve proven since Helgen how good a man you are. Your work to stop the dragons. Your work with the Companions. Your work at the College. Your work with the Dawnguard.”

“You’re rather well-informed, Eli…”

“As I said, I have taken an interest in who you are. We all have a past, skeletons we would prefer to remain hidden.”

“You see; this is why I sometimes think I don’t deserve any of you. All of my crimes are public. I’ve done some horrible things in my life, Eli.”

“And you’ve returned to save the world more than once, Ragnar.” She grabbed my hand, giving it a squeeze. “Trust me on this,” she insisted, “You are not the only one with a past. And you’ve done more than enough to pay back any crimes you may have committed.”

I didn’t exactly calm down but I appreciated her words, against proving her good heart. She didn’t let go of my hand either, instead shuffling so she stood even closer to me. I had a feeling she didn’t really care about gossip so I thought I’d make her smile. “You are beautiful this evening,” I whispered, leaning down close to her ear.

“You’re just saying that because you know what’s underneath,” she whispered back, “I take it you approve?”

“I aim to see you wearing just that later this evening.”

A steward appeared through the doorway nearby, announcing that the Emperor would soon be making his appearance. The guests all formed into a line, buttoning up coats and jacked, smoothing down shirts and dresses, before he appeared through the double doors. I was next to Elisif about halfway down the line, Tullius moving down the line first. When he arrived at my position, he met my eye and shook my hand. “Dragonborn,” he stated.

“General,” I replied.

“Nice of you to come. The Emperor is looking forward to a conversation.”

“I’m sure he is.”

“We found the Brotherhood Headquarters. Only three were there. We arrested two of them and took the child in. We’re… not exactly sure what to do with her.”

“I have a suggestion we can discuss later.”

“Very well. Enjoy dinner tonight.”

The Emperor then appeared in front of me. He remained silent for a few seconds before offering his hand, which I accepted immediately. “Good of you to join us tonight, Dragonborn.”

“My pleasure, Your Majesty.”

“I understand you have been quite busy of late. Dragons. Vampires. College business. Quite a change compared to your… previous employment.”

“Being on the verge of losing your head leads to a readjustment in priorities and how one views life.”

“I would like to hear some stories of your adventures, at least in regards to your recent past, Dragonborn.”

“I’d be delighted, Your Majesty.”

He shared some polite words with Elisif before disappearing down the line, and once everyone had been introduced and shared words with everyone, we were invited to join him in the main dining hall. It wasn’t any real surprise I was seated close to the Emperor, Tullius diagonally opposite to me at the Emperor’s elbow, while Elisif was placed opposite Tullius but next to me.

Dinner was exquisite, as one would expect. I noticed he didn’t order his favourite dish as prepared by the Gourmet, considering he was now dead. I’m sure the Emperor was still pissed at me about that, but the food served was delicious nonetheless. We enjoyed around five courses in total, and plenty of good wine and ale to wash it all down. Everyone made small talk, receiving one or two questions from other guests, particularly once they learned I was the Dragonborn.

Once we reached dessert, that’s when the Emperor started to ask me a few questions, primarily in regards to my actions against Alduin and the dragons that had caused havoc. He was impressed to hear about my trip to Sovngarde and the final battle against Alduin. He, like many others, expressed a little jealousy at the fact I’d managed to fly on the back of a dragon, Skyrim and even most of Tamriel spreading out below me.

Dessert complete, I was asked if I would join him in the adjoining room alone for a drink. That surprised me, sharing a glance with Tullius, who returned a single nod. I glanced at Elisif, who simply grabbed my hand and gave it a squeeze, before I stood and followed the Emperor into a small room, a couple of windows open to provide air, a couple of chairs and a fireplace. Taking a seat, he poured me a glass of brandy, doing the same for himself, as we settled back.

“Sure this has you thinking, Dragonborn. Suffice to say, when I learned who the Dragonborn was, like Tullius said, I did wonder if it wasn’t some joke of the Divines. But he’s told me of all your good deeds. I understand the vampire problem has been solved?”

“Yes, sire. Those allies to Lord Harkon are now dead. There are perhaps a few small pockets round but I’m sure those remaining with the Dawnguard can handle them.”

“And you are now Harbinger of the Companions?”

“I am, sire, though it’s only a title. Others carry out the day to day functions of the organisation.”

“And your work at the College?”

“Well, I think I saved the world again, but I turned down the offer of being made Arch-Mage. I know and can use magic but there are better mages who can do that job.”

He took a sip of his drink. “And now it seems Lady Elisif is interested in you. Very interested.”

“Ah…”

“Of course, only the General and I, plus Rikke, know who you actually are.”

“I told Eli the truth.”

“Eli?” He grinned. “Well, I guess the interest is reciprocated.”

“It is, sire, but… It’s not that easy. And she is concerned about approval, obviously. She knows her position depends on outside factors beyond her control.”

He sipped at his drink again. “But you like her?”

“I don’t want to go into our personal lives just yet, sire.”

“Understandable, but given her position… I’m sure you know this would cause rumour and innuendo. What helps you is that most would not be aware of your previous life. If I may ask, you’re a Nord but were you born here?”

“No, sire. I lived in Cyrodiil for the first nineteen, twenty years of my life. I’m an orphan, born in the Imperial City. I came to Skyrim due to… personal reasons.” I met his eyes and figured I might as well just tell him. “I was chased out of Cyrodiil by a few jealous husbands. I didn’t know they were married!”

That made him laugh, at least. “What were you doing in Cyrodiil?”

“I was a thief as a kid. Living on the streets, I did what I needed to survive. But after a job went bad, I joined the Fighter’s Guild. I was with them until I left. After arriving here, I did… various things, some of which you know about. Once I survived Helgen, I realised I’d been given a second chance so I wasn’t going to waste it. I’m a Nord and ideals such as honour do mean something. And like most Nords, I wish to see Sovngarde when I die.”

“What are your intentions now?” I paused on that question, sipping my own drink. “The reason I ask, Dragonborn…”

“My name is Ragnar, sire.”

He nodded. “The reason I ask, Ragnar, is that Skyrim is still split by civil war. The cease fire you managed to have signed is barely holding. As Emperor, I cannot allow one of our provinces to remain beset by internal strife. The Empire has other matters to deal with.”

“I’m not sure what I can do, sire.”

“Would you be willing to involve yourself?”

I sipped my drink again, and he poured some more into both our glasses. “To be honest, I’m not sure, sire. I’ve been fighting nearly my entire life now. After defeating Lord Harkon and his vampires, I’ll admit to looking forward to some peace and quiet.”

“No-one can force you into the fight, Ragnar. You’ve done more than enough to help the people of Skyrim. I won’t lie and admit I’m not the only one who would appreciate your assistance in the matter.” He sipped his drink, no doubt contemplating his thoughts. “There is also the matter of Elisif. A young, inexperienced and rather naïve woman in charge of the most important city of Skyrim. I understand the Jarl’s of Skyrim have their own ways of electing a High King. Tradition would suggest Elisif would be elected in a moot as High Queen, but the civil war means a moot cannot be called.” He paused again then met my eyes. “What about you?”

“What about me?”

“You are a hero to the people of Skyrim. I don’t think even Jarl Ulfric could argue with you becoming the new High King of Skyrim.”

I couldn’t help chuckle. “I couldn’t possibly… Not with my past. And what about Elisif?”

“She will do what she is told by her superiors. Of course, if you wish her to remain in her position, you could always marry her.”

I almost spat my drink out. “You’re kidding, sire?”

“I’m merely thinking aloud, Ragnar. And I know the civil war isn’t just about Elisif. I’m more than aware of all the problems that have caused the rise of the Stormcloaks. It’s… politics. It’s ugly, brutal business most of the time. But at the moment, we must refrain from provoking the Thalmor. We are simply not strong enough. But if Skyrim leaves the Empire, we are all weaker in the face of Thalmor aggression. That is why I wonder if you could be the symbol that would bring the Stormcloaks to the peace table.”

“You’ve given this some thought, sire.”

“Actually, it was General Tullius who mentioned it. I’m sure you might find that surprising, but he’s an astute man and sees the tactical advantage of using your reputation and personal standing to perhaps solve yet another crisis that besets this land.” He sighed. “Don’t make a decision now. That’s certainly not what any of us are expecting. But I thought I should tell you what we are thinking. We don’t expect anything of the Dragonborn now. We understand he would like to live a life of peace having dealt with all the challenges he’d faced up to now. But I believe you could prove to a popular choice as ruler of Solitude and High King of Skyrim.”

“If I may be so bold, what about the Thalmor, sire?”

“I’m not the only one who wants a reckoning, Ragnar. But I must be smart. And I will be honest. The Empire has never been as weak as it has. High Rock, Skyrim and Cyrodiil. That is all that remains. Hammerfell… I’m not sure they had more now. The likes of Morrowind and Black Marsh are possible allies, but to be honest, I find it unlikely. They have their own problems. And the Dominion are powerful. Does anyone really want another war like the last one?”

“The crown must weigh heavy, sire.”

“Just like your soul within and the blood within your veins, Dragonborn. It is our destiny.”

Thankfully, the conversation moved on, the Emperor just asking for one or two stories of my adventures. He learned that, even when saving the world more than once, a lot of the stories did not have a particularly happy ending, so I chose to tell a detailed story of my trip to Skuldafn, Sovngarde and my agreement with the remaining dragons. He did show concern if they would attack again, but I assured him we had a live and let live agreement. As long as we left them in peace, they would leave us in peace.

We must have conversed for a couple of hours before we departed, only Elisif and a couple of other guests remaining. The Emperor spent a few minutes chatting with her before he bade us goodnight, Elisif and I returning to the Blue Palace. We enjoyed a nightcap by the fire before heading to the bedroom, where she undid her dress rather quickly to reveal the underwear she seemed to have put on especially for that evening. Dark blue bar. Dark blue panties. Dark blue stockings.

She then took enjoyment in undressing myself, and when she noticed how hard I already was, she couldn’t help giggle when gently grasping my cock. “Do I excite you, Ragnar?” she breathed before giving me a soft kiss.

“Like you wouldn’t believe.”

I kept on her underwear as I laid her down on the bed, only moving the cloth covering her pussy as I wasted no time eating her out, no surprise she was already excited as much as I was. Once I made her cum, we made love, Elisif removing her bra specifically so I could show attention to her breasts. She rode me hard and fast through more than one orgasm before I finally came, relaxing back onto the bed as she rested on my chest, running my fingers up and down her spine.

“How long can you stay?” she asked softly.

“I can stay a few more days, Eli. I miss my girls but I’m loving your company at the moment.”

After a quick clean up, and returning to bed completely naked, she snuggled into my body as I hugged her tightly to me. “I want to ask what you discussed with the Emperor but… I think I know…”

“I didn’t agree to anything, Eli. Trust me on that.”

“I do.” She sighed. “I love what I do, Ragnar. I don’t take advantage of my position, or I don’t think I do. I know it’s a great responsibility that I’ve been left with. I’m doing the best I can.”

I gave her a gentle squeeze. “Eli, I know you are,” I whispered into her ear, “I think you’re wonderful.”

She remained silent before I heard a sniffle. “No wonder they all love you in return,” she whispered.

I turned her over so she could look into my eyes, giving her a soft kiss, running a hand up and down her back again. “I love them just as much in return, Eli. And I find myself really liking you as well. But… It’s easier with them. They’re not a Jarl. And they are happy with their lives. Can you…”

“Yes,” she stated adamantly.

“Are you sure? I only ask this question once. If it gets too difficult, I always suggest ending it to prevent heartbreak or jealousy.”

“You’ve made it work with them. We can make it work too, Ragnar. I’m just not sure how.”

“Then we’ll figure it out. I’ll send a letter by courier tomorrow, let my girls know I’ll stay here a little longer. If the Jarl of Solitude wishes for me to share her bed for a while, I find myself unable to say no.”

That made her smile before she shuffled forward, cuddling against me. She was asleep rather quickly. I lay there wide awake a little longer, wondering if I wasn’t going to be making my life a hell of a lot more complicated.

Chapter 56: And Then There Were Six

I was sat on the throne of Solitude. No, I hadn’t agreed to become the ruler or anything. It was late at night, or maybe early morning, the throne room deserted. I was buck arse naked. The Jarl of Solitude, Elisif the Fair, was naked too and my cock was currently inside her, while she was making adorable little noises, her fingers digging into my shoulders as she rode me hard and fast. “Ragnar,” she cried quietly.

“Close?”

“I feel like I’m going to pass out it’s so good.”

“Cum for me, Eli. Then I’m going to carry you back to your bed and fuck you senseless.”

“Promises, promises.” Then she kissed me hard, riding me even faster, breaking the kiss as she rested her forehead against mine, eyes gazing into mine. “How is it this good?” she whispered.

I ran my hands down her back and gently grabbed her arse. “Helps the woman I’m with is drop dead gorgeous.”

That earned me another hot kiss. “So close…”

“Ride your way through it. Then the bedroom.”

 

“I can’t wait…”

She rode me for another five minutes before she did finally orgasm. Soon as it passed, I picked her up, feeling her legs wrap around me, carrying her back to her quarters and the bedroom, gently placing her down on the bed… where the Jarl of Solitude was then properly fucked by the Last Dragonborn. Legs back and spread wide, she simply urged me, loving my cock inside her, though she also wanted me to cum as well. I tried to last as long as possible, but having her ride me in the throne room had been ever so exciting, and fucking her like that was just icing on a delicious cake.

I’m sure they heard my groan around the palace when I did finally cum, her arms and legs immediately wrapping around me as I left myself buried inside her, my head resting next to hers as I felt her soft lips on my cheek. “Ragnar…”

“Yeah…”

“You’re not going soon, are you?” I lifted my head and met her eyes. “You’ve been here two weeks now. And… I want to be selfish for once in my life. I don’t want you to go.”

I caressed her cheek and gave her a soft kiss. “Eli, if I could take you with me, I would…”

“And, honestly, part of me would like to go with you. But we know that isn’t possible.”

“You accept my life?”

“If it means being with you, yes, I do.”

“Then… Why don’t I bring them here with me?”

I was going to pull out but she reached down and grabbed my butt, keeping me in place. “Not yet. I love your cock inside me, Ragnar. Now… Hmmm… Well, I would like to meet these girls of yours, see who has caught your heart so completely. So invite them here for now and we can figure it out. They can’t stay here but there is spare housing in the city. Would they put up with living separately for the time being?”

“If it’s only a temporary solution. But we all would prefer to live together… obviously…” I paused before asking, “Are you sure, Eli? It’s not conventional at all.”

“I know, but I really like you, Ragnar, and as I said, I want to be selfish. I want to keep you here and I want to be with you.”

“Sounds serious then.” She looked away for a moment before I used a finger to move her chin so she looked back at me. “How serious?”

“I want you to stay, Ragnar. With me. I’ve had you here for two weeks and, with each passing day, I find myself…” She definitely blushed and trailed off…

I leaned down to her ear. “Oh, I’m falling for you too, Eli,” I whispered.

“Is it too fast?” she wondered quietly.

“The heart knows what it wants.” I paused. “Okay, instead of sending a letter, I’ll ride to the College and let them know. It will be up to them if they want to come with me or not. Considering I’ve been gone for two weeks now, I’m sure they have already made assumptions about why I’ve remained here.”

I felt her squeeze my cock and smirk. “Well, it helps your cock is inside me every night, Ragnar.”

“As I said that first night we were intimate, your pussy is on fire, Eli. I love eating you out for so long my jaw aches.”

She grabbed the back of my head and kissed me hard. “Your cock is still hard,” she breathed, “And I need you to fuck me again.”

We slept well an hour later as we were both utterly exhausted by then.

She watched me pack my things the next morning after we shared breakfast. She wasn’t exactly upset but I knew she was going to miss me the couple of days I was gone. She walked with me to the doors of the palace itself, and she had no hesitation hugging and kissing me before the doors were opened for me. “I’ll see you soon, Eli.”

“I look forward to your return. And, I’ll admit, I’m also looking forward to meeting your other girls.”

“I’m sure they’ll be intrigued by meeting you too.”

I left later than I’d left the College, so it actually took more than a day on my return journey, diverting to Windhelm as the weather had closed in and it was impossible to see in the darkness. So I only made it back to the College by lunchtime the next day. Mirabelle was already outside waiting for me to dismount, giving me a long hug and a kiss as the others gathered around, sharing the same gesture with all of them, before I was led inside, immediately taking a seat at the table as the four sat around the table.

“You obviously have news, Ragnar. So spill,” Aela said, “You would have only been gone this long if you met someone.”

“Jarl Elisif. She… wants me to return. And she would like all of you to come with me.”

“Permanently?” Mirabelle wondered.

“I don’t know yet. All I know is that I really like her, and she’s already said she’s willing to give this a go. I don’t just mean me and her, and I mean she’s willing to accept all of you. But being who she is, it’s awkward. In fact, it’s complicated as hell.”

Mirabelle grabbed my hand, giving it a squeeze. “You really like her, don’t you?”

I sighed. “I can’t help it,” I muttered, “I was delighted with you four. Honestly, I didn’t go looking…”

“But you fell for her?” Mirabella asked. I met her eyes and there was nothing but understanding. And still love for me. I was a damned fool. I should have just chosen her and been done with it. But I’m a bastard. Always been a bastard, one way or another.

“I think I love her, Belle. As much as the four of you.” I paused before adding, “And there’s more. I met the Emperor. They have ideas and plans. They’ve made an offer.” I took a deep breath. “I have a feeling they want me to take some sort of position, maybe even High King in the end. Considering who I am, they seem to believe that would gain the support of all sides.”

That made the four of them share glances. “You don’t sound so sure, Ragnar?” Lydia finally asked.

“Do I really want to be a ruler? High King? I’m a thief and assassin…”

Mirabelle squeezed my hand. “Ragnar!” she almost shouted, “You are so much more than that. Everything you’ve done since Helgen…” I met her eyes and almost felt my heart drop as she wiped her cheeks. “You are the man the four of us love. You have done more for Skyrim than anyone in centuries. Anything you may have done before Helgen no longer matters due to all the deeds you’ve done every day since then. But most importantly, you are a man of honour, a good man, a just man, and I think you would be the man Skyrim needs to get them through whatever faces it next.”

I leaned over and gave her a kiss, no surprise the other three stood up and crowded around, hugging both of us. “So I guess that means you’re coming with me?”

“Try and stop us!” Serana whispered.

“When do we leave?” Lydia asked.

I looked around the table at each of them. “That simple?”

“We’ve been waiting to leave, Ragnar. I wouldn’t have guessed we’d be going to Solitude, but if you’re being called to greater things, then I’m certainly not just going to stay here,” Aela said.

“Suffice to say, the four of us will be going with you, Ragnar,” Mirabelle added, “I’ve already given it some thought. If I leave, there will need to be a new Arch-Mage, but needing to select one everyone will accept has proven difficult. Tolfdir has been here the longest but he doesn’t want it. So I had the choice of three Master Wizards – Drevis Neloren, Faralda or Tolfdir. As the latter doesn’t want it, I had two to choose from. In the end, I chose Faralda. She’s confident enough to take on the position plus gets along with most of the staff and students.”

“And you’re position?” I wondered.

“I will remain as an advisor to whoever is the Arch-Mage. But we’ve spoken about a family, Ragnar, and I wasn’t going to remain in the position when with child and after the birth. I don’t plan on just having one with you.”

“I think that’s the same for all four of us, Ragnar,” Aela added, “I want a daughter and son. Lydia wants babies. Serana wants to be a mother too. But Elisif is willing to accept this arrangement?”

“She’s willing to try.”

“What about Valerica?”

“She will remain here,” Serana replied, “She’s already shown off her magical prowess more than once. There’s a good chance she’ll end up teaching the students some of her gifts.”

“Oh… And you don’t mind?”

“Visiting her here is far easier than the Soul Cairn, Ragnar. And she can visit us just as easily.”

Mirabelle looked at the others. “Okay, girls, I think we should start packing. We’ll probably need a carriage to take our stuff. Can we leave the day after tomorrow, Ragnar?”

“Whenever is best for all of you. I don’t exactly have a lot of stuff to take myself.”

I was surprised when, that night, I enjoyed a threesome with Aela and Lydia. I thought Mirabelle would have been all over me, but she escorted me to the room Aela now called her own, opening the door to see Aela and Lydia already enjoyed each other on the bed. Mirabelle simply told me to have fun and I would spend our final night at the College with her.

Aela, Lydia and I enjoyed a fun night. They definitely enjoyed eating each other out. I was blown by both of them. I came nowhere except inside them whenever we fucked. And Lydia, of course, also wanted a little anal. However, it wasn’t the also brutal fucking we once did. Yes, I slid it inside her arse, but it was rather tender and loving. Aela watched and couldn’t help but want the same thing, so we ended the night with my cock buried in one arse, then the other.

What surprised me during the final night was that I was with Mirabelle and Serana. The former admitted, looking rather embarrassed, that Serana had admitted to wanting to experiment, and Mirabelle was certainly keen to be the one to be experimented with. So much like the night before, I watched Mirabelle and Serana… make love. That’s the only way to describe it. I think it was one of the most beautiful things I’d ever witnessed. When they both came for around the third time each, they looked at me and simply smiled. “We really like each other, Ragnar, but we love you the most,” Mirabelle stated.

I made love with Mirabelle first, and she whispered she wanted nothing more than to be with child as soon as possible. I wasn’t surprised she wanted one already, but we knew it would happen eventually. Serana loved nothing more than riding me through a couple more orgasms, hearing her whisper the same thing as Mirabelle when she was on her back later, her legs wrapped around me, begging me to cum inside her. I love it when any of my girls tell me to do that.

Leaving early the next morning, we used two of our horses to pull the carriage, the other three being ridden by Aela, Lydia and Serana, Mirabelle sitting next to me as I drove the carriage. Aware it was going to take longer than usual as a carriage was nowhere near as fast as horseback, we diverted further south than normal so we could camp without snow laying on the ground.

I hadn’t camped under the stars in quite a long time. We camped by a pool of water, and we had a large tent that we could all share. By the campfire, we ate dinner and opened a couple of bottles of wine. And let’s just things got frisky and, I think for the first time, it was basically group sex, all five of us enjoying each other, either everyone together, or there’d be a pair and a threesome. Watching Mirabelle lie back with Serana eating her out, and Aela sat on Mirabelle’s face… I watched as I was fucking Lydia, and she joked I’d never felt larger inside her. To be honest, although I participated, I enjoyed watching the four of them please each other either together or in pairs, though whenever I sat back for too long, I’d eventually find lips wrapped around my cock or it buried in someone’s pussy. No anal that night, which I wasn’t looking for. If anyone had passed by, they would have thought I was the luckiest man in Skyrim.

I already knew I was.

We arrived in Solitude by the afternoon of the next day. Walking up to the palace, we walked in together, Firebeard noticing my arrival and asking me to wait, my girls lining up behind me as Elisif appeared from her quarters. She smiled immediately upon seeing me, giving me a hug, before I wasted no time introducing her to my girls.

My girls were wonderful, immediately friendly and asking plenty of questions. Elisif was obviously a little more reserved but any hesitation I could see disappeared quickly. The five of them were soon chatting away and I couldn’t help smile as I knew, then and there, I now have five girls. We might not all live together, not yet, but who knows what the future would bring?

Eventually they all turned to look at me. “Have you explained the situation?” Elisif asked.

“I said things will be a little strange to start off with. Staying here permanently isn’t something I can do, and inviting these four will cause no end of rumours and gossip, which we simply don’t want.”

Elisif turned to them. “I’ve made sure you have one of the best manor’s in Solitude. Each of you will have your own room, and it’s not far from the Blue Palace. And I want you to know that you are not to be strangers here. And I will certainly visit you as I believe we should get to know each other. I don’t know what the future is going to bring for any of us, but I know you all love Ragnar, that is why I want to try and accept this, make it work.”

“Do you love him?” Mirabelle asked.

Elisif looked at me for a moment before returning her eyes to Mirabelle. “I’ve fallen for him big time, Mirabelle. That much I know. It’s why I’ve asked him to return here with you. It’s not just for personal reasons. There is politics as well. That, of course, is up to Ragnar, what he chooses to do.”

Elisif escorted us personally to what was basically our new home for the five of us, though I had a feeling I’d be splitting my time between the palace and the manor. Or that’s what I thought until I walked inside to find six bedrooms. One for Aela, Lydia, Serana, Mirabelle, myself and… “Who is the sixth for?” I wondered.

“Me,” Elisif replied, “I’m figuring people sleep together, and that you often don’t go to sleep alone, Ragnar. I didn’t want to keep you away from your girls, so I figured the easiest thing to do would be to live in this house with you and the girls.”

“You’re serious?”

“I am.”

Elisif found herself in an all-woman group hug. Yep, she was part of the group already. Then Lydia asked, “You know, Ragnar, there is one person you haven’t thought about, and to be honest, you probably don’t need a room. Life is fairly settled for you, but there’s one woman I know you loved who really should be here with us and who should take the last room?” I scratched my head, wondering who she could have met. “Haelga.”

“What?”

Mirabelle chuckled. “By Ysmir, I’m not sure I could handle her after everything I’ve heard about their relationship.”

“She didn’t want to leave Riften,” I explained, “I haven’t seen her in so long. She’s probably moved on with her life.”

“Maybe she’d be ready to move on with her life if you returned and asked her to join you here with us?”

I looked around at all five of them. “You’re dead serious here?”

“The four of us talked while you were away, Ragnar. We had a feeling something would happen with Elisif. From what you said, she was nursing a little crush…”

“Oh, it was more than a little crush,” Elisif whispered.

“Anyway, we thought there would eventually be five of us, and the four agreed we would accept two more. So Elisif and we thought you really should ask Haelga to join your little group of girls.”

“I really don’t know. I’m not sure how she’d react.”

“All you can do is ask,” Aela said, “Ask her to come here and meet with us, see what life is like here. If she likes it, she can stay.”

“I’ve told you what we got up to, remember?”

“We remember and none of us are that bothered.”

“Oh, what did you get up to?” Elisif wondered.

“I’ll tell you later,” Lydia replied for me, “I’ll tell you what he used to do to me as well.”

Elisif looked at me and blushed. She knew I had girls but I hadn’t gone into explicit detail about everything as she simply didn’t need to know. “Okay, I’ll think about it, but I’ve just got here and don’t want to leave again quickly.”

“Or you can leave tomorrow and, once you return with her, have no real reason to leave again anytime soon,” Mirabelle retorted.

I looked around at all of them. Even Elisif seemed to approve. “Sixth and final? Honestly, I could have chosen…”

Mirabelle stepped forward again, giving me one hell of a kiss, as the others, even Elisif, moved in for a group hug. “Ragnar, stop the self-doubt. I’ve never even heard you express it before.”

“Because things are getting serious. I mean, the Jarl of Solitude is now…”

“I’m here because I want to be, Ragnar. I knew within five minutes that I would just grow to adore your girls. Trust me, I know why they all love you.”

“Go get Haelga, Ragnar,” Aela practically insisted, “We’ll organise our home here and, once you’re back, we’ll have to figure out the future together.”

I left on horseback the next morning, figuring I would stop at Whiterun for the night before completing the journey the next day. I hadn’t spent all that much time in Whiterun in months, if not longer by now, so it was nice to catch up with some friends at the Bannered Mare. Jenassa was in there instead of the Drunken Huntsman, and as soon as Ysolda saw me, she had me up dancing with her, hands feeling up my arms and down my back. Even after all this time, there was a lot of teasing between us. I didn’t ask if she was with anyone. We’d always been attracted but, for whatever reason, we’d never done anything. Carlotta was there as well, and she wanted a dance with me as well. Ysolda smouldered with jealousy as she watched.

I went home alone. I could have taken Ysolda. She was giving all the signals. But… I actually wanted a night to myself. And I would be seeing Haelga the next day and I had no idea how she was going to react to me arriving.

Riften hadn’t changed when I arrived late the next day, just enough sun remaining in the sky so I could see where I was going. Stabling my horse, I headed through the gates and took a look around. I recognised a few people and wondered what was going on beneath me in the Thieves Guild. I knew my appearance would have been clocked straight away, though I wasn’t there to see them, but I figured someone might eventually pop up and say hello.

I didn’t just go straight to the Bunkhouse. Instead, I headed to the Bee and Barb. Making sure I had the hood of my jacket up, I sat on the opposite side of the room to where I had once always sat, recognising a few faces. Talen-Jei approached and took my order as I sat and waited. I wanted to see Haelga first, see if she walked in with someone. If she did, I’d leave without a word. If she walked in alone, I’d just see what happened.

I waited around an hour, sipping at my tankard, nibbling at the plate of food, when Haelga walked in. She took a seat at her usual table, so that was obviously something that didn’t change. Talen-Jei took her order and I watched her from across the room. She was obviously alone but she looked… sad. Well, maybe not sad, but the woman I remembered vividly wasn’t sitting there. She drank her tankard, ate her plate of food, left coin on the table and simply walked out.

Talen-Jei approached again, wondering if I wanted another drink. “That woman who just left… her name is Haelga, right?”

“She is… what of it?” he asked, a little suspicious.

“What’s her story?”

“Why are you asking?”

“She just looked a little sad. Simply curious, that’s all.”

He met my eyes behind the hood, or he would have tried, but I had it set so he’d only see my bearded chin. “I don’t know the whole story but what I do know is that she’s lonely. She was in love with someone but… it never seemed to work out. She’s lived with a lot of regret, thinking she missed her opportunity to get out of here.”

“Who was she in love with?”

“The Dragonborn. They were together for a long time, well, on again, off again. We haven’t seen him in these parts for a long time now. And Haelga… she’s not been the same since the last time he was here. I think she’s still hoping he’ll come back.” I pulled the hood back immediately. Talen-Jei grinned. “Though it was you, Ragnar. Are you here for her?”

“I am. A lot has happened since I was last here.” I stood up and gave him more coin than the price. “I’ll go see her straight away.”

“I would wish you good luck, Ragnar, but I know you won’t need it.”

Walking out into the crisp air, the one thing missing was the smell. Glancing down into the water, it appeared the gates had finally been opened, the stagnant water released. That was something, at least. Approaching the Bunkhouse, I chose to just knock on the door and wait. It took around a minute for it to open, Haelga wearing a nightgown, holding a candle. When she saw my face, she nearly fainted.

I blew out the candle, took it from her and dropped it behind me, then I took her in my arms. The fact she was crying wasn’t a surprise. Neither of us said anything for a long time as I just held her, feeling her hands grip me as tightly as ever. When she lifted her face towards mine, I wiped her cheeks clear of tears. “Come with me.”

“Where?”

“Solitude. I have five girls, including the Jarl of Solitude.” Her jaw dropped at that revelation. “They told me to come get you.”

“Why?”

“Because I’ve told them all about you. They know, deep in my heart, I still love you. I still think about you. I was in the Bee and Barb earlier, Haelga. The woman I remember, with fire in her belly, she wasn’t there. I saw a ghost.” I grabbed both her hands. “Come with me this time, Haelga. I have a home that will be full of love and also a lot of fun for all of us.”

“Okay.”

“Just like that?”

“You still love me?” I nodded. “I’ve never stopped loving you, Ragnar. Not a single day goes by I haven’t regretted not going with you.”

“Then it’s time to stop living with regret, Haelga. We pack your things and we head north.”

“Six of us?”

“It’s not just the sex, Haelga. We enjoy each other’s company. We enjoy life together. And I know you’ll fit in. I think you’ll get on fabulously with Lydia.”

Haelga shut the door, took me by the hand, and led me upstairs. Her nightgown disappeared to reveal she was naked underneath. I was rock hard in an instant, and she liked the look in my eye as I gazed her up and down. “Still fit as fuck, Haelga,” I murmured.

She wasted no time helping me get naked as well. As soon as I was, she led me to her bed. That first kiss… It deepened immediately and the passion we’d shared had obviously never left. Then she had to stop, as she needed to cry again. “Gods, I’m going to be a mess when you make me cum, Ragnar,” she whispered through her chuckles.

She was right, of course. I’d always loved pleasing her with my mouth and, when I tasted her for the first time in a long time, even I released a moan which made her giggle rather loudly. I remembered her body very well, all the little tricks I could use to either bring her orgasm quicker and make it last longer. She was as verbal as I remembered, swearing like a soldier, and as demanding as she always had been. I enjoyed it thoroughly, and when I made her cum, she simply begged for more.

After her second one, she pleaded with me to just fuck her senseless. Nice to see that part of her hadn’t changed, and I groaned loudly when sliding my cock inside her. Then we just fucked. By Talos, it was like we’d never been apart. I should have known it wouldn’t have been a gentle, tender affair the first time. No, Haelga knew what she loved from me, and I’d always loved that part. I basically had her curled back, knees almost beside her head. The joy on her face was something to behold. She came hard from fondling her clit and it was little surprise I came incredibly hard not long later. Such a good one, I simply had to pull out and collapse next to her.

“Holy shit,” I muttered as I sucked in some air.

Wrapped an arm around her, she turned onto her side and cuddled into me. “Ten minutes, Ragnar, then I’m going to suck your cock until you give me a present.” I couldn’t help chuckle at her eager tone. “Ragnar… I haven’t been with anyone in a long time…”

“Why not?”

“Because they weren’t you. I tried a couple of men, but…” I met her eyes when she trailed off. “I felt like they were judging me for what I like. They made me feel cheap. One outright called me a whore.”

“Who are they?” I growled.

“No-one you’d know. They were not locals. Don’t worry yourself about it. I’ve been called worst things because of my Dibellan arts.”

“Lydia isn’t involved with Dibella, but she has proven to have a rather voracious sexual appetite with the right person. And she loves anal.”

That made Haelga laugh out loud. “By Ysmir, I haven’t had a good anal session, at least with a man, in too long. My toys are the only action I’ve had.” She gave me a squeeze. “You’ll have to introduce me to this Lydia. She sounds interesting.”

“One thing.” Something in my tone made her look up. “There will be children eventually.”

“Oh, that doesn’t bother me, Ragnar. I remember when Muiri was…” She trailed off and sighed. “I think you’ll make a great father, Ragnar.”

“Thanks.”

Her hand trailed down my body and she gently caressed my cock. Without a word, she kissed down my chest and wasted little time swallowing my length. Watching her head bob up and down, she was as talented as I remembered, but what I recognised straight away was that she was eager to make me cum. I simply sat up a bit and ran my fingers through her hair, earning a smile that shone in her eyes. And when I came in her mouth, she was delighted.

Seeing that I remained relatively hard, she climbed on, slid down my cock, leaned forward and gently started to ride herself. I lay back and just let her have fun. When I was completely hard against a few minutes later, she really let herself go, holding onto my hands for balance as she really bounced herself up and down. All I knew was that she was as beautiful as the last time we’d been intimate.

“I’ve missed you, Ragnar, but I’ve missed your cock as well. Fuck, it fills me something stupid.”

“You always had a tight, hot pussy, Haelga. I never know whether to eat it or fuck it.”

She met my eyes and chuckled. “What about my arse?”

“Oh, once we’re back in Solitude, I think we put on a show for my girls. Lydia will want to see if she can match what you can handle. I’ll put money on it.”

I’m not sure how long Haelga rode me for, but by the time she was satisfied, I was given enough time to cum again before she collapsed onto the bed next to me, mumbling she’d see me in the morning, and then promptly fell asleep. I couldn’t help chuckle as she was with it enough to mould herself back against me, giving her a soft kiss on the cheek, before I joined her in slumberland.

I was woken by someone poking me the next morning, opening an eye to see Haelga sitting up, again tears falling down her cheeks, gently poking my body and face. “I thought it was a dream,” she whispered, “Or a nightmare.”

I pulled her towards me, head resting on my chest as I stroked her back. “I’m here, Haelga. And you’re coming with me, just like I said.”

“Oh shit, I’ll have to tell Svana. She’s… not living here anymore. She still works for me, but she’s with a man now. She should be here soon.”

Haelga got up first as she immediately started to pack her things, stating she’d only bring her clothes, toys and various other little things that meant something to her. She would offer Svana the opportunity to stay in the Bunkhouse, otherwise the room would just remain empty. We heard the door open downstairs a little later, getting up myself and dressing, heading downstairs with Haelga. Svana screamed when she saw me before practically leaping on me, giving me a great bear hug. And she figured out what was going on within a few seconds.

“She’s going with you, isn’t she?”

“You can have this place is you want, Svana. No money necessary. If you want it, it’s yours.”

“You’re serious?”

“I’m not coming back. I should have left with Ragnar before. I’m not going to miss out on being with him again.”

“Okay. I’ll do it. It’ll be weird running the place though.”

“You’ll be just fine, Svana. And if you’re running things, you should get some help in. And you’re free to do with it what you want. I know you’ve had your own ideas in regards to what to do with this place. Once I’m gone, do as you wish.”

“When are you going?”

“Tomorrow morning,” I replied, “Give enough time for Haelga to pack, then it’s a two-day journey to Solitude. There’s a very long story I can tell you over dinner tonight. My treat for both of you at the inn.”

“What will you do now?” Haelga wondered.

“I’m going to go see some old friends.” Haelga knew who I meant but didn’t question. “I’ll be back after lunch.”

The last time I’d been below Riften had been when I’d been searching for Esbern, and even that felt like years ago now. I remembered the way to the cistern though, the door leading in unlocked. Approaching Dirge, I think he did a double take upon seeing me, as he was ready to step in my path until recognising me. Vekel behind the bar then noticed me. “Hey, Bryn, you got a visitor.”

Brynjolf had his back to me. Delvin saw me first and burst into laughter. “Well, I’ll be damned. The man lives after all.”

Brynjolf turned around, the grin immediate as he stood up and approached, offering his hand. “Ragnar Dragonborn, as I live and breathe.”

“Ah, heard about all that, have you?”

Before he could reply, Karliah appeared through the corridor nearby. Her face lit up upon seeing me and I just had to cuddle her too. “It’s been far too long,” she whispered.

“How are you, Karliah?”

“I’m well, Ragnar. I’m doing very well. What brings you back to Riften?”

“A long story. Keeping it very short, I’m now living in Solitude and I’m taking Haelga with me.”

“Still got a thing for her, lad?”

“Aye, Bryn. Not leaving without her this time.”

“Come take a seat, we should catch up.”

The ale was as bad as it ever was, but Brynjolf, Karliah, Delvin and Vex were captivated by the stories I had to share. Some they knew rather well. Others they had heard only rumour. The fact I’d helped the College did amuse them. Having an array of lovers didn’t surprise any of them. Karliah simply smiled as I glanced at her. “Fond memories, Ragnar, but I enjoy my life here. I won’t be joining you.”

“Wasn’t asking nor expecting. But I remember the fun we used to have.”

“So why are you in Solitude?” Brynjolf wondered.

“Honestly, it could end up being political. Being the Dragonborn could prove popular with the masses, and I think the Empire hope that, if I take a position of power, I could help bring peace to the land. No idea how it would all actually work but…” I trailed off with a shrug.

“So the former thief becomes what? High King?” Delvin wondered, before he chuckled, “I don’t think I’ve even read that in a book before.”

I looked around the table. “What we did when I was here, we were never without honour amongst thieves. I think we can all agree to that, right?” They all nodded. “But I’ve done other things that… stained, for want of a better word. After surviving Helgen, I knew I needed a fresh start, and I went about restoring a personal sense of honour. Being Dragonborn did present opportunities in regards to that, but I’ve also worked for the Companions and Dawnguard as well.”

“Kept yourself busy then, Ragnar?” Brynjolf asked with a smirk.

“Better than being bored. How are things here?”

“We continue to work by the ideals you set forth. Yes, we’re still thieves but I like to think we’re thieves with good hearts. And, to be honest, we spend more time searching for things such as treasures and artefacts rather than robbing people of the few septims they have. Most citizens barely scratch a living. Wouldn’t be living up to the ideals if we were robbing from the poor.”

“I’ve heard one thing, Ragnar,” Delvin stated, “The Dark Brotherhood… I’ve heard they are no more…”

“It went tits up, Delvin, that’s the easiest way to put it. Astrid died…” I sighed. It still hurt, even after all this time. “I was this close to killing the Emperor,” I added, making a gesture with my fingers, “But I’d fallen into their trap. Obviously, the hide out was ransacked by Imperial forces. Few survived, and the price of a clean slate was giving up the few that remained.”

Delvin met my eyes before he simply nodded. “Without Astrid, they would have been rudderless anyway. She was a good woman and a better leader. Was it worth the price, though?”

“If it hadn’t been for the Brotherhood, I would never have met her. But… It was because of the Brotherhood that she’s now dead. We had plans that, I guess, were never going to work out. Not with what we were doing. We were fooling ourselves thinking it would all lead to happiness.”

“What about us?” Brynjolf wondered, hearing the concern.

“You’re safe, trust me on that. There are rumours, that is it. I won’t confirm anything to anyone about what goes on down here. I still owe you loyalty after everything that happened.”

“No chance of you returning to become a thief?” Vex asked, hearing humour and a little sarcasm drip from her tone.

“No, Vex. Still disappointed we never hooked up though.”

Brynjolf and Delvin couldn’t help chuckle away. Vex just leaned forward, elbows on the table. “You couldn’t handle me anyway, Ragnar.”

“Well, I’ll just have to take your word for it.”

I spent a couple of hours there in the end, chatting about stories we’d shared, the trouble we’d got into, while I was told a little more about what they’d been up to. Apparently they’d been in contact with the Thieves Guild in Solitude, and were now expanding their reach. It seemed that while the Dark Brotherhood was now no more, the Thieves Guild were slowly expanding influence. I did wonder what their future held and I guess I did wish them luck in the end, though asked they try not to rob myself or my neighbours. Brynjolf chuckled, assuring me they rarely did jobs like that anymore. They had far grander plans for the organisation now.

Returning to the Bunkhouse, Haelga had already packed her things and was sitting with Svana, going through the books and giving some last minute instructions. That lasted until dusk, when Haelga joined me upstairs, wondering if I was hungry. Heading out early sounded like a good idea, so we headed out to the Bee and Barb. Talen-Jei wasn’t surprised to see me walk in with Haelga, taking a seat at our old table, Svana joining us a little later. We ate, drank and reminisced about times we’d shared long ago, and when it came to leaving, I was surprised at the affection between Haelga and Svana. I guess any ill-feeling had been left long in the past.

That night, all Haelga wanted was my company in bed. We undressed, of course, but all she wanted was a lot of cuddling, a little kissing, and that was it. She eventually moulded herself back into my body, holding her tight against me. “We’re really doing this?” she asked quietly.

“Tomorrow morning, we mount my horse and begin our journey north. Within a couple of days, you’ll be with my other girls in our new home.”

“How will that work?”

“We’ll figure it out.”

Leaving at dawn the next morning, I placed her two bags on the flanks of my horse before helping her up, mounting the saddle behind her. There were no last lingering looks around the Bunkhouse or around Riften. Haelga was ready to leave it all behind, and she’d already admitted that she wasn’t going to miss it. There had been an invite for Svana to head north to visit, but she would likely be too busy running the Bunkhouse to leave all that often.

It was dark by the time we made it to Whiterun. Haelga had never seen Breezehome before. Asking what I would do with it, I suggested I’d simply keep it as Whiterun was always a good place to stay if I found myself travelling Skyrim. I took her up to the Bannered Mare for dinner, and I received plenty of questions as to who she was from the regulars.

“Have you slept with her?” Haelga asked upon leaving.

“You’re going to need to narrow that down a little.”

“Ysolda. The chemistry you two obviously had.”

“We’ve come close more than once but we never made the jump into bed. I think a lot of it was the tease. She’s always been a good friend and a terrific flirt.”

Knowing we had an early start, we headed straight for bed, rising again at dawn to finish our journey north. Haelga had rarely travelled far from Riften. Watching her reactions to what we saw was rather amusing at times, whispering that she had no idea that it was all so beautiful. Otherwise, she would simply lean back against me, one of my hands holding the reins, the other wrapped around. “Thank you,” she whispered.

“For what?”

“Coming for me.”

I nuzzled into her neck. “My pleasure,” I whispered in return. She turned to kiss me and the look in her eyes suggested quite a few feelings, all of them I already knew. “Sure you can handle this?”

“I’m looking forward to whatever life brings me next, Ragnar.”

It was dark by the time we made it to Solitude, the ride taking longer due to two of us being on horseback, plus while I tried to get north as quickly as possible, I wanted Haelga to enjoy the countryside as much as possible. Walking hand in hand through the main gates, I led us straight to our new home. Walking in the door, I called out to the girls, hearing a call in return that they were in the living room. The five were already waiting for me when I walked in with Haelga.

“Haelga, these are my girls. From left to right, you have Mirabelle, once the Arch-Mage, College of Winterhold, Lydia, who is my Housecarl, Aela, a fellow Companion, Serana, who is one of my closest friends, and also Elisif, Jarl of Solitude. Girls, this is Haelga, once of Riften.”

There were hugs and kisses all round as Haelga was accepted into the group without hesitation, which pleased me no end. Mirabelle asked if we were hungry, and to be honest, we were both starving, so Haelga and I took a seat at the dining table, quickly joined by the others as we ate. Once she finished eating, Haelga was practically inundated with questions about who she was, what she’d done, why she’d come… and also why she hadn’t come before.

“Because I was a fool,” she admitted, “But the Nine gave me a second chance. I wasn’t going to let it slip by again.” She looked around the table. “So how is this going to work? That’s what I don’t know.”

“We’ve already talked about that,” Mirabelle stated, “And I’ll admit we don’t really know. We don’t want anything like ‘This night, he’s with you and tomorrow, he’s with her’. Just let nature takes its course. But it’s not just about the physical intimacy either. We simply like being with each other, all of us. I already consider these four women alongside me very good friends.”

Haelga looked at me then at the girls. “So… if you’re not with him…”

“Sometimes,” Lydia stated, “Would that interest you?”

“I hadn’t been with a man in quite some time before Ragnar turned up. With a woman? It’s been even longer.”

“Oh, I’m sure you’ll figure it out again rather quickly,” Lydia stated with a grin.

Haelga grinned herself. “Ragnar told me about you.”

“Just as much as he told me about you, Haelga. I think we share some common interests.”

The others just giggled as it didn’t take a detective to figure it out. “We’ll show you to your room, Haelga,” Aela added, “I’m sure you’re tired after the ride here.”

“My arse certainly is and it’s not from the usual pounding Ragnar gives it.”

More giggles as Lydia looked at me. “Sounds like a challenge in there somewhere, Ragnar.”

“Let’s just keep it sensible for now, Lydia.”

The others disappeared with Lydia, leaving me with Mirabelle. An obvious gesture as she took me by the hand, leading me over to one of the chairs by the fireplace, sitting me down before she sat on my lap, immediately kissing me. “Missed you,” she whispered, “How easy was it to get her to come?”

“I think she made up her mind as soon as she opened the door and saw me.”

“Good. First impressions, Ragnar? She’s beautiful and I think will fit in well. I saw a subtle sign of her personality.”

“I think you’ll all like her. The one thing she’ll never be is jealous. She’s… put up with a lot from me. But I think that proves how much she actually does love me.”

“Did you make love straight away?”

“Yeah. Soon as I saw her again… We just clicked. Always have, always will.”

“One thing you might notice. Elisif can’t live here all the time, not yet. She’s here tonight as we figured you’d be back this week sometime, but she has to maintain a presence at the palace. Her leaving for here all the time would simply create too much gossip.”

“I understand.”

“Have you given the future any thought, I mean about the political side?”

“Honestly, no. Not yet. That’s for later. Right now,” I slid my hands under her dress to her arse, earning a sweet smile, “I’m thinking I’ll spend the night with you. How does that sound?”

“Just me?” I nodded as she leaned down to kiss me. “And we’ll make love?”

“I have no plans tomorrow. You have no plans tomorrow. So I’m thinking we can do that all night.”

“Maybe tonight will be the night…”

“You don’t think you are yet?” She shook her head. “Then all we need do is keep trying.”

“What about Haelga?”

“She’s not sure. It’s up to her.”

Walking upstairs, Haelga and Lydia were already sitting back on her bed, chatting away, no doubt sharing stories that involved me. Aela, Serana and Elisif were in another bedroom, sitting at another table, sharing a bottle of wine, clearly getting along very well. They noticed Mirabelle and I look in, simply wishing us goodnight.

Closing the door behind me, Mirabelle turned to me and unhooked her dress, letting it pool at her ankles. Let’s just say I approved what I saw in front of me. “Gods, I love that look in your eye, Ragnar. That look that suggests you just want to… ravish me.”

“I practically want to do that all the time, Belle.”

That made her giggle. “You are very distracting sometimes, Ragnar. Though now that I won’t be busy, I certainly won’t mind.” She stepped towards me until she could rest her hands on my chest, looking up into my eyes. “Is that it?”

“Belle, if you ever wanted…”

She leaned up to kiss me. “None of that again, Ragnar. Though nothing would please me more than being your wife, I already know that, if you’re dragged into it, politically, it makes sense to marry Elisif. We’ve already discussed it.”

“You have?”

She nodded. “Lydia is your Housecarl. Marrying her would be… awkward. Aela loves you to death and wants children, but isn’t all that interested in marriage. Serana… Serana would love nothing more, but hates temples. From what you’ve told me, Haelga isn’t interested in marriage, or she wasn’t. So that leaves myself and Elisif.” She looked down, and I knew the idea was upsetting. I immediately wrapped my arms around her. “I’ve love nothing more than to be Mirabelle Dragonborn, Ragnar,” she whispered, “But you are who you are. The man who saved Skyrim countless times, it seems. And I think she may call on you to save her again. I don’t hate Elisif for it. She’s… adorable. She obviously cares about her people, and it helps she’s just a real sweetheart. It’s obvious she’s falling in love with you, and as I said, to marry her and perhaps become High King… It makes sense.” She sighed. “Part of me does wish it was me though.”

I lifted her head with a finger under her thumb before caressing her face, running my fingers through her hair, watching her eyes close, a smile form at my touch. “Belle…”

She shushed me. “Make love to me, Ragnar. That’s all I want right now. Anything else is for tomorrow and the future. What matters at this moment is that we’re in this room together, you’re rather overdressed, and I want you more than anything.”

I’m not sure how long we made love for. By the end, parts of my body that never usually ached certainly did, while I’m fairly sure Mirabelle simply passed out due to the sheer bliss of the occasion. Still, it was nice watching her sleep with a slight smile on her face. At moments like that, she still reminded me of Muiri. I couldn’t help it but there was similarities at times.

I lay awake a little longer, going over everything in my head. I adored all six women, that much was obvious. Could I ever choose one, though? I’m not sure I could do it as it would break five hearts. Having just returned with Haelga, I couldn’t put her through it again. I had too much fun with Lydia. Aela was just sex on legs. Serana was just… far too sweet to even contemplate. Elisif was nothing but adorable. And as for Mirabelle… I’d marry her in a heartbeat.

But I knew something like that might not be my choice in the end. If I found myself pulled into events outside my control, I knew life could get ever more complicated. For now, though, I was just going to enjoy myself.

A house of seven people. Me plus the six women I adored and loved. Couldn’t ask for much more.

Chapter 57: Solitude

Though I wouldn’t say a routine was established, everyone quickly found things to do to stop themselves getting bored. Elisif wasn’t a problem, of course. She had a city and region to govern. Mirabelle and Serana focused on magic and alchemy. Aela liked to head off and explore the countryside, taking her bow and arrow for a hunt every now and then. Lydia sometimes joined Aela, sometimes stayed in with Mirabelle and Serana. As for Haelga, I think she simply enjoyed relaxing for a while, admitting that she would get bored eventually and might just end up taking a job at an inn as a waitress or something. She was in no rush, though.

Wanting to keep my skills sharp, I spent time training with the city guards and the soldiers of the Empire, keeping fit while also practicing sword and shield work. There were some talented warriors amongst the rabble, while many were simply in awe of being allowed to spar with the Dragonborn. I think my reputation may have been exaggerated in some respects, though that wasn’t always necessarily a bad thing. I was certainly treated with respect by the common soldier and guard.

It was perhaps only a week after I’d returned with Haelga that I found myself summoned to the palace in an official capacity. I did wonder what for as I opened the door to be greeted by a pair of guards, asking me to accompany them to the palace. I’ll admit to curiosity as I followed them, but sighed with relief as I climbed the stairs to the throne room to be greeted only by Elisif, Firebeard, and a few other advisors. Elisif didn’t rise to greet me as she now usually would, so I knew this was official business.

“Thank you for coming so quickly, Dragonborn.”

Definitely official. She always called me Ragnar in private. “I’m assuming you need my help, milady. What do you need?”

“A few weeks ago, you stopped a ritual in Wolfskull Cave, where a group of mages were attempting to resurrect the ‘Wolf Queen’, Potema. We have learned that Potema did escape and that she now represents a clear and present danger to the people of Solitude, and also Skyrim in general.”

“I’ll handle this at once, milady, but if we’re dealing with such powerful magics, I will want to have some assistance in the matter.”

“You may solve this issue whichever way you deem necessary, Dragonborn. Our only advice is that you speak to our city’s priest of Arkay, Styrr. He will give you guidance on how best to solve this issue.”

“I’ll do that immediately and get this sorted as soon as possible.”

“Good luck, Dragonborn.”

First stop was back home, where I assembled myself in armour, grabbing my weapon and shield. Serana was downstairs with Mirabelle. Letting them know what was happening, I asked Serana if she was interested in helping. I didn’t ask Mirabelle as she had told me long ago that she wasn’t the adventuring type. Aela had already disappeared out the door to explore the area, but Lydia was in the living room. Letting her know what the situation was, she offered to help out too.

Once the three of us were ready, we headed to the Hall of the Dead, eventually pointed in the direction of Styrr. He was an elderly, bearded man, and rather friendly. He knew who I was, and after introductions were made of Serana and Lydia, we got down to business.

“Ah Potema. Former queen of Solitude and one of the most dangerous necromancers in recorded history. She was responsible for the Empire's near collapse almost five hundred years ago. I believe I have a book about her...”

“I’m not worried about a book, I just need to know if she has really returned, and if she has, what we can do about her?”

“Summoned in spirit form is not raised from the dead. She'll need help before she can return to the living. For the moment, the Wolf Queen has retreated to a place filled with dead eager to serve her. She has gone to her old Catacombs. A few days ago, one of her servants busted through a wall into the Temple of Divines. We'll need you to go into the Catacombs themselves.” He handed over a key. “We locked the gate leading into them. Use this key to get in.”

“Okay, we deal with Potema. What then?”

“Find what's left of her body, likely a skeleton. Remove it from the Catacombs and bring it back to be sanctified by Arkay.”

Thanking him for the advice, the three of us headed straight for the Temple of Divines. I’d actually never been in this one. Serana was already nervous. She might no longer be a vampire, but she still didn’t like temples, but she grit her teeth as we passed through.

“I’ve done some reading about this Potema,” Serana stated, “She raised armies of dead, and also liked to use vampires. All the more reason to ensure she doesn’t return.”

“Wonder why I was asked instead of someone who knows how to deal with matters like this?”

“You probably have some connection with her now, Ragnar,” Serana replied, “The ritual that was taking place, because you interrupted it, you became linked with her. I know it doesn’t make sense, but sometimes, magic doesn’t. It just… is.”

“Well, that’s why I brought you along. And Lydia now has dual abilities as well.”

“Nothing like Serana or Mirabella, Ragnar. I’m still barely a novice compared to their power.”

“And we still have your gift as well,” Serana added, “I’m not sure what sort of form we’ll find Potema in, but I think your gift will still work regardless. Or so I hope…”

After passing through the locked gate, ensuring it was locked behind us, just in case. We quickly found the hole in the wall Styrr had told us about, and I had a rather good idea what we would probably find lying ahead. Vampires. Undead. Draugr. The usual enemies I dealt with in dungeons like this. At least it wouldn’t be anything too surprising.

What did surprise me was the voice that echoed from well ahead. It was obviously Potema. “You've arrived at last. The hero who prevented me from being bound returns to my fold. I have much to thank you for, little one. When you die I will raise you and you can take your place by my side.”

It didn’t take long to run into draugr, and with the three of us, we made short work of them. Lydia and I relied on our swords, Serana causing havoc with all her spells. It wasn’t a maze of corridors and chambers, thankfully. I’ve been in more than one ruin to find myself almost lost at times as corridors zig-zag one way then the other, leaving me confused as to which direction I should be going.

Thankfully there were no puzzles to figure out either, but there were blocked doorways that required levers pulled, and there was always a trap when pulling one, usually poisoned darts or spears springing from the side or above. I’d been through more than enough dungeons to know most tricks. Still hated when I pulled a lever and flames shot out at me, though.

As always, the further into the dungeon was walked, the more powerful enemies. Soon, draugr armed with stronger weapons, or wearing far better armour, were waiting for us. As were vampires. Serana didn’t hate vampires just because she was no longer one, but just like her father and his minions, she hated those who wanted power for their own gain. It all became a bit of a slog and I eventually had to use my Thu’um, just to help us out. Flames generally worked against draugr or vampires.

Entering another large chamber, I had hoped we’d already reached the end. But there was no sign of any skeleton, only more draugr and vampires. One seemed to think he was in charge, mocking us before going on the attack. “You've come far, mortal. No doubt you seek to enter Potema's Sanctum. I can see to that. We'll need plenty of fresh corpses to rebuild her army, you see.”

I sighed as I went on the attack. “Why do they always mock? Do they not know who I am?”

“Maybe you should just show them, Ragnar,” Serana suggested.

So I did, blasting the nearest vampire with the full power of my Thu’um, sending him flying back against the nearby wall, hearing bones crack before he crashed to the ground. A sword through the neck finished him off before spinning and hacking at the nearest draugr.

“I’m amazed I haven’t lost hearing yet,” Lydia joked, fighting off another draugr.

“What was that?” I asked, earning a giggle, at least.

The next chamber was what I assume was Potema’s Sanctum. It was choc-full of draugr. “Not much further. Come, little thing. Serve me in death.”

I sighed as all the draugr woke up. Must have been a dozen. A dead vampire also on the ground woke up, no doubt summoned by Potema. Every single draugr was a bastard to take down, and when two and three attack at a time, that gives one pause to make sure they don’t make a mistake. I guess I could just always use my Thu’um, but I’ll be honest, it sometimes felt like cheating, and I trusted my sword arm too.

Serana and Lydia seemed to protect each other as I just hunted down one enemy after the other. A couple of draugr carried greatswords, and the clang off my shield reverberated around the room and certainly hurt my arm. Still, because I’d blocked the swing, it sometimes staggered them, easy pickings for a quick counter-attack.

It was a long fight, but it was another we managed to survive without any major wounds, though I’d been nicked more than once. Serana wiped her brow with her sleeve. “Have to remember I’m human again,” she said, noticing the colour in her cheeks. She looked stunning. Even Lydia took a moment to appreciate her as Serana looked between us. “What is it?”

“Nothing. Just… you know…”

She actually giggled for a moment. “Behave, Ragnar. We’re busy at the moment.”

The next room we entered was definitely the Sanctum. Stepping forward carefully, checking the floor for traps, I knew this was going to be an absolute bitch of a fight, no matter what we did. Our eyes took in every potential hazard, but we didn’t discuss any tactics. No point. We’d just fight and try to survive.

“You've come far, mortal, but can you stand against my inner council? Let's see!”

On the far side of the room was what I assumed was the spirit of Potema. Bolts of electricity seemed to shoot from her as draugr woke up all around us. I wasted no time using my Thu’um to great effects, Serana seemed to wield even more powerful spells. Lydia and I teamed up and went to work, Serana staying nearby, casting spells that would protect us from the worst of the electricity.

Every sarcophagus in the chamber contained a draugr for her to summon. After only ten minutes, the floor was littered with their bodies, and it was actually a tripping hazard. By then, Lydia, Serana and myself were back to back, simply fighting off wave after wave. The draugr didn’t understand the term ‘self-preservation’. They saw us and attacked without hesitation. But with each one we killed, the spirit of Potema seemed to weaken.

When there were no draugr left to fight, the spirit took off. We followed, entering a small antechamber that contained a throne and the bones of what must have been Potema. And the ghost of Potema herself. I used my Thu’um before we just hacked away. It took a long time for it to finally die, but it had little chance of fighting back, two swords and endless spells being fired in its direction. When the ghost finally blinked out of existence, there was a low rumble and that was about it.

Collecting the bones, nothing more than a skull, maybe a couple of ribs, a leg or arm bone as well, we found a hidden passageway behind the throne and followed the path. There was a ledge we had to jump down from, finding a door nearby that led us outside… onto the side of a mountain.

Climbing down that wasn’t a lot of fun, but it led us to the path leading towards the docks and eventually the hill and the main gates. Styrr was pleased to hear that our mission was complete, looking over us with a wry grin. “Hard work?”

“She called upon everything she could throw us at. Anyone who goes into the Catacombs now will find a lot of dead… things,” I said.

“I don’t think anyone will go down there, Dragonborn, but your return suggests you were successful. Do you have her bones?”

“I do.”

Handing them over, he nodded and seemed pleased. “Excellent! These things do have a way of working out when people take action. I'll sanctify the remains. In case Falk doesn't make it clear - Solitude owes you three a debt of gratitude.”

“Just doing the right thing.”

Returning to palace alone, Lydia and Serana letting me know that they’d just head home, Elisif wasn’t on her throne, Firebeard disappearing for a moment to grab her from her own quarters. Once she’d taken a seat, I reported the success. “Potema shouldn’t cause any more concern, milady. I’ve handed her bones over to Styrr, and the Catacombs are silent once more.”

“So she had returned?”

“She had. She wasn’t flesh and blood, still only in spirit form, but I can only assume had the matter not be dealt with, it could have caused problems in the future.”

“Then Solitude can only thank you for assisting in this matter so quickly, Dragonborn. I’m not sure how you are normally paid…”

I waved it away. “Not necessary, milady. I now call Solitude my home. I happily serve her, and her ruler.”

Elisif knew what I meant. She’s asked me a favour and I’d happily done it. And I wouldn’t expect a favour in return. I was the Dragonborn. I was powerful enough to help people simply because it was the right thing to do. “Leave us,” she ordered, the throne room emptying in a matter of seconds. When we were alone, she stood up and approached me, looking up with a smile I already knew quite well. “The Jarl of Solitude thanks you, Ragnar,” she said quietly, resting her hands on my chest, “Are you sure you don’t want anything?”

Glancing around, I ran my hands down her back, resting them on her quite firm butt. “I don’t need coin or jewels. Don’t need weapons or armour.” I kissed her forehead. “And I have you, so… no, I don’t want anything else. Serana and Lydia did help me. Not sure if they’d want anything, but I have a feeling they were just helping me for something to do.”

“I’ll have to thank them later as well.”

“If you need anything else, all you need do is ask. Solitude is now my home. And considering who I am…”

“Stay with me tonight. Here in the palace.”

“Done.”

That made her smile. “While you might not take thanks, the Jarl of Solitude would like to offer her personal thanks in a specific way she knows the Dragonborn would enjoy.”

I leaned down and gave her a light kiss. “Well, I don’t usually take payment that way either. But if you want to make love regardless…”

“Definitely,” she breathed, “But I can’t get too distracted right now. I have to see petitioners in an hour. Can you return tonight?”

“Whenever is best for you, Eli.”

“Come after sundown. Bring your girls for dinner, at least. We’ll all eat together. But I want you to myself tonight.”

Returning home, I took off my armour and weapons first before wandering around. Lydia was upstairs in her bedroom, having already taken off all her armour, now relaxing back on her bed. Serana was doing the same thing, though admitted she could feel her heartbeat still thumping away, not used to the adrenaline of battle. Mirabelle was still downstairs, hard at work, so I spent a little time just watching her. She blushed more than once as I simply found watching her interesting, and also captivating.

Aela returned not long before sundown, admitting that although she’d been intent on hunting, she ended up just exploring the nearby region. I told her like everyone else about the offer of dinner at the palace. Haelga, who was still adapting to our new reality, was a little nervous, as she hadn’t been to the palace yet. I assured her it would be a private dinner, so the only thing required was her presence.

The six of us headed to the palace once the sun had disappeared. Our arrival was expected, Firebeard greeting all of us before leading us to the Jarl’s private chambers. Elisif was waiting for us already, and once Firebeard turned and disappeared, Elisif could act normally as all the girls now called her ‘Eli’ as well.

Dinner was a little more extravagant than normal regarding what was available, though it was simply plates of food set out on the dining table, as we all gathered around the fireplace, none of us taking furniture. I felt all the aches and pains of battle as I lowered myself to the ground, thankful there was a thick rug to place my butt on, and soon I was listening to my six girls chat away, lots of laughter, stories being shared. I was the centre of one or two, though nothing too embarrassing. I could see Haelga was still adapting to the new norm, but Lydia was certainly proving very friendly with her, in the sense of making her feel immediately accepted into the group.

We opened at least two bottles of wine at the same time. Elisif was ever so thankful to Lydia and Serana for helping me, and just like me, they waved away any offers of a reward or payment for the job. Once the two bottles were finished, the girls were certainly feeling a little more amorous, but before it turned into some sort of orgy, Aela took charge and suggested that they leave. There was a little moaning and groaning but it was good natured, giving each of them a long hug, hearing rather rude suggestions whispered into my ear, before they disappeared.

Left alone with Elisif, she was busy giggling to herself. “They were not being as quiet as they thought, Ragnar.”

“True, but that’s the sort of relationship I have with them.”

Taking my hand, she led me to her bedroom. It wasn’t quite ‘our’ bedroom, though I now had some clothes stored in the event I did spend the night with her, and I was present enough mornings that my appearance was no longer a surprise. I’m sure gossip spread through the halls, but Elisif either didn’t hear of it, or if she did, she simply didn’t care.

“Undress me, Ragnar,” she ordered. I liked it when she got bossy.

“Naked?”

“To my underwear first.” There was a good reason why. She had a new set of bra, panties and stockings. I stepped back and simply looked her up and down a few times. Gods, she was beautiful. “Do you like it?”

“I love it. The black against your pale skin is just…” I trailed off and cleared my throat.

“Strip.”

I laughed before doing so, and she obviously meant everything. Once I was naked, she smiled, definitely approving of what she saw, her eyes resting at my groin as what I saw first had obviously turned me on considerably. The Jarl of Solitude then stepped forward, gave me one hell of a kiss, before she dropped to her knees before me. “Do you want the Jarl of Solitude to suck your cock, Dragonborn?”

“Gods yes,” I whispered.

“And will you cum in her mouth?”

“If you want me to.”

“Do you want to, Dragonborn?”

“Yes.”

“Good, because I’ll swallow whatever you give me. After that, you will pleasure me with your mouth.”

“For as long as you want, milady.”

“And after that?”

“We’ll make love?”

“Correct answer. I plan on waking up late tomorrow morning, Ragnar. I want you to be the reason why.”

I couldn’t help chuckle. “You have plans, Eli?”

“Just plans that involve you, me, and this cock inside my mouth to start, then my pussy for a lot longer later.”

Elisif was now more confident than the first time she’d blown me. After having not been with anyone for so long, it took a little while for her confidence to shine through. She retained the enthusiasm but she’d learned how to please me just as much as I’d learned some of her secrets. And it was always a good thing when a woman actually wanted to go down on you, not feeling that she had to or felt obliged. She teased me relentlessly to start with, which simply made it even better, but she was soon bobbing up and down, her eyes constantly looking up to meet mine. Sometimes I’d say something a little corny, earning a giggle, or sometimes I’d run my hand down her cheek or fingers through her hair. Whatever the case, the Jarl of Solitude looked beautiful on her knees while swallowing my cock.

I came, of course. Bloody good orgasm it was too. She gave me all of two minutes to catch my breath before she stood up, walked back to her bed and lay down, spreading her legs rather provocatively, running her hand down her body before fondling herself. “Ragnar, do you want this?”

Gods, I loved her when she was in this sort of mood. She jokingly called it her sexual re-awakening. I slowly walked to the bed before crawling towards her, kissing from the top of her toes, all the way up her legs, her stomach, her breasts, her neck, before I finally kissed her. The kiss we shared was utterly passionate, no surprise she whimpered as my hand found what it wanted, and she was already rather excited. “Ragnar,” she breathed.

“Love it when you’re this excited, Eli.”

“I’ve been thinking about this ever since you left earlier.”

“Well, I think you’ve waited long enough then.”

Then wasn’t much teasing from me. She wanted my tongue on her pussy and she wanted it now. To be honest, I was almost desperate to eat her out as well. I had her writhing on the bed within a matter of a couple of minutes, breathing my name in that seductive way which just made me rock hard again, watching her back arch slightly, her eyes look down at me with utter lust and desire, balling handfuls of the sheet as she started to move her body against my mouth.

“Gods,” she breathed.

I pushed her legs even wider, watching her grin slightly. I practically clamped my mouth and let my tongue do all the work, watching her buck and shudder. Once I started to focus on her clit, at her demands, her orgasm was guaranteed. And when it arrived, she cried out so loud, they no doubt heard her at the other end of Solitude. I sometimes wondered if guards would just burst in one night to find the Jarl of Solitude being eaten out thoroughly by the Dragonborn. I did tell her that one morning after a night of lovemaking and she found the idea hilarious.

I made her cum again rather quickly before she asked me to stop as it was simply too much. I collapsed onto the bed beside her, no doubt a smug grin on my face, as she rolled onto her side and cuddled me. “By Talos, Ragnar…”

“I wanted to do that much earlier, to be honest. But you had work to do. Can’t let you get too distracted by me all the time.”

“Sometimes, I wouldn’t mind a distraction. It can be rather dull at times.”

She took five minutes to herself before we made love. I remained on my back as she realised rather quickly that she loved riding my cock. She was always very complimentary about it and, not to toot my own horn, but it was a rare thing when she didn’t cum while riding me either. That night, I think it was going to happen and more than once. Watching the Jarl of Solitude ride me was simply spectacular. All she wanted from me was to either hold her hips, hold her hands, or gently caress her body. Only when she had enough, having cum a couple more times, did she roll off me, spread her legs again, and practically demand I fuck and cum in her.

The Jarl of Solitude wasn’t disappointed, jokingly complaining that she was going to feel rather tender the next morning and that she felt rather full.

We drank a little wine as we relaxed before she surprised me, wanting me to take her from behind. We’d only done it once or twice at most. It was a position I did enjoy doing but some of my girls like it, some of them didn’t. Elisif simply got on her knees and looked back. “Do you like my arse, Ragnar?”

I sat up and gave it a gentle slap. “Rather firm, Eli.”

“Well, I think I need the Dragonborn to fuck me again. Just pound me senseless.”

I sat up, slid inside her and leaned forward to whisper into her ear, “I love it when you’re in this sort of mood.”

“There is no embarrassment in feeling turned on, Ragnar. Men get turned on. Women get turned on. And from the feeling of your cock inside me, and how I’m feeling, we are both definitely turned on by each other.”

I tried various positions as I pounded her from behind. She especially liked it when I was rather dominant, almost crouching over her body, resting my forearms by her head, really driving my cock into her. She whimpered and moaned as I fucked her, though the only words she stated were that she loved it and wanted more. She did find the slap of my skin against her arse amusing at times, particularly as I got faster and faster.

It was really good and I felt that familiar feeling building again. I let her know but she demanded I continue. I put my lips close to her ear. “I think the Jarl of Solitude needs to have her arse fucked one day,” I whispered.

It was something we’d discussed briefly. I wasn’t that bothered, to be honest, but I did wonder… “Like this?” she asked.

“However you want it.”

“If you can fuck me like this there… I’ll never want to leave the bedroom!”

That made me chuckle before I focused on finishing again. I made a lot of noise five minutes later, burying myself over and again, Elisif remaining in position until she felt me stop moving, lowering herself down flat, taking me with her, though whispered for me to stay inside her for now. Realising she hadn’t cum yet, I did something unusual by rolling onto my back, taking her with me, running my hand down her body.

“Ragnar…”

“Want to cum again?”

“This is unusual… but yet.”

She got comfortable, turning her head so we could kiss as I just focused on what was important. She was so turned on, I think she enjoyed her last orgasm within a couple of minutes. That was both of us done by then. We cleaned up a little before snuggling under the sheets. We were asleep within a matter of minutes.

After enjoying breakfast the next morning, I bid Elisif farewell, simply so I didn’t prove a distraction. Our relationship was no longer a secret so she had no problem walking me to the main entrance where we shared a long embrace and kiss before she wished me farewell too.

All my girls were still at home when I walked through the front door. They never asked any questions too personal, simply asking if I enjoyed myself. I said I did and left it at that, as did they, joining them at the table as they ate and gossiped amongst themselves.  Once they’d finished, they all turned to me. “What are you plans, Ragnar?”

“For today or…”

“We just know you’re bound to get restless or bored,” Aela said, “You’re a man of action. Yes, you need a rest after everything you’ve done, and we know you won’t exactly settle down doing nothing.”

“What are you thinking? Sounds like you have an idea?”

“Not just yet, I was just wondering your thoughts.”

I sat back and stroked my chin, eventually shrugging. “I mean, apart from exploring… maybe the occasional hunt… and I assume Eli will ask me to help out with the occasional job. What about all of you though?”

“We have things to keep us occupied, Ragnar. Don’t worry about us.”

Mirabelle got her hands on me that night, dragging me upstairs rather early, and I was rather amused as she stripped off first, then hurriedly got me naked, before dragging me onto the bed with her, simply sliding my cock inside her without barely touching her otherwise. And that’s how the night carried on. She just wanted me inside her constantly. Even when I came, she almost insisted I stay inside her, waiting for me to harden completely again before restarting. It was only once we were done a few hours later that she rolled into me and whispered, “If that doesn’t do it, I’m not sure what will.”

I cuddled her into me and kissed her sweaty forehead. “Maybe you already are and you just don’t know yet,” I whispered back.

“Maybe. I don’t know.” She paused before adding, “The girls have agreed I can have you the next couple of nights too. I just have a feeling that… this is the time…”

“Belle, I’m not going to turn down the chance of a night of lovemaking with you.”

“I know, but just thought I’d let you know the plan anyway.” She paused and then surprised me by giggling. “Haelga was talking about putting on a show for us. We’re obviously getting to know her and her tastes. She’s not exactly subtle… or quiet…”

“Ah… well, we are certainly finding our feet again when it comes to that.”

“I’ve seen you with Lydia. Is it different with Haelga?”

“Sometimes. She can be very submissive. Like to lose completely control. She enjoys things even Lydia would baulk at.”

“Hmmm. Might have to take her up on the offer, see what you two really get up to.”

“If we do, just remember I expect it from no-one else. What I share with Haelga is something we enjoy together and perhaps a little unique.”

I spent the next three nights with Mirabelle, each night the same as the first. Just intercourse. Lots and lots of intercourse. I certainly wasn’t going to complain, though by the fourth night, I was suggesting I wouldn’t mind eating her out before starting. She laughed, suggesting that could be done the next time we were together. At the end of that final night, as she cuddled into me, I could hear her whispering a prayer to the Divines. I could almost hear and feel her desperation. Cuddling her against me, she turned around and needed to release a little emotion, soothing fingers up and down her back. “It will happen, Belle,” I said softly.

“The Nine will be kind, Ragnar. They have to be.”

While I spent each night with Mirabelle, it was easy to figure out the other four were finding ways to enjoy themselves. Aela and Lydia had always had fun with women, so they were not a problem. Serana was still rather new to it but admitted to finding all the women in the house attractive, and was more than willing to experiment. I was still shocked at how open-minded she’d proven to be. As for Haelga, she’d been with women but rarely without a man being present. But it didn’t take long for her to establish a close friendship with Lydia, and it was no surprise they ended up having a little fun together. I knew Lydia wouldn’t allow herself to fall for anyone again, while Haelga would have fun but was in the house because of me.

I knew the peace wasn’t going to last. Something was always bound to go wrong eventually, if not personally then somewhere around Skyrim, and I was going to be summoned. It was a calm morning, having enjoyed a threesome the night before with Aela and Serana, the pair still lying up in bed worn out, or fooling around themselves, when there was a knock at the door. Opening it to see a pair of Imperial soldiers waiting for me, I had to ask, “What’s wrong?”

“General Tullius is asking for your presence, Dragonborn. Are you able to meet him within the hour?”

“Sure. Give me a few minutes and I’ll held up there as soon as I can.”

“Thank you, Dragonborn. Sooner, the better I think. Not sure what’s going on, but something has those in charge excited.”

“Thanks for the warning.”

I changed into my armour and grabbed my weapons. Force of habit. I didn’t think someone would be stupid enough to attack Solitude. I let each of my girls know I was heading out, none of them moving a muscle to join me, and I head out into the cool morning air, the sun shining though there was a light fog. Not so unusual this far north.

I was directed to the office of General Tullius, walking in to find he and Legate Rikke in conversation. It ceased when they noticed me, Tullius approaching with hand outstretched. “Thank you for coming so quickly, Dragonborn.”

I took the offered hand. “No problem, General. It sounded urgent.”

“It could be much ado about nothing, but… once I explain, you’ll see why I asked for you. Join us at the map.” Tullius and Rikke stood one side of the table, I stood on the other. “I’m sure you remember the cease fire you got the Empire and Stormcloaks to agree, correct?” I nodded. “Somehow, it’s held. I’ll admit we’ve been itching to get on the front foot against the enemy, but we don’t want to be the side to break the cease fire. We do that, we lose our moral edge.” He gestured to the map. “You remember our positions?”

“Stormcloaks to the east, Empire to the west, Whiterun in the middle. I remember. I didn’t really give either of you a chance to speak at the summit but I knew enough.”

“True, Dragonborn. Though we would have liked a region in the east, no doubt the Stormcloaks would have wanted one in the west, and that would have just made things awkward. However, I’ve received some disturbing reports in recent days. As we agreed, we would not send any of our soldiers within the borders of Whiterun Hold. According to our reports, Stormcloak soldiers have been seen not only in Whiterun Hold but further west in both the Reach and around Hjaalmarch. That being the case, they have broken the terms of the cease-fire agreement, but as they haven’t actually attacked, we are hesitant in just resuming hostilities.”

“So why am I here?”

“Ulfric Stormcloak knows the key to winning this conflict is holding Whiterun. The side that holds Whiterun will control the main roads north-south and east-west. If he’s sending patrols that far west, I believe he will now put all his efforts into finally taking Whiterun. Jarl Balgruuf insists on his neutrality, but I believe he has sympathies with the Empire rather than the Stormcloaks. I believe you know him well?”

“I’d consider him a friend. But I don’t want to use that friendship to influence him.”

“And I certainly wouldn’t expect that.” He paused a moment. “You haven’t stated before but where does your allegiance lie, Dragonborn? Given that you live in Solitude, it would suggest…”

“While I sympathise with one or two ideas of why Ulfric fights, Skyrim will be weaker outside the Empire than within. Skyrim and Cyrodiil are not enemies. I think the three of us standing around the table know who the real enemy is.”

Tullius sighed. “We had to signed that damn treaty! If we hadn’t, who knows what would have happened. Neither side could keep fighting, though. I know that much. Both sides were smashed to pieces by the end. The only reason the Thalmor got what they wanted is because they still held the balance of power.”

“What do you ask of me, General?”

“Go to Whiterun Hold and investigate the Stormcloak presence. Do they look intent on making a move against the city? And if they do, what does Jarl Balgruuf intend to do? He will have to make a decision eventually. He either stands with the Empire, and we will gladly assist, or he stands with the Stormcloaks, and finds himself branded a traitor like the others who threw their lot behind the Stormcloaks.”

“I can certainly ask him but I already know the answer. He won’t throw his support behind the Stormcloaks, simply as he doesn’t agree with the method undertaken, but he does empathise with those who wish to overturn certain agreements made by the Empire.”

“When can you leave?”

“Tomorrow. I’ll speak with Jarl Balgruuf immediately before exploring myself. I won’t be attacked as I spend plenty of time travelling Stormcloak regions. They know that, for the moment, I’m neutral. So I can use that to my advantage for now.”

“We’re not asking you to be a spy for us, Dragonborn. We simply wish to know what the situation is on the ground, and for you to speak to Jarl Balgruuf. But the Empire cannot allow Whiterun to fall into the hands of Jarl Ulfric Stormcloak. It cannot and must not be allowed.”

“I agree with that viewpoint, General. So I’ll do what I can to help for now. Don’t expect me to join up with your forces just yet, though.”

“We don’t expect it. Someone such as yourself… Well, we’ve already discussed your possible future. Anyway, tomorrow would be excellent, Dragonborn, and we look forward to hearing your report.”

Heading straight home, I gathered the five around the table and explained the request. None of them were surprised. Aela and Lydia immediately offered to join me, as both still thought of Whiterun as their second home at least, so they would want to know what the situation is. Serana, Mirabelle and Haelga would remain in Solitude, simply hoping I wouldn’t be gone too long. Next stop was telling Elisif. She seemed to already know or at least had been consulted, so she simply wished me good luck and to return safely.

The five girls must have come to an agreement as I spent the night with Mirabelle and Serana that night. I’ll be honest, I enjoyed just sitting back and watching my two lovers pleasure each other. Of course, they noticed that and made sure I joined in, but they also knew how enjoyable I found watching them make love. Knowing I had to leave early, it wasn’t all night affair, long enough that I could make love to both of them, Mirabelle joking it would be amusing if this was the night both fell pregnant.

Everyone was up early the next morning. Even Elisif walked down from the palace to say her goodbyes. I didn’t think anything untoward was going to happen. I didn’t believe we’d arrive outside Whiterun to find the city under siege, but I knew the tinderbox was perhaps getting ready to explode. The cease fire was never meant to last. Frankly, I was surprised it had lasted as long as it had, no doubt both sides licking wounds and building up their forces for the resumption of hostilities.

“Just stay safe, Ragnar. I’m not sure how long you’ll be gone, but you never know what news I might have when you return,” Mirabelle whispered as I hugged her last.

“Well, I hope like you do that it’s good news.”

She met my eyes and smiled. “Boy or a girl?”

“I honestly don’t care. Plus… we’re not just having one, are we?”

“No, definitely more than one, Ragnar.”

“You know, Ragnar, if you really want to make sure,” Aela joked behind us. Mirabelle looked past me and smiled. “I know, I know. I haven’t stopped taking my potions yet.”

With last calls of farewell and good luck, Aela, Lydia and I walked through a still slumbering Solitude, through the main gates, and towards the stables. Our horses had been prepared, so all we needed to do was mount up and head out. “Journey in a day, Ragnar?” Lydia asked.

“Aye. I want to sleep in Breezehome tonight. Don’t feel like camping. I think we have a lot of work to do… and I really don’t want to be away from here too long either.”

“Fingers crossed everything remains calm,” Aela stated, before she added a little quieter, “But I have a bad feeling…”

I sighed. “Me too. Tullius won’t have asked if he didn’t think something was up. And I understand why he asked.” I looked at both of them. “Come on, let’s head back to Whiterun and get this sorted.”

Chapter 58: The Message

The problem with borders in Skyrim is that, on a map, they were defined areas that the powers that be must have agreed to a long time ago. In reality, borders seemed to be different. If you were riding or walking along a road, you would pass banners that would indicate when you were passing from one Hold into another. Well defined. However, if you were crossing overland, well away from roads, you would have no real idea which Hold you were in. Most of the time, roads and mountains were generally considered a perimeter of one Hold to another. Even holding a map, you would need to consult the position of the sun during the day, or the stars at night, to know you were where you thought. And that wasn’t an exact science.

Approaching Whiterun from the west, we followed the roads, passing the banner of Whiterun, only passing Whiterun guards once we passed by it. Plenty of Imperial soldiers had been positioned near enough to the border to suggest they were preparing for something. It was growing dark by the time we reached the outskirts of the city itself, so we decided to just stable our horses and head in.

Aela and Lydia headed straight for Breezehome. I continued up the hill towards Dragonsreach. Even though I hadn’t been around all that much lately, the two guards by the main doors recognised me immediately, opening the door, gesturing for me to just keep walking. Balgruuf had vacated his throne for one of the dining tables. As soon as he saw me, he exclaimed my name, rising and striding towards me with hand outstretched. “Well, I will admit this is a bloody good surprise!”

I took his hand with both of mine. “Good to see you again, my lord.”

“What brings you here?” He paused before adding, “To be honest, I have no idea where you actually call home now.”

“Solitude. It’s a long and complicated story.”

That made him laugh, taking my arm and leading me to the table, making sure I sat down, had a plate of food and a tankard of ale before he asked, “Give me the short version.”

I filled him in on everything I’d been up to since the last time we’d spoken. He was pleased to know that the vampire problem had ended. When I told him about the idea Tullius and the Emperor had, he thought it was actually a good one. “To be honest, Ragnar, if a moot was called, I would recommend you as High King because of who you are. If anyone could bring Skyrim together, it’s you. Simply due to your name.”

“I’m not sure I want it, to be honest.”

“That’s exactly why you’d be perfect. I don’t trust any man who craves power for himself. Someone who is given power but doesn’t want it is bound to be more responsible when wielding it, or so I like to believe. It also depends on the man himself, and I like to think you’re a good man now, Ragnar. Is that what brings you to Whiterun now?”

“General Tullius is of the belief the Stormcloaks are preparing something. Worst case scenario, they attack Whiterun to gain the advantage. I don’t think there is a best case. The war has been in a stalemate for a long time now. It can’t keep going. One side has to break.”

“And I guess that means my neutrality will be at an end soon?”

“The General was wondering which way you were leaning. I gave my opinion when asked.”

“What did you say?”

“I suggested that while you may empathise with some of the arguments made by Jarl Ulfric, Skyrim leaving the Empire weakens us, and that, at heart, you still owed allegiance to the Empire.”

He smiled. “You know me well, Ragnar. So what will you do while you’re here?”

“Assess Stormcloak positions. I’m still considered a neutral party, so as long as I don’t look too obvious, I’ll be able to move around the Stormcloak areas. I won’t go entering their camps or anything. Just make it look like I’m on a hunt or something.”

“Will you approach Jarl Ulfric himself?”

“I haven’t been asked to by the General.”

“What about you becoming High King, if you accept?”

“I think he and the Emperor want the civil war won before that step is made. And I have a feeling the Empire don’t want to involve themselves in that process. Of course, they’ll whisper into the ears of people like yourself, suggesting you vote that way.”

“So does that mean you’ll become Jarl of Solitude?”

“I guess. Unfair on Eli… but…”

I realised the slip as soon as I said it, and I noticed his smirk. “Eli?” He leaned forward. “Ragnar, I’m aware of that reputation of yours. Everyone is. But are you suggesting you are currently… bedding the Jarl of Solitude?”

“I think that’s part of the reason why the Emperor and the General have suggested it. Eli has been… infatuated with me for quite a while now. And, I’ll admit, Eli is something else entirely. She’s beautiful and intelligent. Good heart. Cares for her people, her city but also Skyrim entirely.”

“But they obviously want you as High King as a uniting figure, Elisif being too divisive?”

Shrugging, I replied, “I guess that might be one reason why. She doesn’t exactly have a whole host of supporters, even within her own court. A few wouldn’t be sad to see her replaced.” I paused. “I support her but I think there are personal feelings involved with that. I have a feeling they’d like me to marry her, at least. Despite her inexperience, she’s an effective administrator.”

“You will be staying at Breezehome during your stay here?”

“Aye. I’ll head out early tomorrow to get a lay of the land. I don’t want to spend too long here. Tullius wasn’t expecting me to either.”

I finished my meal, enjoyed a couple of tankards, before walking back to the lower part of town. I checked in at Breezehome, finding the place empty, so I headed back up to the Bannered Mare, Aela and Lydia sat at a table, immediately motioning for me to join them. The music was loud, everyone enjoying themselves. Saadia was rather busy as always, though everyone was respectful of her.

Despite the fact I was with Aela and Lydia, Ysolda made her presence known, taking the empty chair. Aela gave me a look and I almost laughed, though I was used to Ysolda flirting with me, as I did it just as much in return. By now, I think we knew nothing was ever going to happen. She certainly knew I was with Aela, though I think she only knew of Lydia as being my housecarl.

Lydia did eventually lean over and whispered into my ear, “You should just fuck the poor woman, Ragnar. She’s clearly gagging for it.”

I met her eyes and smiled. “Six, Lydia.”

“You’ve had sex with plenty of other women. What’s one more?”

“If I want sex, I’ve got you and Aela,” I retorted with a grin.

I think that answer pleased her, as she moved her chair closer and leaned into me, wrapping an arm around her in return. Aela noticed and whispered into my ear that perhaps it was best we leave. Ysolda bid us goodnight, hearing a slight note of jealousy in her tone as she did so, an arm wrapped around Aela and Lydia each as we walked back to Breezehome.

Inside, we headed straight upstairs where the three of us started to make out and strip at the same time. And, from there, things were a lot of fun. It was always fantastic being blown by two women at once, even better when they were eager to take it on their faces. Aela and I then focused on eating out Lydia, before Lydia and I returned the favour to Aela. After that, I was basically told to lie down, Aela riding me first as Lydia sat on my face. Once I left a load in Aela, we switched, Lydia on her hands and knees, Aela in front of her. I was given a bottle of oil and told by Lydia to fuck in the arse. We hadn’t done that in quite a while, due to trying for a child. As this was clearly just a night of fun, Lydia got what she wanted.

The three of us went to sleep with grins on our faces, satisfied with how the night ended.

Breakfast was amusing the next morning. Aela and I were up first, downstairs at the table, breaking bread, enjoying that with some cheese, Lydia the last to rise. She sat down next to Aela and noticeably winced. “Okay, I haven’t done that in quite a while,” she muttered.

“It didn’t hurt last night, did it?”

“Not at all, Ragnar. We’ve done it enough times that it’s only pleasurable. But I guess you did fuck me rather hard and for a long time. Always helps when you cum in Aela first.”

“I’m not complaining. I got to ride that cock through a few orgasms,” Aela added, giving me a look and a smile, “And watching him fuck you in the arse is rather fun to watch. Some of the faces you pull…”

“You’ve done it before, Aela. You know how good it feels.”

“Rarely, Lydia, and nothing like you do with him.”

Lydia glanced my way and smirked. “And I’m nothing compared to Haelga. I still haven’t had the chance to watch you two together, Ragnar.”

“But you’ve had fun with her?”

“Oh, we had a lot of fun together the other night. Her sexual appetite, once she’s well and truly in the mood, is something else entirely. Few of those toys she has… We’re having a threesome soon?”

“Aye, just give me a time and a place.”

“I don’t know who’ll be worn out first.”

“Trust me, I’ve made Haelga pass out before.” That made her laugh, Aela giving me a look before she chuckled as well. I shrugged. “We’ve connected since the very first time we were together.”

Aela reached across to grab my hand. “I’m glad she’s with us, Ragnar. It’s obvious to us five how much she loves you. And when we speak to her, the regret she speaks of…”

“I know. So I’m trying to focus on her a bit as well as…” I sighed. “Honestly, I don’t know how the six of you tolerate me sometimes.”

“Because we all love you, and we’ve agreed to a polyamorous relationship. You have sex with us, and we have sex with each other.” Clearing her throat, she added, “What’s your plan?”

“I’m going to head east and ascertain the situation. You two will do the same, but we won’t work together. We’ll cover much more land if we split up. Try not to look too obvious.”

“So this isn’t a multi-day operation?” Lydia asked.

“No. One or two days at most. Balgruuf won’t make a decision just yet. I think his hand will need to be forced. I don’t blame him, because one he does decide, and it’ll be with the Empire, the Stormcloaks won’t waste any time launching an attack.”

“Any chance someone like yourself could speak to Jarl Ulfric?” Aela wondered.

“I’ve thought about that. I’m not sure why he’d listen to me over anyone else. He’s in too deep now.”

Finishing breakfast, we changed into armour, grabbed our weapons, and headed down to the stables. We agreed the areas we’d cover and split up. It was a rather dull day as I headed north-east, skirting the border area. I stopped at Whitewatch Tower and had a conversation with the guards there. A couple of them were regulars, and had noted the presence of Stormcloak scouts appearing more often in the past few weeks. Generally, they didn’t come too close to their position, but they assumed they were making it as far as the city walls. They could assume for what reason but, unless caught in the act, all they could do was report what they saw.

Heading over the border, the first Stormcloak camp was barely ten minutes away, and it was large. I didn’t count how many soldiers, but it was obvious to me that it was an assembly area. If Aela and Lydia reported similar camps, then I would make a bold assumption and believe Ulfric was preparing to attack. I did wonder if I shouldn’t just ride in and have a chat, but I wasn’t that friendly with any Stormcloaks, and while I might be the Dragonborn, that would afford me respect but it could still provoke them.

By the time I returned to Whiterun that evening, I’d found half a dozen Stormcloak camps within an hour or so of the border. One was enormous, two were of significant size, the other three were small. But it suggested to me that Ulfric was definitely preparing for something. Aela and Lydia were already back by the time I was stabling my horse. Waiting in Breezehome, I collected them on the way up to Dragonsreach. As soon as Balgruuf saw us walk inside, he stood up from his throne and gestured for us to follow up the stairs, the four of us gathering around the large map of Skyrim.

Aela described what she found first, and it was bad enough. Lydia then added what she found, and the situation was worse. By the time I was finished, Balgruuf needed to sit down, burying his head in his hands. “By Ysmir,” he muttered, “Ulfric is making his intentions clear. That much is obvious. Did they look ready for battle?”

I shared a glance with Aela and Lydia. Both shrugged. “The only good thing was the lack of siege weaponry. The walls are strong, my lord. Jarl Ulfric won’t just send his men against the walls without something to make it easier for them. But the number of camps, the size of some of them, it would suggest he’s gearing up for an attack. No point denying reality.”

“You will need to take this to General Tullius as soon as you can, Ragnar,” Balgruuf stated, “But before you do, I need to ask a favour. I need to know for sure of his intentions.”

“I serve Whiterun, my lord.”

“I need you to go to Windhelm itself. I will hand you a ceremonial axe. If Balgruuf accepts the axe, there will be peace. If he doesn’t, then his intention will be obvious. I only ask you to go, putting your head in the lion’s mouth, as I know you can enter and leave his city without issue.”

“I will leave first thing tomorrow, my lord.”

“I know I ask a lot…”

I waved that away. “You helped more than anyone regarding the Dragon Crisis, my lord. I think I owe a favour or two. And while I might no longer live here, I considered Whiterun home long enough that I certainly won’t stand aside and watch it attacked.” I gave it a moment of thought. “Okay, here’s what I’ll do. Aela, Lydia and I will return to Solitude. Give me the axe before I leave. I’ll report to General Tullius what we’ve found, then I’ll head east to Windhelm. What response Jarl Ulfric gives, I’ll report it to General Tullius first, as no doubt he’ll immediately make preparations either way, before I return here. If Jarl Ulfric refuses, I’ll no doubt return here with an offer of assistance from the Empire.”

Balgruuf nodded. “I will tell you my answer now. If Ulfric refuses the gesture, I will accept any help the Empire is willing to offer.”

There was no point in hanging around Whiterun any longer than required, so we bade him goodbye, stopped at the Bannered Mare for a meal and a drink, before returning to Breezehome. As a sign of being serious about getting to sleep early, Lydia went to her own room while Aela stayed with me, but she kept her underwear on, and all we did was cuddle and enjoy quite conversation before drifting off.

It was an entire day’s ride back to Solitude. Mirabelle, Serana and Haelga were a little surprised to see us at first, until I explained what we’d found. Elisif must have received word of our return as she appeared a couple of hours after our return, immediately asking what we’d found. Once I’d explained to her, we all gathered around the dinner table. “It’s war,” Elisif muttered, “And once the issue of Whiterun is decided, the war will resume until it has its victor.”

After dinner, I walked up to Castle Dour to make my report. Tullius knew what it all meant, but wasn’t surprised of the request Balgruuf made of me. He knew Ulfric was going to refuse the axe. His intention was clear, but I guess everyone would hope cooler heads would prevail. But even Tullius muttered that full scale war appeared inevitable. “This time, there will be not halt until there is a conclusion, one way or the other,” he stated, “You will return here first?”

“Aye. Jarl Balgruuf has already stated that, if Ulfric refuses the axe, he will end his neutrality.”

Tullius smirked. “Only because his city is ready to be attacked. But at least the stalemate will finally be at an end.” He nodded to himself. “Okay, leave tomorrow, Dragonborn. Return here first with the response. I know what he’ll say, but as soon as I have word, I will make preparations. We have thousands of men in the west, ready to move. Your intentions?”

“I will return here then I will base myself in Whiterun. I won’t let Ulfric attack my home without a fight.”

It was a long ride from Solitude to Windhelm, so although I could see a couple of my girls wanted my company that evening, although I shared a bed with Serana and Mirabelle, nothing happened except a bit of cuddling and sleeping. I woke up as the first rays of sunlight shone through the window, rising immediately as I needed to spend as much time in the saddle as possible. All my girls woke up to bid me goodbye, wishing me luck for my potential meeting with Jarl Ulfric. We all knew the outcome, all of us being realistic. He wanted the resumption of hostilities. He was going to refuse the axe.

The weather was horrific once I was a couple of hours east of Solitude. First it was only rain but once I was further north, the rain turned to snow, and with an already soaked thick coat, I was soon chilled to the bone, using a simple fire spell to dry out my coat and hoping I didn’t light it on fire at the same time. The wind seemed to slow my horse to a crawl at times, and I didn’t even contemplate stopping to rest to eat. It was the sort of day in the saddle anyone would hate, so by the time I arrived at the bridge leading towards the gates of Windhelm, I was beyond fed up and knew I wouldn’t be allowed entrance to see Jarl Ulfric.

That meant a night at Candlehearth Hall, where I took one of the available rooms, otherwise sitting by the fire to warm myself up, nibbling at a little food and enjoying more than one tankard of ale. It allowed me to listen into the conversation, though I heard nothing that told me of the affairs inside the court of Jarl Ulfric.

I slept in the next morning, rising well after sunrise, making sure all my clothing was dry before putting them on, before I assembled myself in armour, grabbed my things, and headed out into the cool air of the Stormcloak capital. The Palace of the Kings towered over the city, an imposing grey building. It spoke of ancient Nordic power, and I’m sure those who visited the city perhaps wondered why the Palace of the Kings wasn’t home to the High King of Skyrim. Politics, I guess.

As I was clearly a stranger, the guards at the door blocked my access. “State your business, stranger,” one of them stated.

They were just doing their jobs so I certainly wasn’t going to take offence. “I’m the Dragonborn. I seek an audience with Jarl Ulfric Stormcloak.”

“And I’m the High King of Skyrim,” he stated.

I sighed. “So it’s going to be like that, is it?”

“Look, anyone could walk up and state they’re the Dragonborn. Prove it and I’ll personally escort you in.” So I proved it and the guard kept his word. “Apologies, Dragonborn. Can’t be too careful,” he stated as he opened the door.

“Just doing your job. And I’m not exactly here to win friends.”

“Ah, I understand.”

He led me halfway up the hall before he stopped and saluted. At the far end was an enormous throne. Sat upon it was Jarl Ulfric Stormcloak. By his side were his aides. One of them immediately walked towards me as I slowly strode forward. “Who approaches the throne of the rightful King of Skyrim?” he asked, his voice nothing but a growl.

“Ragnar Dragonborn.”

He definitely blinked in surprise. Then there was silence. I figured he perhaps wanted proof, but considering I was now inside, I guess that was proof enough. So he gestured and stated that I could approach the throne. Ulfric hadn’t exactly heard who I was but his interest was definitely perked as I carefully walked forward. There were guards dotting the perimeter of the room, no doubt ready to move at a signal. And I was still armed and armoured, and being a stranger, they wouldn’t trust me for a moment.

I stood in front of Ulfric as he looked me up and down. “So you’re the Dragonborn. I’ve heard many stories of your exploits. I’m sure there is an element of truth to most.”

I took a moment to look him over. Even though sat down, he looked strong, powerful. Commanded respect. He looked weary. That wasn’t a surprise. No doubt everything weighed down on him, caused plenty of stress. But he was definitely curious as to my presence. I’d been to Windhelm often but never walked into the palace until now, so he would assume I was there because of the war.

Taking the axe from my back, I stepped towards the throne, got down on one knee and offered it, laid across my hands. “Jarl Balgruuf offers this axe as a token of friendship, Jarl Ulfric.”

He said nothing for a while. I kept my eyes on him. He barely moved a muscle before he glanced away at his aide. “It is unfortunate the Dragonborn appears to have chosen the wrong side, Galmar.”

“Should we have him arrested, Jarl Ulfric?”

“No, he is here to deliver a message. It is necessary he returned to Whiterun with a message.”

I stood up and stepped back. I already knew the answer. So did Tullius. So did Balgruuf. “You can return this axe to the man who sent it. And tell him he should prepare to entertain... visitors. I expect a great deal of excitement in the city of Whiterun in the near future...”

“We are strong together and united, Jarl Ulfric.”

“I have shown the people that when our Jarls drink the Empire's milk, it makes us weak. I must now show them the path that will lead us back to our strength. There is no progress without sacrifice. No wheat without threshing the chaff. The Empire and the Jarls who back them must be swept away. The people demand it. I demand it.”

“I warn you, Ulfric…”

Galmar unsheathed his weapon. “You dare threaten the Jarl Ulfric?”

I just glared at him with a smirk on my face. “I will listen to the Dragonborn, Galmar. I’ll be interested in what he has to say.”

“Jarl Ulfric, I can empathise with many of your arguments. The Empire is not what it once was. But Skyrim is stronger being part of the Empire than outside. If we leave, the Thalmor will have no hesitation in making moves. But your intentions regarding Whiterun are now clear. I warn you that Whiterun is my home. And if you attack my home, you find the Dragonborn opposing you. I ended the Dragon Crisis. I ended the vampire menace. I cleansed the Companions and am now Harbinger. I ended the crisis of the College. Do you really want to see me on the opposite side of the battlefield to yourself, knowing what I’m capable of?”

He finally stood up. He was a tall man. As tall as me. He stepped forward until we were barely a couple of inches apart, his eyes gazing into mine. “We have come too far, Dragonborn. What has been started must be finished. There will be no more hesitation. Imperial rule of Skyrim must end. Once that is done, we focus on the Thalmor.”

“Skyrim cannot win against the Thalmor alone, Jarl Ulfric.”

“I think you underestimate your brothers and sisters, Dragonborn.”

I stepped back and dipped my head. “I have my reply, Jarl Ulfric. Whenever you decide to attack, rest assured I will be there to stop you.”

“If the Dragonborn must die to secure our freedom, it is a price I’m willing to pay.”

“Very well, Jarl Ulfric.”

Galmar was still glaring at me. I looked around and the guards remained in position, but I made sure I backed away slowly, keeping hands away from weapons. I didn’t think they’d try and stop me but as I was now clearly an enemy, they could decide trying to arrest me to be a wise move. They certainly wouldn’t take me without a fight.

But I walked out of the palace without being stopped. I headed straight back to the inn, grabbed my pack, and once I was mounted, I started my ride back to Solitude. It was dark by the time I stabled my horse and walked through the main gates. My first stop was Castle Dour. Tullius was in the middle of dinner but immediately greeted me, walking into the map room. Rikke walked in a couple of seconds later. I placed the axe on the table.

“He refused the token. He made his intentions clear. He intends to attack.”

Tullius nodded. “I’ll send messengers tomorrow morning to all our camps, ordering them to prepare to move out. I will organise a small force to arrive in Whiterun within two days. What are your intentions?”

“I will offer my services to Jarl Balgruuf.”

Tullius glanced at Rikke before looking back at me. “Considering who you are, Dragonborn, I am going to make a proposal. My men will be under your command.”

“Seriously?”

“Knowing the Dragonborn will be leading the defence? You might not wear the uniform, but knowing you are on their side, it will do them wonders. They will believe. That will almost be enough itself. When will you leave?”

“Tomorrow morning.”

“Are you sure you don’t wish to rest?”

“I can do that in Whiterun. I want to make sure I’m there for whenever Ulfric intends to attack. I have no doubt it will be soon. I didn’t see any siege weapons, that doesn’t mean they are not hidden somewhere, ready to move at a moment’s notice.”

He offered his hand. “Good luck, Dragonborn.”

I took the offered hand. “Thank you, General.”

As soon as I walked in the door at home, I was grabbed my Mirabelle and led to her bedroom, where she hugged me tightly for at least five minutes without saying a word. She eventually leaned back so I could kiss her. “You hungry?” she asked. I nodded, so was led to the dining room, all my girls joining me as I ate dinner, enjoyed a tankard of ale, before I had to explain what was going on. I told them I’d be leaving the next morning, and this time, I didn’t know how long I’d be away. Aela and Lydia offered to come again, which I accepted, as Whiterun was their home. Serana, being a mage, offered her services as well, which I also accepted.

“You will need help, Ragnar. I will send a message to the College, ask them to help you,” Mirabelle stated.

“Seriously?”

“You helped protect the College from Ancano. I think every student there owes you more than one favour. Expect their arrival soon.”

“I’ll head to the Dawnguard first,” Serana added, “I’m sure they won’t mind helping the Dragonborn.”

That meant only Mirabelle and Haelga would be remaining in Solitude, though I’m fairly sure Elisif would visit them often, even if it was simply to say hello and enjoy their company. So, that night, I had my first threesome with Haelga and Mirabelle, and there was no doubt in my mind that Haelga held back that night, at least in regards to some of her desires. Haelga and Mirabelle certainly enjoyed pleasing each other as I fucked them, and Mirabelle did watch Haelga take it in the arse rather hard. Haelga loved every second, of course, wanting more and more. I glanced at Mirabelle, who simply watched on, impressed by what Haelga was taking.

“You’re enjoying that?” she asked, Haelga’s face buried into her pillow, arse up in the air, as I crouched over her, just ramming my cock into her arse.

“Every… single… second,” she replied through each thrust.

“I’m close,” I grunted.

“I want a mouthful.”

Mirabelle then watching, even more amazed, as I pulled out and sat back, Haelga immediately spinning around and swallowing my cock, her head immediately bobbing up and down quickly. I came within a minute, and she audibly gulped down my cum, her eyes alive with nothing but unbridled lust as she looked into mine. Mirabelle moved to have a look and gasp. “Gods, Haelga, you’re… so red…”

My cock popped out of her mouth. “That’s one well fucked arse you’re looking at, Mirabelle.”

“Does it hurt?”

“A little, but that’s the point. The pleasure is overwhelming in comparison. It’s even better when he ties me up, blindfolds and gags me, then just teases me for hours on end. He’ll make me cum over and over until I simply pass out.”

“Wow,” Mirabelle whispered.

Mirabelle then sat up and wrapped an arm around her waist, pulling her tight and kissing her cheek. “Don’t for one second believe he wants this from you. Trust me, I’ve already seen you two make love. What you share is beautiful, and I’m sure you know we all have different things we like to do with him.”

“I’ve… had anal with him before but nothing like that,” she said quietly.

“Did you enjoy it?”

Mirabelle looked at me and smiled. “He was so concerned about hurting me, but it didn’t for a second. Helps that he knows what he’s doing, I guess.”

“He loves you and always makes sure you’re enjoying yourself. Even after all this time, I’m sure he worries he’s hurting me too much. We have a safe word in case it does.” She paused. “Now, Mirabelle, Ragnar will be gone for a few days and it’s only us two. So are we going to fool around?”

Mirabelle looked at me, smiled, then turned and kissed Haelga on the cheek. “I think we’ll have some fun.”

“Good. Been a long time since I’ve only had pussy on the menu.” She looked at me. “Don’t you be gone too long, Ragnar. I’m thinking we put on a show for the girls when you get back.”

“I’m game if you are.”

We eventually cleaned up and rested, Mirabelle to one side, Haelga to the other. Though I wanted to leave early the next morning, Haelga woke me up, gave me a kiss, then left the bedroom. Mirabelle needed no second invitation, immediately straddling my body, feeling her warm pussy slide down my cock. She rode me to an orgasm, taking one final load from me after a few minutes, before she lay on my chest, fingers trailing her spine. “There’ll be a day when you finally stop leaving, won’t there?”

I lifted her chin with a finger. “Soon, Belle. I’m not sure what’s going to happen. If I need to help end the war, so be it. Because once it is over, I can’t think of another thing that will cause me to leave again.”

“Good. I love having you around me all the time. So do the others, of course. But I like being selfish sometimes, have you to myself.”

“I won’t complain, my Breton goddess.”

That made her smile as she lifted herself off. After dressing, I headed out to where I’d left my pack and weapons. Aela, Serana and Lydia appeared from their own rooms and we headed out into the city. It was still rather easily so few people were about. There were hugs all around, wishes of good luck and be safe, before the four of us headed to the stables. Serana would ride with us most of the way before taking the southern route via Falkreath, hoping to return to Whiterun with the Dawnguard in number. Mirabelle would write a letter that morning and send it by courier. She hoped the mages would be in Whiterun within a couple of days. They would have to take a circuitous route to avoid the Stormcloak armies.

Though we tried to keep good pace, we didn’t make it to Whiterun in the day, needing to nigh out near Rorikstead, choosing to camp instead of stay at the inn. There was no sex that night. Or, at least, my cock wasn’t taken out. Lot of pussy was eaten that night though, the three women going to sleep with grins on their faces, while I simply felt smug satisfaction. Sometimes, I don’t need to get my dick wet to enjoy myself and they learned that to their benefit that night.

Serana disappeared not long into our ride the next morning as Aela, Lydia and I completed our journey to Whiterun. There was no obvious differences around the city nor in the air, walking up to Dragonsreach, through the usual crowds, no-one suggesting they were worried about an impending attack.

Jarl Balgruuf didn’t need to ask how my meeting went as I walked into the great hall with his axe already in hand. He took it from me with a sigh. “That means war,” he muttered, “What did General Tullius say?”

“He’s already organising the troops. I think the first will arrive within a matter of days. I have other allies. Serana will see if the Dawnguard will help, and it’s possible the mages of the College will assist.”

“The Companions will also stand in the defence of the Whiterun too,” Aela added. I gave her a look and nodded. I knew they would have helped regardless. I just hadn’t got around to asking them yet.

“What is the plan, my lord?” I asked.

He sat down in his throne again, giving it some thought. Then he looked at me. “Dragonborn, I’m placing the defence of my city in your hands. Will you take on that responsibility?”

“Yes, my lord. I will begin preparations immediately. I will need the co-operation of all yours guards.”

He turned and yelled, “Irileth!” She appeared within seconds. She looked my way and nodded before standing next to me. “Find Commander Caius and ask him to report to me immediately. Plans must be made for any imminent attack by the Stormcloaks.”

Irileth glanced my way. “Is that true, Dragonborn?”

“Their camps are placed in a way that would suggest they could descend upon our walls quickly. And Jarl Ulfric did not accept the axe.”

“I will find Commander Caius immediately, my lord.”

She disappeared as Balgruuf sighed, leaning forward, resting his elbows on his knees. “I knew this day would come eventually,” he said quietly, “But I’d always hoped the Empire would manage a decisive victory that would end the rebellion without Ulfric’s army stacking at my walls.”

“You have the Dragonborn, my lord,” Lydia stated, “And he’s saved Skyrim more than once already. I think saving Whiterun might mean just that little bit more to him.”

“I will put it like this, Dragonborn. Save my city and you have my voice to elect you the new High King at the next Moot. And I will use whatever influence I have to ensure you receive the support required. I know it’s not something you particularly want, but I believe we need someone of your stature in the position to lead our country.”

“Whiterun will not fall to the Stormcloaks, my lord. I give you my word.” I turned to Aela and Lydia. “I believe we should get started.”

“Talos guide you, Dragonborn.”

Heading out of Dragonsreach, I stopped at the top of the stairs, gazing down over the city. I made myself a promise. I would need to be dead before the Stormcloaks took this city. It might no longer be my home, but it was the first city I’d called home after my… re-birth, let’s call it. And while I might empathise with Jarl Ulfric, I would not sit back and allow him to stride across Skyrim, dragging her out of the Empire, making her a soft target for her enemies.

I turned to my two companions. “Let’s get to work.”

Chapter 59: Siege

Things happened quickly. Commander Caius was happy to put his men under my command, admitting that he was used to guarding against bandits and other minor issues. Having to defend the city against an entire army was something he admitted he had no idea what to do. So I thought long and hard about what tactics to use. Unless Tullius sent us significant numbers, we would be outnumbered.

So that meant we’d use a tactic I’d read about more than once. A shield wall. Place it somewhere that would funnel the Stormcloaks, unable to flank us, and they would fight and die at the wall. I thought it was a solid plan, sitting down with Caius and Balgruuf, explaining my idea. They were all for it. Serana arrived within three days with the entire Dawnguard alongside her. They would assist. The next day, the mages of the College arrived to help. Soon, any open space in Whiterun was filled with tents as we prepared.

The Stormcloaks made their move a week after my meeting with Jarl Ulfric. They arrived during the evening, when only the night watch manned the walls. I was woken at dawn, an excited scout explaining the situation. Heading out to the walls, I could see siege weapon at three sides of our walls. It looked like preparations were still being made, but there were numerous weapon on display, and the numbers of soldiers… This was going to be an all-out offensive, Ulfric leaving nothing to chance.

Thankfully, Imperial soldiers arrived the next day. Well, they would have done, but with the Stormcloaks now ringing the city, they had to fight their way through. We couldn’t afford to head out and help them, but mages and archers helped from the walls. In the end, two-thirds of the Imperial force managed to get through the Stormcloak lines. I met their commanders, Legate Vakarian, who told me that he and all his men were being placed under my command. When I explained my idea, he smiled, stating he knew all about shield walls, and that he would assist where he could.

As the Stormcloaks prepared, so did we. I had soldiers and guards drilling all day. The mages knew they would invoke fear in the Stormcloaks. Ordinary Nords had a fear of magic, and I had no doubt the ordinary Stormcloak soldier would probably hate coming against a whole bunch of mages. The Dawnguard joked it would be weird killing humans instead of vampires. The Companions sat back and relaxed, simply waiting for the order to join in the killing. For once, they’d fight for pride rather than coin.

One evening, I stood with Ulfric at his map table, the map now of Whiterun and its surroundings. Whiterun was basically surrounded. Catapults were situated in positions that could easily rain down missiles that would hit anywhere. Attempts had been made at counting the enemy, and even with the arrival of Imperial forces, we were still outnumbered.

“How goes the training?” Balgruuf asked.

“They’re ready to fight, my lord.”

“And… will you use your gift?”

I sighed, running a hand through my hair. “I’ve given my word to the Greybeards not to use it against man. And before you ask, I won’t call in any dragons. I don’t wish to abuse the understanding we have. And I doubt they would help. This is a human problem. They simply won’t care. I trust my sword arm, my lord. And I trust the men and women under my command. We might be surrounded, by the walls are strong, and the shield wall will hold.”

“When do you believe they’ll finally attack?”

“I’ve thought about that and asked the Legion Commander. He believes they’ll attack at first light. Generally, that’s when shifts changed, people are just waking up, or going to bed. They can’t attack at night. It’s too confusing.”

“I’ve received no word that Jarl Ulfric is here. Do you believe he’ll arrive for the attack?”

I nodded. “Yes, my lord. He’ll want to lead this personally. Taking this city will be a feather in his cap. And he’ll want to pit his wits against the Dragonborn. Me being here makes it somewhat personal for both of us. And he’ll want to gain victory by defeating not just the Empire but the Dragonborn.”

“Then we wait for Jarl Ulfric ad see if he will parley. But I already know what he’ll demand. Open our gates and side with him. And he will already know my response.” He sat back in his chair and sagged with a sight. “There’s nothing else that can be done right now, Dragonborn. Go home and relax. We know they won’t attack without him being present. Hopefully he arrives soon and we can finally get this solved.”

“I’ll return tomorrow morning for breakfast, my lord.”

He escorted me all the way to the doors of Dragonsreach, offering his hand as always, though I always grabbed his forearm and he would mine. “Thank you, Dragonborn. Save my city and… I’m not sure I could ever pay back what I owe.”

“I’m owed nothing, my lord. It is the right thing to do.”

Returning to Breezehome, it wasn’t too late, Serana, Aela and Lydia still awake, waiting for me to return. Their roles were already defined. Serana would be with the mages. Lydia would be with me in the shield wall. Aela would join the archers on the wall. I took a seat by the small fire, sighing as I did. Lydia stood up and walked over to the area where food and drink was kept, returning with a tankard of ale for me. I offered thanks before taking a sip. “Are you in the mood tonight?” she asked.

I met her eyes and smiled. “For you three? Always. I’m sure you’re as frustrated as I am. I hate waiting.” I sighed again. “Despite the fact I haven’t been fighting, it is exhausting.”

Serana walked over and sat on my lap, wrapping an arm around the back of my neck, a soft kiss on my cheek. “Then maybe we should just… cuddle…”

“I can definitely do that.”

We each drank a couple of tankards, eventually sitting at the table, reminiscing about times past. I knew we all worried about the conditions Whiterun would be left in at the end of the battle. I was confident of victory, but while I had skill and my gift, I knew I’d also been lucky. All it would take is one well timed arrow to take me down.

Heading upstairs, the four of us undressed and slid under the furs. There was a little kissing, hands being naughty, and we eventually split into pairs, Aela and Lydia having a little fun, while my fingers got busy with Serana. She was happy with that, giving her a couple of rather nice orgasms before she snuggled into me. Aela and Lydia fooled around for a bit longer, putting on a show which Serana and I enjoyed. Lydia then realised I hadn’t enjoyed an orgasm, so insisted she blow me. I wasn’t going to refuse, and certainly didn’t last long, Lydia joking it was now unusual my cum ended up anywhere except in her pussy.

Eating breakfast together the next morning, a knock at the door wasn’t a real surprise. But the insistent banging suggested someone had important news. Opening the door to be greeted by Irileth, I immediately assumed it was important news. “Jarl Ulfric has been sighted at the Stormcloak main camp to the south. Jarl Balgruuf believes we will receive a message or emissary at some point today.”

“I’ll dress and head to Dragonsreach as soon as possible.”

“Very good. Just so you know, Jarl Balgruuf will ask you to remain at his side should Jarl Ulfric request a face to face meeting.”

“I figured as much. Thanks, Irileth.”

“I’ll see you soon, Dragonborn.”

Heading inside, I finished my breakfast before heading upstairs, quickly dressing myself in armour. Aela, Lydia and Serana joined me as I was already ready to walk out the door. I suggested there wouldn’t be an attack but it was bound to happen sooner rather than later.

“What would you tell Ulfric should you meet with him?” Aela wondered.

“I’ll warn him that, once he is defeated, I will make sure every city and province under his control falls until I’m standing at the gates of Windhelm. Attacking Whiterun is crossing the line. I didn’t want to involve myself in this. I thought I’d done enough but I guess I was fooling myself.” I walked around, giving each a kiss on the cheek. “I’m sure there won’t be battle today. But I would suggest light sleeping going forward. They won’t want to sit around and wait, and I don’t believe Ulfric will just lay siege. He’ll want to take the city in battle.”

Heading up to Dragonsreach, Jarl Balgruuf, Irileth and Commander Caius were waiting for me. To be honest, there wasn’t much we could discuss. It was a case of just waiting for a message to be sent by Ulfric. He would either send demands or he’d wish to meet face to face.

The message arrived immediately after lunch. Jarl Ulfric wanted a face to face meeting. As he prepared, I headed out into the city, immediately ordering archers and mages to the walls to oversee the meeting. I didn’t believe Ulfric would pull any dirty tricks. I believed he was an honourable man, so we would talk, it would go nowhere, then battle would eventually start, whether tomorrow or the day after. But I knew the wait wouldn’t last long.

Waiting at the gates, the horses from the stables had been brought in, so I would have one, as would Balgruuf, only Irileth joining us too. No way she was going to let Balgruuf out of her sight once past the gates, even if I was there. She took her duty seriously and would die to protect her Jarl.

“Open the gates!” I called, “Close them as soon as we pass!”

“Yes, Dragonborn!”

I glanced at Balgruuf. “Are you ready for this, my lord?”

“Aye, Dragonborn. I know what to expect. Let’s just get this over with so the fighting can finally start. If blood needs to be spilled to protect my city, so be it.”

The gates opened as I led the way through, Balgruuf following me, Irileth at his back. I heard the gates close as we followed the path down the hill. Ahead we could see the siege weapons and the soldiers of his army. Ulfric was already waiting for us, with a companion to either side of him. We eventually came to a stop perhaps six feet apart. We were all armoured. Weapons were sheathed. No-one moved their hands from their reins.

“Jarl Ulfric,” Balgruuf stated, “What brings you to the gates of my city? And why have you brought soldiers and toys along?”

Ulfric grinned, and shrugged. “A mere statement of my power, Jarl Balgruuf.”

“Say what you need, Ulfric. You should already know my response.”

Ulfric leaned forward slightly. “I’ll make this very simple, Balgruuf. You will open the gates of your city to my soldiers to prevent its unnecessary destruction. If you choose to fight, I will make sure the city burns and that you die along with it. You have two options, Balgruuf. Take the peaceful route, keep your head and your city safe. Refuse my generous offer, your city shall burn and you will die.”

“I believe you are being rather over confident, Jarl Ulfric,” I stated.

Ulfric looked at me. “I have every right to be confident. You are outnumbered. My catapults could lay waste to your entire city. You are one man, Dragonborn. And you can bleed like a man. And you can also die like one.”

I leaned forward, making sure his eyes never met mine. “I will warn you only this once, Ulfric. Take yourself, take your soldiers, take your weapons, and leave Whiterun Hold.”

“You jumped up little…” Galmar started to say, but Ulfric held up a hand.

“If you choose to fight, Ulfric, your army will die at the walls of this city. And once you’re defeated here, I will make it my solemn duty to destroy your armies, burn your cities, and then you will find me at the gates of Windhelm. Do you really want to put that to the test? I’ve defeated Alduin. I’ve defeated Lord Harkon. Unlike those two, you are just a man. You will bleed.”

Ulfric simply smiled. “I look forward to testing my mettle against the Dragonborn.” He looked at Balgruuf. “You refuse my generous offer?”

“I’m going to put this simply, Jarl Ulfric. I look forward to the day I join the Dragonborn outside the walls of your city. And next time, I will listen as he makes demands, knowing you will have no choice. I refuse your offer, Ulfric. You want my city; you’re going to have to earn it. But you will fail.”

We didn’t give him the chance to get the final word in, immediately turning our horses and heading back to the city quickly. Once through the gates, we dismounted and immediately put plans into motion. Archers and mages would now remain on the walls, taking different shifts, ensuring adequate protection all day and night. Those in the wall prepared themselves for the onslaught, many seeking out the priestesses of the temple. As Balgruuf and Irileth returned to Dragonsreach, I patrolled the city. Despite what lay on the other side of the wall, there was no real fear. Having lived through so many problems already, those who could fight, would. Those who couldn’t would find safety.

I slept early that night, knowing Ulfric wouldn’t delay. By the time I woke the next morning, it was still dark, and once I started moving, Lydia, Aela and Serana woke and joined me. We dressed quietly, all of us knowing that the attack would start as it was still dark, perhaps the first rays of light appearing over the horizon. The Stormcloaks would ensure fires would be started to provide targets.

“Aela, your archers along the wall are to target anyone approaching the walls with any sort of device to climb. Serana, mages are to target siege weaponry. Burn them if you can. If that’s not possible, then target those who are operating the machines.”

“Have you sent out scouts?”

I nodded. “Small parties, numbering no more than two or three. They will disable what they can. Most knew they probably wouldn’t return, but they do it to protect Whiterun.”

Heading out into the darkness of morning, I looked up to be greeted by a clear sky, millions of stars and the two moons above. Barley a cloud. Perfect conditions to launch an assault, to be honest. I headed to the main camp where Commander Caius waited. I issued the order for the men to be roused from sleep, but quietly. When, not if, Ulfric attacked, I wanted him to be over-confident that he would be catching us unawares.

It happened just as I thought. The light was just starting to brighten when there was a cry of alarm, gazing to see the first projectiles fired towards Whiterun. Bells started to ring to signal those who would fight to move, and for those who wouldn’t to get to what safety they could find. I kept calm as archers and mages headed to the walls while my soldiers started to file up quickly near the gates. The noise was already terrific, hearing the Stormcloaks war cry as plenty headed to the walls.

Standing in front of my own men, those who would be in the shield wall with me, I met plenty of eyes. They were confident, of course. I guess it helped the Dragonborn was alongside them. “Stay loose for now. The Stormcloaks are coming. We’ve seen the battering ram. First they have to haul it up the hill, and that won’t be easy. Archers and mages will be assaulting them as they. Then they have to get through these gates. They are strong, but won’t hold forever. But after all that, they will meet our shield wall. And it will be impenetrable!” My men roared at that. “We will spill Stormcloak blood today, men. They are our brothers and sisters, but they have chosen the wrong side. Jarl Ulfric has picked the wrong fight. Our wall will remain strong and against it the Stormcloaks will wilt and die. Win this day, men, and I promise you glory will await you in the end. We will end Ulfric’s march here, and tomorrow, we will march east in return. We will soon march all the way to the walls of Windhelm and return the favour. And the Dragonborn will lead you all to glory!”

The men positioned themselves by the gate, standing easy for now. I checked the walls, Commander Caius leading the defence. Hundreds of arrows must have been fired in both directions. We were already taking casualties. A few dead, a few wounded. The mages were proving their power, thunderbolts of fire being fired into the distance. Other spells were being used, but fire naturally caught the eye. More than one Stormcloak cried out as they were enveloped in flames. Projectiles continued to be fired into the city but, chancing a peek over the wall, I could already see catapults on fire.

Through all the madness, Jarl Balgruuf thought it be to join in. I could see Irileth at his side, almost pleading with him to return to Dragonsreach. I approached the pair as Balgruuf appeared on joining me at the shield wall. “My lord, are you sure this is safe?” I asked.

“This is my city, Dragonborn, and I will assist in its defence.”

“Your place is at Dragonsreach, my lord,” Irileth stated, almost exasperated.

“I am a Nord, Irileth. To sit back and do nothing is dishonourable. I could not show my face in Sovngarde if I left the defence of my city to others.”

Irileth looked at me. “Sorry, Irileth, but it is a Nordic thing.” I met his eyes. “Okay, my lord, you can fight. But you stay tight to me. Irileth, you stay tight to his other side. If the wall even looks close to breaking, you run to Dragonsreach, my lord. I’m not having your death stain my conscience.”

“Of course, Dragonborn.”

“I don’t like it. But I trust you,” Irileth added, “Lord, if you even get a scratch, you bet your arse I am dragging you out of the fight, even if I have to do it at sword point myself.”

Balgruuf just looked at Irileth with a grin. “And that’s precisely why you’re in the position you are. I agree. If it gets nasty, I’ll retreat.”

“Dragonborn, they’re sending in the ram!” Aela called.

I gave it some thought. “Let it come! Send everyone to the walls to prevent them being taken. We’ll handle those who come with the ram!”

I noticed movement above as my men started to shuffle, getting into position. We’d trained every day since I’d taken charge. It takes a hell of a lot for a shield wall to falter, and considering it would be unlikely cavalry would be used, it would take a stroke of luck or brilliant tactics for ours to crumble. The only way we’d fail is if nerves took hold.

Focusing on the gates ahead, the sound of battle behind dimmed as I concentrated on the object ahead. We waited with bated breath until there was the first slam of the ram against the gates, hearing the cries from the other side. Aela was keeping watch above, staying in cover and only peeking her head over the side. “How many, Aela?” I called.

She had a quick glance. “Well, I think Ulfric has kept most of his army for this.”

“Okay, if you want, find a few faces to bury some arrows. We’ll handle the rest.”

There were a few more slams of the ram before the gates started to crack. One or two men shuffled, perhaps feeling those last few nerves, but they calmed against quickly, remaining loose for the moment. Another hit, and this time the crack was louder. The wooden plank holding the gates in place started to splinter. I stepped back and joined my brothers and sisters in the shield wall. “Soldiers of Whiterun… Shield wall!”

It formed up, protection for legs, bodies and heads. I kept a space so I could see the gates and the wooden plank. It took three more solid hits before it broke completely. The ram would then be pulled back, another war cry from the Stormcloaks, and then gates opened up.

That’s when they would have noticed our shield wall. To their credit, they charged as one, immediately feeling the slam of bodies into my shield. As they hammered away with swords, axes, clubs and their own shields, we held the line, using the small gaps to thrust our swords through, finding armour, shields or skin. More often than not, a bloody sword was pulled back, the small gap immediately closed.

“Hold the line!” I roared, “Hold the line!”

“For Whiterun!” Lydia added.

The soldiers of Whiterun roared as the pressure increased. The Stormcloaks were brave in the face of our wall. They died bravely, but they still died. We took a few wounds, of course. No shield wall is ever perfect. Gaps would appear. Limbs would grow tired. Nerves took hold and some would simply falter. No-one retreated though. The wall stood firm.

Bodies started to pile up, the wounded, the dying and the dead. I noticed some Stormcloaks dragging away their wounded colleagues, to make space for their charge. I heard their own calls, to keep pressing, to find gaps. But I knew they hadn’t bargained on this. I had little doubt they believed the gates would have opened and it would have been a free reign of terror. Indiscriminate looting and killing, kill a few guards and soldiers, then they’d take Dragonsreach.

They lasted longer in the face of the shield wall than I thought they would. But when the pressure relented slightly, I gave the order. “Shield wall! Three steps forward!”

As a single unit, we pushed the Stormcloaks back, carefully stepping over the fallen. The pressure diminished again as I heard cries of retreat, hearing other demands that they stay and fight. Those retreating were smart. There was no chance of them breaking us now. The only problem I had was keeping the shield wall solid until the right time. I continuously checked, a sea of humanity pressed against us.

I waited and waited, my shield in position, my sword now running red with blood, until I figured it was time to release the pressure. When I heard a loud call for retreated, that’s when I issued a counter order. “Soldiers of Whiterun, press forward! Attack!”

An enormous roar broke out as the shield wall immediately broke apart and charged. Many Stormcloaks died where they had been standing. Many fought where they stood. But many others simply broke and ran. I cut down three or four before I was in almost open ground leading out of the city, checking to see I was being joined by plenty of soldiers and guards, and together we moved forward. Breaking out into the fields surrounding the city, it was carnage. Most of the catapults were now burning or had collapsed entirely. Bodies lay strewn across the ground, some with arrows sticking out of faces and chests, others no doubt the victims of magic attacks.

There was a loud roar from behind as the broken shield wall charged forward. As they ran to cut down the Stormcloaks, I took a look to see what was happening at the wall. More Stormcloak bodies lay piled against it. Mages continued to rain down spells, archers were looking for targets. In the distance, I could see Stormcloaks simply running away. As for any sign of Jarl Ulfric and his companions, there was no sign.

Lydia was beside me as I immediately sheathed my sword. My fight was over for now. As I watched plenty disappear into the distance, the sound of battle did slowly fade away. It was only then that our soldiers started to realise what was happening and there was more than one cry of victory. “Whiterun! Whiterun!” was the call.

I felt a presence alongside me, Jarl Ulfric looking rather pleased with things. He glanced my way before raising his sword. “Balgruuf! Balgruuf!” was the call.

Nodding, I unsheathed my sword and roared, hearing the call of my name the loudest of all.

 

---

Whiterun, the Empire, and the Dragonborn had won a great victory. We didn’t count how many Stormcloaks died at our walls. Mass graves were dug but they were buried with honour. They may be the enemy in a civil war, but they were all Nords. We would meet them in Sovngarde, where we would drink, eat and sing for eternity.

Word was sent to General Tullius the same day of our victory. I had no idea what he planned for me in regards to any future battles, but now that I had shown where my allegiance lay, I had a feeling I would now be involved until the bitter end. I’ll admit, part of me didn’t actually want to kill Jarl Ulfric. I believed killing or executing him would make him a martyr, and the fight would carry on in his name. There had to be a way of getting him to the negotiating table, to stand down and see reason. Maybe it wasn’t possible, and while I would fight him if necessary, I would hope sense would prevail.

There were no major celebrations in Whiterun. We’d lost many of our own people despite the success. Funerals took place daily over a couple of weeks, each body treated like the Hero of Whiterun they were. Families of the fallen were given rewards for their assistance. As for Whiterun itself, the catapults had brought misery and destruction. Numerous houses had been destroyed and would require rebuilding. A small tent city was formed, though Balgruuf promised the immediate start of building work, and no-one would be out of a home any longer than necessary.

As for myself, already quite popular in Whiterun, I think I was now definitely the most popular and respected men in the city. Even Balgruuf treated me with a deference unexpected from someone of his position. We had been friendly before but there was now a mutual trust and respect that would likely hold for the rest of our lives. “With your victory here, Ragnar, you’ve assured my support to become High King, and I know many others will see this victory and believe you would be the right man to take the reins, as it were.”

“Well, I’m not sure about that. I’m just glad we won. And I’m glad I could do it without needing to use my gift. The covenant agreed with the Greybeards remains intact for now.”

“What of Jarl Ulfric?”

“I’m sure Tullius has plans for him. And me, to be honest. But I need to return to Solitude. My home is there, my lord. Whiterun is now safe. Ulfric simply doesn’t have the power to launch another assault. He’s licking his wounds in Windhelm, wondering what to do next.”

“All I ask is that you don’ be a stranger, Ragnar.”

“Never, my lord.”

Planning to leave the morning after next, my girls were definitely conspiring about something. Ever since the battle, they had been more affectionate than usual. Lydia couldn’t keep her hands off me. I’d saved her home. To her, I was now… well, not to sound smug, but her hero. Aela… just loved me even more, I think. As for Serana, she’d seen me in action properly for the first time. I think she was just rather impressed by it all.

But that last night before leaving, it actually wasn’t with those three I spent the night with. We were in the Bannered Mare. Life had returned to Whiterun remarkably quickly despite everything, and whenever I walked into the inn, the reception was friendly and I’d learned quickly that I never had to spend a single. Whenever I offered to pay Saadia, she insisted Hulda would not accept my coin. Nor would she.

Ysolda and I had been friendly flirting for a number of years by now but it had only ever been that. I think there might have been a stolen kiss once or twice, but it had never been physical. That final night, sat back in my usual position, Lydia and Aela were chatting away with her, and the three kept glancing my way. Serana leaned into me. “They’re conspiring,” she whispered.

“I know.”

“You know, Ragnar, she does really like you. What do you think about her?”

“Always thought she was attractive.”

“Well, I think her intentions are obvious, and I think Lydia and Aela are organising it.”

“What do you think?”

“Ragnar, I think it’s obvious I don’t get jealous. And those two certainly won’t be.”

I sipped at my tankard and kept watch. There was plenty of laughing between the trio, and my suspicions were confirmed when the three eventually headed over to our table. Ysolda took the seat nearest me, shuffling across so we sat closer. “Ragnar…”

“Okay.”

She was surprised for a moment before smiling. “Seriously? I didn’t even ask.”

“Can I assume Aela and Lydia have been talking about me?” She nodded. “They obviously know about our… past together… that we’re friendly but it never seemed to be the right time?”

“I’ve always wondered why it hasn’t happened before,” she admitted

I glanced at Aela and Lydia. “You’re seriously okay with this?”

“Ragnar, I’m going to put this simply. You can fuck whoever you want. Trust me, we are not going to be jealous,” Lydia replied, “The attraction you have, no matter how much you deny it, is obvious. And trust me on this one too, Ysolda isn’t the only one who…”

“I know of a couple more, Lydia. But I seriously….” I shut up immediately and glanced at Ysolda. “You sure?”

She leaned over and kissed me, the sort of kiss that immediately suggested I shut the hell up and just go with it. She was a good kisser, I learned that immediately, dragging her over to sit on my lap. It didn’t take long to earn a whimper of pleasure, and that’s when I heard Serana suggest the three of them go home. “You’re going to spend the night at her house,” Serana stated, “We’ll see you in the morning.”

We gave it a couple of minutes before Ysolda stood up, took me by the hand, and led me out, hearing a couple of shouted comments for us to have fun that night. I was practically dragged towards her small house, turning and kissing her against the door, earning another slight whimper as I pressed against her. “Waited so long for this,” she breathed, as I leaned back to see her face in the moonlight.

“Hope it’s worth the wait.”

“Oh, your girls have already told me what to expect, Ragnar.”

She managed to unlock the door to lead us inside, and wasted no time taking me by the hand and leading her to the small bedroom. I’ll be honest, I’d waited a long time to see her naked. Normally, I would take my time, but I wanted her naked, and she giggled as I practically stripped off her clothes before immediately taking off her bra and panties. I stood back and just looked her up and down. She was beautiful, surprised she didn’t turn a little shy. She helped off my clothes, her hands immediately trailing up my arms and back, fingers trailing the scars left from years of fighting.

Once I was without clothing, one of her hands gently grasped my cock. “I’ll be honest, Ragnar, I’ve often thought about just doing this.”

“What?”

“Being like this with you. Just naked, your hands on my body, mine on yours. Sure, I really want to suck your cock right now, and I’d love nothing more than your mouth and cock between my legs, but it’s the simple things I’d often wonder about.”

I gave her a soft kiss. “Should have done this a long time ago.”

“Better later than never. Is this only a one-time thing or…”?

“I have my life up north now. But if the girls agree, and I’m in Whiterun alone…”

“Aela and Lydia were very friendly and understanding. You have some wonderful companions, Ragnar.”

“I know.”

She dropped to her knees and proved she could deliver one hell of a blowjob, at least. Technique was one thing. But enthusiasm was key. And Ysolda was nothing but enthusiastic, smiling constantly as her head bobbed up and down, stopping every so often to simply talk dirty to me, begging me to cum in her mouth. For a woman to do that the very first time was rather special indeed, so I was polite enough to warn her when I was close. All she did was rest her hands on my arse and move even quicker. Little wonder I came hard, hearing her squeal as the first couple of shots would have hit the back of her throat, and she didn’t stop until I felt empty. Even after that, she grabbed the base and licked me up and down, basically ensuring she’d cleaned me up completely before she sat back on her knees and looked up. “Good, Ragnar?”

I lifted her up and gave her a hug, feeling her head rest against my chest. “Outstanding, Ysolda,” I whispered.

“I’ve thought about doing that for a long time. I even thought I’d just crawl under your table in the inn and simply start blowing you. I figured that would get your attention.”

“You’ve had it for a long time, Ysolda. It was just never the right time for it to work.”

“And tonight?”

“Well, I think you should thank my girls tomorrow. They continuously prove to be more than understanding. I still think I’m a bastard but…”

“It’s obvious how much they love you, Ragnar. I think what you did to save us increased it.”

“And you?”

She leaned back and grinned, meeting my eyes. “Oh, I just fancy the fuck out of you, Ragnar, and want nothing more than your company tonight. And if it ever happened again, I won’t be saying no.”

Taken by the hand, I was led to her bed where making out resumed, but it was now my turn to show her my skills. Her body was… fantastic. I’d always thought her attractive, but underneath me, completely naked, I could only marvel at her. She definitely enjoyed what I was doing but we both wanted one thing, and that was my mouth between her legs. I teased and took my time as always, but she spread her legs wide, suggesting what she wanted, adding that she wanted me to eat her pussy and eat it now.

So I did.

Her noises were a complete turn on. Rather cute, to be honest. Almost a squeak at times, but then she released a long moan that made me stop, looking up with my eyes to see hers meeting mine, cheeks red, lips slightly parted, but her eyes spoke volumes. “Keep going,” she breathed.

So I did.

She was turned on as her first orgasm arrived quicker than I thought. I guess all the teasing before finally lowering my mouth to eat her out helped. What was enjoyable, apart from her taste, the fact she found was I was doing enjoyable in return, and the way her body moved as I didn’t stop, was the fact she demanded I keep going, sitting up slightly to hold my head in place. “Eat that pussy,” she moaned.

I love a woman in charge. So I kept on going, eventually forcing her to let go, watching her back arch slightly as I figured I’d help further by sliding a couple of fingers into her. “Oh fuck!” she cried out when I found that little spot all women have. I think she might have been trying to hold back her next one. Not possible when I was doing that. I thought it would have been too much after the second ripped through her, but she murmured for me to keep going. Sure, my jaw was starting to feel a little sore, but I think it’s been proven more than once I’ll happily go down on a woman all night.

She had three more before she needed to say enough was enough for the moment. All I did was take out my fingers, sucking those clean, before leaving soft kisses up her body, eventually meeting her hooded eyes. Reaching behind my head, she dragged me down to lay a soft kiss on my lips. “Worth the fucking wait, Ragnar,” she whispered.

“Been wanting to do that myself for a while,” I admitted, though I’m sure she’d figured that out already.

“Do that for all your girls?”

“Aye, of course.”

“No wonder they love you!”

Settling down on my back next to her, she rolled onto her side, fingers immediately trailing up and down my chest. Her hand was soon sliding further down my body, eventually teasing my cock, which was already hard, of course. Seeing that as an invitation, she wasted no time straddling my body and I watched her slowly lower herself down my cock.

I said nothing as I watched her happily ride me, resting a hand on my chest as she established a rhythm that hit all the right spots. Apart from a hand resting on her hip, the other caressing her body, I happily lay there, just providing the cock for her to enjoy. And now that she was in control, she could control her orgasms, at least. She rode me hard and fast, then slow and gentle, mixing it up, no doubt holding it back as long as possible. Doing all that was a real turn on as well.

“Are you going to cum in me?” she breathed.

“If you want.”

“I have potions. Anywhere else would be a waste.” She paused and smirked. “Well, except for my mouth, but I’ve already swallowed one load tonight.”

Once she had her first orgasm riding me, she leaned forward and kissed me before whispering for me to just fuck her. Both of my hands ended up on her arse and she smiled as no doubt a look crossed my eyes. “Am I getting fucked now? Is the Dragonborn going to pound my little pussy?” I growled, which earned another kiss. “Fuck me.”

Ysolda was well and truly fucked for the next five minutes. She cried out softly, moaned constantly, needing to kiss me all the time, before I couldn’t hold it back any further, burying myself completely before I pretty much exploded. It was one hell of an orgasm, the sort that caused a wave of tiredness to sweep across me. She simply rested on my chest, cock still buried inside her. I’d stay relatively hard and she seemed happy where she was.

I kissed her cheek. “That was worth waiting for, Ysolda,” I whispered.

“Hope it happens again,” she whispered back.

We took around twenty minutes to just cuddle before she ended up on her back, and I think it’s safe to say we made love second time around. The way she looked into my eyes, her fingers digging into my back, her heels resting just above my butt, she definitely liked me a lot. I liked her too. I think that second time was just for me as she didn’t seem to care about another orgasm. All she wanted was my cock inside her, sometimes slow and gentle, sometimes pumping her a little harder and faster. And when I came again, she simply wrapped her arms and legs around me, whispering how much she had enjoyed the night.

After cleaning up, we cuddled under the furs, Ysolda moulded against my body. She’d been in a great mood all night, eventually needing to spin around, a smile on her face. We made out for a little longer before admitting we needed sleep, shuffling towards me so her head rested under my chin, wrapping my arms around her, fingers trailing up and down her back. “I’ll have to thank your girls in the morning,” she stated softly.

“We’ll head to mine for breakfast. I’ll just sit there looking smug.” That made her chuckle, at least, and it didn’t take long for either of us to drift off.

The next morning, we dressed and headed straight for Breezehome. Aela, Lydia and Serana were already up. They took one look at Ysolda and started to chuckle. Ysolda simply grabbed my forearm and rested her head against me. “By Ysmir, what did you do to her last night?” Lydia asked.

“I’m wondering what you three did,” I retorted.

“Oh, pussy was on the menu last night,” Aela replied, “Serana is getting rather good at eating me out.”

I glanced at Serana, who definitely blushed. “Well, I was being eaten out by Lydia at the same time.”

“Aye, but I’ve got plenty of experience. I mean… there was Delphine for a long time…” I definitely looked at her in surprise. She smiled as she added, “Before it went pear-shaped, we were good together, Ragnar. And I do remember a few things rather fondly. That woman could eat pussy, that’s for sure.”

“Well, I’m just glad you all get along.”

We joined them at the table for breakfast, nibbling away, plenty of laughter as the girls shared some stories with Ysolda. But the whole idea of the night before was that we would be leaving that day, so once we’d finished, the final things were packed before we headed outside. I locked up Breezehome before we headed out towards the stables, Ysolda escorting us. I hugged her before mounting up. “When will you back?” she wondered.

“I don’t know. But when I’m back again, and if my girls don’t mind, we can have some fun.”

“If your girls want to join in next time…”

“You’d be interested?” Aela wondered.

“If it means I get some time with Ragnar again, definitely. He’s definitely surrounded himself with some beautiful women.”

“Oh, I like her already, Ragnar. We’re definitely inviting her next time we’re here,” Lydia stated.

I smiled. “I think you’re definitely invited next time I’m here, Ysolda. But I don’t know when. I’m sure we’ll see you again soon though.”

“Good luck with whatever comes next, Ragnar.”

“You too, Ysolda. Farewell.”

The four of us turned our horses towards the road leading west, glancing back once to see Ysolda waving at us before she turned to walk back into the city. With a last look at the walls that were now safe once again, we dug our feet into the flanks of our horses and began the long journey back to Solitude.

Chapter 60: Return to Riften

I had some welcome news on our return to Solitude. As soon as I opened the front door, Mirabelle ran towards me in floods of tears, but the smile on her face… She managed to say she was with child, and was further along than she could ever imagine. When asking how long, she said she was anywhere up to four months along. I was… staggered. Overjoyed, but staggered. Her tears almost got me going, while the others were overjoyed to hear the news.

Lydia headed straight out to see if she was with child as well. She’d admitted to feeling funny the past couple of weeks, so figured she might as well see if she too was with child. Mirabelle went with her, as did Aela, who I knew really wanted at least one child too. I sat with Haelga and Serana, sipping a tankard of mead, waiting for them to return. It took a couple of hours...

The smile on her face told me everything we needed to know. She was a month behind Mirabelle, according to the priestess.

I then looked at Aela. “It will happen,” I said, taking her hand and giving her a hug, “We’ll make sure of it.”

“Lots of sex?” she murmured.

“Whenever it’s time, I’m sure the girls won’t mind.”

“Of course not,” Mirabelle said, joining the hug, and it eventually ended up being all of us.

Mirabelle was… radiant after that. The smile never left her face. She’d unconsciously have a hand on her stomach whenever her mind wandered. Lydia was almost the same, though there was a little melancholy with her, knowing she had made plans with someone else. I tried my best to keep her mind off that. She had a house full of people that simply adored her, to keep her mind on the present and the future. And I was the father, which made her happiest of all.

Serana was in no hurry to be with child, while Haelga was still adamant she didn’t want any, talking with the girls about simply helping them when they finally gave birth. I guess we avoided any issues by the fact she still took it in the arse more often than not, making more than one joke that she couldn’t get pregnant buried in her other hole most of the time. Still, we’d pretty much picked up where we’d left off the first time. She was as kinky and open-minded as ever, as was I, and we simply had a lot of fun together.

As for Elisif, I visited her as soon as I could on my return to Solitude, though once she knew we were back, and we’d been victorious, she was not a stranger to our home, often joining us as soon as the sun disappeared. I spent a night alone with her within a week of returning, and she wanted to hear all about my fight with the Stormcloaks, and certainly enjoyed hearing my retelling of my conversation with Ulfric Stormcloak.

“I hate him,” she murmured, cuddling into me after a couple of hours of lovemaking, “I hate him. He murdered my husband. I’ll never forgive him for that.”

“We gave him a good fight and a bloody nose, Eli.”

“What will you do now?”

“I’m surprised Tullius hasn’t been to see me yet. I’ve given him my report but I guess I’ll be waiting. If he wants my help to end the war, so be it. But after that…”

“Ragnar, you are a warrior. I’m not the only one who wants a peaceful life, but you know who you are and that there are those out there who want to see you fall or fail.”

I glanced her way. “Maybe if I have a queen by my side…”

“It’s been discussed, Ragnar. I love this city and its people. But you are a good man, and it makes sense. And when the Moot is eventually called, and that’s what they decide, then I will…”

I turned onto my side and cuddled her into me. “The day after… I will be king, and you will be my queen.”

That earned me one hell of a kiss. “I love you,” she whispered.

“Despite…”

“Oh, I like all of them, Ragnar. I can’t wait until we have our own child too.”

“I’m going to have a lot of bastards.”

She couldn’t help chuckle. “It will be a house full of love, Ragnar. The only thing I wonder is, would they be Dragonborn too?”

“I honestly don’t know. I’ll find out once Mirabelle gives birth. Well, not that early. When they’re old enough, I’ll see if they have the gift. Might take them all the way to High Hrothgar, introduce them to the Greybeards.”

“You’re spending time with Mirabelle and Lydia?”

I couldn’t help grin. “Of course. Mirabelle is just… happy. So happy.”

“Good. We speak all the time, of course. I’m glad she was the first to find out. Her love for you…”

“It’s why I feel like an arsehole sometimes.”

She rested a hand on my cheek. “Ragnar, you are anything but. I know your past. Everything you have done since Helgen… There is a reason why you’re in bed with the Jarl of Solitude right now.”

“I was thinking it was my rugged good looks, adequate sized cock and rather talented tongue.”

She giggled, playfully slapping my shoulder. “Well, in addition to those things, you’re a good man at heart. I think you always have been. It was… circumstances that led you down some dark paths.”

I didn’t know what to say. It was simply a nice way to end the night, so I hugged her in close, whispered that I loved her, hearing her whisper back the same words, before we drifted off to sleep. Waking the next morning, we made love before breakfast, and my presence was now almost expected around the Blue Palace, no-one batting an eye when her stewards walked in to find me in bed with her. They never walked in us make love, or gods forbidding fucking each other senseless, but they couldn’t miss that faint whiff of sex in the air… plus the satisfied smile on her face whenever we were finished. She was happy and in love, and I think they approved no matter what.

It must have been a good month after I returned to Solitude from Whiterun when I was summoned to Castle Dour by General Tullius. I didn’t mind the summons now. I liked to think I had his respect at least. As for my opinion, he clearly had intelligence, and I liked to believe good intentions, for the Empire but also for Skyrim. The fact he trusted me after everything spoke of his character. We didn’t delve into personal topics whenever in conversation but we could meet each other in the eye and know the worth of each other. I’d saved Skyrim more than once. That was enough alone to earn his respect.

Two Imperial soldiers had come to our front door to request my presence. I told them I would head there quickly, returning to change into armour and arm myself. Not that I expected a fight, just wanted to look the part when I met with the General. My girls all looked concerned, Mirabelle and Lydia most of all. I didn’t blame them.

I took the pair of them in my arms. “We both know what he will probably request.” I laid a kiss on their forehead before meeting the eyes of the others. “Whatever the case, I do this myself. I have an idea of what’s coming next. What matters it that Mirabelle and Lydia are kept safe. Aela… I want you to…” She immediately hugged me as well. Serana and Haelga quickly joined in. “I just want you all to be safe,” I added quietly, “But this is my life for the moment.”

“Riften?” Haelga asked.

“Aye. He won’t send me to Winterhold. What’s the point? He knows I have history in Riften. I’ll see what he says, I’ll return here and let you know, then no doubt I’ll likely head south.”

“I’m tired of this,” Mirabelle whispered. The rest stepped back as I hugged her close. “I just want a family,” she added, holding me tightly. I looked at the others. Her voice spoke volumes.

“I’ve survived everything so far, Belle. I’m the Dragonborn. And Ulfric Stormcloak will not get the best of me.” I leaned back as she lifted her head from my chest, using a thumb to gently dry her cheeks. “I will be here to see my first son or daughter born, and they will not be the first.” She choked back a sob, holding me tightly, the others re-joining quickly. “But this is what I must do. He attacked Whiterun. I have a lot of love for that city. He now cowers behind his walls in Windhelm. I… must do what needs to be done. It’s my destiny.”

“You should go, my Thane,” Lydia stated. She never called me that nowadays. “You won’t be leaving yet. But you must do what is required. If it brings peace to Skyrim, then so be it.”

I nodded my thanks in her direction, gently extracting myself from Mirabelle, the rest hugging her as I quickly headed outside, taking a deep breath as I leant back against the door. A large part of me didn’t want to leave. I wanted to watch the belly of Mirabelle swell with our child, and then be present to hold her hand as she gave birth to what I knew would be the first of a few. I’d do the same for Lydia, Aela, Serana, and Elisif, when we eventually decided on children.

But I was the Dragonborn. And a quiet life was simply not something the Divines chose for me. Not just yet.

Walking into Castle Dour, I was now a familiar figure that I was always greeted with a polite nod of the head as I walked by guards and soldiers. Finding Tullius in what I knew he called his war room, he offered his hand, accepting it as he asked how I was. Formalities were few between us otherwise. We both knew why I was there.

“It’s time to bring this war to a close, Dragonborn, but before we move on Windhelm, we must ensure the rest of his territory has been subdued to ensure we cannot be flanked.”

“So you need to take both Winterhold and Riften, while ensuring he cannot raise further armies at the same time.”

Tullius actually smirked. “You think like an officer already, Dragonborn.”

“It just makes sense. Winterhold is small and relatively undefended. You don’t really need my help for that. Riften will take hard work, planning or… a surprise…”

He gestured to the map. “I know you spent time living in Riften, Dragonborn, so you know all its secrets. I’m sending two Legions into the Rift to eliminate the Stormcloak presence. But I would like to take Riften without destroying the city. The fact half of it is wood is a concern. I don’t want to see it burned to the ground. So I’m going to ask you a favour, to rely on some talents I know you have.”

“Subterfuge, General?”

He nodded. “If we can take the palace without bloodshed, or at least without blood staining the fields surrounding the city… And I don’t wish to see a long siege, resulting in the senseless deaths of the inhabitants. If we can take the city as quickly and cleanly as possible, then we can make our final move on Windhelm.”

“Your plans for Ulfric Stormcloak?”

“He is a traitor to the Empire.”

“Do you not empathise with his viewpoint? We’re all Nords here, General. Talos is our god. The Empire signing that agreement… Is the Emperor really surprised that it sparked this?”

“Empathy or not, he still raised arms against the Empire. We cannot appear weak in the face of such treason.”

“Killing him will make him a martyr to the cause. Even those who support the Empire may think execution a step too far.”

“Are you suggesting something, Dragonborn?”

“We take Windhelm. We must crush his armies, make sure he cannot raise a force against the Empire again. Neuter his power. But… bring him back into the fold.” I paused and met his eyes. “How long do you really think the peace will last with the Thalmor?”

“We cannot afford a war right now, Dragonborn. Nor can they.”

“But it is unlikely that peace will remain. The Thalmor clearly have plans. And they stride around Skyrim like they own the place. What the Nords of Skyrim need to know from the Empire is that you listen to us, particularly our grievances in regards to who we should be allowed to worship.”

“It’s unlikely the Emperor can change his mind. If he allowed the worship of Talos… It was almost the main demand of the Thalmor, but we both saw the reason why. It was to drive a wedge between the Nords and the Empire. Devious bastards.”

“Worked a charm though.” I sighed. “Anyway, I think that’s for later. First, Riften. If you wish, General, I can start thinking about plans to take it. Let me know when your Legions are on the march, but I think I know how to take it over without too many casualties.”

“When can you leave?”

“Tomorrow. I can enter and leave the city without a problem. No-one will be suspicious of me.”

“Okay, do that. The Legions are currently being organised. I will hold them back until I receive word from yourself regarding the situation. While you focus on Riften, I’ll make sure our forces take Winterhold, maybe keep Ulfric busy in the north so it makes things slightly easier for you in the south.” Before I walked out, I thought of one final question. “Obviously the current Jarl needs to be replaced. Who will replace her?”

“Maven Black-Briar. She’s been a friend of the Empire for many years.”

I managed to hold back to the smirk. An ally within the walls already was just perfect. I would speak to her before making the move.

Heading home, word must have reached Elisif already, as the six women in my life were all sitting at the table, waiting for my return. Sitting down, they knew what I was going to tell them. I was mostly worried about how Mirabelle would react… To my surprise, she smiled and grabbed my hand. “I overreacted, Ragnar. It happens when one is with child. Emotions are all over the place.”

“Sure?”

“Will you want any of the others to go?”

“No, this is something I’ll do myself. Or I’ll call in a few favours.”

“Then I’ll have your girls here with me, Ragnar. Lydia is going through the same thing as me. She just holds all the tears in better.” I looked at Lydia and she looked ready to giggle. “She’s putting a brave face on things,” Mirabelle added.

“When do you leave?” Aela asked.

“Tomorrow. The sooner I leave, the sooner I return. Though I head to Riften first, no doubt I’ll be expected to assist with any assault on Windhelm. After that… I would hope for at least a little peace and quiet.”

“You were always bound to be dragged into all this,” Lydia stated, “Frankly, you’ve done well to stay out of it until now.”

“Ulfric forced my hand by attacking Whiterun. I guess I should see this through to the end like everything else I’ve found myself involved with.”

“How long do you think you’ll be gone?” Mirabelle asked, “Not too long?”

“I will aim to have Riften in Empire hands as quickly as possible. After that, I don’t think Tullius will want to delay too long. He’ll surround Windhelm and hope Ulfric sees sense in not wanting a siege. Helps that he lost plenty of men and equipment due to his assault on Whiterun. I guess we might need to really give his armies a good battering out in the field somewhere. I guess we’ll see.”

That night was interesting as I ended up sharing a bed with Mirabelle and Aela. All my girls were aware of how close I was with the former, while Aela simply wanted sex as she was sure it was the right time. I don’t think she was desperate, not yet, but even Mirabelle cuddled her after Aela and I made love, assuring her that it would happen. Placing one of Aela’s hands on her own belly, Mirabelle whispered, “Life is growing inside me, Aela. And it will happen for you soon. A daughter, just like I know you want. Keep your line going.”

“A daughter like her mother, and a son like his father,” Aela whispered, looking at me, “How many do you want, Mirabelle?”

“More than two,” she replied, looking at me with a cheeky grin, “Ragnar knows that already, of course.”

“Definitely going to need a bigger place,” I stated, chuckling away.

“Well, if you do become High King, who says you have to remain in Solitude?” Aela said.

“Hmmm. Good point. Call in a few favours, build a… mansion. The Blue Palace is big though. And there’s an entire wing that isn’t in use. I’ve asked Eli about that but she hasn’t really given me a straight answer yet.”

The next morning, all six girls followed me to the stables outside of the city. Even Elisif joined us, flanked by a half dozen city guard, though they knew I’d fight off the entire Stormcloak army to keep her safe. They knew I wouldn’t do anything stupid, simply asking that I return to them safe and sound as always. I assured them that I’d finish the job in Riften and return to Solitude before doing anything else.

Mounting my horse, I blew them a kiss before turning my horse in the direction required and began the long ride to the other side of Skyrim. I stopped at Whiterun that evening, only making it through the city gates once the torches had been lit, heading straight for the Bannered Mare for a meal and a drink. Ysolda saw me enter alone and made a beeline straight for me. Once I told her that both Mirabelle and Lydia were with child, she backed off a little. “Would they mind?” she wondered.

“If they’re not with me, they know I might make a friend. Or reacquaint myself with an old friend,” I replied, before adding, “Though things are different. Mirabelle and Lydia are pregnant.”

That made her smile. “I’m amazed at how tolerant they are.”

“You and me both, Ysolda. But they all appear genuinely happy with the arrangement, particularly the five that live together. Elisif can’t live with us full-time considering her position.”

That made her laugh. “Still can’t believe you’re sleeping with the Jarl of Solitude.”

“She’s… lovely. Absolutely beautiful. Far more intelligent than given credit for.”

In the end, we both had a desire to be together again, and any hesitation Ysolda may have felt disappeared once I was inside her, though only having spent a good half hour with my mouth between her legs first, appreciating the fact she was a natural redhead and her scent drove me wild. Ysolda wanted nothing more than to be on her hands and knees, begging me to just fuck her. It was intimate, yes, but after finally giving into temptation the last time, this second time was probably even better.

I had to wake with the sun the next morning to make it to Riften within the day. Ysolda escorted me to the stables, and we enjoyed a final embrace before mounting up. “I had a great time last night, Ragnar. In both the tavern and then what we did afterwards.”

“If I’m ever here alone, I’ll clear it with my girls for us to have some fun, at least until the moment someone sweeps you off your feet.”

She sighed. “Happened once, Ragnar. Now that I’ve been with you, I will be comparing all the time.”

“I’m just glad we finally did, Ysolda. Shame it took so long for us both.”

A final kiss and I mounted up, looking back more than once to see her wave, watching me until I disappeared over the horizon. I certainly spent half the time smiling to myself for a number of reasons. Ysolda was lovely, though during our conversation between fucking the night before, I was left thinking she wouldn’t have been interested in joining me up north. But I was generally still smiling about the news regarding Mirabelle and Lydia, and I still had fingers crossed Aela would soon be given good news too.

I passed more than one Stormcloak patrol between Whiterun and Riften. I thought they would have attacked me straight away, as my face was rather well known by now, but I passed by each one with barely a glance received. I knew of at least three camps on route as well, figuring they may be emptier than before their attack as I was adamant Ulfric had thrown significant numbers of men and material towards taking over the city.

Making it to Riften stables before the sun disappeared, I left my horse with Shadr as always before wandering in. The guards took a look at me then ignored me as always. Stopping a few paces inside, I looked between the Bee and Barb, Mistveil Keep and Black-Briar Manor.

Heading to Black-Briar Manor, I knocked on the door and waited for it to open. I was greeted by the face of one of her sons. I didn’t know them that well, but I knew Sibbi was bald, and that was who answered. I knew of his reputation, and didn’t like him based on that alone, but he was polite to me when asking who I was after. “Mother is in the dining room,” he said, standing to the side.

“Thanks.”

Maven usually played it cool and never looked surprised, but she definitely didn’t expect to see me at the doorway leading into the dining room. Gesturing to the nearest seat, I sat down as she asked, “What brings you to me this time, Ragnar?”

“Do you correspond often with General Tullius?”

Her eyes narrowed but she obviously thought about who I was and what I was capable of. The eyes returned to normal, replaced by a smirk as she stood up and closed both sets of doors leading into the dining room, before returning to her seat. “I keep him abreast of the situation in this Hold, Ragnar. Word obviously reached me about what you did in Whiterun. I’m sure your presence here will certainly provoke questions.”

“I’m here on behalf of the General. He wants Riften, and if it can be taken peacefully, even better. I might be Dragonborn but I’m still only one man. I’ll need help to maintain control until his legions arrive.”

“And you’re here because?”

“Tullius wants you to take over once I… depose the current Jarl.”

For once, Maven didn’t have a response. I honestly don’t think she expected it. She took a few seconds to take in the news before replying. “When will you make a move?”

“As I said, I will need assistance so I’m going to head down and see if Bryn and the others are willing to help.

“When do you plan on moving?”

“Tullius will send a message when his legions are in place, no more than a few days according to our last meeting. How many are working for the Guild now?”

“I don’t know exact numbers, Ragnar. I ensure they’re protected but I don’t involve myself that deeply.” She paused a moment, clearly thinking. “When you make your move, you’ll need to take care of any Stormcloak sympathisers in the city as well. There are a few around. I can give you a list of names by tomorrow morning. Meet me in the Bee and Barb. We can discuss this further.” Standing up, I was just about to walk out when she added, “Ingun still asks after you, Ragnar.”

I turned and made sure my face was rather blank. “Is she still with Saerlund?” The smirk returned, and her eyes, told me everything I needed to know. “Why did it end?”

“She would rather focus on her alchemy.”

“And your opinion on that now?”

“She’s… got talent, I’ll give her that. I’ll let her know you’re in town.” She looked me up and down. “She could certainly do a whole lot worse than you.”

“I think there was a compliment in there somewhere, Maven. Anyway, I’d better go see Bryn. I’ll see you tomorrow morning.”

I thought about using the secret entrance near the graveyard, but thought I might catch someone by surprise and end up in an awkward position. So I headed through the Ratway, glad that the sewers remained empty as I arrived at the door of the Ragged Flagon. Walking inside, I noticed immediately that it was far busier than the day I first arrived. Dirge still looked stupid but mean in his position, though even he managed to look surprised upon seeing me.

“Boss?”

“I’m not the boss, Dirge.”

“What brings you here?” He stood a little straighter, no doubt his feeble mind trying to work things out. “You’re not here to cause trouble?”

“Just here to see Bryn, Dirge. Calm yourself.”

He stood to the side as I walked over the small crossing. Vekel was behind the bar. His call of my name caused most conversations to halt, and a few old friends were soon their feet to welcome me, hand shaken, slaps on the back all round. Karliah couldn’t resist giving me a tight hug, while even Vex looked pleased to see me. Not that we’d even fallen out, but she’d been disappointed when I chose to leave the life.

With tankard in hand, I took a seat with Brynjolf, Delvin, Karliah and Vex, grinning at the old guard who were still around. “What brings you here?” Brynjolf asked.

“Before I answer that, I guess you know all about me, right? Who I am? I honestly can’t remember.”

“We know who you are…. Dragonborn,” Karliah said.

“Okay, so obviously there’s a lot of shit going on around Skyrim, and I’ve been in the middle of a lot of it. Why am I here? The Empire wishes to take control of Riften.” I noticed a few shared glances. “Any of you care about the civil war?”

“Well, no, to be honest,” Brynjolf replied, “In fact, considering our line of work, we’d like to see it ended. Get trade flowing, that way there’s more coin and… well, you know the drill.”

“You’re here about the civil war? On the side of the Empire?” Karliah asked.

Nodding, I replied, “Yes. Not sure if any of you have an allegiance, but there is a good reason why I’m here now. General Tullius has requested my assistance and would prefer to take the city without a battle. He certainly doesn’t want to see the city in flames. So that’s why I’m here now. Good reason too. Maven Black-Briar will become Jarl and, considering the relationship between herself and this guild, I’m sure you can see the benefits.”

“What do you need us to do?” Delvin wondered.

“I’m sitting down with Maven tomorrow morning to go over a list of targets, but I’m aiming for in around three to four days’ time, we strike at night, eliminating any Stormcloak sympathisers. I don’t mean kill, I just mean so they can’t raise an alarm. Then we take Mistveil Keep.”

“City guards?” Vex asked.

“Defend yourself when necessary. It can’t and won’t be bloodless, but if we can do this with minimum losses, then it will be a good thing. How many do you have down here now?”

“Thirty or so. More than enough for what you’re planning,” Brynjolf replied, “After what happened with Mercer, we make sure we interrogate each and every individual. If there’s even a sniff of something we don’t like, we watch them carefully. Sometimes… measures need to be taken.”

“Can I count on your assistance?”

They all shared a glance, Vex, Karliah and Delvin nodding. “Sure thing, Ragnar. I think some of us still owe a favour or two,” Brynjolf replied.

I waved that away. “Not necessary, but consider any slate clean once Riften is in the hands of the Empire.”

“Didn’t have you picked as getting involved,” Karliah said.

“I didn’t plan on it, but Ulfric attacked Whiterun. I wasn’t going to stand by and let it happen. So I help take Riften, then we march north. This could all be over within a matter of weeks.”

“Where are you staying while you’re here?” Karliah asked.

“I hadn’t given it a thought. You still living in my old place, Bryn?”

“Aye.”

“Care to stay at Nightingale Hall?”

I took a sip from my tankard, meeting Karliah’s eyes over the edge. She simply returned a smile. “Anyone would think you’re suggesting something, Karliah?”

“Should we be present for this?” Delvin asked.

I smiled as Karliah laughed. “Delvin, I think everyone here knows Ragnar and I were intimate at one time. That definitely wasn’t a secret.” She took a sip from her goblet. “So, interested?”

“Aye,” I replied, “You do know I’m…”

“I don’t know exactly what you’re up to, Ragnar, but I know you have other lovers.”

I ended up enjoying a couple of tankards with the old gang, others wandering in from the other area to say hello and join us. I filled them in with everything I’d been up to, surprised to hear I was now living in Solitude, though pleased my personal issues had been resolved for the most part. As for the Thieves Guild, they still worked by the tenets I’d set in place. Coin and jewels flowed, and they were still thieves at the end of the day, but no blood was ever spilled, and they didn’t rob from the poor. Brynjolf explained they had expanded links with Cyrodiil and were now looking at opportunities to the north. I joked, stating I didn’t mind what they did, long as they didn’t try and rob me.

It was late by the time I left with Karliah, walking hand in hand out of the gate, just like old times. She leaned into me as it was rather cold, wrapping an arm around her in return. The entrance was still hidden away, but as we walked deeper into the hall, it was obvious she had been busy. “Don’t get many visitors,” she said, escorting me to her own room, “Brynjolf and I are still Nightingales, of course. You are too, I guess, though I think your soul belongs to numerous Divines and Daedra by now.”

“You’re right.”

Her bedroom was tastefully decorated and it was clear she’d been thieving items of quality. Turning towards me, she stepped forward and rested her hands on my chest, looking up. She was still gorgeous. “Mirabelle and Lydia are with child,” I said, “Just so you know before we start. Some might find it… off-putting to be here with me like this knowing that. So, you know me, always honest.”

“Do you want me, Ragnar?”

“Right now? Absolutely. But I’ve liked you from the day we met.”

“You were just too damned tempting in the end, Ragnar.”

It was a great evening, both of us knowing it might happen again while I was in Riften, but it was simply two old lovers reconnecting after a long time, also knowing there was no future. It would be a bit of fun and that was it. She still beautiful when naked, still made those same sweet little noises when I ate her out, and wanted nothing more from me than to be on my back as she rode my cock through orgasm after orgasm, and she could do things that certainly kept me nice and hard until I simply had to cry enough with her.

Walking back into Riften together the next morning, she headed for the guild as I wandered into the tavern. Maven was upstairs, a reminder of our first meeting. Taking a seat next to her, I explained my idea about using friends from the guild, which she approved, not that I needed it. She handed me a list of known Stormcloak sympathisers, and a smaller list of those who had ties to the Empire.

“When do you plan to strike?”

“Three days from now. Thinking between midnight and dawn. Catch them off guard. Most armies don’t attack during the night. Too much can go wrong. There’s only me and a few thieves, though they’re all talented in their own right. Long as we take the Keep, I’m happy.”

“I’ll send someone out to locate Tullius and his legions.”

“They should be here by the time we strike. All I need to do is hand the city over to them and yourself.”

“I know you’re not doing this for me, Ragnar. Why are you involved?”

“Honestly, I probably didn’t have a choice in the end. It was the will of the gods. And it was about time to end this, one way or the other. I never entered Skyrim all those years ago intending on joining the Stormcloaks. I didn’t care about the civil war. Wasn’t my problem.”

“Well, once I’m made Jarl, Ragnar, I think I’ll definitely owe you a favour. A big one.”

I gave her a look. “Well, I might just call that in one day, Maven.”

She sat back and looked me up and down. “Well, I can certainly see what Ingun sees in you at least. Certainly have achieved many things of note.”

“I think that’s the nicest thing you’ve ever said to me.”

She smirked. “I don’t give out compliments easily, Ragnar, but… You put the guild back on its feet, ended the dragon menace, and now look ready to give me a title in addition to the power I already wield. What do you expect in return right now?”

Nothing, to be honest.”

“Nothing?” I nodded. She actually laughed. Don’t think I’d heard or seen that before. “You are most unusual at times.” She stood up. “I best not dilly-dally here all day, Ragnar. I have other matters to attend to. I’ll stay clear for now. Give me a heads up when you’re on the verge of striking and I’ll make sure my family is safe, at least.”

“I’ll send word.”

Once she departed, I found myself with little to do except wander the city. I counted up how many guards were on shift during the day, and figured it might be slightly less during an evening. I knew the small gate leading out to the docks was locked of an evening, so that wouldn’t be a real problem. Spending the early evening in the Bee and Barb, I headed out again late at night to check the guard again, this time noting patterns of movement in addition to their numbers and where they were positioned. I was left confident we’d manage to take the city without too much of a fight. Most of them looked rather bored and lazy.

Returning to the Bee and Barb and the room I’d taken for the night, I was just getting ready for sleep when there was a light knock on the door. I couldn’t help grin as I opened it to reveal who was waiting for me. “Maven send you?” I wondered.

Ingun smiled. “No. She just mentioned you were in town and… Well, I don’t think you have company this evening, do you?”

“I don’t.”

“Would you like some?”

“If you’re that company, then yes, I’d like that very much.”

Ingun and I hadn’t been intimate in a long time. But as we undressed, we spoke about times past fondly, and it didn’t take long to figure out what we both liked. She’d obviously bathed and also shaved before coming to see me, as I couldn’t help express a little surprise at her bald pussy. But the fact it glistened in the candlelight suggested she was rather turned on by what I’d already done.

“I just wanted you to fuck me again,” she whispered.

So that’s what Ingun Black-Briar got that evening. She was fucked by the Dragonborn, and it lasted a good couple of hours, her legs pushed back, just utterly pounding her, enjoying the cries of delight she made. Good thing she took a potion the next morning, otherwise I would have received news within a few months, letting me know she was with child too.

Lying back with her the next morning, I couldn’t help chuckle as I admitted she was the third different woman I’d been with in a matter of days. “Well, isn’t that normal, Ragnar,” she stated, snuggling into my side. I certainly appreciated her soft skin compared to mine.

“It is, but that’s due to the arrangement I have.”

“Well, I don’t care who you’ve been with before. I just had to enjoy at least one night with you before you go again.”

“Glad you arrived at my door, Ingun.”

“Haven’t been fucked like that in a long time. Gods, my pussy is going to be sore today. Saerlund… lovely man but I found myself thinking of what you’d do to me at times.”

“Nice to be thought of so fondly.”

That made her scoff before she giggled again. “Want to fuck my mother?”

“What?” I exclaimed.

“Would you be willing to fuck Maven Black-Briar?”

“What in oblivion has made you ask that question?”

“Because when we were talking last night, I was left with the distinct impression that she… well, likes you a little bit. Well, that’s putting it mildly. I think she’s rather attracted.”

“I like my balls where they are. I might be Dragonborn, and she doesn’t scare me, but… there are even people I’d rather not fuck with.”

“So the idea of fucking an older version of me doesn’t appeal?”

“Can I be honest and admit I’ve never really given it a thought? We have a working relationship. That’s all.”

“Shame. I think mother needs a good deep dicking.” I couldn’t help chuckle at the description. “Would probably make her smile a little bit more. Take the edge off if you make her cum a few times.”

“This is your mother we’re talking about, Ingun.”

She shrugged and met my eyes. “Just being honest. Best way I found to relieve stress is making myself orgasm. Feel much better and clear headed afterwards.”

“Okay, why is the thought of you masturbating a turn on?”

That made her grin, her hand reaching around the back of my head so I could kiss her… then we fucked one last time before breakfast. I don’t think she was quiet as we received one or two glances from our fellow patrons while we ate a hearty breakfast. She headed off to work afterwards, leaving me with time to fill, so I headed out of the gates and into the surrounding countryside. I’d explored it before but it had been a long time since I’d spent time in the area.

I didn’t have to wait long until it was time. Maven was obviously sending messages to the approaching legions, which were being replied to. I was in the Bee and Barb four days after my arrival when I was summoned to her manor. She was in her study, taking a seat opposing her as she passed across a letter. The instructions were fairly simple.

Take Riften that evening. Ensure minimum civilian casualties. To signify the city was now occupied by friendly forces by dawn, fire one fire arrow. If not, ensure two fire arrows are fired to warn the approaching legions.

“Looks like we’re on the precipice of change, Ragnar,” she stated once I handed back the letter, “The legions are camped to the west. They avoided coming through Shor’s Stone to avoid the fort between Riften and there. That will have to be captured one the legions march north.”

“I’ll start organising Bryn and his people. I trust him but there are a million things that can go wrong tonight.”

“I understand you don’t really like using that gift of yours.”

“Not against men. It’s a… long story, but I don’t wish to abuse my gift. It would earn the ire of the Divines. And I’m not someone who wants power.”

“Yet, from what I’ve been told, you may end up holding it.”

I gave her a glance, but the fact she would be aware of the machinations going on behind the scenes didn’t come as a shock. She had the ear of the rich and powerful throughout the Empire. But I had a feeling that, given our prior relationship, she would perhaps be a voice of reason at any future Moot. If the Empire wished for me to be High King, she would vote that way.

Maven proposed a toast, but I didn’t want to tempt fate. I’d been through far too much in my life by now to do something like that. So Maven simply wished me well as I left. I headed straight down to the Ratway and the Ragged Flagon, where Brynjolf was issuing final instructions. He looked at me expectantly as I gazed over his assembled teams. The plans were already in place. I was confident it would work. It would barely raise a sweat, to be honest.

But I said the words he and the others were all waiting for.

“Tonight, we move. Tomorrow morning, Riften will be in the hands of the Empire once again.”

Chapter 61: Long Time Coming

Not to sound arrogant, but taking over Riften was easier than I anticipated.

We made our move between midnight and dawn, definitely at that time of the evening when guards are bored and tired, and the city was otherwise silent. I split the thieves into small groups, ensuring two to three to take each guard. They all had the same instructions. Disable and detain the guards where possible, but they were entitled to defend themselves, using lethal force, if necessary.

Others were sent to the homes of known Stormcloak sympathisers. They were under strict orders not to kill. Knock them out if necessary but do not spill blood. Thankfully, they all followed that order.

I stayed out of the way at the beginning, leaving Brynjolf and his small teams to take down each guard around Riften. Some were alone and easier to take down, others did work in pairs. There was one raised alarm, thankfully only another guard going to search the disturbance, finding themselves gagged and bound with the two already taken.

The difficult part was taking the Keep and the barracks. Most guards who slept there would be asleep, Brynjolf leading most of his people off there as I opened both doors into the Keep. There were two guards who noticed my approach, flanked by half a dozen thieves. They attacked immediately. I didn’t move from the doorway, the thieves taking them down for me.

But it hadn’t taken place without making noise, and I wasn’t surprised when Harrald, son of Jarl Laila, and Unmid Snow-Shod, her housecarl, appeared through the doorway near her throne. “What is the meaning of this?” Unmid demanded.

Unsheathing my weapon, I pointed it at Unmid. Harrald didn’t concern me. He was all talk, no action. Unmid was a warrior. I’d shared a tankard with him in the Bee and Barb more than once. He had the scars to prove his bravery. I lowered the sword at my side, but I noticed his eyes look down before meeting mine again. “If you stand down now, Unmid, no further bloodshed need occur.”

He already had weapon in hand. “You traitorous bastard,” he growled.

“Let’s kill him!” Harrald cried.

I glared him. “Boy, you won’t get three swings at me before I take your fucking head. Pipe down. The adults are conversing.” I looked at back at Unmid. “If you wish to fight, so be it. But by dawn today, Riften will be in the hands of the Empire. Jarl Laila will be in charge no more, though there is no intent to kill her. You cannot prevent any of this happening. It is your choice if you wish to die in vain to prevent it.”

He had my immediate respect for charging at me. He was a Nord warrior, brave, honest, and most importantly, loyal. He had talent with his axe. He was quick for a big man. With all the furniture, it was difficult to find space, eventually backing out and around so we fought on grass. I heard more sounds and figured the others were taking care of Harrald, though my eyes remained on Unmid.

If he hadn’t been so angry, he would have been able to show his talents, but he was angry, his blood was up, and that’s when a warrior makes silly mistakes. I kept him back until the opening prevented itself. I didn’t want to kill him straight away, I didn’t want to kill him at all to be honest, so disarmed him first. But he kept fighting even without his axe, almost clawing at my eyes. Putting my forehead into his nose, I heard the crunch of cartilage before he finally fell back onto the ground, putting the tip of my sword at his throat. “Stand down,” I demanded, “Your death will be unnecessary.”

“Standing aside brings dishonour. I will always be loyal to my lady.”

“And the men and women around me recognise that. But your death is not necessary for what is about to happen. I assure you, Sovngarde will still await once you have taken your last breath.” I glanced away, noticing Brynjolf and Delvin nearby, a nod from Brynjolf suggesting all was well within the barracks. “Bind his wrists behind his back,” I ordered, gesturing at Unmid, “Treat him with the respect earned as a fellow warrior.”

“Aye, Dragonborn,” Brynjolf replied.,

“Karliah, Vex, with me. Time to deal with the Jarl.”

No surprise her door was barricaded. Anuriel, her steward, was dragged out of her quarters and escorted downstairs. Saerlund walked out of his room and immediately grinned in my direction, understanding what was going on. He happily walked downstairs to wait for whatever happened next.

I knocked on the door. “Jarl Laila, open the door in the name of the Empire. It’s over, Laila.”

I was expecting to have to knock down the doors with my Thu’um, but there were a couple of clicks and the doors opened. All Laila did was walk back to her bed, taking a seat. She’d obviously been woken up by all the noise and had managed to throw on a fine jacket, but she was clearly still wearing nightclothes underneath.

“Harrald?” she asked.

“He’s got a few bruises but he’s alive,” I replied.

“Unmid?”

“The same. Brave man. Willing to die for you.”

She sighed. “Considering you’re now here, I wonder if I deserve such loyalty.” She looked up and met my eyes, still slightly defiant. “What becomes of me?”

“That is for General Tullius to decide. But you will not be executed. That will send the wrong message.”

“And who replaces me?”

“Maven Black-Briar.”

That earned the clearest snort of derision I’d ever heard. “I should have known that bitch would stab me in the back. If she was here right now, I’d spit in her face. I’ve tolerated her presence for so long… Should have known. Should have seen it coming.”

I stepped forward, offering my hand. “Come, Jarl Laila. Best get things wrapped up quickly before people start to wake.”

Of course, a small crowd had already formed outside. I had Karliah fire an arrow into the sky to signal to the legion the city was now secure. Otherwise, it wasn’t up to me to make any sort of speech to the civilians, though a few recognised me and probably figured out what was going on. Once the sky started to brighten, Maven made her appearance, the crowd parting as she made her way up the stairs, joining her as she walked into the building.

She remained silent for a little while, disappearing upstairs, no doubt to take stock of things, before returning. She sat down on the throne and only then did she allow herself to smile. “Oh yes, you definitely have a friend now, Ragnar Dragonborn,” she said quietly.

The Imperial Army wasted little time arriving in force to secure the town, watching as soldiers swarmed in, while General Tullius and Legate Rikke joined us in Mistveil Keep. The doors were closed as Maven and Tullius sat down to discuss the immediate situation. The civilians outside were rather calm, and anyone who might have caused trouble was under guard. As for myself, Tullius simply thanked me for taking the city with as little bloodshed as possible, but we both knew there would have to be a response from Ulfric. Holding him off at Whiterun was one thing, actually taking one of his cities was another.

“Winterhold will be within our grasp in a week,” he added, “Then it’s a case of taking Windhelm.”

“Ulfric will want to meet us on the field,” Rikke suggested, “He’s a Nord and will want to die a martyr to the cause if he knows victory cannot be achieved.”

I looked at Tullius, who remembered our conversation. “He might give us no choice, Dragonborn. Looks like many are willing to die for the cause.”

Rikke disappeared, returning moments later with a map of Skyrim, the four of us hovering around it. “Okay, where would he be willing to meet us on the field?” I asked, “It would have to be flat. And there are not too many areas between here and Windhelm that offers that.”

“There, to the north,” Rikke stated, pointing north of Riften, “It’s not exactly what he’d want, but it’s open enough.”

“That’s if he forces open battle,” I replied, “He might just hunker down in Windhelm and wait for the armies to arrive.”

Tullius scratched his chin. “He’ll be getting desperate. First he loses any chance at Whiterun, now he’s lost his second most important city. He may decide a final battle will decide the outcome, but whatever he sends at us, we can match and have more in reserve. Forcing us into a siege may give him time to rebuild, though that’s impossible. Once we hold Winterhold in addition to here, he’s surrounded. Cut off. He can either surrender or go down fighting.”

“Being a Nord, it’ll be the second,” Rikke muttered.

Tullius turned to Maven. “Jarl Black-Briar, restore order to your city. Imperial troops will remain until the cessation of hostilities against the Stormcloaks. Temper your reaction against those who supported the cause. The Dragonborn has made a good point. Just executing all his supporters won’t win us favour. It’ll only make them fear us, or hate us even more.”

“I’ll throw a few people in prison as an example, otherwise… well, the guards will need a cleansing, but otherwise, as long as there are no further insurrections and the city is left in peace, I’ll rule with a steady hand.”

“See that you do. The Emperor will be keeping an eye on you for now.”

Didn’t sound like a threat. In fact, it sounded like this might just be the first step for Maven. Guess she had designs on perhaps ending up in Cyrodiil, further spreading her own power. But in Riften, she had power and influence. In the capital of the Empire, she’d be just another noble, and probably nowhere near as rich as some. Wonder if she’d give it all up at the chance of being a favourite of the Emperor…

“One last thing. Dragonborn, I endeavour to move my armies into the vicinity of Windhelm within the next fortnight. Can you remain here until then? Do you have anything urgent in Solitude?”

“I’ll send a letter and inform them I’ll be away a little longer than first anticipated. They know I’m involved in something important, General.”

“Good.” He paused again. “You’ve spoken to Ulfric before, outside Whiterun. When the times does come, do you believe he’ll speak to you again?”

“I think I have his respect so he might be willing to listen.”

“If we do end up outside his walls, I will offer a parley so we may speak. Whether he respect me or not isn’t the problem, I’m here representing the Empire. But the Dragonborn being a Nord, and what you’ve done so far, he might be willing to listen to any advice you give.”

I snorted. “He didn’t listen to me outside Whiterun.”

“And, for that, he paid the price. He might see sense this time.”

“He’ll want to be a martyr,” Rikke muttered, repeating an earlier comment, but that was for later.

Job done, I melted into the background, as did Brynjolf and all his people, heading down that same evening to give thanks for all his help. He’s already received word from Maven that the guild would continue to operate as before, but she would now have to distance herself further, though she could offer more protection in return. Otherwise, I would always be a welcome visitor to the Ragged Flagon.

I sent a letter to Solitude the next day, explaining what happened and the fact I would remain. I didn’t think that would surprise any of them, and I was confident I would be back in more than enough time to see Mirabelle give birth to my first child. I received a letter back within a few days, written by Mirabelle, explaining they certainly expected the news and they would simply wait, and perhaps worry, until I returned to Solitude.

I had also been honest in the letter about what I’d been up to, and I had worried about the reaction. Mirabelle assured me that they all expected it, and that while I was away, if I wanted to have some fun, then to simply enjoy myself. Once I returned to Solitude, they and I knew my eyes would only ever be for them.

Though I wasn’t close with Tullius, I was kept up to date with what was going on. The Empire was now throwing all the resources it could into ending the war and quickly, the defeat of Ulfric outside Whiterun providing a real boost to the morale, and capturing Riften almost ensured victory in the end. News of the capture of Winterhold reached us by the end of the week. The city was undefended except for a small Stormcloak presence, the Jarl laying down his shield with barely a fight.

That left a few small towns and villages… and Windhelm. I marched north with Tullius ten days after we captured Riften. Ulfric had reinforced Fort Greenwall, but they were isolated from reinforcements, seizing control of Shor’s Stone as we circled around the fort. Bringing in siege weaponry, we parlayed with the commander of the fort. He knew the score but could not tolerate the idea of surrendering, and stated he would not allow himself to become a prisoner of the Empire.

“And your men within the walls?” I wondered.

“All are willing to die for freedom. If you want this fort, you will only take it once we are all dead.”

Tullius only sighed, turned his horse, and returned to our lines. I waited a moment longer. “You know who I am?”

“Aye.”

“You know you won’t win. You can’t. Not now.”

“It’s not the winning that’s important, Dragonborn. It’s the message. We must fight, and if necessary, will die for the cause. We all may die in the fort but many more will rise in our place.”

I shook my head. “The war is coming to a close. The Stormcloaks will be defeated. Your deaths are unnecessary.”

“Perhaps, but if we kill a few of you before our deaths, we can enter Sovngarde in glory.” He met my eyes a final time. “I will see you on the field of battle, Dragonborn. Clashing arms with yourself will be a great honour indeed.”

We convened later that afternoon, and Tullius was intent on forcing a quick and decisive victory. His orders were simple. We would attack at dawn, first with siege weaponry, then we’d ram open the gates at both sides. “Dragonborn, that’s when we will need your help with the inevitable shield wall. Can we rely on your gift this once?” I nodded. “Very well. You have your orders, soldiers. See that they are followed. I want his fort captured quickly. Forces are closing in on Windhelm from the north and the east. Ulfric will find his city surrounded soon enough.”

The fort had no way of halting the barrage that took place then next morning. The fort was already crumbling, but as enormous boulders smashed into the towers and walls, I was left thinking there wouldn’t be much of the fort left once we were victorious. The barrage continued for at least an hour as the soldiers were prepared, some to scale the walls, others to direct the ram. The same would happen other side, a pincer movement that would eventually destroy the Stormcloak forces.

Ramming the doors took time as they’d clearly been reinforced, but once they were finally broken open, I stepped through to be greeted by a shield wall. I could see the shuffle of surprise at the fact a lone man wandered through, expecting an arrow to be fired at any second.

So I used my Thu’um.

FUS… RO… DAH…

After that, it was almost too easy. My sword was bloodied as the fighting was hectic. After breaking the first shield wall, soldiers burst through to take the other shield wall at the rear. The fighting was barbaric, hand to hand at times. I went searching for the fort commander, recognising him by the long cloak on his armour. Despite the fighting, his eyes met mine through the chaos, and we walked towards each other, fighting others on the way.

“No Thu’um,” I stated as steel met steel.

“I go to Sovngarde this day,” he stated. He fought ferociously, but I had a track record that he knew he’d never defeat. But he gave it his all. He was brave, noble, and loyal to his would be king. I did not disrespect him by toying with him. He gave a good account of himself, and he had talent that would have won him victory on many other occasions, but when I thrust the sword home, lowering his body to the ground, I ensured he retained his weapon. Despite the chaos, I took his free hand as he began the journey to Sovngarde.

“We will drink ale one day and reminisce of this battle in Sovngarde, my brother.”

He met my eyes and nodded. Then he was gone.

Seeing their commander go down, the fight went out of the rest, weapons quickly dropped as most chose to surrender. While many would dream of Sovngarde, most were not soldiers. They were labourers and farmers, only joining the fight as they believed in the cause. But they had farms and families to return to. To them, it was an ideal worth fighting for, but dying for? A step too far for many.

Satisfied with his victory, Tullius stated he would immediately march north, but I could return to Riften until I was called forward again, though he told me not to get too comfortable as he wasn’t going to waste time. There was no sign of any Stormcloak army coming to meet our armies, so it seemed Ulfric was preparing for the mother of all sieges.

There was a slightly eerie presence walking through the gates of Riften. It was a little weird seeing soldiers of the Empire patrolling the streets. There wasn’t any fear from the civilians, it was just… strange. I knew those who were most fervent in their support of the Stormcloaks now languished in prison, so those who had been supporters but quieter no doubt felt concerned for their own safety, and no doubt a little pissed off at how the war had turned out. Those who had supported the Empire knew enough to stay rather silent.

Heading for Mistveil Keep, Maven had obviously wasted little time in moving in, happily leaning back on her throne as I wandered in. She seemed rather pleased to see me as I let her know what was happening elsewhere. So she suggested a feast that evening in celebration of the recent successes for the Empire. Thinking nothing of it, I agreed.

It ended up being Maven, her two sons, her new steward, her housecarl, and myself only. And once the other four left, leaving me with only Maven, I almost laughed to myself, as she wasn’t backwards in coming forwards. “Would you care to join me for a drink in my private quarters, Ragnar?” she asked.

I figured I might as well be blunt. “Maven, I’m going to ask one simple question. Do you want to fuck me?”

“Yes. Gods yes.”

“Okay, let’s go upstairs.”

We shared half a bottle of wine before Maven proved to be just a mature version of her daughter. It was only when I got her naked, and I already was, that she proved to be a little shy. There were the signs of having carried a child that some women found embarrassing, so I spent time assuring her they were badges of honour.

When it got down to the physical act, I think it was the first time she’d been with a man in quite a while. She definitely enjoyed what I did with my mouth, hearing her make noises I never would have imagined hearing escape her, and when I slowly slid my cock inside her, I never thought I would have seen such a smile on her face. She was actually a really good fuck, enjoying the feeling of her nails digging into my back, and she definitely liked wrapping her legs around me, changing the angle, hearing her beg… beg for me to fuck her. That’s when I met her eyes and grinned. “Oh, you’re getting fucked all night, Maven Black-Briar.”

The kiss that earned was rather breath-taking, in all honesty.

Once I came inside her the first time, I needed to roll off and catch my breath. She lay back, legs spread wide, breathing heavily, before starting to giggle. “Holy shit,” she muttered, “It’s been so long, Ragnar. And I now feel your cum dribbling out of my cunt.” I gave her a look at the language. “Oh please, like you haven’t heard that said before.”

“Aye, it’s just… you…”

“You know, you’ve never asked how old I am.”

“It’s never really bothered me. I’ve slept with mature woman before.”

“I’m surprised you said yes.”

“Physically, you’re just an older version of Ingun. Aye, probably sounds weird, but it’s true. As for your personality, I would expect it considering who you are. But I just made you make noises only I will ever hear.”

“I haven’t had my pussy eaten in years, Ragnar. The occasional dalliance at most since my husband, but more often than not, these,” she held up her fingers, “Do the work for me.” She rolled onto her side and closed the gap, so I wrapped an arm around her. “Don’t concern yourself. This is just a one-time thing. I… just had to have you the once. I’ve heard the stories.”

“Not sure how Ingun will react. She actually suggested I sleep with you. Make you cum so you’d actually smile.”

That actually made her chuckle. “Nice to know my daughter does care for me. And having someone like you give me a few orgasms will definitely brighten the next day.” Her hand ran down my body to my still thick cock. “I have to ride this, Ragnar. I want to cum constantly while doing it too.”

“Climb on then.” She did, and the view was quite beautiful. As I said, mature version of her daughter. And Maven Black-Briar definitely enjoyed riding the cock of the Dragonborn that evening. No idea how many times she came, but she simply couldn’t get enough. She wasn’t quiet. And she was very complimentary. I managed to cum twice more as well, which was a bonus. To end the night, she wanted me to take her from behind, which I wasn’t going to turn down. And surprisingly, she wanted it hard and fast, a solid fuck, she called. Taking a hold of her hair, I leaned forward and growled into her ear that her pussy was mine. She agreed, that night, it was.

Maven Black-Briar went to sleep with a smile, feeling rather content, and also very tender that evening.

Waking next to her the next morning, I thought it would be awkward. It actually wasn’t, and she was ready for more, wasting no time sitting up and then swinging her legs over my body, watching my cock slowly disappear inside her once again. I shuffled back so I could at least sit up, making out as she happily rode me. “Fuck,” she muttered.

“Like it, don’t you?”

She met my eyes and grinned. “No wonder my daughter was left smiling each time.”

As she rode me, I gave her breasts some attention, earning gasps of appreciation, moving back up her collarbone and to her neck, gently biting that earn another moan of appreciation. She came first, another loud orgasm, but she kept on going again. So I upped the ante by springing forward, Maven on her back, legs spread wide, as I just pounded her. “Fuck me, Dragonborn!” she cried.

“I’m leaving such a load, it’s going to be dribbling out for days, Maven.”

“Want to fuck me again sometime?”

I couldn’t help grin. “Why not a mother and daughter threesome?”

She couldn’t reply for a moment, such was the rhythm I’d established. “Not sure I want to share this.”

I leaned down and kissed her hard. “Well, I might take you up on the offer. Maybe just eat your pussy all night next time?”

“Gods, no wonder they all fucking love you, Ragnar.”

I came hard. It was such a good orgasm I couldn’t keep going, lowering ourselves down before I rested on my forearms, feeling her legs wrap around me again, whispering that she wanted to feel me inside her for as long as possible. I was left thinking that she may have held an attraction for a long time but, because of who she was to her, she wouldn’t allow herself. Things were obviously different now.

Getting up for the day, I chuckled as her legs were wobbly at first, hearing her actually giggle of all things as she stood in front of her wardrobe naked. “Ragnar, your cum is flowing out of me right now.”

“As I said, massive load, Maven.”

“I should probably clean myself up.” Then she looked back and smirked. “But the thought of it dribbling out of my pussy during the day is… rather thrilling.”

I chuckled. “I had no idea you had this side to you, Maven.”

“Ragnar, as I said, it’s been a while. Too long, to be honest.” She walked back over to the bed, crawling across it towards me, giving me the softest kiss imaginable, meeting my eyes. “Thank you.”

“Not necessary. I’m here because I want to be,” I replied softly.

“How long are you in Riften for?”

“Until Tullius sends word.”

“Want to stay with me?”

I felt my eyebrows raise in surprise. “Seriously?”

“Better than staying at the inn or down in the Flagon. Not sure if you have other women but… I’m obviously keen, Ragnar.”

“Okay.”

The smile that formed was one I never would have formed on the face of Maven Black-Briar. I think I’d just made her happy for the second time after ensuring she became the Jarl of Riften.

In the end, I spent ten nights with Maven in Mistveil Keep before I was summoned north by General Tullius. During the day, she was busy organising the city, hiring new guards and ensuring the old guards were now loyal to her. She issued a proclamation stating her intentions for the city and its people. I had a read of it and she was far more magnanimous than I imagined. She’d always had power, but now that she had real power, she was showing slightly more circumspection in how she dealt with people. Probably didn’t want to go pissing everyone off straight away.

Once the lights went down and we were in the bedroom, Maven and I… fucked. A few hours each night. I never would have thought she was a sexual dynamo, and once we fucked that first time, she had a voracious appetite. She’d occasionally come looking for me during the day, eager for my cock or my mouth. And she quickly showed her own talents, admitting she hadn’t blown anyone in a long time, but she was more than willing to get on her knees for me.

When it came to actual fucking, we simply enjoyed ourselves. She definitely appreciated the attention I always gave her body. Being middle-aged, she naturally worried but, to be honest, when standing naked with my in the candlelight, she certainly had a mature beauty. And once we learned what each other liked, it simply got better each time. She loved to blow me. I certainly enjoyed eating her out, noticing she trimmed more after a couple of nights, and we simply enjoyed sex. She even offered anal one night, which surprised me completely, though once assured she wanted it, Maven had her arse treated well too.

We talked a lot, as well. She knew quite a bit about me already so I just filled in the gaps. So, in the end, I learned a lot more about her, and after the first few nights, she was an open book. She confessed to one or two things I found surprising, but much of what she told me I already expected, at least. She wasn’t particularly good nor evil, she simply assessed each opportunity as it came and made the best decision for herself, like most people would do.

After ten days, I received a letter from Tullius, asking me to head north immediately. When I told Maven, her face suggested she was rather upset. That final night, I think it was perhaps the first time we ‘made love’. She was certainly more affectionate than ever, asking for something a little tenderer and loving than our usual cavorts. And she certainly rode me far slower than normal, seeming to commit to memory each little bounce she made, closing her eyes, that same smile on her face I always saw whenever she was riding me.

When she’d cum a final time, she resting on my chest as I stroked her back, cock still hard inside her, feeling her give me the occasional squeeze. “Too used to this already,” she whispered.

“Aye, it’s been…. Far more enjoyable than I would have imagined, to be honest. So much for a one-time thing eh?”

“You’ve got to see the real me, Ragnar. Not the Maven Black-Briar they all see out there.”

“I’m glad I did too.”

She looked up and smiled. “You’re a good man. Far too good for the likes of me.”

I gave her a gentle thrust, the smile increasing. “Oh, I don’t always go for good girls, Maven.”

“Do you think you’ll ever return to Riften?”

“I honestly don’t know. If I do, and I’m alone, I might just have to pop in and say hello.”

“I’ll blow you if you do.” I couldn’t help laugh at how eager she sounded. “Then I’ll drag you up here so we end up like this again.” I leaned forward and kissed her, making her moan a little as I sat up. “Gods, far too addictive,” she muttered.

We made love again until we simply had to stop, Maven moulding her body back into mine. It was only when it was quiet that I felt her body start to shudder and I could only lie there, a little wide-eyed, knowing what she was doing. I gave her a gentle squeeze, feeling her squeeze my hand in return. “Feelings?” I whispered.

“A little. Sleep with a man for ten nights in a row… with everything we’ve shared.”

“We’ll make love in the morning before I go. End on a good note.”

“I’d love that, Ragnar.”

After doing just that in the morning, I packed the few things I’d brought with me, Maven escorting me as far as the entrance to Mistveil Keep. We were alone except for a couple of guards, as it was barely light outside, Maven having no problem kissing me deeply, enough that I dropped my things and pulled her tight into my body, earning a moan and a grin at the same time. Then I held her close, feeling her head rest on my chest.

“Going to win?” she asked.

“Aye. But I’m not sure what the cost will be.”

“I wish you all the best, Ragnar Dragonborn. Good luck on being a father. I’m sure you’ll love it.”

“I hope so. And I have some very understanding women in my life.”

She looked up. “Well, I can understand myself regarding certain aspects. As I said, at heart, you’re a good man. Sometimes, that’s enough in itself.” She let me go and stepped back. “And I’d better let you go. Can’t keep them waiting if they want this over and done with.”

“I’m sure you’ll read the reports of what happens when I’m done. Not sure when I’ll ever be back. Good luck, Jarl Black-Briar.”

“And to you, Ragnar Dragonborn.”

The door was opened and I stepped through, walking down the stairs, glancing back to see she stood in the doorway, offering a wave before she turned and disappeared inside. Now by myself, I couldn’t help chuckle at my life. Maven Black-Briar? Who would have thought?

I was still chuckling as I mounted my horse and began the journey north. Passing through Fort Greenwall, there were only a few soldiers manning the walls, stopping to speak with the commander, informing me that it would likely be abandoned in the end. Shor’s Stone hadn’t changed at all, so I just kept riding until I either saw or ran into the nearest Legion army.

I found a camp not far from Kynesgrove. Recognised immediately, I asked for General Tullius, informed he was based in Kynesgrove itself, the village taken without a fight. Dismounting and tying my horse, I walked into the warmth, finding Tullius, Rikke and some of his other officers in the main room, a table having been dragged out near the fire. My presence was noted, Tullius gesturing with his head to join them.

“Thank you for arriving so quickly, Dragonborn.”

“Quicker we get this over and done with, the quicker I can go home.”

He nodded. “Agreed, but we cannot make any mistakes approaching this.” He gestured at the map. “As I was saying, the northern army will watch the northern section of Windhelm. The Stormcloak presence north of Windhelm has either been eliminated or pushed back into the regions directly around the city. To the west, there is a Stormcloak presence guarding the road.” He pointed as he added, “They are as far west as this mill. We’ll need to push them back further so our siege weaponry can get in place. To the south, we now control this village and can place our siege weaponry on higher ground overlooking Windhelm. To the east, there is nowhere Ulfric can go unless he wants to walk into Morrowind.”

“The plan of attack, General?” Rikke asked.

“Before we do that, we parley with Ulfric. I’ve given it some thought, and also communicated with the Emperor. He agrees with the Dragonborn. If we kill Ulfric, we make him a martyr and we could end up facing an insurrection or guerrilla warfare in this province for years to come. We have to bring Ulfric to the table.”

Rikke snorted. “He’s too full of pride and pig-headed to surrender now.”

“That may be so but the Emperor has instructed us to use all means necessary to bring this war to a conclusion peacefully if possible. But the Empire must be victorious and the Stormcloaks must surrender.”

“If we don’t kill Ulfric, then what?” I wondered, “Does he stay Jarl?”

“That is something still being decided. We will likely arrest him to start. As soon as hostilities are complete, the Emperor will journey here to oversee the peace conference himself. He is willing to meet with Ulfric.”

“So the plan of attack?” Rikke asked again.

“Right, of course. Obviously the walls of Windhelm are incredibly thick, and it is surrounded by water, which limits of our options. While we can use siege weaponry, the best we can do is start a fire that will spread through the city. But it’s entering the city itself that will prove more problematic.” Before he could continue, I cleared my throat. “You have an idea, Dragonborn?”

“We can avoid all that. This all started when Ulfric killed Torygg, correct? He walked into his palace, issued a challenge, then killed him. I am a Nord, as is Ulfric. I will issue a challenge. It would be dishonourable of him to refuse it. Plus, I’m sure he’d love a fight against the Dragonborn.”

“What would be the conditions?”

“Well, considering we don’t want him dead, it could be something as simple as first blood. The problem with that is, once in the throes of battle, we’re liable to forget about that agreement. I can be fairly restrained even in the midst of battle, but Ulfric would love the chance at getting his sword through me, particularly after embarrassing his efforts in taking Whiterun.”

Tullius shared glances with his officers. “You know, I would normally say something about all of this being Nordic nonsense, but I’ve been here long enough to understand. Very well, Dragonborn. Tomorrow morning, we’ll ride to the outskirts of Windhelm and see if he’s willing to speak with us. If he is, then you will have your duel. If you win, the outcome is what, he surrenders?”

“Correct.”

“And what if he wins?”

“He won’t win.”

He opened his mouth, no doubt ready to retort, but he closed it rather quickly and even smirked. “You know, I would think it was the arrogance of youth, Dragonborn.”

“Not that young anymore, General. And I have plenty of scars. Still a mortal, I can still be killed. But he won’t win. And when I do win, he will hand us the city without needing to put the civilians through hell.”

“You believe he’ll agree those terms?”

“Aye.”

Tullius looked around the table. “Anyone disagree with this approach?” Everyone shook their heads. “Very well. I’ll send a messenger to Windhelm with the terms and see if he’s willing to at least discuss it. Remain close by for now. I’m sure one of my men can find you a tent unless you want a room.”

“A tent is fine, General. Otherwise, I’ll sleep by the fire and enjoy looking up at the stars the next few nights.”

There were plenty of soldiers in and around Kynesgrove, mostly on patrol, making sure we were not taken by surprise, but I didn’t think Ulfric would now leave the safety of his walls unless challenged. I ended up walking back to the first main camp, taking in a meal, sitting down with some of the serving men and women. Mostly those from Cyrodiil or Skyrim, with a smattering of other races in between. My armour and weaponry stood out, in addition to not wearing a Legion uniform. I didn’t want too many to know who I was, and it was mostly just an excuse to chat with some regular soldiers. Like their officers, they wanted the war done so they could go home to their families.

A messenger was sent to Windhelm the next morning with the offer of a parley. There was no immediate reply, no doubt Ulfric taking time to think it over. He was now surrounded with no way out. So I figured he would eventually be willing to listen to us, to hear our demands. He could make few of his own in return, so I assumed he’d simply hear his options and make his decision based on that. If he truly cared about his people, he’d surrender. But I knew that wasn’t really an option.

He replied two days later, sending his own messenger, stating he would meet with representatives of the Empire at dawn the following day, on the bridge leading out of Windhelm. Tullius agreed immediately and I was summoned to the inn, informed of what the letter stated, asked if I was still willing to meet Ulfric in combat.

“Aye,” I said, “It’s time for peace, General. I will meet him tomorrow and see what he has to say. Then I will offer the terms of combat. If he accepts, then then war will end quickly. If he does not, then I guess we’re in for a long siege.”

“What do you think he’ll do?”

“He’ll be honour bound to accept my challenge, General. Rikke will agree.” Tullius looked at her, she nodding her agreement.

“Okay. Tomorrow morning, Dragonborn. I hope you’re prepared for this.”

“It seems I was born ready, General.”

Chapter 62: War's End

“Ready, Dragonborn?”

“Aye, General.”

Mounting up alongside Rikke and a small retinue of soldiers, we headed north straight for the outskirts of Windhelm. It was a clear day for once, though that meant the temperature had plummeted, and we were all wrapped in thick fur coats. When the dark grey walls of the city came into view, our pace naturally slowed. My eyesight we pretty good, and I could just about see soldiers patrolling the walls. There were more guards at the gates, and they had been busy forming plenty of barricades on the bridge leading across.

Dismounting and leaving our horses, Tullius, Rikke and I immediately walking forward. We were a quarter of the way across when the gates ahead opened, Ulfric exiting, flanked by two of his own people. I recognised the one with the beard as the same man who’d been at his side during the conference at High Hrothgar, and also at his side out Whiterun. The other I didn’t recognise, no doubt the commander of the city’s forces or something.

Approaching with caution, we stopped around five metres apart. There was enough wind that no archer would feel completely confident taking a shot at us from the walls, though one might be attempted to try. We stood in silence, staring and glaring at each other.

“What brings you to my city, General?” Ulfric finally asked.

“You’ve lost, Ulfric. You’ve lost control of all the Holds you once held, and you barely control the Hold of your capital city.”

“I haven’t lost yet, General. While I still draw breath, and while I still have soldiers willing to fight and die for the cause, we haven’t lost yet.”

“Your position is hopeless, Ulfric. Please, see some sense in this,” Rikke almost pleaded, “Enough of our brothers and sisters have died for this pointless war.”

Ulfric glared at her. “Pointless? This is far from pointless. This is about freedom. The freedom of our people, to escape the inadequate government that now serves us. The freedom of our people to speak freely. The freedom of our people to worship who they please. The freedom of our people to expel the Thalmor from our lands. The freedom of our people to rise up as one and find our place in the sun.”

“You are nothing but a traitor to your people and the Empire, Ulfric. And if it was my decision, I would ensure what we started in Helgen was finished as soon as possible.”

Ulfric smirked. “You’re welcome to throw your soldiers at my walls, General. They are strong and have withheld numerous sieges over the centuries.”

“Jarl Ulfric Stormcloak, I challenge you to single combat of arms,” I stated. He looked at me, eyes widening in surprise. “Do you accept the challenge?”

“You want to fight me, Dragonborn?”

“If it ends this bloody war without the needless deaths of your soldiers and your civilians, we can end this with a fight. The Dragonborn versus the Jarl of Windhelm, potential High King of Skyrim.”

“Conditions of battle?”

“We can fight wherever you want except behind your walls.”

“If you win?”

“I won’t kill you, Jarl Ulfric, but I will make you submit. If you lose, the war is over.”

“And if I win?”

It was my turn to smirk. “You won’t.”

“Your Thu’um?”

“To ensure a fair battle, I will refrain from using it. I trust the skill of my sword and shield. If you try and use the Thu’um yourself like you did against Torygg, you will find I was simply stand in place as you try. Then I will return the favour… and at that moment, your last thoughts will be of regret that you used such an underhanded tactic.”

“I would give the offer serious thought, Ulfric,” Tullius added, “You have until tomorrow morning to consider. We will meet here again. Further conditions of the battle can be agreed then. But this will be resolved, one way or the other. Either the Dragonborn will secure our victory, or we will take your city by force.”

“I look forward to seeing you try, General.”

Tullius turned around immediately as did Rikke. I stayed in place for a few seconds more, simply looking at Ulfric before I looked at the warrior at his side. The glare he returned was almost hate-filled. So I made sure I had the most sarcastic smirk possible as I said, “Once I’m done with him, you’re more than welcome to have a go.”

“You dishonour your Nordic brothers and sisters.”

“No, I do this to protect them from people like yourselves. Narrow-minded fools.”

His hand went to his back, where his maul was placed. Ulfric rested a hand on his shoulder. “No, Galmar. We agreed to meet in peace. Ignore the words of the Dragonborn. We will agree terms of the fight tomorrow. Talos guides me and is on our side. We will be victorious in the end.” He met my eyes one last time. “Until tomorrow, Dragonborn.”

He turned his back on me, waiting for his two companions to do the same thing. Only when they were making their way through the barricades did I turn around and join Tullius and Rikke back at our horses, immediately returning to the tavern. As they and his officers continued to make plans, I didn’t believe I’ve be required so headed off back to the main camp.

Wandering around, I watched soldiers taking part in training drills, others busy exercising, some were sitting back and relaxing, others were carrying out other duties that kept a camp relatively clean and somewhat hygienic. As the sun slowly started to fade, the air turning cooler this far north, wind whipping off the near frozen sea to the north-east, I grabbed a bedroll and some furs, hiking my way back north, past Kynesgrove, to the hill overlooking Windhelm. There were soldiers already stationed there. Figuring out who I was within a few seconds, I dumped my stuff near the campfire and joined them as they watched over the city.

“The city is packed with people, Dragonborn,” one of the soldiers stated, “But they have nowhere to go.”

“I’m sure they know we’re watching.”

“All three sides. Wherever we have elevation, we have eyes on them. They’re no doubt trying to watch us in return. We’re not exactly standing here in darkness.”

“Has word reached you of what is to happen tomorrow?”

“Aye. To be honest, you will have the thanks of every soldier here if you can end it with a simple man on man fight. Even those behind the walls of Windhelm would rather have this end without even more death. Most of us just want to go home to our families.”

“You’re not a career soldier?”

“Me? I’ve served since I was sixteen. But there are plenty back in our camps who are farmers, miners, traders, all having joined to protect the Empire, but many of us have now been fighting for a long time. It’s time this ended and peace was restored. I haven’t seen my wife in… a long time. My children would be reaching double figures by now.”

“Do you hear from your wife?”

“Aye, she knows her letters well enough. Once a month, the mail will come.”

“Then, tomorrow, I will make sure that you see your wife and children one day again soon.”

We stood overlooking Windhelm until it was dark, stars twinkling in the sky, the air turning bitterly cold. There was plenty of light from behind the walls. We could hear faint sounds of singing, the clang of steel on steel, the general noise a city made, even at that time of evening. Even in the darkness, you could just about see the soldiers patrolling the walls, occasionally passing by a torch, highlighting their faces and uniform.

Sleep came surprisingly easily that evening. I wasn’t concerned about fighting Ulfric. I wasn’t being arrogant. I’d been fighting for years by now. I had plenty of scars, might earn one or two more, but I was confident I would beat Ulfric in combat. I just had to make sure I didn’t let adrenaline flow too much and end up killing the man. Wound? Yes. Kill? No.

Waking with the sun the next morning, I broke bread with the same soldiers I’d stood watch with the previous evening before I made my way back to the tavern where Tullius and the rest were waiting. As I walked in, I was surprised all four offered a salute, right arm across their chest, fist balled, a dip of the head. “Dragonborn,” they stated together.

“Um… thanks.”

“Are you ready for what it is to come?” Tullius asked.

“Aye. We’ll meet with him, discuss, then we will fight. I would suggest no real delay. If he agrees to the challenge, it must be done before sundown.”

“Agreed. Have you broken your fast?”

“Aye. I’m ready to depart whenever you are.”

Tullius issues a few more orders before we headed outside, mounted up, and started our ride back towards Windhelm. This time, Ulfric was already waiting for us. I wondered if he’d slept the previous evening, or if he’d been kept awake, going over my challenge, wondering if he should accept it or not. And if he accepted, what chances he had of victory? I’m sure he was confident as I was.

Dismounting as we had the previous morning, Tullius, Rikke and I approached them carefully, our eyes again watching the guards above, wondering if they’d dare fire an arrow in our direction. Ulfric was flanked by the two as the previous day. I politely bowed my head once we were around five metres apart. “Jarl Ulfric.”

“Dragonborn.” He looked around. “A crisp, clear morning. Light wind. Not too bright. Perfect conditions for battle, wouldn’t you say?”

“I’d rather fight in conditions like this than snow or rain.”

“Aye. You have spent many years fighting, correct?”

“That is correct, lord.” His eyes widened slightly when I called him that. “You are my enemy, but you are still a Jarl. And despite being the enemy, I am aware of your history. Respect, lord. It has been earned.”

He dipped his head. “Unexpected. Thank you, Dragonborn.” He stood a little straight. “Consider your challenge accepted, Dragonborn. What conditions do you propose?”

“Single combat. One-handed weapon, shield if wanted. Fight until submission or serious enough injury the fight cannot continue.”

“Not to death?”

“I will not kill you, lord, but I will force you into submission. However, do not think I won’t use lethal force should you prove dishonourable, lord. I mean no offence, but even the most honourable of warriors can make split decisions which would cause the gods to look unfavourably upon them.”

“Can I kill you?”

I glanced at Tullius. He shrugged, so I looked back at Ulfric. “If you want to kill the Dragonborn, and you manage to get the upper hand enough to obtain a lethal strike, I will leave it up to you whether you wish to take the step of killing the Dragonborn.”

He nodded before he turned to his men. “Leave us. I wish to speak to the Dragonborn alone.”

I glanced at Tullius, who met my eyes, nodded, and suggested to Rikke they leave me alone. Once Ulfric and I were alone, we stepped forward until we were within arms reach. He was a large, broad man. Almost the same size as myself. He was definitely older, of course, but I was sure he had the scars of battle all over him. His eyes were… no wonder they followed him. They burned with intent. Just his presence alone must have provoked inspiration. When he offered his arm, I grasped his forearm with my hand, feeling him do the same. “Do you know why I started this war?”

“I do, lord.”

“Do you disagree?”

“The reason? Not entirely. The way you’ve approached it? Completely.”

“I am a proud Nord, Dragonborn. I would die for Skyrim. Would you?”

“If necessary, yes.”

He met my eyes and nodded after a few seconds. “Aye, I believe you would too. So, when shall we meet?”

“Sun’s height?”

“Aye, that works for me, Dragonborn.” We stepped closer until we our noses almost touched. “Killing you will give me no personal pleasure,” he added.

“Do not give me reason to kill you, lord. I merely intend to end this war.”

“I would die for Skyrim.” He eyes bored into mine and I knew what he was saying. He would only submit when he was dead. “I’m not the only one, Dragonborn. Thousands of us will die for the ideal of a free Skyrim.”

I didn’t reply, simply meeting his eyes before we released the arm of the other and stepped back. I bowed my head again. “Until later, Jarl Ulfric.”

I walked backwards, as did he, before turning and walking back towards our horses. Mounting up, we rode straight back to Kynesgrove. Heading into the tavern, I asked for someone to spar with me, to warm myself up for what was to come. Rikke offered, so we headed outside and she put me through my paces. When I felt she was taking it too easy, I riled her up to make her attack me harder. We only stopped when it looked like we were about to start drawing blood, but it was just what I wanted. The adrenaline was now flowing.

Heading into the tavern, I requested time alone, given a room where I shut the door, unstrapping my armour, leaving my sword and shield on the bed, taking the medallion from around my neck and placing it on the small table, before getting onto my knees, dipping my head, closing my eyes, and praying to the Nine.

Despite my confidence in battle, a little divine inspiration wasn’t a bad thing.

I only moved when there was a knock at the door. “It’s time, Dragonborn,” Rikke stated.

I slowly dressed in my armour, making sure I was completely comfortable, all the important parts were protection. I sheathed my sword, making sure that was in the right place, my dagger opposite, shield on my back. Picking up my helmet, I headed out into the hall and outside, where Tullius, Rikke, and all the others were waiting. Mounting up, we started our journey down the hill, and it was only then that I realised the crowds had formed. Hundreds upon hundreds of soldiers lied the road leading towards the main one that led to Windhelm. That was lined either side by even more soldiers. They did not cheer, not yet. But they watched me pass expectantly, wanting me to make the return journey in triumph however long later it would happen.

Tullius and Rikke stopped earlier than before, leaving me to approach the entrance of the bridge alone. Dismounting, I tied the horses to a wooden railing and glanced back to see soldiers watching from the nearby hills. I was fairly sure the road I’d just ridden down was now jam packed with even more. Most wouldn’t be able to see but word would pass the ranks quickly.

Taking a deep breath, I walked up onto the bridge approaching Windhelm. The barricades had been removed. There was no nothing between myself and the gates leading into the city. Walking slowly, I looked up to see guards on the ramparts above. In fact, I was fairly sure each gap was taken by a soldier, though none of them looked armed.

Ulfric appeared through the gates, approaching as cautiously as I did. Once we were around ten metres apart, he unsheathed his sword, shield already in place. Following his example, he waited until I was ready before he roared and charged. I let him come towards me though once he was close, and I recognised the swing coming, I feigned blocking his swing before basically pirouetting as I went by him, making sure I ended up with my back to the gates, Ulfric coming to a stop and spinning around.

I then surprised him by dropping my shield. He could keep his if he wanted, but I wanted this over quickly. And carrying a heavy shield would only tire me out. I wouldn’t have to worry about protecting myself from other warriors in the middle of a melee. My entire focus would be on him.

To his credit, the shield he carried clattered onto the ground within a few seconds, both of us twirling swords in our hand as we slowly closed on each other. Then we struck, the clang of steel ringing around. Mostly feints, testing each other out. He knew I wasn’t going for a killing stroke. I knew he would probably kill me if he got the chance. That wasn’t going to stop me though. I’d been sent out on plenty of contracts where the objective was to send a message, not to kill.

The first ‘bout’ last a couple of minutes, almost testing each other out. Then we stepped back, took a breath. Even though it was cold, I could already feel the sweat forming. Ulfric took a couple of deep breaths.

I let him go on the front foot again. His skill with sword was exemplary, but a lot of technique is footwork, about how you position your body. Though I was impressed, I could see deficiencies. Enough that I knew I could get the upper hand when necessary. Though he practices, I was left thinking he hadn’t seen battle in quite a while, leaving the fighting to his soldiers. Probably like Tullius, in all honesty.

Whenever he came forward, I could defend myself reasonably enough, but never gave him the idea he was getting the upper hand. Whenever he might have started to gain some confidence, I made sure I moved out of the way quickly, or moved my sword to block and deflect his, leaving him swinging or stabbing at thing air.

We must have duelled for a good five minutes before he stepped back, breathing heavily, hair now plastered to his forehead. “You are indeed talented, Dragonborn,” he stated.

“As are you, Jarl Ulfric.”

I took the initiative the next time, spending all my time on the front foot. I could read most of his moves. I spent most of my time simply trying to disarm him, which he did realise, so positioned himself enough that made me hesitate just enough that I couldn’t get the strike I wanted. We eventually ended up close together, and that’s when he tried throwing his forehead into my face. Seeing it coming, I turned my head enough that his forehead met my temple. He groaned and I growled, and I threw him backwards. As I shook my head of stars, I noticed him on his back, looking up as he blindly felt for his weapon. Walking forward, I put the tip of my sword to his throat. “Some would consider that dishonourable, Jarl Ulfric. But in a fight to the death, any advantage must be used.”

“And now?”

“You stumbled, Jarl Ulfric. To consider this a victory would not bring myself honour. You may pick up your sword,” I replied, taking half a dozen steps back. I watched him carefully stand up, leaning over to pick up his sword, before he met my eyes. “Are you ready?”

“Aye.”

He was older than I was. No doubt he hadn’t done anything requiring this much energy and exertion in quite a while. He would have spent all his time on his horse watching over his armies. He was starting to slow down already. Some of his swings were growing lazy. He was breathing heavily. While I hadn’t duelled anyone like this in a long time, I was definitely feeling better than he was.

I took the initiative again, now intent on ending the duel. You tend not to think too much during a duel, much of it is natural, almost muscle memory, reacting before your opponent had even made a move. Slowly but surely, I put Ulfric on the back foot, keeping my sword busy, never give him a moment to rest, nor even think about counter attacking, constantly on the defensive. I drew blood more than once, a cut here, a cut there. It wouldn’t be the blood loss, it would be the discomfort of each cut. Enough to distract for long enough that I’d finish the duel.

I had him on the back foot for so long that desperation eventually won out, charging towards me without a care in the world. Footwork, skill with sword, using everything I had to my advantage. His sword went flying, but he was a veteran of warfare. As I went to press my advantage, he withdrew a hidden dagger, and it was only skill and a bit of luck that halted it ending up in my neck. I forced him back against the wall of one of the towers, my strength showing as I forced the dagger back until it rested millimetres away from his neck. “Listen to me,” I said.

“I will die if necessary, Dragonborn,” he grunted, feeling him try and force the dagger back.

I forced the dagger back enough that it pressed against his skin. Pressed enough it drew blood. “Look at my eyes, lord.” I waited until his eyes met mine. “Look at my eyes, Jarl Ulfric. What do you see?”

He looked at me for a good few seconds. “A fellow warrior and Nord.”

“Trust me, Jarl Ulfric. I am the Dragonborn.” I let that sink in, saying plenty in just those four words. “Do you yield? You need not be a martyr, lord. You are worth more to me alive than dead.”

He looked at me again in silence. I knew he was split. Part of him wouldn’t want to die. Part of him would die for his ideals. “Do you promise my soldiers will be safe?”

“All we want is peace, lord. I don’t know the details. All I needed to do was defeat you. I will leave anything else to the others. I give my word that I will do all I can. Do you accept that?” He nodded. “Do you yield, Jarl Ulfric?”

I felt him release his grip on the dagger, and I moved it immediately away from his neck, stepping back with dagger in left hand, sword in his right. He dropped to his knees, a submissive gesture to the superior warrior. I rested the blade flat on his shoulder. “A worthy opponent, Jarl Ulfric.”

Withdrawing the sword, I stepped back and waited for Tullius and the others to arrive. I had no doubt they’d watched as best they could, as we only waited a couple of minutes before they arrived. Tullius managed to appear relatively magnanimous despite the fact Ulfric remained on his knees before him. Tullius looked at me. “I guess you had reason to be confident, Dragonborn.”

“I expect Jarl Ulfric Stormcloak will be treated with the respect his position deserves, General? Despite his defeat, do you assure him that his soldiers can now return to their homes, as long as they relinquish their weapons and armour of war?”

Tullius looked at Ulfric for a moment before looking back at me. “Agreed. They can return to their farms and homes. I will be sending out patrols immediately to ensure control of the local area. Jarl Ulfric, I would like you to issue a proclamation, asking that your supporters now lay down their arms and ensure the peace is preserved.”

“Yes, General. I can agree to that. What about me?”

“Since we won’t be executing you, we will need to document your surrender and agree how to move forward.” Tullius looked at me. “Do you wish to be involved, Dragonborn?”

“No. I’ve done what I needed to do. If you don’t mind, I have people I need to return to.”

Tullius offered his hand, which I accepted. “I would like you to stay around for a celebration, but I certainly understand your desire to leave. The Empire thanks you, Ragnar Dragonborn.”

“I’ll be in Solitude if you need me, General.”

Walking back towards where my horse was still tied up, the cheer that greeted me was deafening. I couldn’t help step back and overlooked the cheering crowd, many of them cheering my name. When I unsheathed my sword, held it high and roared, I think the cheers increased to a volume loud enough to be heard across half of Skyrim.

It felt nice to be loved.

Mounting my horse, I looked at the road heading directly west and instead headed south, through the crowds. It parted slowly, reaching down both sides as my hands were grabbed briefly by numerous soldiers I passed. It must have taken a good half an hour to finally break free of the crowd, turning my horse back and raising my sword again, a last deafening cheer, before I turned my horse around and began my long journey back to Solitude.

---

I didn’t arrive at the gates until the next day. Word had definitely reached Solitude of the fact the war was now over, but my face was still relatively unknown, so I could make it back to the house without being stopped. Walking through the door, I put my bag down on the ground and leaned back against it, feeling rather weary about it all.

Mirabelle appeared from the living room, and she was definitely showing signs of being with child now. Her face lit up upon seeing me alive, and I walked towards her and embraced her tightly. She didn’t say anything, though there were no tears at seeing me again, only a broad grin as I pulled back and looked at her, caressing her face with a hand. “Are you well?” I asked.

“I’m fine, Ragnar. Is it true? Is the war over?”

“It’s over. I left as soon as I defeated Jarl Ulfric.”

“What? What happened?”

“Let’s gather all the girls and I’ll tell you all together.”

Mirabelle thought that was a great idea. After hugging the other four, Aela headed straight out, returning a few minutes later with Elisif. She was already aware of Ulfric’s surrender but not the details. So we sat at the table once I had a tankard in hand and I explained everything since I’d left for Riften. They were aware I’d been with others, something they’d always accepted, but I spent most of the time explaining how we’d taken over Riften and then my duel with Ulfric.

“And you just left once he surrendered?” Elisif asked

“Aye. No point me hanging around. The details are between the Empire and him.”

“But what about if or when you become High King?”

“Depends if he remains Jarl. That wasn’t a detail I discussed with Tullius. And I’m not assured of becoming High King. The Moot will decide it.”

“Do you not want it?” Mirabelle asked.

“Honestly? Not particularly. But if there is demand for me to take it, then I’ll do it. The question is then of Elisif. She had helped lead Skyrim through this war. To just cast her aside…”

“The Jarls have supported the Empire, Ragnar, not me,” Elisif stated, “Though I would love to remain queen, and continue my work, that is your decision.”

“I’ll leave it for later. Right now, all I want to do is relax and not have to worry about another crisis blowing up in my face.”

There was only one woman I was truly going to be with that night, though I’m fairly sure the others had already agreed. I was nodding off in one of the chairs by the fireplace when Mirabelle gently took my hand to wake me up. Without a word, she led me to her bedroom, closing the door, before we embraced and kissed. She was… eager, to say the least. Clothing definitely disappeared quickly, mine in particular. When she slowly kissed down my body until she was on her knees, I could only smile down at her.

“I’ll warn you,” I said quietly.

She licked up my shaft before resting my cock against her cheek, looking up at me. “I’m going to make you cum, then all I want is you inside me, Ragnar.” I raised my eyebrows at that. “You can do that in the morning. I just want to make love tonight.”

“Why the blowjob?”

She smirked as she replied, “Oh, I just know this will make you last a lot longer first time.”

Her expertise at sucking my cock was now unquestionable. But it was still her enthusiasm for doing it, and whenever she looked up at me, I still occasionally had a brief thought of Muiri. They’d always looked remarkably similar. Mirabelle knew that, but knew I loved her, not just because she was a reminder. Running my finger though her hair, it simply made her smile despite the fact her mouth was full of my cock.

I was rather excited. In fact, the term would be incredibly turned on. She’d done that since the day we met. I whispered her name in a way that warned her I was getting close. There was no way I was finishing anywhere except in her mouth, that was for sure, her entire body now one of concentration, sending shivers up and down my body at how damned good she was.

Groaning loudly, she chuckled to herself as the first couple of shots fired into her mouth, and she kept on going until I was simply empty, feeling myself sag on the spot. Watching my cock pop free of her mouth, she looked up at me again and grinned, leaning down to run my hands through her hair again. “I love you,” I whispered.

“I know, Ragnar. You always get sentimental after I blow you.”

“Sure you don’t want the favour returned?”

She gave it thought. “Okay.”

She stood up and I finished undressing her. It had been a few weeks since she’d told me the news. There were definite signs that she was with child. Her breasts were definitely a little bigger and there was a faint bump, but she knew there were still a few months before she’d give birth.

Laying her back on the bed, I spread her legs nice and wide, pleased to see her pussy glisten in the candlelight. I sat back on my knees and looked at her. “Well, it seems you blowing me turns you on.”

“I love how much I excite you, Ragnar. Before you, it wasn’t something I did often. But with you, I find myself wanting to do it every time. And then swallowing when you cum… it still feels so… naughty…”

Leaning up over her, I gave her a gentle kiss before moving down her body, not teasing her too much. We both knew what she wanted. I’ll always love the noise she makes when I touch and taste her the first time, whenever we’re intimate. I teased her pussy relentlessly, making her moan lightly or her body shudder at my touch. When I knew she was definitely ready, that’s when I’d change it up, making her moan louder, looking up as she watched me eat her out. I always wondered what I looked like when doing it.

“Ragnar,” she breathed, “Touch my clit soon.”

We’d fucked and made love so often now, I didn’t need much direction, but if that’s what she wanted to get her off, that’s what I’d do. When I ran my tongue gently over it the first time, she almost jumped off the bed, giggling that it was sensitive, though I hadn’t really warned her I was going near it. But then it was nothing but more moans of appreciation, watching her body react as I slid a couple of fingers inside her. I knew where that special spot was, and by focusing on that and her clit, her orgasm wasn’t going to take long.

When it arrived, she squeezed my fingers her, her legs tried to squeeze my head, and she cried out so loudly, all of Solitude probably heard. Then she demanded I keep going, so I upped the tempo of both fingers and tongue, and that turned her into a babbling wreck, her body reacting quickly by reaching another orgasm within a minute. Despite crying out to the gods, I didn’t relent until she had at least another three, one after the other, and only then did she mumble something about me stopping.

I did just that, of course, sitting back on my knees as I watched her suck in some deep breaths, her face now flushed, hair stuck to her forehead, chest rising and falling. She beckoned me with a finger, leaning down so we could share a deep kiss. “Hmmm… I taste myself on your lips, Ragnar,” she said softly, “Though I am used to that by now.”

“And now you know why I love doing it.”

Mirabelle took ten minutes to herself, where we simply snuggled together, a little kissing but mostly just talking about anything that came to mind, before she pushed me onto my back, straddled my groin, and I happily watched my cock disappear inside her. For the next twenty minutes at least, I happily lay back and watched her ride my cock with all the enthusiasm in the world. She didn’t change position too much, if at all. Knees to either side of my body, leaning forward with hand on my chest, watching my eyes watch her, and she’d simply bounce a little and grind away.

Only when I told her I was getting rather excited did it change, hands on her arse, changing the position of my legs, hands to either side of my body, leaning down so she could kiss me.

“Fuck me, Dragonborn,” she breathed.

Mirabelle Ervine was fucked by the Dragonborn for the next… three minutes. I came hard. And it was so good, I practically passed out immediately after I was done, with it enough to feel her rest on my chest, hugging her to my body as I gathered my thoughts. “Fucking hell,” I grunted.

“Told you we’d still make love even if I was with child.”

“No complaints from me.”

Though we could have kept on going, she eventually lifted herself off me, and after a quick clean up, we snuggled under the covers, moulding herself back against my chest. We lay in silence for a little while, running my fingers up and down the smooth skin of her body before she whispered, “Ragnar, something you said earlier perked my interest.”

“Oh?”

“When you were talking about Elisif, you were suggesting you might not make her queen.”

“Well, I have been thinking. I’ve been married once… obviously. When I marry again, it will be for life, and while marrying Elisif would make political sense, and be fair for her, I want to marry for the right reasons.”

“Out of all of us, who…”

“You.”

She didn’t say anything for a couple of minutes before she whispered, “I’d love nothing more, Ragnar. Mirabelle Dragonborn. I love it.” She paused before asking, “Why the change of heart?”

“I’ve had time to think while I was away… I know I was a bastard…”

She immediately turned around and cuddled into me. “You really need to stop thinking that…”

“I always will. Still don’t know how you tolerate me. So I can assure you this. When we marry, that will be it, except for those already part of our little harem. And even then, if it got too much…”

“Ragnar, I sleep with them too.”

“I know, but if we’re married…”

“Then we will be husband and wife, and we will also have lovers that we share.”

“You’re still seriously fine with this?”

“Ragnar, I love you more than ever. But I also have a lot of love for Aela and Lydia. A different sort of love, but it’s love all the same. Serana is just beautiful. Haelga is lovely to be around. And Elisif is just too damned sweet for her own good. To be honest, not being Jarl might actually do her a favour.”

“Could you handle being married to the High King and being my queen?”

“I would be married to you, Ragnar. Not the title. None of that would mean anything. I would be married to the man I love. I currently carry our child, and we definitely won’t be stopping at one. And I know that we’re going to enjoy a long life together.”

She rolled onto her back, taking me with her, no surprise my cock slid inside her straight away, her legs wrapping around me. We made love slowly, tenderly, mouths rarely parting, otherwise just gazing into the eyes of the others. Her fingers would dig into my shoulders or my back. I just concentrated on how great it felt being inside her once again, all the little sounds and movements she made as I buried myself.

“Fuck, I love being inside you,” I muttered. That made her giggle.

“Well, I love you being inside me. Your big, thick cock.” I raised my eyebrows at that. That just made her scoff. “Oh please, like the others don’t say the same thing. Haelga has no problem going into vivid detail how you tear her arse apart most of the time’.”

That caused both of us to chuckle before I concentrated on making love to her and trying not to cum too quickly. But she whispered this one was for me, as she’d had plenty of orgasms, so I eventually managed to get her legs bent back, Mirabelle holding them, as I upped the tempo, making her moan louder while I was definitely getting ready to cum again.

“Fuck,” I grunted.

“Practice for when we make another one.”

After I finished inside her again, I rested on my forearms as she wrapped her arms and legs around me, feeling her soft kisses on my cheek and neck. Just her breath in my ear was a turn on sometimes. Cleaning up a second time, Mirabelle suggested it was perhaps best we just went to sleep. I thought that was a good idea.

Over breakfast the next morning, Mirabelle and I had agreed before leaving her bedroom that we would immediately discuss what we had talked about the previous night. Elisif was back at the palace, so we’d have to talk to her separately. Aela, Lydia, Serana and Haelga were brilliant, but that was because they were not surprised at all about what Mirabelle and I explained. The only thing that concerned them was if it would all be over. Mirabelle assured them it would not, adding what she’d told me the previous evening. They were her lovers as much as they were mine.

Elisif was… more difficult. I had talked to her about it, though never promised anything. Mirabelle and I sat her down and before we started, Elisif said sadly, “You want to marry, don’t you?”

“I’m sorry, Eli.”

She smiled, sadly, but still smiled. “Ragnar, you have nothing to apologise for. Trust me, your girls have already explained, and we have only talked about things. We’ve never agreed to anything.”

“I might not be made High King anyway. Who knows what the future will bring?”

She sighed. “You might be right.”

“Do you want this to stop?” Mirabelle asked.

Elisif managed a smile. “Of course not. If I am no longer the Jarl, I will have the freedom to pursue my own interests, and can be with who I want. And if that man is the High King of Skyrim, I will be one of his mistresses.”

I glanced at Mirabelle. “I’ll have mistresses?”

“Five of them, Ragnar. We’ll be sharing them. I’ve been with Elisif already.”

I definitely felt my eyes widen. I didn’t know about that. I looked at Elisif, and she was definitely blushing. “Well, I knew Mirabelle had been with the others, but didn’t…”

“The only woman of your little group I haven’t been with is Haelga,” Elisif admitted.

“Some of her desires are a little… extreme for our tastes. That’s when we’ll leave them for you,” Mirabelle added.

“Are you sure you’re okay with this?” I asked Elisif.

“Ragnar, you never promised a thing to me. All we’ve done since that first night we were intimate is talk about possible futures that might or might not happen. What I do know is that I’m not surprised at all to be sitting her right now, hearing that you two want to be married. What I can do is thank you for the honesty. Many would have tried to keep this some sort of secret.”

“I never lie, Eli,” I said, “I can be a right bastard at times, but I never lie to any woman I’m intimate with. And if you wish to continue with our arrangement, then I can only admit to be absolutely stunned, but thoroughly pleased.”

“Me too,” Mirabelle added.

“Depending on what happens, Ragnar, I think we all have a wonderful future to look forward to.”

“Come by this evening, Eli. We’ll have dinner, a few drinks… maybe a little fun,” Mirabelle suggested.

“Now that sounds like a fun idea. I’ll be up once the sun has gone down.”

I think Mirabelle and I were both relieved upon leaving the palace to return home. Elisif had always proven open-minded ever since we’d become intimate, but I had entered with a bad feeling that the reaction would be entirely negative. I was pleased it wasn’t and that things would most continue as they were.

Elisif arrived for dinner that evening, but it was obvious to me what the intention was of Mirabelle’s invitation. The Jarl of Skyrim was definitely centre of attention that night. It was the first night that I had all my girls in one room for part of the evening, but I wasn’t the focus. While I never went without a partner, there was far more attention on certain individuals. The other five all sat back and watched as Elisif and I made love, then all five of my girls spent even more time pleasing her. Elisif was always in the middle, someone eating her pussy, while she ate out someone sitting on her face. At one stage, they had her on her elbow and knees, Aela underneath her as she was eaten out by Elisif, Aela returning the favour, while Haelga and Lydia took turns eating her arse. I was fucking Haelga’s arse at the same time, while Serana and Mirabelle were in the middle of their own mutual pleasure adventure. I fucked all six of them, of course, though only Lydia wanted it in the arse as well, joking as I did that I couldn’t put another child in her that way.

The only thing I would have wished for out of that evening was a way to have recorded the events. Sure, I’d play certain things in my mind over again, but I would love to watch my six lovers all pleasing each other at once. Occasionally, I’d find myself just sitting back and watching for a couple of them glanced my way with a smile, suggesting I join in again.

Elisif left for the palace the next morning reassured, if she needed any. All the girls adored her, and she adored them in return. And she professed her love for me once again, as I did for her. Any possible heartache I may have caused didn’t disappear overnight, but I think she accepted whatever would come next. While I had plenty of ideas of how it would all work, I would only mention them if, and I mean if, I became the High King of Skyrim.

For now, though, there was only peace across the land. And I had something to be excited about. The birth of my children.

Chapter 63: The High King

Aela was with child.

She knew she was as she’d been suffering what she called morning sickness. She explained a couple more things to the girls and myself before she visited a priestess. She was gone for a couple of hours, returning with the news that she was also pregnant, nowhere near as far along as Mirabelle or Lydia, but there was no doubt she was now carrying our child.

Part of me could only sit back in the chair feeling a little smug about things. Three of my six girls now carried our child. If they gave birth to all boys, all girls, or a mix, I didn’t mind. Haelga didn’t want a child, so that made life easier with her. Serana was in two minds. She liked the idea of being a mother, but we’d spoken in private, and she was more focused on her alchemy and working on her magic. She had no yearning to be a mother, though, and would happily help the others in the raising of theirs. As for Elisif, she was prepared to wait until everything had been sorted regarding her future. We’d spoken often since that night and she was ready to continue her service to Solitude, so I suggested that, should she not be queen, I would definitely keep her as a thane and an advisor. She appreciated the thought.

What I learned is that though the war seemed to finish rather quickly, I mean from the time I helped take Riften to my battle with Ulfric, it must have only been a couple of months at most, less than that. But though I had defeated Ulfric, and from what I heard, his army was being sent home, the political fallout was still being dealt with.

I must have been back in Solitude permanently for at least a month when I was summoned to Castle Dour. I knew why, so headed up immediately to be greeted by General Tullius, who filled me in with what had happened and what the future may bring.

“The Emperor himself is currently on his way back to Skyrim. He’s coming by carriage this time, and wishes to oversee the Moot.”

“Interfering won’t make friends fast, General.”

Tullius grinned. “He knows that, Dragonborn. He merely wishes to see who the Jarls will pick as the new High King. Once they are selected, he wishes to sit down with whoever it is and chart a new path forward.”

“And Ulfric?”

“He wishes to meet with Ulfric face to face first. He actually agreed with your idea, about not executing him, making him a martyr. Ulfric isn’t happy about anything, of course. Legion soldiers now patrol his streets. His closest advisors have been arrested and are currently residing in jails around Skyrim. But I guess whatever you said to him work. He said he will be patient for now.”

“I told him to trust me.”

Gesturing with his head, I followed him into a sitting room, where we both sat by the fire on a chair each, a servant bringing in a flask of wine and two goblets. After pouring us each a glass, he sat back in his chair, definitely thinking about what to say next. “We’re not ready,” he finally said.

“Ready for what?”

“War with the Thalmor. We’re not ready for it. I know people are itching for it. Revenge for what those bastards did. But we’re not ready. We’re not strong enough. This civil war dragged on far too long.”

“You think they want to attack us?”

“I don’t think they’re strong enough either. But I know they would love nothing more than to finish the job they started, destroy the Empire completely. They won’t take us over, like they did Valenwood. No, they’ll just ensure Cyrodiil, Skyrim and High Rock are split apart, thereby keeping us too weak to do anything about it. Losing Hammerfell was a bitter blow.”

“What does the Emperor want to do?”

Tullius sipped at his wine for at least a couple of minutes. Then he met my eyes. “This does not leave this room, Dragonborn.” I nodded my understanding. “I love my country. Reading about the history of the Empire, Tiber Septim and the line of Emperors, the fact that Tamriel was, at one time, united. All the races together for one cause. Look at us now. Talos must weep when he sees the mess we’ve made of it. And the current line… nothing like the Septim’s. I serve my Emperor as it is my duty to do so. It’s what I swore to do when taking up the sword and shield. But as a man? What I actually think would be considered treasonous. Personally, I like the man. He has good intentions. But he’s ineffective.”

“I see what you mean by treasonous. So what would you want doing?”

“There’s a list as long as my arm of what could or should be done, Dragonborn. But I’m in Skyrim for a specific reason. To ensure the peace. Once a High King is chosen, my role as military governor would be at an end. Legion soldiers will remain present as always but the High King will run the province once the dust settles.”

“I know my name is being thrown around, General. You do realise all I want is a peaceful life.”

“You’re the Dragonborn. That very fact means a peaceful life is impossible.”

“I realised that a while ago. Still wish for it though.”

“I take it you will be attending the Moot?”

“Aye, at the request of more than one Jarl.”

“I’m sure it will prove rather interesting, Dragonborn. The Emperor should be here within days. Once he arrives, word will be sent to the Jarls about when the Moot will be convened.”

“Where will it be held?”

“I know there is a traditional place where it is held but I believe the Emperor has already requested the use of Dragonsreach in Whiterun, simply as it is near enough the centre of Skyrim.”

We finished the flask of wine before I returned home. I was asked plenty of questions as always, but had little to tell, and what Tullius told me of his own personal opinion regarding the Emperor would be a secret I intended to keep. Now that I knew the Emperor was on his way, and a Moot would be convened, I had something on the horizon. Otherwise, I kept myself busy by continuing to train, while occasionally doting on Mirabelle, who was definitely starting to show, Lydia the same, while Aela was still in the relatively early stages.

Around two weeks later, I received a letter with the seal of the Emperor, asking for my presence at Castle Dour the next evening, and I could bring one guest. Of course I chose to take Mirabelle, as I knew that would lead to plenty of questions, and we’d both grin like idiots when we told anyone that we were expecting. The only question we ever received was why we did not wear the bonds of matrimony. Skyrim could be open-minded at times, terribly conservative at others. The fact we were having a child out of wedlock did raise one or two eyebrows, not that either of us cared for the opinion of narrow minded fools.

Still, dining with the Emperor was an excuse to dress up, and I certainly received appreciation when I wandered out into the sitting room in one of the fine suits I now kept. Mirabelle was a delight when she appeared from the stairs, Aela and Lydia having helped do her hair at the same time. The dress was tight, showing off her larger breasts and pronounced bump.

Walking up to Castle Dour a few minutes later, taking her hand as always, we were greeted by a pair of guards at the door. Handing over my invitation, I was escorted inside to the main hall, a long table in the middle, chairs surrounding it, the table covered in cloths, plates of food already in position. Servants wandered with trays of drink and food, Mirabelle staying by my side as I was greeted by people I knew, but most I didn’t.

No sign of the Emperor yet, but there was eventually a call for places to be taken. Mirabelle and I were given seats rather close to where I assumed the Emperor would be sitting. He appeared five minutes later, all of us rising as he was announced. Though he was still dressed in finery, it seemed he’d scaled it back, taking his position by his chair before asking us to sit.

Conversation soon flowed, as did the alcohol, picking at some meat, potato and vegetables. Mirabelle, eating for two, certainly packed it away, though still managed a refined air, certainly in comparison to myself. The Emperor spent most of his time talking to those nearest, being Elisif and Tullius, before he cleared his throat and looked straight at me. “So, Dragonborn, I believe it is you I have to thank for securing the province for the Emperor.”

“I didn’t do it alone, sire.”

“Ah, but Lucius here tells me that you fought Ulfric Stormcloak in single combat.”

“I did, sire, but I still had the soldiers of the Empire at my back.”

“Was it honourable?”

“It was, sire. No matter what you think of Ulfric, in my mind, he will always be an honourable, noble warrior.”

“I will be meeting with him before my journey to Dragonsreach. I’m sure it will be an interesting experience.”

The rest of the meal carried on without incident, not that I expected anything to go wrong. I chatted with the Emperor every now and then, but it was only later, once the plates had been cleared, the table cleaned, and the guests were now milling around, chatting away, that I was invited for a private conversation with the Emperor. Led into his quarters, I was surprised I was left alone with him, considering my history. After we’d taken a seat, and I’d been handed a goblet of brandy, he sat back and chuckled to himself.

“Bet you never thought we’d be in this position, Dragonborn.”

“Part of me is still amazed by it, sire.”

“You’ve more than redeemed yourself. Ending the dragon threat. Ending the vampire menace. And now resolving the war in a manner that ensures the Empire remains in control but those who rose up can return home peacefully. The killing had to stop.”

“Making Ulfric a martyr would have led to a grassroots campaign that would have kept your soldiers occupied for years. Skyrim was never the enemy.”

“What do you think of this Moot? I understand it is something that happens rarely.”

“I don’t much about it at all. I know it’s an ancient tradition, but I always thought the title of High King was hereditary. Though since Torygg was killed, leaving no heir, there is a vacuum that needs to be filled.”

“Who do you think should be High King? Or even High Queen?”

“Well, depends on how you look at it. First of all, Ulfric can’t be High King, not after everything. What happened with the Jarl of Winterhold?”

“He retained his place though he will pay a tithe to the crown for the next decade as penance. I pitied him a little as he was between a rock and a hard place. If he hadn’t joined Ulfric, it’s probable Ulfric would have taken his city by force.”

“So Ulfric and Korir discounted. Maven Black-Briar has only just become Jarl, so I wouldn’t count her. Elisif? She was Torygg’s wife, but even with those loyal to the Empire, she isn’t exactly popular. So that leaves Balgruuf, Igmund of Markarth, Idgrod of Morthal or Siddgeir of Falkreath. Now, Solitude has held the crown of Skyrim for however long, I guess it’s been tradition for a while. Who would you really choose out of those four?”

“That is the question, Dragonborn. I haven’t met all these Jarl’s, of course, I know most of them only by reputation. Do any have what it takes to be High King? Do any of them have the courage and capacity to bring together a fractured country?”

“Personally, I would selected Jarl Balgruuf of Whiterun, though that is purely personal.”

“You consider him a friend?”

“Friend and confidant. We’ve been through a lot together since I arrived in Skyrim.”

“You trust him?”

“More than any other Jarl… well, except Eli…”

“Eli?” I realised my slip of the tongue as soon as I said it, glancing his way and I couldn’t help the slight grin I felt form. And he wasn’t stupid. He knew exactly why I called her that. “She’s a good woman. Perhaps will be a little over her head if she became High Queen, but she’s adapt to the role over time. Breaking with tradition is a difficult thing.”

Conversation died down as we sat for a few minutes, sipping at our brandy, staring into the roaring fire. I wondered how much stress and worry he felt every day. I’d spoken with most of the Jarl’s around Skyrim. Some took their role seriously and responsibly. Others took complete advantage of it. As Emperor, he was responsible for millions of lives every day, and his main role was to ensure each citizen was safe.

“Can I ask a question, Dragonborn?”

I wish everyone would just call me Ragnar, but I wasn’t going to correct Emperor. “Sure.”

“Why did you do it? Why work with the Dark Brotherhood? Wanting to kill an Emperor isn’t a surprise. I’m sure a lot of people wouldn’t mind putting a blade into my chest. I just wonder what had led you to such a path.”

I looked at him for a moment before staring into the fire again. I figured the simplest response was also the most honest. “I lost my wife.”

“If I may ask, how?”

“She was murdered. Not by the Dark Brotherhood, by someone with an axe to grind. So I killed them in return. But, you see, I’d already killed someone for my wife. I’ve done a lot of things in my life I regret, I can admit that. But I don’t regret I thing I did for her.”

“It’s amazing what someone would do for love.”

“I fell for her the day we met. Took me a while to figure it out. I killed the man who hurt her. I killed the friend who had turned her back on her, cast her aside like she was nothing. We lived happily together until the night she was taken from me. After I took my revenge, I lost my way. I found someone else, but I was deluding myself that we would have a happy ending. The day I entered your ship and eventually your office… I never complained about what you would have done to me. It would have been deserved after everything I’d done.”

“You’ve more than made up for it, Dragonborn. The slate is well and truly clear now.”

We eventually finished the bottle of brandy, so by the time I walked back into the hall, most of the guests had departed, though Mirabelle had waited for me, chatting away with Elisif and a couple of other guests. As soon as she saw me, I was practically dragged home so she could go to sleep. I chuckled a couple of apologies, though she didn’t mind, understanding that, if things happened the way they might, this would be my life going forward.

Of course, as soon as we were in her bedroom, we undressed and I still found her nothing short of a complete turn on, I ended up on my back with Mirabelle sliding down my cock and happily riding me through a couple of orgasms. The further along she was, we found her riding me was the most comfortable position for both of us. I just joked she’d always loved riding me anyway and she was just using it as an excuse. Whenever I came inside her, she would joke I couldn’t make her pregnant again yet. “Oh, I’m just getting practice in for next time,” I’d retort.

I received a letter a couple of days later, giving the agreed date for the Moot. Checking the calendar, I realised I had about three weeks to prepare for whatever was to happen. The invite was only for myself, as although there had been discussions, no-one had a clue which way the Jarl’s would vote. Would the presence of the Emperor swing a decision one way or the other?

As I had a little time to myself, I made sure I kept active, heading out with Aela on more than one hunt. Though she was with child, she wasn’t going to let that stop her doing what she normally did until it wasn’t physically possible. Plus, it was the perfect excuse for us to camp for an evening away from the hustle and bustle of the city, and also fuck like rabbits while we were at it. Aela had always had a high sex drive, but ever since learning she carried our child, I’m sure it increased even further. If she couldn’t get sex from me, she’d go looking for one of the girls.

Lydia wasn’t having the easiest of pregnancies, at least compared to Mirabelle and Aela. It’s not that she was sick or ill, she was just left feeling more exhausted by it all. Funnily enough, it was Haelga who seemed to spend more time caring for her than anything. Before she’d found out she was with our child, Haelga and her had certainly been having fun together. I don’t think Lydia was going to allow herself to fall in love again, but I knew they were certainly experimenting and having a lot of fun, like she’d done with Delphine.

Serana was serene. Easiest way to put it. Happy with her life as she knew it. She either spent time with me or one of the other girls. She kept herself occupied, did a lot of reading, and we’d go out into the countryside at least once a week so she could gather ingredients. She desired adventuring again, maybe one day, but it wasn’t a desire that would take her away from the rest of us.

As for Haelga, whenever we had the chance, we definitely got back into some old habits. And once we were back in the swing of things, so to speak, we put on a show for the other girls. Seeing her bound, gagged, spanked, whipped, then her arse completely and utterly dominated for at least a couple of hours had my girls looking at me in a different light, I was sure, but despite it all, they could see that Haelga loved every second, and that I never hurt her. Granted, when I was absolutely pounding her arse, harder and faster than ever, and all she did was moan her delight, the girls could sit there and smile, knowing we were both enjoying ourselves. But, despite all that, there was the occasional night that Haelga wanted it tender and gentle, and we would make love for what felt like hours. But she always took a potion the next morning, without fail. We’d discussed it and agreed we didn’t need a child together.

I left for Whiterun a couple of days before the Moot, figuring I could visit Balgruuf and spend some time at Breezehome. None of the girls would join me, so there was a little teasing about who I’d sleep with while I was away. I retorted by suggesting I’d fuck every available woman in Whiterun. Of course, that just led to further jokes that I’d end up doing it given the opportunity.

The night before I left, I enjoyed a threesome with Lydia and Mirabelle. Having one with two pregnant women was amusing. I basically lay down and had one on my cock and one on my face at first, Mirabelle on my cock first, then when she was done, Lydia moved from my face to my cock so I could leave a load inside her too. Resting together afterwards, they knew I’d be back in plenty of time for the birth but they did wonder what would happen.

“Do you think you’ll return as High King?” Lydia asked.

“Honestly? Not to sound arrogant, but I think there’s a good chance it could happen. I think there are numbers that would vote for me.”

“So we’re moving to the palace?” Mirabella wondered.

“If I’m High King, then yes, I would live there.”

“What about Elisif?”

“I haven’t thought that far ahead.”

“You’ll need to get married,” Lydia stated, “You and Mirabelle I mean, Ragnar.”

“You’re not going anywhere, are you?”

“Um, no, considering I’m carrying our child, and I plan on you putting another couple inside me before we’re done.” That thought excited me, to be honest. And she noticed, feeling her hand run down my body to my cock, still slick from being inside them. “Does that thought excite you? Knocking me up a couple of more times? Fucking me senseless then blasting inside me again and again?”

“Look, I love fucking or making love to all of you, and if I end up having many children with at least some of you, then that’s a good thing. I’m just as excited as you about the fact we’re going to have a family. Sure, a weird family, but a family nonetheless.”

“Mirabelle, I think he deserves to fuck us again for that. Agree?”

“By the Nine, yes!” Mirabelle exclaimed, excited at the prospect of more time riding my cock.

I wore them both out before I needed to call it quits, lying back with a smug grin as they passed out, not before I earned a soft kiss on the cheek from both of them, whispers of their love for me before they drifted off.

The five of them escorted me to the stables, placing my packs first before I made sure I gave each of them an extra-long hug. I didn’t think I’d be gone for too long, but I was sure that, when I returned, whether as High King or not, I wouldn’t have to leave again until all three of them had given birth. Mirabelle was the last to hug me, the other four giving us a moment to ourselves. Giving her a kiss, I leaned down to her ear and whispered, “If I become king, then I know I’m holding my queen.”

“Are you sure?” she asked, leaning back to meet my eyes, “Politically… Elisif…”

“I don’t care about politics. I’m going to marry for love. I did that the first time. I will be doing it the second and last. I have love for all my girls, Belle. I’m in love with you.”

“You know I wouldn’t mind being one of five or six, Ragnar. I truly mean that.”

“I know.”

“So you will have a wife and… mistresses. Who I will also enjoy too. How open-minded is your future wife?”

“If you ever wanted…”

“No,” she stated sharply, “Because if you give them up, I do too. And I don’t just mean the sex for both of us. Just having them in our lives makes everything so much better. We’re going to have a household that will be a joy to live in. A lot of fun. And plenty of children to give our love to at the same time.”

“Don’t deserve you.” That just made her smile, kissing her one final time, before I mounted up. Turning to look at them, all of them grinning, I added, “Not sure when I’ll return and what my title will be. I’m sure you’ll be the first to find out.”

“I look forward to the coronation,” Aela stated, “King Ragnar.”

I groaned but chuckled at the same time, giving them a wave before I turned onto the road leading west towards Dragon Bridge. I didn’t make it to Whiterun within the day, never planned on it. I’d packed camping supplies and stopped past Rorikstead, finding a small clearing away from the main road, making a small campfire before taking out my bedroll, sitting back and nibbling at a little food, sipping at a bottle of brandy.

Gazing up at the stars above, I couldn’t help but think back about my life so far. Growing up in the Imperial City. My first time in the Thieves Guild. Becoming a warrior in the Fighter’s Guild. The women I’d bedded during my time there. Being run out of Cyrodiil by a gang of angry husbands. Arriving in Skyrim and everything since then. The loves I’d found and lost. The adventures I’d been on. Who I’d become in the process. Saving the world more than once. I’d been a hero and a villain in the story of my life.

I’m sure even writers would look at my life and consider it nothing short of fantasy. But, still, I wouldn’t change anything. Even losing Muiri, who I would love dearly until my dying breath, her loss had led me here to this moment in my life. I only wished she was still with me. I would have loved her to meet Mirabelle and all my other girls. But I knew without losing Muiri, I would likely have never met the rest, except for Haelga. Or, at least, never have formed the same bonds with them. I’m not sure if the gods plan out our lives or not, but while one or two of their choices for me might piss me off, I generally couldn’t find too much to complain about.

Completing the ride the next morning, it was early afternoon when I walked into Dragonsreach. Balgruuf was delighted to see me as always, sitting down to enjoy a tankard of ale, of course discussing the Moot that was to begin in a couple of days’ time. I didn’t ask who he was going to decide to be High King, but we did discuss the ramifications of any decision.

“Are you staying at Breezehome?”

“Aye. No place like home.”

There was still a couple of days until the Moot, waiting for the other Jarls and the Emperor to arrive. I enjoyed dinner at the Bannered Mare that evening though left early, enjoying a night to myself with a good book for company. I spent the next day wandering around Whiterun, chatting with the locals who all knew me well by now. Despite the passage of time, few lives changed much. The scars of the Stormcloak attack had faded, most of the city now rebuilt.

I rarely went to bed alone two nights in a row, and I certainly didn’t that night, my eyes only for one woman in the Bannered Mare that evening. She only had eyes for me in return. We ate, drank and then we danced, though that only lasted a couple of songs before she whispered in my ear that we should definitely leave.

Ysolda had never been to my home before, we’d always gone back to hers. After the quickest tour in history, we headed upstairs, clothing was hastily removed, before I gently laid her back and lavished her body with attention before focusing on what we both really wanted. She tasted divine and made noises that suggested she loved everything I did with my tongue and fingers.

Despite the fact she enjoyed herself, and I always loved going down on a woman, the smile on her face that appeared after I slid my cock inside her suggested we were both getting what we really wanted. The easiest way to describe the next couple of hours would be to say we just fucked. It was hot and wild, and the only time we stopped was after I’d cum, as she’d keep going through her own orgasms, and she’d simply blow me to make sure I was nice and hard again before we continued.

“So, what are you here for?” she asked sometime later, now snuggled into my side.

“The Moot.”

“I’ve heard rumours that was happening here. You’re here because you’re the Dragonborn?”

“Aye.”

“Any idea who they’ll elect as High King?”

“No idea, to be honest. Can’t be Ulfric or the Jarl of Winterhold. Anyone else is a chance. Tradition suggests Elisif, but I don’t think she has the support of the Jarls who backed the Empire.”

“How long will you here for?”

“A few nights.” I glanced her way and her face was a picture. “Yes, Ysolda, I don’t sleep with anyone else when I’m here.”

That made her rather happy. So happy, in fact, that she mounted me yet again, and I had the delight of her riding me nice and slowly for what felt like an hour, enjoying the feel of her soft skin under my hands, her rather firm breasts and arse, her rather passionate kisses, and the feeling of her tight, wet pussy kept me nice and hard until I couldn’t resist any longer.

Sleep came quickly once we were finished again.

The Jarls began to arrive the next day. There was no real fanfare as I had a feeling the fact the Moot was being held in Whiterun hadn’t been shared. The presence of Legion soldiers wasn’t a particular surprise, though if one looked hard enough, you could definitely see more on the streets, and more patrols taking place around the Hold itself.

It was only when the Emperor himself arrived the day before the Moot that streets were cordoned off. The carriage couldn’t be taken into the city, so even the Emperor himself had to walk through the city and climb the stairs to Dragonsreach. Crowds did form at his presence, hearing whispers that this was the first time an Emperor had set foot in Whiterun for generations.

After he passed Breezehome, I headed inside and merely waited around to be summoned to Dragonsreach. The Moot wouldn’t take place right away, knowing there would be a further meeting between the Emperor and Ulfric. From rumours I’d heard, told to me by Balgruuf, of course, their first meeting had started tetchy, with some rather harsh words between the pair, but as the meeting continued, they managed to work towards common ground. Ulfric had still been defeated, and if the Emperor chose, could still be executed for treason, but there was an agreement of sorts of Windhelm surrendered, so now it was working out the details.

It was the second morning after the arrival of the Emperor that I found myself invited to Dragonsreach. Ysolda had been staying with me, noticing the guards glance past me at her, before looking back at me, desperately trying not to grin. “Tell the Jarl I just need to dress for the occasion and I’ll join the others. Let’s say an hour.”

“Of course, Dragonborn,” they replied, giving me the now usual salute before disappearing.

Ysolda stayed with me as I dressed, noting her appreciation for the finery I’d brought for the occasion. I admitted to being tempted in heading up in my armour, sword and shield, nothing but a warrior, but I figured that would give a fright to more than one housecarl. She found the idea amusing but agreed that regular clothing and no weapons would be the wise route to take.

We headed out together, though she headed home, enjoying a final embrace before I headed up the stairs to Dragonsreach. I’ll admit to feeling a touch of nerves. I knew the next few hours could change my life, if what might happen was voted on. In some ways, my future wasn’t in my hands. Not exactly.

I was surprised that they announced my arrival when I walked in the door. The Jarls, Emperor and housecarls all greeted me, and it seemed to be friendly, on the surface at least, though the splits were still apparent, those who had supported the Empire, those who supported the Stormcloaks to different sides. After taking an offered goblet, I simply stood to the side and observed, waiting for the Moot to begin.

As Balgruuf was hosting, he took the lead, asking everyone to approach the table and take their designated seats. The Emperor sat at one end of the long table, Balgruuf at the other, while others had designated places. I noticed that there was a mix, Ulfric sat next to the Jarl of Markarth, the Jarl of Dawnstar, who had not been replaced but, like the Jarl of Winterhold, signing a treaty and paying a tithe, next to Maven. I sat closest to Balgruuf. Food was served first. The most succulent of meats. The freshest vegetables. The sweetest of desserts.  All washed down with ale, mead or spirit. Whatever one desired, it seemed.

Once our appetites were sated, Balgruuf took the lead again. I glanced at the Emperor and I was left thinking he was merely observing. I wondered if he would interfere at all. Maybe his presence would swing minds one way or the other? Or perhaps he was just interested in what would happen, regardless of the outcome?

“My fellow Jarls, I welcome you to Dragonsreach on this day and thank you for attending this Moot. It has been many decades since the last Moot was convened. There are reasons why we have had to call this, but we are not here to rake over recent history. What is important today is that we set forth our future plans. For too long, our country has been divided, brother and sister fighting each other. But now that the fighting is over, the peace now must be maintained. If anyone is concerned, the Emperor has assured me, and therefore assures you, that he is as my guest and merely as an observer. He is not here to interfere with the proceedings of this day. However, Skyrim is part of the Empire, and it is his right to be here today. The future of Skyrim is the future of the Empire.

Tradition dictates that the Jarl of Solitude also inherits the title of High King. But with the death of Torygg, and no heir to take his crown, the throne now lies empty. Many would assume that Jarl Elisif would assume the title of High Queen, but that is not how it is done. If they had issue, the child would have inherited the crown with Jarl Elisif ruling by proxy until the child was of age.

Traditions exist for a reason. However, all traditions must end at one time or another. The High King has not always been the Jarl of Solitude. We can choose to continue tradition or we can set forth a new course. The decision lies with us, my fellow Jarls. The floor is open to anyone who wishes to share their opinion and cast their vote as to who should be the new High King.”

Maven wasted little time clearing her throat and rising to her feet. “My fellow Jarls, our country has, until recently, never been more divided than it has been. We could all stand here now, casting accusations about what was happening until recently, but Jarl Balgruuf is correct. We must now look to the future, repair the old wounds, and move forward as one. Our cities must be rebuilt. Trade must flourish once again. And our fighting men and women need focus on the threats externally.

Through it all, there has been one person who has been protecting Skyrim while we have been at each other’s throats. I could stand here now and list his achievements, but you already know of most of them. All I know is that it is, thanks to him, that I now sit on the throne of Riften, and it is an undertaking of which I humbly accepted at the time.

There was a time when a man of the Dragon Blood resided on the throne of the Empire itself. Though those days now but a distant memory, let us remember that the first man was Tiber Septim, a brother Nord. At this table today is another man of the Dragon Blood, and a fellow Nord. Ragnar Dragonborn. It is true that tradition must dictate we vote one way or another, but I am of the firm belief that the tradition must lay to rest. Jarl Torygg has now lain dead for many years. And while we thank Jarl Elisif for her service, a new leader must be found. A new king, who will unite our lands to a common cause and led us into what we can only hope is a brighter future.

I cast my vote for Ragnar Dragonborn, future Jarl of Solitude and High King of Skyrim.”

I met her eyes briefly and nodded as she sat down. I had kept my eye on Ulfric the entire time and he wasted little time rising to his feet. He was… rather magnanimous. “I stand before my fellow Jarls defeated, but unbroken. I retain no bitterness towards any of you, even the Emperor himself. I fought for an ideal I believed in the day I chose to rise up, and continue to believe in it to this day.

Though I stand here defeated, I agree with some of the words already stated. Our nation is divided and must unite again. If we are to remain part of the Empire, we must be its sword and shield. The Empire is surrounded by enemies who mean us harm. If that is so, then we need a leader who can take up the mantle, the sword, shield and flag, and lead us against this foe.

There were reasons behind all of this, and those reasons have no yet been resolved entirely. However, I have fought Ragnar Dragonborn, and he is a true warrior. And I am aware of all his deeds. I cannot vote for Jarl Elisif. I am sure you all know why. And none of the other Holds wield the power that are required to lead this great nation of ours. Therefore, I vote for Ragnar Dragonborn as High King of Skyrim.” He looked across the table at me. “I am putting my trust in you, Dragonborn. I hope you continue to earn it.”

I nodded my head in his direction as he sat down. Elisif wasted little time adding her voice, rising to her feet straight away. “I loved my husband and I love my country. And while I loved my people, I wish to also exercise correct judgement when it comes to my own position. I arrived at this Moot aware there was a chance a decision would be made, and from the casting of the first two votes, I will stand before my fellow Jarls now and state that I will not vote, though if I did, my vote would be for Ragnar Dragonborn. Instead, to help ease the process that is bound to follow, I will abdicate the throne of Solitude and hope to see it filled by someone that will have the majority of support.”

Elisif met my eyes and gave me a sad smile. Convention be damned, I leaned across and took her hand, giving it a squeeze. I was relieved when she squeezed back. As soon as she sat down, everyone stood and applauded such a magnanimous gesture. Even Ulfric showed his respect for it. Once everyone sat down, the rest stood up and spoke, explaining their reasons for whoever they voted.

Jarl Idgrod of Morthal voted for Ragnar Dragonborn, primarily in thanks for protecting her city from the vampire menace. Jarl Igmund of Markarth voted for Ragnar Dragonborn, primarily in thanks for protecting his city from the Forsworn threat. Jarl Siddgeir of Falkreath voted for himself. That earned plenty of snorts of derision, one or two whispered comments about the ‘arrogant young fool’. Jarl Skald of Dawnstar wanted to vote for Ulfric, but when that was denied, even Ulfric explaining that the vote could not be counted, he abstained. When Jarl Korir of Winterhold voted for Ragnar Dragonborn, that certainly earned a few surprised glances, until he explained that my time with the College had ended with our saving of Winterhold from the Thalmor threat within.

And though his vote was not particularly necessary, Jarl Balgruud talked for a good ten minutes before he proudly announced that he would vote for me too. “My fellow Jarls and Emperor, I believe that the votes are as follows. For Ragnar Dragonborn, the Holds of the Rift, Eastmarch, Hjaalmarch, the Rift, Winterhold and Whiterun. For Jarl Siddgerir, the Hold of Falkreath. There was no vote from Haafingar due to the abdication of Jarl Elisif, and Jarl Skald of the Pale abstained. Does anyone disagree?” There was a sea of shaken heads. “Your Majesty, I do believe the Jarls of Skyrim have elected their new High King.”

“Indeed you have. Jarl Elisif, your abdication will require an Imperial decree and would need to be signed.”

“I will do so whenever required, Your Majesty.”

“Very well. Ragnar Dragonborn, the Jarls of Skyrim have voted. Do you accept their decision? Will you accept the position as Jarl of Solitude and High King of Skyrim?”

I rose to my feet, making sure I met the eye of each Jarl and the Emperor before I replied. “Thank you for honouring me with all your kind words. When I first entered Skyrim all those years ago, I would never have believed I would find myself here, at this moment, standing before you with the vote of a Moot suggesting I become High King. And, of course, I graciously accept your votes. I would consider it the greatest honour to become High King and lead Skyrim into what I can only hope would be a brighter future. I will admit that power of this kind is something I have never sought. For those of you who know me, I live in Solitude now, but as an ordinary citizen.

All of you have spoken of the divisions and conflict that has led us to this point in our joined history. I can only assure you that I will work with each and every one of your as a partner going forward. We must all work together to ensure the wounds are healed, the divisions between us are eradicated, and that we all work together under the guidance of our Emperor towards a better tomorrow.

Jarl Elisif, I thank you for your graciousness today. To give up a Jarldom is no small decision, and I hope that you will remain within the court of Solitude, to impart your wisdom and provide guidance, particularly in the early days of my rule.”

“Of course, Ragnar,” she replied softly, a slight smile on her face. Guess I was saying the right things.

I dipped my head. “You all my thanks for the vote today and I only hope I will prove worthy of your faith in the days, months and years ahead.”

Taking a seat, the Emperor rose to his and gave a small speech, thanking the Jarls for coming together peacefully and he approved of the selection. Not that it was required, but I figure gaining his approval would help relations between Skyrim and the Emperor. Once he’d given his small speech, Balgruuf stood up, asked if there were any other matters. When no-one said anything, he stated the Moot was now closed.

Once that was the case, all I could ask was, “So, um, when is the coronation?”

“We’ll organise that once you return to Solitude, Dragonborn. You will need to become Jarl of Solitude and High King of Skyrim. Your fellow Jarls will need to attend to swear fealty. You will then need to do the same with the Emperor. After that, the crown is yours to do with as you wish,” Balgruuf replied.

While the rest of the Jarls chose to stay at Dragonsreach for the evening, I wasn’t Jarl or High King yet, so I returned to Breezehome. Of course, I didn’t do so alone, escorted by a pair of guards. I wanted to tell them I didn’t exactly need protecting, but they were just doing their jobs. I’d been home only a few minutes when there was a knock on the door, opening it to see Ysolda behind the two guards.

“Do you know this woman, lord?”

Ysolda looked at me wide eyed for a moment before giggling. “Yes, she can come in.”

“Of course, lord. Just making sure.”

I closed the door once Ysolda was inside. The first question she asked is, “Why are they calling you lord?”

“Um… Because I’m about to become the Jarl of Solitude and High King of Skyrim.”

Her jaw dropped so low, I’m sure it did actually hit the floor. I think she was more taken aback by it than myself. “Should I stay the night?” she wondered, “I mean…”

“You’re staying the night. If I need to command it…”

She giggled again. “Oh, power going to your head already, Ragnar?”

“This might be the last time so…”

“We’ll make it a good night?”

“Aye. The best.”

I didn’t leave Whiterun for a couple of days. Apart from another couple of meetings with the Jarls and Emperor, I was left to enjoy my last days as a civilian. That meant enjoying time with Ysolda, who knew this would be our last opportunity. I was tempted to offer her a chance at joining me in Solitude, but I didn’t know how the others would react, so didn’t tempt fate.

That last night, we definitely made what I would call love. We definitely liked each other a hell of a lot. If it continued, I had no doubt we’d fall in love. I think she was close to saying it once, laying back on the bed, her legs wrapped around me, cock gently sliding inside her, our mouths rarely parting. I’m fairly sure she started to say those three words before stopping herself.

The decision to leave was eventually made for me, as the Jarls and Emperor would all return to Solitude together. I knew leaving Whiterun that I would only return in some sort of official capacity going forward. Ysolda escorted me to the stables, and I was now guarded by four soldiers. This time, I did tell them I could look after myself. They retorted stating the Emperor insisted I was guarded, for the time being. Once I was High King, I could do as I pleased. I sighed and accepted it for now.

A last hug and kiss with Ysolda was shared, hugging her tightly. “You should visit me,” I suggested lightly.

“Would you like that?”

“Definitely. And maybe one or two of my girls as well. Lydia liked you. So did Aela.”

“One of your girls? Power definitely going to your head.”

“I’m not going to stand here and say I don’t mind the idea of being surrounded by beautiful women.”

She leaned back and met my eyes. “My home is Whiterun, Ragnar. But… I’ll think about visiting, at least.”

I kissed her a final time before finally mounting up. Wishing her farewell, the words returned in kind, the four guards took their positions and we began our ride back north.

Chapter 64: Crowning Glory

I think the word to describe my return to Solitude would be triumphant. No doubt the city had been told of what had transpired at the Moot. The road leading up the gates was lined with well-wishers, and once I entered the city on horseback, alongside the Emperor, the other Jarls following us, the crowds… roared. Elisif may have been loved but the chant of my name was almost deafening.

Dragonborn.

We stayed on horseback until we reached the Blue Palace, the crowds being kept back a distance so we could dismount and peace and head in. It appeared preparations were already underway for our coronation. During our journey back north, we hadn’t talked business at all. Once we were inside, the first thing I did was excuse myself, take Elisif by the hand, and lead her to her private quarters. Asking for privacy before shutting the doors, I took her in my arms and held her tight.

“Ragnar, I’m fine,” she murmured, “It’s… actually a relief, in a way.”

“Eli…”

She leaned back, one of those grins I loved. “Ragnar, I knew they were going to make that decision. I made the best choice for both of us, but also the people of this city. I know the city will be safe hands with you in charge. And… I want you to marry Mirabelle. I know how much you love her. And you are her heart and soul. I know you love me in your own way, as much as I love you, but trust me, all of us know what Mirabelle means to you.”

“Will you stay within the court?”

“Of course. I don’t plan on moving out exactly. I’m sure you have plans for us.”

“I do,” I admitted, “Been thinking about it for a little while, just in case.”

“So while this may no longer be my permanent bedroom, I appreciate knowing I can still call this palace home.” She paused before adding, “And I’d love a child. I’m still taking potions, of course. I’m sure we can all come to an agreement, how it will all work.”

“Are you sure you don’t want to find a man to call your own?”

“I may do one day, Ragnar, but right now, I’m happy.” She grabbed both my hands with hers. “And please believe me. I know you have doubts about all of this. Mirabelle tells me you often express reservations about this arrangement. Trust me, the six of us love you and we know how much you love all of us in return. None of us are jealous, or if we do feel it, we don’t feel it for long. We are all with the Dragonborn because you chose us, but more importantly, we choose to be here. If we didn’t, we would have left.”

“Hmmm. Maybe I should look at it like that.”

The smile on her face only broadened. “Exactly. I’m here because I love being with you, Ragnar. Whenever we are alone like this, you make me feel like the most special woman in the world, like the only woman in the world. And it would be my pleasure to continue my service to both Solitude, its Jarl and also the High King.”

I gave her a hug, holding her tight against my chest for what felt like a long time, before there was finally a knock at the door, asking if we were available.

The first matter of business was the abdication of Elisif. It was only after she finished signing the paperwork that she showed the first real signs of emotion, needing to wipe her eyes after she had signed the final page. I got down on a knee next to her chair and gave her a hug. She didn’t sob but only the hardest of hearts wouldn’t have understood what she had just given up. But I know she had the respect of everyone in that room. Even Ulfric…

Solitude would now be leaderless until my coronation as both Jarl and High King. It was agreed that it would take place the very next day. Therefore, the only question I had was about the fact I was still a bachelor… technically, at least. And then there was the question of the life I did leave. I sat down with the Emperor, Balgruuf and Elisif to raise my concerns.

“You can marry after you’ve taken the crown,” the Emperor stated, “You won’t be the first nor the last to become a ruler as a single man.”

“As for your lifestyle, no-one will really care if you deliver what you promise,” Balgruuf added, “It will only be if the people are hungry and afraid that they will turn on you.”

“Again, won’t be the first or last,” the Emperor added.

“You are intending to marry?” Balgruuf asked.

“Aye.”

“It would certainly be cause for celebration after your coronation. Who would you marry, if I may ask?”

“Mirabelle Ervine. She was once a member of the College of Winterhold.”

“Hmmm….” Balgruuf stated, stroking his chin, “She’s Breton, yes?” I nodded. “Positives and negatives to such a marriage. You can marry whoever you want, of course, but there will always be a political element. Marrying a Breton will please the rulers of High Rock. And if she’s a mage, that will hopefully change the minds of some of those who have a real dislike for those with expertise in magic.”

“I’m marrying her because I love her, Balgruuf,” I stated.

Moving away from my private life, the trio explained the procedure of how I would be crowned. I would leave the city the night before, returning the next day, walking through the city through the crowds, before entering the palace. I would then take my place on the throne, where the High Priest from the Temple of the Divines would invoke the will of the gods before the Crown of Solitude would be placed upon my head, followed by the Crown of Skyrim. And that would be it. Solitude would have a new Jarl, and Skyrim would have a new High King.

My girls wanted to join me outside the walls the night before my coronation, but Mirabelle and Lydia would have found it far too uncomfortable, while Aela was just about starting to show now. I insisted they stay within the walls. Once the coronation was over, I would immediately make plans about moving all of them into the palace.

I didn’t camp alone the night before my coronation. I happily built a small tent and sat by the campfire, enjoying what was definitely going to be my last ever night of peace. At least six soldiers patrolled around me, though stayed far enough away not to bother me. Not that they would have done so. I did tempt a couple of them to join me for at least a drink, but they were under orders to ensure no-one approached me, even if they looked like city guards or other soldiers. They were taking their roles very seriously.

Despite the impending coronation, I found sleep easy that night, rising with the sunlight the next morning, enjoying a simple breakfast before I dressed. I had been deciding between fine clothes or armour. Then I figured I was the Dragonborn. Most people who knew me as a warrior, so I would enter as one. I wasn’t hoping to look like a conquering hero. I was arriving as the man the Jarls of Skyrim had voted for. I liked to think I had at least the respect of most people of Solitude, if not Skyrim.

I could have entered on horseback but I chose to walk towards the gates of Solitude, flanked by the six soldiers, three to either side. Not too tight to me, but I don’t think anyone would have been dumb enough to try anything. I had my sword and shield regardless, and if desperate, a dagger I always kept sheathed.

The gates opened once I crested the hill, immediately greeted by a cacophony of noise. Guards and soldiers kept the crowds back as I slowly walked by them, though I quickly stepped to both sides, grasping the hands of the citizens. Colourful flowers were being thrown by well-wishers as I slowly made my way along. I recognised a few faces in the crowd, but I had a feeling people would have quickly made their way to Solitude from around Skyrim to catch a glimpse of what was happening.

The Emperor, the Jarls, and all my girls were waiting for me to arrive at the Blue Palace. Alongside them was the High Priest and other members from the Temple of the Divines. After greeting all of them with a handshake, I was led inside by the High Priest, only the local nobility waiting inside as I was led towards the throne. The High Priest asked to take the throne. Once I was comfortable, he invoked the will of the Divines before he took the first crown, that of Solitude, and placed it upon my head. I was then asked to repeat a sermon, where I promised to fulfil my obligations to the people of Solitude.

Once that was done, the crown was removed as the next ceremony took place immediately. I was certainly liking the fact it was taking place without any pomp and ceremony. I had suggested more than once that, if I was to be made ruler, I wanted it done with a minimum of fuss. Considering the carnage that had taken place across Skyrim, everyone had agreed, simply that it would keep costs down. An ostentatious, obviously expensive ceremony would have put many noses out of joint. Not the best way to start my rule of both city and nation.

There was a little more to becoming High King of Skyrim, at least in regards to the oath taken. Holding the crown in his hands, he held it high but did not place it on my head as he asked a series of questions.

“Will you solemnly promise and swear to govern the Peoples of Skyrim, according to the respective laws and customs?”

“Aye, I do.”

“Will you to your power cause Law and Justice, in Mercy, to be executed in all your judgments?”

“Aye, I will.”

“Will you to the utmost of your power maintain the Laws of the Divines?”

“Aye, I will.”

“Oh Akatosh, the crown of the faithful; bless we beseech thee and sanctify this thy servant our king, and as thou dost this day set a crown of pure gold upon his/her head, so enrich his royal heart with thine abundant grace, and crown him with all princely virtues through the Divines.”

Gesturing for me to lower my head, I did so, feeling the crown places upon me as he added, “Divines crown you with a crown of glory and righteousness, that having a right faith and manifold fruit of good works, you may obtain the crown of an everlasting kingdom by the gift of they whose kingdom endureth for ever.”

Sitting back, the High Priest bowed his head as he stepped aside. The Jarls of Skyrim then stepped forward to swear fealty to their new High King. An old friend obviously made sure he was the first to bend the knee before me.

“I, Jarl Balgruuf of Whiterun, do become your liege man of life and limb, and of earthly worship; and faith and truth will I bear unto you, to live and die, against all manner of folks. May the Divines bless you, King Ragnar of Skyrim.”

All the other Jarls followed. Even those who had not voted for me did so willingly, or so it seemed. Maybe the fact I’d had such support had changed their minds, or they were willing to give me a chance. Or maybe they were hoping it would just blow up in my face. There was still a chance the second thing could happen if I made the wrong decisions.

Once fealty had been sworn by the Jarls and then the local nobility, I thought I’d have to swear fealty to the Emperor. When the High Priest suggested it, the Emperor actually waved it away. “I know King Ragnar is loyal to Empire and its Emperor. He is the one that ended the civil war on our behalf. I know where his loyalties lie.”

“I serve Skyrim and the Empire, Your Majesty,” I stated, standing from my throne and bending the knee in his direction.

“Rise and take your throne, King Ragnar. Today is a glorious day.”

I looked around the room and immediately locked eyes with Mirabelle. I smiled at her as I announced the first order of business. “The High King of Skyrim is unmarried and that must be rectified.” I looked at the gaggle of clergy. “Do any of you have an Amulet of Mara?”

I figured they all carried one and I was quickly handed one. Looping it around my neck, I stood up and walked straight towards Mirabelle, taking both her hands as I lowered myself down onto a knee. “I will keep this simple, Belle. Will you marry me?”

She burst into tears, of course. Being heavily pregnant had made her rather emotional, but I think the fact I’d finally asked caused some tears at the same time. She nodded as I immediately stood up, hugged and kissed her. There was applause and a few cheers, while someone suggested no-one would leave as there would be a wedding. “Tomorrow?” I asked Mirabelle, “I know it’s quick, but then everyone can see you crowned as queen.”

“I don’t care when,” she murmured into my chest, “I just want to be Mirabelle Dragonborn. I want to be married when I give birth to our child. I want to be a family. A weird family but it’s what we both want.”

I glanced at the High Priest. “How quickly can we organise a wedding?”

The Emperor answered for him. “Day after tomorrow, King Ragnar. It will give Solitude and Skyrim a cause for celebration. A new king, a marriage and a new queen, and the security of succession with the birth of your first child.”

“Is that okay, Belle?” I asked softly.

“I’d do it right this minute if given the chance.”

“Well…”

“Patience, both of you,” Lydia stated next to us, glancing to see she was wiping her eyes with one hand, resting her other hand on her bump at the same time.

It was suggested any further celebrations be put on hold until after our marriage which was fine with me. The news was quickly passed to the crowd outside, and I was told later that the reactions was overwhelmingly positive. Using my new found power, I ordered that we take into account this would be an event for the entire city to experience. I wanted a party to celebrate not just my coronation nor my marriage, but the fact Skyrim was now secure and that hopefully it would all lead to a brighter future. Of course, I was told it would be done so immediately.

Elisif had already moved out of her private quarters, letting me know she would move into the house with the other girls. Mirabelle would obviously stay with me. As the other Jarls departed, even the Emperor choosing to stay at Castle Dour, the girls all shared a hug before I received one from all of them, whispering their congratulations at the same time, before Mirabelle and I were left alone. Stewards who had worked for Elisif remained, though after enjoying a simple dinner, we dismissed them for the evening. I made them chuckle, admitting it would take getting used to people waiting on us, and I promised immediately that I would always be polite.

Once we were alone, Mirabelle was eager for me. I think it was finally proposing that had heightened her mood. She didn’t even give me an opportunity to help her undress, practically ripping off her clothes before leaping on me… well, leaping as much as a heavily pregnant woman can do. But my trousers were lowered quickly as I lay back on the bed, Mirabelle wasted no time in swallowing my cock. “Oh gods,” I groaned, watching her head bob up and down so fast, she must have been desperate to get me off.

She added her own thoughts quickly. “I’m making you cum, King Ragnar. I’m going to swallow every drop. Then you are going to absolutely fuck your future wife and queen.”

“Like that, is it?”

“I’m getting on my elbows and knees, Ragnar. I want you to just pound me senseless all night.”

“Love it when you’re in this mood.”

She smiled before swallowing my cock. I didn’t say anything else, simply leaning forward enough to stroke her hair, but I didn’t last all that long. I warned her once, not that I needed to, falling back on the bed and groaning as I felt the first shot into her mouth. She kept her word, glancing to see her head bob up and down until I was clearly empty. She then helped undress me so I was as naked as she was, sitting on my lap as I lay back. “You still find me beautiful?” she asked.

I sat up and kissed her. “Belle, you are carrying our child. Of course I do.”

“It’ll be another month or two at most, all being well.” She chuckled to herself. “I was told my emotions would be all over the place, but… I’ve been really horny lately too. Is that weird?”

“I’m not going to complain that my future wife and mother of my child wants me so badly all the time.”

She slid off my lap and got on all fours, just as she said. I sat on my knees behind her before leaning forward on one hand, feeling her up with the other. She was incredibly wet. Placing my lips by her ear, I whispered, “Are you turned on right now?”

“Gods yes, Ragnar.”

“Did sucking the cock of your future husband do that?”

“I just want you all the time at the moment,” she whispered.

“So you want my cock right now?”

“Please, Ragnar,” she pleaded.

“Not my fingers?”

She shuddered as I slid them inside her. “They feel wonderful too,” she muttered, “But your cock is…” She shuddered as I found the spot I was looking for quickly, “Your cock is so hard and thick…”

“Queen Mirabelle. Do you like the sound of that?”

“Please, Ragnar… I want your cock. Please give it to me.” I withdrew my fingers and slowly slid my cock inside her, taking my time until the entire length nestled in her tight, warm pussy. I think she nearly started to cry, feeling her breath catch more than once. “Fuck me. Please,” she pleaded, “Make me cum constantly.”

“Love you when you’re in this mood.”

“I just want to cum thanks to my future husband.”

Once I was comfortable, as was she, Mirabelle Ervine, soon to be Queen Mirabelle Dragonborn, was well and truly fucked by King Ragnar Dragonborn, her future husband. And she must have been turned on, as she rarely enjoyed an orgasm in that position. I think she helped herself by rubbing her clit at the same time, but she came plenty. I didn’t bother counting, just pounding her for what must have been quite a while before I finally came inside her again. I’d been going so long, now covered in sweat, that I needed to roll off onto my back, Mirabelle falling onto her side and immediately snuggling into me.

“Fucking hell, that felt good.” I couldn’t help chuckle. Even in the bedroom, she rarely cursed. “I love you, Ragnar.”

“I love you too, Belle.” I wrapped an arm around her, holding her close, her free hand running up and down my chest.

“I’m giving you around fifteen minutes, then I’m going to ride you. Can you still handle that?”

“Belle, I’m going to be inside you again. I can handle anything.”

I grinned as she climbed onto my a little later, watching as my cock slowly disappeared inside her, before looking at her face, it lighting up with nothing but sheer delight as she got herself comfortable. To say she then rode me with abandon would be an understatement. I’m sure she worried about hurting me, as it was a hard, fast ride, but I thoroughly enjoyed every single second, eventually sitting up enough that I could kiss her at the same time.

When I moved my thumb to her clit, that just drove her wild, and made her ride me with desperation. “Gods, I want to cum so much,” she murmured, “But I don’t want to just yet.”

I kissed down her neck, teasing her even more, before moving down to her now larger breasts. Her nipples were rather sensitive nowadays, and giving them a nibble while playing with her clit was simply too much, feeling her squeeze my cock as she enjoyed an orgasm. And I think it was a good one, as she needed to stop, only the sounds of her deep breathing, before she wasted no time continuing. “So horny,” she murmured.

“I’ll keep going as long as you can.”

I’m not sure how long she rode me for. I didn’t count how many times she had an orgasm. But she rode me for so long that she was falling asleep on me, managing to just about move. She even asked that I continue to play with her clit, her body shuddering at my continuous touching. “Don’t want to stop…”

“Belle, you’re exhausted.”

“I just want you, Ragnar.”

“I know, but I think you’ve had enough.”

“Need to cum again?”

“No, this was about you, sweetie.”

She slid off my lap, lay down next to me, and promptly fell asleep, much to my amusement. I hugged her tight to my body, resting a hand on her swollen belly, and fell asleep a little later. She was a little embarrassed the next morning, and also feeling very tender, something I did tease her about until there was a knock at the door, a steward announcing breakfast was ready.

Before leaving, Mirabelle hugged and kissed me. “Thank you for last night, Ragnar.”

“I loved that side of you, Belle. Someone who just wanted me, needed me so much.”

“I’m still feeling a little… funny, but nowhere near like last night. Maybe it’ll disappear once this baby is out of me.” She paused a moment. “Gods, don’t think sex is off the table at all. I’ll need…”

“Belle, I know what you meant. It’s fine.”

She smiled and we headed to the dining room hand in hand. As we would be getting married the next day, we spent all day preparing. Mirabelle needed a dress to wear, while I insisted on wearing my armour with a fine cloak. I was the Dragonborn, a warrior king, and I would dress like one being crowned, and then being married. Mirabelle actually agreed with my viewpoint, stating she fell in love with the warrior. I was intrigued as to what she would wear. She said it wouldn’t be white, something simple but elegant, and also something she could slip out of easily if we wanted to get away for five minutes to fuck each other. Another reason to love her.

We slept together that evening but were not intimate. That was a rare event, as I think we were always intimate whenever sharing a bed, but that night, we lay together and talked about… everything. She knew everything about me, of course. Every secret I had, she knew. Her life had been markedly different to mine, but any secrets she had, she told me in return. We hid nothing. We trusted each other completely.

The next morning, we parted after breakfast. She would be looked after by our stewards, while all our girls would be arriving to get dressed, as they would all be her maids during the service. I walked up to the castle, greeted by the rest of the Companions, who had arrived the night before. While I would have liked old friends from the Thieves Guild to be there, it would have raised too many questions about who they were.

Though I had male friends, my closest friends were all female, so I was at a loss as to who would be my groomsman. Rather late in the day, I asked if Balgruuf wouldn’t mind, and the twins, Vilkas and Farkas. They all agreed immediately, Balgruuf having clothing for the occasion, assuring the twins that armour was just fine, as I would be getting married in the same. Otherwise, it was a case of waiting for the ceremony to begin. Having married before, I knew what to expect, though marrying as the King of Skyrim, I guess things would be a little different. For one, the High Priest would be overseeing the ceremony.

At the correct time, I was standing in place, Balgruuf next to me, rings in his pocket, having asked him half a dozen times that he had them, the twins to his side, the crowd quietly chatting away as we waited for Mirabelle to arrive. When the doors opened, the conversation died down as the assembled choir began to sing, Haelga leading the way, followed by Serana, Aela, Lydia and then Elisif, before Mirabelle appeared, wearing an absolutely stunning blue dress, her face covered by a veil, and to my complete surprise, the Emperor himself escorting her down the aisle.

I couldn’t help grin as she was slowly led towards me. The Emperor shook my hand first, wishing me good luck, before I took her hand as she stood next to me. “You look… beautiful…”

She didn’t say anything. I think she was desperately trying not to cry. Heavily pregnant woman about to get married? I think the ceremony was going to be kept short simply to prevent her breaking down completely. Once there was complete silence, the High Priest cleared his throat and began the ceremony.

“Dearly beloved and honoured guests. We are gathered together here to join Ragnar and Mirabelle in the union of marriage. This contract is not to be entered into lightly, but thoughtfully and seriously, and with a deep realization of its obligations and responsibilities. Ragnar, I believe you have vows you wish to share.”

I took Mirabelle’s hands in my own, meeting her eyes behind the veil. “I’ll keep this simple, Belle. One of the greatest days of my life was the day I walked into the College of Winterhold and met you the first time. I knew on that day that we would marry. I wasn’t sure where. I wasn’t sure when. But I knew we would be together, we would fall in love, we would marry, then we would have a family. It felt ordained, as if the Divines themselves wished it to happen. I can only make you this solemn promise. I will endeavour to make you as happy as you have made me every single day since we met, and every single day ahead.”

“Mirabelle, do you wish to share vows?”

She gave my hands a squeeze, taking a deep breath. “I love you, Ragnar Dragonborn. You are the light of my life. All I want is for us to be together, to raise a family, and grow old side by side, facing whatever life throws at us. I know you would do anything to protect me and the family we are about to start. All I know is that I will remain by your side until we take our final breaths.”

“Now that the vows have been exchanged, Ragnar, do you take Mirabelle to be your wife? Do you promise to love, honour, cherish, and protect her, forsaking all others, and holding only unto her forevermore?”

“I do.”

“Mirabelle, do you take Ragnar to be your husband? Do you promise to love, honour, cherish, and protect her, forsaking all others, and holding only unto her forevermore?”

“I do.”

“The rings.” Balgruuf handed them to the High Priest. “Ragnar and Mirabelle will now exchange rings as a symbol of love and commitment to each other. Rings are a precious metal; they are also made precious by you wearing them. Your wedding rings are special; they enhance who you are. They mark the beginning of your long journey together. Your wedding ring is a circle; a symbol of love never ending. It is the seal of the vows you have just taken to love each other without end.

Ragnar, please place the ring on Mirabelle’s left hand and repeat after me.”

“As a sign of my love, that I have chosen you, above all else, with this ring, I thee wed.”

She was barely holding herself together now, and struggled through the words when placing the ring on my hand in return.

“To make your relationship work will take love. Continue to date each other. Take time to show each other that your love and marriage grows stronger with time. It will take trust to know that in your hearts, you truly want what is best for each other. It will take dedication to stay open to one another, and to learn and grow together. It will take loyalty to go forward together, without knowing exactly what the future brings. And it will take commitment to hold true to the journey you have both pledged today.

And now by the power vested in me by the Eight Divines, it is my honour and delight to declare you married. Go forth and live each day to the fullest. You may seal this declaration with a kiss.”

I lifted her veil and she practically fell against me as we enjoyed our first kiss as husband and wife. Though a tear or two did fall, the smile on her face was something else. She was nothing short of beautiful. I knew I was a very lucky man.

“I am pleased and honoured to present the newlyweds, Ragnar and Mirabelle Dragonborn.”

The assembled masses rose and applauded as she took my hand and I led us down the aisle and out into the sunshine. The Divines were definitely pleased with the marriage as we were escorted to Castle Dour. I had a memory of the last wedding I’d attended in Solitude. Led towards a private room, I asked for a few minutes, and once the door closed and I locked it, I took her in my arms as she wept. “Sorry,” she murmured, “I’m just so happy.”

“I love you.”

“I love you,” she mumbled into my chest. She let herself calm down before finally looking up. “Mirabelle Dragonborn,” she whispered.

“Aye. Did you like the service?”

“I’m glad they kept it relatively simple. I would have started crying too much otherwise.” She rested her head against my chest again. “I’m just glad we’re married. I won’t say finally. I understood why it might never have happened.”

“You will be my queen, Belle. And I will do my best to treat you like one every day. I will endeavour to keep the people of Solitude and Skyrim happy, but your happiness is the most important to me. If you’re happy, I’m happy, and I will be a far more effective leader.”

She leaned back again. “This might sound… strange… but while I will enjoy ruling alongside you, all I want to be is a mother now, Ragnar. I’ve had this life growing inside me for months. Now I just want to watch our child grow once I give birth. Keep our child safe and protected. Watch him or her learn and develop.” She stood on her tiptoes and gently kissed me. “And I will definitely make sure I’m with child again as soon as possible.”

“I’m guessing we’re having a few?”

“Yes. Yes, we are, Ragnar. No matter what, I can promise you an endless amount of sex, and that’s just from your wife. Can’t forget our mistresses.” I couldn’t help chuckle. “Lydia will want more than one. Not sure about Aela. I think if she has a daughter, she’ll be happy. Serana and Elisif will eventually want children too. And they’ll want you to be the father.”

“Guess we’ll have to organise the palace.”

“But that’s for later.” She let me go and look around before leaning back and managing to sit up on a chest of drawers. “I think you need to fuck your queen right now, King Ragnar.”

Reaching under her skirt, I pulled her panties down, not surprised they were already wet. I made her giggle, and blush a little, as I held them to my nose and inhaled. Her scent made me hard as a rock. Once I had my cock out, she shuffled forward, eager for me to slide it inside her. Once we were joined, she looped her arms around my neck and whispered, “Fuck your queen, my king.”

Wasn’t a bad way to seal our marriage. And, of course, there was a knock on the door in the middle of our coupling. “We’re busy. Come back later,” I grunted.

“How long, sire?”

“Belle?”

She met my eyes then smirked. “Your king is pleasing his wife. He will be as long as he’s needed.”

“Of course, ma’am. We’ll let the guests know you’re currently indisposed.”

“Thank you,” I added, hearing the steps disappear, then I focused on pleasing my wife, both of us enjoying an orgasm a few minutes later.

“You can keep my panties,” she said, hopping down, “I’ll enjoy feeling your cum dribble out of me for the next few minutes.”

I glanced up. “Thank you, Divines, for giving me my wife.” I put her panties in my pocket, adding, “I might fake sniffles later so I can sniff these during the night.” That made her crack up laughing before I kissed her a final time. “Come on, we should go greet our guests.”

We were introduced as husband and wife to the assembled guests, and before anything else was done, Mirabelle was crowned as Queen of Skyrim. A simple ceremony but I don’t she would have had it any other way. Once the applause died down, I was thankful I didn’t have to give a speech, Mirabelle and I being seated as the Emperor stepped forward and shared a few words. He kept it short, though, and soon the sound of music and conversation filled the air as we were joined by our friends at the long table.

It was a great day and evening, all of Solitude joining in the festivities. By the time Mirabelle and I were ready to call it a night, the party was still going, and I had a feeling would continue well into the morning. We wished most of the guests near us goodnight. The Jarls and Emperor would all depart the next morning, so this was the best time for them to wish us goodbye. The last goodbye was to the Emperor, who suggested I get Skyrim back in order, but I would have an invitation to the Imperial City in the future. I hadn’t returned there since I’d left for Skyrim, so I stated any invite would be accepted immediately.

Returning to the Blue Palace, while I would have liked to have made love to my wife, we undressed and collapsed into bed, Mirabelle curling up next to my body and we promptly fell asleep.

The next couple of weeks were busy for a variety of reasons. One was the fact I wanted to move all my girls into the palace. I knew about the Pelagius Wing, told long ago that it was closed off. I thought that was ridiculous so I went in myself to deal with anything in there. It was empty, just full of cobwebs and the appearance of having been abandoned for a long time. So I sent in servants and cleaners, made sure each room had new furniture, and to ensure everyone was comfortable, I spent a night sleeping in each room, Mirabelle joining me, of course.

Lydia, Aela, Serana, Haelga and Elisif moved in immediately, each taking a room. If the stewards thought it an unusual arrangement, they kept their opinion to themselves, but I was eventually told by more than one that it simply added life to what was usually a rather quiet palace.

Any other plans I had regarding my new reign, I put off until Mirabelle and Lydia gave birth to our child. I wanted to tour Skyrim and visit each city, realising that the people would want to see their king. I didn’t know Torygg at all, but I knew most Jarls kept to themselves in their halls, venturing out only rarely. I wanted to be a king of the people, so to speak. I wanted the ordinary man and woman to know their king recognised them as much as any Jarl.

But, for now, it perhaps wasn’t the right time but I was focused on my personal life and the impending arrival of children in our lives.

Chapter 65: Rise

Six weeks after our wedding, Mirabelle gave birth to a perfectly healthy baby boy. I doubt any birth was easy, but both mother and child came through with flying colours. Sitting by her side, watching her hold our first child, she could only weep while I certainly felt nothing short of proud. The gods had finally been kind.

We named our son Ragnar, taking the name of his father. When he assumed the throne, he would be known as Ragnar Dragonborn II.

And from that day on, it’s fair to say Mirabelle was simply Queen of Skyrim… and a mother. She was delighted the day we married, and the smile hadn’t left her fact since that day. After giving birth, her purpose in life was now our family. That’s not me putting words in her mouth, it’s what she told me barely days after she gave birth. All she wanted was another child as quickly as we could manage. We couldn’t have sex for a few weeks, but that didn’t mean we didn’t sleep together nearly every night, already planning for the future.

Within a month, Lydia gave birth to our son. She gave birth slightly prematurely, though there was never any danger to mother or child. Mirabelle held her hand the entire time, almost coaching her through it. We named our son Havardr Dragonborn, an old Nordic name meaning ‘highest guardian’. He might never become High King like his brother, but I would ensure I instilled the right thoughts into his mind about protecting his family and Skyrim.

Once they gave birth, Mirabelle and Lydia were closer than ever. In fact, I would say all six women were. Haelga, Serana and Elisif simply doted on the pair of them, Serana and Elisif both suggesting we should start thinking about children. Aela, now heavily pregnant, simply wanted to give birth. I delayed any suggestion of leaving Solitude until she gave birth as well. Just like Mirabelle, she proved to be rather horny the longer it went on, Mirabelle proving how open-minded she was by escorting me by hand more than once to Aela’s bedroom, where my cock was ridden almost red raw by Aela. No complaints from me. Just like Mirabelle and Lydia, she was just as beautiful as always.

Six weeks after Lydia, Aela gave birth to our daughter. The Divines were certainly looking after us, another healthy child given to our rather unusual family. All the girls were present once again, Mirabelle and Lydia helping Aela through the worst of it. I stood to the side. I had held the hand of Mirabelle during her birth, but now that two of my girls had been through it, they could give advice to Aela, knowing what she was feeling.

I had promised Aela I would have no say if she gave birth to our daughter, that she would be free to choose her name. As soon as she held our child in her arms, she whispered that she wanted to name her after her mother, Freida. I think the name fit regardless. I knew, in that moment, Aela would solely focus on raising our daughter and that she wouldn’t want another child. That didn’t bother me for a second.

The palace now had three babies. One would have thought it would now be a madhouse but the six girls came together straight away. In fact, I was left with the feeling that they made sure I was left to start actually ruling the kingdom while they looked after our children. Even Haelga, who had no desire for children, would happily wake up to look after a crying child in the middle of the night. I helped out where I could but, in those early stages, it was more about keeping them alive more than anything.

Mirabelle agreed that, at six months of age for our child, we would go on a tour of Skyrim. My girls joined us, of course, and during the following month, the crowds turned out to greet their king and queen, while also catching a glimpse of their future king. I didn’t make many speeches. I wasn’t really one for that. But I had no problem mingling with the common folk. I might have been a jarl and a king, but I knew my origins. I was only king due to a set of circumstances, mostly out of my control and due to the Divines. But, all in all, I liked to believe that, in these early days, we were popular across Skyrim, even in cities such as Windhelm. Our reception from both the common folk and the nobility was positive. Every Jarl was willing to work with me as I shared ideas of how to improve the lives of everyone, from those tilling the fields and working the mines, to those in control of coin that flowed around Skyrim but also across the borders into Cyrodiil, High Rock and elsewhere.

Having established a working relationship with General Tullius, I asked if he would be willing to remain in Skyrim as my military advisor. He took some time to think about it, and suggested Legate Rikke, a fellow Nord, should be offered the role. I did so, definitely taking her by surprise, but she accepted it immediately. She would remain part of the Legion but effectively in command of all Legions currently in Skyrim. That allowed Tullius to finally return to Cyrodiil.

Though trade was important, I wanted to make sure Skyrim was secured. Sitting down with Rikke and other advisors, I set out my ideas. A map of Skyrim served as an assistant. “During the civil war, certain forts were taken by Imperial forces to help bring order back to the Holds formerly under Stormcloak control. However, there are at least a dozen other forts out there that remain outside our hands, generally in the hands of bandits and other brigands. I wish to see every fort in Skyrim back in the hands of either the Legion or the people of the Hold in which the fort resides. Can that be done, Rikke?”

“Aye, lord.” I didn’t want to be called ‘Majesty’ or ‘Highness’. Since I had to take a title, I said ‘lord’ was suitable enough. “We certainly have enough soldiers to do so, and the offer of bringing further security to each Hold would certainly lead to help being provided by the Jarl.”

“The Reach will probably be the toughest challenge, given the presence of the Forsworn that still linger in the hills. Markarth is rather isolated in the west, and the trade routes in and out of the city have suffered due to the Forsworn activity.”

“If you agree, lord, we can send a full Legion into the Reach and begin there, moving our way eastwards once we have secured the region.”

“Works for me. So planning after we take any fort, I want to institute a rebuilding program. Many of these forts of little more than crumbling ruins. Once the coin starts to flow again, I want to start rebuilding some of these forts, particularly those along major routes, that can provide safety and security for merchants, and these will also be perfect outposts for Legion soldiers. In addition to forts, I’d like to see improvements of some of the roads around Skyrim. Can the Legion assist in those?”

“Certainly, lord.”

“While all this is going on, trade must flourish again. Skyrim is rather impoverished after the war. Things are slowly improving, though it’s obvious the Thalmor are trying to squeeze us at the same time. We see next to no trade across that border. The Emperor has assured that goods will start flooding across the border once again, same with High Rock, and I will send emissaries to Hammerfell and Morrowind as soon as possible. Elisif, any suggestions and ideas you have in regards to building trade revenues, let me know but you also have free reign to do whatever you can. A prosperous Skyrim will enrich the lives of all of us.”

She nodded. “To be honest, lord, once the Legion start securing the forts and roads across Skyrim, merchants will feel safer travelling our roads.”

“Good. I will also be hiring the Companions on a full time basis to help take care of any bandits that begin to harass the people of Skyrim. Though I am still Harbinger in name, the guild is being run by others nowadays, and they have gone on an extensive recruitment drive. Rikke, the Companions will be ready to assist whenever you might need them.”

“The Legion has worked alongside mercenaries enough times to know what to expect, lord.”

“Finally, as my wife was formerly part of the College of Winterhold, I want my kingdom to have a closer relationship with the college. I want to see my people, my brother and sister Nords, overcome their fear, or even hatred, of those with magic. I have seen both the benefits and costs of magic, but it is something we must use to our advantage given the threats that lie across Tamriel. Sybille, I thank you for remaining as my arcane advisor.”

“It is my pleasure, lord. And the kingdom having a link with the only place that practices magic in Skyrim is only a good thing. Considering we are all capable of magic in some way, if the king shows his support, then ordinary folk may start to believe magic will be a benefit, not a concern.”

“Before you all go, I want to ask you one thing. Never hesitate coming to me with your concerns, and particularly if you have an idea. I’m not sure what previous rulers are like but I like to think I’ve surrounded myself here with the best and brightest. The most important thing is trust. If we don’t trust each other, nothing will be achieved. What I am assured is that we all have the best interests of this nation in our minds and we will work together to ensure that Skyrim will soon be peaceful and prosperous, the beating heart of the Empire once again. The road towards that might be slow, even uncomfortable at times, but we know what our objective is. Let’s rise to meet the challenge.”

My life was now completely different. No longer was I adventuring across Skyrim, going from crisis to crisis, weapon in one hand, shield in the other, charging towards one type of enemy then another. Instead of saving Skyrim, I was now running it. Completely different thought process was required. I’ll admit, it was a little boring compared to my life before but, considering I now had a young family, it was infinitely safer, which I know the likes of Mirabelle and Lydia appreciated.

I would meet petitioners twice a week, and they came from all over Skyrim to meet their king and ask for whatever was on their mind. A third day was set to speak to the people of Solitude, listen to their gripes, and it amazed me what people would complain about. One thing I never did was promise anything. I would listen and understand. If it was something that could be solved immediately, I said it would be done. If it wasn’t, I said they would hear back from the crown as soon as possible. I’m sure more than one person left unhappy after our meeting, but I learned very early on that I simply couldn’t please everyone, and some people simply couldn’t be pleased no matter what I did.

I’m sure you’d like to know about my personal life as well. One of the very first things I did was make sure I made love to all six of my girls while on my throne. On the same night. We dismissed all the servants and guards, stating the doors into the palace were locked, so they were not necessary. Clothing was then removed as I sat down, my six girls taking turns sucking my cock, Haelga being the one to eventually swallow my load, before five of them had fun together as the sixth girl rode me to her own orgasm. Lydia and Haelga both rode me with my cock buried in their arse, as I would have expected from the latter at least, so they went last, Haelga last of all as she rode me so hard and fast, the others could only watch in amazement. Of course, that just got me in the mood, eventually bending her over, face buried on the cushion as I utterly destroyed her from behind. By the time I was done, the other five were looking at me in such a way, I had a feeling some of them might have been interested…

There was no system to how it all worked between us otherwise. I generally slept with Mirabelle at night, but whenever I wasn’t busy, I would find myself wandering the palace, and if they were in the mood, I would be invited into a room. If I walked into a room and was in the mood, I was rarely told no. If they did, I would accept it and simply spend time with them anyway. I was not going to let power go to my head, and I’d never hurt my girls. The sex was great, but at heart we all loved each other and simply enjoyed being around each other. I had something in common with each of them, and the girls were all friends

Within a year of taking the crown, four of my six girls were with child. Only Haelga continued to take potions, while Aela did the same, but she was so happy with Frieda, she was already thinking about another daughter, or a son. She had my support no matter what. Serana was the first to fall pregnant, to the thrill of everyone in the palace, followed by Mirabelle, then Lydia before Elisif was finally with child. The celebration when we found out she was pregnant went all night… and ended up with Elisif receiving attention from all of us. We definitely wore her out that night, murmuring by my side the next morning that her pussy was sore from attention of too many mouths, fingers while having been serviced well and truly by my cock.

The support from Mirabelle and Lydia to Serana and Elisif, and also from Aela, made me fall in love with them all just that little bit more. Again, I did my best to support but my six girls were a real clique nowadays. The five made sure Haelga was a part of it all, and though she didn’t want her own children, she adored the children we’d already had, and had no problem doting on our children just like their mother and father.

Skyrim remained peaceful. I had ideas, of course, but I knew my power was somewhat limited by being part of the Empire. My first trip to the Imperial City was within my first year of rule, taking all my girls and children by carriage to meet the Emperor. We eventually spent two weeks there and I spent much of the time in meetings with the Emperor and his advisors. And, I’ll admit, one or two things I said would have reminded him of the arguments made by Jarl Ulfric Stormcloak.

Mostly, I wanted revenge on the Thalmor. I put it that simply to the Emperor. He sat back in his chair, sipping at his glass of brandy, nodding his head without saying a word. He finally sighed and leaned forward. “I’m old, Dragonborn. I worry that, if I were to go looking for revenge, I would die before seeing it completed. I worry that we would bite off more than we can chew. Even all these years later, the wounds remain. We’re still rebuilding. Tensions remain within the Empire. We’re now surrounded by those who would love to see the Empire split up completely.”

“One would think going on the front foot would perhaps be best, sire.”

“Perhaps, but…” He sat back and looked contemplative. “I know my days are drawing to a close, and one thing I find myself thinking about is legacy and what happens once I’m gone. What have I achieved, Dragonborn? Truly? All I’ve reigned over is a disastrous war, the continued disintegration of the Empire, and it was only thanks to you that Skyrim still remains a part of it. The Thalmor continue to sabre rattle, and my real concern is that they wish to complete the job they started over thirty years ago now.”

“Taking the fight to them might secure a better legacy, sire.”

He shook his head. “No, the coming fight will need to be led by the next Emperor.” He sighed again. “I have two sons, heirs who should be ready to take the throne. Can I be honest with you, Dragonborn?”

“Of course. Whatever is shared within these walls doesn’t leave.”

“They are unworthy of the position. Some suggested I should have abdicated after signing the White-Gold Concordat. My sons are feckless, arrogant men. They have been given every opportunity in life yet squandered it. I know few of my citizens actually like them. It’s why I had to send General Tullius to Skyrim and not one of my sons. If I’d sent one of them, I believe Skyrim would be independent today. In fact, I still believe if, given the opportunity, Jarl Ulfric would have eventually tried to take my throne.”

“You reckon?”

“Ulfric is a warrior and he would have commanded the respect of the Legions, at least. The men and women in uniform.”

I sat back and sipped at my brandy. “Sire, are you suggesting something?”

He chuckled. “Just an old man contemplating the future once I’m no longer here. But… the Empire needs a strong leader more than ever. And my sons are not what the Empire needs.” He cleared his throat and refilled my glass. “Thank you for listening to an old man wallow in self-pity, Dragonborn.”

During our journey back to Solitude, I was definitely deep in thought more than once, going over what he said, or more importantly, what he didn’t say. Mirabelle eventually had to ask what was on my mind, suggesting I was a lot quieter than normal. I asked her to wait until we were home, sitting my six girls down in our private rooms and explaining the last conversation I had with the Emperor.

“I have a feeling he’s not going to pass the crown to his sons. I have a feeling he’s… going to ask me to take the throne.”

“Is it really a surprise?” Mirabelle asked.

“Aye, it is. I tried to assassinate the man.”

“Years ago now, Ragnar, and things have obviously changed. You are now High King of Skyrim. But I think he’s looking at the past, what made the Empire.”

“The dragon blood?” She nodded. “I’m not a Septim. That time is the distant past.”

“While that might be true, one of the dragon blood taking the throne of the Empire again. It might give people renewed confidence. Might even give the Thalmor a moment of pause.” I sighed and ran a hand down my face. “Look, I’m going to continue life as we know it. Nothing has changed as far as I’m concerned. But the Emperor is getting old, he was right about that. Whenever we talked, he was… tired, worn out. Mind was still sharp but I think the body is slowly failing him.”

“Then let’s worry about it if and when it happens.”

That was perhaps the best suggestion. Focus on my life right now. I had a kingdom to run, children to raise, and more children on the way. Within a week, Aela let me know she was off the potions as she wanted to have another child. When she was fertile, she didn’t leave me alone for an entire week. More than once, we were walked in on, Aela busy riding my cock half the time. I would either lie or sit back as she rode me until I came inside her. Half the time, she didn’t even worry about her own orgasm. She just wanted to make sure I left as many loads inside her as possible.

It worked, much to all our amusement. She was with child incredibly quickly. That left only Haelga without being with child at the time, but nothing would change her mind. Instead, we put on one or two shows for the other girls, getting a real idea of how submissive she could be. Much to my amusement, the very next night, Mirabelle got on all fours and begged me to just utterly pound her, and take her arse as well. Her pussy got plenty of attention at first, but when I started to get her ready for anal, she was totally into it. When I slid my cock gently into her arse, she was almost in tears, begging for it hard.

I left my cock buried as I leaned forward, stroking her hair, kissing her cheek. “What’s up?”

“I just want you so much,” she said, catching a sob.

“Is it like with the first one?” She nodded. “Sure you can handle it?”

“Stay like you are so I can feel your breath in my ear and you can whisper very naughty things into my ear. Plus I feel really submissive in this position. Turns me on even more.”

“Ready?” She nodded eagerly. “As soon as it hurts, let me know.”

“It won’t. And if it does, I can handle it. I won’t be like Haelga but… Just fuck my arse, husband of mine. My arse belongs to the High King.”

My wife, the Queen of Skyrim, had her arse well and truly fucked for the next ten or so minutes. She… loved it. Genuinely seemed to love every second, noticing her shoulder move as she fondled herself as I just pounded her. I loved every second as well, her arse so tight, it was almost like a clamp at times. I think she was actually disappointed when I finally exploded deep inside her arse, lying flat on the bed, taking me with her. She asked to keep my cock inside her for as long as I could. I did, and once I was hard again, she begged for more.

When we woke the next morning, she rolled into me and started to giggle. “Ragnar?” she whispered. I was already awake so looked at her. “My arse is really sore. The good kind, but still sore.”

“I’m not surprised, Belle. I left at least three loads in there. I mean, I didn’t hold anything back by the end.”

“I loved it. And I love you.” She paused. “But I don’t think I’ll do that too often. I’m fairly sure I won’t be sitting comfortably today.”

“I won’t complain if you want constant sex again, Belle. Makes me feel useful while you’re carrying our child. I can help out at least in one way.”

“I’ll let you know whenever my pussy is throbbing and needing your attention, Ragnar. And you know I won’t be the only one.”

“Lydia seems to be coping better this time.”

“She’s changed her diet as she figured out it was a few things she was eating. Trust me, all six of us are going to be wanting your attention, one way or another. In fact, when was the last night you didn’t have sex?”

“It’s been quite a while, to be honest. Being High King does have some benefits.”

“Good thing your wife doesn’t mind pussy from time to time as well.”

“True. Walked in on you just as much. Sometimes, I can happily sit and watch when you’re with one or two of my other girls. Nothing more beautiful than when Serana is between your legs and Aela is on your face.”

“Hmmm. Maybe we should just sit you on your throne one night and the six of us put on a show.”

I couldn’t help chuckle. “Do you really think I’ll say no?”

“How about we just lie you back on the bed, give you a potion to keep you hard, and we just ride you all night?”

“Again, do you think I’ll say no?” I kissed her forehead. “Belle, you alone make me happy. We have our kingdom. We have our children. We have our friends. The fact you’re as open-minded as you are is just icing on the cake.”

“Just like my husband, I have a lot of love to give. And all your girls really know how to eat pussy.” I couldn’t help chuckle at her tone. “Want to make love before we get up?”

“I’m taking you mean make love as in not pounding your arse?”

“Definitely not my arse this morning, Ragnar.”

Mirabelle was in a very good morning at breakfast, and had no problem sharing with Haelga what we were up to. As soon as Lydia heard sex like that was on the table, she wasted no time hauling me into her bedroom, begging for nothing but a night of hard anal sex. No attention on her pussy whatever. Get her arse ready then just fuck her. The only difference is she wanted an audience, so the five others were invited in to watch us. No surprise that she wasn’t the only one fucked that evening. Haelga stripped off before I’d cum once, while Aela, who had admitted long ago it wasn’t something that always interested her, eventually had her arse fucked as well.

In the end, the only one who didn’t have her arse pounded was Serana. She was naked, and had clearly been masturbating while watching, but when it came to the act itself, she… wanted to do it… but was terribly frightened. And I knew it was lingering memories of what happened to her.

My girls were brilliant. They relaxed her completely, showering her with attention, talking to her at the same time.

“Do you want Ragnar to pleasure your arse?” Lydia asked, two of her fingers in Serana’s arse. She nodded. “But you’re scared?”

“I am.”

“Do you think it will hurt?”

“A little.”

“But he loves you. He won’t hurt you.”

“I know… but…” Lydia slid a third finger in and that made Serana shudder. “That feels really good.”

Mirabelle and Aela were focusing in her breasts. Haelga was sort of sitting on her face, dipping her pussy down every so often, keeping her mind occupied. “Do you know how great it feels when Ragnar is inside your arse, Serana? You feel so… full. But also so loved. And when he started to fuck you, he owns you completely. Haelga and I love it hard, really hard, but that’s just what we like. But you might prefer it like Aela, where he’ll slide it inside your arse but he’ll be nothing but gentle. Would you like it how Aela just had it?”

“I’m loving your fingers,” she said softly.

Lydia lowered her mouth down to taste Serana. “Well, I love your pussy, Serana, but you’ll love Ragnar’s cock even more. Trust me, you’ll love it, Serana. Do you trust me?” She nodded immediately. “Do you trust the other girls?” She nodded again. “Do you trust Ragnar?”

“More than anything,” she whispered.

“Do you want him to make love to you by taking your arse for the first time?” She nodded. “You need to say it, Serana. He needs to hear the words. He won’t do it otherwise.”

“I want Ragnar in my arse.”

The girls moved out of the way immediately, leaving Serana before me, legs spread wide, completely exposed and obviously turned on. Haelga slid a pillow under Serana’s lower back, lifting her up, while Lydia and Haelga grabbed an ankle each, spreading her wide. Serana definitely blushed as I got in position, leaning down to give her a soft kiss, gently prodding her with my cock. She was more than ready, but I wanted her to be comfortable.

“You’re beautiful, Serana,” I whispered.

“I love you.”

“Well, I love you too.”

“Ragnar, can you make love to me but… differently…”

“You mean slide my cock into your arse?”

“Please,” she hissed.

I didn’t hesitate, sliding the head of my cock inside her. She gasped to begin within and I let her get used to it. Once she met my eyes and nodded, I slowly buried myself until she’d taken my length. Kissing her again, when she smiled at me, that’s when I knew any lingering memories had already been banish. Her ankles were obviously released as I felt them wrap around me, her fingers pressing into my back.

Then we made love. My five other girls watched the entire time, though we both ignored their presence, my eyes only for Serana. After a few minutes, she was really into it, even asking for it a little faster, looking down to see she was fondling herself at the same time. “We’ll cum together,” she whispered.

It didn’t exactly happen that way, but we did both orgasm, at least. And once we were done, and cleaned up, it was suggested I spend the rest of the night with Serana. When we were alone in her room, she asked if we could try again, but this time she would ride me. We definitely spent at least another couple of hours having sex before finally going to sleep. I’m not sure she was exactly a convert, but I had a feeling she would be interested in it again.

Within the next year, the palace now had eight children as my girls all gave birth to healthy children. Three boys, to Mirabelle, Aela and Serana, two girls to Lydia and Elisif. After giving birth again, Aela was adamant that was it. She had a girl and a boy and was happy with that. As soon as she gave birth, Mirabelle was talking about a third, as she wanted a girl. Serana was… a natural mother. I was present the entire time, and the change in her demeanour was immediate when she held our child in her arms the first time. Lydia had a boy and a girl, suggesting she felt the same as Aela. Elisif… immediately spoke about having another.

Part of me should have thought it was all getting a little much with so many children. But they were all brilliant mothers, and I was still present in all their lives. I wasn’t like others where I had children but showed little interest in them. I woke at night to change nappies and rock them to sleep. The only thing I couldn’t really do was feed them, but even then, I’d wake with whoever it was and sit with them as they fed. If they had to get up, I would to. Sometimes I’d fall asleep, but it was the thought that counted.

Most of my plans came to fruition in addition to raising an unusual family. The Forsworn were eradicated completely. I would have preferred to sign a peace agreement, but they would not negotiate. It was the first time I’d been out in the field in a long time, helping take back a trio of forts in the space of a month. Once the Forsworn were finally defeated, the Legions swept east across Skyrim, taking back each and every fort. Those were slowly but surely rebuilt, but I knew it was going to take a number of years before my idea of a series of forts across Skyrim would come to fruition.

Revenues were up. Trade flourished. Skyrim as a whole became prosperous. The rulers of each Hold continued to follow my example. The people in general seemed satisfied, even pleased, with my rule. Life was hard as it was, and I remembered the one thing they all wanted was to feel safe, whether behind the walls of their cities, if they were travelling across Skyrim, or worked one of the many farms or mines that dotted the landscape.

I liked to believe I was a good ruler. But I had no idea what the future would bring.

---

Five years later….

Mirabelle was pregnant again. Child number six was now on the way. We had three sons and twin daughters together. No matter what, it was always exciting news. And I knew, after a few months, she was going to want me constantly. I had a feeling this would likely be our last one. Mirabelle suggested that, from now on, we’d have great sex but she would drink a potion the next morning. Lydia and Aela had two children, a boy and a girl, and had not wanted another. Serana had three children, a boy and twin girls. Elisif had given birth to three girls. We had discussed a fourth, as she wanted a son, but we were not currently trying. As for Haelga… you can’t have children when you only have anal. That’s what it felt like anyway.

The palace was lively, that’s one way of putting it. But my girls were all happy, as were my children. The people of Skyrim were happy, safe, and coin was flowing. The Legion now had an extended presence, residing in most forts that were spread across the landscape, their constant patrols keeping merchants and travellers safe.

I was content… No, I was happy. I had six women who loved me, and I loved them. I had all my children, who I doted on something chronic. I ruled a peaceful kingdom. I wanted for nothing. I still managed to go on the occasional adventure, generally leading a Legion when we took over a fort. Rikke didn’t always approve, but knew it was only sheer boredom that led me out of Solitude. I never used my Thu’um during these times. Rikke didn’t like me getting off my horse, but even as High King, I liked a good fight every now and then.

Despite it being her fifth pregnancy, the girls were excited as ever, and Mirabelle was radiant as always. We celebrated that evening with a good, hard fuck in her arse. Through her subsequent pregnancies, she’d grown a real love for it. Still nothing like Haelga or Lydia, but during her third, she put on a show for the other girls, having me fuck her arse while the girls took turns pleasing her pussy. The Queen of Skyrim was definitely loved by those in the palace. That evening, we did the same thing, the girls sitting back, watching as I lay back as she mounted me, wasting little time sliding down my cock, then simply rode herself stupid until I ran my hands down her body, rested them on her arse, and she ordered me to just destroy it.

She went to sleep a lot later that evening with a smile on her face as a wide as Skyrim. One or two other girls walked out with cum dribbling out of their arses at the same time.

I was in the middle of tying Haelga to the wall a week later, getting ready to give her a good whipping before we made love, when a servant knocked on the door. He walked in, a knowing smirk on his face as Haelga wasn’t embarrassed at all, not that she could see anything as she was blindfolded and gagged. “Letter, my lord.”

He handed it over and the first thing I noticed was the seal of the Emperor himself. He wrote to me once a month but his letters always arrived on the same date. Today was not the day I should receive a letter. Opening it, I read its contents. It wasn’t from the Emperor.

Your Highness,

I will put this plainly. Emperor Titus Mede II is unwell and not long for this world. He asks that you come to his side as soon as you are able. The future of the Empire rests on what will follow.

Yours faithfully,

General Lucius Tullius

“Head straight to Castle Dour and speak to Rikke. Ask her to come to the palace in an hours’ time.”

“At once, my lord.” He paused and added, “Have fun, lord.”

“Oh, this isn’t for me…”

I carried Haelga to her bedroom around forty minutes later, as she was completely exhausted. Covering her in blankets, I left a soft kiss on her forehead, hearing her whispered words of her love for me, before I headed to the throne room, where I waited for Rikke. Mirabelle appeared, dressed in her finery and crown, as she would have heard.

Once Rikke arrived, I let her know what was required. “Organise transport for us…”

“No, I will remain here, Ragnar. This is about you and the Emperor.”

“Are you sure?” She nodded. “Rikke, organise horses and a small guard. We are heading to the Imperial City immediately.”

“The Emperor?” I nodded. “When do you wish to leave?”

“Tomorrow morning.”

“I will have everything organised by this evening, lord.”

As she departed, I ordered everyone out before turning to Mirabelle. “You know what this might mean?”

“I do. We might have a new home.”

“I will send word as soon as I learn what he wants.”

“You know what he wants, Ragnar. We’ve talked about it before.” She grabbed my hands and smiled. “No matter what, you’re still my husband and the father of our children. That’s what is most important to me. When our fifth child arrives, the only difference is that I might be giving birth in the Imperial City instead of Solitude.”

We spoke to the others. Though they were not going to make any assumptions, but all immediately stated that, if I did end up moving to the Imperial City, they would certainly be following me. I couldn’t help smile, sharing a hug with all of them, unsure of what to say except thank you.

Rikke, myself and a dozen Imperial soldiers departed Solitude at the first glimpse of dawn the next morning. We rode hard and fast, making it to Falkreath well after dark that evening. I was travelling incognito, so we stayed at the local inn, getting only a few hours rest before leaving early again the next morning. It was another two nights before the Imperial City came into view.

I was a regular enough visitor now, travelling to the Imperial City once every six months to speak with the Emperor about my rule in Skyrim, that I was recognised by some of the guards. Tullius, looking a little older nowadays, was there to greet me, and there was no standing on ceremony, being led to the Emperor’s private quarters. A steward led me to his bedroom door, a polite knock and the door opened for me, and I entered alone.

It was exquisitely furnished, though it was difficult to make out everything in the faint light provided by the candles. There was no missing him lying under a bundle of covers. I’d seen him only three to four months earlier. He hadn’t been well then, but the man I’d seen then wasn’t the one I saw now. His eyes were open and he looked my way. He raised a weak hand, beckoning me towards him.

Grabbing a chair, I sat next to him. “I came as soon as I received the letter, Your Majesty.”

He gestured and I offered my hand, feeling his two cold, bony hands take mine. “It is decided, Ragnar,” he croaked, hearing him struggle for breath, “My eldest will not succeed the throne. The Empire must be ruled by he of the dragon blood. The Septim line was extinguished. It is the will of the Divines that you are here now.”

“You ask a great favour, Majesty.”

“It is your destiny, Ragnar. All has been organised. When I die, my sons will be… detained. If they co-operate, they will be allowed to live. If not… I will not weep to see my line extinguished with me. You can restore the Empire to its former glory, Ragnar. You can lead our armies against the Thalmor. The Dragonborn was feted to save Skyrim from the dragon menace. But you were also feted to become the leader the Empire needs.”

“Taking the throne of Skyrim was enough, Majesty. I never wanted that. Now you ask for… something unimaginable.”

“You are a good man, Ragnar. You have a good heart. And the fact you don’t want it is why you are perfect. Those who crave power become tyrants. You have proven a capable, thoughtful leader. The people of Skyrim love you and your family. The people of Cyrodiil will do the same. The Legions revere your name, the man who ensured the Empire remained strong and stable. I’ve been laying preparations for many years now, Ragnar. Ever since you took the throne in Skyrim. General Tullius has made all the arrangements. The Legions will be loyal to you.”

I swallowed and nodded. “How long, sire?”

“The priests think I have a few days left at most. As soon as my body is laid to rest, you will be crowned the new Emperor and lead the Empire into a Fifth Era. The Dragonborn Era.”

“I should return home tomorrow and at least return with my wife and children.”

“You should remain, Ragnar, just in case. Rikke can return with your soldiers and return with them. There is much I need to share with you before I depart.”

I agreed to stay, Rikke departing the next morning with most of my soldiers. I figured all my girls and children would journey with her to the Imperial City. As for the Emperor, he held on for ten more days. He remained lucid for six of them, sharing all the secrets of Empire, and when not discussing that, we would sit together and simply talk about our lives. For the last four days, he remained asleep though alive, checking his breath with a mirror. It was late on the tenth day that his breathing ceased and the announcement of his death was made.

My family was already with me by then. I was present when he passed. As soon as I walked out the door, Tullius nodded and set into motion the plans the Emperor had told me about. His sons had not been present, which told me everything I needed to know about them. From what I’d learned during my time in those final few days, no-one liked his sons. Even the Emperor had spoken of his disappointment, even anger, at what they had become. I wasn’t going to weep about their fates either way. I had a feeling Tullius would eliminate them as any sort of threat.

The announcement of his death was made the next day. There… wasn’t exactly an outpouring of grief. People came to pay their respects, but I wouldn’t say they stood at the gates of the palace and openly wept. Some did stand in respectful silence, flowers were left, but over the next couple of days, it was obvious that the Emperor had been right in his own assessment of his rule.

I’m sure they were now wondering what happened next.

I have no doubt my presence was noted by the nobility of Cyrodiil. The Jarls of Skyrim ventured south for the funeral as well. Word may have reached High Rock, but it was a much longer journey and the fact none arrived from there wasn’t a surprise. Perhaps a signal of their impression of the rule of the Emperor too.

The funeral was respectful, at least, but again, there was no real outpouring of grief. There was also no sign of his sons. During the service, I locked eyes with Tullius, the unspoken question. He returned a single nod. So the path to the throne was now open. The only challenge would come from the nobles of Cyrodiil and whoever felt capable of taking the throne for themselves. But with the support of the Legions, I had a feeling things would resolve quickly in my favour.

Tullius organised a summit the very next day, inviting the nobles of both Skyrim and Cyrodiil. The ambassador of High Rock was also invited. It was there that the last will and testament of Emperor Titus Mede was read. I’m not sure how long ago he would have written it, but there’s no doubt most of it was only confirmed in the days before his death.

There was an audible gasp when he stated that the throne should not pass to either of his sons. Tullius then admitted that it wouldn’t be a problem. That the situation had been ‘handled’. No-one dared mutter words like ‘murder’ in his presence, but there was definitely some discomfort as the insinuation was clear.

Then it came to his succession plan.

“It is my belief that the Empire requires the start of a new era. Though our family has tried it’s best to restore the Empire to its former glory, it is clear to me that we have failed in that objective. For two hundred years, we have witnessed the Empire slowly crumble to what it is now. It is only due to Divine intervention, the arrival of the Dragonborn, that our Empire remains somewhat united to this day.

Those who know their history are aware that every Septim was of the dragon blood, all the way from Tiber Septim himself. It is my belief that someone of the dragon blood must be restored to the Ruby Throne, and that it will be through their sheer force of will that they will see the Empire rise back to what it once was. The road will be long and difficult, with innumerable challenges to be faced, and while the Dragonborn might not be a Septim, even carrying that name might have proven a poisoned chalice.

But, to your Emperor, the way forward is now clear. Ragnar Dragonborn should have your support to become the new Emperor, opening the Fifth Era with clear focus and intention. Secure the borders of the Empire. Restore order and security. Open up new alliances and allegiances. Build the armies and navies to their former glories. And then, when the time is right, strike back at those who attacked us.

Bless the Divines.

Praise almighty Talos.

Your Emperor, Titus Mede II.”

There was nothing but silence for a couple of minutes before most eyes looked at me. I stood up and looked around the rooms. My fellow Jarls looked pleased. The lords and ladies of Cyrodiil actually looked a little fearful. The ambassador of High Rock met my eyes and nodded his approval. Bet that was due to be married to a Breton.

“Lords and ladies of Tamriel, the Emperor and I have enjoyed many discussions since the day I took the throne of Skyrim to become it’s High King. In the past fortnight, we discussed many options going forward. What General Tullius read out is but a smidgen of what Emperor Titus and I discussed in his final days before returning to the Divines. What I do know is this. The Legions of the Empire support the decision. General Tullius, do I have the support of the Legions?”

“Yes, lord. The word has already spread. The Imperial Legion support the claim of the Dragonborn to the Ruby Throne. If required, it will fight to ensure your succession.”

Placing my hands on the table, I looked around. “I do not wish to fight any of you. I would like to believe that my fellow Jarls support the Emperor and his decision.”

Balgruuf immediately cleared his throat. “I’m sure I can speak for all my fellow Jarls that we support the succession of the Dragonborn to the Ruby Throne.” Every other Jarl nodded their head or even applauded.

“Lords and ladies of Cyrodiil, the last Emperor of the Fourth Era has made his opinions known. You now face two choices. Support me, and I will endeavour to do the same job I have completed in Skyrim. Restore order. Provide security. Ensure prosperity for us all. Don’t…” I shrugged. “I do not wish to make threats. I hope you don’t think I’m threatening, but although I do not seek the throne, I understand why I have been asked. To the Emperor, it was the last favour owed to a dying man. I accepted his proposal and I will be crowned. Your options are now limited to two. You may become a friend of the next Emperor… or you will be his foe.”

I remained silent, looking around the room, before turned to Tullius. “General, I believe this matter is now concluded. Now, if you don’t mind, I will leave the discussions to you. I would like to see my family. I’m sure you will keep me up to date of whatever ceremony is next.”

“Of course, lord.”

Two weeks later, after an official proclamation, with news sent across Cyrodiil and Skyrim, I was crowned Emperor Ragnar Dragonborn, first of his name, first Emperor of the Fifth Era. My wife was by my side as she was also crowned, my children becoming prince or princess of the realm. What I knew is that my line was definitely assured considering the number of children I did have. Sure, more were illegitimate than not, but that didn’t matter. They still carried my blood.

The dawn of the new era was greeted with cheers and excitement. Before I even took the crown, I released statements of what I hoped to achieve. The only thing I didn’t mention was my intentions regarding the Thalmor. Only my Legions had an inkling of my plans so far. But, for now, I would enjoy the day of celebration and worry about any future plans tomorrow.

That evening, I sat on the Ruby Throne and thought back on my life, how far I’d come. I had once been an orphan on these very streets, nothing more than thief. Then I was a warrior, fighting the good fight, before returning to my roots and being a thief. Selling my soul, I became an assassin before turning a corner once again, and ever since that moment, when I almost lost my head at Helgen, my life had been an upward trajectory.

And through it all, I had loved and lost more than once. I would always remember Muiri, my first real love. I still thought about her nearly every day. I missed Astrid and the life we had planned, but I think we were almost delusional. It was always bound to end in tragedy. But then there were the woman at my side now. I loved them all dearly, as much as they loved me. And I had been given the gift of many children, the Divines having now blessed me far more than they had ever taken from me.

I wondered why my future would bring. Would I prove to be a good Emperor? A wise Emperor? Would I lead the Empire to renewed glory? Or would I make mistakes and watch it all crumble around me? I knew I had to surround myself with the right people, take the right advice, and make the right decisions at the right time. Only with all that could I lead my people to a glorious future.

But, again, that was for later. Mirabelle walked into the throne room to see me sitting by myself. Sitting across my lap, she kissed me before resting her head on my chest. “It’s been quite the rise for the Dragonborn,” she whispered.

Aye, it had been one hell of a ride.

Notes:

And so the adventures of Ragnar Dragonborn end. I had to end it somewhere and I think it's in a good place where I can put the pen down and be content with what I've written.

Thanks to those who have followed this story all the way, left some kudos or wrote a comment. It's all appreciated.

However, if you want to keep reading about Ragnar, I have him in two other stories:

Already uploaded (though currently on hiatus) is 'The Dragonborn Comes', Ragnar arriving in Thedas, solving the crises that arise there while shagging his way around Ferelden, Orlais and Kirkwall. It's NOT a crossover, if that's what you're wondering. I wanted to write a Dragon Age story, but didn't want to write a Warden for Origins, then my own Hawke, then an Inquisitor. Sending Ragnar there as Dragonborn gave me a chuckle.

I will also be uploading a new story called 'The Dragon and the Wolf' within the next couple of weeks, with Ragnar arriving in the world of the Witcher. Having only played Witcher 3, and read a few of the books, the story is based only on Witcher 3, with Ragnar arriving to.. adventure around and shag a lot of women.

If either interests you, give it a read and leave your thoughts. Other than that, thanks for reading!